JP2020199415A - Game machine - Google Patents

Abstract

To provide a game machine which can prevent a fraudulent act.SOLUTION: When a timing at a passage through a specific area 4830 is determined abnormal, a notification of an error is made, which can prevent a fraudulent act. That is, if the falling down of a ball is fraudulently obstructed, it is highly unlikely due to the notification that a fraudulent benefit can be acquired. It is then possible to give a deterrence effect to a person trying to acquire a benefit fraudulently.SELECTED DRAWING: Figure 129

Description

The present invention relates to a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine.

Here, in a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, the ball that has passed through the large winning opening is distributed to either an advantageous route or an unfavorable route by the distribution section, and the profit given to the player changes depending on the distribution result. There is a gaming machine to play (Patent Document 1).

Japanese Unexamined Patent Publication No. 2014-155538

However, the above-mentioned conventional gaming machine has a problem that there is a risk of cheating.

The present invention has been made to solve the above-exemplified problems, and an object of the present invention is to provide a game machine capable of suppressing fraudulent activities.

In order to achieve this object, the gaming machine of the present invention has a gaming area in which a ball flows down, an entry port through which a ball flowing down the game area passes, and a ball flowing down from the upstream side of the entry opening. A ball entry switching means that can switch between a first state in which the ball can be guided to the entry ball port and a second state in which the ball flowing down from the upstream side of the ball entry port cannot be guided to the ball entry port, and the ball entry port. A detection means for detecting the entry of a ball, a profit-giving means for giving a predetermined profit to the player by passing the ball passing through the entry port, and a first state in which the ball can be guided to the profit-giving means. A game machine including a profit switching means for switching the ball to the profit-giving means in a second state in which the ball cannot be guided to the profit-giving means, and determining whether the flow of the ball to the profit-giving means is normal. A means and a notification means for performing notification based on a determination result by the flow mode determination means are provided.

According to the gaming machine according to claim 1, fraudulent acts can be suppressed.

According to the game machine according to the second aspect, in addition to the effect of the game machine according to the first aspect, the flow state of the ball is abnormal regardless of the accumulation state of the game ball between the entrance and the profit-giving means. It can be determined whether or not.

According to the gaming machine according to claim 3, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine according to claim 1 or 2, the loss suffered by the player when the game is restarted can be minimized.

It is a front view of the pachinko machine in 1st Embodiment. It is a front view of the game board of a pachinko machine. It is a rear view of a pachinko machine. It is a block diagram which shows the electric structure of a pachinko machine. It is a partial front perspective view of a game board. It is an exploded front perspective view of the 1st variable winning apparatus. It is an exploded rear perspective view of the 1st variable winning apparatus. It is a front view of the 1st variable winning apparatus. It is sectional drawing of the 1st variable winning apparatus in the IX-IX line of FIG. It is a front view of the 1st variable winning apparatus. It is sectional drawing of the 1st variable winning apparatus in line XI-XI of FIG. It is sectional drawing of the 1st variable winning apparatus in line XII-XII of FIG. (A) and (b) are sectional views of the 1st variable winning apparatus in line XII-XII of FIG. It is a rear perspective view of the 1st variable winning apparatus. It is a rear view of the 1st variable winning apparatus. It is sectional drawing of the 1st variable winning apparatus in line XVI-XVI of FIG. It is a rear perspective view of the 1st variable winning apparatus. It is a rear view of the 1st variable winning apparatus. It is sectional drawing of the 1st variable winning apparatus in XIX-XIX line of FIG. (A) is a rear view of the first variable winning device, (b) is a cross-sectional view of the first variable winning device in line XXb-XXb of FIG. 20 (a), and (c) is a first variable winning device. It is a rear view of the variable winning device. (A) is a rear view of the first variable winning device, (b) is a cross-sectional view of the first variable winning device in the line XXIb-XXIb of FIG. 21 (a), and (c) is the first variable winning device. It is a rear view of the variable winning apparatus, and FIG. 21D is a cross-sectional view of the first variable winning apparatus in the line XXId-XXId of FIG. 21C. (A) is a block diagram showing the electrical configuration of the ROM in the main control device, and (b) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the correspondence between the first hit type counter and the jackpot type in the special symbol. (C) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the correspondence between the second hit random number counter and the hit in the ordinary symbol. (A) is a diagram showing the time change of the first specific winning opening in the first operation pattern, and (b) is a diagram showing the time change of the first specific winning opening in the second operation pattern. Yes, (c) is a diagram showing the timekeeping change of the first specific winning opening in the third operation pattern. It is a front view of the 1st variable winning apparatus in 2nd Embodiment. It is a rear view of the 1st variable winning apparatus. FIG. 5 is a partial cross-sectional view of the first variable winning device in the XXVI-XXVI line of FIG. 25. (A) to (c) are partial rear views of the first variable winning device. FIG. 27 is a partial cross-sectional view of the first variable winning device in line XXVIII-XXVIII of FIG. 27 (c). It is a schematic diagram schematically showing the correspondence relationship between the first hit type counter and the jackpot type in the special symbol. (A) is a diagram showing the timekeeping change of the first specific winning opening and the second specific winning opening in the fourth operation pattern, and (b) is the first specific winning opening and the first specific winning opening in the fifth operation pattern. 2 It is a figure which showed the timekeeping change of a specific winning opening. It is a front view of the 1st variable winning apparatus in 3rd Embodiment. It is sectional drawing of the 1st variable winning apparatus in line XXXII-XXXII of FIG. It is a rear perspective view of the lining front plate. (A) to (c) are cross-sectional views of the first variable winning device in the line XXXIVa-XXXIVa of FIG. 31. (A) and (b) are a partial front view of the first variable winning apparatus, and (c) is a partial sectional view of the first variable winning apparatus in the line XXXVc-XXXVc of FIG. 35 (b). (A) and (b) are schematic views showing the flow-down mode of a ball that has reached the first variable winning device. It is a partial front view of the 1st variable winning apparatus. It is a front view of the game board in 4th Embodiment. It is a partial front view of a game board. It is a schematic diagram schematically showing the correspondence relationship between the first hit type counter and the jackpot type in the special symbol. (A) is a diagram showing the time change of the first specific winning opening and the specific area in the sixth operation pattern, and (b) is the timekeeping of the first specific winning opening and the specific area in the seventh operation pattern. It is a figure which showed the change. (A) is a diagram showing the time change of the first specific winning opening and the specific area in the eighth operation pattern, and (b) is the timekeeping of the first specific winning opening and the specific area in the ninth operation pattern. It is a figure which showed the change. It is a figure which showed the time change of the 1st specific winning opening and the specific area in the tenth operation pattern. It is a partial front view of the game board in 5th Embodiment. It is a partial rear view of the game board. (A) and (b) are cross-sectional views of the first variable winning apparatus in the XLVI-XLVI line of FIG. 45. (A) to (c) are partial rear views of the first variable winning device. (A) and (b) are partial rear views of the first variable winning device. It is a schematic diagram schematically showing the correspondence relationship between the first hit type counter and the jackpot type in the special symbol. (A) is a diagram showing the timekeeping change of the first specific winning opening and the second specific winning opening in the eleventh operation pattern, and (b) is the first specific winning opening and the first specific winning opening in the twelfth operation pattern. 2 It is a figure which showed the timekeeping change of a specific winning opening. It is a partial front view of the game board in the sixth embodiment. FIG. 5 is a partial cross-sectional view of the first variable winning device in line LII-LII of FIG. 51. (A) and (b) are front views of the first variable winning device. (A) is a diagram showing the time change of the first specific winning opening and the specific area in the thirteenth operation pattern, and (b) is the timekeeping of the first specific winning opening and the specific area in the fourteenth operation pattern. It is a figure which showed the change. It is a rear perspective view of the lining front plate in 7th Embodiment. It is a top view of the 1st variable winning apparatus. FIG. 3 is a partial cross-sectional view of the first variable winning device in the line corresponding to the XXXVc-XXXVc line of FIG. 35 (b). (A) and (b) are partial cross-sectional views of the first variable winning apparatus in the line corresponding to the line XXXVc-XXXVc of FIG. 35 (b). It is a front view of the 1st variable winning apparatus in 8th Embodiment. It is a front view of the 1st variable winning apparatus in 8th Embodiment. It is a rear view of the 1st variable winning apparatus. It is a rear view of the 1st variable winning apparatus. (A) is a rear view of the first variable winning device, (b) is a sectional view of the first variable winning device in line LXIIIb-LXIIIb of FIG. 63 (a), and (c) is a first variable winning device. It is a rear view of the variable winning apparatus, (d) is the sectional view of the 1st variable winning apparatus in line LXIIId-LXIIId of FIG. 63 (c). (A) is a rear view of the first variable winning device, (b) is a cross-sectional view of the first variable winning device in the LXIVb-LXIVb line of FIG. 64 (a), and (c) is the first variable winning device. It is a rear view of the variable winning apparatus, (d) is the sectional view of the 1st variable winning apparatus in line LXIVd-LXIVd of FIG. 64 (c). It is a figure which showed the change of the drive (excitation) state of the solenoid of the drive device, and the timekeeping change of the position and state of a tip member, an opening / closing plate, an auxiliary opening / closing member and a regulation member. It is a front view of the 1st variable winning apparatus in 9th Embodiment. It is a front view of the 1st variable winning apparatus. It is a rear view of the 1st variable winning apparatus. It is a rear view of the 1st variable winning apparatus. (A) is a rear view of the first variable winning device, (b) is a sectional view of the first variable winning device in line LXXb-LXXb of FIG. 70 (a), and (c) is a first It is a rear view of the variable winning apparatus, (d) is the cross-sectional view of the 1st variable winning apparatus in line LXXd-LXXd of FIG. 70C. (A) is a rear view of the first variable winning device, (b) is a cross-sectional view of the first variable winning device in the LXXIb-LXXIb line of FIG. 71 (a), and (c) is the first variable winning device. It is a rear view of the variable winning apparatus, (d) is the sectional view of the 1st variable winning apparatus in line LXXId-LXXId of FIG. 71 (c). It is a figure which showed the change of the drive (excitation) state of the solenoid of the drive device, and the timekeeping change of the position and state of a tip member, an opening / closing plate, an auxiliary opening / closing member and a regulation member. It is a figure which showed the change of the drive (excitation) state of the solenoid of the drive device, and the timekeeping change of the position and state of a tip member, an opening / closing plate, an auxiliary opening / closing member and a regulation member. It is a figure which showed the change of the drive (excitation) state of the solenoid of the drive device, and the timekeeping change of the position and state of a tip member, an opening / closing plate, an auxiliary opening / closing member and a regulation member. It is a front view of the 1st variable winning apparatus in 10th Embodiment. It is a rear view of the 1st variable winning apparatus. It is a rear view of the 1st variable winning apparatus. (A) to (d) are diagrams showing an example of a change in the state of the first specific winning opening and a timekeeping change in the state of the movable member in the round game R. It is a front view of the 1st variable winning apparatus in 11th Embodiment. It is sectional drawing of the 1st variable winning apparatus in the LXXX-LXXX line of FIG. 79. It is a rear perspective view of the lining front plate. (A) to (c) are partial front views of the first variable winning device. It is a rear view of the 1st variable winning apparatus. It is a rear view of the 1st variable winning apparatus. (A) to (c) are front schematic views of the projecting rib, the opening / closing means, and the second additional winning opening schematically showing the arrangement of the projecting rib, the opening / closing means, and the second additional winning opening. (A) and (b) are front views of the first variable winning apparatus in the first control example. (A) is a diagram schematically showing an area division setting and an effective line setting of a display screen, and (b) is a diagram illustrating an actual display screen. (A) is a schematic diagram showing an example of the display contents during the advance notice effect executed in the round before the timing effect (operation effect) is executed, and (b) is the timing effect (operation effect). It is a schematic diagram which shows an example of the display content in. It is a schematic diagram which shows an example of the display content in a timing effect (operation effect). (A) is a schematic diagram showing an example of the display contents of the timing effect (operation effect) in the interval between rounds immediately before the fifth round game R, and (b) is during the timing effect (operation effect). It is a schematic diagram which shows an example of the display content of. (A) and (b) are schematic diagrams showing an example of the display contents during the timing effect (operation effect). (A) and (b) are schematic diagrams showing an example of display contents for notifying the third symbol display device that the round game of the sixth round is being executed. It is a block diagram which shows the electric structure of a pachinko machine. (A) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the ROM in the MPU of the main control device, and (b) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the first type selection table. (A) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the opening / closing plate and the interference member operation scenario storage area, and (b) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the opening / closing plate and the interference member operation scenario table. Is. (A) is a diagram showing the timed change of the first specific winning opening, the interference member and the specific region in the fifteenth operation pattern, and (b) is the first specific winning opening, the interference in the sixteenth operation pattern. It is a figure which showed the timekeeping change of a member and a specific area. (A) is a diagram showing the timed change of the first specific winning opening, the interference member and the specific region in the 17th operation pattern, and (b) is the first specific winning opening, the interference in the 18th operation pattern. It is a figure which showed the timekeeping change of a member and a specific area. It is a figure which showed the time timing change of the 1st specific winning opening, the interference member and a specific area in the 19th operation pattern. (A) is a diagram showing the timed change of the first specific winning opening, the interference member and the specific region in the 20th operation pattern, and (b) is the first specific winning opening, the interference in the 21st operation pattern. It is a figure which showed the timekeeping change of a member and a specific area. It is a model diagram explaining the counter and the like provided in the RAM of a main control device. It is a block diagram which shows the structure of the RAM of a main control unit. (A) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the ROM of the MPU of the voice lamp control device, and (b) is a block diagram showing the contents of the RAM. It is a block diagram which shows the electrical structure of a display control device. It is a schematic diagram which shows an example of the variation display data table schematically among the display data tables. It is a schematic diagram which shows an example of the transfer data table schematically. It is a schematic diagram which shows the contents of the drawing list schematically. It is a flowchart which shows the timer interrupt process which is executed by MPU in a main control unit. It is a flowchart which shows the special symbol variation processing. It is a flowchart which showed the state command setting process. It is a flowchart which showed the special symbol change start processing. It is a flowchart which shows the start winning process. It is a flowchart which shows the look-ahead process. It is a flowchart which shows the ordinary symbol variation processing. It is a flowchart which shows the through gate passing process. It is a flowchart which shows the NMI interrupt process. It is a flowchart which shows the start-up process. It is a flowchart which shows the main process. It is a flowchart which shows the jackpot control processing. It is a flowchart which showed the content of the jackpot operation setting process. It is a flowchart which showed the content of the opening / closing process. It is a flowchart which showed the content of the ending process. It is a flowchart which showed the content of the notification processing. It is a flowchart which showed the content of the winning process. It is a flowchart which showed the content of the abnormality processing. It is a flowchart which shows the storage control processing. It is a flowchart which showed the content of the upper limit value setting process 1 of an operation counter. It is a flowchart which showed the content of the upper limit value setting process 2 of an operation counter. It is the flowchart which showed the content of the storage valve operation processing. It is a flowchart which shows the V winning process. It is a flowchart which showed the start-up process which is executed by MPU in the voice lamp control device. It is a flowchart which showed the main process. It is a flowchart which showed the command determination process. It is a flowchart which shows the hit-related processing. It is a flowchart which shows the production process during a big hit. This is a flowchart showing the contents of the display effect round command setting process. It is a flowchart which showed the variation display setting process. It is a flowchart which showed the storage state monitoring process. It is a flowchart which showed the lamp output processing. It is a flowchart which shows the content of a button input monitoring / effect processing. It is a flowchart which shows the ball number confirmation process. It is a schematic diagram which shows typically the contents of the 1st type selection table 202b in the 2nd control example. (A) is a diagram showing the time-varying change of the opening / closing plate and the auxiliary opening / closing member in the 22nd operation pattern, and (b) shows the time-dependent change of the opening / closing plate and the auxiliary opening / closing member in the 23rd operation pattern. It is a figure, (c) is the figure which showed the clock change of the opening / closing plate and the auxiliary opening / closing member in the 24th operation pattern. (A) and (b) are schematic diagrams showing an example of display contents for notifying the third symbol display device that the round game of the sixth round is being executed. It is a schematic diagram which shows typically the contents of the ROM in the MPU of the main control device in the 3rd control example. (A) to (c) are schematic diagrams schematically showing the contents of the first random number table. It is a schematic diagram which shows the contents of the 1st type selection table schematically. (A) to (c) are schematic diagrams schematically showing the contents of the small hit type selection table. It is a figure which showed the time change of the opening / closing plate, a solenoid and a sorting device in a small hit A, and the time change of the opening / closing plate, a solenoid and a sorting device in a small hit B.

Hereinafter, embodiments of the present invention will be described with reference to the accompanying drawings. First, with reference to FIGS. 1 to 23, as a first embodiment, an embodiment when the present invention is applied to a pachinko gaming machine (hereinafter, simply referred to as “pachinko machine”) 10 will be described. FIG. 1 is a front view of the pachinko machine 10 according to the first embodiment, FIG. 2 is a front view of the game board 13 of the pachinko machine 10, and FIG. 3 is a rear view of the pachinko machine 10.

As shown in FIG. 1, the pachinko machine 10 has an outer frame 11 in which an outer shell is formed by a wooden frame combined in a substantially rectangular shape, and an outer frame 11 formed in substantially the same outer shape as the outer frame 11. It is provided with an inner frame 12 that is supported so as to be openable and closable. Metal hinges 18 are attached to the outer frame 11 at two upper and lower positions on the left side of the front view (see FIG. 1) in order to support the inner frame 12, and the side on which the hinge 18 is provided is used as an opening / closing axis. The frame 12 is supported so as to be openable and closable toward the front side of the front surface.

A game board 13 (see FIG. 2) having a large number of nails, winning openings 63, 64, etc. is detachably attached to the inner frame 12 from the back surface side. A ball game is performed by a ball (hereinafter, also referred to as a game ball or a pachinko ball) flowing down the front surface of the game board 13. The inner frame 12 includes a ball launching unit 112a (see FIG. 4) that launches a ball into the front region of the game board 13 and a launch that guides the ball launched from the ball launching unit 112a to the front region of the game board 13. Rails (not shown) etc. are attached.

On the front side of the inner frame 12, a front frame 14 that covers the upper side of the front surface and a lower plate unit 15 that covers the lower side thereof are provided. In order to support the front frame 14 and the lower plate unit 15, metal hinges 19 are attached to the upper and lower two places on the left side of the front view (see FIG. 1), and the side on which the hinges 19 are provided is used as an opening / closing axis for the front frame. The 14 and the lower plate unit 15 are supported so as to be openable and closable toward the front side of the front surface. The lock of the inner frame 12 and the lock of the front frame 14 are released by inserting a dedicated key into the keyhole 21 of the cylinder lock 20 and performing a predetermined operation.

The front frame 14 is formed by assembling decorative resin parts, electric parts, and the like, and a window portion 14c having a substantially elliptical opening is provided at a substantially central portion thereof. A glass unit 16 having two flat glass sheets is arranged on the back surface side of the front frame 14, and the front surface of the game board 13 can be visually recognized on the front side of the pachinko machine 10 through the glass unit 16.

On the front frame 14, an upper plate 17 for storing balls is formed in a substantially box shape with the upper surface open so as to project toward the front side, and prize balls, rental balls, and the like are discharged to the upper plate 17. The bottom surface of the upper plate 17 is formed so as to be inclined downward to the right side in front view (see FIG. 1), and the ball thrown into the upper plate 17 is guided to the ball launching unit 112a (see FIG. 4) by the inclination. Further, a frame button 22 is provided on the upper surface of the upper plate 17. The frame button 22 is operated by the player, for example, when changing the stage of the effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81 (see FIG. 2) or changing the effect content of the super reach. To.

The front frame 14 is provided with light emitting means such as various lamps around the front frame 14 (for example, a corner portion). These light emitting means change and control the light emitting mode by lighting or blinking according to a change in the game state at the time of a big hit or a predetermined reach, and play a role of enhancing the effect of the effect during the game. Illuminations 29 to 33 having a light emitting means such as an LED are provided on the peripheral edge of the window 14c. In the pachinko machine 10, these illumination units 29 to 33 function as effect lamps such as jackpot lamps, and each illumination unit 29 to 33 lights up by lighting or blinking the built-in LED at the time of jackpot or reach production. Or, it blinks to notify that the jackpot is in progress or that the reach is one step before the jackpot. Further, in the upper left portion of the front frame 14 when viewed from the front (see FIG. 1), a light emitting means such as an LED is built in, and a display lamp 34 capable of displaying when the prize ball is being paid out and when an error occurs is provided.

Further, on the lower side of the illuminated portion 32 on the right side, a small window 35 is formed by attaching a transparent resin from the back side so that the back side of the front frame 14 can be visually recognized, and a sticking space K1 on the front of the game board 13 (FIG. The certificate stamp or the like attached to (see 2) is visible from the front of the pachinko machine 10. Further, in the pachinko machine 10, in order to bring out more glitter, a plating member 36 made of ABS resin having chrome plating is attached to a region around the illuminated portions 29 to 33.

A ball lending operation unit 40 is arranged below the window unit 14c. The ball lending operation unit 40 is provided with a frequency display unit 41, a ball lending button 42, and a return button 43. When the ball lending operation unit 40 is operated with bills, cards, etc. inserted into the card unit (ball lending unit) (not shown) arranged on the side of the pachinko machine 10, the ball is operated according to the operation. Lending is done. Specifically, the frequency display unit 41 is an area in which balance information such as a card is displayed, and the built-in LED lights up and the balance is displayed as numerical value as balance information. The ball lending button 42 is operated to obtain a lending ball based on the information recorded on the card or the like (recording medium), and the lending ball is supplied to the upper plate 17 as long as the remaining amount is present on the card or the like. Will be done. The return button 43 is operated when requesting the return of the card or the like inserted in the card unit. A pachinko machine in which balls are lent directly to the upper plate 17 from a ball lending device or the like without using a card unit, a so-called cash machine, does not require a ball lending operation unit 40. In this case, the ball lending operation unit 40 is not required. A decorative sticker or the like may be added to the installation portion of the above to make the component configuration common. It is possible to standardize pachinko machines and cash machines that use card units.

In the lower plate unit 15 located below the upper plate 17, a lower plate 50 for storing balls that could not be stored in the upper plate 17 is formed in a substantially box shape with an open upper surface in the central portion thereof. There is. On the right side of the lower plate 50, an operation handle 51 operated by a player to drive the ball into the front of the game board 13 is arranged.

Inside the operation handle 51, there is a touch sensor 51a for permitting the driving of the ball launch unit 112a, a launch stop switch 51b for stopping the launch of the ball during the pressing operation period, and a rotation of the operation handle 51. It has a built-in variable resistor (not shown) that detects the amount of dynamic operation (rotation position) by the change in electrical resistance. When the operation handle 51 is rotated clockwise by the player, the touch sensor 51a is turned on and the resistance value of the variable resistor changes according to the amount of rotation operation, and the resistance value of the variable resistor is changed. The ball is launched with a strength corresponding to (launch intensity), whereby the ball is driven into the front of the game board 13 with a flying amount corresponding to the operation of the player. Further, when the operation handle 51 is not operated by the player, the touch sensor 51a and the firing stop switch 51b are turned off.

A ball pulling lever 52 for operating the ball stored in the lower plate 50 when the ball stored in the lower plate 50 is discharged downward is provided in the lower front portion of the lower plate 50. The ball pulling lever 52 is always urged to the right, and by sliding it to the left against the urging, the bottom opening formed on the bottom surface of the lower plate 50 is opened. The ball naturally falls from the bottom opening and is discharged. The operation of the ball removing lever 52 is usually performed in a state where a box (generally referred to as a "thousand-car box") for receiving the balls discharged from the lower plate 50 is placed below the lower plate 50. An operation handle 51 is arranged on the right side of the lower plate 50 as described above, and an ashtray 53 is attached to the left side of the lower plate 50.

As shown in FIG. 2, the game board 13 has a base plate 60 cut into a substantially square shape in front view, a large number of nails and windmills for ball guidance, rails 61, 62, general winning openings 63, and a first. It is configured by assembling a ball entry port 64, a second ball entry port 640, a first variable winning device 1000, a normal ball entry port (through gate) 67, a variable display device unit 80, and the like, and the peripheral portion thereof is an inner frame 12 (FIG. 1) is attached to the back side. The base plate 60 is made of a light-transmitting resin material, and is formed so that the player can visually recognize various structures arranged on the back side of the base plate 60 from the front side thereof. The general winning opening 63, the first entry opening 64, the second entry opening 640, the first variable winning device 1000, and the variable display device unit 80 are arranged in the through holes formed in the base plate 60 by router processing. It is fixed from the front side of the game board 13 by a tapping screw or the like.

The front central portion of the game board 13 can be visually recognized from the front side of the inner frame 12 through the window portion 14c (see FIG. 1) of the front frame 14. Hereinafter, the configuration of the game board 13 will be described mainly with reference to FIG. 2.

An outer rail 62 formed by bending a strip-shaped metal plate into a substantially arc shape is planted on the front surface of the game board 13, and a strip-shaped metal plate is placed inside the outer rail 62 like the outer rail 62. The arc-shaped inner rail 61 formed in 1 is planted. The inner rail 61 and the outer rail 62 surround the front outer circumference of the game board 13, and the game board 13 and the glass unit 16 (see FIG. 1) surround the front and back, so that the front of the game board 13 has a ball. A game area in which the game is played is formed by the behavior of. The game area is the area in front of the game board 13 that is partitioned by the two rails 61 and 62 and the resin arc member 70 that connects the rails (a winning opening or the like is arranged and fired). This is the area where the sphere flows down.

The two rails 61 and 62 are provided to guide the ball launched from the ball launching unit 112a (see FIG. 4) to the upper part of the game board 13. A return ball prevention member 68 is attached to the tip portion of the inner rail 61 (upper left portion in FIG. 2) to prevent the ball once guided to the upper part of the game board 13 from returning to the ball guide passage. Will be done. A return rubber 69 is attached to the tip of the outer rail 62 (upper right part in FIG. 2) at a position corresponding to the maximum flight portion of the ball, and the ball launched with a predetermined momentum hits the return rubber 69 and has momentum. Is dampened and bounced back toward the center. Further, a resin arc member 70 formed by providing an arc connecting the rails on the inner surface side is used as a base between the lower right tip of the inner rail 61 and the upper right tip of the outer rail 62. It is fixed by driving it into the plate 60.

In this pachinko machine 10, a special symbol (first symbol) is drawn by taking the opportunity of winning a prize in the first entrance 64 and the second entrance 640, and the ball normally enters the ball 67. When it passes, a lottery of ordinary symbols (second symbol) is performed. In the lottery of special symbols performed for the balls entering the first entrance 64 and the second entrance 640, it is determined whether or not the special symbol is a big hit, and it is determined that the special symbol is a big hit. If so, the jackpot type is also determined. In the pachinko machine 10, in the low probability state of the special symbol, for example, the jackpot of the special symbol is determined with a probability of 1/320, and in the high probability state of the special symbol (also referred to as the probability variation state of the special symbol). For example, it is determined as a jackpot of a special symbol with a probability of 1/60. For convenience of explanation, the lottery of the special symbol performed for the entry into the first entrance 64 is referred to as the "lottery of the special symbol 1", and the lottery is performed for the entry into the second entry 640. The lottery of the special symbol is called "lottery of special symbol 2".

When the jackpot of the special symbol is reached, the pachinko machine 10 shifts to the special gaming state, and the first specific winning opening 1000a, which is normally closed, is closed for a predetermined time (for example, until 30 seconds have passed, or 10 balls are won. The released operation is repeated up to 15 times (15 rounds). As a result, a large number of balls are won in the first specific winning opening 1000a, so that a larger amount of prize balls is paid out than usual.

There are six types of special symbols, "big hit A", "big hit B", "big hit C", "big hit a", "big hit b", and "big hit c" (FIG. 22). reference). Although the details will be described later, the opening pattern of the first specific winning opening 1000a is configured differently depending on the jackpot type, and the number of balls entering the first variable winning device 1000 is changed.

When the lottery of the special symbol (first symbol) is performed, the variable display of the special symbol is started on the first symbol display device 37, and the lottery result is obtained after a predetermined time (for example, 11 seconds to 60 seconds) has elapsed. The special symbol indicating is stopped and displayed. When a ball enters the first entry port 64 or the second entry opening 640 while the variable display is being performed on the first symbol display device 37, the number of entry times is for each type of entry opening. Each is held up to four times, and the number of held balls is indicated by the first symbol display device 37 and also by the third symbol display device 81. When the variable display is completed on the first symbol display device 37, the number of reserved balls for the first entry port 64 (the number of reserved balls for the special symbol 1) or the number of reserved balls for the second entry port 640 (special). If the number of reserved balls of symbol 2) remains, the next special symbol lottery is performed, and the variable display according to the lottery is started. If both the number of reserved balls of the special symbol 1 and the number of reserved balls of the special symbol 2 remain, the lottery based on the reserved balls of the special symbol 2 is preferentially executed.

In the lottery of the normal symbol (second symbol), it is determined whether or not the normal symbol is a hit. When the normal symbol hits, the electric accessory 640a attached to the second entry port 640 is opened for a predetermined time (for example, 0.2 seconds or 1 second), and the ball enters the second entry port 640. It will be easy. That is, when the ball hits the normal symbol, the ball is likely to enter the second entrance 640, and as a result, the special symbol is easily drawn.

Further, when the lottery of the normal symbol (second symbol) is performed, the variable display of the normal symbol is started on the second symbol display device 83, and after a predetermined time (for example, 3 seconds, 30 seconds, etc.) has elapsed, The normal symbol showing the lottery result is stopped and displayed. If a ball passes through the normal entry port 67 while the variable display is being performed on the second symbol display device 83, the number of passes is suspended up to four times, and the number of reserved balls is held by the first symbol display device 37. Along with being displayed, it is also shown on the second symbol hold lamp 84. When the variable display is completed in the second symbol display device 83, if the number of reserved balls for the normal entry port 67 remains, the next normal symbol lottery is performed and the variable display according to the lottery is displayed. To be started.

In the present embodiment, as an added value after the end of the jackpot, a probabilistic state (high probability state) of the special symbol is given from the end of the special game state to the end of the lottery of the special symbol 100 times, and the lottery of the special symbol is performed. After 100 times, it is configured to be set to the normal state.

In the present embodiment, when the probabilistic state of the special symbol is given after the end of the special gaming state, the probabilistic state of the special symbol is configured to end according to the number of lottery of the special symbol. The pachinko machine 10 is not limited to, for example, after a jackpot game of a predetermined jackpot type (for example, jackpot A, jackpot B, jackpot a described later), from the end of the jackpot to the next jackpot. May shift to a high probability state of the special symbol (during the probability change of the special symbol). In this case, after the jackpot game of another jackpot type (for example, jackpot C, jackpot b, jackpot c described later), the time saving state of the normal symbol is set until the lottery of the special symbol is completed 100 times.

The number of lottery of the special symbol to which the above-mentioned probability variation state (high probability state) of the special symbol is given is not limited to 100 times. For example, it may be 50 times or 200 times.

Further, the number of lottery times for the special symbols described above in which the time is shortened is not limited to 100 times. For example, it may be 50 times or 5 times.

Here, the "high probability state of the special symbol" refers to the state in which the probability of the jackpot is increased as an added value after the end of the jackpot, that is, during the so-called probability fluctuation (probability change), in other words, to the special gaming state. It is a state of the game that is easy to shift. The high probability state of the special symbol (during the probability change of the special symbol) in the present embodiment includes the state of the game in which the hit probability of the normal symbol (second symbol) is increased and the ball is likely to win the second entrance 640. .. On the other hand, the "low probability state of the special symbol" means a state in which the probability of the special symbol is not changing, and the jackpot probability is a normal state, that is, a state in which the probability of the jackpot is lower than that during the probability change of the special symbol.

In addition, the time saving state of the normal symbol (during the time saving) means a state of the game in which the hit probability of the normal symbol is increased and the ball is easily won in the second entrance 640. Further, the normal state refers to a state of the game in which neither the probability of the special symbol is changed nor the time is shortened of the normal symbol (the jackpot probability and the hit probability of the normal symbol (second symbol) are not increased).

During the probability change of the special symbol or the time reduction of the normal symbol, not only the hit probability of the normal symbol increases, but also the time when the electric accessory 640a attached to the second entrance 640 is opened is changed, and the normal state A longer time is set compared to. When the electric accessory 640a is in the open state (open state), the ball wins the second entrance 640 as compared with the case where the electric accessory 640a is in the closed state (closed state). It will be easy to do. Therefore, during the probability change of the special symbol or the time reduction of the normal symbol, the ball can easily enter the second entry port 640. That is, a lottery for special symbols is likely to be performed.

In addition to changing the opening time of the electric accessory 640a attached to the second entrance 640, or in addition to changing the opening time, during the probability change of the special symbol or the time reduction of the normal symbol. , The number of times the electric accessory 640a is opened when the normal symbol is hit may be increased as compared with the normal state. In addition, the probability of hitting the normal symbol (second symbol) does not change during the probability change of the special symbol or the time reduction of the normal symbol, and the time when the electric accessory 640a attached to the second entrance 640 is opened and At least one of the number of times the electric accessory 640a is opened may be changed. Further, during the probability change of the special symbol or the time reduction of the normal symbol, the time when the electric accessory 640a attached to the second entrance 640 is opened and the number of times the electric accessory 640a is opened are not changed, and the normal symbol (normal symbol) Only the hit probability of the second symbol) may be configured to be increased as compared with the normal state.

A first symbol display provided with a plurality of light emitting diodes (hereinafter abbreviated as "LED") 37a and a 7-segment display 37b, which are light emitting means, in the lower left side of the game area when viewed from the front (lower left side in FIG. 2). The device 37 is arranged. The first symbol display device 37 displays according to each control performed by the main control device 110, which will be described later, and mainly displays the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10. The plurality of LEDs 37a indicate by the lighting state whether or not a lottery of special symbols performed in association with the entry (starting winning) into the first entry opening 64 or the second entry opening 640 is being executed. As a stop symbol after the end of the fluctuation, a special symbol (first symbol) corresponding to the lottery result of the special symbol is shown by the lighting state, or a ball entered in the first entrance 64. Of these, the number of reserved balls, which is the number of balls (reserved balls) whose fluctuation has not been executed, is indicated by the lighting state.

When a ball enters the first entry port 64 or the second entry port 640 while the special symbol (first symbol) is variablely displayed on the first symbol display device 37, the entry is made. The number of balls is held up to 4 times for each type of entry slot, and the number of held balls is shown by the first symbol display device 37 and also by the third symbol display device 81. In the present embodiment, the first ball entry port 64 and the second ball entry port 640 are each held up to a maximum of four times, but the maximum number of times of holding is limited to four times. It may be set to 3 times or less, or 5 times or more (for example, 8 times).

The 7-segment display 37b displays the number of rounds during the jackpot and an error. The LED 37a is configured so that the emission colors (for example, red, green, and blue) of each LED are different, and depending on the combination of the emission colors, various gaming states (high probability state of a special symbol) of the pachinko machine 10 are used with a small number of LEDs. Or, it is possible to display (such as during the time reduction of ordinary symbols). Further, the LED 37a not only indicates whether or not the lottery result of the special symbol is a jackpot as a stop symbol after the end of the fluctuation, and if it is a jackpot, the jackpot type (big hit A, jackpot B, jackpot C, A special symbol (first symbol) corresponding to the jackpot a, jackpot b, and jackpot c) is shown.

In the game area, a plurality of general winning openings 63 are arranged in which 5 to 15 balls are paid out as prize balls when the balls are won. Further, a variable display device unit 80 is arranged in the central portion of the game area. The variable display device unit 80 is triggered by winning a prize (starting prize) in the first ball entry port 64 and the second ball entry port 640, and synchronizes with the variable display in the first symbol display device 37 to display the third symbol. The third symbol display device 81, which is composed of a liquid crystal display (hereinafter simply abbreviated as "display device") that performs variable display, and the second symbol, which is triggered by the passage of a ball at the normal entry port (through gate) 67, is variablely displayed. A second symbol display device 83 composed of the LED is provided. In the variable display device unit 80, a center frame 86 is arranged so as to surround the outer periphery of the third symbol display device 81.

The third symbol display device 81 is composed of a large 9-inch size liquid crystal display, and by controlling the display contents by the display control device 114 (see FIG. 4), for example, the upper, middle, and lower 3 Two symbol columns are displayed. Each symbol row is composed of a plurality of symbols (third symbol), and these third symbols are horizontally scrolled for each symbol row, and the third symbol is variably displayed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81. It has become like. In the third symbol display device 81 of the present embodiment, the game state is displayed by the control of the main control device 110 (see FIG. 4), whereas the first symbol display device 37 displays the first symbol. A decorative display is performed according to the display of the device 37. In addition, instead of the display device, for example, a reel or the like may be used to configure the third symbol display device 81.

In the present embodiment, the third symbol is composed of 10 types of main symbols having numbers from "0" to "9". In the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, when the lottery result of the special symbol performed by the main control device 110 (see FIG. 4) described later is a big hit, a variable display is performed in which the same main symbols are aligned. It is configured so that a jackpot occurs after the variable display is finished. On the other hand, if the lottery result of the special symbol is out of order, a variable display is performed in which the same main symbol is not aligned.

For example, if the lottery result of the special symbol is "big hit B", "big hit C", "big hit b", "big hit c", even numbers "0,2,4,6,8" are added. A variable display is performed in which the main symbols are aligned. On the other hand, if it is "big hit A" or "big hit a", it is one of all the numbers "0,1,2,3,4,5,6,7,8,9" including odd numbers. A variable display is performed in which the main symbols with the addition of are aligned. On the other hand, if the lottery result of the special symbol is out of order, a variable display is performed in which the main symbols having the same number are not aligned.

Next, a display (right-handed navigation) displayed on the third symbol display device 81 that prompts the player to launch the ball aiming at the path (flow path) on the right side of the game board 13 will be described.

As described above, in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, when the special symbol is in a probabilistic state or the normal symbol is in a time-saving state, the electric accessory 640a is easily released, so that the ball is moved to the right side of the game board 13. By launching (striking to the right), it becomes easier for the ball to enter the second entry port 640. Further, as will be described in detail later, if a big hit is obtained by a special symbol lottery (lottery of special symbol 2) performed based on the ball entering the second entrance 640, the first entrance 64 Compared to the case where a big hit is obtained by a special symbol lottery (lottery for special symbol 1) performed based on the ball entering the ball, the jackpot (big hit a) that can obtain the maximum profit is likely to be obtained. Therefore, in the probabilistic state of the special symbol given after the end of the jackpot and the time saving state of the normal symbol, right-handed hitting is advantageous for the player. In other words, even if the special symbol is set to the probabilistic state or the normal symbol is set to the time saving state, the ball cannot be entered into the second entrance 640 unless the player hits right. The player will not be able to fully receive the benefits of the probability change state of the symbol and the time saving state of the normal symbol.

Therefore, in the present embodiment, in the probabilistic state of the special symbol or the time saving state of the normal symbol, by displaying a specific image (right-handed navigation), the player can perform the probabilistic state of the special symbol or the time saving state of the normal symbol. It is structured so that the benefits of becoming can be surely obtained.

In the right-handed navigation system, the character "Aim to the right !!" is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and three right-pointing arrows are displayed above and below the character. By displaying these characters and arrows, it is possible to make the player feel that the ball should be launched into the path (flow path) provided on the right side of the game board 13. Therefore, it is possible to ensure that the player can obtain the benefits of being in the probabilistic state of the special symbol and the time saving state of the normal symbol.

Next, an example of a warning image displayed on the third symbol display device 81 in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment will be described. This warning image is determined to be performing a right-handed hit even though the player is not in a period in which the ball should be hit (right-handed) into the path (flow path) provided on the right side of the game board 13. This is an image (right-handed warning image) displayed on the third symbol display device 81 in this case. More specifically, it is displayed when it is determined that the player is hitting right in the normal state (neither the probabilistic state of the special symbol nor the time saving state of the normal symbol).

In the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, the electric accessory 640a is controlled so as to be difficult to open in a normal state (even if a right-handed hit is made, it is difficult to allow the ball to enter the second entrance 640). For this reason, if a right-handed hit is made in a normal state, the chances of receiving a special symbol lottery are reduced as compared with the case where a ball is hit at the first entrance 64 by a left-handed hit. That is, if a right-handed hit is performed in the normal state, it is difficult for the player to win a big hit, which is a loss for the player. Therefore, by displaying a right-handed warning image to encourage left-handed hitting, it is possible to prevent (suppress) the player from losing money.

When it is determined that the player is hitting right in the normal state, the characters "warning" and "play left-handed !!" are displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Characters and are displayed. By displaying these characters, it is possible to remind the player that he should not hit right (should hit left). In addition, by checking the presence or absence of the right-handed warning screen, the clerk in the hall can easily determine whether or not there is a player who is executing an irregular game method of right-handed hitting in a normal state.

As a method of determining whether or not the ball is hit right, for example, the ball enters the normal entrance (through gate) 67 (see FIG. 2) where the ball can flow in when the ball is hit right. Judge by whether or not the ball has hit.

In the present embodiment, when it is detected that a ball has entered the normal ball entry port (through gate) 67 (see FIG. 2) in the normal state, a right-handed warning image is displayed. It is not limited to this. For example, when it is detected that a ball has won (winned) into the first specific winning opening 1000a in a state other than the special gaming state (big hit state), it is determined that an illegal game is being performed, and the right It may be configured to display a hit warning image. As a result, the clerk in the hall can easily determine the presence or absence of fraud simply by checking the presence or absence of the right-handed warning image. In addition, when it is detected that a ball has entered the first specific winning opening 1000a in a state other than the special game state (big hit state), a signal indicating that fraud is being performed is sent to the hall computer. It may be configured to output. As a result, the operator of the hall computer can easily determine whether or not there is a possibility of fraudulent activity and the machine number (position) of the pachinko machine 10 where fraudulent activity is being performed.

Next, a warning image displayed when it is detected that an abnormality has occurred in the first variable winning device 1000 will be described. Here, the abnormality of the first variable winning device 1000 is exemplified by, for example, the case where a ball entering the first specific winning opening 1000a is detected even though the game is not in the special gaming state (big hit state).

When it is determined that an abnormality has occurred in the first variable winning device 1000, the character "warning" is displayed in large size in the central portion of the third symbol display device 81. At the bottom, the text "Call a gate error clerk" is displayed. From these characters, the player can determine that an error has occurred in the pachinko machine 10, so that the clerk in the hall or the like can promptly request repairs or the like.

The second symbol display device 83 includes a symbol of "○" and a symbol of "x" as a display symbol (second symbol (not shown)) each time the ball passes through the normal entry port (through gate) 67. Is to be displayed in a variable manner by alternately lighting the above for a predetermined time. In the pachinko machine 10, when it is detected that the ball has passed through the normal entry port (through gate) 67, a winning lottery is performed. As a result of the winning lottery, if it is a winning, the symbol "○" is stopped and displayed on the second symbol display device 83 after the variation display of the second symbol. Further, if the result of the winning lottery is a failure, the symbol "x" is stopped and displayed on the second symbol display device 83 after the variation display of the second symbol.

In the pachinko machine 10, when the variation display on the second symbol display device 83 is stopped at a predetermined symbol (the symbol “○” in the present embodiment), the electric accessory 640a attached to the second entry port 640 It is configured to be in operation (open) for a predetermined time.

The time (variation time) required for the variation display of the second symbol is set so that the game state is shorter during the probability variation of the special symbol or during the time reduction of the normal symbol than during the normal state. As a result, during the probability change of the special symbol and during the time reduction of the normal symbol, the variation display of the second symbol is performed in a short time, so that the lottery of the normal symbol (second symbol) can be performed more than in the normal state. it can. Therefore, since the chances of hitting the normal symbol increase, it is possible to give the player many chances that the electric accessory 640a of the second entrance 640 is opened. Therefore, it is possible to make it easy for the ball to win the second entrance 640 during the probability change of the special symbol and the time reduction of the normal symbol.

In addition, during the probability change of the special symbol or the time reduction of the normal symbol, the hit probability is increased, the opening time and the number of times of opening the electric accessory 640a are increased, and the like, the second entrance 640 is reached by other methods. When the ball is in a state where it is easy to win a prize, the time required for the variable display of the second symbol may be constant regardless of the gaming state. On the other hand, when the time required for the variable display of the second symbol is set shorter than in the normal state during the probability change of the special symbol or the time reduction of the normal symbol, the hit probability of the normal symbol is constant regardless of the game state. Alternatively, the opening time and the number of times of opening the electric accessory 640a for one hit of the normal symbol may be constant regardless of the gaming state.

The normal entry port (through gate) 67 is assembled to the game board on the right side in the area below the variable display device unit 80, and among the balls fired on the game board, the balls that flow down to the right side of the game board. A part of is configured to be passable. When the ball passes through the normal ball entrance (through gate) 67, a winning lottery for the second symbol is performed. After the winning lottery, variable display is performed on the second symbol display device, and if the winning lottery result is a winning symbol, a symbol "○" is displayed as a stop symbol of the variable display, and if the winning lottery result is incorrect. For example, a symbol of "x" is displayed as a stop symbol of the variable display.

The number of times the ball has passed through the normal entry port (through gate) 67 is held up to a total of 4 times, and the number of held balls is displayed by the above-mentioned first symbol display device 37 and on the second symbol holding lamp 84. Is also lit and displayed. Four second symbol holding lamps 84 are provided for the maximum number of holding lamps, and are symmetrically arranged below the third symbol display device 81.

The variation display of the second symbol is performed by switching the lighting and non-lighting of a plurality of lamps in the second symbol display device 83 as in the present embodiment, as well as the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol. It may be performed by using a part of the display device 81. Similarly, the second symbol holding lamp 84 may be turned on by a part of the third symbol display device 81. Further, the maximum number of reserved balls for the passage of a ball at the normal entry port (through gate) 67 is not limited to 4, but is set to 3 times or less, or 5 times or more (for example, 8 times). You may. Further, the number of assembled normal ball entrances (through gates) 67 is not limited to one, and may be a plurality (for example, two). Further, the assembly position of the normal entry port (through gate) 67 is not limited to the right side of the variable display device unit 80, and may be, for example, the left side of the variable display device unit 80. Further, since the number of reserved balls is indicated by the first symbol display device 37, the lighting display may not be performed by the second symbol hold lamp 84.

Below the variable display device unit 80, a first ball entry port 64 in which a ball can win a prize is arranged. When a ball wins a prize in the first entry port 64, the first entry opening switch (not shown) provided on the back side of the game board 13 is turned on, and the main cause is that the first entry opening switch is turned on. A big hit lottery is made by the control device 110 (see FIG. 4), and the display according to the lottery result is shown by the first symbol display device 37.

On the other hand, on the right side of the front entrance 64 of the first entrance 64, a second entrance 640 in which the ball can win a prize is arranged. When a ball wins a prize in the second entrance 640, the second entrance switch (not shown) provided on the back side of the game board 13 is turned on, and this is mainly due to the on of the second entrance switch. A big hit lottery is made by the control device 110 (see FIG. 4), and the display according to the lottery result is shown by the first symbol display device 37.

In addition, each of the first entry port 64 and the second entry opening 640 is also one of the winning openings in which five balls are paid out as prize balls when the balls win a prize. In the present embodiment, the number of prize balls paid out when a ball wins in the first entrance 64 and the number of prize balls paid out when a ball wins in the second entrance 640 are configured to be the same. However, the number of prize balls paid out when a ball wins in the first entrance 64 and the number of prize balls paid out when a ball wins in the second entrance 640 are different, for example, the first entry. The number of prize balls paid out when a ball wins in the ball opening 64 may be three, and the number of prize balls paid out when a ball wins in the second ball opening 640 may be set to five.

An electric accessory 640a is attached to the second entrance 640. The electric accessory 640a is configured to be openable and closable, and normally the electric accessory 640a is in a closed state (reduced state), making it difficult for the ball to win a prize in the second entrance 640. On the other hand, when the symbol "○" is displayed on the second symbol display device 83 as a result of the variation display of the second symbol performed when the ball passes through the normal ball entrance (through gate) 67, the electric combination The object 640a is in the open state (expanded state), and the ball is in a state in which it is easy to win a prize in the second entrance 640.

As described above, during the probability change of the special symbol and during the time reduction of the normal symbol, the probability of hitting the normal symbol is higher than that in the normal state, and the time required for displaying the fluctuation of the normal symbol is short, so that the fluctuation of the normal symbol is short. The "○" symbol is easily displayed on the display. Therefore, the number of times that the electric accessory 640a is in the open state (expanded state) increases. Further, during the probability change of the special symbol and the time reduction of the normal symbol, the time for opening the electric accessory 640a is longer than that in the normal state. Therefore, during the probabilistic change of the special symbol and during the time reduction of the normal symbol, it is possible to create a state in which the ball is more likely to win the second entrance 640 than in the normal state. On the other hand, the first ball entry port 64 does not have an electric accessory as provided in the second ball entry port 640, and the ball is in a state where it can always win a prize.

Here, the probability of winning a jackpot is the same in both the low probability state and the high probability state when the ball wins in the first entry port 64 and when the ball wins in the second entry opening 640. is there. However, the probability of becoming a jackpot (big hit A, jackpot a) that gives the maximum profit (ball output) as the type of jackpot selected in the case of a jackpot is when the ball wins the second entrance 640. Is set higher than when the ball wins the first ball opening 64.

During normal times, the electric accessory attached to the second entry port 640 is often in a closed state, and it is difficult to win a prize in the second entry port 640. Therefore, go to the first entry port 64 without an electric accessory. A ball is fired so that the ball passes to the left of the variable display device unit 80 (so-called "left-handed"), and by winning a prize in the first entrance 64, a lot of chances of a big hit lottery are obtained and a big hit. It is advantageous for the player to aim at becoming.

On the other hand, during the probability change of the special symbol or the time reduction of the normal symbol, the electric accessory 640a attached to the second entry port 640 is likely to be opened by passing the ball through the normal entry port (through gate) 67. Since it is easy to win a prize in the second entrance 640, a ball is launched toward the second entrance 640 so that the ball passes to the right of the variable display device 80 (so-called "right-handed"). ), It is advantageous for the player to aim to win a big hit by passing through the normal entrance (through gate) 67 to open the electric accessory 640a and winning the second entrance 640. It becomes.

As described above, the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment fires a ball at the player according to the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 (whether it is in the probabilistic change, in the time saving, or in the normal state). You can change the method of "left-handed" and "right-handed". Therefore, it is possible to change the way the ball is hit by the player, so that the game can be enjoyed.

A first variable winning device 1000 is arranged on the lower right side of the first ball entrance 64 (lower left side of the second ball opening 640), and the first specific one is opened in the substantially central portion thereof in the left-right direction. A winning opening (large opening) 1000a is provided. In the pachinko machine 10, if a big hit is obtained in a special symbol lottery performed due to winning a prize in the first ball slot 64 or the second ball slot 640, after a predetermined time (variable time) has elapsed, The first symbol display device 37 is turned on so as to be a jackpot stop symbol. In addition, the stop symbol corresponding to the jackpot is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and the occurrence of the jackpot is notified. After that, the gaming state transitions to a special gaming state (big hit) where the ball is easy to win. As this special gaming state, the first specific winning opening 1000a, which is normally closed, is opened for a predetermined time (for example, until 30 seconds elapse or until 10 balls are won).

The first specific winning opening 1000a is closed after a predetermined time elapses, and after the closing, the first specific winning opening 1000a is opened again for a predetermined time. The opening / closing operation of the first specific winning opening 1000a can be repeated up to 15 times (15 rounds), for example. The state in which this opening / closing operation is performed is one form of a special gaming state that is advantageous to the player, and the player is given a game value (game value) in a larger amount than usual (in the present embodiment). Based on the winning of one ball, 15) prize balls will be paid out.

Specifically, the first variable winning device 1000 includes an opening / closing plate 1300 that forms an open state that guides a ball to the first specific winning opening 1000a by rotating upward, and a solenoid 1510 that operates the opening / closing plate 1300. I have. The first specific winning opening 1000a is normally in a closed state in which the ball cannot win or is difficult to win. At the time of a big hit, the solenoid 1510 is driven to rotate the opening / closing plate 1300 ascendingly to temporarily form an open state in which the ball can easily win a prize in the first specific winning opening 1000a, and the open state and the normally closed state are obtained. It operates so as to repeat alternately.

A sticking space K1 for sticking a certificate stamp, an identification label, or the like is provided in the right corner on the lower side of the game board 13, and the certificate stamp or the like stuck on the sticking space K1 is a small window of the front frame 14. It can be visually recognized through 35 (see FIG. 1).

The game board 13 is provided with a first out port 66 below the first ball entry port 64. A ball that flows down the game area and does not win a prize in any of the entry ports 63, 64, 1000a, 640 is guided to a ball discharge path (not shown) through the first out port 66. A large number of nails are planted on the game board 13 in order to appropriately disperse and adjust the falling direction of the ball, and various members (accessories) such as a windmill are arranged.

As shown in FIG. 3, the control board units 90 and 91 and the back pack unit 94 are mainly provided on the back side of the pachinko machine 10. The control board unit 90 is unitized by mounting a main board (main control device 110), a voice lamp control board (voice lamp control device 113), and a display control board (display control device 114). The control board unit 91 is unitized by mounting a payout control board (payout control device 111), a launch control board (launch control device 112), a power supply board (power supply device 115), and a card unit connection board 116.

In the back pack unit 94, the back pack 92 forming the protective cover portion and the payout unit 93 are unitized. In addition, each control board is used for MPU as a one-chip microcomputer that controls each control, a port for contacting various devices, a random number generator used for various lottery, and for time counting and synchronization. A clock pulse generation circuit, etc., is installed as needed.

The main control device 110, the voice lamp control device 113 and the display control device 114, the payout control device 111 and the launch control device 112, the power supply device 115, and the card unit connection board 116 are housed in the board boxes 100 to 104, respectively. .. The board boxes 100 to 104 include a box base and a box cover that covers an opening of the box base, and the box base and the box cover are connected to each other to house each control device and each board.

Further, in the board box 100 (main control device 110) and the board box 102 (payout control device 111 and launch control device 112), the box base and the box cover are connected by a sealing unit (not shown) so as not to be opened (caulking structure). (Consolidated by). Further, a sealing sticker (not shown) is attached to the connecting portion between the box base and the box cover over the box base and the box cover. This seal is made of a brittle material, and if you try to peel off the seal to open the board boxes 100 and 102, or if you try to forcibly open the board boxes 100 and 102, the box base side and the box cover Cut to the side. Therefore, by checking the sealing unit or the sealing seal, it is possible to know whether or not the substrate boxes 100 and 102 have been opened.

The payout unit 93 includes a tank 130 located at the uppermost portion of the back pack unit 94 and opened upward, a tank rail 131 connected below the tank 130 and gently inclined toward the downstream side, and a downstream of the tank rail 131. A case rail 132 vertically connected to the side and a payout device 133 provided at the most downstream portion of the case rail 132 and paying out balls by a predetermined electrical configuration of a payout motor 216 (see FIG. 4) are provided. ing. The tank 130 is sequentially replenished with balls supplied from the island equipment of the game hall, and the required number of balls is appropriately paid out by the payout device 133. A vibrator 134 for adding vibration to the tank rail 131 is attached to the tank rail 131.

Further, the payout control device 111 is provided with a state return switch 120, the launch control device 112 is provided with a variable resistor operation knob 121, and the power supply device 115 is provided with a RAM erase switch 122. The state return switch 120 is operated to clear the ball clogging (return to the normal state) when a payout error occurs, such as a ball clogging of the payout motor 216 (see FIG. 4). The operation knob 121 is operated to adjust the firing force of the firing solenoid. The RAM erase switch 122 is operated when the power is turned on when it is desired to return the pachinko machine 10 to the initial state.

Next, the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 4 is a block diagram showing an electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10.

The main control device 110 is equipped with an MPU 201 as a one-chip microcomputer which is an arithmetic unit. The MPU 201 is a ROM 202 that stores various control programs and fixed value data executed by the MPU 201, and a memory for temporarily storing various data and the like when the control program stored in the ROM 202 is executed. A certain RAM 203 and various other circuits such as an interrupt circuit, a timer circuit, and a data transmission / reception circuit are built in. In the main control device 110, the MPU 201 executes the main processing of the pachinko machine 10 such as a jackpot lottery, display setting in the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81, and lottery of display results in the second symbol display device. To do.

In order to instruct the operation of the sub control device such as the payout control device 111 and the voice lamp control device 113, various commands are transmitted from the main control device 110 to the sub control device by the data transmission / reception circuit. Such a command is transmitted from the main controller 110 to the sub controller in only one direction.

The RAM 203 includes various areas, counters, flags, a stack area in which the contents of internal registers of the MPU 201 and the return destination address of the control program executed by the MPU 201 are stored, various flags, counters, I / O, and the like. It has a work area (work area) in which values are stored. The RAM 203 has a configuration in which a backup voltage is supplied from the power supply device 115 to hold (back up) data even after the power supply of the pachinko machine 10 is cut off, and all the data stored in the RAM 203 is backed up. ..

When the power supply is cut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like, the stack pointer at the time of the power failure (including the time when the power failure occurs; the same applies hereinafter) and the value of each register are stored in the RAM 203. On the other hand, when the power is turned on (including power on due to power failure elimination; the same applies hereinafter), the state of the pachinko machine 10 is restored to the state before the power was cut off based on the information stored in the RAM 203. Writing to the RAM 203 is executed by the main process (not shown) when the power is cut off, and restoration of each value written in the RAM 203 is executed in the start-up process (not shown) at the time of turning on the power. The NMI terminal (non-maskable interrupt terminal) of the MPU 201 is configured so that a power failure signal SG1 from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 is input when the power is cut off due to a power failure or the like, and the power failure signal SG1 is the MPU201. When input to, the NMI interrupt process (not shown) as the power failure process is immediately executed.

An input / output port 205 is connected to the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 via a bus line 204 composed of an address bus and a data bus. The input / output port 205 is centered on the lower side of the payout control device 111, the voice lamp control device 113, the first symbol display device 37, the second symbol display device, the second symbol hold lamp, and the opening / closing plate of the first specific winning opening 1000a. A solenoid 209 (including solenoids 1510, 2810, 4852, 6910, etc.) including a large opening solenoid for driving the opening and closing and a solenoid for driving an electric accessory is connected to the front side, and the MPU 201 is input and output. Various commands and control signals are transmitted to these via the port 205.

Further, the input / output port 205 includes various switches 208 (including a detection sensor 1240, a second detection sensor 2255, etc.) including a switch group (not shown) and a sensor group including a slide position detection sensor S and a rotation position detection sensor R. The RAM erase switch circuit 253 provided in the power supply device 115, which will be described later, is connected, and the MPU 201 executes various processes based on the signals output from the various switches 208 and the RAM erase signal SG2 output from the RAM erase switch circuit 253. To do.

The payout control device 111 drives the payout motor 216 to control the payout of prize balls and rented balls. The MPU 211, which is an arithmetic unit, has a ROM 212 that stores a control program and fixed value data executed by the MPU 211, and a RAM 213 that is used as a work memory or the like.

Like the RAM 203 of the main control device 110, the RAM 213 of the payout control device 111 has a stack area in which the contents of the internal registers of the MPU 211 and the return address of the control program executed by the MPU 211 are stored, and various flags and counters. It has a work area (work area) in which values such as I / O are stored. The RAM 213 has a configuration in which a backup voltage is supplied from the power supply device 115 to hold (back up) data even after the power supply of the pachinko machine 10 is cut off, and all the data stored in the RAM 213 is backed up. Similar to the MPU 201 of the main control device 110, the NMI terminal of the MPU 211 is also configured so that the power failure signal SG1 is input from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 when the power is cut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like. When input to the MPU 211, the NMI interrupt process (not shown) as the power failure process is immediately executed.

An input / output port 215 is connected to the MPU 211 of the payout control device 111 via a bus line 214 composed of an address bus and a data bus. The main control device 110, the payout motor 216, the launch control device 112, and the like are connected to the input / output port 215, respectively. Further, although not shown, the payout control device 111 is connected to a prize ball detection switch for detecting the paid out prize balls. The prize ball detection switch is connected to the payout control device 111, but is not connected to the main control device 110.

The launch control device 112 controls the ball launch unit 112a so that when the main control device 110 gives an instruction to launch the ball, the launch strength of the ball corresponds to the amount of rotation of the operation handle 51. .. The ball launch unit 112a includes a launch solenoid and an electromagnet (not shown), and the launch solenoid and the electromagnet are allowed to be driven when predetermined conditions are met. Specifically, the touch sensor 51a detects that the player is touching the operation handle 51, and the operation is performed on condition that the launch stop switch 51b for stopping the launch of the ball is off (not operated). The firing solenoid is excited in response to the rotation operation amount (rotation position) of the handle 51, and the ball is launched with a strength corresponding to the operation amount of the operation handle 51.

The audio lamp control device 113 is an audio output in an audio output device (speaker, etc. not shown) 226, an on / off output in a lamp display device (illumination units 29 to 33, indicator lamp 34, etc.) 227, and a variation effect (variation). It controls the setting of the display mode of the third symbol display device 81 performed by the display control device 114 such as the display) and the advance notice effect. The MPU 221 which is an arithmetic unit has a ROM 222 which stores a control program and fixed value data executed by the MPU 221, and a RAM 223 used as a work memory or the like.

An input / output port 225 is connected to the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 via a bus line 224 composed of an address bus and a data bus. A main control device 110, a display control device 114, an audio output device 226, a lamp display device 227, other devices 228, a frame button 22, and the like are connected to the input / output port 225, respectively.

The voice lamp control device 113 determines the display mode of the third symbol display device 81 based on various commands (variation pattern command, stop type command, etc.) received from the main control device 110, and commands the determined display mode. (Display variation pattern command, display stop type command, etc.) notifies the display control device 114. Further, the voice lamp control device 113 monitors the input from the frame button 22, and when the frame button 22 is operated by the player, the stage displayed on the third symbol display device 81 can be changed or the super reach can be changed. The display control device 114 is instructed to change the effect content of the time. When the stage is changed, a rear image change command including information about the changed stage is transmitted to the display control device 114 in order to display the rear image corresponding to the changed stage on the third symbol display device 81. .. Here, the rear surface image is an image displayed on the rear surface side of the third symbol, which is a main image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. The display control device 114 displays various images on the third symbol display device 81 according to a command transmitted from the voice lamp control device 113.

Further, the voice lamp control device 113 receives a command (display command) indicating the display contents of the third symbol display device 81 from the display control device 114. Based on the display command received from the display control device 114, the voice lamp control device 113 outputs the voice corresponding to the display content according to the display content of the third symbol display device 81 from the voice output device 226, and also outputs the voice corresponding to the display content. The lighting and extinguishing of the lamp display device 227 are controlled according to the display content.

In the display control device 114, the voice lamp control device 113 and the third symbol display device 81 are connected, and based on the command received from the voice lamp control device 113, the third symbol variation effect of the third symbol display device 81 and the like are performed. It controls the display. Further, the display control device 114 appropriately transmits a display command for notifying the display content of the third symbol display device 81 to the voice lamp control device 113. The voice lamp control device 113 outputs the voice from the voice output device 226 according to the display content indicated by this display command, so that the display of the third symbol display device 81 and the voice output from the voice output device 226 are matched. be able to.

The power supply device 115 is provided with a power supply unit 251 for supplying power to each part of the pachinko machine 10, a power failure monitoring circuit 252 for monitoring power failure due to a power failure, and a RAM erasing switch 122 (see FIG. 3). It has an erasing switch circuit 253. The power supply unit 251 is a device that supplies the required operating voltage to each of the control devices 110 to 114 and the like through a power supply path (not shown). As an outline, the power supply unit 251 takes in an AC 24 volt voltage supplied from the outside, and has a 12 volt voltage for driving various switches such as various switches 208, a solenoid such as a solenoid 209, and a motor. A 5 volt voltage for logic, a backup voltage for RAM backup, and the like are generated, and these 12 volt voltage, 5 volt voltage, and backup voltage are supplied to each control device 110 to 114 and the like.

The power failure monitoring circuit 252 is a circuit for outputting a power failure signal SG1 to each NMI terminal of the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 and the MPU 211 of the payout control device 111 when the power is cut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like. The power failure monitoring circuit 252 monitors the DC stable 24 volt voltage, which is the maximum voltage output from the power supply unit 251 and determines that a power failure (power failure, power failure) has occurred when this voltage becomes less than 22 volts. Then, the power failure signal SG1 is output to the main control device 110 and the payout control device 111. By the output of the power failure signal SG1, the main control device 110 and the payout control device 111 recognize the occurrence of the power failure and execute the NMI interrupt process. The power supply unit 251 outputs a voltage of 5 volts, which is the drive voltage of the control system, for a sufficient period of time to execute the NMI interrupt process even after the voltage of DC stable 24 volts becomes less than 22 volts. Is configured to maintain a normal value. Therefore, the main control device 110 and the payout control device 111 can normally execute and complete the NMI interrupt process (not shown).

The RAM erase switch circuit 253 is a circuit for outputting the RAM erase signal SG2 for clearing the backup data to the main control device 110 when the RAM erase switch 122 (see FIG. 3) is pressed. When the RAM erase signal SG2 is input when the power of the pachinko machine 10 is turned on, the main control device 110 clears the backup data, and the payout control device 111 issues a payout initialization command for clearing the backup data. It transmits to the device 111.

Next, the first variable winning device 1000 will be described with reference to FIGS. 5 to 23. FIG. 5 is a partial front perspective view of the game board 13. The first variable winning device 1000 enters the second entry port 640 among the balls flowing down to the right of the variable ephemeris time device unit 80 when the player strikes right with the inclined surface 1237 provided on the upper surface thereof. It does not sphere, but guides almost all of the spheres that have flowed downstream to the flow path forming part.

FIG. 6 is an exploded front perspective view of the first variable winning device 1000, and FIG. 7 is an exploded rear perspective view of the first variable winning device 1000. The first variable winning device 1000 includes a main body member 1100 composed of a horizontally long rectangular plate shape, an lining front plate 1200 fastened and fixed to the main body member 1100 from the front side, and the main body member 1100 and the lining front plate. An opening / closing plate 1300 that is pivotally supported by being sandwiched between 1200, a power transmission member 1400 that is rotatably supported on the back side of the main body member 1100 and applies a load to the opening / closing plate 1300 by rotation, and a power transmission member thereof. A drive device 1500 that drives the 1400, a regulation member 1600 that regulates the discharge of balls in conjunction with the opening / closing plate 1300, and a power transmission member 1400, a drive device 1500, and a regulation member 1600 are laid on the main body member 1100 from the back side. The rear cover 1700, which is fastened and fixed as described above, is mainly provided.

The main body member 1100 includes a thin plate member 1110 formed of a horizontally long rectangular thin plate arranged on the front side of the game board, and a shaft portion 1320 of the opening / closing plate 1300 recessed in the thin plate member 1110 from the front to the back side. A housing portion 1120 that is accommodated and partially penetrated, a holding hole 1130 that is a through hole into which a detection sensor 1240 is inserted on the right side of the accommodation portion 1120 when viewed from the front, and a ball flows down on the front side of the thin plate member 1110. A protrusion 1140 projecting along the path, a discharge port 1150 for discharging balls from the front to the back side of the thin plate member 1110, and a rotation projecting toward the back side of the thin plate member 1110 to support the power transmission member 1400. It mainly includes a support portion 1160 and a support claw portion 1170 that is projected in a claw shape so as to support the shaft portion 1610 of the regulating member 1600 at the upper portion of the discharge port 1150.

The accommodating portion 1120 includes a pair of left and right support recesses 1121 in which the shaft portion 1320 of the opening / closing plate 1300 is accommodated, a rectangular recess 1122 recessed in a rectangular shape below a straight line connecting the support recesses 1121, and the rectangle thereof. A through hole formed through a rectangular shape that connects a pair of support recesses 1121 in order to move the loaded portion 1330 of the opening / closing plate 1300 that operates along the right end of the recess 1122 to the front and back of the thin plate member 1111. It mainly includes 1123.

The support recess 1121 is formed to be slightly wider than the shaft portion 1320 of the opening / closing plate 1300, and in the assembled state, the shaft portion 1320 of the opening / closing plate 1300 is accommodated, and the recessed opening is closed on the back surface of the lining front plate 1200. To. That is, the opening / closing plate 1300 is pivotally supported by the support recess 1121 and the back surface of the lining front plate 1200.

The surface area of the rectangular recess 1122 is larger than that of the plate portion 1310 of the opening / closing plate 1300, and the depth of the recess is slightly deeper than that of the plate portion 1310. As a result, the plate portion 1310 can be completely accommodated in the rectangular recess 1122 in the tilted posture (closed state) of the opening / closing plate 1300, and the opening / closing plate 1300 can be prevented from protruding to the front side of the thin plate member 1110.

The projecting portion 1140 is projected to a position where it comes into contact with a ball flowing down the storage flow path 1231 of the lining front plate 1200. The flowing ball is decelerated by coming into contact with the projecting portion 1140. A similar projecting portion 1235 is also arranged in the storage flow path 1231 of the lining front plate 1200 at a position where it does not overlap with the projecting portion 1140 in the front-rear direction.

The rotation support portion 1160 has a shaft portion 1161 that rotatably supports the power transmission member 1400, and a projecting height that is evenly projected toward the back surface side of the thin plate member 1110 along a circular shape or an arc shape coaxial with the shaft portion 1161. A circular rib 1162 formed in the shape of a rib is mainly provided.

The circular rib 1162 maintains a distance between the rotating tip portion 1421 of the power transmission member 1400 and the back surface of the thin plate member 1110 at a certain distance or more. That is, during the operation of the power transmission member 1400, the circular rib 1162 is formed in the entire angle range in contact with the rotating tip portion 1421.

The lining front plate 1200 includes a thin plate member 1210 arranged on the front side of the main body member 1100 at a predetermined distance from the thin plate member 1110, and a side wall portion extending from the left end portion of the thin plate member 1210 to the back side. 1220, a box-shaped accommodating portion 1230 extending toward the back side of the thin plate member 1210 on the opposite side of the side wall portion 1220 in the left-right direction, and an upper end portion of the accommodating portion 1230. The detection sensor 1240 and the like are mainly provided.

The thin plate member 1210, the front side wall portion of the side wall portion 1220, the front view left side wall portion of the accommodating portion 1230, and the thin plate member 1110 of the main body member 1100 form a flow path that is a hole through which the sphere flows down in the vertical direction. The part is composed.

The accommodating portion 1230 is formed in a U-shape in front view, and is projected toward the back side in a storage flow path 1231 formed in a width that allows a sphere to flow down inside and a middle portion of the storage flow path 1231. It mainly includes a projecting portion 1235 (see FIG. 12) and an inclined surface 1237 formed as an upper surface on the right side when viewed from the front.

The storage flow path 1231 is configured such that a side wall portion having a U-shaped cross section that opens to the back side is extended while being bent in a front U-shape, and the opening is closed by the main body member 1100 so that a sphere passes through. Form a flow path. In the present embodiment, the thin plate member 1210 corresponding to the front side portion of the region where the storage flow path 1231 is formed is formed of a light-transmitting material. Therefore, the player can visually recognize the ball flowing down the storage flow path 1231.

The storage flow path 1231 has a guide surface 1231a (see FIG. 12), which is an inclined surface that guides the sphere toward the back side at the lowermost end, and a rolling motion that rolls the sphere guided by the guide surface 1231a in the front-rear direction. It mainly includes a surface 1231b.

The inclination angle of the rolling surface 1231b with respect to the horizontal plane is made larger than the inclination angle of the portion of the storage flow path 1231 on the front side (right side of FIG. 12) reaching the rolling surface 1231b with respect to the horizontal plane.

The projecting portion 1235 has substantially the same structure as the projecting portion 1140 of the main body member 1100. That is, the projecting portion 1235 is projected to a position where it can come into contact with the ball flowing down the storage flow path 1231, and the ball is decelerated by contacting the ball.

The inclined surface 1237 is inclined downward toward the left side in the front view. As a result, the ball landing on the inclined surface 1237 can be rolled to the left and guided to the flow path forming portion.

The detection sensor 1240 includes a through hole as the first specific winning opening 1000a. When the ball passes through the first specific winning opening 1000a, the detection sensor 1240 detects the passage and counts the number of winnings.

The opening / closing plate 1300 is a member that switches between a case where the ball is rolled toward the detection sensor 1240 and a case where the ball is dropped downward without contacting the ball, depending on the difference in posture, and is a horizontally long rectangular plate portion 1310. A pair of shaft portions 1320 projecting from the lateral end of the plate portion 1310 along the longitudinal direction, and extending along a plane perpendicular to the shaft portion 1320 at the root of the shaft portion 1320 on the right side of the front view. It mainly includes a loaded portion 1330 to be provided.

The plate portion 1310 includes a rolling surface 1311 on which the ball rolls in the ascending posture (open state), and is covered in the ascending posture (open state) in which the length in the lateral direction is along the front-rear direction in the lateral direction. The distance from the front plate 1200 is set to be equal to or less than the radius of the sphere, and the right end portion in the longitudinal direction is set to be close to the detection sensor 1240.

Further, the plate portion 1310 includes a chamfered portion 1312 chamfered in an arc shape in cross section at the upper corner portion of the end portion on the opposite side of the shaft portion 1320 in the ascending posture (open state).

The plate portion 1310 is formed to be long in the left-right direction, and has a length that allows up to five balls to be placed side by side.

The loaded portion 1330 includes an arc-shaped ball entry prevention portion 1331 extending to the front side of the rolling surface 1311, an intervening transmission portion 1332 extending to the back side of the rolling surface 1311, and an intervening transmission portion thereof. It mainly includes an engaging portion 1333 that protrudes from the 1332 on the right side when viewed from the rear (the side on which the power transmission member 1400 is arranged).

The engaging portion 1333 is provided with a chamfered portion 1333a that extends to a position that interferes with the operation locus of the power transmission member 1400 and is chamfered in an arc shape on the upper surface portion. At the time of contact with the power transmission member 1400, the chamfered portion 1333a, not the corner portion, contacts the power transmission member 1400, so that stress concentration at the time of contact between the engaging portion 1333 and the power transmission member 1400 can be avoided. ..

The power transmission member 1400 mainly includes a disk-shaped main body portion 1410 and an extension portion 1420 extending in the axial direction from the main body portion 1410.

The main body portion 1410 mainly includes a support hole 1411 through which the shaft portion 1161 is inserted, and a projecting pin 1412 projecting from the vicinity of the outer peripheral portion in parallel with the drilling direction of the support hole 1411.

The protrusion pin 1412 is a portion that engages with the tip member 1520 of the drive device 1500, and as the tip member 1520 operates linearly due to switching of excitation of the drive device 1500, the protrusion pin 1412 is displaced to transmit power. The member 1400 rotates.

The extension portion 1420 includes a rotation tip portion 1421 formed in an arc shape coaxial with the center of the support hole 1411 at the extension tip portion, and a push-in portion 1422 projecting from the rotation tip portion 1421 to the front side. To be equipped.

The drive device 1500 includes a solenoid 1510 that linearly operates a movable member by switching excitation, and a front view H-shaped (a shape having recesses at the top and bottom) tip member 1520 arranged at the tip of the movable member of the solenoid 1510. , Is mainly provided.

The tip member 1520 has a recess on the upper side that can accommodate the projecting pin 1412 of the power transmission member 1400. Specifically, a recess is formed in a shape that keeps the protrusion pin 1412 inside during the rotational operation of the power transmission member 1400 (see FIG. 20).

The regulating member 1600 includes a rod-shaped shaft portion 1610 pivotally supported by the support claw portion 1170, an extension portion 1620 extending in the radial direction of the shaft portion 1610 with a thickness equivalent to the diameter of the shaft portion 1610, and a main body. A surface on the member 1100 side is mainly provided with an extension portion 1620 and a ball receiving portion 1630 having a thickness larger than that of the extension portion 1620.

The extension portion 1620 is arranged on the movement locus of the intervening transmission unit 1332 of the opening / closing plate 1300, and receives a pressing load from the intervening transmission unit 1332 when the opening / closing plate is in the ascending posture (open state).

The ball receiving portion 1630 is in a tilted posture (a posture in which the end opposite to the shaft portion 1610 is arranged at a lower position, a storage state) and overlaps with the discharge port 1150 (the ball discharges the opening of the discharge port 1150). It is formed in a mode that is narrowed to the extent that it is not.

The regulating member 1600 is urged by a torsion spring (not shown) in a direction of maintaining an ascending posture (a posture in which the end opposite to the shaft portion 1610 is arranged at an upper position, a discharge state).

The rear cover 1700 includes a discharge port 1710 which is a through hole through which a ball discharged from the discharge port 1150 passes. The balls discharged from the discharge port 1710 are guided to a ball discharge path (not shown).

The closed state of the opening / closing plate 1300 will be described with reference to FIGS. 8 and 9. FIG. 8 is a front view of the first variable winning device 1000, and FIG. 9 is a cross-sectional view of the first variable winning device 1000 on the IX-IX line of FIG. In addition, in FIGS. 8 and 9, the opening / closing plate 1300 is closed, and in FIG. 8, the thin plate member 1210 of the lining front plate 1200 is partially torn and shown.

As shown in FIGS. 8 and 9, when the opening / closing plate 1300 is closed, the plate portion 1310 of the opening / closing plate 1300 is housed in the rectangular recess 1122, so that the thin plate member 1110 of the main body member 1100 is covered. The opening / closing plate 1300 can be aligned with the thin plate member 1110 of the main body member 1100 without narrowing the distance between the front plate 1200 and the thin plate member 1210. Since the thin plate member 1110 of the main body member 1100 and the thin plate member 1210 of the lining front plate 1200 are arranged side by side at intervals through which spheres can pass, the thin plate members 1110 and 1210 of the thin plate members 1110 and 1210 are in the state shown in FIGS. 8 and 9. By guiding the sphere between them, the sphere can be dropped along the flow path forming portion.

Further, as shown in FIG. 9, when the opening / closing plate 1300 is closed, the ball entry prevention portion 1331 of the loaded portion 1330 partially covers the opening of the detection sensor 1240 on the front side of the main body member 1100. Overhang. Therefore, it is possible to physically prevent the ball from passing through the detection sensor 1240, and an irregular prize (for example, even if the ball hits the nail or the like is blown laterally without being guided by the opening / closing plate 1300, the detection sensor (Passing through 1240) can be prevented.

Although the details will be described later, since the regulation member 1600 is in the discharge state when the opening / closing plate 1300 is closed, the ball is discharged from the storage flow path 1231. Therefore, FIG. 8 illustrates a state in which the spheres are not stored in the storage flow path 1231.

The open state of the opening / closing plate 1300 will be described with reference to FIGS. 10 and 11. 10 is a front view of the first variable winning device 1000, and FIG. 11 is a cross-sectional view of the first variable winning device 1000 on the XI-XI line of FIG. In addition, in FIGS. 10 and 11, the opening / closing plate 1300 is opened, and in FIG. 10, the thin plate member 1210 of the lining front plate 1200 is partially broken and shown. Further, in FIG. 11, the outer shape of the sphere is illustrated by an imaginary line in order to grasp the size of the sphere.

As shown in FIGS. 10 and 11, when the opening / closing plate 1300 is opened, the plate portion 1310 of the opening / closing plate 1300 projects to the front side, and the distance between the plate portion 1310 and the thin plate member 1210 is less than the diameter of the sphere. By doing so, it is possible to prevent the ball guided between the thin plate member 1110 of the main body member 1100 and the thin plate member 1210 of the lining front plate 1200 from falling.

The ball guided between the thin plate member 1110 of the main body member 1100 and the thin plate member 1210 of the lining front plate 1200 rolls on the rolling surface 1311 of the opening / closing plate 1300 along the inclination, and the detection sensor 1240 from the right end thereof. And enters the storage flow path 1231.

In the open state of the opening / closing plate 1300, a gap shorter than the radius of the sphere is provided between the plate portion 1310 and the lining front plate 1200. Therefore, the required material can be reduced and the material cost required for the opening / closing plate 1300 can be reduced as compared with the case where the plate portion 1310 is extended to the extent that it comes into contact with the lining front plate 1200.

Further, by reducing the diameter of the movement locus of the tip of the opening / closing plate 1300 in the lateral direction, it is easy to prevent the ball passing in front of the opening / closing plate 1300 from interfering with the opening / closing plate 1300 when the opening / closing plate 1300 rotates. be able to.

Here, although details will be described later, since the regulating member 1600 is in the storage state when the opening / closing plate 1300 is open, the spheres are not discharged from the storage flow path 1231 and the spheres that have passed through the detection sensor 1240 are the storage flow paths. It is stored in. Therefore, FIG. 10 illustrates a state in which spheres are stored in the storage flow path 1231.

As shown in FIG. 10, the storage flow path 1231 of the present embodiment is formed with a length capable of storing spheres up to a predetermined number (10 in the present embodiment). When 10 spheres are stored in the storage flow path 1231, the 10th sphere stops at a position detected by the detection sensor 1240.

Therefore, the tenth ball becomes a plug, and the eleventh ball is prevented from passing through the detection sensor 1240. In other words, the resistance when the eleventh sphere tries to pass through the detection sensor 1240 becomes extremely large, and the eleventh sphere can be made difficult to enter the detection sensor 1240.

In the present embodiment, when the 10th ball is detected by the detection sensor 1240, the opening / closing plate 1300 is switched to the closed state, so that the balls remaining on the opening / closing plate 1300 flow down below the opening / closing plate 1300. Then, as the opening / closing plate 1300 operates, the regulating member 1600 is switched to the discharge state, so that the balls stored in the storage flow path 1231 are discharged.

Here, as shown in FIG. 10, in a state where the spheres are not discharged from the storage flow path 1231, the tenth sphere is detected by the detection sensor 1240, but stops at a position where it does not pass through the detection sensor 1240. To do.

When the 10th ball is detected by the detection sensor 1240, the opening / closing plate 1300 is switched to the closed state, but during the switching, the 10th ball is stored while receiving a load from the ball entry prevention unit 1331. It is pushed into the road 1231 (see FIG. 21B). That is, when the opening / closing plate 1300 is in the open state, the tenth ball stops in a manner of closing the opening of the detection sensor 1240, and while the opening / closing plate 1300 is switching to the closed state, the ball entry prevention unit 1331 is the tenth. Since the opening of the detection sensor 1240 is closed while abutting (rubbing) the ball, the timing at which the tenth ball passes through the detection sensor 1240 and the timing at which the ball entry prevention unit 1331 operates are different. It is possible to prevent a moment when the opening of the detection sensor 1240 is opened, and it is possible to prevent the eleventh ball from passing through the first specific winning opening 1000a.

Therefore, it is not necessary to set a limit on the period from the detection of the specified number of balls by the detection sensor 1240 to the change of the opening / closing plate 1300 to the closed state, and it can be set arbitrarily. For example, the opening / closing operation may be started 0.2 msec after the detection, or the opening / closing operation may be started 1 second after the detection. In the present embodiment, after waiting until the 10th ball comes into contact with the 9th ball (after the center of the ball is arranged on the detection sensor 1240 side beyond the front side of the ball entry prevention unit 1331). ) In order to operate the opening / closing plate 1300, the opening / closing plate 1300 is controlled to open / close 0.5 seconds after being detected by the detection sensor 1240.

According to the operation mode of the opening / closing plate 1300 described above, in the present embodiment, the number of spheres passing through the detection sensor 1240 can be limited to 10 while the opening / closing plate 1300 forms the open state. In this embodiment, prevention (delay) of ball entry can be performed only on the eleventh ball. That is, in the first to tenth balls, it is possible to pass through the detection sensor 1240 at high speed. This leads to an increase in the progress speed of the special gaming state as compared with the case where the passage of the ball is delayed in the whole ball.

For example, in the case of a structure in which a ball that has passed through the detection sensor 1240 is decelerated once at the passing position to delay the winning of the subsequent ball, it is easy to suppress the winning of the eleventh ball, while the first ball. The time until the 10th ball passes through the detection sensor 1240 because each of the 10th balls from the 10th ball decelerates even when the balls are partially connected and rolled on the rolling surface 1311. There was a problem that the game became longer and the game was delayed.

On the other hand, in the present embodiment, the configuration for decelerating the 1st to 10th balls is not adopted, and only the 11th ball is not allowed to enter the detection sensor 1240. Therefore, the 1st to 10th balls are Even if the balls flow down in a row, the detection sensor 1240 can be passed at the flow speed, so that the speed of the game can be increased.

In addition, even if most of the period during which the opening / closing plate 1300 is opened due to repairs such as ball clogging has passed and the game is started at the end of that period, there is no ball entering the detection sensor 1240. Since it does not slow down in a meaningful way, more balls can be entered.

Further, regarding the eleventh ball, no matter how fast (at a speed at which the opening / closing plate 1300 can reach the detection sensor 1240 before the tilting operation starts), the ball flows down toward the detection sensor 1240, regardless of the speed. , The 11th ball can be physically prevented from passing through the detection sensor 1240 by the 10th ball.

The arrangement of the spheres staying in the storage flow path 1231 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 12 is a cross-sectional view of the first variable winning device 1000 in line XII-XII of FIG. In FIG. 12, a sphere stored in the storage flow path 1231 is shown.

Here, a mechanism will be described in which the spheres stored in the storage flow path 1231 are arranged in the same manner each time. First, the sphere P1 that first entered the empty storage flow path 1231 is guided by the guide surface 1231a that inclines backward at the lowermost portion of the storage flow path 1231, and is arranged at a position that abuts on the front surface of the regulation member 1600. To.

The sphere P1 is weighted by the subsequent sphere P2 reaching the lower end, and settles in the arrangement shown in FIG. The sphere P2 has a degree of freedom in arrangement in the front-rear direction on the right side of the sphere P1 when viewed from the front (right side in FIG. 12). That is, depending on the degree of tilting in the front-rear direction when the pachinko machine 10 is arranged, it may be closer to the lining front plate 1200 side, or it may be closer to the projecting portion 1140 of the main body member 1100. As shown in FIG. 12, since the projecting portion 1140 is arranged at a position where the projecting tip of the projecting portion 1140 abuts on the sphere P2, the sphere P2 is a main body member in a state of being in contact with the sphere P1. It does not come into contact with the thin plate member 1110 of 1100.

The sphere P2 is weighted by reaching a position where the subsequently entered sphere P3 abuts on the sphere P2. Here, in the present embodiment, the projecting portion 1235 arranged on the lining front plate 1200 has the ball P2 and the projecting portion 1235 on the right side of the projecting portion 1235 regardless of the position of the ball P2 in the front-rear direction. The sphere P3 enters between the spheres P3 and is arranged at a position where it is impossible to abut the thin plate member 1210 of the concealed front plate 1200 (a position where the gap with the sphere P2 is kept small).

Therefore, regardless of the position of the sphere P2 in the front-rear direction, the center position of the sphere P3 is arranged on the back side of the center position of the sphere P2, and the sphere P3 is on the back side of the sphere P2 (upper side of FIG. 12). ) Will come into contact. Therefore, the load of the sphere P3 causes the sphere P2 to move toward the front side (lower side in FIG. 12). As a result, the sphere P2 settles in the arrangement shown in FIG.

After that, the sphere P3 receives a load from the sphere P4 that subsequently enters under almost the same conditions as the sphere P2 receives the load from the sphere P3 (except that the front-rear direction is reversed), so that the sphere P3 Settles in the arrangement illustrated in FIG.

That is, the arrangement of the nth ball entering the storage flow path 1231 is fixed to a unique position by receiving a load in the front-rear direction from the (n + 1) th ball. Further, in the present embodiment, the arrangement of the spheres is not fixed by narrowing the storage flow path 1231, but while maintaining the cross-sectional area of the storage flow path 1231 larger than the diameter of the sphere, the projecting portion 1140, It is realized by arranging 1235. As a result, the arrangement of the stored balls can be fixed at a unique position while preventing the occurrence of ball clogging.

As described above, in the present embodiment, by arranging the projecting portions 1140 and 1235 at appropriate positions, the spheres are stored in a fixed arrangement each time the action of storing the spheres occurs in the storage flow path 1231. be able to. Therefore, the number of stored items can be unified each time.

With reference to FIG. 13, the discharge of the sphere from the storage flow path 1231 will be described. 13 (a) and 13 (b) are cross-sectional views of the first variable winning device 1000 in line XII-XII of FIG. In FIG. 13A, the sphere P1 is ejected and the sphere P2 is on the rolling surface 1231b. In FIG. 13B, the sphere P2 is ejected and the sphere P3 is the position of the sphere P2 in FIG. The state of being arranged in is illustrated.

As will be described later, when the excitation of the solenoid 1510 is released and the opening / closing plate 1300 is closed, the regulation member 1600 is discharged and the ball is discharged from the storage flow path 1231. When ejecting a ball. The sphere arranged at the lowermost end (sphere P1 in FIG. 12) is discharged to the back side along the inclination of the rolling surface 1231b, and the following sphere (sphere P2 in FIG. 12) flows into the space created thereby. The balls are ejected in order.

Here, since the inclination angle of the rolling surface 1231b with respect to the horizontal plane is larger than the inclination angle of the extension portion (flow path extending in the left-right direction) of the storage flow path 1231 with respect to the horizontal plane, the flow velocity of the sphere P1 is increased. Since the flow velocity of the sphere P2 is higher than that of the sphere P2, a gap is formed between the sphere P1 and the sphere P2 (see FIG. 13A). Therefore, since the load applied from the sphere P2 to the sphere P1 at the time of discharging the sphere P1 can be minimized, the velocity at the time of discharging the sphere P1 is uniform regardless of the number of spheres stored after the sphere P1. Can be transformed into.

After the sphere P1 is discharged, the subsequent spheres P2, P3, and P4 flow down to the downstream side (left side in FIG. 12) along the inclination of the extended portion of the storage flow path 1231. Here, the sphere P2 smoothly reaches the guide surface 1231a and rides on the rolling surface 1231b, while the spheres P3 and P4 come into contact with the projecting portions 1140 and 1235 in the process of flowing down (see FIG. 13A). By this contact, the spheres P3 and P4 are turned toward the directions DP3 and DP4 having the front-back direction component, pass through the positions of the spheres P2 and P3 which are led respectively, and decelerate.

In other words, the balls P3 and P4 are rearranged in the direction orthogonal to the extension direction of the storage flow path 1231 by abutting on the projecting portions 1140 and 1235, and the previously stored balls are stopped. It will be relocated to the position where it was, and will decelerate.

As a result, a gap is created between the sphere P2 and the sphere P3 (see FIG. 13B), and the load applied from the sphere P3 to the sphere P2 when the sphere P2 is ejected can be minimized. , The speed at the time of discharging the sphere P2 can be made uniform regardless of the number of spheres stored after the sphere P2.

That is, since the subsequent spheres flow down the storage flow path 1231 for a longer distance, the method of accelerating the following spheres due to gravity changes as the number of stored spheres increases, and the discharge mode of the spheres P2 (velocity at the time of discharge, There is a possibility that the discharge interval between the ball P1 and the like) will change, but the change in the discharge mode will be caused by the action of the above-mentioned protrusions 1140 and 1235 (the ball discharged on the rolling surface 1231b and its successor). It can be suppressed by the action of leaving a gap between the ball and the ball and eliminating the load due to gravity).

After that, the subsequent spheres repeatedly flow down from the arrangement shown in FIG. 13A to the arrangement shown in FIG. 13B, so that the spheres are discharged from the storage flow path 1231. As described above, by creating a gap between the ball ejected by rolling on the rolling surface 1231b and the subsequent ball, the ejected ball is ejected without receiving the weight of the succeeding ball. Therefore, it is possible to make the discharge mode (speed at the time of discharge, discharge interval, etc.) uniform regardless of the number of balls stored in the storage flow path 1231.

In other words, in the present embodiment, the projecting portions 1140 and 1235 can make the discharge mode of the sphere (speed at the time of discharge, discharge interval, etc.) uniform. In the present embodiment, it takes about 0.2 seconds for one ball to be discharged. Therefore, by maintaining the regulating member 1600 in the discharged state for 2 seconds or longer, all the maximum number (10) balls that can be stored in the storage flow path 1231 can be discharged.

14 is a rear perspective view of the first variable winning device 1000, FIG. 15 is a rear view of the first variable winning device 1000, and FIG. 16 is a first variable winning device on the XVI-XVI line of FIG. It is a cross-sectional view of 1000. In addition, in FIGS. 14 to 16, the closed state of the opening / closing plate 1300 is shown, and the rear cover 1700 is not shown.

As shown in FIGS. 14 and 15, when the opening / closing plate 1300 is in the closed state, the solenoid 1510 is in the non-excited state, and the rotating tip portion 1421 of the power transmission member 1400 is above the engaging portion 1333 of the opening / closing plate 1300. They are placed apart.

Since the intervening transmission portion 1332 of the opening / closing plate 1300 is arranged on the upper side and separated from the regulating member 1600, the regulating member 1600 is not loaded from the intervening transmitting portion 1332, and the regulating member 1600 is a torsion spring (not shown). It is maintained in the discharged state by the urging force.

Further, as shown in FIG. 16, in the closed state of the opening / closing plate 1300, the ball entry prevention unit 1331 projects so that the size of the opening of the detection sensor 1240 is equal to or less than the projected area of the ball. This makes it possible to physically prevent the sphere from passing through the detection sensor 1240.

17 is a rear perspective view of the first variable winning device 1000, FIG. 18 is a rear view of the first variable winning device 1000, and FIG. 19 is a first variable winning device in the XIX-XIX line of FIG. It is a cross-sectional view of 1000. In addition, in FIGS. 17 to 19, the open state of the opening / closing plate 1300 is shown, and the rear cover 1700 is not shown.

As shown in FIGS. 17 and 18, when the opening / closing plate 1300 is in the open state, the solenoid 1510 is in the excited state, and the rotating tip portion 1421 of the power transmission member 1400 is displaced counterclockwise, so that the opening / closing plate 1300 The engaging portion 1333 is pushed into the pushing portion 1422.

The intervening transmission unit 1332 of the opening / closing plate 1300 is arranged on the lower side as the power transmission member 1400 rotates, and in this state, the extension portion 1620 of the regulation member 1600 receives a load from the intervening transmission unit 1332, and the posture of the regulation member 1600. Is switched to a tilted posture (regulatory member 1600 is switched to a stored state).

In the open state of the opening / closing plate 1300, the regulating member 1600 is given a load due to the driving force of the solenoid 1510 and an urging force of a torsion spring (not shown). In the present embodiment, the urging force of the torsion spring is applied. A structure is adopted that can suppress the driving force of the solenoid 1510 when the opening / closing plate 1300 is maintained in the open state while maintaining a large size. The large urging force of the torsion spring leads to the effect that the regulating member 1600 can be immediately switched to the discharge state, whereby the ball can be quickly discharged from the storage flow path 1231. The adopted structure will be described below.

In the present embodiment, the engaging portion 1333 of the opening / closing plate 1300 is arranged on the operation locus E1 of the power transmission member 1400 when the opening / closing plate 1300 starts operating from the closed state, while the opening / closing plate 1300 is in the open state. When switched to, the power transmission member 1400 is pushed outward along the rotation axis direction of the operation locus E1. The operation locus E1 is shown as an outer shape of the movement locus of the portion including the pushing portion 1422 (see FIG. 6).

Therefore, the load transmitted from the opening / closing plate 1300 to the power transmission member 1400 after the opening / closing plate 1300 is switched to the open state is not the operating direction (rotational direction) of the power transmitting member 1400, but the surface forming the rotation direction thereof. Is hung in the axial direction, which is the vertical direction. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the load around the shaft portion 1320 applied to the opening / closing plate 1300 from being transmitted to the solenoid 1510 via the power transmission member 1400.

That is, the urging force of the torsion spring (not shown) that urges the regulating member 1600 tends to push the opening / closing plate 1300 back toward the closed state, but this urging force is the power no matter how large the urging force is. It is not applied to the solenoid 1510 via the transmission member 1400.

As a result, once the opening / closing plate 1300 is switched to the open state, it is possible to prevent the driving force of the solenoid 1510 for maintaining the opening / closing plate 1300 in the open state from fluctuating due to the load applied to the opening / closing plate 1300. Therefore, it is not necessary to keep applying the voltage applied to the solenoid 1510 to the switching plate 1300 at the maximum value.

That is, after exciting the solenoid 1510 so as to generate a driving force sufficient to switch the regulating member 1600 to the stored state against the urging force of the torsion spring (not shown) at the start of operation, the applied voltage was lowered. Even so, the opening / closing plate 1300 can be maintained in the open state.

Therefore, even if a fluctuating load is applied to the opening / closing plate 1300 and the regulating member 1600, the opening / closing plate 1300 can be maintained in the open state and the regulating member 1600 can be maintained in the stored state without being affected by the load.

As the fluctuating load applied to the opening / closing plate 1300 and the regulating member 1600, a load given by the weight of the sphere is exemplified. That is, for example, since the opening / closing plate 1300 has a configuration in which a ball lands on the rolling surface 1311, when the sphere lands, it receives a load due to the weight of the sphere, and the number of the spheres changes frequently. The 1300 is given a fluctuating load. Further, for example, the regulation member 1600 is loaded with or without a sphere stored in the storage flow path 1231, particularly a sphere arranged at the lowermost end of the storage flow path 1231. And, a fluctuating load is given.

As described above in FIGS. 14 to 19, since the opening / closing plate 1300 and the regulating member 1600 are interlocked with each other, the regulating member 1600 cannot be discharged while maintaining the open state of the opening / closing plate 1300. Therefore, even if the opening / closing plate 1300 is illegally maintained in the open state, it is physically possible that more spheres (10 or more spheres in the present embodiment) that can be stored in the storage flow path 1231 pass through the detection sensor 1240. Can be prevented. As a result, it is possible to prevent fraudulently maintaining the opening / closing plate 1300 in the open state and increasing the number of prize balls to be acquired.

20 and 21 show the operation of the opening / closing plate 1300 and the regulating member 1600 in chronological order. 20 (a) is a rear view of the first variable winning device 1000, and FIG. 20 (b) is a cross-sectional view of the first variable winning device 1000 in line XXb-XXb of FIG. 20 (a). 20 (c) is a rear view of the first variable winning device 1000, FIG. 21 (a) is a rear view of the first variable winning device 1000, and FIG. 21 (b) is a rear view of FIG. 21 (a). FIG. 21 (c) is a rear view of the first variable winning device 1000, FIG. 21 (c) is a rear view of the first variable winning device 1000, and FIG. 21 (d) is a cross-sectional view of the first variable winning device 1000 in the line XXIb-XXIb. FIG. 5 is a cross-sectional view of the first variable winning apparatus 1000 on the −XXId line.

In addition, in FIGS. 20 and 21, only the opening / closing plate 1300, the power transmission member 1400, the tip member 1520 of the drive device 1500, and the regulation member 1600 maintain the arrangement in the assembled state (see FIG. 5) for easy understanding. In addition to omitting the illustration of other configurations, the state of the opening / closing plate 1300 changing from the open state to the closed state is illustrated in chronological order.

That is, in FIGS. 20A and 20B, the state in which the tip member 1520 of the drive device 1500 is arranged at a position separated by the first distance h1 from the reference line O1 (the state in which the solenoid 1510 is not excited) is 20 (c), 21 (a) and 21 (b) show a state in which the tip member 1520 is displaced and is arranged at a position separated from the reference line O1 by a second distance h2 shorter than the first distance h1. ), The tip member 1520 is displaced and arranged at a position separated from the reference line O1 by a third distance h3, which is shorter than the second distance h2. In FIGS. 21 (c) and 21 (d), the tip member is arranged. The states in which the 1520 is displaced and arranged at a position separated from the reference line O1 by a fourth distance h4, which is shorter than the third distance h3 (the final arrival position when the solenoid 1510 is excited) are shown in the drawings.

In FIG. 21B, the first specific winning opening 1000a arranged on the front side is illustrated by an imaginary line for reference, and the outer shape of the cross section of the sphere in the same cross section as the cross section used in the illustration is illustrated by the imaginary line. Illustrated. That is, in the state shown in FIG. 10, the opening / closing plate 1300 can rotate to the state shown in FIG. 21B without interfering with the sphere.

From the state shown in FIG. 20A to the state shown in FIG. 20C, the power transmission member 1400 rotates, but the opening / closing plate 1300 maintains the same posture. In addition, in FIG. 20C, the rotating tip portion 1421 of the power transmission member 1400 and the engaging portion 1333 of the opening / closing plate 1300 come into contact with each other.

As a result, the power transmission member 1400 can be given momentum before the opening / closing plate 1300 is operated from the closed state to the open state. Therefore, compared with the case where the opening / closing plate 1300 is started to rotate at the same time as the rotation of the power transmission member 1400 is started. As a result, the driving force required at the start of rotation (initial movement) can be reduced, and the operating speed of the opening / closing plate 1300 can be increased.

From the state shown in FIG. 20 (c) to the state shown in FIG. 21 (a), the regulating member 1600 maintains the discharged state, while the opening / closing plate 1300 operates from the closed state, and the closed state and the open state are obtained. It is an intermediate state between them (see FIG. 21 (b)).

In the intermediate state of the opening / closing plate 1300 shown in FIG. 21B, when the plate portion 1310 projects toward the front side and the ball flows down to the front side (right side of FIG. 21B) of the opening / closing plate 1300. , The ball can be received by the rolling surface 1311 of the plate portion 1310. In this case, the weight of the sphere acts in the direction of pushing down the rolling surface 1311 (clockwise in FIG. 21B), but the tip member 1520 moves to the right in the rear view (toward the right in FIG. 21A) to transmit power. Since the load in the opposite direction (counterclockwise in FIG. 21B) is applied to the engaging portion 1333 via the member 1400, it is possible to prevent the opening / closing plate 1300 from rotating due to the weight of the sphere.

Therefore, in the intermediate state of the opening / closing plate 1300 shown in FIG. 21B, it is possible to prevent the ball from passing downward through the front side of the opening / closing plate 1300 while enabling the ball to be discharged from the discharge port 1150. ..

As a result, there is a problem of maintaining the regulating member 1600 in the discharged state during the time required for discharging the ball from the storage flow path 1231, and a problem of shortening the closed state of the opening / closing plate 1300 (shortening the interval), which contradicts the problem. By extending the plate portion 1310 to an intermediate position and sandwiching the ball between the rolling surface 1311 and the lining front plate 1200 while maintaining the discharge of the ball in the state shown in FIG. 21 (a). , Can be achieved together.

At the same time, in the state shown in FIG. 21B, the opening / closing plate 1300 is in a posture of preventing the ball from entering the detection sensor 1240 while preventing the ball from passing downward. That is, in the state shown in FIG. 21 (b), the rolling surface 1311 is located at a position separated below the bottom surface of the opening of the detection sensor 1240. Therefore, in the state shown in FIG. 21 (b), the rolling surface 1311 It is possible to prevent the ball on the vehicle from passing through the detection sensor 1240 as it is. As a result, it is possible to prevent the ball from passing through the detection sensor 1240 when the regulating member 1600 is in the discharged state, and it is possible to effectively maintain the function of limiting the number of winning balls by the first variable winning device 1000. ..

As shown in FIG. 21D, at the same time that the opening / closing plate 1300 is switched to the open state, the regulating member 1600 is switched to the stored state. Further, as shown in FIGS. 20 and 21, the opening / closing plate 1300 and the regulating member 1600 are interlocked by the operation of the tip member 1520 of the drive device 1500. That is, the driving force of the solenoid 1510 (see FIG. 6) of the driving device 1500 can also be used as the driving force of the opening / closing plate 1300 and the regulating member 1600.

20 and 21 have described the case where the opening / closing plate 1300 is switched from the closed state to the open state, but when the opening / closing plate 1300 is switched from the open state to the closed state, it can be grasped by going back to FIGS. 20 and 21. can do.

When switching from the open state to the closed state, the state is first changed from the state shown in FIG. 21 (d) to the state shown in FIG. 21 (b). Here, since the loaded portion 1330 of the opening / closing plate 1300 is arranged in the operating direction of the regulating member 1600, the regulating member 1600 does not move more than the moving amount of the loaded portion 1330.

That is, since the regulation member 1600 is switched to the discharge state after the opening / closing plate 1300 operates, it is impossible for the opening / closing plate 1300 to maintain the open state after the regulation member 1600 is switched to the discharge state. Can be done. Thereby, for example, it is possible to prevent an irregular winning of the ball passing through the detection sensor 1240 at a timing slightly after the ball starts to be discharged.

Further, in the state shown in FIG. 21B, it seems that the ball can enter the detection sensor 1240 as long as the opening of the detection sensor 1240 is still opened and the ball comes into contact with the rolling surface 1311 and bounces. , In this embodiment, it can be made impossible.

That is, when the state shown in FIG. 21B is viewed as a state in which the opening / closing plate 1300 is in the process of being changed from the open state to the closed state, the rotating tip portion 1421 of the power transmission member 1400 moves up, so that the rolling surface 1311 When the spheres come into contact with each other, no load is generated to support the opening / closing plate 1300 that works in the direction opposite to the weight direction of the spheres. Therefore, when the ball comes into contact with the rolling surface 1311, the plate portion 1310 moves downward due to the weight of the ball, so that the ball cannot be bounced to the detection sensor 1240. As a result, it is possible to prevent irregular prizes from occurring.

The contents of ROM 202 (see FIG. 4) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 22 (a) is a block diagram showing the electrical configuration of the ROM 202 in the main control device 110, and FIG. 22 (b) schematically illustrates the correspondence between the first hit type counter C2 and the jackpot type in the special symbol. FIG. 22 (c) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the correspondence between the second hit random number counter C4 and the hit in the ordinary symbol.

As shown in FIG. 22A, the ROM 202 of the main control device 110 has a random number table 202a per first, a type selection table 202b per first, and a random number table 202c per second as part of the fixed value data described above. , And the variation pattern selection table 202d is stored at least.

The first hit random number table 202a is a data table in which the jackpot determination value of the first hit random number counter, which is updated periodically (for example, every 2 msec), is stored. When the value of the first random number counter acquired based on the starting prize matches any of the determination values specified in the first random number table 202a, it is determined that the special symbol is a big hit.

The first hit type selection table 202b (see FIG. 22B) is a data table in which judgment values for determining the jackpot type are stored, and the judgment value of the first hit type counter C2 is each jackpot type. , And the type of entrance that triggered the lottery of special symbols. In the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, when it is determined that the special symbol is a big hit, the value of the first hit type counter C2 acquired based on the start winning prize is compared with the first hit type selection table 202b, and the first hit type selection table 202b is compared. The jackpot type corresponding to the value of the hit type counter C2 is selected.

Specifically, when a big hit is obtained in the lottery of the special symbol 1 (lottery based on the entry into the first entry slot 64), the value of the first hit type counter C2 is in the range of "0 to 19". Is defined in association with the jackpot A (see 202b1 in FIG. 22B).

When the jackpot A is obtained, the jackpot game of 15 rounds is executed in the first operation pattern of the first variable winning device 1000. In this case, the player can receive a payout of about 2250 prize balls.

The jackpot B is associated with the range in which the value of the first hit type counter C2 is "20 to 49" (see 202b2 in FIG. 22B).

When the jackpot B is obtained, the jackpot game of 8 rounds is executed in the first operation pattern of the first variable winning device 1000. In this case, the player can receive a payout of about 1200 prize balls.

The jackpot C is associated with the range in which the value of the first hit type counter C2 is "50 to 99" (see 202b3 in FIG. 22B).

When the jackpot C is obtained, the jackpot game of four rounds is executed in the first operation pattern of the first variable winning device 1000. In this case, the player can receive a payout of about 600 prize balls.

As described above, when a big hit is obtained in the lottery of the special symbol 1 (lottery based on the entry into the first entry slot 64), the first variable winning device 1000 has the first operation pattern in any case. Works with. Therefore, the difference in the number of prize balls paid out by the player appears as a difference depending on the number of rounds, and as the number of rounds increases, the number of prize balls paid out increases and the time required for the jackpot game also increases.

In the jackpot based on the special symbol 1 lottery (lottery based on entering the first ball opening 64), there is a 20% chance of winning a 15-round jackpot, while a 50% chance of winning a 4-round jackpot. So basically, you can't expect a lot of prize balls. On the other hand, since the 4-round jackpot game is completed in a shorter time than the 15-round jackpot game, it is possible to start launching the ball for the subsequent jackpot acquisition at an early stage.

On the other hand, when a big hit is obtained in the lottery of the special symbol 2 (lottery based on the entry into the second entrance 640), the value of the first hit type counter C2 is in the range of "0 to 79". The jackpot a is associated and defined (see 202b4 in FIG. 22B).

When the jackpot a is reached, the jackpot game of 15 rounds is executed in the first operation pattern of the first variable winning device 1000, as in the case of the jackpot A. In this case, the player can receive a payout of about 2250 prize balls.

A jackpot b is associated with a range in which the value of the first hit type counter C2 is "80 to 89" (see 202b5 in FIG. 22B).

When the jackpot b is reached, the jackpot game of 15 rounds is executed in the second operation pattern (details will be described later) of the first variable winning device 1000. In this case, the number of prize balls paid out to the player is inevitably less than 2250 (1200 in the present embodiment), and the time required for the jackpot game exceeds the case of jackpot a.

The jackpot c is associated with the range in which the value of the first hit type counter C2 is "90 to 99" (see 202b6 in FIG. 22B).

When the jackpot c is reached, the jackpot game of 15 rounds is executed in the third operation pattern (details will be described later) of the first variable winning device 1000. In this case, the number of prize balls paid out to the player is inevitably less than 2250 (1875 in the present embodiment), and the time required for the big hit game exceeds the case of big hit a, and the prize is paid out for each round. The time required for a ball or jackpot game fluctuates.

As described above, when a big hit is obtained in the lottery of the special symbol 2 (lottery based on the entry into the second entrance 640), the operation pattern of the first variable winning device 1000 changes according to the big hit type. Due to this difference in the operation pattern, the number of jackpot rounds can be kept unchanged, while the time required for the jackpot game can be changed while making a difference in the number of payouts. In the present embodiment, when the number of payouts is small (big hit b and big hit c), the time required for the big hit game can be lengthened as compared with the case where the number of payouts is large (big hit a). That is, when a jackpot (big hit b and jackpot c) with a small number of payouts is acquired, the timing of launching the ball aiming at the next jackpot is delayed as compared with the case of the jackpot a.

Therefore, in addition to providing a difference in the number of prize balls, by forcibly prolonging the time required for the jackpot game, the profit per unit time (time efficiency) that the player can obtain by the jackpot game due to the difference in the jackpot type can be obtained. There can be a difference in the number of payouts including).

As a result, the breakdown of the jackpot in the special symbol 2 lottery (lottery based on the entry into the second entrance 640) includes a jackpot (big hit a) that allows a large amount of time-efficient payout and a time-efficient payout. It is possible to provide a small number of big hits (big hit b, big hit c), and it is possible to increase the profit of the player obtained when the big hit a is obtained. As a result, the difference in the number of payouts (the maximum value of the total number of acquired balls and the minimum value of the total number of acquired balls) when the game is continuously played for a predetermined time while maintaining a large probability of winning the jackpot a. It is possible to configure a game machine capable of increasing the difference).

As described above, during the probability change of the special symbol, the hit probability of the normal symbol is increased, the fluctuation time of the normal symbol is shortened (3 seconds), and the opening time of the electric accessory 640a when the normal symbol is hit is increased. It is set to be longer (1 second x 2 times). Therefore, it becomes easy to put the ball into the second entrance 640, and it becomes easy to draw the special symbol 2. Therefore, once it is possible to shift to the probabilistic state of the special symbol, the probabilistic state of the special symbol, which is likely to be a big hit of the special symbol and is likely to be a big hit a (big hit of the maximum ball) when it becomes a big hit, is repeated. Since it becomes easier, it becomes easier for the player to win a large number of prize balls. As a result, it is possible to make the player play the game while strongly expecting the player to shift to the probabilistic state of the special symbol, so that the player's interest in the game can be improved.

The second hit random number table 202c (see FIG. 22C) is a data table in which the hit determination value of the normal symbol is stored. Specifically, "5-28" is defined as a determination value for hitting the normal symbol in the normal state of the normal symbol (see 202c1 in FIG. 22 (c)). Further, in the high probability state of the normal symbol, "5-204" is defined as a determination value for hitting the normal symbol (see 202c2 in FIG. 22 (c)). In the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, the value of the second random number counter C4 acquired based on the passage of the ball through the normal entry port 67 and the second random number table 202c are referred to, and the normal symbol is used. It is judged whether or not it is a hit. The variation pattern selection table 202d is a data table in which the determination value of the variation type counter for determining the display mode of the variation pattern is defined for each display mode.

Next, with reference to FIG. 23, the opening pattern of the first specific winning opening 1000a in the present embodiment will be described. FIG. 23 (a) is a diagram showing a time change of the first specific winning opening 1000a in the first operation pattern, and FIG. 23 (b) is a diagram showing the time timing of the first specific winning opening 1000a in the second operation pattern. It is the figure which showed the change, and FIG. 23C is the figure which showed the timekeeping change of the 1st specific winning opening 1000a in the 3rd operation pattern.

When the jackpot is determined in the special figure hit determination, the MPU 201 (see FIG. 4) starts controlling the determined type of jackpot game after the end of the special figure variation display (symbol variation effect). Hereinafter, the operation control of the opening / closing plate 1300 performed when the big hit game is given will be described.

<When operating with the first operation pattern>
When the jackpot type is jackpot A, jackpot B, jackpot C, or jackpot a jackpot game, the MPU 201 drives and controls the solenoid 1510 so that the opening / closing plate 1300 operates based on the first operation pattern. When the special figure variation display (design variation effect) is completed, the MPU 201 sets the solenoid 1510 so that the timer means (not shown) keeps the opening / closing plate 1300 in the closed state until the predetermined opening time OP (10 seconds) elapses. The drive is controlled, and after the opening time OP elapses, the first round game R is started.

That is, the solenoid 1510 is driven and controlled so that the first operating time T1 (maximum 30 seconds) is measured by the timer means and the opening / closing plate 1300 is displaced from the closed state to the open state to open the first specific winning opening 1000a. Then, the opening / closing plate 1300 is allowed to operate for a long time.

Then, in the first round game R, the lapse of the round end condition (round game time (30 seconds, which is the maximum value of the first operating time T1) or the specified number (10 in the present embodiment) of pachinko balls When the winning) is satisfied, the solenoid 1510 is driven and controlled so as to displace the opening / closing plate 1300 to the closed state and close the first specific winning opening 1000a, and the round game R of the first round ends.

When the round game R of the first round is completed, the timer means drives and controls the solenoid 1510 to keep the opening / closing plate 1300 in the closed state until the first interval time Int1 (2.0 seconds) between rounds elapses, and the round After the lapse of the first interval time Int1, the second round game R is started.

The first interval time Int1 between rounds is set as a time during which the number of balls that can be stored in the storage flow path 1231 can be discharged globally. That is, as described above, in the present embodiment, a maximum of 10 balls are stored in the storage flow path 1231, and the balls are discharged at intervals of about 0.2 seconds per one regardless of the number of stored balls. Will be done. Therefore, it takes 2 seconds for the furnishing to eject 10 balls.

In the second round, as in the start of the first round, the first operation time T1 (maximum 30 seconds) is measured by the timer means, and the opening / closing plate 1300 is displaced from the closed state to the open state to specify the first. The solenoid 1510 is driven and controlled so as to open the winning opening 1000a, and the opening / closing plate 1300 is operated for a long time.

Then, when the round end condition (round game time (30 seconds, which is the maximum value of the first operating time T1) elapses or a specified number of pachinko balls are won) is satisfied in the second round game R. The solenoid 1510 is driven and controlled so as to displace the opening / closing plate 1300 to the closed state and close the first specific winning opening 1000a, and the second round game R ends.

In the first operation pattern, it is possible to form a state in which no balls remain inside the storage flow path 1231 at the start of the round game R in each round by discharging the balls in the first interval time Int1 between rounds. Therefore, even after the second round, a specified number (10 in this embodiment) of pachinko balls can be passed through the first specific winning opening 1000a, so that the maximum length of the first operating time T1 of each round can be reached. The round game R can be completed without waiting for (30 seconds). Therefore, the round game R can be rapidly advanced.

After that, similarly, the round game R from the third round to the maximum 15 rounds is repeated with the first interval time Int1 between rounds sandwiched between the round game R, and the opening / closing plate 1300 is between the closed state and the open state. The solenoid 1510 is driven and controlled so as to open and close the first specific winning opening 1000a.

Then, when the round game R of the final round is completed, the solenoid 1510 is driven and controlled so that the timer means keeps the opening / closing plate 1300 in the closed state until the first interval time Int1 between rounds and the ending time ED (11 seconds) elapse. Then, the jackpot game ends with the passage of the time.

<When operating with the second operation pattern>
When the jackpot type is the jackpot game of jackpot b, the MPU 201 drives and controls the solenoid 1510 so that the opening / closing plate 1300 operates based on the second operation pattern. When the special figure variation display (design variation effect) is completed, the MPU 201 sets the solenoid 1510 so that the timer means (not shown) keeps the opening / closing plate 1300 in the closed state until the predetermined opening time OP (10 seconds) elapses. The drive is controlled, and after the opening time OP elapses, the first round game R is started.

That is, the solenoid 1510 is driven and controlled so that the first operating time T1 (maximum 30 seconds) is measured by the timer means and the opening / closing plate 1300 is displaced from the closed state to the open state to open the first specific winning opening 1000a. Then, the opening / closing plate 1300 is allowed to operate for a long time.

Then, in the first round game R, the lapse of the round end condition (round game time (30 seconds, which is the maximum value of the first operating time T1) or the specified number (10 in the present embodiment) of pachinko balls When the winning) is satisfied, the solenoid 1510 is driven and controlled so as to displace the opening / closing plate 1300 to the closed state and close the first specific winning opening 1000a, and the round game R of the first round ends.

When the round game R of the first round is completed, the timer means drives and controls the solenoid 1510 to keep the opening / closing plate 1300 in the closed state until the second interval time Int2 (1.0 seconds) between rounds elapses, and the round After the lapse of the second interval time Int2, the second round game R is started.

The second interval time Int2 between rounds is set as a time during which at least a part of the number of balls that can be stored in the storage flow path 1231 can be discharged. That is, as described above, in the present embodiment, a maximum of 10 balls are stored in the storage flow path 1231, and the balls are discharged at intervals of about 0.2 seconds per one regardless of the number of stored balls. Will be done. Therefore, since the number of balls that can be discharged in one second is 5, for example, when 10 balls are stored in the storage flow path 1231, even if the balls are discharged in the second interval time Int2 between rounds. , 5 spheres will still remain in the storage channel 1231.

In the second round, as in the start of the first round, the first operation time T1 (maximum 30 seconds) is measured by the timer means, and the opening / closing plate 1300 is displaced from the closed state to the open state to specify the first. The solenoid 1510 is driven and controlled so as to open the winning opening 1000a, and the opening / closing plate 1300 is operated for a long time.

Then, when the round end condition (round game time (30 seconds, which is the maximum value of the first operating time T1) elapses or a specified number of pachinko balls are won) is satisfied in the second round game R. The solenoid 1510 is driven and controlled so as to displace the opening / closing plate 1300 to the closed state and close the first specific winning opening 1000a, and the second round game R ends.

In the second operation pattern, the discharge of the ball at the second interval time Int2 between the rounds can form a state in which the ball remains inside the storage flow path 1231 at the start of the round game R in each round. Therefore, in the second and subsequent rounds, a state in which a specified number (10 in this embodiment) of pachinko balls cannot be passed through the first specific winning opening 1000a may occur. In this case, the round game R ends only after the maximum length (30 seconds) of the first operating time T1 of each round has elapsed. Therefore, the progress of the round game R is delayed as compared with the first operation pattern.

After that, similarly, the round games R of the third to fifteenth rounds are repeated with the second interval time Int2 between the rounds sandwiched between the round games R, and the opening / closing plate 1300 is between the closed state and the open state. The solenoid 1510 is driven and controlled so as to be displaced and open / close the first specific winning opening 1000a.

Then, when the round game R of the final round is completed, the solenoid 1510 is driven and controlled so that the timer means keeps the opening / closing plate 1300 in the closed state until the first interval time Int1 between rounds and the ending time ED (11 seconds) elapse. Then, the jackpot game ends with the passage of the time.

Here, in the 15-round jackpot game, the elapsed time and the number of payouts between the first operation pattern and the second operation pattern are compared. The ball can be fired at a minimum interval of 0.6 seconds.

First, when the jackpot game is performed in the first operation pattern, the time required for 10 balls to pass through the first specific winning opening 1000a is 6 seconds at the shortest. When the time required to continue this for 15 rounds, the opening time OP, the first interval time Int1 between rounds, and the ending time RD are added, the time elapsed from the start to the end of the jackpot game is 141 seconds ( = OP (10s) + (T1 (6s) + Int1 (2s)) × 15R + ED (11s)). The number of payouts is 2250 (= 15 × 10C × 15R).

On the other hand, when the jackpot game is performed in the second operation pattern, 10 balls can be won in the first specific winning opening 1000a in the first round, but only 5 balls can be won in the second and subsequent rounds. The time elapsed from the start to the end of the jackpot game is 463 seconds (= OP (10s) + (T1 (6s) + Int2 (1s)) + (T1 (30s) + Int2 (1s)) x 13R + T1 (30s) + Int1 ( 2s) + ED (11s)). In addition, the number of payouts is 1200 (= (10C × 1R + 5C × 14R) × 15) because only 5 balls can be won in the round game R from the second round onward.

Therefore, when the jackpot game is performed in the second operation pattern, it takes more than three times as long as when the jackpot game is performed in the first operation pattern, while the payout ball is reduced to about half, and the time efficiency of the ball ejection acquisition is reduced. Becomes dramatically worse.

As a result, it is possible to improve the interest of the player when the jackpot game is performed in the first operation pattern. That is, it is possible to increase the rarity value of the jackpot A and the jackpot a, improve the attention to the jackpot type notified for each jackpot, and improve the interest in the jackpot game.

The second interval time Int2 between rounds is set to 1.0 second, but the present invention is not limited to this, and various numerical values can be set and can be changed in each round.

For example, the second interval time Int2 between rounds after the end of the first round game R is 0.5 seconds, and the second interval time Int2 between rounds after the end of the second round game R is 1.5 seconds. It is also possible to.

In the round game R immediately after the second interval time Int2 between rounds is set to 0.5 seconds, since only two balls are discharged from the storage flow path 1231, for example, the balls are discharged to the storage flow path 1231 in the previous round. When 10 balls are stored, the round game R is started with 8 balls remaining. Therefore, in the round game R of the round, only two balls can be won in the first specific winning opening 1000a, so that the number of payouts is small (30).

In the round game R immediately after the second interval time Int2 between rounds is set to 1.5 seconds, 7 balls are discharged from the storage flow path 1231. Therefore, for example, 10 balls are discharged from the storage flow path 1231 in the previous round. If the number of balls is stored, the round game R is started with three balls remaining. Therefore, in the round game R of the round, seven balls can be won in the first specific winning opening 1000a, and a certain number (105) can be paid out.

It is also possible to set the length of the second interval time Int2 between rounds to 2.0 seconds (or more time). In this case, since no balls remain in the storage flow path 1231 at the start of the round game R immediately after, and 10 balls can be won in the first specific winning opening 1000a, a large number (150) prizes are awarded. It is possible to hope for a reduction in the progress time of the ball and the round game R.

<When operating with the third operation pattern>
In the case of a jackpot game in which the jackpot type is jackpot c, the MPU 201 drives and controls the solenoid 1510 so that the opening / closing plate 1300 operates based on the third operation pattern. When the special figure variation display (design variation effect) is completed, the MPU 201 sets the solenoid 1510 so that the timer means (not shown) keeps the opening / closing plate 1300 in the closed state until the predetermined opening time OP (10 seconds) elapses. The drive is controlled, and after the opening time OP elapses, the first round game R is started.

That is, the solenoid 1510 is driven and controlled so that the first operating time T1 (maximum 30 seconds) is measured by the timer means and the opening / closing plate 1300 is displaced from the closed state to the open state to open the first specific winning opening 1000a. Then, the opening / closing plate 1300 is allowed to operate for a long time.

Then, in the first round game R, the lapse of the round end condition (round game time (30 seconds, which is the maximum value of the first operating time T1) or the specified number (10 in the present embodiment) of pachinko balls When the winning) is satisfied, the solenoid 1510 is driven and controlled so as to displace the opening / closing plate 1300 to the closed state and close the first specific winning opening 1000a, and the round game R of the first round ends.

When the round game R of the first round is completed, the timer means drives and controls the solenoid 1510 to keep the opening / closing plate 1300 in the closed state until the first interval time Int1 (2.0 seconds) between rounds elapses, and the round After the lapse of the first interval time Int1, the second round game R is started.

In the second round, as in the start of the first round, the first operation time T1 (maximum 30 seconds) is measured by the timer means, and the opening / closing plate 1300 is displaced from the closed state to the open state to specify the first. The solenoid 1510 is driven and controlled so as to open the winning opening 1000a, and the opening / closing plate 1300 is operated for a long time.

Then, when the round end condition (round game time (30 seconds, which is the maximum value of the first operating time T1) elapses or a specified number of pachinko balls are won) is satisfied in the second round game R. The solenoid 1510 is driven and controlled so as to displace the opening / closing plate 1300 to the closed state and close the first specific winning opening 1000a, and the second round game R ends.

Since the discharge of balls in the first interval time Int1 between rounds forms a state in which no balls remain inside the storage flow path 1231 at the start of the second round game R, the specified number of balls are formed even in the second and subsequent rounds. (In this embodiment, 10) pachinko balls can be passed through the first specific winning opening 1000a, and the balls can be paid out for that amount, and the first operating time T1 of each round can be paid. The round game R can be completed without waiting for the maximum length (30 seconds). Therefore, the prize ball can be paid out in the same manner as in the first operation pattern while the round game R is rapidly advanced.

After that, similarly, the round games R of the third to tenth rounds are repeated with the first interval time Int1 between rounds sandwiched between the round games R, and the opening / closing plate 1300 is between the closed state and the open state. The solenoid 1510 is driven and controlled so as to be displaced and open / close the first specific winning opening 1000a.

When the 10th round game R is completed, the timer means drives and controls the solenoid 1510 to keep the opening / closing plate 1300 in the closed state until the second interval time Int2 (1.0 seconds) between rounds elapses, and the round After the lapse of the second interval time Int2, the 11th round round game R is started.

In the 11th round, the solenoid 1510 is used to start measuring the first operating time T1 (maximum 30 seconds) by the timer means and to displace the opening / closing plate 1300 from the closed state to the open state to open the first specified winning opening 1000a. Is driven and controlled so that the opening / closing plate 1300 operates for a long time.

Then, when the round end condition (round game time (30 seconds, which is the maximum value of the first operating time T1) elapses or a specified number of pachinko balls are won) is satisfied in the 11th round round game R. The solenoid 1510 is driven and controlled so as to displace the opening / closing plate 1300 to the closed state and close the first specific winning opening 1000a, and the round game R of the eleventh round ends.

After that, similarly, the 12th to 15th rounds of the round game R are repeated with the second interval time Int2 between the rounds sandwiched between the round games R, and the opening / closing plate 1300 is between the closed state and the open state. The solenoid 1510 is driven and controlled so as to be displaced and open / close the first specific winning opening 1000a.

By discharging the ball at the second interval time Int2 between the rounds, it is possible to form a state in which the ball remains inside the storage flow path 1231 at the start of the round game R after the 11th round. Therefore, after the 11th round, a state may occur in which a specified number (10 in this embodiment) of pachinko balls cannot be passed through the first specific winning opening 1000a. In this case, the round game R ends only after the maximum length (30 seconds) of the first operating time T1 of each round has elapsed. Therefore, the progress of the round game R is delayed as compared with the first operation pattern.

In addition, the number of prize balls paid out in each round game is also smaller than that by the 10th round. Therefore, the total number of payouts is smaller than that of the jackpot of the first operation pattern (1875 pieces = (10C x 10R + 5C x 5R) x 15 pieces), and the degree of payout (number or speed, etc.) in the jackpot game is reduced. , It can be changed (depending on the timing) depending on how many rounds the game is played.

In the third operation pattern, the case where the number of payouts is large in the first round and the number of payouts decreases toward the final stage has been described, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, the number of payouts may be small at the beginning, but the number of payouts may increase toward the end, or the number of payouts may peak in the middle round.

Then, when the round game R of the final round is completed, the solenoid 1510 is driven and controlled so that the timer means keeps the opening / closing plate 1300 in the closed state until the first interval time Int1 between rounds and the ending time ED (11 seconds) elapse. Then, the jackpot game ends with the passage of the time.

According to this operation pattern, the degree of payout (number or speed, etc.) in the jackpot game is changed depending on the number of rounds in which the round game R is performed, thereby giving the jackpot game slowness and speed and improving the player's interest. Can be made to.

Further, when the jackpot game is performed in the third operation pattern, the player pays out the expected payout in the first operation pattern because there is no change from the first operation pattern until the tenth round round game R. You can play big hit games with the expectation that you can get the number.

Further, the second interval time Int2 between rounds set in 1 second in the present embodiment can be set to an arbitrary value corresponding to each round for each jackpot type. For example, in one jackpot type, the second interval time Int2 between rounds of the third operation pattern is set to 1.5 seconds, and in another jackpot type, the second interval between rounds of the third operation pattern is set. The interval time Int2 can be set to 0.5 seconds for odd-numbered rounds and 1.0 seconds for even-numbered rounds, and the like can be set in advance.

That is, by further subdividing the jackpot type, it is possible to form various jackpot games with different second interval times Int2 between rounds. Therefore, after the 11th round, the number of balls finally paid out can be made unpredictable until the jackpot game is completed, and the attention to the jackpot game can be improved.

Further, the change in the degree of payout may be made to correspond to the effect displayed on the liquid crystal screen of the third symbol display device 81 (see FIG. 2). For example, when a jackpot game is performed in the third operation pattern, the figure of the running character is displayed on the LCD screen, and the beginning (the first round) where the stamina of the character remains is displayed. The character to be run runs well, and many prize balls are paid out in conjunction with it. On the other hand, when the character's stamina runs out (in the final round), the displayed character becomes difficult to run and starts walking, and in conjunction with that, the payout of prize balls decreases.

In this way, by associating the degree of payout of the prize balls with the effect displayed on the liquid crystal screen, it is possible for the player to easily embrace the liquid crystal effect, and the player's interest in the jackpot game is improved. be able to.

Further, by performing the jackpot game in the second operation pattern or the third operation pattern described above, each round can be advanced based on the maximum value of the first operation time T1, so that the jackpot game can be predetermined. It can take more time than the production time. In other words, for example, when the ball wins the first specific winning opening 1000a at an unexpectedly high speed, it is displayed on the liquid crystal screen of the third symbol display device 81 (see FIG. 2) during the jackpot game. It is possible to prevent the jackpot game from ending in the middle of the first playback of the moving image that is loop-played over a predetermined production time. As a result, it is possible to prevent the jackpot game from ending before the production during the jackpot is fully viewed.

It should be noted that the effect displayed on the liquid crystal screen when the jackpot game is performed in the second operation pattern or the third operation pattern is not limited. For example, in a mode in which a cheering message from a character (such as "Do your best next time") is displayed, the longer the jackpot game time, the easier it is to display the cheering message from a character with a lower appearance rate. Thereby, the jackpot game in the second operation pattern or the third operation pattern can proceed without stressing (rather happily) the player.

On the other hand, it may be displayed as a mode in which the player is more stressed. For example, a case where a character running during a jackpot game is displayed and the character is displayed to take a break in a rest area at an interval between rounds will be described. In the first operation pattern, every time a specified number of balls are won, the interval between rounds is set, so that the character can complete the race without accumulating fatigue. On the other hand, after the 11th round of the second operation pattern or the third operation pattern, the specified number of prizes cannot be won and the interval between rounds cannot be reached unless the maximum value (30 seconds) of the first operation time T1 is waited. Therefore, it is possible to perform the effect of accumulating fatigue without causing a deviation from the game mode (in the effect mode in which the time is controlled in advance regardless of the winning mode), and since the interval between rounds is short in the first place, the character can be used. It is possible to produce that there is no time to rest. Therefore, it is possible to make the player visually recognize the exhausted character and give stress to the player, so that the player's aspiration to recover at the next big hit can be enhanced.

Further, in the case of performing the same display, the character may replenish the water at the timing of winning. In this case, while the first operation pattern can sufficiently replenish water, in the 11th and subsequent rounds of the second operation pattern or the third operation pattern, the number of times of replenishing water (the number of winnings) is the first. Compared to the operation pattern, it will be less and the character will run for a longer period (the period of the jackpot game), so the amount of water that can be replenished will be insufficient compared to the sweat that comes out of the character, and the character will become more and more tired. It is possible to perform the effect without causing a deviation from the game mode (in the effect mode in which the time is controlled in advance regardless of the winning mode). This makes it possible to match the appearance of the character with the profit that the player can obtain (payout ball including time efficiency), and how much the jackpot the player has won (whether it is a middle hit). , Big hit or super big hit) can be easily grasped by the player through the production of the entire jackpot game.

Next, the second embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 24 to 30. In the first embodiment, the case where the number of balls that can be stored inside the first variable winning device 1000 is fixed has been described, but the first variable winning device 2000 in the second embodiment has balls that can be stored inside. It is configured so that the number of can be changed. The same parts as those of the above-described embodiments are designated by the same reference numerals, and the description thereof will be omitted.

FIG. 24 is a front view of the first variable winning device 2000 in the second embodiment, and FIG. 25 is a rear view of the first variable winning device 2000. In FIG. 24, a part of the storage flow path 1231 and the arrangement of the balls stored in the second storage flow path 2251 when the ball enters from the second specific winning opening 2255a are shown by hidden lines.

As shown in FIGS. 24 and 25, the first variable winning device 2000 includes an opening / closing plate 1300, a power transmission member 1400, and a drive device 1500 similar to those in the first embodiment, and is a main body member slightly different from the first embodiment. It includes a 2100, an lining front plate 2200, a regulating member 2600 and a rear cover (not shown), and further includes a second variable winning device 2800, which is new in the second embodiment. The second detection sensor 2255 of the second variable winning device 2800 includes a second specific winning opening 2255a through which a ball, which is a reference for paying out, passes during a big hit game.

The second specific winning opening 2255a is a winning opening having the same function as the first specific winning opening 1000a. That is, when the jackpot of the special symbol is reached, the pachinko machine 10 shifts to the special gaming state, and the first specific winning opening 1000a or the second specific winning opening 2255a, which is normally closed, has passed a predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds). The opening operation is repeated 15 times (15 rounds) until the ball is released or 10 balls are won. Although the details will be described later, the open operation is possible with a plurality of operation patterns (fourth operation pattern, fifth operation pattern). As a result, a large amount of balls are awarded to the first specific winning opening 1000a and the second specific winning opening 2255a, so that a larger amount of prize balls are paid out than usual.

The main body member 2100 is in addition to the configuration (thin plate member 1110, accommodating portion 1120, holding hole 1130, projecting portion 1140, discharge port 1150, rotary support portion 1160, and support claw portion 1170) provided in the main body member 1100 of the first embodiment. , A slide guide hole 2181 which is a through hole drilled in the thin plate member 1110 and a holding hole 2182 which is also a through hole drilled in the thin plate member 1110 and is configured to be able to insert the second detection sensor 2255. A pair of wall portions are arranged side by side in parallel along the surface direction of the thin plate member 1110 and extended linearly in the left-right direction, and a pair of drive guide ribs 2183 and a pair along the surface direction of the thin plate member 1110. It mainly includes a transmission guide rib 2184 in which wall portions are arranged in parallel and extend linearly in the vertical direction, and a shaft portion 2185 that pivotally supports a transmission member 2830 of the second variable winning device 2800.

The slide guide hole 2181 is a long hole that guides the operation of the slide plate 2840 of the second variable winning device 2800. The holding hole 2182 is a through hole into which the second detection sensor 2255 arranged in the lining front plate 2200 is inserted.

Each of the ribs 2183 and 2184 is a rib that guides the sliding operation of the intervening rod portion 2850 and the transmission rod portion 2860 that are interlocked with each other when the second variable winning device 2800 is driven.

The lining front plate 2200 is connected in the upper right direction of the housing portion 1230 in addition to the configuration (thin plate member 1210, side wall portion 1220, housing portion 1230 and detection sensor 1240) provided in the lining front plate 1200 of the first embodiment. A second accommodating portion 2250 is provided.

The second accommodating portion 2250 has a functional portion on the back surface side of the thin plate formed at the surface position with the thin plate member 1210, has an upward opening, and has a second end connected to the middle of the storage flow path 1231. The second detection is arranged in the second storage flow path 2251 in a posture in which the opening is arranged along the extension direction of the storage flow path 2251 and the upper end portion of the second storage flow path 2251. The sensor 2255 and the left side portion of the opening of the second storage flow path 2251 are closed between the front plate of the second accommodating portion 2250 and the thin plate member 1110 of the main body member 2100, and the upper surface is inclined downward to the left. Mainly includes an inclined surface 2257 and the like.

In the second storage flow path 2251, when the spheres pass through the second detection sensor 2255 and are accommodated inside the second accommodating portion 2250, and the discharge port 1150 is blocked and the spheres are accumulated, the number of stored spheres is increased. It is configured to have a maximum of 14.

The second detection sensor 2255 is a detection device having a second specific winning opening 2255a and producing the same operation as the detection sensor 1240. That is, when the ball enters the accommodating portion 1230 by switching the opening / closing plate 1300, the ball is detected by the detection sensor 1240, and the ball is admitted via the accommodating portion 2250 by switching the second variable winning device 2800. When entering the ball in 1230, the ball is detected by the second detection sensor 2255.

The inclined surface 2257 causes the ball to flow down to the side where the opening / closing plate 1300 is arranged. Therefore, all the balls that are blocked by the slide plate 2840 and do not enter the second storage flow path 2251 flow down along the inclined surface 2257 and are configured in a manner toward the flow path forming portion on the front side of the opening / closing plate 1300. To. Therefore, during the jackpot game, the player opens any of the specific winning openings 1000a and 2255a regardless of whether the first specific winning opening 1000a is open or the second specific winning opening 2255a is open. If it is in a state, a large amount of prize balls can be paid out by performing a right-handed game. Therefore, even an unfamiliar player can easily play the game.

The second detection sensor 2255 is arranged inside the second storage flow path 2251 with a margin for arranging one sphere on the upstream side. Therefore, at the timing when the slide plate 2840 is about to close (the timing when the remaining one ball passes through the second detection sensor 2255 to reach the specified number), a plurality of balls flow into the second storage flow path 2251 in a row. , The structure is such that more than the specified number of balls can enter.

In the regulating member 2600, in addition to the configuration (shaft portion 1610, extension portion 1620 and ball receiving portion 1630) provided in the regulation member 1600 of the first embodiment, the shaft portion 1610 is further extended to the left, and the extension portion 1620 A second extension portion 2640 formed in a symmetrical relationship with the extension portion 1620 in the plane direction of the above is provided.

The second extension portion 2640 is a portion that receives a load during the operation of the second variable winning device 2800, as will be described later. Due to the formation of the second extension portion 2640, the regulating member 2600 can be the second variable winning device 2800 or the opening / closing plate 1300 regardless of whether the second variable winning device 2800 performs the switching operation or the opening / closing plate 1300 performs the switching operation. The state can be switched in conjunction with the operation of.

The second variable winning device 2800 has a solenoid 2810 fixed to the back surface of the main body member 2100, a tip member 2820 that slides in the left-right direction by driving the solenoid 2810, and a middle abdomen while being supported at one end by the tip member 2820. A transmission member 2830 that is rotatably supported by the shaft portion 2185, a slide plate 2840 that is connected to the other end of the transmission member 2830 and projects from the slide guide hole 2181 to the front side of the main body member 2100, and a tip. A rod-shaped intervening rod 2850 that is fixed to the member 2820 and slidably arranged inside the drive guide rib 2183, and a transmission guide rib that is arranged at a position where it can come into contact with the intervening rod 2850. It mainly includes a transmission rod portion 2860 which is extended along the inside of 2184 and whose other end is arranged at a position where it can come into contact with the second extending portion 2640 of the regulating member 2600.

The intervening rod portion 2850 is guided in the left-right direction by the drive guide rib 2183, while the movement in the up-down direction and the front-back direction is restricted. In the present embodiment, the pair of drive guide ribs 2183 are configured so as to be closer to each other (narrow the distance from each other) as the distance from the thin plate member 1110 of the main body member 2100 increases, so that the intervening rod portion 2850 Movement in the front-back direction is restricted.

The transmission rod portion 2860 is guided in the vertical direction by the transmission guide rib 2184, while the movement in the left-right direction and the front-rear direction is restricted. In the present embodiment, the pair of transmission guide ribs 2184 are configured in such a manner that the main body member 2100 is closer to each other (narrows the distance from each other) as the distance from the thin plate member 1110 becomes longer, so that the transmission rod portion 2860 Movement in the front-back direction is restricted.

The surfaces of the end portions where the intervening rod portion 2850 and the transmission rod portion 2860 come into contact with each other are formed to be inclined so as to face the mating member. As a result, the force can be smoothly transmitted from the intervening rod portion 2850 to the transmission rod portion 2860.

FIG. 26 is a partial cross-sectional view of the first variable winning device 2000 on the XXVI-XXVI line of FIG. As shown in FIG. 26, the second extending portion 2640 of the regulating member 2600 is configured to have an arcuate cross-section in which the facing surface 2641 on the side facing the transmission rod portion 2860 is curved, and the regulating member 2600 is directed toward the discharge state. The urging force of the urging torsion spring (not shown) is transmitted to the transmission rod portion 2860 via the facing surface 2641. As a result, the transmission rod portion 2860 is maintained in the standby position in the state shown in FIGS. 25 and 26.

In the state shown in FIGS. 25 and 26, the ball cannot enter both the detection sensor 1240 and the second detection sensor 2255. Hereinafter, the opening operation of the second variable winning device 2800 for making the ball capable of entering the second detection sensor 2255 will be described.

In FIGS. 27 (a) to 27 (c), the operations of the regulating member 2600 and the second variable winning device 2800 are illustrated in chronological order. 27 (a) to 27 (c) are partial rear views of the first variable winning device 2000. In addition, in FIGS. 27 (a) to 27 (c), in order to facilitate understanding, illustration of a configuration unnecessary for explanation is omitted, and the state of the slide plate 2840 changes from the closed state to the open state. The state of doing is illustrated in chronological order.

In FIG. 27 (a), the solenoid 2810 is de-energized and the tip member 2820 is arranged at the position farthest from the solenoid 2810. In FIG. 27 (b), the solenoid 2810 is immediately after being excited. In FIG. 27 (c), the tip member 2820 is placed at the intermediate position of the movement range, but the tip member 2820 is placed at the most attracted state to the solenoid 2810 (the final arrival position when the solenoid 2810 is excited). Each of these states is illustrated. In the state shown in FIG. 27 (a), the slide plate 2840 constitutes a closed state for preventing the ball from entering the second detection sensor 2255, and in the state shown in FIG. 27 (c), the slide plate 2840 is , Configure an open state that allows the ball to enter the second detection sensor 2255.

As shown in FIG. 27A, when the slide plate 2840 is closed, the regulating member 2600 is in the discharged state. Therefore, when the solenoid 2810 is in the non-excited state, it is possible to prevent the regulating member 2600 from being in the stored state due to the action of the second variable winning device 2800. That is, even when the second variable winning device 2800 is added as in the present embodiment, the control mode that does not cause the operation of the solenoid 2810 (maintains in non-excitation) (for example, the control mode of the first embodiment). Therefore, it is possible to configure a jackpot game similar to that described in the first embodiment.

Further, when the sphere remains in the storage flow path 1231 or the second storage flow path 2251, the sphere can be discharged from the first variable winning device 2000 by switching to the state shown in FIG. 27 (a).

As shown in FIG. 27B, when the solenoid 2810 is excited, the displacement of the tip member 2820 causes the slide plate 2840 to start displacement via the transmission member 2830 and the transmission rod portion 2860 to start displacement via the intervening rod portion 2850. To do. Here, in the present embodiment, the abutting portions of the intervening rod portion 2850 and the transmission rod portion 2860 are arranged close to each other although they are slightly separated from each other in the state of FIG. 27A, so that the operation and transmission of the slide plate 2840 The operation of the rod portion 2860 is started almost at the same time.

When the transmission rod portion 2860 is pushed downward and displaced by the end portion of the intervening rod portion 2850, the lower end portion of the transmission rod portion 2860 gives a load in the pushing direction to the second extension portion 2640 of the regulation member 2600. As a result, the regulation member 2600 is slightly pushed down, and the state is in the middle of the discharge state and the storage state.

As shown in FIG. 27 (c), when the tip member 2830 is completely moved, the transmission rod portion 2860 is pushed down to the terminal position by the intervening rod portion 2850, and the regulation member 2600 is maintained in the stored state. As shown in FIG. 27 (c), the intervening rod portion 2850 slides from the transmission rod portion 2860 to the extent that the inclined surface faces the transmission rod portion 2860 and passes through the transmission rod portion 2860. The load applied to the 2850 can be flowed in a direction perpendicular to the moving direction of the intervening rod portion 2850.

As a result, it is possible to prevent the load applied to the intervening rod portion 2850 from fluctuating along the moving direction of the intervening rod portion 2850 due to the fluctuation of the load applied to the transmission rod portion 2860 via the regulating member 2600. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the load applied to the tip member 2820 from fluctuating via the regulating member 2600, and therefore, the solenoid 2810 for maintaining the slide plate 2840 whose state changes due to the displacement of the tip member 2820 in the open state. It is possible to prevent the driving force of the vehicle from fluctuating. As a result, the driving force required for the solenoid 2810 can be reduced.

Further, unlike the first embodiment, the displacement in the slide direction caused by the solenoid 2810 is used as it is as the displacement of the transmission rod portion 2860, and the state of the regulation member 2600 is even changed. Therefore, the responsiveness of the operation of the regulating member 2600 to the switching of the excitation mode to the solenoid 2810 can be improved. As a result, it is possible to finely adjust the state change timing of the regulating member 2600, so that it is possible to prevent the control value of the number of discharges specified for each round interval time in the jackpot game from deviating from the actual number of discharges. It is possible to stabilize the number of emissions.

FIG. 28 is a partial cross-sectional view of the first variable winning device 2000 in line XXVIII-XXVIII of FIG. 27 (c). As shown in FIG. 28, the tangent line of the contact portion between the lower end portion of the transmission rod portion 2860 and the facing surface 2641 of the regulating member 2600 is angled with the moving direction (vertical direction) of the transmission rod portion 2860. Therefore, the urging force of the torsion spring (not shown) that urges the regulating member 2600 toward the arrangement in the discharged state effectively acts on the transmission rod portion 2860.

Therefore, if the slide plate 2840 is displaced from the open state (see FIG. 27 (c)) to the closed state (see FIG. 27 (a)) and the regulation by the intervening rod portion 2850 is released, the urging force of the torsion spring is released. The transmission rod portion 2860 can be raised and the transmission rod portion 2860 can be maintained in the standby position (see FIG. 27 (a)).

FIG. 29 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the correspondence between the first hit type counter C2 in the present embodiment and the jackpot type in the special symbol.

The first hit type selection table 202b (see FIG. 29) in the present embodiment is a data table in which judgment values for determining the jackpot type are stored, and the judgment value of the first hit type counter C2 is each jackpot. It is stipulated in association with the type and the type of the entrance that triggered the lottery of special symbols. In the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, when it is determined that the special symbol is a big hit, the value of the first hit type counter C2 acquired based on the start winning prize is compared with the first hit type selection table 202b, and the first hit type selection table 202b is compared. The jackpot type corresponding to the value of the hit type counter C2 is selected.

In addition, the jackpot type defined in association with the value of the first hit type counter C2 when a jackpot is obtained in the lottery of the special symbol 1 (lottery based on the entry into the first ball entrance 64) is Since it is the same as that described in the first embodiment, the description is omitted. In the following, the case where a big hit is obtained in the lottery of the special symbol 2 (lottery based on the entry into the second entrance 640) in the present embodiment. explain.

Specifically, in the case of a big hit in the special symbol 2 lottery (lottery based on the entry into the second entrance 640), the value of the first hit type counter C2 is in the range of "0 to 29". Is defined in association with the jackpot d (see 202b21 in FIG. 29).

When the jackpot d is reached, the jackpot game of 15 rounds is executed in the fourth operation pattern (details will be described later) of the first variable winning device 2000. In this case, the player can receive a payout of about 2250 prize balls plus a limited increase.

The jackpot e is associated with the range in which the value of the first hit type counter C2 is "30 to 99" (see 202b22 in FIG. 29).

When the jackpot e is reached, the jackpot game of 15 rounds is executed in the fifth operation pattern (details will be described later) of the first variable winning device 2000. In this case, the number of prize balls to be paid out to the player is the number of 2250 prize balls plus a limited amount of increase, but the difficulty of increasing the number of payouts is compared with the fourth operation pattern. Depending on the timing of increasing the number of payouts, the time required for the jackpot game is significantly longer than that of the jackpot d.

As described above, when a big hit is obtained in the lottery of the special symbol 2 (lottery based on the entry into the second entrance 640), the operation pattern of the first variable winning device 2000 changes according to the big hit type. Due to this difference in the operation pattern, the number of jackpot rounds can be kept unchanged, while the time required for the jackpot game can be changed while making a difference in the number of payouts.

In the present embodiment, in the case of the jackpot e, in the predetermined round game R (round game R in the 1st to 7th rounds). When a specified number or more of balls are inserted into the first variable winning device 2000, the extra payout amount is deducted in the subsequent specific round game R (8th round game R) and the progress of the 8th round is started. It is configured to maximize the time required. On the other hand, in the round game R after the specific round game R, the player can acquire the increased amount of balls paid out by inserting the specified number of balls or more into the first variable winning device 2000 without being deducted. It is configured as follows.

In this case, in the case of the jackpot e, the game method in which the player can obtain the highest profit including time efficiency is limited to the specified number of prizes up to the 8th round, and the round game R after the 9th round. The aim is to increase the number of payouts with the aim of winning more than the specified number. Therefore, it is possible to switch whether it is advantageous or disadvantageous to put more than a specified number of balls in the first variable winning device 2000 depending on the round game R, and the player's attention to the jackpot game. Can be improved.

Next, with reference to FIG. 30, the opening patterns of the first specific winning opening 1000a and the second specific winning opening 2255a in the present embodiment will be described. FIG. 30 (a) is a diagram showing the timekeeping change of the first specific winning opening 1000a and the second specific winning opening 2255a in the fourth operation pattern, and FIG. 30 (b) is a diagram showing a time change in the fifth operation pattern. It is a figure which showed the timekeeping change of 1 specific winning opening 1000a and 2nd specific winning opening 2255a.

When the jackpot is determined in the special figure hit determination, the MPU 201 (see FIG. 4) starts controlling the determined type of jackpot game after the end of the special figure variation display (symbol variation effect). Hereinafter, operation control of the opening / closing plate 1300 and the slide plate 2840 performed when the jackpot game is given will be described.

<When operating with the 4th operation pattern>
In the case of a jackpot game in which the jackpot type is jackpot d, the MPU 201 drives and controls the solenoids 1510 and 2810 so that the opening / closing plate 1300 and the slide plate 2840 operate based on the fourth operation pattern.

When the special figure variation display (design variation effect) is completed, the MPU 201 holds the opening / closing plate 1300 and the slide plate 2840 in the closed state until a predetermined opening time OP (10 seconds) elapses by the timer means (not shown). The solenoids 1510 and 2810 are driven and controlled, and after the opening time OP elapses, the first round game R is started.

That is, the solenoid 2810 is driven and controlled so that the first operating time T1 (maximum 30 seconds) is measured by the timer means and the slide plate 2840 is displaced from the closed state to the open state to open the second specific winning opening 2255a. Then, the slide plate 2840 is operated for a long time.

Then, in the first round game R, the lapse of the round end condition (round game time (30 seconds, which is the maximum value of the first operating time T1) or the specified number (10 in the present embodiment) of pachinko balls When the winning) is satisfied, the solenoid 2810 is driven and controlled so as to displace the slide plate 2840 to the closed state and close the second specific winning opening 2255a, and the round game R of the first round ends.

When the round game R of the first round is completed, the timer means solenoids 1510, 2810 keep the opening / closing plate 1300 and the slide plate 2840 in the closed state until the first interval time Int1 (2.0 seconds) between rounds elapses. Is driven and controlled, and after the lapse of the first interval time Int1 between rounds, the second round game R is started.

In the second round, as in the start of the first round, the first operating time T1 (maximum 30 seconds) is measured by the timer means, and the slide plate 2840 is displaced from the closed state to the open state to specify the second. The solenoid 2810 is driven and controlled so as to open the winning opening 2255a, so that the slide plate 2840 operates for a long time.

Then, when the round end condition (round game time (30 seconds, which is the maximum value of the first operating time T1) elapses or a specified number of pachinko balls are won) is satisfied in the second round game R. The solenoid 2810 is driven and controlled so as to displace the slide plate 2840 to the closed state and close the second specific winning opening 2255a, and the second round game R ends.

The first interval time Int1 between rounds is set as a time for discharging 10 balls from the discharge port 1150 as described above in the first embodiment. In the present embodiment, depending on the timing of passing through the second specific winning opening 2255a, more than 10 balls (for example, 11 or 12) may be won in the second specific winning opening 2255a in each round game R. It is possible. However, on the other hand, since the number of balls discharged from the discharge port 1150 by the first interval time Int1 between rounds is 10, more than 10 balls in each round game R have won the second specific winning port 2255a. Immediately after the start of the round game R, the excess number of balls remains in the storage flow path 1231.

In the present embodiment, the maximum number of stored balls is 14 when the ball is entered from the second storage channel 2251 side. Therefore, in the jackpot game of jackpot d, the number of winnings exceeding the specified number is 15 rounds. Limited to 4 through jackpot games. Therefore, the upper limit of the number of payouts (the number of payouts due to over-winning) that can be acquired by the player who plays the jackpot game of jackpot d can be limited to 60 (= 15 x 4C). This makes it possible to prevent the number of payouts from changing significantly due to differences in game modes (launch timing, launch intervals, etc.). Therefore, it is possible to configure a game machine in which the player can enjoy the profit fairly regardless of the experience value of the player.

After that, similarly, the round game R from the third round to the maximum 15 rounds is repeated with the first interval time Int1 between rounds sandwiched between the round game R, and the slide plate 2840 is in the closed state and the open state. The solenoid 2810 is driven and controlled so as to open and close the second specific winning opening 2255a.

Then, when the round game R of the final round is completed, the solenoid 2810 is driven and controlled so that the timer means keeps the slide plate 2840 in the closed state until the first interval time Int1 between rounds and the ending time ED (11 seconds) elapse. Then, the jackpot game ends with the passage of the time.

<When operating with the fifth operation pattern>
In the case of a jackpot game in which the jackpot type is jackpot e, the MPU 201 drives and controls the solenoids 1510 and 2810 so that the opening / closing plate 1300 and the slide plate 2840 operate based on the fifth operation pattern. When the special figure variation display (design variation effect) is completed, the MPU 201 holds the opening / closing plate 1300 and the slide plate 2840 in the closed state until a predetermined opening time OP (10 seconds) elapses by the timer means (not shown). The solenoids 1510 and 2810 are driven and controlled, and after the opening time OP elapses, the first round game R is started.

That is, the solenoid 2810 is driven and controlled so that the first operating time T1 (maximum 30 seconds) is measured by the timer means and the slide plate 2840 is displaced from the closed state to the open state to open the second specific winning opening 2255a. Then, the slide plate 2840 is operated for a long time.

Then, in the first round game R, the lapse of the round end condition (round game time (30 seconds, which is the maximum value of the first operating time T1) or the specified number (10 in the present embodiment) of pachinko balls When the winning) is satisfied, the solenoid 2810 is driven and controlled so as to displace the slide plate 2840 to the closed state and close the second specific winning opening 2255a, and the round game R of the first round ends.

When the round game R of the first round is completed, the timer means drives and controls the solenoid 2810 to keep the slide plate 2840 in the closed state until the first interval time Int1 (2.0 seconds) between rounds elapses, and the round After the lapse of the first interval time Int1, the second round game R is started.

In the second round, as in the start of the first round, the first operating time T1 (maximum 30 seconds) is measured by the timer means, and the slide plate 2840 is displaced from the closed state to the open state to specify the second. The solenoid 2810 is driven and controlled so as to open the winning opening 2255a, so that the slide plate 2840 operates for a long time.

Then, when the round end condition (round game time (30 seconds, which is the maximum value of the first operating time T1) elapses or a specified number of pachinko balls are won) is satisfied in the second round game R. The solenoid 2810 is driven and controlled so as to displace the slide plate 2840 to the closed state and close the second specific winning opening 2255a, and the second round game R ends.

The first interval time Int1 between rounds is set as a time for discharging 10 balls from the discharge port 1150 as described above in the first embodiment. In the present embodiment, depending on the timing of passing through the second specific winning opening 2255a, more than 10 balls (for example, 11 or 12) may be won in the second specific winning opening 2255a in each round game R. It is possible. However, on the other hand, since the number of balls discharged from the discharge port 1150 by the first interval time Int1 between rounds is 10, more than 10 balls in each round game R have won the second specific winning port 2255a. Immediately after the start of the round game R, the excess number of balls remains in the storage flow path 1231.

After that, similarly, the round games R of the third to seventh rounds are repeated with the first interval time Int1 between rounds sandwiched between the round games R, and the slide plate 2840 is between the closed state and the open state. The solenoid 2810 is driven and controlled so as to be displaced and open and close the second specific winning opening 2255a.

When the seventh round of the round game R is completed, the timer means drives and controls the solenoid 2810 to keep the slide plate 2840 in the closed state until the first interval time Int1 between rounds elapses, and the first interval time Int1 between rounds is completed. After the lapse of, the 8th round game R is started.

In the 8th round, the solenoid 1510 is used to start measuring the first operating time T1 (maximum 30 seconds) by the timer means and to displace the opening / closing plate 1300 from the closed state to the open state to open the first specified winning opening 1000a. Is driven and controlled so that the opening / closing plate 1300 operates for a long time.

Then, when the round end condition (round game time (30 seconds, which is the maximum value of the first operating time T1) elapses or a specified number of pachinko balls are won) is satisfied in the eighth round round game R. The solenoid 1510 is driven and controlled so as to displace the opening / closing plate 1300 to the closed state and close the first specific winning opening 1000a, and the eighth round round game R is completed.

Here, in the round game R before the 7th round, when the number of balls exceeding the specified number has passed through the second specified winning opening 2255a, the number of balls exceeding the specified number at the start of the 8th round round game R Since the balls remain in the storage flow path 1231, in the 8th round round game R, only the number of prizes obtained by subtracting the remaining number (the number exceeding the specified number by the 7th round) from the specified number is performed. Therefore, the payout of prize balls including the 8th round is equalized to the payout of the specified number of prize balls up to the 8th round. In addition, in the 8th round round game R, the specified number of pachinko balls cannot be won, so after waiting for the lapse of 30 seconds, which is the maximum value of the first operating time T1, the next round round. It will move to the game.

Therefore, the player suffers from the feeling that the extra prize balls paid out up to the 7th round are lost, and the time loss that the 8th round game R becomes longer than necessary. Will receive. As a result, by the 7th round, it is possible to encourage the player to play the game carefully so as not to win more balls than the specified number. Therefore, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of winning of balls exceeding a predetermined number, and it is possible to enhance the fairness of the game.

If there are no prizes exceeding the specified number in the 7th round, the specified number of balls can be passed through the 1 specific winning opening 1000a in the 8th round round game R, and the specified number of balls are paid out. In addition, the eighth round of the round game R can be completed without waiting for the maximum length (30 seconds) of the first operating time T1 of each round. Therefore, the specified number of prize balls can be paid out while the round game R is rapidly advanced.

Therefore, in the jackpot game of jackpot e, it is in the interest of the player to intentionally suppress the winning of more than the specified number until the seventh round. Therefore, the player's attention in the game up to the 7th round can be maintained high.

When the jackpot game R in the eighth round is completed, the timer means drives and controls the solenoid 1510 to keep the opening / closing plate 1300 in the closed state until the first interval time Int1 between rounds elapses, and the first interval between rounds. After the lapse of time Int1, the ninth round round game R is started. At the start of the ninth round of the round game R, it is possible to set the state in which no balls remain in the storage flow path 1231.

In the ninth round, the solenoid 2810 is used to start measuring the first operating time T1 (maximum 30 seconds) by the timer means and to displace the slide plate 2840 from the closed state to the open state to open the second specific winning opening 2255a. Is driven and controlled so that the slide plate 2840 operates for a long time.

Then, when the round end condition (round game time (30 seconds, which is the maximum value of the first operating time T1) elapses or a specified number of pachinko balls are won) is satisfied in the ninth round round game R. The solenoid 2810 is driven and controlled so as to displace the slide plate 2840 to the closed state and close the second specific winning opening 2255a, and the round game R of the ninth round ends.

After that, similarly, the 10th to 15th rounds of the round game R are repeated with the first interval time Int1 between the rounds sandwiched between the round games R, and the slide plate 2840 is between the closed state and the open state. The solenoid 1510 is driven and controlled so as to be displaced and open and close the second specific winning opening 2255a.

Then, when the round game R of the final round is completed, the solenoid 1510 is driven and controlled so that the timer means keeps the opening / closing plate 1300 in the closed state until the first interval time Int1 between rounds and the ending time ED (11 seconds) elapse. Then, the jackpot game ends with the passage of the time.

In the round game R after the 9th round, the opening / closing plate 1300 does not open / close, so the prize balls paid out by the balls that have won the second specified winning opening 2255a in excess of the specified number after the 9th round , Can be received by the player without being deducted.

Therefore, when performing a jackpot game of jackpot e, it is suppressed so that the second specified winning opening 2255a, which exceeds the specified number in the jackpot game R, is not won until the 7th round, and is specified in the jackpot game R after the 9th round. Aiming to win a prize in the second specific winning opening 2255a exceeding the number is a gaming method in which the player can obtain the largest profit when considering the profit including time efficiency.

That is, in the round game R of each round, by putting more balls than the specified number into the second specific winning opening 2255a, it is possible to cause a case where the player gains a profit and a case where the player suffers damage. As a result, different playability can be imparted to each round of the jackpot game, and the attention of the player who plays the jackpot game can be improved (it is possible to prevent the jackpot game from being played indiscriminately). ..

Further, according to this operation pattern, the round in which the player can receive the additional prize balls by winning the second specified winning opening 2255a with the number of balls exceeding the specified number is substantially in the ninth round or later. Can be restricted. As a result, it is possible to narrow the timing at which the number of payouts changes due to differences in the game mode (launch timing, launch interval, etc.), and it is possible to prevent the payout balls from changing significantly. Therefore, it is possible to configure a game machine in which the player can enjoy the profit fairly regardless of the experience value of the player.

Next, a third embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 31 to 37. In the first embodiment, the case where the sphere that reaches the flow path forming portion when the opening / closing plate 1300 is in the closed state and flows down to the downstream of the opening / closing plate 1300 in the open state falls as it is is described, but the third embodiment has been described. The first variable winning device 3000 is configured to delay the fall of balls when the opening / closing plate 1300 is in the closed state so that some balls can be won in the first specific winning opening 1000a. The same parts as those of the above-described embodiments are designated by the same reference numerals, and the description thereof will be omitted.

31 is a front view of the first variable winning device 3000 according to the third embodiment, FIG. 32 is a cross-sectional view of the first variable winning device 3000 in the line XXXII-XXXII of FIG. 31, and FIG. 33 is a cover. It is a rear perspective view of the front plate 3200.

As shown in FIGS. 31 to 33, the first variable winning device 3000 includes an opening / closing plate 1300, a power transmission member 1400, a drive device 1500, a regulation member 1600, and a rear cover 1700, which are the same as those in the first embodiment. A main body member 3100 and an lining front plate 3200, which are slightly different from those of the first embodiment, are provided. Note that FIG. 32 shows the closed state of the opening / closing plate 1300.

The main body member 3100 is in addition to the configuration (thin plate member 1110, accommodating portion 1120, holding hole 1130, projecting portion 1140, discharge port 1150, rotary support portion 1160, and support claw portion 1170) provided in the main body member 1100 of the first embodiment. , The additional winning opening 3181 arranged in a manner of being connected to the front view left side wall of the lining front plate 3200 on the front side of the thin plate member 1110 and the additional winning opening 3181 facing upward from the front view left side wall portion. It mainly includes a curved extension plate 3182 that is curved and extended.

The additional winning opening 3181 is an entrance for discharging balls flowing down the game area from the upstream side to the back side of the game board 13, and the upper limit is 15 balls when the balls enter the additional winning opening 3181. The number of prize balls will be paid out. In this embodiment, 11 balls are set to be paid out.

The curved extension plate 3182 is a plate that regulates the passage of a ball flowing down the game area by setting the vertical gap in the game area to be equal to or less than the diameter of the ball, and is ribbed from the thin plate member 1110 to the front side. .. Further, the curved extension plate 3182 is formed from a shape that inclines downward from the middle abdomen toward the left in the front view and downward inclines toward the right in the front view from the middle abdomen.

The lining front plate 3200 is provided between the side wall portion 1220 and the housing portion 1230 in addition to the configuration (thin plate member 1210, side wall portion 1220, accommodating portion 1230 and detection sensor 1240) provided in the lining front plate 1200 of the first embodiment. A drop delay plate 3250 extending from the back surface to the back surface side of the thin plate member 1210 is provided in the region of.

The fall delay plate 3250 is arranged on the front side of the movement locus of the opening / closing plate 1300 so as to avoid interference with the opening / closing plate 1300, and is arranged below the shaft portion 1320 of the opening / closing plate 1300 and is a linear plate parallel to the axial direction. From the curved shape of the elongated plate portion 3251, which is a shaped portion and extends vertically from the back surface of the thin plate member 1210, and the upper surface of the extended plate portion 3251 and the thin plate member 1210 are connected and the upper surface is concave. Mainly includes a rolling arc portion 3252 to be formed.

The fall delay plate 3250 has a long shape to the left and right, and decelerates so that it takes about 2 seconds or more for the ball to flow down (including the flow down due to bouncing or rolling) for a distance of half the length of the plate. It is formed from the shape to be formed. The opening / closing plate 1300 is formed in such a manner that when the sphere flows down a distance of half the length of the plate in the left-right direction, it flows down in 1 second or less.

As shown in FIG. 32, the extension plate portion 3251 is a surface on the side facing the main body member 3100, and is formed so as to be inclined so that the distance from the main body member 3100 becomes longer as it approaches the detection sensor 1240. A facing surface 3251a and a terminal surface 3251b formed between the surface facing the side wall portion 1220 of the accommodating portion 1230 and the accommodating portion 1230 with a distance equal to or larger than the diameter of a sphere are provided.

The distance between the facing surface 3251a and the front side wall of the thin plate member 1110 of the main body member 3100 is the radius of the sphere in the portion vertically below the center of the sphere when the sphere is arranged on the most upstream side (left side in FIG. 32). In the part that is switched to the radius of the sphere or more at the intermediate position (middle position in the left-right direction in FIG. 32) and is arranged vertically below the center of the sphere in the state where it is arranged on the most downstream side (right side in FIG. 32). It is considered to be greater than or equal to the radius of the sphere and less than the diameter of the sphere.

The rolling arc portion 3252 has a shape in which a tangent line drawn on a plane perpendicular to the axial direction at the end of the facing surface 3251a is formed along the front-rear direction and smoothly intersects the thin plate member 1210 of the lining front plate 3200. It is composed of a shape (a tangent line drawn on a plane perpendicular to the axial direction is along the surface direction (extending direction) of the thin plate member 1210).

The radius of curvature of the rolling arc portion 3252 in the axial direction is set to be larger than the radius of the sphere. As a result, it is possible to reduce the resistance when the sphere rolls on the rolling arc portion 3252 in the front-rear direction.

When the opening / closing plate 1300 is in the closed state, the ball that has flowed down the inclined surface 1237 of the lining front plate 3200 rolls on the rolling arc portion 3252 and flows down. At that time, as shown in FIG. 32, the route from the upstream position Pf1 on the most upstream side to the drop position Pf3, which is the position immediately before the ball falls, is separated from the rolling arc portion 3252 to the right, and is the downstream position Pf2. Pass through and flow down.

In the present embodiment, since the distance from the front side wall of the thin plate member 1110 of the main body member 3100 of the facing surface 3251a of the extended plate portion 3251 is less than the diameter of the sphere, until the sphere reaches the drop position Pf3. , The ball is prevented from passing through the rolling arc portion 3252 and falling. Therefore, the ball will fall from the rolling arc portion 3252 only after the ball reaches the drop position Pf3. Hereinafter, a mode in which a sphere flows down on the rolling arc portion 3252 will be described.

34 (a) to 34 (c) are cross-sectional views of the first variable winning device 3000 in the line XXXIVa-XXXIVa of FIG. 31. Note that FIG. 34 (b) shows a sphere arranged at the upstream position Pf1, and FIG. 34 (c) shows a sphere arranged at the downstream position Pf2. In FIG. 34, the rear cover 1700 is not shown.

As shown in FIGS. 34 (b) and 34 (c), the sphere that rolls on the upper surface of the fall delay plate 3250 rolls the rolling arc portion 3252 in the front-rear direction and is in contact with the plate portion 1310. The diameter length (the length between the contact portion in the axial direction and the center of the sphere) to the contact portion with the fall delay plate 3250 of the sphere is shortened as it flows down.

That is, at the upstream position Pf1 shown in FIG. 34 (b), the diameter length r1 to the portion where the sphere comes into contact with the fall delay plate 3250 is equal to the radius of the sphere. On the other hand, at the downstream position Pf2 shown in FIG. 34 (c), the diameter length r2 to the portion where the sphere comes into contact with the fall delay plate 3250 is shorter than the radius of the sphere.

These diameter lengths r1 and r2 correspond to the radius of gyration of the sphere when the sphere rotates about an axis along the front-rear direction as a rotation axis. In other words, if the rotation speed of the sphere is the same, the shorter the diameter lengths r1 and r2, the lower the rolling speed of the sphere (the sphere is delayed). According to the present embodiment, the facing surface 3251a is formed so as to be inclined so that the distance from the main body member 3100 increases toward the downstream side. Therefore, the radius of gyration of the sphere is gradually shortened as the sphere flows down the fall delay plate 3250 to the downstream side (right side of FIG. 31). Therefore, as the ball flows down the fall delay plate 3250 to the downstream side, the rolling speed of the ball can be reduced.

Further, when the extension plate portion 3251 is extended along the rotation axis of the opening / closing plate 1300, in FIG. 34 showing the axial view thereof, FIG. 34 (c) is compared with the state shown in FIG. 34 (b). The sphere is displaced downward in the state shown in). That is, the more the ball flows down the fall delay plate 3250 to the downstream side, the more the ball can be separated from the first specific winning opening 1000a, so that the ball flowing down the fall delay plate 3250 can be deflected from the first specific winning opening 1000a. it can.

As a result, even if the ball entry prevention portion 1331 is not formed on the opening / closing plate 1300, the ball flows down the fall delay plate 3250 to the downstream end and is directed toward the first specific winning opening 1000a with that momentum. It is possible to prevent the situation of winning a prize by flying.

Next, a case where the opening / closing plate 1300 moves up to the open state while the ball rolls on the upper surface of the fall delay plate 3250 will be described with reference to FIG. 35. 35 (a) and 35 (b) are partial front views of the first variable winning device 3000, and FIG. 35 (c) is the first variable winning device 3000 on the XXXVc-XXXVc line of FIG. 35 (b). It is a partial sectional view of. It should be noted that FIG. 35 (a) shows the closed state of the opening / closing plate 1300, FIGS. 35 (b) and 35 (c) show the opening / closing plate 1300, and FIG. 35 (c) shows the opening / closing plate 1300. The outer shape of the plate portion 1310 and the sphere in the closed state is illustrated by an imaginary line, and the rear cover 1700 is not shown. Further, in FIGS. 35 (a) and 35 (b), an example of a ball that has entered the flow path forming portion of the first variable winning device 3000 is shown.

As shown in FIG. 35 (a), when the opening / closing plate 1300 is closed, the sphere landing on the upper surface of the fall delay plate 3250 moves to the right in the front view along the extending direction of the extending plate portion 3251. When the opening / closing plate 1300 is kept in the closed state as it is, it falls after reaching the drop position Pf3. At this time, the rolling speed of the ball can be gradually reduced by the action of the extension plate portion 3251 described above, the rolling time of the ball can be maintained for a long time, and the attention to the ball can be improved.

As shown in FIG. 35 (b), when the opening / closing plate 1300 moves up (rotates) toward the open state while the sphere rolls, the sphere pressed against the rolling surface 1311 of the plate portion 1310 rolls. It smoothly rises and moves along the arc shape of the moving arc portion 3252. As described above, since the tangent to the surface of the rolling arc portion 3252 at the portion where the sphere comes into contact at the start of movement of the sphere faces in the front-rear direction, the movement of the sphere at the start of operation of the opening / closing plate 1300 can be smoothed. it can.

The flow direction when the sphere moves up and rolls on the upper surface of the rolling surface 1311 and flows down is parallel to the flow direction shown in FIG. 35 (a). Therefore, it is possible to alleviate the discomfort felt by the player who visually recognizes the movement of the ball before and after the operation of the opening / closing plate 1300, as compared with the case where the flow direction of the ball changes in a completely different direction before and after the operation of the opening / closing plate 1300. it can.

In this way, from the state in which the sphere is arranged below the plate portion 1310 of the opening / closing plate 1300 in the open state (see the imaginary line in FIG. 35C), the opening / closing plate 1300 moves up to open the sphere. By being pushed back (backflowing) above the plate portion 1310 of the opening / closing plate 1300 in the above, it is possible to win a prize in the first specific winning opening 1000a. That is, a ball that is placed below the opening / closing plate 1300 and once is in a state where it is impossible to win a prize in the first specific winning opening 1000a can be moved up to a state in which a winning can be made in the first specific winning opening 1000a. Since it can be returned, it is possible to improve the interest of the player.

In other words, both FIGS. 35 (a) and 35 (b) show a state in which the sphere is located upstream of the detection sensor 1240 because the sphere may still pass through the detection sensor 1240. It can be said that it is. That is, due to the action of the drop delay plate 3250, the ball can be continuously maintained on the upstream side of the detection sensor 1240 even after the opening / closing plate 1300 is closed.

Further, even when it becomes impossible to win a prize in the first specific winning opening 1000a, the ball rolling on the upper surface of the fall delay plate 3250 flows down in a direction close to the first specific winning opening 1000a. It is possible to give the player a feeling of expectation that the first specific winning opening 1000a may be won, and the attention of the player can be maintained.

As shown in FIG. 35, when the opening / closing plate 1300 forms a closed state, the fall of the ball that has reached the front side of the opening / closing plate 1300 is delayed, and then when the opening / closing plate 1300 changes to the open state, the rolling surface 1311 By configuring it so that it can be revived above, it is possible to increase the possibility that the ball that reaches in front of the opening / closing plate 1300 during the inter-round interval time in the jackpot game will win the first specific winning opening 1000a in the next round game. It is possible to reduce the number of balls that pass through the front side of the opening / closing plate 1300 and enter the first out port 66.

In the present embodiment, it is possible to prevent the opening of the opening / closing plate 1300 from being hindered due to the arrangement of the sphere on the front side of the opening / closing plate 1300. That is, in a structure such as a conventional game machine in which a ball can freely flow down the front side of the opening / closing plate, the opening / closing plate operates to sandwich the ball between the opening / closing plate and the glass plate, thereby opening and closing. There is a problem that the opening of the board is hindered and there is a risk of loss for the player.

On the other hand, in the present embodiment, while the ball rolls on the upper surface of the fall delay plate 3250 in front of the opening / closing plate 1300, the separation distance between the rotation axis of the opening / closing plate 1300 and the ball is maintained (restricted) substantially constant. can do. Therefore, as compared with the case where the sphere freely flows down the front side of the opening / closing plate 1300 and the separation distance of the sphere from the rotation axis changes freely, the sphere is sandwiched between the opening / closing plate 1300 and the glass plate to open / close. The risk of hindering the operation of the plate 1300 can be reduced. In the present embodiment, the ball is sandwiched between the opening / closing plate 1300 and the glass plate while the opening / closing plate 1300 is changing to the open state, and the operation of the opening / closing plate 1300 may be hindered. The fall delay plate 3250 is formed in such a manner that the sphere is maintained at the position of.

36 (a) and 36 (b) are schematic views showing a flow mode of a ball that has reached the first variable winning device 3000. In FIG. 36 (a), the flow-down modes of the two balls that have reached the first variable winning device 3000 when the balls are left unattended are illustrated in chronological order, and in FIG. 36 (b), for example, the first ball. A ball when two balls reach the first variable winning device 3000 in a row by performing a special striking method (so-called "twisting") in which the ball is launched weakly and the second ball is launched strongly. The flow mode of is illustrated in chronological order.

As shown in FIG. 36A, when the first ball P1 and the second ball P2 reach the front side of the opening / closing plate 1300 at a predetermined interval by leaving the ball untouched, the ball is a ball. When the opening / closing plate 1300 is switched to the closed state by the P1 winning the first specific winning opening 1000a, the ball P2 can still be arranged on the upstream side of the fall delay plate 3250.

Therefore, it is possible to secure a long time for the ball P2 to flow down the fall delay plate 3250, so that the ball can be easily maintained on the upper surface of the fall delay plate 3250 until the next time the opening / closing plate 1300 is opened. Can be done.

On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 36B, when two balls are connected to reach the front side of the opening / closing plate 1300, the opening / closing plate 1300 is closed by the balls P1 winning the first specific winning opening 1000a. When switching to the state, the sphere P2 is arranged near the position immediately before the detection sensor 1240 (falling position Pf3), so that it cannot wait until the opening / closing plate 1300 is opened next, and the sphere P2 is delayed in falling. It falls from the board 3250.

As described above, in the present embodiment, as compared with the case where two balls flow down in a row by a special striking method, when two balls flow down at a predetermined interval by leaving the ball (normal striking method). It is possible to make it more susceptible to the action of the fall delay plate 3250 (changing the ball that has reached the front of the opening / closing plate 1300 during the inter-round interval time so that the ball can enter the first specific winning opening 1000a). As a result, it is possible to suppress a game due to a special striking method such as twisting.

FIG. 37 is a partial front view of the first variable winning device 3000. In FIG. 37, immediately after the opening / closing plate 1300 changes its state from the closed state to the open state, a sphere that bounces upward by colliding with the opening / closing plate 1300 is shown.

In the present embodiment, when the ball lands on the open / close plate 1300 in the open state, the bounce as shown in FIG. 37 does not occur, and the ball landing on the open / close plate 1300 is repelled while the open / close plate 1300 is ascending. Only, the sphere bounces in the manner shown in FIG.

Subsequent flow-down modes of the bounced ball are limited to either returning to the top surface of the opening / closing plate 1300 or winning the additional winning opening 3181 along the curved extension plate 3182 as shown in FIG. 37. Will be done. Therefore, the bouncing ball allows the player to receive the prize ball. Therefore, the ball that reaches the opening / closing plate 1300 at a special timing during the switching of the opening / closing plate 1300 to the open state eventually enters the first out port 66, and the player cannot make a profit. Can be prevented.

Further, even if a ball wins in the additional winning opening 3181, a specified number (10 in this embodiment) of balls can be separately won in the first specific winning opening 1000a, so that the additional winning opening is won. The payout by winning the mouth 3181 will be the prize balls (additional profit) paid out in excess of the specified number. That is, the profit that the player can obtain can be different depending on whether or not the ball reaches the front side of the opening / closing plate 1300 at a special timing during the switching of the opening / closing plate 1300 to the open state. It is possible to improve the attention to the flowing ball in.

Next, a fourth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 38 to 43. In the first embodiment, a case has been described in which a probabilistic state (high probability state) of a special symbol is given as an added value after the end of the jackpot regardless of the difference in the flow mode of the ball that has entered the first variable winning device 1000. However, the first variable winning device 4000 in the fourth embodiment includes a probability fluctuation determination unit that determines the acquisition of the right to shift to the probabilistic state (high probability state) of the special symbol according to the difference in the flow mode of the ball. The same parts as those of the above-described embodiments are designated by the same reference numerals, and the description thereof will be omitted.

FIG. 38 is a front view of the game board 13 according to the fourth embodiment, and FIG. 39 is a partial front view of the game board 13. In FIG. 39, the vicinity of the first variable winning device 4000 is enlarged and illustrated. As shown in FIG. 39, in the present embodiment, a transmission window is formed in the game board 13 in the lower portion of the storage flow path 1231 of the first variable winning device 4000, and the probability variation is arranged on the back side of the game board 13. The determination unit 4800 is configured to be visible.

As shown in FIG. 39, the first variable winning device 4000 has the same configuration as that of the first embodiment (main body member 1100, lining front plate 1200, opening / closing plate 1300, power transmission member 1400, drive device 1500, regulation member 1600). And a rear cover 1700), and further, a probability fluctuation determination unit 4800 newly introduced in the fourth embodiment is provided.

The probability fluctuation determination unit 4800 is a flow path through which the ball discharged from the discharge port 1150 flows down, and is a continuous passage 4810 extending vertically downward, and a bifurcated flow that communicates with the lower end of the communication passage 4810. It is arranged so as to communicate with the probability fluctuation determination flow path 4820, which is a road, the specific area 4830 arranged in communication with the flow path on the left side of the front view of the probability fluctuation determination flow path 4820, and the flow path on the right side of the front view. The non-specific area 4840, the distribution device 4850 which is arranged so as to interfere with the game ball at the branch portion of the probability fluctuation determination flow path 4820, the specific area detection sensor 4860 which detects the passage of the game ball in the specific area 4830, and the non-specific area 4860. It mainly includes a non-specific area detection sensor 4870 that detects the passage of a game ball in the specific area 4540.

The communication passage 4810 is formed from a length in which approximately one second elapses before the ball entering from the discharge port reaches the probability fluctuation determination flow path 4820.

The distribution device 4850 is arranged so as to project inside the stochastic variation determination flow path 4820, and causes the sphere to flow down to the specific region 4830 (form an open state) and to the non-specific region 4840 (closed state). It mainly includes a distribution operation member 4851 that can operate between the closed position (to be formed) and a solenoid 4852 that drives the distribution operation member 4851.

The probability fluctuation determination unit 4800 determines the acquisition of the right to shift the special symbol to the probabilistic state (high probability state) only in the special round (fifth round in this embodiment) during the jackpot game. In the special round, the distribution operation member 4851 is moved to the right for a time that allows the game ball to pass. At this time, the specific area 4830 is in the open state, and the non-specific area 4840 is in the closed state. When the game ball passes through the specific area 4830, the game shifts to the probability variation state (high probability state) of the special symbol after the end of the jackpot game. In the present embodiment, in the high probability state of the special symbol, the hit probability of the normal symbol (second symbol) is increased, and the ball is easily won in the second entrance 640.

In the present embodiment, in the low probability state of the special symbol, for example, it is determined as a jackpot of the special symbol with a probability of 1/99, and in the high probability state of the special symbol (probability variation state of the special symbol), for example, 40. It is judged as a big hit of a special symbol with a probability of 1 in.

Then, when the game ball passes through the specific area 4830, after the jackpot game is completed, the special symbol's probability variation state (high probability state) is given until the special symbol lottery is completed 50 times, and the special symbol lottery is performed 50 times. After the end, it is configured to be set to the normal state.

In the present embodiment, five types of special symbols, "big hit D", "big hit E", "big hit F", "big hit G", and "big hit f" are provided (see FIG. 40). Although the details will be described later, the opening pattern of the first specific winning opening 1000a and the operating pattern of the distribution device 4850 are configured differently depending on the jackpot type, and the number of balls entered into the first variable winning device 4000 and the number of balls entered into the first variable winning device 4000 It is configured to change the probability of acquiring the right to move to the probabilistic state (high probability state) of a special symbol.

FIG. 40 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the correspondence between the first hit type counter C2 and the jackpot type in the special symbol. The first hit type selection table 202b (see FIG. 40) is a data table in which judgment values for determining the jackpot type are stored, and the judgment value of the first hit type counter C2 is each jackpot type and special. It is stipulated in association with the type of entry slot that triggered the lottery of the symbol. In the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, when it is determined that the special symbol is a big hit, the value of the first hit type counter C2 acquired based on the start winning prize is compared with the first hit type selection table 202b, and the first hit type selection table 202b is compared. The jackpot type corresponding to the value of the hit type counter C2 is selected.

Specifically, when a big hit is obtained in the lottery of the special symbol 1 (lottery based on the entry into the first entry slot 64), the value of the first hit type counter C2 is in the range of "0 to 29". Is defined in association with a jackpot D (see 202b41 in FIG. 40).

When the jackpot D is obtained, the jackpot game of 5 rounds is executed in the sixth operation pattern of the first variable winning device 4000 and the distribution device 4850. In this case, the player can receive the payout of about 675 prize balls and can almost certainly acquire the right to shift to the probabilistic state (high probability state) of the special symbol.

The jackpot E is associated with the range in which the value of the first hit type counter C2 is "30 to 49" (see 202b42 in FIG. 40).

When the jackpot E is obtained, the jackpot game of 5 rounds is executed in the 7th operation pattern of the 1st variable winning device 4000 and the distribution device 4850. In this case, the player can receive the payout of about 675 prize balls and rarely obtain the right to shift to the probabilistic state (high probability state) of the special symbol.

The jackpot F is associated with the range in which the value of the first hit type counter C2 is "50 to 79" (see 202b43 in FIG. 40).

When the jackpot F is obtained, the jackpot game of 5 rounds is executed in the eighth operation pattern of the first variable winning device 4000 and the distribution device 4850. In this case, the player can receive the payout of about 675 prize balls and can almost certainly acquire the right to shift to the probabilistic state (high probability state) of the special symbol.

A jackpot G is associated with a range in which the value of the first hit type counter C2 is "80 to 99" (see 202b44 in FIG. 40).

When the jackpot G is obtained, the jackpot game of 5 rounds is executed in the eighth operation pattern of the first variable winning device 4000 and the distribution device 4850. In this case, the player can receive the payout of about 750 prize balls and can rarely acquire the right to shift to the probabilistic state (high probability state) of the special symbol.

As described above, in the jackpot based on the lottery of the special symbol 1 (lottery based on the entry into the first entrance 64), there is a 50% chance of the right to shift to the probabilistic state (high probability state) of the special symbol. Can be reliably obtained. On the other hand, even with the remaining 50%, in rare cases, the right to shift to the probabilistic state (high probability state) of the special symbol can be obtained.

On the other hand, when a big hit is obtained in the lottery of the special symbol 2 (lottery based on the entry into the second entrance 640), the value of the first hit type counter C2 is in the range of "0 to 94". The jackpot f is specified in association with each other (see 202b45 in FIG. 40).

When the jackpot f is reached, the jackpot game of 5 rounds is executed in the sixth operation pattern of the first variable winning device 4000 and the distribution device 4850, as in the case of the jackpot D. In this case, the player can receive the payout of about 675 prize balls and can almost certainly acquire the right to shift to the probabilistic state (high probability state) of the special symbol.

A jackpot g is associated with a range in which the value of the first hit type counter C2 is "95 to 99" (see 202b45 in FIG. 40).

When the jackpot g is reached, the jackpot game of 5 rounds is executed in the tenth operation pattern of the first variable winning device 4000 and the distribution device 4850. In this case, the player can receive the payout of about 600 prize balls and, rarely, can acquire the right to shift to the probabilistic state (high probability state) of the special symbol.

As described above, when a big hit is obtained in the special symbol 2 lottery (lottery based on the entry into the second entrance 640), there is a 95% probability that the first variable winning device 4000 and the sorting device 4850 will be the sixth. It operates according to the operation pattern. At this time, since the right to shift to the probabilistic state (high probability state) of the special symbol can be almost certainly acquired, the special symbol 1 lottery (lottery based on the entry into the first entrance 64) It is advantageous for the player as compared with the case of a big hit. Therefore, in order to win a big hit in the special symbol 2 lottery (lottery based on the entry into the second entrance 640), the player plays a right-handed game in the probability variation state (high probability state) of the special symbol. Do.

During the probability change of the special symbol, the hit probability of the normal symbol increases, the fluctuation time of the normal symbol becomes shorter (3 seconds), and the opening time of the electric accessory 640a becomes longer when the normal symbol hits (1). Seconds x 2 times). Therefore, it becomes easy to put the ball into the second entrance 640, and it becomes easy to draw the special symbol 2. Therefore, once it is possible to shift to the probabilistic state of the special symbol, it is easy to become a big hit of the special symbol, and when it becomes a big hit, the jackpot f (almost certainly shifts to the probabilistic state (high probability state) of the special symbol). Since the probabilistic state of the special symbol, which tends to be a big hit that can acquire the right of the player, is likely to be repeated, it is easy for the player to win a large number of prize balls. As a result, it is possible to make the player play the game while strongly expecting the player to shift to the probabilistic state of the special symbol, so that the player's interest in the game can be improved.

Next, with reference to FIGS. 41 to 43, the opening patterns of the first specific winning opening 1000a and the specific area 4830 in the present embodiment will be described. FIG. 41 (a) is a diagram showing a timed change of the first specific winning opening 1000a and the specific area 4830 in the sixth operation pattern, and FIG. 41 (b) is a diagram showing the first specific winning in the seventh operation pattern. It is a figure which showed the timekeeping change of the mouth 1000a and the specific area 4830.

When the jackpot is determined in the special figure hit determination, the MPU 201 (see FIG. 4) starts controlling the determined type of jackpot game after the end of the special figure variation display (symbol variation effect). Hereinafter, operation control of the opening / closing plate 1300 and the distribution operation member 4851, which is performed when the big hit game is given, will be described.

<When operating with the 6th operation pattern>
When the jackpot type is jackpot D or jackpot f, the MPU 201 drives and controls the solenoids 1510 and 4852 so that the opening / closing plate 1300 and the distribution operation member 4851 operate based on the sixth operation pattern.

When the special figure variation display (design variation effect) is completed, the MPU 201 closes the opening / closing plate 1300 and the distribution operation member 4851 until the timer means (not shown) elapses the predetermined opening time OP (10 seconds). The solenoids 1510 and 4852 are driven and controlled so as to be held, and the first round game R is started after the opening time OP elapses.

That is, the solenoid 1510 is driven and controlled so that the first operating time T1 (maximum 30 seconds) is measured by the timer means and the opening / closing plate 1300 is displaced from the closed state to the open state to open the first specific winning opening 1000a. Then, the opening / closing plate 1300 is allowed to operate for a long time.

Then, in the first round game R, the lapse of the round end condition (round game time (30 seconds, which is the maximum value of the first operating time T1) or the specified number (10 in the present embodiment) of pachinko balls When the winning) is satisfied, the solenoid 1510 is driven and controlled so as to displace the opening / closing plate 1300 to the closed state and close the first specific winning opening 1000a, and the round game R of the first round ends.

When the round game R of the first round is completed, the timer means drives and controls the solenoid 1510 to keep the opening / closing plate 1300 in the closed state until the first interval time Int1 (2.0 seconds) between rounds elapses, and the round After the lapse of the first interval time Int1, the second round game R is started.

In the second round, as in the start of the first round, the first operation time T1 (maximum 30 seconds) is measured by the timer means, and the opening / closing plate 1300 is displaced from the closed state to the open state to specify the first. The solenoid 1510 is driven and controlled so as to open the winning opening 1000a, and the opening / closing plate 1300 is operated for a long time.

Then, when the round end condition (round game time (30 seconds, which is the maximum value of the first operating time T1) elapses or a specified number of pachinko balls are won) is satisfied in the second round game R. The solenoid 1510 is driven and controlled so as to displace the opening / closing plate 1300 to the closed state and close the first specific winning opening 1000a, and the second round game R ends.

When the second round game R is completed, the timer means drives and controls the solenoid 1510 to keep the opening / closing plate 1300 in the closed state until the first interval time Int1 (2.0 seconds) between rounds elapses, and the round After the lapse of the first interval time Int1, the third round game R is started.

In the third round, as in the start of the second round, the first operation time T1 (maximum 30 seconds) is measured by the timer means, and the opening / closing plate 1300 is displaced from the closed state to the open state to specify the first. The solenoid 1510 is driven and controlled so as to open the winning opening 1000a, and the opening / closing plate 1300 is operated for a long time.

Then, when the round end condition (round game time (30 seconds, which is the maximum value of the first operating time T1) elapses or a specified number of pachinko balls are won) is satisfied in the third round game R. The solenoid 1510 is driven and controlled so as to displace the opening / closing plate 1300 to the closed state and close the first specific winning opening 1000a, and the third round game R ends.

When the third round game R is completed, the timer means drives and controls the solenoid 1510 to keep the opening / closing plate 1300 in the closed state until the second interval time Int2 (1.0 seconds) between rounds elapses, and the round After the lapse of the second interval time Int2, the fourth round game R is started.

In the fourth round, unlike the start of the other rounds, the second operating time T2 (maximum 3 seconds) is measured by the timer means, and the opening / closing plate 1300 is displaced from the closed state to the open state to win the first specific prize. The solenoid 1510 is driven and controlled so as to open the mouth 1000a, and the opening / closing plate 1300 is operated for a long time.

When the opening / closing plate 1300 is displaced from the closed state to the open state, the MPU 201 measures the timer means (not shown) until a predetermined third opening time OP3 (32.3 seconds) elapses, and the third opening time After the elapse of OP3, the distribution operation member 4851 is moved to the open position for a predetermined time (0.1 seconds in the present embodiment), and after the elapse of the predetermined time, the solenoid is used to hold the distribution operation member 4851 in the closed state again. The 4852 is driven and controlled so that the distribution operation member 4851 operates for a short time. This predetermined time is set as a time during which the ball is not allowed to pass through the specific area 4830.

Then, when the round end condition (round game time (3 seconds, which is the maximum value of the second operating time T2) elapses or a specified number of pachinko balls are won) is satisfied in the fourth round game R. The solenoid 1510 is driven and controlled so as to displace the opening / closing plate 1300 to the closed state and close the first specific winning opening 1000a, and the round game R of the fourth round ends.

Here, the second operating time T2 is set as a time during which a predetermined number of balls cannot be inserted into the first specific winning opening 1000a. That is, in the present embodiment, one ball can be fired at the fastest interval of 0.6 seconds, but it takes 6 seconds to fire a predetermined number of balls. That is, it is usually estimated that only about 5 balls can be inserted into the first specific winning opening 1000a in 3 seconds. Therefore, the round game R of the fourth round ends exclusively in 3 seconds, which is the maximum value of the second operating time T2.

On the other hand, in this operation pattern, only five balls are discharged from the discharge port 1150 in the interval immediately before the fourth round. Therefore, since the storage flow path 1231 is filled with about 5 winnings possible in 3 seconds, the discomfort given to the player by the time of the round game R in the 4th round being shorter than that in the other rounds is suppressed. can do.

When the round game R of the fourth round is completed, the timer means drives and controls the solenoid 1510 so as to keep the opening / closing plate 1300 in the closed state until the first interval time Int1 (2.0 seconds) between rounds elapses, and the round After the lapse of the first interval time Int1, the fifth round (special round) round game R is started.

In the fifth round, the solenoid 1510 is used to start measuring the first operating time T1 (maximum 30 seconds) by the timer means and to displace the opening / closing plate 1300 from the closed state to the open state to open the first specified winning opening 1000a. Is driven and controlled so that the opening / closing plate 1300 operates for a long time.

When the opening / closing plate 1300 is displaced from the closed state to the open state, the MPU 201 closes the distribution operation member 4851 until the timer means (not shown) elapses the predetermined second opening time OP2 (0.3 seconds). After the second opening time OP2 has elapsed, the distribution operation member 4851 is moved to the open position for a predetermined time (about 2 seconds in this embodiment), and after the predetermined time has elapsed, the distribution operation member 4851 is moved again. The solenoid 4852 is driven and controlled so as to be held in the closed state, and the distribution operation member 4851 is operated for a long time.

Then, when the round end condition (round game time (30 seconds, which is the maximum value of the first operating time T1) elapses or a specified number of pachinko balls are won) is satisfied in the fifth round game R. The solenoid 1510 is driven and controlled so as to displace the opening / closing plate 1300 to the closed state and close the first specific winning opening 1000a, and the fifth round game R ends.

In the second opening time OP2, when the number of balls discharged from the storage flow path 1231 is less than 7 (when the number of stored balls is up to 6), all the discharged balls are the probability fluctuation determination flow path 4820. When the number of balls discharged from the storage flow path 1231 is 7 or more (when the number of stored balls is 7 or more), at least one of the discharged balls is used, which is longer than the time required to pass through. The time is set shorter than the time required for the sphere to pass through the probability fluctuation determination flow path 4820.

In the present embodiment, since the fourth round round game R is started with five balls remaining in the storage flow path 1231, even if the fourth round round game ends in the second operating time T2, The number of spheres stored in the storage flow path 1231 can be easily increased to 7 or more. Therefore, since the distribution operation member 4851 can be opened while the sphere remains in the probability fluctuation determination flow path 4820, the remaining sphere can flow down to the specific region 4830. Therefore, the player can acquire the right to shift to the probabilistic state (high probability state) of the special symbol.

Then, when the fifth round game R is completed, the timer means holds the opening / closing plate 1300 and the distribution operation member 4851 in the closed state until the first interval time Int1 between rounds and the ending time ED (11 seconds) elapse. The solenoids 1510 and 4852 are driven and controlled, and the jackpot game ends with the passage of the time.

Here, unlike the prior art, in this operation pattern, it is not necessary to close the opening / closing plate 1300 while the distribution operation member 4851 is closed before the operation in the fifth round round game R. , The opening / closing plate 1300 can be operated without any discomfort. This will be described below.

In the prior art, if a predetermined number of balls win a prize in the first specific winning opening 1000a and the round game R ends before the operation of the distribution operation member 4581 starts, the distribution operation member 4851 is opened. However, there is a risk that the ball cannot be won in the first specific winning opening 1000a and the player cannot acquire the right to shift to the probabilistic state (high probability state) of the special symbol. In order to prevent this, it was necessary to close the opening / closing plate 1300 while the distribution operating member 4851 was closed before the operation (it was opened twice in one round).

On the other hand, in the present embodiment, it is a game property that switches whether or not the ball that has won the first specific winning opening 1000a can be entered into the specific area 4830 by the round game R of the round immediately before the fifth round. When the distribution operation member 4851 is in the open state even if the ball cannot enter the first specific winning opening 1000a while the distribution operation member 4851 is closed before the operation. Since the ball heading for the specific area 4830 has already won the first variable winning device 4000, the player can acquire the right to shift to the probabilistic state (high probability state) of the special symbol without any problem.

Therefore, in this operation pattern, even while the distribution operation member 4851 is closed before the operation in the fifth round game R, the opening / closing plate 1300 is opened to operate the opening / closing plate 1300. On the other hand, while preventing the player from feeling uncomfortable, it is possible to prevent the player from being unable to acquire the right to shift to the probabilistic state (high probability state) of the special symbol depending on the winning mode. can do.

Further, since the ball that has won the first specific winning opening 1000a in the fifth round game R stays in the storage flow path 1231 during the first operating time T1, the first round game R in the fifth round It is possible to prevent the ball winning in the specific winning opening 1000a from entering the probability variation determination flow path 4820 while the distribution operation member 4851 is in the open state. As a result, the player can acquire the right to shift to the probabilistic state (high probability state) of the special symbol depending on the mode of winning the first specific winning opening 1000a in the round game R of the fifth round (special round). It is possible to prevent a problem that whether or not it can be done changes.

<When operating in the 7th operation pattern>
When the jackpot type is a jackpot game of jackpot E, the MPU 201 drives and controls the solenoids 1510 and 4852 so that the opening / closing plate 1300 and the distribution operation member 4851 operate based on the seventh operation pattern. Since it is the same as the case of the jackpot D described above until the end of the third round game R, the description thereof will be omitted. Further, the driving mode of the distribution device 4850 is the same as that of the sixth operation pattern.

When the third round game R is completed, the timer means drives and controls the solenoid 1510 to keep the opening / closing plate 1300 in the closed state until the first interval time Int1 (2.0 seconds) between rounds elapses, and the round After the lapse of the first interval time Int1, the fourth round game R is started.

In the fourth round, unlike the start of the other rounds, the second operating time T2 (maximum 3 seconds) is measured by the timer means, and the opening / closing plate 1300 is displaced from the closed state to the open state to win the first specific prize. The solenoid 1510 is driven and controlled so as to open the mouth 1000a, and the opening / closing plate 1300 is operated for a long time.

When the opening / closing plate 1300 is displaced from the closed state to the open state, the MPU 201 measures the timer means (not shown) until a predetermined third opening time OP3 (32.3 seconds) elapses, and the third opening time After the elapse of OP3, the distribution operation member 4851 is moved to the open position for a predetermined time (0.1 seconds in the present embodiment), and after the elapse of the predetermined time, the solenoid is used to hold the distribution operation member 4851 in the closed state again. The 4852 is driven and controlled so that the distribution operation member 4851 operates for a short time. It should be noted that this short-time operation is set as an operation that does not allow the ball to pass through the specific area 4830.

Then, when the round end condition (round game time (3 seconds, which is the maximum value of the second operating time T2) elapses or a specified number of pachinko balls are won) is satisfied in the fourth round game R. The solenoid 1510 is driven and controlled so as to displace the opening / closing plate 1300 to the closed state and close the first specific winning opening 1000a, and the round game R of the fourth round ends.

Here, the second operating time T2 is set as a time during which a predetermined number of balls cannot be inserted into the first specific winning opening 1000a. That is, in the present embodiment, one ball can be fired at the fastest interval of 0.6 seconds, but it takes 6 seconds to fire a predetermined number of balls. That is, it is usually estimated that only about 5 balls can be inserted into the first specific winning opening 1000a in 3 seconds. Therefore, the round game R of the fourth round ends exclusively in 3 seconds, which is the maximum value of the second operating time T2.

On the other hand, in this operation pattern, 10 balls (global) are discharged from the discharge port 1150 in the interval immediately before the fourth round. Therefore, the storage flow path 1231 is not filled by about 5 winnings possible in 3 seconds, and the opening / closing plate 1300 is displaced to the closed state with the winning balls remaining in the storage flow path 1231 in 3 seconds. ..

When the round game R of the fourth round is completed, the timer means drives and controls the solenoid 1510 so as to keep the opening / closing plate 1300 in the closed state until the first interval time Int1 (2.0 seconds) between rounds elapses, and the round After the lapse of the first interval time Int1, the fifth round (special round) round game R is started.

In the fifth round, the solenoid 1510 is used to start measuring the first operating time T1 (maximum 30 seconds) by the timer means and to displace the opening / closing plate 1300 from the closed state to the open state to open the first specified winning opening 1000a. Is driven and controlled so that the opening / closing plate 1300 operates for a long time.

When the opening / closing plate 1300 is displaced from the closed state to the open state, the MPU 201 closes the distribution operation member 4851 until the timer means (not shown) elapses the predetermined second opening time OP2 (0.3 seconds). After the second opening time OP2 has elapsed, the distribution operation member 4851 is moved to the open position for a predetermined time (about 2 seconds in this embodiment), and after the predetermined time has elapsed, the distribution operation member 4851 is moved again. The solenoid 4852 is driven and controlled so as to be held in the closed state, and the distribution operation member 4851 is operated for a long time.

Then, when the round end condition (round game time (30 seconds, which is the maximum value of the first operating time T1) elapses or a specified number of pachinko balls are won) is satisfied in the fifth round game R. The solenoid 1510 is driven and controlled so as to displace the opening / closing plate 1300 to the closed state and close the first specific winning opening 1000a, and the fifth round game R ends.

In this operation pattern, about 5 balls are ejected from the discharge port 1150 at the interval immediately before the round game R of the 5th round, so for some rare reason, 8 or more balls in 3 seconds win the first specific prize. Unless the mouth 1000a is won, the distribution operation member 4851 is displaced after all the discharged balls have passed through the probability fluctuation determination flow path 4820.

Therefore, when the distribution operation member 4851 is in the open state, the sphere does not remain in the probability fluctuation determination flow path 4820, so that the sphere does not pass through the specific region 4830. Therefore, the player cannot acquire the right to shift to the probabilistic state (high probability state) of the special symbol.

Then, when the fifth round game R is completed, the timer means holds the opening / closing plate 1300 and the distribution operation member 4851 in the closed state until the first interval time Int1 between rounds and the ending time ED (11 seconds) elapse. The solenoids 1510 and 4852 are driven and controlled, and the jackpot game ends with the passage of the time.

In this operation pattern, the operation mode of the opening / closing plate 1300 and the distribution operation member 4851 in the fifth round game R is the same as the above-described sixth operation pattern. Therefore, in this operation pattern as well, the sixth operation pattern It is possible to produce the same effect as the effect in.

Here, the difference between the sixth operation pattern and the seventh operation pattern is whether or not the balls can be stored up to the vicinity of the full storage flow path 1231 during the fourth round game R. That is, it is possible to predict whether or not the player can subsequently acquire the right to shift to the probabilistic state (high probability state) of the special symbol due to the difference in the accumulation state of the balls, so that the balls are accumulated in the storage flow path 1231. It is possible to improve the attention to the sphere. Thereby, the attention to the first variable winning device 4000 can be improved.

In addition, in the sixth operation pattern, if three or more balls enter in the round game R of the fourth round, it is almost certain that the right to shift to the probabilistic state (high probability state) of the special symbol is acquired. However, since the round game R time is short, the more the player is accustomed to the game, the more he fails to acquire the right to shift to the probabilistic state (high probability state) of the special symbol even in the sixth operation pattern. An easy situation is formed.

That is, the more unfamiliar the player is, the easier it is to play the game by leaving it unattended during the jackpot game, while the more accustomed to the game, the easier it is to avoid leaving it unattended to avoid wasting balls between rounds during the jackpot and to stop between rounds. Is the difference that arises from.

In detail, in the case of an untouched game, a plurality of balls are always flowing down near the opening / closing plate 1300, and the balls are awarded to the first specific winning opening 1000a immediately after the start of the fourth round game R. Since it occurs, there is ample room for three or more balls to enter in three seconds. Therefore, an unfamiliar player can acquire the right to shift to the probabilistic state (high probability state) of the special symbol without any problem.

On the other hand, if the ball is stopped between rounds so as to prevent the ball from flowing down near the opening / closing plate 1300 during the interval period by starting the launch after the start of the fourth round game R, the wasted ball is certainly Although it can be suppressed, the ball does not reach the vicinity of the opening / closing plate 1300 until a while after the start of the fourth round game R (for example, two seconds have not passed). Therefore, it becomes necessary to insert three or more balls in the remaining one second, and it becomes difficult to acquire the right to shift to the probabilistic state (high probability state) of the special symbol. Therefore, it is possible to encourage a player who is accustomed to the game to launch the game unattended during the jackpot game.

As described above, the sixth operation pattern has an inherent possibility that the profit obtained by a person who is more accustomed to the game is reduced depending on the mode of launching. Therefore, regardless of whether the player is unfamiliar or accustomed to the game, it is possible to induce the player to play the game unattended during the jackpot, and the fairness of the profit obtained by the game can be guaranteed.

On the other hand, it is possible to provide a player who, after grasping the above-mentioned risks, still stops between rounds, a jackpot game that requires concentration, which cannot be experienced with other pachinko machines 10. .. That is, the number of wasted balls is reduced by performing a round stop striking in which the ball flows back into the first specific winning opening 1000a immediately after the opening of the first specific winning opening 1000a in the fourth round and the launch is started. However, it is also possible to acquire the right to shift the special symbol to the probabilistic state (high probability state). In this case, the game is stopped between rounds before the end of the third round game R, and the launch is started before the end of the third round game R. That is, it is necessary to perform an advanced calculation of starting the launch while anticipating the entry timing while considering the randomness of the flow of the ball entering during the third round game R. Therefore, when the timing at which the ball that has started launching reaches the vicinity of the first specific winning opening 1000a is as calculated, the interest of the player can be improved.

FIG. 42 (a) is a diagram showing the timed change of the first specific winning opening 1000a and the specific region 4830 in the eighth operation pattern, and FIG. 42 (b) is a diagram showing the first specific winning in the ninth operation pattern. It is a figure which showed the timekeeping change of the mouth 1000a and the specific area 4830.

When the jackpot is determined in the special figure hit determination, the MPU 201 (see FIG. 4) starts controlling the determined type of jackpot game after the end of the special figure variation display (symbol variation effect). Hereinafter, operation control of the opening / closing plate 1300 and the distribution operation member 4851, which is performed when the big hit game is given, will be described.

<When operating with the 8th operation pattern>
In the case of a jackpot game in which the jackpot type is jackpot F, the MPU 201 drives and controls the solenoids 1510 and 4852 so that the opening / closing plate 1300 and the distribution operation member 4851 operate based on the eighth operation pattern. Since it is the same as the case of the jackpot D described above until the end of the third round game R, the description thereof will be omitted.

When the third round game R is completed, the timer means drives and controls the solenoid 1510 to keep the opening / closing plate 1300 in the closed state until the second interval time Int2 (1.0 seconds) between rounds elapses, and the round After the lapse of the second interval time Int2, the fourth round game R is started.

In the fourth round, the solenoid 1510 is used to start measuring the first operating time T1 (maximum 30 seconds) by the timer means and to displace the opening / closing plate 1300 from the closed state to the open state to open the first specific winning opening 1000a. Is driven and controlled so that the opening / closing plate 1300 operates for a long time.

When the opening / closing plate 1300 is displaced from the closed state to the open state, the MPU 201 closes the distribution operation member 4851 until the timer means (not shown) elapses the predetermined third opening time OP3 (32.3 seconds). After the lapse of the third opening time OP3, the distribution operation member 4851 is moved to the open position for a predetermined time (about 2 seconds in this embodiment), and after the lapse of the predetermined time, the distribution operation member 4851 is moved again. The solenoid 4852 is driven and controlled so as to be held in the closed state, and the distribution operation member 4851 is operated for a long time.

Then, when the round end condition (round game time (3 seconds, which is the maximum value of the second operating time T2) elapses or a specified number of pachinko balls are won) is satisfied in the fourth round game R. The solenoid 1510 is driven and controlled so as to displace the opening / closing plate 1300 to the closed state and close the first specific winning opening 1000a, and the round game R of the fourth round ends.

In this operation pattern, only five balls are discharged from the discharge port 1150 in the interval immediately before the fourth round. Therefore, in the fourth round round game R, a specified number of balls cannot be won in the first specific winning opening 1000a, so that the fourth round round game R is 30 seconds, which is the maximum value of the first operating time T1. It ends with the passage of.

When the round game R of the fourth round is completed, the timer means drives and controls the solenoid 1510 so as to keep the opening / closing plate 1300 in the closed state until the first interval time Int1 (2.0 seconds) between rounds elapses, and the round After the lapse of the first interval time Int1, the fifth round (special round) round game R is started.

In the fifth round, the solenoid 1510 is used to start measuring the first operating time T1 (maximum 30 seconds) by the timer means and to displace the opening / closing plate 1300 from the closed state to the open state to open the first specified winning opening 1000a. Is driven and controlled so that the opening / closing plate 1300 operates for a long time.

When the opening / closing plate 1300 is displaced from the closed state to the open state, the MPU 201 closes the distribution operation member 4851 until the timer means (not shown) elapses the predetermined second opening time OP2 (0.3 seconds). After the second opening time OP2 has elapsed, the distribution operation member 4851 is moved to the open position for a predetermined time (about 2 seconds in this embodiment), and after the predetermined time has elapsed, the distribution operation member 4851 is moved again. The solenoid 4852 is driven and controlled so as to be held in the closed state, and the distribution operation member 4851 is operated for a long time. It should be noted that this opening operation is performed at the same time as the opening operation due to the passage of the third opening time OP3.

Then, when the round end condition (round game time (30 seconds, which is the maximum value of the first operating time T1) elapses or a specified number of pachinko balls are won) is satisfied in the fifth round game R. The solenoid 1510 is driven and controlled so as to displace the opening / closing plate 1300 to the closed state and close the first specific winning opening 1000a, and the fifth round game R ends.

The third opening time OP3 is an interval immediately after the fourth round game R continues at the maximum value of the first operating time T1, and when 7 or more balls are discharged from the discharge port 1150 (storage). (When the number is 7 or more), the time is set to be shorter than that at least a part of the discharged spheres passes through the probability fluctuation determination flow path 4820.

In this operation pattern, the fourth round round game R is started with five balls remaining in the storage flow path 1231, so that the fourth round round game R waits until the maximum value of the first operation time T1. If the number of balls stored in the storage flow path 1231 is 7 or more, the distribution operation member 4851 may be opened with the balls remaining in the probability fluctuation determination flow path 4820. it can. Therefore, the remaining ball can be made to flow down to the specific area 4830, and the player can acquire the right to shift to the probabilistic state (high probability state) of the special symbol.

Then, when the fifth round game R is completed, the timer means holds the opening / closing plate 1300 and the distribution operation member 4851 in the closed state until the first interval time Int1 between rounds and the ending time ED (11 seconds) elapse. The solenoids 1510 and 4852 are driven and controlled, and the jackpot game ends with the passage of the time.

In this operation pattern, the operation mode of the opening / closing plate 1300 and the distribution operation member 4851 in the fifth round game R is the same as the above-described sixth operation pattern. Therefore, in this operation pattern as well, the sixth operation pattern It is possible to produce the same effect as the effect in.

<When operating with the 9th operation pattern>
When the jackpot type is a jackpot game of jackpot G, the MPU 201 drives and controls the solenoids 1510 and 4852 so that the opening / closing plate 1300 and the distribution operation member 4851 operate based on the ninth operation pattern. Since it is the same as the case of the jackpot D described above until the end of the third round game R, the description thereof will be omitted. Further, the driving mode of the distribution device 4850 is the same as that of the eighth operation pattern.

When the third round game R is completed, the timer means drives and controls the solenoid 1510 to keep the opening / closing plate 1300 in the closed state until the first interval time Int1 (2.0 seconds) between rounds elapses, and the round After the lapse of the first interval time Int1, the fourth round game R is started.

In the fourth round, the solenoid 1510 is used to start measuring the first operating time T1 (maximum 30 seconds) by the timer means and to displace the opening / closing plate 1300 from the closed state to the open state to open the first specific winning opening 1000a. Is driven and controlled so that the opening / closing plate 1300 operates for a long time.

When the opening / closing plate 1300 is displaced from the closed state to the open state, the MPU 201 closes the distribution operation member 4851 until the timer means (not shown) elapses the predetermined third opening time OP3 (32.3 seconds). After the lapse of the third opening time OP3, the distribution operation member 4851 is moved to the open position for a predetermined time (about 2 seconds in this embodiment), and after the lapse of the predetermined time, the distribution operation member 4851 is moved again. The solenoid 4852 is driven and controlled so as to be held in the closed state, and the distribution operation member 4851 is operated for a long time.

Then, when the round end condition (round game time (30 seconds, which is the maximum value of the first operating time T1) elapses or a specified number of pachinko balls are won) is satisfied in the fourth round game R. The solenoid 1510 is driven and controlled so as to displace the opening / closing plate 1300 to the closed state and close the first specific winning opening 1000a, and the round game R of the fourth round ends.

In this operation pattern, only five balls are discharged from the discharge port 1150 in the interval immediately before the fourth round. Therefore, in the fourth round round game R, a specified number of balls cannot be won in the first specific winning opening 1000a, so that the fourth round round game R is 30 seconds, which is the maximum value of the first operating time T1. It ends with the passage of.

When the round game R of the fourth round is completed, the timer means drives and controls the solenoid 1510 so as to keep the opening / closing plate 1300 in the closed state until the first interval time Int1 (2.0 seconds) between rounds elapses, and the round After the lapse of the first interval time Int1, the fifth round (special round) round game R is started.

In the fifth round, the solenoid 1510 is used to start measuring the first operating time T1 (maximum 30 seconds) by the timer means and to displace the opening / closing plate 1300 from the closed state to the open state to open the first specified winning opening 1000a. Is driven and controlled so that the opening / closing plate 1300 operates for a long time.

When the opening / closing plate 1300 is displaced from the closed state to the open state, the MPU 201 closes the distribution operation member 4851 until the timer means (not shown) elapses the predetermined second opening time OP2 (0.3 seconds). After the second opening time OP2 elapses, the distribution operation member 4851 is moved to the open position for a predetermined time (about 0.2 seconds in this embodiment), and after the elapse of the predetermined time, the distribution operation member 4851 The solenoid 4852 is driven and controlled so as to keep the closed state again, so that the distribution operation member 4851 operates for a short time. It should be noted that this short-time operation is set as an operation that does not allow the ball to pass through the specific area 4830.

Then, when the round end condition (round game time (30 seconds, which is the maximum value of the first operating time T1) elapses or a specified number of pachinko balls are won) is satisfied in the fifth round game R. The solenoid 1510 is driven and controlled so as to displace the opening / closing plate 1300 to the closed state and close the first specific winning opening 1000a, and the fifth round game R ends.

The third opening time OP3 is an interval immediately after the fourth round game R continues at the maximum value of the first operating time T1, and when 7 or more balls are discharged from the discharge port 1150 (storage). (When the number is 7 or more), the time is set to be shorter than that at least a part of the discharged spheres passes through the probability fluctuation determination flow path 4820.

In this operation pattern, since the fourth round round game R is started in a state where no balls remain in the storage flow path 1231, a specified number of balls are won in the first specific winning opening 1000a in the fourth round round game R. Can be made to. Therefore, it is possible to finish the fourth round game R without waiting for the maximum value of the first operating time T1. However, in many cases, when the fourth round game R is ended without waiting for the maximum value of the first operating time T1, as in the case where the fourth round game R is ended by winning a specified number of prizes. Immediately after that, the sphere discharged from the discharge port 1150 passes through the probability fluctuation determination flow path 4820, and then the distribution operation member 4851 is displaced.

On the other hand, if the distribution operation member 4851 waits for the fourth round game R to the maximum value of the first operation time T1 and ends, if the number of balls ejected in the interval immediately after that is 7 or more. The sphere can flow down to the specific area 4830. Therefore, the player does not rush to win the specified number of balls, but by having the first specified winning opening 1000a win the specified number of balls just before the end of the fourth round game R, the player has a special symbol. You can get the right to move to the probabilistic state (high probability state).

In addition, as another method, by ending the fifth round game R immediately after the fourth round at an appropriate timing, the ball discharged at the interval immediately after the fifth round game R is placed in a specific area. By letting it flow down, the player can acquire the right to shift to the probabilistic state (high probability state) of the special symbol.

As described above, according to this operation pattern, the player enters the probabilistic state (high probability state) of the special symbol at the discretion of the player (selection of the timing of winning the ball to the first specific winning opening 1000a). Whether or not you can acquire the right to transition can be different.

Then, when the fifth round game R is completed, the timer means holds the opening / closing plate 1300 and the distribution operation member 4851 in the closed state until the first interval time Int1 between rounds and the ending time ED (11 seconds) elapse. The solenoids 1510 and 4852 are driven and controlled, and the jackpot game ends with the passage of the time.

Here, the difference between the eighth operation pattern and the ninth operation pattern is whether or not the operation time of the fourth round game R is specified. When the operating time is specified (in the case of the eighth operating pattern), by continuing the ball entering the first specific winning opening 1000a, the player can play a special symbol no matter how the game is played. Since the right to shift to the probabilistic state (high probability state) can be acquired, the game can be played with peace of mind.

On the other hand, when the operating time is not specified (in the case of the ninth operating pattern), the player selects the operating time by himself / herself according to the game mode (when to make the first specific winning opening 1000a win the specified number of balls). You may be able to obtain the right to move to the probabilistic state (high probability state) of the special symbol by selecting). Therefore, it is possible to encourage the player to concentrate on the round game R, improve the attention to the ball flowing down the game area, and give the player an uplifting feeling of acquiring the probabilistic state by himself / herself. As a result, it is possible to improve the interest of the player.

The features of the sixth to ninth operation patterns are that the interval immediately after the third round round game R is shorter than usual, and the fourth round game is performed with the ball remaining in the storage flow path 1231. When R is started, it is easy to acquire the right to shift to the probabilistic state (high probability state) of the special symbol. That is, when the number of prize balls obtained in the fourth round game R is small, it is possible to realize a game property in which it is easier to acquire the right to shift to the probabilistic state (high probability state) of the special symbol.

On the other hand, if the interval immediately after the third round game R is long enough to eject the balls of the storage flow path 1231, the right to shift to the probabilistic state (high probability state) of the special symbol is granted. Hard to get. That is, when it is difficult to acquire the right to shift to the probabilistic state (high probability state) of the special symbol, it is possible to realize the playability that the prize balls obtained in the jackpot game are paid out more. As a result, it is possible to prepare a large number of balls to be launched by the player in the normal state to be continued later, so that it is possible to easily suppress the cash investment of the player.

Since these differences can be grasped by whether or not the ball remains in the storage flow path 1231 at the start of the fourth round, the player predicts the state after the jackpot game ends at the start of the fourth round game R. can do. And even in the case of an operation pattern in which it is difficult to obtain the right to shift to the probabilistic state (high probability state) of the special symbol, the right to shift to the probabilistic state (high probability state) of the special symbol depending on the mode of entering the ball. It is possible to obtain.

Here, in the present embodiment, it is possible to maintain the concentration of the player during the jackpot game by forcing the player to make a selection. That is, the game mode in which it is easy to acquire the right to shift to the probabilistic state (high probability state) of the special symbol is the opposite.

More specifically, in the case of the seventh operation pattern, in the fourth round game R, as many balls as possible are placed in the first specific winning opening 1000a before the second operation time T2 (maximum 3 seconds) elapses. By winning a prize, the possibility of acquiring the right to move to the probabilistic state (high probability state) of the special symbol increases (it is beneficial to win many balls from the beginning of the 4th round), while the first In the case of the operation pattern of 9, in the round game R of the fourth round, the period of the round game R is extended by waiting for the winning of the specified number of balls until just before the end of 30 seconds, which is the maximum value of the first operation time T1. This increases the possibility of acquiring the right to move to the probabilistic state (high probability state) of the special symbol (it is beneficial to suppress the winning of the ball at the start of the fourth round).

In this way, the possibility of acquiring the right to shift to the probabilistic state (high probability state) of the special symbol changes depending on the method of winning the ball in the round game R (the game mode selected by the player). Therefore, even if the jackpot game continues a plurality of times, it is possible to prevent the player from getting bored and maintain the concentration on the game.

FIG. 43 is a diagram showing a timed change of the first specific winning opening 1000a and the specific area 4830 in the tenth operation pattern.

When the jackpot is determined in the special figure hit determination, the MPU 201 (see FIG. 4) starts controlling the determined type of jackpot game after the end of the special figure variation display (symbol variation effect). Hereinafter, operation control of the opening / closing plate 1300 and the distribution operation member 4851, which is performed when the big hit game is given, will be described.

<When operating with the 10th operation pattern>
When the jackpot type is a jackpot game of jackpot g, the MPU 201 drives and controls the solenoids 1510 and 4852 so that the opening / closing plate 1300 and the distribution operation member 4851 operate based on the tenth operation pattern. Since it is the same as the case of the sixth operation pattern described above until the end of the fourth round game R, the description thereof will be omitted.

When the round game R of the fourth round is completed, the timer means drives and controls the solenoid 1510 to keep the opening / closing plate 1300 in the closed state until the second interval time Int2 (1.0 seconds) between rounds elapses, and the round After the lapse of the second interval time Int2, the fifth round (special round) round game R is started.

In the fifth round, the solenoid 1510 is used to start measuring the first operating time T1 (maximum 30 seconds) by the timer means and to displace the opening / closing plate 1300 from the closed state to the open state to open the first specified winning opening 1000a. Is driven and controlled so that the opening / closing plate 1300 operates for a long time.

When the opening / closing plate 1300 is displaced from the closed state to the open state, the MPU 201 closes the distribution operation member 4851 until the timer means (not shown) elapses the predetermined second opening time OP2 (0.3 seconds). After the second opening time OP2 elapses, the distribution operation member 4851 is moved to the open position for a predetermined time (about 0.2 seconds in this embodiment), and after the elapse of the predetermined time, the distribution operation member 4851 The solenoid 4852 is driven and controlled so as to keep the closed state again, so that the distribution operation member 4851 operates for a short time.

Then, when the round end condition (round game time (30 seconds, which is the maximum value of the first operating time T1) elapses or a specified number of pachinko balls are won) is satisfied in the fifth round game R. The solenoid 1510 is driven and controlled so as to displace the opening / closing plate 1300 to the closed state and close the first specific winning opening 1000a, and the fifth round game R ends.

In this operation pattern, since the opening operation of the distribution operation member 4851 after the lapse of the second opening time OP2 is a short time operation, basically, the ball cannot flow down to the specific region 4830.

Further, since the distribution operation member 4851 is opened during the fifth round game R, if the round game can be completed early, the ball that has won the first specific winning opening 1000a in the fifth round flows down to the specific area 4830. (For example, when the operation after the lapse of the third opening time OP3 is long), in this operation pattern, the fifth round game R starts with the ball remaining in the storage flow path 1231. Therefore, it is not possible to enter a specified number of balls, and it is not possible to end the fifth round game at an early stage. Therefore, it is not possible to allow the ball that has won the first specific winning opening 1000a in the fifth round game R to flow down to the specific area 4830.

Then, when the fifth round game R is completed, the timer means holds the opening / closing plate 1300 and the distribution operation member 4851 in the closed state until the first interval time Int1 between rounds and the ending time ED (11 seconds) elapse. The solenoids 1510 and 4852 are driven and controlled, and the jackpot game ends with the passage of the time.

In this operation pattern, the operation mode of the opening / closing plate 1300 and the distribution operation member 4851 in the fifth round game R has the same parts as the above-described sixth operation pattern. It is possible to achieve the same effect as the effect in the operation pattern of 6.

Here, the main difference between the sixth operation pattern and the tenth operation pattern in the first specific winning opening 1000a is the length of the interval immediately after the round game R in the fourth round. Since the patterns of the other parts are the same, it is difficult to grasp the difference, and it is possible to improve the concentration of the player who visually recognizes the operation pattern of the first variable winning device 4000.

The tenth operation pattern causes the ball to flow down to the specific region 4830 even if the storage flow path 1231 can be filled in the fourth round game R in relation to the sixth operation pattern and the seventh operation pattern. It differs in that it cannot be done.

That is, by mixing this operation pattern, the player is not relieved even if the balls can be fully stored in the storage flow path 1231 in the round game R of the fourth round, and the discharged balls are in a specific area. You can be prompted to see if you are passing 4830. That is, in the jackpot game, the stage of whether or not the balls can be stored in the storage flow path 1231 (first step) and the distribution operation member 4851 operate before the balls discharged from the storage flow path 1231 pass through. It can be divided into the stage of whether or not it is (second step), and attention can be paid to different points in each stage. As a result, it is possible to prevent the player from playing indiscriminately, and it is possible to improve the player's concentration.

Next, a fifth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 44 to 50. In the first embodiment, the case where the ball output corresponding to the jackpot type can be obtained regardless of the progress mode of the game in the probabilistic state (high probability state) of the special symbol has been described, but the first variable winning device in the fifth embodiment has been described. The 5000 includes a ball ejection adjusting device 5900 that makes it easier for a player to acquire a large number of balls as the number of fluctuations until a jackpot is acquired in a probabilistic state (high probability state) of a special symbol is smaller. The same parts as those of the above-described embodiments are designated by the same reference numerals, and the description thereof will be omitted.

FIG. 44 is a partial front view of the game board 13 according to the fifth embodiment, and FIG. 45 is a partial rear view of the game board 13. As shown in FIGS. 44 and 45, the first variable winning device 5000 arranged near the lower right corner of the game board 13 includes the main body member 2100, the lining front plate 2200, and the lining front plate 2200, as in the second embodiment. In addition to including the opening / closing plate 1300, the driving device 1500, and the regulating member 2600, the power transmission member 5400 slightly different from the second embodiment, the second variable winning device 5800, and the newly introduced in this embodiment, It is mainly provided with a ball ejection adjusting device 5900 that adjusts the ball ejection by allowing the ball entering the second ball entry port 640 to enter the storage flow path 1231 through the communication hole 5920.

The power transmission member 5400 includes a time difference forming portion 5423 extending downward from the lower end portion of the rotating tip portion 1421 of the extending portion 1420 along the shape of the rotating tip portion 1421.

As shown in FIG. 45, the lower tip of the time difference forming portion 5423 extends to a position where it comes into contact with the engaging portion 1333 of the closing opening / closing plate 1300 in the non-excited state of the solenoid 1510.

In addition to the configuration described above in the second embodiment, the second variable winning device 5800 has an intervening rod portion 5850 with a slightly added shape and a transmission rod portion 2860 capable of sliding in the vertical direction on the left side of the rear view. By being pushed down to the branched portion of the intervening rod portion 5850 (the rear view L-shaped portion added to the configuration of the intervening rod portion 2850 of the second embodiment), it is arranged so as to be in contact with the movable closing member 5931 of the ball ejection adjusting device 5900. A pressing action unit 5870 is provided.

The ball exit adjusting device 5900 is formed and stored through a flow passage forming portion 5910 that allows a ball that has entered the second entry port 640 to flow down, and a thin plate member 1110 of the main body member 2100 at the lower end portion of the flow passage forming portion 5910. Mainly, a communication hole 5920 arranged in a manner (opening diameter, arrangement) capable of flowing a sphere into the flow path 1231, and an opening / closing member 5930 that opens and closes the communication hole 5920 in conjunction with the drive of the solenoids 1510 and 2810. Prepare for. The flow passage forming portion 5910 is arranged so as to pass through the back side (front side of the paper surface of FIG. 45) of the second variable winning device 5800, and is illustrated by an imaginary line for easy understanding. And the illustration of the middle part is omitted.

The flow passage forming portion 5910 is a bifurcated flow path through which a ball entering the second entry port 640 flows down, and the opening at the lower end is arranged to face the communication hole 5920 and the ball is arranged to the communication hole 5920. After the number of adjusting flow paths 5911 formed so as to be able to flow in and the number of balls stored in the adjusting flow path 5911 exceeds the specified number (30 in this embodiment), the balls further enter the second entry port 640. It is mainly provided with a surplus ball discharge flow path 5915 for discharging the ball to the ball discharge path (not shown).

The adjustment flow path 5911 is a deceleration flow path 5912 formed as a back view inverted U-shaped flow path that is curved by half a turn near the lower end portion, and a second entry port 640 from the upper end portion of the deceleration flow path 5912. It mainly includes a drop flow path 5913 extending in the vertical direction toward the rear.

Due to the shape of the deceleration flow path 5912, the load applied to the sphere discharged from the communication hole 5920 from the subsequent spheres staying in the deceleration flow path 5912 in the opening direction of the communication hole 5920 is reduced regardless of the number of spheres staying. be able to. That is, the sphere discharged from the communication hole 5920 is loaded by the weight of the subsequent sphere from the subsequent sphere, but the deceleration flow path 5912 has a gentle inclination (near horizontal inclination) near the communication hole 5920. Therefore, the influence of the load due to its own weight can be reduced. Therefore, regardless of the number of spheres staying, the speed at which the sphere immediately before the communication hole 5920 is discharged from the communication hole 5920 can be made uniform, and the load applied from the sphere to the opening / closing member 5930 can be made uniform.

Since the falling flow path 5913 extends in the vertical direction, the flowing ball is not decelerated and falls freely. Therefore, when the balls enter the second entry port 640 in a row, the former ball is decelerated earlier than the latter ball, and the flow of the latter ball is obstructed, so that the latter ball is erroneously entered. It is possible to prevent the ball from entering the surplus ball discharge flow path 5915.

In the present embodiment, the adjusting flow path 5911 accumulates balls in order from the front of the communication hole 5920, and when the number of retained balls reaches 30, the upper end of the 30th ball is the surplus ball discharge flow path 5915. The flow path length is designed to exceed the lower end of the inlet opening. Therefore, after the 31st ball, the ball enters the surplus ball discharge flow path 5915. In other words, a maximum of 30 balls stay in front of the communication hole 5920.

In the present embodiment, as will be described later, after the jackpot game is completed, the game shifts to a high probability state of 30 rotations. During this period, the ball is likely to enter the second entrance 640, and the player can aim for the next big hit while suppressing the loss of the ball by advancing the game by the right-handed game. On the other hand, since the ball that has entered the second entry port 640 enters the adjustment flow path 5911, it stays in the adjustment flow path 5911 from the start of the high probability state to the end of the high probability state. The number of spheres increases.

The opening / closing member 5930 is arranged at a position protruding inward of the communication hole 5920 when the solenoids 1510 and 2810 are not excited, and the opening is closed below the outer shape of the sphere, while one of the solenoids 1510 and 2810 is excited. Along with this, the movable closing member 5931 arranged at a position retracted to the outside of the communication hole 5920, the movable closing member 5931, and the tip member 1520 of the drive device 1500 are connected and can be moved in the left-right direction by driving the solenoid 1510. A connecting rod portion 593 supported by the thin plate member 1110, and a slide rail portion 5933 disposed at the tip of the connecting rod portion 5932 and supporting the movable closing member 5931 so as to be movable up and down relative to the connecting rod portion 593. Mainly includes an elastic spring 5934 having one end disposed on the connecting rod portion 5932 and applying an ascending urging force to the movable closing member 5931.

46 (a) and 46 (b) are cross-sectional views of the first variable winning device 5000 on the XLVI-XLVI line of FIG. 45. FIG. 46 (a) shows a state in which the communication hole 5920 is open, and FIG. 46 (b) shows a state in which the communication hole 5920 is closed.

As shown in FIG. 46 (a), when the movable closing member 5931 is retracted and a ball can flow into and stay in the storage flow path 1231 from the communication hole 5920, up to the third ball AP53 flows into the storage flow path 1231. However, the fourth ball AP54 is fixed at a position where it cannot escape from the communication hole 5920.

In the jackpot game, a plurality of balls IP51 (only one ball is shown in FIG. 46) that have passed through the first specific winning opening 1000a or the second specific winning opening 2255a in this state flows into the storage flow path 1231, so that the communication hole The ball AP54, which is kept at a position where it does not come out of the 5920, is filled with the ball IP51 into which the space for entering the storage channel 1231 is filled. Therefore, the ball kept in a position where it cannot escape from the communication hole 5920 does not flow into the storage flow path 1231 even after that, and is maintained in the same position.

As shown in FIG. 46 (b), as the solenoids 1510 and 2810 are de-energized and the regulating member 2600 changes to the discharged state, the movable closing member 5931 moves from the overhang adjustment flow path 5911 to the storage flow path 1231. The inflow of balls is regulated.

When the discharge of the ball from the storage flow path 1231 is completed, the state is switched to the state shown in FIG. Spheres flow into the storage channel 1231.

In the jackpot game, as described above, the inflow of balls from the adjustment flow path 5911 into the storage flow path 1231 is repeated, and the inflow is defined to be a maximum of three per opening of the communication hole 5920. To.

A case where the jackpot game proceeds by driving the solenoid 1510 will be described with reference to FIG. 47. 47 (a) to 47 (c) are partial rear views of the first variable winning device 5000. In FIGS. 47 (a) to 47 (c), the operations of the opening / closing plate 1300, the regulating member 2600, and the opening / closing member 5930 driven by the solenoid 1510 are illustrated in chronological order.

In FIG. 47 (a), the solenoid 1510 is excited, and in FIG. 47 (b), the solenoid 1510 is de-energized and the tip of the time difference forming portion 5423 is on the back side of the engaging portion 1333 of the opening / closing plate 1300 (FIG. The state in which the time difference forming portion 5423 is arranged above the engaging portion 1333 is shown in FIG. 47 (c), and the state in which the time difference forming portion 5423 is arranged above the engaging portion 1333 is shown in FIG. 47 (c).

As shown in FIG. 47 (a), the communication hole 5920 is opened as the solenoid 1510 is excited, so that the ball can pass through.

When the state shown in FIG. 47 (a) changes to the state shown in FIG. 47 (b), the movable closing member 5931 moves with the movement of the tip member 1520, closing the communication hole 5920, and engaging the opening / closing plate 1300. Since the portion 1333 still abuts on the time difference forming portion 5423 of the power transmission member 5400 in the front-rear direction and the movement of the opening / closing plate 1300 is restricted, the regulating member 2600 maintains the stored state.

In the state shown in FIG. 47 (c), the regulation member 2600 is in the discharge state, and the ball staying in the storage flow path 1231 is discharged. That is, in driving the solenoid 1510, the communication hole 5920 can be closed before the discharge of the ball from the discharge port 1150 is started, so that the adjustment flow path is driven by the momentum of the discharge of the ball from the discharge port 1150. It is possible to prevent the ball from flowing from the 5911.

48 (a) and 48 (b) are partial rear views of the first variable winning device 5000. In FIGS. 48 (a) and 48 (b), the operations of the regulation member 2600 and the opening / closing member 5930 driven by the solenoid 2810 are illustrated in chronological order. FIG. 48 (a) shows a state in which the solenoid 1510 and the solenoid 2810 are not excited, and FIG. 48 (b) shows a state in which the solenoid 2810 is excited.

As shown in FIGS. 48 (a) and 48 (b), when the solenoid 2810 is excited, the movable closing member 593 is pushed down by the pressing action unit 5870, so that the communication hole 5920 is opened. As a result, the sphere can flow into the storage flow path 1231 through the communication hole 5920. On the other hand, when the excitation of the solenoid 2810 is released, the movable closing member 593 is moved up by the urging force of the elastic spring 5934, and the communication hole 5920 is closed.

Therefore, when either the solenoid 1510 or the solenoid 2810 is excited, the communication hole 5920 is opened so that the sphere can flow into the storage flow path 1231, while the non-excitation makes the communication hole 5920 open. It is closed and the inflow to the storage channel 1231 is restricted.

In the jackpot game in which the solenoids 1510 and 2810 are driven and controlled by the mechanism described above, a fixed number of balls (up to 3 in this embodiment) flow into the storage flow path 1231 through the communication holes 5920.

In the present embodiment, in the low probability state of the special symbol, for example, the jackpot of the special symbol is determined with a probability of 1/320, and in the high probability state of the special symbol (probability variation state of the special symbol), for example, 20 minutes. It is judged as a big hit of a special symbol with a probability of 1. Then, when it is determined that the special symbol is a big hit, after the jackpot game is completed, the special symbol is given a probability change state (high probability state) until the special symbol lottery is completed 30 times, and the special symbol lottery is performed 30 times. After the end, it is configured to be set to the normal state. In the present embodiment, in the high probability state of the special symbol, the hit probability of the normal symbol (second symbol) is increased, and the ball is easily won in the second entrance 640.

In the present embodiment, three types of special symbols, "big hit H", "big hit h", and "big hit i", are provided (see FIG. 49). Although the details will be described later, the opening patterns of the first specific winning opening 1000a and the second specific winning opening 2255a are configured differently depending on the jackpot type, and the number of balls entered into the first variable winning device 5000 can be changed. It is composed.

FIG. 49 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the correspondence between the first hit type counter C2 and the jackpot type in the special symbol. The first hit type selection table 202b (see FIG. 49) is a data table in which judgment values for determining the jackpot type are stored, and the judgment value of the first hit type counter C2 is each jackpot type and special. It is stipulated in association with the type of entry slot that triggered the lottery of the symbol. In the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, when it is determined that the special symbol is a big hit, the value of the first hit type counter C2 acquired based on the start winning prize is compared with the first hit type selection table 202b, and the first hit type selection table 202b is compared. The jackpot type corresponding to the value of the hit type counter C2 is selected.

Specifically, when a big hit is obtained in the lottery of the special symbol 1 (lottery based on the entry into the first entry slot 64), the value of the first hit type counter C2 is in the range of "0 to 99". Is defined in association with the jackpot H (see 202b51 in FIG. 49).

If a big hit is obtained in the special symbol 2 lottery (lottery based on entering the second ball opening 640), the big hit h is in the range where the value of the first hit type counter C2 is "0 to 19". Are associated with each other (see 202b52 in FIG. 49).

When the jackpot H or the jackpot h is reached, the jackpot game of 15 rounds is executed in the eleventh operation pattern of the first variable winning device 4000. In this case, the player can receive the payout of about 2250 prize balls, and can win a specified number of balls regardless of the timing of winning the jackpot, and can receive the payout of the specified upper limit.

If a big hit is obtained in the special symbol 2 lottery (lottery based on the entry into the second entrance 640), the value of the first hit type counter C2 is in the range of "20 to 99". Are associated with each other and specified (see 202b53 in FIG. 49).

When the jackpot i is reached, the jackpot game of 15 rounds is executed in the twelfth operation pattern of the first variable winning device 4000. In this case, the maximum value of the number of prize balls to be paid out and the time required for the jackpot game are variable according to the number of balls entered in the second entrance 640 until the jackpot is acquired.

That is, if a big hit is obtained in the special symbol 1 lottery (lottery based on the entry into the first entry slot 64), the specified number of prize balls can be paid out regardless of the timing of the big hit. If a big hit is obtained in the special symbol 2 lottery (lottery based on the entry into the second entry opening 640), the prize balls will be awarded according to the number of balls entered in the second entry opening 640 until the big hit is obtained. Since the maximum number of payouts and the time required for the jackpot game are variable, the game of winning the jackpot in the right-handed game is different from the payout of the prize ball depending on when the jackpot of the right-handed game occurs. Gender can be added. As a result, it is possible to suppress the right-handed game from being played indiscriminately, and it is possible to improve the attention to each fluctuation.

Next, with reference to FIG. 50, the opening patterns of the first specific winning opening 1000a and the second specific winning opening 2255a in the present embodiment will be described. FIG. 50 (a) is a diagram showing the timekeeping change of the first specific winning opening 1000a and the second specific winning opening 2255a in the eleventh operation pattern, and FIG. 50 (b) is a diagram showing a time change in the twelfth operation pattern. It is a figure which showed the timekeeping change of 1 specific winning opening 1000a and 2nd specific winning opening 2255a.

When the jackpot is determined in the special figure hit determination, the MPU 201 (see FIG. 4) starts controlling the determined type of jackpot game after the end of the special figure variation display (symbol variation effect). Hereinafter, operation control of the opening / closing plate 1300 and the slide plate 2840 performed when the jackpot game is given will be described.

<When operating in the 11th operation pattern>
When the jackpot type is jackpot H or jackpot h, the MPU 201 drives and controls the solenoids 1510 and 2810 so that the opening / closing plate 1300 and the slide plate 2840 operate based on the eleventh operation pattern.

When the special figure variation display (design variation effect) is completed, the MPU 201 holds the opening / closing plate 1300 and the slide plate 2840 in the closed state until a predetermined opening time OP (10 seconds) elapses by the timer means (not shown). The solenoids 1510 and 2810 are driven and controlled, and after the opening time OP elapses, the first round game R is started.

That is, the solenoid 2810 is driven and controlled so that the first operating time T1 (maximum 30 seconds) is measured by the timer means and the slide plate 2840 is displaced from the closed state to the open state to open the second specific winning opening 2255a. Then, the slide plate 2840 is operated for a long time.

Then, in the first round game R, the lapse of the round end condition (round game time (30 seconds, which is the maximum value of the first operating time T1) or the specified number (10 in the present embodiment) of pachinko balls When the winning) is satisfied, the solenoid 2810 is driven and controlled so as to displace the slide plate 2840 to the closed state and close the second specific winning opening 2255a, and the round game R of the first round ends.

In the first round game R, with the opening of the second specific winning opening 2255a, the communication hole 5920 is opened, and a maximum of three balls flow into the storage flow path 1231 (see FIGS. 46 and 48). 2 When storing spheres from the storage flow path 2251 to the storage flow path 1231, 13 spheres can be stored downstream of the second detection sensor 2255, so how many spheres (1 to 1) flow in from the communication hole 5920. Even if the number is 3), there is no problem, and the round game R can be completed by winning a specified number (10C).

When the round game R of the first round is completed, the timer means solenoids 1510 and 2810 keep the opening / closing plate 1300 and the slide plate 2840 in the closed state until the third interval time Int3 (3.0 seconds) between rounds elapses. Is driven and controlled, and after the lapse of the third interval time Int3 between rounds, the second round game R is started. Here, since a maximum of 15 balls can be discharged from the discharge port 1150 by the interval of 3 seconds, a part of the storage flow path 1231 and the second storage flow path 2251 at the end of the first round game R are completed. It is possible to discharge all the balls (up to 14) that can be stored in a row.

In the second round, as in the start of the first round, the first operating time T1 (maximum 30 seconds) is measured by the timer means, and the slide plate 2840 is displaced from the closed state to the open state to specify the second. The solenoid 2810 is driven and controlled so as to open the winning opening 2255a, so that the slide plate 2840 operates for a long time.

Then, when the round end condition (round game time (30 seconds, which is the maximum value of the first operating time T1) elapses or a specified number of pachinko balls are won) is satisfied in the second round game R. The solenoid 2810 is driven and controlled so as to displace the slide plate 2840 to the closed state and close the second specific winning opening 2255a, and the second round game R ends.

After that, similarly, the round game R from the third round to the maximum 15 rounds is repeated with the first interval time Int1 between rounds sandwiched between the round game R, and the slide plate 2840 is in the closed state and the open state. The solenoid 2810 is driven and controlled so as to open and close the second specific winning opening 2255a.

Then, when the round game R of the final round is completed, the solenoid 2810 is driven and controlled so that the timer means keeps the slide plate 2840 in the closed state until the third interval time Int3 between rounds and the ending time ED (11 seconds) elapse. Then, the jackpot game ends with the passage of the time.

According to this operation pattern, three balls flow into the storage flow path 1231 from the adjustment flow path 5911 for each drive operation (excitation) of the solenoid 2810. Therefore, even if the maximum number (30) of balls is stored in the adjustment flow path 5911, all the balls are stored by the end of the jackpot game (at the end of the 10th round game R). Since the ball can be entered into the road 1231, the jackpot game can be completed without the ball remaining in the storage flow path 1231.

<When operating with the 12th operation pattern>
In the case of a jackpot game in which the jackpot type is jackpot i, the MPU 201 drives and controls the solenoids 1510 and 2810 so that the opening / closing plate 1300 and the slide plate 2840 operate based on the twelfth operation pattern. When the special figure variation display (design variation effect) is completed, the MPU 201 holds the opening / closing plate 1300 and the slide plate 2840 in the closed state until a predetermined opening time OP (10 seconds) elapses by the timer means (not shown). The solenoids 1510 and 2810 are driven and controlled, and after the opening time OP elapses, the first round game R is started. Since the operation pattern up to the fourth round game R is the same as that of the eleventh operation pattern, the description thereof will be omitted.

When the round game R of the fourth round is completed, the timer means drives and controls the solenoid 2810 to keep the slide plate 2840 in the closed state until the third interval time Int3 (3.0 seconds) between rounds elapses, and the round After the lapse of the third interval time Int3, the fifth round game R is started.

In the fifth round, the solenoid 1510 is used to start measuring the first operating time T1 (maximum 30 seconds) by the timer means and to displace the opening / closing plate 1300 from the closed state to the open state to open the first specified winning opening 1000a. Is driven and controlled so that the opening / closing plate 1300 operates for a long time.

Then, when the round end condition (round game time (30 seconds, which is the maximum value of the first operating time T1) elapses or a specified number of pachinko balls are won) is satisfied in the fifth round game R. The solenoid 1510 is driven and controlled so as to displace the opening / closing plate 1300 to the closed state and close the first specific winning opening 1000a, and the fifth round game R ends.

Here, even in the fifth round of the round game R, the ball can flow in from the communication hole 5920, but unlike the fourth round, the ball enters from the first specific winning opening 1000a. Therefore, when the inflow of balls from the communication hole 5920 is actually performed, a predetermined number of balls cannot be won. Therefore, the number of prize balls that can be obtained in the fifth round game R of this operation pattern is smaller than that of the prize balls that can be obtained in the round game R of the same round in the eleventh operation pattern, and the first one. Since the end of the round game R is waited until the operation time T1 elapses, the time until the end of the jackpot game is prolonged.

After that, similarly, the 6th to 15th rounds of the round game R are repeated with the third interval time Int3 between the rounds sandwiched between the round games R, and the opening / closing plate 1300 is between the closed state and the open state. The solenoid 1510 is driven and controlled so as to be displaced and open / close the first specific winning opening 1000a.

Then, when the round game R of the final round is completed, the solenoid 1510 is driven and controlled so that the timer means keeps the opening / closing plate 1300 in the closed state until the third interval time Int3 between rounds and the ending time ED (11 seconds) elapse. Then, the jackpot game ends with the passage of the time.

In this operation pattern, the decrease in the number of prize balls that may occur in the subsequent round game R from the fifth round game R and the extension of the round time are such that the balls flow from the communication hole 5920 into the storage flow path 1231. This is caused by this, and depending on the number of balls remaining in the adjustment flow path 5911 at the start of the jackpot, how much the number of prize balls decreases and the round time is extended changes. The number of balls remaining in the adjustment flow path corresponds to the number of balls that have passed through the second entry port 640, while the special symbol 2 lottery (second entry port) is due to the passage of the balls in the second entry port 640. Since the lottery based on the entry into the 640) can be received, the number of balls remaining in the adjustment flow path 5911 is related to the number of lottery of the special symbol 2.

In the following description, in this operation pattern, the number of lottery of the special symbol 2 (lottery based on the entry into the second entry port 640) in the high probability state and the number of balls remaining in the adjustment flow path 5911. Is assumed to be the same number.

As described above, in the jackpot game of this operation pattern, three balls flow into the storage flow path 1231 when the first specific winning opening 1000a or the second specific winning opening 2255a is opened once. That is, up to the fourth round game R, a maximum of 12 balls have already flowed into the storage flow path 1231. Therefore, in the fifth and subsequent round games, the balls flow into the storage flow path 1231 through the communication hole 5920, and the jackpot game is started with 13 or more balls stored in the adjustment flow path 5911. If. In other words, it is a case where the jackpot game is started in a state where the lottery of the special symbol 2 (lottery based on the entry into the second entrance 640) has been received 13 times or more after the transition to the high probability state. ..

Therefore, if a big hit is obtained between the transition to the high probability state and the 12 times of the special symbol 2 lottery (lottery based on the entry into the second entrance 640), the number of prize balls will decrease. Since the round time is not extended, the player's attention to winning the jackpot by the 12th lottery can be improved.

In addition, even after the 13th lottery, the number of prize balls decreases with each lottery, and the round time is extended every 3 lottery, so the player can determine how many lottery the jackpot can be won. Can improve the attention of.

That is, for example, when a jackpot is won with 14 balls remaining in the adjustment flow path 5911 (14th lottery of special symbol 2), the balls are stored through the communication hole 5920 at the start of the fifth round game R. Since the number of balls flowing into the flow path 1231 is 2, the number of balls that can be won in this round is eight. In addition, when a big hit is won with 15 balls remaining in the adjustment flow path 5911 (15th lottery of special symbol 2), the storage flow path passes through the communication hole 5920 at the start of the fifth round game R. Since the number of balls flowing into 1231 is 3, the number of balls that can be won in this round is 7. Therefore, as the number of remaining balls increases, the number of prize balls paid out decreases in the fifth round game R.

On the other hand, when a big hit is won in the 13th to 15th lottery, in any case, the ball that remains in the adjustment flow path 5911 by flowing into the storage flow path 1231 at the start of the fifth round round game R. Is 0. Therefore, from the 6th round round game R, a specified number of balls can be won in the first specific winning opening 1000a, whereby the 6th round round game R can be completed, so that the round time There is no change in the degree of extension.

Further, when the number of remaining adjustment flow paths 5911 when the jackpot is won is 16 to 18, in the 6th round round game R, when 19 to 21, in the 7th round round game R, 22 to 24 Decrease in the number of prize balls in the 8th round round game R when the number is 25 to 27, in the 9th round game R when the number is 25 to 27, and in the 10th round game R when the number is 28 to 30. And the extension of the round time occurs.

As a result, as in the present embodiment, in the game playability in which the high-probability state ends depending on the number of lottery, when a big hit is obtained shortly after the transition to the high-probability state and when a big hit is obtained just before the end of the high-probability state. With, it is possible to make a difference in the profit given to the player (the number of prize balls paid out, the progress time of the jackpot game, etc.).

In this case, in the present embodiment, as the number of lottery from the transition to the high probability state to the acquisition of the jackpot increases, the profit given to the player decreases. Therefore, when the number of lottery until the jackpot is acquired is small, Originally, there should have been a high probability of receiving a lottery even with the remaining number of lottery, but the player's dissatisfaction that he cannot receive it can be partially resolved.

In other words, if you win a big hit in the first lottery after becoming a high probability state, you should be able to add the remaining 29 lottery and receive the next 59 lottery. In fact, the player's dissatisfaction with the fact that the high-probability state after the jackpot game is limited to 30 times can be partially resolved. As a result, the fairness of the game can be maintained.

Even in the high probability state, if a big hit is won in the lottery of the special symbol 1 (lottery based on the entry into the first entry opening 64), the second specific winning opening 2255a is set in the eleventh operation pattern. It is possible to receive the maximum payout regardless of the number of lottery after opening and closing and shifting to the high probability state. Therefore, the player may perform a game (left-handed game) aiming at winning a ball in the first ball opening 64 in a high probability state.

In this case, as compared with the case of performing a right-handed game, the number of balls discharged from the first out port 66 does not lead to the lottery of the special symbol, the interval for receiving the lottery becomes longer, and the game time becomes longer. It may be long.

Therefore, as a method of playing in a high probability state, the player can receive the maximum number of balls in a short time while suppressing the number of balls ejected from the first out port 66 before the jackpot is acquired. Whether you aim to win the jackpot h) (whether you play a right-handed game), or by the time you win the jackpot, more balls will be ejected from the first out port 66, and you are prepared for a longer game time. It is possible to appropriately select whether to aim for a jackpot of a jackpot type (big hit H) that can eliminate the risk of a drop in the prize ball in (play a left-handed game). As a result, the range of game methods to be selected can be expanded according to the player's taste and the situation (playable time, etc.).

After the high probability state ends, it becomes difficult to open the second entrance 640, and the player shifts to the left-handed game. In this case, a plurality of balls will remain in the adjustment flow path 5911, but in the jackpot of the jackpot type (big hit H) that can be obtained in the left-handed game, regardless of the number of balls remaining in the adjustment flow path 5911. Since the maximum number of payouts can be obtained by winning a specified number of prizes, the profit given to the player (profit in terms of both the number of prize balls and the playing time) is not impaired. Therefore, even if the player stops the game with the ball remaining in the adjustment flow path 5911 and the next player plays the game, it is possible to prevent the profit given to the player from being impaired. The player can start the game at any time.

In this embodiment, the number of lottery of the special symbol 2 in the high probability state (lottery based on the entry into the second entry port 640) and the number of balls remaining in the adjustment flow path 5911 (second entry). The explanation was made on the assumption that the number of balls entering the mouth 640 is the same, but in the actual game, the number of balls remaining in the adjustment flow path 5911 at the time of winning the jackpot is the number of balls remaining in the adjustment flow path 5911. It should be noted that the number is rarely the same as the number of lottery.

That is, the lottery of the special symbol 2 is performed when the ball wins the second entrance 640, and the player recognizes whether or not the big hit has been won in the lottery after that, the reach production and the subsequent reach production. , Since it is after the button pressing effect and the like, the player usually keeps hitting the ball into the second entrance 640 during that time. In the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, up to four balls can be held in the second entrance 640, so that a normal game mode (a game mode in which the player efficiently receives a lottery, a so-called hold stop) In addition to the number of lottery in which the player can recognize the judgment of the jackpot, a state in which a maximum of about four balls are entered into the second entrance 640 is maintained.

In addition, even if the ball enters the second entrance 640 when the number of holdings is maximum, the lottery cannot be received, but the ball enters the adjustment flow path 5911, so that the profit that the player can obtain in the jackpot game is obtained. It is more likely to decrease. The hold is digested when the fluctuation stops and the next fluctuation starts, so in other words, the longer the period until the fluctuation stops, the more likely it is that the profit that the player will get in the jackpot game will decrease. It will be.

Therefore, if the ball is left unattended during a highly anticipated production such as long reach, it is possible to form a playability in which the profit obtained by the player in the jackpot game is likely to decrease. As a result, it is possible to prevent the player from continuing to launch the ball during a highly anticipated production such as long reach, so that the concentration power that the player has devoted to adjusting the shot output of the ball is eliminated. can do. Therefore, it is possible to improve the player's concentration on the production such as long reach, and it is possible to improve the attention to the production.

Next, the sixth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 51 to 54. In the first embodiment, the case where the arrangement of the spheres stored in the storage flow path 1231 is fixed to a unique position has been described, but the first variable winning device 6000 in the sixth embodiment interferes with the spheres by driving. The arrangement of the spheres in the storage channel 1231 can be changed. The same parts as those of the above-described embodiments are designated by the same reference numerals, and the description thereof will be omitted.

FIG. 51 is a partial front view of the game board 13 in the sixth embodiment. As shown in FIG. 51, the probability fluctuation determination unit 4800 described above in the fourth embodiment is arranged below the first variable winning device 6000 in the present embodiment, and the ball discharged from the storage flow path 1231 is a specific region 4830. It is configured so that the state after the big hit game changes depending on whether or not it passes through.

FIG. 52 is a partial cross-sectional view of the first variable winning device 6000 on the LII-LII line of FIG. 51. Note that FIG. 52 shows the retracted state of the interference member 6930. The first variable winning device 6000 has the same configuration as the first variable winning device 1000 in the first embodiment (main body member 1100, lining front plate 1200, opening / closing plate 1300, power transmission member 1400, drive device 1500, regulation member 1600). In addition to the rear cover 1700), the new interfering device 6900 is provided in the sixth embodiment.

The interference device 6900 includes a solenoid 6910 arranged on the back side of the main body member 1100 and having a slide movable shaft arranged along a plane surface and a flat surface of the thin plate member 1110 of the main body member 1100, and the tip of a movable portion of the solenoid 6910. It mainly includes a tip member 6920 fixed to the body member 6920 and an interference member 6930 that slides in the front-rear direction of the main body member 1100 by the operation of the tip member 6920.

The tip member 6920 includes an elongated hole 6921 that is inclined with respect to the surface of the thin plate member 1110. The elongated hole 6921 is formed so as to be inclined so as to be closer to the thin plate member 1110 toward the tip side of the tip member 6920.

The interference member 6930 is slidably supported in the front-rear direction by a through hole H61 formed in a thin plate member 1110 arranged to face the storage flow path 1231 of the lining front plate 1200, and the rear end portion is a long hole 6921. The rear end portion moves back and forth along the elongated hole 6921 as the solenoid 6910 is driven. By this front-back operation, it is possible to enter the inside of the storage flow path 1231 through the through hole H61.

The through hole H61 is arranged at a position slightly left from the center of the third sphere P3 stored in the storage flow path 1231. The interference member 6930 slides forward from the through hole H61 to bring it into an overhanging state (see the imaginary line in FIG. 52), so that the sphere P3 is pressed and pushed to the upstream side of the storage flow path 1231.

53 (a) and 53 (b) are front views of the first variable winning device 6000. Note that FIG. 53 (a) shows the case where the interference member 6930 is in the retracted state, and FIG. 53 (b) shows the case where the interference member 6930 is in the overhanging state. A sphere that can be stored in the storage flow path 1231 is illustrated by an imaginary line, and "V" is described in the sphere that first enters the specific region 4830 according to the thirteenth operation pattern and the fourteenth operation pattern described later. ..

As shown in FIGS. 53A and 53B, 10 balls are stored in the storage flow path 1231 in the retracted state of the interference member 6930, while the third ball is stored in the overhanging state of the interference member 6930. Subsequent balls are pushed to the upstream side of the storage flow path 1231, and the number of stored balls is less than 10. Therefore, as in the present embodiment, when the specified number of balls for each round game R of the jackpot game is set to 10, if the interference member 6930 is in the overhanging state, the specified number of balls cannot be won. Since the round game R cannot be completed by winning a specified number of prizes, the end of the round game R will be waited until the specified time. The effects that can be realized by utilizing this difference will be described below together with the description of the game mode in the present embodiment.

In the present embodiment, in the low probability state of the special symbol, for example, the jackpot of the special symbol is determined with a probability of 1/10, and in the high probability state of the special symbol (probability variation state of the special symbol), for example, 4 minutes. It is judged as a big hit of a special symbol with a probability of 1.

Then, when the game ball passes through the specific area 4830, after the jackpot game ends, the special symbol's probability variation state (high probability state) is given until the special symbol lottery ends 10 times, and the special symbol lottery is performed 10 times. While it is configured to be set to the normal state after the end, if the game ball does not pass through the specific area 4830, it is normal until the lottery of the special symbol is completed 10 times after the end of the jackpot game. It is configured to shorten the time of the symbol.

In the present embodiment, two types of special symbols, "big hit I" and "big hit j", are provided. Although the details will be described later, the opening pattern of the first specific winning opening 1000a and the operating pattern of the distribution device 4850 are configured differently depending on the jackpot type, and the number of balls entered into the first variable winning device 6000 and the number of balls entered into the first variable winning device 6000 It is configured to change the probability of acquiring the right to move to the probabilistic state (high probability state) of a special symbol.

Specifically, when a big hit is obtained in the lottery of the special symbol 1 (lottery based on the entry into the first ball entrance 64), the big hit I is associated and defined (see FIG. 54). .. When the jackpot I is obtained, the jackpot game of two rounds is executed in the thirteenth operation pattern of the first variable winning device 6000 and the distribution device 4850. In this case, the player can receive the payout of about 285 prize balls and almost certainly cannot acquire the right to shift to the probabilistic state (high probability state) of the special symbol.

On the other hand, when a big hit is obtained in the lottery of the special symbol 2 (lottery based on the entry into the second entrance 640), the big hit j is associated and defined (see FIG. 54).

When the jackpot j is reached, the jackpot game of two rounds is executed in the 14th operation pattern of the first variable winning device 6000 and the distribution device 4850. In this case, the player can receive the payout of about 300 prize balls and almost certainly can acquire the right to shift to the probabilistic state (high probability state) of the special symbol.

As mentioned above, if you win a big hit in the special symbol 2 lottery (lottery based on entering the second ball entrance 640), you will almost certainly get the right to shift to the probabilistic state (high probability state) of the special symbol. Therefore, it is advantageous for the player as compared with the case where the lottery of the special symbol 1 (lottery based on the entry into the first entry slot 64) is a big hit. Therefore, in order to win a big hit in the special symbol 2 lottery (lottery based on the entry into the second entrance 640), the player plays a right-handed game in the probability variation state (high probability state) of the special symbol. Do.

During the probability change of the special symbol, the hit probability of the normal symbol increases, the fluctuation time of the normal symbol becomes shorter (3 seconds), and the opening time of the electric accessory 640a becomes longer when the normal symbol hits (1). Seconds x 2 times). Therefore, it becomes easy to put the ball into the second entrance 640, and it becomes easy to draw the special symbol 2. Therefore, once it is possible to shift to the probabilistic state of the special symbol, it is easy to become a big hit of the special symbol, and when it becomes a big hit, the jackpot j (almost certainly shifts to the probabilistic state (high probability state) of the special symbol). Since the probabilistic state of the special symbol, which is a big hit that can acquire the right of the player, is likely to be repeated, it is easy for the player to win a large number of prize balls. As a result, it is possible to make the player play the game while strongly expecting the player to shift to the probabilistic state of the special symbol, so that the player's interest in the game can be improved.

Next, with reference to FIGS. 54 (a) and 54 (b), the opening patterns of the first specific winning opening 1000a and the specific area 4830 in the present embodiment will be described. FIG. 54 (a) is a diagram showing the timekeeping change of the first specific winning opening 1000a and the specific area 4830 in the thirteenth operation pattern, and FIG. 54 (b) is a diagram showing the first specific winning in the fourteenth operation pattern. It is a figure which showed the timekeeping change of the mouth 1000a and the specific area 4830.

In addition, in FIG. 54, in order to facilitate identification, the first interval time Int1 between rounds is described ignoring the relative relationship with other times (sixth opening time OP6 and long-term operating time TL). Will be done. Therefore, it is not used for the relative comparison of the lengths of each time in FIG. 54, and the relative comparison of the lengths of each time is performed according to the time relationship described below.

When the jackpot is determined in the special figure hit determination, the MPU 201 (see FIG. 4) starts controlling the determined type of jackpot game after the end of the special figure variation display (symbol variation effect). Hereinafter, operation control of the opening / closing plate 1300, the distribution operation member 4851, and the interference member 6930, which is performed when the big hit game is given, will be described.

<When operating with the 13th operation pattern>
In the case of a jackpot game in which the jackpot type is jackpot I, the MPU 201 drives solenoids 1510, 4852, 6910 so that the opening / closing plate 1300, the distribution operation member 4851, and the interference member 6930 operate based on the thirteenth operation pattern. Control.

When the special figure variation display (design variation effect) is completed, the MPU 201 closes the opening / closing plate 1300 and the distribution operation member 4851 until the timer means (not shown) elapses the predetermined opening time OP (10 seconds). , The solenoids 1510, 4852, 6910 are driven and controlled so as to hold the interference member 6930 in the retracted state, respectively, and the first round game R is started after the opening time OP elapses.

That is, the solenoid 1510 is driven and controlled so that the first operating time T1 (maximum 30 seconds) is measured by the timer means and the opening / closing plate 1300 is displaced from the closed state to the open state to open the first specific winning opening 1000a. Then, the opening / closing plate 1300 is allowed to operate for a long time.

When the opening / closing plate 1300 is displaced from the closed state to the open state, the MPU 201 closes the distribution operation member 4851 until the timer means (not shown) elapses the predetermined sixth opening time OP6 (3.0 seconds). After the 6th opening time OP6 elapses, the long-term operating time TL (27 seconds in this embodiment) distribution operation member 4851 is moved to the open position, and after the long-term operation time TL elapses, the distribution operation member 4851 The solenoid 4852 is driven and controlled so as to keep the closed state again, so that the distribution operation member 4851 operates for a long time.

When the opening / closing plate 1300 is displaced from the closed state to the open state, the MPU 201 holds the interference member 6930 in the retracted state until the predetermined sixth opening time OP6 (3.0 seconds) elapses by the timer means (not shown). Then, after the 6th opening time OP6 elapses, the interference member 6930 is changed to the overhanging state by the long-term operating time TL, and after the long-term operating time TL elapses, the solenoid 6910 is driven to hold the interfering member 6930 in the retracted state again. It is controlled to cause the interference member 6930 to operate for a long time.

Then, in the first round game R, the lapse of the round end condition (round game time (30 seconds, which is the maximum value of the first operating time T1) or the specified number (10 in the present embodiment) of pachinko balls When the winning) is satisfied, the solenoid 1510 is driven and controlled so as to displace the opening / closing plate 1300 to the closed state and close the first specific winning opening 1000a, and the round game R of the first round ends.

In the present embodiment, the interfering member 6930 is in an overhanging state for a long operating time TL. During this time, the storage channel 1231 cannot win a specified number of balls (see FIG. 53 (b)). Then, in the present embodiment, the sum of the sixth opening time OP6 and the long-term operating time TL becomes the maximum value of the first operating time T1, so that the interference member 6930 must wait until the maximum value of the first operating time T1. Is in the retracted state, so that it is practically impossible to win a predetermined number of balls, and the round game R of the first round ends with the lapse of the first operating time T1.

At the same time as the end of the first round round game R, the interference member 6930 changes to the retracted state, and the distribution operation member 4851 is switched to the closed state. Therefore, the sphere discharged from the storage flow path 1231 cannot be passed through the specific region 4830. Therefore, the player cannot acquire the right to shift to the probabilistic state (high probability state) of the special symbol.

When the round game R of the first round is completed, the timer means drives and controls the solenoid 1510 to keep the opening / closing plate 1300 in the closed state until the first interval time Int1 (2.0 seconds) between rounds elapses, and the round After the lapse of the first interval time Int1, the second round game R is started.

In the second round, as in the start of the first round, the first operation time T1 (maximum 30 seconds) is measured by the timer means, and the opening / closing plate 1300 is displaced from the closed state to the open state to specify the first. The solenoid 1510 is driven and controlled so as to open the winning opening 1000a, and the opening / closing plate 1300 is operated for a long time.

Then, when the round end condition (round game time (30 seconds, which is the maximum value of the first operating time T1) elapses or a specified number of pachinko balls are won) is satisfied in the second round game R. The solenoid 1510 is driven and controlled so as to displace the opening / closing plate 1300 to the closed state and close the first specific winning opening 1000a, and the second round game R ends.

When the second round game R is completed, the timer means closes the opening / closing plate 1300 and the distribution operation member 4851 until the first interval time Int1 between rounds and the ending time ED (11 seconds) elapses, and the interference member 6930. The solenoids 1510, 4852, and 6910 are driven and controlled so as to hold the two in the retracted state, and the jackpot game ends with the passage of the time.

<When operating with the 14th operation pattern>
In the case of a jackpot game in which the jackpot type is jackpot j, the MPU 201 drives the solenoids 1510, 4852, 6910 so that the opening / closing plate 1300, the distribution operation member 4851, and the interference member 6930 operate based on the 14th operation pattern. Control.

When the special figure variation display (design variation effect) is completed, the MPU 201 closes the opening / closing plate 1300 and the distribution operation member 4851 until the timer means (not shown) elapses the predetermined opening time OP (10 seconds). , The solenoids 1510, 4852, 6910 are driven and controlled so as to hold the interference member 6930 in the retracted state, respectively, and the first round game R is started after the opening time OP elapses.

That is, the solenoid 1510 is driven and controlled so that the first operating time T1 (maximum 30 seconds) is measured by the timer means and the opening / closing plate 1300 is displaced from the closed state to the open state to open the first specific winning opening 1000a. Then, the opening / closing plate 1300 is allowed to operate for a long time.

When the opening / closing plate 1300 is displaced from the closed state to the open state, the MPU 201 closes the distribution operation member 4851 until the timer means (not shown) elapses the predetermined sixth opening time OP6 (3.0 seconds). After the 6th opening time OP6 elapses, the long-term operating time TL (27 seconds in this embodiment) distribution operation member 4851 is moved to the open position, and after the long-term operation time TL elapses, the distribution operation member 4851 The solenoid 4852 is driven and controlled so as to keep the closed state again, so that the distribution operation member 4851 operates for a long time.

When the opening / closing plate 1300 is displaced from the closed state to the open state, the MPU 201 holds the interference member 6930 in the retracted state until the predetermined sixth opening time OP6 (3.0 seconds) elapses by the timer means (not shown). Then, after the lapse of the sixth opening time OP6, the interference member 6930 is changed to the overhanging state for a minute time (0.2 seconds in this embodiment), and after the lapse of the minute time, the interference member 6930 is held in the retracted state again. The solenoid 6910 is driven and controlled so that the interference member 6930 operates for a short time.

Then, in the first round game R, the lapse of the round end condition (round game time (30 seconds, which is the maximum value of the first operating time T1) or the specified number (10 in the present embodiment) of pachinko balls When the winning) is satisfied, the solenoid 1510 is driven and controlled so as to displace the opening / closing plate 1300 to the closed state and close the first specific winning opening 1000a, and the round game R of the first round ends.

In the present embodiment, although the interference member 6930 is in the overhanging state for a very short time, it is in the retracted state most of the time. Therefore, as shown in FIG. 53A, a specified number of interference members are used in the first round game. It is possible to win a ball. Therefore, the opening / closing plate 1300 is closed while the distribution operation member 4851 is in the open state, the regulation member 1600 is in the discharge state, and the ball can be discharged toward the probability fluctuation determination flow path 4820. It can flow down to a specific area 4830. Therefore, the player can acquire the right to shift to the probabilistic state (high probability state) of the special symbol.

When the round game R of the first round is completed, the timer means drives and controls the solenoid 1510 to keep the opening / closing plate 1300 in the closed state until the first interval time Int1 (2.0 seconds) between rounds elapses, and the round After the lapse of the first interval time Int1, the second round game R is started.

In the second round, as in the start of the first round, the first operation time T1 (maximum 30 seconds) is measured by the timer means, and the opening / closing plate 1300 is displaced from the closed state to the open state to specify the first. The solenoid 1510 is driven and controlled so as to open the winning opening 1000a, and the opening / closing plate 1300 is operated for a long time.

Then, when the round end condition (round game time (30 seconds, which is the maximum value of the first operating time T1) elapses or a specified number of pachinko balls are won) is satisfied in the second round game R. The solenoid 1510 is driven and controlled so as to displace the opening / closing plate 1300 to the closed state and close the first specific winning opening 1000a, and the second round game R ends.

When the second round game R is completed, the timer means closes the opening / closing plate 1300 and the distribution operation member 4851 until the first interval time Int1 between rounds and the ending time ED (11 seconds) elapses, and the interference member 6930. The solenoids 1510, 4852, and 6910 are driven and controlled so as to hold the above in the retracted state, and the jackpot game ends with the passage of the time.

Here, the sixth opening time OP6 is set as a time during which the number of winning balls is expected to be 3 or more and less than 6 in the round game R of the first round. In this case, since the interference member 6930 is arranged on the back side of the ball stored in the storage flow path 1231, the player's line of sight is blocked by the ball, and it is difficult to visually recognize the operation of the interference member 6930. Become. This makes it difficult for the player to confirm the operation mode of the interference member 6930.

Therefore, the change due to the overhang of the interference member 6930 is limited to the slight movement of the third and subsequent balls in the storage flow path 1231, so that the player recognizes whether or not the change due to the interference member 6930 has occurred. It can be made difficult, and the player can enjoy the game of winning a ball in the first specific winning opening 1000a and storing the ball in the storage flow path 1231 without giving a sense of discomfort to the player due to the operation of the interference member 6930. Can be done.

Then, the balls are stored up to the vicinity of the entrance of the storage flow path 1231, and even then, the first round of the round game R is not completed, which gives a sense of discomfort, and the number of balls stored in the storage flow path 1231 is actually counted. It is possible to form a new playability by recognizing the difference in jackpot type for the first time.

As described above, according to the present embodiment, it is difficult for the player to recognize the change in the situation (change in the state of the interference member 6930) visually recognized through the game board 13, and the player can use the operation mode of the first variable winning device 6000. It is possible to notify the change of the situation of the game board 13 from the given discomfort in an easy-to-recognize manner, and to make the player recognize the difference in the jackpot type. Therefore, the attention to the first variable winning device 6000 can be improved.

Next, a seventh embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 55 to 58. In the third embodiment, the case where the ball arranged at the vertical position of the drop position Pf3 falls as it is when the opening / closing plate 1300 is closed has been described, but the first variable winning device 7000 in the seventh embodiment has been described. The second drop delay plate 7260 is configured such that when the opening / closing plate 1300 is closed, the ball arranged at the vertical position of the drop position Pf3 can flow down to the drop delay plate 3250 side. The same parts as those of the above-described embodiments are designated by the same reference numerals, and the description thereof will be omitted.

FIG. 55 is a rear perspective view of the inverted front plate 7200 according to the seventh embodiment, FIG. 56 is a top view of the first variable winning device 7000, and FIG. 57 is a top view of XXXVc-XXXVc of FIG. 35 (b). It is a partial cross-sectional view of the 1st variable winning apparatus 7000 in the line corresponding to the line. Since the configuration of the first variable winning device 7000 of the present embodiment other than the lining front plate 7200 is the same as that of the first variable winning device 3000 described above in the third embodiment, the description thereof will be omitted.

As shown in FIGS. 55 to 57, the lining front plate 7200 has the same configuration as that described in the third embodiment (thin plate member 1210, side wall portion 1220, accommodating portion 1230, detection sensor 1240, and drop delay plate 3250). ), The second drop delay plate 7260 newly introduced in the present embodiment is provided.

The second drop delay plate 7260 is a plate member extending between the end surface 3251b and the accommodating portion 1230 on the back surface side of the thin plate member 1210, and descends so that the upper surface 7261 thereof separates from the detection sensor 1240. Tilt. As shown in FIG. 57, the second drop delay plate 7260 is extended rearward to the extent that it does not interfere with the plate portion 1310 of the opening / closing plate 1300.

As shown in FIG. 56, the second drop delay plate 7260 has a distance between the thin plate member 1110 and the front side wall surface in the vicinity of the detection sensor 1240 that is less than the diameter of the sphere, and at a position farthest from the detection sensor 1240. Also, the distance between the thin plate member 1110 and the front side wall surface is less than the diameter of the sphere.

On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 57, the second fall delay plate 7260 is arranged on the front side (left side of FIG. 57) of the movement locus of the ball rolling on the rolling arc portion 3252 of the fall delay plate 3250. That is, it does not act on the rolling sphere of the rolling arc portion 3252. That is, the second drop delay plate 7260 is configured as a plate member whose presence or absence in contact with the sphere changes depending on the arrival path of the sphere. This will be described below.

58 (a) and 58 (b) are partial cross-sectional views of the first variable winning device 7000 in the line corresponding to the XXXVc-XXXVc line of FIG. 35 (b). FIG. 58 (a) shows a case where the opening / closing plate 1300 changes to the closed state while the ball is arranged near the vertical position of the falling position Pf3, and FIG. 58 (b) shows the case where the opening / closing plate 1300 is in the closed state. In the meantime, the case where the ball rolls toward the drop position Pf3 is illustrated.

As shown in FIG. 58 (a), when the sphere is arranged near the vertical position of the drop position Pf3, the sphere is tilted forward along with the forward inclination of the plate portion 1310 that occurs during the operation of the opening / closing plate 1300, and the sphere is the front plate for lining. It flows down toward the 7200 side. Therefore, it comes into contact with the second fall delay plate 7260 in the process of flowing down, flows down to the fall delay plate 3250 side along the inclination of the upper surface, and then rolls on the upper surface of the fall delay plate 3250 and falls again at the drop position Pf3. To reach.

Since the distance between the second fall delay plate 7260 and the front side wall of the thin plate member 1110 (distance between the rolling surface 1311 of the opening / closing plate 1300 in the closed state) is less than the diameter of the sphere, the momentum of the sphere It is possible to prevent the ball from falling vertically on the back surface side of the second fall delay plate 7260 due to the large size.

On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 58B, the sphere that rolls the fall delay plate 3250 in the closed state of the opening / closing plate 1300 is on the main body member 3100 side along the rearward inclination of the rolling arc portion 3252 of the fall delay plate 3250. It flows down while contacting.

At this time, since the center position (maximum diameter position) of the sphere is arranged below the second fall delay plate 7260, the extension length of the second fall delay plate 7260 to the back side is set from the movement locus of the sphere. The ball falling from above can be caught by the upper surface 7261 while being fastened on the front side.

The ball rolling on the rolling arc portion 3252 does not come into contact with the second fall delay plate 7260 in the process of flowing down, and after reaching the drop position Pf3, falls as it is. Therefore, as in the third embodiment, the ball can be dropped without delay from the lower end of the drop delay plate 3250.

As described above, in the present embodiment, it is possible to switch between the case where the ball is affected by the second fall delay plate 7260 and the case where the ball is not affected by the action of the second fall delay plate 7260, depending on which side the ball is closer to the second fall delay plate 7260.

In the present embodiment, two balls are continuously rolled on the upper surface of the opening / closing plate 1300 while maintaining the action of smoothly dropping the ball that rolls the fall delay plate 3250 to the position facing the end surface 3251b, and the previous ball. Even when the opening / closing plate 1300 is closed by passing through the detection sensor 1240, it is possible to delay the fall of the ball arranged immediately before the detection sensor 1240.

Further, even if two balls are not connected in a row, the opening / closing plate 1300 happens to be closed when the balls rolling on the upper surface of the opening / closing plate 1300 are arranged in front of the detection sensor 1240. Also, the ball can flow down to the fall delay plate 3250 side. In this case, the ball rolls the upper surface 7261 of the second fall delay plate 7260 to the left, and then resumes rolling to the right along the upper surface of the rolling arc portion 3252 of the fall delay plate 3250.

Therefore, the ball can be substantially maintained on the front side of the opening / closing plate 1300 for more than the time required for rolling over the upper surface of the opening / closing plate 1300. This makes it possible to reduce the number of wasted balls (balls that flow down the front side of the opening / closing plate 1300 and are discharged from the first out port 66) that may occur during the interval time.

Next, the eighth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 59 to 65. 59 and 60 are front views of the first variable winning device 8000 according to the eighth embodiment, and FIGS. 61 and 62 are rear views of the first variable winning device 8000.

In FIGS. 59 and 60, the thin plate member 1210 is partially cut out so that the opening / closing plate 8300 can be visually recognized, and a part of the side wall portion 1220 and a part of the inclined surface 1237 are shown by imaginary lines. Further, in FIGS. 59 and 61, after the solenoid 1510 of the drive device 1500 is driven (excited), the opening / closing plate 8300 is in the open state (elevated posture), and the auxiliary opening / closing member 8340 is in the open state (extending posture). In FIGS. 60 and 62, the driving (excitation) of the solenoid 1510 of the driving device 1500 is released, the opening / closing plate 8300 is in the closed state (tilted posture), and the auxiliary opening / closing member 8340 is in the closed state (immersive posture). ) Is shown in the figure. Further, the same elements as those in the above-described embodiment are designated by the same reference numerals, and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

In the following description, with respect to the pachinko machine 10 in the state shown in FIG. 1, the front side of the paper surface will be referred to as the front (front) side, and the back side of the paper surface will be described as the rear (back) side. Further, with respect to the pachinko machine 10 in the state shown in FIG. 1, the upper side is the upper (upper) side, the lower side is the lower (lower) side, the right side is the right (right) side, and the left side is the left side (left). ) Side will be explained respectively. Further, the arrows UD, LR, and FB in the figure indicate the vertical direction, the horizontal direction, and the front-rear direction of the pachinko machine 10.

As shown in FIGS. 59 to 62, the opening / closing plate 8300 of the first variable winning device 8000 has a shaft portion 1320 described in each of the above embodiments, a loaded portion 1330, and both shaft portions 1320, which are approximately 4 mag. It is divided into minutes and includes a plate portion 8310 formed in a plate shape in three divisions on the left side of the front view (the side away from the detection sensor 1240).

That is, in the present embodiment, a gap is formed between the opening / closing plate 8300 and the detection sensor 1240 on the front surface of the thin plate member 1110, and the fixed receiving portion 8250 and the auxiliary opening / closing member 8340 are arranged in this gap. Will be set up.

Since the axial length of the plate portion 8310 of the opening / closing plate 8300 is shorter than that of the first embodiment, the formation range of the rectangular recess 1122 can also be shortened. In the present embodiment, the rectangular recess 1122 is formed in the minimum range necessary for the plate portion 8310 to enter (see FIG. 59).

The fixed receiving portion 8250 is a portion fixed to the lining front plate 8200 and plays a role of a rolling surface of a sphere guided to the detection sensor 1240. Since the configuration of the lining front plate 8200 is the same as that of the lining front plate 1200 described in the above embodiment except for the fixed receiving portion 8250, the same reference numerals are given to each configuration, and the details thereof are given. The explanation is omitted.

The fixed receiving portion 8250 is a rod-shaped member that protrudes from the back surface of the thin plate member 1210 toward the main body member 1100 side, and the protruding end portion (rear side end portion) is a support recess 1121 on the right side of the main body member 1100. It comes into contact with the main body member 1100 in a manner of closing the open end (front side end portion) of the above. Therefore, in the present embodiment, the shaft portion 1320 on the right side of the opening / closing plate 8300 is rotatably supported by the support recess 1121 and the fixed receiving portion 8250.

The fixed receiving portion 8250 is formed so that the upper surface (rolling surface of the sphere) is in a surface position with the upper surface (rolling surface) of the opening / closing plate 8300 in the open state, that is, as an inclined surface that inclines downward toward the right. The lower surface is formed from an arc shape centered on the rotation axis of the auxiliary opening / closing member 8340. The arc that is the basis of the shape of the lower surface is formed as an arc whose radius is shorter than the radius of the operation locus (arc) of the auxiliary opening / closing member 8340 (the radius of the longest portion, that is, the radius of the operation locus of the upper end portion of the facing surface 8341b). Will be done. As a result, the upper corner portion of the facing surface 8341b and the fixed receiving portion 8250 come into contact with each other in the moving direction of the auxiliary opening / closing member 8340, and the auxiliary opening / closing member 8340 moves (rotates) to the fixed receiving portion 8250 by a predetermined angle or more. Be regulated.

As shown in FIG. 59, the protrusion (extending length to the left) of the fixed receiving portion 8250 is designed so that the ball dropped from the left end of the inclined surface 1237 does not directly get on the rolling surface. To. That is, in the present embodiment, the left end of the fixed receiving portion 8250 is arranged to the left of the left end of the inclined surface 1237, but the overhang length thereof is less than the radius of the sphere. Therefore, when the ball falls vertically from the inclined surface 1237, even if the ball collides with the fixed receiving portion 8250, the center of gravity of the ball is to the left of the left end of the fixed receiving portion 8250. The event that the sphere flows down to the detection sensor 1240 hardly occurs, and the sphere spills to the left from the fixed receiving portion 8250 and falls toward the first out port 66.

In addition, when a ball spilled to the left from the fixed receiving portion 8250 rolls on the facing surface 8341b of the auxiliary opening / closing member 8340, the load applied from the ball to the auxiliary opening / closing member 8340 causes the auxiliary opening / closing member 8340 to be closed. (Oriented to rotate the auxiliary opening / closing member 8340 clockwise in front view). Therefore, it is possible to prevent the auxiliary opening / closing member 8340 from changing to the open state due to the load given from the ball.

Further, from the configuration on the upstream side of the first variable winning device 8000 in the game area (arrangement of nails, second ball opening 640, etc., see FIG. 2), a ball having a speed downward to the right to the fixed receiving portion 8250 It is extremely unlikely that a jumping event will occur.

Therefore, while the fixed receiving portion 8250 having the rolling surface is arranged on the upstream side of the detection sensor 1240, the fixed receiving portion 8250 alone does not have the effect of making it easy for the ball to be excessively guided by the detection sensor 1240. It is composed of.

The essence of the fixed receiving portion 8250 is to prevent a problem from occurring in the flow of a ball rolling on its upper surface (rolling surface) while opening and closing the auxiliary opening / closing member 8340 by a rotary operation. Hereinafter, the details of the auxiliary opening / closing member 8340 will be described.

The auxiliary opening / closing member 8340 is a member rotatably supported by the thin plate member 1110, and extends from the receiving plate 8341 arranged on the front side of the thin plate member 1110 and the receiving plate 8341 toward the rotating shaft. The rod-shaped connecting portion 8342 to be formed, the loaded portion 8343 disposed on the back side of the thin plate member 1110 and capable of contacting the power transmission member 1400, and the connecting portion 8342 and the loaded portion 8343 are made relatively non-rotatable. It is a rod-shaped member to be connected, and mainly includes a shaft support rod portion 8344 which is rotatably supported by a thin plate member 1110.

In the present embodiment, the shaft support rod portion 8344 has a shaft support portion supported by the thin plate member 1110 having a circular cross section, a support portion that supports the connecting portion 8342 on the front side thereof, and a load portion 8343 on the rear side thereof. The supporting portion to be supported is formed in a D-shaped cross section (a shape other than a circular shape). Fitting portions (holes or recesses) having a shape corresponding to this D-shape are formed in the connecting portion 8342 and the loaded portion 8343, and in the used state (see FIG. 59), the supporting portion and the fitting portion are fitted. By being combined, the connecting portion 8342 and the loaded portion 8343 are configured to rotate integrally.

The loaded portion 8343 is a substantially fan-shaped portion whose end is pivotally supported by the shaft support rod portion 8344, and has a contact curved surface 8343a which is a curved upper surface that abuts the power transmission member 1400 and a loaded portion 8343. It is arranged on the right side of the shaft support rod portion 8344 regardless of the posture of, and includes a center of gravity portion 8343b including the position of the center of gravity of the auxiliary opening / closing member 8340.

As shown in FIG. 62, the contact curved surface 8343a is a straight line that overlaps the lower surface of the extension portion 1420 during the operation of the power transmission member 1400, and is extended when the extension portion 1420 descends (tilts). The right end of the extension portion 1420 and the load-bearing portion 8343 has a surface substantially parallel to the contact start line FL1 including the point where the portion 1420 and the loaded portion 8343 start contact.

Since a smooth curved surface is formed from the right end portion toward the left end portion which is the end point of contact with the extension portion 1420 in a manner in which the radius of gyration gradually decreases, the extension portion 1420 and the loaded portion Load transmission with the 8343 can occur smoothly (with low dynamic friction). As a result, the followability of the loaded portion 8343 to the extended portion 1420 can be improved.

The center of gravity portion 8343b is a portion for maintaining the auxiliary opening / closing member 8340 in a closed state (immersive posture) when no load is generated from the power transmission member 1400. That is, since the center of gravity portion 8343b includes the position of the center of gravity of the auxiliary opening / closing member 8340, the auxiliary opening / closing member 8340 changes its posture toward the closed state (immersive posture) by rotation due to its own weight. Then, when the receiving plate 8341 of the auxiliary opening / closing member 8340 and the left end of the fixed receiving portion 8250 come into contact with each other, further rotation of the auxiliary opening / closing member 8340 is restricted, and the auxiliary opening / closing member 8340 is maintained in the closed state (immersive posture). Will be done.

The connecting portion 8342 is coupled to the receiving plate 8341 at the left end portion of the receiving plate 8341 (that is, a portion adjacent to the opening / closing plate 8300 and where a load may be generated). As a result, the rigidity of the left end portion of the receiving plate 8341 can be improved while narrowing the arrangement range of the connecting portion 8342. Therefore, when the solenoid 1510 is driven (excited), the auxiliary opening / closing member 8340 changes to the opening / closing plate 8300. Even if it collides with, the possibility that the auxiliary opening / closing member 8340 is damaged can be reduced.

The connecting portion 8342 need only be able to connect the receiving plate 8341 and the shaft support rod portion 8344, and the configuration mode thereof is not limited to this. For example, in addition to connecting the left end portion of the receiving plate 8341 and the shaft support rod portion 8344, the right end portion of the receiving plate 8341 and the shaft supporting rod portion 8344 may be connected (that is, two pieces). The left and right ends of the receiving plate 8341 may be supported by rods), and the two rods in that case are connected and reinforced by a planar plate portion along a plane orthogonal to the shaft support rod portion 8344. Is also good.

The receiving plate 8341 is a plate-shaped portion having a front-rear width similar to the lateral width of the plate portion 8310 of the opening / closing plate 8300, and is connected to a flat rolling plane 8341a and the left end of the rolling plane 8341a. It is provided with a facing surface 8341b which is a surface to be provided and is arranged to face the right end surface of the plate portion 8310 of the opening / closing plate 8300 in the open state (see FIG. 59).

The rolling plane 8341a is formed as a parallel plane connected to the rolling surface 1311 of the plate portion 8310 of the opening / closing plate 8300 in the open state (upward posture) in the open state (extended posture) at the surface position.

The facing surface 8341b is configured as a plane orthogonal to the rolling plane 8341a, and its lateral width (thickness of the receiving plate 8341) is substantially equal to the thickness of the plate portion 8310. As a result, the surface that receives the load at the time of contact between the facing surface 8341b and the plate portion 8310 can be increased, so that the receiving plate 8341 or the plate portion 8310 is damaged (cracking or chipping) due to the load at the time of contact. It can be easily avoided (such as being generated or damaged).

Here, the facing surface 8341b is arranged on the left side (the side away from the detection sensor 1240) of the plane passing through the shaft support rod portion 8344 and orthogonal to the central axis of the shaft portion 1320. Therefore, as shown in FIG. 59, the operation locus LC1 of the facing surface 8341b when the auxiliary opening / closing member 8340 operates in the open state (see FIG. 59) and the closed state (see FIG. 60) is a rolling plane in the open state. It swells above 8341a (outward in the radial direction of the shaft support rod portion 8344). This makes it easier to push the ball (one in the present embodiment) on the upper surface of the rolling plane 8341a into the detection sensor 1240, but the details will be described later.

Next, with reference to FIGS. 63 to 65, the operation modes and operation sequences of the auxiliary opening / closing member 8340, the opening / closing plate 8300, and the regulation member 1600 by the load transmitted through the power transmission member 1400 will be described.

In FIGS. 63 and 64, the operations of the opening / closing plate 8300, the auxiliary opening / closing member 8340, the power transmission member 1400, the tip member 1520 of the drive device 1500, and the regulation member 1600 are illustrated in chronological order. Further, FIG. 65 shows a change in the driving (excitation) state of the solenoid 1510 of the driving device 1500, and a timekeeping change in the positions and states of the tip member 1520, the opening / closing plate 8300, the auxiliary opening / closing member 8340, and the regulating member 1600.

63 (a) is a rear view of the first variable winning device 8000, and FIG. 63 (b) is a cross-sectional view of the first variable winning device 8000 in line LXIIIb-LXIIIb of FIG. 63 (a). 63 (c) is a rear view of the first variable winning device 8000, and FIG. 63 (d) is a cross-sectional view of the first variable winning device 8000 on the LXIIId-LXIIId line of FIG. 63 (c).

FIG. 64 (a) is a rear view of the first variable winning device 8000, and FIG. 64 (b) is a cross-sectional view of the first variable winning device 8000 in the LXIVb-LXIVb line of FIG. 64 (a). 64 (c) is a rear view of the first variable winning device 8000, and FIG. 64 (d) is a cross-sectional view of the first variable winning device 8000 on the LXIVd-LXIVd line of FIG. 64 (c).

In FIGS. 63 and 64, the opening / closing plate 8300, the auxiliary opening / closing member 8340, the power transmission member 1400, the tip member 1520 of the drive device 1500, the regulating member 1600, and the lining front plate 8200 are fixed for easy understanding. Only the receiving portion 8250 is shown while maintaining the arrangement in the assembled state (see FIGS. 59 to 62), the illustration of other configurations is omitted, and the opening / closing plate 8300 and the auxiliary opening / closing member 8340 are in the closed state (FIG. 63 (FIG. 63). The state change from (see a) and FIG. 63 (b)) to the open state (see FIGS. 64 (c) and 64 (d)) is illustrated in chronological order.

That is, in FIGS. 63 (a) and 63 (b), the state in which the tip member 1520 of the drive device 1500 is arranged at a position separated from the reference line O1 by the first distance h1 (the state in which the solenoid 1510 is not excited) is In FIGS. 63 (c) and 63 (d), the tip member 1520 is displaced and an auxiliary second distance shorter than the second distance h2 (see FIG. 20 (c)) shorter than the first distance h1 from the reference line O1. In FIGS. 64 (a) and 64 (b), the tip member 1520 is displaced and separated from the reference line O1 by a third distance h3, which is shorter than the auxiliary second distance h2a, when the state is arranged at a position separated by h2a. In FIGS. 64 (c) and 64 (d), the tip member 1520 is displaced and separated from the reference line O1 by a fourth distance h4, which is shorter than the third distance h3 (the solenoid 1510 is located). The states arranged at the final arrival position when excited are shown in the figure.

In the state where the tip member 1520 is arranged at a position separated from the reference line O1 by the auxiliary second distance h2a (see FIG. 63 (c)), the power transmission member 1400 makes the lower surface of the extension portion 1420 contact with the contact start line FL1. It is the same as the state to be matched. That is, in the states shown in FIGS. 63 (c) and 63 (d), the auxiliary opening / closing member 8340 starts receiving a load from the power transmission member 1400 (from the states shown in FIGS. 63 (a) and 63 (b), FIG. The auxiliary opening / closing member 8340 is maintained in the closed state until the states shown in 63 (c) and 63 (d) are reached).

FIG. 65 is a diagram showing changes in the drive (excitation) state of the solenoid 1510 of the drive device 1500, and changes in the positions and states of the tip member 1520, the opening / closing plate 8300, the auxiliary opening / closing member 8340, and the regulating member 1600. In FIG. 65, the distances h1, h2, h2a, h3, and h4 are shown in the column of the tip member 1520 corresponding to the position of the tip member 1520.

The opening / closing plate 8300, the auxiliary opening / closing member 8340, and the regulating member 1600 are each driven by driving (excitation) of a single solenoid 1510, but as shown in FIG. 65, there is a time lag in the operation timing.

That is, when the solenoid 1510 is driven (excited), that is, when the tip member 1520 moves from the left end to the right end, the opening / closing plate 8300 starts operating earlier and ends earlier than the auxiliary opening / closing member 8340. ..

Further, the regulation member 1600 starts operating toward the storage state after the auxiliary opening / closing member 8340 starts operating toward the open state, and enters the storage state at the same time when the opening / closing plate 8300 is opened. As shown in FIG. 65, each timing chart is symmetrically shown. When the solenoid 1510 is de-excited, each member operates in the reverse order of the driving (excitation).

As shown in FIG. 65, when the drive (excitation) of the solenoid 1510 is released, the opening / closing plate 8300 has not reached the closed state at the timing when the auxiliary opening / closing member 8340 reaches the closed state, and the first specific winning opening 1000a The state in which the ball can enter the ball is maintained (see FIGS. 63 (c) and 63 (d)). Therefore, during the period when the auxiliary opening / closing member 8340 changes from the open state to the closed state, the state in which the ball can pass through the detection sensor 1240 is maintained.

Here, in the present embodiment, the operation locus LC1 of the facing surface 8341b of the auxiliary opening / closing member 8340 is configured to bulge above the rolling plane 8341a, and the sphere P81 is detected by the detection sensor 1240 at the timing when the sphere P81 is detected. The center of the sphere P82 flowing down the upstream side of the sphere P81 is a plane orthogonal to the central axis of the shaft portion 1320 and passing through the center of the shaft support rod portion 8344 (the most bulging point of the operation locus LC1). It is arranged closer to the detection sensor 1240 than the plane through which it passes (see FIG. 59). Therefore, when the auxiliary opening / closing member 8340 changes from the open state to the closed state, a rightward (direction of pushing into the detection sensor 1240) load can be applied to the ball P82 at the upper end of the facing surface 8341b.

As a result, the ball P81 is the detection sensor on the premise that a continuous ball is formed according to the configuration of the present embodiment (see the balls P81 and P82 in FIG. 59 in which the condition of the ball upstream of the detection sensor 1240 satisfies the condition). When the excitation (drive) of the solenoid 1510 is released by being detected by 1240 (for example, when the ball P81 is detected by the detection sensor 1240 and a specified number of balls are detected in the round game R). Even so, only one ball (corresponding to the ball P82) on the rolling plane 8341a of the auxiliary opening / closing member 8340 is an excess prize (so-called over prize, that is, a specified number of round games R (this). In the embodiment, it can be configured to allow more than 10 balls to be detected by the detection sensor 1240 (passing through the first specific winning opening 1000a).

In the present embodiment, the receiving surface 8341 operates in an arc orbit to give a load to the sphere P82, and after being pushed toward the detection sensor 1240 by the load, the upper surface of the fixed receiving portion 8250 is rolled. Therefore, as compared with the case where the sphere P82 is pushed into the detection sensor 1240 along the arc trajectory, the sphere P82 flutters when passing through the opening of the detection sensor 1240 (the sphere P82 collides with the inner surface of the detection sensor 1240 and flows down. It is possible to prevent the occurrence of stagnation, bounce, etc.).

In the present embodiment, the spheres can be stored on the downstream side (storage flow path 1231) of the detection sensor 1240, and as described in each of the above embodiments, the detection sensor is made up of the spheres stored in the storage flow path 1231. It is configured to regulate the passage of 1240 balls. Therefore, when the storage flow path 1231 is full of spheres, the sphere P82 does not enter the storage flow path 1231 by being restricted by the spheres stored in the storage flow path 1231, and auxiliary opening and closing is performed. After the member 8340 is closed, it spills and flows down toward the first out port 66.

On the other hand, if there is a gap in the storage flow path 1231, the excess winning can be allowed only for one sphere on the rolling plane 8341a of the auxiliary opening / closing member 8340. Therefore, the easiness of generating the excess prize can be changed by the arrangement of the spheres downstream of the detection sensor 1240 (that is, the arrangement of the spheres inside the storage flow path 1231). It can be carried out by controlling the flow of the sphere in the road 1231.

According to the present embodiment described in detail above, the following excellent effects are obtained.

The contact curved surface 8343a of the auxiliary opening / closing member 8340 is smooth in such a manner that the radius of gyration gradually shortens from the contact start portion (right end portion) to the contact end portion (left end) with the power transmission member 1400. A curve was formed. As a result, load transmission can be generated in a state where the dynamic friction is small. As a result, the followability of the loaded portion 8343 to the extended portion 1420 can be improved.

In a state where a continuous ball is formed on the upstream side of the ball entering the detection sensor 1240 (first specific winning opening 1000a), the auxiliary opening / closing member 8340 is limited to one ball on the rolling plane 8341a. When the state changes (rotates) from the open state to the closed state, a load is applied from the rolling plane 8341a to the detection sensor 1240 (first specific winning opening 1000a). As a result, when the auxiliary opening / closing member 8340 is rotated (when it is operated to the closed state), a limited number of balls (one in the present embodiment) enter the detection sensor 1240 (first specific winning opening 1000a). It can be made easier to ball. This makes it possible to increase the possibility that a limited number of excess prizes will occur.

In addition, the likelihood of this excess winning will vary depending on how the balls in the storage channel 1231 are accumulating. That is, the possibility of excess winning can be changed depending on the arrangement state (stored number, etc.) of the spheres in the storage flow path 1231 when the auxiliary opening / closing member 8340 rotates (operates toward the closed state). Further, the arrangement state of the spheres in the storage flow path 1231 can be adjusted by the drive (excitation) control mode of the opening / closing plate 8300 and the operation mode of the interference member 6930. That is, by controlling the driving (excitation) mode of the opening / closing plate 8300 and the interference member 6930, it is possible to equalize the number of prize balls to be paid out due to the excess prize.

Next, a ninth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 66 to 72. 66 and 67 are front views of the first variable winning device 9000 according to the ninth embodiment, and FIGS. 68 and 69 are rear views of the first variable winning device 9000. The same elements as those in the above-described embodiment are designated by the same reference numerals, and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

In FIGS. 66 and 68, the solenoid 1510 of the drive device 1500 is driven (excited), the opening / closing plate 8300 is in the open state (elevated posture), and the auxiliary opening / closing member 8340 is in the open state (extending posture). In FIGS. 67 and 69, the drive (excitation) of the solenoid 1510 of the drive device 1500 is released, the opening / closing plate 8300 is in the closed state (tilted posture), and the auxiliary opening / closing member 8340 is in the closed state (immersive posture). The state after becoming is illustrated.

As shown in FIGS. 66 to 69, the first variable winning device 9000 is a combination of the configurations described in the above embodiment except that the thin plate member 9110 of the main body member 9100 is different from the above embodiment. Briefly, it corresponds to a power transmission member 1400 of the first variable winning device 8000 in the eighth embodiment replaced with the power transmission member 5400 described in the fifth embodiment.

Similar to the above embodiment, in the power transmission member 5400, the front side overhang end of the push-in portion 1422 and the front side overhang end of the time difference forming portion 5423 are the same orthogonal to the rotation axis of the power transmission member 5400. Arranged on a plane. Therefore, the opening / closing plate 8300 is opened even when the time difference forming portion 5423 pushes the engaging portion 1333 of the opening / closing plate 8300 (corresponding to the state shown in FIG. 71 (a) even before being pushed by the pushing portion 1422). The state changes to the state (see FIGS. 66 and 68).

The thin plate member 9110 extends to the front side of the thin plate member 9110 with a length that allows the ball to be guided to the auxiliary entry port 9111 and the auxiliary entry port 9111 that are bored with a size that allows the ball to pass through. Mainly provided with a rolling plate 9112.

The auxiliary ball entry port 9111 is a through hole arranged to the left of the discharge port 1150 in front view, and by detecting the passage of the ball, a plurality of balls (three in the present embodiment) are paid out. It is a prize ball mouth. The configuration of the present embodiment is not limited, and for example, the auxiliary ball entry port 9111 may be used as an entry port (for example, an out port) in which the prize ball is not paid out.

The rolling plate 9112 is configured as a plate in which a ball flowing down between the main body member 9100 and the lining front plate 8200 rolls on the upper surface, and as the upper surface approaches the auxiliary entry port 9111 (to the right). ) Formed as an inclined surface that slopes downward. Further, the rolling plate 9112 is formed so as to be connected to the lower side of the auxiliary entry port 9111, and on the front side of the auxiliary entry port 9111, it is formed as an inclined surface whose upper surface is inclined downward toward the back side. To.

That is, the ball on the upper surface of the rolling plate 9112 is guided to the front side of the auxiliary entry port 9111 along the inclination, and then passes through the auxiliary entry port 9111 and is discharged from the game area. At this time, in the present embodiment, three prize balls are paid out to the player.

The length of the rolling plate 9112 is designed so as not to pick up the ball flowing down the flow path FK1 of the ball that rolls on the upper surface of the inclined surface 1237 and freely falls. That is, in a state where the first variable winning device 9000 is not driven, the ball does not pass through the auxiliary entry port 9111 no matter how long the right-handed hit is continued.

On the other hand, the opening / closing plate 8300 having an upper surface that inclines downward toward the right is driven even slightly (for example, the opening / closing plate 8300 is excited for 0.1 seconds and rotates toward the open state), and the opening / closing plate 8300 is directed to the right. When the ball flows down the load flow path FK2 on which the loaded ball flows down, the ball may roll on the upper surface of the rolling plate 9112 and pass through the auxiliary entry port 9111. That is, in the present embodiment, when the opening / closing plate 8300 is driven, the ball that comes into contact with the opening / closing plate 8300 can pass through the auxiliary entry opening 9111 in addition to the first specific winning opening 1000a.

Here, since the operation mode of the opening / closing plate 8300 is different from that described above in the eighth embodiment, it will be described in detail with reference to FIGS. 70 to 72.

In FIGS. 70 and 71, the operations of the opening / closing plate 8300, the auxiliary opening / closing member 8340, the power transmission member 5400, the tip member 1520 of the drive device 1500, and the regulation member 1600 are illustrated in chronological order. Further, FIG. 72 shows a change in the driving (excitation) state of the solenoid 1510 of the driving device 1500, and a timekeeping change in the positions and states of the tip member 1520, the opening / closing plate 8300, the auxiliary opening / closing member 8340, and the regulating member 1600.

70 (a) is a rear view of the first variable winning device 9000, and FIG. 70 (b) is a cross-sectional view of the first variable winning device 9000 in the line LXXb-LXXb of FIG. 70 (a). 70 (c) is a rear view of the first variable winning device 9000, and FIG. 70 (d) is a cross-sectional view of the first variable winning device 9000 in the LXXd-LXXd line of FIG. 70 (c).

71 (a) is a rear view of the first variable winning device 9000, and FIG. 71 (b) is a cross-sectional view of the first variable winning device 9000 in the LXXIb-LXXIb line of FIG. 71 (a). 71 (c) is a rear view of the first variable winning device 9000, and FIG. 71 (d) is a cross-sectional view of the first variable winning device 9000 on the LXXId-LXXId line of FIG. 71 (c).

In FIGS. 70 and 71, the opening / closing plate 8300, the auxiliary opening / closing member 8340, the power transmission member 5400, the tip member 1520 of the drive device 1500, the regulation member 1600, and the lining front plate 8200 are fixed for easy understanding. Only the receiving portion 8250 is shown while maintaining the arrangement in the assembled state (see FIGS. 66 to 69), the illustration of other configurations is omitted, and the opening / closing plate 8300 and the auxiliary opening / closing member 8340 are in the closed state (FIG. 70 (FIG. 70). The state change from a) and 70 (b)) to the open state (see 71 (c) and 71 (d)) is illustrated in chronological order.

That is, in FIGS. 70A and 70B, the state in which the tip member 1520 of the drive device 1500 is arranged at a position separated from the reference line O1 by the first distance h1 (the state in which the solenoid 1510 is not excited) is 70 (c) and 70 (d) show that the tip member 1520 is displaced and is arranged at a position separated from the reference line O1 by an auxiliary first distance h1a shorter than the first distance h1. In a) and 71 (b), the state in which the tip member 1520 is displaced and is arranged at a position separated from the reference line O1 by an auxiliary second distance h2a shorter than the auxiliary first distance h1a is shown in FIGS. 71 (c) and 71 (b). In FIG. 71 (d), the tip member 1520 is displaced and is arranged at a position separated from the reference line O1 by a fourth distance h4 shorter than the auxiliary second distance h2a (final arrival position when the solenoid 1510 is excited). Each state is illustrated.

The state in which the tip member 1520 is arranged at a position separated from the reference line O1 by the auxiliary first distance h1a (see FIG. 70 (c)) is regulated by the intervening transmission portion 1332 of the opening / closing plate 8300 pushed down by the power transmission member 5400. It is the same as the state in which the extension portion 1620 of the member 1600 starts to come into contact with the extension portion 1620. That is, in the states shown in FIGS. 70 (c) and 70 (d), the regulating member 1600 starts to receive a load from the opening / closing plate 8300 (from the states shown in FIGS. 70 (a) and 70 (b), FIG. 70 ( The regulating member 1600 is maintained in the ascending posture (discharging state) until the state shown in c) and FIG. 70 (d) is reached).

In the present embodiment, unlike the eighth embodiment, the opening / closing plate 8300 is opened in a state where the tip member 1520 is arranged at a position separated from the reference line O1 by an auxiliary second distance h2a (see FIG. 71 (a)). The state (elevation posture) is set, and the regulation member 1600 is set to the stored state. Then, in a state where the tip member 1520 is arranged at a position separated from the reference line O1 by a fourth distance h4, the auxiliary opening / closing member 8340 (see FIG. 71 (a)), which was in the closed state, is opened (see FIG. 71 (a)). 71 (c)).

Therefore, from the state shown in FIGS. 71 (a) and 71 (b) to the state shown in FIGS. 71 (c) and 71 (d), the opening / closing plate 8300 is maintained in the open state (elevated posture) and regulated. The member 1600 is maintained in the stored state.

FIG. 72 is a diagram showing changes in the drive (excitation) state of the solenoid 1510 of the drive device 1500, and changes in the positions and states of the tip member 1520, the opening / closing plate 8300, the auxiliary opening / closing member 8340, and the regulating member 1600. In FIG. 72, the distances h1, h1a, h2a, and h4 are shown in the column of the tip member 1520 corresponding to the position of the tip member 1520.

The opening / closing plate 8300, the auxiliary opening / closing member 8340, and the regulating member 1600 are each driven by driving (excitation) of a single solenoid 1510, but as shown in FIG. 72, there is a time lag in the operation timing.

That is, when the solenoid 1510 is driven (excited), that is, when the tip member 1520 moves from the left end to the right end, the opening / closing plate 8300 starts operating earlier than the auxiliary opening / closing member 8340, and the opening / closing plate 8300 After the operation is completed, the auxiliary opening / closing member 8340 starts the operation.

Further, the regulation member 1600 starts operating toward the storage state before the auxiliary opening / closing member 8340 starts operating toward the open state, and the opening / closing plate 8300 enters the storage state at the same time as the opening state. As shown in FIG. 72, each timing chart is symmetrically shown. When the solenoid 1510 is de-excited, each member operates in the reverse order of the driving (excitation).

As shown in FIG. 72, when the solenoid 1510 is driven from the non-excited state, only the opening / closing plate 8300 starts operating, and the auxiliary opening / closing member 8340 does not start operating yet. Therefore, by shortening the drive (excitation) of the solenoid 1510 (by performing a short opening), the state of the opening / closing plate 8300 can be changed while the auxiliary opening / closing member 8340 is maintained in the closed state. This will be described with reference to FIG. 73.

FIG. 73 is a diagram showing changes in the driving (excited) state of the solenoid 1510 of the driving device 1500, and changes in the positions and states of the tip member 1520, the opening / closing plate 8300, the auxiliary opening / closing member 8340, and the regulating member 1600. In FIG. 73, the distances h1, h1a, h2a, and h4 are shown in the column of the tip member 1520 corresponding to the position of the tip member 1520.

FIG. 73 shows a case where the period for driving (exciting) the solenoid 1510 is half of the time required for the opening / closing plate 8300 to change from the closed state to the open state (0.1 seconds in the present embodiment). (That is, the case where it is driven (excited) for 0.05 seconds is shown).

In this case, the auxiliary opening / closing member 8340 is maintained in the closed state, and only the opening / closing plate 8300 repeats the operation of rising to the intermediate state. According to this operation, a load can be applied to the ball flowing down the front side of the opening / closing plate 8300. Therefore, the flow path of the ball reaching the front side of the opening / closing plate 8300 at the timing when the opening / closing plate 8300 is driven is flowed down. It is possible to switch from the path FK1 to the load flow path FK2 (see FIG. 66). Therefore, by continuing to launch the ball by hitting the right side, the ball can be passed through the auxiliary entry port 9111, and the prize ball can be paid out to the player.

With this configuration, for example, it is possible to configure the playability of paying out prize balls by a small hit game. In the small hit game, by driving (exciting) the solenoid 1510 in the opening pattern shown in FIG. 73, the flow path of the ball reaching the front side of the opening / closing plate 8300 is switched at the timing when the opening / closing plate 8300 operates to assist. The ball can be guided to the entry port 9111 to cause the prize ball to be paid out.

Since the solenoid 1510 of the small hit game can be driven a plurality of times in succession, the timing at which the ball reaches the front side of the opening / closing plate 8300 can be set at a plurality of time points. For example, since one drive (excitation) period is 0.05 seconds, if the total drive (excitation) period of the solenoid 1510 is 1.8 seconds, the solenoid 1510 is driven (excited) 36 times. be able to.

Further, by setting the drive (excitation) interval, it is possible to easily apply a load to the ball via the opening / closing plate 8300. For example, when the spheres are fired at intervals of 0.6 seconds, the solenoid 1510 is set at intervals of 0.5 seconds because 0.6 × X (number of arrivals of the spheres) = 0.5 × X + 0.1 × X =. By driving (exciting) with, a load can be applied to the spheres via the opening / closing plate 8300 at a ratio of about 1 in 5 spheres regardless of the timing of starting the driving (excitation).

In this case, about 7 balls can be guided to the auxiliary entrance 9111 in one small hit game, and about 21 prize balls can be paid out to the player.

The period of the small hit game in this case is 0.5 second interval × 36 times = about 18 seconds. By prolonging the time of one small hit game in this way, it is possible to prevent a situation in which the reserved ball of the special symbol disappears (cuts) by the end of the small hit game. As a result, the small hit game can be generated without interruption.

Further, in the present embodiment, since the auxiliary opening / closing member 8340 arranged above the auxiliary entry opening 9111 is maintained in the closed state, as in the case where the auxiliary opening / closing member 8340 operates (above the auxiliary entry port 9111). The ball that flows down to the auxiliary entry port 9111 side (that is, the ball that flows down in the load flow path FK2) is repelled by the load from the auxiliary opening / closing member 8340, or the auxiliary opening / closing. It is possible to prevent the member 8340 from being guided by the detection sensor 1240 on the rolling plane 8341a.

It will be described back to FIG. 72. As shown in FIG. 72, when the drive (excitation) of the solenoid 1510 is released, the opening / closing plate 8300 does not reach the closed state at the timing when the auxiliary opening / closing member 8340 reaches the closed state, and the first specific winning opening 1000a The state in which the solenoid ball can enter is maintained as described above in the eighth embodiment. Therefore, as described in the eighth embodiment, even in the present embodiment, it is possible to easily configure an excess prize with a limited number of balls.

In addition, in the present embodiment, when the drive (excitation) of the solenoid 1510 is released, the regulation member 1600 is controlled to change to the discharge state after the auxiliary opening / closing member 8340 is closed. When the storage channel 1231 is full, it is possible to prevent the balls from being discharged from the storage channel 1231 by mistake, and thus it is possible to prevent an excess prize from being generated.

Here, in the present embodiment, the opening / closing plate 8300 maintains the open state at the timing when the auxiliary opening / closing member 8340 is closed (see FIG. 71 (a)). Therefore, the state of the auxiliary opening / closing member 8340 can be changed while maintaining the state (open state) in which the ball can be placed on the upper surface of the opening / closing plate 8300. This will be described with reference to FIG. 74.

FIG. 74 is a diagram showing changes in the driving (excited) state of the solenoid 1510 of the driving device 1500, and changes in the positions and states of the tip member 1520, the opening / closing plate 8300, the auxiliary opening / closing member 8340, and the regulating member 1600. In FIG. 74, the distances h1, h1a, h2a, and h4 are shown in the column of the tip member 1520 corresponding to the position of the tip member 1520.

In FIG. 74, the period for releasing the drive (excitation) of the solenoid 1510 is set to 1/4 of the time required for the opening / closing plate 8300 to change from the closed state to the open state (0.1 seconds in the present embodiment). (That is, the case where the drive (excitation) is released for 0.025 seconds is shown). In the following, the mode of releasing the drive (excitation) is also referred to as "1/4 release".

In this case, the opening / closing plate 8300 and the regulating member 1600 maintain the state (maintain the storage of the sphere in the storage flow path 1231), and only the auxiliary opening / closing member 8340 changes from the open state to the closed state. According to this operation, among the spheres on the upper surfaces of the opening / closing plate 8300 and the auxiliary opening / closing member 8340, several spheres (auxiliary opening / closing member 8340 and the opening / closing plate 8300) arranged on the upstream side of the auxiliary opening / closing member 8340 A sphere arranged at the boundary of the above, mainly a sphere arranged outside the motion locus LC1) can flow down toward the auxiliary entry port 9111 (see FIG. 66).

As a result, when the ball that has rolled on the upper surface of the opening / closing plate 8300 passes through the detection sensor 1240 when the opening / closing plate 8300 is still in the open state (when 15 prize balls are paid out). , The case where the detection sensor 1240 passes through the auxiliary entry port 9111 without passing through (the case where three prize balls are paid out) can be configured.

In this case, since the time until the specified number of balls pass through the detection sensor 1240 is extended, the time of the round game R can be extended without causing ball loss.

The upper surface of the opening / closing plate 8300 and the auxiliary opening / closing member 8340 may be provided with irregularities, or a vertically long rib may be provided on the front side of the thin plate member 9110 at a position where a rolling ball contacts the upper surface of the opening / closing plate 8300. The flow speed of the spheres may be suppressed so that the spheres are connected on the upstream side of the detection sensor 1240. As a result, when the drive (excitation) of the solenoid 1510 is released by 1/4, the possibility that the sphere is arranged at the boundary position between the auxiliary opening / closing member 8340 and the opening / closing plate 8300 can be increased. By releasing 1/4 of the drive (excitation), the function of guiding the ball to the auxiliary ball entry port 9111 can be improved.

Further, the timing and the number of times to execute the 1/4 release of the solenoid 1510 can be set to a plurality of types by associating with the jackpot type.

For example, when the balls are fired at intervals of 0.6 seconds, 1/4 of the drive (excitation) of the solenoid 1510 is released during the 9.0 seconds required for the 15 balls to reach the opening / closing plate 8300. Is generated 5 times, that is, once every 1.8 seconds, 1/4 release of the drive (excitation) of the solenoid 1510 occurs once, thereby assisting about 5 balls during the round game R. It is possible to guide to the entry port 9111.

In this case, the number of prize balls paid out to the player can be the same as the case where only one ball is excessively won in the first specific winning opening 1000a in the round game R.

In addition, by doubling this interval, that is, once every 3.6 seconds, 1/4 release of the solenoid 1510 occurs once, about 5 balls can be played while the round game R is executed twice. It can be guided to the auxiliary ball entrance 9111.

In this case, the number of prize balls paid out to the player can be the same as the case where only one ball is excessively won in the first specific winning opening 1000a while the round game R is executed twice.

In addition, in order to satisfy 5 times in 9.0 seconds, it is not necessary to set equal intervals of 1.8 seconds each. For example, 1.4 seconds, 1.6 seconds, 1.8 seconds, 2.0 seconds, 2.2 seconds, and so on, in the manner of adding 0.2 seconds each, 5 times in 9.0 seconds, solenoid 1510. 1/4 of the above may be released. Further, the solenoid 1510 may be released by 1/4 at different timings. This makes it difficult for the player to predict when the solenoid 1510 will be released in 1/4.

Further, for example, by concentrating the timing of executing 1/4 release of the solenoid 1510 in the first half of the round game R, the ball is guided to the auxiliary entry port 9111 by continuing to shoot the ball from the start time of the round game R. It is possible to construct a playability that increases the probability of being played.

In this case, if the firing of the ball is stopped at the interval between rounds, the ball may not reach the first variable winning device 9000 at the timing when the 1/4 release of the solenoid 1510 is executed. Can be suppressed.

That is, if the ball is launched at the interval between rounds, the next round game R can be started in a state where the launched ball has reached the vicinity of the first variable winning device 9000, and the auxiliary entry is performed. Since the probability that the ball will be guided to the ball opening 9111 can be increased, and as a result, the number of prize balls to be paid out can be increased, it is possible to enthusiastically keep the player hitting the ball at the interval between rounds. it can.

Further, for example, by concentrating the timing of executing the 1/4 release of the solenoid 1510 in the latter half of the round game R, a specified number (10 in this embodiment) of prizes (first specific) is won until the middle of the round game R. It is possible to promote a loose jackpot game in which a ball is intermittently fired so as not to cause a winning of the winning opening 1000a).

In this case, in the latter half of the round game R, if the round game R is prolonged until the release of 1/4 of the solenoid 1510 is executed, the prize ball will be paid out due to the ball passing through the auxiliary entry port 9111. Since it can be made to pay out and the number of payouts can be increased, it is possible to make the player perform a loose jackpot game such as enthusiastically firing a ball intermittently.

In this case, a difference is provided in the number of times that the solenoid 1510 is released 1/4 in the latter half of the round game R (for example, there are 0 times, 1 time, and 5 times). As a result, the additional prize balls obtained as a result of the loose jackpot game can be differentiated, so that the player's attention to the flow mode of the balls that have reached the first variable winning device 9000 is maintained in a high state. can do.

On the other hand, the balls may be continuously fired, and a specified number (10 in this embodiment) of balls may be won in the first specific winning opening 1000a before the drive (excitation) of the solenoid 1510 is released. .. In this case, it is not expected that the payout of prize balls will increase due to the passage of the ball through the auxiliary ball opening 9111, but by shortening the time required for the round game R, the start timing of the next round game R and the end of the jackpot game You can accelerate the timing of receiving the lottery later.

In this way, the player can arbitrarily select whether to aim for the payout of the prize ball by the auxiliary ball opening 9111 or to ignore it and end the round game R at an early stage.

According to the present embodiment described in detail above, the following excellent effects are obtained.

A ball that collides with the opening / closing plate 8300 during the operation of driving the opening / closing plate 8300 from the closed state to the intermediate state can enter the auxiliary entry port 9111 by being given a load toward the auxiliary entry port 9111. did. As a result, even in the case of an operation mode in which the opening / closing plate 8300 is maintained in the open state for a short period of time, it is possible to easily pay out the prize ball, so that the player can play the ball during a small hit game or the like. Can be enthusiastically executed.

A ball that reaches the upstream of the auxiliary opening / closing member 8340 at a specific timing by executing 1/4 release of the excitation (drive) of the solenoid 1510 while the opening / closing plate 8300 continues to guide the ball to the detection sensor 1240. Was made to flow down toward the auxiliary entry port 9111. As a result, variations can be provided in the mode of progress of the round game R in the jackpot game and the mode of paying out the prize balls.

For example, even if the number of balls passing through the first specific winning opening 1000a does not exceed the specified number, the player can pay out the winning balls by entering the auxiliary entry opening 9111, and the player can use the excess winning balls (first). It is possible to obtain a prize ball (150 prize balls in the present embodiment) that is paid out by entering a specified number (10 balls in the present embodiment) into the specific prize opening 1000a.

Next, the tenth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 75 to 78. 75 is a front view of the first variable winning device 10000 according to the tenth embodiment, and FIGS. 76 and 77 are rear views of the first variable winning device 10000. The same elements as those in the above-described embodiment are designated by the same reference numerals, and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

In FIGS. 75 and 76, the solenoid 10182 of the intermediate discharge device 10180 is de-energized, and the state in which the sphere flowing down the storage flow path 1231 reaches the lowermost end is shown. In FIG. 77, the solenoid 10182 of the intermediate discharge device 10180 is shown. Is driven (excited), and a state in which a sphere flowing down the storage flow path 1231 can be discharged on the way is illustrated.

As shown in FIGS. 75 to 77, the first variable winning device 10000 includes a case where the ball can be discharged from an intermediate position of the storage flow path 1231 formed by the main body member 10100 and the lining front plate 10200. Except for the differences from the embodiments, the configurations described in the above embodiments are combined. Briefly, the movable parts (that is, the opening / closing plate 8300, the auxiliary opening / closing member 8340, the power transmission member 1400, the drive device 1500, the regulation member 1600, and the interference device 6900) except for the intermediate discharge device 10180 are configured in the eighth embodiment. Is diverted as it is.

In the present embodiment, a mechanism for discharging the sphere at an intermediate position of the storage flow path 1231 will be described. In the present embodiment, the lining front plate 10200 is extended in a box shape that opens toward the back side of the thin plate member 1210, and includes a storage passage 1231, a protruding portion 1235, and an accommodating portion 10230 including an inclined surface 1237. ..

The accommodating portion 10230 includes a bulging portion 10232 formed in such a manner that the lower wall portion of the box bulges downward, and a through hole 10233 formed in the vicinity of the bulging portion 10232 in the front-rear direction.

The bulging portion 10232 is bulged vertically below the sphere whose flow is restricted by the interference member 6930 with a volume larger than that of the sphere, and in that portion, a through hole 10233 having a cross-sectional area larger than that of the sphere connected to the storage flow path 1231. Is formed. As a result, the ball staying at the position near the interference member 6930 can be configured to be dropped downward from the storage flow path 1231 toward the bulging portion 10232.

The through hole 10233 is a horizontal hole 10233a extending horizontally below the bottom surface of the storage flow path 1231 and a vertical hole that is spatially connected to the horizontal hole 10233a and extends downward with a width equal to or larger than the diameter of the sphere. It includes 10233b and an inclined surface 10233c as an upper bottom surface of the vertical hole 10233b that inclines downward toward the back surface side.

The lateral hole 10233a is arranged above the bulging portion 10232 at the left and right ends, and is arranged below the lower bottom surface of the storage flow path 1231 near the right end, while the lateral hole 10233a is arranged near the left end of the storage flow path 1231. It is configured to enter the upper side of a plane (a plane with a constant inclination) along the extension line of the lower bottom surface.

The main body member 10100 has substantially the same shape as the horizontal hole 10233a in the thin plate member 10110 formed from a horizontally long rectangular thin plate arranged on the front side of the game board, in addition to the one described as the configuration of the main body member 1100 in the above embodiment. The horizontal hole 10111 to be drilled, the discharge port 10112 to be drilled so that the ball thrown to the back side along the inclined surface 10233c can pass through, and the thin plate member 10110 are arranged and move along the horizontal hole 10111. An intermediate discharge device 10180 having a portion is provided.

The intermediate discharge device 10180 mainly includes a movable member 10181 that is inserted through both the lateral holes 10111 and 10233a and is movable to the left and right, and a solenoid 10182 that generates a driving force to move the movable member 10181 to the left and right. Be prepared.

The movable member 10181 is excited by the solenoid 10182 in a closed state (see FIGS. 75 and 76) that closes an opening (opening connected to the through hole 10233) in the middle of the storage flow path 1231 in the non-excited (non-driven) state of the solenoid 10182. In the (driving) state, the storage flow path 1231 is switched to an open state (see FIG. 77) that allows the passage of a sphere through an opening (opening connected to the through hole 10233) in the middle.

The movable member 10181 is maintained in a non-contact state with the bulging portion 10232 when the ball is not on it. As a result, it is possible to avoid friction between the movable member 10181 and the bulging portion 10232, and it is possible to reduce the movement resistance.

On the other hand, the movable member 10181 is supported by the upper surface of the bulging portion 10232 and the left and right end portions coming into vertical contact with each other in the closed state. As a result, even when the ball rides on the upper surface of the movable member 10181 in the closed state of the movable member 10181, it is possible to prevent the movable member 10181 from hanging excessively, and the ball inside the storage flow path 1231. Can smooth the flow of.

The movable member 10181 is an inclined upper surface 10181a which is an upper surface and is formed as an inclined surface which is inclined downward toward the left and functions as a rolling surface on which a sphere rolls in a closed state, and a lower surface which is a front view. It mainly includes an inclined lower surface 10181b formed at the left end and inclined downward toward the right.

The inclined upper surface 10181a is in a state before the ball rides, and in a state where the movable member 10181 is not in contact with the bulging portion 10232 in the vertical direction (a state in which the movable member 10181 is floating), the right end portion is adjacent to the storage. It is arranged slightly below the lower bottom surface of the flow path 1231. As a result, the load (resistance) received by the ball when the ball transfers from the storage flow path 1231 to the inclined upper surface 10181a can be reduced.

Further, the inclined upper surface 10181a is in a state after the ball is placed, and in a state where the movable member 10181 is in contact with the bulging portion 10232 in the vertical direction (a state in which the movable member 10181 is sunk), the left end portion is adjacent to the storage. The shape is such that the lower bottom surface and the surface position of the flow path 1231 are formed. As a result, the load (resistance) received by the ball when the ball is transferred from the inclined upper surface 10181a to the storage flow path 1231 can be reduced.

The shape of the above-mentioned inclined upper surface 10181a is not the same shape because the degree of inclination is gentler than the shape of the lower surface of the storage flow path 1231. However, since the difference is slight, in the present embodiment as well, the time required for one ball to be discharged from the storage flow path 1231 in the closed state of the movable member 10181 is 0.2. It is considered to be seconds.

The inclined lower surface 10181b is for facilitating landing on the bulging portion 10232 even when the ball rides on the upper surface of the movable member 10181 before the movable member 10181 reaches the open state and the movable member 10181 is about to fall forward. It is an inclined surface provided in. As a result, the tip of the movable member 10181 is restricted from moving to the inner surface of the vertical hole 10233b, and it is possible to prevent a problem of stopping in that state, and the flow of the ball in the storage flow path 1231 is maintained smoothly. be able to.

When the intermediate discharge device 10180 is opened (see FIG. 77), the upstream spheres, including the third storage sphere counting from the downstream end, flow down the vertical hole 10233b and load from the inclined surface 10233c. The ball is thrown to the back side, and is thrown to the ball discharge path (not shown) through the discharge port 10112.

In the present embodiment, the discharge port 10112 is provided with a detection sensor 10112a for detecting the passage of balls, and is configured to be able to determine the number of balls that have passed through the discharge port 10112. Then, the ball that has entered the first specific winning opening 1000a is a detection means for detecting the ball discharged from the detection sensor 10112a or the discharge port 1150 (for example, the specific area detection sensor 4860, the non-specific area detection sensor 4870, FIG. 51. The passage is detected by (see), and control is executed to determine whether the number of balls entered and the number of ejected balls match.

According to the present embodiment, according to the operation mode of the intermediate discharge device 10180 in the round game R, when a specified number of balls (10 in the present embodiment) enter the first specific winning opening 1000a, the storage flow path It is possible to switch between the case where the 1231 is full and the state where the storage flow path 1231 is not full. This will be described with reference to FIG. 78. In the description of FIG. 78, in order to facilitate understanding, the interference member 6930 will be described as being maintained in the retracted state.

FIGS. 78A to 78D are diagrams showing an example of a change in the state of the first specific winning opening 1000a and a timekeeping change in the state of the movable member 10181 in the round game R. In FIG. 78A, the first specific winning opening 1000a is in an open state (also referred to as “open” in the figure. The closed state of the first specific winning opening 1000a is also shown as “closed” in the figure. The timekeeping change when the movable member 10181 is maintained in the closed state (also referred to as “closed” in the figure; the same applies in the following figures) for the period considered to be the same in the following figures) is shown in FIG. In 78 (b), the movable member 10181 is maintained in the open state (also referred to as “open” in the figure; the same applies in the following figures) for the period in which the first specific winning opening 1000a is opened. The timed changes in each case are illustrated.

Further, in FIG. 78 (c), the movable member 10181 changes to the open state after the lapse of the first predetermined time (1 second in the present embodiment) after the first specific winning opening 1000a starts to change to the open state, and then the first 2 When the movable member 10181 changes to the closed state after a lapse of a predetermined time (3 seconds in the present embodiment) and is maintained as it is, the timing change in FIG. 78 (d) shows that the first specific winning opening 1000a is in the open state. The movable member 10181 changes to the open state after the lapse of the reference time T11s (about 15 seconds in the present embodiment) from the start of the state change, and then the movable member 10181 closes after the lapse of the second predetermined time (2 seconds in the present embodiment). The timekeeping changes when the state changes and is maintained as it is are shown.

In this way, the drive of the movable member 10181 (drive of the solenoid 10182) is associated (associated) with a combination of the number of rounds of the round game R to be executed and what the jackpot type is. It is made feasible in various driving modes.

For example, in the drive mode shown in FIG. 78 (a), since the movable member 10181 is always in a closed state during the round game R, the ball that has entered the storage flow path 1231 is discharged as in each of the above embodiments. It is discharged from the outlet 1150. That is, since the balls are not discharged from the intermediate position of the storage flow path 1231, the storage flow path 1231 is formed by the specified number of balls (10 in the present embodiment) entering the first specific winning opening 1000a. It will be full. Therefore, it is possible (or impossible) to generate an excess prize exceeding the specified number of round games R (10 in this embodiment).

Further, for example, in the drive mode shown in FIG. 78 (b), since the movable member 10181 is always in the open state during the round game R, the ball entering the storage flow path 1231 is different from each of the above embodiments. , It falls into the through hole 10233 and is discharged from the discharge port 10112 before reaching the discharge port 1150. That is, even if a specified number of balls (10 in this embodiment) enter the first specific winning opening 1000a, the storage flow path 1231 is not full. Therefore, it is possible (and possible) to easily generate an excess prize exceeding the specified number of round games R (10 in this embodiment).

In FIG. 78 (b), the movable member 10181 has elapsed 2 seconds (the period required for the ball to pass through the storage flow path 1231) after the excitation (drive) of the solenoid 1510 is released as the end of the round game R. Is changed to the open state, so that the first specified winning opening 1000a can be dropped toward the through hole 10233 including the ball that passed last (immediately before the drive (excitation) of the solenoid 1510 is released). Therefore, it is possible to configure the ball that has passed through the first specific winning opening 1000a so as not to flow down to the discharge port 1150 at all.

Further, for example, in the drive mode shown in FIG. 78 (c), the movable member 10181 changes from the closed state to the open state 1.0 second after the start of the round game R, and 3.0 seconds after that, the movable member 10181 changes. Since it is controlled to change from the open state to the closed state, if the balls can be dropped toward the through hole 10233 before 4 seconds have passed from the start of the round game R, the specified number (10 in this embodiment). Even when the ball (pieces) enters the first specific winning opening 1000a, the storage flow path 1231 is not full. Therefore, it is possible (and possible) to easily generate an excess prize exceeding the specified number of round games R (10 in this embodiment).

In order to place the ball above the through hole 10233 before 4 seconds have passed from the start of the round game R, considering the time for the ball to flow down the storage flow path 1231, about 2.5 from the start of the round game R. It is necessary for the ball to pass through the first specific winning opening 1000a before the second elapses.

This time of about 2.5 seconds is the time (minimum) required for the ball launched from the ball launching unit 112a (see FIG. 4) to flow down the game area and reach the first specific winning opening 1000a in the present embodiment. Time is shorter than about 4 seconds). Therefore, it is not enough to shoot the ball from the start of the round game R.

Therefore, in order to prevent the storage flow path 1231 from becoming full, it is necessary to continue firing the ball even in the inter-round interval before the round game R. As a result, it is possible to suppress the game mode in which the firing of the ball is stopped at the interval between rounds.

Further, the effect of the display device or the like is configured so that it is difficult for the player to grasp the information as to which round of the round game R the driving mode shown in FIG. 78 (c) occurs or whether or not it occurs in the first place. As a result, regardless of whether or not the round game R is driven by the drive mode shown in FIG. 78 (c), the game mode in which the ball is stopped at the interval immediately before the round game R is suppressed. Can be done.

Further, for example, in the drive mode shown in FIG. 78 (d), the movable member 10181 is opened when the reference time T11s (15 seconds in the present embodiment) elapses from the start of the round game R, and then 2.0 seconds elapse. Later, the movable member 10181 is controlled to change state to the closed state.

In the present embodiment, the control of the movable member 10181 is effectively executed during the period in which the round game R continues, but when the round game R ends, the control is skipped and the movable member 10181 is forced to the closed state. Can be switched.

In the driving mode shown in FIG. 78 (d), for example, when the first end time T11a (for example, 10 seconds) shorter than the reference time T11s elapses from the start of the round game R, a specified number (10 in the present embodiment) When the balls (pieces) pass through the first specific winning opening 1000a, since the round game R is completed before the movable member 10181 is opened, all the balls that have passed through the first specific winning opening 1000a are stored in the storage flow path. It is stored in 1231, and the storage channel 1231 is full. Therefore, it is possible (or impossible) to generate an excess prize exceeding the specified number of round games R (10 in this embodiment).

On the other hand, for example, when the second end time T11b (for example, 20 seconds) longer than the reference time T11s elapses from the start of the round game R, a specified number (10 in this embodiment) of balls wins the first specific prize. When passing through the mouth 1000a, the movable member 10181 is opened before the end of the round game R, the ball falls toward the through hole 10233, and is discharged from the discharge port 10112, so that the storage flow path 1231 is full. It doesn't become a tongue. Therefore, it is possible (and possible) to easily generate an excess prize exceeding the specified number of round games R (10 in this embodiment).

Therefore, according to the driving mode of FIG. 78 (d), the specified number of round games R (10 in this embodiment) is determined depending on whether the time required for the round game R is less than the reference time T11s or the reference time T11s or more. It is possible to switch whether or not an excess prize will be exceeded.

In the case of this driving mode, if the number of prize balls to be paid out in the round game R is important, it is preferable to execute the round game R over a long period of time. That is, it is preferable to intermittently stop the firing of the balls so that a specified number of balls (10 in the present embodiment) do not enter the first specific winning opening 1000a at an early stage. Therefore, there is a possibility that the game mode in which the firing of the ball is stopped at the interval between rounds is promoted.

On the other hand, in the driving mode shown in FIG. 78 (c), as described above, the occurrence of excess winning can be aimed at by continuously firing the ball at the interval between rounds.

In this way, the drive modes in which the preferred ball launch modes are contradictory are distributed and arranged in the round game R of the jackpot game (even in the same round, the drive modes are controlled to be different depending on the jackpot type). It is possible to improve the player's ability to concentrate on the jackpot game as compared with the case where the jackpot game is always executed in the same firing mode (the profits obtained by the player are the same).

According to the present embodiment, when the interference member 6930 is maintained in the retracted state and the regulating member 1600 is maintained in the stored state, the number of balls that can enter the storage flow path 1231 is determined by the operation mode of the movable member 10181. Can be changed. That is, it is possible to switch between the case where the storage flow path 1231 is full with 10 balls and the case where the storage flow path 1231 is not full even with 10 balls.

In addition, when the interfering member 6930 is in the overhanging state, there are 7 storage channels 1231 (9 if two spheres are already arranged downstream of the interfering member 6930, see FIG. 75). ) Can be switched between the case where the tank is full and the case where the storage channel 1231 is not full even when 7 (or 9) balls are filled.

In the present embodiment, the case where the interference member 6930 is maintained in the retracted state has been described, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, by setting the interference member 6930 to the overhanging state in response to the movable member 10181 being opened, the ball can pass (jump over) above the through hole 10233 in the left-right direction with momentum. Can be prevented.

The driving mode of the movable member 10181 is not limited to the above. For example, it may be configured to be driven by the operation of the operation button 300.

According to the present embodiment described in detail above, the following excellent effects are obtained.

By opening the movable member 10181, the ball can be discharged from the storage flow path 1231 on the upstream side of the interference member 6930. As a result, the number of balls stored in the storage flow path 1231 can be changed independently of the state of the first specific winning opening 1000a.

That is, when the number of balls entered into the first specified winning opening 1000a and the number of stored balls in the storage channel 1231 are the same while the first specified winning opening 1000a is maintained in the open state, and when the number of stored balls in the storage channel 1231 is the same, entry into the first specific winning opening 1000a It is possible to configure a case where the number of spheres and the number of stored in the storage channel 1231 are different. Thereby, the possibility of excessive winning in the first specific winning opening 1000a can be changed depending on the driving mode of the movable member 10181.

Next, the eleventh embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 79 to 85. 79 is a front view of the first variable winning device 11000 according to the eleventh embodiment, FIG. 80 is a cross-sectional view of the first variable winning device 11000 in the LXXX-LXXX line of FIG. 79, and FIG. 81 is a cover. It is a rear perspective view of the installation front plate 11200.

As shown in FIGS. 79 to 81, in the first variable winning device 11000 of the present embodiment, the shape of the opening / closing plate 11300 is changed, the formation of the upstream portion of the fall delay plate 3250 is omitted, and the main body member 11100 has a first position. 2. It has the same configuration as the first variable winning device 3000 of the third embodiment except that an additional winning opening 11183 or the like is added. Therefore, the same elements as those in the above-described embodiment are designated by the same reference numerals, and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

In the main body member 11100, in addition to the configuration already described in each of the above embodiments, the thin plate member 11110 formed from the horizontally long rectangular thin plate arranged on the front side of the game board is separated by a distance slightly longer than the diameter of the sphere. A pair of left and right thin plate members 1111 projecting ribs 11111 projecting to the front side, guide holes 11112 drilled as horizontally long holes to guide the movement of the opening / closing means 11190 described later, and extending to the left of the guide holes 11112. A guide recess 11113, which is formed as a bottomed recess, is provided.

Further, the main body member 11100 mainly includes a second additional winning opening 11183 configured to allow the ball to pass through, and an opening / closing means 11190 for changing the winning probability of the ball into the second additional winning opening 11183. The details of the opening / closing means 11190 will be described later.

In the drop delay plate 3250 formed on the lining front plate 11200 in the present embodiment, only the right side of the cut surface SP12 formed at a position away from the side wall portion 1220 from the diameter of the sphere is maintained on the upstream side. The left portion of the cut surface SP12 is omitted.

The position of the cut surface SP12 is set as a position where the ball that rolls on the inclined surface 1237 and reaches the fall delay plate 3250 does not reach by itself. That is, the ball that rolls on the inclined surface 1237 and reaches the fall delay plate 3250 flows down to the lower right (in the direction close to the detection sensor 1240) along the inclination of the fall delay plate 3250 unless an external force is applied. To do.

On the other hand, when a load is applied to the ball and the ball is thrown to the left of the cut surface SP12, the ball has a high probability of falling to the second additional winning opening 11183 side. The falling ball enters the second additional winning opening 11183 after passing through the opening / closing means 11190 newly described in the present embodiment. In the present embodiment, the second additional winning opening 11183 is configured as a winning opening in which three prize balls are paid out by detecting the passage of the balls.

The opening / closing plate 11300 includes an inclined surface 11340 that remains after being scraped off in a shape that inclines toward the left shaft portion 1320 from the rotation tip side toward the rotation shaft side in the left half portion.

The inclined surface 11340 is at a position where the end on the rotation tip side is to the right of the cut surface SP12 and the velocity in the left-right direction becomes 0 after landing on the fall delay plate 3250 (final arrival position FP12, FIG. It is placed to the right of the center of the sphere that has reached 82 (a)).

Therefore, when the ball is at the position where the speed in the left-right direction becomes 0 (final arrival position FP12, see FIG. 82 (a)), when the opening / closing plate 11300 is driven from the closed state to the open state, the opening / closing plate 11300 is driven via the inclined surface 11340. The load is given to the ball. This will be described with reference to FIG. 82.

82 (a) to 82 (c) are partial front views of the first variable winning device 11000. 82 (a) to 82 (c) show changes in the state of the first variable winning device 11000 in chronological order, and in FIG. 82 (a), the opening / closing plate 11300 is closed and tilted. The final arrival position FP12 of the ball that rolled on the surface 1237 and landed on the fall delay plate 3250 is illustrated by an imaginary line, and in FIG. 82 (b), the opening / closing plate 11300 is opened from the state shown in FIG. 82 (a). The state after the change is illustrated, and FIG. 82 (c) shows how the sphere falls from the state shown in FIG. 82 (b).

As shown in FIG. 82 (b), the sphere arranged at the final arrival position FP12 comes into contact with the inclined surface 11340 when the opening / closing plate 11300 changes to the open state, and a load facing left is applied. The ball to which the load is applied to the left is pushed to the left of the cut surface SP12, spills from the fall delay plate 3250, and enters the second additional winning opening 11183.

On the other hand, when the ball has not reached the final arrival position FP12 (for example, when it slightly flows down from the final arrival position FP12 and is arranged at the position shown by the solid line in FIG. 82A), the opening / closing plate 11300 is opened. Even if the state is changed, the inclined surface 11340 does not come into contact with the sphere, and the sphere has a component pointing to the right because the rotation direction of the opening / closing plate 11300 (since the rotation axis is inclined to the lower right with respect to the horizontal). It receives a load in the direction) and is pushed toward the detection sensor 1240. Therefore, in this case, the ball does not enter the second additional winning opening 11183.

As described above, according to the present embodiment, at the timing when the opening / closing plate 11300 changes to the open state, the sphere heads toward the detection sensor 1240 depending on the position on the front side of the opening / closing plate 11300. , It is possible to switch to the second additional winning opening 11183.

Since the payout of the prize ball by passing the ball through the second additional winning opening 11183 is an excess prize ball exceeding the prize ball scheduled in the jackpot game for the player, the ball passing through the second additional winning opening 11183 The greater the number, the greater the profit that the player can obtain.

The opening / closing plate is compared with the case where the firing of the ball is stopped by continuing the firing of the ball toward the first specific winning opening 1000a while the opening / closing plate 11300 is maintained in the closed state (inter-round interval period). Since it is possible to easily generate a situation in which the ball is arranged at the final arrival position FP12 at the timing when the 11300 changes to the open state, it is possible to promote a game mode in which the ball is continuously fired over the interval period between rounds. it can. As a result, it is possible to suppress a game mode in which the player stops firing the ball during the interval period between rounds.

Since the entry into the second additional winning opening 11183 is conditional on the opening / closing plate 11300 changing to the open state, the opening / closing plate 11300 is driven to the open state (big hit game or small hit game). In a state other than the above, even if the right-handed strike is continued, it is difficult for the ball to enter the second additional winning opening 11183.

As a result, in a situation where the opening / closing plate 11300 does not change to the open state (for example, a situation in which the right-handed instruction effect is not executed), even if the right-handed hit is performed, the ball enters the second additional winning opening 11183. The accompanying benefits can be configured to be difficult for the player to obtain. That is, the second additional winning opening 11183 can function as a winning opening that makes it easier for the ball to enter in a situation (small hit game or big hit game) in which the opening / closing plate 11300 is driven.

Next, the opening / closing means 11190 will be described with reference to FIGS. 83 to 85. 83 and 84 are rear views of the first variable winning device 11000, and FIGS. 85 (a) to 85 (c) show the arrangement of the projecting rib 11111, the opening / closing means 11190, and the second additional winning opening 11183. FIG. 5 is a front schematic view of a projecting rib 11111 schematically shown, an opening / closing means 11190, and a second additional winning opening 11183. In addition, in FIGS. 85 (a) to 85 (c), the timekeeping change of the state of the opening / closing means 11190 is illustrated.

As shown in FIGS. 83 to 85, the opening / closing means 11190 is a movable means that is guided by the guide hole 11112 and moves left and right in conjunction with the movement of the tip member 1520, and is supported by the guide hole 11112 in a inserted state. The main body support portion 11191, the transmission portion 11192 extending upward from the back surface side portion of the main body support portion 11191 and supported by the tip member 1520, and the main body support portion 11191 extending to the left from the front side portion. An interval slightly longer than the diameter of the sphere is provided on the right side of the extension portion 11193, the first protrusion 11194 projecting to the front side at the left end of the extension portion 11193, and the first protrusion 11194. The second projecting portion 11195, which is projected in the same shape as the first projecting portion 11194, is mainly provided.

The method of assembling the opening / closing means 11190 will be described. As shown in FIG. 83, in the present embodiment, the right end of the guide hole 11112 is vertically enlarged so as to be slightly longer than the transmission portion 11192, and the other portions are slightly longer than the main body support portion 11191 as a whole. It is formed as a horizontally long hole.

Therefore, after the transmission unit 11192 is projected to the back side through this enlarged portion, the opening / closing means 11190 is slid to the left, and then the drive device 1500 is assembled to the main body member 11100, and the transmission unit 11192 is supported by the tip member 1520. Thereby, the opening / closing means 11190 can be assembled in a manner of interlocking with the tip member 1520. Since the transmission unit 11192 does not reach the enlarged portion at the right end of the guide hole 11112 in the range of motion of the solenoid 1510 (see FIGS. 83 and 84), it is possible to prevent the opening / closing means 11190 from coming off the guide hole 11112. can do.

The extension portion 11193 is formed with a thickness sufficient to be completely accommodated in the guide recess 11113. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the ball flowing down the front side of the opening / closing means 11190 from colliding with the extension portion 11193, and the flow path of the ball changes in the front-rear direction, or the extension portion 11193 is affected by the load from the ball. It can be prevented from being damaged.

As shown in FIGS. 85 (a) to 85 (c), the first projecting portion 11194 and the second projecting portion 11195 are formed as inclined plates that incline downward to the left in the front view. In the present embodiment, when the ball on the fall delay plate 3250 flows to the left of the cut surface SP12, the ball falls between the projecting ribs 11111 and enters the second additional winning opening 11183 by the opening / closing means 11190. Whether or not to do it is switched. This will be described in detail.

FIG. 85A shows a state in which the solenoid 1510 is driven (excited) and the opening / closing means 11190 is arranged at the left end of the moving range (see FIG. 84). In this case, the upper end portion of the second projecting portion 11195 and the projecting rib 11111 on the right side are arranged on the center line of the second additional winning opening 11183.

When the ball falls between the projecting ribs 11111 in the state shown in FIG. 85 (a), the ball comes into contact with the second projecting portion 11195 and flows to the left. Therefore, since the ball flows down from the second additional winning opening 11183, the probability of entering the second additional winning opening 11183 can be reduced.

FIG. 85 (b) shows a state in which the driving (excitation) of the solenoid 1510 is released and the opening / closing means 11190 is arranged at an intermediate position in the moving range (see FIG. 20 (c)). That is, it corresponds immediately after the opening / closing plate 11300 is closed.

In this case, the upper end of the first protruding portion 11194 is arranged to the left of the vertical line passing through the intermediate position of the pair of protruding ribs 11111, and the upper end of the second protruding portion 11195 is the second additional prize. It is located to the right of the center line of the mouth 11183.

Therefore, when the ball falls between the projecting ribs 11111 in the state shown in FIG. 85 (b), the ball abuts on the first projecting portion 11194 and flows to the right, and abuts on the second projecting portion 11195. It flows to the left. Since the flowing ball will flow down toward the second additional winning opening 11183, the probability of entering the second additional winning opening 11183 can be increased.

FIG. 85 (c) shows a state in which the driving (excitation) of the solenoid 1510 is released and the opening / closing means 11190 is arranged at the right end position of the moving range (see FIG. 83). Also in this case, the opening / closing plate 11300 is maintained in the closed state as in FIG. 85 (b).

In this case, the upper end of the first projecting portion 11194 is arranged to the right of the vertical line passing through the intermediate position of the pair of projecting ribs 11111.

Therefore, when the ball falls between the projecting ribs 11111 in the state shown in FIG. 85 (c), the ball comes into contact with the first projecting portion 11194 and flows to the left. Since the flow-down ball deviates from the second additional winning opening 11183 and flows down, the probability of entering the second additional winning opening 11183 can be reduced.

That is, the opening / closing means 11190 keeps the probability that the ball enters the second additional winning opening 11183 low while the opening / closing plate 11300 is maintained in the open state or the closed state, and the second additional winning is made during the state change. It is configured to increase the probability that the ball will enter the mouth 11183.

As described above, in the present embodiment, the probability that the ball enters the second additional winning opening 11183 changes by interlocking the opening / closing means 11190 with the state of the opening / closing plate 1300. Here, it will be described that there are cases where the ball can be expected to enter the second additional winning opening 11183 and cases where it cannot be expected due to the difference in the drive control of the solenoid 1510.

The phenomenon that the sphere flows to the left of the cut surface SP12 of the drop delay plate 3250 occurs when the opening / closing plate 11300 changes to the open state (see FIGS. 82 (b) and 82 (c)).

Therefore, in the drive pattern in which the solenoid 1510 continues to maintain the drive (excitation) state (operation pattern with a low ball entry probability), when the ball flowing to the left of the cut surface SP12 passes through the projecting rib 11111, the tip member 1520 The opening / closing means 11190 is arranged at the left end position, as in the arrangement of. Since the excitation (driving) of the solenoid 1510 is maintained, the state of the opening / closing means 11190 is maintained, so that the ball flowing to the left of the cut surface SP12 deviates from the second additional winning opening 11183 and flows down (see FIG. 82). ).

On the other hand, in the drive pattern (operation pattern with high ball entry probability) in which the drive (excitation) is once released (the opening / closing plate 11300 is opened shortly) immediately after the solenoid 1510 is driven (excited), the cut surface SP12 When the ball flowing to the left passes through the projecting rib 11111, the opening / closing means 11190 is arranged at the left end position, but after that, the excitation (driving) of the solenoid 1510 is temporarily released, so that the solenoid 1510 The opening / closing means 11190 moves toward the right end position by the urging force of the return spring. As a result, the ball that has flowed to the left of the cut surface SP12 receives a load facing right from the first projecting portion 11194 and flows down along the second projecting portion 11195, so that the ball flows toward the second additional winning opening 11183. Can flow down.

By providing variations in the operation pattern of the opening / closing plate 11300 in this way, the cut surface SP12 has the same timing (for example, the timing at which the inclined surface 11340 comes into contact with the ball at the start of the round game R, see FIG. 82 (b)). The probability that the ball flowing to the left will enter the second additional winning opening 11183 can be changed.

In the operation pattern with a high probability of entering a ball, the timing of releasing the drive (excitation) of the solenoid 1510 is not particularly limited. In the present embodiment, the timing at which the ball flowing to the left of the cut surface SP12 due to the load from the opening / closing plate 11300 passes through the protrusion rib 11111 and reaches between the first protrusion 11194 and the second protrusion 11195. Is controlled to release the drive (excitation) of the solenoid 1510.

The second additional winning opening 11183 may be configured as a ball entry opening that starts the fluctuation of the special symbol 2 when the ball enters the ball. In this case, since the number of reserved balls of the special symbol 2 can be increased by the balls that reach the opening / closing plate 11300 during the interval period between rounds, the normal symbol is in a high probability state (time saving state) after the jackpot game is completed. Nevertheless, it is possible to prevent the phenomenon that the special symbol 1 is held from being changed and the player is disadvantaged.

According to the present embodiment described in detail above, the following excellent effects are obtained.

Depending on where the ball is placed on the front side of the opening / closing plate 11300 at the timing when the opening / closing plate 11300 changes to the open state, whether the ball heads for (enters) the detection sensor 1240 or the second additional winning opening 11183 In addition to being able to switch between heading (entering the ball) and continuing to fire the ball during the inter-round interval period, it is easier for the ball to flow down to the second additional winning opening 11183. As a result, it is possible to increase the number of payout prize balls by continuing to fire the balls during the inter-round interval period, thus promoting a game mode in which the balls are continuously fired during the inter-round interval period. It can be made easier.

The second additional winning opening 11183 is configured so that it is difficult for the ball to enter even if the ball arrives while the state of the opening / closing plate 11300 is maintained. As a result, the second additional winning opening 11183 can function as a winning opening that facilitates the entry of the ball in a state in which the opening / closing plate 11300 is driven (small hit game or big hit game).

While it is difficult to enter the second additional winning opening 11183 while the state of the opening / closing means 11190 is maintained, it is easy for the ball to enter the second additional winning opening 11183 during the state change of the opening / closing means 11190. In addition to being configured as such, the second additional winning opening 11183 is provided with a ball that receives a load from the opening / closing plate 11300 when the opening / closing plate 11300 is driven from the closed state to the open state. It was configured to flow down to 11183. As a result, the probability that the ball will enter the second additional winning opening 11183 by providing a variation in the operation pattern of the opening / closing plate 11300 after the opening / closing plate 11300 is driven toward the open state (the round game R has started). Can be changed.

Next, a first control example will be described with reference to FIGS. 86 to 140. 86 (a) and 86 (b) are front views of the first variable winning device 6000 in the first control example. In FIGS. 86 (a) and 86 (b), the thin plate member 1210 is partially cut out so that the opening / closing plate 1300 can be visually recognized, and a part of the side wall portion 1220 and a part of the inclined surface 1237 are imaginary lines. Illustrated in. Further, FIG. 86 (a) shows a schematic diagram showing a shielded state of the first variable winning device 6000, and FIG. 86 (b) shows the inside from the shielded state where it is difficult to see (hard to see but visible). A schematic diagram showing the transparent state of the first variable winning device 6000 when the transparent effect for changing the transparent state to the visible transparent state is executed is shown. Further, the same elements as those in the above-described embodiment are designated by the same reference numerals, and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

As shown in FIG. 86 (a), in the first variable winning device 6000 described in this control example, the inside of the storage flow path 1231 is difficult to see due to the thin plate member 1210 arranged on the front side of the storage flow path 1231. It is configured (the thin plate member 1210 is configured to have low transparency).

In addition, even if an attempt is made to look into the inside of the storage flow path 1231 through the opening of the detection sensor 1240, the storage flow path 1231 is formed as a bent flow path, and the downstream side cannot be visually recognized. It is configured so that the number of balls stored in the can not be grasped. In addition, since the arrangement position of the interference device 6900 is downstream from the bent portion, it is configured so that the movable state of the interference device 6900 cannot be visually recognized.

Further, by extending the thin plate member 1210 on the upstream side (left side in FIG. 86 (a)) of the detection sensor 1240 in the opening direction (see FIG. 14), the direction of the line of sight when looking through the opening of the detection sensor 1240 is limited. However, it is configured to make it difficult to see the inside of the storage flow path 1231.

With this configuration, it is difficult to grasp the number of balls stored inside the storage flow path 1231 and the movable state of the interference device 6900 in the shielded state of the first variable winning device 6000. it can.

In the variable winning device 6000 configured in this way, the transmission lamps 227ba to 227be are turned on based on the establishment of predetermined conditions (for example, the success of the timing effect (operation effect) (see FIG. 88 (b))). However, as shown in FIG. 86 (b), the lining front plate 1200 is composed of a half mirror so as to switch to a transparent state in which the inside can be visually recognized. As a result, when the transmission lamps 227ba to 227be are turned on, the player can be made to grasp the number of balls stored inside the storage flow path 1231 and the movable state of the interference device 6900.

An optical sensor that detects light incident from the outside may be arranged behind the lining front plate 1200. In this case, by utilizing the characteristic of the half mirror that the inside can be seen by irradiating the inside with strong light from the outside, a fraudulent act of irradiating the lining front plate 1200 with strong light to see the inside has been executed. , It can be judged by the output of the optical sensor. Therefore, fraudulent activity can be suppressed by setting an error command in response to a change in the output of the optical sensor and controlling the game so as to make it difficult to continue the game.

In this control example, the lining front plate 1200 is irradiated with light (transmission lamp) to switch to the transmission state, but other configurations may be used. For example, a part of the concealed front plate 1200 (for example, the thin plate member 1210) or the light emitting means can be moved so that the incident angle of the light emitted from the constantly lit light emitting means (LED) to the concealed front plate 1200 is switched. It may be configured to be possible, and the inside may be in a visible transparent state only when the movable portion is positioned at a predetermined position.

Further, the lining front plate 1200 may be configured to have a transparent color whose inside is visible, and the surface thereof may be subjected to a process of diffusely reflecting the irradiated light (for example, a grained process). As a result, while the game is being executed in the pachinko machine 10, the inside of the first variable winning device 6000 is made difficult to see by the light emitted from various lamps, and the power of the pachinko machine 10 is turned off (that is, various types). The inside of the variable winning device 6000 may be made visible when the lamp is not lit). As a result, the clerk can easily inspect the inside of the variable winning device 6000 even when the power of the pachinko machine 10 is turned off.

When such a configuration is used, a shielding wall is provided to shield the light emitted from various lamps from being irradiated to the first variable winning device 6000, and the shielding wall is changed into a shielded state and a non-shielded state. It is advisable to provide a configuration. As a result, the inside of the storage flow path 1231 of the first variable winning device 6000 can be visually recognized by the player even while the game is being played.

Further, by providing a dedicated light emitting means (lamp) for irradiating the first variable winning device 6000 with light and performing light emission control for the light emitting means, it is difficult to visually recognize the inside of the storage flow path 1231. The state (state in which light is irradiated) and the visible state (state in which light is not irradiated) may be switched.

Further, by providing a movable member for decoration on the lining front plate 1200 whose inside is visible and controlling the operation of the movable member, the inside of the storage flow path 1231 can be visually recognized (the movable member for decoration is visible). A state in which the inside of the storage flow path 1231 is difficult to see (a state in which the movable member for decoration is movable in a position where it overlaps so as to cover the storage flow path 1231). It may be switched.

Further, in this control example, as shown in FIG. 86A, the lining front plate 1200 makes it difficult to visually recognize the entire range of the storage flow path 1231, and it is ensured that the movable state of the interference device 6900 is visually recognized. However, the configuration is not limited to this, and any configuration may be used as long as it has the effect of making it difficult to visually recognize the movable state of the interference device 6900 in the posture in which the game is normally played.

For example, it may be difficult to see only the lower half of the storage channel 1231 (downstream from the bent part), and the visibility of the upper half may be ensured (the formation of the upper half mirror may be omitted. (Good), or in the same way, it may be difficult to see only the portion overlapping with the interference member 6930 of the interference device 6900 in front view. As a result, it is possible to construct a configuration that makes it difficult to visually recognize the movable state of the interference device 6900 at low cost.

Further, for example, while ensuring the visibility of the lower half of the storage flow path 1231 (the formation of the lower half mirror is omitted), the upper half may be made difficult to see. In this case, the lower limit of the number of spheres stored in the storage channel 1231 can be grasped by visually recognizing the spheres remaining in the lower half of the storage channel 1231, while the spheres are stored in the storage channel 1231. It can be difficult to know the exact number.

Therefore, when the player temporarily stops the firing of the ball in order to reduce the wasted ball (the ball that does not enter the winning opening), it is possible to make it difficult to determine the timing of stopping the firing. In the first variable winning device 6000 (see FIG. 53) described in this control example, when the storage flow path 1231 is full (10 balls are stored), no more balls can be expected. By stopping the firing of the ball at that timing, it is possible to reduce the number of wasted balls.

On the other hand, in this control example, the number of balls entered in the first variable winning device 6000 in the predetermined number of round games R does not always match the number of balls stored in the storage flow path 1231. Even if the number of balls entering the 1 variable winning device 6000 is counted, the number of balls stored in the storage flow path 1231 cannot be accurately known. Therefore, in order to directly grasp the number of spheres stored in the storage flow path 1231, it is necessary to visually check the inside of the storage flow path 1231.

That is, because of the configuration of this control example, the visibility of the lower half of the storage flow path 1231 is ensured (the formation of the lower half mirror is omitted), while the configuration of making the upper half difficult to see is effective. It becomes difficult for the player to easily determine the timing at which the ball is stopped from being launched. As a result, it is possible to improve the player's attention and concentration to the launch of the ball in the jackpot game, and it is possible to prevent the player from playing the game indiscriminately.

A feature of this control example shown in FIGS. 86 (a) and 86 (b) is that, in addition to the above-mentioned change in the visual state, the operation timing of the interference member 6930 is controlled by operating the operation button 300 (see FIG. 1). It can be mentioned that the timing that can be set with is prepared, but the details will be described later.

Next, the screen configuration of the third symbol display device 81 will be described. As described above, the variable display device unit 80 is arranged in the central portion of the game area. The variable display device unit 80 is provided with a third symbol display device 81, a second symbol display device 83, and a center frame 86 so as to surround the outer periphery of the third symbol display device 81.

The third symbol display device 81 performs a decorative display according to the display of the first symbol display device 37. For example, when a ball enters the first ball entry port 64 or the second ball entry port 640 (starting prize), the first symbol display device 37 displays the variation of the special symbol (first symbol) as a trigger. Will be executed. Further, in the third symbol display device 81, the variation display of the third symbol corresponding to the variation display of the special symbol is performed in synchronization with the variation display of the special symbol.

In addition, instead of the display device, for example, a reel or the like may be used to configure the third symbol display device 81. Further, a plurality of liquid crystal displays may be provided as the third symbol display device 81, or the third symbol display device 81 may be configured to be movable. Here, the display contents of the third symbol display device 81 will be described with reference to FIG. 87.

FIG. 87 is a drawing for explaining the display screen of the third symbol display device 81, and FIG. 87 (a) is a diagram schematically showing the area division setting and the effective line setting of the display screen. FIG. 87B is a diagram illustrating an actual display screen.

The third symbol is composed of 10 types of main symbols with numbers from "0" to "9". Each main symbol is composed of a rear symbol consisting of a wooden box with numbers from "0" to "9", of which the main symbols with odd numbers (1, 3, 5, 7, 9) are , A large number is added to almost the front of the wooden box. On the other hand, the main design with even numbers (0, 2, 4, 6, 8) has an attached design that imitates a character such as a planer, a furoshiki, and a helmet that almost fills the front of the wooden box. Even numbers are added to the lower right side of the attached symbol so that they are small in green and displayed on the front side of the attached symbol.

Further, in the pachinko machine 10 of this control example, when the lottery result of the special symbol performed by the main control device 110 (see FIG. 93) described later is a big hit, a variable display in which the same main symbols are aligned is performed. , It is configured so that a big hit occurs after the fluctuation display is finished. On the other hand, if the lottery result of the special symbol is out of order, a variable display is performed in which the same main symbol is not aligned.

As shown in FIG. 87 (a), the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 is roughly divided into upper and lower halves, and the lower two-thirds are the main display area Dm for variable display of the third symbol, and the rest. The upper 1/3 of is a sub-display area Ds for displaying the advance notice effect, the character, the number of reserved balls, and the like.

The main display area Dm is divided into three display areas Dm1 to Dm3 on the left, middle, and right, and three symbol columns Z1, Z2, and Z3 are displayed in the three display areas Dm1 to Dm3, respectively. In each of the symbol rows Z1 to Z3, the above-mentioned third symbols are displayed in a specified order. That is, the main symbols are arranged in the ascending or descending order of the numbers in the symbol rows Z1 to Z3, and the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 are scrolled from top to bottom with periodicity to perform variable display. In particular, in the left symbol row Z1, the numbers of the main symbols are arranged so as to appear in descending order, and in the middle symbol row Z2 and the right symbol row Z3, the numbers of the main symbols appear in ascending order.

Further, in the main display area Dm, the third symbol is displayed in the upper, middle, and lower three rows for each of the symbol rows Z1 to Z3. The middle part of this main display area Dm is set as the effective line L1, and the third symbol is stopped on the effective line L1 in the order of the left symbol row Z1 → the right symbol row Z3 → the middle symbol row Z2 in each game. Is displayed. This stop display state is held for at least 1 second.

By displaying the stopped 3rd symbol for a certain period of time (1 second or more) in this way, whether or not the player is a combination of the 3rd symbols corresponding to the jackpot (the lottery result of the special symbol is a jackpot). It is possible to prevent overlooking (whether or not there is). Further, if a combination of jackpot symbols (combination of the same main symbol in this control example) is aligned on the effective line L1 when the third symbol is stopped, a jackpot moving image (opening effect) is displayed as a jackpot.

Further, if the combination of the third symbols displayed as stopped is a combination corresponding to the detachment and there is a reserved ball, the variable display corresponding to the lottery based on the reserved ball is started after the stop display for 1 second. .. If there are a plurality of reserved balls, the lottery is executed based on the reserved balls corresponding to the oldest incoming balls in time. Further, when both the reserved ball of the special symbol 1 and the reserved ball of the special symbol 2 exist, the lottery based on the reserved ball of the special symbol 2 is preferentially executed.

On the other hand, when the third symbol of the combination corresponding to the deviation of the special symbol is stopped and displayed for 1 second in the state where the holding ball does not exist, the state in which the third symbol is stopped and displayed continues thereafter. This state continues until a predetermined time (for example, 15 seconds) elapses or a new ball enters either the first entry port 64 or the second entry opening 640.

Then, when a predetermined time (for example, 15 seconds) has elapsed since the third symbol was stopped and displayed, a demo effect indicating that the game has not been executed is displayed. It is rare that the player does not enter the first entrance 64 and the second entrance 640 even though the player has continuously fired the ball for a predetermined time (for example, 15 seconds). In most cases, the state in which the third symbol is stopped and displayed continues for a predetermined time (for example, 15 seconds) because the player has quit the game, and the pachinko machine 10 has not played the game at all. to cause.

Therefore, in the pachinko machine 10 of this control example, when a predetermined time (for example, 15 seconds) has elapsed from the stop display of the third symbol, it is determined that the player is not playing the game, and the demonstration effect is started. To do. Thereby, the player who is going to select the pachinko machine 10 to start the game can easily determine whether or not the game is being performed based on the presence or absence of the display of the demonstration effect. On the other hand, if a new ball enters the first entry port 64 and the second entry opening 640 before the predetermined time (for example, 15 seconds) elapses, the new ball enters the ball. The variable display of the third symbol is executed.

The sub-display area Ds is provided horizontally above the main display area Dm, and is further divided into three small areas Ds1 to Ds3 in the left-right direction. Of these, the small area Ds1 displays the number of reserved balls, which is the number of balls (reserved balls) that have not been changed among the balls that have been entered into the first entry port 64 and the second entry opening 640. The small areas Ds2 and Ds3 are areas for displaying the advance notice effect image.

Further, the third symbol is displayed in the small area Ds3. Although the details will be described later, in the pachinko machine 10, the types of special symbols (one of the special symbol 1 and the special symbol 2) in which the lottery is easily executed are configured differently depending on the game state. In the main display area Dm, a variable display is displayed when a lottery of a special symbol that is easy to execute in the current gaming state is executed. On the other hand, in the small area Ds3, a variable display is displayed when a lottery of a special symbol that is difficult to execute in the current gaming state is executed.

Here, it is a great note for the player that the lottery of the special symbol that is difficult to be executed is executed. For example, when the lottery of the special symbol 2 which is difficult to execute in the normal state of the special symbol is executed and the lottery result is a big hit, the player is compared with the case where the lottery of the special symbol 1 is a big hit. There are cases where the expectation of profits that can be obtained is high. Further, for example, when the lottery of the special symbol 1 which is difficult to execute in the high probability state of the special symbol is executed and the lottery result is a big hit, compared with the case where the lottery of the special symbol 2 is a big hit. , The expectation of the profit that the player can obtain may be low.

Therefore, in the small area Ds3, the variable display is performed only when the lottery of the special symbol that is difficult to execute in the current game state is executed (by separating from the variable display in the main display area Dm), the game. It becomes easier to attract the attention of the player, and the player can be drawn into the variable display.

On the actual display screen, as shown in FIG. 87 (b), a total of nine main symbols of the third symbol are displayed in the main display area Dm. In the sub-display area Ds, a total of three main symbols of the third symbol different from the main symbol displayed in the main display area Dm are displayed in the small area Ds3 on the right. In the central small area Ds2, a predetermined character 710 (a boy with a headband in this control example) usually performs a predetermined action, and sometimes a special action different from the predetermined action or another character performs a predetermined action. A notice will be given, such as by appearing.

On the other hand, when the ball enters the first ball entry port 64 while the variable display based on the lottery of the special symbol 1 is being performed on the third symbol display device 81 (first symbol display device 37), and If a ball enters the second entrance 640 while the variable display based on the special symbol 2 lottery is being performed, the number of times the ball is entered is held up to 4 times, and the number of reserved balls is the first. It is shown by the symbol display device 37 and also in the small area Ds1 of the sub-display area Ds. Specifically, the symbol (first reserved ball number symbol) displayed in the upper half of the small area Ds1 indicates the number of reserved balls with respect to the first entrance 64, and the symbol displayed in the lower half (second reserved ball number symbol). The number of reserved balls symbol) indicates the number of reserved balls for the second entrance 640. FIG. 87 illustrates a case where four first reserved symbols are displayed while zero second reserved symbols are displayed (all the second reserved symbols are blank).

In addition, instead of displaying the number of reserved balls symbol in the small area Ds1, the number of reserved balls is different by a number in a part of the third symbol display device 81, or the area divided into four is different by the number of reserved balls. (For example, a color or a lighting pattern) may be displayed. Further, since the number of reserved balls is indicated by the first symbol display device 37, the number of reserved balls may not be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Further, the variable display device unit 80 may be provided with four hold lamps indicating the number of hold balls for the maximum number of hold balls, and the number of hold balls may be displayed according to the number of hold lamps in the lit state.

Next, with reference to FIGS. 88 to 92, a timing effect (operation effect) executed by the pachinko machine 10 of the present control example in the first control example will be described.

In this control example, the effect related to the sphere stored in the storage flow path 1231 (see FIG. 86) is executed based on the operation of the operation button 300 (see FIG. 1). As the effects related to the spheres stored in the storage flow path 1231, for example, an effect of changing the visibility inside the storage flow path 1231 and a discharge mode of the spheres stored in the storage flow path 1231 may be used. An example of a production to be changed. Then, these effects are configured so that the content of the effects changes depending on the degree of deviation between the predetermined reference operation timing and the timing at which the player operates the operation button 300.

Here, in this control example, a timing effect (operation effect) is executed as an effect for notifying the timing for operating the operation button 300 (see FIG. 1). Then, by executing the operation at the right time according to the timing effect (operation effect), the effect is configured so as to maximize the profit obtained by the player. Thereby, the player's willingness to participate in the operation of the operation button 300 can be improved.

First, with reference to FIGS. 88 and 89, the contents of the timing effect (operation effect) executed during the jackpot will be described. 88 (a) is a schematic view showing an example of the display contents during the advance notice effect executed in the round before the timing effect (operation effect) is executed, and FIGS. 88 (b) to 89 are shown in FIGS. , Is a schematic diagram showing an example of the display contents during the timing effect (operation effect). In each drawing, a schematic diagram showing the display contents of the third symbol display device 81 and a schematic diagram showing the operation status for the operation means (operation button 300) are used, and the second drawing changes based on the operation of the operation means. 3 The display contents of the symbol display device 81 will be described.

As shown in FIG. 88, on the third symbol display device 81, the round number display unit 714 that displays the current number of rounds is displayed in the upper left of the screen in a manner indicating that the third round round game R is in progress. In the area Ds2, an acquisition display suggesting the number of balls acquired during the big hit is executed, and in the small area Ds3, "Aim to the right" is displayed on the guidance display unit that guides the game method. Then, the acquired number display mode 718 for suggesting the number of balls acquired based on the ball winning in the specific winning opening 1000a (see FIG. 7) is displayed as "15" indicating the number of winning balls in the specific winning opening 1000a. Will be done. The acquired number display mode 718 is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 based on the winning of the ball to the specific winning opening 1000a, then is moved and displayed toward the small area Ds2, and finally, the small area Ds2. It is added as an acquisition display.

In the round number display unit 714, the display regarding the currently executing game section (number of rounds or interval) is displayed large on the left side, and the display regarding the game section started after the end of the currently executing game section is displayed on the right side. It is displayed small.

In addition, four circles are displayed side by side below the number of rounds display. The circles to be filled are switched according to the number of spheres stored in the storage flow path 1231. That is, when the number of spheres stored in the storage flow path 1231 is less than 4, the circle at the left end is filled in (see FIG. 88 (a), corresponding to the shortage display) and stored in the storage flow path 1231. When the number of spheres to be stored is 4 or more and less than 7, the second circle from the left is filled (corresponding to the intermediate number display), and the number of spheres stored in the storage flow path 1231 is 7. If the number is less than 9, the second circle from the right is filled in (see FIG. 92 (a), corresponding to the shortage display), and the number of spheres stored in the storage flow path 1231 is 10. In that case, the circle at the right end is filled in (see FIG. 92 (b), corresponding to the full tank display).

In the center of the screen, a notice display for notifying the player that the timing effect (operation effect) will be started from the next round and a guidance display for notifying the game nature of the timing effect (operation effect) are executed. .. Then, on the lower side of the screen, an effect area used in the timing effect (operation effect) is displayed.

In this effect area, the button display mode 715 corresponding to the operation button 300 is displayed, and the sub-display area Ds4 on which the display pointer 719 (see FIG. 88B) is displayed corresponding to the button display mode 715. A sub-display area Ds5 is provided below the sub-display area Ds4, which is arranged in the same shape as the sub-display area Ds4 and displays information about the player's operation.

As will be described later in FIG. 88B, the sub-display area Ds4 is an area in which a plurality of display pointers 719 are scrolled and displayed from right to left, and the display pointer 719 is a display mode indicating an operation timing. By operating the operation button 300 (operation means) at a timing that matches the bar display unit 717, a success effect (see FIG. 88 (b) described later) is executed. Further, when the operating means is operated at a timing when the display pointer 719 does not match the bar display unit 717, a failure effect (see FIG. 89 described later) is executed.

As shown in FIG. 88 (b), the transmission lamps 227ba to 227be are turned on in connection with the success effect being executed in the round game R of the fourth round (see FIG. 86 (b)). In the description of this control example, as shown in FIGS. 86 (a) and 86 (b), the inside of the lining front plate 1200 is difficult to see when the transmission lamps 227ba to 227be are turned off, while the transmission lamp is difficult to see. It is composed of a half mirror so as to switch to a transparent state in which the inside becomes visible when 227ba to 227be are turned on. Therefore, by turning on the transmission lamps 227ba to 227be, the flow condition of the sphere flowing down near the interference device 6900 (see FIGS. 86 (a) and 86 (b)) (of the sphere stored in the storage flow path 1231). The storage mode) can be grasped by the player.

Further, as shown in FIG. 89, a part of the transmission lamps 227ba to 227be is lit in connection with the failure effect being executed in the fourth round game R. As a result, the storage mode of the spheres arranged near the interference device 6900 (lower half of the storage flow path 1231) cannot be visually recognized, while the storage mode is arranged near the detection sensor 1240 (upper half of the storage flow path 1231). The storage mode of the sphere is configured to be visible.

As shown in FIG. 88A, the characters “waiting” are scrolled and displayed from right to left in the sub-display areas Ds4 and Ds5 while the advance notice effect is being executed.

Next, with reference to FIG. 88 (b), the display contents of the timing effect (operation effect) during the jackpot will be described. When the timing effect (operation effect) is executed, the display pointer 719 is scrolled and displayed in the sub-display area Ds4, and when the operation button 300 is operated at the timing when the display pointer 719a matches the bar display unit 717, the center of the screen is displayed. The character "good" is displayed as the result display mode 720, and the operation of the operation button 300 is displayed by changing the display mode of the button display mode 715.

As shown in FIG. 88B, at the same time as the result display mode 720 is displayed, the characters "Attention to the attacker!" Are displayed in the vicinity of the result display mode 720, and the result display mode 720 is displayed in the sub-display area Ds5. The characters "good" are displayed in the same manner as above.

In this case, by distributing the characters "good" on the third symbol display device 81, the player can easily notice the display, and the player who notices the display can be attacked (first variable winning device 6000). ) Can be easily noticed. Then, the player can be made aware that the storage balls stored in the storage flow path 1231 of the first variable winning device 6000 are visible, and the player who notices the storage number is determined. Appropriate launch ball adjustments can be made accordingly.

The state shown in FIG. 89 is a state in which the operation button 300 is operated at a timing when the display pointer 719c does not match the bar display unit 717 in the timing effect (operation effect), and the result display mode 720 is set to " The characters "bad" are displayed, and the operation of the operation button 300 is displayed by changing the display mode of the button display mode 715.

As shown in FIG. 89, at the same time that the result display mode 720 is displayed, the characters “bad” are displayed in the sub-display area Ds5 as in the result display mode 720. In addition, the characters "Attention to the attacker!" Are not displayed here.

In this case, by distributing the characters "bad" on the third symbol display device 81, the player can easily notice the display. In addition, by not displaying the characters "Attention to the attacker!", The player can attack the attacker (first variable) even when the stored balls stored in the storage channel 1231 of the first variable winning device 6000 are difficult to see. Since it is possible to suppress attention to the winning device 6000), it is possible to maintain the player's attention to the effect of the third symbol display device 81. In addition, it is possible to increase the player's confidence in the display of the characters "Attention to the attacker!" (Confidence that profits can be obtained by following the display).

As described above, as shown in FIG. 89, when the result display mode 720 is displayed, some of the transmission lamps 227ba are lit. On the other hand, in this control example, in the timing effect (operation effect) in the fourth round game R, the operation button 300 is operated even after 3 seconds have passed after the display pointer 719 passed the bar display unit 717. If this is not done, the transmission lamps 227ba to 227be are all controlled to be kept off, so that in the subsequent round game R (from the 4th round to the 6th round), the storage flow path 1231 It is configured so that it is extremely difficult to see the inside.

90 (a) is a schematic view showing an example of the display contents of the timing effect (operation effect) in the interval between rounds immediately before the fifth round game R, and FIGS. 90 (b) to 91 (b). ) Is a schematic diagram showing an example of the display contents during the timing effect (operation effect). In each drawing, a schematic diagram showing the display contents of the third symbol display device 81 and a schematic diagram showing the operation status for the operation means (operation button 300) are used, and the second drawing changes based on the operation of the operation means. 3 The display contents of the symbol display device 81 will be described.

As shown in FIG. 90, the third symbol display device 81 is displayed on the upper left of the screen in a manner indicating that the above-mentioned round number display unit 714 is in the inter-round interval immediately before the fifth round game R. In the small area Ds2, an acquisition display suggesting the number of balls acquired during the big hit is executed, and in the small area Ds3, "Aim to the right" is displayed on the guidance display unit that guides the game method.

In the center of the screen, an operation instruction display consisting of the characters "press!" That prompts the operation of the operation button 300 is executed. Then, on the lower side of the screen, an effect area used in the timing effect (operation effect) is displayed.

In the sub-display area Ds5 corresponding to the lower part of the effect area, the band display unit 716, which is a display mode indicating the operation timing, is displayed as in the bar display unit 717. The band display unit 716 is provided adjacent to the first band unit 716a on which the characters "safety" are displayed on the right side of the bar display unit 717 and to the left of the first band unit 716a, and the bar display unit. It includes a second band portion 716b that overlaps with the 717 and displays the character "highest", and a third band portion 716c that displays the character "failure" on the left side of the second band portion 716b. ..

As described above, the display pointer 719d is scrolled and displayed from right to left in the sub-display area Ds4. In this control example, the profit obtained by the player is controlled to change depending on the position of the display pointer 719d on the band display unit 716 when the operation button 300 (operation means) is operated.

For example, when the operation button 300 (operation means) is operated when the display pointer 719d is above the first band portion 716a, a relief effect (see FIG. 91 (a) described later) is executed. In this case, while an advantageous event occurs in which the privilege of shifting to the high probability state of the special symbol can be obtained after the end of the jackpot game, the payout of prize balls in the fifth round game R is slightly reduced (specified number). (In this control example, the number of prize balls is reduced by the amount that 10 balls cannot be entered), and a disadvantageous event occurs in which the duration of the round game R in the fifth round becomes the maximum time (30 seconds). ..

Further, for example, when the operation button 300 (operation means) is operated when the display pointer 719d is above the second band portion 716b, the highest effect (see FIG. 90 (b) described later) is executed. In this case, an advantageous event occurs in which the privilege of shifting to the high probability state of the special symbol can be obtained after the end of the jackpot game, and the specified number (10) of balls is first in the fifth round game R. While an advantageous event occurs in which the ball can be entered into the specific winning opening 1000a and the duration of the round game R in the fifth round can be made shorter than the maximum time (30 seconds), no disadvantageous event occurs.

Further, for example, when the operation button 300 (operation means) is operated when the display pointer 719d is above the third band portion 716c, or when the operation button 200 (operation means) is not operated, a failure effect is produced. (See FIG. 91 (b) described later) is executed. In this case, a disadvantageous event occurs in which the privilege of shifting to the high probability state of the special symbol cannot be obtained after the end of the jackpot game, while the specified number (10) of balls is first in the fifth round game R. An advantageous event occurs in which the ball can be entered into the specific winning opening 1000a and the duration of the round game R in the fifth round can be made shorter than the maximum time (30 seconds).

It should be noted that the maximum profit can be obtained by operating the operation button 300 (operation means) when the display pointer 719 is on the second band portion 716b that vertically overlaps with the bar display portion 717. Therefore, FIG. 88 (b) shows. And even if the display immediately shifts from the timing effect (operation effect) displayed in FIG. 89, the player can execute the operation of the operation button 300 (operation means) without discomfort.

Next, with reference to FIG. 90B, an example of the display content of the timing effect (operation effect) during the jackpot will be described. When the timing effect (operation effect) is executed, the display pointer 719 is scrolled and displayed in the sub-display area Ds4, and when the operation button 300 is operated at the timing when the display pointer 719d coincides with the second band portion 716b at the top and bottom. , The character "highest! V acquisition!" (Highest effect) is displayed as the result display mode 720 in the center of the screen, and the operation of the operation button 300 is displayed by changing the display mode of the button display mode 715. Scroll. As a result, it is possible to make the player visually recognize that the maximum profit can be obtained, and it is possible to improve the interest of the player.

By operating the operation button 300 (operation means) when the display pointer 719 is located on the second band portion 716b that vertically overlaps with the bar display portion 717, it is controlled so that the maximum profit can be obtained. Even if the display immediately shifts from the timing effect (operation effect) (effect in the fourth round game R) displayed in FIGS. 88 (b) and 89 (the effect in the inter-round interval is immediately started). Also, the player can execute the operation of the operation button 300 (operation means) without discomfort.

Further, as shown in FIG. 88 (a), since "Don't be careful even after the end of the round" is displayed on the guidance display, the interval between rounds after the end of the fourth round game R (FIG. Even in 90 (a)), the player's attention to the third symbol display device 81 can be maintained. As a result, the possibility that the player cannot operate the operation button 300 (operation means) without noticing the display of the timing effect (operation effect) shown in FIG. 90 (b) can be reduced. it can.

Next, with reference to FIG. 91 (a), an example of the display contents of the timing effect (operation effect) during the jackpot will be described. When the timing effect (operation effect) is executed, the display pointer 719 is scrolled and displayed in the sub-display area Ds4, and when the operation button 300 is operated at the timing when the display pointer 719e coincides with the first band portion 716a in the vertical direction. , The characters "Reliable! V acquisition with reason!" (Reliable effect) are displayed as the result display mode 720 in the center of the screen, and the operation of the operation button 300 changes the display mode of the button display mode 715. Is displayed. As a result, it is possible to make the player visually recognize that it is possible to obtain a profit that can be reassured although there is some disadvantage, and it is possible to improve the interest of the player.

As described above, the slight disadvantage is that the payout of prize balls in the fifth round game R is slightly reduced (in this control example, 10 balls cannot be entered). The prize balls are reduced by the minute, which means that the duration of the fifth round game R is the maximum time (30 seconds).

Next, with reference to FIG. 91 (b), an example of the display content of the timing effect (operation effect) during the jackpot will be described. When the timing effect (operation effect) is executed, the display pointer 719 is scrolled and displayed in the sub-display area Ds4, and when the operation button 300 is operated at the timing when the display pointer 719f coincides with the third band portion 716c at the top and bottom. , The character "Failure! Not V! Next expectation!" Is displayed as the result display mode 720 in the center of the screen, and the display mode of the button display mode 715 is changed by operating the operation button 300. It is displayed by letting it. As a result, it is possible to notify the player that a great deal of disadvantage will occur.

As described above, the great disadvantage is that it is not possible to obtain the privilege of shifting to the high probability state of the special symbol after the end of the jackpot game. Further, in this case, as described above, in the fifth round round game R, a specified number (10) of balls can be entered into the first specific winning opening 1000a, and the fifth round round game R can be continued. Since the time can be made shorter than the maximum time (30 seconds), the timing of the end of the jackpot game can be advanced as compared with the case shown in FIG. 91 (a), and the lottery of the special symbol can be executed earlier. Therefore, it is possible to facilitate the transition timing to the next jackpot game.

As described above, in this control example, the profit obtained by the player is obtained based on the operation result of the operation button 300 (operation means) in the timing effect (operation effect) in the inter-round interval immediately before the fifth round game R. Since it changes, it is possible to improve the player's motivation to operate the operation button 300 (operation means).

Next, the display in the sixth round of the round game R will be described with reference to FIGS. 92 (a) and 92 (b). 92 (a) and 92 (b) are schematic views showing an example of display contents for notifying the third symbol display device 81 that the sixth round round game R is being executed. Note that FIG. 92 (a) is a schematic diagram showing an example of display when the jackpot type is “big hit L” or “big hit N”, and in FIG. 92 (b), the jackpot type is “big hit K”. It is a schematic diagram which showed an example of the display in the case of "big hit M" or "big hit k".

In an example of the display in the sixth round round game R shown in FIG. 92 (a), it is determined that the jackpot type is a jackpot of "big hit L" or "big hit N", that is, a 6-round jackpot is won. The characters "Big hit" are displayed.

Further, in an example of the display in the sixth round round game R shown in FIG. 92 (b), a jackpot whose jackpot type is "big hit K", "big hit M", or "big hit k" is won, that is, a 6-round jackpot. The character "big hit" indicating that the player has won the game is displayed, and the interference device 6900 is executed in the player-favorable operation pattern (20th operation pattern) in the sixth round game R. The character "+ chance" is displayed as the notification mode 721 for increasing the possibility of excessive winning, and the character "right-handed!" Is displayed on the guidance display unit in the small area Ds3.

When the jackpot type is "big hit K", "big hit M" or "big hit k", in the 6th round round game R, the number of balls entered exceeds the specified number by continuing without stopping the firing of the balls. The interfering device 6900 is driven so as to increase the possibility of occurrence (see FIG. 99 (a)). Therefore, the player can increase the possibility of receiving the payout of the prize balls exceeding the specified number by continuing the firing of the balls according to the display of FIG. 92 (b).

In this way, in addition to the mode of notifying that the lottery result of the special symbol was a big hit, the mode of notifying the operating status of the interfering device 6900 during the big hit is notified on the display screen in the round game R. It is possible to display a display mode suitable for various patterns of round game R. In this control example, by continuing or stopping the firing of the ball according to this display, the player can easily receive the maximum profit planned for each jackpot type as the profit given to the player. Is controlled by. Therefore, the player can easily obtain the maximum profit by firing the ball according to the display.

In this control example, the player who is executed in the timing effect (operation effect) has a different effect mode of the timing effect (operation effect) based on the operation content, but in addition to that, for example, the timing effect Operation history (operation) in which the player operates the operation button 300 (operation means) in an operation effect (for example, a mini-game effect during a jackpot game or a reach effect during a special symbol change) executed other than (operation effect). The timing effect (operation effect) may be configured to be different based on the number of times, the operation content, and the operation result). As a result, it is possible to enthusiastically play the game for various operation effects executed by the pachinko machine 10, and it is possible to prevent the player from getting tired of the game at an early stage.

Further, the timing effect is not limited to the operation result for the operation button 300 (operation means) by the player, for example, based on the time timing period measured by the time measurement means (RTC) or the game period in which the player plays the game. It may be configured to switch the production mode of (operation effect).

<About the electrical configuration in the first control example>
Next, with reference to FIG. 93, the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 will be described again. FIG. 93 is a block diagram showing an electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10. The changes to FIG. 4 will be described, and the description will be omitted in the same parts.

The main control device 110 executes the main processing of the pachinko machine 10, such as a jackpot lottery, display setting in the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81, and lottery of display results in the second symbol display device 83. The RAM 203 is provided with a counter buffer (see FIG. 100) for storing various counters for controlling these processes.

Here, with reference to FIG. 100, a counter and the like provided in the RAM 203 of the main control device 110 will be described. FIG. 100 is a model diagram illustrating a counter and the like provided in the RAM 203 of the main control device 110. These counters and the like use the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 to perform a jackpot lottery, setting the display of the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81, drawing the display result of the second symbol display device 83, and the like. Used in.

For the jackpot lottery and the display settings of the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81, the first hit random number counter C1 used for the jackpot (and small hit) lottery and the jackpot type (big hit symbol) are selected. Used to set the initial value of the first hit type counter C2 used for, the stop type counter C3 used for selecting the stop type, the fluctuation type counter CS1 used for selecting the fluctuation pattern, and the random number counter C1 per first. The first initial value random number counter CINI1 is used.

Further, the second random number counter C4 is used for the lottery of the ordinary symbol (second symbol display device 83), and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 is used for setting the initial value of the second random number counter C4. Further, the small hit type counter C5 is used for selecting the small hit type. Each of these counters is a loop counter in which 1 is added to the previous value each time it is updated, and after reaching the maximum value, it returns to 0.

Each counter is updated, for example, at intervals of 2 milliseconds, which is the execution interval of the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 107), and some counters are updated irregularly in the main process (see FIG. 117). Then, the updated value is appropriately stored in the counter buffer set in the predetermined area of the RAM 203. Although the details will be described later, the RAM 203 stores each counter value for the winning of the first ball opening 64 and the special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a and the winning of the second ball opening 640. A special symbol 2 holding ball storage 203b is provided.

In this control example, the first ball entry port 64 and the second ball entry port 640 are each provided with a maximum of four reserved balls, and a total of a maximum of eight reserved balls can be stored. Therefore, if the ball wins the first entry slot 64 during the period when the special symbol can be drawn, such as when the special symbol is not displayed in a variable manner or when the special symbol is not in the jackpot game, each counter value is changed to the special symbol. When the game ball is stored in the 1 reserved ball storage area 203a and the game ball wins in the second entrance 640, each counter value is stored in the special symbol 2 reserved ball storage area 203b. After that, each counter value stored in the special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a is moved to the execution area provided in the special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a, and the special symbol 1 is variablely displayed (dynamically displayed). Various settings and control processing for this are executed. Similarly, each counter value stored in the special symbol 2 reserved ball storage area 203b is moved to the execution area provided in the special symbol 2 reserved ball storage area 203b, and various types for variable display of the special symbol 2 are displayed. Settings and control processing are executed.

On the other hand, during the period when the special symbol cannot be drawn, such as during the variable display of the special symbol 1 or the special symbol 2 or during the jackpot game of the special symbol 1 or the special symbol 2, the game ball enters the first slot 64 or the second slot. When the ball opening 640 is won, if the number of reserved balls for the winning ball opening (starting opening) is less than the upper limit value (4 in this control example), each counter value is acquired and the winning is won. It is stored in the special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a or the special symbol 2 reserved ball storage area 203b corresponding to the entrance. In addition, when the number of reserved balls for the winning ball opening is the upper limit value (4 in this control example) or more, each counter value or the like is not acquired and the prize balls (5 in this control example) are not acquired. Only the prize ball) is treated as an invalid ball paid out to the player.

Each counter will be described in detail with reference to FIG. 100. The first random number counter C1 is configured to be incremented by 1 in order within a predetermined range (0 to 319 in this control example), reach the maximum value (319 in this control example), and then return to 0. There is. In particular, when the first random number counter C1 makes one round, the value of the first initial value random number counter CINI1 at that time is read as the initial value of the first random number counter C1.

Further, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 is configured as a loop counter updated in the same range as the first random number counter C1. That is, for example, when the first random number counter C1 is a loop counter capable of taking a value of 0 to 319, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 is also a loop counter in the range of 0 to 319. The first initial value random number counter CINI1 is updated once for each execution of the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 107), and is repeatedly updated within the remaining time of the main process (see FIG. 117).

The value of the first random number counter C1 is updated periodically (in this control example, once for each timer interrupt process), and the timing at which the ball wins the first entry port 64 or the second entry opening 640. It is stored in the special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a or the special symbol 2 reserved ball storage area 203b of the RAM 203. The value of the random number that becomes the jackpot of the special symbol is defined in the first random number table 202a stored in the ROM 202 (see FIG. 94 (a)) of the main control device 110, and the first random number counter C1. When the value matches the value of the random number that is the big hit defined in the first random number table 202a, it is determined to be the big hit of the special symbol.

Here, the first random number table 202a (see FIG. 94A) will be described. The first hit random number table 202a is a table in which a random number value (determination value) determined to be a hit in each game state is set in the lottery of the special symbol 1 or the special symbol 2. Specifically, when the game state is a low probability state, it is determined in the lottery of the special symbol 1 or the special symbol 2 whether the value of the acquired first random number counter C1 is "0". If it is "0", it is determined to be a big hit. Further, when the game state is a high probability state, it is determined in the lottery of the special symbol 1 or the special symbol 2 whether the value of the acquired first random number counter C1 is within the range of "1 to 4". If it is within the range of "1 to 4", it is determined that it is a big hit.

Here, if the value of the first hit random number counter C1 stored in the execution area of the special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a or the execution area of the special symbol 2 reserved ball storage area 203b is a random number that is a big hit of the special symbol. For example, the display mode corresponding to the stop symbol displayed on the first symbol display device 37 is the one at the time of a big hit of the special symbol. In this case, the specific display mode at the time of the big hit is the display mode indicated by the value of the first hit type counter C2 stored in the same execution area.

The first random number counter C1 in the pachinko machine 10 of this control example is configured as a 2-byte loop counter in the range of 0 to 319. As described above, in the low probability state of the special symbol, there is one value of the first random number counter C1 which is a big hit of the special symbol, and the random number value "0" is the first random number table as described above. It is stored in 202a (see FIG. 94 (a)). Since the total number of random numbers that are big hits is 1 while the total number of random numbers is 320, the probability of being a big hit of a special symbol is "1/320". On the other hand, in the high probability state of the special symbol, there are four values of the first random number counter C1 which is a big hit of the special symbol, and the random number values "1 to 4" are the first random number table as described above. It is stored in 202a. Since the total number of random numbers that are big hits is 4 while the total number of random numbers is 320, the probability of being a big hit of a special symbol is "1/80".

Further, the value of the first hit type counter C2 in the pachinko machine 10 of this control example is configured as a loop counter in the range of 0 to 99. Then, when the lottery result of the special symbol becomes a big hit, the big hit type is selected based on the value of the first hit type counter C2 and the first hit type selection table 202b (see FIG. 94 (b)). The Rukoto. Specifically, it will be described later with reference to FIG. 94 (b).

In this control example, the stop type selection counter C3 is configured to be incremented by 1 in order within the range of 0 to 99, reach the maximum value (that is, 99), and then return to 0. In this control example, the stop type selection counter C3 selects the stop type at the time of disconnection displayed by the third symbol display device 81, and after the reach occurs, the symbol is different from the symbol that is reached as the final stop symbol. Two stop (effect) patterns are selected: "out of reach" where the symbol stops (for example, in the range of 90 to 99) and "completely out of reach" (for example, in the range of 0 to 89) where reach does not occur. The value of the stop type selection counter C3 is updated periodically (once for each timer interrupt process in this control example), and when a ball enters the first entry port 64, the value is a special value of the RAM 203. The symbol 1 is stored in the reserved ball storage area 203a. When the ball enters the second entry port 640, the value is stored in the special symbol 2 reserved ball storage area 203b of the RAM 203.

From the value (random value) of the stop type selection counter C3, the random number value for determining the stop type of the special symbol is set by the stop type selection table (not shown), and this table is the main control. It is provided in the ROM 202 of the device 110. Further, in this control example, this table is divided into a special symbol for high probability and a special symbol for low probability, and a range of random values set for each stop type of deviation according to the table. Is changing. This is because the selection ratio of the stop type is changed depending on whether the pachinko machine 10 is in the high probability state of the special symbol or the low probability state of the special symbol.

For example, in the probabilistic state of a special symbol, a jackpot is likely to occur, so the range of random values corresponding to the "completely off" stop type is wide, 0 to 89, so that the reach effect is not selected more than necessary. Table is selected, "completely out of reach" is easily selected, and "out of reach" is narrowed to 90 to 99, so that "out of reach" is difficult to be selected. Further, in the low probability state of the special symbol, the range of the random number value corresponding to the stop type of "completely off" is narrow as 0 to 79 in order to secure the ball entry time to the first entry port 64. A table for low probability is selected, and it becomes difficult to select "completely out of reach", and the range of random numbers corresponding to the stop type of "out of reach" is widened to 80 to 99. Therefore, in the low probability state, it is possible to perform many reach displays with a long effect time, so that the ball entry time to the first entry port 64 can be secured, and the variation display by the third symbol display device 81 continues. It will be easier to do.

In this control example, the variation type counter CS1 is configured to be incremented by 1 in order within the range of 0 to 198, reach the maximum value (that is, 198), and then return to 0. The variation type counter CS1 determines one variation pattern from the set variation pattern selection table. A fluctuation time (dynamic display period) is set in this fluctuation pattern, and the fluctuation type counter CS1 is also a counter for determining the fluctuation time. The value of the variation type counter CS1 is updated once each time the main process (see FIG. 117) described later is executed once, and is repeatedly updated even within the remaining time in the main process. The fluctuation pattern selection table 202d, which stores a random number value for determining one fluctuation time of the symbol fluctuation from the value (random number value) of the fluctuation type counter CS1, is provided in the ROM 202 of the main control device 110.

The variation pattern selection table 202d defines a plurality of data tables for selecting variation patterns. In this variation pattern selection table 202d, a plurality of variation pattern selection tables commonly used for the special symbol 1 and the special symbol 2 are set, and a variation pattern selection table is set for each of the hit / fail determination results. Has been done.

In this control example, the second random number counter C4 is configured as a loop counter in which 1 is sequentially added in the range of 0 to 239, and after reaching the maximum value (that is, 239), the counter returns to 0. Further, when the second hit random number counter C4 makes one round, the value of the second initial value random number counter CINI2 at that time is read as the initial value of the second hit random number counter C4. In this control example, the value of the second random number counter C4 is updated periodically for each timer interrupt process (see FIG. 107), and it is detected that the ball has passed through the normal start port (through gate) 67. It is acquired at that time and stored in the execution area of the normal symbol of RAM 203.

The value of the random number that normally hits the symbol is defined in the second hit random number table 202c (see FIG. 94 (c)) stored in the ROM 202 of the main controller, and the value of the second hit random number counter C4. However, when it matches the value of the random number that is the hit specified in the second hit random number table 202c, it is determined that the hit is a normal symbol (second symbol). In this control example, in the second hit random number table 202c, when the probability of the normal symbol is low (during the normal state of the normal symbol), there are five random numbers that can be hit by the normal symbol, and the range is "5 to 9". ". Since the total number of random numbers that can be taken by the second random number counter C4 is 240 and the total number of random numbers that can be hit is 5, the probability of hitting a normal symbol at a low probability of a normal symbol is "1". / 48 ".

On the other hand, when the probability of the normal symbol is high (during the time saving state of the normal symbol), there are 200 random values that can be hit by the normal symbol, and the range is "5-204". Since the total number of random numbers that can be taken by the second random number counter C4 is 240 and the total number of random numbers that can be hit is 200, the probability of hitting a normal symbol is "1 / 1.2". .. As described above, in this control example, the random value that is the hit of the normal symbol is significantly different between the low probability state of the normal symbol and the high probability state of the normal symbol, so that the hit probability is greatly different. In addition, the fluctuation time of the normal symbol and the opening time of the electric accessory 640a attached to the second entrance 640 when the normal symbol hits are also different between the low probability time and the high probability time of the normal symbol. .. For this reason, the ease of entering the second ball opening 640 differs greatly between the low probability state of the normal symbol and the high probability state of the normal symbol. Therefore, in the low probability state (normal state) of the normal symbol, The player can be made to play the game aiming at the first entrance 64.

When the ball passes through the through gate (normal entry port) 67 (see FIG. 2) in the low probability state of the normal symbol, the value of the random number counter C4 per second is acquired and the second symbol display device 83 (FIG. 2). In (see 2), the fluctuation display of the normal symbol is executed for 30 seconds. Then, if the acquired value of the second random number counter C4 is in the range of "5 to 9", it is determined that the player has won, and after the variation display on the second symbol display device 83 is completed, the stop symbol (second symbol) ), The symbol "○" is lit and displayed, and the second entrance 640 is opened only for "0.2 seconds x 2 times".

On the other hand, when the ball passes through the through gate (normal entry port) 67 (see FIG. 2) in the high probability state of the normal symbol, the fluctuation display of the normal symbol is displayed for 1 second on the second symbol display device 83 (see FIG. 2). If the value of the second random number counter C4 executed and acquired is in the range of "5-204", it is determined that the winning symbol has been won, and after the variation display in the second symbol display device 83 is completed, the stop symbol (second symbol) The symbol "○" is lit and displayed as the symbol), and the second entrance 640 is opened only "1 second x 2 times". In this control example, the fluctuation time of the normal symbol, the opening time of the normal electric accessory, and the number of times of opening may be appropriately changed as long as the game playability is not impaired.

The second initial value random number counter CINI2 is configured as a loop counter that is updated in the same range as the second random number counter C4 (that is, “0 to 239”), and is once for each timer interrupt process (see FIG. 107). At the same time as being updated, it is repeatedly updated within the remaining time of the main process (see FIG. 117).

As described above, the RAM 203 is provided with various counters and the like, and in the main control device 110, a jackpot lottery and a display on the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81 are displayed according to the value of the counter or the like. The main processing of the pachinko machine 10 such as setting and lottery of display results in the second symbol display device 83 can be executed.

Returning to FIG. 93, the description will be continued. In addition to the various counters shown in FIG. 93, the RAM 203 includes a stack area in which the contents of the internal registers of the MPU 201 and the return address of the control program executed by the MPU 201 are stored, various flags and counters, I / O, and the like. It has a work area (work area) in which the value of is stored.

The RAM 203 has a configuration in which a backup voltage is supplied from the power supply device 115 to hold (back up) data even after the power supply of the pachinko machine 10 is cut off, and all the data stored in the RAM 203 is backed up. ..

When the power supply is cut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like, the stack pointer at the time of the power failure (including the time when the power failure occurs; the same applies hereinafter) and the value of each register are stored in the RAM 203. On the other hand, when the power is turned on (including power on due to power failure elimination; the same applies hereinafter), the state of the pachinko machine 10 is restored to the state before the power was cut off based on the information stored in the RAM 203. The writing to the RAM 203 is executed by the main process (see FIG. 117) when the power is cut off, and the restoration of each value written in the RAM 203 is executed in the start-up process (see FIG. 116) when the power is turned on. The NMI terminal (non-maskable interrupt terminal) of the MPU 201 is configured so that a power failure signal SG1 from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 is input when the power is cut off due to a power failure or the like, and the power failure signal SG1 is the MPU201. When input to, the NMI interrupt process (see FIG. 115) as the power failure process is immediately executed.

Next, the contents of the ROM 202 of the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 in this control example will be described with reference to FIGS. 94 to 95. FIG. 94 (a) is a schematic view schematically showing the contents of ROM 202 in MPU 201 of the main control device 110 in this control example. In the ROM 202, in addition to the first random number table 202a and the second random number table 202c already described above, the first hit type selection table 202b, the variation pattern selection table 202d, and the switching plate and the interference member operation scenario storage area At least 202e and an opening / closing plate and an interference member operation scenario table 202f are provided.

First, the details of the first type selection table 202b will be described with reference to FIG. 94 (b). FIG. 94 (b) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the first type selection table 202b. The first hit type selection table 202b (see FIG. 94 (b)) is a data table in which determination values for determining the jackpot type are stored for each type of special symbol, and the determination of the first hit type counter C2. The value is specified in association with each jackpot type. In the pachinko machine 10 of the present control example, when it is determined that the special symbol is a big hit, the value of the first hit type counter C2 acquired based on the start winning prize is compared with the first hit type selection table 202b, and the first hit type selection table 202b is compared. The jackpot type corresponding to the value of the hit type counter C2 is selected.

As shown in FIG. 94 (b), "big hit K" is associated with the special symbol 1 in the range where the value of the first hit type counter C2 is "0 to 24". This "big hit K" is a big hit with 6 rounds. Of the 100 counter values that the first hit type counter C2 can take, 25 are counter values that are "big hit K", so if a big hit is achieved in the special symbol 1 lottery, "big hit K" is determined. The ratio is 25% (25/100).

For this "big hit K", 6 rounds are set as the number of rounds, and after the big hit ends, the game shifts to a high probability state (ST80 times) of 80 times in a short time. Therefore, it is an advantageous jackpot type in terms of ball ejection (expected ball ejection) that can be acquired by the player from the start of one jackpot until the gaming state returns to the normal state.

Further, with respect to the special symbol 1, the value of the first hit type counter C2 is defined in the range of "25 to 49" in association with "big hit L". This "big hit L" is a big hit with 6 rounds. Of the 100 counter values that the first hit type counter C2 can take, 25 are counter values that are "big hit L", so if a big hit is achieved in the special symbol 1 lottery, "big hit L" is determined. The ratio is 25% (25/100).

For this "big hit L", 6 rounds are set as the number of rounds, and it is the same as "big hit K" to shift to a high probability state (ST80 times) of 80 times in a short time after the end of the big hit, but as will be described later, In terms of game efficiency (number of prize balls paid out / time required for big hit game), it is a big hit type that is disadvantageous compared to "big hit K".

Further, with respect to the special symbol 1, the value of the first hit type counter C2 is defined in the range of "50 to 74" in association with "big hit M". This "big hit M" is a big hit with 6 rounds. Of the 100 counter values that the first hit type counter C2 can take, 25 counter values are "big hit M", so if a big hit is achieved in the special symbol 1 lottery, "big hit M" is determined. The ratio is 25% (25/100).

For this "big hit M", 6 rounds are set as the number of rounds, and after the big hit is completed, the time saving state of the normal symbol is given 100 times.

Further, with respect to the special symbol 1, the value of the first hit type counter C2 is defined in the range of "75 to 99" in association with "big hit N". This "big hit N" is a big hit with 6 rounds. Of the 100 counter values that the first hit type counter C2 can take, 25 counter values are "big hit N", so if a big hit is achieved in the special symbol 1 lottery, "big hit N" is determined. The ratio is 25% (25/100).

This "big hit N" is set to 6 rounds as the number of rounds, and after the big hit is completed, the time saving state of the normal symbol is given 100 times, which is the same as the "big hit M", but as will be described later, "big hit M". It is disadvantageous in that the maximum number of payouts is small (the possibility of over-winning (over-winning) is low) with respect to "big hit M".

On the other hand, for the second special symbol, "big hit k" is associated with the range (entire range) in which the value of the first hit type counter C2 is "0 to 99". This "big hit k" is a big hit with 6 rounds. Of the 100 counter values that the first hit type counter C2 can take, 100 counter values are "big hit k", so "big hit k" is determined when a big hit is obtained in the special symbol 2 lottery. The ratio is 100%.

For this "big hit k", 6 rounds are set as the number of rounds, and after the jackpot ends, whether to shift to the high probability state (ST80 times) of 80 times of time reduction or to give the time reduction state of the normal symbol 100 times. , It changes depending on the game mode of the player during the jackpot game. The game mode of the player is not limited in any way, and the ball may be passed through a predetermined entry port or a predetermined operation means may be operated. However, the details in this control example are described. It will be described later.

That is, although the number of rounds of the jackpot game is the same for the special symbol 1 and the special symbol 2, the special symbol 2 is more advantageous in the privilege (the time saving state or the high probability state of the normal symbol) given after the jackpot ends. (It is easy to shift to the high probability state).

As described above, in this control example, the case where the lottery of the special symbol 1 is a big hit, the case where the lottery of the special symbol 2 is a big hit shifts to a high probability state which is advantageous to the player. The structure makes it easy. Therefore, once the consecutive villa mode (high probability state of special symbol and time saving state of normal symbol) is set, the special symbol 2 is drawn by right-handed to enter the second entrance 640. Is easy to be executed and the jackpot game is easy to be repeated. Therefore, it is possible to have the player play the game for one purpose of shifting to the consecutive villa mode. Therefore, it is possible to improve the interest of the player in the game.

Next, the detailed contents of the opening / closing plate and the interference member operation scenario storage area 202e will be described with reference to FIG. 95 (a). FIG. 95A is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the opening / closing plate and the interference member operation scenario storage area 202e. The opening / closing plate and the interference member operation scenario storage area 202e is an area in which the operation scenarios used for the operation control of the opening / closing plate 1300 and the interference member 6930 (see FIG. 52) are stored for each scenario type. The opening / closing plate 1300 and the interference member 6930 are operated in a predetermined round game R in the jackpot game by using the information stored in the interference member operation scenario storage area 202e.

Specifically, in the opening / closing plate and the interference member operation scenario storage area 202e, operation scenarios 1 to 6 are defined as scenario types. The operation scenario 1 is an operation scenario for a maximum of 30 seconds in which the opening / closing plate 1300 is set to "open (open state)" and the interference member 6930 is set to "retract state" as the scenario content. In the operation scenario 1, even before 30 seconds have passed, the detection sensor 1240 detects a specified number of balls (10 in this control example), so that the operation scenario of the opening / closing plate 1300 ends, and the initial stage It is controlled to return to the state (the state in which the opening / closing plate 1300 is closed and the interfering member is in the retracted state).

The operation scenario 2 is an operation scenario for a maximum of 10 seconds in which the opening / closing plate 1300 is set to "open (open state)" and the interference member 6930 is set to "retract state" as the scenario content. In the operation scenario 2, the operation scenario of the opening / closing plate 1300 is completed by detecting a specified number of balls (10 in this control example) in the detection sensor 1240 even before 10 seconds have elapsed, and the initial operation scenario 2 is completed. It is controlled to return to the state.

In the operation scenario 3, "open (open state) 0.2 seconds → closed (closed state) 0.8 seconds → open (open state)" is set in the opening / closing plate 1300, and the interfering member 6930 is set to "retracted state". This is an operation scenario of up to 30 seconds in which "1.0 seconds-> overhanging state 0.1 seconds-> retracted state" is set. In the operation scenario 3, the operation scenario of the opening / closing plate 1300 is completed by detecting a specified number of balls (10 in this control example) by the detection sensor 1240 even before 30 seconds have elapsed, and the initial operation scenario 3 is performed. It is controlled to return to the state.

In this operation scenario 3, unlike the above-mentioned operation scenario 1 and operation scenario 2, the opening / closing plate 1300 is first opened (open state) and then closed (closed state), so that the storage flow path 1231 The remaining balls can be discharged, but the details will be described later. Since the closed state is maintained for 0.8 seconds, up to 4 balls remaining in the storage flow path 1231 can be discharged (as described above, 0.2 seconds are required to discharge one ball).

Of the spheres remaining in the storage flow path 1231, the spheres discharged while the closure (closed state) is maintained for 0.8 seconds are guided to the probability fluctuation determination unit 4800. In this control example, regardless of the jackpot type, the distribution operation member 4851 is displaced to the open position 2.0 seconds after the start of the fifth round game R, and 18.0 seconds after that (the fifth round). (20.0 seconds after the start of the game R), the distribution operation member 4851 is displaced to the closed position.

This "2.0 seconds later" is later than the timing at which the third sphere counting from the downstream of the spheres remaining in the storage flow path 1231 passes through the distribution operation member 4851 (see FIG. 51). It is a numerical value set as a time point before the timing when the fourth sphere passes through the distribution operation member 4851. That is, the fourth ball passes through the discharge port 1150 immediately before the end of 0.8 seconds in which the opening / closing plate 1300 is maintained closed (closed state) (from the start of the fifth round game R 1. (0 seconds have passed), it is a numerical value derived from the setting that it takes 1.0 seconds to pass through the continuous passage 4810 from the discharge port 1150 (2.0 seconds have passed from the start of the fifth round game R). ..

In the operation scenario 4, "open (open state) 0.2 seconds → closed (closed state) 0.8 seconds → open (open state)" is set in the opening / closing plate 1300, and the interfering member 6930 is set to "retracted state". This is an operation scenario of a maximum of 30 seconds in which "1.0 seconds-> overhang state 24.0 seconds-> retracted state" is set. In the operation scenario 4, the operation scenario of the opening / closing plate 1300 is completed when the detection sensor 1240 detects a specified number of balls (10 in this control example) even before 30 seconds have elapsed, and the initial operation scenario 4 is performed. It is controlled to return to the state.

In this operation scenario 4, similarly to the operation scenario 3 described above, the opening / closing plate 1300 is initially opened (open state) and then closed (closed state), so that the sphere remaining in the storage flow path 1231. Can be discharged, but details will be described later. Since the closed state is maintained for 0.8 seconds, up to 4 balls remaining in the storage flow path 1231 can be discharged (as described above, 0.2 seconds are required to discharge one ball). As described above, among the spheres remaining in the storage flow path 1231, the spheres discharged while the closure (closed state) is maintained for 0.8 seconds are guided to the probability fluctuation determination unit 4800. is there.

The “overhanging state 24.0 seconds” in this operation scenario 4 is set as a numerical value capable of maintaining the overhanging state at least until the distribution operation member 4851 is displaced to the closed position. That is, in the operation scenario 4, as will be described later, it is impossible for a specified number of balls (10 in this control example) to pass through the detection sensor 1240 until the interference member 6930 is in the retracted state. Since the distribution operation member 4851 is displaced to the closed position before the interference member 6930 is in the retracted state, the ball discharged from the discharge port 1150 after the interference member 6930 is in the retracted state is removed. It becomes impossible to flow down to the specific area 4830.

In the operation scenario 5, "open (open state) 3.0 seconds → closed (closed state) 0.2 seconds → open (open state)" is set in the opening / closing plate 1300, and the interfering member 6930 is set to "retracted state". It is an operation scenario of a maximum of 30 seconds in which 0.2 seconds → overhang state 0.2 seconds → evacuation state 2.6 seconds → overhang state 20 seconds → evacuation state ”is set. In the operation scenario 5, the operation scenario of the opening / closing plate 1300 is completed when the detection sensor 1240 detects a specified number of balls (10 in this control example) even before 30 seconds have elapsed, and the initial operation scenario 5 is performed. It is controlled to return to the state.

In this operation scenario 5, the opening / closing plate 1300 is first opened (opened) and then closed (closed), so that one ball remaining in the storage flow path 1231 is discharged, as will be described later. This is an operation scenario in which the flow of spheres is regulated by the interference member 6930 and the number of spheres stored inside the storage flow path 1231 is limited to eight (see FIG. 53 (b), interference member 6930). Corresponds to the state where there is one sphere downstream of).

In this case, since it is possible to restrict the spheres from passing through the detection sensor 1240 when the number of spheres that have passed through the detection sensor 1240 is less than the specified number (9 in this control example), the interference member 6930 is retracted. Since it is possible to allow the ball to pass through the detection sensor 1240 based on the displacement to the detection sensor 1240, it is possible to generate the ball passing through the detection sensor 1240 with a plurality of balls arranged on the upstream side of the detection sensor 1240. it can. As a result, it is possible to easily generate an excess prize (so-called "over prize").

In the operation scenario 6, the opening / closing plate 1300 is set to "open (open state) 3.0 seconds → closed (closed state) 0.2 seconds → open (open state)" as in the operation scenario 5. In an operation scenario of a maximum of 30 seconds, in which the interfering member 6930 is set to "retract state 0.2 seconds-> overhang state 2.6 seconds-> evacuation state 0.2 seconds-> overhang state 0.2 seconds-> evacuation state". is there. In the operation scenario 6, the operation scenario of the opening / closing plate 1300 is completed when the detection sensor 1240 detects a specified number of balls (10 in this control example) even before 30 seconds have elapsed, and the initial operation scenario 6 is completed. It is controlled to return to the state.

In this operation scenario 6, the opening / closing plate 1300 is initially opened (opened) and then closed (closed), but the opening / closing plate 1300 is restricted from flowing down by the interference member 6930. This is an operation scenario in which the ball is not discharged from the discharge port 1150 while the closed (closed state) is maintained. Further, after 3 seconds have passed from the start of the round game R, since the interference member 6930 is maintained in the retracted state, the number of balls stored inside the storage flow path 1231 is 10 (FIG. 53 (FIG. 53). a)), the round game R ends based on the detection of the tenth ball by the detection sensor 1240. Therefore, in the operation scenario 6, unlike the operation scenario 5, it is not possible to easily generate an excess prize.

In this way, by classifying and memorizing the operation scenarios based on the difference in the profits obtained by the player, the profits given to the player by the currently executed movements of the opening / closing plate 1300 and the interference member 6930 can be obtained. It can be easily identified.

For each operation scenario, the opening / closing plate 1300 is forcibly closed by a specified number of balls (10 in this control example) entering the first specific winning opening 1000a (see FIGS. 8 and 9). (The operation scenario ends), but the interference member 6930 has a round game R even if a specified number of balls enter the first specific winning opening 1000a in the middle of the operation scenario. The operation based on the operation scenario is continued until the end of the inter-round interval after the end of, and the state is controlled to change to the retracted state (the operation scenario ends) at the same time as the end of the inter-round interval.

FIG. 95B is a schematic view schematically showing the contents of the opening / closing plate and the interference member operation scenario table 202f. The opening / closing plate and the interference member operation scenario table 202f are provided with information on which jackpot type and which round of the round game R each predetermined scenario type corresponds to.

In the MPU of the main control device 110, when the operation control of the opening / closing plate 1300 and the interference member 6930 is executed, the information corresponding to the contents specified in the opening / closing plate and the interference member operation scenario table 202f is provided to the opening / closing plate and the interference member. The opening / closing plate 1300 and the interference member 6930 are moved by reading from the operation scenario storage area 202e.

The opening / closing plate and the interference member operation scenario table 202f are configured so that the corresponding operation scenario can be set based on the combination of the jackpot type and the round game R of which round. In the round game R in the jackpot game, the opening / closing plate 1300 and the interference member 6930 are movably controlled at the same time as the start of the round game R in the selected operation scenario.

In this control example, the case where the interference member 6930 is movably controlled in response to the start timing of the round game R of the jackpot game has been described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the interference member 6930 is movable in an operation scenario in which the setting order is stored in advance in the opening / closing plate and the interference member operation scenario table 202f and changes in order from the time the power is turned on (or a predetermined operation start timing) to each end of the operation scenario. It may be controlled. As a result, the correspondence between the opening / closing plate 1300 and the interference member 6930 can be broken, so that it is difficult for the player to predict the operation of the interference member 6930.

With reference to FIGS. 96 (a), 96 (b), 97 (a), 97 (b), 98, 99 (a) and 99 (b), the opening / closing plate corresponding to the jackpot type. The operation mode of the 1300 (first specific winning opening 1000a), the interference member 6930, and the distribution device 4850 (specific area 4830, see FIG. 51) will be described.

In FIGS. 96 (a), 96 (b), 97 (a), 97 (b), 98, 99 (a) and 99 (b), the open state of the first specific winning opening 1000a is shown. Also indicated as "open", the closed state of the first specific winning opening 1000a is also indicated as "closed", the overhanging state of the interfering member 6930 is also indicated as "tensioning", and the retracted state of the interfering member 6930 is also indicated as "retired". The state in which the ball can flow into the region 4830 (that is, the state in which the distribution operation member 4851 is arranged in the open position) is also indicated as "open", and the state in which the ball cannot flow into the specific area 4830 (that is, the distribution operation member). The state in which 4851 is placed in the closed position) is also referred to as “closed”.

As shown in FIG. 95B, the operation mode of the opening / closing plate 1300 (first specific winning opening 1000a) and the interference member 6930 from the first round round game R to the fourth round round game R is as follows. Since it is common regardless of the jackpot type, the period from the end of the fourth round game R to the end of the jackpot game will be described in detail.

Further, as described above, the driving mode of the distribution operation member 4851 is common regardless of the jackpot type (see FIG. 96A). That is, 2.0 seconds after the start of the fifth round game R, the distribution operation member 4851 is displaced to the open position (the ball is opened so that the ball can pass through the specific area 4830), and 18.0 seconds later (5). (20.0 seconds after the start of the round game R of the round), the distribution operation member 4851 is displaced to the closed position (the ball is blocked so as not to pass through the specific area 4830).

FIG. 96A is a diagram showing the time-dependent changes of the first specific winning opening 1000a, the interference member 6930, and the specific region 4830 in the fifteenth operation pattern. In this control example, the timekeeping change shown in FIG. 96A is executed in the jackpot game when the jackpot type is jackpot K (see FIG. 94B).

As shown in FIG. 96A, in the fifteenth operation pattern, after the end of the fourth round game R, the fifth round is sandwiched between the first interval time Int1 (2.0 seconds) between the rounds. The game R is started, and the fifth round game R is executed in the above-described operation scenario 3 (see FIG. 95B).

First, according to this operation pattern, all the balls stored in the storage flow path 1231 are discharged at the interval between rounds immediately before the fifth round game R (0.2 seconds x 10 pieces). (= 2.0 seconds)) In the 4th round round game R, the balls stored in the storage flow path 1231 do not remain in the storage flow path 1231 until after the start of the 5th round round game. Further, since it takes at least 2.0 seconds for the ball newly entered into the storage flow path 1231 to reach the lower end of the storage flow path 1231, it takes at least 2.0 seconds within 1 second after the start of the fifth round game R. Balls are not discharged from the downstream side of the storage channel 1231.

Therefore, the ball is discharged from the storage flow path 1231 during the period (0.8 seconds) when the opening / closing plate 1300 is closed (the regulating member 1600 is discharged) immediately after the start of the fifth round game R. Since this is not the case, the distribution operation member 4851 is displaced to the open position, and the event that the ball passes through the specific area 4830 immediately after the ball is opened so as to be able to pass through the specific area 4830 does not occur.

On the other hand, since the storage flow path 1231 is configured to be able to store a regulated number of balls (10 in this control example), the fifth round round game R is performed, and 10 balls are stored in the first specific winning opening 1000a. It can be finished by inserting individual balls. Therefore, while the ball can pass through the specific area 4830 (20.0 seconds), the ball stored in the storage flow path 1231 can be discharged in the fifth round game R, so that the first specific By continuing to shoot the ball toward the winning opening 1000a, an event occurs in which the ball passes through the specific area 4830 after the end of the fifth round game R.

That is, in this operation pattern, since the ball is configured to be able to pass through the specific area 4830, it is possible to give a privilege advantageous to the player (in this control example, the continuation of the high probability state of the special symbol). In addition to being able to do so, the fifth round of round game R can be completed in a short time (finished by winning a specified number (10 in this control example)), so that the time efficiency with respect to the number of prize balls to be paid out in the jackpot game can be improved. Can be raised.

Further, since the timing at which the ball passes through the specific area 4830 is after the end of the fifth round round game R, it is not possible to know whether or not the ball passes through the specific area 4830 over the fifth round round game R. Therefore, it is possible to improve the player's interest in the game.

FIG. 96B is a diagram showing the time-dependent changes of the first specific winning opening 1000a, the interference member 6930, and the specific region 4830 in the sixteenth operation pattern. In this control example, the timekeeping change shown in FIG. 96 (b) is executed in the jackpot game when the jackpot type is jackpot L (see FIG. 94 (b)).

As shown in FIG. 96 (b), in the 16th operation pattern, after the end of the 4th round game R, the 5th round has a second interval time Int2 (1.0 seconds) between the rounds. The game R is started, and the fifth round game R is executed in the above-described operation scenario 3 (see FIG. 95B).

First, according to this operation pattern, five balls stored in the storage flow path 1231 are discharged at the interval between rounds immediately before the fifth round game R (0.2 seconds × 5). (Pieces = 1.0 second)) In the fourth round round game R, the balls stored in the storage flow path 1231 may remain in the storage flow path 1231 until after the start of the fifth round round game R. For example, in the fourth round of round game R, when five or more balls are stored in the storage flow path, the number of balls obtained by subtracting 5 from the stored number remains in the storage flow path.

Here, since the progress of the fifth round game R changes depending on the number of balls stored in the storage flow path 1231 in the fourth round game R, the cases will be described separately below.

First, in the fourth round round game R, when 10 balls are stored in the storage flow path 1231, the fifth round round game R starts with five balls stored in the storage flow path 1231. Will be done.

Here, as described above, in the present control example, among the balls stored in the storage flow path 1231 at the start of the fifth round game R, the fourth ball counted from the downstream side is the specific area. The distribution operation member 4851 is controlled to be in the open position at the timing of passing through 4830 (the timing at which the third sphere does not pass through the specific region 4830).

Therefore, when the fifth round round game R is started with five balls stored in the storage flow path 1231, the balls pass through the specific area 4830 immediately after the balls can pass through the specific area 4830. Therefore, a privilege advantageous to the player (in this control example, continuation of the high probability state of the special symbol) can be given at an early stage.

On the other hand, since the upper limit of the number of balls discharged from the storage channel 1231 immediately after the start of the fifth round game R is 4 (0.2 seconds x 4 = 0.8 seconds), the storage channel is discharged even after the discharge. One sphere remains in 1231. Therefore, in the fifth round game R, the number of balls that can be additionally entered into the storage flow path 1231 is 9 (the number is less than the specified number (10 in this control example)), so that the number of balls is 5 rounds. The round game R of the eyes does not end until 30.0 seconds, which is the maximum length of the first operating time T1, elapses, and the time efficiency with respect to the number of payout prize balls in the jackpot game decreases.

Note that FIG. 96 (b) shows, as a typical example, the timekeeping change when 10 balls are stored in the storage flow path 1231 in the round game R of the fourth round.

Second, in the fourth round round game R, when nine balls are stored in the storage flow path 1231, the fifth round round game R starts with four balls stored in the storage flow path 1231. Will be done.

Here, as described above, in the present control example, among the balls stored in the storage flow path 1231 at the start of the fifth round game R, the fourth ball counted from the downstream side is the specific area. The distribution operation member 4851 is controlled to be in the open position at the timing of passing through 4830 (the timing at which the third sphere does not pass through the specific region 4830).

Therefore, when the fifth round round game R is started with four balls stored in the storage flow path 1231, the balls pass through the specific area 4830 immediately after the balls can pass through the specific area 4830. Therefore, a privilege advantageous to the player (in this control example, continuation of the high probability state of the special symbol) can be given at an early stage.

On the other hand, since the upper limit of the balls discharged from the storage flow path 1231 immediately after the start of the fifth round game R is 4 (0.2 seconds x 4 = 0.8 seconds), the balls remain in the storage flow path 1231. All the balls that were there are discharged. Therefore, in the fifth round round game R, the number of balls that can be additionally entered into the storage flow path 1231 is 10 (the same number as the specified number), so that the fifth round round game R is the specified number. It can be ended by letting the ball enter the first specific winning opening 1000a. Therefore, it is possible to improve the time efficiency with respect to the number of payout prize balls in the jackpot game.

Third, in the fourth round round game R, when the number of balls stored in the storage flow path 1231 is 0 to 8, 5 is added from the number of balls stored in the storage flow path 1231. The fifth round game R is started with the number of drawn balls (0 to 3 balls) stored.

Here, as described above, in the present control example, among the balls stored in the storage flow path 1231 at the start of the fifth round game R, the fourth ball counted from the downstream side is the specific area. The distribution operation member 4851 is controlled to be in the open position at the timing of passing through 4830 (the timing at which the third sphere does not pass through the specific region 4830).

Further, since it takes at least 2.0 seconds for the ball newly entered into the storage flow path 1231 to reach the lower end of the storage flow path 1231, it takes at least 2.0 seconds within 1 second after the start of the fifth round game R. Balls are not discharged from the downstream side of the storage channel 1231.

Therefore, immediately after the start of the fifth round game R, while the balls discharged from the storage flow path 1231 pass through the whole ball (0 to 3), the distribution operation is performed in a state where the balls cannot pass through the specific area 4830. Since the member 4851 is maintained, the event that the ball passes through the specific area 4830 immediately after the start of the fifth round game R does not occur.

On the other hand, since the upper limit of the balls discharged from the storage flow path 1231 immediately after the start of the fifth round game R is 4 (0.2 seconds x 4 = 0.8 seconds), the balls remain in the storage flow path 1231. All the balls that were there are discharged. Therefore, in the fifth round round game R, the number of balls that can be additionally entered into the storage flow path 1231 is 10 (the same number as the specified number), so that the fifth round round game R is the specified number. It can be ended by letting the ball enter the first specific winning opening 1000a.

Therefore, it is possible to improve the time efficiency with respect to the number of payout prize balls in the jackpot game. In addition, if the ball is maintained in a state where the ball can pass through the specific area 4830 for 1 second or more after the end of the 5th round round game R (19 seconds have passed from the start of the 5th round round game R). If a specified number of balls (10 in this control example) are previously inserted into the first specific winning opening 1000a), an event occurs in which the balls discharged from the storage flow path 1231 pass through the specific area 4830. As the ball passes through the specific area 4830, a privilege advantageous to the player (in this control example, continuation of the high-probability state of the special symbol) is given to the player. be able to.

Summarizing the first to third cases described above, when there are 10 balls stored in the storage flow path 1231 in the round game R of the fourth round, the event that the balls pass through the specific area 4830 is early. While it can be generated, the time efficiency with respect to the number of payout prize balls in the fifth round game is reduced (in the first case), and nine balls stored in the storage flow path 1231 in the fourth round game R are reduced. In the case of the number of balls, the event that the ball passes through the specific area 4830 can be caused at an early stage, and the time efficiency with respect to the number of payout prize balls in the fifth round game is improved (in the second case), the fourth round When the number of balls stored in the storage flow path 1231 is 0 to 8 in the round game R of the above, the event that the balls pass through the specific area 4830 is after the end of the fifth round game R, while the fifth round. Increases time efficiency for the number of payout prize balls in the round game (in the third case).

Therefore, when controlling with the same operation pattern, the timing at which the player can obtain a profit and the magnitude of the profit obtained can be changed for each game mode of the jackpot game.

In this control example, as described above, in the round game R of the fourth round, the profit obtained by the player can be maximized by setting the number of balls stored in the storage flow path 1231 to nine. .. Therefore, at least when the jackpot type is jackpot L, information on a guideline for the number of pieces stored in the storage channel 1231 is displayed (see FIG. 88 (b)). As a result, it is possible to improve the attention to the number of balls stored in the storage flow path 1231, and it is possible to guide the line of sight of the player.

FIG. 97A is a diagram showing the time-dependent changes of the first specific winning opening 1000a, the interference member 6930, and the specific region 4830 in the 17th operation pattern. In this control example, the timekeeping change shown in FIG. 97A is executed in the jackpot game when the jackpot type is jackpot M (see FIG. 94B).

As shown in FIG. 97 (a), in the 17th operation pattern, after the end of the 4th round game R, the 5th round has a 4th interval time Int4 (1.8 seconds) between the rounds. The game R is started, and the fifth round game R is executed in the above-described operation scenario 4 (see FIG. 95B).

First, according to this operation pattern, the balls stored in the storage flow path 1231 are discharged at the upper limit of 9 balls at the interval between rounds immediately before the fifth round game R (0.2 seconds). × 9 = 1.8 seconds) In the 4th round round game R, the balls stored in the storage flow path 1231 can remain in the storage flow path 1231 with an upper limit of 1 until after the start of the 5th round round game. There is sex. Further, since it takes at least 2.0 seconds for the ball newly entered into the storage flow path 1231 to reach the lower end of the storage flow path 1231, the storage flow path 1231 is newly added in the fifth round game R. The ball that has entered is not discharged from the downstream side of the storage flow path 1231 within 1 second after the start of the fifth round game R.

Therefore, during the period (0.8 seconds) when the opening / closing plate 1300 is closed (the regulating member 1600 is discharged) immediately after the start of the fifth round game R, the balls discharged from the storage flow path 1231 are released. , The distribution operation member 4851 is displaced to the open position, and the event of passing through the specific area 4830 immediately after the ball is opened so as to be able to pass through the specific area 4830 does not occur.

In addition, the interfering member 6930 is in an overhanging state from 1.0 second after the start of the fifth round game R to 25.0 seconds, and the flow of the ball is restricted (FIG. 86). (See (a)), the storage channel 1231 is in a state where the regulated number of balls (10 in this control example) cannot be stored (a state in which a maximum of 9 balls can be stored, substantially downstream of the interference member 6930). Since the spheres are not stored, a maximum of 7 balls can be stored). Therefore, the fifth round game cannot be completed until 25.0 seconds have elapsed after the start of the fifth round game R, and then 10 balls are inserted into the first specific winning opening 1000a. Alternatively, the fifth round of the round game R ends when a predetermined time (30.0 seconds in this control example) elapses.

Therefore, while the ball can pass through the specific area 4830 (until 20.0 seconds have elapsed from the start of the fifth round game R), the ball is stored in the storage flow path 1231 in the fifth round game R. The ball cannot be ejected. Therefore, even if the ball is continuously fired toward the first specific winning opening 1000a, the event that the ball passes through the specific area 4830 does not occur after the end of the fifth round game R.

That is, in this operation pattern, since the ball is configured so as not to pass through the specific area 4830, it is possible to give the player an advantageous privilege (in this control example, the continuation of the high probability state of the special symbol). In addition to being unable to do so, the round game R in the fifth round becomes longer, so that the time efficiency with respect to the number of payout prize balls in the jackpot game cannot be increased (can be decreased).

FIG. 97B is a diagram showing the time-dependent changes of the first specific winning opening 1000a, the interference member 6930, and the specific region 4830 in the 18th operation pattern. In this control example, the timekeeping change shown in FIG. 97 (b) is executed in the jackpot game when the jackpot type is jackpot N (see FIG. 94 (b)).

As shown in FIG. 97 (b), in the 18th operation pattern, after the end of the 4th round game R, the 5th round is sandwiched between the first interval time Int1 (2.0 seconds) between the rounds. The game R is started, and the fifth round game R is executed in the above-described operation scenario 4 (see FIG. 95B).

As shown in FIGS. 97 (a) and 97 (b), the 18th operation pattern is the 17th operation except that the length of the interval between rounds immediately before the fifth round game R is different. Since it is the same as the pattern, the description of the parts common to the above description will be omitted.

The difference between the 18th operation pattern and the 17th operation pattern is whether or not there is a remaining ball that remains undischarged from the storage flow path 1231 in the inter-round interval immediately before the fifth round game R.

That is, in the 17th operation pattern, as described above, since the inter-round interval is set to the inter-round fourth interval time Int4 (1.8 seconds), the maximum number of discharges is 9, and the number of stored balls is 1231. If 10 are stored, one remaining ball is generated.

On the other hand, in the 18th operation pattern, since the interval between rounds is set to the first interval time Int1 (2.0 seconds) between rounds, the maximum number of discharged balls is 10, and the maximum number of stored 1231 balls is 10 (maximum). Even if it is stored, it can be discharged globally and no residual balls are generated.

In this case, in the 17th operation pattern, since there is a ball (remaining ball) discharged from the storage flow path 1231 immediately after the start of the fifth round game R, it is specified immediately after the start of the fifth round game R. On the other hand, in the 18th operation pattern, from the storage flow path 1231 immediately after the start of the fifth round game R, it is possible to make the player think that the ball may pass through the area 4830 (expected normal jackpot). Since there is no ball (remaining ball) to be discharged, the player can grasp that there is no possibility that the ball will pass through the specific area 4830 immediately after the start of the fifth round game R (expected normal jackpot).

Therefore, the player's expectation can be changed depending on the presence or absence of the ball remaining in the storage flow path 1231, while the benefits obtained by the player are substantially the same.

Further, as described above, the profit obtained by the player is larger than that of the jackpot of the jackpot type of jackpot M, and the 16th operation pattern in which the remaining balls are generated at the inter-round interval immediately before the round game R of the fifth round (FIG. Since the difference from 96 (b)) can be grasped by the number of remaining balls in the storage flow path 1231, the player's attention to the number of remaining balls in the storage flow path 1231 can be improved.

FIG. 98 is a diagram showing the time-dependent changes of the first specific winning opening 1000a, the interference member 6930, and the specific region 4830 in the 19th operation pattern. In this control example, the timekeeping change shown in FIG. 98 is executed in the jackpot game when the jackpot type is jackpot k (see FIG. 94 (b)).

As shown in FIG. 98, in the 19th operation pattern, after the end of the 4th round round game R, the 5th round round game R is performed with the first interval time Int1 (2.0 seconds) between the rounds in between. The fifth round of the round game R, which is started, is executed in the above-described operation scenario 4 (see FIG. 95 (b)).

First, according to this operation pattern, how many balls stored in the storage flow path 1231 are discharged at the interval between rounds immediately before the fifth round game R is changed by the operation of the player.

That is, immediately after it is determined that the player has operated the operation button 300 (see FIG. 1) according to the above-mentioned timing effect (operation effect, see FIGS. 90 and 91), the interference member 6930 changes to the overhanging state. Since the subsequent discharge of spheres is restricted, the spheres arranged on the upstream side of the interference member 6930 will remain in the storage flow path 1231. It should be noted that the operation of the operation button 300 is controlled so that only the timing of the first pressing in the inter-round interval is valid and the operation to the subsequent pressing is invalid, but the details will be described later.

Here, since the progress of the round game R in the fifth round changes depending on the number of balls remaining in the storage flow path 1231, it is possible to improve the attention to the timing effect (operation effect) and the operation of the operation button 300. Hereinafter, the cases will be described separately.

First, a case where there are many spheres remaining in the storage flow path 1231 (when there are five or more spheres) will be described. That is, it is a case where the fifth round round game R is started with five or more balls stored in the storage flow path 1231. This corresponds to the case where the operation timing of the operation button 300 is early (see FIG. 91 (a)).

Here, as described above, in the present control example, among the balls stored in the storage flow path 1231 at the start of the fifth round game R, the fourth ball counted from the downstream side is the specific area. The distribution operation member 4851 is controlled to be in the open position at the timing of passing through 4830 (the timing at which the third sphere does not pass through the specific region 4830).

Therefore, when the fifth round round game R is started with five or more balls stored in the storage flow path 1231, the balls pass through the specific area 4830 immediately after the balls can pass through the specific area 4830. Since it passes through, a privilege advantageous to the player (in this control example, continuation of the high probability state of the special symbol) can be given at an early stage.

On the other hand, since the upper limit of the number of balls discharged from the storage channel 1231 immediately after the start of the fifth round game R is 4 (0.2 seconds x 4 = 0.8 seconds), the storage channel is discharged even after the discharge. One or more spheres remain in 1231. Therefore, in the fifth round game R, the number of balls that can be additionally entered into the storage flow path 1231 is 9 or less (the number is less than the specified number (10 in this control example)). The round game R of the first round does not end until the lapse of 30.0 seconds, which is the maximum length of the first operating time T1, and the time efficiency with respect to the number of payout prize balls in the jackpot game decreases.

That is, in the first case, an advantageous event occurs in which the privilege of shifting to the high probability state of the special symbol can be obtained after the end of the jackpot game, while the payout of the prize ball in the fifth round game R is slightly smaller. Nari (the number of prize balls is reduced because the specified number of balls (10 in this control example) cannot be entered), which is a disadvantage that the duration of the fifth round game R is the maximum time (30 seconds). Event occurs.

Second, a case where the number of spheres remaining in the storage flow path 1231 is four will be described. That is, it is a case where the fifth round round game R is started with four balls stored in the storage flow path 1231. This corresponds to the case where the operation timing of the operation button 300 is good (see FIG. 90B).

Here, as described above, in the present control example, among the balls stored in the storage flow path 1231 at the start of the fifth round game R, the fourth ball counted from the downstream side is the specific area. The distribution operation member 4851 is controlled to be in the open position at the timing of passing through 4830 (the timing at which the third sphere does not pass through the specific region 4830).

Therefore, when the fifth round round game R is started with four balls stored in the storage flow path 1231, the balls pass through the specific area 4830 immediately after the balls can pass through the specific area 4830. Therefore, a privilege advantageous to the player (in this control example, continuation of the high probability state of the special symbol) can be given at an early stage.

On the other hand, since the upper limit of the balls discharged from the storage flow path 1231 immediately after the start of the fifth round game R is 4 (0.2 seconds x 4 = 0.8 seconds), the balls remain in the storage flow path 1231. All the balls that were there are discharged. Therefore, in the fifth round round game R, the number of balls that can be additionally entered into the storage flow path 1231 is 10 (the same number as the specified number), so that the fifth round round game R is the specified number. It can be ended by letting the ball enter the first specific winning opening 1000a.

Therefore, it is possible to improve the time efficiency with respect to the number of payout prize balls in the jackpot game. It should be noted that the specified number of balls will enter the first specific winning opening 1000a only after 25.0 seconds have elapsed from the start of the fifth round game R due to the control mode of the interference member 6930. ..

That is, in the second case, an advantageous event occurs in which the privilege of shifting to the high probability state of the special symbol can be obtained after the end of the jackpot game, and the specified number (10 pieces) is obtained in the fifth round game R. While there is an advantageous event that the ball can be entered into the first specific winning opening 1000a and the duration of the fifth round game R can be made shorter than the maximum time (30 seconds), the disadvantageous event is Does not occur.

Thirdly, a case where the number of spheres remaining in the storage flow path 1231 is small (when the number is 3 or less) will be described. That is, it is a case where the fifth round round game R is started with three or less balls stored in the storage flow path 1231. This corresponds to the case where the operation timing of the operation button 300 is late (see FIG. 91B).

Here, as described above, in the present control example, among the balls stored in the storage flow path 1231 at the start of the fifth round game R, the fourth ball counted from the downstream side is the specific area. The distribution operation member 4851 is controlled to be in the open position at the timing of passing through 4830 (the timing at which the third sphere does not pass through the specific region 4830).

Further, since it takes at least 2.0 seconds for the ball newly entered into the storage flow path 1231 to reach the lower end of the storage flow path 1231, it takes at least 2.0 seconds within 1 second after the start of the fifth round game R. Balls are not discharged from the downstream side of the storage channel 1231.

Therefore, immediately after the start of the fifth round game R, while the balls discharged from the storage flow path 1231 pass through the whole ball (0 to 3), the distribution operation is performed in a state where the balls cannot pass through the specific area 4830. Since the member 4851 is maintained, the event that the ball passes through the specific area 4830 immediately after the start of the fifth round game R does not occur.

On the other hand, since the upper limit of the balls discharged from the storage flow path 1231 immediately after the start of the fifth round game R is 4 (0.2 seconds x 4 = 0.8 seconds), the balls remain in the storage flow path 1231. Although all the balls that were in the game are discharged, the interfering member 6930 maintains the overhanging state from 1.0 second after the start of the fifth round game R to 25.0 seconds, so that it is specified during that time. The number of balls (10 in this control example) cannot be entered into the first specific winning opening 1000a. In addition, 20.0 seconds after the start of the fifth round game R, the distribution operation member 4851 (see FIG. 51) is driven so that the ball cannot pass through the specific area 4830.

Therefore, the event that the ball discharged from the storage flow path 1231 passes through the specific region 4830 after the end of the fifth round game R is configured so as not to occur.

On the other hand, since the upper limit of the balls discharged from the storage flow path 1231 immediately after the start of the fifth round game R is 4 (0.2 seconds x 4 = 0.8 seconds), the balls remain in the storage flow path 1231. All the balls that were there are discharged. Therefore, in the fifth round round game R, the number of balls that can be additionally entered into the storage flow path 1231 is 10 (the same number as the specified number), so that the fifth round round game R is the specified number. It can be terminated by inserting the ball into the first specific winning opening 1000a (it can be terminated without waiting for the lapse of 30.0 seconds, which is the maximum length of the first operating time T1).

Therefore, it is possible to improve the time efficiency with respect to the number of payout prize balls in the jackpot game. It should be noted that the specified number of balls will enter the first specific winning opening 1000a only after 25.0 seconds have elapsed from the start of the fifth round game R due to the control mode of the interference member 6930. ..

That is, in the third case, a disadvantageous event occurs in which the privilege of shifting to the high probability state of the special symbol cannot be obtained after the jackpot game ends, while the specified number (10) in the fifth round game R occurs. An advantageous event occurs in which the ball can be entered into the first specific winning opening 1000a and the duration of the fifth round game R can be made shorter than the maximum time (30 seconds).

Summarizing the first to third cases described above, when there are five or more spheres remaining in the storage flow path 1231, an event in which the spheres pass through the specific region 4830 can occur at an early stage, while 5 When the time efficiency with respect to the number of payout prize balls in the round game of the round is reduced (in the first case) and there are four balls remaining in the storage flow path 1231, an event in which the balls pass through the specific area 4830 occurs at an early stage. If the number of prize balls to be paid out in the fifth round game is improved (in the second case) and the number of balls remaining in the storage flow path 1231 is 3 or less, the balls pass through the specific area 4830. While no event occurs, the time efficiency for the number of payout prize balls in the fifth round game is increased (in the third case). Which case is applied depends on the timing at which the player operates the operation button 300.

That is, since the profit obtained by the player can be changed depending on the timing of operating the operation button 300, it is possible to improve the attention to the timing effect (operation effect) and participate in the timing effect (operation effect). You can motivate yourself.

FIG. 99A is a diagram showing the time-dependent changes of the first specific winning opening 1000a, the interference member 6930, and the specific area 4830 in the 20th operation pattern. In this control example, the timekeeping change shown in FIG. 99A is executed in the jackpot game when the jackpot type is jackpot K, M or k (see FIG. 94B).

As shown in FIG. 99 (a), in the twentieth operation pattern, the sixth round round game R is executed in the above-mentioned operation scenario 5 (see FIG. 95 (b)).

According to this operation pattern, in the round game R of the sixth round, the upper limit is the number of excess balls (the number of balls exceeding the specified number (10 in this control example)) into the first specific winning opening 1000a. It can be easily generated by one piece. Details will be described below.

The interval between rounds immediately before the round game R of the sixth round is set by the first interval time Int1 (2.0 seconds) between rounds. That is, the sixth round of the round game R is started with no balls stored in the storage flow path 1231.

Immediately after the start of the sixth round game R, the interference member 6930 is put into the overhanging state, but immediately returns to the retracted state (see FIG. 95 (a)). Therefore, the ball that first enters the first specific winning opening 1000a within 1.0 second from the start of the round game R in the sixth round is not restricted by the interfering member 6930 and flows down to 2 It takes 0.0 seconds to reach the lowermost end of the storage flow path 1231 (the front side of the regulation member 1600, the position where it comes into contact with the regulation member 1600).

The first ball entered is ejected when the first specific winning opening 1000a is closed (the outlet 1150 (see FIG. 14) is opened) 3.0 seconds after the start of the sixth round round game R. .. Here, since the period during which the first specific winning opening 1000a is closed is 0.2 seconds, the number of balls discharged from the storage flow path 1231 is limited to one.

3.0 seconds after the start of the sixth round game R, the interference member 6930 changes to the overhanging state at the same time as the discharge port 1150 starts to open. Therefore, thereafter, the ball arranged on the upstream side of the interference member 6930 is restricted from flowing down by the interference member 6930.

The internal shape of the storage flow path 1231 is such that, in the overhanging state of the interference member 6930, a maximum of two balls can be stored on the downstream side of the interference member 6930 and a maximum of seven balls can be stored on the upstream side of the interference member 6930 (FIG. 86 (b)).

After 3.0 seconds have passed from the start of the sixth round game R, the ball entering the storage flow path 1231 is restricted from flowing down by the interference member 6930, so that the ball stays on the upstream side of the interference member 6930. It will be.

On the other hand, as described above, when one sphere arranged at the lowermost end is discharged from the storage flow path 1231, as a result, the sphere arranged downstream of the interference member 6930 inside the storage flow path 1231 It will be one or less. Therefore, the maximum number of spheres that can be stored in the storage flow path 1231 is eight. Since the total number of balls discharged from the storage flow path 1231 is 9, which is less than the specified number (10 in this control example), the specified number of balls is maintained while the interference member 6930 maintains the overhanging state. Cannot be entered into the first specific winning opening 1000a, and the sixth round round game R cannot be completed.

During this period, the opening / closing plate 1300 is maintained in the open state (see FIG. 86 (b)), so that the player can continue to strike right according to the display of the third symbol display device 81 (see FIG. 92 (b)). , A plurality of spheres can be aligned on the upper surface of the opening / closing plate 1300 (so-called "grape" can be generated).

When the interfering member 6930 changes from the overhanging state to the retracted state, it flows down along the inclination of the opening / closing plate 1300 so that the ball whose flow is restricted inside the storage flow path 1231 will follow the flow down later. (It flows down like an avalanche). When a specified number of balls (10 in this control example) enter the first specified winning opening 1000a due to the flow of balls, the opening / closing plate 1300 starts operating toward the closed state, but corresponds to the number of ejected balls. Since a gap corresponding to one sphere is formed in the storage flow path 1231, the momentum of the inflow of the sphere into the storage flow path 1231 is maintained even after the opening / closing plate 1300 starts operation.

Therefore, before the opening / closing plate 1300 closes the first specific winning opening 1000a, there is a possibility that a ball that has gained momentum enters the first specific winning opening 1000a, and in this case, the upper limit of one is exceeded. Winning can be generated.

If the ball is not arranged at the lowermost end of the storage flow path 1231 at the timing when 3.0 seconds have elapsed from the start of the round game R of the sixth round, it is downstream of the interference member 6930 even after 3.0 seconds have elapsed. The number of spheres placed in does not change. Therefore, in this case, the number of spheres remaining on the downstream side of the interference member 6930 is 0 to 2. In addition, since the spheres are not discharged from the storage flow path 1231, the above-mentioned voids are not generated inside the storage flow path 1231, and the effect of causing an excess prize cannot be achieved. To.

FIG. 99B is a diagram showing the time-dependent changes of the first specific winning opening 1000a, the interference member 6930, and the specific region 4830 in the 21st operation pattern. In this control example, the timekeeping change shown in FIG. 99B is executed in the jackpot game when the jackpot type is jackpot L or N (see FIG. 94B).

As shown in FIG. 99 (b), in the 21st operation pattern, the sixth round round game R is executed in the above-mentioned operation scenario 6 (see FIG. 95 (b)).

According to this operation pattern, in the round game R of the sixth round, an excess number of balls (the number of balls exceeding the specified number (10 in this control example)) is generated in the first specific winning opening 1000a. It can be difficult. Details will be described below.

The interval between rounds immediately before the round game R of the sixth round is set by the first interval time Int1 (2.0 seconds) between rounds. That is, the sixth round of the round game R is started with no balls stored in the storage flow path 1231.

Immediately after the start of the sixth round game R, the interfering member 6930 is maintained in an overhanging state for 2.6 seconds (see FIG. 95 (a)). Therefore, the ball that first enters the first specific winning opening 1000a within 1.0 second from the start of the sixth round game R is restricted from flowing down by the interference member 6930.

When the interfering member 6930 changes to the retracted state, the ball whose flow is restricted resumes the flow, but 0.2 seconds (2.0 seconds, which is the time required for the flow of the storage flow path 1231/10 pieces that can be stored). ), The ball flows down only the length of one ball. Therefore, the ball that has resumed the flow has the lowermost end of the storage flow path 1231 (the front side of the regulating member 1600) by the time the opening / closing plate 1300 starts operating in the closed state (the discharge port 1150 (see FIG. 14) starts opening). It is not possible to reach the position where it comes into contact with the regulating member 1600). Therefore, in this operation pattern, the ball is not discharged from the storage flow path 1231 at the timing when 3.0 seconds have elapsed from the start of the sixth round round game R.

3.0 seconds after the start of the sixth round game R, at the same time as the discharge port 1150 starts to open, the interference member 6930 changes to the overhanging state again, but immediately returns to the retracted state. Therefore, thereafter, the spheres arranged on the upstream side of the interference member 6930 are not restricted from flowing down by the interference member 6930, and the spheres are sequentially stored in the storage flow path 1231.

As a specified number of balls (10 in this control example) enter the first specific winning opening 1000a (at a timing earlier than the 20th operation pattern), the first specific winning opening 1000a is closed. Changes to. At this time, the number of balls stored in the storage flow path 1231 is 10, and since the storage flow path 1231 is full, the entry of more balls is prevented. Therefore, according to the present operation pattern, the number of balls entering the first specific winning opening 1000a is a specified number (10 in this control example) as in the first operation pattern (see FIG. 23A). It is limited to (pieces) and cannot cause excess prizes.

Therefore, even if a ball is arranged on the upstream side of the opening / closing plate 1300 at the end of the jackpot game R in the sixth round, the ball does not lead to the profit of the player. Therefore, in the sixth round round game R in the jackpot game in which the jackpot type is jackpot L or N, the third symbol display device 81 is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 so as not to strongly urge the continuation of ball firing (see FIG. 92 (a)). Will be executed.

As shown in FIGS. 99 (a) and 99 (b), the timing at which the first specific winning opening 1000a changes from the closed state to the open state with reference to the start of the sixth round game R, and the interference member. It is unlikely that an excess prize will occur in the sixth round of the round game R (see FIG. 99 (a)) while controlling the timing at which the 6930 changes from the retracted state to the overhanged state in common. Cases (see FIG. 99 (b)) can occur.

This makes it difficult for the player to determine whether the round game R of the sixth round in this jackpot game is controlled by the 20th operation pattern or the 21st operation pattern. Therefore, it is possible to configure a game mode in which a ball suitable for the operation pattern is launched while predicting the operation pattern. As a result, it is possible to prevent the player from inadvertently digesting the jackpot game.

As described above, when the first specific winning opening 1000a and the interference member 6930 are driven and controlled in the 20th operation pattern, after the first specific winning opening 1000a is short-opened (opened for 0.2 seconds), No two spheres remain downstream of the interfering member 6930. On the other hand, when the first specific winning opening 1000a and the interference member 6930 are driven and controlled in the 21st pattern, the interference member 6930 is opened after the first specific winning opening 1000a is short-opened (opened for 0.2 seconds). Two spheres may remain downstream of.

Therefore, by checking how many balls remain downstream of the interference member 6930, whether the round game R in the sixth round is controlled by the twentieth operation pattern or is controlled by the twenty-first operation pattern. Since the ease of discriminating between the two is improved, the interference member 6930 is retracted for a predetermined period (for example, 23.0 seconds after the start of the sixth round round game R) on the downstream side of the interference member 6930. It may be configured to be difficult to see (up to 0.0 seconds ago).

Next, the details of the RAM 203 will be described with reference to FIG. 101. FIG. 101 is a block diagram showing the configuration of the RAM 203 of the main control device 110. As shown in FIG. 101, the RAM 203 includes a special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a, a special symbol 2 reserved ball storage area 203b, a normal symbol reserved ball storage area 203c, a special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d, and a special symbol 2 reserved ball. Number counter 203e, normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203f, probability variation counter 203g, time saving medium counter 203h, operation scenario storage area 203i, operation counter 203j, output flag 203k, remaining ball timer flag 203m, remaining ball timer 203n, remaining ball counter 203p , Closing flag 203q, counting start flag 203q, closing counter 203r, V flag 203s, V winning valid counter 203t, notification counter 203u, winning number counter 203w, discharging number counter 203x, and other memory area 203z.

The special symbol 1 hold ball storage area 203a has one execution area and four hold areas (hold 1st area to hold 4th area), and each of these areas has a random number counter per first. Each value of C1, the first hit type counter C2, and the stop type selection counter C3 is stored.

More specifically, at the timing when the ball enters the first entry port 64 (starting winning), each value of each counter C1 to C3 is acquired, and the acquired data is stored in four holding areas (holding). Among the vacant areas (1st area to 4th reserved area), the areas with the smallest area numbers (1st to 4th) are stored in order. That is, the smaller the area number, the data corresponding to the time-old prize is stored, and the data corresponding to the time-oldest prize is stored in the reserved first area. If data is stored in all four holding areas, nothing is newly stored.

After that, when the special symbol lottery is performed in the main control device 110, each value of each counter C1 to C3 stored in the reserved first area of the special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a is transferred to the execution area. A determination such as a special symbol lottery is performed based on the respective values of the counters C1 to C3 that are shifted (moved) and stored in the execution area.

When the data is shifted from the hold 1st area to the execution area, the hold 1st area becomes empty. Therefore, a shift process is performed in which the winning data stored in the other holding areas (holding 2nd area to holding 4th area) is packed into the holding area (holding 1st area to holding 3rd area) having the smaller area number. Will be done. In this control example, in the special symbol 1 hold ball storage area 203a, the data shift is performed only in the hold area (hold second area to hold fourth area) in which the winning data is stored.

The special symbol 2 reserved ball storage area 203b has one execution area and four reserved areas, similarly to the special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a. In the special symbol 2 reserved ball storage area 203b, each counter value acquired based on the start winning prize to the second ball entry port 640 is stored. Since the method of storing the counter value is the same as that of the special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a, a detailed description thereof will be omitted.

Similar to the special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a and the special symbol 2 reserved ball storage area 203b, the normal symbol reserved ball storage area 203c has one execution area and four reserved areas (holding first area to holding fourth area). Area) and. A second random number counter C4 is stored in each of these areas.

More specifically, the value of the counter C4 is acquired at the timing when the sphere passes through the through gate 67 (see FIG. 2), and the acquired data is the four reserved areas (holding first area to holding fourth). Areas) are stored in order from the smallest area number (1st to 4th) in the vacant area. That is, similarly to the special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a and the special symbol 2 reserved ball storage area 203b, the data corresponding to the winning is stored while the winning order is maintained. If data is stored in all four holding areas, nothing is newly stored.

After that, when the lottery for winning the normal symbol is performed in the main control device 110, the value of the counter C4 stored in the hold first area of the normal symbol hold ball storage area 203c is shifted to the execution area ( Based on the value of the counter C4 stored in the execution area (moved), a determination such as a lottery for winning a normal symbol is performed.

When the data is shifted from the hold 1st area to the execution area, the hold 1st area becomes empty. Therefore, as in the case of the special symbol 1 hold ball storage area 203a and the special symbol 2 hold ball storage area 203b, A shift process is performed in which the winning data stored in the other holding area is packed into the holding area one smaller than the area number. Also, the data shift is performed only in the holding area where the winning data is stored.

The special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d is a variable display (third symbol) of the special symbol (first symbol) performed by the first symbol display device 37 based on the entry (starting prize) into the first entry port 64. It is a counter that counts the number of reserved balls (the number of times of waiting) of the display device 81 (variation display) up to a maximum of four times. The initial value of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d is set to zero, and the maximum value is 4 each time a ball enters the first entry port 64 and the number of reserved balls in the variable display increases. They are added one by one (see S404 in FIG. 111). On the other hand, the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d is decremented by 1 each time a new variation display of the special symbol is executed (see S210 in FIG. 108).

The value of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d (holding number N1 of the variation display in the first special symbol) is notified to the voice lamp control device 113 by the reserved ball number command (S211 in FIG. 108, S405 in FIG. 111). reference). The hold ball number command is a command transmitted from the main control device 110 to the voice lamp control device 113 each time the value of the special symbol 1 hold ball number counter 203d is changed.

The voice lamp control device 113 holds the fluctuation display held in the main control device 110 by the hold ball number command transmitted from the main control device 110 each time the value of the special symbol 1 hold ball number counter 203d is changed. The value of the number of balls itself can be obtained. As a result, the number of reserved balls in the variable display managed by the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 223b and the second special symbol reserved ball number counter 223c (see FIG. 102 (b)) of the voice lamp control device 113 becomes noise. Even if the number of reserved balls in the actual fluctuation display held by the main controller 110 deviates due to the influence of the above, the deviation can be corrected by the next received number of reserved balls command. ..

The voice lamp control device 113 manages the number of reserved balls based on the reserved ball number command, and notifies the display control device 114 (see FIG. 93) of the number of reserved balls each time the number of reserved balls changes. Send a hold ball count command for display. The display control device 114 displays the reserved ball number symbol on the third symbol display device 81 based on the reserved ball number notified by the display reserved ball number command.

The special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 203e is a variable display (third symbol) of the special symbol (first symbol) performed by the first symbol display device 37 based on the ball entering the second entry port 640 (starting prize). It is a counter that counts the number of reserved balls (the number of times of waiting) of the display device 81 (variation display) up to a maximum of four times.

The initial value of the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 203e is set to zero, and the maximum value is 4 each time a ball enters the second entry port 640 and the number of reserved balls in the variable display increases. They are added one by one (see S410 in FIG. 111).

On the other hand, the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 203e is decremented by 1 each time a new variation display of the special symbol is executed (see S205 in FIG. 108). The value of the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 203e is also notified to the voice lamp control device 113 by the reserved ball number command, similarly to the value of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d.

The normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203f sets the number of reserved balls (waiting number) of the variable display of the normal symbol (second symbol) performed by the second symbol display device 83 based on the passage of the balls in the through gate 67 up to four times. It is a counter that counts up to.

The initial value of the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203f is set to zero, and each time a ball passes through the through gate 67 and the number of reserved balls in the variable display increases, 1 is added up to a maximum value of 4 ( See S704 in FIG. 114).

On the other hand, the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203f is decremented by 1 each time the variation display of the normal symbol (second symbol) is newly executed (see S605 in FIG. 113).

When the sphere passes through the through gate 67, if the value of the normal symbol hold ball number counter 203f (the number of hold times M of the variation display in the normal symbol) is less than 4, the value of the second random number counter C4 is acquired. , The acquired data is stored in the normal symbol holding ball storage area 203c (S705 in FIG. 114).

On the other hand, when the ball passes through the through gate 67, if the value of the normal symbol holding ball number counter 203f is 4, nothing is newly stored in the normal symbol holding ball storage area 203c (S703: No in FIG. 114). ).

The probability variation counter 203g is a counter for counting the number of fluctuations of the remaining special symbols in the probability variation state of the special symbol. That is, when the value of the probability variation counter 203g is a natural number, the probability variation state of the special symbol is set, and when the value of the probability variation counter 203g is 0, the probability variation state of the special symbol is set. In this control example, the probability variation state of the special symbol is accompanied by the time reduction state of the normal symbol, so the numerical value of the probability variation counter 203g corresponds to the remaining time reduction period (number of fluctuations of the special symbol).

The probability variation counter 203g is set to 80 at the end of the jackpot game when the ball passes through the specific area 4830 (see FIG. 51) in the jackpot game (see S1235 in FIG. 121). That is, in this control example, the number of changes of the special symbol in the probabilistic state after the big hit game is limited to 80 times.

Further, the probability variation counter 203g becomes a big hit by a lottery of a special symbol, and is set to 0 when the start of the big hit is set (see S219 in FIG. 108). In the initialized state (that is, the power is turned on for the pachinko machine 10 while the RAM erase switch 122 is pressed), the probability change counter 203g is reset to 0, and a normal power failure occurs. If this happens, the state immediately before the power cutoff occurs is backed up.

The time saving medium counter 203h is a counter for counting the remaining time saving period (number of fluctuations of the special symbol) in the time saving state (time saving state) of the normal symbol. When the ball does not pass through the specific area 4830 (see FIG. 51) during the jackpot game, the time saving / medium counter 203h is set to 100 at the end of the jackpot game (see S1237 in FIG. 121). That is, in this control example, if the probability change state is not set after the big hit game, the time saving state of 100 times is given.

In this control example, the case where the time saving state is given regardless of the jackpot type has been described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, all or one of the jackpot types (“big hit K”, “big hit L” and “big hit k”) in which the ball can be flown to the specific area 4830 (see FIG. 51) by executing the game in an appropriate game mode. In the unit, when the ball does not pass through the specific area 4830 during the jackpot game, it may be controlled so as not to give the time saving state.

In this case, the game was not executed in an appropriate game mode (for example, the ball firing was not stopped or the operation button 300 (see FIG. 1) was not operated without following the notification of the display device. ) Is excessively large (it does not shift to the probabilistic state of the special symbol that was originally supposed to shift, and the time saving state is not given), so it is possible to improve the motivation to play the game in an appropriate game mode. it can.

The operation scenario storage area 203i is the opening / closing plate and the interference member operation scenario table 202f (FIG. 95 (b)) when the operation control (see S1004 of FIG. 117) of the opening / closing plate 1300 and the interference member 6930 (see FIG. 53) is started. ) Refer to) This is the area to read and store the operation scenario. The operation control of the opening / closing plate 1300 and the interference member 6930 is performed based on the operation scenario stored in the operation scenario storage area 203i.

The operation counter 203j is a counter for determining the timing for movably controlling the interference member 6930 in the storage valve operation process (see S1412 in FIG. 128). Various upper limit values are set in the operation counter 203j in the storage control process (see S1008 in FIG. 125).

The output flag 203k is a flag for determining that the interference member 6930 is in the overhanging state, and when it is on, it indicates that the interfering member 6930 is in the overhanging state (see FIG. 53B). If it is off, it indicates that the interference member 6930 is in the retracted state (see FIG. 53A).

The output flag 203k is determined when it is determined that the operation of the operation button 300 is detected during the valid period (S1403: Yes in FIG. 19) or the operation start timing in the storage control process (see S1008 in FIG. 125). When this is done (S1408: Yes in FIG. 125), it is set to ON, and when it is set to ON, the storage valve operation process (see S1412 in FIG. 128) is executed, and the storage valve operation process (see S1412 in FIG. 128) is executed. ) Is finished, it is set to off (see S1445 in FIG. 128).

The remaining ball timer flag 203m is a flag set to be turned on in the winning process (see S1112 in FIG. 123) (see S1282 in FIG. 123), and is used to start counting the remaining ball timer 203n described later.

The remaining ball timer 203n is a timer that is counted in order to specify a normal range in the jackpot control process (see S1004 in FIG. 118). Even if the count value of the remaining ball timer 203n reaches the upper limit (value corresponding to 1 second), the number of balls detected by the detection sensor 1240 and the number of balls discharged from the discharge port 1150 (specific area detection sensor). If the number of spheres detected by the 4860 (see FIG. 51) and the number of spheres detected by the non-specific area detection sensor 4870 (see FIG. 51) do not match, the difference between the numbers is different. It is added to the remaining ball counter 203p.

The remaining ball counter 203p is a counter for detecting the difference between the number of incoming balls detected by the detection sensor 1240 and the number of discharged balls discharged from the discharge port 1150 across each round. When the notification of the remaining ball counter 203p is determined not to be 0 in the ending process (S1110 in FIG. 121) (S1231: No in FIG. 121), an error command is set.

The closing flag 203q is a flag for determining the timing at which the first specific winning opening 1000a is closed, and is a flag set to be turned on in the winning process (see S1112 in FIG. 123) (FIG. 123). (See S1278), which is used to start counting the closure counter 203r, which will be described later. Then, the closing flag 203q is set to off based on the fact that the closing counter 203r becomes a predetermined value or more in the V winning process (see S1009 in FIG. 129).

The count start flag 203qa is set to on based on the closing flag 203q being set to ON in the fifth round game R, and is used to start counting of the closing counter 203r. Then, the count start flag 203qa is based on the fact that the closing counter 203r has reached the upper limit value (value corresponding to 4.0 seconds in this control example) in the V winning process (see S1009 in FIG. 129). It is set to off (see S1510 in FIG. 129).

The closing counter 203r starts counting when the closing flag 203q is turned on, and mainly determines that the ball has passed the specific region 4830 at a normal timing in the V winning process (see S1009 in FIG. 129). It is a counter to do. The closing counter 203r is incremented by 1 each time the V winning process is executed.

In this control example, the predetermined value of the closing counter 203r is set as the interval period after the round game R according to various timings. The closing counter 203r is used for determining an abnormality in the timing of V winning in the V winning process (see S1009 in FIG. 129).

In the V flag 203s, the ball is set in the specific area 4830 (FIG. 51) at a predetermined timing (within the set value, a predetermined period after the first specific winning opening 1000a (see FIG. 7) is closed in this control example). This is a flag that is set to on when it is detected that it has passed (see). The V flag 203s is set to off after the value of the probability variation counter is set to 80 in the ending process (see S1110 in FIG. 121) (see S1236 in FIG. 121).

The V-winning valid counter 203t is a counter that is subtracted by the same number as the closing counter 203r in the V-winning process (see S1009 in FIG. 129). The V winning valid counter 203t is for determining that the sphere stored in the storage flow path 1231 has normally passed through the specific area 4830 in a state where the distribution operation member 4851 is arranged in the open position. Therefore, in the winning process (S1112 in FIG. 123), a numerical value (a numerical value corresponding to 4.0 seconds in this control example) is set when the closing flag 203q is turned on.

The notification counter 203u is a counter that counts the time until a notification command (see S1257 in FIG. 122) is set with reference to a predetermined timing (see S1253 in FIG. 122) in the notification process (see S1111 in FIG. 122). ..

The winning number counter 203w is a counter that counts the number of balls that have won the first specific winning opening 1000a (see FIG. 7) in the winning process (see S1112 in FIG. 123).

The discharge number counter 203x is a counter that counts the number of balls discharged from the discharge port 1150. The relationship between the numerical values of the winning number counter 203w and the discharging number counter 203x is determined each time the remaining ball timer 203n reaches the upper limit value in the abnormality processing (see S1113 in FIG. 124).

The other memory area 203z is an area for temporarily storing other counter values and the like used by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110.

Returning to FIG. 93, the description will be continued. An input / output port 205 is connected to the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 via a bus line 204 composed of an address bus and a data bus. The input / output port 205 has a large opening solenoid (a large opening solenoid) for closing or opening the payout control device 111, the voice lamp control device 113, the first symbol display device 37, the second symbol display device 83, and the first specific winning opening 1000a. A solenoid 209 composed of a solenoid 1510), a solenoid for driving an electric accessory, and a solenoid 6910 for driving an interference member 6930 are connected, and the MPU 201 issues various commands to these via the input / output port 205. Send a control signal.

Further, the input / output port 205 includes various switches 208 including a switch group and a sensor group (not shown), a RAM erasing switch (FIGS. 3, 122) circuit 253 provided in the power supply device 115, and a game during operation production. An operation button 300 operated by a person is connected, and the MPU 201 is based on various switches 208, signals output from the operation button 300, and a RAM erase signal SG2 output from the RAM erase switch (FIGS. 3, 122) circuit 253. To execute various processes.

The payout control device 111 drives the payout motor 216 to control the payout of prize balls and rented balls. The MPU 211, which is an arithmetic unit, has a ROM 212 that stores a control program and fixed value data executed by the MPU 211, and a RAM 213 that is used as a work memory or the like.

Like the RAM 203 of the main control device 110, the RAM 213 of the payout control device 111 has a stack area in which the contents of the internal registers of the MPU 211 and the return address of the control program executed by the MPU 211 are stored, and various flags and counters. It has a work area (work area) in which values such as I / O are stored. The RAM 213 has a configuration in which a backup voltage is supplied from the power supply device 115 to hold (back up) data even after the power supply of the pachinko machine 10 is cut off, and all the data stored in the RAM 213 is backed up. Similar to the MPU 201 of the main control device 110, the NMI terminal of the MPU 211 is also configured so that the power failure signal SG1 is input from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 when the power is cut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like. When input to the MPU 211, the NMI interrupt process (see FIG. 115) as the power failure process is immediately executed.

An input / output port 225 is connected to the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 via a bus line 224 composed of an address bus and a data bus. A main control device 110, a display control device 114, an audio output device 226, a lamp display device 227, a frame button 22, and the like are connected to the input / output port 225, respectively.

The voice lamp control device 113 determines an error according to a command from the main control device 110 and the status of various devices connected to the voice lamp control device 113, and displays and controls an error command including the type of the error. It transmits to the device 114. The display control device 114 controls the third symbol display device 81 to display an error message image according to the error type (for example, vibration error) indicated by the received error command without delay.

Next, the details of the electrical configuration of the voice lamp control device 113 will be described with reference to FIG. 102. FIG. 102A is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of ROM 222 of the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113. As shown in FIG. 102A, the ROM 222 has at least a variation pattern selection table 222a.

The variation pattern selection table 222a is based on the variation pattern command output from the main control device 110 to the voice lamp control device 113, and the rough variation content (variation time, variation type (reach, deviation, etc.)) indicated by the variation pattern command. ) Is used to determine more detailed fluctuations. Thereby, a wider variety of variation modes can be determined. Here, one of a plurality of types of variation mode is determined by lottery with respect to the rough variation content instructed by the main control device 110.

The opening / closing plate and the interference member operation scenario 222b is provided so that the operation status of the opening / closing plate 1300 and the interference member 6930 whose operation is controlled by the main control device 110 can be grasped on the voice lamp control device 113 side as well. This is an area in which information stored in the opening / closing plate / interference member operation scenario storage area 202e and the opening / closing plate / interference member operation scenario table 202f stored in the ROM 202 of the control device 110 is stored.

Next, the RAM 223 in the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 will be described with reference to FIG. 102 (b). FIG. 102 (b) is a block diagram showing the contents of the RAM 223. The RAM 223 includes a command storage area 223a, a first special symbol holding ball number counter 223b, a second special symbol holding ball number counter 223c, a normal symbol holding ball number counter 223d, a fluctuation start flag 223e, and a stop type selection. Flag 223f, effect counter 223g, round number cumulative counter 223h, probability variation state flag 223i, time saving state counter 223j, storage state flag 223k, storage upper limit flag 223m, storage counter 223n, operation flag 223p, The effect temporary storage area 223r, the first operation effect flag 223wa, the second operation effect flag 223wb, the first input flag 223wc, the second input flag 223wd, the effect execution flag 223x, and the pressing period information storage area 223y. And other memory areas 223z are provided at least.

The command storage area 223a is an area in which various commands output from the main control device 110 to the voice lamp control device 113 are temporarily stored until processing for the commands is executed. More specifically, it is composed of a ring buffer, and data is read and written by a FIFO (First In First Out) method. When the command determination process (see FIG. 132) of the voice lamp control device 113 is executed, the command stored first among the unprocessed commands stored in the command storage area 223a is read out, and the command determination process performs the command determination process. , The command is parsed and processing is performed according to the command.

The first special symbol reserved ball number counter 223b and the second special symbol reserved ball number counter 223c are fluctuation effects (variation display) performed by the first symbol display device 37 (and the third symbol display device 81). It is a counter that counts the number of reserved balls (number of standbys) of the fluctuation effect held in the main control device 110 up to 4 times for each type of special symbol. The first special symbol reserved ball counter 223b corresponds to the number of reserved balls of the variable effect based on the lottery of the first special symbol (special symbol 1), and the second special symbol reserved ball counter 223c corresponds to the second special symbol (special symbol 1). Corresponds to the number of reserved balls of the variable effect based on the lottery of the special symbol 2).

As described above, the voice lamp control device 113 directly accesses the main control device 110, and the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d and the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 203e stored in the RAM 203 of the main control device 110. Cannot get the value of. Therefore, the voice lamp control device 113 counts the number of reserved balls based on the reserved ball number command transmitted from the main control device 110, and the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 223b and the second special symbol reserved ball number counter 223c. In, the number of reserved balls is managed for each type of special symbol.

Specifically, in the main control device 110, when the number of reserved balls in the variable display is added by entering the first ball entrance 64 and the second entry port 640, or in the main control device 110, a special symbol is used. When the fluctuation display in is executed and the number of reserved balls is subtracted, the number of reserved balls indicating the value of the special symbol 1 reserved ball counter 203d after addition or subtraction, or the value of the special symbol 2 reserved ball counter 203e. The command is transmitted to the voice lamp control device 113.

When the voice lamp control device 113 receives the hold ball number command transmitted from the main control device 110, the special symbol 1 hold ball number counter 203d of the main control device 110 or the special symbol 2 hold ball number counter 203d is used from the hold ball number command. The value of the number counter 203e is acquired and stored in the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 223b and the second special symbol reserved ball number counter 223c (see S2210 in FIG. 132). In this way, the voice lamp control device 113 updates the values of the first special symbol hold ball number counter 223b and the second special symbol hold ball number counter 223c according to the hold ball number command transmitted from the main control device 110. , The value can be updated while synchronizing with the values of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d and the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 203e of the main control device 110.

The values of the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 223b and the second special symbol reserved ball number counter 223c are used for displaying the reserved ball number symbol in the third symbol display device 81. That is, the voice lamp control device 113 stores the number of reserved balls indicated by the command in the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 223b and the second special symbol reserved ball number counter 223c in response to the reception of the reserved ball number command. At the same time, in order to notify the display control device 114 of the values of the first special symbol hold ball number counter 223b and the second special symbol hold ball number counter 223c after storage, a display hold ball number command is sent to the display control device 114. Send.

When the display control device 114 receives this display hold ball number command, the value of the hold ball number indicated by the command, that is, the first special symbol hold ball number counter 223b and the second special symbol of the voice lamp control device 113. The drawing of the image is controlled so that the reserved ball number symbol corresponding to the value of the reserved ball number counter 223c is displayed in the small area Ds1 of the third symbol display device 81. As described above, the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 223b and the second special symbol reserved ball number counter 223c are synchronized with the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d and the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 203e of the main controller 110. However, the value is changed. Therefore, the number of reserved sphere symbols displayed in the small area Ds1 of the third symbol display device 81 is also synchronized with the values of the special symbol 1 reserved sphere counter 203d and the special symbol 2 reserved sphere counter 203e of the main control device 110. It can be changed while making it. Therefore, the third symbol display device 81 can accurately display the number of reserved balls for which the variable display is reserved.

When the value of the normal symbol reserved ball counter 203f of the main control device 110 is increased or decreased, the value of the ordinary symbol reserved ball counter 223d is increased or decreased according to the content of the received command. It is a counter to be used to synchronize the number of reserved balls of the normal symbol managed by the main control device 110 side with the number of reserved balls of the normal symbol managed by the voice lamp control device 113 side. is there. The value of the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203f is used, for example, when the third symbol display device 81 displays the number of reserved balls of the normal symbol. Regarding the detailed contents when the value of the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203f is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, the case where the number of reserved balls of the special symbol described above is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is used. Since the same is true, the description thereof will be omitted.

The variation start flag 223e is turned on when a variation pattern command transmitted from the main control unit 110 is received (see S2202 in FIG. 132), and is turned off when the variation display is set in the third symbol display device 81. (See S2702 in FIG. 136). When the variation start flag 223e is turned on, the display variation pattern command is set based on the variation pattern extracted from the received variation pattern command.

The display variation pattern command set here is stored in the command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 223, and is included in the command output process (S2102) of the main process (see FIG. 131) executed by the MPU 221. It is transmitted to the display control device 114. By receiving this display variation pattern command, the display control device 114 so that the third symbol display device 81 performs the variation display of the third symbol with the variation pattern indicated by the display variation pattern command. The display control of the fluctuation effect is started.

The stop type selection flag 223f is turned on when a stop type command transmitted from the main control unit 110 is received (see S2205 in FIG. 132), and is turned off when the stop type is set in the third symbol display device 81. (S2707 in FIG. 136). When the stop type selection flag 223f is turned on, the stop type is set as it is based on the stop type extracted from the received stop type command (in the case of a big hit, the big hit type).

The effect counter 223 g is a counter used for selecting a variation pattern, selecting various effects, and the like. The effect counter 223g is composed of a 1-byte loop counter that is updated in the range of 0 to 198, and the value is added and updated by 1 each time the main process (see FIG. 131) is executed. .. The effect counter 223g has a plurality of counters (not shown), and when the effect pattern is determined by referring to the plurality of counter values in one loop processing, different counter values are used. Used. As a result, when setting one effect pattern, the same counter value is not used at a plurality of places, so that the bias of the set effect pattern can be suppressed. It should be noted that the effect pattern may be set using each value calculated after performing different processing on the value acquired from the same counter. Specifically, among the effect patterns, one selection refers to the ones digit of the acquired value, the other selection refers to the tens digit of the acquired value, and the other selection refers to one of the acquired values. The ones digit of the obtained value may be referred to by multiplying the value obtained by multiplying the digit of the digit by three and the value obtained by multiplying the tens digit by five. With this configuration, it is possible to suppress the bias of the set effect pattern while reducing the number of counters used when setting the effect pattern.

The round number cumulative counter 223h is a counter for counting the number of rounds during the jackpot game, and is updated to a value corresponding to the round number command transmitted from the main controller 110 (when the round number command is received. S2504 in FIG. 133), the value of the counter is reset to 0 by receiving the jackpot ending command (S2510 in FIG. 133). In the voice lamp control device 113, a display command regarding the display during the jackpot game is set based on the round number accumulation counter 223h (see S2537, S2546, and S2547 in FIG. 134).

The probability change state flag 223i is a flag indicating whether or not the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 is the probability change state of the special symbol. When the probability change state flag 223i is on, it indicates that the pachinko machine 10 is in the probability change state of the special symbol, and when it is off, it indicates that the special symbol is in the low probability state. The probability change state flag 223i is updated according to the notification content of the state command output from the main control device 110.

In this control example, the state command is an embodiment in which if the value of the probability variation counter 203g is 1 or more, it indicates that the probability variation counter is in the game, the value of the probability variation counter 203g is 0, and the value of the time saving / medium counter 203h is If it is 1 or more, it is considered to indicate that the time saving game is in progress, and when the value of the probability variation counter 203g is 0 and the value of the time saving medium counter 203h is 0 (see S234 or S238 in FIG. 109). Is an aspect indicating that the game is normally in progress.

Depending on the state of the probability change state flag 223i, it is determined whether or not the present is the probability change state of the special symbol, and the corresponding effect is set. More specifically, whether or not to display the right-handed navigation image displayed in the probabilistic state of the special symbol, and whether or not to display the right-handed warning image when the right-handed game is executed in the normal state. To determine if.

The time saving state counter 223j is a flag indicating whether or not the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 is the time saving state of the normal symbol. When the time saving state counter 223j is on, it indicates that the pachinko machine 10 is in the time saving state of the normal symbol, and when it is off, it indicates that it is in the normal state (low probability state) of the normal symbol. The time saving state counter 223j is updated according to the notification content of the state command output from the main control device 110. Depending on the state of the time saving state counter 223j, it is determined whether or not the current time saving state is the normal symbol, and the corresponding effect is set. More specifically, it is determined whether or not to display the right-handed navigation image displayed in the time-saving state of the normal symbol, and whether or not to display the right-handed warning image in the normal state.

The storage state flag 223k is a flag for determining the number of spheres stored in the storage flow path 1231 (see FIG. 86 (a)), and is a flag for determining the number of spheres stored in the storage flow path 1231 (see FIG. Settings are made based on the detection result of. When this storage state flag 223k is on, it indicates that a predetermined number or more of spheres are stored in the storage flow path 1231, and when it is off, the storage flow path 1231 stores less than the number of stored spheres. Show that.

This storage state flag 223k is turned on when it is determined in the storage state monitoring process (see S2113 in FIG. 137) that the number of spheres stored in the storage flow path 1231 is a predetermined number (4 in this control example) or more. Is set to (see S2807 in FIG. 137), and is set to off when it is determined that the number of spheres stored in the storage flow path 1231 is less than a predetermined number (S2810 in FIG. 137). Here, when the storage state flag 223k is set to on, the median number display is executed in the display during the round game, and when the storage state flag 223k is set to off, the display is insufficient (FIG. 88). (See)) is executed.

The storage upper limit flag 223m is a flag for determining that the number of spheres stored in the storage flow path 1231 has reached the upper limit number (10 in this control example), and is the detection result of the detection sensor 1240. , The setting is made based on the detection result of the ball discharged from the discharge port 1150. When this storage upper limit flag 223m is on, it indicates that the upper limit number of spheres is stored in the storage flow path 1231, and when it is off, it indicates that the upper limit number of spheres is not stored in the storage flow path 1231. Shown.

This storage upper limit flag 223m is set to on when it is determined in the storage state monitoring process (see S2113 in FIG. 137) that the number of spheres stored in the storage flow path 1231 is the upper limit (see S2814 in FIG. 137). , It is set to off when it is determined that the number of spheres stored in the storage flow path 1231 is less than the upper limit (S2817 in FIG. 137). Here, when the storage upper limit flag 223m is set to on, the full tank display (see FIG. 92 (b)) is executed, and when the storage upper limit flag 223m is set to off, a dissatisfaction display (FIG. 92 (a)) is executed.

The storage counter 223n is a counter for counting the number of spheres stored in the storage flow path 1231. That is, when the passage of the sphere is detected by the detection sensor 1240, the value of the storage counter 223n is incremented by 1, and the discharge of the sphere from the discharge port 1150 is the specific area detection sensor 4860 or the non-specific area detection sensor 4870 (or dedicated). The value of the storage counter 223n is subtracted by 1 when it is detected by the ball discharge sensor).

The operation flag 223p is a flag for determining whether or not the operation button 300 has been operated. When the operation flag 223p is on, it indicates that the operation button 300 has been operated, and when it is off, it indicates that the operation button 300 has not been operated. This operation flag 223p is set to on when an operation command is received in the command determination process (S2218: Yes in FIG. 132), and is set to off in the button input monitoring / effect processing (see S3007 in FIG. 139). ..

The effect temporary storage area 223r is an area for temporarily storing the set effect contents until the effect is executed. For example, the effect mode of the timing effect (operation effect) executed during the jackpot is described. The content of the timing effect (operation effect) is temporarily stored during the period from the set timing (third round) to the timing (fourth round) when the timing effect (operation effect) is executed during the jackpot. This effect temporary storage area 223r stores the set effect mode, and when the round (4 rounds) in which the timing effect (operation effect) is executed is executed in the jackpot medium effect process (see S2505 in FIG. 134). Is read out (S2537 in FIG. 134).

The first operation effect flag 223wa and the second operation effect flag 223wb are flags for determining whether to execute the timing effect (operation effect) for executing the effect of causing the player to operate the operation means (operation button 300). If it is on, it indicates that the condition for executing the timing effect (operation effect) is satisfied, and if it is off, it indicates that the condition for executing the timing effect (operation effect) is not satisfied.

In this control example, as a condition for executing the timing effect (operation effect), the start of the fourth round game R with respect to the first operation effect flag 223wa is set to the second operation effect flag 223wb. On the other hand, it is set that the round game R of the four rounds of the jackpot game of the jackpot type k has been started. Then, the effect information read from the effect temporary storage area changes depending on the setting status of the first operation effect flag 223wa and the second operation effect flag 223wb.

Further, the first operation effect flag 223wa and the second operation effect flag 223wb are set to off after the effect execution flag 223x is set to on (see S2539 in FIG. 134).

The first input flag 223wc and the second input flag 223wd are flags for limiting the number of operations of the operation button 300 during the corresponding production (in this control example, the number of operations is limited to one), and the respective operations are performed. The first operation is executed during the period, or it is set to be turned on when the operation period is exceeded, and the input of the operation button 300 after that is invalidated. Further, the first input flag 223wc and the second input flag 223wd are set to off after the fifth round round game R is started and the effect executing flag 223x is set to off (see S2543 in FIG. 134). ).

The effect executing flag 223x is a flag for determining whether or not the timing effect (operation effect) is being executed. If it is on, it indicates that the timing effect (operation effect) is being executed, and if it is off, it indicates that the timing effect (operation effect) is being executed. For example, it indicates that the timing effect (operation effect) is not executed. The effect execution flag 223x is referred to when determining whether the operation for the operation means (operation button 300) is an operation based on the timing effect (operation effect).

The effect execution flag 223x starts a round in which the timing effect (operation effect) is executed in the jackpot medium effect process (see S2505 in FIG. 134) (S2532: Yes in FIG. 134), and issues a display effect round command. After setting, it is set to on (S2538 in FIG. 134). Then, when the set timing effect (operation effect) is completed, it is set to off (S2542 in FIG. 134).

The pressing period information storage area 223y is an area for storing the operation timing of the operation means (operation button 300) set so as to correspond to the display timing of the pointer (effect pointer) displayed in the timing effect (operation effect). ..

The successful pressing period is set in the pressing period information storage area 223y corresponding to the set display pointer (effect pointer). The successful pressing period set here is referred to in the button input monitoring / effect processing (see S2107 in FIG. 139) in order to determine whether the timing at which the operation button 300 is pressed is the successful pressing period.

The other memory area 223z is provided as an area for storing data other than the above-mentioned data, and is an area for temporarily storing other counter values and the like used by the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113.

Next, the electrical configuration of the display control device 114 will be described with reference to FIG. 103. FIG. 103 is a block diagram showing an electrical configuration of the display control device 114. The display control device 114 includes the MPU 231, the work RAM 233, the character ROM 234, the resident video RAM 235, the normal video RAM 236, the image controller 237, the input port 238, the output port 239, and the bus lines 240 and 241. have.

The output side of the voice lamp control device 113 is connected to the input side of the input port 238, and the MPU 231, the work RAM 233, the character ROM 234, and the image controller 237 are connected to the output side of the input port 238 via the bus line 240. .. A resident video RAM 235 and a normal video RAM 236 are connected to the image controller 237, and an output port 239 is connected via the bus line 241. Further, a third symbol display device 81 is connected to the output side of the output port 239.

Even if the pachinko machine 10 is a different model in which the lottery probability of winning a special symbol and the number of prize balls paid out for one special symbol jackpot are different, the symbol displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Since there are models with exactly the same configuration, the display control device 114 is made into a common component to reduce costs.

In the following, the MPU 231, the character ROM 234, the image controller 237, the resident video RAM 235, and the normal video RAM 236 will be described first, and then the work RAM 233 will be described.

First, the MPU 231 controls the display content of the third symbol display device 81 based on the display variation pattern command output from the voice lamp control device 113 based on the variation pattern command of the main control device 110. The MPU 231 has a built-in instruction pointer 231a, reads and fetches an instruction code stored at the address indicated by the instruction pointer 231a, and executes various processes according to the instruction code. Immediately after the MPU 231 is turned on (including recovery from a power failure; the same applies hereinafter), a system reset can be applied from the power supply device 115. Is automatically set to "0000H" by the hardware of MPU231. Then, each time the instruction code is fetched, the value of the instruction pointer 231a is added by one. When the MPU 231 executes an instruction pointer setting instruction, the pointer value instructed by the setting instruction is set in the instruction pointer 231a.

Although the details will be described later, in this control example, the control program executed by the MPU 231 and various fixed value data used in the control program are provided with a dedicated program ROM like a conventional game machine. It is stored in the character ROM 234 provided for storing the image data to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81, instead of storing the data.

Although the details will be described later, the character ROM 234 is composed of a NAND flash memory 234a capable of increasing the capacity in a small area. As a result, not only the image data but also the control program and the like can be sufficiently stored. If the control program or the like is stored in the character ROM 234, it is not necessary to provide a dedicated program ROM for storing the control program or the like. Therefore, the number of parts in the display control device 114 can be reduced, the manufacturing cost can be reduced, and the increase in the failure occurrence rate due to the increase in the number of parts can be suppressed.

On the other hand, the NAND flash memory has a problem that the read speed becomes slow, especially when random access is performed. For example, when reading data arranged continuously on a plurality of pages, the data on the second and subsequent pages can be read at high speed, but an address is specified for reading the data on the first page. It takes a long time to output the data. Further, when reading non-continuous data, it takes a long time to read the data. As described above, since the speed of reading the NAND flash memory is slow, if the MPU 231 is configured to directly read the control program from the character ROM 234 and execute various processes, it takes time to read the instructions constituting the control program. Even if a high-performance processor is used as the MPU 231, the processing performance of the display control device 114 may be deteriorated.

Therefore, in this control example, when the system reset of the MPU 231 is released, first, the control program stored in the NAND flash memory 234a of the character ROM 234 is transferred to the work RAM 233 provided for temporary storage of various data. And store. Then, the MPU 231 executes various processes according to the control program stored in the work RAM 233. Since the work RAM 233 is configured by a DRAM (Dynamic RAM) as described later and data is read / written at high speed, the MPU 231 can read out the instructions constituting the control program without delay. Therefore, high processing performance can be maintained in the display control device 114, and diversified and complicated effects can be easily executed by using the third symbol display device 81.

The character ROM 234 is a memory that stores the control program executed in the MPU 231 and the image data displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and is connected to the MPU 231 via the bus line 240. The MPU 231 directly accesses the character ROM 234 after the system reset is released via the bus line 240, and transfers the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 of the character ROM 234 to the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233. An image controller 237 is also connected to the bus line 240, and the image controller 237 transfers the image data stored in the character storage area 234a2 described later of the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 connected to the image controller 237. Transfer to the normal video RAM 236.

The character ROM 234 is configured by modularizing a NAND flash memory 234a, a ROM controller 234b, a buffer RAM 234c, and a NOR flash memory 234d.

The NAND flash memory 234a is a non-volatile memory provided as a main storage unit in the character ROM 234, and stores most of the control programs executed by the MPU 231 and fixed value data for driving the third symbol display device 81. It has at least a second program storage area 234a1 to be stored and a character storage area 234a2 to store data of an image (character or the like) to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

Here, the NAND flash memory has a feature that a large storage capacity can be obtained in a small area, and the character ROM 234 can be easily increased in capacity. As a result, in this pachinko machine, for example, by using a NAND flash memory 234a having a capacity of 2 gigabytes, many images can be stored in the character storage area 234a2 as images to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. it can. Therefore, the image displayed on the third symbol display device 81 can be diversified and complicated in order to further enhance the interest of the player.

Further, the NAND flash memory 234a can store a large amount of image data in the character storage area 234a2, and further store the control program and fixed value data in the second program storage area 234a1. In this way, it is provided to store the image data to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 without storing the control program and the fixed value data by providing a dedicated program ROM as in the conventional game machine. Since it can be stored in the character ROM 234, the number of parts in the display control device 114 can be reduced, the manufacturing cost can be reduced, and the increase in the failure occurrence rate due to the increase in the number of parts can be suppressed.

The ROM controller 234b is a controller for controlling the operation of the character ROM 234. For example, the corresponding data from the NAND flash memory 234a or the like is based on the address transmitted from the MPU 231 or the image controller 237 via the bus line 240. Is read out and output to the MPU 231 or the image controller 237 via the bus line 240.

Here, due to the nature of the NAND flash memory 234a, a relatively large number of error bits (bits in which incorrect data are written) occur when writing data, or a defective data block in which data cannot be written occurs. Or something. Therefore, the ROM controller 234b is known to perform known error correction on the data read from the NAND flash memory 234a, and to avoid reading and writing data to the NAND flash memory 234a while avoiding defective data blocks. Performs data address translation for.

Since the ROM controller 234b performs error correction on the data read from the NAND flash memory 234a including the error bit, even if the NAND flash memory 234a is used as the character ROM 234, it is based on the incorrect data. It is possible to prevent the MPU 231 from performing processing and the image controller 237 from generating various images.

Further, since the defective data block of the NAND flash memory 234a is analyzed by the ROM controller 234b and access to the defective data block is avoided, the MPU 231 and the image controller 237 have different defective data in each NAND flash memory 234a. Access to the character ROM 234 can be easily performed without considering the address position of the block. Therefore, even if the NAND flash memory 234a is used for the character ROM 234, it is possible to suppress the complicated access control to the character ROM 234.

The buffer RAM 234c is a memory used as a buffer for temporarily storing the data read from the NAND flash memory 234a. When the address assigned to the character ROM 234 from the MPU 231 or the image controller 237 via the bus line 240 is specified, the ROM controller 234b contains one page (for example, 2 kilobytes) including the data corresponding to the specified address. It is determined whether or not the data of is set in the buffer RAM 234c. If it is not set, one page (for example, 2 kilobytes) of data including the data corresponding to the specified address is read from the NAND flash memory 234a (or NOR flash 234d) and temporarily set in the buffer RAM 234c. To do. Then, the ROM controller 234b performs known error correction processing, and then outputs the data corresponding to the designated address to the MPU 231 and the image controller 237 via the bus line 240.

The buffer RAM 234c is composed of two banks, and data for one page of the NAND flash memory 234a can be set per bank. As a result, the ROM controller 234b can output the data of the NAND flash memory 234a to the outside by using the other bank while the data is set in one bank, or can be designated by the MPU 231 or the image controller 237. One page of data including the data corresponding to the assigned address is transferred from the NAND flash memory 234a to one bank and set, and the data corresponding to the address specified by the MPU 231 or the image controller 237 is transferred to the other bank. The process of reading from the bank and outputting to the MPU 231 and the image controller 237 can be processed in parallel. Therefore, it is possible to improve the responsiveness in reading the character ROM 234.

The NOR type ROM 234d is a non-volatile memory provided as a sub storage unit in the character ROM 234, and has an extremely smaller capacity (for example, 2 kilobytes) than the NAND type flash memory 234a for the purpose of complementing the NAND type flash memory 234a. ) Is configured. Among the control programs stored in the character ROM 234, the NOR type ROM 234d is the first program not stored in the second program storage area 234a1 of the NAND flash memory 234a, specifically, the MPU 231 after the system reset is released. At least a first program storage area 234d1 for storing a part of the boot program to be executed is provided.

The boot program is a control program for starting the display control device 114 so that various controls for the third symbol display device 81 can be executed, and the MPU 231 first executes this boot program after the system reset is released. As a result, various controls can be made executable in the display control device 114. The first program storage area 234d1 should be processed first by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released within the capacity range of one bank of the buffer RAM 234c (that is, one page of the NAND flash memory 234a) in this boot program. A predetermined number of instructions (for example, if the capacity of one page is 2 kilobytes, 1024 words (1 word = 2 bytes) worth of instructions) are stored. The number of boot program instructions stored in the first program storage area 234d1 may be less than or equal to the capacity of one bank of the buffer RAM 234c, and is appropriately set according to the specifications of the display control device 114. There may be.

When the system reset is released, the MPU 231 sets the value of the instruction pointer 231a to "0000H" by hardware and specifies the address "0000H" indicated by the instruction pointer 231a to the bus line 240. It is configured. On the other hand, when the ROM controller 234b of the character ROM 234 detects that the address "0000H" is specified for the bus line 240, the ROM controller 234b stores the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 of the NOR type ROM 234d in one bank of the buffer RAM 234c. Is set to, and the corresponding data (instruction code) is output to MPU231.

When the MPU 231 fetches the instruction code received from the character ROM 234, the MPU 231 executes various processes according to the fetched instruction code, adds only one instruction pointer 231a, and sets the address indicated by the instruction pointer 231a to the bus line 240. To specify. Then, the ROM controller 234b of the character ROM 234 is selected from the programs previously set in the buffer RAM 234c from the NOR type ROM 234d while the address specified by the bus line 240 is an address indicating the program stored in the NOR type ROM 234d. , The instruction code of the corresponding address is read from the buffer RAM 234c and output to the MPU 231.

Here, in this control example, instead of storing all the control programs in the NAND flash memory 234a, among the boot programs, a predetermined number of instructions from the instruction to be processed first by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released are NOR type ROM 234d. It is stored in for the following reasons. That is, as described above, the NAND flash memory 234a is peculiar to the NAND flash memory in that it takes a long time from the designation of the address to the output of the data in reading the data on the first page. There's a problem.

When all the control programs are stored in such a NAND flash memory 234a, the address "0000H" is specified from the MPU 231 via the bus line 240 in order to fetch the instruction code to be executed first by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released. If so, the character ROM 234 must read one page of data including the data (instruction code) corresponding to the address "0000H" from the NAND flash memory 234a and set it in the buffer RAM 234c. Due to the nature of the NAND flash memory 234a, it takes a long time to set the buffer RAM 234c from its read. Therefore, the MPU 231 specifies the address "0000H" and then gives an instruction corresponding to the address "0000H". It consumes a lot of waiting time to receive the code. Therefore, it takes a long time to start the MPU 231. As a result, there is a problem that the control of the third symbol display device 81 in the display control device 114 may not be started immediately.

On the other hand, since the NOR type ROM is a memory capable of reading data at high speed, a predetermined number of instructions from the instruction to be processed first by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released are stored in the NOR type ROM 234d among the boot programs. By doing so, when the address "0000H" is specified from the MPU 231 via the bus line 240 after the system reset is released, the character ROM 234 immediately stores the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 of the NOR type ROM 234d in the buffer RAM 234c. The corresponding data (instruction code) can be output to the MPU 231 by setting to. Therefore, the MPU 231 can receive the instruction code corresponding to the address "0000H" in a short time after designating the address "0000H", and the MPU 231 can be started in a short time. Therefore, even if the control program is stored in the character ROM 234 configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow read speed, the control of the third symbol display device 81 in the display control device 114 can be started immediately.

The boot program includes a control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 of the NAND flash memory 234a, that is, a control program excluding the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 of the NOR type ROM 234d. , The fixed value data (for example, display data table, transfer data table, etc. described later) used in the control program is stored in the program storage area of the work RAM 233 by a predetermined amount (for example, the capacity of one page of the NAND flash memory 234a). It is programmed to transfer to 233a or the data table storage area 233b. Then, in the MPU 231, first, the boot program in the first program storage area 234d1 sets the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 according to the boot program read from the first program storage area 234d1 after the system reset is released. While using a bank different from the bank of the buffer RAM 234c, a predetermined amount is transferred to and stored in the program storage area 233a.

Here, since the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 has a capacity corresponding to one bank of the buffer RAM 234c as described above, the address of the internal bus is designated as "0000H". When the boot program in the first program storage area 234d1 is set in the buffer RAM 234c in response to the above, the boot program is set in only one bank of the buffer RAM 234c. Therefore, when transferring the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 to the program storage area 233a according to the boot program in the first program storage area 234d1, the first program set in one bank of the buffer RAM 234c The transfer process can be executed using the other bank while leaving the boot program in the storage area 234d1. Therefore, since it is not necessary to reset the boot program in the first program storage area 234d1 to the buffer RAM 234c after the transfer process, the time required for the boot process can be shortened.

When the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 transfers the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 to the program storage area 233a by a predetermined amount, the instruction pointer 231a is transferred to the program storage area 233a. It is programmed to set to the first predetermined address. As a result, when the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 is transferred to the program storage area 233a by a predetermined amount after the system reset is released, the instruction pointer 231a is set to the first predetermined program storage area 233a. Set to the address.

Therefore, when a predetermined amount of the control programs stored in the second program storage area 234a1 are stored in the program storage area 233a, the MPU 231 reads the control program stored in the program storage area 233a and reads the control program. Various processes can be executed. That is, the MPU 231 does not read the control program from the NAND flash memory 234a having the second program storage area 234a1 and fetch the instruction, but reads the control program transferred to the work RAM 233 having the program storage area 233a and fetches the instruction. Then, various processes will be executed. As will be described later, since the work RAM 233 is composed of the DRAM, the read operation is performed at high speed. Therefore, even when most of the control programs are stored in the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow read speed, the MPU 231 can fetch the instructions at high speed and execute the processing for the instructions.

Here, the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 includes the remaining boot programs that are not stored in the first program storage area 234d1. On the other hand, the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 has the remaining boot programs in the control program transferred from the second program storage area 234a1 by a predetermined amount to the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233. It is programmed to be included, and the instruction pointer 231a is set with the start address of the remaining boot program stored in the program storage area 233a as the first predetermined address.

As a result, the MPU 231 transfers the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 to the program storage area 233a by a predetermined amount by the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1, and then transfers the control program. Run the remaining boot programs included in the control program.

In this remaining boot program, the remaining control program that has not been transferred to the program storage area 233a and the fixed value data (for example, the display data table and the transfer data table described later) used in the control program are all stored in the second program. A process of transferring a predetermined amount from the area 234a1 to the program storage area 233a or the data table storage area 233b is executed. Further, at the end of the boot program, the instruction pointer 231a is set to the second predetermined address in the program storage area 233a. Specifically, as this second predetermined address, the start address of the program stored in the program storage area 233a and corresponding to the initial setting process executed after the boot process by the boot program is completed is set.

By executing the remaining boot program, the MPU 231 transfers all the control programs and fixed value data stored in the second program storage area 234a1 to the program storage area 233a or the data table storage area 233b. Then, when the boot program is executed to the end by the MPU 231, the instruction pointer 231a is set to the second predetermined address, and thereafter, the MPU 231 is transferred to the program storage area 233a without referring to the NAND flash memory 234a. Various processes are executed using the control program.

Therefore, even when most of the control programs are stored in the character ROM 234 configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow read speed, the control programs are transferred to the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233 after the system reset is released. As a result, the MPU 231 can read a control program from a work RAM composed of a DRAM having a high read speed and perform various controls. Therefore, high processing performance can be maintained in the display control device 114, and diversified and complicated effects can be easily executed by using the third symbol display device 81.

Further, as described above, instead of storing all the boot programs in the NOR type ROM 234d, a predetermined number of instructions are stored from the instruction to be processed first by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released, and the remaining boot programs are stored. Even if the program is stored in the second program storage area 234a1 of the NAND flash memory 234a, the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 can be reliably transferred to the program storage area 233a. Therefore, the character ROM 234 can start the MPU 231 in a short time only by adding an extremely small capacity NOR type ROM 234d, so that the cost increase of the character ROM 234 due to the shortening of the time can be suppressed. Can be done.

The image controller 237 is a digital signal processor (DSP) that draws an image and displays the drawn image on the third symbol display device 81 at a predetermined timing. The image controller 237 draws an image for one frame based on the drawing list (see FIG. 106) described later transmitted from the MPU 231, and draws one frame of the first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c described later. The image drawn in the buffer is expanded, and the image information for one frame previously expanded in the other frame buffer is output to the third symbol display device 81 to display the image on the third symbol display device 81. .. The image controller 237 performs the image drawing process for one frame and the image display process for one frame in the image display time for one frame in the third symbol display device 81 (20 milliseconds in this control example). Process in parallel in.

The image controller 237 transmits a vertical synchronization interrupt signal (hereinafter, referred to as “V interrupt signal”) to the MPU 231 every 20 milliseconds when the drawing process of an image for one frame is completed. Each time the MPU 231 detects this V interrupt signal, it executes a V interrupt process and instructs the image controller 237 to draw an image for the next frame. In response to this instruction, the image controller 237 executes the drawing process of the image for the next one frame, and also executes the process of displaying the image developed by the drawing on the third symbol display device 81.

In this way, the MPU 231 executes the V interrupt process in response to the V interrupt signal from the image controller 237, and gives a drawing instruction to the image controller 237. Therefore, the image controller 237 performs the image drawing process and display. An image drawing instruction can be received from the MPU 231 at each processing interval (20 milliseconds). Therefore, the image controller 237 does not receive a drawing instruction for the next image before the image drawing processing and display processing are completed. Therefore, the image controller 237 may start drawing a new image in the middle of drawing the image. It is possible to prevent the image from being expanded in accordance with a new drawing instruction in the frame buffer in which the image information being displayed is stored.

The image controller 237 also executes a process of transferring image data from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 based on the transfer instruction from the MPU 231 and the transfer data information included in the drawing list.

The drawing of the image is performed using the image data stored in the resident video RAM 235 and the normal video RAM 236. That is, the image data required for drawing is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 based on the instruction from the MPU 231 before the drawing is performed.

Here, the NAND flash memory makes it easy to increase the capacity of the ROM, but the read speed is slower than that of other ROMs (mask ROM, EEPROM, etc.). On the other hand, in the display control device 114, the MPU 231 instructs the image controller 237 to transfer a part of the image data stored in the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 after the power is turned on. It is configured to do. Then, as will be described later, the image data stored in the resident video RAM 235 is controlled so as to be resident without being overwritten.

As a result, after the transfer of the image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 is completed after the power is turned on, the image controller 237 draws the image while using the image data resident in the resident video RAM 235. Processing can be performed. Therefore, if the image data used for the drawing process is resident in the resident video RAM 235, it is not necessary to read the corresponding image data from the character ROM 234 configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow read speed at the time of image drawing. The time required for reading the data can be omitted, and the image can be drawn immediately and the drawn image can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

In particular, since the resident video RAM 235 is resident with image data of images that are frequently displayed and image data of images that should be displayed immediately after the display is determined by the main control device 110 or the display control device 114. Even if the character ROM 234 is composed of the NAND flash memory 234a, the responsiveness until some image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 can be maintained high.

Further, when drawing an image using non-resident image data in the resident video RAM 235, the display control device 114 is required for drawing from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 before the drawing is performed. The MPU 231 is configured to instruct the image controller 237 to transfer the image data. As will be described later, the image data transferred to the normal video RAM 236 may be deleted by overwriting after being used for drawing the image, but at the time of drawing the image, the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow read speed Since it is not necessary to read the corresponding image data from the character ROM 234 configured by, and the time required for reading the data can be omitted, the image can be drawn immediately and the drawn image can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. it can.

Further, since it is not necessary to make all the image data resident in the resident video RAM 235 by storing the image data in the normal video RAM 236, it is not necessary to prepare a large-capacity resident video RAM 235. Therefore, it is possible to suppress an increase in cost due to the provision of the resident video RAM 235.

The image controller 237 has a buffer RAM 237a composed of 132 kilobytes of SRAM, which is the capacity of one block of the NAND flash memory 234a.

The image data transfer instruction given by the MPU 231 to the image controller 237 based on the transfer instruction or the transfer data information of the drawing list includes the start address (storage source start address) of the character ROM 234 in which the image data to be transferred is stored. The end address (final address of the storage source), transfer destination information (information indicating whether to transfer to the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236), and the beginning of the transfer destination (resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236). Contains the address. The data size of the image data to be transferred may be included instead of the final address of the storage source.

The image controller 237 reads data for one block from a predetermined address of the character ROM 234 and temporarily stores the data in the buffer RAM 237a according to various information of the transfer instruction, and when the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 is not used, the buffer RAM 237a The image data stored in the resident RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 is transferred. Then, the process is repeatedly executed until all the image data stored in the storage source final address is transferred from the storage source start address indicated by the transfer instruction.

As a result, the image data read from the character ROM 234 over time is temporarily stored in the buffer RAM 237a, and then the image data is transferred from the buffer RAM 237a to the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 in a short time. Can be done. Therefore, while the image data is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236, the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 is prevented from being occupied for a long time by the transfer of the image data. be able to. Therefore, since the resident video RAM 235 and the normal video RAM 236 are occupied by the transfer of the image data, those video RAMs 235 and 236 cannot be used for the image drawing process, and as a result, the image can be drawn by the required time. , It is possible to prevent the display on the third symbol display device 81 from being missed.

Further, since the transfer of the image data from the buffer RAM 234c to the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 is performed by the image controller 237, the resident video RAM 235 and the normal video RAM 236 perform image drawing processing and display the third symbol. The period during which the display process on the device 81 is unused can be easily determined, and the process can be simplified.

The resident video RAM 235 is used so that the image data transferred from the character ROM 234 is retained without being overwritten during the power-on, and when the power is turned on, the main image area 235a, the rear image area 235c, and the character design area are used. In addition to the 235e and the error message image area 235f, at least the variable image area 235b and the third symbol area 235d when the power is turned on are provided.

The main image area 235a at power-on is used as the main image at power-on to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 between the time the power is turned on and the time when all the image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 is stored. This is the area that stores the corresponding data. Further, in the fluctuating image area 235b when the power is turned on, the game is started by the player while the main image when the power is turned on is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and the first ball entry port 64 and the second ball entry are entered. This is an area for storing image data corresponding to a fluctuating image at power-on, which displays the result of a lottery performed by the main control device 110 by a fluctuating effect when a ball entering the mouth 640 is detected.

When the power supply is started from the power supply unit 251 of the MPU 231, the image data corresponding to the power-on main image and the power-on fluctuation image is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the power-on main image area 235a. A transfer instruction is transmitted to the controller 237.

Here, the fluctuation image when the power is turned on will be described. Immediately after the power is turned on, the display control device 114 transfers the image data corresponding to the power-on main image and the power-on variable image from the character ROM 234 to the power-on main image area 235a and the power-on variable image area 235b. Subsequently, the remaining image data to be stored in the resident video RAM 235 is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235. While the remaining image data is being transferred, the display control device 114 uses the image data previously stored in the power-on main image area 235a to display the power-on main image as the third symbol display device. Display on 81.

At this time, when the display fluctuation pattern command transmitted from the voice lamp control device 113 is received based on the fluctuation pattern command from the main control device 110 which is the instruction command for starting the fluctuation, the display control device 114 displays the main image when the power is turned on. On the display screen of, the fluctuation image of the "○" symbol at the lower right position when facing the screen and the fluctuation image of the "×" symbol at the same position as the "○" symbol are displayed during the fluctuation period. Medium, alternate and repeat display. Then, from the display variation pattern command and the display stop type command transmitted from the voice lamp control device 113 based on the variation pattern command from the main control device 110 and the stop type command, the lottery performed by the main control device 110 is performed. Judging the result, if it is a "big hit of a special symbol", the "○" symbol is displayed for a certain period of time after the variable effect is stopped, and if it is "out of the special symbol", the "x" symbol is displayed after the variable effect is stopped. Display for a certain period of time.

The MPU 231 uses the image data stored in the main image area 235a at power-on to the image controller 237 until all the image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 is transferred to the resident video RAM 235. Instructs to draw the main image when the power is turned on. As a result, while the remaining image data to be resident is transferred to the resident video RAM 235, the player or the person concerned with the hall can confirm the main image at power-on displayed on the third symbol display device 81. it can. Therefore, the display control device 114 transfers the remaining resident image data from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 over time while displaying the main image at power-on on the third symbol display device 81. be able to. Further, since the player or the like can recognize that some processing is being performed while the main image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 when the power is turned on, the image to be resident in the remaining resident video RAM 235. Until the data is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235, wait until the transfer of the image data to the resident video RAM 235 is completed without worrying that the operation has stopped. Can be done.

Further, even in the operation check in a factory or the like at the time of manufacturing, the main image at the time of turning on the power is immediately displayed on the third symbol display device 81, so that the operation of the third symbol display device 81 is started without any problem by turning on the power. Further, by using the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow read speed for the character ROM 234, it is possible to suppress the deterioration of the operation check efficiency.

Further, when the power is turned on, the player starts the game while the main image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and the entry into the first entry port 64 or the second entry port 640 is detected. In this case, the power-on fluctuation image is drawn using the image data corresponding to the power-on fluctuation image resident in the power-on fluctuation image area 235b, and the power-on fluctuation image is alternately displayed on the third symbol display device. The MPU 231 instructs the image controller 237 to be displayed on the 81. As a result, it is possible to perform a simple fluctuation effect using the fluctuation image when the power is turned on. Therefore, the player can confirm that the lottery has been surely performed by the simple variation effect even while the main image at the time of turning on the power is displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

Further, since the image data corresponding to the power-on fluctuation effect image is already resident in the power-on fluctuation image area 235b at the stage when the power-on main image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, the power is turned on. If a ball is detected in the first ball entry port 64 while the time main image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, the corresponding variation effect is immediately displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Can be done.

Returning to FIG. 103, the description will be continued. The rear image area 235c is an area for storing image data corresponding to the rear image displayed on the third symbol display device 81. The back image is an image displayed on the back side of the main symbol (third symbol), and for example, a city, the sea, the sky, or the like is displayed. A right-handed navigation image (see FIG. 88A) and the like are also stored in the rear image area 235c as a rear image.

The third symbol area 235d is an area for resident the third symbol used in the variation effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81. That is, in the third symbol area 235d, image data corresponding to the above-mentioned 10 types of main symbols with numbers "0" to "9", which are the third symbols, is resident. As a result, when the variation effect is performed by the third symbol display device 81, it is not necessary to read the image data from the character ROM 234 one by one. Therefore, even if the NAND flash memory 234a is used for the character ROM 234, the third symbol display device 81 You can start the variable effect quickly. Therefore, after the ball enters the first ball entry port 64, the variation effect is immediately started in the third symbol display device 81 even though the variation effect is started in the first symbol display device 37. It is possible to suppress the occurrence of a state in which the display is not performed.

Further, in the third symbol area 235d, as the main symbols without the numbers "0" to "9", the main symbol consisting of the rear symbol such as a wooden box, the rear symbol and the character such as the furoshiki, the helmet, etc. Image data corresponding to the main symbol consisting of the attached symbol imitating the above is also resident. These image data are used for the demonstration effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81 when the next variation effect accompanying the start winning is not started even after a predetermined time has elapsed after one variation effect is stopped. Be done. As a result, when the demo effect is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, the main symbol without a number is displayed as the third symbol in the demo effect. Therefore, the player can easily recognize that the pachinko machine 10 is in the demo state by visually recognizing the main symbol without a number from the display image of the third symbol display device 81.

The character symbol area 235e is an area for storing image data corresponding to the character symbols used in various effects displayed on the third symbol display device 81. In this pachinko machine 10, various characters such as "boy" are displayed according to various effects, and the data corresponding to these is resident in the character symbol area 235e to control the display. When the device 114 changes the character symbol based on the content of the command received from the voice lamp control device 113, the device 114 does not newly read the corresponding image data from the character ROM 234, but instead enters the character symbol area 235e of the resident video RAM 235. By reading out the image data resident in advance, a predetermined image can be drawn by the image controller 237. As a result, it is not necessary to read the corresponding image data from the character ROM 234, so that the character symbol can be changed immediately even if the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow reading speed is used for the character ROM 234.

The error message image area 235f is an area for storing image data corresponding to an error message displayed when an error occurs in the pachinko machine 10. In the pachinko machine 10, for example, when vibration is detected by the voice lamp control device 113 from the output of a vibration sensor (not shown) attached to the back surface of the game board 13, the voice lamp control device 113 causes a vibration error. Notify the display control device 114 by an error command. Further, even when the occurrence of another error is detected by the voice lamp control device 113, the voice lamp control device 113 notifies the display control device 114 of the occurrence of the error together with the error type by an error command. When the display control device 114 receives an error command, the display control device 114 is configured to display an error message corresponding to the received error on the third symbol display device 81.

Here, from the viewpoint of preventing fraud of the player and protecting the player against the error, the error message is required to be displayed almost at the same time as the occurrence of the error. In the pachinko machine 10, image data corresponding to various error messages is resident in advance in the error message image area 235f, so that the display control device 114 determines the error message of the resident video RAM 235 based on the received error command. By reading out the image data resident in the image area 235f in advance, each error message image can be immediately drawn by the image controller 237. As a result, it is not necessary to read the image data corresponding to the sequential error message from the character ROM 234. Therefore, even if the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow read speed is used for the character ROM 234, the corresponding error message is sent after receiving the error command. It can be displayed immediately.

The normal video RAM 236 is used so that data is overwritten and updated at any time, and at least an image storage area 236a, a first frame buffer 236b, and a second frame buffer 236c are provided.

The image storage area 236a is an area for storing image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 among the image data necessary for drawing an image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. The image storage area 236a is divided into a plurality of sub-areas, and the type of image data stored in the sub-area is predetermined for each sub-area.

Of the image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235, the MPU 231 collects the image data required for subsequent image drawing from the character ROM 234 to the sub-area provided in the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236. , Instruct the image controller 237 to transfer the type of the image data to a predetermined sub-area to be stored. As a result, the image controller 237 reads the image data instructed by the MPU 231 from the character ROM 234, and transfers the read image data to a designated predetermined sub-area of the image storage area 236a via the buffer RAM 237a.

The image data transfer instruction is given by including the transfer data information in the drawing list described later in which the MPU 231 instructs the image controller 237 to draw the image. As a result, the MPU 231 can give an image drawing instruction and an image data transfer instruction only by transmitting the drawing list to the image controller 237, so that the processing load can be reduced.

The first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c are buffers for developing an image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. The image controller 237 writes an image for one frame drawn according to the instruction from the MPU 231 to the frame buffer of either the first frame buffer 236b or the second frame buffer 236c, thereby writing one frame in the frame buffer. While the image is expanded and the image is expanded in one frame buffer, the image information for one frame previously expanded is read from the other frame buffer, and the drive signal is transmitted to the third symbol display device 81. By transmitting the image information, the third symbol display device 81 is executed to display the image for one frame.

In this way, by providing two frame buffers, the first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c, the image controller 237 expands the image for one frame drawn in one frame buffer and simultaneously expands the image. The image for one frame previously expanded can be read from the other frame buffer, and the read image for one frame can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

Then, the frame buffer that expands the image for one frame and the frame buffer for reading the image information for one frame in order to display the image on the third symbol display device 81 are used for drawing the image for one frame. Every 20 milliseconds to complete, the MPU 231 alternately specifies one of the first framebuffer 236b and the second framebuffer 236c, respectively.

That is, at a certain timing, the first frame buffer 236b is designated as the frame buffer for expanding the image for one frame, and the second frame buffer 236c is designated as the frame buffer for reading the image information for one frame. When the drawing process and the display process are executed, the second frame buffer 236c is designated as a frame buffer for expanding the image for one frame 20 milliseconds after the drawing process for the image for one frame is completed, and the image for one frame is expanded. The first frame buffer 236b is designated as the frame buffer from which the image information of the above is read. As a result, the image information of the image previously expanded in the first frame buffer 236b can be read out and displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and at the same time, a new image is expanded in the second frame buffer 236c. To.

Then, after the next 20 milliseconds, the first frame buffer 236b is designated as the frame buffer for expanding the image for one frame, and the second frame buffer 236c is designated as the frame buffer for reading the image information for one frame. Will be done. As a result, the image information of the image previously expanded in the second frame buffer 236c can be read out and displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and at the same time, a new image is expanded in the first frame buffer 236b. To. After that, one of the first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c is used every 20 milliseconds for the frame buffer for expanding the image for one frame and the frame buffer for reading the image information for one frame. By alternately alternating and specifying, it is possible to continuously perform the display processing of the image for one frame in units of 20 milliseconds while drawing the image for one frame.

The work RAM 233 is a memory for storing the control program and fixed value data stored in the character ROM 234, and temporarily storing the work data and flags used when executing various control programs by the MPU 231. It is composed of DRAM. The work RAM 233 includes a program storage area 233a, a data table storage area 233b, a simple image display flag 233c, a display data table buffer 233d, a transfer data table buffer 233e, a pointer 233f, a drawing list area 233g, a time counting counter 233h, and a stored image data discrimination. It has at least a flag 233i and a drawing target buffer flag 233j.

The program storage area 233a is an area for storing the control program executed by the MPU 231. When the system reset is released, the MPU 231 reads the control program from the character ROM 234, transfers it to the work RAM 233, and stores it in the program storage area 233a. Then, when all the control programs are stored in the program storage area 233a, the MPU 231 subsequently executes various controls using the control programs stored in the program storage area 233a.

As described above, since the work RAM 233 is composed of the DRAM, the read operation is performed at high speed. Therefore, even when the control program is stored in the character ROM 234 configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow read speed, the display control device 114 can maintain high processing performance, and the third symbol display device 81 can be maintained. Can be used to easily perform diversified and complicated productions.

The data table storage area 233b is a display data table and display data in which display contents to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 with the passage of time are described for one effect to be displayed based on a command from the main control device 110. This is an area for storing transfer data information of image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 and a transfer data table that defines transfer timing among the image data used in one effect displayed by the table.

These data tables are usually stored as a type of fixed value data in the second program storage area 234a1 provided in the NAND flash memory 234a of the character ROM 234, and according to the boot program executed by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released. , These data tables are transferred from the character ROM 234 to the work RAM 233 and stored in the data table storage area 233b. Then, when all the data tables are stored in the data table storage area 233b, the MPU 231 subsequently controls the display of the third symbol display device 81 by using the data table stored in the data table storage area 233b. As described above, since the work RAM 233 is composed of the DRAM, the read operation is performed at high speed. Therefore, even when various data tables are stored in the character ROM 234 configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow read speed, the display control device 114 can maintain high processing performance, and the third symbol display device can be used. By using 81, it is possible to easily execute a diversified and complicated production.

Here, the details of various data tables will be described. First, one display data table is prepared for each effect mode displayed on the third symbol display device 81 based on a command from the main control device 110. For example, a variable effect and an opening effect. , Display data tables corresponding to round production, ending production, and demo production are prepared.

The variation effect is an effect that is started by the third symbol display device 81 when a display variation pattern command is received from the voice lamp control device 113. When the display variation pattern command is received, the display stop type command indicating the stop type of the variation effect is also received. For example, when a variation effect is started, if the stop type of the variation effect is out of order, the stop symbol indicating the deviation is finally displayed as a stop, while the stop type of the variation effect is a big hit (big hit K, etc.). ), The stop symbol indicating each jackpot is finally displayed as a stop. The player can recognize the jackpot type by visually recognizing the stop symbol in this variation effect, and can easily determine the game value given according to the jackpot type.

The opening effect is an effect for notifying the player that the pachinko machine 10 will shift to the special gaming state and the first specific winning opening 1000a, which is normally closed, will be opened. This is an effect for notifying the player of the number of rounds to be started from now on. The ending effect is an effect for notifying the player that the end of the special game state (big hit state) is notified to the player.

As described above, the demo effect is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 when the next variation effect accompanying the start winning is not started even after a predetermined time has passed since one variation effect was stopped. Therefore, the third symbol consisting of the main symbols without the numbers “0” to “9” is stopped and displayed, and only the rear image changes. If the demonstration effect is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, the player or the person involved in the hall can recognize that the pachinko machine 10 is not playing a game.

In the data table storage area 233b, one display data table corresponding to the opening effect, the round effect, the ending effect, and the demo effect is stored. Further, as the variation display data table, which is a display data table for variation effect, if there are 32 patterns of variation effect patterns to be set, one table is prepared for one variation effect pattern, for a total of 32 tables.

Here, the details of the display data table will be described with reference to FIG. 104. FIG. 104 is a schematic diagram schematically showing an example of a variable display data table among the display data tables. The display data table should be displayed at the time corresponding to the address represented by the time (20 milliseconds in this control example) in which the image for one frame is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 as one unit. The content (drawing content) of the image for one frame is defined in detail.

In the drawing content, the type of sprite is specified for each sprite that is a display object that constitutes an image for one frame, and the display position coordinates, enlargement ratio, rotation angle, and translucency are specified according to the type of sprite. Drawing information for causing the third symbol display device 81 to draw a sprite, such as a value, α blending information, color information, and filter designation information, is defined.

The sprite type is information for identifying the sprite to be displayed. The display position coordinates are information for specifying the coordinates on the third symbol display device 81 on which the sprite should be displayed. The enlargement ratio is information for designating the enlargement ratio with respect to a standard display size preset for the sprite, and the size of the sprite displayed according to the enlargement ratio is specified. If the magnification is greater than 100%, the sprite will be displayed enlarged from the standard size, and if the magnification is less than 100%, the sprite will be reduced from the standard size. Is displayed.

The rotation angle is information for specifying the rotation angle when the sprite is rotated and displayed. The translucent value is for specifying the transparency of the entire sprite, and the higher the translucent value, the more the image displayed on the back side of the sprite can be seen through. The α-blending information is information for identifying a known α-blending coefficient used when performing a superposition process with another sprite. The color information is information for designating the color tone of the sprite to be displayed. Then, the filter designation information is information for designating an image filter to be applied to the sprite when drawing the designated sprite.

In the variable display data table, one back image, nine third symbols (design 1, symbol 2, ...) As the drawing contents for one frame defined corresponding to each address, and light in the image. Drawing information for each sprite, such as an effect that expresses the insertion of a boy image and a character used for various effects such as boy images and characters, is defined for each address. In addition, one or a plurality of information about the effect and the character are defined according to the content to be displayed in the frame.

Here, the display position of the rear image is fixed to the entire screen of the third symbol display device 81, and the enlargement ratio, the rotation angle, the translucent value, the α blending information, the color information, and the filter designation information are displayed with respect to the passage of time. Since it is constant, only the back type, which is information for specifying the type of the back image, is specified in the variable display data table. This back type displays one of the backs A to C corresponding to the stage selected by the player (either "city stage", "sky stage", or "island stage"), or backside A to. Information that specifies whether to display a rear image different from C is described. Further, as the back surface type, when specifying to display a back image different from the back images A to C, information for specifying which back image is to be displayed is also described.

When it is specified that any of the back surfaces A to C is to be displayed by the back surface type, the MPU 231 specifies the back image of the back surfaces A to C corresponding to the stage specified by the player as the drawing target. In addition, the range of the rear image to be displayed for the frame is specified according to the passage of time. On the other hand, when it is specified to display a back image different from the back images A to C, the back image to be displayed is specified from the back type.

In this control example, a case where only the back type is specified as the drawing content of the back image in the display data table will be described. Instead, the back type and the range of the back image corresponding to the back type will be described. It may be specified as the position information indicating whether or not to be displayed. This position information may be, for example, information indicating the elapsed time since the back image of the range corresponding to the initial position is displayed. In this case, the MPU 231 specifies the range of the back image to be displayed with respect to the frame based on the elapsed time from the display of the back image in the range corresponding to the initial position indicated by the position information.

Further, the position information may be information indicating the elapsed time from the start of drawing the image (or the display of the third symbol display device 81) based on the display data table. In this case, the MPU 231 displayed the range of the rear image to be displayed for the frame at the stage when the drawing of the image (or the display of the third symbol display device 81) was started based on the display database. It is specified based on the position of the back image and the elapsed time from the start of drawing (or the display of the third symbol display device 81) of the image indicated by the position information.

Further, the position information is information indicating the elapsed time since the back image of the range corresponding to the initial position is displayed and the drawing of the image based on the display data table (or the third symbol display device 81) according to the back type. It may indicate any of the information indicating the elapsed time since the start of the display), and the type information of the position information (for example, the range corresponding to the initial position) together with the back type and the position information. It is information indicating the elapsed time since the back image is displayed, or information indicating the elapsed time since the drawing of the image based on the display database (or the display of the third symbol display device 81) is started. Information indicating the above) may be specified as the drawing content of the back image. In addition, the position information may not be information indicating the elapsed time, but may be information indicating an address in which the range of the rear image to be displayed is stored.

In the third symbol (design 1, symbol 2, ...), The symbol type offset information is described as the symbol type information for specifying the third symbol to be displayed. This offset information is information representing the difference between the numbers attached to each third symbol. The offset information is specified instead of directly specifying the type of the third symbol. The display of the third symbol in the variation effect is the stop symbol of the variation effect that was performed immediately before and the variation effect that is performed this time. This is because it changes according to the stop symbol, and in the symbol offset information from the start of the fluctuation to the elapse of a predetermined time, the offset information from the stop symbol of the fluctuation effect performed immediately before is described. As a result, the variation effect is started from the stop symbol in the previous variation effect.

On the other hand, after a predetermined time has elapsed from the start of the fluctuation, the offset from the stop symbol set according to the stop type command (display stop type command) received from the main control device 110 via the voice lamp control device 113. Describe the information. As a result, the variation effect can be stopped at the stop symbol corresponding to the stop type designated by the main control device 110.

Since each third symbol has a unique number, the fluctuation symbol in the previous variation effect and the stop symbol according to the stop type specified by the main control device 110 can be selected as the third symbol. By managing with the numbers attached to and expressing the offset information by the difference of the numbers attached to each third symbol, the third symbol to be easily displayed can be specified from the offset information.

Further, in the symbol offset information, the third symbol fluctuates at high speed for a predetermined time during which the offset information of the stop symbol of the fluctuation effect performed immediately before is switched to the offset information of the stop symbol of the fluctuation effect performed this time. It is set to be the displayed time. While the third symbol is fluctuating at high speed, the third symbol is invisible to the player. During that time, the stop symbol of the fluctuation effect performed immediately before the symbol offset information is displayed. By switching from the offset information to the offset information of the stop symbol of the fluctuation effect that is being performed this time, even if the continuity of the numbers of the third symbol is interrupted, the player is prevented from recognizing the interruption of the continuity of the numbers. be able to.

The start address "0000H" of the display data table is described with "Start" information indicating the start of the data table, and the final address of the display data table ("02F0H" in the example of FIG. 104) is the data table. "End" information indicating the end of is described. Then, for each address between the address "0000H" in which the "Start" information is described and the address in which the "End" information is described, the drawing content corresponding to the effect mode to be specified in the display data table is obtained. Is described.

The MPU 231 selects a display data table to be used according to a command (for example, a display variation pattern command) transmitted from the voice lamp control device 113 based on a command from the main control device 110, and the selected display. The data table is read from the data table storage area 233b, stored in the display data table buffer 233d, and the pointer 233f is initialized. Then, the pointer 233f is added by 1 each time the drawing process for one frame is completed, and in the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d, based on the drawing content defined by the address indicated by the pointer 233f, the pointer is then added. The image content to be drawn is specified, and a drawing list (see FIG. 106) described later is created. By transmitting this drawing list to the image controller 237, a drawing instruction for the image is given. As a result, the drawing contents are specified in the order specified in the display data table according to the update of the pointer 233f, so that the image as specified in the display data table is displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

As described above, in the pachinko machine 10, the display control device 114 responds to a command (for example, a display variation pattern command) transmitted from the voice lamp control device 113 based on a command from the main control device 110 or the like. Instead of changing the program to be executed by the MPU 231, the effect image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 can be changed by a simple operation of replacing the display data table with the display data table buffer 233d as appropriate. ..

Here, when the program executed by the MPU 231 is started every time the effect image displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is changed like the conventional pachinko machine, the effect image becomes diversified. Since a large load is applied to the complicated and enormous processing of starting and executing a program, the processing capacity of the display control device 114 may be limited, and the diversification of controllable production images may be limited. there were. On the other hand, in the pachinko machine 10, the effect image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 can be changed by a simple operation of appropriately replacing the display data table with the display data table buffer 233d. A wide variety of effect images can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 regardless of the processing capacity of the control device 114.

Further, in this way, a display data table is prepared corresponding to each effect mode, a display data table buffer is set according to the effect mode to be displayed, and a drawing list is drawn frame by frame according to the set data table. This can be created because, in the pachinko machine 10, the effect to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is determined in advance based on the result of the lottery performed based on the start winning prize. On the other hand, in game machines other than game machines such as pachinko machines, the display contents change on the spot based on the user's operation, so that the display contents cannot be predicted. It is not possible to have a display data table corresponding to the effect mode. In this way, a display data table is prepared corresponding to each effect mode, a display data table buffer is set according to the effect mode to be displayed, and a drawing list is created frame by frame according to the set data table. This configuration can only be realized based on the configuration in which the pachinko machine 10 determines in advance the effect mode to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 based on the result of the lottery performed based on the start winning prize.

Next, the details of the transfer data table will be described with reference to FIG. 105. FIG. 105 is a schematic diagram schematically showing an example of a transfer data table. The transfer data table is prepared corresponding to the display data table prepared for each effect, and as described above, is resident among the sprite image data used in the effect specified by the display data table. The transfer data information for transferring the image data not resident in the video RAM 235 from the character ROM 234 to the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236 and the transfer timing thereof are defined.

If all the sprite image data used in the effect specified in the display data table is stored in the resident video RAM 235, the transfer data table corresponding to the display data table is not prepared. As a result, it is possible to suppress an increase in the capacity of the data table storage area 233b.

The transfer data table corresponds to the address specified in the display data table, and the transfer data information of the sprite image data (hereinafter referred to as "transfer target image data") for which transfer should be started at the time indicated by the address. Is described (corresponding to the addresses "0001H" and "097H" in FIG. 105). Here, the transfer start timing of the transfer target image data is set so that the image data corresponding to the predetermined sprite is stored in the image storage area 236a by the time the drawing of the predetermined sprite is started according to the display data table. In the transfer data table, the transfer data information of the image data to be transferred is defined in correspondence with the address corresponding to the transfer start timing.

On the other hand, if there is no transfer target image data to start transfer at the time indicated by the address specified in the display data table, there is no transfer target image data to start transfer corresponding to that address. Null data is defined (corresponding to the address "0002H" in FIG. 105).

The transfer data information includes the start address (storage source start address) and end address (storage source final address) of the character ROM 234 in which the transfer target image data is stored, and the start address of the transfer destination (normal video RAM 236). Is included.

In the "0000H" which is the start address of the transfer data table, "Start" information indicating the start of the data table is described as in the display data table, and the final address of the transfer data table (in the example of FIG. 105, in the example of FIG. 105). In "02F0H"), "End" information indicating the end of the data table is described. Then, for each address between the address "0000H" in which the "Start" information is described and the address in which the "End" information is described, the transfer data information of the image data to be transferred that should be specified in the transfer data table. Is described.

When the display data table to be used is selected by the MPU 231 according to a command (for example, a display variation pattern command) transmitted from the voice lamp control device 113 based on a command from the main control device 110, the display data table is displayed. If a transfer data table corresponding to the above exists, the transfer data table is read from the data table storage area 233b and stored in the transfer data table buffer 233e of the work RAM 233 described later. Then, each time the pointer 233f is updated, the drawing content defined at the address indicated by the pointer 233f is specified from the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d, and a drawing list (see FIG. 106) described later is created. At the same time, the transfer data information of the image data of the predetermined sprite to be transferred at that time is acquired from the transfer data table stored in the transfer data table buffer 233e, and the transfer data information is added to the created drawing list. to add.

For example, in the example of FIG. 105, when the pointer 233f becomes “0001H” or “097H”, the MPU 231 creates the transfer data information defined at the address in the transfer data table based on the display data table. It is added to the drawing list, and the added drawing list is transmitted to the image controller 237. On the other hand, when the pointer 233f is "0002H", since the Null data is specified at the address "0002H" of the transfer data table, it is determined that there is no transfer target image data to start the transfer, and the data is generated. The drawing list is transmitted to the image controller 237 without adding the transfer data information to the drawing list.

Then, when the transfer data information is described in the drawing list received from the MPU 231, the image controller 237 transfers the transfer target image data from the character ROM 234 to a predetermined sub-area of the image storage area 236a according to the transfer data information. Execute the process to be performed.

Here, as described above, in the transfer data table, the image data corresponding to the predetermined sprite is stored in the image storage area 236a by the time the drawing of the predetermined sprite is started according to the display data table. Since the transfer data information of the image data to be transferred is specified for a predetermined address, the image data is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the image storage area 236a according to the transfer data information specified in the transfer data table. When drawing a predetermined sprite according to the display data table, the image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 necessary for drawing the sprite can always be stored in the image storage area 236a. Then, using the image data stored in the image storage area 236a, a predetermined sprite can be drawn based on the display data table.

As a result, even if the character ROM 234 is configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow read speed, the image required for display can be read in advance from the character ROM 234 and transferred to the normal video RAM 236 without delay. While drawing the image of each sprite specified in the data table, the corresponding effect can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Further, according to the description in the transfer data table, only the non-resident image data in the resident video RAM 235 can be easily and surely transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236.

Further, in the pachinko machine 10, the display control device 114 receives display data in response to a command (for example, a display variation pattern command) transmitted from the voice lamp control device 113 based on a command or the like from the main control device 110. When the table is set in the display data table buffer 233d, the transfer data table corresponding to the display data table is set in the transfer data table buffer 233e. Therefore, the image data of the sprite used in the display data table is displayed. It is possible to reliably transfer data from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 at a desired timing.

Further, in the transfer data table, the transfer data information is defined so that the image data is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 for each image data corresponding to the sprite. As a result, the transfer of the image data can be managed and controlled for each sprite, so that the processing related to the transfer can be easily performed. Then, by controlling the transfer of the image data from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 in sprite units, it is possible to control the transfer of the image data in detail while facilitating the processing. Therefore, it is possible to efficiently suppress an increase in the load applied to the transfer.

Further, the transfer data table has the same data structure as the display data table, and is associated with the address specified in the display data table, and the transfer of the transfer target image data to be started at the time indicated by the address is transferred. Since the data information is specified, the image data of a predetermined sprite is surely stored in the normal video RAM 236 before being used based on the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d. As described above, since the transfer start timing can be instructed, even if the character ROM 234 is configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow read speed, a wide variety of effect images can be easily displayed on the third symbol display device 81. be able to.

The simple image display flag 233c is a flag indicating whether or not to display the power-on image (power-on main image and power-on fluctuation image) on the third symbol display device 81. The simple image display flag 233c is set after the image data corresponding to the main image at power-on and the variable image at power-on is transferred to the main image area 235a at power-on or the variable image area 235b at power-on of the resident video RAM. , MPU231 is set to on in the main process (see FIG. 131). Then, in order to display an image other than the image at the time of power-on on the third symbol display device 81 at the stage where all the resident target image data is stored in the resident video RAM 235 by the resident image transfer process of the image transfer process, Set to off.

This simple image display flag 233c is referred to in the V interrupt process executed by the MPU 231 each time a V interrupt signal transmitted from the image controller 237 is detected, and when the simple image display flag 233c is on, it is referred to. , The simple command determination process and the simple display setting process are executed so that the image at power-on is displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

On the other hand, when the simple image display flag 233c is off, the command determination is made so that various images are displayed according to the command transmitted from the voice lamp control device 113 based on the command from the main control device 110 or the like. Processing and display setting processing are executed.

Further, the simple image display flag 233c is referred to in the transfer setting process executed by the MPU 231 in the V interrupt process, and when the simple image display flag 233c is on, it is stored in the resident video RAM 235. Since there is no resident image data, it is necessary for the drawing process when the resident image transfer setting process for transferring the resident image data from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 is executed and the simple image display flag 233c is off. A normal image transfer setting process for transferring various image data from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 is executed.

The display data table buffer 233d stores a display data table corresponding to an effect mode to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 in response to a command or the like transmitted from the voice lamp control device 113 based on a command or the like from the main control device 110. It is a buffer to do. The MPU 231 determines an effect mode to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 based on a command or the like transmitted from the voice lamp control device 113, and displays a display data table corresponding to the effect mode from the data table storage area 233b. It is selected and the selected display data table is stored in the display data table buffer 233d. Then, the MPU 231 adds the pointer 233f by 1, and based on the drawing content defined by the address indicated by the pointer 233f in the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d, the image controller 237 is used for each frame. A drawing list (see FIG. 106), which will be described later, is generated, which describes the contents of instructions for drawing an image. As a result, the third symbol display device 81 displays the effect corresponding to the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d.

The MPU 231 adds the pointer 233f one by one, and based on the drawing content defined by the address indicated by the pointer 233f in the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d, the image for the image controller 237 is obtained for each frame. A drawing list (see FIG. 106) described later, which describes the drawing instructions, is generated. As a result, the effect corresponding to the display data table is displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

The transfer data table buffer 233e is a transfer data table corresponding to the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d in response to a command or the like transmitted from the voice lamp control device 113 based on a command or the like from the main control device 110. It is a buffer for storing. The MPU 231 selects a transfer data table corresponding to the display data table from the data table storage area 233b in accordance with storing the display data table in the display data table buffer 233d, and transfers the selected transfer data table. It is stored in the data table buffer 233e. If all the sprite image data used in the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d is stored in the resident video RAM 235, the transfer data table corresponding to the display data table is not prepared. Therefore, the MPU 231 clears the contents by writing the Full data which means that the transfer target image data does not exist in the transfer data table buffer 233e.

Then, the MPU 231 defines the transfer data information of the transfer target image data defined by the address indicated by the pointer 233f in the transfer data table stored in the transfer data table buffer 233e while adding the pointer 233f one by one. If (that is, if Null data is not described), the transfer data information is added to a drawing list (see FIG. 106) described later that describes the instruction content for drawing an image to the image controller 237 generated for each frame. to add.

As a result, when the transfer data information is described in the drawing list received from the MPU 231, the image controller 237 shifts the image data to be transferred from the character ROM 234 to a predetermined sub-area of the image storage area 236a according to the transfer data information. Execute the process to transfer. Here, as described above, in the transfer data table, the image data corresponding to the predetermined sprite is stored in the image storage area 236a by the time the drawing of the predetermined sprite is started according to the display data table. The transfer data information of the image data to be transferred is specified for a predetermined address. Therefore, when drawing a predetermined sprite according to the display data table by transferring the image data from the character ROM 234 to the image storage area 236a according to the transfer data information defined in the transfer data table, it is necessary to draw the sprite. Image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 can always be stored in the image storage area 236a.

As a result, even if the character ROM 234 is configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow read speed, the image required for display can be read in advance from the character ROM 234 and transferred to the normal video RAM 236 without delay. While drawing the image of each sprite specified in the data table, the corresponding effect can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Further, according to the description in the transfer data table, only the non-resident image data in the resident video RAM 235 can be easily and surely transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236.

The pointer 233f is an address to acquire the transfer data information of the corresponding drawing content or transfer target image data from the display data table and transfer data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d and the transfer data table buffer 233e, respectively. Is for specifying. The MPU 231 temporarily initializes the pointer 233f to 0 in accordance with the display data table being stored in the display data table buffer 233d. Then, in the display setting process of the V interrupt process executed by the MPU 231 based on the V interrupt signal transmitted from the image controller 237 every 20 milliseconds when the drawing process of the image for one frame is completed, the pointer The update process is executed, and the value of the pointer 233f is added one by one.

Each time the pointer 233f is updated, the MPU 231 specifies the drawing content defined by the address indicated by the pointer 233f from the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d, and describes a drawing list described later. (See FIG. 106) is created, and the transfer data information of the image data of the predetermined sprite to be transferred at that time is acquired from the transfer data table stored in the transfer data table buffer 233e, and the transfer data is acquired. Add the information to the created drawing list.

As a result, the effect corresponding to the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d is displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Therefore, the effect to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 can be easily changed only by changing the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d. Therefore, a wide variety of effects can be displayed regardless of the processing capacity of the display control device 114.

When the transfer data table stored in the transfer data table buffer 233e is stored, the sprite is drawn by the corresponding display data table based on the transfer data table before the drawing of the predetermined sprite is started. Image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 used for drawing can always be stored in the image storage area 236a. As a result, even if the character ROM 234 is configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow read speed, the image required for display can be read in advance from the character ROM 234 and transferred to the normal video RAM 236 without delay. While drawing the image of each sprite specified in the data table, the corresponding effect can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Further, according to the description in the transfer data table, only the non-resident image data in the resident video RAM 235 can be easily and surely transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236.

The drawing list area 233g is an image controller that draws an image for one frame generated based on the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d and the transfer data table stored in the transfer data table buffer 233e. This is an area for storing the drawing list instructed to 237.

Here, the details of the drawing list will be described with reference to FIG. 106. FIG. 106 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the drawing list. The drawing list is an instruction table for instructing the image controller 237 to draw an image for one frame, and as shown in FIG. 106, a back image used in the image of one frame and a third symbol (designs 1,). Symbol 2, ...), Effect (Effect 1, Effect 2, ...), Character (Character 1, Character 2, ..., Number of reserved balls Design 1, Number of reserved balls Symbol 2, ..., Error Detailed drawing information (detailed information) of the sprite is described for each sprite such as (design). In addition, transfer data information for transferring predetermined image data from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 to the image controller 237 is also described in the drawing list.

The detailed drawing information (detailed information) of each sprite includes information indicating the RAM type (resident video RAM 235 or normal video RAM 236) in which the image data of the corresponding sprite (display object) is stored, and the information thereof. The address is described, and the image controller 237 acquires the image data of the sprite from the memory area specified by the RAM type and the address. Further, the detailed drawing information (detailed information) includes display position coordinates, enlargement ratio, rotation angle, translucent value, α blending information, color information, and filter specification information, and various image controllers 237 are used. A standard image generated from the image data of the sprite read from the video RAM is subjected to enlargement / reduction processing according to the enlargement ratio, rotation processing according to the rotation angle, and translucent according to the semitransparent value. Performs conversion processing, synthesizes with other sprites according to α blending information, performs color tone correction processing according to color information, and performs filtering processing by the method specified by that information according to filter specification information. Then, the image obtained by performing various processing on the display position indicated by the display position coordinates is drawn. Then, the drawn image is expanded by the image controller 237 into either the first frame buffer 236b or the second frame buffer 236c specified by the drawing target buffer flag 233j.

The MPU 231 is a display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d. Based on the image, warning image notifying the occurrence of an error, etc.), detailed drawing information (detailed information) for all sprites used for drawing one frame of image is generated, and the detailed information is generated for each sprite. Create a drawing list by sorting.

Here, among the detailed information of each sprite, the storage RAM type and address of the sprite (display object) data are the sprite type specified in the display data table and the sprite type specified from the contents of other images. Generated accordingly. That is, for each sprite, the area of the resident video RAM 235 in which the image data of the sprite is stored or the sub area of the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236 is fixed, so that the MPU 231 can be adjusted according to the sprite type. Therefore, the storage RAM type and address in which the image data of the sprite is stored can be immediately specified, and such information can be easily included in the detailed information of the drawing list.

Further, the MPU 231 is defined in the display data table for other information (display position coordinates, enlargement ratio, rotation angle, translucent value, α blending information, color information and filter designation information) among the detailed information of each sprite. Copy those information as it is.

Further, when generating the drawing list, the MPU 231 rearranges the sprites to be arranged on the back side to the sprites to be arranged on the front side in the image for one frame, and detailed drawing information for each sprite. Describe (detailed information). That is, in the drawing list, detailed information corresponding to the back image is first described, and then the third symbol (symbol 1, symbol 2, ...), effect (effect 1, effect 2, ...), character. Detailed information corresponding to each sprite is described in the order of (character 1, character 2, ..., Number of reserved balls symbol 1, number of reserved balls symbol 2, ..., error symbol).

The image controller 237 executes drawing processing of each sprite in the order described in the drawing list, and expands the drawn sprites by overwriting in the frame buffer. Therefore, in the image for one frame generated by the drawing list, the sprite drawn first can be arranged on the backmost side, and the sprite drawn last can be arranged on the frontmost side.

Further, when the transfer data information is described in the transfer data table stored in the transfer data table buffer 233e at the address indicated by the pointer 233f, the MPU 231 describes the transfer data information (character in which the transfer target image data is stored). The storage source start address and storage source final address in ROM 234 and the storage destination start address of the sub-area provided in the image storage area 236a to store the transfer target image data) are added to the end of the drawing list. If the drawing list includes this transfer data information, the image controller 237 uses the transferred data information to create an image from a predetermined area (the area indicated by the storage source start address and the storage source final address) of the character ROM 234. The data is read out, and the image data to be transferred is transferred to a predetermined sub-area (storage destination address) provided in the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236.

The timekeeping counter 233h is a counter that counts the effect time of the effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81 by the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d. The MPU 231 stores one display data table in the display data table buffer 233d, and sets time data indicating the effect time of the effect displayed based on the display data table. This time data is a value obtained by dividing the effect time by the image display time for one frame (20 milliseconds in this control example) in the third symbol display device 81.

Then, the display setting process of the V interrupt process executed by the MPU 231 is performed based on the V interrupt signal transmitted from the image controller 237 every 20 milliseconds when the drawing process and the display process of the image for one frame are completed. Each time it is executed, the timekeeping counter 233h is decremented by 1. As a result, when the value of the timekeeping counter 233h becomes 0 or less, the MPU 231 determines that the effect displayed by the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d has ended, and performs the effect in accordance with the end of the effect. Perform various processes to be performed.

The stored image data determination flag 233i stores the image data corresponding to the sprite in the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236 for all the sprites whose corresponding image data is not resident in the resident video RAM 235. It is a flag indicating the storage state indicating whether or not it is present.

The stored image data determination flag 233i is generated by the initial setting process executed by the MPU 231 in the main process when the power is turned on. The stored image data determination flag 233i generated here is set to "off" indicating that the stored state for all sprites is not stored in the image storage area 236a.

Then, the stored image data determination flag 233i is updated when a transfer instruction of the transfer target image data corresponding to one sprite is set in the normal image transfer setting process executed by the MPU 231. In this update, the storage state corresponding to one sprite for which the transfer instruction is set is set to "on" indicating that the corresponding image data is stored in the image storage area 236a. Further, the image data of the other sprites that are to be stored in the sub-area of the same image storage area 236a as the one sprite is always in the unstored state by storing the image data of the one sprite. Therefore, set the storage state corresponding to other sprites to "off".

Further, the MPU 231 refers to the stored image data determination flag 233i when transferring the image data of the sprite whose image data is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236, and of the sprite to be transferred. It is determined whether or not the image data is already stored in the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 235. If the storage state corresponding to the sprite to be transferred is "off" and the corresponding image data is not stored in the image storage area 236a, a transfer instruction for the image data is set to the image controller 237. , The image data is transferred from the character ROM 234 to a predetermined sub-area of the image storage area 236a.

On the other hand, if the storage state corresponding to the sprite to be transferred is "on", the corresponding image data is already stored in the image storage area 236a, so the transfer process of the image data is stopped. As a result, it is possible to suppress unnecessary transfer from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236, reduce the processing load on each part of the display control device 114, and reduce the traffic on the bus line 240. it can.

The drawing target buffer flag 233j is referred to as a frame buffer (hereinafter, "drawing target buffer") that expands the image drawn by the image controller 237 from the two frame buffers (first frame buffer 236b and second frame buffer 236c). When the drawing target buffer flag 233j is 0, the first frame buffer 236b is specified as the drawing target buffer, and when it is 1, the second frame buffer 236c is specified. Then, the information of the designated drawing target buffer is transmitted to the image controller 237 together with the drawing list.

As a result, the image controller 237 executes a drawing process of expanding the image drawn based on the drawing list on the designated drawing target buffer. Further, the image controller 237 reads out the previously expanded drawing image information from the frame buffer different from the drawing target buffer in parallel with the drawing process, and together with the drive signal, displays the image on the third symbol display device 81. By transferring the information, a display process for displaying an image on the third symbol display device 81 is executed.

The drawing target buffer flag 233j is updated in accordance with the drawing target buffer information being transmitted to the image controller 237 together with the drawing list. This update is performed by inverting the value of the drawing target buffer flag 233j, that is, setting it to "1" if the value is "0" and "0" if the value is "1". Is done by. As a result, the drawing target buffer is alternately set between the first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c each time the drawing list is transmitted. Further, the drawing list is transmitted by the V interrupt executed by the MPU 231 based on the V interrupt signal transmitted from the image controller 237 every 20 milliseconds when the drawing process and the display process of the image for one frame are completed. It is performed every time the drawing process of the process is executed.

That is, at a certain timing, the first frame buffer 236b is designated as the frame buffer for expanding the image for one frame, and the second frame buffer 236c is designated as the frame buffer for reading the image information for one frame. When the drawing process and the display process are executed, the second frame buffer 236c is designated as a frame buffer for expanding the image for one frame 20 milliseconds after the drawing process for the image for one frame is completed, and the image for one frame is expanded. The first frame buffer 236b is designated as the frame buffer from which the image information of the above is read. As a result, the image information of the image previously expanded in the first frame buffer 236b can be read out and displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and at the same time, a new image is expanded in the second frame buffer 236c. To.

Then, after the next 20 milliseconds, the first frame buffer 236b is designated as the frame buffer for expanding the image for one frame, and the second frame buffer 236c is designated as the frame buffer for reading the image information for one frame. Will be done. As a result, the image information of the image previously expanded in the second frame buffer 236c can be read out and displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and at the same time, a new image is expanded in the first frame buffer 236b. To. After that, one of the first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c is used every 20 milliseconds for the frame buffer for expanding the image for one frame and the frame buffer for reading the image information for one frame. By alternately alternating and specifying, it is possible to continuously perform the display processing of the image for one frame in units of 20 milliseconds while drawing the image for one frame.

<Regarding the control processing of the main control device in the first control example>
Next, each control process executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 will be described with reference to the flowcharts of FIGS. 107 to 129. The processing of the MPU 201 is roughly divided into a start-up process that is started when the power is turned on, a main process that is executed after the start-up process, and a timer that is started periodically (at intervals of 2 ms in this embodiment). There are an interrupt process and an NMI interrupt process activated by inputting a power failure signal SG1 to the NMI terminal. For convenience of explanation, the timer interrupt process and the NMI interrupt process are first described, and then the start-up process is performed. And the main process will be explained.

FIG. 107 is a flowchart showing a timer interrupt process executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110. The timer interrupt process is, for example, a periodic process executed every 2 milliseconds. In the timer interrupt process, first, the read process of various winning switches is executed (S101). That is, the state of various switches connected to the main control device 110 is read, the state of the switch is determined, and the detection information (winning detection information) is saved.

Next, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 are updated (S102). Specifically, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 is added by 1, and when the counter value reaches the maximum value (319 in the present embodiment), it is cleared to 0. Then, the updated value of the first initial value random number counter CINI1 is stored in the corresponding buffer area of the RAM 203. Similarly, the second initial value random number counter CINI2 is added by 1, and when the counter value reaches the maximum value (239 in the present embodiment), it is cleared to 0 and the updated value of the second initial value random number counter CINI2. Is stored in the corresponding buffer area of the RAM 203.

Further, the first hit random number counter C1, the first hit type counter C2, the stop type selection counter C3, and the second hit random number counter C4 are updated (S103). Specifically, the first per random number counter C1, the first per type counter C2, the stop type selection counter C3, and the second per random number counter C4 are each added by 1, and their counter values are the maximum values (in the present embodiment). When it reaches 319, 99, 99, 239), it clears to 0, respectively. Then, the updated values of the counters C1 to C4 are stored in the corresponding buffer area of the RAM 203.

Next, in addition to the process for displaying on the first symbol display device 37, the special symbol variation process for setting the variation pattern of the third symbol by the third symbol display device 81 is executed (S104). After that, the start winning process associated with the winning (starting winning) in the first entrance 64 or the second entrance 640 is executed (S105). The details of the special symbol variation process and the start winning process will be described later with reference to FIGS. 108 to 112.

After the start winning process is executed, the normal symbol variation process, which is a process for displaying on the second symbol display device, is executed (S106), and the through is accompanied by the passage of the ball at the normal entry port (through gate) 67. The gate passage process is executed (S107). The details of the normal symbol variation process and the through-gate passage process will be described later with reference to FIGS. 113 and 114, respectively. After executing the through-gate passage process, the launch control process is executed (S108), and other processes to be executed periodically are executed (S109) to end the timer interrupt process. In the launch control process, the touch sensor 51a detects that the player is touching the operation handle 51, and the launch stop switch 51b for stopping the launch is not operated. It is a process to determine whether to turn on / off the firing. The main control device 110 instructs the launch control device 112 to launch the ball when the launch of the ball is on.

Next, the special symbol variation processing (S104) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 will be described with reference to FIG. 108. FIG. 108 is a flowchart showing this special symbol variation processing (S104). This special symbol variation processing (S104) is executed in the timer interrupt processing (see FIG. 107), and the variation display of the special symbol (first symbol) performed by the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device. This is a process for controlling the variation display of the third symbol performed in 81.

In this special symbol variation processing, first, it is determined whether or not the special symbol is currently in the jackpot (S201). Among the special symbol jackpots, the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81 are displaying the special symbol jackpot (including during the special symbol jackpot game), and the special symbol. This includes the middle of a predetermined time after the end of the jackpot game. As a result of the determination, if the special symbol is a big hit (S201: Yes), this process is terminated as it is.

If it is not during the big hit of the special symbol (S201: No), it is determined whether or not the display mode of the first symbol display device 37 is changing (S202), and the display mode of the first symbol display device 37 is changing. If not (S202: No), the value of the special symbol 2 hold ball number counter 203e (the number of hold counts N2 of the variation display in the special symbol) is acquired (S203). Next, it is determined whether or not the value (N2) of the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 203e is larger than 0 (S204).

If the value (N2) of the special symbol 2 reserved ball counter 203e is not 0 (S204: Yes), the value (N2) of the special symbol 2 reserved ball counter 203e is subtracted by 1 (S205) and changed by calculation. A hold ball number command (special figure 2 hold ball number command) indicating the value of the special symbol 2 hold ball number counter 203e is set (S206).

The reserved ball count command set here is stored in the ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203, and is executed in the external output process (S1001) of the main process (see FIG. 117) to be executed later by the MPU 201. , Is transmitted to the voice lamp control device 113. When the voice lamp control device 113 receives the hold ball number command, the voice lamp control device 113 extracts the values of the special symbol 1 hold ball number counter 203d and the special symbol 2 hold ball number counter 203e from the hold ball number command, and extracts the extracted values from the RAM 223. It is stored in the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 223b and the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 223c, respectively.

After the special figure 2 reserved ball number command is set by the process of S206, the data stored in the special symbol 2 reserved ball storage area 203b is shifted (S207). In the process of S207, the data stored in the hold 1st area to the hold 4th area of the special symbol 2 hold ball storage area 203b is sequentially shifted to the execution area side. More specifically, within each area, such as hold 1st area → execution area, hold 2nd area → hold 1st area, hold 3rd area → hold 2nd area, hold 4th area → hold 3rd area, and so on. Shift the data. After shifting the data, the first symbol display device 37 executes a special symbol variation start process for starting the variation display (S213). The special symbol change start processing will be described later with reference to FIG. 110.

On the other hand, in the process of S204, when it is determined that the value (N2) of the special symbol 2 reserved ball counter 203e is 0 (S204: No), the value (N1) of the special symbol 1 reserved ball counter 203d. (S208), and it is determined whether the value (N1) of the acquired special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d is larger than 0 (S209). If it is determined by the process of S209 that the value (N1) of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d is 0 (S209: No), this process is terminated.

On the other hand, when it is determined that the value (N1) of the special symbol 1 reserved ball counter 203d is not 0 (S209: Yes), the value (N1) of the special symbol 1 reserved ball counter 203d is subtracted by 1 (S210). , The hold ball number command (special figure 1 hold ball number command) indicating the value (N1) of the special symbol 1 hold ball number counter 203d changed by the calculation is set (S211). After setting the special figure 1 reserved ball number command by the process of S211 (S212), the data stored in the special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a is shifted (S212), and the process shifts to S213.

In the process of S202, if the display mode of the first symbol display device 37 is changing (S202: Yes), it is determined whether or not the fluctuation time of the variation display executed by the first symbol display device 37 has elapsed. (S214). The fluctuation time of the fluctuation display executed by the first symbol display device 37 is determined according to the fluctuation pattern selected by the fluctuation type counter CS1 (determined according to the fluctuation pattern command), and this fluctuation time is determined. If (S214: No) has not elapsed, this process ends as it is.

On the other hand, in the process of S214, when it is determined that the fluctuation time has elapsed (S214: Yes), the display mode corresponding to the stop symbol of the first symbol display device 37 is set (S215). The stop symbol is set in advance by the special symbol variation start process (S213) described later with reference to FIG. 110. When this special symbol change start process is executed, a lottery of special symbols is performed based on the values of various counters stored in the execution area of the special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a or the special symbol 2 reserved ball storage area 203b. Be told. More specifically, whether or not it is a big hit of a special symbol is determined according to the value of the random number counter C1 per first, and if it is a big hit of a special symbol, it depends on the value of the first hit type counter C2. It is determined whether the jackpot is K, the jackpot is L, the jackpot is M, the jackpot is N, or the jackpot is k.

In the present embodiment, when the jackpot is K, the blue LED is turned on in the first symbol display device 37, and when the jackpot is L, the red LED is turned on. If the jackpot is M, N or k, the yellow LED is turned on, and if it is off, the green LED is turned on. The display of each LED is turned off when the next fluctuation display is started, but it may be turned on only for a few seconds after the fluctuation is stopped.

After the processing of S215 is completed, when the variation display being executed by the first symbol display device 37 is started, the lottery result (current lottery result) of the special symbol performed by the special symbol variation start processing is displayed. It is determined whether it is a big hit of a special symbol (S216). If the result of this lottery is a jackpot with a special symbol (S216: Yes), the operation scenario of the first specific winning opening is set based on the jackpot type (S217), and then the start of the jackpot is set (S218). .. The operation scenario specifically indicates the setting of the opening pattern of the first specific winning opening 1000a. That is, in the 1st to 4th rounds, the first specific winning opening 1000a is set to be opened for a predetermined period (until 30 seconds elapse or 10 balls are won), and in the 5th and 6th rounds, the jackpot type is selected. It is shown that the first specific winning opening 1000a is set to be opened in the corresponding pattern (see FIG. 95B). When the processing of S218 is completed, the value of the probability variation counter 203g is set to 0 (S219). Next, the value of the time saving / medium counter 203h is set to 0 (S220), and the process proceeds to S221.

On the other hand, in the process of S216, if the result of the lottery this time is out of order (S216: No), the state command setting process for determining whether or not the time saving state has ended is executed (S222), and the process proceeds to S221. Transition.

In the process of S221, a stop command is set (S221). Then, this process ends.

Next, the state command setting process (S222) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 will be described with reference to FIG. 109. FIG. 109 is a flowchart showing the state command setting process (S222). This state command setting process (S222) is a process executed in the special symbol variation process (see FIG. 108) of the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 107), and is various types of the probability variation counter 203 g and the time saving medium counter 203h. This is a process for determining the game state based on the value of the counter and setting the state command (S234, S238).

In this state command setting process, first, it is determined whether the value of the probability variation counter 203g is 1 or more (S231), and when it is determined that the value of the probability variation counter 203g is 1 or more (S231: Yes), the probability variation is changed. The value of the counter 203g is subtracted by 1, and the value of the counter 203h is subtracted by 1 (S232). Next, it is determined whether the value of the probability variation counter 203g is 0 (S233), and if it is determined that the value is larger than 0 (S233: No), this process is terminated. On the other hand, when it is determined that the value of the probability variation counter 203g is 0 (S233: Yes), a state command indicating that the game is in the normal game state is set (S234), and the process returns to the special symbol variation process.

When it is determined that the value of the probability variation counter 203g is not 1 or more (that is, 0) (S231: No), it is determined whether the value of the time saving medium counter 203h is 1 or more (S235), and the time saving medium counter If it is determined that the value of 203h is not 1 or more (that is, 0) (S235: No), the process returns to the special symbol variation processing.

On the other hand, when it is determined that the time saving / medium counter 203h is 1 or more (S235: Yes), the value of the time saving / medium counter 203h is subtracted by 1 (S236). Next, it is determined whether the value of the time saving / medium counter 203h is 0 (S237), and if it is determined that the value is larger than 0 (S237: No), this processing is terminated. On the other hand, when it is determined that the time reduction / medium counter 203h is 0 (S237: Yes), a state command indicating that the game is in the normal game state is set (S238), and the process returns to the special symbol variation process.

Next, the special symbol variation start processing (S213) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 will be described with reference to FIG. 110. FIG. 110 is a flowchart showing the special symbol variation start processing (S213). This special symbol variation start process (S213) is a process executed in the special symbol variation process (see FIG. 108) of the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 33), and is special with the special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a. Based on the values of various counters stored in the execution area common to the symbol 2 reserved ball storage area 203b, a lottery (win / fail judgment) of "big hit of special symbol" or "missing of special symbol" is performed, and the first This is a process for determining an effect pattern (variation effect pattern) of the variation effect performed by the symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81.

In the special symbol fluctuation start processing, first, the first random number counter C1 and the first type counter C2 stored in the common execution area of the special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a and the special symbol 2 reserved ball storage area 203b. , And each value of the stop type selection counter C3 is acquired (S301).

Next, it is determined whether the value of the probability variation counter 203g of the RAM 203 is 1 or more (S302), and if it is 1 or more (S302: Yes), the value of the first random number counter C1 acquired in the process of S301 and the value of the first random number counter C1. Based on the special symbol jackpot random number table for high probability, the lottery result of whether or not the special symbol is a jackpot is acquired from the first random number table 202a (S303). Specifically, the value of the first random number counter C1 is compared with the 10 random number values defined in the first random number table 202a one by one. As described above, four random numbers "1 to 4" are set as the big hit random numbers of the special symbol, and the value of the random number counter C1 per first matches the random number values that hit these. If so, it is determined that the special symbol is a big hit. After obtaining the lottery result of the special symbol, the process proceeds to S305.

In the present embodiment, the lottery for the special symbol 1 and the lottery for the special symbol 2 share the same judgment value as a big hit, but depending on whether the lottery for the special symbol 1 or the lottery for the special symbol 2 is used. It may be a different random value. With this configuration, the random number value determined to be out of order in the first special symbol is configured to be determined to be a hit in the second special symbol, and the bias of the jackpot can be suppressed.

Further, in the present embodiment, the lottery of the special symbol 1 and the lottery of the special symbol 2 are set to the same number of judgment values to be big hits, but the lottery of the special symbol 1 and the lottery of the special symbol 2 The number of judgment values that are big hits may be different. By configuring in this way, the probability of a big hit can be made different between the first special symbol and the second special symbol, and when the lottery is executed with the special symbol having the higher jackpot probability, the player It is possible to have expectations for a big hit.

On the other hand, in the processing of S302, when it is determined that the value of the probability variation counter 203g is not 1 or more (that is, the value is 0) (S302: No), the pachinko machine 10 is in the normal state (low probability gaming state) of the special symbol. ), Therefore, based on the value of the first random number counter C1 acquired in the process of S301 and the first random number table 202a for low probability, the lottery result of whether or not the special symbol is a big hit is acquired. (S304). Specifically, the value of the first random number counter C1 is compared with the random number value of 1 stored in the first random number table 202a for low probability. As a random number value that becomes a big hit of a special symbol, one of "0" is set, and when the value of the random number counter C1 per first and the random number value that becomes this hit match, the big hit of the special symbol Is determined to be. After obtaining the lottery result of the special symbol, the process proceeds to S305.

Then, it is determined whether the lottery result of the special symbol acquired by the processing of S303 or S304 is a jackpot of the special symbol (S305), and if it is determined to be a jackpot of the special symbol (S305: Yes). , A display mode at the time of a big hit indicating a big hit is set (S306). More specifically, the value of the first hit type counter C2 acquired in the process of S301 is compared with the random number value stored in the first hit type selection table 202b, and the jackpot of five types of special symbols (big hit). Of K, jackpot L, jackpot M, jackpot N, and jackpot k), it is determined what the jackpot type is.

In the process of S306, the display mode (lighting state of LED 37a) of the first symbol display device 37 is set according to the determined jackpot type (big hit K, jackpot L, jackpot M, jackpot N and jackpot k). .. Further, the jackpot type (big hit K, jackpot L, jackpot M, jackpot N, and jackpot k) is set as the stop type so that the stop symbol corresponding to the jackpot type is stopped and displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

Next, the fluctuation pattern at the time of big hit is determined (S307). When the variation pattern is set in the process of S307, the variation time (display time) of the variation effect in the first symbol display device 37 is set, and the third symbol display device 81 stops at the jackpot symbol. The fluctuation time of the symbol is determined. At this time, the value of the variation type counter CS1 stored in the counter buffer of the RAM 203 is confirmed, and the fluctuation time of the symbol variation such as normal reach and super reach is determined based on the value of the variation type counter CS1. As described above, the relationship between the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 and the fluctuation time is defined in the fluctuation pattern selection table 20d.

The fluctuation patterns defined in the fluctuation pattern selection table 202d include, for example, "disengagement (for a long time)", "disengagement (for a short time)", "disappearance", and "disengagement" as fluctuation patterns for disengagement. Various types of "normal reach", various types of "outside super reach", and various types of "outside chance reach" are stipulated. In addition, various types of "shared normal reach", "shared super reach", "shared chance reach", and "shared special reach" are stipulated as fluctuation patterns for various jackpots.

On the other hand, in the process of S305, when it is determined that the special symbol is out of alignment (S305: No), the display mode at the time of deviation is set (S308). In the process of S308, the display mode of the first symbol display device 37 is set to the display mode corresponding to the outlier symbol, and the value of the stop type selection counter C3 stored in the execution area of the special symbol hold ball storage area 203a is set. Based on this, as the stop type to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81, whether it is out of reach or out of reach is set.

Here, if the pachinko machine 10 is in a probabilistic state of a special symbol, the value of the stop type selection counter C3 acquired in the process of S301 is compared with the random number value stored in the stop type selection table for high probability. Then, set the stop type. Specifically, if the value of the stop type selection counter C3 is in the range of "0 to 89", a complete deviation is set, and if it is in the range of "90 to 97", a reach other than the front and rear deviation is set, and "98". If it is ", 99", the front-back off reach is set. On the other hand, if the pachinko machine 10 is in the normal state of the special symbol, the stop type is set by comparing the value of the stop type selection counter C3 with the random number value stored in the stop type selection table for low probability. To do. Specifically, if the value of the stop type selection counter C3 is in the range of "0 to 79", a complete deviation is set, and if it is in the range of "80 to 97", a reach other than the front and rear deviation is set, and "98". If it is ", 99", the front-back off reach is set.

Next, the fluctuation pattern at the time of disconnection is determined (S309). Here, the display time of the first symbol display device 37 is set, and the fluctuation time of the third symbol until the third symbol display device 81 stops at the off symbol is determined. At this time, similarly to the processing of S307, the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 stored in the counter buffer of the RAM 203 is confirmed, and the fluctuation time of the symbol fluctuation such as normal reach and super reach is confirmed based on the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1. To determine.

When the process of S307 or the process of S309 is completed, next, a variation pattern command for notifying the display control device 114 of the variation pattern determined by the process of S307 or the process of S309 is set (S310). Next, a stop type command for notifying the display control device 114 of the stop type set in the process of S306 or S308 is set (S311). These fluctuation pattern commands and stop type commands are stored in the ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203, and these commands are transmitted to the voice lamp control device 113 in the process of S1001 of the main process (see FIG. 117). Will be sent. The voice lamp control device 113 transmits the stop type command as it is to the display control device 114. When the processing of S311 is completed, the process returns to the special symbol variation processing.

Next, the start winning process (S105) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 111. FIG. 111 is a flowchart showing this start winning process (S105). This start winning process (S105) is executed in the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 107), and determines whether or not there is a prize (starting prize) in the first ball opening 64 or the second ball opening 640. , This is a process for acquiring various random number counters and executing a hold process for the value when there is a start prize.

When the start winning process is executed, first, it is determined whether or not the ball has won a prize (starting prize) in the first ball opening 64 (S401). Here, the ball entering the first ball entry port 64 is detected over three timer interrupt processes. Then, when it is determined that the ball has won the first ball opening 64 (S401: Yes), the value of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d (the number of pending numbers N1 of the variation display in the special symbol) is acquired (S402). ). Then, it is determined whether or not the value (N1) of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d is less than the upper limit value (4 in this embodiment) (S403).

Then, whether or not there is a prize in the first ball opening 64 (S401: No), or even if there is a prize in the first ball opening 64, the value (N1) of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d is 4. If it is not less than (S403: No), the process proceeds to S407.

On the other hand, if there is a prize in the first ball opening 64 (S401: Yes) and the value (N1) of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d is less than 4 (S403: Yes), the special symbol 1 is reserved. The value (N1) of the ball counter 203d is added by 1 (S404). Then, a hold ball number command (special figure 1 hold ball number command) indicating the value of the special symbol 1 hold ball number counter 203d changed by the calculation is set (S405).

The reserved ball count command set here is stored in the ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203, and is executed in the external output process (S1001) of the main process (see FIG. 117) to be executed later by the MPU 201. , Is transmitted to the voice lamp control device 113. When the voice lamp control device 113 receives the hold ball number command, the voice lamp control device 113 extracts the value of the special symbol 1 hold ball number counter 203d from the hold ball number command, and transfers the extracted value to the special symbol 1 hold ball number counter 223b of the RAM 223. Store.

After setting the hold ball number command by the processing of S405, each value of the first random number counter C1, the first hit type counter C2, and the stop type selection counter C3 updated in the processing of S103 of the timer interrupt processing described above is set. , RAM 203 is stored in the first free holding area (holding first area to holding fourth area) of the holding ball storage area 203a (S406). In the process of S406, the value of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d is referred to, and if the value is 0, the reserved first area is set as the first area. Similarly, if the value is 1, the reserved second area is set as the first area, if the value is 2, the reserved third area is set, and if the value is 3, the held fourth area is set as the first area.

Next, in each of the processes of S407 to S412, the same process as that of each of the processes of S401 to S406 is executed for the winning of the second entrance 640. The only difference between the processes S407 to S412 is that the process of holding the reserved ball corresponding to the winning of the second ball opening 640 is executed, and the other processes are different from those of S401 to S406. Since they are the same, detailed description thereof will be omitted. When each process of S407 to S412 is completed, the look-ahead process is executed (S413), and the main process is completed.

Next, the look-ahead process (S413) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 will be described with reference to FIG. 112. FIG. 112 is a flowchart showing this look-ahead process (S413). This look-ahead process (S413) is executed in the start winning process (see FIG. 111).

In this look-ahead processing, first, it is determined whether or not there is a new prize in the first entry port 64 or the second entry opening 640 (S501), and any of the first entry opening 64 and the second entry opening 640. If there is no new prize (S501: No), this process ends as it is.

On the other hand, when it is determined that there is a new prize in the first entrance 64 or the second entrance 640 (S501: Yes), whether or not the game state at the start of the fluctuation is the probability change state of the special symbol. If the determination is made (S502) and the special symbol is in a probabilistic state (S502: Yes), the lottery result is acquired based on the first random number table for high probability (S503), and the process shifts to S505.

In the process of S502, when it is determined that the game state is not the probabilistic state of the special symbol (S502: No), the lottery result is acquired based on the first random number table for the low probability time (S504), and the process is performed in S505. Move to.

In the process of S505, each value of the first hit type counter C2 and the stop type selection counter C3, which are the determination results of the jackpot, is stored in the special symbol holding ball storage area (S505). Next, a winning information command including the jackpot determination result is set (S506), and this process is terminated.

Next, the normal symbol variation processing (S106) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 will be described with reference to FIG. 113. FIG. 113 is a flowchart showing this normal symbol variation processing (S106). This normal symbol variation processing (S106) is executed in the timer interrupt processing (see FIG. 107), and is associated with the variation display of the second symbol performed by the second symbol display device 83 and the second entry port 640. This is a process for controlling the opening time of the electric accessory.

In this normal symbol variation processing, first, it is determined whether or not the normal symbol (second symbol) is currently being hit (S601). As for the hitting of the normal symbol (second symbol), the opening / closing control of the electric accessory 640a attached to the second entrance 640 is performed while the display indicating the hit is being made on the second symbol display device 83. Includes during and during the process. As a result of the determination, if the normal symbol (second symbol) is hit (S601: Yes), the present process is terminated as it is.

On the other hand, if the normal symbol (second symbol) is not hit (S601: No), it is determined whether or not the display mode of the second symbol display device 83 is changing (S602), and the second symbol display device If the display mode of is not changing (S602: No), the value of the normal symbol holding ball number counter 203f (the number of holdings of the variable display in the normal symbol M) is acquired (S603). Next, it is determined whether or not the value (M) of the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203f is larger than 0 (S604), and if the value (M) of the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203f is 0 (S604: No), this process ends as it is. On the other hand, if the value (M) of the normal symbol reserved ball counter 203f is not 0 (S604: Yes), the value (M) of the normal symbol reserved ball counter 203f is subtracted by 1 (S605).

Next, the data stored in the normal symbol holding ball storage area 203c is shifted (S606). In the process of S606, the data stored in the hold 1st area to the hold 4th area of the normal symbol hold ball storage area 203c is sequentially shifted to the execution area side. More specifically, within each area, such as hold 1st area → execution area, hold 2nd area → hold 1st area, hold 3rd area → hold 2nd area, hold 4th area → hold 3rd area, and so on. Shift the data. After shifting the data, the value of the second random number counter C4 stored in the execution area of the normal symbol holding ball storage area 203c is acquired (S607).

Next, it is determined whether or not the pachinko machine 10 is in the time saving state of the normal symbol (S608), and if it is determined that the pachinko machine 10 is in the time saving state of the normal symbol (S608: Yes), the second acquired by the process of S607. Based on the value of the hit random number counter C4 and the second hit random number table 202c for high probability, the lottery result of whether or not the normal symbol is hit is acquired (S609). Specifically, the value of the second random number counter C4 is compared with the random number value stored in the second random number table 202c for high probability. As described above, if the value of the second hit type counter C4 is in the range of "5-204", it is determined that the hit is a normal symbol, and if it is in the range of "0-4,205-239", it is determined. It is determined that the normal symbol is out of alignment (see 202c2 in FIG. 94 (c)).

In the processing of S608, when the pachinko machine 10 is not in the time saving state of the normal symbol (S608: No), the pachinko machine 10 is in the normal state of the normal symbol, so the value of the second random number counter C4 acquired in the processing of S607. And, based on the second hit random number table for the low probability time, the lottery result of whether or not the normal symbol is hit is acquired (S611). Specifically, the value of the second random number counter C4 is compared with the random number value stored in the second random number table for low probability. As described above, if the value of the second hit type counter C4 is in the range of "5-9", it is determined that the hit is a normal symbol, and if it is in the range of "0-4, 10-239", it is determined. It is determined that the normal symbol is out of alignment (see 202c1 in FIG. 94 (c)).

Next, it is determined whether the lottery result of the ordinary symbol acquired by the processing of S609 or S610 is a hit of the ordinary symbol (S611), and if it is determined to be a hit of the ordinary symbol (S611: Yes). , The display mode at the time of hit is set (S612). In the process of S612, after the variation display in the second symbol display device is completed, the symbol "○" is set to be lit and displayed as the stop symbol (second symbol).

Then, it is determined whether the pachinko machine 10 is in the time saving state of the normal symbol (S613), and if the pachinko machine 10 is in the time saving state of the normal symbol (S613: Yes), the electric combination attached to the second entrance 640 The opening period of the object 640a is set to 1 second, the number of times of opening is set to 2 (S614), and the process proceeds to S617. In the processing of S613, when the pachinko machine 10 is not in the time saving state of the normal symbol (S613: No), the opening period of the electric accessory 640a attached to the second entrance 640 is set to 0.2 seconds, and the opening period thereof is set to 0.2 seconds. The number of times of opening is set to 1 (S615), and the process proceeds to S617.

In the process of S611, when it is determined that the normal symbol is out of alignment (S611: No), the display mode at the time of deviation is set (S616). In the process of S616, after the variation display in the second symbol display device is completed, the symbol "x" is set to be lit and displayed as the stop symbol (second symbol). When the setting of the display mode at the time of disconnection is completed, the process proceeds to S617.

In the process of S617, it is determined whether the pachinko machine 10 is in the time saving state of the normal symbol (S617), and if the pachinko machine 10 is in the time saving state of the normal symbol (S617: Yes), the variation display in the second symbol display device. The fluctuation time of is set to 1 second (S618), and this process is terminated. On the other hand, when the pachinko machine 10 is not in the time saving state of the normal symbol (S617: No), the variation time of the variation display in the second symbol display device is set to 30 seconds (S619), and this process is terminated. In this way, except during the jackpot of the special symbol, when the normal symbol has a high probability, the fluctuation display time is very short, "30 seconds → 1 second", as compared with the low probability of the normal symbol. Since the opening period of the second entry port 640 is very long, "0.2 seconds x 1 time → 1 second x 2 times", the ball can easily enter the second entry port 640.

In the process of S602, if the display mode of the second symbol display device is changing (S602: Yes), it is determined whether or not the fluctuation time of the variation display executed in the second symbol display device has elapsed (S602: Yes). S622). The fluctuation time here is a time preset by the process of S618 or the process of S619 before the variation display is started in the second symbol display device.

In the process of S622, if the fluctuation time has not elapsed (S622: No), this process ends. On the other hand, in the process of S622, if the fluctuation time of the fluctuation display being executed has elapsed (S622: Yes), the stop display of the second symbol display device is set (S623).

In the process of S623, if the lottery of ordinary symbols is a win and the display mode is set by the process of S612, the "○" symbol as the second symbol is stopped and displayed (lighted display) on the second symbol display device. ) Is set to be done. On the other hand, if the lottery of ordinary symbols is removed and the display mode is set by the process of S616, the "x" symbol as the second symbol is stopped and displayed (lighted up) on the second symbol display device. Is set.

When the stop display is set by the process of S623, the variation display in the second symbol display device ends when the second symbol display update process (see S1007) of the main process (see FIG. 117) is executed next. Then, the stop symbol (second symbol) is stopped and displayed (lit) on the second symbol display device in the display mode set in the process of S612 or the process of S616.

Next, when the variable display being executed in the second symbol display device is started, whether the lottery result of the normal symbol (current lottery result) performed by the normal symbol variation process is a hit of the normal symbol. Judgment (S624).

If the result of the lottery this time is a hit of a normal symbol (S624: Yes), the opening / closing control start of the electric accessory 640a attached to the second entrance 640 is set (S625), and this process is completed. When the opening / closing control start of the electric accessory 640a is set by the process of S625, the opening / closing of the electric accessory is opened / closed when the electric accessory opening / closing process (see S1005) of the main process (see FIG. 117) is executed next. The control is started, and the opening / closing control of the electric accessory is continued until the opening time and the number of times of opening set in the process of S614 or the process of S615 are completed.

On the other hand, in the process of S624, if the result of the lottery this time is out of the normal symbol (S624: No), the process of S625 is skipped and the present process is terminated.

Next, the through-gate passage process (S107) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 114. FIG. 114 is a flowchart showing the through gate passing process (S107). This through-gate passage process (S107) is executed in the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 107), determines whether or not the ball has passed through the normal entry port (through gate) 67, and the ball has passed. In this case, it is a process for acquiring and holding the value indicated by the second random number counter C4.

In the through gate passing process, first, it is determined whether or not the ball has passed through the normal entry port (through gate) 67 (S701). Here, the passage of the ball at the normal entry port (through gate) 67 is detected over three timer interrupt processes. Then, when it is determined that the ball has passed through the normal entry port (through gate) 67 (S701: Yes), the value of the normal symbol hold ball number counter 203f (the number of hold times M of the variation display in the normal symbol) is acquired. (S702). Then, it is determined whether or not the value (M) of the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203f is less than the upper limit value (4 in this embodiment) (S703).

Whether the ball has passed through the normal entry port (through gate) 67 (S701: No), or even if the ball has passed through the normal entry port (through gate) 67, the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203f If the value (M) is not less than 4 (S703: No), this process ends.

On the other hand, if the ball passes through the normal entry port (through gate) 67 (S701: Yes) and the value (M) of the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203f is less than 4 (S703: Yes), the normal symbol The value (M) of the reserved ball number counter 203f is added by 1 (S704).

Then, the value of the second random number counter C4 updated in the processing of S103 of the timer interrupt processing described above is set to the free hold area (hold 1st area to hold 4th area) of the normal symbol hold ball storage area 203c of the RAM 203. It is stored in the first area (S705), and this process is terminated. In the process of S705, the value of the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203f is referred to, and if the value is 0, the reserved first area is set as the first area. Similarly, if the value is 1, the reserved second area is set as the first area, if the value is 2, the reserved third area is set, and if the value is 3, the held fourth area is set as the first area.

Next, the NMI interrupt process executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 115. FIG. 115 is a flowchart showing an NMI interrupt process executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110. This NMI interrupt process is a process executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 when the power of the pachinko machine 10 is cut off due to a power failure or the like. By this NMI interrupt processing, the power failure occurrence information is stored in the RAM 203. That is, when the power supply of the pachinko machine 10 is cut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like, the power failure signal SG1 is output from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 to the NMI terminal of the MPU 201 in the main control device 110. Then, the MPU 201 interrupts the control during execution and starts the NMI interrupt process, stores the power failure occurrence information in the RAM 203 (S801) as a setting of the power failure occurrence information, and ends the NMI interrupt process. To do.

The above NMI interrupt process is also executed in the payout control device 111 (see FIG. 93), and the power outage occurrence information is stored in the RAM 213 by the NMI interrupt process. That is, when the power supply of the pachinko machine 10 is cut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like, the power failure signal SG1 is output from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 to the NMI terminal of the MPU 211 in the payout control device 111, and the MPU 211 interrupts the control during execution. Then, the NMI interrupt process is started.

Next, with reference to FIG. 116, the start-up process executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 when the power is turned on to the main control device 110 will be described. FIG. 116 is a flowchart showing this start-up process. This start-up process is started by resetting when the power is turned on.

In the start-up process, first, the initial setting process accompanying the power-on is executed (S901). In this initial setting process, for example, a predetermined value set in advance is set in the stack pointer. Next, a weight process (1 second in this embodiment) is executed in order to wait for the control device on the sub side (peripheral control device such as the voice lamp control device 113 and the payout control device 111) to be in an operable state. (S902). Then, the access of the RAM 203 is permitted (S903).

After that, it is determined whether or not the RAM erase switch 122 (see FIG. 3) provided in the power supply device 115 is turned on (S904), and if it is turned on (S904: Yes), the process shifts to S910. On the other hand, if the RAM erase switch 122 is not turned on (S904: No), it is determined whether or not the power cutoff occurrence information is stored in the RAM 203 (S905), and if it is not stored (S905: No). Since there is a possibility that the processing at the time of the previous power cutoff did not end normally, the processing is shifted to S910 in this case as well.

If the power outage occurrence information is stored in the RAM 203 (S905: Yes), the RAM determination value is calculated (S906), and if the calculated RAM determination value is not normal (S907: No), that is, the calculated RAM If the determination value does not match the RAM determination value saved when the power is cut off, the backed up data has been destroyed, and the process is shifted to S910 even in such a case.

As will be described later in the process of S1017 in FIG. 117, the RAM determination value is, for example, a checksum value at the work area address of the RAM 203. Instead of this RAM determination value, the effectiveness of the backup may be determined based on whether or not the keyword written in the predetermined area of the RAM 203 is correctly saved.

In the process of S910, a payout initialization command is transmitted in order to initialize the payout control device 111 which is a control device (peripheral control device) on the sub side (S910). Upon receiving this payout initialization command, the payout control device 111 clears an area (work area) other than the stack area of the RAM 213, sets an initial value, and is ready to start payout control of the game ball. After transmitting the payout initialization command, the main control device 110 executes the initialization process (S911, S912) of the RAM 203.

As described above, in the pachinko machine 10, when the RAM data is initialized when the power is turned on, for example, when the hall is open for business, the power is turned on while pressing the RAM erase switch 122. Therefore, if the RAM erase switch 122 is pressed during the start-up process, the RAM initialization process (S911, S912) is executed. Similarly, when the power failure occurrence information is not set, or when a backup abnormality is confirmed by the RAM determination value (checksum value, etc.), the initialization process (S911, S912) of the RAM 203 is executed in the same manner. .. In the RAM initialization process (S911, S912), the used area of the RAM 203 is cleared to 0 (S911), and then the initial value of the RAM 203 is set (S912). When the processing of S912 is completed, the process proceeds to the processing of S913.

On the other hand, if the RAM erase switch 122 is not turned on (S904: No), the power failure occurrence information is stored (S905: Yes), and the RAM determination value (checksum value, etc.) is normal ( S907: Yes), the information on the occurrence of the power failure is cleared while holding the data backed up in the RAM 203 (S908). Next, a payout return command at the time of power recovery for returning the control device (peripheral control device) on the sub side to the gaming state when the drive power is cut off is transmitted (S909), and the process proceeds to S913. Upon receiving this payout return command, the payout control device 111 is in a state where the payout control of the game ball can be started while holding the data stored in the RAM 213.

In the process of S913, a command (state command) for notifying the gaming state at the time of power recovery is output to the voice lamp control device 113 (S913). This state command is a command for notifying whether or not the special symbol is in the probable change state, whether or not the normal symbol is in the time saving state, the number of times of the normal symbol is shortened, and the like.

A state command is generated according to the value of the time reduction counter 203h and the value of the probability variation counter 203g, and is output to the voice lamp control device 113. By outputting this state command, the recognition of the game state can be matched between the main control device 110 and the voice lamp control device 113. Therefore, even though the normal symbol is in the low probability state, the right-handed navigation (for example, see the small area Ds3 in FIG. 88 (a)) is displayed, or conversely, the normal symbol is in the high probability state. Nevertheless, it is possible to prevent (suppress) the display of the right-handed warning image (not shown) when the player makes a right-handed hit. That is, it is possible to match the gaming state with the effect to be executed.

When the process of S913 is completed, the effect permission command is transmitted to the voice lamp control device 113 to allow the voice lamp control device 113 and the display control device 114 to execute various effects (S914). Next, the interrupt is permitted (S915), and the process proceeds to the main process described later.

Next, with reference to FIG. 117, the main process executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 after the above-mentioned start-up process will be described. FIG. 117 is a flowchart showing this main process. In this main process, the main process of the game is executed. As an outline, each process of S1001 to S1010 is executed as a periodic process having a cycle of 4 ms, and the counter update process of S1013 and S1014 is executed in the remaining time.

In the main process, first, during the execution of the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 107), the output data such as commands stored in the ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203 is sent to each control device (peripheral) on the sub side. The external output process to be transmitted to the control device) is executed (S1001).

Specifically, the presence or absence of the winning detection information detected by the switch reading process of S101 in the timer interrupt processing (see FIG. 107) is determined, and if there is the winning detection information, the number of acquired balls corresponds to the payout control device 111. Send a prize ball command to do.

Further, the hold ball number command set in the special symbol variation processing (see FIG. 108) and the start winning processing (see FIG. 111) is transmitted to the voice lamp control device 113. Further, by this external output processing, the variation pattern command, the stop type command, and the like necessary for the variation display of the third symbol by the third symbol display device 81 are transmitted to the voice lamp control device 113.

Further, the opening command, the number of rounds command, and the ending command set in the jackpot control process (S1004) are transmitted to the voice lamp control device 113. In addition, when launching a ball, a ball launch signal is transmitted to the launch control device 112.

Next, the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 is updated (S1002). Specifically, the variation type counter CS1 is added by 1, and when the counter value reaches the maximum value (198 in this control example), it is cleared to 0. Then, the update value of the variation type counter CS1 is stored in the corresponding buffer area of the RAM 203.

When the update of the variation type counter CS1 is completed, the prize ball counting signal and the payout abnormality signal received from the payout control device 111 are read (S1003), and then, when the special symbol is in the jackpot state, the jackpot effect is executed or the first A jackpot control process for opening or closing the first specific winning opening 1000a of the 1 variable winning device 6000 is executed (S1004).

In the jackpot control process, the opening and closing of the first specific winning opening 1000a are set according to the operation scenario set by the process of S217 of the special symbol variation processing (see FIG. 108) for each round of the jackpot state. In this control example, the jackpot control process (S1004) is executed in the main process, but it may be executed in the timer interrupt process.

Next, the electric accessory opening / closing process for controlling the opening / closing of the electric accessory 640a attached to the second entry port 640 is executed (S1005). In the electric accessory opening / closing process, when the opening / closing control start of the electric accessory is set by the process of S625 of the normal symbol variation process (see FIG. 113), the opening / closing control of the electric accessory is started. The opening / closing control of the electric accessory is continued until the opening time and the number of times of opening set in the processing of S614 or the processing of S615 in the normal symbol variation processing are completed.

Next, the first symbol display update process for updating the display of the first symbol display device 37 is executed (S1006). In the first symbol display update process, when a variation pattern is set by the process of S307 or the process of S309 of the special symbol variation start process (see FIG. 110), the variation display according to the variation pattern is displayed in the first symbol display. Start at device 37. In this control example, among the LEDs of the first symbol display device 37, from the start of fluctuation until the fluctuation time elapses, for example, if the currently lit LED is red, the red LED is turned off. At the same time, turn on the green LED, if the green LED is on, turn off the green LED and turn on the blue LED, and if the blue LED is on, turn off the blue LED. At the same time, turn on the red LED.

The main process is executed every 4 milliseconds, but if the LED lighting color is changed each time the main process is executed, the player cannot confirm the change in the LED lighting color. Therefore, a counter (not shown) is counted by 1 each time the main process is executed so that the player can confirm the change in the lighting color of the LED, and when the counter reaches 100, the LED is displayed. Change the lighting color of. That is, the lighting color of the LED is changed every 0.4 s. The value of the counter is reset to 0 when the lighting color of the LED is changed.

Further, in the first symbol display update process, when the variation time corresponding to the variation pattern set by the processes of S307 and S309 of the special symbol variation start process (see FIG. 110) ends, the first symbol display device 37 The executed variation display is ended, and the stop symbol (first symbol) is stopped at the first symbol display device 37 in the display mode set by the processing of S306 and S308 of the special symbol variation start processing (see FIG. 110). Display (light up display).

Next, the second symbol display update process for updating the display of the second symbol display device is executed (S1007). In the second symbol display update process, when the variation time of the second symbol is set by the process of S618 or the process of S619 of the normal symbol variation process (see FIG. 113), the variation display is started on the second symbol display device 83. To do. As a result, in the second symbol display device 83, variable display is performed in which the “◯” symbol and the “x” symbol as the second symbol are alternately lit.

Further, in the second symbol display update process, when the stop display of the second symbol display device 83 is set by the process of S623 of the normal symbol variation process (see FIG. 113), the second symbol display device 83 is executed. The stop symbol (second symbol) is stopped and displayed on the second symbol display device 83 in the display mode set by the process of S612 or the process of S616 of the normal symbol variation process (see FIG. 113) after ending the variable display (see FIG. 113). Lighting display).

After executing the process of S1007, the storage control process is executed (S1008). The storage control process (S1008) will be described later with reference to FIGS. 125 and 126, but a process for setting the retracting and overhanging of the interference member 6930 will be executed. Next, when the process of S1008 is completed, the V winning process is executed (S1009). The V winning process (S1009) will be described later with reference to FIG. 129. Then, when the process of S1009 is completed, other processes are executed (S1010).

When the processing of S1010 is completed, it is determined whether or not the power failure occurrence information is stored in the RAM 203 (S1011), and if the power failure occurrence information is not stored in the RAM 203 (S1011: No), the power failure monitoring circuit The power failure signal SG1 is not output from 252, and the power supply is not cut off. Therefore, in such a case, it is determined whether or not the execution timing of the next main process has been reached, that is, whether or not a predetermined time (4 msec in the present embodiment) has elapsed from the start of the main process this time (S1012). If the predetermined time has already passed (S1012: Yes), the process is shifted to S1001, and each process after S1001 described above is repeatedly executed.

On the other hand, if the predetermined time has not yet elapsed from the start of the main process this time (S1012: No), the first is within the period until the predetermined time is reached, that is, within the remaining time until the execution timing of the next main process is reached. 1 The initial value random number counter CINI1, the second initial value random number counter CINI2, and the variation type counter CS1 are repeatedly updated (S1013, S1014).

First, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 are updated (S1013). Specifically, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 are added by 1, and when the counter value reaches the maximum value (319, 239 in this control example), it is cleared to 0. .. Then, the updated values of the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 are stored in the corresponding buffer areas of the RAM 203, respectively. Next, the variation type counter CS1 is updated by the same method as the process of S1002 (S1014).

Here, since the execution time of each process of S1001 to S1010 changes according to the state of the game, the remaining time until the execution timing of the next main process is not constant and fluctuates. Therefore, by repeatedly updating the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 using the remaining time, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 (that is, , The initial value of the first random number counter C1 and the initial value of the second random number counter C4) can be randomly updated, and similarly, the variable type counter CS1 can also be updated randomly.

Further, in the process of S1011 if the power outage occurrence information is stored in the RAM 203 (S1011: Yes), the power is cut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the power is turned off, and the power failure signal SG1 is output from the power failure monitoring circuit 252. As a result, since the NMI interrupt process shown in FIG. 115 has been executed, the process when the power is cut off after S1015 is executed.

First, the occurrence of each interrupt process is prohibited (S1015), and a power off command indicating that the power is cut off is issued to other control devices (peripheral control devices such as the payout control device 111 and the voice lamp control device 113). (S1016). Then, the RAM determination value is calculated, the value is saved (S1017), the access of the RAM 203 is prohibited (S1018), and the infinite loop is continued until the power supply is completely shut off and the process cannot be executed. Here, the RAM determination value is, for example, a checksum value in the backed up stack area and work area of the RAM 203.

The processing of S1011 is performed at the end of a series of processing corresponding to the state change of the game performed in S1001 to S1010, or at the end of one cycle of the processing of S1013 and S1014 performed within the remaining time. It is running. Therefore, in the main process of the main control device 110, the power off occurrence information is confirmed at the timing when each setting is completed. Therefore, when returning from the power cut state, the process is performed after the start-up process is completed. It can be started from the process of S1001.

That is, the process can be started from the process of S1001 as in the case of being initialized in the start-up process. Therefore, in the process when the power is cut off, the stack pointer is used in the initial setting process (S901) without saving the contents of each register used by the MPU 201 to the stack area or saving the value of the stack pointer. By setting a predetermined value (initial value), the process of S1001 can be started. Therefore, the control load of the main control device 110 can be reduced, and accurate control can be performed without the main control device 110 malfunctioning or running out of control.

Next, the jackpot control process (S1004) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 118. FIG. 118 is a flowchart showing this jackpot control process (S1004). This jackpot control process (S1004) is executed in the main process (see FIG. 117), and when the pachinko machine 10 is in the jackpot state of a special symbol, various effects according to the jackpot are executed, or the first identification is performed. This is a process for opening or closing the winning opening (large opening opening) 1000a, or opening or closing the specific area 4830.

In the jackpot control process (FIGS. 118, S1004), first, it is determined whether or not the jackpot of the special symbol is started (S1101). Specifically, if the processing of S218 of the special symbol variation processing (see FIG. 108) is executed and the start of the jackpot of the special symbol is set, it is determined that the jackpot of the special symbol is started. In the process of S1101, when the jackpot of the special symbol is started (S1101: Yes), the opening command is set (S1102), and this process is terminated.

On the other hand, in the process of S1101, when the jackpot of the special symbol is not started (S1101: No), it is determined whether the jackpot of the special symbol is in progress (S1103). The special symbol jackpots include those during which the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81 are displaying the special symbol jackpot (including during the special symbol jackpot game) and the special symbol. This includes the middle of a predetermined time after the jackpot game is completed. In the process of S1103, if the special symbol is not a big hit (S1103: No), this process is terminated as it is.

On the other hand, in the process of S1103, when it is determined that the special symbol is a big hit (S1103: Yes), the process of S1104 is executed. In the process of S1104, it is determined whether it is the start timing of a new round (S1104). If it is determined in the process of S1104 that it is the start timing of a new round (S1104: Yes), the jackpot operation setting process is executed (S1105).

Here, the jackpot operation setting process will be described with reference to FIG. 119 (S1105). FIG. 119 is a flowchart showing the contents of the jackpot operation setting process (S1105). In the jackpot operation setting process (FIG. 119, S1105), first, the opening operation corresponding to the number of rounds of the jackpot to be started is read from the set operation scenario (S1201).

The operation of the distribution device 4850 (distribution operation member 4851, solenoid 4852) is set based on the data read in S1201 (S1202). The opening operation of the opening / closing plate 1300 of the first variable winning device 6000 is set by the data read in the process of S1201 (S1203). After that, this process is terminated and the process returns to the jackpot control process. In the processing of S1202 and S1203, the operation of the distribution device 4850 (distribution operation member 4851, solenoid 4852) and the operation of the opening / closing plate 1300 are set for each round.

In this way, since each operation of the first variable winning device 6000 is set at each start of each round, even if an unexpected power failure occurs during the jackpot game, the jackpot game ends in the middle. Such problems can be suppressed.

Returning to FIG. 118, the description will be continued. When the processing of S1105 is completed, a round number command indicating the number of newly started rounds is set (S1106). After setting the number of rounds command, this process ends.

The round number command set here is stored in the ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203, and the voice lamp is included in the external output process (S1001) of the main process (see FIG. 117) executed by the MPU 201. It is transmitted to the control device 113. When the voice lamp control device 113 receives the round number command, the voice lamp control device 113 extracts the round number from the round number command. Then, a display round number command corresponding to the extracted round number is transmitted to the display control device 114. When the display control device 114 receives the display round number command, the third symbol display device 81 starts a new round effect.

On the other hand, in the process of S1104, when it is determined that it is not the start timing of a new round (S1104: No), it is determined whether it is the operation timing of the opening / closing plate 1300 or the distribution device 4850 (S1107). When it is determined that it is the operation timing (S1107: Yes), the opening / closing process is executed (S1108).

Here, the opening / closing process will be described with reference to FIG. 120 (S1108). FIG. 120 is a flowchart showing the contents of this opening / closing process (S1108). In the opening / closing process (FIG. 120, S1108), first, the opening / closing operation of the opening / closing plate 1300 or the distribution device 4850 that matches the operation timing based on the operation scenario is executed (S1211), and then the process returns to the jackpot control process (S1004). , End this process.

Returning to FIG. 118, the description will be continued. In the process of S1107, when it is determined that it is not the timing of the opening operation (S1107: No), it is determined whether it is the start timing of the ending effect (S1109). As for the start timing of the ending effect, the opening / closing plate 1300 is closed after 6 rounds, and the waiting time (storage flow path 1231 and the probability fluctuation determination unit 4800 is 3.0 seconds or more from the design of the ball ejection time). When it is required and 3 seconds) has elapsed in this control example, it is determined as the start timing of the ending effect. When it is determined that it is the start timing of the ending effect (S1109: Yes), the ending process is executed (S1110). After that, this process ends.

Here, the details of this ending process (S1110) will be described with reference to FIG. 121. FIG. 121 is a flowchart showing the contents of this ending process (FIG. 121, S1110). In the ending process (FIG. 121, S1110), first, it is determined whether or not the value of the remaining ball counter 203p is 0 (S1231). If it is determined that the value of the remaining ball counter 203p is not 0, a problem such as ball clogging has occurred, or the player illegally stops the ball stored in the storage flow path 1231 with a strong magnet or the like. An error command is set (S1232), and then an ending command is set (S1233).

The error command set here is stored in the ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203, and is controlled by the voice lamp in the external output process (S1001) of the main process (see FIG. 117) executed by the MPU 201. It is transmitted to the device 113. When the voice lamp control device 113 receives the error command, the voice lamp control device 113 selects the display mode of the error notification based on the information stored in the command storage area 223a of the RAM 223. Then, an error command corresponding to the selected error notification display mode is transmitted to the display control device 114. When an error command is received by the display control device 114, error notification is started in the third symbol display device 81.

In this control example, the characters "Discharge error. Please call the hall clerk" are displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and the player is controlled to notify the player that an abnormality has occurred.

Further, when the voice lamp control device 113 receives an error command, the lamp display devices 227 (see FIG. 93) such as the illumination units 29 to 33 (see FIG. 1) are strongly emitted in red, or the voice output device 226 is used. (See FIG. 4) is controlled so that the hall clerk notices the occurrence of an abnormality by outputting a loud voice (in this control example, the sound of a black telephone bell).

On the other hand, when it is determined that the value of the remaining ball counter 203p is 0, the ending command is set (S1233). The ending command set here is stored in the ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203, and is controlled by the voice lamp in the external output process (S1001) of the main process (see FIG. 117) executed by the MPU 201. It is transmitted to the device 113. When the voice lamp control device 113 receives the ending command, the voice lamp control device 113 selects the display mode of the ending effect based on the winning information stored in the command storage area 223a of the RAM 223. Then, a display ending command corresponding to the display mode of the selected ending effect is transmitted to the display control device 114. When the display ending command is received by the display control device 114, the ending effect is started in the third symbol display device 81.

When the processing of S1233 is completed, it is then determined whether the V flag 203s is set to on (that is, whether the sphere has passed through the specific area 4830) (S1234) and set to on (that is, the specific area 4830). (S1234: Yes), the value of the probability variation counter 203g is set to 80, the value of the time saving / medium counter 203h is set to 80, and then the V flag 203s is set to off. (S1236), the process returns to the jackpot control process (S1004), and this process ends.

On the other hand, in the process of S1234, when it is determined that the V flag 203s is not set to ON (that is, the sphere has not passed through the specific area 4830) (S1234: No), the value of the time saving / medium counter 203h is set. The setting is set to 100 (S1237), the process returns to the jackpot control process (S1004), and this process ends.

As described above, in the present embodiment, at the end of the jackpot game, it is determined whether the V flag 203s is on, and if it is on, a numerical value is set in the probability variation counter 203g. Therefore, at the end of the jackpot game, it is possible to determine whether the ball is passing through the specific area 4830 and set the probability variation. Therefore, it is possible to keep expecting the player to shift to the probabilistic game state until the jackpot game is completed.

Furthermore, if the ball can be passed through the specific area 4830 during the jackpot game, the probability variation game state is given after the jackpot game, so whether or not the ball passes through the specific area 4830 even during the jackpot game. You can play the game with interest.

Returning to FIG. 118, the description will be continued. If it is determined in the process of S1109 that it is not the start timing of the ending effect (S1109: No), the notification process is executed (S1111). Here, the details of the notification process (S1111) will be described with reference to FIG. 122. FIG. 122 is a flowchart showing the contents of this notification process (S1111).

In the notification process (S1111), first, it is determined whether the jackpot type of the jackpot game currently being executed is the jackpot k (S1251), and when it is determined that the jackpot type is not the jackpot k (S1251: No). , This process is terminated, and the process returns to the jackpot control process (S1004).

On the other hand, when it is determined that the jackpot type is jackpot k (S1251: Yes), it is determined whether the value of the notification counter 203u is greater than 0 (S1252). When it is determined that the value of the notification counter 203u is 0 (S1252: No), it is determined whether it is the end timing of the fourth round (S1253). The determination of the end timing of the fourth round is performed depending on the case where it is detected that 10 balls have been won or the case where it is determined that 30 seconds have passed in the fourth round. When it is determined that the end timing of the fourth round is reached (S1253: Yes), a counter value corresponding to 0.5 seconds is set in the notification counter 203u. After that, this process ends.

On the other hand, in the process of S1253, if it is determined that it is not the end timing of the fourth round (S1253: No), this process is terminated. Here, by setting a counter of 0.5 seconds in S1254, the notification counter 203u becomes 0 during 2 seconds of the interval time, which is the ball ejection time after the end of 4 rounds, and the voice "press" is heard. Is output.

Therefore, although the distribution device 4850 operates in the fifth round, the player must operate the operation button 300 at the interval time after the end of the fourth round, and the operation button 300 and the liquid crystal are attracted attention. It is possible to make it difficult to visually recognize the number of spheres remaining in the storage flow path 1231. As a result, it is possible to prevent whether or not the sphere passes through the specific region 4830 is identified from the number of remaining spheres. Therefore, for example, at the start of the fifth round, it is possible to make it difficult to determine whether or not the sphere has passed through the specific region 4830 by performing the above-mentioned control that makes it difficult to see the inside of the storage flow path 1231. The player can play the game with the expectation that the probabilistic game state will be granted (given) until the end of the jackpot game (and even after the end of the jackpot game).

In the present embodiment, by providing the notification counter 203u, the effect of attracting attention to the liquid crystal is performed over the fifth round from 1.5 seconds before the end of the interval time, but the effect is not limited to this, and four rounds. It may be executed continuously from the eyes.

On the other hand, in the process of S1252, when it is determined that the value of the notification counter 203u is larger than 0 (S1252: Yes), the value of the notification counter 203u is updated by -1 (S1255). It is determined whether the value of the updated notification counter 203u is 0 (S1256). When it is determined that the value of the notification counter 203u is 0 (S1256: Yes), the notification command is set (S1257). After that, this process ends. By this notification command, the voice lamp control device 113 executes the setting of the voice output of "press".

Returning to FIG. 118, the description will be continued. When the notification process (FIG. 122, S1111) is executed, the winning process is executed (S1112). Here, the winning process (S1112) will be described in detail with reference to FIG. 123. FIG. 123 is a flowchart showing the contents of this winning process (S1112).

In the winning process (FIG. 123, S1112), first, it is determined whether the round is valid (S1271). The round valid period is a period in which the round game is set, that is, a period from when the opening / closing plate 1300 is opened to when the opening / closing plate 1300 changes to the closed state and the interval period ends. If it is determined that the round is out of the valid period (S1271: No), this process ends.

On the other hand, when it is determined that the round is within the valid period (S1271: Yes), it is determined whether or not the detection sensor 1240 of the first specific winning opening 1000a has passed. When it is determined that the detection sensor 1240 of the first specific winning opening 1000a has passed (S1272: Yes), the winning number counter 203w is incremented by 1 and updated (S1273). After that, the process of S1274 is executed. On the other hand, when it is determined that the detection sensor 1240 has not passed (S1272: No), the process of S1274 is executed.

In the process of S1274, it is determined whether the value of the winning number counter 203w is 10 or more (S1274). When it is determined that the value of the winning number counter 203w is 10 or more (S1274: Yes), it is determined whether the closing flag 203q is on (S1277), and when it is determined that the closing flag 203q is on. (S1277: Yes), this process is terminated, and the process returns to the jackpot control process (S1004).

On the other hand, in the processing of S1277, when it is determined that the closing flag 203q is off (S1277: No), the closing flag 203q is set to on (S1278), and then the set value of the V winning valid counter 203t (S1278). In this control example, a numerical range corresponding to 3.0 seconds or less and (3-0.2 × number of stored balls) seconds or more) is set (S1279), and then the opening / closing plate of the first specific winning opening 1000a is set. The closure of 1300 (change of state in the closed state) is set (S1280), and then a numerical value (in this control example, a numerical value corresponding to 4.0 seconds) is set in the V winning valid counter 203t (S1281), and then The remaining ball timer flag 203m is set to ON (S1282). By setting the remaining ball timer flag 203m to ON, it can be determined that the ball is in the ball-spraying time after the opening / closing plate 1300 is closed. After that, this process is terminated, and the process returns to the jackpot control process (S1004).

As described above, the lower limit of the set value of the V winning valid counter 203t fluctuates based on the number of stored balls. As a result, when only three spheres are stored in the storage flow path 1231 (controlled so that the spheres do not pass through the specific area 4830), the spheres flow down due to dirt inside the storage flow path 1231 or the like. Even if the ball passes through the specific area 4830 due to a delay, the passage of the specific area 4830 can be invalidated as it is outside the range of the set value of the V winning counter 203t.

As a result, when a display effect different depending on the number of stored items in the storage channel 1231 is executed by the third symbol display device 81, the degree of expectation indicated by the display effect (the amount of prize balls paid out and the end of the jackpot game). It is possible to prevent a discrepancy between the degree of possibility of shifting to the high probability state of the special symbol later) and the actual game result.

On the other hand, in the process of S1274, when it is determined that the value of the winning number counter 203w is less than 10, it is determined whether the round time (30 seconds in this embodiment) has elapsed (S1275). When it is determined that the round time has elapsed (S1275: Yes), the processes of S1277 to S1282 are executed.

On the other hand, when it is determined that the round time has not elapsed (S1275: No), it is determined whether the opening / closing plate 1300 is closed halfway based on the operation scenario (S1276). Here, when it is determined that it is the timing to close halfway (S1276: Yes), the processes of S1277 to S1282 are executed, and when it is determined that it is not the timing to close halfway (S1276: No), this process is performed. It ends and returns to the jackpot control process (S1004).

Returning to FIG. 118, the description will be continued. When the winning process (FIG. 123, S1112) is executed, the abnormal process is executed (S1113). After that, this process ends. Here, the abnormality processing (S1113) will be described in detail with reference to FIG. 124. FIG. 124 is a flowchart showing the contents of this abnormality processing (S1113). In the abnormality processing (S1113), a processing for monitoring whether or not the specific area 4830 is illegally passed is executed.

In the abnormality handling (FIG. 124, S1113), first, it is determined whether or not the round is valid (S1301). If it is outside the round validity period (S1301: No), this process ends. On the other hand, when it is determined that the round is within the valid period (S1301: Yes), it is determined whether or not the game ball has passed through the discharge port 1150 (S1302). Whether or not the game ball has passed through the discharge port 1150 is determined by whether or not the passage of the game ball is detected by the specific area detection sensor 4860 (see FIG. 51) or the non-specific area detection sensor 4870 (see FIG. 51). Will be done.

When it is determined that the game ball has passed through the discharge port 1150 (S1302: Yes), the value of the discharge number counter 203x is incremented by 1 and updated (S1303). After that, the process of S1304 is executed. On the other hand, when it is determined that the game ball has not passed through the discharge port 1150 (S1302: No), the process of S1304 is executed.

In the process of S1304, it is determined whether the remaining ball timer flag 203m is on (S1304). When it is determined that the remaining ball timer flag 203m is off (S1304: No), this process ends.

On the other hand, when it is determined that the remaining ball timer flag 203m is on (S1304: Yes), the remaining ball timer 203n is incremented by 1 and updated (S1305) because it is in the period of the ball brushing time. The remaining ball timer 203n determines whether or not the upper limit value (various interval times in this control example) has elapsed (S1306). If it is determined that the value is not the upper limit (S1306: No), this process ends. On the other hand, when it is determined to be the upper limit value (S1306: Yes), the number of discharged balls (the number of spheres detected by the specific area detection sensor 4860 (see FIG. 51) and the non-specific area detection sensor 4870 (see FIG. 51)). It is determined whether or not the number of winnings (the value of the winning number counter 203w) matches the number of winning balls (the total value with the number of balls detected in 1307).

If it is determined that they match (S1307: Yes), the process of S1309 is executed. On the other hand, when it is determined that they do not match (S1307: No), the value obtained by subtracting the value of the discharge number counter 203x from the value of the winning number counter 203w is added to the remaining ball counter 203p (S1308), and the processing of S1309 is executed. To do.

In the process of S1309, it is determined whether it is the start timing of the ending effect (S1309). If it is not the start timing of the ending effect (S1309: No), the process of S1312 is executed.

On the other hand, when it is the start timing of the ending effect (S1309: Yes), it is determined whether the value of the remaining ball counter 203p is 0 (S1310). When the value of the remaining ball counter 203p is 0 (S1310: Yes), the process of S1312 is executed. On the other hand, when the value of the remaining ball counter is not 0 (S1310: No), an error command is set (S1311) because an abnormality has occurred in the ejection of the ball, and the process of S1312 is executed.

When the voice lamp control device 113 receives the error command, an error display (for example, a character of a winning number mismatch error is displayed) is displayed, and an error signal is output to the hall computer. Therefore, even if the jackpot type of the jackpot acquired later is the jackpot M or N, the game ball is illegally left in the storage flow path 1231 or the probability fluctuation determination unit 4800, and the game ball is illegally passed through the specific area 4830. Can be suppressed.

In this way, by controlling so as to notify the ball discharge error at the start timing of the ending effect, even if there is a difference between the number of balls entered and the number of discharged balls in the round game R of each round, the error notification is performed. You can play the game without any. As a result, it is possible to partially regulate the discharge of balls from the storage flow path 1231 in the interval between rounds, and to realize the playability of starting the next round with the balls stored in the storage flow path 1231. ..

Further, even if there is a difference between the number of balls entered and the number of ejected balls in the round game R of each round, the game can be executed without notifying an error, so that the period of the interval between rounds is set to 2 seconds (storage). It can be set to a shorter period (the period required to discharge the spheres stored in the flow path 1231).

The method of setting the ball discharge error command is not limited to this. For example, from the jackpot type, set a value that can occur normally as the difference between the number of balls entered and the number of ejected balls, and if the difference in the number is within the range of that value, the error command is not set and the difference in the number. However, if it is out of the range of the value, it may be controlled to set an error command. In this case, it is possible to determine that an error in ball discharge has occurred without waiting until the start timing of the ending effect, so that the occurrence of an abnormality can be detected at an early stage. As a result, when the ball discharge error is caused by fraudulent activity, early detection of fraudulent activity can be achieved.

In the process of S1312, the remaining ball timer flag 203m is set to off (S1312), and the remaining ball timer 203n is reset to the initial value 0 (S1313). After that, the winning number counter 203w and the discharging number counter 203x are reset to the initial values (S1314), and then this process ends.

Next, the storage control process (S1008) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 125. FIG. 125 is a flowchart showing this storage control process (S1008). This storage control process (S1008) is executed in the main process (see FIG. 117) and is a process for setting the state of the interference member 6930.

As described above, the interference member 6930 changes its state according to the operation of the operation button 300 by the player (S1403 to S1407) and the state changes at a preset timing (S1403 to S1407). There are S1408 to S1411), but both of them are included in the storage control process (S1008).

In the storage control process, first, it is determined whether the output flag 203k is on (S1401), and when it is determined that the output flag 203k is not on (that is, it is off) (S1401: No), the interference member 6930 It means that it is in the retracted state. Next, it is determined whether the operation of the operation button 300 is valid (S1402).

If it is determined that the period is valid (S1402: Yes), it is determined whether or not the player presses (operates) the operation button 300 (S1403). That is, it is determined whether or not the pressing detection signal is detected.

In the process of S1403, when it is determined that the pressing (operation) of the operation button 300 is not detected (that is, the pressing detection signal is not detected) (S1403: No), the interference member 6930 is kept in the retracted state as it is. In order to keep it, this process is terminated as it is.

On the other hand, when it is determined that the pressing (operation) of the operation button 300 is detected (that is, the pressing detection signal is detected) (S1403: Yes), the upper limit value setting process 1 of the operation counter is executed (S1404). Here, the upper limit value setting process 1 (S1404) of this operation counter will be described with reference to FIG. 126. FIG. 126 is a flowchart showing the contents of the upper limit value setting process 1 (S1404) of the operation counter. In the operation counter upper limit value setting process 1 (S1404), a process of setting an upper limit value different depending on the operation timing of the operation button 300 as an operation counter upper limit value is executed.

That is, in the operation counter upper limit value setting process 1 (S1404), the pressing (operation) of the operation button 300 is detected from the inter-round interval period after the inter-round interval period is started (that is, the pressing detection signal is output. The period until (detection) is subtracted, the value indicating the remaining period is set as the upper limit value of the operation counter 203j (S1421), this process is terminated, and the process returns to the storage control process (S1008).

Next, a button operation command is set (S1405). Then, in order to indicate that the interference member 6930 is in the overhang state, the extension flag 203k is set to ON (S1406), and the interference member 6930 is in the overhang state (extension state based on the operation of the operation button 300, extension). In order to notify the voice lamp control device 113 that the output state 1) has been reached, a storage state command corresponding to the overhanging state of the interfering member 6930 is set (S1407), this process is terminated, and storage control is performed. Return to the process (S1008).

On the other hand, when it is determined that the period is not valid (S1402: No), it is determined whether it is the operation start timing of the interference member 6930 based on the operation scenario (S1408). If it is determined that it is not the operation start timing of the interference member 6930 (S1408: No), this process is terminated and the process returns to the storage control process (S1008).

On the other hand, when it is determined that it is the operation start timing of the interference member 6930 (S1408: Yes), the operation counter upper limit value setting process 2 is executed (S1409). Here, the upper limit value setting process 2 (S1409) of this operation counter will be described with reference to FIG. 127. FIG. 127 is a flowchart showing the contents of the upper limit value setting process 2 (S1409) of the operation counter. In the operation counter upper limit value setting process 2 (S1409), a process of setting a preset upper limit value according to the operation scenario as an operation counter upper limit value is executed.

That is, in the operation counter upper limit value setting process 2 (S1409), first, it is determined whether or not it is the change timing of the interference member 6930 to the overhanging state based on the operation scenario (S1431). When it is determined that it is not the timing of change of the interference member 6930 to the overhanging state (S1431: No), this process is terminated and the process returns to the storage control process (S1008).

On the other hand, when it is determined that it is the timing of change of the interference member 6930 to the overhanging state (S1431: Yes), an appropriate value from the operation scenario (based on the operation scenario, the interference member 6930 is maintained in the overhanging state). The value corresponding to the period to be performed) is set to the upper limit value of the operation counter 203j (S1432), this process is terminated, and the process returns to the storage control process (S1008).

Next, in order to indicate that the interference member 6930 is in the overhanging state, the extension flag 203k is set to ON (S1410), and the interference member 6930 is in the overhanging state (overhanging state and overhanging state based on the operation scenario). In order to notify the voice lamp control device 113 that 2) has occurred, a storage state command corresponding to the overhanging state of the interference member 6930 is set (S1411), and this process is terminated.

The storage state command set here is stored in the ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203, and the voice lamp is included in the external output process (S1001) of the main process (see FIG. 117) executed by the MPU 201. It is transmitted to the control device 113. When the voice lamp control device 113 receives the storage state command corresponding to the overhang state, it outputs a display rear image change command for setting the back side type corresponding to the overhang state to the display control device 114. The display control device 114 changes the rear image based on the display rear image change command.

That is, for example, it is set so that the characters "passing ball is being stored" are displayed in the small area Ds1 (see FIG. 87 (a)). As a result, the player can easily recognize that the interference member 6930 is in the stored state.

On the other hand, in the process of S1401, when it is determined that the output flag 203k is on (S1401: Yes), the storage valve operation process for setting the operation of the interference member 6930 is executed (S1412). Here, the storage valve operation process (S1412) will be described with reference to FIG. 128. FIG. 128 is a flowchart showing the contents of this storage valve operation process (S1412). The storage valve operation process (S1412) is a process for setting the operation of the interference member 6930.

In the storage valve operation process (S1412), first, the solenoid 6910 is set to ON (S1441), and 1 is added to the operation counter 203j (S1442). Although not particularly shown, when the solenoid 6910 is already on, the process of S1441 is skipped and the process of S1442 is performed. Next, it is determined whether the value of the operation counter 203j is the upper limit value (S1443).

When it is determined that the value of the operation counter 203j is the upper limit value in the process of S1443 (S1443: Yes), the solenoid 6910 is set to off (S1444). Then, the output flag 203k is set to off (S1445), the value of the operation counter 203j is set to 0 (S1446), and this process is terminated. Further, in the process of S1443, when it is determined that the value of the operation counter 203j is not the upper limit value (S1443: No), this process is also terminated.

When the process of S1412 is completed, it is determined whether the output flag 203k is off (S1413), and if it is determined that the output flag 203k is not off (that is, it is on) (S1413: No), the present process is terminated. To do.

On the other hand, in the process of S1413, when it is determined that the output flag 203k is off (S1413: Yes), it means that the interfering member 6930 is in the retracted state, so that the interfering member 6930 is in the retracted state. In order to notify the voice lamp control device 113 of this, a storage state command corresponding to the retracted state of the interference member 6930 is set (S1414), and this process is terminated.

The storage state command set here is stored in the ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203, and the voice lamp is included in the external output process (S1001) of the main process (see FIG. 117) executed by the MPU 201. It is transmitted to the control device 113. When the voice lamp control device 113 receives the storage state command corresponding to the evacuation state, it outputs a display rear image change command for setting the back type corresponding to the evacuation state to the display control device 114. The display control device 114 changes the rear image based on the display rear image change command.

By executing this storage control process, the state of the interference member 6930 can be set according to the operation status of the operation button 300. As a result, it is possible to switch between a state in which the flow of the ball is restricted by the interference member 6930 at an arbitrary timing of the player and a state in which the regulation is released and the flow of the ball is allowed.

Further, by this storage control process, the interference member 6930 can be driven at a time other than the operation timing of the operation button 300. Therefore, a member that operates according to the operation status of the operation button 300 and a member that operates regardless of the operation of the operation button 300 can be composed of the same member.

Next, the V winning process (S1009) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 129. FIG. 129 is a flowchart showing this V winning process (S1009). This V winning process (S1009) is executed in the main process (see FIG. 117), and is a process for controlling the flow of the ball after the first specific winning opening 1000a is closed. ..

In the V winning process, first, it is determined whether or not the count start flag 203qa is on (S1501). When it is determined that the count start flag 203qa is not on (that is, it is off) (S1501: No), it is determined whether or not the closing flag 203q is on (S1502). When it is determined that the closing flag 203q is on (S1502: Yes), it is determined whether or not the current execution is the fifth round (S1503). If it is determined that it is the fifth round (S1503: Yes), then the count start flag 203qa is set to ON (S1504), and this process ends.

On the other hand, in the processing of S1502, when it is determined that the closing flag 203q is not on (that is, it is off) (S1502: No), and in the processing of S1503, it is determined that the current execution is not the fifth round. If this is the case (S1503: No), the present process is terminated as it is.

On the other hand, in the process of S1501, when it is determined that the count start flag 203qa is on (S1501: Yes), it means that it is near the timing at which the distribution operation member 4851 that opens and closes the specific area 4830 operates. , In order to determine whether the ball has normally passed through the specific area 4830, the closing counter 203r is updated by adding 1 (S1505), and then the V winning valid counter 203t is similarly subtracted by 1. Update.

Then, it is determined whether the value of the closed counter 203r after the update is a predetermined value (that is, whether the period in which the opening / closing plate 1300 is maintained in the closed state has elapsed) (S1507), and if it is a predetermined value (S1507). : Yes), the closing flag 203q is turned off and set (S1508), and then the process proceeds to S1509. On the other hand, if it is not a predetermined value (S1507: No), the process proceeds to S1509 as it is.

In the process of S1509, it is determined whether the value of the closing counter 203r is the upper limit value (4.0 seconds). When the value of the closing counter 203r is the upper limit value (S1509: Yes), it means that the value of the V winning valid counter 203t has become 0, so the count start flag 203qa is set to off (S1510). The closure counter is reset to 0 (S1511), and the process proceeds to S1512. On the other hand, if the value of the closing counter 203r is not the upper limit value (S1509: No), the process proceeds to S1512 as it is.

In this way, after the closing counter 203r reaches the upper limit value (that is, after 4.0 seconds have passed since the opening / closing plate 1300 was closed), the count start flag 203qa is turned off. The process of S1512 is not executed. That is, the processing of S1512 is executed only during the period from when the opening / closing plate 1300 is closed until 4.0 seconds have elapsed.

In the process of S1512, it is determined whether the sphere has passed through the specific area 4830 (that is, whether the sphere has been detected by the specific area detection sensor 4860). When it is determined that the sphere has not passed through the specific area 4830 (S1512: No), this process ends. On the other hand, when it is determined that the ball has passed through the specific area 4830 (S1512: Yes), it is determined whether the value of the V winning valid counter 203t is within the set value range (S1513).

In the process of S1513, when it is determined that the value of the V winning valid counter 203t is within the set value range (S1513: Yes), it means that the sphere has normally passed through the specific region 4830. , The V flag 203s is set to ON (S1514), and this process ends.

Immediately after the opening / closing plate 1300 is changed to the closed state, a value corresponding to 4.0 seconds is set in the V winning valid counter 203t, and the value is subtracted from the value. As described above, the set value of the V winning valid counter 203t is set as the timing at which the sphere stored in the storage flow path 1231 passes through the specific area 4830, and in this control example, it is 3.0 seconds. Hereinafter, it is set to a numerical range corresponding to (3-0.2 × number of stored balls) seconds or more.

Therefore, for example, when the ball passes through the specific area 4830 immediately after the opening / closing plate 1300 is closed (the value of the V winning valid counter 203 is larger than 3.0 seconds), the ball is out of the set value range. In this case, it is suspected that the ball stagnated near the lower end of the passage 4810 (stopped due to clogging or improper fastening of the ball), and the ball started to flow immediately after the opening / closing plate 1300 was closed. , It is controlled to notify an error.

Further, for example, when the ball passes through the specific area 4830 after a long time has passed since the opening / closing plate 1300 was closed (the value of the V winning valid counter 203 is less than (3-0.2 × number of stored balls) seconds). It is out of the set value range. In this case, there is a problem in the flow mode when the ball is discharged from the storage flow path 1231 (ball biting, stopping due to improper fastening of the ball, etc.), and the discharge timing of the ball from the storage flow path 1231 (opening / closing plate 1300 is closed) Since it is suspected that the ball started to be ejected later than the timing of the state), it is controlled to notify the error just in case.

In addition, as the fraud to stop the ball, it is assumed that the ball is fastened with a strong magnet, or the ball with the thread adhered is launched into the game area and the player operates the thread to operate the ball. .. In this pachinko machine 10, a magnetic sensor (not shown) is placed near the storage flow path 1231, and the storage flow path 1231 and the probability fluctuation determination unit 4800 are not reached by magnetic force against fraud caused by magnets. This is supported by arranging them apart from each other behind the glass unit 16 (see FIG. 1) or by making the glass unit 16 thicker.

Further, in response to fraud caused by a ball to which a thread is adhered, when the thread is laid to the communication passage 4810 via the storage flow path 1231 and the opening / closing plate 1300 is closed, the ball entry prevention unit 1331 When the thread is fixed and the opening / closing plate 1300 is opened by being sandwiched between the side wall of the accommodating portion 1230 and the portion holding the detection sensor 1240 (see FIG. 7), the regulating member 1600 and the discharging plate 1600 are discharged. The thread is fixed by being sandwiched between the outlet 1150 and the outlet. Therefore, even if the player operates the thread, the load can be prevented from being transmitted to the ball in the communication passage 4810. Therefore, for example, the thread held by the player is released at an arbitrary timing. Even if the ball is illegally targeted to pass through the specific area 4830, as described above, the thread is fixed in some places, so that it is easy to prevent the ball from illegally passing through the specific area 4830. Can be done.

On the other hand, if it is determined that the value of the V winning valid counter 203t is not within the set value range (S1513: No), some kind of fraud or a malfunction of the pachinko machine 10 is suspected, so an error command is set. (S1515), and this process is terminated. In this case, the V flag 203s is not turned on.

In this control example, the case where the occurrence of fraud or malfunction is determined by setting the set value of the V winning valid counter 203t based on the number of storages in the storage flow path 1231 has been described, but it is not necessarily limited to this. Not. For example, the occurrence of fraud or malfunction may be determined by detecting the discharge interval of the balls from the storage flow path 1231, or the occurrence of fraud or malfunction may be determined by detecting the period during which a predetermined number of balls are discharged. It may be determined, or if the number of spheres stored in the storage flow path 1231 is less than the required number (less than 4 spheres), the passage of spheres in the specific area 4830 is detected, and fraud or malfunction occurs. May be determined.

In the V winning process (S1009) in this control example, the case where the V flag 203s is set to ON only when it is determined that the value of the V winning valid counter 203t is within the set value has been described. It is not limited to this. For example, even if it is determined that the value of the V winning valid counter 203t is not included in the set value, the V flag 203s is set to on so that the game cannot be played until the error due to the error command is resolved. You may control it. The resolution of this error command is executed by turning off the power, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the RAM 203 may need to be cleared.

In this case, if the timing of the ball passing through the specific area 4830 is deviated due to a malfunction of the pachinko machine 10 instead of the player's fraud, the player is in a high probability state of the special symbol without any problem after it is discovered. You can play a game.

On the other hand, if the cause is fraudulent by the player, after the fraud is discovered, the player who commits the fraud is first stopped, the hall clerk clears RAM203, and the special symbol is placed in a low probability state. It is forcibly controlled so that it becomes. As a result, it is possible to prevent another customer from having an extra waiting time before starting the game on the pachinko machine 10 where the fraud has been performed.

In this control example, while the error command is set by S1515, for example, it is controlled so that the ball cannot be fired, or when the ball is fired, an error notification is given to the clerk to notice. It is controlled so that the prize ball is not paid out even if the fired ball enters the winning opening (for example, the function of the payout control device 111 is stopped), the ball is fired or the prize is won. It is controlled so that the game cannot be played by a control mode such as controlling the power to be turned off based on the ball entering the mouth.

<Regarding the control process of the audio lamp control device in the first embodiment>
Next, each control process executed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113 will be described with reference to FIGS. 130 to 140. The processing of the MPU 221 is roughly divided into a start-up process that is started when the power is turned on and a main process that is executed after the start-up process.

First, the start-up process executed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113 will be described with reference to FIG. 130. FIG. 130 is a flowchart showing this start-up process. This start-up process is started when the power is turned on.

When the start-up process is executed, first, the initial setting process associated with the power-on is executed (S2001). Specifically, a predetermined value is set in the stack pointer. After that, depending on whether or not the power-off processing flag is turned on, the power-off processing of S2120 (see FIG. 131) is caused by a momentary voltage drop (instantaneous power failure, so-called "instantaneous power failure") in this startup processing. ) Is started in the middle of execution (S2002). As will be described later with reference to FIG. 131, when the voice lamp control device 113 receives the power cutoff command from the main control device 110 (see S2114 of FIG. 131), the voice lamp control device 113 executes the power cutoff process of S2117. The power off processing flag is turned on before the power off processing is executed, and the power off processing flag is turned off after the power off processing is completed. Therefore, whether or not the power off processing of S2117 is in the middle of execution can be determined by the state of the power off processing flag.

If the power off processing flag is off (S2002: No), the start-up process this time is started after the power is completely cut off, or after a momentary power failure occurs and the power of S2120 is turned off. It was started after the execution of the process was completed, or it was started by resetting only the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 due to noise or the like (without receiving the power off command from the main control device 110). is there. Therefore, in these cases, it is confirmed whether or not the data in the RAM 223 is destroyed (S2003).

Confirmation of data corruption in RAM 223 is performed as follows. That is, data as a keyword of "55AAh" is written in the specific area of the RAM 223 by the processing of S2006. Therefore, the data stored in the specific area can be checked, and if the data is "55AAh", there is no data corruption in the RAM 223, and conversely, if the data is not "55AAh", the data corruption in the RAM 223 can be confirmed. If the data corruption of the RAM 223 is confirmed (S2003: Yes), the process proceeds to S2004 and the initialization of the RAM 223 is started. On the other hand, if the data corruption of the RAM 223 is not confirmed (S2003: No), the process proceeds to S2008.

If the start-up process is started after the power is completely cut off, the keyword "55AAh" is not stored in the specific area of the RAM 223 (the memory of the RAM 223 is lost due to the power off). (From), it is determined that the data of the RAM 223 is destroyed (S2003: Yes), and the process proceeds to S2004. On the other hand, the start-up process this time was started after the execution of the power-off process of S2120 was completed after a momentary power failure occurred, or was reset only to the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 due to noise or the like. Since the keyword "55AAh" is stored in the specific area of the RAM 223, the data of the RAM 223 is determined to be normal (S2003: No), and the process proceeds to S2008.

If the power off processing flag is on (S2002: Yes), the start-up process this time is after a momentary power failure occurs, and during the execution of the power off process of S2120, the voice lamp control device 113 The MPU 221 of the above was reset and started. In such a case, the storage state of the RAM 223 is not always correct because the power off processing is being executed. Therefore, in such a case, the control cannot be continued, so the process is shifted to S2004 and the initialization of the RAM 223 is started.

In the process of S2004, the storage area of the entire range of the RAM 223 is checked (S2004). As a check method, first, "0FFh" is written for each byte, and it is read for each byte to check whether or not it is "0FFh", and if it is "0FFh", it is determined to be normal. Such writing and confirmation for each byte are performed in the order of "0FFh", then "55h", "0AAh", and "00h". By this read / write check of RAM 223, all the storage areas of RAM 223 are cleared to 0.

If it is determined that the read / write check is normal for all the storage areas of the RAM 223 (S2005: Yes), the keyword "55AAh" is written in the specific area of the RAM 223 to set the RAM destruction check data (S2006). By confirming the keyword "55AAh" written in this specific area, it is checked whether or not the RAM 223 has data corruption. On the other hand, if an abnormality in the read / write check is detected in any storage area of the RAM 223 (S2005: No), an abnormality in the RAM 223 is notified (S2007), and an infinite loop is performed until the power is cut off. The abnormality of the RAM 223 is notified by the indicator lamp 34. The voice output device 226 may output voice to notify the abnormality of the RAM 223, or an error command may be sent to the display control device 114 to display an error message on the third symbol display device 81. It may be.

In the process of S2008, it is determined whether or not the power off flag is turned on (S2008). The power-off flag is turned on when the power-off process of S2117 is executed (see S2116 in FIG. 131). That is, since the power-off flag is turned on before the power-off process of S2117 is executed, the process of S2008 is reached with the power-off flag turned on because the start-up process is instantaneous. This is the case where the operation is started after the power failure of S2117 is completed after the power failure occurs. Therefore, in such a case (S2008: Yes), the work area of the RAM is cleared in order to initialize each process of the voice lamp control device 113 (S2009), the initial value of the RAM 223 is set (S2010), and then an interrupt is interrupted. Set the permission (S2012) and move to the main process. The work area of the RAM 223 refers to an area other than the area for storing commands and the like received from the main control device 110.

On the other hand, the reason why the process of S2008 is reached with the power off flag turned off is that the start-up process of this time is started after the power is completely shut off, for example, so that the process of S2008 via the processes of S2004 to S2006 This is a case where the processing is reached, or only the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 is reset due to noise or the like (without receiving the power off command from the main control device 110). Therefore, in such a case (S2008: No), S2009, which is the clearing process of the work area of the RAM 223, is skipped, the process is shifted to S2010, and the initial value of the RAM 223 is set (S2010). Next, the probability change state flag 223i is updated (S2011) according to the game state notified by the state command received from the main control device 110, interrupt permission is set (S2012), and the process proceeds to the main process. By updating the probability change state flag 223i based on the state command, the game state recognized by the main control device 110 and the game state recognized by the voice lamp control device 113 can be matched. Therefore, it is possible to appropriately execute the effect according to the game state.

The reason for skipping the clearing process of S2009 is that when the processing of S2008 is reached via the processing of S2004 to S2006, all the storage areas of the RAM 223 have already been cleared by the processing of S2004. When only the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 is reset due to noise or the like and the start-up process is started, the data in the work area of the RAM 223 is saved without being cleared, so that the voice lamp control device 113 This is because the control of

Next, with reference to FIG. 131, the main process executed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113 after the start-up process of the voice lamp control device 113 will be described. FIG. 131 is a flowchart showing this main process. When the main process is executed, it is first determined whether or not 1 msec or more has elapsed since the main process was started or the process of S2101 this time was executed (S2101), and 1 msec or more has elapsed. If not (S2101: No), the process proceeds to S2111 without performing the processes of S2102 to S2110. In the process of S2101, it is determined whether or not 1 msec has elapsed because S2102 to S2110 are mainly processes related to display (effect), and it is not necessary to edit in a short cycle (within 1 msec). This is because it is preferable to execute the command determination process of S2111, the variation display setting process of S2112, and the storage state monitoring process of S2113 in a short cycle. By executing the processing of S2111 in a short cycle, it is possible to prevent omission of reception of the command transmitted from the main controller 110, and by executing the processing of S2112 in a short cycle, the command received by the command determination processing Based on the above, settings related to variable effects can be made without delay. Further, since the processing of S2113 is executed in a short cycle, the setting regarding the storage state flag 223k and the storage upper limit flag 223m can be performed without delay based on the storage state.

If 1 msec or more has passed in the process of S2101 (S2101: Yes), first, various commands for the display control device 114 set by the processes of S2101 to S2113 are transmitted to the display control device 114 (S2102). ). Next, the output of each lamp is set so as to set the lighting mode of the indicator lamp 34 and the lighting mode of the lamp edited by the process of S2108 described later (S2103), and then the power-on notification process is executed (S2104).

The power-on notification process notifies that the power has been turned on for a predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds) when the power is turned on, and the notification is performed by the voice output device 226 or the lamp display device 227. Will be. Further, a command may be transmitted to the display control device 114 to notify that the power has been supplied on the screen of the third symbol display device 81. If the power is not turned on, the process shifts to the process of S2105 without performing the notification by the power on notification process.

In the process of S2105, the customer waiting effect process is executed, and then the hold quantity display update process is executed (S2106). In the customer waiting effect processing, when a predetermined time elapses when the pachinko machine 10 is not played by the player, a setting is made to switch the display of the third symbol display device 81 to the title screen, and the setting is displayed as a command. It is transmitted to the device 114. In the hold quantity display update process, a process of turning on the hold lamp (not shown) is performed according to the value of the first special symbol hold ball number counter 223b.

After that, the button input monitoring / effect processing is executed (S2107). This button input monitoring / effect processing monitors the input of whether or not the operation button 300 operated by the player is pressed in order to enhance the effect, and the effect corresponding to the case where the input of the operation button 300 is confirmed. It is a process to set to perform. In this process, when an operation by the player of the operation button 300 is detected, a display command corresponding to the operation of the operation button 300 is set in the display control device 114.

When the button input monitoring / effect processing is completed, the lamp editing process is executed (S2108), and then the sound editing / output processing is executed (S2109). In the lamp editing process, the lighting patterns of the illumination units 29 to 33 and the like are set so as to correspond to the display performed by the third symbol display device 81. In the sound editing / output processing, the output pattern of the voice output device 226 is set so as to correspond to the display performed by the third symbol display device 81, and the sound is output from the voice output device 226 according to the setting.

After the process of S2109, the liquid crystal effect execution management process is executed (S2110). In the liquid crystal effect execution management process, a time synchronized with the time required for the fluctuation display performed by the third symbol display device 81 is set based on the fluctuation pattern command transmitted from the main control device 110. The lamp editing process of S2108 is executed based on the time set in the liquid crystal effect execution monitoring process. The sound editing / output processing of S2109 is also executed at a time synchronized with the time required for the fluctuation display performed by the third symbol display device 81.

When the processing of S2110 is completed, a command determination process for performing processing according to the command received from the main control unit 110 is performed (S2111). Details of this command determination process will be described later with reference to FIGS. 132 to 135.

Next, the process proceeds to S2112. In the process of S2112, the variable display setting process is executed (S2112). In the variation display setting process, a display variation pattern command is generated and set based on the variation pattern command received from the main control device 110 in order to execute the variation effect on the third symbol display device 81. As a result, the command is transmitted to the display control device 114. The details of this variable display setting process will be described later with reference to FIG. 136.

Next, the process proceeds to S2113. In the process of S2113, the storage state monitoring process is executed (S2113). In the storage state monitoring process, a display variation pattern command is generated and set based on the variation pattern command received from the main control device 110 in order to execute the variation effect on the third symbol display device 81. As a result, the command is transmitted to the display control device 114. The details of this storage state monitoring process will be described later with reference to FIG. 137.

Then, when the storage state monitoring process is completed, it is determined whether or not the power failure occurrence information is stored in the work RAM 233 (S2114). The power-off occurrence information is stored when a power-off command is received from the main control device 110. If the power-off occurrence information is stored in the process of S2114 (S2114: Yes), both the power-off flag and the power-off processing in-progress flag are turned on (S2116), and the power-off process is executed (S2117). After executing the power off processing, the power off processing flag is turned off (S2118), and then the processing is looped infinitely. In the power cutoff process, the occurrence of the interrupt process is prohibited, and each output port is turned off to turn off the output from the audio output device 226 and the lamp display device 227. In addition, the memory of the power failure occurrence information is also deleted.

On the other hand, if the power failure occurrence information is not stored in the process of S2114 (S2114: No), it is determined whether or not the RAM 223 is destroyed based on the keyword stored in the RAM 223 (S2115), and the RAM 223 is destroyed. If not (S2115: No), the process returns to the process of S2101, and the main process is repeatedly executed. On the other hand, if the RAM 223 is destroyed (S2115: Yes), the processing is looped infinitely in order to stop the execution of the subsequent processing. Here, if it is determined that the RAM is destroyed and an infinite loop is performed, the main process is not executed, so that the display by the third symbol display device 81 does not change thereafter. Therefore, since the player can know that the abnormality has occurred, he / she can call a clerk in the hall or the like and ask for repair of the pachinko machine 10. Further, when it is confirmed that the RAM 223 is destroyed, the audio output device 226 or the lamp display device 227 may notify the RAM destruction.

Next, the command determination process (S2111) executed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113 will be described with reference to FIG. 132. FIG. 132 is a flowchart showing this command determination process (S2111). This command determination process (S2111) is executed in the main process (see FIG. 131) executed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113, and determines the command received from the main control device 110 as described above. It is a process for.

In the command determination process (FIG. 132, S2113), first, from the command storage area 223a provided in the RAM 223, the first unprocessed command received from the main control unit 110 is read and analyzed, and the variation pattern command is executed. It is determined whether or not the command has been received (S2201). The variation pattern command is a command for notifying the variation pattern (fluctuation time) of the special symbol, and the variation pattern (variation time) selected from the main control device 110 is the first special symbol and the second special symbol. It is output corresponding to each pattern.

When it is determined that the fluctuation pattern command has been received in the processing of S2201 (S2201: Yes), the fluctuation start flag 223e provided in the RAM 223 is set to ON (S2202), and the fluctuation pattern type is selected from the received fluctuation pattern command. Is extracted (S2203), and this process is terminated. The variation pattern type extracted here can be identified in the other memory area 223z of the RAM 223 as the variation pattern type of the special symbol for each special symbol type (corresponding first special symbol, second special symbol). When stored in a format and notified to the display control device 114 of the start of the variable display effect of the special symbol and the display mode of the variable display effect of the special symbol in the variable display setting process (see FIG. 136) described later. It is used (when setting a variation pattern command for displaying a special symbol).

On the other hand, when it is determined that the fluctuation pattern command has not been received (S2201: No), it is determined whether or not the stop type command has been received from the main controller 110 (S2204). If it is determined that a stop type command (either the special figure 1 stop type command or the special figure 2 stop type command) has been received (S2204: Yes), the flag corresponding to the received command type is set to on. (S2205). Specifically, when the special figure 1 stop type command is received, the stop type selection flag 223f corresponding to the first special symbol is set to on, and when the special figure 2 stop type command is received, the second special The stop type selection flag 223f corresponding to the symbol is set to on.

Next, the stop type (one of complete loss, reach loss, small hit, and big hit K, L, M, N, and k) is extracted from the received stop type command (S2206), and this process is terminated. The stop type extracted in the process of S2206 is stored in the voice lamp control device 113 in the other memory area 223z of the RAM 223 of the MPU 221. Then, it is referred to when the variation display setting process (see FIG. 136) described later is executed, and is used to set a display stop type command for notifying the display control device 114 of the stop type of the variation effect.

In the process of S2204, when it is determined that the stop type command has not been received (S2204: No), it is determined whether the stop command has been received from the main control unit 110 (S2207). When it is determined that the stop command has been received (S2207: Yes), the display stop command is set based on the received command (S2208), and this process is terminated.

Next, it is determined whether or not the reserved ball number command has been received from the main control device 110 (S2209). When it is determined that the hold ball number command has been received (S2209: Yes), the special symbol 1 hold ball number counter 203d or the special symbol 2 hold ball number counter 203e of the main controller 110 included in the received hold ball number command (That is, the number of reserved balls in the variable display of the first special symbol or the second special symbol) is extracted, and the corresponding counter value provided in the RAM 223 of the voice lamp control device 113 is matched with the extracted counter value. The counter value is updated (S2210), and this process ends. More specifically, when the value of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d is extracted, the extracted counter value is stored in the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 223b of the RAM 223, and the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 203e is stored. When the value of is extracted, the extracted counter value is stored in the second special symbol reserved ball number counter 223c.

Here, the hold ball number command is transmitted from the main control device 110 when the ball enters the first entry port 64 or the second entry port 640 (starting winning), so that the starting winning is won. By the processing of S2210, the values of the first special symbol reserved ball counter 223b and the second special symbol reserved ball counter 223c of the voice lamp control device 113 are set to the special symbol 1 hold of the main control device 110 each time. The values of the ball number counter 203d and the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 203e can be adjusted respectively.

Therefore, due to the influence of noise or the like, the value of the first special symbol reserved ball counter 223b or the second special symbol reserved ball counter 223c of the voice lamp control device 113 is the special symbol 1 reserved ball counter 203d of the main control device 110. Alternatively, even if the value deviates from the value of the special symbol 2 hold ball counter 203e, if the hold ball number command is notified based on the start winning, the first special symbol hold ball counter 223b of the voice lamp control device 113 Alternatively, the value of the second special symbol reserved ball number counter 223c can be modified to match the value of the special symbol 1 reserved ball counter 203d or the special symbol 2 reserved ball counter 203e of the main controller 110.

Further, in the process of S2209, when it is determined that the reserved ball number command has not been received (S2209: No), it is determined whether or not the winning information command has been received from the main control device 110 (S2212). If it is determined that the winning information command has been received in the processing of S2212 (S2212: Yes), the winning information command receiving processing is executed (S2213).

In this winning information command reception process (S2213), various flags to be referred to and various counters are set in order to set various effects executed by the third symbol display device 81. As a result, based on the lottery result of the pending special symbol, the special symbol executed before the change of the pending special symbol starts (that is, before the change of the target special symbol). During the variable display), it is possible to execute an effect showing the lottery result of the special symbol for which the winning information command is transmitted, and the lottery result of one special symbol is displayed to the player using the variable display period of a plurality of special symbols. Suggestion notification can be given, and the effect of production can be enhanced.

On the other hand, in the process of S2212, when it is determined that the winning information command has not been received (S2212: No), it is determined whether the notification command has been received from the main control device 110 (S2214). If it is determined that the notification command has been received (S2214: Yes), the display notification command is set (S2215), and this process ends.

If it is determined that the notification command has not been received in the processing of S2214 (S2214: No), the storage device-related command (storage state command corresponding to the evacuation state (S1414, see FIG. 125) or the overhanging state) is supported. It is determined whether or not the storage state command (S1407, see FIG. 125) has been received (S2216). If it is determined in S2216 that a storage device-related command has been received (S2216: Yes), the corresponding rear image for display is changed. A command is set (S2217), and this process ends.

In the process of S2216, if it is determined that the storage device-related command has not been received (S2216: No), then it is determined whether or not the operation command has been received (S2218). In the process of S2218, if it is determined that the operation command has been received (the operation (pressed down) of the operation button 300 has been performed) (S2218: Yes), the operation flag 223p is set to on (S2219), and this process is terminated. To do. This operation command is a command output when the operation button 300 is operated. On the other hand, when it is determined that the operation command has not been received (S2218: No), it is determined whether or not the hit-related command has been received (S2220).

If it is determined that the hit-related command has been received in the process of S2220 (S2220: Yes), the hit-related process is executed (S2221), and this process is terminated. The detailed contents of this hit-related process (S2221) will be described later with reference to FIGS. 133 to 135. On the other hand, in the process of S2220, if it is determined that the hit-related command has not been received (S2220: No), the process corresponding to the other command is executed (S2222), and this process is terminated.

In the processing of S2222, if the other command is a command used by the voice lamp control device 113, the processing corresponding to the command is performed, the processing result is stored in the RAM 223, and if the command is used by the display control device 114, the command is performed. Is set to be transmitted to the display control device 114. For example, a ball entry command set based on the ball entering each entry port provided in the game board 13. Is received, a process of accumulating the number of balls entered for each type of entry port into which the ball has entered is executed.

Next, the hit-related processing (S2221) executed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113 will be described with reference to FIG. 133. FIG. 133 is a flowchart showing a hit-related process (S2221). This hit-related process (S2221) is a process executed in the command determination process (see S2111 in FIG. 132) of the main process (see FIG. 131) executed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113, and is the main control. This is a process executed when a hit-related command is received from the device 110.

When the hit-related process (S2221) is executed, it is first determined whether or not the jackpot opening command has been received (S2501). If it is determined that the jackpot opening command has been received (S2501: Yes), then the display opening command is set (S2502), and this process ends. On the other hand, in the process of S2501, when it is determined that the opening command has not been received (S2501: No), it is determined whether or not the round number command has been received (S2503). If it is determined that the round number command has been received in the processing of S2503 (S2503: Yes), the round number accumulation counter 223h is updated based on the received command (S2504), and then the jackpot medium effect processing is executed (S2503). S2505), this process is terminated.

The jackpot middle effect processing (S2505) is a process for selecting the mode of the round effect (the effect of the round game R and the effect of the interval between rounds), and the details will be described later in FIG. 134.

In the process of S2503, if it is determined that the hit-related command received this time is not a round number command (S2503: No), then it is determined whether an interval command has been received (S2506). This interval command is a command output from the main control device 110 when each round in the jackpot is completed. If it is determined that an interval command has been received in the processing of S2506 (S2506: Yes), the number of completed rounds is calculated based on the value of the round number accumulation counter 223h, and the corresponding display interval command is set (S2506: Yes). S2507), this process is terminated.

On the other hand, in the process of S2506, when it is determined that the interval command has not been received (S2506: No), it is determined whether or not the jackpot ending command has been received (S2508). In the process of S2508, when the jackpot ending command is received (S2508: Yes), the display ending command is set (S2509), the value of the round number accumulation counter 223h is cleared (S2510), and this process is terminated. Further, in the process of S2508, when it is determined that the jackpot ending command has not been received (S2508: No), this process is also terminated.

Here, the jackpot middle effect processing (S2505) will be described with reference to FIG. 134. FIG. 134 is a flowchart showing the jackpot medium effect processing (S2505). In this jackpot middle effect processing (S2505), as an effect executed during the jackpot, in addition to the jackpot game effect for blessing the jackpot, the inside of the storage flow path 1231 is visually recognized by having the player operate the operation button 300. The first operation effect (operation effect (timing effect)) that enables the interference member 6930 and the second operation effect (operation effect (timing effect)) that changes the state of the interference member 6930 by causing the player to operate the operation button 300 are defined. The continuous firing effect that encourages the continuation of the firing of the balls even after the number of balls has been entered, the effect mode and the presence / absence of the effect are set, and each effect is executed.

When the jackpot middle effect processing (S2505) is executed, it is first determined whether or not the effect execution flag 223x is on (S2531). If it is determined that the effect executing flag 223x is on (S2531: Yes), the process proceeds to S2540. On the other hand, if it is determined that the effect executing flag 223x is not on (off) (S2531: No), then is the round number command received this time a round number command indicating the third round of the jackpot? Is determined (S2532).

In the process of S2532, if it is determined that the command is the number of rounds indicating the third round (S2532: Yes), the first operation effect flag 223wa is set to ON (S2533), and the process proceeds to S2534.

In the processing of S2534, it is determined whether the jackpot type of the jackpot currently being executed is the jackpot k (S2534), and if it is determined to be the jackpot k (S2534: Yes), the second operation effect flag 223wb is turned on. Is set to (S2535), and the process proceeds to S2536. On the other hand, if it is determined that the jackpot is not k (S2534: No), the process proceeds to S2536 as it is.

That is, if it is a jackpot k, both the first operation effect flag 223wa and the second operation effect flag 223wb are set to on, but if it is a jackpot other than the jackpot k (big hit K, L, M, N), , Only the first operation effect flag 223wa is set to on.

Here, the display effect round command setting process will be described with reference to FIG. 135 (S2536). FIG. 135 is a flowchart showing the contents of the display effect round command setting process (S2536). In the display effect round command setting process (S2536), first, it is determined whether the second operation effect flag 223wb is on (S2551), and if the second operation effect flag 223wb is on (S2551: Yes), The first display mode is set as information that can be read from the effect temporary storage area 223r (S2552), this process is terminated, and the process returns to the jackpot medium effect process (S2505).

In the first display mode, as a display effect round command, it is displayed that there is an operation effect in the next round and that there is an operation effect in the interval period after the end of the next round in the third round game R (FIG. 88 (a)), and the operation effect is displayed (see FIGS. 90 and 91) in the interval period after the end of the fourth round game R.

The display in the interval period after the end of the third round game R and the display in the fourth round game R are common regardless of the display mode.

On the other hand, when it is determined that the second operation effect flag 223wb is not on (that is, it is off) (S2551: No), it is determined whether the jackpot type of the jackpot currently being executed is jackpot L or M (S2553). ), When it is determined that the jackpot type is jackpot L or M (S2553: Yes), the second display mode is set as information that can be read from the effect temporary storage area 223r (S2554), and this processing is terminated. Then, the process returns to the big hit medium production process (S2505).

In the second display mode, as a display effect round command, there is an operation effect in the next round in the third round round game R (see FIG. 88 (a)), and the number of stored balls in the fourth round game. It is set to display information (see FIG. 88 (b)), and during the interval period after the end of the fourth round game R, a moving image (or still image) without an operation effect is set to be displayed. Will be done.

Here, the information about the number of stored balls is prepared so as to be displayable, and is based on the operation button 300 being operated at the success timing of the operation effect (for example, the timing when the display pointer 719 overlaps the bar display unit 717). Is controlled so that the display is executed.

The display in the interval period after the end of the third round game R and the display in the fourth round game R are common regardless of the display mode.

On the other hand, in the processing of S2553, when it is determined that the jackpot type is not jackpot L or M (that is, jackpot K, N, k) (S2553: No), the information can be read from the effect temporary storage area 223r. , The third display mode is set (S2555), this process is terminated, and the process returns to the jackpot middle effect process (S2505).

In the third display mode, as a display effect round command, in the third round game R, there is an operation effect in the next round, and a character urging the ball to be launched toward the first specific winning opening 1000a is displayed. (See FIG. 88), and during the interval period after the end of the fourth round game R, a moving image (or a still image) without an operation effect is set to be displayed.

The display in the interval period after the end of the third round game R and the display in the fourth round game R are common regardless of the display mode.

As described above, the display of the third round round game R and the fourth round round game R is collectively set as a display effect round command.

It will be described back to FIG. 134. After the processing of S2536, the effect information is read from the effect temporary storage area 223r, and the display effect round command for the display effect of the third round round game R and the fourth round round game R is set (S2537). The effect executing flag 223x is set to on (S2538), the first operation effect flag 223wa and the second operation effect flag 223wb are set to off (S2539), and this process is terminated.

Although details are not shown, the process of S2539 is configured to be skipped if the first operation effect flag 223wa or the second operation effect flag 223wb is already set to off. doing. As a result, it is possible to prevent unnecessary processing from being executed.

On the other hand, in the process of S2532, if it is determined that the command is not the round number command indicating the third round (S2532: No), then it is determined whether the round number command received this time is the fourth round of the jackpot (S2532: No). S2540).

If it is determined in the process of S2540 that the command is the number of rounds indicating the fourth round (S2540: Yes), a display command indicating that the fourth round has been reached is set. Then, since the display mode of the fourth round has already been selected as described above, this process is terminated in order to avoid selecting another display mode in duplicate, and the process returns to the hit-related process (S2221).

On the other hand, in the processing of S2540, if it is determined that the round number command received this time is not the fourth round of the jackpot (S2540: No), then the round number command received this time is the fifth round of the jackpot. (S2541).

In the process of S2541 when it is determined that the command is the number of rounds indicating the fifth round (S2541: Yes), the effect executing flag 223x is set to off (S2542), and the first input flag 223wc and the second input flag 223wc and the second are described later. The input flag 223wd is set to off (S2543), and the process proceeds to S2547. On the other hand, if it is determined that the command is not the number of rounds command indicating the fifth round in the process of S2541 (S2541: No), the process proceeds to the process of S2544.

In the process of S2544, it is determined whether the number of rounds command received this time is the sixth round of the jackpot (S2544). In the process of S2544, when it is determined that the command is the number of rounds indicating the sixth round (S2544: Yes), it is determined whether the jackpot type is jackpot K, M or k (S2545).

When it is determined that the jackpot type is jackpot K, M or k (S2545: Yes), a continuous firing round command for display is set (S2546), this process is terminated, and the process returns to the hit-related process (S2221). ..

The continuous firing round command for display is set to include a display (see the small area Ds3 in FIG. 92B) that prompts the ball to continue firing without stopping as a display effect round command. .. This display is executed only in the jackpot type (big hit K, M or k, see FIG. 94 (b)) in which an excess prize can be expected in the round game R of the sixth round. Therefore, the player can increase the possibility of excess winning by continuing to shoot the ball according to the display.

On the other hand, in the processing of S2544, when it is determined that the command is not the number of rounds command indicating the sixth round (S2544: No), or in the processing of S2545, the jackpot type is not jackpot K, M or k (that is, jackpot L, If it is determined (S2545: No), a display round number command corresponding to the received round number is set (S2547), and this process is terminated.

Therefore, in this control example, when the 1st, 2nd, 5th rounds, and the 6th round number command when the jackpot type is jackpot L, N are received, the display round number command is set by the processing of S2547. To. On the other hand, when another round number command is received, a display effect round command or a display continuous firing round command is set. In this way, by changing the display of the round game R according to the jackpot type and the number of rounds, the jackpot game can be advanced without boring the player.

Various display round number commands and the like (display round number command, display effect round command, display continuous firing round command) set here are stored in the ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 223, and are stored in the MPU221. Is transmitted to the display control device 114 in the command output process (S2102) of the main process (see FIG. 131) executed by. When the display control device 114 receives various display round number commands and the like (display round number command, display effect round command, display continuous firing round command), the third symbol display device 81 starts a new round effect. To do.

As described above, in the present embodiment, the current number of rounds is determined by the counter value of the round number cumulative counter 223h, and the content of the effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is changed. Other configurations may be used. For example, by including information indicating the current number of rounds in the number of rounds command, it is possible to eliminate the process of adding the counter value of the round number cumulative counter 223h.

Further, although the display mode of the 4th round is also selected when the 3rd round number command is acquired, other configurations may be used, for example, the 3rd round number command is acquired. The control equivalent to the control performed when the command is performed may be repeatedly performed when the round number command for the fourth round is acquired. Further, for example, when the third round number command is acquired, only the display mode is set, and when the fourth round number command is acquired, the display mode is selected. You may.

As described above, in the present embodiment, when the jackpot is started, at the time of the round (3 rounds) before the round (4 rounds) in which the timing effect (operation effect) is actually executed, the next A notice effect is executed to announce that the timing effect (operation effect) will be executed in the round (see FIG. 88 (a)). Then, the timing effect (operation effect) is executed (see FIG. 88 (b)).

In this way, since the advance notice effect is executed in the round before the timing effect (operation effect) is executed, it is possible to inform the player in advance that the effect of operating the operation button 300 is executed. it can. In addition, since the advance notice effect is executed only in the round before the timing effect (operation effect) is executed, the timing effect (operation effect) is not executed even though the advance notice effect is executed. Can be prevented.

In the present embodiment, the timing effect (operation effect) is executed in a predetermined number of rounds during the jackpot, but other configurations may be used, for example, in the storage flow path 1231. When it is determined that a predetermined number (for example, 3) of balls have been stored, the timing effect (operation effect) may be executed in the next round. As a result, the player can be made to play the game of storing the ball in the storage flow path 1231 more positively.

Next, the variation display setting process (S2112) executed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113 will be described with reference to FIG. 136. FIG. 136 is a flowchart showing this variation display setting process (S2112). This variation display setting process (S2112) is one process (see FIG. 131) executed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113. As described above, in the variation display setting process (see FIG. 136), the first special symbol is based on the variation pattern command received from the main control device 110 in order to display the variation display effect on the third symbol display device 81. Alternatively, a process of generating a display variation pattern command of the second special symbol and transmitting the command to the display control device 114 is executed. Further, based on the extracted stop type (complete loss, reach loss, jackpot), a process of setting a display stop type command for notifying the display control device 114 of the stop type is executed.

In the variation display setting process (S2112 in FIG. 136), first, it is determined whether the variation start flag 223e provided in the RAM 223 is set to ON (S2701). Then, when it is determined that the fluctuation start flag 223e is off (S2701: No), the fluctuation pattern command has not been received from the main control device 110, so the process proceeds to S2706. On the other hand, when it is determined that the fluctuation start flag 223e is on (S2701: Yes), the detailed mode of the fluctuation display of the special symbol this time is determined based on the fluctuation pattern command received from the main control device 110. Each process of S2702 to S2705 for the purpose is executed.

More specifically, first, the fluctuation start flag 223e is set to off (S2702), then the extracted fluctuation pattern is acquired (S2703), the display fluctuation pattern command is set (S2704), and then the corresponding variation pattern is set. 1 is subtracted from the value of the special symbol reserved ball counter (1st special symbol reserved ball counter 223b or 2nd special symbol reserved ball counter 223c), and the winning information included in the command storage area is based on the subtracted value. The data in the storage area is shifted (S2705), and the process shifts to the process of S2706.

In the process of S2706, it is determined whether the stop type selection flag 223f of the RAM 223 is set to ON (S2706). Then, when it is determined that the stop type selection flag 223f is off (S2706: No), the present process is terminated as it is. On the other hand, in the process of S2706, when it is determined that the stop type selection flag 223f is on (S2706: Yes), the stop type selection flag 223f is set to off (S2707), and then the command determination process (FIG. 132). In the process of S2206 of (see), the extracted stop type is acquired (S2708), and the acquired stop type is set (S2709). Next, based on the set stop type, a display stop type command for notifying the display control device 114 of the stop type is set (S2710), and this process is terminated.

Next, the storage state monitoring process (S2113) will be described with reference to FIG. 137. FIG. 137 is a flowchart showing this storage state monitoring process (S2113). This storage state monitoring process (S2113) is one of the main processes (see FIG. 131) executed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113, and the spheres are stored in the storage flow path 1231 (see FIG. 51). It is a process for determining that.

Here, in this control example, as shown in FIG. 51, a storage flow path 1231 is provided as a part of the storage device capable of storing balls on the game board 13, and a maximum of 10 balls can be stored. It is configured in.

A detection sensor 1240 is arranged at the upstream end of the storage flow path 1231, and the detection sensor 1240 detects the entry of a ball into the storage flow path 1231. Further, the sphere discharged from the downstream side of the storage flow path 1231 is detected by the specific area detection sensor 4860 or the non-specific area detection sensor 4870.

In the storage state monitoring process (S2113), first, it is determined whether the ball has passed through the first specific winning opening 1000a (that is, whether the passing of the ball has been detected by the detection sensor 1240) (S2801), and the first specific winning opening When the sphere has passed 1000a (S2801: Yes), 1 is added to the value of the storage counter 223n (S2802), and the process proceeds to S2803. On the other hand, if the ball has not passed through the first specific winning opening 1000a (S2801: No), the process proceeds to S2803.

In the process of S2803, it is determined whether the ball has passed through the discharge port 1150 (that is, whether the ball has been detected by the specific area detection sensor 4860 or the non-specific area detection sensor 4870) (S2803), and the discharge port 1150 is used as the ball. When it is determined that has passed (S2803: Yes), the value of the storage counter 223n is subtracted by 1 (S2804), and the process proceeds to S2805. On the other hand, when it is determined that the ball has not passed through the discharge port 1150 (S2803: No), the process proceeds to S2805.

In the processing of S2805, when it is determined whether the value of the storage counter 223n is 4 or more (S2805) and when it is determined that the value of the storage counter 223n is 4 or more (S2805: Yes), the storage state flag 223k is turned on. (S2806). When it is determined that the storage state flag 223k is not on (that is, it is off) (S2806: No), the storage state flag 223k is set to on (S2807), and the display median command is set (S2808). ), The process proceeds to S2812. On the other hand, when it is determined that the storage state flag 223k is on in the processing of S2806 (S2806: Yes), the process proceeds to the processing of S2812.

On the other hand, in the process of S2805, when it is determined that the value of the storage counter 223n is not 4 or more (that is, 3 or less) (S2805: No), it is determined whether the storage state flag 223k is on (S2805: No). S2809). When it is determined that the storage status flag 223k is on (S2809: Yes), the storage status flag 223k is set to off (S2810), a display shortage command is set (S2811), and the process proceeds to S2812. .. On the other hand, in the process of S2809, when it is determined that the storage state flag 223k is not on (that is, it is off) (S2809: No), the process proceeds to the process of S2812.

In the processing of S2812, if it is determined whether the value of the storage counter 223n is 10 (S2812) and if it is determined that the value of the storage counter 223n is 10 (S2812: Yes), the storage upper limit flag 223m is on. (S2813). When it is determined that the storage upper limit flag 223m is not on (that is, it is off) (S2813: No), the storage upper limit flag 223m is set to on (S2814), and the display full tank command is set (S2815). ), End this process. On the other hand, in the process of S2813, if it is determined that the storage state flag 223k is ON (S2813: Yes), this process is terminated as it is.

On the other hand, in the processing of S2812, when it is determined that the value of the storage counter 223n is not 10 (that is, 9 or less) (S2812: No), it is determined whether the storage upper limit flag 223m is on (S2816). ). When it is determined that the storage upper limit flag 223m is on (S2816: Yes), the storage upper limit flag 223m is set to off (S2817), a dissatisfaction command for display is set (S2818), and this process is terminated. On the other hand, in the process of S2816, if it is determined that the storage upper limit flag 223 m is not on (that is, it is off) (S2816: No), the present process is terminated as it is.

As described above, the settings of the storage state flag 223k and the storage upper limit flag 223m are configured to be updated at any time based on the detection results of the detection sensor 1240, the specific area detection sensor 4860, and the non-specific area detection sensor 4870.

As described above, in the storage state monitoring process (S2113) in the present embodiment, the storage status of the spheres in the storage flow path 1231 is determined, and various flags (storage state flag 223k, storage upper limit flag 223m) are set. Therefore, the voice lamp control device 113 can perform an effect based on the storage state of the storage flow path 1231.

In the above description, the number of balls entered in the storage channel 1231 based on the detection result of the detection sensor 1240 and the number of discharged balls based on the detection results of the specific area detection sensor 4860 and the non-specific area detection sensor 4870. The number of is calculated, but it is not limited to this.

For example, a sensor for detecting the presence or absence of a sphere is arranged at an arbitrary position in the storage flow path 1231, and the sphere is stored downstream of the sensor based on the lapse of a predetermined period in the state where the sphere is detected by the sensor. It may be determined that there is. As an example, when a sensor is arranged at a position where the third ball from the downstream stops, the sensor causes three balls including two balls arranged on the downstream side of the storage flow path 1231. It can be determined that it is stored in.

Further, if the detection of the ball by the sensor is continued even after the opening / closing plate 1300 is closed, it can be suspected that the ball is illegally stopped. Therefore, it is illegal to notify the error. Can be detected early. That is, the sensor that detects the spheres can be used for both detecting the number of spheres stored in the storage flow path 1231 and detecting fraud.

Next, the lamp output process (S2103) will be described with reference to FIG. 138. FIG. 138 is a flowchart showing this lamp output process (S2103). This lamp output process (S2103) is one process (see FIG. 131) executed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113, and sets a lamp lighting command transmitted to the lamp display device 227. It is a process for.

Here, in this control example, as the lamp display device 227 (see FIG. 93), in addition to the above-described configuration, the decorative lamp 227a (described above) used for the effect and the like provided throughout the pachinko machine 10. (Including the illuminated parts 29 to 33, the indicator lamp 34, etc.) and the lining front plate 1200 (see FIG. 5) provided so as to cover the storage flow path 1231, the inside of the lining front plate 1200 is A transmission lamp 227b (see FIG. 86) for making the transmission state visible to the player and another lamp 227z are provided.

When the lamp output process (S2103) is executed, it is first determined whether or not the current state is within a predetermined period (30 seconds) after the start-up process of the voice lamp control device 113 is executed (S2901). Here, a predetermined period is measured using a timer (not shown) timed by the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113. If it is determined that the time is within 30 seconds in the process of S2901 (S2901: Yes), the transmission lamp lighting command (strong) is set (S2903), and the process proceeds to the process of S2905.

When the transmission lamp lighting command (strong) is set, all of the transmission lamps 227ba to 227be are controlled to be lit (intensity).

Here, in this control example, the lining front plate 1200 is provided so that it is possible to configure a state in which it is difficult for the player to visually recognize the internal state of the storage flow path 1231 and the operating state of the interference member 6930 in the normal game state. There is. As described above, the lining front plate 1200 is configured to change from a shielded state to a transmitted state by irradiating a predetermined light (light of a transmitting lamp) from the back surface.

Then, during a predetermined period (a predetermined period after the start-up process is executed) after the power is turned on to the game machine, the transmission lamp is lit regardless of the game state. As a result, immediately after the power is turned on to the pachinko machine 10, that is, at the timing when the clerk inspects the pachinko machine 10, the inside of the storage flow path 1231 covered by the lining front plate 1200 can be easily visually recognized. it can.

On the other hand, in the process of S2901 when it is determined that the current state is not within a predetermined period (30 seconds) after the start-up process of the voice lamp control device 113 is executed (after the predetermined period (30 seconds) has elapsed) ( S2901: No), then it is determined whether the detection sensor 1240 has detected the passage of the ball (S2902). In the process of S2902, when the detection sensor 1240 detects the passage of a ball (S2902: Yes), a transmission lamp lighting command (strong) is set so that the player can visually recognize the ball that has passed the detection sensor 1240 (strong). S2903), the process proceeds to S2906.

In this case, the transmission lamp lighting command is a transmission lamp 227b for a sufficient time (for example, 2.0 seconds) for the ball to pass through the area covered by the lining front plate 1200 in the storage flow path 1231. Is set to light up, and while the permeation state is maintained during the period when the ball flows down the storage flow path 1231, the permeation state can be canceled after the ball is stopped. It is not limited to this. For example, the transmission lamp 227b is turned off (shielded from the transmission state) on the condition that the ball has passed through the discharge port 1150 or the specific area detection sensor 4860 or the non-specific area detection sensor 4870 has detected the passage of the ball. It may be configured to change to a state). As a result, the lining front plate 1200 can be maintained in a permeated state for the period during which the spheres remain in the storage flow path 1231.

In the process of S2902, if the detection sensor 1240 does not detect the passage of the ball (S2902: No), then it is determined whether the transmission lamp-related command is set (S2904), and the transmission lamp-related command is set. If this is the case (S2904: Yes), a predetermined transmission lamp lighting command is set (S2905), and the process proceeds to S2906. On the other hand, if the transmission lamp-related command is not set (S2904: No), the process proceeds to S2906 as it is.

The setting of the transmission lamp-related command is mainly executed by the ball number confirmation process (S3004) described later in FIG. 140.

Returning to FIG. 138, the description will be continued. In the process of S2906, a decorative lamp lighting command is set according to the current state (game state) (S2906), and this process is terminated. The decorative lamp lighting command is set in various ways according to the fluctuation pattern to be executed, the current game state, and the like.

Next, the button input monitoring / effect processing (S2107) will be described with reference to FIG. 139. FIG. 139 is a flowchart showing the contents of the button input monitoring / effect processing (S2107). In this button input monitoring / effect processing (2107), the input of whether or not the operation button 300 operated by the player is pressed in order to enhance the effect is monitored, and when the input of the operation button 300 is confirmed. This is a process for setting the corresponding effect. In this process, when an operation on the operation button 300 is detected, an operation button effect command for notifying the display control device 114 that the operation button 300 has been operated is set, and various flags based on the operation content are set. The settings are made.

Specifically, first, during the round game R of the fourth round, it is determined whether or not the operation timing of the operation button 300 during the period during which the timing effect (operation effect) is executed is the pressing success period. You can set a transparent lamp lighting command to execute the lamp lighting based on the judgment result, or set a display command to display the accompanying ball number grasping effect (success effect, failure effect, impossible effect). (See FIG. 140). Secondly, in the interval period after the end of the fourth round game R, the operation timing of the operation button 300 during the period in which the timing effect (operation effect) is executed is either the pressing success period or the pressing success period. It is determined whether the period is the push-down failure period, and a display command for displaying the effect (great success effect, success effect, failure effect) based on the result is set.

When the button input monitoring / effect processing (S2107) is executed, it is first determined whether or not the effect execution flag 223x is set to ON (S3001). Then, in the process of S3001, when it is determined that the effect execution flag 223x is on (S3001: Yes), then it is determined whether the jackpot type of the jackpot currently being executed is the jackpot k (S3002). .. In the processing of S3002, if it is determined that the jackpot is k (S3002: Yes), it is determined whether it is an interval period (S3003), and if it is an interval period (S3003: Yes), the process proceeds to S3005. On the other hand, in the processing of S3002, when it is determined that the jackpot is not k (that is, the jackpot is K, L, M, N) (S3002: No), or in the processing of S3003, it is not in the interval (that is, the round game). If it is determined (S3003: No), the number of balls confirmation process is executed (S3004), and this process is terminated.

Here, the number of balls confirmation process (S3004) executed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113 will be described with reference to FIG. 140. FIG. 140 is a flowchart showing a ball number confirmation process (S3004). This ball number confirmation process (S3004) is a process executed in the button input monitoring / effect process (see S2107 in FIG. 139) of the main process (see FIG. 131) executed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113. is there.

This ball number confirmation process (S3004) monitors the input of whether or not the operation button 300 operated by the player is pressed in order to enhance the effect, and corresponds to the case where the input of the operation button 300 is confirmed. This is a process for setting the effect. In this process, when an operation on the operation button 300 is detected, various flags are set based on the operation content, a transparent lamp lighting command for executing lamp lighting is set, and the like, as described above. A display command for displaying the accompanying effect of grasping the number of balls (success effect, failure effect, impossible effect) is set.

When the number of balls confirmation process (S3004) is executed, first, it is determined whether the first input flag 223wc is on (S3101), and when it is determined that the first input flag 223wc is on (S3101: Yes). Since the transmission lamp lighting command and the display ball number grasping related command have already been set, this process is terminated as it is, and the process returns to the button input monitoring / effect process (S2107).

On the other hand, in the process of S3101, when it is determined that the first input flag 223wc is not on (that is, is off) (S3101: No), then it is determined whether the operation (pressing down) of the operation button 300 is detected. (S3102). When the operation (pushing down) of the operation button 300 is detected (S3102: Yes), it is determined whether or not the number of balls is within the grasping period (S3103).

Here, the ball number grasping period means a period in which the display pointer 719 coincides with the bar display unit 717 at least in part in the timing effect (operation effect) described above (see FIG. 88 (b)). The length of this ball number grasping period can be adjusted according to the relationship between the size and operating speed of the display pointer 719 and the width of the bar display unit 717.

In this control example, the display pointer 719 is a circle with a diameter of 3 [cm], its operating speed is 20 [cm / s], and the width of the bar display unit 717 is 1 [cm]. In this case, the period for grasping the number of balls is 0.2 [s] because it is the same as the time for the display pointer 719 to move by 4 [cm].

In the process of S3103, when it is determined that the number of balls is within the period (S3103: Yes), the command for success in grasping the number of display balls is set (S3104), and the transmission lamp lighting command (strong / long) is set (S3105). ), The process proceeds to S3111.

Here, when the display ball number grasping success command is set, the display prompting the grasping of the number of balls stored in the storage flow path 1231 (for example, the character display "Attention to the attacker !!") is displayed as the third symbol. It is executed in the device 81, "good" is displayed as the result display mode 720, and the button display mode 715 schematically showing the operation button 300 is changed to the pressed state mode (see FIG. 88 (b)).

Further, the transmission lamp lighting command (strong / long) is set so that the transmission lamps 227ba to 227be are lit at least from the fourth round round game R to the fifth round round game R.

On the other hand, in the process of S3103, when it is determined that the operation button 300 is not within the period of the number of balls (that is, the operation of the operation button 300 is executed at the timing when the display pointer 719 and the bar display unit 717 are out of alignment (see FIG. 89)). (S3103: No), the command for failing to grasp the number of display balls is set (S3106), the transmissive lamp lighting command (medium / long) is set (S3107), and the process proceeds to S3111.

Here, when the display ball number grasping failure command is set, the display prompting to grasp the number of balls stored in the storage flow path 1231 is not displayed, "bad" is displayed as the result display mode 720, and the operation is performed. The button display mode 715 schematically showing the button 300 is changed to the pressed state mode (see FIG. 89).

Further, the transmission lamp lighting command (medium / long) is set so that only the transmission lamp 227ba is lit at least from the fourth round round game R to the fifth round round game R.

On the other hand, when it is determined that the operation of the operation button 300 is not detected in the process of S3102 (S3102: No), the process proceeds to the process of S3108. In the process of S3108, it is determined whether or not the time limit (in this control example, 3 seconds from the start of the fourth round game R) has elapsed (S3108). When it is determined that the time limit has passed (S3108: Yes), a command for not grasping the number of display balls is set (S3109), a transmission lamp lighting command (weak / short) is set (S3110), and the process proceeds to S3111. Transition. On the other hand, in the process of S3108, if it is determined that the time limit has not elapsed (less than 3 seconds from the start of the round game R in the fourth round), this process is terminated and the button input monitoring / effect process (S2107). ) Return.

Here, when the command for not grasping the number of display balls is set, the display prompting to grasp the number of balls stored in the storage flow path 1231 is not displayed, and the result display mode 720 (see FIG. 89) is not displayed, and the operation is performed. The button display mode 715 schematically showing the button 300 also does not change (see FIG. 88 (a)).

Further, the transmission lamp lighting command (weak / short) is set so that the transmission lamps 227ba to 227be are turned off in the subsequent round game R.

As described above, in this control example, the player can obtain the player by operating the operation button 300 rather than not operating the operation button 300 from the display on the third symbol display device 81 and the lighting mode of the transmission lamp 227b. It is controlled so that the profit is large. Further, when operating the operation button 300, it is better to operate the operation button 300 during the ball number grasping period (0.2 seconds in this control example) than to perform the operation at other timings, the third symbol display device 81. It is controlled so that the profit obtained by the player is increased from the display in the above and the lighting mode of the transmission lamp 227b.

Therefore, the player can improve the motivation to operate the operation button 300 during the fourth round game R, and can concentrate on the operation. Then, the operation of the operation button 300 is executed according to the display performed by the third symbol display device 81. Therefore, the line of sight of the player who is trying to operate the operation button 300 can be gathered on the third symbol display device 81.

In the process of S3111, the first input flag 223wc is set to on (S3111). The first input flag 223wc is set to on by the operation of the operation button 300 (or the passage of the time limit), and while the first input flag 223wc is set to on, the ball number confirmation process (S3004) is skipped. Therefore, in the ball number confirmation process (S3004), only the first operation (push down) of the operation button 300 is valid.

Therefore, it is possible to urge the player to avoid the operation mode in which the operation button 300 is blindly repeatedly hit, and to carefully plan the timing of operating the operation button 300. Further, by executing the display prompting this (display of alerting) on the third symbol display device 81, it is possible to suppress the player from repeatedly hitting the operation button 300, so that the operation of the operation button 300 can be suppressed. It is possible to prevent the number of times from exceeding the useful number of times at an early stage, and it is possible to improve the durability of the operation button 300.

When the process of S3111 is completed, this process is terminated and the process returns to the button input monitoring / effect process (S2107).

It will be described back to FIG. 139. In the process of S3005, it is determined whether or not the second input flag 223wd is on (S3005). When it is determined that the second input flag 223wd is on (S3005: Yes), since the display operation button-related effect command has already been set, this process is terminated as it is, and the button input monitoring / effect process (S2107). Return to.

On the other hand, in the process of S3005, when it is determined that the second input flag 223wd is not on (that is, it is off) (S3005: No), it is determined whether the operation flag 223p is on (S3006). The fact that the operation flag 223p is set to ON (see S1405 in FIG. 125 and S2218 and S2219 in FIG. 132) is an effect for changing the state of the interference member 6930 to the overhanging state (see FIGS. 90 and 91). It means that the operation (pushing down) of the operation button 300 was executed in (see S1403 in FIG. 125). In other words, it means that the state change of the interfering member 6930 to the overhanging state is executed.

When it is determined that the operation flag 223p is on (S3006: Yes), the operation flag 223p is set to off (S3007), and the round is based on the value of the storage counter 223n at the end of the fourth round game R. After subtracting the value obtained by dividing the elapsed time of the interval by 0.2 by 0.2, it is determined whether or not the number of remaining balls indicated by the value obtained by further subtracting 2 is 4 (S3008). The value calculated in S3008 corresponds to the number of spheres left on the upstream side of the interference member 6930 in the storage flow path 1231.

Here, the value calculated in S3008 is 4, when the display pointer 719d is in a position where at least a part of the display pointer 719d coincides with the second band portion 716b in the vertical direction in the timing effect (operation effect). It is controlled so that it is the case when the operation is executed (see FIG. 90 (b)). Here, the period during which the display pointer 719d is in a position where at least a part of the display pointer 719d coincides with the second band portion 716b at the top and bottom depends on the relationship between the size and operating speed of the display pointer 719 and the width of the second band portion 716b. , The length can be adjusted.

In this control example, as described above, the display pointer 719 is a circle having a diameter of 3 [cm], and the width of the second band portion 716b is newly set to 4.2 [cm]. Since the period required for one ball to be discharged from the storage flow path 1231 is 0.2 seconds, it is assumed that the period required for the display pointer 719 to pass through the second band portion 716b is 0.1 seconds. , The operating speed of the display pointer 719 is 72 [cm / s]. After being set in this way, the display pointer 719 is controlled so that its left end reaches the right end of the second band portion 716b at a timing of 0.7 seconds from the start of the interval period (0.8 seconds). At the timing, its right end passes the left end of the second band portion 716b). In this control example, by controlling in this way, the period in which the display pointer 719 coincides with the second band portion 716b at least in the vertical direction can be limited to 0.1 seconds.

When it is determined that the number of remaining balls is 4 in the process of S3008 (S3008: Yes), the display operation button great success effect command is set (S3009), and the process proceeds to the process of S3014.

Here, when the display operation button great success effect command is set, a display indicating that the player can obtain the highest profit as a result of the timing effect (operation effect) is executed on the third symbol display device 81. (See FIG. 90 (b)).

On the other hand, in the process of S3008, when it is determined that the number of remaining balls is not 4, (S3008: No), it is determined whether the number of remaining balls is 5 or more (S3010). Here, the reason why the number of remaining balls is 5 or more in S3010 is that in the timing effect (operation effect), the operation of the operation button 300 is performed when all of the display pointers 719d are in positions that vertically match the first band portion 716a. Is controlled so as to be the case when is executed (see FIG. 91 (a)). That is, it corresponds to the case where the operation button 300 is operated (when the operation is too early) before 0.7 seconds have elapsed from the start of the interval period.

If it is determined in the process of S3010 that the number of remaining balls is 5 or more (S3010: Yes), the display operation button success effect command is set (S3011), and the process proceeds to the process of S3014.

Here, when the display operation button success effect command is set, the player can obtain a medium profit (that is, neither the highest nor the lowest profit) as a result of the timing effect (operation effect). The indicated display is executed in the third symbol display device 81 (see FIG. 91 (a)).

On the other hand, in the process of S3010, when it is determined that the number of remaining balls is not 5 or more (that is, the number of remaining balls is 3 or less) (S3010: No), or the operation flag 223p is not set to ON. When the time limit (1.5 seconds in this control example) has elapsed (S3012: Yes), the display operation button failure effect command is set (S3013), and the process proceeds to S3014.

Here, the reason why the number of remaining balls is 3 or less in S3010 is that in the timing effect (operation effect), the operation of the operation button 300 is performed when all of the display pointers 719d are in positions that vertically match the third band portion 716c. Is controlled so as to be the case when is executed (see FIG. 91 (b)). That is, it corresponds to the case where the operation button 300 is operated after 0.8 seconds have elapsed from the start of the interval period (when the operation is too late), or when the operation button 300 is not operated.

Here, when the display operation button failure effect command is set, a display indicating that the player can obtain the minimum profit as a result of the timing effect (operation effect) is executed on the third symbol display device 81. (See FIG. 91 (b)).

As described above, in this control example, the profit obtained by the player is greater when the operation button 300 is operated than when the operation button 300 is not operated, and the display on the third symbol display device 81 also changes accordingly. Is controlled. Further, when operating the operation button 300, the operation is performed at the timing when the number of remaining balls becomes 4 (from the start of the interval period to the elapse of 0.7 seconds until the elapse of 0.8 seconds). It is controlled so that the highest profit is obtained, the profit is medium before the timing, and the lowest profit is obtained after the timing.

Therefore, the player can improve the motivation to operate the operation button 300 in the interval period immediately after the round game R in the fourth round, and can select the operation mode of the operation button 300.

That is, if the player wants to obtain at least a medium profit, he / she can obtain a medium profit without risk by pressing the operation button 300 immediately after the start of the interval period (stable). Profitable). On the other hand, if you want to get the highest profit, if the operation is delayed even a little, you will not get the medium profit and you will get the lowest profit, so you should consider the disadvantage and perform the operation. (Profit is unstable and fluctuates greatly).

By differentiating the operation mode of the operation button 300 in this way, the player selects a person who can stably obtain a medium profit or a person who is unstable but can obtain the highest profit. be able to.

Therefore, it is possible to concentrate on the operation of the operation button 300. Then, the operation of the operation button 300 is executed according to the display performed by the third symbol display device 81. Therefore, the line of sight of the player who is trying to operate the operation button 300 can be gathered on the third symbol display device 81.

In the process of S3014, the second input flag 223wd is set to on (S3014). The second input flag 223wd is set on by the operation of the operation button 300 (or the passage of the time limit), and while the second input flag 223wd is set to on, the button input monitoring / effect processing (S2107) is performed. Since it is skipped (S3005), only the first operation (pressing down) of the operation button 300 is valid in the button input monitoring / effect processing (S2107).

Therefore, it is possible to urge the player to avoid the operation mode in which the operation button 300 is blindly repeatedly hit, and to carefully plan the timing of operating the operation button 300. Further, by executing the display prompting this (display of alerting) on the third symbol display device 81, it is possible to suppress the player from repeatedly hitting the operation button 300, so that the operation of the operation button 300 can be suppressed. It is possible to prevent the number of times from exceeding the useful number of times at an early stage, and it is possible to improve the durability of the operation button 300.

According to this control example described in detail above, the following excellent effects are obtained.

The visibility of the inside of the storage flow path 1231 was changed depending on the lighting mode of the transmission lamps 227ba to 227be. As a result, the number of spheres stored in the storage flow path 1231 and the ease of grasping the operation mode of the interference device 6900 can be changed.

In order to maintain high visibility inside the storage flow path 1231, it is necessary to remove the line of sight from the storage flow path 1231, pay attention to the liquid crystal display device (third symbol display device 81), and participate in the timing effect (operation effect). It was configured to be As a result, it is possible to prevent a situation in which the jackpot game ends while the player's line of sight is concentrated on the first variable winning device 6000.

Further, pay attention to the first variable winning device 6000 in which the storage flow path 1231 is arranged when the storage flow path 1231 becomes a transparent state as a result of the player operating the operation button 300 in the timing effect (operation effect). It was configured to display a prompt to do so. As a result, it is possible to encourage the player's line of sight paying attention to the liquid crystal display device (third symbol display device 81) to be transferred to the storage flow path 1231 when necessary.

On the liquid crystal display device (third symbol display device 81), a circle is displayed so that the range of the number of spheres stored in the storage flow path 1231 can be grasped. As a result, the player can easily predict the internal state of the storage flow path 1231 by visually recognizing the liquid crystal display device, and can easily determine how many more balls should be fired before the specified number of prizes are won. be able to. Therefore, the launch mode of the ball can be easily selected.

As the timing effect (operation effect) performed by the liquid crystal display device (third symbol display device 81), the quality is different for the player (in this control example, the visibility of the storage flow path 1231 and the prize ball are paid out. When the timing effect (operation effect) that gives the benefit of (the one that is directly connected to) is executed continuously, the operation timing that gives the best benefit to the player is grasped as the same timing (similar timing) for the player. It was configured to be. As a result, even when the transition from the earlier timing effect (operation effect) to the later timing effect (operation effect) occurs immediately, the player can perform the operation without discomfort.

Depending on the jackpot type, in the predetermined round game R (6th round round game R), when the ball is discharged from the storage flow path 1231 (20th operation pattern, operation scenario 5) and when it is not discharged (21st). The operation pattern and the operation scenario 6) of the above are configured to occur. Thereby, it is possible to specify whether or not an excess prize is generated in a predetermined round game R depending on the jackpot type.

By making the predetermined inter-round interval period (for example, the interval period between the 4th and 5th rounds) different depending on the jackpot type, the inside of the storage flow path 1231 in the round game R immediately after the inter-round interval period. It was configured so that the state (number of stored balls) changed. As a result, even if the mode of state change of the first specific winning opening 1000a, the interference member 6930, and the specific region 4830 in the round game R is the same, the progress mode of the round game can be changed.

A predetermined number of balls (9 in this control example) different from the specified number (10 in this control example) of the predetermined round game R (4th round game R in this control example) are first. By ending the ball in the specific winning opening 1000a, the profit obtained by the player in the next round game R (in this control example, the fifth round game R) is maximized. did. As a result, it is possible to prevent the player from inadvertently digesting the jackpot game.

In a configuration in which the ball flows down toward the specific region 4830 as the first specific winning opening 1000a is closed, a specified number of balls flow into the first specific winning opening 1000a while the interfering member 6930 maintains the overhanging state. It was configured so that the ball could not enter. Thereby, the timing at which the first specific winning opening 1000a is closed at the end of the round game R can be defined by the operation mode of the interference member 6930, and the ball reaches the upstream of the first specific winning opening 1000a. The timing and the timing of the end of the round game R can be dissociated. That is, based on the operation mode of the interference member 6930, it is possible to specify the timing at which the first specific winning opening 1000a is closed with the end of the round game R.

In the open state of the first specific winning opening 1000a, the balls are easily retained in a state of being aligned on the upstream side of the first specific winning opening 1000a, and the retained balls are in a state in which the first specific winning opening 1000a is closed. It is configured to flow down toward the first specific winning opening 1000a at a changing timing. As a result, it is possible to collectively make it possible to enter a plurality of stagnant balls in the first specific winning opening 1000a, and it is possible to increase the possibility of excessive winning.

In addition, the number of excess prizes can be specified. As a result, it is possible to prevent the number of excess prizes from becoming excessive and hindering the playability.

Further, the presence or absence of excess winning is defined by the operating mode of the interference member 6930 arranged downstream of the first specific winning opening 1000a, and the operating mode of the interference member 6930 is predetermined based on the jackpot type. To. As a result, even if the ball is similarly retained on the upstream side of the first specific winning opening 1000a, it is possible to switch between the case where the excess winning occurs and the case where the excess winning does not occur based on the jackpot type.

Based on the operation timing of the operation button 300, the profit obtained by the player in the round game R (for example, the visibility inside the storage flow path 1231, the number of discharge balls discharged from the storage flow path 1231, and based on it. The presence or absence of the ball entering the specific area 4830 and the maximum number of balls entered in the round game R) are configured to change. As a result, the player's attention to the timing effect (operation effect) can be improved.

Based on the operation timing of the operation button 300, the two types of profits obtained by the player are configured to be seesawed, and the display device (third symbol) so that the player can grasp the mode of the profits obtained by the player. It is configured to be displayed by the display device 81). As a result, the player who visually recognizes the display of the display device can obtain the profit that matches the operation timing by selecting the operation timing and operating the operation button 300 based on the profit that he / she wants to obtain preferentially. Therefore, the motivation to participate in the timing effect (operation effect) can be increased.

Next, a second control example will be described with reference to FIGS. 141 to 143. First, with reference to FIG. 141, the details of the first type selection table 202b in the second control example will be described.

As shown in FIG. 141, "big hit P" is associated with the special symbol 1 in the range where the value of the first hit type counter C2 is "0 to 49". This "big hit P" is a big hit with 6 rounds. Of the 100 counter values that the first hit type counter C2 can take, 50 are counter values that become "big hit P", so if a big hit is achieved in the special symbol 1 lottery, "big hit P" is determined. The ratio is 50% (50/100).

For this "big hit P", 6 rounds are set as the number of rounds, and after the big hit ends, the special symbol and the normal symbol shift to the high probability state. In this control example, it is controlled so that at least one jackpot is determined between the transition of the special symbol to the high probability state and the transition to the low probability state. Therefore, it is an advantageous jackpot type in terms of ball ejection (expected ball ejection) that can be acquired by the player from the start of one jackpot until the gaming state returns to the normal state.

Further, with respect to the special symbol 1, the value of the first hit type counter C2 is defined in the range of "50 to 99" in association with "big hit Q". This "big hit Q" is a big hit with 6 rounds. Of the 100 counter values that the first hit type counter C2 can take, 50 counter values are "big hit Q", so if a big hit is achieved in the special symbol 1 lottery, "big hit Q" is determined. The ratio is 50% (50/100).

For this "big hit Q", 6 rounds are set as the number of rounds, and after the big hit is completed, the time saving state of the normal symbol is given 100 times.

On the other hand, for the second special symbol, "big hit m" is associated with the range (entire range) in which the value of the first hit type counter C2 is "0 to 99". This "big hit m" is a big hit with 6 rounds. Of the 100 counter values that the first hit type counter C2 can take, the counter value that becomes the "big hit m" is 100, so the "big hit m" is determined when a big hit is obtained in the special symbol 2 lottery. The ratio is 100%.

For this "big hit m", 6 rounds are set as the number of rounds, and after the big hit is completed, the special symbol and the normal symbol shift to the high probability state. In this control example, it is controlled so that at least one jackpot is determined between the transition of the special symbol to the high probability state and the transition to the low probability state. Therefore, it is an advantageous jackpot type in terms of ball ejection (expected ball ejection) that can be acquired by the player from the start of one jackpot until the gaming state returns to the normal state.

That is, the special symbol 1 and the special symbol 2 have the same number of rounds of the jackpot game, but the privilege (high probability state of the normal symbol or the high probability state of the special symbol) given after the jackpot ends is the special symbol 2. Is stipulated to be more advantageous (easier to shift to a high probability state).

As described above, in this control example, the case where the lottery of the special symbol 1 is a big hit, the case where the lottery of the special symbol 2 is a big hit shifts to a high probability state which is advantageous to the player. The structure makes it easy. Therefore, once the consecutive villa mode (high probability state of special symbol and time saving state of normal symbol) is set, the special symbol 2 is drawn by right-handed to enter the second entrance 640. Is easy to be executed and the jackpot game is easy to be repeated. Therefore, it is possible to have the player play the game for one purpose of shifting to the consecutive villa mode. Therefore, it is possible to improve the interest of the player in the game.

Next, in the sixth round of the round game R, the operation pattern is controlled to be different according to the jackpot type, which will be described with reference to FIG. 142. In this control example, the first variable winning device 9000 (see FIG. 66) described above in the ninth embodiment will be described.

FIG. 142 (a) is a diagram showing the time timing change of the opening / closing plate 8300 and the auxiliary opening / closing member 8340 in the 22nd operation pattern, and FIG. 142 (b) is a diagram showing the time change of the opening / closing plate 8300 and the auxiliary opening / closing member in the 23rd operation pattern. It is a figure which showed the time change of the member 8340, and FIG. 142 (c) is a figure which showed the time change of the opening / closing plate 8300 and the auxiliary opening / closing member 8340 in the 24th operation pattern.

In this control example, in the 6th round round game R of the jackpot P, the opening / closing plate 8300 and the auxiliary opening / closing member 8340 are driven by the 22nd operation pattern, and in the 6th round round game R of the jackpot Q, the 23rd The opening / closing plate 8300 and the auxiliary opening / closing member 8340 are driven by the operation pattern, and the opening / closing plate 8300 and the auxiliary opening / closing member 8340 are driven by the 24th operation pattern in the sixth round game R of the jackpot m.

As shown in FIG. 142 (a), in the 22nd operation pattern, the opening / closing plate 8300 and the auxiliary opening / closing member 8340 are maintained in the open state (that is, the regulating member 1600 is maintained in the stored state), and the round game R is started. After the waiting time TK (8 seconds in this control example) elapses, the interference member 6930 changes from the retracted state to the overhanging state.

The interference member 6930 returns to the retracted state by the end of the round game R (skip if the round game R ends before the waiting time TK). Here, in the round game R, the passage of a specified number of balls (10 in this control example) is detected at the first specific winning opening 1000a, or the maximum time of the round game R (in this control example, 10) is detected. It ends when 30 seconds) elapses.

In the sixth round round game R of the jackpot P in which the opening / closing plate 8300 and the auxiliary opening / closing member 8340 are driven and controlled in the 22nd operation pattern, a specified number (10 in this control example) before the standby time TK elapses. When the ball enters the first specific winning opening 1000a, the round game R ends without waiting for the waiting time TK.

On the other hand, if a specified number of balls do not enter the first specific winning opening 1000a before the waiting time TK elapses, the interference member 6930 is in an overhanging state, and 10 balls can be stored in the storage flow path 1231. Therefore, it becomes impossible to insert a specified number of balls into the first specific winning opening 1000a, and the time required for the round game R becomes the maximum value (30 seconds) of the first operating time T1.

The standby time TK (8 seconds in this control example) does not stop the firing of the ball even during the inter-round interval from the end of the fifth round round game R, and the ball continues even after the start of the sixth round round game R. By continuing the firing, a specified number (10 in this control example) of balls is set as a sufficiently reachable period in the first specific winning opening 1000a. In this control example, the ball is launched at intervals of 0.6 seconds.

On the other hand, for example, when the firing of the ball is stopped during the interval between rounds from the end of the fifth round game R and the firing of the ball is started at the start of the sixth round, the launched ball is released. From the balance with the time to reach the first specific winning opening 1000a (about 4.0 seconds), the specified number of balls (10 in this control example) is set in the first specific winning opening by the elapse of the waiting time TK. It cannot be passed through 1000a.

Therefore, the case where the ball firing is stopped at the inter-round interval immediately before the sixth round round game R is compared with the case where the ball firing is continued at the inter-round interval, the sixth round round game R. It can be configured to increase the time required for. As a result, it is possible to suppress the game mode in which the firing of the ball is stopped at the interval between rounds.

As shown in FIG. 142 (b), in the 23rd operation pattern, the opening / closing plate 8300 is maintained in the open state (that is, the regulating member 1600 is maintained in the stored state), while the standby time TK is before elapse. , Only the auxiliary opening / closing member 8340 is driven and controlled so as to open / close multiple times (open / close on one side as shown in FIG. 74). That is, the control in which the drive (excitation) is released for 0.025 seconds is executed a plurality of times.

It should be noted that the interference member 6930 changes its state from the retracted state to the overhanging state after the waiting time TK (8 seconds in this control example) elapses from the start of the round game R, which is the same as the 22nd operation pattern. ..

According to this operation pattern, not all the balls on the opening / closing plate 8300 enter the first specific winning opening 1000a, but some of the balls flow down toward the auxiliary entry opening 9111. It is possible to make it more difficult for a specified number of balls (10 in this control example) to pass through the first specific winning opening 1000a before the standby time TK (8 seconds in this control example) elapses than in the operation pattern. ..

Therefore, with a high probability, the round game R of the sixth round can be set to a long time (30 seconds). On the other hand, unlike the 22nd operation pattern, the prize balls can be paid out when the balls enter the auxiliary entry port 9111. Therefore, the number of prize balls to be paid out is larger than that of the 23rd operation pattern. can do.

As shown in FIG. 142 (c), in the 24th operation pattern, the opening / closing plate 8300 is maintained in the open state (that is, the regulating member 1600 is maintained in the stored state), while before and after the standby time TK elapses. , Only the auxiliary opening / closing member 8340 is driven and controlled so as to open / close multiple times (open / close on one side as shown in FIG. 74). That is, the control in which the drive (excitation) is released for 0.025 seconds is executed a plurality of times.

It should be noted that the interference member 6930 changes its state from the retracted state to the overhanging state after the waiting time TK (8 seconds in this control example) elapses from the start of the round game R in the 22nd operation pattern and the 23rd operation pattern. It is the same as the operation pattern.

In this operation pattern, not all the balls on the opening / closing plate 8300 enter the first specific winning opening 1000a, but some of the balls flow down toward the auxiliary entry opening 9111 (see FIG. 66). Similar to the 23rd operation pattern, the probability that the round game R ends can be reduced by passing a specified number of balls (10 in this control example) through the first specific winning opening 1000a.

Therefore, with a high probability, the round game R of the sixth round can be set to a long time (30 seconds). On the other hand, unlike the 23rd operation pattern, the ball can be entered into the auxiliary entry port 9111 (see FIG. 66) even after the waiting time TK has elapsed, so that the period is longer than that of the 23rd operation pattern. Throughout this, the payout of the prize ball due to the entry of the ball into the auxiliary entry port 9111 can be generated. Therefore, more prize balls can be paid out as compared with the 23rd operation pattern.

In this operation pattern, even after the interference member 6930 is in the overhanging state, it is controlled so that one-sided opening and closing occurs. That is, even after the storage flow path 1231 is filled with spheres (filled) and the spheres stay on the upstream side of the detection sensor 1240 (see FIG. 66), one-sided opening and closing occurs, so that the spheres are arranged. It is possible to easily guide the ball to the auxiliary ball entry port 9111 when opening and closing one side as compared with the case where is unspecified.

Next, the display in the sixth round of the round game R will be described with reference to FIGS. 143 (a) and 143 (b). 143 (a) and 143 (b) are schematic views showing an example of display contents for notifying the third symbol display device 81 that the sixth round round game R is being executed.

In addition, in FIG. 143 (a), an example of the display of the 6th round round game R when the jackpot type is "big hit P" or "big hit Q", or the 6th round round game when the jackpot type is "big hit m". A schematic diagram showing an example of the display before the lapse of the waiting time TK in R is shown, and in FIG. 143 (b), the waiting time TK in the sixth round round game R when the jackpot type is “big hit m” is shown. A schematic diagram showing an example of the display after the lapse is shown.

That is, when the jackpot type is "big hit P" or "big hit Q", the display command is set so that the display shown in FIG. 143 (a) is maintained over the round game R, and the jackpot type is "big hit". In the case of "m", the display command is set so that the display shown in FIG. 143 (a) is maintained, and then the display is switched to the display shown in FIG. 143 (b) after the waiting time TK elapses. The display command is set so that the display shown in FIG. 143 (b) is maintained until the end of the round game R.

As shown in FIGS. 143 (a) and 143 (b), the third symbol display device 81 indicates that the round number display unit 714 that displays the current number of rounds is in the sixth round round game R. A sub-round display unit 714b is displayed in the upper left corner of the screen in the mode, and below the round number display unit 714, indicating that an additional prize ball can be expected in the round game R.

In FIG. 143 (a), the round number display unit 714 is light-emitting (displayed brightly), while the sub-round display unit 714b is turned off (displayed dark), and in FIG. 143 (b), conversely, the number of rounds is displayed. While the unit 714 is turned off (displayed dark), the sub-round display unit 714b is displayed (displayed brightly).

That is, in this control example, the round game R is executed by the display of the mode shown in FIG. 143 (a) during the period in which the prize balls are mainly paid out when the balls are entered into the first specific winning opening 1000a. In addition to notifying the player of this, after the waiting time TK has elapsed, although it is no longer possible to expect the prize ball to be paid out when the ball enters the first specific winning opening 1000a, due to the entry into the auxiliary entry opening 9111. It is possible to make the player recognize that the period in which the payout of the prize ball can be expected is continued.

Here, by changing the display on the sub-round display unit 714b, it is possible for the player to easily recognize the change in the substantial profit obtained by the player by entering the ball. That is, the number of prize balls paid out when one ball enters the auxiliary entry port 9111 is three as described above, which is 1/5 of the case where the ball enters the first specific winning opening 1000a. Is. The player can easily recognize the change in the number of prize balls with respect to the number of balls entered.

Further, the ball flows to the auxiliary entry port 9111 only when the ball is arranged between the opening / closing plate 8300 and the auxiliary opening / closing member 8340 within a short time when the auxiliary opening / closing member 8340 is opened. The ball does not always flow to the auxiliary entry port 9111 every time the auxiliary opening / closing member 8340 is opened.

Therefore, the frequency of ball entry into the auxiliary entry port 9111 during the period when the sub-round display unit 714b emits light (displays brightly) is the period during which the round number display unit 714 emits light (displays brightly). It is lower than the frequency of balls entering the first specific winning opening 1000a.

In this way, according to this control example, while notifying that the period of the round game R has not ended, the profit obtained by the player (change in the prize ball paid out by entering one ball, or a ball). It is possible to simultaneously notify that a change has occurred in the frequency of ball entry.

In an example of the display in the sixth round of the round game R shown in FIG. 143 (b), the character "+ chance" is displayed as the above-mentioned excess winning possibility increase notification mode 721. In this control example, the character "+ chance" may cause a ball to enter the auxiliary entry port 9111 by firing a ball, and a prize ball may be entered by the ball entering the auxiliary entry port 9111. Corresponds to being able to receive a payout.

As described above, in this control example, in the round game R, it is controlled to pay out an additional prize ball due to the ball entering the auxiliary ball entry port 9111. Therefore, in the round game R, the number of prize balls paid out to the player when a specified number of balls (10 in this control example) enters the first specific winning opening 1000a (150 in this control example). More than the number of prize balls (excess prize balls) can be paid out.

In particular, in the 24th operation pattern, there is a high possibility that the ball will enter the auxiliary entry port 9111 even after the waiting time TK has elapsed, and the game is compared with the other 22nd operation pattern and the 23rd operation pattern. The number of prize balls paid out to a person can be large. On the other hand, in the operation pattern in this control example, the driving mode of the interference member 6930 is the same.

That is, in the 22nd to 24th operation patterns in this control example, the number of prize balls paid out to the player can be different while the driving mode of the interference member 6930 is the same.

Since the maximum number of times the ball enters the auxiliary ball entry port 9111 corresponds to the number of times the auxiliary opening / closing member 8340 opens / closes in the round game R, the above-mentioned excess is achieved by setting the number of times the auxiliary opening / closing member 8340 opens / closes. The number of prize balls can be adjusted.

According to this control example described in detail above, the following excellent effects are obtained.

In the inter-round interval period, when the ball firing is stopped, the period required for the next round game R is likely to be longer than when the ball firing is continued in the inter-round interval period. As a result, it is possible to suppress the game mode in which the firing of the ball is stopped during the interval period between rounds.

Depending on the driving mode of the opening / closing plate 8300 and the auxiliary opening / closing member 8340 (that is, whether or not the above-mentioned "one-sided opening / closing" occurs), the number of prize balls paid out to the player in the round game R can be positively changed. .. In other words, whether the ball that has reached the opening / closing plate 8300 and the auxiliary opening / closing member 8340 passes through the first specific winning opening 1000a or the auxiliary entry opening 9111 is determined by the opening / closing plate 8300 and the auxiliary opening / closing member. It can be switched depending on the driving mode of 8340.

Thereby, the timing at which the ball is likely to be guided to the auxiliary entry port 9111 and the timing at which the ball is difficult to be guided to the auxiliary entry port 9111 can be separated and configured. Therefore, for example, during the period of the round game R, the timing at which the ball is likely to be guided to the auxiliary entry port 9111 can be concentrated in a part of the period. In this case, the balls that have reached the movable object that circulates are sorted in the order of arrival, and a predetermined number of the reached balls is guided to the winning opening (the winning opening corresponding to the auxiliary entry opening 9111). As a result, the attention power in the vicinity of the auxiliary ball entrance 9111 can be improved.

That is, the number of launched balls can be reduced relative to the number of payouts by launching the ball at a timing when the ball is likely to be guided to the auxiliary entry port 9111 and stopping the firing of the ball at other timings.

On the other hand, the timing at which the ball should be launched with the aim of winning the auxiliary ball opening 9111 is configured to be different based on the jackpot type. As a result, it is possible to request the player to change the firing mode of the ball for each jackpot game, so that it is easy to prevent the player from playing the jackpot game indiscriminately. In addition, by making it difficult to grasp the type of jackpot, it is possible to prevent the occurrence of a strategy, which is an excessive profit for a specific player (experienced player) (for example, the number of balls paid out rather than the number of shot balls). Can be prevented from occurring.

The auxiliary ball entry port 9111 is arranged at a position where the ball is not guided (difficult to be guided) when the opening / closing plate 8300 is not driven (non-excited). As a result, the player's ability to concentrate on the game can be improved as compared with the case where the ball is guided to the auxiliary ball entry port 9111 at the timing when the opening / closing plate 8300 and the auxiliary opening / closing member 8340 are not driven.

In the round game R, it is easy for the player to grasp the change in the expected value of the number of prize balls paid out with respect to the number of balls reaching the first variable winning device 9000 from the display of the display device (third symbol display device 81). It was configured as follows. As a result, during the continuation of the same round game R, the player can easily select whether to continue firing the ball or stop firing the ball from the display on the display device.

Next, a third control example will be described with reference to FIGS. 144 to 148. First, the ROM 202 in the third control example will be described with reference to FIG. 144. FIG. 144 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the ROM 202 in the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 in the third control example. The ROM 202 includes a first random number table 202a, a second random number table 202c, a first hit type selection table 202b, a variation pattern selection table 202d, an opening / closing plate and an interference member operation scenario storage area 202e, and an opening / closing plate. In addition to the interference member operation scenario table 202f, at least a small hit type selection table 202g is provided.

This small hit type selection table 202g is used to select the small hit type when a small hit is made based on the entry of a game ball into the first entry port 64 or the second entry opening 640. Is something that can be done.

The contents of the first random number table 202a will be described with reference to FIG. 145. FIGS. 145 (a) to 145 (c) are schematic views schematically showing the contents of the first random number table 202a.

In the first random number table 202a, as shown in FIG. 145 (a), whether or not the value of the first random number counter C3 acquired when the game ball enters the first entry port 64 is a big hit. It is determined whether or not the value of the special symbol 1 random number table 202a1 for determining whether or not the value of the first random number counter C3 acquired when the game ball enters the second winning opening 640 is a big hit. This is a table in which the special symbol 2 random number table 202a2 for the purpose is set.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 145 (b), the special symbol 1 random number table 202a1 is a random number value determined to be a hit in the lottery of the first special symbol based on the entry into the first entry port 64. This is a table in which (judgment value) is set. In the lottery of the first special symbol, it is determined whether or not the value of the acquired first random number counter C3 is "0", and if it is "0", it is determined that it is a big hit. Further, it is determined whether the value of the acquired first random number counter C3 is "1 to 3", and if it is "1 to 3", it is determined to be a small hit. In addition, when it is determined that the value is "4 to 319", it is determined that the value is out of alignment.

On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 145 (c), the special symbol 2 random number table 202a2 is a random number value (judgment value) determined to be a hit in the lottery of the second special symbol based on the ball entering the second winning opening 640. Is a set table. In the lottery of the second special symbol, it is determined whether or not the value of the acquired first random number counter C3 is "0", and if it is "0", it is determined that it is a big hit. Further, it is determined whether the value of the acquired first random number counter C3 is "1 to 318", and if it is "1 to 318", it is determined to be a small hit. In addition, when it is determined to be "319", it is determined to be out of order.

As described above, the first random number counter C3 in the pachinko machine 10 of this control example is configured as a 2-byte loop counter in the range of 0 to 319. In this first random number counter C3, at the time of lottery of the first special symbol based on the entry into the first ball entrance 64, the number of random numbers that becomes the jackpot of the first special symbol is one, and the total number of random numbers is Of the 320, the total number of random numbers that will be big hits is 1, so the probability of being big hits for the first special symbol is "1/320". Further, since the total number of random numbers that are small hits is 3, the probability of being a small hit of the first special symbol is "3/320".

On the other hand, at the time of the lottery of the second special symbol based on the entry into the second winning opening 640, the number of random numbers that becomes the jackpot of the second special symbol is one, and the total number of random numbers is 320. Since the total number of random numbers is 1, the probability of becoming a jackpot for the second special symbol is "1/320". Further, since the total number of random numbers that are small hits is 318, the probability of small hits of the second special symbol is "318/320".

As in each of the above-described embodiments or control examples, when it is determined that the normal symbol is a hit, after the variation display in the second symbol display device is completed, the stop symbol (second symbol) is marked with "○". The symbol is lit and displayed, and the electric accessory 640a is opened for a predetermined time.

The electric accessory 640a in the present embodiment is opened for 5 seconds or 0.5 seconds when the time is shortened, but is released only for 0.2 seconds when the time is not shortened. Therefore, even if the value of the second hit random number counter C5 is hit when the time is not shortened, it is difficult to make the game ball win the second winning opening 640. As a result, it is possible to suppress a game in which a ball is attempted to enter the second winning opening 640 even though the time is not reduced (the jackpot with a time reduction is not displayed).

FIG. 146 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the first type selection table 202b. The first hit type selection table 202b (see FIG. 146) is a data table in which judgment values for determining the jackpot type are stored, and the judgment values of the first hit type counter C4 are each stored. It is stipulated in association with the type of jackpot and the type of winning opening that triggered the lottery of special symbols. In the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, when it is determined that the special symbol is a big hit, the value of the first hit type counter C4 acquired based on the start winning prize is compared with the first hit type selection table 202b, and the first The jackpot type corresponding to the value of the hit type counter C4 is selected.

Specifically, when a big hit is obtained in the special symbol 1 lottery (lottery based on the entry into the first entry slot 64), the value of the first hit type counter C4 is in the range of "0 to 49". Is defined in association with a jackpot R (see 202b21 in FIG. 146).

When the jackpot R is reached, the jackpot game of 16 rounds is executed, and the game state after the jackpot game is completed becomes a time saving state (100 times) until the fluctuation of the special symbol is digested 100 times. In this case, the player can receive a payout of about 2400 prize balls.

The jackpot S is associated with the range in which the value of the first hit type counter C4 is "50 to 99" (see 202b22 in FIG. 146).

When the jackpot S is reached, the jackpot game of 16 rounds is executed, and the game state after the jackpot game is completed becomes the normal state. In this case, the player can receive the payout of about 2,400 prize balls, but cannot obtain the profit of the time saving state after the jackpot game is completed.

In the jackpot based on the lottery of the special symbol 1 (lottery based on the entry into the first ball entrance 64), the game state after the end of the jackpot game can be shortened with a probability of 50%. During the time saving, we will aim to get more big hits by the small hit game described later.

On the other hand, if a big hit is obtained in the special symbol 2 lottery (lottery based on the entry into the second winning opening 640), the value of the first hit type counter C4 is in the range of "0-9". n is associated and defined (see 202b23 in FIG. 146). The jackpot n gives the player the same profit as the jackpot R described above.

That is, 16 rounds of the jackpot game are executed, and the gaming state after the jackpot game is completed becomes a time saving state (100 times) until the fluctuation of the special symbol is digested 100 times. In this case, the player can receive a payout of about 2400 prize balls.

A jackpot p is associated with a range in which the value of the first hit type counter C4 is "10 to 99" (see 202b24 in FIG. 146). The jackpot p is provided with a difference in the number of fluctuations in the time-saving game while giving the player the same prize ball payout as the jackpot n described above.

That is, 16 rounds of the jackpot game are executed, and the gaming state after the jackpot game is completed becomes a time saving state (4 times) until the fluctuation of the special symbol is digested 4 times. In this case, the player can receive a payout of about 2400 prize balls.

As described above, the jackpot generated by the lottery of the special symbol 2 (lottery based on the entry into the second winning opening 640) shifts to the time saving state with a probability of 100%. Therefore, the possibility of winning the next big hit in a short time after the end of the big hit game is increased as compared with the case where the big hit is obtained in the lottery of the special symbol 1.

As described above, during the time reduction of the special symbol, the hit probability of the normal symbol is increased, the fluctuation time of the normal symbol is shortened (3 seconds), and the opening time of the electric accessory 640a when the normal symbol is hit is increased. It is set to be longer (5 seconds or 0.5 seconds). Therefore, it becomes easy to put the ball into the second winning opening 640, and the lottery of the special symbol 2 becomes easy to be performed. Then, if a big hit is obtained by the lottery of the special symbol 2, the time will be shortened after the big hit is completed, so that it becomes easier to obtain the big hit by the lottery of the special symbol 2.

Therefore, once it is possible to shift to the time saving state of the special symbol, the time saving state of the special symbol which is likely to be a big hit of the special symbol and is likely to be a big hit G when it becomes a big hit is likely to be repeated, so that the player can easily repeat the time saving state of the special symbol. It becomes easier to win a large number of prize balls. As a result, it is possible to make the player play the game while strongly expecting the player to shift to the time saving state of the special symbol, so that the player's interest in the game can be improved.

Further, in this control example, the number of spheres stored in the storage flow path 1231 is related to the number of reserved special symbols, and the spheres are in the specific area 4830 (in this control example, the next jackpot is obtained by passing the spheres). Whether or not to pass through the area to be determined (see FIG. 51) is determined, the details of which will be described later in FIG. 148.

Next, the contents of the small hit type selection table 202g will be described with reference to FIG. 147. FIGS. 147 (a) to 147 (c) are schematic views schematically showing the contents of the small hit type selection table 202 g.

The small hit type selection table 202g is a small hit based on the first entry opening 64, a special symbol 1 small hit selection table 202g1 for selecting the small hit type, and a small hit based on the second winning opening 640. It has a special symbol 2 small hit selection table 202g2 for selecting a hit type (see FIG. 147 (a)).

As shown in FIG. 147 (b), at the time of a small hit based on the first entry port 64, when the value of the small hit type counter C6 is "0 to 1", the small hit A is selected and "2 to 99". In the case of "", the small hit B is selected.

On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 147 (c), at the time of a small hit based on the second winning opening 640, when the value of the first hit type counter C6 is "0-9", the small hit A is selected and "10". In the case of "~ 99", the small hit B is selected.

In this control example, the operation of the opening / closing plate 1300 is set according to the small hit type (see FIG. 148). Although the details will be described later, the small hit A is a small hit that is given with a high probability of a big hit when the game ball passes through the specific area 4830, and the small hit B is a small hit that is not given a big hit with a high probability. ..

Further, in this control example, the jackpot given after the small hit A and the small hit B is configured to be the jackpot G (16R time-saving big hit).

In this embodiment, the type of jackpot to be given thereafter is determined according to the type of small hit, but as another specification, the lottery result of the second special symbol is a small hit. Also, the type of jackpot is determined by the jackpot selection table (only the jackpot right is acquired), and the jackpot that acquired the right earlier is executed when the game ball passes through the specific area 4830 in the subsequent small hit game. You may. By doing so, the player can select a small hit that passes through the specific area 4830, and the interest of the game can be improved.

FIG. 148 is a diagram showing a time change of the opening / closing plate 1300, the solenoid 1510 and the distribution device 4850 in the small hit A and a time change of the opening / closing plate 1300, the solenoid 1510 and the distribution device 4850 (see FIG. 51) in the small hit B. Is. The operation of the sorting device 4850 is the same for both the small hit A and the small hit B.

Note that in FIG. 148, the difference between the operation timing of the opening / closing plate 1300 and the drive timing of the solenoid 1510 is omitted, and the operation starts at the same point.

First, the outline of the operation in the small hit A will be described. In the small hit A, the solenoid 1510 is driven (excited) so that the opening / closing plate 1300 is maintained in the open state for 1.0 second from the start of the small hit, and after 1.0 second, the solenoid 1510 is driven (excited). Excitation) is released. 0.2 seconds after the excitation is released, the solenoid 1510 is driven (excited) again, the opening / closing plate 1300 is maintained in the open state for 0.6 seconds, and then the solenoid 1510 is driven (excited).

Next, the outline of the operation in the small hit B will be described. In the small hit B, the solenoid 1510 is driven (excited) so that the opening / closing plate 1300 is maintained in the open state from the start of the small hit for 1.8 seconds, and after 1.8 seconds, the solenoid 1510 is driven (excited). ) Is canceled.

In this way, the small hit A and the small hit B have the same time of the small hit game (1.8 seconds), but differ in whether or not the opening / closing plate 1300 is closed during the small hit game. ..

In this control example, when the small hit game is started immediately after the end of the small hit game, that is, when the number of reserved balls of the special symbol remains and the small hit game occurs continuously, between the small hit games. The minimum period for which the opening / closing plate 1300 is maintained in the closed state is set to 0.4 seconds. Therefore, in the above-described embodiment, when the small hit game occurs continuously, even if two or more balls are stored in the storage flow path 1231 (see FIG. 51), the balls are discharged from the discharge port 1150 during the small hit game. The number of spheres to be made is limited to two. Therefore, the ball that entered the storage flow path 1231 in the previous small hit game may remain in the storage flow path 1231 even during the next small hit game.

The operation mode of the distribution device 4850 will be described. The distribution device 4850 maintains the distribution operation member 4851 in the closed position until 2.0 seconds have passed since the solenoid 1510 was started to be driven (excited) at the start of the small hit game, and after 2.0 seconds have passed. The distribution operation member 4851 is moved to the open position and maintained for 0.5 seconds, and after 0.5 seconds have passed, the distribution operation member 4851 is returned to the closed position again. Further, the distribution device 4850 moves the distribution operation member 4851 to the open position and maintains it for 0.5 seconds after 3.2 seconds have passed since the solenoid 1510 was started to be driven (excited) at the start of the small hit game. After 0.5 seconds have passed, the solenoid 4852 is driven (excited) in such a manner that the distribution operation member 4851 is returned to the closed position again.

That is, the distribution operation member 4851 moves to the open position twice for one small hit game. The first movement corresponds to 1 second (corresponding to the time elapsed until the ball passing through the discharge port 1150 reaches the distribution operation member 4851) after the opening / closing plate 1300 is closed in the small hit A. ..

From this, when the opening / closing plate 1300 is driven by the small hit A, if a sphere remains in the storage flow path 1231 in advance, the sphere passes through the specific region 4830 when the first distribution operation member 4851 moves. Can be made to. On the other hand, since the probability that the small hit A will occur is 10% in the case of the special symbol 2, it is difficult to frequently cause the ball to pass through the specific region 4830 at this timing.

The second movement of the distribution operation member 4851 is 1.4 seconds after the end of the small hit game (corresponding to immediately after the second ball that has passed through the discharge port 1150 has passed through the distribution operation member 4851). Equivalent to. That is, the second movement is an embodiment in which the balls are not allowed to enter the specific area 4830 if the number of balls discharged from the storage flow path 1231 at the end of the small hit game is up to two.

That is, according to this control example, when only the small hit B is repeatedly executed during the time saving game, the ball does not pass through the specific area 4830 unless the number of reserved balls of the special symbol 2 becomes 0. Can be configured as follows.

As a result, when only the small hit B is repeatedly executed during the time saving game, the timing at which the ball passes through the specific area 4830 can be limited to the time when the number of reserved balls of the special symbol 2 becomes 0. In this case, the prize balls paid out by the game in which the balls are continuously inserted into the second entrance 640 so that the number of reserved balls does not become 0 can be used to obtain a large amount of prize balls to be paid out in the time-saving game.

On the other hand, it is difficult to pass the ball through the specific area 4830 while the ball is continuously inserted into the second entrance 640, so in order to obtain the next big hit (pass the ball through the specific area 4830). , The player needs to set the timing to set the number of reserved balls of the second special symbol to 0 in the time-saving game. As a result, in the time-saving game, when the number of remaining time-saving times decreases, it is possible to configure the player to obtain a larger profit by frequently setting the timing to set the number of reserved balls to 0.

According to the setting of the second movement, if the number of balls discharged from the storage flow path 1231 is 3, the balls pass through the specific area 4830, but the present invention is not limited to this. That is, the number of ejected balls may be set when the number of ejected balls is larger than the number of ejected balls (2 pieces) at the shortest interval (0.4 seconds) of the small hit game. Therefore, for example, the fourth ball covers the specific area 4830. The second movement may be set at the timing of passing (1.8 seconds from the end of the small hit game). Further, the shortest interval of the small hit game may be set to 0.2 seconds (the number of ejected pieces is 1), and in this case, the second movement is when the number is larger than the number of ejected (1 piece). It may be set, and for example, the second movement may be set at the timing (1.2 seconds from the end of the small hit game) when the second ball passes through the specific area 4830.

Further, since the average number of balls that can enter the storage flow path 1231 in one small hit game is about 1 or 2, the storage flow path 1231 is before the small hit game in which the number of reserved balls becomes 0. By storing the spheres in, the possibility that the spheres pass through the specific area 4830 can be increased. Therefore, the timing for setting the number of reserved balls of the special symbol 2 to 0 can be selected according to the number of balls in the storage flow path 1231 that increases or decreases with each small hit game. This makes it possible to improve the attention to the spheres stored in the storage channel 1231.

In this control example, as the period of the time-saving game becomes longer, the number of prize balls paid out due to the ball entering the second entrance 640 increases. Here, by setting the number of prize balls in the second entrance 640, the player can select whether to shorten or lengthen the period of the time-saving game.

For example, if the number of prize balls in the second entrance 640 is 1, there is no profit (number of payout prize balls) that the player can obtain by subtracting the number of shots (0). Therefore, it is beneficial for the player to shorten the period of the time-saving game.

On the other hand, if the number of prize balls in the second entrance 640 is 2 or more (for example, 5), there is a profit (number of payout prize balls) that the player can obtain by deducting from the number of shots (1 piece). that's all). Therefore, it may be beneficial for the player to suppress the entry of the ball into the specific area 4830 and prolong the period of the time-saving game.

In this control example, the opening time of the opening / closing plate 1300 for one small hit game is set to 1.8 seconds from the start of the first opening to the closing, so that the first specific winning opening 1000a in one small hit game is reached. The number of balls entered is 3 or 4, but the number is not limited to this. For example, by configuring the opening pattern of the small hit game with an opening pattern in which the opening of 0.12 seconds is repeated 15 times, more balls (for example, 10 balls) can be played during one small hit game. ) May be configured to be able to enter the first specific winning opening 1000a. In this case, for example, by disposing the drop delay plate 3250 described in the third embodiment, even if the opening time of the opening / closing plate 1300 is short, the ball is at the lower end of the opening / closing plate 1300 when the opening / closing plate 1300 is closed. It is possible to prolong the time until the ball falls downward, and the ball can be guided to the first specific winning opening 1000a.

In this control example, since the ball is controlled to be able to be launched at intervals of 0.6 seconds, the small hit game (small hit A, small hit B) with a period from opening to closing of 1.8 seconds is the shortest interval (0). When repeated at intervals of .4 seconds), the number of small hit games for the number of balls that can be fired is 11 balls / 3 times. That is, a maximum of 11 balls can be fired during three small hit games.

Here, since it is necessary to put a ball into the second entrance 640 in order to generate a small hit game, when the number of reserved balls in the second entrance 640 is 0, such as at the start of right-handed hitting. It is necessary to insert three balls into the second entrance 640 as the number of balls for generating three small hit games. Therefore, the remaining eight balls deviate from the second entrance 640 and head toward the first specific winning opening 1000a. In the three small hit games, for example, if all the small hits are the above-mentioned small hits B, six balls are ejected after the three small hit games. Therefore, after three small hit games, two balls remain in the storage flow path 1231. Therefore, the expected number of additional balls remaining in the storage flow path 1231 when the balls are continuously launched is 2 for every 3 small hit games.

The ball that has passed through the first specific winning opening 1000a in the small hit game is not discharged if it has not reached the lower end of the storage flow path 1231. It takes 2 seconds from the first specific winning opening 1000a to reach the lower end of the storage flow path 1231, and even considering that the opening in the small hit game is completed in 1.8 seconds, the small hit game is the first. It is possible that the opening of the next small hit game is started before the ball that has passed through the 1 specific winning opening 1000a reaches the lower end of the storage flow path 1231.

Therefore, when the balls start to accumulate in the storage flow path 1231 (when the number is not 0, the first time), the small hit game in a state where the number is not 0 (for example, two balls remain in the storage flow path 1231). It is possible to make it easier for the balls to remain in the storage flow path 1231 as compared with the case where the balls are additionally increased in the small hit game to be executed (continuous times).

On the other hand, if the number of reserved balls in the second entrance 640 is not 0, the number of reserved balls remaining is newly added even if three balls do not enter the second entrance 640. If the number of balls entered into the second entrance 640 exceeds 3, three small hit games can be executed at the shortest interval (0.4 second interval). In this case, the number of balls heading to the first specific winning opening 1000a during the three small hit games is eight or more, and more balls can be directed to the storage flow path 1231 for three small hit games. It is possible to leave more than two spheres in the storage channel 1231 additionally.

As described above, in this control example, the small hit game generated based on the ball entering the second entry port 640 is maintained so as to continue at the shortest interval, and as many balls as possible are used. 1 It is controlled so that it is profitable for the player to enter the ball into the specific winning opening 1000a and leave the ball in the storage flow path 1231. Therefore, when the ball entering the second entrance 640 is not involved in the occurrence of the small hit game (when the number of reserved balls is full (4 in this control example)), the ball is inserted into the second entrance 640. Is disadvantageous to the player from the viewpoint of the number of prize balls and the increase of the number of balls to be additionally left in the storage channel 1231 (to the second entrance 640 during the right-handed game). The entry of the ball may be disadvantageous to the player).

Therefore, it is possible to improve the attention to the number of reserved balls of the special symbol 2 when the ball enters the second entrance 640 during the right-handed game.

Here, in this control example, when aiming to pass a ball through the specific area 4830, more balls than two are stored at the stage where the number of reserved balls in the second entry port 640 becomes 0. It is required that it is stored in the flow path 1231. That is, if the number of reserved balls is not reduced based on the time when there are more balls than twice the number of reserved balls in the second entry port 640 (determined), the balls flow into the specific area 4830. It is configured so that it is difficult to make it. As a result, in addition to the attention to the number of reserved balls of the special symbol 2, the attention to the number of balls stored in the storage flow path 1231 can be improved.

In this control example, the adjustment of the game area (gauge configuration, nail adjustment, etc.) is an adjustment in which a large number of balls enter the second entry port 640 so that the ball can easily pass through the normal entry port 67 during the right-handed game. However, even if the adjustment is such that it is difficult for the ball to enter the second entry opening 640 and many balls tend to move toward the first specific winning opening 1000a, the loss given to the player can be reduced.

That is, for example, in the case of adjustment in which a large number of balls enter the second entry port 640 during the right-handed game, it is difficult for the balls to accumulate in the storage flow path 1231, and while the small hit game B continues to occur. Although it is difficult for the ball to enter the specific area 4830, if the small hit game A selected with 10% probability occurs, the ball can be passed to the specific area 4830, so that the ball enters the specific area 4830. By entering a large number of balls into the second entrance 640 in the meantime, it is possible to aim for the payout of many prize balls.

Further, for example, in the case where it is difficult for a ball to enter the second entrance 640 during a right-handed game and many balls are easily adjusted toward the first specific winning opening 1000a, the ball enters the second entrance 640. Since it is difficult to enter, most of the right-handed game balls can be entered into the storage flow path 1231, and in addition, the number of reserved special symbols 2 based on the entry into the second entry port 640 is 0. Since it is easy to maintain as it is, it becomes easy to eject two or more balls in the first small hit game. Therefore, since it is easy for the ball to pass through the specific area 4830 at an early stage, the time-saving game can be completed at an early stage, and a period in which a loss occurs due to the ball being difficult to enter the second entrance 640 (that is, the time-saving game). The period) can be shortened.

In this control example, since the opening / closing plate 1300 and the first specific winning opening 1000a are configured to be used in the small hit game, it is desirable to separately prepare the winning opening used in the big hit game. For example, the second specific winning opening 2255a different from the first specific winning opening 1000a as described in the second embodiment may be set as the winning opening used in the jackpot game.

In this case, the storage channels 1231 do not necessarily have to merge, and for example, the first specific winning opening 1000a and the second specific winning opening 2255a may form independent storage channels. The second specific winning opening 2255a may not form a storage flow path (discharged to the ball discharge path).

It should be noted that this control example exemplifies one means of the technical idea regarding the game machine that "the player can select the timing of flowing the ball into the specific area 4830 (can aim)", and other means for the same purpose. May be used.

For example, a small hit (small hit A in this control example) for driving (exciting) the opening / closing plate 1300 in a driving mode in which the ball easily flows into the specific area 4830 (small hit A in this control example) and a ball is difficult to flow into the specific area 4830 ( In the control mode in which the small hit (small hit B in this control example) that drives (excites) the opening / closing plate 1300 in the drive mode (which does not flow in) is selected according to the small hit type, which small hit is executed is played. By controlling so as to notify the person and controlling so that the launched ball can pass through the specific area 4830 after grasping the content of the notification, the timing of flowing the ball into the specific area 4830 is played. It may be possible for a person to select. According to this, it is possible to allow "a game mode in which the ball is avoided from entering the specific area 4830 by not firing the ball at a predetermined timing".

The means of notification is not limited in any way. For example, it may be notified by the display of the third symbol display device 81, or may be notified by voice.

Although the present invention has been described above based on the above-described embodiment, the present invention is not limited to the above-described embodiment, and it is easy to make various modifications and improvements within a range that does not deviate from the gist of the present invention. It can be inferred.

In each of the above embodiments, a part or all of the configurations in one embodiment may be combined with or replaced with a part or all of the configurations in another embodiment to form another embodiment.

In each of the above embodiments, the storage flow path 1231 is configured as a flow path extending on a plane, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the storage flow path 1231 may be configured so that the right side of the plane orthogonal to the left-right direction is bent 90 degrees and extends in the front-rear direction. That is, it may be configured as a flow path that extends from the detection sensor 1240 to the bent position in the left-right direction, extends from the bent position in the front-rear direction, and again extends in the left-right direction on the upstream side of the discharge port 1150.

The flow path extending in the front-rear direction has a flow path shape in which the extension direction is switched from left-right to front-back (rotated by 90 degrees in the vertical axis) by diverting the shape of the storage flow path 1231. It is formed by combining two lightly transmissive members having a substantially symmetrical shape having recesses forming one side surface of the flow path on opposite sides from the left and right.

The storage flow path 1231 including the flow path extending in the front-rear direction has a different direction of the flow path from the above embodiment, but the number of balls that can be stored downstream of the first specific winning opening 1000a is a specified number (10 in this embodiment). It is designed to be (pieces). That is, also in this embodiment, it is possible to configure the same game playability as the game playability described in each of the above embodiments.

Even for the storage flow path 1231 including the flow path extending in the front-rear direction, the solenoid 6910 enters the flow path in a driven (excited) state and regulates the flow of spheres in the flow path, and the solenoid 6910. In the state where the drive (excitation) of the vehicle is released, an interference member is provided which is retracted from the flow path and can be switched between the retracted state where the flow of the sphere in the flow path is allowed.

Here, the arrangement of the interference member with respect to the flow path is the same as that of the sixth embodiment. That is, among the balls stored on the downstream side of the first specific winning opening 1000a, the flow path extending forward and backward on the upstream side of the second ball counting from the lowermost ball whose flow is restricted by the regulating member 1600. It is arranged so that the flow of the third ball can be regulated by entering the inside, and in the overhanging state of the interference member, seven pieces are located on the upstream side of the interference member and on the downstream side of the first specified winning opening 1000a. Balls can be stored.

The flow path extending back and forth is formed so that the third and subsequent spheres are stored behind the second sphere counting from the lowermost sphere whose flow is restricted by the regulating member 1600. Therefore, when the second sphere is arranged, the sphere is arranged on the front side of the interfering member, so that the interfering member is hidden by the sphere. That is, the state of the interfering member can be made difficult to grasp by the sphere.

Compared to the case where the stored spheres are arranged side by side, the entire sphere cannot be visually recognized, and the flow path itself extends to the back side, so that the distance from the glass unit 16 (see FIG. 1) to the visual object can be reduced. When the storage flow path 1231 includes a flow path extending back and forth due to reasons such as being far away, a state in which 10 spheres are stored in the storage flow path 1231 due to the retracting of the interference member and the interference member It becomes difficult to grasp the state in which nine balls are stored in the storage flow path 1231 from the arrangement of the balls. Therefore, according to the present embodiment, it is possible to make it difficult to grasp the number of stored balls even if the first variable winning device 1000 is directly visually recognized.

In the case of having such a feature, for example, the third symbol display device 81 may display the number of balls entered into the first specific winning opening 1000a. In this case, the number of balls that have entered the first specific winning opening 1000a can be grasped by looking at the third symbol display device 81 rather than visually recognizing the storage flow path 1231 in which the number of stored balls is poorly discriminating. Since it can be configured to be easy, the attention power to the third symbol display device 81 can be relatively improved with respect to the attention power to the first variable winning device 1000. Therefore, the line of sight of the player can be easily removed from the first variable winning device 1000.

In each of the above embodiments, the case where the number of balls discharged from the storage flow path 1231 is controlled by the operating length of the regulating member 1600 has been described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, a second discharge port capable of discharging a ball from the middle of the storage channel 1231 and a second discharge port regulating member for opening and closing the second discharge port are provided so that the ball can be discharged from the second discharge port. You can do it. In this case, it is possible to prevent the balls stored between the second discharge port and the first discharge port from being discharged without strictly controlling the operating length of the second discharge port regulating member. Therefore, the number of balls discharged can be changed depending on whether the balls are discharged from the first discharge port or the second discharge port. Further, in this case, for example, if the first discharge port and the second discharge port are controlled to be opened at the same time, the time required to discharge the ball globally can be shortened, and the interval can be shortened.

In each of the above embodiments, the case where the opening / closing plate 1300 operates in rotation has been described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, it is composed of an opening / closing plate 1300 that moves up and down so that the ball can be guided to the first specific winning opening 1000a when it is placed in the upper position, and the ball is guided from the first specific winning opening 1000a when it is placed in the lower position. You may try to divert. In this case, since it is not necessary to arrange the ball at a position sandwiched between the opening / closing plate 1300 and the lining front plate 3200 when raising the ball, the raising operation of the ball can be made smoother.

In each of the above embodiments, the case where the balls stored in the storage flow path 1231 are discharged from a single discharge port 1710 has been described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, an additional outlet may be located midway through the storage channel 1231. In this case, the maximum number of possible discharges can be changed depending on whether the discharge is performed from the discharge port 1710 or an additional discharge port. That is, it becomes difficult to discharge the ball stuck on the discharge port 1710 side from the additional discharge port. Further, by opening both discharge ports at the same time to discharge the ball, the discharge efficiency of the ball can be improved and the interval can be shortened.

In each of the above embodiments, the case where the distribution device 4850 of the probability fluctuation determination unit 4800 starts the operation based on the operation timing of the opening / closing plate 1300 has been described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the state may be changed by the weight of the spheres depending on the number of spheres passing through the probability fluctuation determination flow path 4820 within a predetermined time. In this case, it is possible to switch whether or not the right to shift to the high probability state can be obtained depending on the number of balls discharged, regardless of the ejection speed (interval) of the balls.

In each of the above embodiments, the case where the operation start timing of the opening / closing plate 1300 and the operation start timing of the regulation member 1600 are slightly different has been described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the operation may be started at the same time. In this case, the structure can be simplified.

In each of the above embodiments, the case where the resistance of the ball to enter the ball changes depending on whether or not there is a gap for the ball to enter in the storage channel 1231 (whether or not the storage channel 1231 is full). It is not necessarily limited to this. For example, it may be configured to decelerate a predetermined ball entering the storage channel 1231 depending on whether or not the number of balls stored in the storage channel 1231 is close to the full state. In this case, even if the specified number (count number) of the round game R is smaller than the number that can be stored in the storage channel 1231, it is possible to suppress winning more than the specified number. Further, in this case, as compared with the case where the ball is decelerated regardless of the number of stored balls, it is possible to prevent the jackpot game from being delayed while suppressing the winning of a predetermined number or more. It should be noted that the deceleration is not limited to the acceleration. In this case, it is possible to intentionally generate more than a specified number of prizes.

In each of the above embodiments, the case where the balls are stored in the storage flow path 1231 and the balls are restricted from entering the first specific winning opening 1000a by the stored balls is not necessarily limited to this. Absent. For example, a non-electrically actuated member may be provided, which operates by a predetermined amount when a ball that has reached the specific winning opening 1000a passes through, and facilitates regulation of ball entry in a certain posture. In this case, the time required for the inter-round interval can be shortened as compared with the case where the stored balls are discharged all at once.

In each of the above embodiments, the case where a specified number of balls are stored in the storage flow path 1231 has been described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, a specified number + 1 ball may be stored. In this case, the number of balls that exceed the specified number and pass through the first specific winning opening 1000a can be limited to one for each round game R. Further, in this case, the round in which the eleventh ball easily passes and the round in which the passage of the eleventh ball is restricted may be switched for each round.

In each of the above embodiments, when the opening / closing plate 1300 starts switching to the closed state, the ball cannot be held (falls) in front of the first specific winning opening 1000a, so that two balls cannot be won at the same time. However, it is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the ball may be held only for one ball so that the opening / closing plate 1300 may pass through the first specific winning opening 1000a before the opening / closing plate 1300 is closed. In addition, the presence or absence of this possibility may be switched for each round.

In the second embodiment, the storage flow path 1231 having a plurality of inlets and a single outlet has been described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, a plurality of outlets may be arranged in the storage flow path, and the flow path may branch toward the outlet in the middle. In this case, a predetermined number of balls can be left in the storage flow path 1231 regardless of which outlet the balls are discharged from.

In the second embodiment, the case where the number of balls that can be stored when the ball is entered from the first specific winning opening 1000a is the same as the specified number of winnings (counting number) in the round game R of the jackpot game has been described. It is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the number of balls that can be stored when the ball is entered from the first specific winning opening 1000a is less than the specified number of winning balls (count number) in the round game R, and the number of balls that can be stored when the ball is entered from the second specific winning opening 2255a. May be equal to or greater than the specified number of winnings (counting number) in the round game R. In this case, it is possible to configure the game property that the round time is inevitably extended when the ball is entered from the first specific winning opening 1000a while the whole ball is discharged at the interval between rounds.

In the third embodiment, the case where the ball flowing down the opening / closing plate 1300 is lifted upward by the opening / closing plate 1300 again is described, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, the ball may be raised by a movable accessory having a constant motion capable of picking up the ball. In this case, the movement of the ball can entertain the player.

In the third embodiment, the case where the delay member (fall delay plate 3250) is arranged below the opening / closing plate 1300 has been described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the opening / closing plate 1300 may be formed so as to slide along a direction perpendicular to the board surface, and ribs protruding from the board surface or the glass plate side to the game area may be arranged above the opening / closing plate 1300. Then, when the opening / closing plate 1300 that slides is in the open state, the ball does not come into contact with the rib, and when it is in the closed state, the ball may come into contact with the rib. As a result, even above the opening / closing plate 1300, the flow velocity of the sphere can be changed to delay the flow.

As a method of preventing the sphere from coming into contact with the rib, it is possible to move the sphere to either the front or the back by inclining in the front-rear direction and arrange the rib on the opposite side.

In the third embodiment, the case where the flow of the ball is delayed by the drop delay plate 3250 arranged on the front side of the opening / closing plate 1300 has been described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, an inlet and an outlet may be arranged on the front side of the opening / closing plate 1300, and the flow path connecting the inlet and the outlet may be composed of a curved flow path passing through the back side of the opening / closing plate 1300. In this case, a ball that has once become difficult for the player to see due to the opening / closing plate 1300 by passing through the entrance from the front side of the opening / closing plate 1300 and flowing down the back side of the opening / closing plate 1300 is discharged from the exit again. Since the area where the ball is delayed is not limited to the area on the front side of the opening / closing plate 1300, the ball is delayed until the next round is started even if the interval is long. It is possible to secure a sufficient section for.

It is desirable that the entrance is below the opening / closing plate 1300 and the exit is above the opening / closing plate 1300. Further, when the opening / closing plate 1300 is in the open state, it is desirable that a part of the opening / closing plate 1300 narrows the opening of the entrance to such an extent that the passage of the ball can be prevented. In this case, the opening / closing plate 1300 can prevent the ball from entering the entrance when the opening / closing plate 1300 is in the open state.

In the third embodiment, the case where the ball is decelerated by moving the facing surface 3251a of the extended plate portion 3251 away from the thin plate member 1110 of the main body member 3100 toward the downstream side has been described. It is not limited to this. For example, the inclination angle of the upper surface of the extension plate portion 3251 may be made gentler toward the downstream side. In this case, the component of the gravitational acceleration in the flow direction of the sphere becomes small, and the sphere can be decelerated.

Further, the change in acceleration / deceleration may be reversed. When the sphere accelerates toward the downstream side, it is possible to prevent the formation of a continuous sphere on the fall delay plate 3250.

In the third embodiment, the case where the fall delay plate 3250 is arranged below the opening / closing plate 1300 so that only the sphere that has passed downward through the opening / closing plate 1300 is brought into contact with the opening / closing plate 1300 has been described. It is not limited to. For example, in a front / rear sliding type opening / closing plate, in an open state, a ball enters a pocket in which a winning opening is arranged, and in a closed state, the ball rolls on the upper surface of the opening / closing plate. A rib that can be contacted when reaching the downstream side on the plate may be arranged. The ball that enters the pocket as it is does not come into contact with this rib. In this case, since the sphere can be delayed on the upper surface of the opening / closing plate in the closed state, it is possible to prevent the sphere from moving up and down with the operation of the opening / closing plate.

In the third embodiment, the case where the drop delay plate 3250 is omitted from the drop position Pf3 and the sphere falls vertically downward at the position immediately before the detection sensor 1240 has been described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. .. For example, the fall delay plate 3250 is extended to a position where it passes the detection sensor 1240 in the left-right direction, a through hole through which a ball passing through the detection sensor 1240 can pass is formed, and the ball is discharged from the through hole. You may do so. In this case, even when the opening / closing plate 1300 is switched from the closed state to the open state when the sphere is arranged at the position immediately before the detection sensor 1240, the sphere can be arranged above the opening / closing plate 1300.

This is different from the second drop delay plate 7260 described above in the seventh embodiment. That is, when the fall delay plate 3250 is extended to a position where it passes the detection sensor 1240 in the left-right direction, the ball that has fallen at the position immediately before the detection sensor 1240 and has landed on the fall delay plate 3250 remains to the right (detection sensor). The ball that has fallen to the second fall delay plate 7260 due to the same drop flows down to the left side (the side away from the detection sensor 1240) and then flows down to the fall delay plate 3250 again. To reach. That is, the period during which the flow of the sphere is delayed and the path through which the sphere flows are different below the opening / closing plate 1300.

In the fifth embodiment, the case where the flow path through which the balls entering from the second entry port 640 and the specific winning openings 1000a and 2255a flow down merges with the storage flow path 1231 and the number of incoming balls is related to each other will be described. However, it is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the sphere may be automatically supplied into the storage flow path 1231. In this case, it is possible to create a situation in which the ball remains in the storage flow path 1231 from the start of the game.

In the fifth embodiment, the case where the profit obtained by the player decreases as the number of lottery until the jackpot is acquired decreases in the high probability state, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the more the number of lottery to win the jackpot, the greater the profit that the player can obtain. In this case, the profit obtained from the jackpot obtained in a short time is small, and the profit obtained from the jackpot obtained over a long time can be increased, so that the time efficiency with respect to the profit obtained by the player can be made uniform.

In the sixth embodiment, the case where the interference member 6930 is driven by the solenoid 6910 and the number of balls that can be stored in the storage flow path 1231 changes has been described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, an operating member that operates in the storage flow path 1231 according to the number of stored balls and changes the number of spheres that can be stored in the storage flow path 1231 may be provided. In this case, since the operating member moves depending on the number of stored devices regardless of the driving timing of the driving device 1500, it is possible to prevent the player from feeling uncomfortable due to reasons such as the operating timing of the operating member being different from the usual one.

In the sixth embodiment, the case where the number of balls that can be stored in the storage flow path 1231 changes due to the interference member 6930 forming an overhanging state, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the portion forming the storage flow path 1231 (particularly, the U-shaped portion) is configured to move in the extension direction (left-right direction) of the flow path to change the flow path length of the storage flow path 1231. You may. In this case, even if the movement is performed in advance, it is difficult for the player to notice whether or not the movement has been made due to the small amount of the movement. Therefore, it is possible to form a game property in which the movement of the member (change in the flow path length of the storage flow path 1231) is noticed only after the ball is accumulated in the storage flow path 1231, and the player's attention to the first variable winning device 6000 can be formed. Can be improved.

The member may be moved by the driving force of the solenoid, or the member may be moved only by switching whether or not the member can be moved by the driving device, and the actual movement may be performed by the weight of the ball itself.

In the sixth embodiment, the case where the interference member 6930 projects in a state where a predetermined number of balls are stored in the storage flow path 1231 has been described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, an overhanging state may be formed before the sphere begins to enter the storage channel 1231. In this case, the number of balls that can enter the storage flow path 1231 can be seven. Further, a pattern that forms an overhanging state after the spheres are stored and a pattern that forms an overhanging state before the spheres start to enter the storage flow path 1231 may be mixed for each round. In this case, the round in which the number of stored pieces is 7 and the round in which the number of stored pieces is 9 can be switched by a single member.

In the sixth embodiment, the case where the interference member 6930 is in the retracted state when the ball is discharged from the storage flow path 1231 has been described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the interference member 6930 may be able to change to an overhanging state while the ball is being discharged from the storage flow path 1231. In this case, by changing the combination of the timing at which the ball is discharged and the timing at which the interference member 6930 is brought into the overhanging state, the mode of discharging the ball can be formed in a plurality of patterns.

In the eighth embodiment and the ninth embodiment, the auxiliary opening / closing member 8340 is seen as an auxiliary, but the present invention is not limited thereto. For example, only the auxiliary opening / closing member 8340 may open / close, and the opening / closing plate 8300 may be configured as a fixed plate. In this case, the auxiliary opening / closing member 8340 may be provided with a flow path for dropping the ball from above vertically so as to prevent the auxiliary opening / closing member 8340 from passing to the left. In this case, a limited number of excess prizes can be allowed based on the continuous ball mode.

Further, for example, the opening / closing mode of the auxiliary opening / closing member 8340 may be switched depending on whether the auxiliary opening / closing member 8340 is repeatedly opened for a long period of time or shortly opened for each round game R. In this case, the detection sensor 1240 detects and closes at the end of the round game R, or the ball closes as an operation pattern before being detected by the detection sensor 1240 and passes through the detection sensor 1240 while it is closed. When is detected, the round game R ends, and it is possible to switch whether or not the next opening occurs. In this case, the possibility of over-winning is lower in the case of repeated short-opening than in the case of long-term opening, so the possibility of over-winning may differ depending on the difference in operation pattern. Can be done.

In the eighth embodiment, the case where the opening / closing plate 8300 and the auxiliary opening / closing member 8340 are driven by the same driving device has been described, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, a dedicated drive device may be provided for each and controlled so as to be independently driveable.

In the eighth embodiment, when the opening / closing plate 8300 and the auxiliary opening / closing member 8340 are changed to the open state, the opening / closing plate 8300 rotates in a manner of rising forward, and the auxiliary opening / closing member 8340 is directed to the left. Although the case where the opening / closing plate 8300 is configured to rotate so as to approach the opening / closing plate 8300 from above is described, the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the rotation axes of both the opening / closing plate 8300 and the auxiliary opening / closing member 8340 are parallel (for example, the axis in the front-rear direction), and the opening / closing plate 8300 and the auxiliary opening / closing member 8340 face each other (for example, one is downward and the other is upward). It may work. In this case, the opening / closing plate 8300 and the auxiliary opening / closing member 8340 can perform an effect of sandwiching the ball as the state changes.

In the eighth embodiment, the case where the opening / closing plate 8300 includes the ball entry prevention unit 1331 has been described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the ball entry prevention unit 1331 may be omitted. In this case, since the opening / closing plate 8300 does not close the detection sensor 1240 regardless of the state, the auxiliary opening / closing member 8340 can be made to correspond as a member that regulates the guidance of the ball to the detection sensor 1240. Further, for example, the front surface portion of the ball entry prevention portion 1331 may be recessed so as to be recessed toward the back surface side. In this case, it is possible to prolong the period from the start of the state change of the opening / closing plate 8300 toward the closed state until the ball of the detection sensor 1240 cannot pass through.

In the eighth embodiment and the ninth embodiment, the opening / closing plate 8300 and the auxiliary opening / closing member 8340 have been described as members for allowing the ball to pass through the first specific winning opening 1000a, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. There is no. For example, by omitting the ball entry prevention unit 1331, the allowance of the ball to pass through the first specific winning opening 1000a can be switched only by the auxiliary opening / closing member 8340, and the opening / closing plate 8300 allows the ball to be inserted into the auxiliary ball entry port. It may be interpreted that the ball is thrown toward 9111 or the first out port 66. That is, the opening / closing plate 8300 only has a role of guiding the ball to the auxiliary opening / closing member 8340 in the open state, and whether or not the ball is guided to the first specific winning opening 1000a is switched depending on the state of the auxiliary opening / closing member 8340. It may be interpreted as being. In this case, the attention power of the auxiliary opening / closing member 8340 can be improved as compared with the attention power of the opening / closing plate 8300.

In the ninth embodiment, a case will be described in which a plurality of members movable on the upstream side of the first specific winning opening 1000a are configured and a driving mode in which one member is operated is configured to allow the ball to flow down to the auxiliary entry opening 9111. However, it is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the opening / closing plate 1300 is closed by using a single movable member (for example, the opening / closing plate 1300) and controlling the interference member 6930 to be in the overhanging state in accordance with the timing when the opening / closing plate 1300 is closed. The discharge of balls from the storage flow path 1231 in the state may be suppressed, or the period required for the opening / closing plate 1300 to be closed may be set short (the time required for one ball to be discharged from the discharge port 1150). (By setting it to less than 0.2 seconds), the discharge of balls from the storage flow path 1231 may be suppressed.

In the ninth embodiment, the case where the auxiliary ball slot 9111 is configured as a general winning slot has been described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, it may be configured as a winning opening related to a lottery of special symbols. In this case, the special symbol 2 is configured to be able to win the lottery of the special symbol 2 by entering the ball into the auxiliary entry port 9111 under the control that the special symbol 2 fluctuates in preference to the special symbol 1. It is possible to suppress the start of the fluctuation of the special symbol 1 immediately after the end.

In the ninth embodiment, the rolling plate 9112 is configured as a fixed plate, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the state changes between a state in which the rolling plate 9112 is retracted from the front side of the thin plate member 9110 (a state in which it does not collide with the game ball) and a state in which it overhangs the front side of the thin plate member 9110 (a state in which it collides with the game ball). It may be configured as a movable plate that is driven and controlled so as to be driven. In this case, various modes of operation patterns are exemplified. For example, it may be a constant operation from the power on, or a predetermined operation starting from the start of the jackpot game.

In the ninth embodiment, the case where the operating speed of the return operation of the power transmission member 5400 when the drive (excitation) of the solenoid 1510 is released is substantially constant (depending on the restoration mode of the return spring of the solenoid 1510) has been described. However, it is not necessarily limited to this. For example, a damper that gives a load to the power transmission member 5400 after the auxiliary transmission member 8340 is closed during the return operation of the power transmission member 5400 may be provided. In this case, since the period during which the opening / closing plate 8300 is maintained in the open state after the auxiliary opening / closing member 8340 is closed can be extended, the control of opening one side can be facilitated.

In the ninth embodiment, the case of switching the entry into the auxiliary entry port 9111 on the premise that the opening / closing plate 8300 changes its state toward the open state has been described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the ball may be configured to be able to enter the auxiliary ball opening 9111 at a predetermined rate during the period when the opening / closing plate 8300 is maintained in the closed state. For example, another movable object having a constant motion may be arranged so that the ball collides with the movable object to cause the ball to enter the auxiliary ball entry port 9111.

In the tenth embodiment, the movement of the movable member 10181 causes the balls to be discharged from the middle of the storage flow path 1231 so that more balls than can be accommodated in the storage flow path 1231 can pass through the first specific winning opening 1000a. As explained, it is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the volume of the storage flow path 1231 may be variably configured. In this case, since the number of balls remaining in the storage flow path 1231 can correspond to the number of balls that have passed through the first specific winning opening 1000a, it is possible to prevent the player from being confused.

In the first control example described above, a case has been described in which the periphery of the first variable winning device 6000 is brightly lit based on the operation of the operation button 300 so that the number of balls stored in the storage flow path 1231 can be grasped. It is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the brightly lit portion does not have to be in the vicinity of the first variable winning apparatus 6000, and may be a wide range portion (center frame 86 or the like) including the first variable winning apparatus 6000.

Various modes are exemplified as means for changing the lighting mode of the transmission lamp 227b. For example, a predetermined clock pulse generation circuit is arranged in the voice lamp control device 113, data of the lighting mode is transmitted to the lamp control device 227 at the rising edge of the clock pulse, and corresponds to the transmitted data at the falling edge of the clock pulse. The lamp may be turned on. In this case, when the lamp is turned off, the data corresponding to the turning off may be transmitted to the lamp control device 227. It may also be combined with a latch.

Further, a plurality of types of lighting pattern tables may be facilitated in advance, and the lighting mode of the lamp control device 227 may be switched by switching the tables. Further, the lighting mode may be switched by combining the lighting pattern table and the above-mentioned clock. Further, the display mode may be changed by setting a command, or may be controlled by using a serial port driver.

The intensity of light emission of the lamp control device 227 may be determined by a so-called dynamic lighting method (a lighting method that produces a difference in brightness by changing the time interval between lighting and extinguishing), or by a high or low voltage.

In the first control example described above, if the operation effect is successful, the case where the transmission lamp 227b is kept lit has been described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, when the operation button 300 is pressed, the transmission lamp 227b may be turned on for a short period (for a moment). In this case, the attention to the storage channel 1231 can be improved. Further, based on the success of the operation effect, it is possible to notify, for example, how many remaining balls should be inserted into the storage flow path 1231 instead of lighting the lamp.

In the first control example, five or more spheres are stored on the upstream side of the interference member 6930, and the interference member 6930 is brought into a retracted state by operating the operation button 300 so that the spheres flow into the specific area 4830. However, it is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the number of balls stored on the upstream side of the interference member 6930 is set to 4 or less, and the interference member 6930 is in the retracted state, so that the general winning opening is arranged at a position where the stored balls can pass. You may. In this case, the interference member 6930 can be configured as a so-called "holding device".

In the first control example, the case where the number of balls to be entered into the storage flow path 1231 is notified by display in the round game R in which the operation effect is executed has been described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the round in which the operation effect is executed may be advanced by one round, and the number of balls to be entered in the storage flow path 1231 may be notified in the round game after the round in which the operation effect is executed. In this case, it is possible to prevent the balls from accumulating too much in the storage flow path 1231 before the notification.

Further, in the round game R in which the operation effect is executed, when the number of balls to be entered into the storage flow path 1231 is notified, the time is insufficient to reach the number (continuously firing the balls). It is desirable to execute the notification at a time (when it is insufficient). As a result, even if the firing of the ball is continued from the start of the round game R, it is possible to prevent a situation in which the ball enters the storage flow path 1231 too much at the execution timing of the notification.

In the first control example described above, the case where the operation speed of the display pointer 719 is the same in the operation effect has been described, but the operation speed is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the operating speed of the display pointer 719 and the number of display pointers may be changed and controlled based on a predetermined condition. Examples of the predetermined conditions include, for example, the number of changes in the special symbol required for the jackpot, the number of points accumulated by the number of games, and the like. In this case, for example, when the number of fluctuations of the special symbol is large or when the privilege is high, the difficulty level of the operation effect is controlled to be low, so that the burden (number of fluctuations, the number of fluctuations) required by the player to the jackpot is required. The larger the number of games), the greater the profit that the player can obtain by the operation effect.

Here, as the difficulty level, the difficulty level of the operation effect itself, the difficulty level of profit acquisition after the operation effect, and the like are exemplified. When the difficulty of obtaining profit after the operation effect is high, for example, the execution timing of the operation effect and the accompanying notification is the latter half of the round game R (the period during which the specified number of balls can enter the storage flow path 1231 has elapsed. It is exemplified that it is arranged later). In this case, at the timing of notification, a situation may occur in which the number of balls entering the storage flow path 1231 exceeds the number notified as the number of balls to be entered into the storage flow path 1231.

Further, the difficulty level of the operation effect itself may be associated with the difficulty level of profit acquisition after the operation effect. For example, when the operation speed of the display pointer 719 is slow, it is easy to succeed in the operation itself, but since the time elapsed until the operation timing is long, the number of balls to be entered into the storage flow path 1231 by then is set. There is a possibility that more balls than the reported number will enter. On the other hand, when the operation speed of the display pointer 719 is high, it is difficult to succeed in the operation itself, but since the time elapsed until the operation timing is short, the number of balls to be entered into the storage flow path 1231 by then. It is possible to prevent more balls than the number notified as.

Since the duration of the remaining round game R differs depending on the difference in the execution timing of the notification, the display effect adopted may be controlled so as to be switchable according to the duration of the remaining round game R. For example, if the duration of the remaining round game R is short, a display effect is configured with a video that can be completed in a short period of time, and if the remaining round game R is sufficiently long, a video that continues for a long period is displayed. You may configure the production. In this case, for example, it is possible to prevent a problem that the loading of the moving image does not end with the remaining time of the round game R and the round game R ends without being displayed.

In the first control example, the case where the number of balls to be inserted into the storage flow path 1231 is nine, which is less than the specified number, has been described, but the number is not necessarily limited to this. For example, by allowing an extremely small number (for example, two) of balls to enter the storage flow path 1231, the player may be controlled so as to obtain a large profit. In this case, the player can be urged to stop firing the ball at the start of the notified round. At the same time, the third symbol display device 81 or the like may give a notification such as "stop firing".

In the first control example, the case where the interference member 6930 operates immediately when the operation button 300 is pressed has been described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the operation timing of the operation button 300 in the operation effect and the operation timing of the interference member 6930 may be shifted by a predetermined period. In this case, it is possible to prevent the operation button 300 from being operated with the state near the interference member 6930 (the flow state of the ball as a guide), and it is possible to improve the attention to the operation effect.

In the first control example, the timing at which the error command is set by S1515 is the timing at which the sphere is discharged from the storage flow path 1231, and the solenoid 1510 is turned off, so that the error command is issued. If the sphere remains in the storage flow path 1231 even after the setting, the discharge from the storage flow path 1231 is continued, but the discharge is not necessarily limited to this. For example, another movable object that regulates the passage of the ball of the discharge port 1150 is arranged, and when the power is turned on, it is driven (excited) to allow the ball of the discharge port 1150 to pass, and while an error command is generated. May be controlled to change state so as to regulate the passage of the ball. In this case, since it is possible to prevent the balls remaining in the storage flow path 1231 from being discharged from the storage flow path 1231 at the timing when the error command is generated, it is not illegal and some kind of malfunction (ball clogging or ball When an error command is set due to deceleration due to dirt, etc.), the disadvantage caused to the player can be reduced. After that, by resolving the error command by turning off the power or turning the power on again, the game can be restarted from the state where the ball remains in the storage flow path 1231 (the state immediately before the error command is set). ..

The control of this movable object is not limited to the control depending on whether or not an error command is set. For example, it may be controlled so that the state changes when the power is turned on and off. In this case, for example, when the game cannot be continued due to a sudden power failure or the like, it is possible to prevent the balls stored in the storage flow path 1231 from being discharged from the storage flow path 1231.

Further, the control mode of the movable object may be changed depending on whether or not the RAM 203 is cleared before and after the power is turned off. For example, even when it is discovered that the error command setting was based on fraudulent activity and the RAM 203 is cleared, it is not necessary to be able to restart the game from the state immediately before the error command is set. Before resuming the game, the movement of the movable object may be controlled so that the ball is discharged from the storage flow path 1231.

The mode of this movable object is not limited at all. For example, a drive device may be separately arranged and the regulating member 1600 may be diverted as a means for preventing the ejection of the ball, or the interference member 6930 may be configured to be able to be maintained in an overhanging state as a process when the power is turned off. The interference member 6930 may be adopted as the movable member.

In the first control example, the control flow is configured based on the number of rounds started in the jackpot medium effect processing S2505, but the control flow is not necessarily limited to this. For example, control is performed based on the start of a specific effect, such as the start of a round game R in which a ball can pass through a specific area 4830 or the start of a round game R in which an operation effect is started. The flow may be configured. In this case, even if the round number of the production is changed due to the specification change, it is possible to eliminate the need for a drastic change in the control flow, so that the burden of the specification change can be reduced. it can.

Further, in the jackpot medium effect processing S2505, the control flow is configured so that the flag turned on in the control flow when it is determined to be the third round is turned off in the control flow when it is determined to be the fifth round. , Not necessarily limited to this. For example, the flag may be turned off at the end of the control mode set in the third round, that is, at the end of the round of the fourth round game R. In this case, the burden of changing specifications when adopting a 4-round jackpot game can be reduced.

In the second control example, the case where the ball flows down toward the auxiliary ball entry port 9111 by the drive control in which only the auxiliary opening / closing member 8340 is opened / closed has been described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, by adopting the opening / closing plate 1300 described in the first embodiment and controlling the solenoid 1510 in a drive (excitation) mode in which the opening / closing plate 1300 is maintained in the closed state for a predetermined period during the round game R, the auxiliary ball entry port is used. The ball may flow down to 9111. In this case, the ball can be configured to flow down to the auxiliary entry port 9111 without dividing the plate that guides the ball to the first specific winning opening 1000a.

Further, in this case, by setting the period for keeping the opening / closing plate 1300 in the closed state to less than 0.2 seconds, the discharge port 1150 is again before the ball is discharged from the storage flow path 1231 (in the state where the ball is about to be discharged). The passage of the ball can be regulated. Therefore, the balls can flow down to the auxiliary entry port 9111 without reducing the number of balls stored in the storage flow path 1231.

In the second control example described above, the case where the display mode of the round number display unit 714 and the sub-round display unit 714b is controlled so as to be switched based on the passage of the waiting time TK has been described, but this is not necessarily the case. It is not limited. For example, it may be controlled so as to be switched based on the number of balls that have passed through the first specific winning opening 1000a. In this case, the display is controlled to be switched based on the number of balls stored in the first specific winning opening 1000a (the storage flow path 1231 is full in the overhanging state of the interference member 6930). The player can be made to grasp the change timing of the display mode as the timing when the storage flow path 1231 is full.

The number of balls inside the storage flow path 1231 may be determined by the value of the remaining ball counter 203p, or the number of balls may be directly detected by arranging a contact sensor separately in the storage flow path 1231. You can do it.

In the second control example described above, the case where the character "+ chance" is displayed as the excess winning possibility increase notification mode 721 at a predetermined timing of a predetermined jackpot type has been described, but it is not necessarily limited to this. There is no. For example, regardless of the jackpot type, the character "+ chance" may be displayed as the excess winning possibility increase notification mode 721 during the period when the ball can enter the auxiliary entry port 9111, or the auxiliary entry may be performed. During the period when the ball cannot enter the ball opening 9111, the character "+ chance" of the excess winning possibility increase notification mode 721 may be controlled so as to be displayed as a fan display. For example, when the round number display unit 714 is brightly displayed, the character "+ chance" may be displayed.

Further, as the excess winning possibility increase notification mode 721, the characters "+ chance" may be continuously displayed for a certain period of time, or may be displayed so that the display and non-display can be switched in a short period of time. You may.

In the second control example described above, it is configured to control whether or not the auxiliary opening / closing member 8340 is opened on one side based on the jackpot type and the passage of time from the start of the jackpot, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. .. For example, the frequency of occurrence of one-sided opening and the timing of occurrence may be changed based on the type of jackpot and the passage of time from the start of jackpot. In this case, it is possible to suppress the launch mode in which the ball is launched aiming at the ball reaching the auxiliary opening / closing member 8340 at the timing when the auxiliary opening / closing member 8340 is closed (the effect of the launch mode is reduced).

In the third control example, the case where the balls remaining in the storage flow path 1231 continue to be discharged during the period when the opening / closing plate 1300 is closed has been described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, by adopting the interference member 6930 and controlling it so that it is in the overhanging state at a predetermined timing, the case where the ball remains in the storage flow path 1231 while the opening / closing plate 1300 is maintained in the closed state is configured. be able to. As a result, it is possible to complicate the selection of the launching mode of the ball by the player, so that it is possible to prevent the player from playing the ball indiscriminately.

The present invention may be implemented in a pachinko machine or the like of a type different from each of the above embodiments. For example, once a jackpot is hit, a pachinko machine (commonly known as a two-time right item, a three-time right item) that raises the expected value of the jackpot until multiple times (for example, two or three times) a big hit state occurs. It may be carried out as). Further, after the jackpot symbol is displayed, it may be implemented as a pachinko machine that generates a special game that gives a player a predetermined game value on the condition that a ball is won in a predetermined area. Further, it may be carried out on a pachinko machine that has a winning device having a special area such as a V zone and is in a special gaming state on the condition that a ball is won in the special area. Further, in addition to the pachinko machine, it may be implemented as various game machines such as an ale-pachi, a sparrow ball, a slot machine, a so-called pachinko machine and a slot machine.

In the slot machine, for example, the symbol is changed by operating the operation lever in a state where a coin is inserted to determine the symbol effective line, and the symbol is stopped and confirmed by operating the stop button. It is a thing. Therefore, the basic concept of the slot machine is "provided with a display device that displays the identification information in a variable manner after displaying the identification information string composed of a plurality of identification information in a variable manner, and is caused by the operation of the starting operation means (for example, the operation lever). The variable display of the identification information is started, and the variable display of the identification information is stopped and confirmed and displayed due to the operation of the stop operation means (for example, the stop button) or after a predetermined time has elapsed. It becomes a "slot machine that generates a special game that gives a player a predetermined game value, provided that the combination of time identification information is specific". In this case, the game medium is represented by coins, medals, etc. Take as an example.

Further, as a specific example of a gaming machine in which a pachinko machine and a slot machine are fused, a display device for variably displaying a symbol sequence consisting of a plurality of symbols and then confirming the symbol is provided, and a handle for launching a ball is provided. Some are not. In this case, after a predetermined amount of balls are thrown in based on a predetermined operation (button operation), the symbol variation is started, for example, due to the operation of the operation lever, and for example, due to the operation of the stop button or a predetermined amount. As time elapses, the fluctuation of the symbol is stopped, and a special game is generated that gives the player a predetermined game value on the condition that the confirmed symbol at the time of the stop is a so-called jackpot symbol, and the player is given a predetermined game value. Is for paying out a large amount of balls to the lower saucer. If such a game machine is used instead of a slot machine, only the ball can be treated as a game value in the game hall, which is a game value seen in the current game hall where pachinko machines and slot machines are mixed. Problems such as the burden on equipment due to the separate handling of medals and balls and restrictions on the locations where game machines are installed can be solved.

The concepts of various inventions included in the above-described embodiments in addition to the gaming machine of the present invention are shown below.

<Points that do not allow you to win more than the target number>
The game area in which the ball flows down, the entry port through which the ball flowing down the game area passes, and the first state in which the ball flowing down from the upstream side of the entry port can be guided to the entry port and the entry ball. In a game machine including a ball entry switching means for switching a ball flowing down from the upstream side of the mouth in a second state in which the ball cannot be guided to the ball entry port, and a detection means for detecting the ball entering the ball entry port. A game characterized in that the detection means includes a ball entry prevention means that makes it difficult for a ball to pass through the ball entry port in a state where a predetermined number of balls have entered the ball entry port in a predetermined period. Machine A1.

Here, in a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, a detection means is arranged so that the detection port of the large winning opening is turned sideways, and a predetermined number of balls are detected by an operating member that rolls the balls toward the detection port. There is a gaming machine that operates when it passes through the mouth and drops a ball that is on the operating member during the operation to prevent more than a predetermined number of balls from passing through the detection port of the detection means. (See, for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2015-181572). However, in the conventional game machine described above, when a plurality of balls roll unexpectedly vigorously on the operating member, an extra ball is added between the start of operation of the operating member and the fall of the ball from the operating member. There is a possibility that the ball will pass through the detection port, so that there is a problem that a predetermined number or more of balls may pass through the detection port.

On the other hand, according to the game machine A1, the ball entry prevention means makes it difficult for a predetermined number of balls or later to pass through the detection means. Therefore, regardless of the magnitude of the momentum of the balls when they are arranged on the upstream side of the entrance, the ease of passage when the balls pass through the entrance is determined by the number of balls within the predetermined number and the predetermined number of balls. It can be changed with the subsequent spheres. As a result, it is possible to prevent a predetermined number or more of balls from passing through the detection port.

As the ball entry prevention means, a means for changing the ease of passage of the ball entry port according to the detection result of the detection means, a means for constantly maintaining the passage ease of the ball entry port, etc. Is exemplified.

In the game machine A1, the ball entry prevention means includes a storage means for accommodating a ball that has passed through the ball entry port, a discharge port through which the ball passes when the ball exits from the storage means, and a discharge port thereof. The accommodation means includes a first state in which the ball can pass and a second state in which the ball cannot pass through the discharge port, and the accommodating means is between the ball entry port and the discharge port. The gaming machine A2 is formed with a volume that accommodates the predetermined number of balls at the maximum.

According to the game machine A2, in addition to the effect of the game machine A1, the storage means is formed with a volume in which a predetermined number of balls can be stored between the entry port and the discharge port. When the means is maintained in the second state and the balls are stored in the accommodating means, it is possible to prevent the balls accommodated in the accommodating means from passing a predetermined number or more of the balls through the entrance. Therefore, it is possible to physically prevent the number of balls after the predetermined number from passing through the entry port.

In the game machine A2, the game machine A3 is characterized in that while the discharge switching means is in the first state, the ball entry switching means is formed so as to be sustainable in the second state.

According to the game machine A3, in addition to the effect of the game machine A2, it is possible to prevent the ball from entering the accommodation means from the entry port while the ball is being discharged from the accommodation means. The operation timings of the discharge switching means and the ball entry switching means may be simultaneous or different.

The game machine A4 is characterized in that the game machine A2 or A3 includes a drive means that is also used as the discharge switching means and the ball entry switching means.

According to the game machine A4, in addition to the effect of the game machine A2 or A3, the pair of switching means can be operated by the combined driving means. As a result, space saving and cost saving can be achieved.

In any of the game machines A2 to A4, after the ball entry switching means starts the state change from the second state to the first state, the discharge switching means changes from the first state to the first state. A game machine A5, wherein the state change is ordered in a manner of starting the state change toward two states, and the state changes are completed substantially at the same time.

According to the game machine A5, in addition to the effect of any of the game machines A2 to A4, the ball that has entered the accommodation means is discharged from the discharge port after the ball entry switching means is in the first state. While preventing (preventing irregular winning), the ball entry switching means can be started from the second state before the discharge of the ball from the discharge port is completed, so that the ball is discharged from the discharge port. It is possible to reduce the number of balls that flow down the game area and head toward the out port through the ball entry switching means, as compared with the case where the ball entry switching means is started after the completion of the above.

The order of state changes may be performed by sequentially transmitting a driving force to each switching means, or a dedicated driving means is provided for each switching means to control the timing. You may.

The game machine A6 is characterized in that any one of the game machines A2 to A5 is provided with a changing means for changing the maximum number of the accommodation means.

According to the game machine A6, in addition to the effect of any of the game machines A2 to A5, the maximum number of accommodation means can be changed by the changing means, so that the maximum number of accommodation means can be changed temporarily (for example, in a specific round). It is possible to form a state in which more balls than the number of balls are accommodated in the accommodating means. This makes it possible to improve the interest of the player.

Further, by using the accommodating means having the same shape, it is possible to reconfigure the gaming machine by changing the predetermined number of numerical values (it is possible to cope with the difference in specifications). As a result, the development cost can be suppressed as compared with the case where the shape is made for each specification.

In the game machine A6, the ball entry port is communicated with the first ball entry port and the accommodating means downstream of the first ball entry port so that a ball flowing down the game area can pass through the ball. It is provided with a second entry port whose passage is switched by the entry switching means, and a case where a ball enters the accommodation means from the first entry opening and a case where the ball enters the accommodation means from the second entry port. The maximum number of accommodating means is changed depending on the case where the ball enters the means, and the changing means selectively sets which entry port allows the ball to pass through. Game machine A7.

According to the game machine A7, in addition to the effect of the game machine A6, both the ball entering from the first entry port and the ball entering from the second entry port can be stored in the accommodating means. Therefore, the space required can be reduced as compared with the case where separate accommodation means are arranged for each.

In the game machine A6, the changing means includes an interfering means capable of extending to the inside of the accommodating means, and the interfering means interferes with a ball overhanging and stored inside the accommodating means, and the accommodating means. The gaming machine A8 is characterized in that the maximum number of accommodating means is changed depending on the case where the accommodating means is retracted to the outside.

According to the game machine A8, in addition to the effect of the game machine A6, the number of balls accommodated is changed by changing the internal volume of the accommodating means without changing the ball entry route to the accommodating means. Therefore, it is possible to switch the number of accommodations without giving the player a sense of discomfort.

In the game machine A8, the interference means projects from the back side of the game area to the inside of the accommodation means, and is characterized in that the ball can be arranged on the front side at the time of evacuation. Game machine A9.

According to the game machine A9, in addition to the effect of the game machine A8, the interference means at the time of evacuation can be hidden by a ball arranged in front. As a result, the operation of the interference means can be made inconspicuous while eliminating the need for an additional shielding member.

<Point AK to hide the number of stored balls>
The game area in which the ball flows down, the entry port through which the ball flowing down the game area passes, and the first state in which the ball flowing down from the upstream side of the entry port can be guided to the entry port and the entry ball. In a game machine including a ball entry switching means for switching a ball flowing down from the upstream side of the mouth in a second state in which the ball cannot be guided to the ball entry port, and a detection means for detecting the ball entering the ball entry port. A ball entry preventing means for making it difficult for a ball to pass through the entry opening in a state where a predetermined number of balls have entered the entry opening in a predetermined period is provided by the detection means. The game machine is provided with a storage means for accommodating a ball that has passed through the entrance, and is provided with a visually obscuring means for making it difficult to visually recognize at least a part of the balls accommodated in the accommodating means. AK1.

Here, in a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, a detection means is arranged so that the detection port of the large winning opening is turned sideways, and a predetermined number of balls are detected by an operating member that rolls the balls toward the detection port. There is a gaming machine that operates when it passes through the mouth and drops a ball that is on the operating member during the operation to prevent more than a predetermined number of balls from passing through the detection port of the detection means. (See, for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2015-181572). However, in the above-mentioned conventional game machine, since the visibility downstream of the detection port does not change, there is a problem that the effect of the effect of the ball passing through the detection port is insufficient and the attention may be reduced. There was a point.

On the other hand, according to the game machine AK1, at least a part of the balls housed in the accommodating means is made difficult to see by the visually obscuring means, so that the effect differs depending on the number of balls accommodated in the accommodating means. When the mechanism that causes the occurrence of the ball is adopted, it is possible to reduce the possibility that the player's expectation of the action that occurs is consistent with the action that occurs. Thereby, the attention to the above-mentioned production can be improved.

In the game machine AK1, when the ball comes out of the accommodating means, the discharge port through which the ball passes, the first state in which the ball can pass through the discharge port, and the second state in which the ball cannot pass through the discharge port. A game characterized in that the accommodation means is formed with a volume in which a predetermined number of balls can be accommodated at a maximum between the entry port and the discharge port. Machine AK2
According to the game machine AK2, in addition to the effect of the game machine AK1, the balls can be stored in the accommodating means, so that the period during which the effect of the balls can be maintained can be extended.

The game machine AK3 is characterized in that the game machine AK1 or AK2 is configured to change the action of the visual disability means based on the establishment of a predetermined condition.

According to the game machine AK3, in addition to the effect of the game machine AK1 or AK2, the player's attention to the establishment of a predetermined condition can be improved.

The mode of the predetermined condition is not limited in any way. For example, as a predetermined condition, it may be adopted that the operating means that can be operated by the player is detected to be operated by the player at a predetermined timing. In this case, the magnitude of the deviation between the operation timing instructed by the display means and the actual operation timing is detected, and the degree of change in the action of the visibility obstruction means is changed according to the magnitude. Is also good. For example, the visibility of the ball accommodated in the accommodating means may be improved when the degree of deviation is small as compared with the case where the degree of deviation is large. In this case, the player's motivation for operating the operating means can be improved. The reverse is also possible.

Further, for example, as a predetermined condition, it may be adopted that the ball has passed through a predetermined entry port. In this case, for example, the degree of change in the action of the visibility obstruction means may be changed according to the number of balls that have passed through the predetermined entry port within a predetermined period. For example, as the number of balls that have passed through the entry port increases, the visibility of the balls accommodated in the accommodating means may be improved. In this case, the player can be motivated to fire more balls. The reverse is also possible. In this case, since it is possible to enthusiastically adjust the firing intensity of the ball, it is possible to suppress a vague game.

<Points to suppress wasted balls at intervals while suppressing over-winning>
The game area in which the ball flows down, the entry port through which the ball flowing down the game area passes, and the first state in which the ball flowing down from the upstream side of the entry port can be guided to the entry port and the entry ball. In a gaming machine including a ball entry switching means for switching a ball flowing down from the upstream side of the mouth in a second state in which the ball cannot be guided to the ball entry port, and a detection means for detecting the ball entering the ball entry port. , A delay means for delaying the flow of the ball at the upstream position of the ball entry port when the ball entry switching means is in the second state as compared with the case where the ball entry switching means is in the first state. A game machine B1 characterized by being equipped with.

Here, in a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, a detection means is arranged so that the detection port of the large winning opening is turned sideways, and a predetermined number of balls are detected by an operating member that rolls the balls toward the detection port. There is a gaming machine that operates when it passes through the mouth and drops a ball that is on the operating member during the operation to prevent more than a predetermined number of balls from passing through the detection port of the detection means. (See, for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2015-181572). However, in the conventional game machine described above, since the ball that has fallen from the operating member is inevitably configured to flow down to the out port, is it possible to launch the ball so that the ball that falls from the operating member does not occur? There is a problem that a certain amount of actual ball launch occurs depending on whether or not (the skill of the player's launching technique is high or low).

On the other hand, according to the game machine B1, when the ball entry switching means is in the second state in which the ball flowing down from the upstream position of the ball entry port cannot be guided to the ball entry port, the delay means acts. By delaying the flow of the ball, it is possible to facilitate the arrangement of the ball at the upstream position of the ball entry port until the ball entry switching means is switched to the first state. If the ball entry switching means is in the first state while the ball is located upstream of the ball entry port, the ball is guided to the ball entry port. As a result, it is possible to reduce the influence of the player's launching technique on the actual number of balls to be launched, so that a beginner-friendly gaming machine can be configured.

The mode of the delay means is not limited. For example, it may be a drop regulating means that is composed of a horizontally long member that supports the ball from below and regulates the fall to the end, or a convex means formed from a protrusion that decelerates the ball by contact.

In the game machine B1, the delay means is characterized in that, in a state where the ball is arranged on the downstream side, the degree of delay is increased as compared with the case where the ball is arranged on the upstream side.

According to the game machine B2, in addition to the effect of the game machine B1, the degree of delay of the ball increases when the ball is arranged on the downstream side of the delay means, so that the attention of the ball flowing down along the delay means Can be improved.

The mode of the degree of delay is not limited in any way. For example, the speed of the ball may be high or low, or the degree of backflow of the ball when the ball entry switching means is switched from the second state to the first state may be high or low.

In the game machine B1 or B2, the delay means is configured such that the ball arranged on the downstream side has a larger distance from the opening direction of the entry port than the ball arranged on the upstream side. A game machine B3 characterized by this.

According to the game machine B3, in addition to the effect of the game machine B1 or B2, when the delay means is arranged on the downstream side of the delay means, the delay means increases the distance between the opening direction of the ball entrance and the ball. Is formed, it is possible to prevent the ball from directly entering the ball entrance when the ball flows down vigorously through the delay means.

In any of the game machines B1 to B3, the ball entry switching means includes an ascending means for ascending the game area when the state changes from the second state to the first state, and the delay means is the first. The gaming machine B4, which is arranged below the ascending means in the state.

According to the game machine B4, in addition to the effect of any of the game machines B1 to B3, the delay means is arranged lower than the ascending means in the first state, so that the ball is placed from the ball entry switching means. The ball can be delayed after making the player visually recognize it as if it had fallen. This makes it possible to improve the attention to the sphere.

The game machine B4 is provided with an ascending regulating means which is arranged on the upstream side of the flow path of the ball with respect to the ascending means and which regulates the ascending movement of the ball and guides the ascending movement in a predetermined direction.

According to the game machine B5, in addition to the effect of the game machine B4, the ascending movement of the ball is regulated by the ascending regulating means and the ball is guided in a predetermined direction, so that a load is applied to the ball when the ascending means is ascended. It is possible to prevent the ball from flying in an unexpected direction.

The game machine B5 is characterized in that the ball guided in the predetermined direction by the ascending regulating means can be entered and the game machine B5 is provided with a relief entry port that gives a predetermined benefit to the player.

According to the game machine B6, in addition to the effect of the game machine B5, as a profit different from the profit generated when the ball passes through the entrance due to the ball that has been loaded and flew when the ascending means is raised. , It is possible to give the player a profit generated when the ball passes through the relief entrance. As a result, even when the ball deviates from the flow path to the entrance of the ball, it is possible to prevent the attention from being lowered, and the movement of the ball can improve the interest of the player.

In any of the game machines B1 to B6, the delay means includes a variable action unit having a different action on the sphere depending on the mode of reaching the delay means.

According to the game machine B7, in addition to the effect of any of the game machines B1 to B6, the action of delaying the ball can be different depending on the mode of reaching the delay means. As a result, it is possible to select each sphere and give a different action.

It should be noted that the mode of difference in the mode of arrival is not limited. For example, it may be a difference in the arrival position of the ball with respect to the entry port, or a difference in the flow direction of the ball until it reaches the delay means.

In the game machine B7, the variable action unit delays the flow of the ball that has reached the delay means at a position separated from the entry port by a predetermined distance or less, while separating the ball from the entry port by a predetermined distance or more. A game machine B8 characterized in that it does not act on a ball that has reached the delay means at a position.

According to the game machine B8, in addition to the effect of the game machine B7, the flow of the ball is delayed by the variable action unit for the ball that is close to the ball entry port and the state of the ball entry switching means cannot be switched in time. On the other hand, an appropriate game speed can be maintained by assuming that the variable action unit does not act on a ball that is far from the ball entry port and is sufficiently in time for switching the state of the ball entry switching means.

<Point BK that makes use of the ball reached at intervals>
The game area in which the ball flows down, the entry port through which the ball flowing down the game area passes, and the first state in which the ball flowing down from the upstream side of the entry port can be guided to the entry port and the entry ball. In a game machine including a ball entry switching means for switching a ball flowing down from the upstream side of the mouth in a second state in which the ball cannot be guided to the ball entry port, and a detection means for detecting the ball entering the ball entry port. , While the ball entry switching means is in the second state or from the second state, as compared to a ball that has reached the ball entry switching means while the ball entry switching means is in the first state. The gaming machine BK1 is provided with a profit-giving means that makes it easy to give a profit to a player by a ball that reaches the ball-entry switching means while the state changes to the first state.

Here, in a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, a detection means is arranged so that the detection port of the large winning opening is turned sideways, and a predetermined number of balls are detected by an operating member that rolls the balls toward the detection port. There is a gaming machine that operates when it passes through the mouth and drops a ball that is on the operating member during the operation to prevent more than a predetermined number of balls from passing through the detection port of the detection means. (See, for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2015-181572). However, in the conventional game machine described above, since the ball that has fallen from the operating member is inevitably configured to flow down to the out port, is it possible to launch the ball so that the ball that falls from the operating member does not occur? Depending on whether or not (the skill of the player's launching technique is high or low), some of the actual ball launches will occur, so that the player has to play carefully, and there is a problem that the interest may be reduced.

On the other hand, according to the game machine BK1, by adopting the profit-giving means, it becomes easy to give a profit to the player by the ball that arrived while the ball entry switching means changes the state, so that the profit is given to the player. Since it is possible to incorporate chance into the magnitude of profits, it is possible to remove caution from the game and improve the interest.

The mode of profit given to the player by the profit-giving means is not limited at all. For example, the prize ball may be paid out, a lottery of a predetermined symbol may be performed, the right to shift to a high probability state after the jackpot game is completed, or the next jackpot may be confirmed.

For example, when the mode of profit given to the player by the profit-giving means is the lottery of the special symbol 2, the special symbol 2 is reached by reaching the ball entry switching means at a predetermined timing during the jackpot game. The number of reserved balls can be increased up to a predetermined upper limit. As a result, when the game shifts to the high probability state after the jackpot game ends, the number of reserved balls of the special symbol 2 is 0, so that the occurrence of the event in which the reserved special symbol 1 starts to fluctuate can be suppressed. Can be done. As a result, in a gaming machine in which the lottery of the special symbol 2 is more advantageous for the player, the possibility that the lottery of the special symbol 1 unintentionally wins a big hit and causes a disadvantage to the player is reduced. can do.

In the game machine BK1, the ball is sent to the profit-giving means by a load given from the ball entry switching means.

According to the game machine BK2, in addition to the effect of the game machine BK1, it is possible to prevent the occurrence of a problem that the ball is thrown to the profit-giving means when the ball entry switching means is stopped.

In the game machine BK1 or BK2, the profit that can be given to the player by the profit-giving means is equal to or greater than the loss that can occur while the ball entry switching means maintains the second state. ..

According to the game machine BK3, in addition to the effect of the game machine BK1 or BK2, the player's attention to the profit-giving means can be improved, and the game is performed so that the profit given by the profit-giving means can be obtained. You can make it happen.

In any one of the game machines BK1 to BK3, the profit-giving means is controlled so that a plurality of types of periods maintained in the second state can be selected and controlled.

According to the game machine BK4, in addition to the effect of any of the game machines BK1 to BK3, a plurality of types of periods during which the profit-giving means are maintained in the second state are selected, so that the player can use the profit-giving means. It is possible to make it difficult to launch the ball at the timing of the change to the second state. Therefore, in order to obtain the profit obtained by passing the ball through the profit-giving means, it is possible to configure the game property that the firing of the ball must be continued.

<Points to adjust the launch of the jackpot game>
The game area in which the ball flows down, the entry port through which the ball flowing down the game area passes, and the first state in which the ball flowing down from the upstream side of the entry port can be guided to the entry port and the entry ball. In a game machine including a ball entry switching means for switching a ball flowing down from the upstream side of the mouth in a second state in which the ball cannot be guided to the ball entry port, and a detection means for detecting the ball entering the ball entry port. When the ball entry switching means maintains the first state, a ball that can pass through the ball entry port in relation to the number of balls that have passed through the ball entry port during the period in which the first state was formed before that. The gaming machine C1 is provided with a number changing means capable of changing the number.

Here, in a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, the operation mode of the operating member arranged in the big winning opening during the big hit game is such that a specified number of balls can be inserted for a long time and a specified number of balls can be inserted. There is a gaming machine that is controlled so as to change the number of balls entering the large winning opening in each round by switching the balls in a short time, which is impossible (for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2015-). 181572 (see). However, in the above-mentioned conventional game machine, the number of balls that can be won in the big prize opening is independent in each round, and each of them depends on the mode of launching the balls, so that the prize balls throughout the big hit game are large. There was a problem that there was a possibility of making a difference.

On the other hand, according to the game machine C1, the number of balls passing through the entry port in the state where the entry ball switching means forms the first state by the number changing means is determined by the entry ball switching means before that. When one state is formed, it can be changed in relation to the number of balls that have passed through the ball entry port, so that the benefit given to the player in a series of operation patterns in which the ball entry switching means repeatedly forms the first state. Adjustments can be made.

The method of adjusting profits is not limited. For example, when the ball entry switching means previously forms the first state, the ball enters the ball when the ball entry switching means forms the first state due to passing through a large number of balls through the ball entry port. It may be an embodiment in which the number of balls that can be put into the mouth is suppressed, or the player's benefit (not limited to the ball output) when the ball entry switching means forms the first state next due to the same event. For example, it may be an aspect of increasing the right to move to a high probability state).

In the game machine C1, the number changing means includes a storage means for accommodating a ball that has passed through the entry port, an discharge port through which the ball passes when the ball exits from the accommodation means, and a ball at the discharge port. A discharge switching means that can switch between a first state through which the ball can pass and a second state in which the ball cannot pass through the discharge port, and the discharge switching means can be operated in a plurality of types of operation modes, and the discharge switching means The gaming machine C2 is characterized by comprising an operation mode switching means capable of changing the number of balls discharged from the accommodating means depending on the difference in the operation mode.

According to the game machine C2, in addition to the effect of the game machine C1, the number of balls housed in the housing means to be discharged from the discharge port can be changed by the operation mode switching means, so that the balls remain in the storage means. The number of remaining spheres can be made variable. As a result, the number of balls required to fill the accommodating means with the balls can be changed, and the maximum number of balls passing through the entry port can be physically changed.

The mode of the difference in the operation mode is not limited in any way. For example, different operation periods, or when a plurality of discharge ports are arranged, different discharge switching means to be operated (operation target) may be exemplified.

In the game machine C2, the number changing means includes an interval maintaining means for maintaining a ball discharge interval from the discharge port.

According to the game machine C3, in addition to the effect of the game machine C2, the discharge interval of the balls from the discharge port is maintained by the interval maintaining means, so that the balls are discharged regardless of the number of balls housed in the storage means. The number of balls discharged from the discharge port can be specified according to the length of the period in which the switching means is in the first state. Therefore, the number of balls discharged from the discharge port can be strictly changed according to the length of the interval determined in advance by the jackpot symbol.

The mode of the interval maintaining means is not particularly limited. For example, a flow path shape formed so that the direction of the load received from the ball immediately before the discharge port from the subsequent ball is perpendicular to the direction in which the discharge port is opened may be used as the means, or from the inner wall of the accommodation means. A rib that is projected and gives a load to the ball to decelerate the ball may be used as the means.

In the game machine C3, the space-maintaining means includes a protrusion protruding from the inner surface of the accommodating means in the flow path of the ball in the vicinity of the discharge port.

According to the game machine C4, in addition to the effect of the game machine C3, the protruding portion is projected into the flow path, so that the flowing ball is brought into contact with the protruding portion to decelerate, so that the ball is closer to the discharge port. It is possible to prevent a large change in the flow velocity between the ball and the ball having a short distance from the discharge port, and it is possible to make the flow velocity of the ball uniform.

In the game machine C4, the accommodating means includes a discharge path for causing balls to flow down in a row in a predetermined flow direction immediately before the discharge port, and the protrusions are staggered from facing surfaces constituting the discharge path. A game machine C5 characterized in that it is projected at predetermined intervals.

According to the game machine C5, in addition to the effect of the game machine C4, the protrusions are alternately projected from the facing surfaces at predetermined intervals, so that the protrusions collide with the balls flowing down the discharge path to cause the balls to collide with each other. It is possible to collide with the protrusions at predetermined intervals while shifting the position in the vertical direction in the predetermined flow direction, and the action of decelerating the ball can be maintained for a long period of time.

In the game machine C5, the accommodating means includes a rolling discharge plate portion that is connected to the discharge passage and rolls a ball immediately before being discharged from the discharge port, and rolls the rolling discharge plate portion. The gaming machine C6 is characterized in that the flow velocity of the ball is formed to be higher than the flow velocity of the ball flowing down the discharge path.

According to the game machine C6, in addition to the effect of the game machine C5, the ball rolling on the rolling discharge plate portion flows down at a higher speed than the ball flowing down the discharge path, so that the ball stored in the accommodating means Regardless of the number of balls, the tempo (time interval) at which the balls are discharged from the discharge port can be kept constant.

In any of the game machines C1 to C6, the ball entry port is provided with a start port for determining a big hit of a special symbol by passing a ball.

According to the game machine C7, in addition to the effect of any of the game machines C1 to C6, the number of jackpot determinations of the special symbol can be associated with the number of balls entering the ball entrance. As a result, the number of payouts in the jackpot game can be changed depending on the number of determinations of the special symbol required to acquire the jackpot.

The game machine C7 includes a starting ball passing switching means for switching whether or not a ball passing through the starting port can enter the accommodating means, and the starting ball passing switching means operates in conjunction with the entering ball switching means. A game machine C8 characterized by doing.

According to the game machine C8, in addition to the effect of the game machine C7, the number of arranged drive devices can be reduced.

By the way, the discharge port includes a first discharge port and a second discharge port arranged at different positions, and the discharge switching means changes the state of the first discharge port and the second discharge port independently of each other. The first discharge port and the second discharge port are made possible by the accommodating means depending on whether the ball is discharged from the first discharge port or the ball is discharged from the second discharge port (under the same conditions). The number of remaining spheres may be arranged at a changeable position.

In this case, the number of balls remaining in the accommodating means can be changed depending on whether the balls are ejected from the first outlet or the second outlet, so that the flow velocity of the balls flowing down the accommodating means has changed. Even in this case, the number of balls ejected from the accommodating means can be maintained.

The arrangement of the first discharge port and the second discharge port is not limited in any way. For example, one may be arranged at the lower end of the accommodating means and the other may be arranged at the intermediate position of the accommodating means, or both may be arranged at the lower end and a branch flow path for distributing the sphere may be arranged upstream thereof. You can do it.

Further, the operation mode of the first discharge port and the second discharge port is not limited. For example, one may be opened one by one, or both may be opened. When both are open, the time required to discharge the same number of balls from the accommodating means can be shortened as compared with the case where the balls are discharged from a single discharge port. As a result, the interval in the jackpot game can be shortened, and the number of balls discharged from the out port during the jackpot game can be reduced.

By the way, the first discharge port may be arranged at the lower end of the accommodating means, and the second discharge port may be arranged on the upstream side of the first discharge port.

In this case, when the ball is discharged from the second discharge port, the ball arranged between the first discharge port and the second discharge port is used as the accommodating means regardless of the period during which the second discharge port is in the first state. Can be held. Therefore, even if the number of balls accommodated in the accommodating means varies, it is possible to easily keep the number of balls remaining after discharging the balls constant. Further, even if the launch of the ball is reduced due to clogging of the ball or the like, it is possible to easily form a state in which the ball remains inside the accommodating means.

Further, the first discharge port and the second discharge port may be arranged on the downstream side branched at the lower end portion of the accommodation means.

In this case, from the state in which the same number of balls are accommodated in the accommodating means, it is possible to switch from which discharge port the last ejected ball is ejected depending on the operation mode of the ejection switching means, so that the balls are ejected. From the behavior at the start, it can be difficult to grasp the ejection mode of the sphere. That is, for example, when the profit given to the player changes depending on which discharge port the last discharged ball is discharged from, it is possible to improve the attention to the flow mode of the ball.

<During the round, it will be produced as if the round was switched>
The game area in which the ball flows down, the entry port through which the ball flowing down the game area passes, and the first state in which the ball flowing down from the upstream side of the entry port can be guided to the entry port and the entry ball. In a game machine including a ball entry switching means for switching a ball flowing down from the upstream side of the mouth in a second state in which the ball cannot be guided to the ball entry port, and a detection means for detecting the ball entering the ball entry port. When the ball entry switching means maintains the first state, the open state switching means is provided so as to be able to switch between a period during which the ball easily passes through the ball entry port and a period during which the ball does not easily pass through. The game machine CK1 characterized by.

Here, in a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, the operation mode of the operating member arranged in the big winning opening during the big hit game is such that a specified number of balls can be inserted for a long time and a specified number of balls can be inserted. There is a gaming machine that is controlled so as to change the number of balls entering the large winning opening in each round by switching the balls in a short time, which is impossible (for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2015-). 181572 (see). However, in the conventional game machine described above, since the ball enters the large winning opening in each round in the same manner, there is a problem that it may be difficult to sufficiently improve the attention to the large winning opening. there were.

On the other hand, according to the game machine CK1, while the ball entry switching means maintains the first state, the attention to the ball entry mode to the entry port can be improved by the opening state switching means. ..

The mode of the open state switching means is not limited at all. For example, the period may be changed by changing the operation mode of the movable object arranged on the upstream side of the detection means, or the period may be changed based on the number of balls entering the detection means. You may.

The game machine CK2 is characterized in that the game machine CK1 includes a notification means for notifying a change in profit given to a player while the ball entry switching means maintains the first state.

According to the game machine CK2, in addition to the effect played by the game machine CK1, if the notification of the notification means is confirmed, the game shows that the profit obtained by the player has changed while the ball entry switching means maintains the first state. Can be grasped. Therefore, the game mode can be adjusted by the notification of the notification means.

The mode of notification of the notification means is not limited in any way. For example, while presenting the number of rounds of the jackpot game, it may be notified to make a break in the middle of the round game R (switching the screen, outputting sound, etc.), or turning off the display of the number of rounds. , The sub-round may be displayed as if a new round game R has started. In any case, assuming that the start timing of the round game R and the timing of notification by the notification means are the breaks in the game, the number of times the maximum number of rounds in the control state (for example, 16 rounds) is exceeded, and the breaks in the jackpot game By setting (for example, 20 breaks), it is possible to improve the interest of the player.

In the game machine CK2, it is configured so that a predetermined benefit can be easily given to the player based on the fact that the number of balls that can pass through the entry port is guided by the entry switching means. The gaming machine CK3, which comprises a conditional profit-giving means.

According to the game machine CK3, in addition to the effect of the game machine CK2, it is possible to prevent all of the balls from being wasted when the number of balls that can be passed through the ball entrance is increased. As a result, it is possible to link the improvement of the interest of the player by the production and the substantial profit (payment of the prize ball).

It should be noted that a notification may be given to instruct the player to continue firing so that the player does not stop firing by visually recognizing that the ball has stopped passing through the entrance. As the mode of notification in this case, various modes are exemplified. For example, it may be a direct notification such as "continue firing", a notification that euphemistically suggests the number of shots such as "if you put 5 on it, a great chance", or "something can be seen through the ball". It may be notified (in this case, it cannot be visually recognized when there is no sphere, and when there is a sphere, a light beam that visually displays some figure or picture is irradiated to a predetermined position where the sphere is accumulated near the incoming ball switching means. Is desirable).

<Points to adjust the launch of the jackpot game for each round>
The game area in which the ball flows down, the entry port through which the ball flowing down the game area passes, and the first state in which the ball flowing down from the upstream side of the entry port can be guided to the entry port and the entry ball. In a game machine including a ball entry switching means for switching a ball flowing down from the upstream side of the mouth in a second state in which the ball cannot be guided to the ball entry port, and a detection means for detecting the ball entering the ball entry port. A switching drive means for switching and driving the ball entry switching means to the second state when a predetermined number of balls have passed through the ball entry port while the ball entry switching means is in the first state. The game machine DK1 is provided with an adjusting means configured to be able to adjust an excess ball entering the ball entrance based on a specified number of balls.

Here, in a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, the operation mode of the operating member arranged in the big winning opening during the big hit game is such that a specified number of balls can be inserted for a long time and a specified number of balls can be inserted. There is a gaming machine that is controlled so as to change the number of balls entering the large winning opening in each round by switching the balls in a short time, which is impossible (for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2015-). 181572 (see). However, in the above-mentioned conventional game machine, the number of balls that can be won in the big prize opening is independent in each round, and each depends on the mode of launching the balls, so that the prize balls throughout the big hit game are large. There was a problem that there was a risk of difference.

On the other hand, according to the game machine DK1, the excess ball entering the ball entrance can be adjusted by the adjusting means, so that the profit given to the player by the ball passing through the ball opening varies in a short time. It can be leveled for a long time.

The mode of adjusting the excess ball is not limited at all. For example, the ball entry switching means may be adjusted so that the same excess ball entry can be expected each time based on the specified number of balls that can pass through the ball entry port during the first state, or a predetermined number (plural or singular). ) The second excess ball that occurs when the first state is set at the other (multiple or singular) timing is reduced compared to the first excess ball that occurs when the first state is set at the timing. , The first excess ball and the second excess ball may be adjusted so as to be balanced, and the period in which the ball entry switching means is in the first state is short or long (big hit game and small hit). (In the game), the number of over-entry balls may be distinguished and adjusted so that they balance.

The ball entry switching means may be configured in a single arrangement or may be configured in a plurality of arrangements.

The game machine DK1 is provided with a load applying means configured to be able to apply a load suitable for the detecting means to a sphere arranged at a predetermined position on the upstream side of the detecting means in the process of switching driving by the switching driving means. DK2, a game machine characterized by.

According to the game machine DK2, in addition to the effect of the game machine DK1, the ball arranged on the upstream side of the detection means can be easily detected by the detection means by the action of the load applying means.

The number of spheres to which the load is applied by the load applying means is not limited at all. For example, it may be one or a plurality.

In the game machine DK1 or DK2, as a state at the start of the switching drive, a post-drive entry ball that can be switched between an allowable state that allows the ball to pass through the ball entry port and a regulated state that restricts the passage of the ball. A game machine DK3 characterized by being provided with a state switching means.

According to the game machine DK3, in addition to the effect of the game machine DK1 or DK2, whether or not the ball can pass through the ball entrance port regardless of the flow mode of the ball to the ball entry port and the operating speed of the ball entry switching means. Can be specified by the ball entry state switching means after driving, so that the degree of excess ball entry into the ball entry port can be easily adjusted.

In any of the game machines DK1 to DK3, the load applied from the ball to the ball entry switching means is applied in a direction along the direction in which the ball entry switching means is driven during the switching drive. Machine DK4.

According to the game machine DK4, in addition to the effect of any of the game machines DK1 to DK3, it is possible to suppress a problem that the load from the ball prevents the ball entry switching means from changing to the second state. ..

As a mode of applying the load from the ball, for example, the ball entry switching means is configured to be driven so as to fall (hang down) downward by the switching drive, and the weight of the ball is given to the ball entry switching means. The case is illustrated.

<Points to adjust the launch of the jackpot game for each round>
The game area in which the ball flows down, the entry port through which the ball flowing down the game area passes, and the first state in which the ball flowing down from the upstream side of the entry port can be guided to the entry port and the entry ball. In a game machine including a ball entry switching means for switching a ball flowing down from the upstream side of the mouth in a second state in which the ball cannot be guided to the ball entry port, and a detection means for detecting the ball entering the ball entry port. A switching drive means for switching and driving the ball entry switching means to the second state when a predetermined number of balls have passed through the ball entry port while the ball entry switching means is in the first state. After the switching drive by the switching drive means is started, a post-drive entry state switching means capable of forming an allowable state for allowing the ball to pass through the ball entry port and a regulated state for restricting the passage of the ball, A game machine D1 characterized by being equipped with.

Here, in a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, the operation mode of the operating member arranged in the big winning opening during the big hit game is such that a specified number of balls can be inserted for a long time and a specified number of balls can be inserted. There is a gaming machine that is controlled so as to change the number of balls entering the large winning opening in each round by switching the balls in a short time, which is impossible (for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2015-). 181572 (see). However, in the above-mentioned conventional game machine, the number of balls that can be won in the big prize opening is independent in each round, and each of them depends on the mode of launching the balls, so that the prize balls throughout the big hit game are large. There was a problem that there was a possibility of making a difference.

On the other hand, according to the game machine D1, the post-drive entry state switching means switches whether or not the ball can enter after the entry port is closed by the switching drive means, so that an extra ball can enter. The timing can be reduced, and the number of prize balls throughout the jackpot game can be made uniform.

In the game machine D1, the ball entry port includes a first ball entry port and a second ball entry port, and the drive-after ball entry state switching means forms the restricted state at the first ball entry port. However, the gaming machine D2 is characterized in that the allowable state is formed at the second entrance.

According to the game machine D2, in addition to the effect of the game machine D1, the number of balls exceeds the specified number depending on whether the ball passes through the first entry port or the second entry port. Since it is possible to switch whether or not the ball can be entered, it is possible to improve the attention to which entry opening the entry switching means opens.

In the game machine D2, the first ball entry port is provided with a drop hole on the front side of the opening, and when the ball entry switching means starts switching to the second state, from the front side of the opening of the first ball entry port. The gaming machine D3 is characterized in that a ball arranged on the upstream side is dropped into the drop hole.

According to the game machine D3, in addition to the effect of the game machine D2, even when the ball remains on the upstream side of the first ball entry port, the ball is dropped while the ball entry switching means maintains the second state. It can be dropped into the ball and kept away from the entrance. As a result, it is possible to prevent the number of balls exceeding the specified number from passing through the first entry port.

<Point where balls join the storage channel from multiple winning openings>
The game area in which the ball flows down, the entry port through which the ball flowing down the game area passes, and the first state in which the ball flowing down from the upstream side of the entry port can be guided to the entry port and the entry ball. In a game machine including a ball entry switching means for switching a ball flowing down from the upstream side of the mouth in a second state in which the ball cannot be guided to the ball entry port, and a detection means for detecting the ball entering the ball entry port. , A storage means in which a predetermined number of balls that have passed through the ball entry port are stored, and a ball housed in the storage means based on the switching of the ball entry switching means to the second state from the storage means. The gaming machine EK1 is provided with a discharge means for discharging, and the ball entry switching means can be switched to the first state before the end of the discharge action by the discharge means.

Here, in a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, the operation mode of the operating member arranged in the big winning opening during the big hit game is such that a specified number of balls can be inserted for a long time and a specified number of balls can be inserted. There is a gaming machine that is controlled so as to change the number of balls entering the large winning opening in each round by switching the balls in a short time, which is impossible (for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2015-). 181572 (see). However, in the above-mentioned conventional game machine, the number of balls that can be won in the big prize opening is independent in each round, and each of them depends on the mode of launching the balls, so that the prize balls throughout the big hit game are large. There was a problem that there was a possibility of making a difference.

On the other hand, according to the game machine EK1, since the discharge act by the discharge means can be completed leaving the balls that have been closed in the storage means, the number of balls that can be entered into the entrance in each round is related. Can be made to. Therefore, it is possible to reduce the difference in the prize balls throughout the jackpot game.

Further, since the ball can be accommodated in the accommodating means for a period in which the state of the entry ball switching means is switched a plurality of times, the number of balls that can pass through the entry slot while the entry ball switching means is maintained in the first state. More balls can be accommodated in the containment means. As a result, it is possible to notify the player of the guideline of the frequency of entering the ball, so that the player can be shown the game efficiency of the game machine currently playing.

The means for showing the game efficiency is not limited in any way. For example, the ratio of the number of prize balls paid out to the number of balls launched (prize ball / number of launched balls) may be used, or each time the ball entry switching means is in the first state, the number of times in a row at the ball entry port. It may be an index indicating whether or not the ball is passed.

The number of ball entry ports, ball entry switching means, and accommodating means is not limited to a single number, and may be plural. In this case, the ball entry switching means and the accommodating means may be provided corresponding to each ball entry port so that the state change of each ball entry switching means occurs in order, or each ball entry switching means may be configured. It may be configured so that the state changes partially at the same time.

The game machine EK2 is characterized in that whether or not the discharging action ends with the ball housed in the accommodating means can be adjusted depending on the launching mode of the ball.

According to the game machine EK2, in addition to the effect of the game machine EK1, it is possible to increase the motivation to participate in the game of launching the game ball toward the entrance.

In the game machine EK1 or EK2, the entry port includes at least a first entry port and a second entry port, and a mode in which balls that have passed through the first entry port or the second entry port merge. The gaming machine EK3, characterized in that the accommodating means is formed in the above.

According to the game machine EK3, in addition to the effect of the game machine EK1 or EK2, the balls that have passed through the first entry port or the second entry port merge inside the accommodating means capable of accommodating up to a predetermined number of balls. Therefore, the number of balls that can pass through the second entrance can be changed in relation to the number of balls that have passed through the first entrance. Therefore, the number of balls passing through the first entry port and the second entry opening (the number of payouts associated therewith) can be made uniform throughout the game.

The game area in which the ball flows down, the entry port through which the ball flowing down the game area passes, and the first state in which the ball flowing down from the upstream side of the entry port can be guided to the entry port and the entry ball. In a game machine including a ball entry switching means for switching a ball flowing down from the upstream side of the mouth in a second state in which the ball cannot be guided to the ball entry port, and a detection means for detecting the ball entering the ball entry port. A storage means for accommodating a predetermined number of balls that have passed through the ball entry port is provided, and the ball entry port includes at least a first ball entry port and a second ball entry port, and the first ball entry port thereof. Alternatively, the gaming machine E1 is characterized in that the accommodating means is formed in such a manner that the balls passing through the second entrance are merged.

Here, in a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, the operation mode of the operating member arranged in the big winning opening during the big hit game is such that a specified number of balls can be inserted for a long time and a specified number of balls can be inserted. There is a gaming machine that is controlled so as to change the number of balls entering the large winning opening in each round by switching the balls in a short time, which is impossible (for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2015-). 181572 (see). However, in the above-mentioned conventional game machine, the number of balls that can be won in the big prize opening is independent in each round, and each of them depends on the mode of launching the balls, so that the prize balls throughout the big hit game are large. There was a problem that there was a possibility of making a difference.

On the other hand, according to the game machine E1, the balls that have passed through the first entry port or the second entry opening merge inside the accommodating means that can accommodate up to a predetermined number of balls, so that the first entry ball The number of balls that can pass through the second entrance can be changed in relation to the number of balls that have passed through the mouth. Therefore, the number of balls passing through the first entry port and the second entry opening (the number of payouts associated therewith) can be made uniform throughout the game.

In the game machine E1, when the accommodating means is empty, the number of balls that can be accommodated in the accommodating means by passing through the first entry port and the accommodation by passing through the second entry port. The gaming machine E2 is characterized in that the number of balls that can be accommodated in the means is different.

According to the game machine E2, in addition to the effect of the game machine E1, the number of balls that can enter the first entrance and the number of balls that can enter the second entrance are different. It is possible to improve the player's attention to whether or not the entrance to the ball is opened.

In the game machine E2, the number of balls that can be accommodated from the first entrance is set to be smaller than the number that can be accommodated from the second entrance, and a predetermined upper limit number of balls is discharged in the closed state of each entrance. The upper limit is set to be the same as the number that can be accommodated from the first ball entrance, and the first ball opening is opened during the opening when the second ball opening is opened a plurality of times. A game machine E3 characterized by this.

According to the game machine E3, in addition to the effect of the game machine E2, the ball that has passed through the second ball entrance before the opening of the first ball opening and the second ball opening after the opening of the first ball opening The ball that has passed can differ from the actual benefit given to the player.

That is, when the ball passes through the second ball slot before the first ball slot is opened, even if the number of balls that can be accommodated from the first ball slot has passed through the second ball slot, the ball has passed. Minutes are not discharged, and the number of balls obtained by subtracting the remaining amount is accommodated from the first entry port. The player can only get the same profit as if he passed the number of.

On the other hand, if the ball passes through the second ball slot after the first ball slot is opened, and if more balls than can be accommodated from the first ball slot pass through the second ball slot, they are deducted. The player can get additional benefits because it is not.

The number of game balls that can be accommodated is set in various ways. For example, it can be performed by setting the length and thickness of the flow path in which the game ball is accommodated. Further, the change in the substantial benefit given to the player is not limited to the number of prize balls, and for example, the substantial benefit given to the player can be changed depending on whether or not the ball can pass through a specific area. Can be done.

<Points where the interference member overhangs>
The game area in which the ball flows down, the entry port through which the ball flowing down the game area passes, and the first state in which the ball flowing down from the upstream side of the entry port can be guided to the entry port and the entry ball. In a gaming machine including a ball entry switching means for switching a ball flowing down from the upstream side of the mouth in a second state in which the ball cannot be guided to the ball entry port, and a detection means for detecting the ball entering the ball entry port. The ball is arranged in the flow path of the ball that has passed through the entrance, and is provided with an interference means that can be switched between an overhanging state that can interfere with the ball and a retracted state that does not interfere with the ball. The game machine F1.

Here, in a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, the operation mode of the operating member arranged in the big winning opening during the big hit game is such that a specified number of balls can be inserted for a long time and a specified number of balls can be inserted. There is a gaming machine that is controlled so as to change the number of balls entering the large winning opening in each round by switching the balls in a short time, which is impossible (for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2015-). 181572 (see). However, in the above-mentioned conventional game machine, the number of balls that can be won in the big prize opening is independent in each round, and each of them depends on the mode of launching the balls, so that the prize balls throughout the big hit game are large. There was a problem that there was a possibility of making a difference.

On the other hand, according to the game machine F1, since the interference means is arranged in the flow path of the ball passing through the ball entry port, by keeping the interference means in the overhanging state, from the ball entry port to the interference means. It is possible to clog the ball in the path of the ball and prevent more balls from passing through the entrance. Thereby, the prize ball can be adjusted throughout the jackpot game depending on the operation mode of the interference means.

The game machine F1 is characterized in that the game machine F1 is provided with a stopping means for stopping the ball in front of the interference means in the retracted state of the interference means.

According to the game machine F2, in addition to the effect of the game machine F1, the interference means can be changed to the overhanging state while the ball is stopped in front of the interference means, so that the state of the interference means is changed in advance. Compared to, the movement can be hidden by a sphere. Therefore, the movement can be made difficult for the player to notice.

In the game machine F2, the stopping means is switched between a stopping state in which the ball passing through the detecting means is stopped and a passing state in which the ball passing through the detecting means is passed, and the above-mentioned aspect of switching of the stopping means. The gaming machine F3 is characterized in that the mode of changing the state of the interfering means can be changed.

According to the game machine F3, in addition to the effect of the game machine F2, a plurality of types of modes of changing the state of the interfering means in the passing state of the stopping means can be configured, so that the stopping means can be maintained in the passing state. The timing at which the ball passes through the stopping means can be changed in a plurality of types.

<It is difficult to predict the type of benefits from the number of stored items>
The game area in which the ball flows down, the entry port through which the ball flowing down the game area passes, and the first state in which the ball flowing down from the upstream side of the entry port can be guided to the entry port and the entry ball. In a game machine including a ball entry switching means for switching a ball flowing down from the upstream side of the mouth in a second state in which the ball cannot be guided to the ball entry port, and a detection means for detecting the ball entering the ball entry port. , The ball is arranged in the flow path of the ball passing through the entrance, and is provided with an operation means capable of operating in a plurality of operation patterns, and the profit that can be obtained by the player is changed based on the operation pattern of the operation means. A game machine FK1 characterized in being capable of being configured.

Here, in a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, the operation mode of the operating member arranged in the big winning opening during the big hit game is such that a specified number of balls can be inserted for a long time and a specified number of balls can be inserted. There is a gaming machine that is controlled so as to change the number of balls entering the large winning opening in each round by switching the balls in a short time, which is impossible (for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2015-). 181572 (see). However, in the above-mentioned conventional game machine, the number of balls that can be won in the big winning opening is determined based on the situation on the upstream side of the big winning opening in each round, so that the attention to the downstream of the big winning opening may decrease. There was a problem that there was.

On the other hand, according to the game machine FK1, the operation means is arranged on the downstream side of the ball entrance, and the profit that the player can obtain can be changed by the operation pattern of the operation means. It is possible to improve the attention to the downstream side of.

The game machine FK1 is characterized in that the game machine FK1 is provided with an operation means that can be operated by the player, and the operation pattern of the operation means can be changed by the player operating the operation means.

According to the game machine FK2, in addition to the effect of the game machine FK1, the operation pattern of the operation means can be changed by the player operating the operation means, so that the player's motivation to operate the operation means is improved. Can be made to.

In the game machine FK2, a first privilege and a second privilege are set as profits given to the player based on the passage of the game ball through the entrance, and the first privilege depends on the operation mode of the operation means. The gaming machine FK3, characterized in that the mode of acquisition of the privilege and the second privilege changes.

According to the game machine FK3, in addition to the effect of the game machine FK2, the profit obtained by the player directly changes depending on the operation mode of the operation means, so that the player's motivation to operate the operation means can be improved. it can.

The modes of the first privilege and the second privilege are not limited in any way. For example, the first privilege may be set as the payout of the prize ball, the second privilege may be set as the confirmation of the probability change state after the jackpot game (as a V probability variation game machine), or the second privilege may be set as the confirmation of the jackpot. It may be set (as a small hit game in a type 1 type 2 mixer).

The relationship between the first privilege and the second privilege is not limited in any way. For example, they may be large or small, have different properties, or have conflicting relationships.

Here, as for those having a large or small relationship, for example, the profits given to the player in the first privilege and the second privilege are both the payout of prize balls, and the number of balls paid out in the first privilege is the first. When the number of balls paid out in the 2 benefits is larger, or the profit given to the player in the 1st and 2nd benefits is both a transition to the jackpot game state, which is compared with the number of rounds of the jackpot game in the 1st benefit. Then, the case where the number of rounds in the second privilege is larger is illustrated.

Further, as another property, for example, the profit given to the player in the first privilege is a transition to the jackpot gaming state, whereas the profit given to the player in the second privilege is a prize. In the case of paying out balls or when the profit given to the player in the first privilege is a clear indication of the game state, the profit given to the player in the second privilege is the maximum payout prize ball acquisition. For example, the case is.

Further, as a contradictory relationship, for example, the profit given to the player in the first privilege is related to the profit of the player such as the game state after the end of the jackpot game (or the number of fluctuations until the next jackpot). In contrast to the disclosure of information), the profit given to the player in the second privilege is the game state after the end of the jackpot game (and information related to the player's profit such as the number of fluctuations until the next jackpot). An example is the case of extinction.

<Point 1 that makes it difficult to predict whether or not a V prize can be won from the attacker's movement>
The game area in which the ball flows down, the entry port through which the ball flowing down the game area passes, and the first state in which the ball flowing down from the upstream side of the entry port can be guided to the entry port and the entry ball. The ball entry switching means for switching the ball flowing down from the upstream side of the mouth in the second state in which the ball cannot be guided to the ball entry port, the detection means for detecting the ball entering the ball entry port, and the ball entry port. A profit-giving means that gives a predetermined profit to the player by passing the passed ball, a first state in which the ball can be guided to the profit-giving means, and a second state in which the ball cannot be guided to the profit-giving means. In a gaming machine including a profit switching means that can be switched by, in an operating mode in which the conditions for maintaining the ball entry switching means in the first state are the same, a case where the ball can pass through the profit-giving means and the profit. The gaming machine G1 characterized in that it is possible to switch between the case where the ball cannot pass through the giving means.

Here, in a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, a ball that has passed through a large winning opening is distributed to either an advantageous route or an unfavorable route by the distribution section, and the profit given to the player changes depending on the distribution result. (See, for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2014-155538). However, in the above-mentioned conventional game machine, the operation mode of the opening / closing plate of the large winning opening during the period in which the distribution unit is in a state where the ball can be distributed to the advantageous route is an operation for causing the ball to flow down to the advantageous route. It is clearly divided into the mode and the operation mode for when the ball is not allowed to flow down to the advantageous route. In the operation mode for when the ball is not allowed to flow down to the advantageous route, the ball should not enter the big winning opening in the first place. Since the opening / closing plate is operated (closed), it is not possible to maintain the attention to the ball toward the big winning opening, and there is room for improvement from the viewpoint of paying attention to the behavior of the ball entering the big winning opening. There was a problem.

On the other hand, according to the game machine G1, in the operation mode in which the conditions for maintaining the ball entry switching means in the first state are the same, the ball can pass through the profit-giving means and the ball passes through the profit-giving means. Since it can be switched between the impossible case and the impossible case, it does not block the ball from entering the ball entrance. As a result, it is possible to maintain the attention to the ball toward the entrance.

The game machine G1 is provided with a stopping means which is arranged on the upstream side of the profit switching means and can be switched between a stopping state in which a ball passing through the detecting means is stopped and a passing state in which a ball passing through the detecting means is stopped. As the ball entry switching means is switched from the first state to the second state, the stopping means is switched from the stopping state to the passing state, and the ball flowing down to the downstream of the stopping means switches the profit. A game machine G2 characterized by reaching a means.

According to the game machine G2, in addition to the effect of the game machine G1, the ball that has passed through the entrance is stopped once by the stopping means arranged upstream of the profit switching means, so that the ball is profitable at an arbitrary timing. It is possible to prevent the switching means from being reached. As a result, it is possible to prevent the ball from reaching the profit switching means at an unexpected timing no matter how the ball passes through the ball entry port while the ball entry switching means is in the first state. it can.

The game machine G2 is characterized by comprising a period changing means for changing the period during which the ball flowing down through the stopping means can reach the profit switching means after switching the stopping means to the passing state. Game machine G3.

According to the game machine G3, in addition to the effect of the game machine G2, the period during which the ball can reach the profit switching means after the ball passes through the stopping means changes depending on the period changing means, so that after the ball passes through the stopping means. It is possible to prevent the player from getting bored with the playability of the above, and it is possible to improve the interest of the player until the ball reaches the profit switching means.

The period changing means may be a means for changing the flow velocity of the ball passing through the stopping means, or a means for delaying the period from when the stopping means is switched to the passing state until the ball starts flowing down. It may be a means for changing the number of balls anchored in the stopping means.

In the game machine G3, the period changing means is formed so that the number of balls stopped by the stopping means can be switched according to the profit given to the player.

According to the game machine G4, in addition to the effect of the game machine G3, the profit given to the player can be predicted from the number of balls stopped by the stopping means, so attention to the balls stopped by the stopping means can be predicted. The power can be improved.

The means for switching the number of balls stopped by the stopping means is not limited at all. For example, the number of balls to be stopped in the stopping means can be changed by combining the period in which the stopping means is in the passing state and the period in which the ball entry switching means is in the first state immediately after that.

That is, for example, when the period in which the stopping means is in the passing state is extremely shortened, and then the period in which the ball entry switching means is in the first state is extremely shortened immediately after that, among the balls stopped in the stopping means. Since the number of balls flowing downstream of the stopping means is extremely reduced, a large number of balls are stopped at the stopping means even if no new balls enter from the entrance.

On the other hand, if the period during which the stopping means is passed is sufficiently long and then the period during which the entry switching means is set to the first state immediately after that is extremely shortened, among the balls stopped at the stopping means, In addition to the majority of the balls flowing downstream of the stopping means, no new balls enter from the entry port, so that the balls are hardly stopped at the stopping means.

In this way, by changing the period during which the stopping means is in the passing state and shortening the period during which the entering ball switching means is in the first state immediately after that, the ball is stopped at the stopping means regardless of the launch mode of the ball. The number of spheres can be changed.

In any of the game machines G1 to G4, the entry ball switching means is provided with a setting means for selecting and setting a plurality of types of closed maintenance periods in which the second state is maintained, and a predetermined period from the end point of the closed maintenance period. The gaming machine G5, wherein the profit switching means is switched to the first state after the lapse of time.

According to the game machine G5, in addition to the effect of any of the game machines G1 to G4, the setting means forms a plurality of types of periods during which the ball entry switching means maintains the second state, so that the ball is a stopping means. Since the period from passing through to the switching of the profit switching means to the first state is formed by a plurality of types, even if the number of balls stopped at the stopping means is the same, the balls pass through the profit giving means. It is possible to control the case where it is performed and the case where it is not passed. Therefore, it is possible to continuously improve the attention to the flow of the ball.

For example, a period in which the ball entry switching means is maintained in the first state for a sufficiently long period so that a specified number of balls can pass through the ball entry port, and immediately after that, the ball entry switching means is maintained in the second state. When the setting means selects the closed maintenance period in the manner of making it extremely short (the ball passing through the stopping means is shorter than reaching the profit switching means), the entry ball switching means is in the first state immediately after that. By changing the state of the profit switching means from time to time, it is possible to arbitrarily set the period from the passing state of the stopping means to the first state of the profit switching means. Therefore, regardless of the timing at which the ball entry switching means is switched from the first state to the second state, it is possible to arbitrarily determine whether or not the ball that has passed through the stopping means passes through the profit-giving means. Thereby, regardless of the number of balls anchored in the stopping means and the mode of stopping (for example, timing), it is possible to arbitrarily determine whether or not the balls passing through the stopping means pass through the profit-giving means.

In any of the game machines G1 to G5, the switching operation of the ball entry switching means occurs not in the first operation caused by the specified number of balls entering the ball entry port but in the second operation caused by the passage of the specified time. The gaming machine G6 is provided with an intentional selection means for intentionally selecting the player.

According to the game machine G6, in addition to the effect of any of the game machines G1 to G5, the switching operation of the ball entry switching means is limited to the operation at a preset time by the action of the intentional selection means. It is possible to eliminate the randomness of switching depending on the passing mode of the ball at the entrance. As a result, it is possible to secure a large amount of time during which the ball is not allowed to enter while the profit switching means is in the first state.

As an intentional selection means, it is exemplified that the ball does not pass through the entrance due to the passage of less than the specified number of balls. This can be achieved by intentionally clogging (not allowing) the ball on the way through the entrance.

The game area in which the ball flows down, the entry port through which the ball flowing down the game area passes, and the first state in which the ball flowing down from the upstream side of the entry port can be guided to the entry port and the entry ball. A ball entry switching means for switching a ball flowing down from the upstream side of the mouth in a second state in which the ball cannot be guided to the entry port, a detection means for detecting entry into the entry port, and the entry port. A profit-giving means that gives a predetermined profit to the player by passing the passed ball, a first state in which the ball can be guided to the profit-giving means, and a second state in which the ball cannot be guided to the profit-giving means. In a game machine provided with the profit switching means that can be switched by, the notification is sent based on the flow mode determining means for determining whether the flow mode of the ball to the profit giving means is normal and the determination result by the flow mode determining means. A game machine GK1 characterized by comprising a notification means for performing.

Here, in a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, a ball that has passed through a large winning opening is distributed to either an advantageous route or an unfavorable route by the distribution section, and the profit given to the player changes depending on the distribution result. (See, for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2014-155538). However, in the above-mentioned conventional game machine, there is a problem that not a few players try to obtain an illegal profit due to an illegal act of applying a load (magnetic force or impact) to the ball before reaching the distribution part. was there.

On the other hand, according to the game machine GK1, when an abnormality is determined, it is notified by the notification means, so that fraudulent acts can be suppressed. That is, even if the ball is illegally blocked from flowing down, there is a high possibility that the notification will not be able to obtain an illegal profit. Therefore, a person who tries to make an illegal profit (hereinafter, "a fraudulent person" or It can exert a deterrent effect against (also called "illegal person").

The mode of determining the abnormality is not limited in any way. For example, after the profit switching means is switched to the first state, the timing at which the balls are completely discharged may be set, and the discharge of the balls is not detected even at that timing, so that the notification may be performed. In this case, since the notification can be given before the ball passes through the profit switching means, it is possible to reduce the dissatisfaction from the player.

In the game machine GK1, the flow-down mode determining means makes a determination based on the number of balls arranged between the ball entrance and the profit-giving means.

According to the game machine GK2, in addition to the effect of the game machine GK1, it is possible to determine whether or not the flow mode of the ball is abnormal regardless of the accumulation state of the game ball between the entrance and the profit-giving means. it can.

The game machine GK3 is characterized in that the game machine GK1 or GK2 is provided with an arrangement suppressing means for suppressing a change in the arrangement of balls on the upstream side of the profit-giving means after the notification means executes the notification.

According to the game machine GK3, in addition to the effect of the game machine GK1 or GK2, the change in the arrangement of the balls can be suppressed by the arrangement suppressing means, so that the player suffers when the game is restarted when an unexpected error occurs. The loss can be minimized.

<Point 2, which makes it difficult to predict whether or not to win a V prize from the attacker's movement, there is a paca>
The game area in which the ball flows down, the entry port through which the ball flowing down the game area passes, and the first state in which the ball flowing down from the upstream side of the entry port can be guided to the entry port and the entry ball. A ball entry switching means for switching a ball flowing down from the upstream side of the mouth in a second state in which the ball cannot be guided to the entry port, a detection means for detecting entry into the entry port, and the entry port. A profit-giving means that gives a predetermined profit to the player by passing the passed ball, a first state in which the ball can be guided to the profit-giving means, and a second state in which the ball cannot be guided to the profit-giving means. H1 is a gaming machine including a profit switching means that can be switched by the above, wherein the mode in which the ball reaches the profit switching means can be changed depending on the operation mode of the ball entry switching means.

Here, in a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, a ball that has passed through a large winning opening is distributed to either an advantageous route or an unfavorable route by the distribution section, and the profit given to the player changes depending on the distribution result. (See, for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2014-155538). However, in the above-mentioned conventional game machine, the operation mode of the opening / closing plate of the large winning opening during the period in which the distribution unit is in a state where the ball can be distributed to the advantageous route is an operation for causing the ball to flow down to the advantageous route. It is clearly divided into the mode and the operation mode for when the ball is not allowed to flow down to the advantageous route. In the operation mode for when the ball is not allowed to flow down to the advantageous route, the ball should not enter the big winning opening in the first place. Since the opening / closing plate is operated (closed), it is not possible to maintain the attention to the ball toward the big winning opening, and there is room for improvement from the viewpoint of paying attention to the behavior of the ball entering the big winning opening. There was a problem.

On the other hand, according to the game machine H1, the mode in which the ball reaches the profit switching means can be changed depending on the operation mode of the ball entry switching means while maintaining the state in which the ball can pass through the ball entry port. Therefore, it is possible to intentionally control in what manner the profit switching means reaches the ball.

The game machine H1 is characterized in that the number of balls related to the time when the ball entry switching means is switched to the second state can be guided to the profit switching means.

According to the game machine H2, in addition to the effect of the game machine H1, the player can tell how the ball is guided to the profit switching means from the length that the ball entry switching means is maintained in the second state. It is possible to improve the player's attention to the operation of the ball entry switching means.

In the game machine H1 or H2, a start state is formed in which the ball is started to be thrown to the profit switching means while the ball entry switching means is switched from the first state to the second state. Game machine H3.

According to the game machine H3, in addition to the effect of the game machine H1 or H2, when the ball is sent to the profit switching means only after the start state, the operation of the ball entry switching means is stopped immediately before the start state. Since the first state can be set again, it is possible to form a game property that the throwing to the profit switching means is not necessarily started even if the operation is started from the first state. As a result, it becomes necessary to directly confirm whether or not the sphere reaches the profit switching means, so that the attention to the profit switching means can be improved.

The game area in which the ball flows down, the entry port through which the ball flowing down the game area passes, and the first state in which the ball flowing down from the upstream side of the entry port can be guided to the entry port and the entry ball. A ball entry switching means for switching a ball flowing down from the upstream side of the mouth in a second state in which the ball cannot be guided to the entry port, a detection means for detecting entry into the entry port, and the entry port. A profit-giving means that gives a predetermined profit to the player by passing the passed ball, a first state in which the ball can be guided to the profit-giving means, and a second state in which the ball cannot be guided to the profit-giving means. In a game machine including a profit switching means that can be switched by, the game machine includes a state changing means configured so that the entering ball switching means can change the state by detecting the passage of a ball, and the state changing means is provided. The gaming machine HK1 is characterized in that the number of balls that can be thrown to the profit switching means can be switched based on the passing frequency of the balls to the profit switching means.

Here, in a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, a ball that has passed through a large winning opening is distributed to either an advantageous route or an unfavorable route by the distribution section, and the profit given to the player changes depending on the distribution result. (See, for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2014-155538). However, in the above-mentioned conventional game machine, the operation mode of the opening / closing plate of the large winning opening during the period in which the distribution unit is in a state where the ball can be distributed to the advantageous route is an operation for causing the ball to flow down to the advantageous route. It is clearly divided into the mode and the operation mode for when the ball is not allowed to flow down to the advantageous route. In the operation mode for when the ball is not allowed to flow down to the advantageous route, the ball should not enter the big winning opening in the first place. Since the opening / closing plate is operated (closed), it is not possible to maintain the attention to the ball toward the big winning opening, and there is room for improvement from the viewpoint of paying attention to the behavior of the ball entering the big winning opening. There was a problem.

On the other hand, in the game machine HK1, the number of balls that can be thrown to the profit switching means can be switched based on the frequency of passing the balls to the state changing means, so that the ball enters the profit switching means. Can be changed. As a result, it is possible to improve the attention to the behavior of the ball that has passed through the entrance.

In the game machine HK1, when the frequency of entering the state changing means is higher than a predetermined frequency, an upper limit of the number of balls thrown to the profit switching means is set in a predetermined period. Machine HK2.

According to the game machine HK2, in addition to the effect of the game machine HK1, it is possible to escape from the game property that the more the ball is passed through the state changing means, the better.

The game machine HK1 or HK2 is configured to be capable of throwing balls that have passed through the ball entry port to the profit switching means in a plurality of opening and closing of the ball entry switching means. ..

According to the game machine HK3, in addition to the effect of the game machine HK1 or HK2, the ball entering the ball entry port when a plurality of ball entry switching means are opened and closed can be associated with the throwing mode to the ball entry switching means. Therefore, it is possible to increase the variation of the throwing mode as compared with the case where the throwing mode to the ball entering switching means is independent by opening and closing the ball entering switching means once.

The number of times the ball entry switching means is opened and closed is not limited in any way. For example, it may be counted by the number of operations of the ball entry switching means, or may be counted by the number of occurrences of a combination of actions of the ball entry switching means (for example, a preset operation pattern such as a small hit game).

An operating means that can be operated by the player, a storage state in which the ball that has entered the ball entry switching means is temporarily stored, and a passing state in which the ball is released from storage and can flow down toward the profit-giving means. The gaming machine HP1 is provided with a temporary storage means that can be switched by the above, and the state of the temporary storage means can be switched by operating the operating means.

According to the game machine HP1, the player can switch the state of the temporary storage means at an arbitrary timing, so that the motivation to participate in the operation of the operation means can be increased.

In the game machine HP1, the game machine HP2 is characterized in that the profit given to the player is selected from the first privilege or the second privilege according to the operation timing of the operation means.

According to the game machine HP2, in addition to the effect of the game machine HP1, it is possible to improve the player's attention to the operation of the operating means.

The relationship between the first privilege and the second privilege is not limited in any way. For example, they may be large or small, have different properties, or have conflicting relationships.

Here, as for those having a large or small relationship, for example, the profits given to the player in the first privilege and the second privilege are both the payout of prize balls, and the number of balls paid out in the first privilege is the first. When the number of balls paid out in the 2 benefits is larger, or the profit given to the player in the 1st and 2nd benefits is both a transition to the jackpot game state, which is compared with the number of rounds of the jackpot game in the 1st benefit. Then, the case where the number of rounds in the second privilege is larger is illustrated.

Further, as another property, for example, the profit given to the player in the first privilege is a transition to the jackpot gaming state, whereas the profit given to the player in the second privilege is a prize. In the case of paying out balls or when the profit given to the player in the first privilege is a clear indication of the game state, the profit given to the player in the second privilege is the maximum payout prize ball acquisition. For example, the case is.

Further, as a contradictory relationship, for example, the profit given to the player in the first privilege is related to the profit of the player such as the game state after the end of the jackpot game (or the number of fluctuations until the next jackpot). In contrast to the disclosure of information), the profit given to the player in the second privilege is the game state after the end of the jackpot game (and information related to the player's profit such as the number of fluctuations until the next jackpot). An example is the case of extinction.

The game machine HP2 is characterized in that, based on the selection of the first privilege, the passage of the ball at the ball entry port is restricted when the ball entry switching means is in the first state. Game machine HP3.

According to the game machine HP3, in addition to the effect played by the game machine HP2, based on the selection of the first privilege, the ball is prevented from passing through the ball entry port regardless of the state of the ball entry switching means. Therefore, when the player does not want the ball to pass through the entrance, it is not necessary to temporarily stop the ball from firing (so-called "stop hitting") at the right timing. it can. In this case, since the player can continuously shoot the ball regardless of the state of the ball entry switching means, the desired game can be smoothly executed.

The game machine HP4 is characterized in that, based on the selection of the first privilege, the game machine HP3 is controlled so that the game can be continued regardless of the detection time of the ball by the detection means.

According to the game machine HP4, in addition to the effect of the game machine HP3, it is possible to realize the game property of restricting the entry of the ball by clogging the detecting means with the ball.

A1 to A9, AK1 to AK3, B1 to B8, BK1 to BK4, C1 to C8, CK1 to CK3, DK1 to DK4, D1 to D3, EK1 to EK3, E1 to E3, F1 to F3, FK1 to FK3 A game machine Z1 characterized in that the game machine is a slot machine in any one of G1 to G6, GK1 to GK3, H1 to H3, HK1 to HK3, and HP1 to HP4. Among them, the basic configuration of the slot machine is "provided with a variable display means for dynamically displaying an identification information string composed of a plurality of identification information and then confirming and displaying the identification information, and for operating a starting operation means (for example, an operation lever). Due to this, the dynamic display of the identification information is started, and the dynamic display of the identification information is stopped due to the operation of the stop operation means (stop button) or after a predetermined time has elapsed, and at the time of the stop. It is a game machine provided with a special game state generating means for generating a special game state advantageous to the player, provided that the definite identification information of the above is the specific identification information. In this case, coins, medals, and the like are typical examples of the game medium.

A1 to A9, AK1 to AK3, B1 to B8, BK1 to BK4, C1 to C8, CK1 to CK3, DK1 to DK4, D1 to D3, EK1 to EK3, E1 to E3, F1 to F3, FK1 to FK3 A gaming machine Z2 characterized in that the gaming machine is a pachinko gaming machine in any one of G1 to G6, GK1 to GK3, H1 to H3, HK1 to HK3, and HP1 to HP4. Among them, the basic configuration of the pachinko gaming machine is provided with an operation handle, and the ball is launched into a predetermined game area according to the operation of the operation handle, and the ball is placed in a predetermined position in the game area. As a prerequisite for winning a prize (or passing through the operating port), the identification information dynamically displayed by the display means is fixedly stopped after a predetermined time. In addition, when a special gaming state occurs, a variable winning device (specific winning opening) arranged at a predetermined position in the gaming area is opened in a predetermined manner to enable a ball to be won, and is valuable according to the number of winnings. Some are given value (including not only prize balls but also data written on a magnetic card).

A1 to A9, AK1 to AK3, B1 to B8, BK1 to BK4, C1 to C8, CK1 to CK3, DK1 to DK4, D1 to D3, EK1 to EK3, E1 to E3, F1 to F3, FK1 to FK3 In any of G1 to G6, GK1 to GK3, H1 to H3, HK1 to HK3, and HP1 to HP4, the gaming machine Z3 is a fusion of a pachinko gaming machine and a slot machine. .. Among them, as a basic configuration of the fused gaming machine, "a variable display means for dynamically displaying an identification information string composed of a plurality of identification information and then confirming and displaying the identification information is provided, and a starting operation means (for example, an operation lever). The variation of the identification information is started due to the operation of, and the dynamic display of the identification information is stopped due to the operation of the stop operation means (for example, the stop button) or after a predetermined time elapses. A special game state generating means for generating a special game state advantageous to the player is provided on the condition that the definite identification information at the time of stopping is the specific identification information, the ball is used as the game medium, and the identification information is described. A game machine that requires a predetermined number of balls to start the dynamic display of the game, and is configured to pay out a large number of balls when a special game state occurs. "

10 Pachinko machine (game machine)
13 Game board 81 Third symbol display device (part of notification means)
110 Main control device (part of change means, part of period change means, part of setting means, part of intentional selection means, part of flow mode determination means)
300 Operation buttons (operation means)
640 Second ball entry port (part of the ball entry port, starting port, part of the state changing means)
640a Electric accessory (part of ball entry switching means)
1000a 1st specific winning opening (part of the entry opening, 1st entry opening)
1140 Protruding part (part of spacing maintenance means, protruding part)
1150 Outlet (part of ball entry prevention means, part of number changing means)
1210 Thin plate member (means for making visibility difficult)
1231 Storage flow path (part of ball entry prevention means, part of number changing means, part of post-drive entry ball state switching means, accommodation means, discharge path, part of adjustment means)
1231a Guide surface (part of spacing maintenance means)
1231b Rolling surface (part of spacing maintenance means, rolling discharge plate)
1235 Protruding part (part of spacing maintenance means, protruding part)
1240 detection sensor (part of detection means)
1300 Opening and closing plate (part of the ball entry switching means)
1310 Board part (raising means)
1331 Ball entry prevention part (part of ball entry prevention means)
1510, 2810 Solenoid (driving means, part of number changing means, operation mode switching means, switching driving means)
1600, 2600 Regulatory members (part of ball entry prevention means, part of number changing means, discharge switching means, stopping means, part of placement suppressing means)
2251 Second storage flow path (part of ball entry prevention means, part of number changing means, part of post-drive entry state switching means, accommodation means, discharge path)
2255 Second detection sensor (part of detection means)
2255a 2nd specific winning opening (part of the entry opening, 2nd entry opening)
2840 slide plate (part of ball entry switching means)
3181 additional winning opening (relief entry opening)
3182 Curved extension plate (elevation regulation means)
3250 Drop delay plate (part of delay means)
3251b End surface (part of drop hole)
4830 Specific area (part of profit-giving means)
4850 distribution device (profit switching means)
4860 Specific area detection sensor (part of profit-giving means)
5900 Ball ejection adjustment device (starting ball passage switching means)
6930 Interference member (interference means, part of period change means, part of adjustment means. Part of drive-in-ball state switching means, part of operation means, part of arrangement suppression means)
7260 Second drop delay plate (part of delay means, variable action part)
8300, 11300 Opening and closing plate (part of ball entry switching means)
8340 Auxiliary opening / closing member (part of ball entry switching means, part of opening state switching means, part of adjustment means, part of load applying means, part of post-drive entry state switching means)
9111 Auxiliary entrance (part of entrance, part of profit-giving means, part of conditional profit-giving means)
10180 Intermediate discharge device (part of operating means)
11183 2nd additional winning opening (part of the entry opening)
11190 Opening / closing means (part of the ball entry state switching means after driving)

The present invention relates to a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine.

Here, in a game machine such as a pachinko machine, there is a game machine in which the ball entry switching means is controlled so as to change the number of balls entering the ball entry port in a predetermined period (Patent Document 1).

Japanese Unexamined Patent Publication No. 2015-181572

However, the above-mentioned conventional game machine has a problem that there is room for improvement in switching the state of the ball entry switching means .

The present invention has been made to solve the above-exemplified problems, and an object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine capable of improving the switching of the state of the ball entry switching means .

In order to achieve this object, the gaming machine according to claim 1 has a gaming area in which a ball flows down, an entrance through which a ball flowing down the game area passes, and a ball flowing down from the upstream side of the entrance. A ball entry switching means that can switch between a first state in which the ball can be guided to the entry port and a second state in which the ball flowing down from the upstream side of the entry port cannot be guided to the entry port, and the entry port. a gaming machine and a detection means for detecting a ball entrance to the space structure means a sphere passing through the entering-ball port constitutes a predetermined space can exist at the same time a predetermined number, entering-sphere switching means Is provided with a discharge means capable of discharging a sphere existing in the predetermined space from the predetermined space in a state of being switched to the second state, and the ball entry switching is performed in a state of the sphere existing in the predetermined space. The means can be switched to the first state .

According to the gaming machine according to claim 1, it is possible to improve the switching of the state of the ball entry switching means .

It is a front view of the pachinko machine in 1st Embodiment. It is a front view of the game board of a pachinko machine. It is a rear view of a pachinko machine. It is a block diagram which shows the electric structure of a pachinko machine. It is a partial front perspective view of a game board. It is an exploded front perspective view of the 1st variable winning apparatus. It is an exploded rear perspective view of the 1st variable winning apparatus. It is a front view of the 1st variable winning apparatus. It is sectional drawing of the 1st variable winning apparatus in the IX-IX line of FIG. It is a front view of the 1st variable winning apparatus. It is sectional drawing of the 1st variable winning apparatus in line XI-XI of FIG. It is sectional drawing of the 1st variable winning apparatus in line XII-XII of FIG. (A) and (b) are sectional views of the 1st variable winning apparatus in line XII-XII of FIG. It is a rear perspective view of the 1st variable winning apparatus. It is a rear view of the 1st variable winning apparatus. It is sectional drawing of the 1st variable winning apparatus in line XVI-XVI of FIG. It is a rear perspective view of the 1st variable winning apparatus. It is a rear view of the 1st variable winning apparatus. It is sectional drawing of the 1st variable winning apparatus in XIX-XIX line of FIG. (A) is a rear view of the first variable winning device, (b) is a cross-sectional view of the first variable winning device in line XXb-XXb of FIG. 20 (a), and (c) is a first variable winning device. It is a rear view of the variable winning device. (A) is a rear view of the first variable winning device, (b) is a cross-sectional view of the first variable winning device in the line XXIb-XXIb of FIG. 21 (a), and (c) is the first variable winning device. It is a rear view of the variable winning apparatus, and FIG. 21D is a cross-sectional view of the first variable winning apparatus in the line XXId-XXId of FIG. 21C. (A) is a block diagram showing the electrical configuration of the ROM in the main control device, and (b) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the correspondence between the first hit type counter and the jackpot type in the special symbol. (C) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the correspondence between the second hit random number counter and the hit in the ordinary symbol. (A) is a diagram showing the time change of the first specific winning opening in the first operation pattern, and (b) is a diagram showing the time change of the first specific winning opening in the second operation pattern. Yes, (c) is a diagram showing the timekeeping change of the first specific winning opening in the third operation pattern. It is a front view of the 1st variable winning apparatus in 2nd Embodiment. It is a rear view of the 1st variable winning apparatus. FIG. 5 is a partial cross-sectional view of the first variable winning device in the XXVI-XXVI line of FIG. 25. (A) to (c) are partial rear views of the first variable winning device. FIG. 27 is a partial cross-sectional view of the first variable winning device in line XXVIII-XXVIII of FIG. 27 (c). It is a schematic diagram schematically showing the correspondence relationship between the first hit type counter and the jackpot type in the special symbol. (A) is a diagram showing the timekeeping change of the first specific winning opening and the second specific winning opening in the fourth operation pattern, and (b) is the first specific winning opening and the first specific winning opening in the fifth operation pattern. 2 It is a figure which showed the timekeeping change of a specific winning opening. It is a front view of the 1st variable winning apparatus in 3rd Embodiment. It is sectional drawing of the 1st variable winning apparatus in line XXXII-XXXII of FIG. It is a rear perspective view of the lining front plate. (A) to (c) are cross-sectional views of the first variable winning device in the line XXXIVa-XXXIVa of FIG. 31. (A) and (b) are a partial front view of the first variable winning apparatus, and (c) is a partial sectional view of the first variable winning apparatus in the line XXXVc-XXXVc of FIG. 35 (b). (A) and (b) are schematic views showing the flow-down mode of a ball that has reached the first variable winning device. It is a partial front view of the 1st variable winning apparatus. It is a front view of the game board in 4th Embodiment. It is a partial front view of a game board. It is a schematic diagram schematically showing the correspondence relationship between the first hit type counter and the jackpot type in the special symbol. (A) is a diagram showing the time change of the first specific winning opening and the specific area in the sixth operation pattern, and (b) is the timekeeping of the first specific winning opening and the specific area in the seventh operation pattern. It is a figure which showed the change. (A) is a diagram showing the time change of the first specific winning opening and the specific area in the eighth operation pattern, and (b) is the timekeeping of the first specific winning opening and the specific area in the ninth operation pattern. It is a figure which showed the change. It is a figure which showed the time change of the 1st specific winning opening and the specific area in the tenth operation pattern. It is a partial front view of the game board in 5th Embodiment. It is a partial rear view of the game board. (A) and (b) are cross-sectional views of the first variable winning apparatus in the XLVI-XLVI line of FIG. 45. (A) to (c) are partial rear views of the first variable winning device. (A) and (b) are partial rear views of the first variable winning device. It is a schematic diagram schematically showing the correspondence relationship between the first hit type counter and the jackpot type in the special symbol. (A) is a diagram showing the timekeeping change of the first specific winning opening and the second specific winning opening in the eleventh operation pattern, and (b) is the first specific winning opening and the first specific winning opening in the twelfth operation pattern. 2 It is a figure which showed the timekeeping change of a specific winning opening. It is a partial front view of the game board in the sixth embodiment. FIG. 5 is a partial cross-sectional view of the first variable winning device in line LII-LII of FIG. 51. (A) and (b) are front views of the first variable winning device. (A) is a diagram showing the time change of the first specific winning opening and the specific area in the thirteenth operation pattern, and (b) is the timekeeping of the first specific winning opening and the specific area in the fourteenth operation pattern. It is a figure which showed the change. It is a rear perspective view of the lining front plate in 7th Embodiment. It is a top view of the 1st variable winning apparatus. FIG. 3 is a partial cross-sectional view of the first variable winning device in the line corresponding to the XXXVc-XXXVc line of FIG. 35 (b). (A) and (b) are partial cross-sectional views of the first variable winning apparatus in the line corresponding to the line XXXVc-XXXVc of FIG. 35 (b). It is a front view of the 1st variable winning apparatus in 8th Embodiment. It is a front view of the 1st variable winning apparatus in 8th Embodiment. It is a rear view of the 1st variable winning apparatus. It is a rear view of the 1st variable winning apparatus. (A) is a rear view of the first variable winning device, (b) is a sectional view of the first variable winning device in line LXIIIb-LXIIIb of FIG. 63 (a), and (c) is a first variable winning device. It is a rear view of the variable winning apparatus, (d) is the sectional view of the 1st variable winning apparatus in line LXIIId-LXIIId of FIG. 63 (c). (A) is a rear view of the first variable winning device, (b) is a cross-sectional view of the first variable winning device in the LXIVb-LXIVb line of FIG. 64 (a), and (c) is the first variable winning device. It is a rear view of the variable winning apparatus, (d) is the sectional view of the 1st variable winning apparatus in line LXIVd-LXIVd of FIG. 64 (c). It is a figure which showed the change of the drive (excitation) state of the solenoid of the drive device, and the timekeeping change of the position and state of a tip member, an opening / closing plate, an auxiliary opening / closing member and a regulation member. It is a front view of the 1st variable winning apparatus in 9th Embodiment. It is a front view of the 1st variable winning apparatus. It is a rear view of the 1st variable winning apparatus. It is a rear view of the 1st variable winning apparatus. (A) is a rear view of the first variable winning device, (b) is a sectional view of the first variable winning device in line LXXb-LXXb of FIG. 70 (a), and (c) is a first It is a rear view of the variable winning apparatus, (d) is the cross-sectional view of the 1st variable winning apparatus in line LXXd-LXXd of FIG. 70C. (A) is a rear view of the first variable winning device, (b) is a cross-sectional view of the first variable winning device in the LXXIb-LXXIb line of FIG. 71 (a), and (c) is the first variable winning device. It is a rear view of the variable winning apparatus, (d) is the sectional view of the 1st variable winning apparatus in line LXXId-LXXId of FIG. 71 (c). It is a figure which showed the change of the drive (excitation) state of the solenoid of the drive device, and the timekeeping change of the position and state of a tip member, an opening / closing plate, an auxiliary opening / closing member and a regulation member. It is a figure which showed the change of the drive (excitation) state of the solenoid of the drive device, and the timekeeping change of the position and state of a tip member, an opening / closing plate, an auxiliary opening / closing member and a regulation member. It is a figure which showed the change of the drive (excitation) state of the solenoid of the drive device, and the timekeeping change of the position and state of a tip member, an opening / closing plate, an auxiliary opening / closing member and a regulation member. It is a front view of the 1st variable winning apparatus in 10th Embodiment. It is a rear view of the 1st variable winning apparatus. It is a rear view of the 1st variable winning apparatus. (A) to (d) are diagrams showing an example of a change in the state of the first specific winning opening and a timekeeping change in the state of the movable member in the round game R. It is a front view of the 1st variable winning apparatus in 11th Embodiment. It is sectional drawing of the 1st variable winning apparatus in the LXXX-LXXX line of FIG. 79. It is a rear perspective view of the lining front plate. (A) to (c) are partial front views of the first variable winning device. It is a rear view of the 1st variable winning apparatus. It is a rear view of the 1st variable winning apparatus. (A) to (c) are front schematic views of the projecting rib, the opening / closing means, and the second additional winning opening schematically showing the arrangement of the projecting rib, the opening / closing means, and the second additional winning opening. (A) and (b) are front views of the first variable winning apparatus in the first control example. (A) is a diagram schematically showing an area division setting and an effective line setting of a display screen, and (b) is a diagram illustrating an actual display screen. (A) is a schematic diagram showing an example of the display contents during the advance notice effect executed in the round before the timing effect (operation effect) is executed, and (b) is the timing effect (operation effect). It is a schematic diagram which shows an example of the display content in. It is a schematic diagram which shows an example of the display content in a timing effect (operation effect). (A) is a schematic diagram showing an example of the display contents of the timing effect (operation effect) in the interval between rounds immediately before the fifth round game R, and (b) is during the timing effect (operation effect). It is a schematic diagram which shows an example of the display content of. (A) and (b) are schematic diagrams showing an example of the display contents during the timing effect (operation effect). (A) and (b) are schematic diagrams showing an example of display contents for notifying the third symbol display device that the round game of the sixth round is being executed. It is a block diagram which shows the electric structure of a pachinko machine. (A) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the ROM in the MPU of the main control device, and (b) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the first type selection table. (A) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the opening / closing plate and the interference member operation scenario storage area, and (b) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the opening / closing plate and the interference member operation scenario table. Is. (A) is a diagram showing the timed change of the first specific winning opening, the interference member and the specific region in the fifteenth operation pattern, and (b) is the first specific winning opening, the interference in the sixteenth operation pattern. It is a figure which showed the timekeeping change of a member and a specific area. (A) is a diagram showing the timed change of the first specific winning opening, the interference member and the specific region in the 17th operation pattern, and (b) is the first specific winning opening, the interference in the 18th operation pattern. It is a figure which showed the timekeeping change of a member and a specific area. It is a figure which showed the time timing change of the 1st specific winning opening, the interference member and a specific area in the 19th operation pattern. (A) is a diagram showing the timed change of the first specific winning opening, the interference member and the specific region in the 20th operation pattern, and (b) is the first specific winning opening, the interference in the 21st operation pattern. It is a figure which showed the timekeeping change of a member and a specific area. It is a model diagram explaining the counter and the like provided in the RAM of a main control device. It is a block diagram which shows the structure of the RAM of a main control unit. (A) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the ROM of the MPU of the voice lamp control device, and (b) is a block diagram showing the contents of the RAM. It is a block diagram which shows the electrical structure of a display control device. It is a schematic diagram which shows an example of the variation display data table schematically among the display data tables. It is a schematic diagram which shows an example of the transfer data table schematically. It is a schematic diagram which shows the contents of the drawing list schematically. It is a flowchart which shows the timer interrupt process which is executed by MPU in a main control unit. It is a flowchart which shows the special symbol variation processing. It is a flowchart which showed the state command setting process. It is a flowchart which showed the special symbol change start processing. It is a flowchart which shows the start winning process. It is a flowchart which shows the look-ahead process. It is a flowchart which shows the ordinary symbol variation processing. It is a flowchart which shows the through gate passing process. It is a flowchart which shows the NMI interrupt process. It is a flowchart which shows the start-up process. It is a flowchart which shows the main process. It is a flowchart which shows the jackpot control processing. It is a flowchart which showed the content of the jackpot operation setting process. It is a flowchart which showed the content of the opening / closing process. It is a flowchart which showed the content of the ending process. It is a flowchart which showed the content of the notification processing. It is a flowchart which showed the content of the winning process. It is a flowchart which showed the content of the abnormality processing. It is a flowchart which shows the storage control processing. It is a flowchart which showed the content of the upper limit value setting process 1 of an operation counter. It is a flowchart which showed the content of the upper limit value setting process 2 of an operation counter. It is the flowchart which showed the content of the storage valve operation processing. It is a flowchart which shows the V winning process. It is a flowchart which showed the start-up process which is executed by MPU in the voice lamp control device. It is a flowchart which showed the main process. It is a flowchart which showed the command determination process. It is a flowchart which shows the hit-related processing. It is a flowchart which shows the production process during a big hit. This is a flowchart showing the contents of the display effect round command setting process. It is a flowchart which showed the variation display setting process. It is a flowchart which showed the storage state monitoring process. It is a flowchart which showed the lamp output processing. It is a flowchart which shows the content of a button input monitoring / effect processing. It is a flowchart which shows the ball number confirmation process. It is a schematic diagram which shows typically the contents of the 1st type selection table 202b in the 2nd control example. (A) is a diagram showing the time-varying change of the opening / closing plate and the auxiliary opening / closing member in the 22nd operation pattern, and (b) shows the time-dependent change of the opening / closing plate and the auxiliary opening / closing member in the 23rd operation pattern. It is a figure, (c) is the figure which showed the clock change of the opening / closing plate and the auxiliary opening / closing member in the 24th operation pattern. (A) and (b) are schematic diagrams showing an example of display contents for notifying the third symbol display device that the round game of the sixth round is being executed. It is a schematic diagram which shows typically the contents of the ROM in the MPU of the main control device in the 3rd control example. (A) to (c) are schematic diagrams schematically showing the contents of the first random number table. It is a schematic diagram which shows the contents of the 1st type selection table schematically. (A) to (c) are schematic diagrams schematically showing the contents of the small hit type selection table. It is a figure which showed the time change of the opening / closing plate, a solenoid and a sorting device in a small hit A, and the time change of the opening / closing plate, a solenoid and a sorting device in a small hit B.

Hereinafter, embodiments of the present invention will be described with reference to the accompanying drawings. First, with reference to FIGS. 1 to 23, as a first embodiment, an embodiment when the present invention is applied to a pachinko gaming machine (hereinafter, simply referred to as “pachinko machine”) 10 will be described. FIG. 1 is a front view of the pachinko machine 10 according to the first embodiment, FIG. 2 is a front view of the game board 13 of the pachinko machine 10, and FIG. 3 is a rear view of the pachinko machine 10.

As shown in FIG. 1, the pachinko machine 10 has an outer frame 11 in which an outer shell is formed by a wooden frame combined in a substantially rectangular shape, and an outer frame 11 formed in substantially the same outer shape as the outer frame 11. It is provided with an inner frame 12 that is supported so as to be openable and closable. Metal hinges 18 are attached to the outer frame 11 at two upper and lower positions on the left side of the front view (see FIG. 1) in order to support the inner frame 12, and the side on which the hinge 18 is provided is used as an opening / closing axis. The frame 12 is supported so as to be openable and closable toward the front side of the front surface.

A game board 13 (see FIG. 2) having a large number of nails, winning openings 63, 64, etc. is detachably attached to the inner frame 12 from the back surface side. A ball game is performed by a ball (hereinafter, also referred to as a game ball or a pachinko ball) flowing down the front surface of the game board 13. The inner frame 12 includes a ball launching unit 112a (see FIG. 4) that launches a ball into the front region of the game board 13 and a launch that guides the ball launched from the ball launching unit 112a to the front region of the game board 13. Rails (not shown) etc. are attached.

On the front side of the inner frame 12, a front frame 14 that covers the upper side of the front surface and a lower plate unit 15 that covers the lower side thereof are provided. In order to support the front frame 14 and the lower plate unit 15, metal hinges 19 are attached to the upper and lower two places on the left side of the front view (see FIG. 1), and the side on which the hinges 19 are provided is used as an opening / closing axis for the front frame. The 14 and the lower plate unit 15 are supported so as to be openable and closable toward the front side of the front surface. The lock of the inner frame 12 and the lock of the front frame 14 are released by inserting a dedicated key into the keyhole 21 of the cylinder lock 20 and performing a predetermined operation.

The front frame 14 is formed by assembling decorative resin parts, electric parts, and the like, and a window portion 14c having a substantially elliptical opening is provided at a substantially central portion thereof. A glass unit 16 having two flat glass sheets is arranged on the back surface side of the front frame 14, and the front surface of the game board 13 can be visually recognized on the front side of the pachinko machine 10 through the glass unit 16.

On the front frame 14, an upper plate 17 for storing balls is formed in a substantially box shape with the upper surface open so as to project toward the front side, and prize balls, rental balls, and the like are discharged to the upper plate 17. The bottom surface of the upper plate 17 is formed so as to be inclined downward to the right side in front view (see FIG. 1), and the ball thrown into the upper plate 17 is guided to the ball launching unit 112a (see FIG. 4) by the inclination. Further, a frame button 22 is provided on the upper surface of the upper plate 17. The frame button 22 is operated by the player, for example, when changing the stage of the effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81 (see FIG. 2) or changing the effect content of the super reach. To.

The front frame 14 is provided with light emitting means such as various lamps around the front frame 14 (for example, a corner portion). These light emitting means change and control the light emitting mode by lighting or blinking according to a change in the game state at the time of a big hit or a predetermined reach, and play a role of enhancing the effect of the effect during the game. Illuminations 29 to 33 having a light emitting means such as an LED are provided on the peripheral edge of the window 14c. In the pachinko machine 10, these illumination units 29 to 33 function as effect lamps such as jackpot lamps, and each illumination unit 29 to 33 lights up by lighting or blinking the built-in LED at the time of jackpot or reach production. Or, it blinks to notify that the jackpot is in progress or that the reach is one step before the jackpot. Further, in the upper left portion of the front frame 14 when viewed from the front (see FIG. 1), a light emitting means such as an LED is built in, and a display lamp 34 capable of displaying when the prize ball is being paid out and when an error occurs is provided.

Further, on the lower side of the illuminated portion 32 on the right side, a small window 35 is formed by attaching a transparent resin from the back side so that the back side of the front frame 14 can be visually recognized, and a sticking space K1 on the front of the game board 13 (FIG. The certificate stamp or the like attached to (see 2) is visible from the front of the pachinko machine 10. Further, in the pachinko machine 10, in order to bring out more glitter, a plating member 36 made of ABS resin having chrome plating is attached to a region around the illuminated portions 29 to 33.

A ball lending operation unit 40 is arranged below the window unit 14c. The ball lending operation unit 40 is provided with a frequency display unit 41, a ball lending button 42, and a return button 43. When the ball lending operation unit 40 is operated with bills, cards, etc. inserted into the card unit (ball lending unit) (not shown) arranged on the side of the pachinko machine 10, the ball is operated according to the operation. Lending is done. Specifically, the frequency display unit 41 is an area in which balance information such as a card is displayed, and the built-in LED lights up and the balance is displayed as numerical value as balance information. The ball lending button 42 is operated to obtain a lending ball based on the information recorded on the card or the like (recording medium), and the lending ball is supplied to the upper plate 17 as long as the remaining amount is present on the card or the like. Will be done. The return button 43 is operated when requesting the return of the card or the like inserted in the card unit. A pachinko machine in which balls are lent directly to the upper plate 17 from a ball lending device or the like without using a card unit, a so-called cash machine, does not require a ball lending operation unit 40. In this case, the ball lending operation unit 40 is not required. A decorative sticker or the like may be added to the installation portion of the above to make the component configuration common. It is possible to standardize pachinko machines and cash machines that use card units.

In the lower plate unit 15 located below the upper plate 17, a lower plate 50 for storing balls that could not be stored in the upper plate 17 is formed in a substantially box shape with an open upper surface in the central portion thereof. There is. On the right side of the lower plate 50, an operation handle 51 operated by a player to drive the ball into the front of the game board 13 is arranged.

Inside the operation handle 51, there is a touch sensor 51a for permitting the driving of the ball launch unit 112a, a launch stop switch 51b for stopping the launch of the ball during the pressing operation period, and a rotation of the operation handle 51. It has a built-in variable resistor (not shown) that detects the amount of dynamic operation (rotation position) by the change in electrical resistance. When the operation handle 51 is rotated clockwise by the player, the touch sensor 51a is turned on and the resistance value of the variable resistor changes according to the amount of rotation operation, and the resistance value of the variable resistor is changed. The ball is launched with a strength corresponding to (launch intensity), whereby the ball is driven into the front of the game board 13 with a flying amount corresponding to the operation of the player. Further, when the operation handle 51 is not operated by the player, the touch sensor 51a and the firing stop switch 51b are turned off.

A ball pulling lever 52 for operating the ball stored in the lower plate 50 when the ball stored in the lower plate 50 is discharged downward is provided in the lower front portion of the lower plate 50. The ball pulling lever 52 is always urged to the right, and by sliding it to the left against the urging, the bottom opening formed on the bottom surface of the lower plate 50 is opened. The ball naturally falls from the bottom opening and is discharged. The operation of the ball removing lever 52 is usually performed in a state where a box (generally referred to as a "thousand-car box") for receiving the balls discharged from the lower plate 50 is placed below the lower plate 50. An operation handle 51 is arranged on the right side of the lower plate 50 as described above, and an ashtray 53 is attached to the left side of the lower plate 50.

As shown in FIG. 2, the game board 13 has a base plate 60 cut into a substantially square shape in front view, a large number of nails and windmills for ball guidance, rails 61, 62, general winning openings 63, and a first. It is configured by assembling a ball entry port 64, a second ball entry port 640, a first variable winning device 1000, a normal ball entry port (through gate) 67, a variable display device unit 80, and the like, and the peripheral portion thereof is an inner frame 12 (FIG. 1) is attached to the back side. The base plate 60 is made of a light-transmitting resin material, and is formed so that the player can visually recognize various structures arranged on the back side of the base plate 60 from the front side thereof. The general winning opening 63, the first entry opening 64, the second entry opening 640, the first variable winning device 1000, and the variable display device unit 80 are arranged in the through holes formed in the base plate 60 by router processing. It is fixed from the front side of the game board 13 by a tapping screw or the like.

The front central portion of the game board 13 can be visually recognized from the front side of the inner frame 12 through the window portion 14c (see FIG. 1) of the front frame 14. Hereinafter, the configuration of the game board 13 will be described mainly with reference to FIG. 2.

An outer rail 62 formed by bending a strip-shaped metal plate into a substantially arc shape is planted on the front surface of the game board 13, and a strip-shaped metal plate is placed inside the outer rail 62 like the outer rail 62. The arc-shaped inner rail 61 formed in 1 is planted. The inner rail 61 and the outer rail 62 surround the front outer circumference of the game board 13, and the game board 13 and the glass unit 16 (see FIG. 1) surround the front and back, so that the front of the game board 13 has a ball. A game area in which the game is played is formed by the behavior of. The game area is the area in front of the game board 13 that is partitioned by the two rails 61 and 62 and the resin arc member 70 that connects the rails (a winning opening or the like is arranged and fired). This is the area where the sphere flows down.

The two rails 61 and 62 are provided to guide the ball launched from the ball launching unit 112a (see FIG. 4) to the upper part of the game board 13. A return ball prevention member 68 is attached to the tip portion of the inner rail 61 (upper left portion in FIG. 2) to prevent the ball once guided to the upper part of the game board 13 from returning to the ball guide passage. Will be done. A return rubber 69 is attached to the tip of the outer rail 62 (upper right part in FIG. 2) at a position corresponding to the maximum flight portion of the ball, and the ball launched with a predetermined momentum hits the return rubber 69 and has momentum. Is dampened and bounced back toward the center. Further, a resin arc member 70 formed by providing an arc connecting the rails on the inner surface side is used as a base between the lower right tip of the inner rail 61 and the upper right tip of the outer rail 62. It is fixed by driving it into the plate 60.

In this pachinko machine 10, a special symbol (first symbol) is drawn by taking the opportunity of winning a prize in the first entrance 64 and the second entrance 640, and the ball normally enters the ball 67. When it passes, a lottery of ordinary symbols (second symbol) is performed. In the lottery of special symbols performed for the balls entering the first entrance 64 and the second entrance 640, it is determined whether or not the special symbol is a big hit, and it is determined that the special symbol is a big hit. If so, the jackpot type is also determined. In the pachinko machine 10, in the low probability state of the special symbol, for example, the jackpot of the special symbol is determined with a probability of 1/320, and in the high probability state of the special symbol (also referred to as the probability variation state of the special symbol). For example, it is determined as a jackpot of a special symbol with a probability of 1/60. For convenience of explanation, the lottery of the special symbol performed for the entry into the first entrance 64 is referred to as the "lottery of the special symbol 1", and the lottery is performed for the entry into the second entry 640. The lottery of the special symbol is called "lottery of special symbol 2".

When the jackpot of the special symbol is reached, the pachinko machine 10 shifts to the special gaming state, and the first specific winning opening 1000a, which is normally closed, is closed for a predetermined time (for example, until 30 seconds have passed, or 10 balls are won. The released operation is repeated up to 15 times (15 rounds). As a result, a large number of balls are won in the first specific winning opening 1000a, so that a larger amount of prize balls is paid out than usual.

There are six types of special symbols, "big hit A", "big hit B", "big hit C", "big hit a", "big hit b", and "big hit c" (FIG. 22). reference). Although the details will be described later, the opening pattern of the first specific winning opening 1000a is configured differently depending on the jackpot type, and the number of balls entering the first variable winning device 1000 is changed.

When the lottery of the special symbol (first symbol) is performed, the variable display of the special symbol is started on the first symbol display device 37, and the lottery result is obtained after a predetermined time (for example, 11 seconds to 60 seconds) has elapsed. The special symbol indicating is stopped and displayed. When a ball enters the first entry port 64 or the second entry opening 640 while the variable display is being performed on the first symbol display device 37, the number of entry times is for each type of entry opening. Each is held up to four times, and the number of held balls is indicated by the first symbol display device 37 and also by the third symbol display device 81. When the variable display is completed on the first symbol display device 37, the number of reserved balls for the first entry port 64 (the number of reserved balls for the special symbol 1) or the number of reserved balls for the second entry port 640 (special). If the number of reserved balls of symbol 2) remains, the next special symbol lottery is performed, and the variable display according to the lottery is started. If both the number of reserved balls of the special symbol 1 and the number of reserved balls of the special symbol 2 remain, the lottery based on the reserved balls of the special symbol 2 is preferentially executed.

In the lottery of the normal symbol (second symbol), it is determined whether or not the normal symbol is a hit. When the normal symbol hits, the electric accessory 640a attached to the second entry port 640 is opened for a predetermined time (for example, 0.2 seconds or 1 second), and the ball enters the second entry port 640. It will be easy. That is, when the ball hits the normal symbol, the ball is likely to enter the second entrance 640, and as a result, the special symbol is easily drawn.

Further, when the lottery of the normal symbol (second symbol) is performed, the variable display of the normal symbol is started on the second symbol display device 83, and after a predetermined time (for example, 3 seconds, 30 seconds, etc.) has elapsed, The normal symbol showing the lottery result is stopped and displayed. If a ball passes through the normal entry port 67 while the variable display is being performed on the second symbol display device 83, the number of passes is suspended up to four times, and the number of reserved balls is held by the first symbol display device 37. Along with being displayed, it is also shown on the second symbol hold lamp 84. When the variable display is completed in the second symbol display device 83, if the number of reserved balls for the normal entry port 67 remains, the next normal symbol lottery is performed and the variable display according to the lottery is displayed. To be started.

In the present embodiment, as an added value after the end of the jackpot, a probabilistic state (high probability state) of the special symbol is given from the end of the special game state to the end of the lottery of the special symbol 100 times, and the lottery of the special symbol is performed. After 100 times, it is configured to be set to the normal state.

In the present embodiment, when the probabilistic state of the special symbol is given after the end of the special gaming state, the probabilistic state of the special symbol is configured to end according to the number of lottery of the special symbol. The pachinko machine 10 is not limited to, for example, after a jackpot game of a predetermined jackpot type (for example, jackpot A, jackpot B, jackpot a described later), from the end of the jackpot to the next jackpot. May shift to a high probability state of the special symbol (during the probability change of the special symbol). In this case, after the jackpot game of another jackpot type (for example, jackpot C, jackpot b, jackpot c described later), the time saving state of the normal symbol is set until the lottery of the special symbol is completed 100 times.

The number of lottery of the special symbol to which the above-mentioned probability variation state (high probability state) of the special symbol is given is not limited to 100 times. For example, it may be 50 times or 200 times.

Further, the number of lottery times for the special symbols described above in which the time is shortened is not limited to 100 times. For example, it may be 50 times or 5 times.

Here, the "high probability state of the special symbol" refers to the state in which the probability of the jackpot is increased as an added value after the end of the jackpot, that is, during the so-called probability fluctuation (probability change), in other words, to the special gaming state. It is a state of the game that is easy to shift. The high probability state of the special symbol (during the probability change of the special symbol) in the present embodiment includes the state of the game in which the hit probability of the normal symbol (second symbol) is increased and the ball is likely to win the second entrance 640. .. On the other hand, the "low probability state of the special symbol" means a state in which the probability of the special symbol is not changing, and the jackpot probability is a normal state, that is, a state in which the probability of the jackpot is lower than that during the probability change of the special symbol.

In addition, the time saving state of the normal symbol (during the time saving) means a state of the game in which the hit probability of the normal symbol is increased and the ball is easily won in the second entrance 640. Further, the normal state refers to a state of the game in which neither the probability of the special symbol is changed nor the time is shortened of the normal symbol (the jackpot probability and the hit probability of the normal symbol (second symbol) are not increased).

During the probability change of the special symbol or the time reduction of the normal symbol, not only the hit probability of the normal symbol increases, but also the time when the electric accessory 640a attached to the second entrance 640 is opened is changed, and the normal state A longer time is set compared to. When the electric accessory 640a is in the open state (open state), the ball wins the second entrance 640 as compared with the case where the electric accessory 640a is in the closed state (closed state). It will be easy to do. Therefore, during the probability change of the special symbol or the time reduction of the normal symbol, the ball can easily enter the second entry port 640. That is, a lottery for special symbols is likely to be performed.

In addition to changing the opening time of the electric accessory 640a attached to the second entrance 640, or in addition to changing the opening time, during the probability change of the special symbol or the time reduction of the normal symbol. , The number of times the electric accessory 640a is opened when the normal symbol is hit may be increased as compared with the normal state. In addition, the probability of hitting the normal symbol (second symbol) does not change during the probability change of the special symbol or the time reduction of the normal symbol, and the time when the electric accessory 640a attached to the second entrance 640 is opened and At least one of the number of times the electric accessory 640a is opened may be changed. Further, during the probability change of the special symbol or the time reduction of the normal symbol, the time when the electric accessory 640a attached to the second entrance 640 is opened and the number of times the electric accessory 640a is opened are not changed, and the normal symbol (normal symbol) Only the hit probability of the second symbol) may be configured to be increased as compared with the normal state.

A first symbol display provided with a plurality of light emitting diodes (hereinafter abbreviated as "LED") 37a and a 7-segment display 37b, which are light emitting means, in the lower left side of the game area when viewed from the front (lower left side in FIG. 2). The device 37 is arranged. The first symbol display device 37 displays according to each control performed by the main control device 110, which will be described later, and mainly displays the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10. The plurality of LEDs 37a indicate by the lighting state whether or not a lottery of special symbols performed in association with the entry (starting winning) into the first entry opening 64 or the second entry opening 640 is being executed. As a stop symbol after the end of the fluctuation, a special symbol (first symbol) corresponding to the lottery result of the special symbol is shown by the lighting state, or a ball entered in the first entrance 64. Of these, the number of reserved balls, which is the number of balls (reserved balls) whose fluctuation has not been executed, is indicated by the lighting state.

When a ball enters the first entry port 64 or the second entry port 640 while the special symbol (first symbol) is variablely displayed on the first symbol display device 37, the entry is made. The number of balls is held up to 4 times for each type of entry slot, and the number of held balls is shown by the first symbol display device 37 and also by the third symbol display device 81. In the present embodiment, the first ball entry port 64 and the second ball entry port 640 are each held up to a maximum of four times, but the maximum number of times of holding is limited to four times. It may be set to 3 times or less, or 5 times or more (for example, 8 times).

The 7-segment display 37b displays the number of rounds during the jackpot and an error. The LED 37a is configured so that the emission colors (for example, red, green, and blue) of each LED are different, and depending on the combination of the emission colors, various gaming states (high probability state of a special symbol) of the pachinko machine 10 are used with a small number of LEDs. Or, it is possible to display (such as during the time reduction of ordinary symbols). Further, the LED 37a not only indicates whether or not the lottery result of the special symbol is a jackpot as a stop symbol after the end of the fluctuation, and if it is a jackpot, the jackpot type (big hit A, jackpot B, jackpot C, A special symbol (first symbol) corresponding to the jackpot a, jackpot b, and jackpot c) is shown.

In the game area, a plurality of general winning openings 63 are arranged in which 5 to 15 balls are paid out as prize balls when the balls are won. Further, a variable display device unit 80 is arranged in the central portion of the game area. The variable display device unit 80 is triggered by winning a prize (starting prize) in the first ball entry port 64 and the second ball entry port 640, and synchronizes with the variable display in the first symbol display device 37 to display the third symbol. The third symbol display device 81, which is composed of a liquid crystal display (hereinafter simply abbreviated as "display device") that performs variable display, and the second symbol, which is triggered by the passage of a ball at the normal entry port (through gate) 67, is variablely displayed. A second symbol display device 83 composed of the LED is provided. In the variable display device unit 80, a center frame 86 is arranged so as to surround the outer periphery of the third symbol display device 81.

The third symbol display device 81 is composed of a large 9-inch size liquid crystal display, and by controlling the display contents by the display control device 114 (see FIG. 4), for example, the upper, middle, and lower 3 Two symbol columns are displayed. Each symbol row is composed of a plurality of symbols (third symbol), and these third symbols are horizontally scrolled for each symbol row, and the third symbol is variably displayed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81. It has become like. In the third symbol display device 81 of the present embodiment, the game state is displayed by the control of the main control device 110 (see FIG. 4), whereas the first symbol display device 37 displays the first symbol. A decorative display is performed according to the display of the device 37. In addition, instead of the display device, for example, a reel or the like may be used to configure the third symbol display device 81.

In the present embodiment, the third symbol is composed of 10 types of main symbols having numbers from "0" to "9". In the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, when the lottery result of the special symbol performed by the main control device 110 (see FIG. 4) described later is a big hit, a variable display is performed in which the same main symbols are aligned. It is configured so that a jackpot occurs after the variable display is finished. On the other hand, if the lottery result of the special symbol is out of order, a variable display is performed in which the same main symbol is not aligned.

For example, if the lottery result of the special symbol is "big hit B", "big hit C", "big hit b", "big hit c", even numbers "0,2,4,6,8" are added. A variable display is performed in which the main symbols are aligned. On the other hand, if it is "big hit A" or "big hit a", it is one of all the numbers "0,1,2,3,4,5,6,7,8,9" including odd numbers. A variable display is performed in which the main symbols with the addition of are aligned. On the other hand, if the lottery result of the special symbol is out of order, a variable display is performed in which the main symbols having the same number are not aligned.

Next, a display (right-handed navigation) displayed on the third symbol display device 81 that prompts the player to launch the ball aiming at the path (flow path) on the right side of the game board 13 will be described.

As described above, in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, when the special symbol is in a probabilistic state or the normal symbol is in a time-saving state, the electric accessory 640a is easily released, so that the ball is moved to the right side of the game board 13. By launching (striking to the right), it becomes easier for the ball to enter the second entry port 640. Further, as will be described in detail later, if a big hit is obtained by a special symbol lottery (lottery of special symbol 2) performed based on the ball entering the second entrance 640, the first entrance 64 Compared to the case where a big hit is obtained by a special symbol lottery (lottery for special symbol 1) performed based on the ball entering the ball, the jackpot (big hit a) that can obtain the maximum profit is likely to be obtained. Therefore, in the probabilistic state of the special symbol given after the end of the jackpot and the time saving state of the normal symbol, right-handed hitting is advantageous for the player. In other words, even if the special symbol is set to the probabilistic state or the normal symbol is set to the time saving state, the ball cannot be entered into the second entrance 640 unless the player hits right. The player will not be able to fully receive the benefits of the probability change state of the symbol and the time saving state of the normal symbol.

Therefore, in the present embodiment, in the probabilistic state of the special symbol or the time saving state of the normal symbol, by displaying a specific image (right-handed navigation), the player can perform the probabilistic state of the special symbol or the time saving state of the normal symbol. It is structured so that the benefits of becoming can be surely obtained.

In the right-handed navigation system, the character "Aim to the right !!" is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and three right-pointing arrows are displayed above and below the character. By displaying these characters and arrows, it is possible to make the player feel that the ball should be launched into the path (flow path) provided on the right side of the game board 13. Therefore, it is possible to ensure that the player can obtain the benefits of being in the probabilistic state of the special symbol and the time saving state of the normal symbol.

Next, an example of a warning image displayed on the third symbol display device 81 in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment will be described. This warning image is determined to be performing a right-handed hit even though the player is not in a period in which the ball should be hit (right-handed) into the path (flow path) provided on the right side of the game board 13. This is an image (right-handed warning image) displayed on the third symbol display device 81 in this case. More specifically, it is displayed when it is determined that the player is hitting right in the normal state (neither the probabilistic state of the special symbol nor the time saving state of the normal symbol).

In the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, the electric accessory 640a is controlled so as to be difficult to open in a normal state (even if a right-handed hit is made, it is difficult to allow the ball to enter the second entrance 640). For this reason, if a right-handed hit is made in a normal state, the chances of receiving a special symbol lottery are reduced as compared with the case where a ball is hit at the first entrance 64 by a left-handed hit. That is, if a right-handed hit is performed in the normal state, it is difficult for the player to win a big hit, which is a loss for the player. Therefore, by displaying a right-handed warning image to encourage left-handed hitting, it is possible to prevent (suppress) the player from losing money.

When it is determined that the player is hitting right in the normal state, the characters "warning" and "play left-handed !!" are displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Characters and are displayed. By displaying these characters, it is possible to remind the player that he should not hit right (should hit left). In addition, by checking the presence or absence of the right-handed warning screen, the clerk in the hall can easily determine whether or not there is a player who is executing an irregular game method of right-handed hitting in a normal state.

As a method of determining whether or not the ball is hit right, for example, the ball enters the normal entrance (through gate) 67 (see FIG. 2) where the ball can flow in when the ball is hit right. Judge by whether or not the ball has hit.

In the present embodiment, when it is detected that a ball has entered the normal ball entry port (through gate) 67 (see FIG. 2) in the normal state, a right-handed warning image is displayed. It is not limited to this. For example, when it is detected that a ball has won (winned) into the first specific winning opening 1000a in a state other than the special gaming state (big hit state), it is determined that an illegal game is being performed, and the right It may be configured to display a hit warning image. As a result, the clerk in the hall can easily determine the presence or absence of fraud simply by checking the presence or absence of the right-handed warning image. In addition, when it is detected that a ball has entered the first specific winning opening 1000a in a state other than the special game state (big hit state), a signal indicating that fraud is being performed is sent to the hall computer. It may be configured to output. As a result, the operator of the hall computer can easily determine whether or not there is a possibility of fraudulent activity and the machine number (position) of the pachinko machine 10 where fraudulent activity is being performed.

Next, a warning image displayed when it is detected that an abnormality has occurred in the first variable winning device 1000 will be described. Here, the abnormality of the first variable winning device 1000 is exemplified by, for example, the case where a ball entering the first specific winning opening 1000a is detected even though the game is not in the special gaming state (big hit state).

When it is determined that an abnormality has occurred in the first variable winning device 1000, the character "warning" is displayed in large size in the central portion of the third symbol display device 81. At the bottom, the text "Call a gate error clerk" is displayed. From these characters, the player can determine that an error has occurred in the pachinko machine 10, so that the clerk in the hall or the like can promptly request repairs or the like.

The second symbol display device 83 includes a symbol of "○" and a symbol of "x" as a display symbol (second symbol (not shown)) each time the ball passes through the normal entry port (through gate) 67. Is to be displayed in a variable manner by alternately lighting the above for a predetermined time. In the pachinko machine 10, when it is detected that the ball has passed through the normal entry port (through gate) 67, a winning lottery is performed. As a result of the winning lottery, if it is a winning, the symbol "○" is stopped and displayed on the second symbol display device 83 after the variation display of the second symbol. Further, if the result of the winning lottery is a failure, the symbol "x" is stopped and displayed on the second symbol display device 83 after the variation display of the second symbol.

In the pachinko machine 10, when the variation display on the second symbol display device 83 is stopped at a predetermined symbol (the symbol “○” in the present embodiment), the electric accessory 640a attached to the second entry port 640 It is configured to be in operation (open) for a predetermined time.

The time (variation time) required for the variation display of the second symbol is set so that the game state is shorter during the probability variation of the special symbol or during the time reduction of the normal symbol than during the normal state. As a result, during the probability change of the special symbol and during the time reduction of the normal symbol, the variation display of the second symbol is performed in a short time, so that the lottery of the normal symbol (second symbol) can be performed more than in the normal state. it can. Therefore, since the chances of hitting the normal symbol increase, it is possible to give the player many chances that the electric accessory 640a of the second entrance 640 is opened. Therefore, it is possible to make it easy for the ball to win the second entrance 640 during the probability change of the special symbol and the time reduction of the normal symbol.

In addition, during the probability change of the special symbol or the time reduction of the normal symbol, the hit probability is increased, the opening time and the number of times of opening the electric accessory 640a are increased, and the like, the second entrance 640 is reached by other methods. When the ball is in a state where it is easy to win a prize, the time required for the variable display of the second symbol may be constant regardless of the gaming state. On the other hand, when the time required for the variable display of the second symbol is set shorter than in the normal state during the probability change of the special symbol or the time reduction of the normal symbol, the hit probability of the normal symbol is constant regardless of the game state. Alternatively, the opening time and the number of times of opening the electric accessory 640a for one hit of the normal symbol may be constant regardless of the gaming state.

The normal entry port (through gate) 67 is assembled to the game board on the right side in the area below the variable display device unit 80, and among the balls fired on the game board, the balls that flow down to the right side of the game board. A part of is configured to be passable. When the ball passes through the normal ball entrance (through gate) 67, a winning lottery for the second symbol is performed. After the winning lottery, variable display is performed on the second symbol display device, and if the winning lottery result is a winning symbol, a symbol "○" is displayed as a stop symbol of the variable display, and if the winning lottery result is incorrect. For example, a symbol of "x" is displayed as a stop symbol of the variable display.

The number of times the ball has passed through the normal entry port (through gate) 67 is held up to a total of 4 times, and the number of held balls is displayed by the above-mentioned first symbol display device 37 and on the second symbol holding lamp 84. Is also lit and displayed. Four second symbol holding lamps 84 are provided for the maximum number of holding lamps, and are symmetrically arranged below the third symbol display device 81.

The variation display of the second symbol is performed by switching the lighting and non-lighting of a plurality of lamps in the second symbol display device 83 as in the present embodiment, as well as the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol. It may be performed by using a part of the display device 81. Similarly, the second symbol holding lamp 84 may be turned on by a part of the third symbol display device 81. Further, the maximum number of reserved balls for the passage of a ball at the normal entry port (through gate) 67 is not limited to 4, but is set to 3 times or less, or 5 times or more (for example, 8 times). You may. Further, the number of assembled normal ball entrances (through gates) 67 is not limited to one, and may be a plurality (for example, two). Further, the assembly position of the normal entry port (through gate) 67 is not limited to the right side of the variable display device unit 80, and may be, for example, the left side of the variable display device unit 80. Further, since the number of reserved balls is indicated by the first symbol display device 37, the lighting display may not be performed by the second symbol hold lamp 84.

Below the variable display device unit 80, a first ball entry port 64 in which a ball can win a prize is arranged. When a ball wins a prize in the first entry port 64, the first entry opening switch (not shown) provided on the back side of the game board 13 is turned on, and the main cause is that the first entry opening switch is turned on. A big hit lottery is made by the control device 110 (see FIG. 4), and the display according to the lottery result is shown by the first symbol display device 37.

On the other hand, on the right side of the front entrance 64 of the first entrance 64, a second entrance 640 in which the ball can win a prize is arranged. When a ball wins a prize in the second entrance 640, the second entrance switch (not shown) provided on the back side of the game board 13 is turned on, and this is mainly due to the on of the second entrance switch. A big hit lottery is made by the control device 110 (see FIG. 4), and the display according to the lottery result is shown by the first symbol display device 37.

In addition, each of the first entry port 64 and the second entry opening 640 is also one of the winning openings in which five balls are paid out as prize balls when the balls win a prize. In the present embodiment, the number of prize balls paid out when a ball wins in the first entrance 64 and the number of prize balls paid out when a ball wins in the second entrance 640 are configured to be the same. However, the number of prize balls paid out when a ball wins in the first entrance 64 and the number of prize balls paid out when a ball wins in the second entrance 640 are different, for example, the first entry. The number of prize balls paid out when a ball wins in the ball opening 64 may be three, and the number of prize balls paid out when a ball wins in the second ball opening 640 may be set to five.

An electric accessory 640a is attached to the second entrance 640. The electric accessory 640a is configured to be openable and closable, and normally the electric accessory 640a is in a closed state (reduced state), making it difficult for the ball to win a prize in the second entrance 640. On the other hand, when the symbol "○" is displayed on the second symbol display device 83 as a result of the variation display of the second symbol performed when the ball passes through the normal ball entrance (through gate) 67, the electric combination The object 640a is in the open state (expanded state), and the ball is in a state in which it is easy to win a prize in the second entrance 640.

As described above, during the probability change of the special symbol and during the time reduction of the normal symbol, the probability of hitting the normal symbol is higher than that in the normal state, and the time required for displaying the fluctuation of the normal symbol is short, so that the fluctuation of the normal symbol is short. The "○" symbol is easily displayed on the display. Therefore, the number of times that the electric accessory 640a is in the open state (expanded state) increases. Further, during the probability change of the special symbol and the time reduction of the normal symbol, the time for opening the electric accessory 640a is longer than that in the normal state. Therefore, during the probabilistic change of the special symbol and during the time reduction of the normal symbol, it is possible to create a state in which the ball is more likely to win the second entrance 640 than in the normal state. On the other hand, the first ball entry port 64 does not have an electric accessory as provided in the second ball entry port 640, and the ball is in a state where it can always win a prize.

Here, the probability of winning a jackpot is the same in both the low probability state and the high probability state when the ball wins in the first entry port 64 and when the ball wins in the second entry opening 640. is there. However, the probability of becoming a jackpot (big hit A, jackpot a) that gives the maximum profit (ball output) as the type of jackpot selected in the case of a jackpot is when the ball wins the second entrance 640. Is set higher than when the ball wins the first ball opening 64.

During normal times, the electric accessory attached to the second entry port 640 is often in a closed state, and it is difficult to win a prize in the second entry port 640. Therefore, go to the first entry port 64 without an electric accessory. A ball is fired so that the ball passes to the left of the variable display device unit 80 (so-called "left-handed"), and by winning a prize in the first entrance 64, a lot of chances of a big hit lottery are obtained and a big hit. It is advantageous for the player to aim at becoming.

On the other hand, during the probability change of the special symbol or the time reduction of the normal symbol, the electric accessory 640a attached to the second entry port 640 is likely to be opened by passing the ball through the normal entry port (through gate) 67. Since it is easy to win a prize in the second entrance 640, a ball is launched toward the second entrance 640 so that the ball passes to the right of the variable display device 80 (so-called "right-handed"). ), It is advantageous for the player to aim to win a big hit by passing through the normal entrance (through gate) 67 to open the electric accessory 640a and winning the second entrance 640. It becomes.

As described above, the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment fires a ball at the player according to the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 (whether it is in the probabilistic change, in the time saving, or in the normal state). You can change the method of "left-handed" and "right-handed". Therefore, it is possible to change the way the ball is hit by the player, so that the game can be enjoyed.

A first variable winning device 1000 is arranged on the lower right side of the first ball entrance 64 (lower left side of the second ball opening 640), and the first specific one is opened in the substantially central portion thereof in the left-right direction. A winning opening (large opening) 1000a is provided. In the pachinko machine 10, if a big hit is obtained in a special symbol lottery performed due to winning a prize in the first ball slot 64 or the second ball slot 640, after a predetermined time (variable time) has elapsed, The first symbol display device 37 is turned on so as to be a jackpot stop symbol. In addition, the stop symbol corresponding to the jackpot is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and the occurrence of the jackpot is notified. After that, the gaming state transitions to a special gaming state (big hit) where the ball is easy to win. As this special gaming state, the first specific winning opening 1000a, which is normally closed, is opened for a predetermined time (for example, until 30 seconds elapse or until 10 balls are won).

The first specific winning opening 1000a is closed after a predetermined time elapses, and after the closing, the first specific winning opening 1000a is opened again for a predetermined time. The opening / closing operation of the first specific winning opening 1000a can be repeated up to 15 times (15 rounds), for example. The state in which this opening / closing operation is performed is one form of a special gaming state that is advantageous to the player, and the player is given a game value (game value) in a larger amount than usual (in the present embodiment). Based on the winning of one ball, 15) prize balls will be paid out.

Specifically, the first variable winning device 1000 includes an opening / closing plate 1300 that forms an open state that guides a ball to the first specific winning opening 1000a by rotating upward, and a solenoid 1510 that operates the opening / closing plate 1300. I have. The first specific winning opening 1000a is normally in a closed state in which the ball cannot win or is difficult to win. At the time of a big hit, the solenoid 1510 is driven to rotate the opening / closing plate 1300 ascendingly to temporarily form an open state in which the ball can easily win a prize in the first specific winning opening 1000a, and the open state and the normally closed state are obtained. It operates so as to repeat alternately.

A sticking space K1 for sticking a certificate stamp, an identification label, or the like is provided in the right corner on the lower side of the game board 13, and the certificate stamp or the like stuck on the sticking space K1 is a small window of the front frame 14. It can be visually recognized through 35 (see FIG. 1).

The game board 13 is provided with a first out port 66 below the first ball entry port 64. A ball that flows down the game area and does not win a prize in any of the entry ports 63, 64, 1000a, 640 is guided to a ball discharge path (not shown) through the first out port 66. A large number of nails are planted on the game board 13 in order to appropriately disperse and adjust the falling direction of the ball, and various members (accessories) such as a windmill are arranged.

As shown in FIG. 3, the control board units 90 and 91 and the back pack unit 94 are mainly provided on the back side of the pachinko machine 10. The control board unit 90 is unitized by mounting a main board (main control device 110), a voice lamp control board (voice lamp control device 113), and a display control board (display control device 114). The control board unit 91 is unitized by mounting a payout control board (payout control device 111), a launch control board (launch control device 112), a power supply board (power supply device 115), and a card unit connection board 116.

In the back pack unit 94, the back pack 92 forming the protective cover portion and the payout unit 93 are unitized. In addition, each control board is used for MPU as a one-chip microcomputer that controls each control, a port for contacting various devices, a random number generator used for various lottery, and for time counting and synchronization. A clock pulse generation circuit, etc., is installed as needed.

The main control device 110, the voice lamp control device 113 and the display control device 114, the payout control device 111 and the launch control device 112, the power supply device 115, and the card unit connection board 116 are housed in the board boxes 100 to 104, respectively. .. The board boxes 100 to 104 include a box base and a box cover that covers an opening of the box base, and the box base and the box cover are connected to each other to house each control device and each board.

Further, in the board box 100 (main control device 110) and the board box 102 (payout control device 111 and launch control device 112), the box base and the box cover are connected by a sealing unit (not shown) so as not to be opened (caulking structure). (Consolidated by). Further, a sealing sticker (not shown) is attached to the connecting portion between the box base and the box cover over the box base and the box cover. This seal is made of a brittle material, and if you try to peel off the seal to open the board boxes 100 and 102, or if you try to forcibly open the board boxes 100 and 102, the box base side and the box cover Cut to the side. Therefore, by checking the sealing unit or the sealing seal, it is possible to know whether or not the substrate boxes 100 and 102 have been opened.

The payout unit 93 includes a tank 130 located at the uppermost portion of the back pack unit 94 and opened upward, a tank rail 131 connected below the tank 130 and gently inclined toward the downstream side, and a downstream of the tank rail 131. A case rail 132 vertically connected to the side and a payout device 133 provided at the most downstream portion of the case rail 132 and paying out balls by a predetermined electrical configuration of a payout motor 216 (see FIG. 4) are provided. ing. The tank 130 is sequentially replenished with balls supplied from the island equipment of the game hall, and the required number of balls is appropriately paid out by the payout device 133. A vibrator 134 for adding vibration to the tank rail 131 is attached to the tank rail 131.

Further, the payout control device 111 is provided with a state return switch 120, the launch control device 112 is provided with a variable resistor operation knob 121, and the power supply device 115 is provided with a RAM erase switch 122. The state return switch 120 is operated to clear the ball clogging (return to the normal state) when a payout error occurs, such as a ball clogging of the payout motor 216 (see FIG. 4). The operation knob 121 is operated to adjust the firing force of the firing solenoid. The RAM erase switch 122 is operated when the power is turned on when it is desired to return the pachinko machine 10 to the initial state.

Next, the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 4 is a block diagram showing an electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10.

The main control device 110 is equipped with an MPU 201 as a one-chip microcomputer which is an arithmetic unit. The MPU 201 is a ROM 202 that stores various control programs and fixed value data executed by the MPU 201, and a memory for temporarily storing various data and the like when the control program stored in the ROM 202 is executed. A certain RAM 203 and various other circuits such as an interrupt circuit, a timer circuit, and a data transmission / reception circuit are built in. In the main control device 110, the MPU 201 executes the main processing of the pachinko machine 10 such as a jackpot lottery, display setting in the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81, and lottery of display results in the second symbol display device. To do.

In order to instruct the operation of the sub control device such as the payout control device 111 and the voice lamp control device 113, various commands are transmitted from the main control device 110 to the sub control device by the data transmission / reception circuit. Such a command is transmitted from the main controller 110 to the sub controller in only one direction.

The RAM 203 includes various areas, counters, flags, a stack area in which the contents of internal registers of the MPU 201 and the return destination address of the control program executed by the MPU 201 are stored, various flags, counters, I / O, and the like. It has a work area (work area) in which values are stored. The RAM 203 has a configuration in which a backup voltage is supplied from the power supply device 115 to hold (back up) data even after the power supply of the pachinko machine 10 is cut off, and all the data stored in the RAM 203 is backed up. ..

When the power supply is cut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like, the stack pointer at the time of the power failure (including the time when the power failure occurs; the same applies hereinafter) and the value of each register are stored in the RAM 203. On the other hand, when the power is turned on (including power on due to power failure elimination; the same applies hereinafter), the state of the pachinko machine 10 is restored to the state before the power was cut off based on the information stored in the RAM 203. Writing to the RAM 203 is executed by the main process (not shown) when the power is cut off, and restoration of each value written in the RAM 203 is executed in the start-up process (not shown) at the time of turning on the power. The NMI terminal (non-maskable interrupt terminal) of the MPU 201 is configured so that a power failure signal SG1 from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 is input when the power is cut off due to a power failure or the like, and the power failure signal SG1 is the MPU201. When input to, the NMI interrupt process (not shown) as the power failure process is immediately executed.

An input / output port 205 is connected to the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 via a bus line 204 composed of an address bus and a data bus. The input / output port 205 is centered on the lower side of the payout control device 111, the voice lamp control device 113, the first symbol display device 37, the second symbol display device, the second symbol hold lamp, and the opening / closing plate of the first specific winning opening 1000a. A solenoid 209 (including solenoids 1510, 2810, 4852, 6910, etc.) including a large opening solenoid for driving the opening and closing and a solenoid for driving an electric accessory is connected to the front side, and the MPU 201 is input and output. Various commands and control signals are transmitted to these via the port 205.

Further, the input / output port 205 includes various switches 208 (including a detection sensor 1240, a second detection sensor 2255, etc.) including a switch group (not shown) and a sensor group including a slide position detection sensor S and a rotation position detection sensor R. The RAM erase switch circuit 253 provided in the power supply device 115, which will be described later, is connected, and the MPU 201 executes various processes based on the signals output from the various switches 208 and the RAM erase signal SG2 output from the RAM erase switch circuit 253. To do.

The payout control device 111 drives the payout motor 216 to control the payout of prize balls and rented balls. The MPU 211, which is an arithmetic unit, has a ROM 212 that stores a control program and fixed value data executed by the MPU 211, and a RAM 213 that is used as a work memory or the like.

Like the RAM 203 of the main control device 110, the RAM 213 of the payout control device 111 has a stack area in which the contents of the internal registers of the MPU 211 and the return address of the control program executed by the MPU 211 are stored, and various flags and counters. It has a work area (work area) in which values such as I / O are stored. The RAM 213 has a configuration in which a backup voltage is supplied from the power supply device 115 to hold (back up) data even after the power supply of the pachinko machine 10 is cut off, and all the data stored in the RAM 213 is backed up. Similar to the MPU 201 of the main control device 110, the NMI terminal of the MPU 211 is also configured so that the power failure signal SG1 is input from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 when the power is cut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like. When input to the MPU 211, the NMI interrupt process (not shown) as the power failure process is immediately executed.

An input / output port 215 is connected to the MPU 211 of the payout control device 111 via a bus line 214 composed of an address bus and a data bus. The main control device 110, the payout motor 216, the launch control device 112, and the like are connected to the input / output port 215, respectively. Further, although not shown, the payout control device 111 is connected to a prize ball detection switch for detecting the paid out prize balls. The prize ball detection switch is connected to the payout control device 111, but is not connected to the main control device 110.

The launch control device 112 controls the ball launch unit 112a so that when the main control device 110 gives an instruction to launch the ball, the launch strength of the ball corresponds to the amount of rotation of the operation handle 51. .. The ball launch unit 112a includes a launch solenoid and an electromagnet (not shown), and the launch solenoid and the electromagnet are allowed to be driven when predetermined conditions are met. Specifically, the touch sensor 51a detects that the player is touching the operation handle 51, and the operation is performed on condition that the launch stop switch 51b for stopping the launch of the ball is off (not operated). The firing solenoid is excited in response to the rotation operation amount (rotation position) of the handle 51, and the ball is launched with a strength corresponding to the operation amount of the operation handle 51.

The audio lamp control device 113 is an audio output in an audio output device (speaker, etc. not shown) 226, an on / off output in a lamp display device (illumination units 29 to 33, indicator lamp 34, etc.) 227, and a variation effect (variation). It controls the setting of the display mode of the third symbol display device 81 performed by the display control device 114 such as the display) and the advance notice effect. The MPU 221 which is an arithmetic unit has a ROM 222 which stores a control program and fixed value data executed by the MPU 221, and a RAM 223 used as a work memory or the like.

An input / output port 225 is connected to the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 via a bus line 224 composed of an address bus and a data bus. A main control device 110, a display control device 114, an audio output device 226, a lamp display device 227, other devices 228, a frame button 22, and the like are connected to the input / output port 225, respectively.

The voice lamp control device 113 determines the display mode of the third symbol display device 81 based on various commands (variation pattern command, stop type command, etc.) received from the main control device 110, and commands the determined display mode. (Display variation pattern command, display stop type command, etc.) notifies the display control device 114. Further, the voice lamp control device 113 monitors the input from the frame button 22, and when the frame button 22 is operated by the player, the stage displayed on the third symbol display device 81 can be changed or the super reach can be changed. The display control device 114 is instructed to change the effect content of the time. When the stage is changed, a rear image change command including information about the changed stage is transmitted to the display control device 114 in order to display the rear image corresponding to the changed stage on the third symbol display device 81. .. Here, the rear surface image is an image displayed on the rear surface side of the third symbol, which is a main image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. The display control device 114 displays various images on the third symbol display device 81 according to a command transmitted from the voice lamp control device 113.

Further, the voice lamp control device 113 receives a command (display command) indicating the display contents of the third symbol display device 81 from the display control device 114. Based on the display command received from the display control device 114, the voice lamp control device 113 outputs the voice corresponding to the display content according to the display content of the third symbol display device 81 from the voice output device 226, and also outputs the voice corresponding to the display content. The lighting and extinguishing of the lamp display device 227 are controlled according to the display content.

In the display control device 114, the voice lamp control device 113 and the third symbol display device 81 are connected, and based on the command received from the voice lamp control device 113, the third symbol variation effect of the third symbol display device 81 and the like are performed. It controls the display. Further, the display control device 114 appropriately transmits a display command for notifying the display content of the third symbol display device 81 to the voice lamp control device 113. The voice lamp control device 113 outputs the voice from the voice output device 226 according to the display content indicated by this display command, so that the display of the third symbol display device 81 and the voice output from the voice output device 226 are matched. be able to.

The power supply device 115 is provided with a power supply unit 251 for supplying power to each part of the pachinko machine 10, a power failure monitoring circuit 252 for monitoring power failure due to a power failure, and a RAM erasing switch 122 (see FIG. 3). It has an erasing switch circuit 253. The power supply unit 251 is a device that supplies the required operating voltage to each of the control devices 110 to 114 and the like through a power supply path (not shown). As an outline, the power supply unit 251 takes in an AC 24 volt voltage supplied from the outside, and has a 12 volt voltage for driving various switches such as various switches 208, a solenoid such as a solenoid 209, and a motor. A 5 volt voltage for logic, a backup voltage for RAM backup, and the like are generated, and these 12 volt voltage, 5 volt voltage, and backup voltage are supplied to each control device 110 to 114 and the like.

The power failure monitoring circuit 252 is a circuit for outputting a power failure signal SG1 to each NMI terminal of the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 and the MPU 211 of the payout control device 111 when the power is cut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like. The power failure monitoring circuit 252 monitors the DC stable 24 volt voltage, which is the maximum voltage output from the power supply unit 251 and determines that a power failure (power failure, power failure) has occurred when this voltage becomes less than 22 volts. Then, the power failure signal SG1 is output to the main control device 110 and the payout control device 111. By the output of the power failure signal SG1, the main control device 110 and the payout control device 111 recognize the occurrence of the power failure and execute the NMI interrupt process. The power supply unit 251 outputs a voltage of 5 volts, which is the drive voltage of the control system, for a sufficient period of time to execute the NMI interrupt process even after the voltage of DC stable 24 volts becomes less than 22 volts. Is configured to maintain a normal value. Therefore, the main control device 110 and the payout control device 111 can normally execute and complete the NMI interrupt process (not shown).

The RAM erase switch circuit 253 is a circuit for outputting the RAM erase signal SG2 for clearing the backup data to the main control device 110 when the RAM erase switch 122 (see FIG. 3) is pressed. When the RAM erase signal SG2 is input when the power of the pachinko machine 10 is turned on, the main control device 110 clears the backup data, and the payout control device 111 issues a payout initialization command for clearing the backup data. It transmits to the device 111.

Next, the first variable winning device 1000 will be described with reference to FIGS. 5 to 23. FIG. 5 is a partial front perspective view of the game board 13. The first variable winning device 1000 enters the second entry port 640 among the balls flowing down to the right of the variable ephemeris time device unit 80 when the player strikes right with the inclined surface 1237 provided on the upper surface thereof. It does not sphere, but guides almost all of the spheres that have flowed downstream to the flow path forming part.

FIG. 6 is an exploded front perspective view of the first variable winning device 1000, and FIG. 7 is an exploded rear perspective view of the first variable winning device 1000. The first variable winning device 1000 includes a main body member 1100 composed of a horizontally long rectangular plate shape, an lining front plate 1200 fastened and fixed to the main body member 1100 from the front side, and the main body member 1100 and the lining front plate. An opening / closing plate 1300 that is pivotally supported by being sandwiched between 1200, a power transmission member 1400 that is rotatably supported on the back side of the main body member 1100 and applies a load to the opening / closing plate 1300 by rotation, and a power transmission member thereof. A drive device 1500 that drives the 1400, a regulation member 1600 that regulates the discharge of balls in conjunction with the opening / closing plate 1300, and a power transmission member 1400, a drive device 1500, and a regulation member 1600 are laid on the main body member 1100 from the back side. The rear cover 1700, which is fastened and fixed as described above, is mainly provided.

The main body member 1100 includes a thin plate member 1110 formed of a horizontally long rectangular thin plate arranged on the front side of the game board, and a shaft portion 1320 of the opening / closing plate 1300 recessed in the thin plate member 1110 from the front to the back side. A housing portion 1120 that is accommodated and partially penetrated, a holding hole 1130 that is a through hole into which a detection sensor 1240 is inserted on the right side of the accommodation portion 1120 when viewed from the front, and a ball flows down on the front side of the thin plate member 1110. A protrusion 1140 projecting along the path, a discharge port 1150 for discharging balls from the front to the back side of the thin plate member 1110, and a rotation projecting toward the back side of the thin plate member 1110 to support the power transmission member 1400. It mainly includes a support portion 1160 and a support claw portion 1170 that is projected in a claw shape so as to support the shaft portion 1610 of the regulating member 1600 at the upper portion of the discharge port 1150.

The accommodating portion 1120 includes a pair of left and right support recesses 1121 in which the shaft portion 1320 of the opening / closing plate 1300 is accommodated, a rectangular recess 1122 recessed in a rectangular shape below a straight line connecting the support recesses 1121, and the rectangle thereof. A through hole formed through a rectangular shape that connects a pair of support recesses 1121 in order to move the loaded portion 1330 of the opening / closing plate 1300 that operates along the right end of the recess 1122 to the front and back of the thin plate member 1111. It mainly includes 1123.

The support recess 1121 is formed to be slightly wider than the shaft portion 1320 of the opening / closing plate 1300, and in the assembled state, the shaft portion 1320 of the opening / closing plate 1300 is accommodated, and the recessed opening is closed on the back surface of the lining front plate 1200. To. That is, the opening / closing plate 1300 is pivotally supported by the support recess 1121 and the back surface of the lining front plate 1200.

The surface area of the rectangular recess 1122 is larger than that of the plate portion 1310 of the opening / closing plate 1300, and the depth of the recess is slightly deeper than that of the plate portion 1310. As a result, the plate portion 1310 can be completely accommodated in the rectangular recess 1122 in the tilted posture (closed state) of the opening / closing plate 1300, and the opening / closing plate 1300 can be prevented from protruding to the front side of the thin plate member 1110.

The projecting portion 1140 is projected to a position where it comes into contact with a ball flowing down the storage flow path 1231 of the lining front plate 1200. The flowing ball is decelerated by coming into contact with the projecting portion 1140. A similar projecting portion 1235 is also arranged in the storage flow path 1231 of the lining front plate 1200 at a position where it does not overlap with the projecting portion 1140 in the front-rear direction.

The rotation support portion 1160 has a shaft portion 1161 that rotatably supports the power transmission member 1400, and a projecting height that is evenly projected toward the back surface side of the thin plate member 1110 along a circular shape or an arc shape coaxial with the shaft portion 1161. A circular rib 1162 formed in the shape of a rib is mainly provided.

The circular rib 1162 maintains a distance between the rotating tip portion 1421 of the power transmission member 1400 and the back surface of the thin plate member 1110 at a certain distance or more. That is, during the operation of the power transmission member 1400, the circular rib 1162 is formed in the entire angle range in contact with the rotating tip portion 1421.

The lining front plate 1200 includes a thin plate member 1210 arranged on the front side of the main body member 1100 at a predetermined distance from the thin plate member 1110, and a side wall portion extending from the left end portion of the thin plate member 1210 to the back side. 1220, a box-shaped accommodating portion 1230 extending toward the back side of the thin plate member 1210 on the opposite side of the side wall portion 1220 in the left-right direction, and an upper end portion of the accommodating portion 1230. The detection sensor 1240 and the like are mainly provided.

The thin plate member 1210, the front side wall portion of the side wall portion 1220, the front view left side wall portion of the accommodating portion 1230, and the thin plate member 1110 of the main body member 1100 form a flow path that is a hole through which the sphere flows down in the vertical direction. The part is composed.

The accommodating portion 1230 is formed in a U-shape in front view, and is projected toward the back side in a storage flow path 1231 formed in a width that allows a sphere to flow down inside and a middle portion of the storage flow path 1231. It mainly includes a projecting portion 1235 (see FIG. 12) and an inclined surface 1237 formed as an upper surface on the right side when viewed from the front.

The storage flow path 1231 is configured such that a side wall portion having a U-shaped cross section that opens to the back side is extended while being bent in a front U-shape, and the opening is closed by the main body member 1100 so that a sphere passes through. Form a flow path. In the present embodiment, the thin plate member 1210 corresponding to the front side portion of the region where the storage flow path 1231 is formed is formed of a light-transmitting material. Therefore, the player can visually recognize the ball flowing down the storage flow path 1231.

The storage flow path 1231 has a guide surface 1231a (see FIG. 12), which is an inclined surface that guides the sphere toward the back side at the lowermost end, and a rolling motion that rolls the sphere guided by the guide surface 1231a in the front-rear direction. It mainly includes a surface 1231b.

The inclination angle of the rolling surface 1231b with respect to the horizontal plane is made larger than the inclination angle of the portion of the storage flow path 1231 on the front side (right side of FIG. 12) reaching the rolling surface 1231b with respect to the horizontal plane.

The projecting portion 1235 has substantially the same structure as the projecting portion 1140 of the main body member 1100. That is, the projecting portion 1235 is projected to a position where it can come into contact with the ball flowing down the storage flow path 1231, and the ball is decelerated by contacting the ball.

The inclined surface 1237 is inclined downward toward the left side in the front view. As a result, the ball landing on the inclined surface 1237 can be rolled to the left and guided to the flow path forming portion.

The detection sensor 1240 includes a through hole as the first specific winning opening 1000a. When the ball passes through the first specific winning opening 1000a, the detection sensor 1240 detects the passage and counts the number of winnings.

The opening / closing plate 1300 is a member that switches between a case where the ball is rolled toward the detection sensor 1240 and a case where the ball is dropped downward without contacting the ball, depending on the difference in posture, and is a horizontally long rectangular plate portion 1310. A pair of shaft portions 1320 projecting from the lateral end of the plate portion 1310 along the longitudinal direction, and extending along a plane perpendicular to the shaft portion 1320 at the root of the shaft portion 1320 on the right side of the front view. It mainly includes a loaded portion 1330 to be provided.

The plate portion 1310 includes a rolling surface 1311 on which the ball rolls in the ascending posture (open state), and is covered in the ascending posture (open state) in which the length in the lateral direction is along the front-rear direction in the lateral direction. The distance from the front plate 1200 is set to be equal to or less than the radius of the sphere, and the right end portion in the longitudinal direction is set to be close to the detection sensor 1240.

Further, the plate portion 1310 includes a chamfered portion 1312 chamfered in an arc shape in cross section at the upper corner portion of the end portion on the opposite side of the shaft portion 1320 in the ascending posture (open state).

The plate portion 1310 is formed to be long in the left-right direction, and has a length that allows up to five balls to be placed side by side.

The loaded portion 1330 includes an arc-shaped ball entry prevention portion 1331 extending to the front side of the rolling surface 1311, an intervening transmission portion 1332 extending to the back side of the rolling surface 1311, and an intervening transmission portion thereof. It mainly includes an engaging portion 1333 that protrudes from the 1332 on the right side when viewed from the rear (the side on which the power transmission member 1400 is arranged).

The engaging portion 1333 is provided with a chamfered portion 1333a that extends to a position that interferes with the operation locus of the power transmission member 1400 and is chamfered in an arc shape on the upper surface portion. At the time of contact with the power transmission member 1400, the chamfered portion 1333a, not the corner portion, contacts the power transmission member 1400, so that stress concentration at the time of contact between the engaging portion 1333 and the power transmission member 1400 can be avoided. ..

The power transmission member 1400 mainly includes a disk-shaped main body portion 1410 and an extension portion 1420 extending in the axial direction from the main body portion 1410.

The main body portion 1410 mainly includes a support hole 1411 through which the shaft portion 1161 is inserted, and a projecting pin 1412 projecting from the vicinity of the outer peripheral portion in parallel with the drilling direction of the support hole 1411.

The protrusion pin 1412 is a portion that engages with the tip member 1520 of the drive device 1500, and as the tip member 1520 operates linearly due to switching of excitation of the drive device 1500, the protrusion pin 1412 is displaced to transmit power. The member 1400 rotates.

The extension portion 1420 includes a rotation tip portion 1421 formed in an arc shape coaxial with the center of the support hole 1411 at the extension tip portion, and a push-in portion 1422 projecting from the rotation tip portion 1421 to the front side. To be equipped.

The drive device 1500 includes a solenoid 1510 that linearly operates a movable member by switching excitation, and a front view H-shaped (a shape having recesses at the top and bottom) tip member 1520 arranged at the tip of the movable member of the solenoid 1510. , Is mainly provided.

The tip member 1520 has a recess on the upper side that can accommodate the projecting pin 1412 of the power transmission member 1400. Specifically, a recess is formed in a shape that keeps the protrusion pin 1412 inside during the rotational operation of the power transmission member 1400 (see FIG. 20).

The regulating member 1600 includes a rod-shaped shaft portion 1610 pivotally supported by the support claw portion 1170, an extension portion 1620 extending in the radial direction of the shaft portion 1610 with a thickness equivalent to the diameter of the shaft portion 1610, and a main body. A surface on the member 1100 side is mainly provided with an extension portion 1620 and a ball receiving portion 1630 having a thickness larger than that of the extension portion 1620.

The extension portion 1620 is arranged on the movement locus of the intervening transmission unit 1332 of the opening / closing plate 1300, and receives a pressing load from the intervening transmission unit 1332 when the opening / closing plate is in the ascending posture (open state).

The ball receiving portion 1630 is in a tilted posture (a posture in which the end opposite to the shaft portion 1610 is arranged at a lower position, a storage state) and overlaps with the discharge port 1150 (the ball discharges the opening of the discharge port 1150). It is formed in a mode that is narrowed to the extent that it is not.

The regulating member 1600 is urged by a torsion spring (not shown) in a direction of maintaining an ascending posture (a posture in which the end opposite to the shaft portion 1610 is arranged at an upper position, a discharge state).

The rear cover 1700 includes a discharge port 1710 which is a through hole through which a ball discharged from the discharge port 1150 passes. The balls discharged from the discharge port 1710 are guided to a ball discharge path (not shown).

The closed state of the opening / closing plate 1300 will be described with reference to FIGS. 8 and 9. FIG. 8 is a front view of the first variable winning device 1000, and FIG. 9 is a cross-sectional view of the first variable winning device 1000 on the IX-IX line of FIG. In addition, in FIGS. 8 and 9, the opening / closing plate 1300 is closed, and in FIG. 8, the thin plate member 1210 of the lining front plate 1200 is partially torn and shown.

As shown in FIGS. 8 and 9, when the opening / closing plate 1300 is closed, the plate portion 1310 of the opening / closing plate 1300 is housed in the rectangular recess 1122, so that the thin plate member 1110 of the main body member 1100 is covered. The opening / closing plate 1300 can be aligned with the thin plate member 1110 of the main body member 1100 without narrowing the distance between the front plate 1200 and the thin plate member 1210. Since the thin plate member 1110 of the main body member 1100 and the thin plate member 1210 of the lining front plate 1200 are arranged side by side at intervals through which spheres can pass, the thin plate members 1110 and 1210 of the thin plate members 1110 and 1210 are in the state shown in FIGS. 8 and 9. By guiding the sphere between them, the sphere can be dropped along the flow path forming portion.

Further, as shown in FIG. 9, when the opening / closing plate 1300 is closed, the ball entry prevention portion 1331 of the loaded portion 1330 partially covers the opening of the detection sensor 1240 on the front side of the main body member 1100. Overhang. Therefore, it is possible to physically prevent the ball from passing through the detection sensor 1240, and an irregular prize (for example, even if the ball hits the nail or the like is blown laterally without being guided by the opening / closing plate 1300, the detection sensor (Passing through 1240) can be prevented.

Although the details will be described later, since the regulation member 1600 is in the discharge state when the opening / closing plate 1300 is closed, the ball is discharged from the storage flow path 1231. Therefore, FIG. 8 illustrates a state in which the spheres are not stored in the storage flow path 1231.

The open state of the opening / closing plate 1300 will be described with reference to FIGS. 10 and 11. 10 is a front view of the first variable winning device 1000, and FIG. 11 is a cross-sectional view of the first variable winning device 1000 on the XI-XI line of FIG. In addition, in FIGS. 10 and 11, the opening / closing plate 1300 is opened, and in FIG. 10, the thin plate member 1210 of the lining front plate 1200 is partially broken and shown. Further, in FIG. 11, the outer shape of the sphere is illustrated by an imaginary line in order to grasp the size of the sphere.

As shown in FIGS. 10 and 11, when the opening / closing plate 1300 is opened, the plate portion 1310 of the opening / closing plate 1300 projects to the front side, and the distance between the plate portion 1310 and the thin plate member 1210 is less than the diameter of the sphere. By doing so, it is possible to prevent the ball guided between the thin plate member 1110 of the main body member 1100 and the thin plate member 1210 of the lining front plate 1200 from falling.

The ball guided between the thin plate member 1110 of the main body member 1100 and the thin plate member 1210 of the lining front plate 1200 rolls on the rolling surface 1311 of the opening / closing plate 1300 along the inclination, and the detection sensor 1240 from the right end thereof. And enters the storage flow path 1231.

In the open state of the opening / closing plate 1300, a gap shorter than the radius of the sphere is provided between the plate portion 1310 and the lining front plate 1200. Therefore, the required material can be reduced and the material cost required for the opening / closing plate 1300 can be reduced as compared with the case where the plate portion 1310 is extended to the extent that it comes into contact with the lining front plate 1200.

Further, by reducing the diameter of the movement locus of the tip of the opening / closing plate 1300 in the lateral direction, it is easy to prevent the ball passing in front of the opening / closing plate 1300 from interfering with the opening / closing plate 1300 when the opening / closing plate 1300 rotates. be able to.

Here, although details will be described later, since the regulating member 1600 is in the storage state when the opening / closing plate 1300 is open, the spheres are not discharged from the storage flow path 1231 and the spheres that have passed through the detection sensor 1240 are the storage flow paths. It is stored in. Therefore, FIG. 10 illustrates a state in which spheres are stored in the storage flow path 1231.

As shown in FIG. 10, the storage flow path 1231 of the present embodiment is formed with a length capable of storing spheres up to a predetermined number (10 in the present embodiment). When 10 spheres are stored in the storage flow path 1231, the 10th sphere stops at a position detected by the detection sensor 1240.

Therefore, the tenth ball becomes a plug, and the eleventh ball is prevented from passing through the detection sensor 1240. In other words, the resistance when the eleventh sphere tries to pass through the detection sensor 1240 becomes extremely large, and the eleventh sphere can be made difficult to enter the detection sensor 1240.

In the present embodiment, when the 10th ball is detected by the detection sensor 1240, the opening / closing plate 1300 is switched to the closed state, so that the balls remaining on the opening / closing plate 1300 flow down below the opening / closing plate 1300. Then, as the opening / closing plate 1300 operates, the regulating member 1600 is switched to the discharge state, so that the balls stored in the storage flow path 1231 are discharged.

Here, as shown in FIG. 10, in a state where the spheres are not discharged from the storage flow path 1231, the tenth sphere is detected by the detection sensor 1240, but stops at a position where it does not pass through the detection sensor 1240. To do.

When the 10th ball is detected by the detection sensor 1240, the opening / closing plate 1300 is switched to the closed state, but during the switching, the 10th ball is stored while receiving a load from the ball entry prevention unit 1331. It is pushed into the road 1231 (see FIG. 21B). That is, when the opening / closing plate 1300 is in the open state, the tenth ball stops in a manner of closing the opening of the detection sensor 1240, and while the opening / closing plate 1300 is switching to the closed state, the ball entry prevention unit 1331 is the tenth. Since the opening of the detection sensor 1240 is closed while abutting (rubbing) the ball, the timing at which the tenth ball passes through the detection sensor 1240 and the timing at which the ball entry prevention unit 1331 operates are different. It is possible to prevent a moment when the opening of the detection sensor 1240 is opened, and it is possible to prevent the eleventh ball from passing through the first specific winning opening 1000a.

Therefore, it is not necessary to set a limit on the period from the detection of the specified number of balls by the detection sensor 1240 to the change of the opening / closing plate 1300 to the closed state, and it can be set arbitrarily. For example, the opening / closing operation may be started 0.2 msec after the detection, or the opening / closing operation may be started 1 second after the detection. In the present embodiment, after waiting until the 10th ball comes into contact with the 9th ball (after the center of the ball is arranged on the detection sensor 1240 side beyond the front side of the ball entry prevention unit 1331). ) In order to operate the opening / closing plate 1300, the opening / closing plate 1300 is controlled to open / close 0.5 seconds after being detected by the detection sensor 1240.

According to the operation mode of the opening / closing plate 1300 described above, in the present embodiment, the number of spheres passing through the detection sensor 1240 can be limited to 10 while the opening / closing plate 1300 forms the open state. In this embodiment, prevention (delay) of ball entry can be performed only on the eleventh ball. That is, in the first to tenth balls, it is possible to pass through the detection sensor 1240 at high speed. This leads to an increase in the progress speed of the special gaming state as compared with the case where the passage of the ball is delayed in the whole ball.

For example, in the case of a structure in which a ball that has passed through the detection sensor 1240 is decelerated once at the passing position to delay the winning of the subsequent ball, it is easy to suppress the winning of the eleventh ball, while the first ball. The time until the 10th ball passes through the detection sensor 1240 because each of the 10th balls from the 10th ball decelerates even when the balls are partially connected and rolled on the rolling surface 1311. There was a problem that the game became longer and the game was delayed.

On the other hand, in the present embodiment, the configuration for decelerating the 1st to 10th balls is not adopted, and only the 11th ball is not allowed to enter the detection sensor 1240. Therefore, the 1st to 10th balls are Even if the balls flow down in a row, the detection sensor 1240 can be passed at the flow speed, so that the speed of the game can be increased.

In addition, even if most of the period during which the opening / closing plate 1300 is opened due to repairs such as ball clogging has passed and the game is started at the end of that period, there is no ball entering the detection sensor 1240. Since it does not slow down in a meaningful way, more balls can be entered.

Further, regarding the eleventh ball, no matter how fast (at a speed at which the opening / closing plate 1300 can reach the detection sensor 1240 before the tilting operation starts), the ball flows down toward the detection sensor 1240, regardless of the speed. , The 11th ball can be physically prevented from passing through the detection sensor 1240 by the 10th ball.

The arrangement of the spheres staying in the storage flow path 1231 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 12 is a cross-sectional view of the first variable winning device 1000 in line XII-XII of FIG. In FIG. 12, a sphere stored in the storage flow path 1231 is shown.

Here, a mechanism will be described in which the spheres stored in the storage flow path 1231 are arranged in the same manner each time. First, the sphere P1 that first entered the empty storage flow path 1231 is guided by the guide surface 1231a that inclines backward at the lowermost portion of the storage flow path 1231, and is arranged at a position that abuts on the front surface of the regulation member 1600. To.

The sphere P1 is weighted by the subsequent sphere P2 reaching the lower end, and settles in the arrangement shown in FIG. The sphere P2 has a degree of freedom in arrangement in the front-rear direction on the right side of the sphere P1 when viewed from the front (right side in FIG. 12). That is, depending on the degree of tilting in the front-rear direction when the pachinko machine 10 is arranged, it may be closer to the lining front plate 1200 side, or it may be closer to the projecting portion 1140 of the main body member 1100. As shown in FIG. 12, since the projecting portion 1140 is arranged at a position where the projecting tip of the projecting portion 1140 abuts on the sphere P2, the sphere P2 is a main body member in a state of being in contact with the sphere P1. It does not come into contact with the thin plate member 1110 of 1100.

The sphere P2 is weighted by reaching a position where the subsequently entered sphere P3 abuts on the sphere P2. Here, in the present embodiment, the projecting portion 1235 arranged on the lining front plate 1200 has the ball P2 and the projecting portion 1235 on the right side of the projecting portion 1235 regardless of the position of the ball P2 in the front-rear direction. The sphere P3 enters between the spheres P3 and is arranged at a position where it is impossible to abut the thin plate member 1210 of the concealed front plate 1200 (a position where the gap with the sphere P2 is kept small).

Therefore, regardless of the position of the sphere P2 in the front-rear direction, the center position of the sphere P3 is arranged on the back side of the center position of the sphere P2, and the sphere P3 is on the back side of the sphere P2 (upper side of FIG. 12). ) Will come into contact. Therefore, the load of the sphere P3 causes the sphere P2 to move toward the front side (lower side in FIG. 12). As a result, the sphere P2 settles in the arrangement shown in FIG.

After that, the sphere P3 receives a load from the sphere P4 that subsequently enters under almost the same conditions as the sphere P2 receives the load from the sphere P3 (except that the front-rear direction is reversed), so that the sphere P3 Settles in the arrangement illustrated in FIG.

That is, the arrangement of the nth ball entering the storage flow path 1231 is fixed to a unique position by receiving a load in the front-rear direction from the (n + 1) th ball. Further, in the present embodiment, the arrangement of the spheres is not fixed by narrowing the storage flow path 1231, but while maintaining the cross-sectional area of the storage flow path 1231 larger than the diameter of the sphere, the projecting portion 1140, It is realized by arranging 1235. As a result, the arrangement of the stored balls can be fixed at a unique position while preventing the occurrence of ball clogging.

As described above, in the present embodiment, by arranging the projecting portions 1140 and 1235 at appropriate positions, the spheres are stored in a fixed arrangement each time the action of storing the spheres occurs in the storage flow path 1231. be able to. Therefore, the number of stored items can be unified each time.

With reference to FIG. 13, the discharge of the sphere from the storage flow path 1231 will be described. 13 (a) and 13 (b) are cross-sectional views of the first variable winning device 1000 in line XII-XII of FIG. In FIG. 13A, the sphere P1 is ejected and the sphere P2 is on the rolling surface 1231b. In FIG. 13B, the sphere P2 is ejected and the sphere P3 is the position of the sphere P2 in FIG. The state of being arranged in is illustrated.

As will be described later, when the excitation of the solenoid 1510 is released and the opening / closing plate 1300 is closed, the regulation member 1600 is discharged and the ball is discharged from the storage flow path 1231. When ejecting a ball. The sphere arranged at the lowermost end (sphere P1 in FIG. 12) is discharged to the back side along the inclination of the rolling surface 1231b, and the following sphere (sphere P2 in FIG. 12) flows into the space created thereby. The balls are ejected in order.

Here, since the inclination angle of the rolling surface 1231b with respect to the horizontal plane is larger than the inclination angle of the extension portion (flow path extending in the left-right direction) of the storage flow path 1231 with respect to the horizontal plane, the flow velocity of the sphere P1 is increased. Since the flow velocity of the sphere P2 is higher than that of the sphere P2, a gap is formed between the sphere P1 and the sphere P2 (see FIG. 13A). Therefore, since the load applied from the sphere P2 to the sphere P1 at the time of discharging the sphere P1 can be minimized, the velocity at the time of discharging the sphere P1 is uniform regardless of the number of spheres stored after the sphere P1. Can be transformed into.

After the sphere P1 is discharged, the subsequent spheres P2, P3, and P4 flow down to the downstream side (left side in FIG. 12) along the inclination of the extended portion of the storage flow path 1231. Here, the sphere P2 smoothly reaches the guide surface 1231a and rides on the rolling surface 1231b, while the spheres P3 and P4 come into contact with the projecting portions 1140 and 1235 in the process of flowing down (see FIG. 13A). By this contact, the spheres P3 and P4 are turned toward the directions DP3 and DP4 having the front-back direction component, pass through the positions of the spheres P2 and P3 which are led respectively, and decelerate.

In other words, the balls P3 and P4 are rearranged in the direction orthogonal to the extension direction of the storage flow path 1231 by abutting on the projecting portions 1140 and 1235, and the previously stored balls are stopped. It will be relocated to the position where it was, and will decelerate.

As a result, a gap is created between the sphere P2 and the sphere P3 (see FIG. 13B), and the load applied from the sphere P3 to the sphere P2 when the sphere P2 is ejected can be minimized. , The speed at the time of discharging the sphere P2 can be made uniform regardless of the number of spheres stored after the sphere P2.

That is, since the subsequent spheres flow down the storage flow path 1231 for a longer distance, the method of accelerating the following spheres due to gravity changes as the number of stored spheres increases, and the discharge mode of the spheres P2 (velocity at the time of discharge, There is a possibility that the discharge interval between the ball P1 and the like) will change, but the change in the discharge mode will be caused by the action of the above-mentioned protrusions 1140 and 1235 (the ball discharged on the rolling surface 1231b and its successor). It can be suppressed by the action of leaving a gap between the ball and the ball and eliminating the load due to gravity).

After that, the subsequent spheres repeatedly flow down from the arrangement shown in FIG. 13A to the arrangement shown in FIG. 13B, so that the spheres are discharged from the storage flow path 1231. As described above, by creating a gap between the ball ejected by rolling on the rolling surface 1231b and the subsequent ball, the ejected ball is ejected without receiving the weight of the succeeding ball. Therefore, it is possible to make the discharge mode (speed at the time of discharge, discharge interval, etc.) uniform regardless of the number of balls stored in the storage flow path 1231.

In other words, in the present embodiment, the projecting portions 1140 and 1235 can make the discharge mode of the sphere (speed at the time of discharge, discharge interval, etc.) uniform. In the present embodiment, it takes about 0.2 seconds for one ball to be discharged. Therefore, by maintaining the regulating member 1600 in the discharged state for 2 seconds or longer, all the maximum number (10) balls that can be stored in the storage flow path 1231 can be discharged.

14 is a rear perspective view of the first variable winning device 1000, FIG. 15 is a rear view of the first variable winning device 1000, and FIG. 16 is a first variable winning device on the XVI-XVI line of FIG. It is a cross-sectional view of 1000. In addition, in FIGS. 14 to 16, the closed state of the opening / closing plate 1300 is shown, and the rear cover 1700 is not shown.

As shown in FIGS. 14 and 15, when the opening / closing plate 1300 is in the closed state, the solenoid 1510 is in the non-excited state, and the rotating tip portion 1421 of the power transmission member 1400 is above the engaging portion 1333 of the opening / closing plate 1300. They are placed apart.

Since the intervening transmission portion 1332 of the opening / closing plate 1300 is arranged on the upper side and separated from the regulating member 1600, the regulating member 1600 is not loaded from the intervening transmitting portion 1332, and the regulating member 1600 is a torsion spring (not shown). It is maintained in the discharged state by the urging force.

Further, as shown in FIG. 16, in the closed state of the opening / closing plate 1300, the ball entry prevention unit 1331 projects so that the size of the opening of the detection sensor 1240 is equal to or less than the projected area of the ball. This makes it possible to physically prevent the sphere from passing through the detection sensor 1240.

17 is a rear perspective view of the first variable winning device 1000, FIG. 18 is a rear view of the first variable winning device 1000, and FIG. 19 is a first variable winning device in the XIX-XIX line of FIG. It is a cross-sectional view of 1000. In addition, in FIGS. 17 to 19, the open state of the opening / closing plate 1300 is shown, and the rear cover 1700 is not shown.

As shown in FIGS. 17 and 18, when the opening / closing plate 1300 is in the open state, the solenoid 1510 is in the excited state, and the rotating tip portion 1421 of the power transmission member 1400 is displaced counterclockwise, so that the opening / closing plate 1300 The engaging portion 1333 is pushed into the pushing portion 1422.

The intervening transmission unit 1332 of the opening / closing plate 1300 is arranged on the lower side as the power transmission member 1400 rotates, and in this state, the extension portion 1620 of the regulation member 1600 receives a load from the intervening transmission unit 1332, and the posture of the regulation member 1600. Is switched to a tilted posture (regulatory member 1600 is switched to a stored state).

In the open state of the opening / closing plate 1300, the regulating member 1600 is given a load due to the driving force of the solenoid 1510 and an urging force of a torsion spring (not shown). In the present embodiment, the urging force of the torsion spring is applied. A structure is adopted that can suppress the driving force of the solenoid 1510 when the opening / closing plate 1300 is maintained in the open state while maintaining a large size. The large urging force of the torsion spring leads to the effect that the regulating member 1600 can be immediately switched to the discharge state, whereby the ball can be quickly discharged from the storage flow path 1231. The adopted structure will be described below.

In the present embodiment, the engaging portion 1333 of the opening / closing plate 1300 is arranged on the operation locus E1 of the power transmission member 1400 when the opening / closing plate 1300 starts operating from the closed state, while the opening / closing plate 1300 is in the open state. When switched to, the power transmission member 1400 is pushed outward along the rotation axis direction of the operation locus E1. The operation locus E1 is shown as an outer shape of the movement locus of the portion including the pushing portion 1422 (see FIG. 6).

Therefore, the load transmitted from the opening / closing plate 1300 to the power transmission member 1400 after the opening / closing plate 1300 is switched to the open state is not the operating direction (rotational direction) of the power transmitting member 1400, but the surface forming the rotation direction thereof. Is hung in the axial direction, which is the vertical direction. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the load around the shaft portion 1320 applied to the opening / closing plate 1300 from being transmitted to the solenoid 1510 via the power transmission member 1400.

That is, the urging force of the torsion spring (not shown) that urges the regulating member 1600 tends to push the opening / closing plate 1300 back toward the closed state, but this urging force is the power no matter how large the urging force is. It is not applied to the solenoid 1510 via the transmission member 1400.

As a result, once the opening / closing plate 1300 is switched to the open state, it is possible to prevent the driving force of the solenoid 1510 for maintaining the opening / closing plate 1300 in the open state from fluctuating due to the load applied to the opening / closing plate 1300. Therefore, it is not necessary to keep applying the voltage applied to the solenoid 1510 to the switching plate 1300 at the maximum value.

That is, after exciting the solenoid 1510 so as to generate a driving force sufficient to switch the regulating member 1600 to the stored state against the urging force of the torsion spring (not shown) at the start of operation, the applied voltage was lowered. Even so, the opening / closing plate 1300 can be maintained in the open state.

Therefore, even if a fluctuating load is applied to the opening / closing plate 1300 and the regulating member 1600, the opening / closing plate 1300 can be maintained in the open state and the regulating member 1600 can be maintained in the stored state without being affected by the load.

As the fluctuating load applied to the opening / closing plate 1300 and the regulating member 1600, a load given by the weight of the sphere is exemplified. That is, for example, since the opening / closing plate 1300 has a configuration in which a ball lands on the rolling surface 1311, when the sphere lands, it receives a load due to the weight of the sphere, and the number of the spheres changes frequently. The 1300 is given a fluctuating load. Further, for example, the regulation member 1600 is loaded with or without a sphere stored in the storage flow path 1231, particularly a sphere arranged at the lowermost end of the storage flow path 1231. And, a fluctuating load is given.

As described above in FIGS. 14 to 19, since the opening / closing plate 1300 and the regulating member 1600 are interlocked with each other, the regulating member 1600 cannot be discharged while maintaining the open state of the opening / closing plate 1300. Therefore, even if the opening / closing plate 1300 is illegally maintained in the open state, it is physically possible that more spheres (10 or more spheres in the present embodiment) that can be stored in the storage flow path 1231 pass through the detection sensor 1240. Can be prevented. As a result, it is possible to prevent fraudulently maintaining the opening / closing plate 1300 in the open state and increasing the number of prize balls to be acquired.

20 and 21 show the operation of the opening / closing plate 1300 and the regulating member 1600 in chronological order. 20 (a) is a rear view of the first variable winning device 1000, and FIG. 20 (b) is a cross-sectional view of the first variable winning device 1000 in line XXb-XXb of FIG. 20 (a). 20 (c) is a rear view of the first variable winning device 1000, FIG. 21 (a) is a rear view of the first variable winning device 1000, and FIG. 21 (b) is a rear view of FIG. 21 (a). FIG. 21 (c) is a rear view of the first variable winning device 1000, FIG. 21 (c) is a rear view of the first variable winning device 1000, and FIG. 21 (d) is a cross-sectional view of the first variable winning device 1000 in the line XXIb-XXIb. FIG. 5 is a cross-sectional view of the first variable winning apparatus 1000 on the −XXId line.

In addition, in FIGS. 20 and 21, only the opening / closing plate 1300, the power transmission member 1400, the tip member 1520 of the drive device 1500, and the regulation member 1600 maintain the arrangement in the assembled state (see FIG. 5) for easy understanding. In addition to omitting the illustration of other configurations, the state of the opening / closing plate 1300 changing from the open state to the closed state is illustrated in chronological order.

That is, in FIGS. 20A and 20B, the state in which the tip member 1520 of the drive device 1500 is arranged at a position separated by the first distance h1 from the reference line O1 (the state in which the solenoid 1510 is not excited) is 20 (c), 21 (a) and 21 (b) show a state in which the tip member 1520 is displaced and is arranged at a position separated from the reference line O1 by a second distance h2 shorter than the first distance h1. ), The tip member 1520 is displaced and arranged at a position separated from the reference line O1 by a third distance h3, which is shorter than the second distance h2. In FIGS. 21 (c) and 21 (d), the tip member is arranged. The states in which the 1520 is displaced and arranged at a position separated from the reference line O1 by a fourth distance h4, which is shorter than the third distance h3 (the final arrival position when the solenoid 1510 is excited) are shown in the drawings.

In FIG. 21B, the first specific winning opening 1000a arranged on the front side is illustrated by an imaginary line for reference, and the outer shape of the cross section of the sphere in the same cross section as the cross section used in the illustration is illustrated by the imaginary line. Illustrated. That is, in the state shown in FIG. 10, the opening / closing plate 1300 can rotate to the state shown in FIG. 21B without interfering with the sphere.

From the state shown in FIG. 20A to the state shown in FIG. 20C, the power transmission member 1400 rotates, but the opening / closing plate 1300 maintains the same posture. In addition, in FIG. 20C, the rotating tip portion 1421 of the power transmission member 1400 and the engaging portion 1333 of the opening / closing plate 1300 come into contact with each other.

As a result, the power transmission member 1400 can be given momentum before the opening / closing plate 1300 is operated from the closed state to the open state. Therefore, compared with the case where the opening / closing plate 1300 is started to rotate at the same time as the rotation of the power transmission member 1400 is started. As a result, the driving force required at the start of rotation (initial movement) can be reduced, and the operating speed of the opening / closing plate 1300 can be increased.

From the state shown in FIG. 20 (c) to the state shown in FIG. 21 (a), the regulating member 1600 maintains the discharged state, while the opening / closing plate 1300 operates from the closed state, and the closed state and the open state are obtained. It is an intermediate state between them (see FIG. 21 (b)).

In the intermediate state of the opening / closing plate 1300 shown in FIG. 21B, when the plate portion 1310 projects toward the front side and the ball flows down to the front side (right side of FIG. 21B) of the opening / closing plate 1300. , The ball can be received by the rolling surface 1311 of the plate portion 1310. In this case, the weight of the sphere acts in the direction of pushing down the rolling surface 1311 (clockwise in FIG. 21B), but the tip member 1520 moves to the right in the rear view (toward the right in FIG. 21A) to transmit power. Since the load in the opposite direction (counterclockwise in FIG. 21B) is applied to the engaging portion 1333 via the member 1400, it is possible to prevent the opening / closing plate 1300 from rotating due to the weight of the sphere.

Therefore, in the intermediate state of the opening / closing plate 1300 shown in FIG. 21B, it is possible to prevent the ball from passing downward through the front side of the opening / closing plate 1300 while enabling the ball to be discharged from the discharge port 1150. ..

As a result, there is a problem of maintaining the regulating member 1600 in the discharged state during the time required for discharging the ball from the storage flow path 1231, and a problem of shortening the closed state of the opening / closing plate 1300 (shortening the interval), which contradicts the problem. By extending the plate portion 1310 to an intermediate position and sandwiching the ball between the rolling surface 1311 and the lining front plate 1200 while maintaining the discharge of the ball in the state shown in FIG. 21 (a). , Can be achieved together.

At the same time, in the state shown in FIG. 21B, the opening / closing plate 1300 is in a posture of preventing the ball from entering the detection sensor 1240 while preventing the ball from passing downward. That is, in the state shown in FIG. 21 (b), the rolling surface 1311 is located at a position separated below the bottom surface of the opening of the detection sensor 1240. Therefore, in the state shown in FIG. 21 (b), the rolling surface 1311 It is possible to prevent the ball on the vehicle from passing through the detection sensor 1240 as it is. As a result, it is possible to prevent the ball from passing through the detection sensor 1240 when the regulating member 1600 is in the discharged state, and it is possible to effectively maintain the function of limiting the number of winning balls by the first variable winning device 1000. ..

As shown in FIG. 21D, at the same time that the opening / closing plate 1300 is switched to the open state, the regulating member 1600 is switched to the stored state. Further, as shown in FIGS. 20 and 21, the opening / closing plate 1300 and the regulating member 1600 are interlocked by the operation of the tip member 1520 of the drive device 1500. That is, the driving force of the solenoid 1510 (see FIG. 6) of the driving device 1500 can also be used as the driving force of the opening / closing plate 1300 and the regulating member 1600.

20 and 21 have described the case where the opening / closing plate 1300 is switched from the closed state to the open state, but when the opening / closing plate 1300 is switched from the open state to the closed state, it can be grasped by going back to FIGS. 20 and 21. can do.

When switching from the open state to the closed state, the state is first changed from the state shown in FIG. 21 (d) to the state shown in FIG. 21 (b). Here, since the loaded portion 1330 of the opening / closing plate 1300 is arranged in the operating direction of the regulating member 1600, the regulating member 1600 does not move more than the moving amount of the loaded portion 1330.

That is, since the regulation member 1600 is switched to the discharge state after the opening / closing plate 1300 operates, it is impossible for the opening / closing plate 1300 to maintain the open state after the regulation member 1600 is switched to the discharge state. Can be done. Thereby, for example, it is possible to prevent an irregular winning of the ball passing through the detection sensor 1240 at a timing slightly after the ball starts to be discharged.

Further, in the state shown in FIG. 21B, it seems that the ball can enter the detection sensor 1240 as long as the opening of the detection sensor 1240 is still opened and the ball comes into contact with the rolling surface 1311 and bounces. , In this embodiment, it can be made impossible.

That is, when the state shown in FIG. 21B is viewed as a state in which the opening / closing plate 1300 is in the process of being changed from the open state to the closed state, the rotating tip portion 1421 of the power transmission member 1400 moves up, so that the rolling surface 1311 When the spheres come into contact with each other, no load is generated to support the opening / closing plate 1300 that works in the direction opposite to the weight direction of the spheres. Therefore, when the ball comes into contact with the rolling surface 1311, the plate portion 1310 moves downward due to the weight of the ball, so that the ball cannot be bounced to the detection sensor 1240. As a result, it is possible to prevent irregular prizes from occurring.

The contents of ROM 202 (see FIG. 4) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 22 (a) is a block diagram showing the electrical configuration of the ROM 202 in the main control device 110, and FIG. 22 (b) schematically illustrates the correspondence between the first hit type counter C2 and the jackpot type in the special symbol. FIG. 22 (c) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the correspondence between the second hit random number counter C4 and the hit in the ordinary symbol.

As shown in FIG. 22A, the ROM 202 of the main control device 110 has a random number table 202a per first, a type selection table 202b per first, and a random number table 202c per second as part of the fixed value data described above. , And the variation pattern selection table 202d is stored at least.

The first hit random number table 202a is a data table in which the jackpot determination value of the first hit random number counter, which is updated periodically (for example, every 2 msec), is stored. When the value of the first random number counter acquired based on the starting prize matches any of the determination values specified in the first random number table 202a, it is determined that the special symbol is a big hit.

The first hit type selection table 202b (see FIG. 22B) is a data table in which judgment values for determining the jackpot type are stored, and the judgment value of the first hit type counter C2 is each jackpot type. , And the type of entrance that triggered the lottery of special symbols. In the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, when it is determined that the special symbol is a big hit, the value of the first hit type counter C2 acquired based on the start winning prize is compared with the first hit type selection table 202b, and the first hit type selection table 202b is compared. The jackpot type corresponding to the value of the hit type counter C2 is selected.

Specifically, when a big hit is obtained in the lottery of the special symbol 1 (lottery based on the entry into the first entry slot 64), the value of the first hit type counter C2 is in the range of "0 to 19". Is defined in association with the jackpot A (see 202b1 in FIG. 22B).

When the jackpot A is obtained, the jackpot game of 15 rounds is executed in the first operation pattern of the first variable winning device 1000. In this case, the player can receive a payout of about 2250 prize balls.

The jackpot B is associated with the range in which the value of the first hit type counter C2 is "20 to 49" (see 202b2 in FIG. 22B).

When the jackpot B is obtained, the jackpot game of 8 rounds is executed in the first operation pattern of the first variable winning device 1000. In this case, the player can receive a payout of about 1200 prize balls.

The jackpot C is associated with the range in which the value of the first hit type counter C2 is "50 to 99" (see 202b3 in FIG. 22B).

When the jackpot C is obtained, the jackpot game of four rounds is executed in the first operation pattern of the first variable winning device 1000. In this case, the player can receive a payout of about 600 prize balls.

As described above, when a big hit is obtained in the lottery of the special symbol 1 (lottery based on the entry into the first entry slot 64), the first variable winning device 1000 has the first operation pattern in any case. Works with. Therefore, the difference in the number of prize balls paid out by the player appears as a difference depending on the number of rounds, and as the number of rounds increases, the number of prize balls paid out increases and the time required for the jackpot game also increases.

In the jackpot based on the special symbol 1 lottery (lottery based on entering the first ball opening 64), there is a 20% chance of winning a 15-round jackpot, while a 50% chance of winning a 4-round jackpot. So basically, you can't expect a lot of prize balls. On the other hand, since the 4-round jackpot game is completed in a shorter time than the 15-round jackpot game, it is possible to start launching the ball for the subsequent jackpot acquisition at an early stage.

On the other hand, when a big hit is obtained in the lottery of the special symbol 2 (lottery based on the entry into the second entrance 640), the value of the first hit type counter C2 is in the range of "0 to 79". The jackpot a is associated and defined (see 202b4 in FIG. 22B).

When the jackpot a is reached, the jackpot game of 15 rounds is executed in the first operation pattern of the first variable winning device 1000, as in the case of the jackpot A. In this case, the player can receive a payout of about 2250 prize balls.

A jackpot b is associated with a range in which the value of the first hit type counter C2 is "80 to 89" (see 202b5 in FIG. 22B).

When the jackpot b is reached, the jackpot game of 15 rounds is executed in the second operation pattern (details will be described later) of the first variable winning device 1000. In this case, the number of prize balls paid out to the player is inevitably less than 2250 (1200 in the present embodiment), and the time required for the jackpot game exceeds the case of jackpot a.

The jackpot c is associated with the range in which the value of the first hit type counter C2 is "90 to 99" (see 202b6 in FIG. 22B).

When the jackpot c is reached, the jackpot game of 15 rounds is executed in the third operation pattern (details will be described later) of the first variable winning device 1000. In this case, the number of prize balls paid out to the player is inevitably less than 2250 (1875 in the present embodiment), and the time required for the big hit game exceeds the case of big hit a, and the prize is paid out for each round. The time required for a ball or jackpot game fluctuates.

As described above, when a big hit is obtained in the lottery of the special symbol 2 (lottery based on the entry into the second entrance 640), the operation pattern of the first variable winning device 1000 changes according to the big hit type. Due to this difference in the operation pattern, the number of jackpot rounds can be kept unchanged, while the time required for the jackpot game can be changed while making a difference in the number of payouts. In the present embodiment, when the number of payouts is small (big hit b and big hit c), the time required for the big hit game can be lengthened as compared with the case where the number of payouts is large (big hit a). That is, when a jackpot (big hit b and jackpot c) with a small number of payouts is acquired, the timing of launching the ball aiming at the next jackpot is delayed as compared with the case of the jackpot a.

Therefore, in addition to providing a difference in the number of prize balls, by forcibly prolonging the time required for the jackpot game, the profit per unit time (time efficiency) that the player can obtain by the jackpot game due to the difference in the jackpot type can be obtained. There can be a difference in the number of payouts including).

As a result, the breakdown of the jackpot in the special symbol 2 lottery (lottery based on the entry into the second entrance 640) includes a jackpot (big hit a) that allows a large amount of time-efficient payout and a time-efficient payout. It is possible to provide a small number of big hits (big hit b, big hit c), and it is possible to increase the profit of the player obtained when the big hit a is obtained. As a result, the difference in the number of payouts (the maximum value of the total number of acquired balls and the minimum value of the total number of acquired balls) when the game is continuously played for a predetermined time while maintaining a large probability of winning the jackpot a. It is possible to configure a game machine capable of increasing the difference).

As described above, during the probability change of the special symbol, the hit probability of the normal symbol is increased, the fluctuation time of the normal symbol is shortened (3 seconds), and the opening time of the electric accessory 640a when the normal symbol is hit is increased. It is set to be longer (1 second x 2 times). Therefore, it becomes easy to put the ball into the second entrance 640, and it becomes easy to draw the special symbol 2. Therefore, once it is possible to shift to the probabilistic state of the special symbol, the probabilistic state of the special symbol, which is likely to be a big hit of the special symbol and is likely to be a big hit a (big hit of the maximum ball) when it becomes a big hit, is repeated. Since it becomes easier, it becomes easier for the player to win a large number of prize balls. As a result, it is possible to make the player play the game while strongly expecting the player to shift to the probabilistic state of the special symbol, so that the player's interest in the game can be improved.

The second hit random number table 202c (see FIG. 22C) is a data table in which the hit determination value of the normal symbol is stored. Specifically, "5-28" is defined as a determination value for hitting the normal symbol in the normal state of the normal symbol (see 202c1 in FIG. 22 (c)). Further, in the high probability state of the normal symbol, "5-204" is defined as a determination value for hitting the normal symbol (see 202c2 in FIG. 22 (c)). In the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, the value of the second random number counter C4 acquired based on the passage of the ball through the normal entry port 67 and the second random number table 202c are referred to, and the normal symbol is used. It is judged whether or not it is a hit. The variation pattern selection table 202d is a data table in which the determination value of the variation type counter for determining the display mode of the variation pattern is defined for each display mode.

Next, with reference to FIG. 23, the opening pattern of the first specific winning opening 1000a in the present embodiment will be described. FIG. 23 (a) is a diagram showing a time change of the first specific winning opening 1000a in the first operation pattern, and FIG. 23 (b) is a diagram showing the time timing of the first specific winning opening 1000a in the second operation pattern. It is the figure which showed the change, and FIG. 23C is the figure which showed the timekeeping change of the 1st specific winning opening 1000a in the 3rd operation pattern.

When the jackpot is determined in the special figure hit determination, the MPU 201 (see FIG. 4) starts controlling the determined type of jackpot game after the end of the special figure variation display (symbol variation effect). Hereinafter, the operation control of the opening / closing plate 1300 performed when the big hit game is given will be described.

<When operating with the first operation pattern>
When the jackpot type is jackpot A, jackpot B, jackpot C, or jackpot a jackpot game, the MPU 201 drives and controls the solenoid 1510 so that the opening / closing plate 1300 operates based on the first operation pattern. When the special figure variation display (design variation effect) is completed, the MPU 201 sets the solenoid 1510 so that the timer means (not shown) keeps the opening / closing plate 1300 in the closed state until the predetermined opening time OP (10 seconds) elapses. The drive is controlled, and after the opening time OP elapses, the first round game R is started.

That is, the solenoid 1510 is driven and controlled so that the first operating time T1 (maximum 30 seconds) is measured by the timer means and the opening / closing plate 1300 is displaced from the closed state to the open state to open the first specific winning opening 1000a. Then, the opening / closing plate 1300 is allowed to operate for a long time.

Then, in the first round game R, the lapse of the round end condition (round game time (30 seconds, which is the maximum value of the first operating time T1) or the specified number (10 in the present embodiment) of pachinko balls When the winning) is satisfied, the solenoid 1510 is driven and controlled so as to displace the opening / closing plate 1300 to the closed state and close the first specific winning opening 1000a, and the round game R of the first round ends.

When the round game R of the first round is completed, the timer means drives and controls the solenoid 1510 to keep the opening / closing plate 1300 in the closed state until the first interval time Int1 (2.0 seconds) between rounds elapses, and the round After the lapse of the first interval time Int1, the second round game R is started.

The first interval time Int1 between rounds is set as a time during which the number of balls that can be stored in the storage flow path 1231 can be discharged globally. That is, as described above, in the present embodiment, a maximum of 10 balls are stored in the storage flow path 1231, and the balls are discharged at intervals of about 0.2 seconds per one regardless of the number of stored balls. Will be done. Therefore, it takes 2 seconds for the furnishing to eject 10 balls.

In the second round, as in the start of the first round, the first operation time T1 (maximum 30 seconds) is measured by the timer means, and the opening / closing plate 1300 is displaced from the closed state to the open state to specify the first. The solenoid 1510 is driven and controlled so as to open the winning opening 1000a, and the opening / closing plate 1300 is operated for a long time.

Then, when the round end condition (round game time (30 seconds, which is the maximum value of the first operating time T1) elapses or a specified number of pachinko balls are won) is satisfied in the second round game R. The solenoid 1510 is driven and controlled so as to displace the opening / closing plate 1300 to the closed state and close the first specific winning opening 1000a, and the second round game R ends.

In the first operation pattern, it is possible to form a state in which no balls remain inside the storage flow path 1231 at the start of the round game R in each round by discharging the balls in the first interval time Int1 between rounds. Therefore, even after the second round, a specified number (10 in this embodiment) of pachinko balls can be passed through the first specific winning opening 1000a, so that the maximum length of the first operating time T1 of each round can be reached. The round game R can be completed without waiting for (30 seconds). Therefore, the round game R can be rapidly advanced.

After that, similarly, the round game R from the third round to the maximum 15 rounds is repeated with the first interval time Int1 between rounds sandwiched between the round game R, and the opening / closing plate 1300 is between the closed state and the open state. The solenoid 1510 is driven and controlled so as to open and close the first specific winning opening 1000a.

Then, when the round game R of the final round is completed, the solenoid 1510 is driven and controlled so that the timer means keeps the opening / closing plate 1300 in the closed state until the first interval time Int1 between rounds and the ending time ED (11 seconds) elapse. Then, the jackpot game ends with the passage of the time.

<When operating with the second operation pattern>
When the jackpot type is the jackpot game of jackpot b, the MPU 201 drives and controls the solenoid 1510 so that the opening / closing plate 1300 operates based on the second operation pattern. When the special figure variation display (design variation effect) is completed, the MPU 201 sets the solenoid 1510 so that the timer means (not shown) keeps the opening / closing plate 1300 in the closed state until the predetermined opening time OP (10 seconds) elapses. The drive is controlled, and after the opening time OP elapses, the first round game R is started.

That is, the solenoid 1510 is driven and controlled so that the first operating time T1 (maximum 30 seconds) is measured by the timer means and the opening / closing plate 1300 is displaced from the closed state to the open state to open the first specific winning opening 1000a. Then, the opening / closing plate 1300 is allowed to operate for a long time.

Then, in the first round game R, the lapse of the round end condition (round game time (30 seconds, which is the maximum value of the first operating time T1) or the specified number (10 in the present embodiment) of pachinko balls When the winning) is satisfied, the solenoid 1510 is driven and controlled so as to displace the opening / closing plate 1300 to the closed state and close the first specific winning opening 1000a, and the round game R of the first round ends.

When the round game R of the first round is completed, the timer means drives and controls the solenoid 1510 to keep the opening / closing plate 1300 in the closed state until the second interval time Int2 (1.0 seconds) between rounds elapses, and the round After the lapse of the second interval time Int2, the second round game R is started.

The second interval time Int2 between rounds is set as a time during which at least a part of the number of balls that can be stored in the storage flow path 1231 can be discharged. That is, as described above, in the present embodiment, a maximum of 10 balls are stored in the storage flow path 1231, and the balls are discharged at intervals of about 0.2 seconds per one regardless of the number of stored balls. Will be done. Therefore, since the number of balls that can be discharged in one second is 5, for example, when 10 balls are stored in the storage flow path 1231, even if the balls are discharged in the second interval time Int2 between rounds. , 5 spheres will still remain in the storage channel 1231.

In the second round, as in the start of the first round, the first operation time T1 (maximum 30 seconds) is measured by the timer means, and the opening / closing plate 1300 is displaced from the closed state to the open state to specify the first. The solenoid 1510 is driven and controlled so as to open the winning opening 1000a, and the opening / closing plate 1300 is operated for a long time.

Then, when the round end condition (round game time (30 seconds, which is the maximum value of the first operating time T1) elapses or a specified number of pachinko balls are won) is satisfied in the second round game R. The solenoid 1510 is driven and controlled so as to displace the opening / closing plate 1300 to the closed state and close the first specific winning opening 1000a, and the second round game R ends.

In the second operation pattern, the discharge of the ball at the second interval time Int2 between the rounds can form a state in which the ball remains inside the storage flow path 1231 at the start of the round game R in each round. Therefore, in the second and subsequent rounds, a state in which a specified number (10 in this embodiment) of pachinko balls cannot be passed through the first specific winning opening 1000a may occur. In this case, the round game R ends only after the maximum length (30 seconds) of the first operating time T1 of each round has elapsed. Therefore, the progress of the round game R is delayed as compared with the first operation pattern.

After that, similarly, the round games R of the third to fifteenth rounds are repeated with the second interval time Int2 between the rounds sandwiched between the round games R, and the opening / closing plate 1300 is between the closed state and the open state. The solenoid 1510 is driven and controlled so as to be displaced and open / close the first specific winning opening 1000a.

Then, when the round game R of the final round is completed, the solenoid 1510 is driven and controlled so that the timer means keeps the opening / closing plate 1300 in the closed state until the first interval time Int1 between rounds and the ending time ED (11 seconds) elapse. Then, the jackpot game ends with the passage of the time.

Here, in the 15-round jackpot game, the elapsed time and the number of payouts between the first operation pattern and the second operation pattern are compared. The ball can be fired at a minimum interval of 0.6 seconds.

First, when the jackpot game is performed in the first operation pattern, the time required for 10 balls to pass through the first specific winning opening 1000a is 6 seconds at the shortest. When the time required to continue this for 15 rounds, the opening time OP, the first interval time Int1 between rounds, and the ending time RD are added, the time elapsed from the start to the end of the jackpot game is 141 seconds ( = OP (10s) + (T1 (6s) + Int1 (2s)) × 15R + ED (11s)). The number of payouts is 2250 (= 15 × 10C × 15R).

On the other hand, when the jackpot game is performed in the second operation pattern, 10 balls can be won in the first specific winning opening 1000a in the first round, but only 5 balls can be won in the second and subsequent rounds. The time elapsed from the start to the end of the jackpot game is 463 seconds (= OP (10s) + (T1 (6s) + Int2 (1s)) + (T1 (30s) + Int2 (1s)) x 13R + T1 (30s) + Int1 ( 2s) + ED (11s)). In addition, the number of payouts is 1200 (= (10C × 1R + 5C × 14R) × 15) because only 5 balls can be won in the round game R from the second round onward.

Therefore, when the jackpot game is performed in the second operation pattern, it takes more than three times as long as when the jackpot game is performed in the first operation pattern, while the payout ball is reduced to about half, and the time efficiency of the ball ejection acquisition is reduced. Becomes dramatically worse.

As a result, it is possible to improve the interest of the player when the jackpot game is performed in the first operation pattern. That is, it is possible to increase the rarity value of the jackpot A and the jackpot a, improve the attention to the jackpot type notified for each jackpot, and improve the interest in the jackpot game.

The second interval time Int2 between rounds is set to 1.0 second, but the present invention is not limited to this, and various numerical values can be set and can be changed in each round.

For example, the second interval time Int2 between rounds after the end of the first round game R is 0.5 seconds, and the second interval time Int2 between rounds after the end of the second round game R is 1.5 seconds. It is also possible to.

In the round game R immediately after the second interval time Int2 between rounds is set to 0.5 seconds, since only two balls are discharged from the storage flow path 1231, for example, the balls are discharged to the storage flow path 1231 in the previous round. When 10 balls are stored, the round game R is started with 8 balls remaining. Therefore, in the round game R of the round, only two balls can be won in the first specific winning opening 1000a, so that the number of payouts is small (30).

In the round game R immediately after the second interval time Int2 between rounds is set to 1.5 seconds, 7 balls are discharged from the storage flow path 1231. Therefore, for example, 10 balls are discharged from the storage flow path 1231 in the previous round. If the number of balls is stored, the round game R is started with three balls remaining. Therefore, in the round game R of the round, seven balls can be won in the first specific winning opening 1000a, and a certain number (105) can be paid out.

It is also possible to set the length of the second interval time Int2 between rounds to 2.0 seconds (or more time). In this case, since no balls remain in the storage flow path 1231 at the start of the round game R immediately after, and 10 balls can be won in the first specific winning opening 1000a, a large number (150) prizes are awarded. It is possible to hope for a reduction in the progress time of the ball and the round game R.

<When operating with the third operation pattern>
In the case of a jackpot game in which the jackpot type is jackpot c, the MPU 201 drives and controls the solenoid 1510 so that the opening / closing plate 1300 operates based on the third operation pattern. When the special figure variation display (design variation effect) is completed, the MPU 201 sets the solenoid 1510 so that the timer means (not shown) keeps the opening / closing plate 1300 in the closed state until the predetermined opening time OP (10 seconds) elapses. The drive is controlled, and after the opening time OP elapses, the first round game R is started.

That is, the solenoid 1510 is driven and controlled so that the first operating time T1 (maximum 30 seconds) is measured by the timer means and the opening / closing plate 1300 is displaced from the closed state to the open state to open the first specific winning opening 1000a. Then, the opening / closing plate 1300 is allowed to operate for a long time.

Then, in the first round game R, the lapse of the round end condition (round game time (30 seconds, which is the maximum value of the first operating time T1) or the specified number (10 in the present embodiment) of pachinko balls When the winning) is satisfied, the solenoid 1510 is driven and controlled so as to displace the opening / closing plate 1300 to the closed state and close the first specific winning opening 1000a, and the round game R of the first round ends.

When the round game R of the first round is completed, the timer means drives and controls the solenoid 1510 to keep the opening / closing plate 1300 in the closed state until the first interval time Int1 (2.0 seconds) between rounds elapses, and the round After the lapse of the first interval time Int1, the second round game R is started.

In the second round, as in the start of the first round, the first operation time T1 (maximum 30 seconds) is measured by the timer means, and the opening / closing plate 1300 is displaced from the closed state to the open state to specify the first. The solenoid 1510 is driven and controlled so as to open the winning opening 1000a, and the opening / closing plate 1300 is operated for a long time.

Then, when the round end condition (round game time (30 seconds, which is the maximum value of the first operating time T1) elapses or a specified number of pachinko balls are won) is satisfied in the second round game R. The solenoid 1510 is driven and controlled so as to displace the opening / closing plate 1300 to the closed state and close the first specific winning opening 1000a, and the second round game R ends.

Since the discharge of balls in the first interval time Int1 between rounds forms a state in which no balls remain inside the storage flow path 1231 at the start of the second round game R, the specified number of balls are formed even in the second and subsequent rounds. (In this embodiment, 10) pachinko balls can be passed through the first specific winning opening 1000a, and the balls can be paid out for that amount, and the first operating time T1 of each round can be paid. The round game R can be completed without waiting for the maximum length (30 seconds). Therefore, the prize ball can be paid out in the same manner as in the first operation pattern while the round game R is rapidly advanced.

After that, similarly, the round games R of the third to tenth rounds are repeated with the first interval time Int1 between rounds sandwiched between the round games R, and the opening / closing plate 1300 is between the closed state and the open state. The solenoid 1510 is driven and controlled so as to be displaced and open / close the first specific winning opening 1000a.

When the 10th round game R is completed, the timer means drives and controls the solenoid 1510 to keep the opening / closing plate 1300 in the closed state until the second interval time Int2 (1.0 seconds) between rounds elapses, and the round After the lapse of the second interval time Int2, the 11th round round game R is started.

In the 11th round, the solenoid 1510 is used to start measuring the first operating time T1 (maximum 30 seconds) by the timer means and to displace the opening / closing plate 1300 from the closed state to the open state to open the first specified winning opening 1000a. Is driven and controlled so that the opening / closing plate 1300 operates for a long time.

Then, when the round end condition (round game time (30 seconds, which is the maximum value of the first operating time T1) elapses or a specified number of pachinko balls are won) is satisfied in the 11th round round game R. The solenoid 1510 is driven and controlled so as to displace the opening / closing plate 1300 to the closed state and close the first specific winning opening 1000a, and the round game R of the eleventh round ends.

After that, similarly, the 12th to 15th rounds of the round game R are repeated with the second interval time Int2 between the rounds sandwiched between the round games R, and the opening / closing plate 1300 is between the closed state and the open state. The solenoid 1510 is driven and controlled so as to be displaced and open / close the first specific winning opening 1000a.

By discharging the ball at the second interval time Int2 between the rounds, it is possible to form a state in which the ball remains inside the storage flow path 1231 at the start of the round game R after the 11th round. Therefore, after the 11th round, a state may occur in which a specified number (10 in this embodiment) of pachinko balls cannot be passed through the first specific winning opening 1000a. In this case, the round game R ends only after the maximum length (30 seconds) of the first operating time T1 of each round has elapsed. Therefore, the progress of the round game R is delayed as compared with the first operation pattern.

In addition, the number of prize balls paid out in each round game is also smaller than that by the 10th round. Therefore, the total number of payouts is smaller than that of the jackpot of the first operation pattern (1875 pieces = (10C x 10R + 5C x 5R) x 15 pieces), and the degree of payout (number or speed, etc.) in the jackpot game is reduced. , It can be changed (depending on the timing) depending on how many rounds the game is played.

In the third operation pattern, the case where the number of payouts is large in the first round and the number of payouts decreases toward the final stage has been described, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, the number of payouts may be small at the beginning, but the number of payouts may increase toward the end, or the number of payouts may peak in the middle round.

Then, when the round game R of the final round is completed, the solenoid 1510 is driven and controlled so that the timer means keeps the opening / closing plate 1300 in the closed state until the first interval time Int1 between rounds and the ending time ED (11 seconds) elapse. Then, the jackpot game ends with the passage of the time.

According to this operation pattern, the degree of payout (number or speed, etc.) in the jackpot game is changed depending on the number of rounds in which the round game R is performed, thereby giving the jackpot game slowness and speed and improving the player's interest. Can be made to.

Further, when the jackpot game is performed in the third operation pattern, the player pays out the expected payout in the first operation pattern because there is no change from the first operation pattern until the tenth round round game R. You can play big hit games with the expectation that you can get the number.

Further, the second interval time Int2 between rounds set in 1 second in the present embodiment can be set to an arbitrary value corresponding to each round for each jackpot type. For example, in one jackpot type, the second interval time Int2 between rounds of the third operation pattern is set to 1.5 seconds, and in another jackpot type, the second interval between rounds of the third operation pattern is set. The interval time Int2 can be set to 0.5 seconds for odd-numbered rounds and 1.0 seconds for even-numbered rounds, and the like can be set in advance.

That is, by further subdividing the jackpot type, it is possible to form various jackpot games with different second interval times Int2 between rounds. Therefore, after the 11th round, the number of balls finally paid out can be made unpredictable until the jackpot game is completed, and the attention to the jackpot game can be improved.

Further, the change in the degree of payout may be made to correspond to the effect displayed on the liquid crystal screen of the third symbol display device 81 (see FIG. 2). For example, when a jackpot game is performed in the third operation pattern, the figure of the running character is displayed on the LCD screen, and the beginning (the first round) where the stamina of the character remains is displayed. The character to be run runs well, and many prize balls are paid out in conjunction with it. On the other hand, when the character's stamina runs out (in the final round), the displayed character becomes difficult to run and starts walking, and in conjunction with that, the payout of prize balls decreases.

In this way, by associating the degree of payout of the prize balls with the effect displayed on the liquid crystal screen, it is possible for the player to easily embrace the liquid crystal effect, and the player's interest in the jackpot game is improved. be able to.

Further, by performing the jackpot game in the second operation pattern or the third operation pattern described above, each round can be advanced based on the maximum value of the first operation time T1, so that the jackpot game can be predetermined. It can take more time than the production time. In other words, for example, when the ball wins the first specific winning opening 1000a at an unexpectedly high speed, it is displayed on the liquid crystal screen of the third symbol display device 81 (see FIG. 2) during the jackpot game. It is possible to prevent the jackpot game from ending in the middle of the first playback of the moving image that is loop-played over a predetermined production time. As a result, it is possible to prevent the jackpot game from ending before the production during the jackpot is fully viewed.

It should be noted that the effect displayed on the liquid crystal screen when the jackpot game is performed in the second operation pattern or the third operation pattern is not limited. For example, in a mode in which a cheering message from a character (such as "Do your best next time") is displayed, the longer the jackpot game time, the easier it is to display the cheering message from a character with a lower appearance rate. Thereby, the jackpot game in the second operation pattern or the third operation pattern can proceed without stressing (rather happily) the player.

On the other hand, it may be displayed as a mode in which the player is more stressed. For example, a case where a character running during a jackpot game is displayed and the character is displayed to take a break in a rest area at an interval between rounds will be described. In the first operation pattern, every time a specified number of balls are won, the interval between rounds is set, so that the character can complete the race without accumulating fatigue. On the other hand, after the 11th round of the second operation pattern or the third operation pattern, the specified number of prizes cannot be won and the interval between rounds cannot be reached unless the maximum value (30 seconds) of the first operation time T1 is waited. Therefore, it is possible to perform the effect of accumulating fatigue without causing a deviation from the game mode (in the effect mode in which the time is controlled in advance regardless of the winning mode), and since the interval between rounds is short in the first place, the character can be used. It is possible to produce that there is no time to rest. Therefore, it is possible to make the player visually recognize the exhausted character and give stress to the player, so that the player's aspiration to recover at the next big hit can be enhanced.

Further, in the case of performing the same display, the character may replenish the water at the timing of winning. In this case, while the first operation pattern can sufficiently replenish water, in the 11th and subsequent rounds of the second operation pattern or the third operation pattern, the number of times of replenishing water (the number of winnings) is the first. Compared to the operation pattern, it will be less and the character will run for a longer period (the period of the jackpot game), so the amount of water that can be replenished will be insufficient compared to the sweat that comes out of the character, and the character will become more and more tired. It is possible to perform the effect without causing a deviation from the game mode (in the effect mode in which the time is controlled in advance regardless of the winning mode). This makes it possible to match the appearance of the character with the profit that the player can obtain (payout ball including time efficiency), and how much the jackpot the player has won (whether it is a middle hit). , Big hit or super big hit) can be easily grasped by the player through the production of the entire jackpot game.

Next, the second embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 24 to 30. In the first embodiment, the case where the number of balls that can be stored inside the first variable winning device 1000 is fixed has been described, but the first variable winning device 2000 in the second embodiment has balls that can be stored inside. It is configured so that the number of can be changed. The same parts as those of the above-described embodiments are designated by the same reference numerals, and the description thereof will be omitted.

FIG. 24 is a front view of the first variable winning device 2000 in the second embodiment, and FIG. 25 is a rear view of the first variable winning device 2000. In FIG. 24, a part of the storage flow path 1231 and the arrangement of the balls stored in the second storage flow path 2251 when the ball enters from the second specific winning opening 2255a are shown by hidden lines.

As shown in FIGS. 24 and 25, the first variable winning device 2000 includes an opening / closing plate 1300, a power transmission member 1400, and a drive device 1500 similar to those in the first embodiment, and is a main body member slightly different from the first embodiment. It includes a 2100, an lining front plate 2200, a regulating member 2600 and a rear cover (not shown), and further includes a second variable winning device 2800, which is new in the second embodiment. The second detection sensor 2255 of the second variable winning device 2800 includes a second specific winning opening 2255a through which a ball, which is a reference for paying out, passes during a big hit game.

The second specific winning opening 2255a is a winning opening having the same function as the first specific winning opening 1000a. That is, when the jackpot of the special symbol is reached, the pachinko machine 10 shifts to the special gaming state, and the first specific winning opening 1000a or the second specific winning opening 2255a, which is normally closed, has passed a predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds). The opening operation is repeated 15 times (15 rounds) until the ball is released or 10 balls are won. Although the details will be described later, the open operation is possible with a plurality of operation patterns (fourth operation pattern, fifth operation pattern). As a result, a large amount of balls are awarded to the first specific winning opening 1000a and the second specific winning opening 2255a, so that a larger amount of prize balls are paid out than usual.

The main body member 2100 is in addition to the configuration (thin plate member 1110, accommodating portion 1120, holding hole 1130, projecting portion 1140, discharge port 1150, rotary support portion 1160, and support claw portion 1170) provided in the main body member 1100 of the first embodiment. , A slide guide hole 2181 which is a through hole drilled in the thin plate member 1110 and a holding hole 2182 which is also a through hole drilled in the thin plate member 1110 and is configured to be able to insert the second detection sensor 2255. A pair of wall portions are arranged side by side in parallel along the surface direction of the thin plate member 1110 and extended linearly in the left-right direction, and a pair of drive guide ribs 2183 and a pair along the surface direction of the thin plate member 1110. It mainly includes a transmission guide rib 2184 in which wall portions are arranged in parallel and extend linearly in the vertical direction, and a shaft portion 2185 that pivotally supports a transmission member 2830 of the second variable winning device 2800.

The slide guide hole 2181 is a long hole that guides the operation of the slide plate 2840 of the second variable winning device 2800. The holding hole 2182 is a through hole into which the second detection sensor 2255 arranged in the lining front plate 2200 is inserted.

Each of the ribs 2183 and 2184 is a rib that guides the sliding operation of the intervening rod portion 2850 and the transmission rod portion 2860 that are interlocked with each other when the second variable winning device 2800 is driven.

The lining front plate 2200 is connected in the upper right direction of the housing portion 1230 in addition to the configuration (thin plate member 1210, side wall portion 1220, housing portion 1230 and detection sensor 1240) provided in the lining front plate 1200 of the first embodiment. A second accommodating portion 2250 is provided.

The second accommodating portion 2250 has a functional portion on the back surface side of the thin plate formed at the surface position with the thin plate member 1210, has an upward opening, and has a second end connected to the middle of the storage flow path 1231. The second detection is arranged in the second storage flow path 2251 in a posture in which the opening is arranged along the extension direction of the storage flow path 2251 and the upper end portion of the second storage flow path 2251. The sensor 2255 and the left side portion of the opening of the second storage flow path 2251 are closed between the front plate of the second accommodating portion 2250 and the thin plate member 1110 of the main body member 2100, and the upper surface is inclined downward to the left. Mainly includes an inclined surface 2257 and the like.

In the second storage flow path 2251, when the spheres pass through the second detection sensor 2255 and are accommodated inside the second accommodating portion 2250, and the discharge port 1150 is blocked and the spheres are accumulated, the number of stored spheres is increased. It is configured to have a maximum of 14.

The second detection sensor 2255 is a detection device having a second specific winning opening 2255a and producing the same operation as the detection sensor 1240. That is, when the ball enters the accommodating portion 1230 by switching the opening / closing plate 1300, the ball is detected by the detection sensor 1240, and the ball is admitted via the accommodating portion 2250 by switching the second variable winning device 2800. When entering the ball in 1230, the ball is detected by the second detection sensor 2255.

The inclined surface 2257 causes the ball to flow down to the side where the opening / closing plate 1300 is arranged. Therefore, all the balls that are blocked by the slide plate 2840 and do not enter the second storage flow path 2251 flow down along the inclined surface 2257 and are configured in a manner toward the flow path forming portion on the front side of the opening / closing plate 1300. To. Therefore, during the jackpot game, the player opens any of the specific winning openings 1000a and 2255a regardless of whether the first specific winning opening 1000a is open or the second specific winning opening 2255a is open. If it is in a state, a large amount of prize balls can be paid out by performing a right-handed game. Therefore, even an unfamiliar player can easily play the game.

The second detection sensor 2255 is arranged inside the second storage flow path 2251 with a margin for arranging one sphere on the upstream side. Therefore, at the timing when the slide plate 2840 is about to close (the timing when the remaining one ball passes through the second detection sensor 2255 to reach the specified number), a plurality of balls flow into the second storage flow path 2251 in a row. , The structure is such that more than the specified number of balls can enter.

In the regulating member 2600, in addition to the configuration (shaft portion 1610, extension portion 1620 and ball receiving portion 1630) provided in the regulation member 1600 of the first embodiment, the shaft portion 1610 is further extended to the left, and the extension portion 1620 A second extension portion 2640 formed in a symmetrical relationship with the extension portion 1620 in the plane direction of the above is provided.

The second extension portion 2640 is a portion that receives a load during the operation of the second variable winning device 2800, as will be described later. Due to the formation of the second extension portion 2640, the regulating member 2600 can be the second variable winning device 2800 or the opening / closing plate 1300 regardless of whether the second variable winning device 2800 performs the switching operation or the opening / closing plate 1300 performs the switching operation. The state can be switched in conjunction with the operation of.

The second variable winning device 2800 has a solenoid 2810 fixed to the back surface of the main body member 2100, a tip member 2820 that slides in the left-right direction by driving the solenoid 2810, and a middle abdomen while being supported at one end by the tip member 2820. A transmission member 2830 that is rotatably supported by the shaft portion 2185, a slide plate 2840 that is connected to the other end of the transmission member 2830 and projects from the slide guide hole 2181 to the front side of the main body member 2100, and a tip. A rod-shaped intervening rod 2850 that is fixed to the member 2820 and slidably arranged inside the drive guide rib 2183, and a transmission guide rib that is arranged at a position where it can come into contact with the intervening rod 2850. It mainly includes a transmission rod portion 2860 which is extended along the inside of 2184 and whose other end is arranged at a position where it can come into contact with the second extending portion 2640 of the regulating member 2600.

The intervening rod portion 2850 is guided in the left-right direction by the drive guide rib 2183, while the movement in the up-down direction and the front-back direction is restricted. In the present embodiment, the pair of drive guide ribs 2183 are configured so as to be closer to each other (narrow the distance from each other) as the distance from the thin plate member 1110 of the main body member 2100 increases, so that the intervening rod portion 2850 Movement in the front-back direction is restricted.

The transmission rod portion 2860 is guided in the vertical direction by the transmission guide rib 2184, while the movement in the left-right direction and the front-rear direction is restricted. In the present embodiment, the pair of transmission guide ribs 2184 are configured in such a manner that the main body member 2100 is closer to each other (narrows the distance from each other) as the distance from the thin plate member 1110 becomes longer, so that the transmission rod portion 2860 Movement in the front-back direction is restricted.

The surfaces of the end portions where the intervening rod portion 2850 and the transmission rod portion 2860 come into contact with each other are formed to be inclined so as to face the mating member. As a result, the force can be smoothly transmitted from the intervening rod portion 2850 to the transmission rod portion 2860.

FIG. 26 is a partial cross-sectional view of the first variable winning device 2000 on the XXVI-XXVI line of FIG. As shown in FIG. 26, the second extending portion 2640 of the regulating member 2600 is configured to have an arcuate cross-section in which the facing surface 2641 on the side facing the transmission rod portion 2860 is curved, and the regulating member 2600 is directed toward the discharge state. The urging force of the urging torsion spring (not shown) is transmitted to the transmission rod portion 2860 via the facing surface 2641. As a result, the transmission rod portion 2860 is maintained in the standby position in the state shown in FIGS. 25 and 26.

In the state shown in FIGS. 25 and 26, the ball cannot enter both the detection sensor 1240 and the second detection sensor 2255. Hereinafter, the opening operation of the second variable winning device 2800 for making the ball capable of entering the second detection sensor 2255 will be described.

In FIGS. 27 (a) to 27 (c), the operations of the regulating member 2600 and the second variable winning device 2800 are illustrated in chronological order. 27 (a) to 27 (c) are partial rear views of the first variable winning device 2000. In addition, in FIGS. 27 (a) to 27 (c), in order to facilitate understanding, illustration of a configuration unnecessary for explanation is omitted, and the state of the slide plate 2840 changes from the closed state to the open state. The state of doing is illustrated in chronological order.

In FIG. 27 (a), the solenoid 2810 is de-energized and the tip member 2820 is arranged at the position farthest from the solenoid 2810. In FIG. 27 (b), the solenoid 2810 is immediately after being excited. In FIG. 27 (c), the tip member 2820 is placed at the intermediate position of the movement range, but the tip member 2820 is placed at the most attracted state to the solenoid 2810 (the final arrival position when the solenoid 2810 is excited). Each of these states is illustrated. In the state shown in FIG. 27 (a), the slide plate 2840 constitutes a closed state for preventing the ball from entering the second detection sensor 2255, and in the state shown in FIG. 27 (c), the slide plate 2840 is , Configure an open state that allows the ball to enter the second detection sensor 2255.

As shown in FIG. 27A, when the slide plate 2840 is closed, the regulating member 2600 is in the discharged state. Therefore, when the solenoid 2810 is in the non-excited state, it is possible to prevent the regulating member 2600 from being in the stored state due to the action of the second variable winning device 2800. That is, even when the second variable winning device 2800 is added as in the present embodiment, the control mode that does not cause the operation of the solenoid 2810 (maintains in non-excitation) (for example, the control mode of the first embodiment). Therefore, it is possible to configure a jackpot game similar to that described in the first embodiment.

Further, when the sphere remains in the storage flow path 1231 or the second storage flow path 2251, the sphere can be discharged from the first variable winning device 2000 by switching to the state shown in FIG. 27 (a).

As shown in FIG. 27B, when the solenoid 2810 is excited, the displacement of the tip member 2820 causes the slide plate 2840 to start displacement via the transmission member 2830 and the transmission rod portion 2860 to start displacement via the intervening rod portion 2850. To do. Here, in the present embodiment, the abutting portions of the intervening rod portion 2850 and the transmission rod portion 2860 are arranged close to each other although they are slightly separated from each other in the state of FIG. 27A, so that the operation and transmission of the slide plate 2840 The operation of the rod portion 2860 is started almost at the same time.

When the transmission rod portion 2860 is pushed downward and displaced by the end portion of the intervening rod portion 2850, the lower end portion of the transmission rod portion 2860 gives a load in the pushing direction to the second extension portion 2640 of the regulation member 2600. As a result, the regulation member 2600 is slightly pushed down, and the state is in the middle of the discharge state and the storage state.

As shown in FIG. 27 (c), when the tip member 2830 is completely moved, the transmission rod portion 2860 is pushed down to the terminal position by the intervening rod portion 2850, and the regulation member 2600 is maintained in the stored state. As shown in FIG. 27 (c), the intervening rod portion 2850 slides from the transmission rod portion 2860 to the extent that the inclined surface faces the transmission rod portion 2860 and passes through the transmission rod portion 2860. The load applied to the 2850 can be flowed in a direction perpendicular to the moving direction of the intervening rod portion 2850.

As a result, it is possible to prevent the load applied to the intervening rod portion 2850 from fluctuating along the moving direction of the intervening rod portion 2850 due to the fluctuation of the load applied to the transmission rod portion 2860 via the regulating member 2600. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the load applied to the tip member 2820 from fluctuating via the regulating member 2600, and therefore, the solenoid 2810 for maintaining the slide plate 2840 whose state changes due to the displacement of the tip member 2820 in the open state. It is possible to prevent the driving force of the vehicle from fluctuating. As a result, the driving force required for the solenoid 2810 can be reduced.

Further, unlike the first embodiment, the displacement in the slide direction caused by the solenoid 2810 is used as it is as the displacement of the transmission rod portion 2860, and the state of the regulation member 2600 is even changed. Therefore, the responsiveness of the operation of the regulating member 2600 to the switching of the excitation mode to the solenoid 2810 can be improved. As a result, it is possible to finely adjust the state change timing of the regulating member 2600, so that it is possible to prevent the control value of the number of discharges specified for each round interval time in the jackpot game from deviating from the actual number of discharges. It is possible to stabilize the number of emissions.

FIG. 28 is a partial cross-sectional view of the first variable winning device 2000 in line XXVIII-XXVIII of FIG. 27 (c). As shown in FIG. 28, the tangent line of the contact portion between the lower end portion of the transmission rod portion 2860 and the facing surface 2641 of the regulating member 2600 is angled with the moving direction (vertical direction) of the transmission rod portion 2860. Therefore, the urging force of the torsion spring (not shown) that urges the regulating member 2600 toward the arrangement in the discharged state effectively acts on the transmission rod portion 2860.

Therefore, if the slide plate 2840 is displaced from the open state (see FIG. 27 (c)) to the closed state (see FIG. 27 (a)) and the regulation by the intervening rod portion 2850 is released, the urging force of the torsion spring is released. The transmission rod portion 2860 can be raised and the transmission rod portion 2860 can be maintained in the standby position (see FIG. 27 (a)).

FIG. 29 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the correspondence between the first hit type counter C2 in the present embodiment and the jackpot type in the special symbol.

The first hit type selection table 202b (see FIG. 29) in the present embodiment is a data table in which judgment values for determining the jackpot type are stored, and the judgment value of the first hit type counter C2 is each jackpot. It is stipulated in association with the type and the type of the entrance that triggered the lottery of special symbols. In the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, when it is determined that the special symbol is a big hit, the value of the first hit type counter C2 acquired based on the start winning prize is compared with the first hit type selection table 202b, and the first hit type selection table 202b is compared. The jackpot type corresponding to the value of the hit type counter C2 is selected.

In addition, the jackpot type defined in association with the value of the first hit type counter C2 when a jackpot is obtained in the lottery of the special symbol 1 (lottery based on the entry into the first ball entrance 64) is Since it is the same as that described in the first embodiment, the description is omitted. In the following, the case where a big hit is obtained in the lottery of the special symbol 2 (lottery based on the entry into the second entrance 640) in the present embodiment. explain.

Specifically, in the case of a big hit in the special symbol 2 lottery (lottery based on the entry into the second entrance 640), the value of the first hit type counter C2 is in the range of "0 to 29". Is defined in association with the jackpot d (see 202b21 in FIG. 29).

When the jackpot d is reached, the jackpot game of 15 rounds is executed in the fourth operation pattern (details will be described later) of the first variable winning device 2000. In this case, the player can receive a payout of about 2250 prize balls plus a limited increase.

The jackpot e is associated with the range in which the value of the first hit type counter C2 is "30 to 99" (see 202b22 in FIG. 29).

When the jackpot e is reached, the jackpot game of 15 rounds is executed in the fifth operation pattern (details will be described later) of the first variable winning device 2000. In this case, the number of prize balls to be paid out to the player is the number of 2250 prize balls plus a limited amount of increase, but the difficulty of increasing the number of payouts is compared with the fourth operation pattern. Depending on the timing of increasing the number of payouts, the time required for the jackpot game is significantly longer than that of the jackpot d.

As described above, when a big hit is obtained in the lottery of the special symbol 2 (lottery based on the entry into the second entrance 640), the operation pattern of the first variable winning device 2000 changes according to the big hit type. Due to this difference in the operation pattern, the number of jackpot rounds can be kept unchanged, while the time required for the jackpot game can be changed while making a difference in the number of payouts.

In the present embodiment, in the case of the jackpot e, in the predetermined round game R (round game R in the 1st to 7th rounds). When a specified number or more of balls are inserted into the first variable winning device 2000, the extra payout amount is deducted in the subsequent specific round game R (8th round game R) and the progress of the 8th round is started. It is configured to maximize the time required. On the other hand, in the round game R after the specific round game R, the player can acquire the increased amount of balls paid out by inserting the specified number of balls or more into the first variable winning device 2000 without being deducted. It is configured as follows.

In this case, in the case of the jackpot e, the game method in which the player can obtain the highest profit including time efficiency is limited to the specified number of prizes up to the 8th round, and the round game R after the 9th round. The aim is to increase the number of payouts with the aim of winning more than the specified number. Therefore, it is possible to switch whether it is advantageous or disadvantageous to put more than a specified number of balls in the first variable winning device 2000 depending on the round game R, and the player's attention to the jackpot game. Can be improved.

Next, with reference to FIG. 30, the opening patterns of the first specific winning opening 1000a and the second specific winning opening 2255a in the present embodiment will be described. FIG. 30 (a) is a diagram showing the timekeeping change of the first specific winning opening 1000a and the second specific winning opening 2255a in the fourth operation pattern, and FIG. 30 (b) is a diagram showing a time change in the fifth operation pattern. It is a figure which showed the timekeeping change of 1 specific winning opening 1000a and 2nd specific winning opening 2255a.

When the jackpot is determined in the special figure hit determination, the MPU 201 (see FIG. 4) starts controlling the determined type of jackpot game after the end of the special figure variation display (symbol variation effect). Hereinafter, operation control of the opening / closing plate 1300 and the slide plate 2840 performed when the jackpot game is given will be described.

<When operating with the 4th operation pattern>
In the case of a jackpot game in which the jackpot type is jackpot d, the MPU 201 drives and controls the solenoids 1510 and 2810 so that the opening / closing plate 1300 and the slide plate 2840 operate based on the fourth operation pattern.

When the special figure variation display (design variation effect) is completed, the MPU 201 holds the opening / closing plate 1300 and the slide plate 2840 in the closed state until a predetermined opening time OP (10 seconds) elapses by the timer means (not shown). The solenoids 1510 and 2810 are driven and controlled, and after the opening time OP elapses, the first round game R is started.

That is, the solenoid 2810 is driven and controlled so that the first operating time T1 (maximum 30 seconds) is measured by the timer means and the slide plate 2840 is displaced from the closed state to the open state to open the second specific winning opening 2255a. Then, the slide plate 2840 is operated for a long time.

Then, in the first round game R, the lapse of the round end condition (round game time (30 seconds, which is the maximum value of the first operating time T1) or the specified number (10 in the present embodiment) of pachinko balls When the winning) is satisfied, the solenoid 2810 is driven and controlled so as to displace the slide plate 2840 to the closed state and close the second specific winning opening 2255a, and the round game R of the first round ends.

When the round game R of the first round is completed, the timer means solenoids 1510, 2810 keep the opening / closing plate 1300 and the slide plate 2840 in the closed state until the first interval time Int1 (2.0 seconds) between rounds elapses. Is driven and controlled, and after the lapse of the first interval time Int1 between rounds, the second round game R is started.

In the second round, as in the start of the first round, the first operating time T1 (maximum 30 seconds) is measured by the timer means, and the slide plate 2840 is displaced from the closed state to the open state to specify the second. The solenoid 2810 is driven and controlled so as to open the winning opening 2255a, so that the slide plate 2840 operates for a long time.

Then, when the round end condition (round game time (30 seconds, which is the maximum value of the first operating time T1) elapses or a specified number of pachinko balls are won) is satisfied in the second round game R. The solenoid 2810 is driven and controlled so as to displace the slide plate 2840 to the closed state and close the second specific winning opening 2255a, and the second round game R ends.

The first interval time Int1 between rounds is set as a time for discharging 10 balls from the discharge port 1150 as described above in the first embodiment. In the present embodiment, depending on the timing of passing through the second specific winning opening 2255a, more than 10 balls (for example, 11 or 12) may be won in the second specific winning opening 2255a in each round game R. It is possible. However, on the other hand, since the number of balls discharged from the discharge port 1150 by the first interval time Int1 between rounds is 10, more than 10 balls in each round game R have won the second specific winning port 2255a. Immediately after the start of the round game R, the excess number of balls remains in the storage flow path 1231.

In the present embodiment, the maximum number of stored balls is 14 when the ball is entered from the second storage channel 2251 side. Therefore, in the jackpot game of jackpot d, the number of winnings exceeding the specified number is 15 rounds. Limited to 4 through jackpot games. Therefore, the upper limit of the number of payouts (the number of payouts due to over-winning) that can be acquired by the player who plays the jackpot game of jackpot d can be limited to 60 (= 15 x 4C). This makes it possible to prevent the number of payouts from changing significantly due to differences in game modes (launch timing, launch intervals, etc.). Therefore, it is possible to configure a game machine in which the player can enjoy the profit fairly regardless of the experience value of the player.

After that, similarly, the round game R from the third round to the maximum 15 rounds is repeated with the first interval time Int1 between rounds sandwiched between the round game R, and the slide plate 2840 is in the closed state and the open state. The solenoid 2810 is driven and controlled so as to open and close the second specific winning opening 2255a.

Then, when the round game R of the final round is completed, the solenoid 2810 is driven and controlled so that the timer means keeps the slide plate 2840 in the closed state until the first interval time Int1 between rounds and the ending time ED (11 seconds) elapse. Then, the jackpot game ends with the passage of the time.

<When operating with the fifth operation pattern>
In the case of a jackpot game in which the jackpot type is jackpot e, the MPU 201 drives and controls the solenoids 1510 and 2810 so that the opening / closing plate 1300 and the slide plate 2840 operate based on the fifth operation pattern. When the special figure variation display (design variation effect) is completed, the MPU 201 holds the opening / closing plate 1300 and the slide plate 2840 in the closed state until a predetermined opening time OP (10 seconds) elapses by the timer means (not shown). The solenoids 1510 and 2810 are driven and controlled, and after the opening time OP elapses, the first round game R is started.

That is, the solenoid 2810 is driven and controlled so that the first operating time T1 (maximum 30 seconds) is measured by the timer means and the slide plate 2840 is displaced from the closed state to the open state to open the second specific winning opening 2255a. Then, the slide plate 2840 is operated for a long time.

Then, in the first round game R, the lapse of the round end condition (round game time (30 seconds, which is the maximum value of the first operating time T1) or the specified number (10 in the present embodiment) of pachinko balls When the winning) is satisfied, the solenoid 2810 is driven and controlled so as to displace the slide plate 2840 to the closed state and close the second specific winning opening 2255a, and the round game R of the first round ends.

When the round game R of the first round is completed, the timer means drives and controls the solenoid 2810 to keep the slide plate 2840 in the closed state until the first interval time Int1 (2.0 seconds) between rounds elapses, and the round After the lapse of the first interval time Int1, the second round game R is started.

In the second round, as in the start of the first round, the first operating time T1 (maximum 30 seconds) is measured by the timer means, and the slide plate 2840 is displaced from the closed state to the open state to specify the second. The solenoid 2810 is driven and controlled so as to open the winning opening 2255a, so that the slide plate 2840 operates for a long time.

Then, when the round end condition (round game time (30 seconds, which is the maximum value of the first operating time T1) elapses or a specified number of pachinko balls are won) is satisfied in the second round game R. The solenoid 2810 is driven and controlled so as to displace the slide plate 2840 to the closed state and close the second specific winning opening 2255a, and the second round game R ends.

The first interval time Int1 between rounds is set as a time for discharging 10 balls from the discharge port 1150 as described above in the first embodiment. In the present embodiment, depending on the timing of passing through the second specific winning opening 2255a, more than 10 balls (for example, 11 or 12) may be won in the second specific winning opening 2255a in each round game R. It is possible. However, on the other hand, since the number of balls discharged from the discharge port 1150 by the first interval time Int1 between rounds is 10, more than 10 balls in each round game R have won the second specific winning port 2255a. Immediately after the start of the round game R, the excess number of balls remains in the storage flow path 1231.

After that, similarly, the round games R of the third to seventh rounds are repeated with the first interval time Int1 between rounds sandwiched between the round games R, and the slide plate 2840 is between the closed state and the open state. The solenoid 2810 is driven and controlled so as to be displaced and open and close the second specific winning opening 2255a.

When the seventh round of the round game R is completed, the timer means drives and controls the solenoid 2810 to keep the slide plate 2840 in the closed state until the first interval time Int1 between rounds elapses, and the first interval time Int1 between rounds is completed. After the lapse of, the 8th round game R is started.

In the 8th round, the solenoid 1510 is used to start measuring the first operating time T1 (maximum 30 seconds) by the timer means and to displace the opening / closing plate 1300 from the closed state to the open state to open the first specified winning opening 1000a. Is driven and controlled so that the opening / closing plate 1300 operates for a long time.

Then, when the round end condition (round game time (30 seconds, which is the maximum value of the first operating time T1) elapses or a specified number of pachinko balls are won) is satisfied in the eighth round round game R. The solenoid 1510 is driven and controlled so as to displace the opening / closing plate 1300 to the closed state and close the first specific winning opening 1000a, and the eighth round round game R is completed.

Here, in the round game R before the 7th round, when the number of balls exceeding the specified number has passed through the second specified winning opening 2255a, the number of balls exceeding the specified number at the start of the 8th round round game R Since the balls remain in the storage flow path 1231, in the 8th round round game R, only the number of prizes obtained by subtracting the remaining number (the number exceeding the specified number by the 7th round) from the specified number is performed. Therefore, the payout of prize balls including the 8th round is equalized to the payout of the specified number of prize balls up to the 8th round. In addition, in the 8th round round game R, the specified number of pachinko balls cannot be won, so after waiting for the lapse of 30 seconds, which is the maximum value of the first operating time T1, the next round round. It will move to the game.

Therefore, the player suffers from the feeling that the extra prize balls paid out up to the 7th round are lost, and the time loss that the 8th round game R becomes longer than necessary. Will receive. As a result, by the 7th round, it is possible to encourage the player to play the game carefully so as not to win more balls than the specified number. Therefore, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of winning of balls exceeding a predetermined number, and it is possible to enhance the fairness of the game.

If there are no prizes exceeding the specified number in the 7th round, the specified number of balls can be passed through the 1 specific winning opening 1000a in the 8th round round game R, and the specified number of balls are paid out. In addition, the eighth round of the round game R can be completed without waiting for the maximum length (30 seconds) of the first operating time T1 of each round. Therefore, the specified number of prize balls can be paid out while the round game R is rapidly advanced.

Therefore, in the jackpot game of jackpot e, it is in the interest of the player to intentionally suppress the winning of more than the specified number until the seventh round. Therefore, the player's attention in the game up to the 7th round can be maintained high.

When the jackpot game R in the eighth round is completed, the timer means drives and controls the solenoid 1510 to keep the opening / closing plate 1300 in the closed state until the first interval time Int1 between rounds elapses, and the first interval between rounds. After the lapse of time Int1, the ninth round round game R is started. At the start of the ninth round of the round game R, it is possible to set the state in which no balls remain in the storage flow path 1231.

In the ninth round, the solenoid 2810 is used to start measuring the first operating time T1 (maximum 30 seconds) by the timer means and to displace the slide plate 2840 from the closed state to the open state to open the second specific winning opening 2255a. Is driven and controlled so that the slide plate 2840 operates for a long time.

Then, when the round end condition (round game time (30 seconds, which is the maximum value of the first operating time T1) elapses or a specified number of pachinko balls are won) is satisfied in the ninth round round game R. The solenoid 2810 is driven and controlled so as to displace the slide plate 2840 to the closed state and close the second specific winning opening 2255a, and the round game R of the ninth round ends.

After that, similarly, the 10th to 15th rounds of the round game R are repeated with the first interval time Int1 between the rounds sandwiched between the round games R, and the slide plate 2840 is between the closed state and the open state. The solenoid 1510 is driven and controlled so as to be displaced and open and close the second specific winning opening 2255a.

Then, when the round game R of the final round is completed, the solenoid 1510 is driven and controlled so that the timer means keeps the opening / closing plate 1300 in the closed state until the first interval time Int1 between rounds and the ending time ED (11 seconds) elapse. Then, the jackpot game ends with the passage of the time.

In the round game R after the 9th round, the opening / closing plate 1300 does not open / close, so the prize balls paid out by the balls that have won the second specified winning opening 2255a in excess of the specified number after the 9th round , Can be received by the player without being deducted.

Therefore, when performing a jackpot game of jackpot e, it is suppressed so that the second specified winning opening 2255a, which exceeds the specified number in the jackpot game R, is not won until the 7th round, and is specified in the jackpot game R after the 9th round. Aiming to win a prize in the second specific winning opening 2255a exceeding the number is a gaming method in which the player can obtain the largest profit when considering the profit including time efficiency.

That is, in the round game R of each round, by putting more balls than the specified number into the second specific winning opening 2255a, it is possible to cause a case where the player gains a profit and a case where the player suffers damage. As a result, different playability can be imparted to each round of the jackpot game, and the attention of the player who plays the jackpot game can be improved (it is possible to prevent the jackpot game from being played indiscriminately). ..

Further, according to this operation pattern, the round in which the player can receive the additional prize balls by winning the second specified winning opening 2255a with the number of balls exceeding the specified number is substantially in the ninth round or later. Can be restricted. As a result, it is possible to narrow the timing at which the number of payouts changes due to differences in the game mode (launch timing, launch interval, etc.), and it is possible to prevent the payout balls from changing significantly. Therefore, it is possible to configure a game machine in which the player can enjoy the profit fairly regardless of the experience value of the player.

Next, a third embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 31 to 37. In the first embodiment, the case where the sphere that reaches the flow path forming portion when the opening / closing plate 1300 is in the closed state and flows down to the downstream of the opening / closing plate 1300 in the open state falls as it is is described, but the third embodiment has been described. The first variable winning device 3000 is configured to delay the fall of balls when the opening / closing plate 1300 is in the closed state so that some balls can be won in the first specific winning opening 1000a. The same parts as those of the above-described embodiments are designated by the same reference numerals, and the description thereof will be omitted.

31 is a front view of the first variable winning device 3000 according to the third embodiment, FIG. 32 is a cross-sectional view of the first variable winning device 3000 in the line XXXII-XXXII of FIG. 31, and FIG. 33 is a cover. It is a rear perspective view of the front plate 3200.

As shown in FIGS. 31 to 33, the first variable winning device 3000 includes an opening / closing plate 1300, a power transmission member 1400, a drive device 1500, a regulation member 1600, and a rear cover 1700, which are the same as those in the first embodiment. A main body member 3100 and an lining front plate 3200, which are slightly different from those of the first embodiment, are provided. Note that FIG. 32 shows the closed state of the opening / closing plate 1300.

The main body member 3100 is in addition to the configuration (thin plate member 1110, accommodating portion 1120, holding hole 1130, projecting portion 1140, discharge port 1150, rotary support portion 1160, and support claw portion 1170) provided in the main body member 1100 of the first embodiment. , The additional winning opening 3181 arranged in a manner of being connected to the front view left side wall of the lining front plate 3200 on the front side of the thin plate member 1110 and the additional winning opening 3181 facing upward from the front view left side wall portion. It mainly includes a curved extension plate 3182 that is curved and extended.

The additional winning opening 3181 is an entrance for discharging balls flowing down the game area from the upstream side to the back side of the game board 13, and the upper limit is 15 balls when the balls enter the additional winning opening 3181. The number of prize balls will be paid out. In this embodiment, 11 balls are set to be paid out.

The curved extension plate 3182 is a plate that regulates the passage of a ball flowing down the game area by setting the vertical gap in the game area to be equal to or less than the diameter of the ball, and is ribbed from the thin plate member 1110 to the front side. .. Further, the curved extension plate 3182 is formed from a shape that inclines downward from the middle abdomen toward the left in the front view and downward inclines toward the right in the front view from the middle abdomen.

The lining front plate 3200 is provided between the side wall portion 1220 and the housing portion 1230 in addition to the configuration (thin plate member 1210, side wall portion 1220, accommodating portion 1230 and detection sensor 1240) provided in the lining front plate 1200 of the first embodiment. A drop delay plate 3250 extending from the back surface to the back surface side of the thin plate member 1210 is provided in the region of.

The fall delay plate 3250 is arranged on the front side of the movement locus of the opening / closing plate 1300 so as to avoid interference with the opening / closing plate 1300, and is arranged below the shaft portion 1320 of the opening / closing plate 1300 and is a linear plate parallel to the axial direction. From the curved shape of the elongated plate portion 3251, which is a shaped portion and extends vertically from the back surface of the thin plate member 1210, and the upper surface of the extended plate portion 3251 and the thin plate member 1210 are connected and the upper surface is concave. Mainly includes a rolling arc portion 3252 to be formed.

The fall delay plate 3250 has a long shape to the left and right, and decelerates so that it takes about 2 seconds or more for the ball to flow down (including the flow down due to bouncing or rolling) for a distance of half the length of the plate. It is formed from the shape to be formed. The opening / closing plate 1300 is formed in such a manner that when the sphere flows down a distance of half the length of the plate in the left-right direction, it flows down in 1 second or less.

As shown in FIG. 32, the extension plate portion 3251 is a surface on the side facing the main body member 3100, and is formed so as to be inclined so that the distance from the main body member 3100 becomes longer as it approaches the detection sensor 1240. A facing surface 3251a and a terminal surface 3251b formed between the surface facing the side wall portion 1220 of the accommodating portion 1230 and the accommodating portion 1230 with a distance equal to or larger than the diameter of a sphere are provided.

The distance between the facing surface 3251a and the front side wall of the thin plate member 1110 of the main body member 3100 is the radius of the sphere in the portion vertically below the center of the sphere when the sphere is arranged on the most upstream side (left side in FIG. 32). In the part that is switched to the radius of the sphere or more at the intermediate position (middle position in the left-right direction in FIG. 32) and is arranged vertically below the center of the sphere in the state where it is arranged on the most downstream side (right side in FIG. 32). It is considered to be greater than or equal to the radius of the sphere and less than the diameter of the sphere.

The rolling arc portion 3252 has a shape in which a tangent line drawn on a plane perpendicular to the axial direction at the end of the facing surface 3251a is formed along the front-rear direction and smoothly intersects the thin plate member 1210 of the lining front plate 3200. It is composed of a shape (a tangent line drawn on a plane perpendicular to the axial direction is along the surface direction (extending direction) of the thin plate member 1210).

The radius of curvature of the rolling arc portion 3252 in the axial direction is set to be larger than the radius of the sphere. As a result, it is possible to reduce the resistance when the sphere rolls on the rolling arc portion 3252 in the front-rear direction.

When the opening / closing plate 1300 is in the closed state, the ball that has flowed down the inclined surface 1237 of the lining front plate 3200 rolls on the rolling arc portion 3252 and flows down. At that time, as shown in FIG. 32, the route from the upstream position Pf1 on the most upstream side to the drop position Pf3, which is the position immediately before the ball falls, is separated from the rolling arc portion 3252 to the right, and is the downstream position Pf2. Pass through and flow down.

In the present embodiment, since the distance from the front side wall of the thin plate member 1110 of the main body member 3100 of the facing surface 3251a of the extended plate portion 3251 is less than the diameter of the sphere, until the sphere reaches the drop position Pf3. , The ball is prevented from passing through the rolling arc portion 3252 and falling. Therefore, the ball will fall from the rolling arc portion 3252 only after the ball reaches the drop position Pf3. Hereinafter, a mode in which a sphere flows down on the rolling arc portion 3252 will be described.

34 (a) to 34 (c) are cross-sectional views of the first variable winning device 3000 in the line XXXIVa-XXXIVa of FIG. 31. Note that FIG. 34 (b) shows a sphere arranged at the upstream position Pf1, and FIG. 34 (c) shows a sphere arranged at the downstream position Pf2. In FIG. 34, the rear cover 1700 is not shown.

As shown in FIGS. 34 (b) and 34 (c), the sphere that rolls on the upper surface of the fall delay plate 3250 rolls the rolling arc portion 3252 in the front-rear direction and is in contact with the plate portion 1310. The diameter length (the length between the contact portion in the axial direction and the center of the sphere) to the contact portion with the fall delay plate 3250 of the sphere is shortened as it flows down.

That is, at the upstream position Pf1 shown in FIG. 34 (b), the diameter length r1 to the portion where the sphere comes into contact with the fall delay plate 3250 is equal to the radius of the sphere. On the other hand, at the downstream position Pf2 shown in FIG. 34 (c), the diameter length r2 to the portion where the sphere comes into contact with the fall delay plate 3250 is shorter than the radius of the sphere.

These diameter lengths r1 and r2 correspond to the radius of gyration of the sphere when the sphere rotates about an axis along the front-rear direction as a rotation axis. In other words, if the rotation speed of the sphere is the same, the shorter the diameter lengths r1 and r2, the lower the rolling speed of the sphere (the sphere is delayed). According to the present embodiment, the facing surface 3251a is formed so as to be inclined so that the distance from the main body member 3100 increases toward the downstream side. Therefore, the radius of gyration of the sphere is gradually shortened as the sphere flows down the fall delay plate 3250 to the downstream side (right side of FIG. 31). Therefore, as the ball flows down the fall delay plate 3250 to the downstream side, the rolling speed of the ball can be reduced.

Further, when the extension plate portion 3251 is extended along the rotation axis of the opening / closing plate 1300, in FIG. 34 showing the axial view thereof, FIG. 34 (c) is compared with the state shown in FIG. 34 (b). The sphere is displaced downward in the state shown in). That is, the more the ball flows down the fall delay plate 3250 to the downstream side, the more the ball can be separated from the first specific winning opening 1000a, so that the ball flowing down the fall delay plate 3250 can be deflected from the first specific winning opening 1000a. it can.

As a result, even if the ball entry prevention portion 1331 is not formed on the opening / closing plate 1300, the ball flows down the fall delay plate 3250 to the downstream end and is directed toward the first specific winning opening 1000a with that momentum. It is possible to prevent the situation of winning a prize by flying.

Next, a case where the opening / closing plate 1300 moves up to the open state while the ball rolls on the upper surface of the fall delay plate 3250 will be described with reference to FIG. 35. 35 (a) and 35 (b) are partial front views of the first variable winning device 3000, and FIG. 35 (c) is the first variable winning device 3000 on the XXXVc-XXXVc line of FIG. 35 (b). It is a partial sectional view of. It should be noted that FIG. 35 (a) shows the closed state of the opening / closing plate 1300, FIGS. 35 (b) and 35 (c) show the opening / closing plate 1300, and FIG. 35 (c) shows the opening / closing plate 1300. The outer shape of the plate portion 1310 and the sphere in the closed state is illustrated by an imaginary line, and the rear cover 1700 is not shown. Further, in FIGS. 35 (a) and 35 (b), an example of a ball that has entered the flow path forming portion of the first variable winning device 3000 is shown.

As shown in FIG. 35 (a), when the opening / closing plate 1300 is closed, the sphere landing on the upper surface of the fall delay plate 3250 moves to the right in the front view along the extending direction of the extending plate portion 3251. When the opening / closing plate 1300 is kept in the closed state as it is, it falls after reaching the drop position Pf3. At this time, the rolling speed of the ball can be gradually reduced by the action of the extension plate portion 3251 described above, the rolling time of the ball can be maintained for a long time, and the attention to the ball can be improved.

As shown in FIG. 35 (b), when the opening / closing plate 1300 moves up (rotates) toward the open state while the sphere rolls, the sphere pressed against the rolling surface 1311 of the plate portion 1310 rolls. It smoothly rises and moves along the arc shape of the moving arc portion 3252. As described above, since the tangent to the surface of the rolling arc portion 3252 at the portion where the sphere comes into contact at the start of movement of the sphere faces in the front-rear direction, the movement of the sphere at the start of operation of the opening / closing plate 1300 can be smoothed. it can.

The flow direction when the sphere moves up and rolls on the upper surface of the rolling surface 1311 and flows down is parallel to the flow direction shown in FIG. 35 (a). Therefore, it is possible to alleviate the discomfort felt by the player who visually recognizes the movement of the ball before and after the operation of the opening / closing plate 1300, as compared with the case where the flow direction of the ball changes in a completely different direction before and after the operation of the opening / closing plate 1300. it can.

In this way, from the state in which the sphere is arranged below the plate portion 1310 of the opening / closing plate 1300 in the open state (see the imaginary line in FIG. 35C), the opening / closing plate 1300 moves up to open the sphere. By being pushed back (backflowing) above the plate portion 1310 of the opening / closing plate 1300 in the above, it is possible to win a prize in the first specific winning opening 1000a. That is, a ball that is placed below the opening / closing plate 1300 and once is in a state where it is impossible to win a prize in the first specific winning opening 1000a can be moved up to a state in which a winning can be made in the first specific winning opening 1000a. Since it can be returned, it is possible to improve the interest of the player.

In other words, both FIGS. 35 (a) and 35 (b) show a state in which the sphere is located upstream of the detection sensor 1240 because the sphere may still pass through the detection sensor 1240. It can be said that it is. That is, due to the action of the drop delay plate 3250, the ball can be continuously maintained on the upstream side of the detection sensor 1240 even after the opening / closing plate 1300 is closed.

Further, even when it becomes impossible to win a prize in the first specific winning opening 1000a, the ball rolling on the upper surface of the fall delay plate 3250 flows down in a direction close to the first specific winning opening 1000a. It is possible to give the player a feeling of expectation that the first specific winning opening 1000a may be won, and the attention of the player can be maintained.

As shown in FIG. 35, when the opening / closing plate 1300 forms a closed state, the fall of the ball that has reached the front side of the opening / closing plate 1300 is delayed, and then when the opening / closing plate 1300 changes to the open state, the rolling surface 1311 By configuring it so that it can be revived above, it is possible to increase the possibility that the ball that reaches in front of the opening / closing plate 1300 during the inter-round interval time in the jackpot game will win the first specific winning opening 1000a in the next round game. It is possible to reduce the number of balls that pass through the front side of the opening / closing plate 1300 and enter the first out port 66.

In the present embodiment, it is possible to prevent the opening of the opening / closing plate 1300 from being hindered due to the arrangement of the sphere on the front side of the opening / closing plate 1300. That is, in a structure such as a conventional game machine in which a ball can freely flow down the front side of the opening / closing plate, the opening / closing plate operates to sandwich the ball between the opening / closing plate and the glass plate, thereby opening and closing. There is a problem that the opening of the board is hindered and there is a risk of loss for the player.

On the other hand, in the present embodiment, while the ball rolls on the upper surface of the fall delay plate 3250 in front of the opening / closing plate 1300, the separation distance between the rotation axis of the opening / closing plate 1300 and the ball is maintained (restricted) substantially constant. can do. Therefore, as compared with the case where the sphere freely flows down the front side of the opening / closing plate 1300 and the separation distance of the sphere from the rotation axis changes freely, the sphere is sandwiched between the opening / closing plate 1300 and the glass plate to open / close. The risk of hindering the operation of the plate 1300 can be reduced. In the present embodiment, the ball is sandwiched between the opening / closing plate 1300 and the glass plate while the opening / closing plate 1300 is changing to the open state, and the operation of the opening / closing plate 1300 may be hindered. The fall delay plate 3250 is formed in such a manner that the sphere is maintained at the position of.

36 (a) and 36 (b) are schematic views showing a flow mode of a ball that has reached the first variable winning device 3000. In FIG. 36 (a), the flow-down modes of the two balls that have reached the first variable winning device 3000 when the balls are left unattended are illustrated in chronological order, and in FIG. 36 (b), for example, the first ball. A ball when two balls reach the first variable winning device 3000 in a row by performing a special striking method (so-called "twisting") in which the ball is launched weakly and the second ball is launched strongly. The flow mode of is illustrated in chronological order.

As shown in FIG. 36A, when the first ball P1 and the second ball P2 reach the front side of the opening / closing plate 1300 at a predetermined interval by leaving the ball untouched, the ball is a ball. When the opening / closing plate 1300 is switched to the closed state by the P1 winning the first specific winning opening 1000a, the ball P2 can still be arranged on the upstream side of the fall delay plate 3250.

Therefore, it is possible to secure a long time for the ball P2 to flow down the fall delay plate 3250, so that the ball can be easily maintained on the upper surface of the fall delay plate 3250 until the next time the opening / closing plate 1300 is opened. Can be done.

On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 36B, when two balls are connected to reach the front side of the opening / closing plate 1300, the opening / closing plate 1300 is closed by the balls P1 winning the first specific winning opening 1000a. When switching to the state, the sphere P2 is arranged near the position immediately before the detection sensor 1240 (falling position Pf3), so that it cannot wait until the opening / closing plate 1300 is opened next, and the sphere P2 is delayed in falling. It falls from the board 3250.

As described above, in the present embodiment, as compared with the case where two balls flow down in a row by a special striking method, when two balls flow down at a predetermined interval by leaving the ball (normal striking method). It is possible to make it more susceptible to the action of the fall delay plate 3250 (changing the ball that has reached the front of the opening / closing plate 1300 during the inter-round interval time so that the ball can enter the first specific winning opening 1000a). As a result, it is possible to suppress a game due to a special striking method such as twisting.

FIG. 37 is a partial front view of the first variable winning device 3000. In FIG. 37, immediately after the opening / closing plate 1300 changes its state from the closed state to the open state, a sphere that bounces upward by colliding with the opening / closing plate 1300 is shown.

In the present embodiment, when the ball lands on the open / close plate 1300 in the open state, the bounce as shown in FIG. 37 does not occur, and the ball landing on the open / close plate 1300 is repelled while the open / close plate 1300 is ascending. Only, the sphere bounces in the manner shown in FIG.

Subsequent flow-down modes of the bounced ball are limited to either returning to the top surface of the opening / closing plate 1300 or winning the additional winning opening 3181 along the curved extension plate 3182 as shown in FIG. 37. Will be done. Therefore, the bouncing ball allows the player to receive the prize ball. Therefore, the ball that reaches the opening / closing plate 1300 at a special timing during the switching of the opening / closing plate 1300 to the open state eventually enters the first out port 66, and the player cannot make a profit. Can be prevented.

Further, even if a ball wins in the additional winning opening 3181, a specified number (10 in this embodiment) of balls can be separately won in the first specific winning opening 1000a, so that the additional winning opening is won. The payout by winning the mouth 3181 will be the prize balls (additional profit) paid out in excess of the specified number. That is, the profit that the player can obtain can be different depending on whether or not the ball reaches the front side of the opening / closing plate 1300 at a special timing during the switching of the opening / closing plate 1300 to the open state. It is possible to improve the attention to the flowing ball in.

Next, a fourth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 38 to 43. In the first embodiment, a case has been described in which a probabilistic state (high probability state) of a special symbol is given as an added value after the end of the jackpot regardless of the difference in the flow mode of the ball that has entered the first variable winning device 1000. However, the first variable winning device 4000 in the fourth embodiment includes a probability fluctuation determination unit that determines the acquisition of the right to shift to the probabilistic state (high probability state) of the special symbol according to the difference in the flow mode of the ball. The same parts as those of the above-described embodiments are designated by the same reference numerals, and the description thereof will be omitted.

FIG. 38 is a front view of the game board 13 according to the fourth embodiment, and FIG. 39 is a partial front view of the game board 13. In FIG. 39, the vicinity of the first variable winning device 4000 is enlarged and illustrated. As shown in FIG. 39, in the present embodiment, a transmission window is formed in the game board 13 in the lower portion of the storage flow path 1231 of the first variable winning device 4000, and the probability variation is arranged on the back side of the game board 13. The determination unit 4800 is configured to be visible.

As shown in FIG. 39, the first variable winning device 4000 has the same configuration as that of the first embodiment (main body member 1100, lining front plate 1200, opening / closing plate 1300, power transmission member 1400, drive device 1500, regulation member 1600). And a rear cover 1700), and further, a probability fluctuation determination unit 4800 newly introduced in the fourth embodiment is provided.

The probability fluctuation determination unit 4800 is a flow path through which the ball discharged from the discharge port 1150 flows down, and is a continuous passage 4810 extending vertically downward, and a bifurcated flow that communicates with the lower end of the communication passage 4810. It is arranged so as to communicate with the probability fluctuation determination flow path 4820, which is a road, the specific area 4830 arranged in communication with the flow path on the left side of the front view of the probability fluctuation determination flow path 4820, and the flow path on the right side of the front view. The non-specific area 4840, the distribution device 4850 which is arranged so as to interfere with the game ball at the branch portion of the probability fluctuation determination flow path 4820, the specific area detection sensor 4860 which detects the passage of the game ball in the specific area 4830, and the non-specific area 4860. It mainly includes a non-specific area detection sensor 4870 that detects the passage of a game ball in the specific area 4540.

The communication passage 4810 is formed from a length in which approximately one second elapses before the ball entering from the discharge port reaches the probability fluctuation determination flow path 4820.

The distribution device 4850 is arranged so as to project inside the stochastic variation determination flow path 4820, and causes the sphere to flow down to the specific region 4830 (form an open state) and to the non-specific region 4840 (closed state). It mainly includes a distribution operation member 4851 that can operate between the closed position (to be formed) and a solenoid 4852 that drives the distribution operation member 4851.

The probability fluctuation determination unit 4800 determines the acquisition of the right to shift the special symbol to the probabilistic state (high probability state) only in the special round (fifth round in this embodiment) during the jackpot game. In the special round, the distribution operation member 4851 is moved to the right for a time that allows the game ball to pass. At this time, the specific area 4830 is in the open state, and the non-specific area 4840 is in the closed state. When the game ball passes through the specific area 4830, the game shifts to the probability variation state (high probability state) of the special symbol after the end of the jackpot game. In the present embodiment, in the high probability state of the special symbol, the hit probability of the normal symbol (second symbol) is increased, and the ball is easily won in the second entrance 640.

In the present embodiment, in the low probability state of the special symbol, for example, it is determined as a jackpot of the special symbol with a probability of 1/99, and in the high probability state of the special symbol (probability variation state of the special symbol), for example, 40. It is judged as a big hit of a special symbol with a probability of 1 in.

Then, when the game ball passes through the specific area 4830, after the jackpot game is completed, the special symbol's probability variation state (high probability state) is given until the special symbol lottery is completed 50 times, and the special symbol lottery is performed 50 times. After the end, it is configured to be set to the normal state.

In the present embodiment, five types of special symbols, "big hit D", "big hit E", "big hit F", "big hit G", and "big hit f" are provided (see FIG. 40). Although the details will be described later, the opening pattern of the first specific winning opening 1000a and the operating pattern of the distribution device 4850 are configured differently depending on the jackpot type, and the number of balls entered into the first variable winning device 4000 and the number of balls entered into the first variable winning device 4000 It is configured to change the probability of acquiring the right to move to the probabilistic state (high probability state) of a special symbol.

FIG. 40 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the correspondence between the first hit type counter C2 and the jackpot type in the special symbol. The first hit type selection table 202b (see FIG. 40) is a data table in which judgment values for determining the jackpot type are stored, and the judgment value of the first hit type counter C2 is each jackpot type and special. It is stipulated in association with the type of entry slot that triggered the lottery of the symbol. In the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, when it is determined that the special symbol is a big hit, the value of the first hit type counter C2 acquired based on the start winning prize is compared with the first hit type selection table 202b, and the first hit type selection table 202b is compared. The jackpot type corresponding to the value of the hit type counter C2 is selected.

Specifically, when a big hit is obtained in the lottery of the special symbol 1 (lottery based on the entry into the first entry slot 64), the value of the first hit type counter C2 is in the range of "0 to 29". Is defined in association with a jackpot D (see 202b41 in FIG. 40).

When the jackpot D is obtained, the jackpot game of 5 rounds is executed in the sixth operation pattern of the first variable winning device 4000 and the distribution device 4850. In this case, the player can receive the payout of about 675 prize balls and can almost certainly acquire the right to shift to the probabilistic state (high probability state) of the special symbol.

The jackpot E is associated with the range in which the value of the first hit type counter C2 is "30 to 49" (see 202b42 in FIG. 40).

When the jackpot E is obtained, the jackpot game of 5 rounds is executed in the 7th operation pattern of the 1st variable winning device 4000 and the distribution device 4850. In this case, the player can receive the payout of about 675 prize balls and rarely obtain the right to shift to the probabilistic state (high probability state) of the special symbol.

The jackpot F is associated with the range in which the value of the first hit type counter C2 is "50 to 79" (see 202b43 in FIG. 40).

When the jackpot F is obtained, the jackpot game of 5 rounds is executed in the eighth operation pattern of the first variable winning device 4000 and the distribution device 4850. In this case, the player can receive the payout of about 675 prize balls and can almost certainly acquire the right to shift to the probabilistic state (high probability state) of the special symbol.

A jackpot G is associated with a range in which the value of the first hit type counter C2 is "80 to 99" (see 202b44 in FIG. 40).

When the jackpot G is obtained, the jackpot game of 5 rounds is executed in the eighth operation pattern of the first variable winning device 4000 and the distribution device 4850. In this case, the player can receive the payout of about 750 prize balls and can rarely acquire the right to shift to the probabilistic state (high probability state) of the special symbol.

As described above, in the jackpot based on the lottery of the special symbol 1 (lottery based on the entry into the first entrance 64), there is a 50% chance of the right to shift to the probabilistic state (high probability state) of the special symbol. Can be reliably obtained. On the other hand, even with the remaining 50%, in rare cases, the right to shift to the probabilistic state (high probability state) of the special symbol can be obtained.

On the other hand, when a big hit is obtained in the lottery of the special symbol 2 (lottery based on the entry into the second entrance 640), the value of the first hit type counter C2 is in the range of "0 to 94". The jackpot f is specified in association with each other (see 202b45 in FIG. 40).

When the jackpot f is reached, the jackpot game of 5 rounds is executed in the sixth operation pattern of the first variable winning device 4000 and the distribution device 4850, as in the case of the jackpot D. In this case, the player can receive the payout of about 675 prize balls and can almost certainly acquire the right to shift to the probabilistic state (high probability state) of the special symbol.

A jackpot g is associated with a range in which the value of the first hit type counter C2 is "95 to 99" (see 202b45 in FIG. 40).

When the jackpot g is reached, the jackpot game of 5 rounds is executed in the tenth operation pattern of the first variable winning device 4000 and the distribution device 4850. In this case, the player can receive the payout of about 600 prize balls and, rarely, can acquire the right to shift to the probabilistic state (high probability state) of the special symbol.

As described above, when a big hit is obtained in the special symbol 2 lottery (lottery based on the entry into the second entrance 640), there is a 95% probability that the first variable winning device 4000 and the sorting device 4850 will be the sixth. It operates according to the operation pattern. At this time, since the right to shift to the probabilistic state (high probability state) of the special symbol can be almost certainly acquired, the special symbol 1 lottery (lottery based on the entry into the first entrance 64) It is advantageous for the player as compared with the case of a big hit. Therefore, in order to win a big hit in the special symbol 2 lottery (lottery based on the entry into the second entrance 640), the player plays a right-handed game in the probability variation state (high probability state) of the special symbol. Do.

During the probability change of the special symbol, the hit probability of the normal symbol increases, the fluctuation time of the normal symbol becomes shorter (3 seconds), and the opening time of the electric accessory 640a becomes longer when the normal symbol hits (1). Seconds x 2 times). Therefore, it becomes easy to put the ball into the second entrance 640, and it becomes easy to draw the special symbol 2. Therefore, once it is possible to shift to the probabilistic state of the special symbol, it is easy to become a big hit of the special symbol, and when it becomes a big hit, the jackpot f (almost certainly shifts to the probabilistic state (high probability state) of the special symbol). Since the probabilistic state of the special symbol, which tends to be a big hit that can acquire the right of the player, is likely to be repeated, it is easy for the player to win a large number of prize balls. As a result, it is possible to make the player play the game while strongly expecting the player to shift to the probabilistic state of the special symbol, so that the player's interest in the game can be improved.

Next, with reference to FIGS. 41 to 43, the opening patterns of the first specific winning opening 1000a and the specific area 4830 in the present embodiment will be described. FIG. 41 (a) is a diagram showing a timed change of the first specific winning opening 1000a and the specific area 4830 in the sixth operation pattern, and FIG. 41 (b) is a diagram showing the first specific winning in the seventh operation pattern. It is a figure which showed the timekeeping change of the mouth 1000a and the specific area 4830.

When the jackpot is determined in the special figure hit determination, the MPU 201 (see FIG. 4) starts controlling the determined type of jackpot game after the end of the special figure variation display (symbol variation effect). Hereinafter, operation control of the opening / closing plate 1300 and the distribution operation member 4851, which is performed when the big hit game is given, will be described.

<When operating with the 6th operation pattern>
When the jackpot type is jackpot D or jackpot f, the MPU 201 drives and controls the solenoids 1510 and 4852 so that the opening / closing plate 1300 and the distribution operation member 4851 operate based on the sixth operation pattern.

When the special figure variation display (design variation effect) is completed, the MPU 201 closes the opening / closing plate 1300 and the distribution operation member 4851 until the timer means (not shown) elapses the predetermined opening time OP (10 seconds). The solenoids 1510 and 4852 are driven and controlled so as to be held, and the first round game R is started after the opening time OP elapses.

That is, the solenoid 1510 is driven and controlled so that the first operating time T1 (maximum 30 seconds) is measured by the timer means and the opening / closing plate 1300 is displaced from the closed state to the open state to open the first specific winning opening 1000a. Then, the opening / closing plate 1300 is allowed to operate for a long time.

Then, in the first round game R, the lapse of the round end condition (round game time (30 seconds, which is the maximum value of the first operating time T1) or the specified number (10 in the present embodiment) of pachinko balls When the winning) is satisfied, the solenoid 1510 is driven and controlled so as to displace the opening / closing plate 1300 to the closed state and close the first specific winning opening 1000a, and the round game R of the first round ends.

When the round game R of the first round is completed, the timer means drives and controls the solenoid 1510 to keep the opening / closing plate 1300 in the closed state until the first interval time Int1 (2.0 seconds) between rounds elapses, and the round After the lapse of the first interval time Int1, the second round game R is started.

In the second round, as in the start of the first round, the first operation time T1 (maximum 30 seconds) is measured by the timer means, and the opening / closing plate 1300 is displaced from the closed state to the open state to specify the first. The solenoid 1510 is driven and controlled so as to open the winning opening 1000a, and the opening / closing plate 1300 is operated for a long time.

Then, when the round end condition (round game time (30 seconds, which is the maximum value of the first operating time T1) elapses or a specified number of pachinko balls are won) is satisfied in the second round game R. The solenoid 1510 is driven and controlled so as to displace the opening / closing plate 1300 to the closed state and close the first specific winning opening 1000a, and the second round game R ends.

When the second round game R is completed, the timer means drives and controls the solenoid 1510 to keep the opening / closing plate 1300 in the closed state until the first interval time Int1 (2.0 seconds) between rounds elapses, and the round After the lapse of the first interval time Int1, the third round game R is started.

In the third round, as in the start of the second round, the first operation time T1 (maximum 30 seconds) is measured by the timer means, and the opening / closing plate 1300 is displaced from the closed state to the open state to specify the first. The solenoid 1510 is driven and controlled so as to open the winning opening 1000a, and the opening / closing plate 1300 is operated for a long time.

Then, when the round end condition (round game time (30 seconds, which is the maximum value of the first operating time T1) elapses or a specified number of pachinko balls are won) is satisfied in the third round game R. The solenoid 1510 is driven and controlled so as to displace the opening / closing plate 1300 to the closed state and close the first specific winning opening 1000a, and the third round game R ends.

When the third round game R is completed, the timer means drives and controls the solenoid 1510 to keep the opening / closing plate 1300 in the closed state until the second interval time Int2 (1.0 seconds) between rounds elapses, and the round After the lapse of the second interval time Int2, the fourth round game R is started.

In the fourth round, unlike the start of the other rounds, the second operating time T2 (maximum 3 seconds) is measured by the timer means, and the opening / closing plate 1300 is displaced from the closed state to the open state to win the first specific prize. The solenoid 1510 is driven and controlled so as to open the mouth 1000a, and the opening / closing plate 1300 is operated for a long time.

When the opening / closing plate 1300 is displaced from the closed state to the open state, the MPU 201 measures the timer means (not shown) until a predetermined third opening time OP3 (32.3 seconds) elapses, and the third opening time After the elapse of OP3, the distribution operation member 4851 is moved to the open position for a predetermined time (0.1 seconds in the present embodiment), and after the elapse of the predetermined time, the solenoid is used to hold the distribution operation member 4851 in the closed state again. The 4852 is driven and controlled so that the distribution operation member 4851 operates for a short time. This predetermined time is set as a time during which the ball is not allowed to pass through the specific area 4830.

Then, when the round end condition (round game time (3 seconds, which is the maximum value of the second operating time T2) elapses or a specified number of pachinko balls are won) is satisfied in the fourth round game R. The solenoid 1510 is driven and controlled so as to displace the opening / closing plate 1300 to the closed state and close the first specific winning opening 1000a, and the round game R of the fourth round ends.

Here, the second operating time T2 is set as a time during which a predetermined number of balls cannot be inserted into the first specific winning opening 1000a. That is, in the present embodiment, one ball can be fired at the fastest interval of 0.6 seconds, but it takes 6 seconds to fire a predetermined number of balls. That is, it is usually estimated that only about 5 balls can be inserted into the first specific winning opening 1000a in 3 seconds. Therefore, the round game R of the fourth round ends exclusively in 3 seconds, which is the maximum value of the second operating time T2.

On the other hand, in this operation pattern, only five balls are discharged from the discharge port 1150 in the interval immediately before the fourth round. Therefore, since the storage flow path 1231 is filled with about 5 winnings possible in 3 seconds, the discomfort given to the player by the time of the round game R in the 4th round being shorter than that in the other rounds is suppressed. can do.

When the round game R of the fourth round is completed, the timer means drives and controls the solenoid 1510 so as to keep the opening / closing plate 1300 in the closed state until the first interval time Int1 (2.0 seconds) between rounds elapses, and the round After the lapse of the first interval time Int1, the fifth round (special round) round game R is started.

In the fifth round, the solenoid 1510 is used to start measuring the first operating time T1 (maximum 30 seconds) by the timer means and to displace the opening / closing plate 1300 from the closed state to the open state to open the first specified winning opening 1000a. Is driven and controlled so that the opening / closing plate 1300 operates for a long time.

When the opening / closing plate 1300 is displaced from the closed state to the open state, the MPU 201 closes the distribution operation member 4851 until the timer means (not shown) elapses the predetermined second opening time OP2 (0.3 seconds). After the second opening time OP2 has elapsed, the distribution operation member 4851 is moved to the open position for a predetermined time (about 2 seconds in this embodiment), and after the predetermined time has elapsed, the distribution operation member 4851 is moved again. The solenoid 4852 is driven and controlled so as to be held in the closed state, and the distribution operation member 4851 is operated for a long time.

Then, when the round end condition (round game time (30 seconds, which is the maximum value of the first operating time T1) elapses or a specified number of pachinko balls are won) is satisfied in the fifth round game R. The solenoid 1510 is driven and controlled so as to displace the opening / closing plate 1300 to the closed state and close the first specific winning opening 1000a, and the fifth round game R ends.

In the second opening time OP2, when the number of balls discharged from the storage flow path 1231 is less than 7 (when the number of stored balls is up to 6), all the discharged balls are the probability fluctuation determination flow path 4820. When the number of balls discharged from the storage flow path 1231 is 7 or more (when the number of stored balls is 7 or more), at least one of the discharged balls is used, which is longer than the time required to pass through. The time is set shorter than the time required for the sphere to pass through the probability fluctuation determination flow path 4820.

In the present embodiment, since the fourth round round game R is started with five balls remaining in the storage flow path 1231, even if the fourth round round game ends in the second operating time T2, The number of spheres stored in the storage flow path 1231 can be easily increased to 7 or more. Therefore, since the distribution operation member 4851 can be opened while the sphere remains in the probability fluctuation determination flow path 4820, the remaining sphere can flow down to the specific region 4830. Therefore, the player can acquire the right to shift to the probabilistic state (high probability state) of the special symbol.

Then, when the fifth round game R is completed, the timer means holds the opening / closing plate 1300 and the distribution operation member 4851 in the closed state until the first interval time Int1 between rounds and the ending time ED (11 seconds) elapse. The solenoids 1510 and 4852 are driven and controlled, and the jackpot game ends with the passage of the time.

Here, unlike the prior art, in this operation pattern, it is not necessary to close the opening / closing plate 1300 while the distribution operation member 4851 is closed before the operation in the fifth round round game R. , The opening / closing plate 1300 can be operated without any discomfort. This will be described below.

In the prior art, if a predetermined number of balls win a prize in the first specific winning opening 1000a and the round game R ends before the operation of the distribution operation member 4581 starts, the distribution operation member 4851 is opened. However, there is a risk that the ball cannot be won in the first specific winning opening 1000a and the player cannot acquire the right to shift to the probabilistic state (high probability state) of the special symbol. In order to prevent this, it was necessary to close the opening / closing plate 1300 while the distribution operating member 4851 was closed before the operation (it was opened twice in one round).

On the other hand, in the present embodiment, it is a game property that switches whether or not the ball that has won the first specific winning opening 1000a can be entered into the specific area 4830 by the round game R of the round immediately before the fifth round. When the distribution operation member 4851 is in the open state even if the ball cannot enter the first specific winning opening 1000a while the distribution operation member 4851 is closed before the operation. Since the ball heading for the specific area 4830 has already won the first variable winning device 4000, the player can acquire the right to shift to the probabilistic state (high probability state) of the special symbol without any problem.

Therefore, in this operation pattern, even while the distribution operation member 4851 is closed before the operation in the fifth round game R, the opening / closing plate 1300 is opened to operate the opening / closing plate 1300. On the other hand, while preventing the player from feeling uncomfortable, it is possible to prevent the player from being unable to acquire the right to shift to the probabilistic state (high probability state) of the special symbol depending on the winning mode. can do.

Further, since the ball that has won the first specific winning opening 1000a in the fifth round game R stays in the storage flow path 1231 during the first operating time T1, the first round game R in the fifth round It is possible to prevent the ball winning in the specific winning opening 1000a from entering the probability variation determination flow path 4820 while the distribution operation member 4851 is in the open state. As a result, the player can acquire the right to shift to the probabilistic state (high probability state) of the special symbol depending on the mode of winning the first specific winning opening 1000a in the round game R of the fifth round (special round). It is possible to prevent a problem that whether or not it can be done changes.

<When operating in the 7th operation pattern>
When the jackpot type is a jackpot game of jackpot E, the MPU 201 drives and controls the solenoids 1510 and 4852 so that the opening / closing plate 1300 and the distribution operation member 4851 operate based on the seventh operation pattern. Since it is the same as the case of the jackpot D described above until the end of the third round game R, the description thereof will be omitted. Further, the driving mode of the distribution device 4850 is the same as that of the sixth operation pattern.

When the third round game R is completed, the timer means drives and controls the solenoid 1510 to keep the opening / closing plate 1300 in the closed state until the first interval time Int1 (2.0 seconds) between rounds elapses, and the round After the lapse of the first interval time Int1, the fourth round game R is started.

In the fourth round, unlike the start of the other rounds, the second operating time T2 (maximum 3 seconds) is measured by the timer means, and the opening / closing plate 1300 is displaced from the closed state to the open state to win the first specific prize. The solenoid 1510 is driven and controlled so as to open the mouth 1000a, and the opening / closing plate 1300 is operated for a long time.

When the opening / closing plate 1300 is displaced from the closed state to the open state, the MPU 201 measures the timer means (not shown) until a predetermined third opening time OP3 (32.3 seconds) elapses, and the third opening time After the elapse of OP3, the distribution operation member 4851 is moved to the open position for a predetermined time (0.1 seconds in the present embodiment), and after the elapse of the predetermined time, the solenoid is used to hold the distribution operation member 4851 in the closed state again. The 4852 is driven and controlled so that the distribution operation member 4851 operates for a short time. It should be noted that this short-time operation is set as an operation that does not allow the ball to pass through the specific area 4830.

Then, when the round end condition (round game time (3 seconds, which is the maximum value of the second operating time T2) elapses or a specified number of pachinko balls are won) is satisfied in the fourth round game R. The solenoid 1510 is driven and controlled so as to displace the opening / closing plate 1300 to the closed state and close the first specific winning opening 1000a, and the round game R of the fourth round ends.

Here, the second operating time T2 is set as a time during which a predetermined number of balls cannot be inserted into the first specific winning opening 1000a. That is, in the present embodiment, one ball can be fired at the fastest interval of 0.6 seconds, but it takes 6 seconds to fire a predetermined number of balls. That is, it is usually estimated that only about 5 balls can be inserted into the first specific winning opening 1000a in 3 seconds. Therefore, the round game R of the fourth round ends exclusively in 3 seconds, which is the maximum value of the second operating time T2.

On the other hand, in this operation pattern, 10 balls (global) are discharged from the discharge port 1150 in the interval immediately before the fourth round. Therefore, the storage flow path 1231 is not filled by about 5 winnings possible in 3 seconds, and the opening / closing plate 1300 is displaced to the closed state with the winning balls remaining in the storage flow path 1231 in 3 seconds. ..

When the round game R of the fourth round is completed, the timer means drives and controls the solenoid 1510 so as to keep the opening / closing plate 1300 in the closed state until the first interval time Int1 (2.0 seconds) between rounds elapses, and the round After the lapse of the first interval time Int1, the fifth round (special round) round game R is started.

In the fifth round, the solenoid 1510 is used to start measuring the first operating time T1 (maximum 30 seconds) by the timer means and to displace the opening / closing plate 1300 from the closed state to the open state to open the first specified winning opening 1000a. Is driven and controlled so that the opening / closing plate 1300 operates for a long time.

When the opening / closing plate 1300 is displaced from the closed state to the open state, the MPU 201 closes the distribution operation member 4851 until the timer means (not shown) elapses the predetermined second opening time OP2 (0.3 seconds). After the second opening time OP2 has elapsed, the distribution operation member 4851 is moved to the open position for a predetermined time (about 2 seconds in this embodiment), and after the predetermined time has elapsed, the distribution operation member 4851 is moved again. The solenoid 4852 is driven and controlled so as to be held in the closed state, and the distribution operation member 4851 is operated for a long time.

Then, when the round end condition (round game time (30 seconds, which is the maximum value of the first operating time T1) elapses or a specified number of pachinko balls are won) is satisfied in the fifth round game R. The solenoid 1510 is driven and controlled so as to displace the opening / closing plate 1300 to the closed state and close the first specific winning opening 1000a, and the fifth round game R ends.

In this operation pattern, about 5 balls are ejected from the discharge port 1150 at the interval immediately before the round game R of the 5th round, so for some rare reason, 8 or more balls in 3 seconds win the first specific prize. Unless the mouth 1000a is won, the distribution operation member 4851 is displaced after all the discharged balls have passed through the probability fluctuation determination flow path 4820.

Therefore, when the distribution operation member 4851 is in the open state, the sphere does not remain in the probability fluctuation determination flow path 4820, so that the sphere does not pass through the specific region 4830. Therefore, the player cannot acquire the right to shift to the probabilistic state (high probability state) of the special symbol.

Then, when the fifth round game R is completed, the timer means holds the opening / closing plate 1300 and the distribution operation member 4851 in the closed state until the first interval time Int1 between rounds and the ending time ED (11 seconds) elapse. The solenoids 1510 and 4852 are driven and controlled, and the jackpot game ends with the passage of the time.

In this operation pattern, the operation mode of the opening / closing plate 1300 and the distribution operation member 4851 in the fifth round game R is the same as the above-described sixth operation pattern. Therefore, in this operation pattern as well, the sixth operation pattern It is possible to produce the same effect as the effect in.

Here, the difference between the sixth operation pattern and the seventh operation pattern is whether or not the balls can be stored up to the vicinity of the full storage flow path 1231 during the fourth round game R. That is, it is possible to predict whether or not the player can subsequently acquire the right to shift to the probabilistic state (high probability state) of the special symbol due to the difference in the accumulation state of the balls, so that the balls are accumulated in the storage flow path 1231. It is possible to improve the attention to the sphere. Thereby, the attention to the first variable winning device 4000 can be improved.

In addition, in the sixth operation pattern, if three or more balls enter in the round game R of the fourth round, it is almost certain that the right to shift to the probabilistic state (high probability state) of the special symbol is acquired. However, since the round game R time is short, the more the player is accustomed to the game, the more he fails to acquire the right to shift to the probabilistic state (high probability state) of the special symbol even in the sixth operation pattern. An easy situation is formed.

That is, the more unfamiliar the player is, the easier it is to play the game by leaving it unattended during the jackpot game, while the more accustomed to the game, the easier it is to avoid leaving it unattended to avoid wasting balls between rounds during the jackpot and to stop between rounds. Is the difference that arises from.

In detail, in the case of an untouched game, a plurality of balls are always flowing down near the opening / closing plate 1300, and the balls are awarded to the first specific winning opening 1000a immediately after the start of the fourth round game R. Since it occurs, there is ample room for three or more balls to enter in three seconds. Therefore, an unfamiliar player can acquire the right to shift to the probabilistic state (high probability state) of the special symbol without any problem.

On the other hand, if the ball is stopped between rounds so as to prevent the ball from flowing down near the opening / closing plate 1300 during the interval period by starting the launch after the start of the fourth round game R, the wasted ball is certainly Although it can be suppressed, the ball does not reach the vicinity of the opening / closing plate 1300 until a while after the start of the fourth round game R (for example, two seconds have not passed). Therefore, it becomes necessary to insert three or more balls in the remaining one second, and it becomes difficult to acquire the right to shift to the probabilistic state (high probability state) of the special symbol. Therefore, it is possible to encourage a player who is accustomed to the game to launch the game unattended during the jackpot game.

As described above, the sixth operation pattern has an inherent possibility that the profit obtained by a person who is more accustomed to the game is reduced depending on the mode of launching. Therefore, regardless of whether the player is unfamiliar or accustomed to the game, it is possible to induce the player to play the game unattended during the jackpot, and the fairness of the profit obtained by the game can be guaranteed.

On the other hand, it is possible to provide a player who, after grasping the above-mentioned risks, still stops between rounds, a jackpot game that requires concentration, which cannot be experienced with other pachinko machines 10. .. That is, the number of wasted balls is reduced by performing a round stop striking in which the ball flows back into the first specific winning opening 1000a immediately after the opening of the first specific winning opening 1000a in the fourth round and the launch is started. However, it is also possible to acquire the right to shift the special symbol to the probabilistic state (high probability state). In this case, the game is stopped between rounds before the end of the third round game R, and the launch is started before the end of the third round game R. That is, it is necessary to perform an advanced calculation of starting the launch while anticipating the entry timing while considering the randomness of the flow of the ball entering during the third round game R. Therefore, when the timing at which the ball that has started launching reaches the vicinity of the first specific winning opening 1000a is as calculated, the interest of the player can be improved.

FIG. 42 (a) is a diagram showing the timed change of the first specific winning opening 1000a and the specific region 4830 in the eighth operation pattern, and FIG. 42 (b) is a diagram showing the first specific winning in the ninth operation pattern. It is a figure which showed the timekeeping change of the mouth 1000a and the specific area 4830.

When the jackpot is determined in the special figure hit determination, the MPU 201 (see FIG. 4) starts controlling the determined type of jackpot game after the end of the special figure variation display (symbol variation effect). Hereinafter, operation control of the opening / closing plate 1300 and the distribution operation member 4851, which is performed when the big hit game is given, will be described.

<When operating with the 8th operation pattern>
In the case of a jackpot game in which the jackpot type is jackpot F, the MPU 201 drives and controls the solenoids 1510 and 4852 so that the opening / closing plate 1300 and the distribution operation member 4851 operate based on the eighth operation pattern. Since it is the same as the case of the jackpot D described above until the end of the third round game R, the description thereof will be omitted.

When the third round game R is completed, the timer means drives and controls the solenoid 1510 to keep the opening / closing plate 1300 in the closed state until the second interval time Int2 (1.0 seconds) between rounds elapses, and the round After the lapse of the second interval time Int2, the fourth round game R is started.

In the fourth round, the solenoid 1510 is used to start measuring the first operating time T1 (maximum 30 seconds) by the timer means and to displace the opening / closing plate 1300 from the closed state to the open state to open the first specific winning opening 1000a. Is driven and controlled so that the opening / closing plate 1300 operates for a long time.

When the opening / closing plate 1300 is displaced from the closed state to the open state, the MPU 201 closes the distribution operation member 4851 until the timer means (not shown) elapses the predetermined third opening time OP3 (32.3 seconds). After the lapse of the third opening time OP3, the distribution operation member 4851 is moved to the open position for a predetermined time (about 2 seconds in this embodiment), and after the lapse of the predetermined time, the distribution operation member 4851 is moved again. The solenoid 4852 is driven and controlled so as to be held in the closed state, and the distribution operation member 4851 is operated for a long time.

Then, when the round end condition (round game time (3 seconds, which is the maximum value of the second operating time T2) elapses or a specified number of pachinko balls are won) is satisfied in the fourth round game R. The solenoid 1510 is driven and controlled so as to displace the opening / closing plate 1300 to the closed state and close the first specific winning opening 1000a, and the round game R of the fourth round ends.

In this operation pattern, only five balls are discharged from the discharge port 1150 in the interval immediately before the fourth round. Therefore, in the fourth round round game R, a specified number of balls cannot be won in the first specific winning opening 1000a, so that the fourth round round game R is 30 seconds, which is the maximum value of the first operating time T1. It ends with the passage of.

When the round game R of the fourth round is completed, the timer means drives and controls the solenoid 1510 so as to keep the opening / closing plate 1300 in the closed state until the first interval time Int1 (2.0 seconds) between rounds elapses, and the round After the lapse of the first interval time Int1, the fifth round (special round) round game R is started.

In the fifth round, the solenoid 1510 is used to start measuring the first operating time T1 (maximum 30 seconds) by the timer means and to displace the opening / closing plate 1300 from the closed state to the open state to open the first specified winning opening 1000a. Is driven and controlled so that the opening / closing plate 1300 operates for a long time.

When the opening / closing plate 1300 is displaced from the closed state to the open state, the MPU 201 closes the distribution operation member 4851 until the timer means (not shown) elapses the predetermined second opening time OP2 (0.3 seconds). After the second opening time OP2 has elapsed, the distribution operation member 4851 is moved to the open position for a predetermined time (about 2 seconds in this embodiment), and after the predetermined time has elapsed, the distribution operation member 4851 is moved again. The solenoid 4852 is driven and controlled so as to be held in the closed state, and the distribution operation member 4851 is operated for a long time. It should be noted that this opening operation is performed at the same time as the opening operation due to the passage of the third opening time OP3.

Then, when the round end condition (round game time (30 seconds, which is the maximum value of the first operating time T1) elapses or a specified number of pachinko balls are won) is satisfied in the fifth round game R. The solenoid 1510 is driven and controlled so as to displace the opening / closing plate 1300 to the closed state and close the first specific winning opening 1000a, and the fifth round game R ends.

The third opening time OP3 is an interval immediately after the fourth round game R continues at the maximum value of the first operating time T1, and when 7 or more balls are discharged from the discharge port 1150 (storage). (When the number is 7 or more), the time is set to be shorter than that at least a part of the discharged spheres passes through the probability fluctuation determination flow path 4820.

In this operation pattern, the fourth round round game R is started with five balls remaining in the storage flow path 1231, so that the fourth round round game R waits until the maximum value of the first operation time T1. If the number of balls stored in the storage flow path 1231 is 7 or more, the distribution operation member 4851 may be opened with the balls remaining in the probability fluctuation determination flow path 4820. it can. Therefore, the remaining ball can be made to flow down to the specific area 4830, and the player can acquire the right to shift to the probabilistic state (high probability state) of the special symbol.

Then, when the fifth round game R is completed, the timer means holds the opening / closing plate 1300 and the distribution operation member 4851 in the closed state until the first interval time Int1 between rounds and the ending time ED (11 seconds) elapse. The solenoids 1510 and 4852 are driven and controlled, and the jackpot game ends with the passage of the time.

In this operation pattern, the operation mode of the opening / closing plate 1300 and the distribution operation member 4851 in the fifth round game R is the same as the above-described sixth operation pattern. Therefore, in this operation pattern as well, the sixth operation pattern It is possible to produce the same effect as the effect in.

<When operating with the 9th operation pattern>
When the jackpot type is a jackpot game of jackpot G, the MPU 201 drives and controls the solenoids 1510 and 4852 so that the opening / closing plate 1300 and the distribution operation member 4851 operate based on the ninth operation pattern. Since it is the same as the case of the jackpot D described above until the end of the third round game R, the description thereof will be omitted. Further, the driving mode of the distribution device 4850 is the same as that of the eighth operation pattern.

When the third round game R is completed, the timer means drives and controls the solenoid 1510 to keep the opening / closing plate 1300 in the closed state until the first interval time Int1 (2.0 seconds) between rounds elapses, and the round After the lapse of the first interval time Int1, the fourth round game R is started.

In the fourth round, the solenoid 1510 is used to start measuring the first operating time T1 (maximum 30 seconds) by the timer means and to displace the opening / closing plate 1300 from the closed state to the open state to open the first specific winning opening 1000a. Is driven and controlled so that the opening / closing plate 1300 operates for a long time.

When the opening / closing plate 1300 is displaced from the closed state to the open state, the MPU 201 closes the distribution operation member 4851 until the timer means (not shown) elapses the predetermined third opening time OP3 (32.3 seconds). After the lapse of the third opening time OP3, the distribution operation member 4851 is moved to the open position for a predetermined time (about 2 seconds in this embodiment), and after the lapse of the predetermined time, the distribution operation member 4851 is moved again. The solenoid 4852 is driven and controlled so as to be held in the closed state, and the distribution operation member 4851 is operated for a long time.

Then, when the round end condition (round game time (30 seconds, which is the maximum value of the first operating time T1) elapses or a specified number of pachinko balls are won) is satisfied in the fourth round game R. The solenoid 1510 is driven and controlled so as to displace the opening / closing plate 1300 to the closed state and close the first specific winning opening 1000a, and the round game R of the fourth round ends.

In this operation pattern, only five balls are discharged from the discharge port 1150 in the interval immediately before the fourth round. Therefore, in the fourth round round game R, a specified number of balls cannot be won in the first specific winning opening 1000a, so that the fourth round round game R is 30 seconds, which is the maximum value of the first operating time T1. It ends with the passage of.

When the round game R of the fourth round is completed, the timer means drives and controls the solenoid 1510 so as to keep the opening / closing plate 1300 in the closed state until the first interval time Int1 (2.0 seconds) between rounds elapses, and the round After the lapse of the first interval time Int1, the fifth round (special round) round game R is started.

In the fifth round, the solenoid 1510 is used to start measuring the first operating time T1 (maximum 30 seconds) by the timer means and to displace the opening / closing plate 1300 from the closed state to the open state to open the first specified winning opening 1000a. Is driven and controlled so that the opening / closing plate 1300 operates for a long time.

When the opening / closing plate 1300 is displaced from the closed state to the open state, the MPU 201 closes the distribution operation member 4851 until the timer means (not shown) elapses the predetermined second opening time OP2 (0.3 seconds). After the second opening time OP2 elapses, the distribution operation member 4851 is moved to the open position for a predetermined time (about 0.2 seconds in this embodiment), and after the elapse of the predetermined time, the distribution operation member 4851 The solenoid 4852 is driven and controlled so as to keep the closed state again, so that the distribution operation member 4851 operates for a short time. It should be noted that this short-time operation is set as an operation that does not allow the ball to pass through the specific area 4830.

Then, when the round end condition (round game time (30 seconds, which is the maximum value of the first operating time T1) elapses or a specified number of pachinko balls are won) is satisfied in the fifth round game R. The solenoid 1510 is driven and controlled so as to displace the opening / closing plate 1300 to the closed state and close the first specific winning opening 1000a, and the fifth round game R ends.

The third opening time OP3 is an interval immediately after the fourth round game R continues at the maximum value of the first operating time T1, and when 7 or more balls are discharged from the discharge port 1150 (storage). (When the number is 7 or more), the time is set to be shorter than that at least a part of the discharged spheres passes through the probability fluctuation determination flow path 4820.

In this operation pattern, since the fourth round round game R is started in a state where no balls remain in the storage flow path 1231, a specified number of balls are won in the first specific winning opening 1000a in the fourth round round game R. Can be made to. Therefore, it is possible to finish the fourth round game R without waiting for the maximum value of the first operating time T1. However, in many cases, when the fourth round game R is ended without waiting for the maximum value of the first operating time T1, as in the case where the fourth round game R is ended by winning a specified number of prizes. Immediately after that, the sphere discharged from the discharge port 1150 passes through the probability fluctuation determination flow path 4820, and then the distribution operation member 4851 is displaced.

On the other hand, if the distribution operation member 4851 waits for the fourth round game R to the maximum value of the first operation time T1 and ends, if the number of balls ejected in the interval immediately after that is 7 or more. The sphere can flow down to the specific area 4830. Therefore, the player does not rush to win the specified number of balls, but by having the first specified winning opening 1000a win the specified number of balls just before the end of the fourth round game R, the player has a special symbol. You can get the right to move to the probabilistic state (high probability state).

In addition, as another method, by ending the fifth round game R immediately after the fourth round at an appropriate timing, the ball discharged at the interval immediately after the fifth round game R is placed in a specific area. By letting it flow down, the player can acquire the right to shift to the probabilistic state (high probability state) of the special symbol.

As described above, according to this operation pattern, the player enters the probabilistic state (high probability state) of the special symbol at the discretion of the player (selection of the timing of winning the ball to the first specific winning opening 1000a). Whether or not you can acquire the right to transition can be different.

Then, when the fifth round game R is completed, the timer means holds the opening / closing plate 1300 and the distribution operation member 4851 in the closed state until the first interval time Int1 between rounds and the ending time ED (11 seconds) elapse. The solenoids 1510 and 4852 are driven and controlled, and the jackpot game ends with the passage of the time.

Here, the difference between the eighth operation pattern and the ninth operation pattern is whether or not the operation time of the fourth round game R is specified. When the operating time is specified (in the case of the eighth operating pattern), by continuing the ball entering the first specific winning opening 1000a, the player can play a special symbol no matter how the game is played. Since the right to shift to the probabilistic state (high probability state) can be acquired, the game can be played with peace of mind.

On the other hand, when the operating time is not specified (in the case of the ninth operating pattern), the player selects the operating time by himself / herself according to the game mode (when to make the first specific winning opening 1000a win the specified number of balls). You may be able to obtain the right to move to the probabilistic state (high probability state) of the special symbol by selecting). Therefore, it is possible to encourage the player to concentrate on the round game R, improve the attention to the ball flowing down the game area, and give the player an uplifting feeling of acquiring the probabilistic state by himself / herself. As a result, it is possible to improve the interest of the player.

The features of the sixth to ninth operation patterns are that the interval immediately after the third round round game R is shorter than usual, and the fourth round game is performed with the ball remaining in the storage flow path 1231. When R is started, it is easy to acquire the right to shift to the probabilistic state (high probability state) of the special symbol. That is, when the number of prize balls obtained in the fourth round game R is small, it is possible to realize a game property in which it is easier to acquire the right to shift to the probabilistic state (high probability state) of the special symbol.

On the other hand, if the interval immediately after the third round game R is long enough to eject the balls of the storage flow path 1231, the right to shift to the probabilistic state (high probability state) of the special symbol is granted. Hard to get. That is, when it is difficult to acquire the right to shift to the probabilistic state (high probability state) of the special symbol, it is possible to realize the playability that the prize balls obtained in the jackpot game are paid out more. As a result, it is possible to prepare a large number of balls to be launched by the player in the normal state to be continued later, so that it is possible to easily suppress the cash investment of the player.

Since these differences can be grasped by whether or not the ball remains in the storage flow path 1231 at the start of the fourth round, the player predicts the state after the jackpot game ends at the start of the fourth round game R. can do. And even in the case of an operation pattern in which it is difficult to obtain the right to shift to the probabilistic state (high probability state) of the special symbol, the right to shift to the probabilistic state (high probability state) of the special symbol depending on the mode of entering the ball. It is possible to obtain.

Here, in the present embodiment, it is possible to maintain the concentration of the player during the jackpot game by forcing the player to make a selection. That is, the game mode in which it is easy to acquire the right to shift to the probabilistic state (high probability state) of the special symbol is the opposite.

More specifically, in the case of the seventh operation pattern, in the fourth round game R, as many balls as possible are placed in the first specific winning opening 1000a before the second operation time T2 (maximum 3 seconds) elapses. By winning a prize, the possibility of acquiring the right to move to the probabilistic state (high probability state) of the special symbol increases (it is beneficial to win many balls from the beginning of the 4th round), while the first In the case of the operation pattern of 9, in the round game R of the fourth round, the period of the round game R is extended by waiting for the winning of the specified number of balls until just before the end of 30 seconds, which is the maximum value of the first operation time T1. This increases the possibility of acquiring the right to move to the probabilistic state (high probability state) of the special symbol (it is beneficial to suppress the winning of the ball at the start of the fourth round).

In this way, the possibility of acquiring the right to shift to the probabilistic state (high probability state) of the special symbol changes depending on the method of winning the ball in the round game R (the game mode selected by the player). Therefore, even if the jackpot game continues a plurality of times, it is possible to prevent the player from getting bored and maintain the concentration on the game.

FIG. 43 is a diagram showing a timed change of the first specific winning opening 1000a and the specific area 4830 in the tenth operation pattern.

When the jackpot is determined in the special figure hit determination, the MPU 201 (see FIG. 4) starts controlling the determined type of jackpot game after the end of the special figure variation display (symbol variation effect). Hereinafter, operation control of the opening / closing plate 1300 and the distribution operation member 4851, which is performed when the big hit game is given, will be described.

<When operating with the 10th operation pattern>
When the jackpot type is a jackpot game of jackpot g, the MPU 201 drives and controls the solenoids 1510 and 4852 so that the opening / closing plate 1300 and the distribution operation member 4851 operate based on the tenth operation pattern. Since it is the same as the case of the sixth operation pattern described above until the end of the fourth round game R, the description thereof will be omitted.

When the round game R of the fourth round is completed, the timer means drives and controls the solenoid 1510 to keep the opening / closing plate 1300 in the closed state until the second interval time Int2 (1.0 seconds) between rounds elapses, and the round After the lapse of the second interval time Int2, the fifth round (special round) round game R is started.

In the fifth round, the solenoid 1510 is used to start measuring the first operating time T1 (maximum 30 seconds) by the timer means and to displace the opening / closing plate 1300 from the closed state to the open state to open the first specified winning opening 1000a. Is driven and controlled so that the opening / closing plate 1300 operates for a long time.

When the opening / closing plate 1300 is displaced from the closed state to the open state, the MPU 201 closes the distribution operation member 4851 until the timer means (not shown) elapses the predetermined second opening time OP2 (0.3 seconds). After the second opening time OP2 elapses, the distribution operation member 4851 is moved to the open position for a predetermined time (about 0.2 seconds in this embodiment), and after the elapse of the predetermined time, the distribution operation member 4851 The solenoid 4852 is driven and controlled so as to keep the closed state again, so that the distribution operation member 4851 operates for a short time.

Then, when the round end condition (round game time (30 seconds, which is the maximum value of the first operating time T1) elapses or a specified number of pachinko balls are won) is satisfied in the fifth round game R. The solenoid 1510 is driven and controlled so as to displace the opening / closing plate 1300 to the closed state and close the first specific winning opening 1000a, and the fifth round game R ends.

In this operation pattern, since the opening operation of the distribution operation member 4851 after the lapse of the second opening time OP2 is a short time operation, basically, the ball cannot flow down to the specific region 4830.

Further, since the distribution operation member 4851 is opened during the fifth round game R, if the round game can be completed early, the ball that has won the first specific winning opening 1000a in the fifth round flows down to the specific area 4830. (For example, when the operation after the lapse of the third opening time OP3 is long), in this operation pattern, the fifth round game R starts with the ball remaining in the storage flow path 1231. Therefore, it is not possible to enter a specified number of balls, and it is not possible to end the fifth round game at an early stage. Therefore, it is not possible to allow the ball that has won the first specific winning opening 1000a in the fifth round game R to flow down to the specific area 4830.

Then, when the fifth round game R is completed, the timer means holds the opening / closing plate 1300 and the distribution operation member 4851 in the closed state until the first interval time Int1 between rounds and the ending time ED (11 seconds) elapse. The solenoids 1510 and 4852 are driven and controlled, and the jackpot game ends with the passage of the time.

In this operation pattern, the operation mode of the opening / closing plate 1300 and the distribution operation member 4851 in the fifth round game R has the same parts as the above-described sixth operation pattern. It is possible to achieve the same effect as the effect in the operation pattern of 6.

Here, the main difference between the sixth operation pattern and the tenth operation pattern in the first specific winning opening 1000a is the length of the interval immediately after the round game R in the fourth round. Since the patterns of the other parts are the same, it is difficult to grasp the difference, and it is possible to improve the concentration of the player who visually recognizes the operation pattern of the first variable winning device 4000.

The tenth operation pattern causes the ball to flow down to the specific region 4830 even if the storage flow path 1231 can be filled in the fourth round game R in relation to the sixth operation pattern and the seventh operation pattern. It differs in that it cannot be done.

That is, by mixing this operation pattern, the player is not relieved even if the balls can be fully stored in the storage flow path 1231 in the round game R of the fourth round, and the discharged balls are in a specific area. You can be prompted to see if you are passing 4830. That is, in the jackpot game, the stage of whether or not the balls can be stored in the storage flow path 1231 (first step) and the distribution operation member 4851 operate before the balls discharged from the storage flow path 1231 pass through. It can be divided into the stage of whether or not it is (second step), and attention can be paid to different points in each stage. As a result, it is possible to prevent the player from playing indiscriminately, and it is possible to improve the player's concentration.

Next, a fifth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 44 to 50. In the first embodiment, the case where the ball output corresponding to the jackpot type can be obtained regardless of the progress mode of the game in the probabilistic state (high probability state) of the special symbol has been described, but the first variable winning device in the fifth embodiment has been described. The 5000 includes a ball ejection adjusting device 5900 that makes it easier for a player to acquire a large number of balls as the number of fluctuations until a jackpot is acquired in a probabilistic state (high probability state) of a special symbol is smaller. The same parts as those of the above-described embodiments are designated by the same reference numerals, and the description thereof will be omitted.

FIG. 44 is a partial front view of the game board 13 according to the fifth embodiment, and FIG. 45 is a partial rear view of the game board 13. As shown in FIGS. 44 and 45, the first variable winning device 5000 arranged near the lower right corner of the game board 13 includes the main body member 2100, the lining front plate 2200, and the lining front plate 2200, as in the second embodiment. In addition to including the opening / closing plate 1300, the driving device 1500, and the regulating member 2600, the power transmission member 5400 slightly different from the second embodiment, the second variable winning device 5800, and the newly introduced in this embodiment, It is mainly provided with a ball ejection adjusting device 5900 that adjusts the ball ejection by allowing the ball entering the second ball entry port 640 to enter the storage flow path 1231 through the communication hole 5920.

The power transmission member 5400 includes a time difference forming portion 5423 extending downward from the lower end portion of the rotating tip portion 1421 of the extending portion 1420 along the shape of the rotating tip portion 1421.

As shown in FIG. 45, the lower tip of the time difference forming portion 5423 extends to a position where it comes into contact with the engaging portion 1333 of the closing opening / closing plate 1300 in the non-excited state of the solenoid 1510.

In addition to the configuration described above in the second embodiment, the second variable winning device 5800 has an intervening rod portion 5850 with a slightly added shape and a transmission rod portion 2860 capable of sliding in the vertical direction on the left side of the rear view. By being pushed down to the branched portion of the intervening rod portion 5850 (the rear view L-shaped portion added to the configuration of the intervening rod portion 2850 of the second embodiment), it is arranged so as to be in contact with the movable closing member 5931 of the ball ejection adjusting device 5900. A pressing action unit 5870 is provided.

The ball exit adjusting device 5900 is formed and stored through a flow passage forming portion 5910 that allows a ball that has entered the second entry port 640 to flow down, and a thin plate member 1110 of the main body member 2100 at the lower end portion of the flow passage forming portion 5910. Mainly, a communication hole 5920 arranged in a manner (opening diameter, arrangement) capable of flowing a sphere into the flow path 1231, and an opening / closing member 5930 that opens and closes the communication hole 5920 in conjunction with the drive of the solenoids 1510 and 2810. Prepare for. The flow passage forming portion 5910 is arranged so as to pass through the back side (front side of the paper surface of FIG. 45) of the second variable winning device 5800, and is illustrated by an imaginary line for easy understanding. And the illustration of the middle part is omitted.

The flow passage forming portion 5910 is a bifurcated flow path through which a ball entering the second entry port 640 flows down, and the opening at the lower end is arranged to face the communication hole 5920 and the ball is arranged to the communication hole 5920. After the number of adjusting flow paths 5911 formed so as to be able to flow in and the number of balls stored in the adjusting flow path 5911 exceeds the specified number (30 in this embodiment), the balls further enter the second entry port 640. It is mainly provided with a surplus ball discharge flow path 5915 for discharging the ball to the ball discharge path (not shown).

The adjustment flow path 5911 is a deceleration flow path 5912 formed as a back view inverted U-shaped flow path that is curved by half a turn near the lower end portion, and a second entry port 640 from the upper end portion of the deceleration flow path 5912. It mainly includes a drop flow path 5913 extending in the vertical direction toward the rear.

Due to the shape of the deceleration flow path 5912, the load applied to the sphere discharged from the communication hole 5920 from the subsequent spheres staying in the deceleration flow path 5912 in the opening direction of the communication hole 5920 is reduced regardless of the number of spheres staying. be able to. That is, the sphere discharged from the communication hole 5920 is loaded by the weight of the subsequent sphere from the subsequent sphere, but the deceleration flow path 5912 has a gentle inclination (near horizontal inclination) near the communication hole 5920. Therefore, the influence of the load due to its own weight can be reduced. Therefore, regardless of the number of spheres staying, the speed at which the sphere immediately before the communication hole 5920 is discharged from the communication hole 5920 can be made uniform, and the load applied from the sphere to the opening / closing member 5930 can be made uniform.

Since the falling flow path 5913 extends in the vertical direction, the flowing ball is not decelerated and falls freely. Therefore, when the balls enter the second entry port 640 in a row, the former ball is decelerated earlier than the latter ball, and the flow of the latter ball is obstructed, so that the latter ball is erroneously entered. It is possible to prevent the ball from entering the surplus ball discharge flow path 5915.

In the present embodiment, the adjusting flow path 5911 accumulates balls in order from the front of the communication hole 5920, and when the number of retained balls reaches 30, the upper end of the 30th ball is the surplus ball discharge flow path 5915. The flow path length is designed to exceed the lower end of the inlet opening. Therefore, after the 31st ball, the ball enters the surplus ball discharge flow path 5915. In other words, a maximum of 30 balls stay in front of the communication hole 5920.

In the present embodiment, as will be described later, after the jackpot game is completed, the game shifts to a high probability state of 30 rotations. During this period, the ball is likely to enter the second entrance 640, and the player can aim for the next big hit while suppressing the loss of the ball by advancing the game by the right-handed game. On the other hand, since the ball that has entered the second entry port 640 enters the adjustment flow path 5911, it stays in the adjustment flow path 5911 from the start of the high probability state to the end of the high probability state. The number of spheres increases.

The opening / closing member 5930 is arranged at a position protruding inward of the communication hole 5920 when the solenoids 1510 and 2810 are not excited, and the opening is closed below the outer shape of the sphere, while one of the solenoids 1510 and 2810 is excited. Along with this, the movable closing member 5931 arranged at a position retracted to the outside of the communication hole 5920, the movable closing member 5931, and the tip member 1520 of the drive device 1500 are connected and can be moved in the left-right direction by driving the solenoid 1510. A connecting rod portion 593 supported by the thin plate member 1110, and a slide rail portion 5933 disposed at the tip of the connecting rod portion 5932 and supporting the movable closing member 5931 so as to be movable up and down relative to the connecting rod portion 593. Mainly includes an elastic spring 5934 having one end disposed on the connecting rod portion 5932 and applying an ascending urging force to the movable closing member 5931.

46 (a) and 46 (b) are cross-sectional views of the first variable winning device 5000 on the XLVI-XLVI line of FIG. 45. FIG. 46 (a) shows a state in which the communication hole 5920 is open, and FIG. 46 (b) shows a state in which the communication hole 5920 is closed.

As shown in FIG. 46 (a), when the movable closing member 5931 is retracted and a ball can flow into and stay in the storage flow path 1231 from the communication hole 5920, up to the third ball AP53 flows into the storage flow path 1231. However, the fourth ball AP54 is fixed at a position where it cannot escape from the communication hole 5920.

In the jackpot game, a plurality of balls IP51 (only one ball is shown in FIG. 46) that have passed through the first specific winning opening 1000a or the second specific winning opening 2255a in this state flows into the storage flow path 1231, so that the communication hole The ball AP54, which is kept at a position where it does not come out of the 5920, is filled with the ball IP51 into which the space for entering the storage channel 1231 is filled. Therefore, the ball kept in a position where it cannot escape from the communication hole 5920 does not flow into the storage flow path 1231 even after that, and is maintained in the same position.

As shown in FIG. 46 (b), as the solenoids 1510 and 2810 are de-energized and the regulating member 2600 changes to the discharged state, the movable closing member 5931 moves from the overhang adjustment flow path 5911 to the storage flow path 1231. The inflow of balls is regulated.

When the discharge of the ball from the storage flow path 1231 is completed, the state is switched to the state shown in FIG. Spheres flow into the storage channel 1231.

In the jackpot game, as described above, the inflow of balls from the adjustment flow path 5911 into the storage flow path 1231 is repeated, and the inflow is defined to be a maximum of three per opening of the communication hole 5920. To.

A case where the jackpot game proceeds by driving the solenoid 1510 will be described with reference to FIG. 47. 47 (a) to 47 (c) are partial rear views of the first variable winning device 5000. In FIGS. 47 (a) to 47 (c), the operations of the opening / closing plate 1300, the regulating member 2600, and the opening / closing member 5930 driven by the solenoid 1510 are illustrated in chronological order.

In FIG. 47 (a), the solenoid 1510 is excited, and in FIG. 47 (b), the solenoid 1510 is de-energized and the tip of the time difference forming portion 5423 is on the back side of the engaging portion 1333 of the opening / closing plate 1300 (FIG. The state in which the time difference forming portion 5423 is arranged above the engaging portion 1333 is shown in FIG. 47 (c), and the state in which the time difference forming portion 5423 is arranged above the engaging portion 1333 is shown in FIG. 47 (c).

As shown in FIG. 47 (a), the communication hole 5920 is opened as the solenoid 1510 is excited, so that the ball can pass through.

When the state shown in FIG. 47 (a) changes to the state shown in FIG. 47 (b), the movable closing member 5931 moves with the movement of the tip member 1520, closing the communication hole 5920, and engaging the opening / closing plate 1300. Since the portion 1333 still abuts on the time difference forming portion 5423 of the power transmission member 5400 in the front-rear direction and the movement of the opening / closing plate 1300 is restricted, the regulating member 2600 maintains the stored state.

In the state shown in FIG. 47 (c), the regulation member 2600 is in the discharge state, and the ball staying in the storage flow path 1231 is discharged. That is, in driving the solenoid 1510, the communication hole 5920 can be closed before the discharge of the ball from the discharge port 1150 is started, so that the adjustment flow path is driven by the momentum of the discharge of the ball from the discharge port 1150. It is possible to prevent the ball from flowing from the 5911.

48 (a) and 48 (b) are partial rear views of the first variable winning device 5000. In FIGS. 48 (a) and 48 (b), the operations of the regulation member 2600 and the opening / closing member 5930 driven by the solenoid 2810 are illustrated in chronological order. FIG. 48 (a) shows a state in which the solenoid 1510 and the solenoid 2810 are not excited, and FIG. 48 (b) shows a state in which the solenoid 2810 is excited.

As shown in FIGS. 48 (a) and 48 (b), when the solenoid 2810 is excited, the movable closing member 593 is pushed down by the pressing action unit 5870, so that the communication hole 5920 is opened. As a result, the sphere can flow into the storage flow path 1231 through the communication hole 5920. On the other hand, when the excitation of the solenoid 2810 is released, the movable closing member 593 is moved up by the urging force of the elastic spring 5934, and the communication hole 5920 is closed.

Therefore, when either the solenoid 1510 or the solenoid 2810 is excited, the communication hole 5920 is opened so that the sphere can flow into the storage flow path 1231, while the non-excitation makes the communication hole 5920 open. It is closed and the inflow to the storage channel 1231 is restricted.

In the jackpot game in which the solenoids 1510 and 2810 are driven and controlled by the mechanism described above, a fixed number of balls (up to 3 in this embodiment) flow into the storage flow path 1231 through the communication holes 5920.

In the present embodiment, in the low probability state of the special symbol, for example, the jackpot of the special symbol is determined with a probability of 1/320, and in the high probability state of the special symbol (probability variation state of the special symbol), for example, 20 minutes. It is judged as a big hit of a special symbol with a probability of 1. Then, when it is determined that the special symbol is a big hit, after the jackpot game is completed, the special symbol is given a probability change state (high probability state) until the special symbol lottery is completed 30 times, and the special symbol lottery is performed 30 times. After the end, it is configured to be set to the normal state. In the present embodiment, in the high probability state of the special symbol, the hit probability of the normal symbol (second symbol) is increased, and the ball is easily won in the second entrance 640.

In the present embodiment, three types of special symbols, "big hit H", "big hit h", and "big hit i", are provided (see FIG. 49). Although the details will be described later, the opening patterns of the first specific winning opening 1000a and the second specific winning opening 2255a are configured differently depending on the jackpot type, and the number of balls entered into the first variable winning device 5000 can be changed. It is composed.

FIG. 49 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the correspondence between the first hit type counter C2 and the jackpot type in the special symbol. The first hit type selection table 202b (see FIG. 49) is a data table in which judgment values for determining the jackpot type are stored, and the judgment value of the first hit type counter C2 is each jackpot type and special. It is stipulated in association with the type of entry slot that triggered the lottery of the symbol. In the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, when it is determined that the special symbol is a big hit, the value of the first hit type counter C2 acquired based on the start winning prize is compared with the first hit type selection table 202b, and the first hit type selection table 202b is compared. The jackpot type corresponding to the value of the hit type counter C2 is selected.

Specifically, when a big hit is obtained in the lottery of the special symbol 1 (lottery based on the entry into the first entry slot 64), the value of the first hit type counter C2 is in the range of "0 to 99". Is defined in association with the jackpot H (see 202b51 in FIG. 49).

If a big hit is obtained in the special symbol 2 lottery (lottery based on entering the second ball opening 640), the big hit h is in the range where the value of the first hit type counter C2 is "0 to 19". Are associated with each other (see 202b52 in FIG. 49).

When the jackpot H or the jackpot h is reached, the jackpot game of 15 rounds is executed in the eleventh operation pattern of the first variable winning device 4000. In this case, the player can receive the payout of about 2250 prize balls, and can win a specified number of balls regardless of the timing of winning the jackpot, and can receive the payout of the specified upper limit.

If a big hit is obtained in the special symbol 2 lottery (lottery based on the entry into the second entrance 640), the value of the first hit type counter C2 is in the range of "20 to 99". Are associated with each other and specified (see 202b53 in FIG. 49).

When the jackpot i is reached, the jackpot game of 15 rounds is executed in the twelfth operation pattern of the first variable winning device 4000. In this case, the maximum value of the number of prize balls to be paid out and the time required for the jackpot game are variable according to the number of balls entered in the second entrance 640 until the jackpot is acquired.

That is, if a big hit is obtained in the special symbol 1 lottery (lottery based on the entry into the first entry slot 64), the specified number of prize balls can be paid out regardless of the timing of the big hit. If a big hit is obtained in the special symbol 2 lottery (lottery based on the entry into the second entry opening 640), the prize balls will be awarded according to the number of balls entered in the second entry opening 640 until the big hit is obtained. Since the maximum number of payouts and the time required for the jackpot game are variable, the game of winning the jackpot in the right-handed game is different from the payout of the prize ball depending on when the jackpot of the right-handed game occurs. Gender can be added. As a result, it is possible to suppress the right-handed game from being played indiscriminately, and it is possible to improve the attention to each fluctuation.

Next, with reference to FIG. 50, the opening patterns of the first specific winning opening 1000a and the second specific winning opening 2255a in the present embodiment will be described. FIG. 50 (a) is a diagram showing the timekeeping change of the first specific winning opening 1000a and the second specific winning opening 2255a in the eleventh operation pattern, and FIG. 50 (b) is a diagram showing a time change in the twelfth operation pattern. It is a figure which showed the timekeeping change of 1 specific winning opening 1000a and 2nd specific winning opening 2255a.

When the jackpot is determined in the special figure hit determination, the MPU 201 (see FIG. 4) starts controlling the determined type of jackpot game after the end of the special figure variation display (symbol variation effect). Hereinafter, operation control of the opening / closing plate 1300 and the slide plate 2840 performed when the jackpot game is given will be described.

<When operating in the 11th operation pattern>
When the jackpot type is jackpot H or jackpot h, the MPU 201 drives and controls the solenoids 1510 and 2810 so that the opening / closing plate 1300 and the slide plate 2840 operate based on the eleventh operation pattern.

When the special figure variation display (design variation effect) is completed, the MPU 201 holds the opening / closing plate 1300 and the slide plate 2840 in the closed state until a predetermined opening time OP (10 seconds) elapses by the timer means (not shown). The solenoids 1510 and 2810 are driven and controlled, and after the opening time OP elapses, the first round game R is started.

That is, the solenoid 2810 is driven and controlled so that the first operating time T1 (maximum 30 seconds) is measured by the timer means and the slide plate 2840 is displaced from the closed state to the open state to open the second specific winning opening 2255a. Then, the slide plate 2840 is operated for a long time.

Then, in the first round game R, the lapse of the round end condition (round game time (30 seconds, which is the maximum value of the first operating time T1) or the specified number (10 in the present embodiment) of pachinko balls When the winning) is satisfied, the solenoid 2810 is driven and controlled so as to displace the slide plate 2840 to the closed state and close the second specific winning opening 2255a, and the round game R of the first round ends.

In the first round game R, with the opening of the second specific winning opening 2255a, the communication hole 5920 is opened, and a maximum of three balls flow into the storage flow path 1231 (see FIGS. 46 and 48). 2 When storing spheres from the storage flow path 2251 to the storage flow path 1231, 13 spheres can be stored downstream of the second detection sensor 2255, so how many spheres (1 to 1) flow in from the communication hole 5920. Even if the number is 3), there is no problem, and the round game R can be completed by winning a specified number (10C).

When the round game R of the first round is completed, the timer means solenoids 1510 and 2810 keep the opening / closing plate 1300 and the slide plate 2840 in the closed state until the third interval time Int3 (3.0 seconds) between rounds elapses. Is driven and controlled, and after the lapse of the third interval time Int3 between rounds, the second round game R is started. Here, since a maximum of 15 balls can be discharged from the discharge port 1150 by the interval of 3 seconds, a part of the storage flow path 1231 and the second storage flow path 2251 at the end of the first round game R are completed. It is possible to discharge all the balls (up to 14) that can be stored in a row.

In the second round, as in the start of the first round, the first operating time T1 (maximum 30 seconds) is measured by the timer means, and the slide plate 2840 is displaced from the closed state to the open state to specify the second. The solenoid 2810 is driven and controlled so as to open the winning opening 2255a, so that the slide plate 2840 operates for a long time.

Then, when the round end condition (round game time (30 seconds, which is the maximum value of the first operating time T1) elapses or a specified number of pachinko balls are won) is satisfied in the second round game R. The solenoid 2810 is driven and controlled so as to displace the slide plate 2840 to the closed state and close the second specific winning opening 2255a, and the second round game R ends.

After that, similarly, the round game R from the third round to the maximum 15 rounds is repeated with the first interval time Int1 between rounds sandwiched between the round game R, and the slide plate 2840 is in the closed state and the open state. The solenoid 2810 is driven and controlled so as to open and close the second specific winning opening 2255a.

Then, when the round game R of the final round is completed, the solenoid 2810 is driven and controlled so that the timer means keeps the slide plate 2840 in the closed state until the third interval time Int3 between rounds and the ending time ED (11 seconds) elapse. Then, the jackpot game ends with the passage of the time.

According to this operation pattern, three balls flow into the storage flow path 1231 from the adjustment flow path 5911 for each drive operation (excitation) of the solenoid 2810. Therefore, even if the maximum number (30) of balls is stored in the adjustment flow path 5911, all the balls are stored by the end of the jackpot game (at the end of the 10th round game R). Since the ball can be entered into the road 1231, the jackpot game can be completed without the ball remaining in the storage flow path 1231.

<When operating with the 12th operation pattern>
In the case of a jackpot game in which the jackpot type is jackpot i, the MPU 201 drives and controls the solenoids 1510 and 2810 so that the opening / closing plate 1300 and the slide plate 2840 operate based on the twelfth operation pattern. When the special figure variation display (design variation effect) is completed, the MPU 201 holds the opening / closing plate 1300 and the slide plate 2840 in the closed state until a predetermined opening time OP (10 seconds) elapses by the timer means (not shown). The solenoids 1510 and 2810 are driven and controlled, and after the opening time OP elapses, the first round game R is started. Since the operation pattern up to the fourth round game R is the same as that of the eleventh operation pattern, the description thereof will be omitted.

When the round game R of the fourth round is completed, the timer means drives and controls the solenoid 2810 to keep the slide plate 2840 in the closed state until the third interval time Int3 (3.0 seconds) between rounds elapses, and the round After the lapse of the third interval time Int3, the fifth round game R is started.

In the fifth round, the solenoid 1510 is used to start measuring the first operating time T1 (maximum 30 seconds) by the timer means and to displace the opening / closing plate 1300 from the closed state to the open state to open the first specified winning opening 1000a. Is driven and controlled so that the opening / closing plate 1300 operates for a long time.

Then, when the round end condition (round game time (30 seconds, which is the maximum value of the first operating time T1) elapses or a specified number of pachinko balls are won) is satisfied in the fifth round game R. The solenoid 1510 is driven and controlled so as to displace the opening / closing plate 1300 to the closed state and close the first specific winning opening 1000a, and the fifth round game R ends.

Here, even in the fifth round of the round game R, the ball can flow in from the communication hole 5920, but unlike the fourth round, the ball enters from the first specific winning opening 1000a. Therefore, when the inflow of balls from the communication hole 5920 is actually performed, a predetermined number of balls cannot be won. Therefore, the number of prize balls that can be obtained in the fifth round game R of this operation pattern is smaller than that of the prize balls that can be obtained in the round game R of the same round in the eleventh operation pattern, and the first one. Since the end of the round game R is waited until the operation time T1 elapses, the time until the end of the jackpot game is prolonged.

After that, similarly, the 6th to 15th rounds of the round game R are repeated with the third interval time Int3 between the rounds sandwiched between the round games R, and the opening / closing plate 1300 is between the closed state and the open state. The solenoid 1510 is driven and controlled so as to be displaced and open / close the first specific winning opening 1000a.

Then, when the round game R of the final round is completed, the solenoid 1510 is driven and controlled so that the timer means keeps the opening / closing plate 1300 in the closed state until the third interval time Int3 between rounds and the ending time ED (11 seconds) elapse. Then, the jackpot game ends with the passage of the time.

In this operation pattern, the decrease in the number of prize balls that may occur in the subsequent round game R from the fifth round game R and the extension of the round time are such that the balls flow from the communication hole 5920 into the storage flow path 1231. This is caused by this, and depending on the number of balls remaining in the adjustment flow path 5911 at the start of the jackpot, how much the number of prize balls decreases and the round time is extended changes. The number of balls remaining in the adjustment flow path corresponds to the number of balls that have passed through the second entry port 640, while the special symbol 2 lottery (second entry port) is due to the passage of the balls in the second entry port 640. Since the lottery based on the entry into the 640) can be received, the number of balls remaining in the adjustment flow path 5911 is related to the number of lottery of the special symbol 2.

In the following description, in this operation pattern, the number of lottery of the special symbol 2 (lottery based on the entry into the second entry port 640) in the high probability state and the number of balls remaining in the adjustment flow path 5911. Is assumed to be the same number.

As described above, in the jackpot game of this operation pattern, three balls flow into the storage flow path 1231 when the first specific winning opening 1000a or the second specific winning opening 2255a is opened once. That is, up to the fourth round game R, a maximum of 12 balls have already flowed into the storage flow path 1231. Therefore, in the fifth and subsequent round games, the balls flow into the storage flow path 1231 through the communication hole 5920, and the jackpot game is started with 13 or more balls stored in the adjustment flow path 5911. If. In other words, it is a case where the jackpot game is started in a state where the lottery of the special symbol 2 (lottery based on the entry into the second entrance 640) has been received 13 times or more after the transition to the high probability state. ..

Therefore, if a big hit is obtained between the transition to the high probability state and the 12 times of the special symbol 2 lottery (lottery based on the entry into the second entrance 640), the number of prize balls will decrease. Since the round time is not extended, the player's attention to winning the jackpot by the 12th lottery can be improved.

In addition, even after the 13th lottery, the number of prize balls decreases with each lottery, and the round time is extended every 3 lottery, so the player can determine how many lottery the jackpot can be won. Can improve the attention of.

That is, for example, when a jackpot is won with 14 balls remaining in the adjustment flow path 5911 (14th lottery of special symbol 2), the balls are stored through the communication hole 5920 at the start of the fifth round game R. Since the number of balls flowing into the flow path 1231 is 2, the number of balls that can be won in this round is eight. In addition, when a big hit is won with 15 balls remaining in the adjustment flow path 5911 (15th lottery of special symbol 2), the storage flow path passes through the communication hole 5920 at the start of the fifth round game R. Since the number of balls flowing into 1231 is 3, the number of balls that can be won in this round is 7. Therefore, as the number of remaining balls increases, the number of prize balls paid out decreases in the fifth round game R.

On the other hand, when a big hit is won in the 13th to 15th lottery, in any case, the ball that remains in the adjustment flow path 5911 by flowing into the storage flow path 1231 at the start of the fifth round round game R. Is 0. Therefore, from the 6th round round game R, a specified number of balls can be won in the first specific winning opening 1000a, whereby the 6th round round game R can be completed, so that the round time There is no change in the degree of extension.

Further, when the number of remaining adjustment flow paths 5911 when the jackpot is won is 16 to 18, in the 6th round round game R, when 19 to 21, in the 7th round round game R, 22 to 24 Decrease in the number of prize balls in the 8th round round game R when the number is 25 to 27, in the 9th round game R when the number is 25 to 27, and in the 10th round game R when the number is 28 to 30. And the extension of the round time occurs.

As a result, as in the present embodiment, in the game playability in which the high-probability state ends depending on the number of lottery, when a big hit is obtained shortly after the transition to the high-probability state and when a big hit is obtained just before the end of the high-probability state. With, it is possible to make a difference in the profit given to the player (the number of prize balls paid out, the progress time of the jackpot game, etc.).

In this case, in the present embodiment, as the number of lottery from the transition to the high probability state to the acquisition of the jackpot increases, the profit given to the player decreases. Therefore, when the number of lottery until the jackpot is acquired is small, Originally, there should have been a high probability of receiving a lottery even with the remaining number of lottery, but the player's dissatisfaction that he cannot receive it can be partially resolved.

In other words, if you win a big hit in the first lottery after becoming a high probability state, you should be able to add the remaining 29 lottery and receive the next 59 lottery. In fact, the player's dissatisfaction with the fact that the high-probability state after the jackpot game is limited to 30 times can be partially resolved. As a result, the fairness of the game can be maintained.

Even in the high probability state, if a big hit is won in the lottery of the special symbol 1 (lottery based on the entry into the first entry opening 64), the second specific winning opening 2255a is set in the eleventh operation pattern. It is possible to receive the maximum payout regardless of the number of lottery after opening and closing and shifting to the high probability state. Therefore, the player may perform a game (left-handed game) aiming at winning a ball in the first ball opening 64 in a high probability state.

In this case, as compared with the case of performing a right-handed game, the number of balls discharged from the first out port 66 does not lead to the lottery of the special symbol, the interval for receiving the lottery becomes longer, and the game time becomes longer. It may be long.

Therefore, as a method of playing in a high probability state, the player can receive the maximum number of balls in a short time while suppressing the number of balls ejected from the first out port 66 before the jackpot is acquired. Whether you aim to win the jackpot h) (whether you play a right-handed game), or by the time you win the jackpot, more balls will be ejected from the first out port 66, and you are prepared for a longer game time. It is possible to appropriately select whether to aim for a jackpot of a jackpot type (big hit H) that can eliminate the risk of a drop in the prize ball in (play a left-handed game). As a result, the range of game methods to be selected can be expanded according to the player's taste and the situation (playable time, etc.).

After the high probability state ends, it becomes difficult to open the second entrance 640, and the player shifts to the left-handed game. In this case, a plurality of balls will remain in the adjustment flow path 5911, but in the jackpot of the jackpot type (big hit H) that can be obtained in the left-handed game, regardless of the number of balls remaining in the adjustment flow path 5911. Since the maximum number of payouts can be obtained by winning a specified number of prizes, the profit given to the player (profit in terms of both the number of prize balls and the playing time) is not impaired. Therefore, even if the player stops the game with the ball remaining in the adjustment flow path 5911 and the next player plays the game, it is possible to prevent the profit given to the player from being impaired. The player can start the game at any time.

In this embodiment, the number of lottery of the special symbol 2 in the high probability state (lottery based on the entry into the second entry port 640) and the number of balls remaining in the adjustment flow path 5911 (second entry). The explanation was made on the assumption that the number of balls entering the mouth 640 is the same, but in the actual game, the number of balls remaining in the adjustment flow path 5911 at the time of winning the jackpot is the number of balls remaining in the adjustment flow path 5911. It should be noted that the number is rarely the same as the number of lottery.

That is, the lottery of the special symbol 2 is performed when the ball wins the second entrance 640, and the player recognizes whether or not the big hit has been won in the lottery after that, the reach production and the subsequent reach production. , Since it is after the button pressing effect and the like, the player usually keeps hitting the ball into the second entrance 640 during that time. In the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, up to four balls can be held in the second entrance 640, so that a normal game mode (a game mode in which the player efficiently receives a lottery, a so-called hold stop) In addition to the number of lottery in which the player can recognize the judgment of the jackpot, a state in which a maximum of about four balls are entered into the second entrance 640 is maintained.

In addition, even if the ball enters the second entrance 640 when the number of holdings is maximum, the lottery cannot be received, but the ball enters the adjustment flow path 5911, so that the profit that the player can obtain in the jackpot game is obtained. It is more likely to decrease. The hold is digested when the fluctuation stops and the next fluctuation starts, so in other words, the longer the period until the fluctuation stops, the more likely it is that the profit that the player will get in the jackpot game will decrease. It will be.

Therefore, if the ball is left unattended during a highly anticipated production such as long reach, it is possible to form a playability in which the profit obtained by the player in the jackpot game is likely to decrease. As a result, it is possible to prevent the player from continuing to launch the ball during a highly anticipated production such as long reach, so that the concentration power that the player has devoted to adjusting the shot output of the ball is eliminated. can do. Therefore, it is possible to improve the player's concentration on the production such as long reach, and it is possible to improve the attention to the production.

Next, the sixth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 51 to 54. In the first embodiment, the case where the arrangement of the spheres stored in the storage flow path 1231 is fixed to a unique position has been described, but the first variable winning device 6000 in the sixth embodiment interferes with the spheres by driving. The arrangement of the spheres in the storage channel 1231 can be changed. The same parts as those of the above-described embodiments are designated by the same reference numerals, and the description thereof will be omitted.

FIG. 51 is a partial front view of the game board 13 in the sixth embodiment. As shown in FIG. 51, the probability fluctuation determination unit 4800 described above in the fourth embodiment is arranged below the first variable winning device 6000 in the present embodiment, and the ball discharged from the storage flow path 1231 is a specific region 4830. It is configured so that the state after the big hit game changes depending on whether or not it passes through.

FIG. 52 is a partial cross-sectional view of the first variable winning device 6000 on the LII-LII line of FIG. 51. Note that FIG. 52 shows the retracted state of the interference member 6930. The first variable winning device 6000 has the same configuration as the first variable winning device 1000 in the first embodiment (main body member 1100, lining front plate 1200, opening / closing plate 1300, power transmission member 1400, drive device 1500, regulation member 1600). In addition to the rear cover 1700), the new interfering device 6900 is provided in the sixth embodiment.

The interference device 6900 includes a solenoid 6910 arranged on the back side of the main body member 1100 and having a slide movable shaft arranged along a plane surface and a flat surface of the thin plate member 1110 of the main body member 1100, and the tip of a movable portion of the solenoid 6910. It mainly includes a tip member 6920 fixed to the body member 6920 and an interference member 6930 that slides in the front-rear direction of the main body member 1100 by the operation of the tip member 6920.

The tip member 6920 includes an elongated hole 6921 that is inclined with respect to the surface of the thin plate member 1110. The elongated hole 6921 is formed so as to be inclined so as to be closer to the thin plate member 1110 toward the tip side of the tip member 6920.

The interference member 6930 is slidably supported in the front-rear direction by a through hole H61 formed in a thin plate member 1110 arranged to face the storage flow path 1231 of the lining front plate 1200, and the rear end portion is a long hole 6921. The rear end portion moves back and forth along the elongated hole 6921 as the solenoid 6910 is driven. By this front-back operation, it is possible to enter the inside of the storage flow path 1231 through the through hole H61.

The through hole H61 is arranged at a position slightly left from the center of the third sphere P3 stored in the storage flow path 1231. The interference member 6930 slides forward from the through hole H61 to bring it into an overhanging state (see the imaginary line in FIG. 52), so that the sphere P3 is pressed and pushed to the upstream side of the storage flow path 1231.

53 (a) and 53 (b) are front views of the first variable winning device 6000. Note that FIG. 53 (a) shows the case where the interference member 6930 is in the retracted state, and FIG. 53 (b) shows the case where the interference member 6930 is in the overhanging state. A sphere that can be stored in the storage flow path 1231 is illustrated by an imaginary line, and "V" is described in the sphere that first enters the specific region 4830 according to the thirteenth operation pattern and the fourteenth operation pattern described later. ..

As shown in FIGS. 53A and 53B, 10 balls are stored in the storage flow path 1231 in the retracted state of the interference member 6930, while the third ball is stored in the overhanging state of the interference member 6930. Subsequent balls are pushed to the upstream side of the storage flow path 1231, and the number of stored balls is less than 10. Therefore, as in the present embodiment, when the specified number of balls for each round game R of the jackpot game is set to 10, if the interference member 6930 is in the overhanging state, the specified number of balls cannot be won. Since the round game R cannot be completed by winning a specified number of prizes, the end of the round game R will be waited until the specified time. The effects that can be realized by utilizing this difference will be described below together with the description of the game mode in the present embodiment.

In the present embodiment, in the low probability state of the special symbol, for example, the jackpot of the special symbol is determined with a probability of 1/10, and in the high probability state of the special symbol (probability variation state of the special symbol), for example, 4 minutes. It is judged as a big hit of a special symbol with a probability of 1.

Then, when the game ball passes through the specific area 4830, after the jackpot game ends, the special symbol's probability variation state (high probability state) is given until the special symbol lottery ends 10 times, and the special symbol lottery is performed 10 times. While it is configured to be set to the normal state after the end, if the game ball does not pass through the specific area 4830, it is normal until the lottery of the special symbol is completed 10 times after the end of the jackpot game. It is configured to shorten the time of the symbol.

In the present embodiment, two types of special symbols, "big hit I" and "big hit j", are provided. Although the details will be described later, the opening pattern of the first specific winning opening 1000a and the operating pattern of the distribution device 4850 are configured differently depending on the jackpot type, and the number of balls entered into the first variable winning device 6000 and the number of balls entered into the first variable winning device 6000 It is configured to change the probability of acquiring the right to move to the probabilistic state (high probability state) of a special symbol.

Specifically, when a big hit is obtained in the lottery of the special symbol 1 (lottery based on the entry into the first ball entrance 64), the big hit I is associated and defined (see FIG. 54). .. When the jackpot I is obtained, the jackpot game of two rounds is executed in the thirteenth operation pattern of the first variable winning device 6000 and the distribution device 4850. In this case, the player can receive the payout of about 285 prize balls and almost certainly cannot acquire the right to shift to the probabilistic state (high probability state) of the special symbol.

On the other hand, when a big hit is obtained in the lottery of the special symbol 2 (lottery based on the entry into the second entrance 640), the big hit j is associated and defined (see FIG. 54).

When the jackpot j is reached, the jackpot game of two rounds is executed in the 14th operation pattern of the first variable winning device 6000 and the distribution device 4850. In this case, the player can receive the payout of about 300 prize balls and almost certainly can acquire the right to shift to the probabilistic state (high probability state) of the special symbol.

As mentioned above, if you win a big hit in the special symbol 2 lottery (lottery based on entering the second ball entrance 640), you will almost certainly get the right to shift to the probabilistic state (high probability state) of the special symbol. Therefore, it is advantageous for the player as compared with the case where the lottery of the special symbol 1 (lottery based on the entry into the first entry slot 64) is a big hit. Therefore, in order to win a big hit in the special symbol 2 lottery (lottery based on the entry into the second entrance 640), the player plays a right-handed game in the probability variation state (high probability state) of the special symbol. Do.

During the probability change of the special symbol, the hit probability of the normal symbol increases, the fluctuation time of the normal symbol becomes shorter (3 seconds), and the opening time of the electric accessory 640a becomes longer when the normal symbol hits (1). Seconds x 2 times). Therefore, it becomes easy to put the ball into the second entrance 640, and it becomes easy to draw the special symbol 2. Therefore, once it is possible to shift to the probabilistic state of the special symbol, it is easy to become a big hit of the special symbol, and when it becomes a big hit, the jackpot j (almost certainly shifts to the probabilistic state (high probability state) of the special symbol). Since the probabilistic state of the special symbol, which is a big hit that can acquire the right of the player, is likely to be repeated, it is easy for the player to win a large number of prize balls. As a result, it is possible to make the player play the game while strongly expecting the player to shift to the probabilistic state of the special symbol, so that the player's interest in the game can be improved.

Next, with reference to FIGS. 54 (a) and 54 (b), the opening patterns of the first specific winning opening 1000a and the specific area 4830 in the present embodiment will be described. FIG. 54 (a) is a diagram showing the timekeeping change of the first specific winning opening 1000a and the specific area 4830 in the thirteenth operation pattern, and FIG. 54 (b) is a diagram showing the first specific winning in the fourteenth operation pattern. It is a figure which showed the timekeeping change of the mouth 1000a and the specific area 4830.

In addition, in FIG. 54, in order to facilitate identification, the first interval time Int1 between rounds is described ignoring the relative relationship with other times (sixth opening time OP6 and long-term operating time TL). Will be done. Therefore, it is not used for the relative comparison of the lengths of each time in FIG. 54, and the relative comparison of the lengths of each time is performed according to the time relationship described below.

When the jackpot is determined in the special figure hit determination, the MPU 201 (see FIG. 4) starts controlling the determined type of jackpot game after the end of the special figure variation display (symbol variation effect). Hereinafter, operation control of the opening / closing plate 1300, the distribution operation member 4851, and the interference member 6930, which is performed when the big hit game is given, will be described.

<When operating with the 13th operation pattern>
In the case of a jackpot game in which the jackpot type is jackpot I, the MPU 201 drives the solenoids 1510, 4852, 6910 so that the opening / closing plate 1300, the distribution operation member 4851, and the interference member 6930 operate based on the thirteenth operation pattern. Control.

When the special figure variation display (design variation effect) is completed, the MPU 201 closes the opening / closing plate 1300 and the distribution operation member 4851 until the timer means (not shown) elapses the predetermined opening time OP (10 seconds). , The solenoids 1510, 4852, 6910 are driven and controlled so as to hold the interference member 6930 in the retracted state, respectively, and the first round game R is started after the opening time OP elapses.

That is, the solenoid 1510 is driven and controlled so that the first operating time T1 (maximum 30 seconds) is measured by the timer means and the opening / closing plate 1300 is displaced from the closed state to the open state to open the first specific winning opening 1000a. Then, the opening / closing plate 1300 is allowed to operate for a long time.

When the opening / closing plate 1300 is displaced from the closed state to the open state, the MPU 201 closes the distribution operation member 4851 until the timer means (not shown) elapses the predetermined sixth opening time OP6 (3.0 seconds). After the 6th opening time OP6 elapses, the long-term operating time TL (27 seconds in this embodiment) distribution operation member 4851 is moved to the open position, and after the long-term operation time TL elapses, the distribution operation member 4851 The solenoid 4852 is driven and controlled so as to keep the closed state again, so that the distribution operation member 4851 operates for a long time.

When the opening / closing plate 1300 is displaced from the closed state to the open state, the MPU 201 holds the interference member 6930 in the retracted state until the predetermined sixth opening time OP6 (3.0 seconds) elapses by the timer means (not shown). Then, after the 6th opening time OP6 elapses, the interference member 6930 is changed to the overhanging state by the long-term operating time TL, and after the long-term operating time TL elapses, the solenoid 6910 is driven to hold the interfering member 6930 in the retracted state again. It is controlled to cause the interference member 6930 to operate for a long time.

Then, in the first round game R, the lapse of the round end condition (round game time (30 seconds, which is the maximum value of the first operating time T1) or the specified number (10 in the present embodiment) of pachinko balls When the winning) is satisfied, the solenoid 1510 is driven and controlled so as to displace the opening / closing plate 1300 to the closed state and close the first specific winning opening 1000a, and the round game R of the first round ends.

In the present embodiment, the interfering member 6930 is in an overhanging state for a long operating time TL. During this time, the storage channel 1231 cannot win a specified number of balls (see FIG. 53 (b)). Then, in the present embodiment, the sum of the sixth opening time OP6 and the long-term operating time TL becomes the maximum value of the first operating time T1, so that the interference member 6930 must wait until the maximum value of the first operating time T1. Is in the retracted state, so that it is practically impossible to win a predetermined number of balls, and the round game R of the first round ends with the lapse of the first operating time T1.

At the same time as the end of the first round round game R, the interference member 6930 changes to the retracted state, and the distribution operation member 4851 is switched to the closed state. Therefore, the sphere discharged from the storage flow path 1231 cannot be passed through the specific region 4830. Therefore, the player cannot acquire the right to shift to the probabilistic state (high probability state) of the special symbol.

When the round game R of the first round is completed, the timer means drives and controls the solenoid 1510 to keep the opening / closing plate 1300 in the closed state until the first interval time Int1 (2.0 seconds) between rounds elapses, and the round After the lapse of the first interval time Int1, the second round game R is started.

In the second round, as in the start of the first round, the first operation time T1 (maximum 30 seconds) is measured by the timer means, and the opening / closing plate 1300 is displaced from the closed state to the open state to specify the first. The solenoid 1510 is driven and controlled so as to open the winning opening 1000a, and the opening / closing plate 1300 is operated for a long time.

Then, when the round end condition (round game time (30 seconds, which is the maximum value of the first operating time T1) elapses or a specified number of pachinko balls are won) is satisfied in the second round game R. The solenoid 1510 is driven and controlled so as to displace the opening / closing plate 1300 to the closed state and close the first specific winning opening 1000a, and the second round game R ends.

When the second round game R is completed, the timer means closes the opening / closing plate 1300 and the distribution operation member 4851 until the first interval time Int1 between rounds and the ending time ED (11 seconds) elapses, and the interference member 6930. The solenoids 1510, 4852, and 6910 are driven and controlled so as to hold the above in the retracted state, and the jackpot game ends with the passage of the time.

<When operating with the 14th operation pattern>
In the case of a jackpot game in which the jackpot type is jackpot j, the MPU 201 drives the solenoids 1510, 4852, 6910 so that the opening / closing plate 1300, the distribution operation member 4851, and the interference member 6930 operate based on the 14th operation pattern. Control.

When the special figure variation display (design variation effect) is completed, the MPU 201 closes the opening / closing plate 1300 and the distribution operation member 4851 until the timer means (not shown) elapses the predetermined opening time OP (10 seconds). , The solenoids 1510, 4852, 6910 are driven and controlled so as to hold the interference member 6930 in the retracted state, respectively, and the first round game R is started after the opening time OP elapses.

That is, the solenoid 1510 is driven and controlled so that the first operating time T1 (maximum 30 seconds) is measured by the timer means and the opening / closing plate 1300 is displaced from the closed state to the open state to open the first specific winning opening 1000a. Then, the opening / closing plate 1300 is allowed to operate for a long time.

When the opening / closing plate 1300 is displaced from the closed state to the open state, the MPU 201 closes the distribution operation member 4851 until the timer means (not shown) elapses the predetermined sixth opening time OP6 (3.0 seconds). After the 6th opening time OP6 elapses, the long-term operating time TL (27 seconds in this embodiment) distribution operation member 4851 is moved to the open position, and after the long-term operation time TL elapses, the distribution operation member 4851 The solenoid 4852 is driven and controlled so as to keep the closed state again, so that the distribution operation member 4851 operates for a long time.

When the opening / closing plate 1300 is displaced from the closed state to the open state, the MPU 201 holds the interference member 6930 in the retracted state until the predetermined sixth opening time OP6 (3.0 seconds) elapses by the timer means (not shown). Then, after the lapse of the sixth opening time OP6, the interference member 6930 is changed to the overhanging state for a minute time (0.2 seconds in this embodiment), and after the lapse of the minute time, the interference member 6930 is held in the retracted state again. The solenoid 6910 is driven and controlled so that the interference member 6930 operates for a short time.

Then, in the first round game R, the lapse of the round end condition (round game time (30 seconds, which is the maximum value of the first operating time T1) or the specified number (10 in the present embodiment) of pachinko balls When the winning) is satisfied, the solenoid 1510 is driven and controlled so as to displace the opening / closing plate 1300 to the closed state and close the first specific winning opening 1000a, and the round game R of the first round ends.

In the present embodiment, although the interference member 6930 is in the overhanging state for a very short time, it is in the retracted state most of the time. Therefore, as shown in FIG. 53A, a specified number of interference members are used in the first round game. It is possible to win a ball. Therefore, the opening / closing plate 1300 is closed while the distribution operation member 4851 is in the open state, the regulation member 1600 is in the discharge state, and the ball can be discharged toward the probability fluctuation determination flow path 4820. It can flow down to a specific area 4830. Therefore, the player can acquire the right to shift to the probabilistic state (high probability state) of the special symbol.

When the round game R of the first round is completed, the timer means drives and controls the solenoid 1510 to keep the opening / closing plate 1300 in the closed state until the first interval time Int1 (2.0 seconds) between rounds elapses, and the round After the lapse of the first interval time Int1, the second round game R is started.

In the second round, as in the start of the first round, the first operation time T1 (maximum 30 seconds) is measured by the timer means, and the opening / closing plate 1300 is displaced from the closed state to the open state to specify the first. The solenoid 1510 is driven and controlled so as to open the winning opening 1000a, and the opening / closing plate 1300 is operated for a long time.

Then, when the round end condition (round game time (30 seconds, which is the maximum value of the first operating time T1) elapses or a specified number of pachinko balls are won) is satisfied in the second round game R. The solenoid 1510 is driven and controlled so as to displace the opening / closing plate 1300 to the closed state and close the first specific winning opening 1000a, and the second round game R ends.

When the second round game R is completed, the timer means closes the opening / closing plate 1300 and the distribution operation member 4851 until the first interval time Int1 between rounds and the ending time ED (11 seconds) elapses, and the interference member 6930. The solenoids 1510, 4852, and 6910 are driven and controlled so as to hold the above in the retracted state, and the jackpot game ends with the passage of the time.

Here, the sixth opening time OP6 is set as a time during which the number of winning balls is expected to be 3 or more and less than 6 in the round game R of the first round. In this case, since the interference member 6930 is arranged on the back side of the ball stored in the storage flow path 1231, the player's line of sight is blocked by the ball, and it is difficult to visually recognize the operation of the interference member 6930. Become. This makes it difficult for the player to confirm the operation mode of the interference member 6930.

Therefore, the change due to the overhang of the interference member 6930 is limited to the slight movement of the third and subsequent balls in the storage flow path 1231, so that the player recognizes whether or not the change due to the interference member 6930 has occurred. It can be made difficult, and the player can enjoy the game of winning a ball in the first specific winning opening 1000a and storing the ball in the storage flow path 1231 without giving a sense of discomfort to the player due to the operation of the interference member 6930. Can be done.

Then, the balls are stored up to the vicinity of the entrance of the storage flow path 1231, and even then, the first round of the round game R is not completed, which gives a sense of discomfort, and the number of balls stored in the storage flow path 1231 is actually counted. It is possible to form a new playability by recognizing the difference in jackpot type for the first time.

As described above, according to the present embodiment, it is difficult for the player to recognize the change in the situation (change in the state of the interference member 6930) visually recognized through the game board 13, and the player can use the operation mode of the first variable winning device 6000. It is possible to notify the change of the situation of the game board 13 from the given discomfort in an easy-to-recognize manner, and to make the player recognize the difference in the jackpot type. Therefore, the attention to the first variable winning device 6000 can be improved.

Next, a seventh embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 55 to 58. In the third embodiment, the case where the ball arranged at the vertical position of the drop position Pf3 falls as it is when the opening / closing plate 1300 is closed has been described, but the first variable winning device 7000 in the seventh embodiment has been described. The second drop delay plate 7260 is configured such that when the opening / closing plate 1300 is closed, the ball arranged at the vertical position of the drop position Pf3 can flow down to the drop delay plate 3250 side. The same parts as those of the above-described embodiments are designated by the same reference numerals, and the description thereof will be omitted.

FIG. 55 is a rear perspective view of the inverted front plate 7200 according to the seventh embodiment, FIG. 56 is a top view of the first variable winning device 7000, and FIG. 57 is a top view of XXXVc-XXXVc of FIG. 35 (b). It is a partial cross-sectional view of the 1st variable winning apparatus 7000 in the line corresponding to the line. Since the configuration of the first variable winning device 7000 of the present embodiment other than the lining front plate 7200 is the same as that of the first variable winning device 3000 described above in the third embodiment, the description thereof will be omitted.

As shown in FIGS. 55 to 57, the lining front plate 7200 has the same configuration as that described in the third embodiment (thin plate member 1210, side wall portion 1220, accommodating portion 1230, detection sensor 1240, and drop delay plate 3250). ), The second drop delay plate 7260 newly introduced in the present embodiment is provided.

The second drop delay plate 7260 is a plate member extending between the end surface 3251b and the accommodating portion 1230 on the back surface side of the thin plate member 1210, and descends so that the upper surface 7261 thereof separates from the detection sensor 1240. Tilt. As shown in FIG. 57, the second drop delay plate 7260 is extended rearward to the extent that it does not interfere with the plate portion 1310 of the opening / closing plate 1300.

As shown in FIG. 56, the second drop delay plate 7260 has a distance between the thin plate member 1110 and the front side wall surface in the vicinity of the detection sensor 1240 that is less than the diameter of the sphere, and at a position farthest from the detection sensor 1240. Also, the distance between the thin plate member 1110 and the front side wall surface is less than the diameter of the sphere.

On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 57, the second fall delay plate 7260 is arranged on the front side (left side of FIG. 57) of the movement locus of the ball rolling on the rolling arc portion 3252 of the fall delay plate 3250. That is, it does not act on the rolling sphere of the rolling arc portion 3252. That is, the second drop delay plate 7260 is configured as a plate member whose presence or absence in contact with the sphere changes depending on the arrival path of the sphere. This will be described below.

58 (a) and 58 (b) are partial cross-sectional views of the first variable winning device 7000 in the line corresponding to the XXXVc-XXXVc line of FIG. 35 (b). FIG. 58 (a) shows a case where the opening / closing plate 1300 changes to the closed state while the ball is arranged near the vertical position of the falling position Pf3, and FIG. 58 (b) shows the case where the opening / closing plate 1300 is in the closed state. In the meantime, the case where the ball rolls toward the drop position Pf3 is illustrated.

As shown in FIG. 58 (a), when the sphere is arranged near the vertical position of the drop position Pf3, the sphere is tilted forward along with the forward inclination of the plate portion 1310 that occurs during the operation of the opening / closing plate 1300, and the sphere is the front plate for lining. It flows down toward the 7200 side. Therefore, it comes into contact with the second fall delay plate 7260 in the process of flowing down, flows down to the fall delay plate 3250 side along the inclination of the upper surface, and then rolls on the upper surface of the fall delay plate 3250 and falls again at the drop position Pf3. To reach.

Since the distance between the second fall delay plate 7260 and the front side wall of the thin plate member 1110 (distance between the rolling surface 1311 of the opening / closing plate 1300 in the closed state) is less than the diameter of the sphere, the momentum of the sphere It is possible to prevent the ball from falling vertically on the back surface side of the second fall delay plate 7260 due to the large size.

On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 58B, the sphere that rolls the fall delay plate 3250 in the closed state of the opening / closing plate 1300 is on the main body member 3100 side along the rearward inclination of the rolling arc portion 3252 of the fall delay plate 3250. It flows down while contacting.

At this time, since the center position (maximum diameter position) of the sphere is arranged below the second fall delay plate 7260, the extension length of the second fall delay plate 7260 to the back side is set from the movement locus of the sphere. The ball falling from above can be caught by the upper surface 7261 while being fastened on the front side.

The ball rolling on the rolling arc portion 3252 does not come into contact with the second fall delay plate 7260 in the process of flowing down, and after reaching the drop position Pf3, falls as it is. Therefore, as in the third embodiment, the ball can be dropped without delay from the lower end of the drop delay plate 3250.

As described above, in the present embodiment, it is possible to switch between the case where the ball is affected by the second fall delay plate 7260 and the case where the ball is not affected by the action of the second fall delay plate 7260, depending on which side the ball is closer to the second fall delay plate 7260.

In the present embodiment, two balls are continuously rolled on the upper surface of the opening / closing plate 1300 while maintaining the action of smoothly dropping the ball that rolls the fall delay plate 3250 to the position facing the end surface 3251b, and the previous ball. Even when the opening / closing plate 1300 is closed by passing through the detection sensor 1240, it is possible to delay the fall of the ball arranged immediately before the detection sensor 1240.

Further, even if two balls are not connected in a row, the opening / closing plate 1300 happens to be closed when the balls rolling on the upper surface of the opening / closing plate 1300 are arranged in front of the detection sensor 1240. Also, the ball can flow down to the fall delay plate 3250 side. In this case, the ball rolls the upper surface 7261 of the second fall delay plate 7260 to the left, and then resumes rolling to the right along the upper surface of the rolling arc portion 3252 of the fall delay plate 3250.

Therefore, the ball can be substantially maintained on the front side of the opening / closing plate 1300 for more than the time required for rolling over the upper surface of the opening / closing plate 1300. This makes it possible to reduce the number of wasted balls (balls that flow down the front side of the opening / closing plate 1300 and are discharged from the first out port 66) that may occur during the interval time.

Next, the eighth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 59 to 65. 59 and 60 are front views of the first variable winning device 8000 according to the eighth embodiment, and FIGS. 61 and 62 are rear views of the first variable winning device 8000.

In FIGS. 59 and 60, the thin plate member 1210 is partially cut out so that the opening / closing plate 8300 can be visually recognized, and a part of the side wall portion 1220 and a part of the inclined surface 1237 are shown by imaginary lines. Further, in FIGS. 59 and 61, after the solenoid 1510 of the drive device 1500 is driven (excited), the opening / closing plate 8300 is in the open state (elevated posture), and the auxiliary opening / closing member 8340 is in the open state (extending posture). In FIGS. 60 and 62, the driving (excitation) of the solenoid 1510 of the driving device 1500 is released, the opening / closing plate 8300 is in the closed state (tilted posture), and the auxiliary opening / closing member 8340 is in the closed state (immersive posture). ) Is shown in the figure. Further, the same elements as those in the above-described embodiment are designated by the same reference numerals, and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

In the following description, with respect to the pachinko machine 10 in the state shown in FIG. 1, the front side of the paper surface will be referred to as the front (front) side, and the back side of the paper surface will be described as the rear (back) side. Further, with respect to the pachinko machine 10 in the state shown in FIG. 1, the upper side is the upper (upper) side, the lower side is the lower (lower) side, the right side is the right (right) side, and the left side is the left side (left). ) Side will be explained respectively. Further, the arrows UD, LR, and FB in the figure indicate the vertical direction, the horizontal direction, and the front-rear direction of the pachinko machine 10.

As shown in FIGS. 59 to 62, the opening / closing plate 8300 of the first variable winning device 8000 has a shaft portion 1320 described in each of the above embodiments, a loaded portion 1330, and both shaft portions 1320, which are approximately 4 mag. It is divided into minutes and includes a plate portion 8310 formed in a plate shape in three divisions on the left side of the front view (the side away from the detection sensor 1240).

That is, in the present embodiment, a gap is formed between the opening / closing plate 8300 and the detection sensor 1240 on the front surface of the thin plate member 1110, and the fixed receiving portion 8250 and the auxiliary opening / closing member 8340 are arranged in this gap. Will be set up.

Since the axial length of the plate portion 8310 of the opening / closing plate 8300 is shorter than that of the first embodiment, the formation range of the rectangular recess 1122 can also be shortened. In the present embodiment, the rectangular recess 1122 is formed in the minimum range necessary for the plate portion 8310 to enter (see FIG. 59).

The fixed receiving portion 8250 is a portion fixed to the lining front plate 8200 and plays a role of a rolling surface of a sphere guided to the detection sensor 1240. Since the configuration of the lining front plate 8200 is the same as that of the lining front plate 1200 described in the above embodiment except for the fixed receiving portion 8250, the same reference numerals are given to each configuration, and the details thereof are given. The explanation is omitted.

The fixed receiving portion 8250 is a rod-shaped member that protrudes from the back surface of the thin plate member 1210 toward the main body member 1100 side, and the protruding end portion (rear side end portion) is a support recess 1121 on the right side of the main body member 1100. It comes into contact with the main body member 1100 in a manner of closing the open end (front side end portion) of the above. Therefore, in the present embodiment, the shaft portion 1320 on the right side of the opening / closing plate 8300 is rotatably supported by the support recess 1121 and the fixed receiving portion 8250.

The fixed receiving portion 8250 is formed so that the upper surface (rolling surface of the sphere) is in a surface position with the upper surface (rolling surface) of the opening / closing plate 8300 in the open state, that is, as an inclined surface that inclines downward toward the right. The lower surface is formed from an arc shape centered on the rotation axis of the auxiliary opening / closing member 8340. The arc that is the basis of the shape of the lower surface is formed as an arc whose radius is shorter than the radius of the operation locus (arc) of the auxiliary opening / closing member 8340 (the radius of the longest portion, that is, the radius of the operation locus of the upper end portion of the facing surface 8341b). Will be done. As a result, the upper corner portion of the facing surface 8341b and the fixed receiving portion 8250 come into contact with each other in the moving direction of the auxiliary opening / closing member 8340, and the auxiliary opening / closing member 8340 moves (rotates) to the fixed receiving portion 8250 by a predetermined angle or more. Be regulated.

As shown in FIG. 59, the protrusion (extending length to the left) of the fixed receiving portion 8250 is designed so that the ball dropped from the left end of the inclined surface 1237 does not directly get on the rolling surface. To. That is, in the present embodiment, the left end of the fixed receiving portion 8250 is arranged to the left of the left end of the inclined surface 1237, but the overhang length thereof is less than the radius of the sphere. Therefore, when the ball falls vertically from the inclined surface 1237, even if the ball collides with the fixed receiving portion 8250, the center of gravity of the ball is to the left of the left end of the fixed receiving portion 8250. The event that the sphere flows down to the detection sensor 1240 hardly occurs, and the sphere spills to the left from the fixed receiving portion 8250 and falls toward the first out port 66.

In addition, when a ball spilled to the left from the fixed receiving portion 8250 rolls on the facing surface 8341b of the auxiliary opening / closing member 8340, the load applied from the ball to the auxiliary opening / closing member 8340 causes the auxiliary opening / closing member 8340 to be closed. (Oriented to rotate the auxiliary opening / closing member 8340 clockwise in front view). Therefore, it is possible to prevent the auxiliary opening / closing member 8340 from changing to the open state due to the load given from the ball.

Further, from the configuration on the upstream side of the first variable winning device 8000 in the game area (arrangement of nails, second ball opening 640, etc., see FIG. 2), a ball having a speed downward to the right to the fixed receiving portion 8250 It is extremely unlikely that a jumping event will occur.

Therefore, while the fixed receiving portion 8250 having the rolling surface is arranged on the upstream side of the detection sensor 1240, the fixed receiving portion 8250 alone does not have the effect of making it easy for the ball to be excessively guided by the detection sensor 1240. It is composed of.

The essence of the fixed receiving portion 8250 is to prevent a problem from occurring in the flow of a ball rolling on its upper surface (rolling surface) while opening and closing the auxiliary opening / closing member 8340 by a rotary operation. Hereinafter, the details of the auxiliary opening / closing member 8340 will be described.

The auxiliary opening / closing member 8340 is a member rotatably supported by the thin plate member 1110, and extends from the receiving plate 8341 arranged on the front side of the thin plate member 1110 and the receiving plate 8341 toward the rotating shaft. The rod-shaped connecting portion 8342 to be formed, the loaded portion 8343 disposed on the back side of the thin plate member 1110 and capable of contacting the power transmission member 1400, and the connecting portion 8342 and the loaded portion 8343 are made relatively non-rotatable. It is a rod-shaped member to be connected, and mainly includes a shaft support rod portion 8344 which is rotatably supported by a thin plate member 1110.

In the present embodiment, the shaft support rod portion 8344 has a shaft support portion supported by the thin plate member 1110 having a circular cross section, a support portion that supports the connecting portion 8342 on the front side thereof, and a load portion 8343 on the rear side thereof. The supporting portion to be supported is formed in a D-shaped cross section (a shape other than a circular shape). Fitting portions (holes or recesses) having a shape corresponding to this D-shape are formed in the connecting portion 8342 and the loaded portion 8343, and in the used state (see FIG. 59), the supporting portion and the fitting portion are fitted. By being combined, the connecting portion 8342 and the loaded portion 8343 are configured to rotate integrally.

The loaded portion 8343 is a substantially fan-shaped portion whose end is pivotally supported by the shaft support rod portion 8344, and has a contact curved surface 8343a which is a curved upper surface that abuts the power transmission member 1400 and a loaded portion 8343. It is arranged on the right side of the shaft support rod portion 8344 regardless of the posture of, and includes a center of gravity portion 8343b including the position of the center of gravity of the auxiliary opening / closing member 8340.

As shown in FIG. 62, the contact curved surface 8343a is a straight line that overlaps the lower surface of the extension portion 1420 during the operation of the power transmission member 1400, and is extended when the extension portion 1420 descends (tilts). The right end of the extension portion 1420 and the load-bearing portion 8343 has a surface substantially parallel to the contact start line FL1 including the point where the portion 1420 and the loaded portion 8343 start contact.

Since a smooth curved surface is formed from the right end portion toward the left end portion which is the end point of contact with the extension portion 1420 in a manner in which the radius of gyration gradually decreases, the extension portion 1420 and the loaded portion Load transmission with the 8343 can occur smoothly (with low dynamic friction). As a result, the followability of the loaded portion 8343 to the extended portion 1420 can be improved.

The center of gravity portion 8343b is a portion for maintaining the auxiliary opening / closing member 8340 in a closed state (immersive posture) when no load is generated from the power transmission member 1400. That is, since the center of gravity portion 8343b includes the position of the center of gravity of the auxiliary opening / closing member 8340, the auxiliary opening / closing member 8340 changes its posture toward the closed state (immersive posture) by rotation due to its own weight. Then, when the receiving plate 8341 of the auxiliary opening / closing member 8340 and the left end of the fixed receiving portion 8250 come into contact with each other, further rotation of the auxiliary opening / closing member 8340 is restricted, and the auxiliary opening / closing member 8340 is maintained in the closed state (immersive posture). Will be done.

The connecting portion 8342 is coupled to the receiving plate 8341 at the left end portion of the receiving plate 8341 (that is, a portion adjacent to the opening / closing plate 8300 and where a load may be generated). As a result, the rigidity of the left end portion of the receiving plate 8341 can be improved while narrowing the arrangement range of the connecting portion 8342. Therefore, when the solenoid 1510 is driven (excited), the auxiliary opening / closing member 8340 changes to the opening / closing plate 8300. Even if it collides with, the possibility that the auxiliary opening / closing member 8340 is damaged can be reduced.

The connecting portion 8342 need only be able to connect the receiving plate 8341 and the shaft support rod portion 8344, and the configuration mode thereof is not limited to this. For example, in addition to connecting the left end portion of the receiving plate 8341 and the shaft support rod portion 8344, the right end portion of the receiving plate 8341 and the shaft supporting rod portion 8344 may be connected (that is, two pieces). The left and right ends of the receiving plate 8341 may be supported by rods), and the two rods in that case are connected and reinforced by a planar plate portion along a plane orthogonal to the shaft support rod portion 8344. Is also good.

The receiving plate 8341 is a plate-shaped portion having a front-rear width similar to the lateral width of the plate portion 8310 of the opening / closing plate 8300, and is connected to a flat rolling plane 8341a and the left end of the rolling plane 8341a. It is provided with a facing surface 8341b which is a surface to be provided and is arranged to face the right end surface of the plate portion 8310 of the opening / closing plate 8300 in the open state (see FIG. 59).

The rolling plane 8341a is formed as a parallel plane connected to the rolling surface 1311 of the plate portion 8310 of the opening / closing plate 8300 in the open state (upward posture) in the open state (extended posture) at the surface position.

The facing surface 8341b is configured as a plane orthogonal to the rolling plane 8341a, and its lateral width (thickness of the receiving plate 8341) is substantially equal to the thickness of the plate portion 8310. As a result, the surface that receives the load at the time of contact between the facing surface 8341b and the plate portion 8310 can be increased, so that the receiving plate 8341 or the plate portion 8310 is damaged (cracking or chipping) due to the load at the time of contact. It can be easily avoided (such as being generated or damaged).

Here, the facing surface 8341b is arranged on the left side (the side away from the detection sensor 1240) of the plane passing through the shaft support rod portion 8344 and orthogonal to the central axis of the shaft portion 1320. Therefore, as shown in FIG. 59, the operation locus LC1 of the facing surface 8341b when the auxiliary opening / closing member 8340 operates in the open state (see FIG. 59) and the closed state (see FIG. 60) is a rolling plane in the open state. It swells above 8341a (outward in the radial direction of the shaft support rod portion 8344). This makes it easier to push the ball (one in the present embodiment) on the upper surface of the rolling plane 8341a into the detection sensor 1240, but the details will be described later.

Next, with reference to FIGS. 63 to 65, the operation modes and operation sequences of the auxiliary opening / closing member 8340, the opening / closing plate 8300, and the regulation member 1600 by the load transmitted through the power transmission member 1400 will be described.

In FIGS. 63 and 64, the operations of the opening / closing plate 8300, the auxiliary opening / closing member 8340, the power transmission member 1400, the tip member 1520 of the drive device 1500, and the regulation member 1600 are illustrated in chronological order. Further, FIG. 65 shows a change in the driving (excitation) state of the solenoid 1510 of the driving device 1500, and a timekeeping change in the positions and states of the tip member 1520, the opening / closing plate 8300, the auxiliary opening / closing member 8340, and the regulating member 1600.

63 (a) is a rear view of the first variable winning device 8000, and FIG. 63 (b) is a cross-sectional view of the first variable winning device 8000 in line LXIIIb-LXIIIb of FIG. 63 (a). 63 (c) is a rear view of the first variable winning device 8000, and FIG. 63 (d) is a cross-sectional view of the first variable winning device 8000 on the LXIIId-LXIIId line of FIG. 63 (c).

FIG. 64 (a) is a rear view of the first variable winning device 8000, and FIG. 64 (b) is a cross-sectional view of the first variable winning device 8000 in the LXIVb-LXIVb line of FIG. 64 (a). 64 (c) is a rear view of the first variable winning device 8000, and FIG. 64 (d) is a cross-sectional view of the first variable winning device 8000 on the LXIVd-LXIVd line of FIG. 64 (c).

In FIGS. 63 and 64, the opening / closing plate 8300, the auxiliary opening / closing member 8340, the power transmission member 1400, the tip member 1520 of the drive device 1500, the regulating member 1600, and the lining front plate 8200 are fixed for easy understanding. Only the receiving portion 8250 is shown while maintaining the arrangement in the assembled state (see FIGS. 59 to 62), the illustration of other configurations is omitted, and the opening / closing plate 8300 and the auxiliary opening / closing member 8340 are in the closed state (FIG. 63 (FIG. 63). The state change from (see a) and FIG. 63 (b)) to the open state (see FIGS. 64 (c) and 64 (d)) is illustrated in chronological order.

That is, in FIGS. 63 (a) and 63 (b), the state in which the tip member 1520 of the drive device 1500 is arranged at a position separated from the reference line O1 by the first distance h1 (the state in which the solenoid 1510 is not excited) is In FIGS. 63 (c) and 63 (d), the tip member 1520 is displaced and an auxiliary second distance shorter than the second distance h2 (see FIG. 20 (c)) shorter than the first distance h1 from the reference line O1. In FIGS. 64 (a) and 64 (b), the tip member 1520 is displaced and separated from the reference line O1 by a third distance h3, which is shorter than the auxiliary second distance h2a, when the state is arranged at a position separated by h2a. In FIGS. 64 (c) and 64 (d), the tip member 1520 is displaced and separated from the reference line O1 by a fourth distance h4, which is shorter than the third distance h3 (the solenoid 1510 is located). The states arranged at the final arrival position when excited are shown in the figure.

In the state where the tip member 1520 is arranged at a position separated from the reference line O1 by the auxiliary second distance h2a (see FIG. 63 (c)), the power transmission member 1400 makes the lower surface of the extension portion 1420 contact with the contact start line FL1. It is the same as the state to be matched. That is, in the states shown in FIGS. 63 (c) and 63 (d), the auxiliary opening / closing member 8340 starts receiving a load from the power transmission member 1400 (from the states shown in FIGS. 63 (a) and 63 (b), FIG. The auxiliary opening / closing member 8340 is maintained in the closed state until the states shown in 63 (c) and 63 (d) are reached).

FIG. 65 is a diagram showing changes in the drive (excitation) state of the solenoid 1510 of the drive device 1500, and changes in the positions and states of the tip member 1520, the opening / closing plate 8300, the auxiliary opening / closing member 8340, and the regulating member 1600. In FIG. 65, the distances h1, h2, h2a, h3, and h4 are shown in the column of the tip member 1520 corresponding to the position of the tip member 1520.

The opening / closing plate 8300, the auxiliary opening / closing member 8340, and the regulating member 1600 are each driven by driving (excitation) of a single solenoid 1510, but as shown in FIG. 65, there is a time lag in the operation timing.

That is, when the solenoid 1510 is driven (excited), that is, when the tip member 1520 moves from the left end to the right end, the opening / closing plate 8300 starts operating earlier and ends earlier than the auxiliary opening / closing member 8340. ..

Further, the regulation member 1600 starts operating toward the storage state after the auxiliary opening / closing member 8340 starts operating toward the open state, and enters the storage state at the same time when the opening / closing plate 8300 is opened. As shown in FIG. 65, each timing chart is symmetrically shown. When the solenoid 1510 is de-excited, each member operates in the reverse order of the driving (excitation).

As shown in FIG. 65, when the drive (excitation) of the solenoid 1510 is released, the opening / closing plate 8300 has not reached the closed state at the timing when the auxiliary opening / closing member 8340 reaches the closed state, and the first specific winning opening 1000a The state in which the ball can enter the ball is maintained (see FIGS. 63 (c) and 63 (d)). Therefore, during the period when the auxiliary opening / closing member 8340 changes from the open state to the closed state, the state in which the ball can pass through the detection sensor 1240 is maintained.

Here, in the present embodiment, the operation locus LC1 of the facing surface 8341b of the auxiliary opening / closing member 8340 is configured to bulge above the rolling plane 8341a, and the sphere P81 is detected by the detection sensor 1240 at the timing when the sphere P81 is detected. The center of the sphere P82 flowing down the upstream side of the sphere P81 is a plane orthogonal to the central axis of the shaft portion 1320 and passing through the center of the shaft support rod portion 8344 (the most bulging point of the operation locus LC1). It is arranged closer to the detection sensor 1240 than the plane through which it passes (see FIG. 59). Therefore, when the auxiliary opening / closing member 8340 changes from the open state to the closed state, a rightward (direction of pushing into the detection sensor 1240) load can be applied to the ball P82 at the upper end of the facing surface 8341b.

As a result, the ball P81 is the detection sensor on the premise that a continuous ball is formed according to the configuration of the present embodiment (see the balls P81 and P82 in FIG. 59 in which the condition of the ball upstream of the detection sensor 1240 satisfies the condition). When the excitation (drive) of the solenoid 1510 is released by being detected by 1240 (for example, when the ball P81 is detected by the detection sensor 1240 and a specified number of balls are detected in the round game R). Even so, only one ball (corresponding to the ball P82) on the rolling plane 8341a of the auxiliary opening / closing member 8340 is an excess prize (so-called over prize, that is, a specified number of round games R (this). In the embodiment, it can be configured to allow more than 10 balls to be detected by the detection sensor 1240 (passing through the first specific winning opening 1000a).

In the present embodiment, the receiving surface 8341 operates in an arc orbit to give a load to the sphere P82, and after being pushed toward the detection sensor 1240 by the load, the upper surface of the fixed receiving portion 8250 is rolled. Therefore, as compared with the case where the sphere P82 is pushed into the detection sensor 1240 along the arc trajectory, the sphere P82 flutters when passing through the opening of the detection sensor 1240 (the sphere P82 collides with the inner surface of the detection sensor 1240 and flows down. It is possible to prevent the occurrence of stagnation, bounce, etc.).

In the present embodiment, the spheres can be stored on the downstream side (storage flow path 1231) of the detection sensor 1240, and as described in each of the above embodiments, the detection sensor is made up of the spheres stored in the storage flow path 1231. It is configured to regulate the passage of 1240 balls. Therefore, when the storage flow path 1231 is full of spheres, the sphere P82 does not enter the storage flow path 1231 by being restricted by the spheres stored in the storage flow path 1231, and auxiliary opening and closing is performed. After the member 8340 is closed, it spills and flows down toward the first out port 66.

On the other hand, if there is a gap in the storage flow path 1231, the excess winning can be allowed only for one sphere on the rolling plane 8341a of the auxiliary opening / closing member 8340. Therefore, the easiness of generating the excess prize can be changed by the arrangement of the spheres downstream of the detection sensor 1240 (that is, the arrangement of the spheres inside the storage flow path 1231). It can be carried out by controlling the flow of the sphere in the road 1231.

According to the present embodiment described in detail above, the following excellent effects are obtained.

The contact curved surface 8343a of the auxiliary opening / closing member 8340 is smooth in such a manner that the radius of gyration gradually shortens from the contact start portion (right end portion) to the contact end portion (left end) with the power transmission member 1400. A curve was formed. As a result, load transmission can be generated in a state where the dynamic friction is small. As a result, the followability of the loaded portion 8343 to the extended portion 1420 can be improved.

In a state where a continuous ball is formed on the upstream side of the ball entering the detection sensor 1240 (first specific winning opening 1000a), the auxiliary opening / closing member 8340 is limited to one ball on the rolling plane 8341a. When the state changes (rotates) from the open state to the closed state, a load is applied from the rolling plane 8341a to the detection sensor 1240 (first specific winning opening 1000a). As a result, when the auxiliary opening / closing member 8340 is rotated (when it is operated to the closed state), a limited number of balls (one in the present embodiment) enter the detection sensor 1240 (first specific winning opening 1000a). It can be made easier to ball. This makes it possible to increase the possibility that a limited number of excess prizes will occur.

In addition, the likelihood of this excess winning will vary depending on how the balls in the storage channel 1231 are accumulating. That is, the possibility of excess winning can be changed depending on the arrangement state (stored number, etc.) of the spheres in the storage flow path 1231 when the auxiliary opening / closing member 8340 rotates (operates toward the closed state). Further, the arrangement state of the spheres in the storage flow path 1231 can be adjusted by the drive (excitation) control mode of the opening / closing plate 8300 and the operation mode of the interference member 6930. That is, by controlling the driving (excitation) mode of the opening / closing plate 8300 and the interference member 6930, it is possible to equalize the number of prize balls to be paid out due to the excess prize.

Next, a ninth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 66 to 72. 66 and 67 are front views of the first variable winning device 9000 according to the ninth embodiment, and FIGS. 68 and 69 are rear views of the first variable winning device 9000. The same elements as those in the above-described embodiment are designated by the same reference numerals, and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

In FIGS. 66 and 68, the solenoid 1510 of the drive device 1500 is driven (excited), the opening / closing plate 8300 is in the open state (elevated posture), and the auxiliary opening / closing member 8340 is in the open state (extending posture). In FIGS. 67 and 69, the drive (excitation) of the solenoid 1510 of the drive device 1500 is released, the opening / closing plate 8300 is in the closed state (tilted posture), and the auxiliary opening / closing member 8340 is in the closed state (immersive posture). The state after becoming is illustrated.

As shown in FIGS. 66 to 69, the first variable winning device 9000 is a combination of the configurations described in the above embodiment except that the thin plate member 9110 of the main body member 9100 is different from the above embodiment. Briefly, it corresponds to a power transmission member 1400 of the first variable winning device 8000 in the eighth embodiment replaced with the power transmission member 5400 described in the fifth embodiment.

Similar to the above embodiment, in the power transmission member 5400, the front side overhang end of the push-in portion 1422 and the front side overhang end of the time difference forming portion 5423 are the same orthogonal to the rotation axis of the power transmission member 5400. Arranged on a plane. Therefore, the opening / closing plate 8300 is opened even when the time difference forming portion 5423 pushes the engaging portion 1333 of the opening / closing plate 8300 (corresponding to the state shown in FIG. 71 (a) even before being pushed by the pushing portion 1422). The state changes to the state (see FIGS. 66 and 68).

The thin plate member 9110 extends to the front side of the thin plate member 9110 with a length that allows the ball to be guided to the auxiliary entry port 9111 and the auxiliary entry port 9111 that are bored with a size that allows the ball to pass through. Mainly provided with a rolling plate 9112.

The auxiliary ball entry port 9111 is a through hole arranged to the left of the discharge port 1150 in front view, and by detecting the passage of the ball, a plurality of balls (three in the present embodiment) are paid out. It is a prize ball mouth. The configuration of the present embodiment is not limited, and for example, the auxiliary ball entry port 9111 may be used as an entry port (for example, an out port) in which the prize ball is not paid out.

The rolling plate 9112 is configured as a plate in which a ball flowing down between the main body member 9100 and the lining front plate 8200 rolls on the upper surface, and as the upper surface approaches the auxiliary entry port 9111 (to the right). ) Formed as an inclined surface that slopes downward. Further, the rolling plate 9112 is formed so as to be connected to the lower side of the auxiliary entry port 9111, and on the front side of the auxiliary entry port 9111, it is formed as an inclined surface whose upper surface is inclined downward toward the back side. To.

That is, the ball on the upper surface of the rolling plate 9112 is guided to the front side of the auxiliary entry port 9111 along the inclination, and then passes through the auxiliary entry port 9111 and is discharged from the game area. At this time, in the present embodiment, three prize balls are paid out to the player.

The length of the rolling plate 9112 is designed so as not to pick up the ball flowing down the flow path FK1 of the ball that rolls on the upper surface of the inclined surface 1237 and freely falls. That is, in a state where the first variable winning device 9000 is not driven, the ball does not pass through the auxiliary entry port 9111 no matter how long the right-handed hit is continued.

On the other hand, the opening / closing plate 8300 having an upper surface that inclines downward toward the right is driven even slightly (for example, the opening / closing plate 8300 is excited for 0.1 seconds and rotates toward the open state), and the opening / closing plate 8300 is directed to the right. When the ball flows down the load flow path FK2 on which the loaded ball flows down, the ball may roll on the upper surface of the rolling plate 9112 and pass through the auxiliary entry port 9111. That is, in the present embodiment, when the opening / closing plate 8300 is driven, the ball that comes into contact with the opening / closing plate 8300 can pass through the auxiliary entry opening 9111 in addition to the first specific winning opening 1000a.

Here, since the operation mode of the opening / closing plate 8300 is different from that described above in the eighth embodiment, it will be described in detail with reference to FIGS. 70 to 72.

In FIGS. 70 and 71, the operations of the opening / closing plate 8300, the auxiliary opening / closing member 8340, the power transmission member 5400, the tip member 1520 of the drive device 1500, and the regulation member 1600 are illustrated in chronological order. Further, FIG. 72 shows a change in the driving (excitation) state of the solenoid 1510 of the driving device 1500, and a timekeeping change in the positions and states of the tip member 1520, the opening / closing plate 8300, the auxiliary opening / closing member 8340, and the regulating member 1600.

70 (a) is a rear view of the first variable winning device 9000, and FIG. 70 (b) is a cross-sectional view of the first variable winning device 9000 in the line LXXb-LXXb of FIG. 70 (a). 70 (c) is a rear view of the first variable winning device 9000, and FIG. 70 (d) is a cross-sectional view of the first variable winning device 9000 in the LXXd-LXXd line of FIG. 70 (c).

71 (a) is a rear view of the first variable winning device 9000, and FIG. 71 (b) is a cross-sectional view of the first variable winning device 9000 in the LXXIb-LXXIb line of FIG. 71 (a). 71 (c) is a rear view of the first variable winning device 9000, and FIG. 71 (d) is a cross-sectional view of the first variable winning device 9000 on the LXXId-LXXId line of FIG. 71 (c).

In FIGS. 70 and 71, the opening / closing plate 8300, the auxiliary opening / closing member 8340, the power transmission member 5400, the tip member 1520 of the drive device 1500, the regulation member 1600, and the lining front plate 8200 are fixed for easy understanding. Only the receiving portion 8250 is shown while maintaining the arrangement in the assembled state (see FIGS. 66 to 69), the illustration of other configurations is omitted, and the opening / closing plate 8300 and the auxiliary opening / closing member 8340 are in the closed state (FIG. 70 (FIG. 70). The state change from a) and 70 (b)) to the open state (see 71 (c) and 71 (d)) is illustrated in chronological order.

That is, in FIGS. 70A and 70B, the state in which the tip member 1520 of the drive device 1500 is arranged at a position separated from the reference line O1 by the first distance h1 (the state in which the solenoid 1510 is not excited) is 70 (c) and 70 (d) show that the tip member 1520 is displaced and is arranged at a position separated from the reference line O1 by an auxiliary first distance h1a shorter than the first distance h1. In a) and 71 (b), the state in which the tip member 1520 is displaced and is arranged at a position separated from the reference line O1 by an auxiliary second distance h2a shorter than the auxiliary first distance h1a is shown in FIGS. 71 (c) and 71 (b). In FIG. 71 (d), the tip member 1520 is displaced and is arranged at a position separated from the reference line O1 by a fourth distance h4 shorter than the auxiliary second distance h2a (final arrival position when the solenoid 1510 is excited). Each state is illustrated.

The state in which the tip member 1520 is arranged at a position separated from the reference line O1 by the auxiliary first distance h1a (see FIG. 70 (c)) is regulated by the intervening transmission portion 1332 of the opening / closing plate 8300 pushed down by the power transmission member 5400. It is the same as the state in which the extension portion 1620 of the member 1600 starts to come into contact with the extension portion 1620. That is, in the states shown in FIGS. 70 (c) and 70 (d), the regulating member 1600 starts to receive a load from the opening / closing plate 8300 (from the states shown in FIGS. 70 (a) and 70 (b), FIG. 70 ( The regulating member 1600 is maintained in the ascending posture (discharging state) until the state shown in c) and FIG. 70 (d) is reached).

In the present embodiment, unlike the eighth embodiment, the opening / closing plate 8300 is opened in a state where the tip member 1520 is arranged at a position separated from the reference line O1 by an auxiliary second distance h2a (see FIG. 71 (a)). The state (elevation posture) is set, and the regulation member 1600 is set to the stored state. Then, in a state where the tip member 1520 is arranged at a position separated from the reference line O1 by a fourth distance h4, the auxiliary opening / closing member 8340 (see FIG. 71 (a)), which was in the closed state, is opened (see FIG. 71 (a)). 71 (c)).

Therefore, from the state shown in FIGS. 71 (a) and 71 (b) to the state shown in FIGS. 71 (c) and 71 (d), the opening / closing plate 8300 is maintained in the open state (elevated posture) and regulated. The member 1600 is maintained in the stored state.

FIG. 72 is a diagram showing changes in the drive (excitation) state of the solenoid 1510 of the drive device 1500, and changes in the positions and states of the tip member 1520, the opening / closing plate 8300, the auxiliary opening / closing member 8340, and the regulating member 1600. In FIG. 72, the distances h1, h1a, h2a, and h4 are shown in the column of the tip member 1520 corresponding to the position of the tip member 1520.

The opening / closing plate 8300, the auxiliary opening / closing member 8340, and the regulating member 1600 are each driven by driving (excitation) of a single solenoid 1510, but as shown in FIG. 72, there is a time lag in the operation timing.

That is, when the solenoid 1510 is driven (excited), that is, when the tip member 1520 moves from the left end to the right end, the opening / closing plate 8300 starts operating earlier than the auxiliary opening / closing member 8340, and the opening / closing plate 8300 After the operation is completed, the auxiliary opening / closing member 8340 starts the operation.

Further, the regulation member 1600 starts operating toward the storage state before the auxiliary opening / closing member 8340 starts operating toward the open state, and the opening / closing plate 8300 enters the storage state at the same time as the opening state. As shown in FIG. 72, each timing chart is symmetrically shown. When the solenoid 1510 is de-excited, each member operates in the reverse order of the driving (excitation).

As shown in FIG. 72, when the solenoid 1510 is driven from the non-excited state, only the opening / closing plate 8300 starts operating, and the auxiliary opening / closing member 8340 does not start operating yet. Therefore, by shortening the drive (excitation) of the solenoid 1510 (by performing a short opening), the state of the opening / closing plate 8300 can be changed while the auxiliary opening / closing member 8340 is maintained in the closed state. This will be described with reference to FIG. 73.

FIG. 73 is a diagram showing changes in the driving (excited) state of the solenoid 1510 of the driving device 1500, and changes in the positions and states of the tip member 1520, the opening / closing plate 8300, the auxiliary opening / closing member 8340, and the regulating member 1600. In FIG. 73, the distances h1, h1a, h2a, and h4 are shown in the column of the tip member 1520 corresponding to the position of the tip member 1520.

FIG. 73 shows a case where the period for driving (exciting) the solenoid 1510 is half of the time required for the opening / closing plate 8300 to change from the closed state to the open state (0.1 seconds in the present embodiment). (That is, the case where it is driven (excited) for 0.05 seconds is shown).

In this case, the auxiliary opening / closing member 8340 is maintained in the closed state, and only the opening / closing plate 8300 repeats the operation of rising to the intermediate state. According to this operation, a load can be applied to the ball flowing down the front side of the opening / closing plate 8300. Therefore, the flow path of the ball reaching the front side of the opening / closing plate 8300 at the timing when the opening / closing plate 8300 is driven is flowed down. It is possible to switch from the path FK1 to the load flow path FK2 (see FIG. 66). Therefore, by continuing to launch the ball by hitting the right side, the ball can be passed through the auxiliary entry port 9111, and the prize ball can be paid out to the player.

With this configuration, for example, it is possible to configure the playability of paying out prize balls by a small hit game. In the small hit game, by driving (exciting) the solenoid 1510 in the opening pattern shown in FIG. 73, the flow path of the ball reaching the front side of the opening / closing plate 8300 is switched at the timing when the opening / closing plate 8300 operates to assist. The ball can be guided to the entry port 9111 to cause the prize ball to be paid out.

Since the solenoid 1510 of the small hit game can be driven a plurality of times in succession, the timing at which the ball reaches the front side of the opening / closing plate 8300 can be set at a plurality of time points. For example, since one drive (excitation) period is 0.05 seconds, if the total drive (excitation) period of the solenoid 1510 is 1.8 seconds, the solenoid 1510 is driven (excited) 36 times. be able to.

Further, by setting the drive (excitation) interval, it is possible to easily apply a load to the ball via the opening / closing plate 8300. For example, when the spheres are fired at intervals of 0.6 seconds, the solenoid 1510 is set at intervals of 0.5 seconds because 0.6 × X (number of arrivals of the spheres) = 0.5 × X + 0.1 × X =. By driving (exciting) with, a load can be applied to the spheres via the opening / closing plate 8300 at a ratio of about 1 in 5 spheres regardless of the timing of starting the driving (excitation).

In this case, about 7 balls can be guided to the auxiliary entrance 9111 in one small hit game, and about 21 prize balls can be paid out to the player.

The period of the small hit game in this case is 0.5 second interval × 36 times = about 18 seconds. By prolonging the time of one small hit game in this way, it is possible to prevent a situation in which the reserved ball of the special symbol disappears (cuts) by the end of the small hit game. As a result, the small hit game can be generated without interruption.

Further, in the present embodiment, since the auxiliary opening / closing member 8340 arranged above the auxiliary entry opening 9111 is maintained in the closed state, as in the case where the auxiliary opening / closing member 8340 operates (above the auxiliary entry port 9111). The ball that flows down to the auxiliary entry port 9111 side (that is, the ball that flows down in the load flow path FK2) is repelled by the load from the auxiliary opening / closing member 8340, or the auxiliary opening / closing. It is possible to prevent the member 8340 from being guided by the detection sensor 1240 on the rolling plane 8341a.

It will be described back to FIG. 72. As shown in FIG. 72, when the drive (excitation) of the solenoid 1510 is released, the opening / closing plate 8300 does not reach the closed state at the timing when the auxiliary opening / closing member 8340 reaches the closed state, and the first specific winning opening 1000a The state in which the solenoid ball can enter is maintained as described above in the eighth embodiment. Therefore, as described in the eighth embodiment, even in the present embodiment, it is possible to easily configure an excess prize with a limited number of balls.

In addition, in the present embodiment, when the drive (excitation) of the solenoid 1510 is released, the regulation member 1600 is controlled to change to the discharge state after the auxiliary opening / closing member 8340 is closed. When the storage channel 1231 is full, it is possible to prevent the balls from being discharged from the storage channel 1231 by mistake, and thus it is possible to prevent an excess prize from being generated.

Here, in the present embodiment, the opening / closing plate 8300 maintains the open state at the timing when the auxiliary opening / closing member 8340 is closed (see FIG. 71 (a)). Therefore, the state of the auxiliary opening / closing member 8340 can be changed while maintaining the state (open state) in which the ball can be placed on the upper surface of the opening / closing plate 8300. This will be described with reference to FIG. 74.

FIG. 74 is a diagram showing changes in the driving (excited) state of the solenoid 1510 of the driving device 1500, and changes in the positions and states of the tip member 1520, the opening / closing plate 8300, the auxiliary opening / closing member 8340, and the regulating member 1600. In FIG. 74, the distances h1, h1a, h2a, and h4 are shown in the column of the tip member 1520 corresponding to the position of the tip member 1520.

In FIG. 74, the period for releasing the drive (excitation) of the solenoid 1510 is set to 1/4 of the time required for the opening / closing plate 8300 to change from the closed state to the open state (0.1 seconds in the present embodiment). (That is, the case where the drive (excitation) is released for 0.025 seconds is shown). In the following, the mode of releasing the drive (excitation) is also referred to as "1/4 release".

In this case, the opening / closing plate 8300 and the regulating member 1600 maintain the state (maintain the storage of the sphere in the storage flow path 1231), and only the auxiliary opening / closing member 8340 changes from the open state to the closed state. According to this operation, among the spheres on the upper surfaces of the opening / closing plate 8300 and the auxiliary opening / closing member 8340, several spheres (auxiliary opening / closing member 8340 and the opening / closing plate 8300) arranged on the upstream side of the auxiliary opening / closing member 8340 A sphere arranged at the boundary of the above, mainly a sphere arranged outside the motion locus LC1) can flow down toward the auxiliary entry port 9111 (see FIG. 66).

As a result, when the ball that has rolled on the upper surface of the opening / closing plate 8300 passes through the detection sensor 1240 when the opening / closing plate 8300 is still in the open state (when 15 prize balls are paid out). , The case where the detection sensor 1240 passes through the auxiliary entry port 9111 without passing through (the case where three prize balls are paid out) can be configured.

In this case, since the time until the specified number of balls pass through the detection sensor 1240 is extended, the time of the round game R can be extended without causing ball loss.

The upper surface of the opening / closing plate 8300 and the auxiliary opening / closing member 8340 may be provided with irregularities, or a vertically long rib may be provided on the front side of the thin plate member 9110 at a position where a rolling ball contacts the upper surface of the opening / closing plate 8300. The flow speed of the spheres may be suppressed so that the spheres are connected on the upstream side of the detection sensor 1240. As a result, when the drive (excitation) of the solenoid 1510 is released by 1/4, the possibility that the sphere is arranged at the boundary position between the auxiliary opening / closing member 8340 and the opening / closing plate 8300 can be increased. By releasing 1/4 of the drive (excitation), the function of guiding the ball to the auxiliary ball entry port 9111 can be improved.

Further, the timing and the number of times to execute the 1/4 release of the solenoid 1510 can be set to a plurality of types by associating with the jackpot type.

For example, when the balls are fired at intervals of 0.6 seconds, 1/4 of the drive (excitation) of the solenoid 1510 is released during the 9.0 seconds required for the 15 balls to reach the opening / closing plate 8300. Is generated 5 times, that is, once every 1.8 seconds, 1/4 release of the drive (excitation) of the solenoid 1510 occurs once, thereby assisting about 5 balls during the round game R. It is possible to guide to the entry port 9111.

In this case, the number of prize balls paid out to the player can be the same as the case where only one ball is excessively won in the first specific winning opening 1000a in the round game R.

In addition, by doubling this interval, that is, once every 3.6 seconds, 1/4 release of the solenoid 1510 occurs once, about 5 balls can be played while the round game R is executed twice. It can be guided to the auxiliary ball entrance 9111.

In this case, the number of prize balls paid out to the player can be the same as the case where only one ball is excessively won in the first specific winning opening 1000a while the round game R is executed twice.

In addition, in order to satisfy 5 times in 9.0 seconds, it is not necessary to set equal intervals of 1.8 seconds each. For example, 1.4 seconds, 1.6 seconds, 1.8 seconds, 2.0 seconds, 2.2 seconds, and so on, in the manner of adding 0.2 seconds each, 5 times in 9.0 seconds, solenoid 1510. 1/4 of the above may be released. Further, the solenoid 1510 may be released by 1/4 at different timings. This makes it difficult for the player to predict when the solenoid 1510 will be released in 1/4.

Further, for example, by concentrating the timing of executing 1/4 release of the solenoid 1510 in the first half of the round game R, the ball is guided to the auxiliary entry port 9111 by continuing to shoot the ball from the start time of the round game R. It is possible to construct a playability that increases the probability of being played.

In this case, if the firing of the ball is stopped at the interval between rounds, the ball may not reach the first variable winning device 9000 at the timing when the 1/4 release of the solenoid 1510 is executed. Can be suppressed.

That is, if the ball is launched at the interval between rounds, the next round game R can be started in a state where the launched ball has reached the vicinity of the first variable winning device 9000, and the auxiliary entry is performed. Since the probability that the ball will be guided to the ball opening 9111 can be increased, and as a result, the number of prize balls to be paid out can be increased, it is possible to enthusiastically keep the player hitting the ball at the interval between rounds. it can.

Further, for example, by concentrating the timing of executing the 1/4 release of the solenoid 1510 in the latter half of the round game R, a specified number (10 in this embodiment) of prizes (first specific) is won until the middle of the round game R. It is possible to promote a loose jackpot game in which a ball is intermittently fired so as not to cause a winning of the winning opening 1000a).

In this case, in the latter half of the round game R, if the round game R is prolonged until the release of 1/4 of the solenoid 1510 is executed, the prize ball will be paid out due to the ball passing through the auxiliary entry port 9111. Since it can be made to pay out and the number of payouts can be increased, it is possible to make the player perform a loose jackpot game such as enthusiastically firing a ball intermittently.

In this case, a difference is provided in the number of times that the solenoid 1510 is released 1/4 in the latter half of the round game R (for example, there are 0 times, 1 time, and 5 times). As a result, the additional prize balls obtained as a result of the loose jackpot game can be differentiated, so that the player's attention to the flow mode of the balls that have reached the first variable winning device 9000 is maintained in a high state. can do.

On the other hand, the balls may be continuously fired, and a specified number (10 in this embodiment) of balls may be won in the first specific winning opening 1000a before the drive (excitation) of the solenoid 1510 is released. .. In this case, it is not expected that the payout of prize balls will increase due to the passage of the ball through the auxiliary ball opening 9111, but by shortening the time required for the round game R, the start timing of the next round game R and the end of the jackpot game You can accelerate the timing of receiving the lottery later.

In this way, the player can arbitrarily select whether to aim for the payout of the prize ball by the auxiliary ball opening 9111 or to ignore it and end the round game R at an early stage.

According to the present embodiment described in detail above, the following excellent effects are obtained.

A ball that collides with the opening / closing plate 8300 during the operation of driving the opening / closing plate 8300 from the closed state to the intermediate state can enter the auxiliary entry port 9111 by being given a load toward the auxiliary entry port 9111. did. As a result, even in the case of an operation mode in which the opening / closing plate 8300 is maintained in the open state for a short period of time, it is possible to easily pay out the prize ball, so that the player can play the ball during a small hit game or the like. Can be enthusiastically executed.

A ball that reaches the upstream of the auxiliary opening / closing member 8340 at a specific timing by executing 1/4 release of the excitation (drive) of the solenoid 1510 while the opening / closing plate 8300 continues to guide the ball to the detection sensor 1240. Was made to flow down toward the auxiliary entry port 9111. As a result, variations can be provided in the mode of progress of the round game R in the jackpot game and the mode of paying out the prize balls.

For example, even if the number of balls passing through the first specific winning opening 1000a does not exceed the specified number, the player can pay out the winning balls by entering the auxiliary entry opening 9111, and the player can use the excess winning balls (first). It is possible to obtain a prize ball (150 prize balls in the present embodiment) that is paid out by entering a specified number (10 balls in the present embodiment) into the specific prize opening 1000a.

Next, the tenth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 75 to 78. 75 is a front view of the first variable winning device 10000 according to the tenth embodiment, and FIGS. 76 and 77 are rear views of the first variable winning device 10000. The same elements as those in the above-described embodiment are designated by the same reference numerals, and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

In FIGS. 75 and 76, the solenoid 10182 of the intermediate discharge device 10180 is de-energized, and the state in which the sphere flowing down the storage flow path 1231 reaches the lowermost end is shown. In FIG. 77, the solenoid 10182 of the intermediate discharge device 10180 is shown. Is driven (excited), and a state in which a sphere flowing down the storage flow path 1231 can be discharged on the way is illustrated.

As shown in FIGS. 75 to 77, the first variable winning device 10000 includes a case where the ball can be discharged from an intermediate position of the storage flow path 1231 formed by the main body member 10100 and the lining front plate 10200. Except for the differences from the embodiments, the configurations described in the above embodiments are combined. Briefly, the movable parts (that is, the opening / closing plate 8300, the auxiliary opening / closing member 8340, the power transmission member 1400, the drive device 1500, the regulation member 1600, and the interference device 6900) except for the intermediate discharge device 10180 are configured in the eighth embodiment. Is diverted as it is.

In the present embodiment, a mechanism for discharging the sphere at an intermediate position of the storage flow path 1231 will be described. In the present embodiment, the lining front plate 10200 is extended in a box shape that opens toward the back side of the thin plate member 1210, and includes a storage passage 1231, a protruding portion 1235, and an accommodating portion 10230 including an inclined surface 1237. ..

The accommodating portion 10230 includes a bulging portion 10232 formed in such a manner that the lower wall portion of the box bulges downward, and a through hole 10233 formed in the vicinity of the bulging portion 10232 in the front-rear direction.

The bulging portion 10232 is bulged vertically below the sphere whose flow is restricted by the interference member 6930 with a volume larger than that of the sphere, and in that portion, a through hole 10233 having a cross-sectional area larger than that of the sphere connected to the storage flow path 1231. Is formed. As a result, the ball staying at the position near the interference member 6930 can be configured to be dropped downward from the storage flow path 1231 toward the bulging portion 10232.

The through hole 10233 is a horizontal hole 10233a extending horizontally below the bottom surface of the storage flow path 1231 and a vertical hole that is spatially connected to the horizontal hole 10233a and extends downward with a width equal to or larger than the diameter of the sphere. It includes 10233b and an inclined surface 10233c as an upper bottom surface of the vertical hole 10233b that inclines downward toward the back surface side.

The lateral hole 10233a is arranged above the bulging portion 10232 at the left and right ends, and is arranged below the lower bottom surface of the storage flow path 1231 near the right end, while the lateral hole 10233a is arranged near the left end of the storage flow path 1231. It is configured to enter the upper side of a plane (a plane with a constant inclination) along the extension line of the lower bottom surface.

The main body member 10100 has substantially the same shape as the horizontal hole 10233a in the thin plate member 10110 formed from a horizontally long rectangular thin plate arranged on the front side of the game board, in addition to the one described as the configuration of the main body member 1100 in the above embodiment. The horizontal hole 10111 to be drilled, the discharge port 10112 to be drilled so that the ball thrown to the back side along the inclined surface 10233c can pass through, and the thin plate member 10110 are arranged and move along the horizontal hole 10111. An intermediate discharge device 10180 having a portion is provided.

The intermediate discharge device 10180 mainly includes a movable member 10181 that is inserted through both the lateral holes 10111 and 10233a and is movable to the left and right, and a solenoid 10182 that generates a driving force to move the movable member 10181 to the left and right. Be prepared.

The movable member 10181 is excited by the solenoid 10182 in a closed state (see FIGS. 75 and 76) that closes an opening (opening connected to the through hole 10233) in the middle of the storage flow path 1231 in the non-excited (non-driven) state of the solenoid 10182. In the (driving) state, the storage flow path 1231 is switched to an open state (see FIG. 77) that allows the passage of a sphere through an opening (opening connected to the through hole 10233) in the middle.

The movable member 10181 is maintained in a non-contact state with the bulging portion 10232 when the ball is not on it. As a result, it is possible to avoid friction between the movable member 10181 and the bulging portion 10232, and it is possible to reduce the movement resistance.

On the other hand, the movable member 10181 is supported by the upper surface of the bulging portion 10232 and the left and right end portions coming into vertical contact with each other in the closed state. As a result, even when the ball rides on the upper surface of the movable member 10181 in the closed state of the movable member 10181, it is possible to prevent the movable member 10181 from hanging excessively, and the ball inside the storage flow path 1231. Can smooth the flow of.

The movable member 10181 is an inclined upper surface 10181a which is an upper surface and is formed as an inclined surface which is inclined downward toward the left and functions as a rolling surface on which a sphere rolls in a closed state, and a lower surface which is a front view. It mainly includes an inclined lower surface 10181b formed at the left end and inclined downward toward the right.

The inclined upper surface 10181a is in a state before the ball rides, and in a state where the movable member 10181 is not in contact with the bulging portion 10232 in the vertical direction (a state in which the movable member 10181 is floating), the right end portion is adjacent to the storage. It is arranged slightly below the lower bottom surface of the flow path 1231. As a result, the load (resistance) received by the ball when the ball transfers from the storage flow path 1231 to the inclined upper surface 10181a can be reduced.

Further, the inclined upper surface 10181a is in a state after the ball is placed, and in a state where the movable member 10181 is in contact with the bulging portion 10232 in the vertical direction (a state in which the movable member 10181 is sunk), the left end portion is adjacent to the storage. The shape is such that the lower bottom surface and the surface position of the flow path 1231 are formed. As a result, the load (resistance) received by the ball when the ball is transferred from the inclined upper surface 10181a to the storage flow path 1231 can be reduced.

The shape of the above-mentioned inclined upper surface 10181a is not the same shape because the degree of inclination is gentler than the shape of the lower surface of the storage flow path 1231. However, since the difference is slight, in the present embodiment as well, the time required for one ball to be discharged from the storage flow path 1231 in the closed state of the movable member 10181 is 0.2. It is considered to be seconds.

The inclined lower surface 10181b is for facilitating landing on the bulging portion 10232 even when the ball rides on the upper surface of the movable member 10181 before the movable member 10181 reaches the open state and the movable member 10181 is about to fall forward. It is an inclined surface provided in. As a result, the tip of the movable member 10181 is restricted from moving to the inner surface of the vertical hole 10233b, and it is possible to prevent a problem of stopping in that state, and the flow of the ball in the storage flow path 1231 is maintained smoothly. be able to.

When the intermediate discharge device 10180 is opened (see FIG. 77), the upstream spheres, including the third storage sphere counting from the downstream end, flow down the vertical hole 10233b and load from the inclined surface 10233c. The ball is thrown to the back side, and is thrown to the ball discharge path (not shown) through the discharge port 10112.

In the present embodiment, the discharge port 10112 is provided with a detection sensor 10112a for detecting the passage of balls, and is configured to be able to determine the number of balls that have passed through the discharge port 10112. Then, the ball that has entered the first specific winning opening 1000a is a detection means for detecting the ball discharged from the detection sensor 10112a or the discharge port 1150 (for example, the specific area detection sensor 4860, the non-specific area detection sensor 4870, FIG. 51. The passage is detected by (see), and control is executed to determine whether the number of balls entered and the number of ejected balls match.

According to the present embodiment, according to the operation mode of the intermediate discharge device 10180 in the round game R, when a specified number of balls (10 in the present embodiment) enter the first specific winning opening 1000a, the storage flow path It is possible to switch between the case where the 1231 is full and the state where the storage flow path 1231 is not full. This will be described with reference to FIG. 78. In the description of FIG. 78, in order to facilitate understanding, the interference member 6930 will be described as being maintained in the retracted state.

FIGS. 78A to 78D are diagrams showing an example of a change in the state of the first specific winning opening 1000a and a timekeeping change in the state of the movable member 10181 in the round game R. In FIG. 78A, the first specific winning opening 1000a is in an open state (also referred to as “open” in the figure. The closed state of the first specific winning opening 1000a is also shown as “closed” in the figure. The timekeeping change when the movable member 10181 is maintained in the closed state (also referred to as “closed” in the figure; the same applies in the following figures) for the period considered to be the same in the following figures) is shown in FIG. In 78 (b), the movable member 10181 is maintained in the open state (also referred to as “open” in the figure; the same applies in the following figures) for the period in which the first specific winning opening 1000a is opened. The timed changes in each case are illustrated.

Further, in FIG. 78 (c), the movable member 10181 changes to the open state after the lapse of the first predetermined time (1 second in the present embodiment) after the first specific winning opening 1000a starts to change to the open state, and then the first 2 When the movable member 10181 changes to the closed state after a lapse of a predetermined time (3 seconds in the present embodiment) and is maintained as it is, the timing change in FIG. 78 (d) shows that the first specific winning opening 1000a is in the open state. The movable member 10181 changes to the open state after the lapse of the reference time T11s (about 15 seconds in the present embodiment) from the start of the state change, and then the movable member 10181 closes after the lapse of the second predetermined time (2 seconds in the present embodiment). The timekeeping changes when the state changes and is maintained as it is are shown.

In this way, the drive of the movable member 10181 (drive of the solenoid 10182) is associated (associated) with a combination of the number of rounds of the round game R to be executed and what the jackpot type is. It is made feasible in various driving modes.

For example, in the drive mode shown in FIG. 78 (a), since the movable member 10181 is always in a closed state during the round game R, the ball that has entered the storage flow path 1231 is discharged as in each of the above embodiments. It is discharged from the outlet 1150. That is, since the balls are not discharged from the intermediate position of the storage flow path 1231, the storage flow path 1231 is formed by the specified number of balls (10 in the present embodiment) entering the first specific winning opening 1000a. It will be full. Therefore, it is possible (or impossible) to generate an excess prize exceeding the specified number of round games R (10 in this embodiment).

Further, for example, in the drive mode shown in FIG. 78 (b), since the movable member 10181 is always in the open state during the round game R, the ball entering the storage flow path 1231 is different from each of the above embodiments. , It falls into the through hole 10233 and is discharged from the discharge port 10112 before reaching the discharge port 1150. That is, even if a specified number of balls (10 in this embodiment) enter the first specific winning opening 1000a, the storage flow path 1231 is not full. Therefore, it is possible (and possible) to easily generate an excess prize exceeding the specified number of round games R (10 in this embodiment).

In FIG. 78 (b), the movable member 10181 has elapsed 2 seconds (the period required for the ball to pass through the storage flow path 1231) after the excitation (drive) of the solenoid 1510 is released as the end of the round game R. Is changed to the open state, so that the first specified winning opening 1000a can be dropped toward the through hole 10233 including the ball that passed last (immediately before the drive (excitation) of the solenoid 1510 is released). Therefore, it is possible to configure the ball that has passed through the first specific winning opening 1000a so as not to flow down to the discharge port 1150 at all.

Further, for example, in the drive mode shown in FIG. 78 (c), the movable member 10181 changes from the closed state to the open state 1.0 second after the start of the round game R, and 3.0 seconds after that, the movable member 10181 changes. Since it is controlled to change from the open state to the closed state, if the balls can be dropped toward the through hole 10233 before 4 seconds have passed from the start of the round game R, the specified number (10 in this embodiment). Even when the ball (pieces) enters the first specific winning opening 1000a, the storage flow path 1231 is not full. Therefore, it is possible (and possible) to easily generate an excess prize exceeding the specified number of round games R (10 in this embodiment).

In order to place the ball above the through hole 10233 before 4 seconds have passed from the start of the round game R, considering the time for the ball to flow down the storage flow path 1231, about 2.5 from the start of the round game R. It is necessary for the ball to pass through the first specific winning opening 1000a before the second elapses.

This time of about 2.5 seconds is the time (minimum) required for the ball launched from the ball launching unit 112a (see FIG. 4) to flow down the game area and reach the first specific winning opening 1000a in the present embodiment. Time is shorter than about 4 seconds). Therefore, it is not enough to shoot the ball from the start of the round game R.

Therefore, in order to prevent the storage flow path 1231 from becoming full, it is necessary to continue firing the ball even in the inter-round interval before the round game R. As a result, it is possible to suppress the game mode in which the firing of the ball is stopped at the interval between rounds.

Further, the effect of the display device or the like is configured so that it is difficult for the player to grasp the information as to which round of the round game R the driving mode shown in FIG. 78 (c) occurs or whether or not it occurs in the first place. As a result, regardless of whether or not the round game R is driven by the drive mode shown in FIG. 78 (c), the game mode in which the ball is stopped at the interval immediately before the round game R is suppressed. Can be done.

Further, for example, in the drive mode shown in FIG. 78 (d), the movable member 10181 is opened when the reference time T11s (15 seconds in the present embodiment) elapses from the start of the round game R, and then 2.0 seconds elapse. Later, the movable member 10181 is controlled to change state to the closed state.

In the present embodiment, the control of the movable member 10181 is effectively executed during the period in which the round game R continues, but when the round game R ends, the control is skipped and the movable member 10181 is forced to the closed state. Can be switched.

In the driving mode shown in FIG. 78 (d), for example, when the first end time T11a (for example, 10 seconds) shorter than the reference time T11s elapses from the start of the round game R, a specified number (10 in the present embodiment) When the balls (pieces) pass through the first specific winning opening 1000a, since the round game R is completed before the movable member 10181 is opened, all the balls that have passed through the first specific winning opening 1000a are stored in the storage flow path. It is stored in 1231, and the storage channel 1231 is full. Therefore, it is possible (or impossible) to generate an excess prize exceeding the specified number of round games R (10 in this embodiment).

On the other hand, for example, when the second end time T11b (for example, 20 seconds) longer than the reference time T11s elapses from the start of the round game R, a specified number (10 in this embodiment) of balls wins the first specific prize. When passing through the mouth 1000a, the movable member 10181 is opened before the end of the round game R, the ball falls toward the through hole 10233, and is discharged from the discharge port 10112, so that the storage flow path 1231 is full. It doesn't become a tongue. Therefore, it is possible (and possible) to easily generate an excess prize exceeding the specified number of round games R (10 in this embodiment).

Therefore, according to the driving mode of FIG. 78 (d), the specified number of round games R (10 in this embodiment) is determined depending on whether the time required for the round game R is less than the reference time T11s or the reference time T11s or more. It is possible to switch whether or not an excess prize will be exceeded.

In the case of this driving mode, if the number of prize balls to be paid out in the round game R is important, it is preferable to execute the round game R over a long period of time. That is, it is preferable to intermittently stop the firing of the balls so that a specified number of balls (10 in the present embodiment) do not enter the first specific winning opening 1000a at an early stage. Therefore, there is a possibility that the game mode in which the firing of the ball is stopped at the interval between rounds is promoted.

On the other hand, in the driving mode shown in FIG. 78 (c), as described above, the occurrence of excess winning can be aimed at by continuously firing the ball at the interval between rounds.

In this way, the drive modes in which the preferred ball launch modes are contradictory are distributed and arranged in the round game R of the jackpot game (even in the same round, the drive modes are controlled to be different depending on the jackpot type). It is possible to improve the player's ability to concentrate on the jackpot game as compared with the case where the jackpot game is always executed in the same firing mode (the profits obtained by the player are the same).

According to the present embodiment, when the interference member 6930 is maintained in the retracted state and the regulating member 1600 is maintained in the stored state, the number of balls that can enter the storage flow path 1231 is determined by the operation mode of the movable member 10181. Can be changed. That is, it is possible to switch between the case where the storage flow path 1231 is full with 10 balls and the case where the storage flow path 1231 is not full even with 10 balls.

In addition, when the interfering member 6930 is in the overhanging state, there are 7 storage channels 1231 (9 if two spheres are already arranged downstream of the interfering member 6930, see FIG. 75). ) Can be switched between the case where the tank is full and the case where the storage channel 1231 is not full even when 7 (or 9) balls are filled.

In the present embodiment, the case where the interference member 6930 is maintained in the retracted state has been described, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, by setting the interference member 6930 to the overhanging state in response to the movable member 10181 being opened, the ball can pass (jump over) above the through hole 10233 in the left-right direction with momentum. Can be prevented.

The driving mode of the movable member 10181 is not limited to the above. For example, it may be configured to be driven by the operation of the operation button 300.

According to the present embodiment described in detail above, the following excellent effects are obtained.

By opening the movable member 10181, the ball can be discharged from the storage flow path 1231 on the upstream side of the interference member 6930. As a result, the number of balls stored in the storage flow path 1231 can be changed independently of the state of the first specific winning opening 1000a.

That is, when the number of balls entered into the first specified winning opening 1000a and the number of stored balls in the storage channel 1231 are the same while the first specified winning opening 1000a is maintained in the open state, and when the number of stored balls in the storage channel 1231 is the same, entry into the first specific winning opening 1000a It is possible to configure a case where the number of spheres and the number of stored in the storage channel 1231 are different. Thereby, the possibility of excessive winning in the first specific winning opening 1000a can be changed depending on the driving mode of the movable member 10181.

Next, the eleventh embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 79 to 85. 79 is a front view of the first variable winning device 11000 according to the eleventh embodiment, FIG. 80 is a cross-sectional view of the first variable winning device 11000 in the LXXX-LXXX line of FIG. 79, and FIG. 81 is a cover. It is a rear perspective view of the installation front plate 11200.

As shown in FIGS. 79 to 81, in the first variable winning device 11000 of the present embodiment, the shape of the opening / closing plate 11300 is changed, the formation of the upstream portion of the fall delay plate 3250 is omitted, and the main body member 11100 has a first position. 2. It has the same configuration as the first variable winning device 3000 of the third embodiment except that an additional winning opening 11183 or the like is added. Therefore, the same elements as those in the above-described embodiment are designated by the same reference numerals, and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

In the main body member 11100, in addition to the configuration already described in each of the above embodiments, the thin plate member 11110 formed from the horizontally long rectangular thin plate arranged on the front side of the game board is separated by a distance slightly longer than the diameter of the sphere. A pair of left and right thin plate members 1111 projecting ribs 11111 projecting to the front side, guide holes 11112 drilled as horizontally long holes to guide the movement of the opening / closing means 11190 described later, and extending to the left of the guide holes 11112. A guide recess 11113, which is formed as a bottomed recess, is provided.

Further, the main body member 11100 mainly includes a second additional winning opening 11183 configured to allow the ball to pass through, and an opening / closing means 11190 for changing the winning probability of the ball into the second additional winning opening 11183. The details of the opening / closing means 11190 will be described later.

In the drop delay plate 3250 formed on the lining front plate 11200 in the present embodiment, only the right side of the cut surface SP12 formed at a position away from the side wall portion 1220 from the diameter of the sphere is maintained on the upstream side. The left portion of the cut surface SP12 is omitted.

The position of the cut surface SP12 is set as a position where the ball that rolls on the inclined surface 1237 and reaches the fall delay plate 3250 does not reach by itself. That is, the ball that rolls on the inclined surface 1237 and reaches the fall delay plate 3250 flows down to the lower right (in the direction close to the detection sensor 1240) along the inclination of the fall delay plate 3250 unless an external force is applied. To do.

On the other hand, when a load is applied to the ball and the ball is thrown to the left of the cut surface SP12, the ball has a high probability of falling to the second additional winning opening 11183 side. The falling ball enters the second additional winning opening 11183 after passing through the opening / closing means 11190 newly described in the present embodiment. In the present embodiment, the second additional winning opening 11183 is configured as a winning opening in which three prize balls are paid out by detecting the passage of the balls.

The opening / closing plate 11300 includes an inclined surface 11340 that remains after being scraped off in a shape that inclines toward the left shaft portion 1320 from the rotation tip side toward the rotation shaft side in the left half portion.

The inclined surface 11340 is at a position where the end on the rotation tip side is to the right of the cut surface SP12 and the velocity in the left-right direction becomes 0 after landing on the fall delay plate 3250 (final arrival position FP12, FIG. It is placed to the right of the center of the sphere that has reached 82 (a)).

Therefore, when the ball is at the position where the speed in the left-right direction becomes 0 (final arrival position FP12, see FIG. 82 (a)), when the opening / closing plate 11300 is driven from the closed state to the open state, the opening / closing plate 11300 is driven via the inclined surface 11340. The load is given to the ball. This will be described with reference to FIG. 82.

82 (a) to 82 (c) are partial front views of the first variable winning device 11000. 82 (a) to 82 (c) show changes in the state of the first variable winning device 11000 in chronological order, and in FIG. 82 (a), the opening / closing plate 11300 is closed and tilted. The final arrival position FP12 of the ball that rolled on the surface 1237 and landed on the fall delay plate 3250 is illustrated by an imaginary line, and in FIG. 82 (b), the opening / closing plate 11300 is opened from the state shown in FIG. 82 (a). The state after the change is illustrated, and FIG. 82 (c) shows how the sphere falls from the state shown in FIG. 82 (b).

As shown in FIG. 82 (b), the sphere arranged at the final arrival position FP12 comes into contact with the inclined surface 11340 when the opening / closing plate 11300 changes to the open state, and a load facing left is applied. The ball to which the load is applied to the left is pushed to the left of the cut surface SP12, spills from the fall delay plate 3250, and enters the second additional winning opening 11183.

On the other hand, when the ball has not reached the final arrival position FP12 (for example, when it slightly flows down from the final arrival position FP12 and is arranged at the position shown by the solid line in FIG. 82A), the opening / closing plate 11300 is opened. Even if the state is changed, the inclined surface 11340 does not come into contact with the sphere, and the sphere has a component pointing to the right because the rotation direction of the opening / closing plate 11300 (since the rotation axis is inclined to the lower right with respect to the horizontal). It receives a load in the direction) and is pushed toward the detection sensor 1240. Therefore, in this case, the ball does not enter the second additional winning opening 11183.

As described above, according to the present embodiment, at the timing when the opening / closing plate 11300 changes to the open state, the sphere heads toward the detection sensor 1240 depending on the position on the front side of the opening / closing plate 11300. , It is possible to switch to the second additional winning opening 11183.

Since the payout of the prize ball by passing the ball through the second additional winning opening 11183 is an excess prize ball exceeding the prize ball scheduled in the jackpot game for the player, the ball passing through the second additional winning opening 11183 The greater the number, the greater the profit that the player can obtain.

The opening / closing plate is compared with the case where the firing of the ball is stopped by continuing the firing of the ball toward the first specific winning opening 1000a while the opening / closing plate 11300 is maintained in the closed state (inter-round interval period). Since it is possible to easily generate a situation in which the ball is arranged at the final arrival position FP12 at the timing when the 11300 changes to the open state, it is possible to promote a game mode in which the ball is continuously fired over the interval period between rounds. it can. As a result, it is possible to suppress a game mode in which the player stops firing the ball during the interval period between rounds.

Since the entry into the second additional winning opening 11183 is conditional on the opening / closing plate 11300 changing to the open state, the opening / closing plate 11300 is driven to the open state (big hit game or small hit game). In a state other than the above, even if the right-handed strike is continued, it is difficult for the ball to enter the second additional winning opening 11183.

As a result, in a situation where the opening / closing plate 11300 does not change to the open state (for example, a situation in which the right-handed instruction effect is not executed), even if the right-handed hit is performed, the ball enters the second additional winning opening 11183. The accompanying benefits can be configured to be difficult for the player to obtain. That is, the second additional winning opening 11183 can function as a winning opening that makes it easier for the ball to enter in a situation (small hit game or big hit game) in which the opening / closing plate 11300 is driven.

Next, the opening / closing means 11190 will be described with reference to FIGS. 83 to 85. 83 and 84 are rear views of the first variable winning device 11000, and FIGS. 85 (a) to 85 (c) show the arrangement of the projecting rib 11111, the opening / closing means 11190, and the second additional winning opening 11183. FIG. 5 is a front schematic view of a projecting rib 11111 schematically shown, an opening / closing means 11190, and a second additional winning opening 11183. In addition, in FIGS. 85 (a) to 85 (c), the timekeeping change of the state of the opening / closing means 11190 is illustrated.

As shown in FIGS. 83 to 85, the opening / closing means 11190 is a movable means that is guided by the guide hole 11112 and moves left and right in conjunction with the movement of the tip member 1520, and is supported by the guide hole 11112 in a inserted state. The main body support portion 11191, the transmission portion 11192 extending upward from the back surface side portion of the main body support portion 11191 and supported by the tip member 1520, and the main body support portion 11191 extending to the left from the front side portion. An interval slightly longer than the diameter of the sphere is provided on the right side of the extension portion 11193, the first protrusion 11194 projecting to the front side at the left end of the extension portion 11193, and the first protrusion 11194. The second projecting portion 11195, which is projected in the same shape as the first projecting portion 11194, is mainly provided.

The method of assembling the opening / closing means 11190 will be described. As shown in FIG. 83, in the present embodiment, the right end of the guide hole 11112 is vertically enlarged so as to be slightly longer than the transmission portion 11192, and the other portions are slightly longer than the main body support portion 11191 as a whole. It is formed as a horizontally long hole.

Therefore, after the transmission unit 11192 is projected to the back side through this enlarged portion, the opening / closing means 11190 is slid to the left, and then the drive device 1500 is assembled to the main body member 11100, and the transmission unit 11192 is supported by the tip member 1520. Thereby, the opening / closing means 11190 can be assembled in a manner of interlocking with the tip member 1520. Since the transmission unit 11192 does not reach the enlarged portion at the right end of the guide hole 11112 in the range of motion of the solenoid 1510 (see FIGS. 83 and 84), it is possible to prevent the opening / closing means 11190 from coming off the guide hole 11112. can do.

The extension portion 11193 is formed with a thickness sufficient to be completely accommodated in the guide recess 11113. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the ball flowing down the front side of the opening / closing means 11190 from colliding with the extension portion 11193, and the flow path of the ball changes in the front-rear direction, or the extension portion 11193 is affected by the load from the ball. It can be prevented from being damaged.

As shown in FIGS. 85 (a) to 85 (c), the first projecting portion 11194 and the second projecting portion 11195 are formed as inclined plates that incline downward to the left in the front view. In the present embodiment, when the ball on the fall delay plate 3250 flows to the left of the cut surface SP12, the ball falls between the projecting ribs 11111 and enters the second additional winning opening 11183 by the opening / closing means 11190. Whether or not to do it is switched. This will be described in detail.

FIG. 85A shows a state in which the solenoid 1510 is driven (excited) and the opening / closing means 11190 is arranged at the left end of the moving range (see FIG. 84). In this case, the upper end portion of the second projecting portion 11195 and the projecting rib 11111 on the right side are arranged on the center line of the second additional winning opening 11183.

When the ball falls between the projecting ribs 11111 in the state shown in FIG. 85 (a), the ball comes into contact with the second projecting portion 11195 and flows to the left. Therefore, since the ball flows down from the second additional winning opening 11183, the probability of entering the second additional winning opening 11183 can be reduced.

FIG. 85 (b) shows a state in which the driving (excitation) of the solenoid 1510 is released and the opening / closing means 11190 is arranged at an intermediate position in the moving range (see FIG. 20 (c)). That is, it corresponds immediately after the opening / closing plate 11300 is closed.

In this case, the upper end of the first protruding portion 11194 is arranged to the left of the vertical line passing through the intermediate position of the pair of protruding ribs 11111, and the upper end of the second protruding portion 11195 is the second additional prize. It is located to the right of the center line of the mouth 11183.

Therefore, when the ball falls between the projecting ribs 11111 in the state shown in FIG. 85 (b), the ball abuts on the first projecting portion 11194 and flows to the right, and abuts on the second projecting portion 11195. It flows to the left. Since the flowing ball will flow down toward the second additional winning opening 11183, the probability of entering the second additional winning opening 11183 can be increased.

FIG. 85 (c) shows a state in which the driving (excitation) of the solenoid 1510 is released and the opening / closing means 11190 is arranged at the right end position of the moving range (see FIG. 83). Also in this case, the opening / closing plate 11300 is maintained in the closed state as in FIG. 85 (b).

In this case, the upper end of the first projecting portion 11194 is arranged to the right of the vertical line passing through the intermediate position of the pair of projecting ribs 11111.

Therefore, when the ball falls between the projecting ribs 11111 in the state shown in FIG. 85 (c), the ball comes into contact with the first projecting portion 11194 and flows to the left. Since the flow-down ball deviates from the second additional winning opening 11183 and flows down, the probability of entering the second additional winning opening 11183 can be reduced.

That is, the opening / closing means 11190 keeps the probability that the ball enters the second additional winning opening 11183 low while the opening / closing plate 11300 is maintained in the open state or the closed state, and the second additional winning is made during the state change. It is configured to increase the probability that the ball will enter the mouth 11183.

As described above, in the present embodiment, the probability that the ball enters the second additional winning opening 11183 changes by interlocking the opening / closing means 11190 with the state of the opening / closing plate 1300. Here, it will be described that there are cases where the ball can be expected to enter the second additional winning opening 11183 and cases where it cannot be expected due to the difference in the drive control of the solenoid 1510.

The phenomenon that the sphere flows to the left of the cut surface SP12 of the drop delay plate 3250 occurs when the opening / closing plate 11300 changes to the open state (see FIGS. 82 (b) and 82 (c)).

Therefore, in the drive pattern in which the solenoid 1510 continues to maintain the drive (excitation) state (operation pattern with a low ball entry probability), when the ball flowing to the left of the cut surface SP12 passes through the projecting rib 11111, the tip member 1520 The opening / closing means 11190 is arranged at the left end position, as in the arrangement of. Since the excitation (driving) of the solenoid 1510 is maintained, the state of the opening / closing means 11190 is maintained, so that the ball flowing to the left of the cut surface SP12 deviates from the second additional winning opening 11183 and flows down (see FIG. 82). ).

On the other hand, in the drive pattern (operation pattern with high ball entry probability) in which the drive (excitation) is once released (the opening / closing plate 11300 is opened shortly) immediately after the solenoid 1510 is driven (excited), the cut surface SP12 When the ball flowing to the left passes through the projecting rib 11111, the opening / closing means 11190 is arranged at the left end position, but after that, the excitation (driving) of the solenoid 1510 is temporarily released, so that the solenoid 1510 The opening / closing means 11190 moves toward the right end position by the urging force of the return spring. As a result, the ball that has flowed to the left of the cut surface SP12 receives a load facing right from the first projecting portion 11194 and flows down along the second projecting portion 11195, so that the ball flows toward the second additional winning opening 11183. Can flow down.

By providing variations in the operation pattern of the opening / closing plate 11300 in this way, the cut surface SP12 has the same timing (for example, the timing at which the inclined surface 11340 comes into contact with the ball at the start of the round game R, see FIG. 82 (b)). The probability that the ball flowing to the left will enter the second additional winning opening 11183 can be changed.

In the operation pattern with a high probability of entering a ball, the timing of releasing the drive (excitation) of the solenoid 1510 is not particularly limited. In the present embodiment, the timing at which the ball flowing to the left of the cut surface SP12 due to the load from the opening / closing plate 11300 passes through the protrusion rib 11111 and reaches between the first protrusion 11194 and the second protrusion 11195. Is controlled to release the drive (excitation) of the solenoid 1510.

The second additional winning opening 11183 may be configured as a ball entry opening that starts the fluctuation of the special symbol 2 when the ball enters the ball. In this case, since the number of reserved balls of the special symbol 2 can be increased by the balls that reach the opening / closing plate 11300 during the interval period between rounds, the normal symbol is in a high probability state (time saving state) after the jackpot game is completed. Nevertheless, it is possible to prevent the phenomenon that the special symbol 1 is held from being changed and the player is disadvantaged.

According to the present embodiment described in detail above, the following excellent effects are obtained.

Depending on where the ball is placed on the front side of the opening / closing plate 11300 at the timing when the opening / closing plate 11300 changes to the open state, whether the ball heads for (enters) the detection sensor 1240 or the second additional winning opening 11183 In addition to being able to switch between heading (entering the ball) and continuing to fire the ball during the inter-round interval period, it is easier for the ball to flow down to the second additional winning opening 11183. As a result, it is possible to increase the number of payout prize balls by continuing to fire the balls during the inter-round interval period, thus promoting a game mode in which the balls are continuously fired during the inter-round interval period. It can be made easier.

The second additional winning opening 11183 is configured so that it is difficult for the ball to enter even if the ball arrives while the state of the opening / closing plate 11300 is maintained. As a result, the second additional winning opening 11183 can function as a winning opening that facilitates the entry of the ball in a state in which the opening / closing plate 11300 is driven (small hit game or big hit game).

While it is difficult to enter the second additional winning opening 11183 while the state of the opening / closing means 11190 is maintained, it is easy for the ball to enter the second additional winning opening 11183 during the state change of the opening / closing means 11190. In addition to being configured as such, the second additional winning opening 11183 is provided with a ball that receives a load from the opening / closing plate 11300 when the opening / closing plate 11300 is driven from the closed state to the open state. It was configured to flow down to 11183. As a result, the probability that the ball will enter the second additional winning opening 11183 by providing a variation in the operation pattern of the opening / closing plate 11300 after the opening / closing plate 11300 is driven toward the open state (the round game R has started). Can be changed.

Next, a first control example will be described with reference to FIGS. 86 to 140. 86 (a) and 86 (b) are front views of the first variable winning device 6000 in the first control example. In FIGS. 86 (a) and 86 (b), the thin plate member 1210 is partially cut out so that the opening / closing plate 1300 can be visually recognized, and a part of the side wall portion 1220 and a part of the inclined surface 1237 are imaginary lines. Illustrated in. Further, FIG. 86 (a) shows a schematic diagram showing a shielded state of the first variable winning device 6000, and FIG. 86 (b) shows the inside from the shielded state where it is difficult to see (hard to see but visible). A schematic diagram showing the transparent state of the first variable winning device 6000 when the transparent effect for changing the transparent state to the visible transparent state is executed is shown. Further, the same elements as those in the above-described embodiment are designated by the same reference numerals, and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

As shown in FIG. 86 (a), in the first variable winning device 6000 described in this control example, the inside of the storage flow path 1231 is difficult to see due to the thin plate member 1210 arranged on the front side of the storage flow path 1231. It is configured (the thin plate member 1210 is configured to have low transparency).

In addition, even if an attempt is made to look into the inside of the storage flow path 1231 through the opening of the detection sensor 1240, the storage flow path 1231 is formed as a bent flow path, and the downstream side cannot be visually recognized. It is configured so that the number of balls stored in the can not be grasped. In addition, since the arrangement position of the interference device 6900 is downstream from the bent portion, it is configured so that the movable state of the interference device 6900 cannot be visually recognized.

Further, by extending the thin plate member 1210 on the upstream side (left side in FIG. 86 (a)) of the detection sensor 1240 in the opening direction (see FIG. 14), the direction of the line of sight when looking through the opening of the detection sensor 1240 is limited. However, it is configured to make it difficult to see the inside of the storage flow path 1231.

With this configuration, it is difficult to grasp the number of balls stored inside the storage flow path 1231 and the movable state of the interference device 6900 in the shielded state of the first variable winning device 6000. it can.

In the variable winning device 6000 configured in this way, the transmission lamps 227ba to 227be are turned on based on the establishment of predetermined conditions (for example, the success of the timing effect (operation effect) (see FIG. 88 (b))). However, as shown in FIG. 86 (b), the lining front plate 1200 is composed of a half mirror so as to switch to a transparent state in which the inside can be visually recognized. As a result, when the transmission lamps 227ba to 227be are turned on, the player can be made to grasp the number of balls stored inside the storage flow path 1231 and the movable state of the interference device 6900.

An optical sensor that detects light incident from the outside may be arranged behind the lining front plate 1200. In this case, by utilizing the characteristic of the half mirror that the inside can be seen by irradiating the inside with strong light from the outside, a fraudulent act of irradiating the lining front plate 1200 with strong light to see the inside has been executed. , It can be judged by the output of the optical sensor. Therefore, fraudulent activity can be suppressed by setting an error command in response to a change in the output of the optical sensor and controlling the game so as to make it difficult to continue the game.

In this control example, the lining front plate 1200 is irradiated with light (transmission lamp) to switch to the transmission state, but other configurations may be used. For example, a part of the concealed front plate 1200 (for example, the thin plate member 1210) or the light emitting means can be moved so that the incident angle of the light emitted from the constantly lit light emitting means (LED) to the concealed front plate 1200 is switched. It may be configured to be possible, and the inside may be in a visible transparent state only when the movable portion is positioned at a predetermined position.

Further, the lining front plate 1200 may be configured to have a transparent color whose inside is visible, and the surface thereof may be subjected to a process of diffusely reflecting the irradiated light (for example, a grained process). As a result, while the game is being executed in the pachinko machine 10, the inside of the first variable winning device 6000 is made difficult to see by the light emitted from various lamps, and the power of the pachinko machine 10 is turned off (that is, various types). The inside of the variable winning device 6000 may be made visible when the lamp is not lit). As a result, the clerk can easily inspect the inside of the variable winning device 6000 even when the power of the pachinko machine 10 is turned off.

When such a configuration is used, a shielding wall is provided to shield the light emitted from various lamps from being irradiated to the first variable winning device 6000, and the shielding wall is changed into a shielded state and a non-shielded state. It is advisable to provide a configuration. As a result, the inside of the storage flow path 1231 of the first variable winning device 6000 can be visually recognized by the player even while the game is being played.

Further, by providing a dedicated light emitting means (lamp) for irradiating the first variable winning device 6000 with light and performing light emission control for the light emitting means, it is difficult to visually recognize the inside of the storage flow path 1231. The state (state in which light is irradiated) and the visible state (state in which light is not irradiated) may be switched.

Further, by providing a movable member for decoration on the lining front plate 1200 whose inside is visible and controlling the operation of the movable member, the inside of the storage flow path 1231 can be visually recognized (the movable member for decoration is visible). A state in which the inside of the storage flow path 1231 is difficult to see (a state in which the movable member for decoration is movable in a position where it overlaps so as to cover the storage flow path 1231). It may be switched.

Further, in this control example, as shown in FIG. 86A, the lining front plate 1200 makes it difficult to visually recognize the entire range of the storage flow path 1231, and it is ensured that the movable state of the interference device 6900 is visually recognized. However, the configuration is not limited to this, and any configuration may be used as long as it has the effect of making it difficult to visually recognize the movable state of the interference device 6900 in the posture in which the game is normally played.

For example, it may be difficult to see only the lower half of the storage channel 1231 (downstream from the bent part), and the visibility of the upper half may be ensured (the formation of the upper half mirror may be omitted. (Good), or in the same way, it may be difficult to see only the portion overlapping with the interference member 6930 of the interference device 6900 in front view. As a result, it is possible to construct a configuration that makes it difficult to visually recognize the movable state of the interference device 6900 at low cost.

Further, for example, while ensuring the visibility of the lower half of the storage flow path 1231 (the formation of the lower half mirror is omitted), the upper half may be made difficult to see. In this case, the lower limit of the number of spheres stored in the storage channel 1231 can be grasped by visually recognizing the spheres remaining in the lower half of the storage channel 1231, while the spheres are stored in the storage channel 1231. It can be difficult to know the exact number.

Therefore, when the player temporarily stops the firing of the ball in order to reduce the wasted ball (the ball that does not enter the winning opening), it is possible to make it difficult to determine the timing of stopping the firing. In the first variable winning device 6000 (see FIG. 53) described in this control example, when the storage flow path 1231 is full (10 balls are stored), no more balls can be expected. By stopping the firing of the ball at that timing, it is possible to reduce the number of wasted balls.

On the other hand, in this control example, the number of balls entered in the first variable winning device 6000 in the predetermined number of round games R does not always match the number of balls stored in the storage flow path 1231. Even if the number of balls entering the 1 variable winning device 6000 is counted, the number of balls stored in the storage flow path 1231 cannot be accurately known. Therefore, in order to directly grasp the number of spheres stored in the storage flow path 1231, it is necessary to visually check the inside of the storage flow path 1231.

That is, because of the configuration of this control example, the visibility of the lower half of the storage flow path 1231 is ensured (the formation of the lower half mirror is omitted), while the configuration of making the upper half difficult to see is effective. It becomes difficult for the player to easily determine the timing at which the ball is stopped from being launched. As a result, it is possible to improve the player's attention and concentration to the launch of the ball in the jackpot game, and it is possible to prevent the player from playing the game indiscriminately.

A feature of this control example shown in FIGS. 86 (a) and 86 (b) is that, in addition to the above-mentioned change in the visual state, the operation timing of the interference member 6930 is controlled by operating the operation button 300 (see FIG. 1). It can be mentioned that the timing that can be set with is prepared, but the details will be described later.

Next, the screen configuration of the third symbol display device 81 will be described. As described above, the variable display device unit 80 is arranged in the central portion of the game area. The variable display device unit 80 is provided with a third symbol display device 81, a second symbol display device 83, and a center frame 86 so as to surround the outer periphery of the third symbol display device 81.

The third symbol display device 81 performs a decorative display according to the display of the first symbol display device 37. For example, when a ball enters the first ball entry port 64 or the second ball entry port 640 (starting prize), the first symbol display device 37 displays the variation of the special symbol (first symbol) as a trigger. Will be executed. Further, in the third symbol display device 81, the variation display of the third symbol corresponding to the variation display of the special symbol is performed in synchronization with the variation display of the special symbol.

In addition, instead of the display device, for example, a reel or the like may be used to configure the third symbol display device 81. Further, a plurality of liquid crystal displays may be provided as the third symbol display device 81, or the third symbol display device 81 may be configured to be movable. Here, the display contents of the third symbol display device 81 will be described with reference to FIG. 87.

FIG. 87 is a drawing for explaining the display screen of the third symbol display device 81, and FIG. 87 (a) is a diagram schematically showing the area division setting and the effective line setting of the display screen. FIG. 87B is a diagram illustrating an actual display screen.

The third symbol is composed of 10 types of main symbols with numbers from "0" to "9". Each main symbol is composed of a rear symbol consisting of a wooden box with numbers from "0" to "9", of which the main symbols with odd numbers (1, 3, 5, 7, 9) are , A large number is added to almost the front of the wooden box. On the other hand, the main design with even numbers (0, 2, 4, 6, 8) has an attached design that imitates a character such as a planer, a furoshiki, and a helmet that almost fills the front of the wooden box. Even numbers are added to the lower right side of the attached symbol so that they are small in green and displayed on the front side of the attached symbol.

Further, in the pachinko machine 10 of this control example, when the lottery result of the special symbol performed by the main control device 110 (see FIG. 93) described later is a big hit, a variable display in which the same main symbols are aligned is performed. , It is configured so that a big hit occurs after the fluctuation display is finished. On the other hand, if the lottery result of the special symbol is out of order, a variable display is performed in which the same main symbol is not aligned.

As shown in FIG. 87 (a), the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 is roughly divided into upper and lower halves, and the lower two-thirds are the main display area Dm for variable display of the third symbol, and the rest. The upper 1/3 of is a sub-display area Ds for displaying the advance notice effect, the character, the number of reserved balls, and the like.

The main display area Dm is divided into three display areas Dm1 to Dm3 on the left, middle, and right, and three symbol columns Z1, Z2, and Z3 are displayed in the three display areas Dm1 to Dm3, respectively. In each of the symbol rows Z1 to Z3, the above-mentioned third symbols are displayed in a specified order. That is, the main symbols are arranged in the ascending or descending order of the numbers in the symbol rows Z1 to Z3, and the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 are scrolled from top to bottom with periodicity to perform variable display. In particular, in the left symbol row Z1, the numbers of the main symbols are arranged so as to appear in descending order, and in the middle symbol row Z2 and the right symbol row Z3, the numbers of the main symbols appear in ascending order.

Further, in the main display area Dm, the third symbol is displayed in the upper, middle, and lower three rows for each of the symbol rows Z1 to Z3. The middle part of this main display area Dm is set as the effective line L1, and the third symbol is stopped on the effective line L1 in the order of the left symbol row Z1 → the right symbol row Z3 → the middle symbol row Z2 in each game. Is displayed. This stop display state is held for at least 1 second.

By displaying the stopped 3rd symbol for a certain period of time (1 second or more) in this way, whether or not the player is a combination of the 3rd symbols corresponding to the jackpot (the lottery result of the special symbol is a jackpot). It is possible to prevent overlooking (whether or not there is). Further, if a combination of jackpot symbols (combination of the same main symbol in this control example) is aligned on the effective line L1 when the third symbol is stopped, a jackpot moving image (opening effect) is displayed as a jackpot.

Further, if the combination of the third symbols displayed as stopped is a combination corresponding to the detachment and there is a reserved ball, the variable display corresponding to the lottery based on the reserved ball is started after the stop display for 1 second. .. If there are a plurality of reserved balls, the lottery is executed based on the reserved balls corresponding to the oldest incoming balls in time. Further, when both the reserved ball of the special symbol 1 and the reserved ball of the special symbol 2 exist, the lottery based on the reserved ball of the special symbol 2 is preferentially executed.

On the other hand, when the third symbol of the combination corresponding to the deviation of the special symbol is stopped and displayed for 1 second in the state where the holding ball does not exist, the state in which the third symbol is stopped and displayed continues thereafter. This state continues until a predetermined time (for example, 15 seconds) elapses or a new ball enters either the first entry port 64 or the second entry opening 640.

Then, when a predetermined time (for example, 15 seconds) has elapsed since the third symbol was stopped and displayed, a demo effect indicating that the game has not been executed is displayed. It is rare that the player does not enter the first entrance 64 and the second entrance 640 even though the player has continuously fired the ball for a predetermined time (for example, 15 seconds). In most cases, the state in which the third symbol is stopped and displayed continues for a predetermined time (for example, 15 seconds) because the player has quit the game, and the pachinko machine 10 has not played the game at all. to cause.

Therefore, in the pachinko machine 10 of this control example, when a predetermined time (for example, 15 seconds) has elapsed from the stop display of the third symbol, it is determined that the player is not playing the game, and the demonstration effect is started. To do. Thereby, the player who is going to select the pachinko machine 10 to start the game can easily determine whether or not the game is being performed based on the presence or absence of the display of the demonstration effect. On the other hand, if a new ball enters the first entry port 64 and the second entry opening 640 before the predetermined time (for example, 15 seconds) elapses, the new ball enters the ball. The variable display of the third symbol is executed.

The sub-display area Ds is provided horizontally above the main display area Dm, and is further divided into three small areas Ds1 to Ds3 in the left-right direction. Of these, the small area Ds1 displays the number of reserved balls, which is the number of balls (reserved balls) that have not been changed among the balls that have been entered into the first entry port 64 and the second entry opening 640. The small areas Ds2 and Ds3 are areas for displaying the advance notice effect image.

Further, the third symbol is displayed in the small area Ds3. Although the details will be described later, in the pachinko machine 10, the types of special symbols (one of the special symbol 1 and the special symbol 2) in which the lottery is easily executed are configured differently depending on the game state. In the main display area Dm, a variable display is displayed when a lottery of a special symbol that is easy to execute in the current gaming state is executed. On the other hand, in the small area Ds3, a variable display is displayed when a lottery of a special symbol that is difficult to execute in the current gaming state is executed.

Here, it is a great note for the player that the lottery of the special symbol that is difficult to be executed is executed. For example, when the lottery of the special symbol 2 which is difficult to execute in the normal state of the special symbol is executed and the lottery result is a big hit, the player is compared with the case where the lottery of the special symbol 1 is a big hit. There are cases where the expectation of profits that can be obtained is high. Further, for example, when the lottery of the special symbol 1 which is difficult to execute in the high probability state of the special symbol is executed and the lottery result is a big hit, compared with the case where the lottery of the special symbol 2 is a big hit. , The expectation of the profit that the player can obtain may be low.

Therefore, in the small area Ds3, the variable display is performed only when the lottery of the special symbol that is difficult to execute in the current game state is executed (by separating from the variable display in the main display area Dm), the game. It becomes easier to attract the attention of the player, and the player can be drawn into the variable display.

On the actual display screen, as shown in FIG. 87 (b), a total of nine main symbols of the third symbol are displayed in the main display area Dm. In the sub-display area Ds, a total of three main symbols of the third symbol different from the main symbol displayed in the main display area Dm are displayed in the small area Ds3 on the right. In the central small area Ds2, a predetermined character 710 (a boy with a headband in this control example) usually performs a predetermined action, and sometimes a special action different from the predetermined action or another character performs a predetermined action. A notice will be given, such as by appearing.

On the other hand, when the ball enters the first ball entry port 64 while the variable display based on the lottery of the special symbol 1 is being performed on the third symbol display device 81 (first symbol display device 37), and If a ball enters the second entrance 640 while the variable display based on the special symbol 2 lottery is being performed, the number of times the ball is entered is held up to 4 times, and the number of reserved balls is the first. It is shown by the symbol display device 37 and also in the small area Ds1 of the sub-display area Ds. Specifically, the symbol (first reserved ball number symbol) displayed in the upper half of the small area Ds1 indicates the number of reserved balls with respect to the first entrance 64, and the symbol displayed in the lower half (second reserved ball number symbol). The number of reserved balls symbol) indicates the number of reserved balls for the second entrance 640. FIG. 87 illustrates a case where four first reserved symbols are displayed while zero second reserved symbols are displayed (all the second reserved symbols are blank).

In addition, instead of displaying the number of reserved balls symbol in the small area Ds1, the number of reserved balls is different by a number in a part of the third symbol display device 81, or the area divided into four is different by the number of reserved balls. (For example, a color or a lighting pattern) may be displayed. Further, since the number of reserved balls is indicated by the first symbol display device 37, the number of reserved balls may not be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Further, the variable display device unit 80 may be provided with four hold lamps indicating the number of hold balls for the maximum number of hold balls, and the number of hold balls may be displayed according to the number of hold lamps in the lit state.

Next, with reference to FIGS. 88 to 92, a timing effect (operation effect) executed by the pachinko machine 10 of the present control example in the first control example will be described.

In this control example, the effect related to the sphere stored in the storage flow path 1231 (see FIG. 86) is executed based on the operation of the operation button 300 (see FIG. 1). As the effects related to the spheres stored in the storage flow path 1231, for example, an effect of changing the visibility inside the storage flow path 1231 and a discharge mode of the spheres stored in the storage flow path 1231 may be used. An example of a production to be changed. Then, these effects are configured so that the content of the effects changes depending on the degree of deviation between the predetermined reference operation timing and the timing at which the player operates the operation button 300.

Here, in this control example, a timing effect (operation effect) is executed as an effect for notifying the timing for operating the operation button 300 (see FIG. 1). Then, by executing the operation at the right time according to the timing effect (operation effect), the effect is configured so as to maximize the profit obtained by the player. Thereby, the player's willingness to participate in the operation of the operation button 300 can be improved.

First, with reference to FIGS. 88 and 89, the contents of the timing effect (operation effect) executed during the jackpot will be described. 88 (a) is a schematic view showing an example of the display contents during the advance notice effect executed in the round before the timing effect (operation effect) is executed, and FIGS. 88 (b) to 89 are shown in FIGS. , Is a schematic diagram showing an example of the display contents during the timing effect (operation effect). In each drawing, a schematic diagram showing the display contents of the third symbol display device 81 and a schematic diagram showing the operation status for the operation means (operation button 300) are used, and the second drawing changes based on the operation of the operation means. 3 The display contents of the symbol display device 81 will be described.

As shown in FIG. 88, on the third symbol display device 81, the round number display unit 714 that displays the current number of rounds is displayed in the upper left of the screen in a manner indicating that the third round round game R is in progress. In the area Ds2, an acquisition display suggesting the number of balls acquired during the big hit is executed, and in the small area Ds3, "Aim to the right" is displayed on the guidance display unit that guides the game method. Then, the acquired number display mode 718 for suggesting the number of balls acquired based on the ball winning in the specific winning opening 1000a (see FIG. 7) is displayed as "15" indicating the number of winning balls in the specific winning opening 1000a. Will be done. The acquired number display mode 718 is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 based on the winning of the ball to the specific winning opening 1000a, then is moved and displayed toward the small area Ds2, and finally, the small area Ds2. It is added as an acquisition display.

In the round number display unit 714, the display regarding the currently executing game section (number of rounds or interval) is displayed large on the left side, and the display regarding the game section started after the end of the currently executing game section is displayed on the right side. It is displayed small.

In addition, four circles are displayed side by side below the number of rounds display. The circles to be filled are switched according to the number of spheres stored in the storage flow path 1231. That is, when the number of spheres stored in the storage flow path 1231 is less than 4, the circle at the left end is filled in (see FIG. 88 (a), corresponding to the shortage display) and stored in the storage flow path 1231. When the number of spheres to be stored is 4 or more and less than 7, the second circle from the left is filled (corresponding to the intermediate number display), and the number of spheres stored in the storage flow path 1231 is 7. If the number is less than 9, the second circle from the right is filled in (see FIG. 92 (a), corresponding to the shortage display), and the number of spheres stored in the storage flow path 1231 is 10. In that case, the circle at the right end is filled in (see FIG. 92 (b), corresponding to the full tank display).

In the center of the screen, a notice display for notifying the player that the timing effect (operation effect) will be started from the next round and a guidance display for notifying the game nature of the timing effect (operation effect) are executed. .. Then, on the lower side of the screen, an effect area used in the timing effect (operation effect) is displayed.

In this effect area, the button display mode 715 corresponding to the operation button 300 is displayed, and the sub-display area Ds4 on which the display pointer 719 (see FIG. 88B) is displayed corresponding to the button display mode 715. A sub-display area Ds5 is provided below the sub-display area Ds4, which is arranged in the same shape as the sub-display area Ds4 and displays information about the player's operation.

As will be described later in FIG. 88B, the sub-display area Ds4 is an area in which a plurality of display pointers 719 are scrolled and displayed from right to left, and the display pointer 719 is a display mode indicating an operation timing. By operating the operation button 300 (operation means) at a timing that matches the bar display unit 717, a success effect (see FIG. 88 (b) described later) is executed. Further, when the operating means is operated at a timing when the display pointer 719 does not match the bar display unit 717, a failure effect (see FIG. 89 described later) is executed.

As shown in FIG. 88 (b), the transmission lamps 227ba to 227be are turned on in connection with the success effect being executed in the round game R of the fourth round (see FIG. 86 (b)). In the description of this control example, as shown in FIGS. 86 (a) and 86 (b), the inside of the lining front plate 1200 is difficult to see when the transmission lamps 227ba to 227be are turned off, while the transmission lamp is difficult to see. It is composed of a half mirror so as to switch to a transparent state in which the inside becomes visible when 227ba to 227be are turned on. Therefore, by turning on the transmission lamps 227ba to 227be, the flow condition of the sphere flowing down near the interference device 6900 (see FIGS. 86 (a) and 86 (b)) (of the sphere stored in the storage flow path 1231). The storage mode) can be grasped by the player.

Further, as shown in FIG. 89, a part of the transmission lamps 227ba to 227be is lit in connection with the failure effect being executed in the fourth round game R. As a result, the storage mode of the spheres arranged near the interference device 6900 (lower half of the storage flow path 1231) cannot be visually recognized, while the storage mode is arranged near the detection sensor 1240 (upper half of the storage flow path 1231). The storage mode of the sphere is configured to be visible.

As shown in FIG. 88A, the characters “waiting” are scrolled and displayed from right to left in the sub-display areas Ds4 and Ds5 while the advance notice effect is being executed.

Next, with reference to FIG. 88 (b), the display contents of the timing effect (operation effect) during the jackpot will be described. When the timing effect (operation effect) is executed, the display pointer 719 is scrolled and displayed in the sub-display area Ds4, and when the operation button 300 is operated at the timing when the display pointer 719a matches the bar display unit 717, the center of the screen is displayed. The character "good" is displayed as the result display mode 720, and the operation of the operation button 300 is displayed by changing the display mode of the button display mode 715.

As shown in FIG. 88B, at the same time as the result display mode 720 is displayed, the characters "Attention to the attacker!" Are displayed in the vicinity of the result display mode 720, and the result display mode 720 is displayed in the sub-display area Ds5. The characters "good" are displayed in the same manner as above.

In this case, by distributing the characters "good" on the third symbol display device 81, the player can easily notice the display, and the player who notices the display can be attacked (first variable winning device 6000). ) Can be easily noticed. Then, the player can be made aware that the storage balls stored in the storage flow path 1231 of the first variable winning device 6000 are visible, and the player who notices the storage number is determined. Appropriate launch ball adjustments can be made accordingly.

The state shown in FIG. 89 is a state in which the operation button 300 is operated at a timing when the display pointer 719c does not match the bar display unit 717 in the timing effect (operation effect), and the result display mode 720 is set to " The characters "bad" are displayed, and the operation of the operation button 300 is displayed by changing the display mode of the button display mode 715.

As shown in FIG. 89, at the same time that the result display mode 720 is displayed, the characters “bad” are displayed in the sub-display area Ds5 as in the result display mode 720. In addition, the characters "Attention to the attacker!" Are not displayed here.

In this case, by distributing the characters "bad" on the third symbol display device 81, the player can easily notice the display. In addition, by not displaying the characters "Attention to the attacker!", The player can attack the attacker (first variable) even when the stored balls stored in the storage channel 1231 of the first variable winning device 6000 are difficult to see. Since it is possible to suppress attention to the winning device 6000), it is possible to maintain the player's attention to the effect of the third symbol display device 81. In addition, it is possible to increase the player's confidence in the display of the characters "Attention to the attacker!" (Confidence that profits can be obtained by following the display).

As described above, as shown in FIG. 89, when the result display mode 720 is displayed, some of the transmission lamps 227ba are lit. On the other hand, in this control example, in the timing effect (operation effect) in the fourth round game R, the operation button 300 is operated even after 3 seconds have passed after the display pointer 719 passed the bar display unit 717. If this is not done, the transmission lamps 227ba to 227be are all controlled to be kept off, so that in the subsequent round game R (from the 4th round to the 6th round), the storage flow path 1231 It is configured so that it is extremely difficult to see the inside.

90 (a) is a schematic view showing an example of the display contents of the timing effect (operation effect) in the interval between rounds immediately before the fifth round game R, and FIGS. 90 (b) to 91 (b). ) Is a schematic diagram showing an example of the display contents during the timing effect (operation effect). In each drawing, a schematic diagram showing the display contents of the third symbol display device 81 and a schematic diagram showing the operation status for the operation means (operation button 300) are used, and the second drawing changes based on the operation of the operation means. 3 The display contents of the symbol display device 81 will be described.

As shown in FIG. 90, the third symbol display device 81 is displayed on the upper left of the screen in a manner indicating that the above-mentioned round number display unit 714 is in the inter-round interval immediately before the fifth round game R. In the small area Ds2, an acquisition display suggesting the number of balls acquired during the big hit is executed, and in the small area Ds3, "Aim to the right" is displayed on the guidance display unit that guides the game method.

In the center of the screen, an operation instruction display consisting of the characters "press!" That prompts the operation of the operation button 300 is executed. Then, on the lower side of the screen, an effect area used in the timing effect (operation effect) is displayed.

In the sub-display area Ds5 corresponding to the lower part of the effect area, the band display unit 716, which is a display mode indicating the operation timing, is displayed as in the bar display unit 717. The band display unit 716 is provided adjacent to the first band unit 716a on which the characters "safety" are displayed on the right side of the bar display unit 717 and to the left of the first band unit 716a, and the bar display unit. It includes a second band portion 716b that overlaps with the 717 and displays the character "highest", and a third band portion 716c that displays the character "failure" on the left side of the second band portion 716b. ..

As described above, the display pointer 719d is scrolled and displayed from right to left in the sub-display area Ds4. In this control example, the profit obtained by the player is controlled to change depending on the position of the display pointer 719d on the band display unit 716 when the operation button 300 (operation means) is operated.

For example, when the operation button 300 (operation means) is operated when the display pointer 719d is above the first band portion 716a, a relief effect (see FIG. 91 (a) described later) is executed. In this case, while an advantageous event occurs in which the privilege of shifting to the high probability state of the special symbol can be obtained after the end of the jackpot game, the payout of prize balls in the fifth round game R is slightly reduced (specified number). (In this control example, the number of prize balls is reduced by the amount that 10 balls cannot be entered), and a disadvantageous event occurs in which the duration of the round game R in the fifth round becomes the maximum time (30 seconds). ..

Further, for example, when the operation button 300 (operation means) is operated when the display pointer 719d is above the second band portion 716b, the highest effect (see FIG. 90 (b) described later) is executed. In this case, an advantageous event occurs in which the privilege of shifting to the high probability state of the special symbol can be obtained after the end of the jackpot game, and the specified number (10) of balls is first in the fifth round game R. While an advantageous event occurs in which the ball can be entered into the specific winning opening 1000a and the duration of the round game R in the fifth round can be made shorter than the maximum time (30 seconds), no disadvantageous event occurs.

Further, for example, when the operation button 300 (operation means) is operated when the display pointer 719d is above the third band portion 716c, or when the operation button 200 (operation means) is not operated, a failure effect is produced. (See FIG. 91 (b) described later) is executed. In this case, a disadvantageous event occurs in which the privilege of shifting to the high probability state of the special symbol cannot be obtained after the end of the jackpot game, while the specified number (10) of balls is first in the fifth round game R. An advantageous event occurs in which the ball can be entered into the specific winning opening 1000a and the duration of the round game R in the fifth round can be made shorter than the maximum time (30 seconds).

It should be noted that the maximum profit can be obtained by operating the operation button 300 (operation means) when the display pointer 719 is on the second band portion 716b that vertically overlaps with the bar display portion 717. Therefore, FIG. 88 (b) shows. And even if the display immediately shifts from the timing effect (operation effect) displayed in FIG. 89, the player can execute the operation of the operation button 300 (operation means) without discomfort.

Next, with reference to FIG. 90B, an example of the display content of the timing effect (operation effect) during the jackpot will be described. When the timing effect (operation effect) is executed, the display pointer 719 is scrolled and displayed in the sub-display area Ds4, and when the operation button 300 is operated at the timing when the display pointer 719d coincides with the second band portion 716b at the top and bottom. , The character "highest! V acquisition!" (Highest effect) is displayed as the result display mode 720 in the center of the screen, and the operation of the operation button 300 is displayed by changing the display mode of the button display mode 715. Scroll. As a result, it is possible to make the player visually recognize that the maximum profit can be obtained, and it is possible to improve the interest of the player.

By operating the operation button 300 (operation means) when the display pointer 719 is located on the second band portion 716b that vertically overlaps with the bar display portion 717, it is controlled so that the maximum profit can be obtained. Even if the display immediately shifts from the timing effect (operation effect) (effect in the fourth round game R) displayed in FIGS. 88 (b) and 89 (the effect in the inter-round interval is immediately started). Also, the player can execute the operation of the operation button 300 (operation means) without discomfort.

Further, as shown in FIG. 88 (a), since "Don't be careful even after the end of the round" is displayed on the guidance display, the interval between rounds after the end of the fourth round game R (FIG. Even in 90 (a)), the player's attention to the third symbol display device 81 can be maintained. As a result, the possibility that the player cannot operate the operation button 300 (operation means) without noticing the display of the timing effect (operation effect) shown in FIG. 90 (b) can be reduced. it can.

Next, with reference to FIG. 91 (a), an example of the display contents of the timing effect (operation effect) during the jackpot will be described. When the timing effect (operation effect) is executed, the display pointer 719 is scrolled and displayed in the sub-display area Ds4, and when the operation button 300 is operated at the timing when the display pointer 719e coincides with the first band portion 716a in the vertical direction. , The characters "Reliable! V acquisition with reason!" (Reliable effect) are displayed as the result display mode 720 in the center of the screen, and the operation of the operation button 300 changes the display mode of the button display mode 715. Is displayed. As a result, it is possible to make the player visually recognize that it is possible to obtain a profit that can be reassured although there is some disadvantage, and it is possible to improve the interest of the player.

As described above, the slight disadvantage is that the payout of prize balls in the fifth round game R is slightly reduced (in this control example, 10 balls cannot be entered). The prize balls are reduced by the minute, which means that the duration of the fifth round game R is the maximum time (30 seconds).

Next, with reference to FIG. 91 (b), an example of the display content of the timing effect (operation effect) during the jackpot will be described. When the timing effect (operation effect) is executed, the display pointer 719 is scrolled and displayed in the sub-display area Ds4, and when the operation button 300 is operated at the timing when the display pointer 719f coincides with the third band portion 716c at the top and bottom. , The character "Failure! Not V! Next expectation!" Is displayed as the result display mode 720 in the center of the screen, and the display mode of the button display mode 715 is changed by operating the operation button 300. It is displayed by letting it. As a result, it is possible to notify the player that a great deal of disadvantage will occur.

As described above, the great disadvantage is that it is not possible to obtain the privilege of shifting to the high probability state of the special symbol after the end of the jackpot game. Further, in this case, as described above, in the fifth round round game R, a specified number (10) of balls can be entered into the first specific winning opening 1000a, and the fifth round round game R can be continued. Since the time can be made shorter than the maximum time (30 seconds), the timing of the end of the jackpot game can be advanced as compared with the case shown in FIG. 91 (a), and the lottery of the special symbol can be executed earlier. Therefore, it is possible to facilitate the transition timing to the next jackpot game.

As described above, in this control example, the profit obtained by the player is obtained based on the operation result of the operation button 300 (operation means) in the timing effect (operation effect) in the inter-round interval immediately before the fifth round game R. Since it changes, it is possible to improve the player's motivation to operate the operation button 300 (operation means).

Next, the display in the sixth round of the round game R will be described with reference to FIGS. 92 (a) and 92 (b). 92 (a) and 92 (b) are schematic views showing an example of display contents for notifying the third symbol display device 81 that the sixth round round game R is being executed. Note that FIG. 92 (a) is a schematic diagram showing an example of display when the jackpot type is “big hit L” or “big hit N”, and in FIG. 92 (b), the jackpot type is “big hit K”. It is a schematic diagram which showed an example of the display in the case of "big hit M" or "big hit k".

In an example of the display in the sixth round round game R shown in FIG. 92 (a), it is determined that the jackpot type is a jackpot of "big hit L" or "big hit N", that is, a 6-round jackpot is won. The characters "Big hit" are displayed.

Further, in an example of the display in the sixth round round game R shown in FIG. 92 (b), a jackpot whose jackpot type is "big hit K", "big hit M", or "big hit k" is won, that is, a 6-round jackpot. The character "big hit" indicating that the player has won the game is displayed, and the interference device 6900 is executed in the player-favorable operation pattern (20th operation pattern) in the sixth round game R. The character "+ chance" is displayed as the notification mode 721 for increasing the possibility of excessive winning, and the character "right-handed!" Is displayed on the guidance display unit in the small area Ds3.

When the jackpot type is "big hit K", "big hit M" or "big hit k", in the 6th round round game R, the number of balls entered exceeds the specified number by continuing without stopping the firing of the balls. The interfering device 6900 is driven so as to increase the possibility of occurrence (see FIG. 99 (a)). Therefore, the player can increase the possibility of receiving the payout of the prize balls exceeding the specified number by continuing the firing of the balls according to the display of FIG. 92 (b).

In this way, in addition to the mode of notifying that the lottery result of the special symbol was a big hit, the mode of notifying the operating status of the interfering device 6900 during the big hit is notified on the display screen in the round game R. It is possible to display a display mode suitable for various patterns of round game R. In this control example, by continuing or stopping the firing of the ball according to this display, the player can easily receive the maximum profit planned for each jackpot type as the profit given to the player. Is controlled by. Therefore, the player can easily obtain the maximum profit by firing the ball according to the display.

In this control example, the player who is executed in the timing effect (operation effect) has a different effect mode of the timing effect (operation effect) based on the operation content, but in addition to that, for example, the timing effect Operation history (operation) in which the player operates the operation button 300 (operation means) in an operation effect (for example, a mini-game effect during a jackpot game or a reach effect during a special symbol change) executed other than (operation effect). The timing effect (operation effect) may be configured to be different based on the number of times, the operation content, and the operation result). As a result, it is possible to enthusiastically play the game for various operation effects executed by the pachinko machine 10, and it is possible to prevent the player from getting tired of the game at an early stage.

Further, the timing effect is not limited to the operation result for the operation button 300 (operation means) by the player, for example, based on the time timing period measured by the time measurement means (RTC) or the game period in which the player plays the game. It may be configured to switch the production mode of (operation effect).

<About the electrical configuration in the first control example>
Next, with reference to FIG. 93, the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 will be described again. FIG. 93 is a block diagram showing an electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10. The changes to FIG. 4 will be described, and the description will be omitted in the same parts.

The main control device 110 executes the main processing of the pachinko machine 10, such as a jackpot lottery, display setting in the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81, and lottery of display results in the second symbol display device 83. The RAM 203 is provided with a counter buffer (see FIG. 100) for storing various counters for controlling these processes.

Here, with reference to FIG. 100, a counter and the like provided in the RAM 203 of the main control device 110 will be described. FIG. 100 is a model diagram illustrating a counter and the like provided in the RAM 203 of the main control device 110. These counters and the like use the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 to perform a jackpot lottery, setting the display of the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81, drawing the display result of the second symbol display device 83, and the like. Used in.

For the jackpot lottery and the display settings of the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81, the first hit random number counter C1 used for the jackpot (and small hit) lottery and the jackpot type (big hit symbol) are selected. Used to set the initial value of the first hit type counter C2 used for, the stop type counter C3 used for selecting the stop type, the fluctuation type counter CS1 used for selecting the fluctuation pattern, and the random number counter C1 per first. The first initial value random number counter CINI1 is used.

Further, the second random number counter C4 is used for the lottery of the ordinary symbol (second symbol display device 83), and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 is used for setting the initial value of the second random number counter C4. Further, the small hit type counter C5 is used for selecting the small hit type. Each of these counters is a loop counter in which 1 is added to the previous value each time it is updated, and after reaching the maximum value, it returns to 0.

Each counter is updated, for example, at intervals of 2 milliseconds, which is the execution interval of the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 107), and some counters are updated irregularly in the main process (see FIG. 117). Then, the updated value is appropriately stored in the counter buffer set in the predetermined area of the RAM 203. Although the details will be described later, the RAM 203 stores each counter value for the winning of the first ball opening 64 and the special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a and the winning of the second ball opening 640. A special symbol 2 holding ball storage 203b is provided.

In this control example, the first ball entry port 64 and the second ball entry port 640 are each provided with a maximum of four reserved balls, and a total of a maximum of eight reserved balls can be stored. Therefore, if the ball wins the first entry slot 64 during the period when the special symbol can be drawn, such as when the special symbol is not displayed in a variable manner or when the special symbol is not in the jackpot game, each counter value is changed to the special symbol. When the game ball is stored in the 1 reserved ball storage area 203a and the game ball wins in the second entrance 640, each counter value is stored in the special symbol 2 reserved ball storage area 203b. After that, each counter value stored in the special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a is moved to the execution area provided in the special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a, and the special symbol 1 is variablely displayed (dynamically displayed). Various settings and control processing for this are executed. Similarly, each counter value stored in the special symbol 2 reserved ball storage area 203b is moved to the execution area provided in the special symbol 2 reserved ball storage area 203b, and various types for variable display of the special symbol 2 are displayed. Settings and control processing are executed.

On the other hand, during the period when the special symbol cannot be drawn, such as during the variable display of the special symbol 1 or the special symbol 2 or during the jackpot game of the special symbol 1 or the special symbol 2, the game ball enters the first slot 64 or the second slot. When the ball opening 640 is won, if the number of reserved balls for the winning ball opening (starting opening) is less than the upper limit value (4 in this control example), each counter value is acquired and the winning is won. It is stored in the special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a or the special symbol 2 reserved ball storage area 203b corresponding to the entrance. In addition, when the number of reserved balls for the winning ball opening is the upper limit value (4 in this control example) or more, each counter value or the like is not acquired and the prize balls (5 in this control example) are not acquired. Only the prize ball) is treated as an invalid ball paid out to the player.

Each counter will be described in detail with reference to FIG. 100. The first random number counter C1 is configured to be incremented by 1 in order within a predetermined range (0 to 319 in this control example), reach the maximum value (319 in this control example), and then return to 0. There is. In particular, when the first random number counter C1 makes one round, the value of the first initial value random number counter CINI1 at that time is read as the initial value of the first random number counter C1.

Further, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 is configured as a loop counter updated in the same range as the first random number counter C1. That is, for example, when the first random number counter C1 is a loop counter capable of taking a value of 0 to 319, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 is also a loop counter in the range of 0 to 319. The first initial value random number counter CINI1 is updated once for each execution of the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 107), and is repeatedly updated within the remaining time of the main process (see FIG. 117).

The value of the first random number counter C1 is updated periodically (in this control example, once for each timer interrupt process), and the timing at which the ball wins the first entry port 64 or the second entry opening 640. It is stored in the special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a or the special symbol 2 reserved ball storage area 203b of the RAM 203. The value of the random number that becomes the jackpot of the special symbol is defined in the first random number table 202a stored in the ROM 202 (see FIG. 94 (a)) of the main control device 110, and the first random number counter C1. When the value matches the value of the random number that is the big hit defined in the first random number table 202a, it is determined to be the big hit of the special symbol.

Here, the first random number table 202a (see FIG. 94A) will be described. The first hit random number table 202a is a table in which a random number value (determination value) determined to be a hit in each game state is set in the lottery of the special symbol 1 or the special symbol 2. Specifically, when the game state is a low probability state, it is determined in the lottery of the special symbol 1 or the special symbol 2 whether the value of the acquired first random number counter C1 is "0". If it is "0", it is determined to be a big hit. Further, when the game state is a high probability state, it is determined in the lottery of the special symbol 1 or the special symbol 2 whether the value of the acquired first random number counter C1 is within the range of "1 to 4". If it is within the range of "1 to 4", it is determined that it is a big hit.

Here, if the value of the first hit random number counter C1 stored in the execution area of the special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a or the execution area of the special symbol 2 reserved ball storage area 203b is a random number that is a big hit of the special symbol. For example, the display mode corresponding to the stop symbol displayed on the first symbol display device 37 is the one at the time of a big hit of the special symbol. In this case, the specific display mode at the time of the big hit is the display mode indicated by the value of the first hit type counter C2 stored in the same execution area.

The first random number counter C1 in the pachinko machine 10 of this control example is configured as a 2-byte loop counter in the range of 0 to 319. As described above, in the low probability state of the special symbol, there is one value of the first random number counter C1 which is a big hit of the special symbol, and the random number value "0" is the first random number table as described above. It is stored in 202a (see FIG. 94 (a)). Since the total number of random numbers that are big hits is 1 while the total number of random numbers is 320, the probability of being a big hit of a special symbol is "1/320". On the other hand, in the high probability state of the special symbol, there are four values of the first random number counter C1 which is a big hit of the special symbol, and the random number values "1 to 4" are the first random number table as described above. It is stored in 202a. Since the total number of random numbers that are big hits is 4 while the total number of random numbers is 320, the probability of being a big hit of a special symbol is "1/80".

Further, the value of the first hit type counter C2 in the pachinko machine 10 of this control example is configured as a loop counter in the range of 0 to 99. Then, when the lottery result of the special symbol becomes a big hit, the big hit type is selected based on the value of the first hit type counter C2 and the first hit type selection table 202b (see FIG. 94 (b)). The Rukoto. Specifically, it will be described later with reference to FIG. 94 (b).

In this control example, the stop type selection counter C3 is configured to be incremented by 1 in order within the range of 0 to 99, reach the maximum value (that is, 99), and then return to 0. In this control example, the stop type selection counter C3 selects the stop type at the time of disconnection displayed by the third symbol display device 81, and after the reach occurs, the symbol is different from the symbol that is reached as the final stop symbol. Two stop (effect) patterns are selected: "out of reach" where the symbol stops (for example, in the range of 90 to 99) and "completely out of reach" (for example, in the range of 0 to 89) where reach does not occur. The value of the stop type selection counter C3 is updated periodically (once for each timer interrupt process in this control example), and when a ball enters the first entry port 64, the value is a special value of the RAM 203. The symbol 1 is stored in the reserved ball storage area 203a. When the ball enters the second entry port 640, the value is stored in the special symbol 2 reserved ball storage area 203b of the RAM 203.

From the value (random value) of the stop type selection counter C3, the random number value for determining the stop type of the special symbol is set by the stop type selection table (not shown), and this table is the main control. It is provided in the ROM 202 of the device 110. Further, in this control example, this table is divided into a special symbol for high probability and a special symbol for low probability, and a range of random values set for each stop type of deviation according to the table. Is changing. This is because the selection ratio of the stop type is changed depending on whether the pachinko machine 10 is in the high probability state of the special symbol or the low probability state of the special symbol.

For example, in the probabilistic state of a special symbol, a jackpot is likely to occur, so the range of random values corresponding to the "completely off" stop type is wide, 0 to 89, so that the reach effect is not selected more than necessary. Table is selected, "completely out of reach" is easily selected, and "out of reach" is narrowed to 90 to 99, so that "out of reach" is difficult to be selected. Further, in the low probability state of the special symbol, the range of the random number value corresponding to the stop type of "completely off" is narrow as 0 to 79 in order to secure the ball entry time to the first entry port 64. A table for low probability is selected, and it becomes difficult to select "completely out of reach", and the range of random numbers corresponding to the stop type of "out of reach" is widened to 80 to 99. Therefore, in the low probability state, it is possible to perform many reach displays with a long effect time, so that the ball entry time to the first entry port 64 can be secured, and the variation display by the third symbol display device 81 continues. It will be easier to do.

In this control example, the variation type counter CS1 is configured to be incremented by 1 in order within the range of 0 to 198, reach the maximum value (that is, 198), and then return to 0. The variation type counter CS1 determines one variation pattern from the set variation pattern selection table. A fluctuation time (dynamic display period) is set in this fluctuation pattern, and the fluctuation type counter CS1 is also a counter for determining the fluctuation time. The value of the variation type counter CS1 is updated once each time the main process (see FIG. 117) described later is executed once, and is repeatedly updated even within the remaining time in the main process. The fluctuation pattern selection table 202d, which stores a random number value for determining one fluctuation time of the symbol fluctuation from the value (random number value) of the fluctuation type counter CS1, is provided in the ROM 202 of the main control device 110.

The variation pattern selection table 202d defines a plurality of data tables for selecting variation patterns. In this variation pattern selection table 202d, a plurality of variation pattern selection tables commonly used for the special symbol 1 and the special symbol 2 are set, and a variation pattern selection table is set for each of the hit / fail determination results. Has been done.

In this control example, the second random number counter C4 is configured as a loop counter in which 1 is sequentially added in the range of 0 to 239, and after reaching the maximum value (that is, 239), the counter returns to 0. Further, when the second hit random number counter C4 makes one round, the value of the second initial value random number counter CINI2 at that time is read as the initial value of the second hit random number counter C4. In this control example, the value of the second random number counter C4 is updated periodically for each timer interrupt process (see FIG. 107), and it is detected that the ball has passed through the normal start port (through gate) 67. It is acquired at that time and stored in the execution area of the normal symbol of RAM 203.

The value of the random number that normally hits the symbol is defined in the second hit random number table 202c (see FIG. 94 (c)) stored in the ROM 202 of the main controller, and the value of the second hit random number counter C4. However, when it matches the value of the random number that is the hit specified in the second hit random number table 202c, it is determined that the hit is a normal symbol (second symbol). In this control example, in the second hit random number table 202c, when the probability of the normal symbol is low (during the normal state of the normal symbol), there are five random numbers that can be hit by the normal symbol, and the range is "5 to 9". ". Since the total number of random numbers that can be taken by the second random number counter C4 is 240 and the total number of random numbers that can be hit is 5, the probability of hitting a normal symbol at a low probability of a normal symbol is "1". / 48 ".

On the other hand, when the probability of the normal symbol is high (during the time saving state of the normal symbol), there are 200 random values that can be hit by the normal symbol, and the range is "5-204". Since the total number of random numbers that can be taken by the second random number counter C4 is 240 and the total number of random numbers that can be hit is 200, the probability of hitting a normal symbol is "1 / 1.2". .. As described above, in this control example, the random value that is the hit of the normal symbol is significantly different between the low probability state of the normal symbol and the high probability state of the normal symbol, so that the hit probability is greatly different. In addition, the fluctuation time of the normal symbol and the opening time of the electric accessory 640a attached to the second entrance 640 when the normal symbol hits are also different between the low probability time and the high probability time of the normal symbol. .. For this reason, the ease of entering the second ball opening 640 differs greatly between the low probability state of the normal symbol and the high probability state of the normal symbol. Therefore, in the low probability state (normal state) of the normal symbol, The player can be made to play the game aiming at the first entrance 64.

When the ball passes through the through gate (normal entry port) 67 (see FIG. 2) in the low probability state of the normal symbol, the value of the random number counter C4 per second is acquired and the second symbol display device 83 (FIG. 2). In (see 2), the fluctuation display of the normal symbol is executed for 30 seconds. Then, if the acquired value of the second random number counter C4 is in the range of "5 to 9", it is determined that the player has won, and after the variation display on the second symbol display device 83 is completed, the stop symbol (second symbol) ), The symbol "○" is lit and displayed, and the second entrance 640 is opened only for "0.2 seconds x 2 times".

On the other hand, when the ball passes through the through gate (normal entry port) 67 (see FIG. 2) in the high probability state of the normal symbol, the fluctuation display of the normal symbol is displayed for 1 second on the second symbol display device 83 (see FIG. 2). If the value of the second random number counter C4 executed and acquired is in the range of "5-204", it is determined that the winning symbol has been won, and after the variation display in the second symbol display device 83 is completed, the stop symbol (second symbol) The symbol "○" is lit and displayed as the symbol), and the second entrance 640 is opened only "1 second x 2 times". In this control example, the fluctuation time of the normal symbol, the opening time of the normal electric accessory, and the number of times of opening may be appropriately changed as long as the game playability is not impaired.

The second initial value random number counter CINI2 is configured as a loop counter that is updated in the same range as the second random number counter C4 (that is, “0 to 239”), and is once for each timer interrupt process (see FIG. 107). At the same time as being updated, it is repeatedly updated within the remaining time of the main process (see FIG. 117).

As described above, the RAM 203 is provided with various counters and the like, and in the main control device 110, a jackpot lottery and a display on the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81 are displayed according to the value of the counter or the like. The main processing of the pachinko machine 10 such as setting and lottery of display results in the second symbol display device 83 can be executed.

Returning to FIG. 93, the description will be continued. In addition to the various counters shown in FIG. 93, the RAM 203 includes a stack area in which the contents of the internal registers of the MPU 201 and the return address of the control program executed by the MPU 201 are stored, various flags and counters, I / O, and the like. It has a work area (work area) in which the value of is stored.

The RAM 203 has a configuration in which a backup voltage is supplied from the power supply device 115 to hold (back up) data even after the power supply of the pachinko machine 10 is cut off, and all the data stored in the RAM 203 is backed up. ..

When the power supply is cut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like, the stack pointer at the time of the power failure (including the time when the power failure occurs; the same applies hereinafter) and the value of each register are stored in the RAM 203. On the other hand, when the power is turned on (including power on due to power failure elimination; the same applies hereinafter), the state of the pachinko machine 10 is restored to the state before the power was cut off based on the information stored in the RAM 203. The writing to the RAM 203 is executed by the main process (see FIG. 117) when the power is cut off, and the restoration of each value written in the RAM 203 is executed in the start-up process (see FIG. 116) when the power is turned on. The NMI terminal (non-maskable interrupt terminal) of the MPU 201 is configured so that a power failure signal SG1 from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 is input when the power is cut off due to a power failure or the like, and the power failure signal SG1 is the MPU201. When input to, the NMI interrupt process (see FIG. 115) as the power failure process is immediately executed.

Next, the contents of the ROM 202 of the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 in this control example will be described with reference to FIGS. 94 to 95. FIG. 94 (a) is a schematic view schematically showing the contents of ROM 202 in MPU 201 of the main control device 110 in this control example. In the ROM 202, in addition to the first random number table 202a and the second random number table 202c already described above, the first hit type selection table 202b, the variation pattern selection table 202d, and the switching plate and the interference member operation scenario storage area At least 202e and an opening / closing plate and an interference member operation scenario table 202f are provided.

First, the details of the first type selection table 202b will be described with reference to FIG. 94 (b). FIG. 94 (b) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the first type selection table 202b. The first hit type selection table 202b (see FIG. 94 (b)) is a data table in which determination values for determining the jackpot type are stored for each type of special symbol, and the determination of the first hit type counter C2. The value is specified in association with each jackpot type. In the pachinko machine 10 of the present control example, when it is determined that the special symbol is a big hit, the value of the first hit type counter C2 acquired based on the start winning prize is compared with the first hit type selection table 202b, and the first hit type selection table 202b is compared. The jackpot type corresponding to the value of the hit type counter C2 is selected.

As shown in FIG. 94 (b), "big hit K" is associated with the special symbol 1 in the range where the value of the first hit type counter C2 is "0 to 24". This "big hit K" is a big hit with 6 rounds. Of the 100 counter values that the first hit type counter C2 can take, 25 are counter values that are "big hit K", so if a big hit is achieved in the special symbol 1 lottery, "big hit K" is determined. The ratio is 25% (25/100).

For this "big hit K", 6 rounds are set as the number of rounds, and after the big hit ends, the game shifts to a high probability state (ST80 times) of 80 times in a short time. Therefore, it is an advantageous jackpot type in terms of ball ejection (expected ball ejection) that can be acquired by the player from the start of one jackpot until the gaming state returns to the normal state.

Further, with respect to the special symbol 1, the value of the first hit type counter C2 is defined in the range of "25 to 49" in association with "big hit L". This "big hit L" is a big hit with 6 rounds. Of the 100 counter values that the first hit type counter C2 can take, 25 are counter values that are "big hit L", so if a big hit is achieved in the special symbol 1 lottery, "big hit L" is determined. The ratio is 25% (25/100).

For this "big hit L", 6 rounds are set as the number of rounds, and it is the same as "big hit K" to shift to a high probability state (ST80 times) of 80 times in a short time after the end of the big hit, but as will be described later, In terms of game efficiency (number of prize balls paid out / time required for big hit game), it is a big hit type that is disadvantageous compared to "big hit K".

Further, with respect to the special symbol 1, the value of the first hit type counter C2 is defined in the range of "50 to 74" in association with "big hit M". This "big hit M" is a big hit with 6 rounds. Of the 100 counter values that the first hit type counter C2 can take, 25 counter values are "big hit M", so if a big hit is achieved in the special symbol 1 lottery, "big hit M" is determined. The ratio is 25% (25/100).

For this "big hit M", 6 rounds are set as the number of rounds, and after the big hit is completed, the time saving state of the normal symbol is given 100 times.

Further, with respect to the special symbol 1, the value of the first hit type counter C2 is defined in the range of "75 to 99" in association with "big hit N". This "big hit N" is a big hit with 6 rounds. Of the 100 counter values that the first hit type counter C2 can take, 25 counter values are "big hit N", so if a big hit is achieved in the special symbol 1 lottery, "big hit N" is determined. The ratio is 25% (25/100).

This "big hit N" is set to 6 rounds as the number of rounds, and after the big hit is completed, the time saving state of the normal symbol is given 100 times, which is the same as the "big hit M", but as will be described later, "big hit M". It is disadvantageous in that the maximum number of payouts is small (the possibility of over-winning (over-winning) is low) with respect to "big hit M".

On the other hand, for the second special symbol, "big hit k" is associated with the range (entire range) in which the value of the first hit type counter C2 is "0 to 99". This "big hit k" is a big hit with 6 rounds. Of the 100 counter values that the first hit type counter C2 can take, 100 counter values are "big hit k", so "big hit k" is determined when a big hit is obtained in the special symbol 2 lottery. The ratio is 100%.

For this "big hit k", 6 rounds are set as the number of rounds, and after the jackpot ends, whether to shift to the high probability state (ST80 times) of 80 times of time reduction or to give the time reduction state of the normal symbol 100 times. , It changes depending on the game mode of the player during the jackpot game. The game mode of the player is not limited in any way, and the ball may be passed through a predetermined entry port or a predetermined operation means may be operated. However, the details in this control example are described. It will be described later.

That is, although the number of rounds of the jackpot game is the same for the special symbol 1 and the special symbol 2, the special symbol 2 is more advantageous in the privilege (the time saving state or the high probability state of the normal symbol) given after the jackpot ends. (It is easy to shift to the high probability state).

As described above, in this control example, the case where the lottery of the special symbol 1 is a big hit, the case where the lottery of the special symbol 2 is a big hit shifts to a high probability state which is advantageous to the player. The structure makes it easy. Therefore, once the consecutive villa mode (high probability state of special symbol and time saving state of normal symbol) is set, the special symbol 2 is drawn by right-handed to enter the second entrance 640. Is easy to be executed and the jackpot game is easy to be repeated. Therefore, it is possible to have the player play the game for one purpose of shifting to the consecutive villa mode. Therefore, it is possible to improve the interest of the player in the game.

Next, the detailed contents of the opening / closing plate and the interference member operation scenario storage area 202e will be described with reference to FIG. 95 (a). FIG. 95A is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the opening / closing plate and the interference member operation scenario storage area 202e. The opening / closing plate and the interference member operation scenario storage area 202e is an area in which the operation scenarios used for the operation control of the opening / closing plate 1300 and the interference member 6930 (see FIG. 52) are stored for each scenario type. The opening / closing plate 1300 and the interference member 6930 are operated in a predetermined round game R in the jackpot game by using the information stored in the interference member operation scenario storage area 202e.

Specifically, in the opening / closing plate and the interference member operation scenario storage area 202e, operation scenarios 1 to 6 are defined as scenario types. The operation scenario 1 is an operation scenario for a maximum of 30 seconds in which the opening / closing plate 1300 is set to "open (open state)" and the interference member 6930 is set to "retract state" as the scenario content. In the operation scenario 1, even before 30 seconds have passed, the detection sensor 1240 detects a specified number of balls (10 in this control example), so that the operation scenario of the opening / closing plate 1300 ends, and the initial stage It is controlled to return to the state (the state in which the opening / closing plate 1300 is closed and the interfering member is in the retracted state).

The operation scenario 2 is an operation scenario for a maximum of 10 seconds in which the opening / closing plate 1300 is set to "open (open state)" and the interference member 6930 is set to "retract state" as the scenario content. In the operation scenario 2, the operation scenario of the opening / closing plate 1300 is completed by detecting a specified number of balls (10 in this control example) in the detection sensor 1240 even before 10 seconds have elapsed, and the initial operation scenario 2 is completed. It is controlled to return to the state.

In the operation scenario 3, "open (open state) 0.2 seconds → closed (closed state) 0.8 seconds → open (open state)" is set in the opening / closing plate 1300, and the interfering member 6930 is set to "retracted state". This is an operation scenario of up to 30 seconds in which "1.0 seconds-> overhanging state 0.1 seconds-> retracted state" is set. In the operation scenario 3, the operation scenario of the opening / closing plate 1300 is completed by detecting a specified number of balls (10 in this control example) by the detection sensor 1240 even before 30 seconds have elapsed, and the initial operation scenario 3 is performed. It is controlled to return to the state.

In this operation scenario 3, unlike the above-mentioned operation scenario 1 and operation scenario 2, the opening / closing plate 1300 is first opened (open state) and then closed (closed state), so that the storage flow path 1231 The remaining balls can be discharged, but the details will be described later. Since the closed state is maintained for 0.8 seconds, up to 4 balls remaining in the storage flow path 1231 can be discharged (as described above, 0.2 seconds are required to discharge one ball).

Of the spheres remaining in the storage flow path 1231, the spheres discharged while the closure (closed state) is maintained for 0.8 seconds are guided to the probability fluctuation determination unit 4800. In this control example, regardless of the jackpot type, the distribution operation member 4851 is displaced to the open position 2.0 seconds after the start of the fifth round game R, and 18.0 seconds after that (the fifth round). (20.0 seconds after the start of the game R), the distribution operation member 4851 is displaced to the closed position.

This "2.0 seconds later" is later than the timing at which the third sphere counting from the downstream of the spheres remaining in the storage flow path 1231 passes through the distribution operation member 4851 (see FIG. 51). It is a numerical value set as a time point before the timing when the fourth sphere passes through the distribution operation member 4851. That is, the fourth ball passes through the discharge port 1150 immediately before the end of 0.8 seconds in which the opening / closing plate 1300 is maintained closed (closed state) (from the start of the fifth round game R 1. (0 seconds have passed), it is a numerical value derived from the setting that it takes 1.0 seconds to pass through the continuous passage 4810 from the discharge port 1150 (2.0 seconds have passed from the start of the fifth round game R). ..

In the operation scenario 4, "open (open state) 0.2 seconds → closed (closed state) 0.8 seconds → open (open state)" is set in the opening / closing plate 1300, and the interfering member 6930 is set to "retracted state". This is an operation scenario of a maximum of 30 seconds in which "1.0 seconds-> overhang state 24.0 seconds-> retracted state" is set. In the operation scenario 4, the operation scenario of the opening / closing plate 1300 is completed when the detection sensor 1240 detects a specified number of balls (10 in this control example) even before 30 seconds have elapsed, and the initial operation scenario 4 is performed. It is controlled to return to the state.

In this operation scenario 4, similarly to the operation scenario 3 described above, the opening / closing plate 1300 is initially opened (open state) and then closed (closed state), so that the sphere remaining in the storage flow path 1231. Can be discharged, but details will be described later. Since the closed state is maintained for 0.8 seconds, up to 4 balls remaining in the storage flow path 1231 can be discharged (as described above, 0.2 seconds are required to discharge one ball). As described above, among the spheres remaining in the storage flow path 1231, the spheres discharged while the closure (closed state) is maintained for 0.8 seconds are guided to the probability fluctuation determination unit 4800. is there.

The “overhanging state 24.0 seconds” in this operation scenario 4 is set as a numerical value capable of maintaining the overhanging state at least until the distribution operation member 4851 is displaced to the closed position. That is, in the operation scenario 4, as will be described later, it is impossible for a specified number of balls (10 in this control example) to pass through the detection sensor 1240 until the interference member 6930 is in the retracted state. Since the distribution operation member 4851 is displaced to the closed position before the interference member 6930 is in the retracted state, the ball discharged from the discharge port 1150 after the interference member 6930 is in the retracted state is removed. It becomes impossible to flow down to the specific area 4830.

In the operation scenario 5, "open (open state) 3.0 seconds → closed (closed state) 0.2 seconds → open (open state)" is set in the opening / closing plate 1300, and the interfering member 6930 is set to "retracted state". It is an operation scenario of a maximum of 30 seconds in which 0.2 seconds → overhang state 0.2 seconds → evacuation state 2.6 seconds → overhang state 20 seconds → evacuation state ”is set. In the operation scenario 5, the operation scenario of the opening / closing plate 1300 is completed when the detection sensor 1240 detects a specified number of balls (10 in this control example) even before 30 seconds have elapsed, and the initial operation scenario 5 is performed. It is controlled to return to the state.

In this operation scenario 5, the opening / closing plate 1300 is first opened (opened) and then closed (closed), so that one ball remaining in the storage flow path 1231 is discharged, as will be described later. This is an operation scenario in which the flow of spheres is regulated by the interference member 6930 and the number of spheres stored inside the storage flow path 1231 is limited to eight (see FIG. 53 (b), interference member 6930). Corresponds to the state where there is one sphere downstream of).

In this case, since it is possible to restrict the spheres from passing through the detection sensor 1240 when the number of spheres that have passed through the detection sensor 1240 is less than the specified number (9 in this control example), the interference member 6930 is retracted. Since it is possible to allow the ball to pass through the detection sensor 1240 based on the displacement to the detection sensor 1240, it is possible to generate the ball passing through the detection sensor 1240 with a plurality of balls arranged on the upstream side of the detection sensor 1240. it can. As a result, it is possible to easily generate an excess prize (so-called "over prize").

In the operation scenario 6, the opening / closing plate 1300 is set to "open (open state) 3.0 seconds → closed (closed state) 0.2 seconds → open (open state)" as in the operation scenario 5. In an operation scenario of a maximum of 30 seconds, in which the interfering member 6930 is set to "retract state 0.2 seconds-> overhang state 2.6 seconds-> evacuation state 0.2 seconds-> overhang state 0.2 seconds-> evacuation state". is there. In the operation scenario 6, the operation scenario of the opening / closing plate 1300 is completed when the detection sensor 1240 detects a specified number of balls (10 in this control example) even before 30 seconds have elapsed, and the initial operation scenario 6 is completed. It is controlled to return to the state.

In this operation scenario 6, the opening / closing plate 1300 is initially opened (opened) and then closed (closed), but the opening / closing plate 1300 is restricted from flowing down by the interference member 6930. This is an operation scenario in which the ball is not discharged from the discharge port 1150 while the closed (closed state) is maintained. Further, after 3 seconds have passed from the start of the round game R, since the interference member 6930 is maintained in the retracted state, the number of balls stored inside the storage flow path 1231 is 10 (FIG. 53 (FIG. 53). a)), the round game R ends based on the detection of the tenth ball by the detection sensor 1240. Therefore, in the operation scenario 6, unlike the operation scenario 5, it is not possible to easily generate an excess prize.

In this way, by classifying and memorizing the operation scenarios based on the difference in the profits obtained by the player, the profits given to the player by the currently executed movements of the opening / closing plate 1300 and the interference member 6930 can be obtained. It can be easily identified.

For each operation scenario, the opening / closing plate 1300 is forcibly closed by a specified number of balls (10 in this control example) entering the first specific winning opening 1000a (see FIGS. 8 and 9). (The operation scenario ends), but the interference member 6930 has a round game R even if a specified number of balls enter the first specific winning opening 1000a in the middle of the operation scenario. The operation based on the operation scenario is continued until the end of the inter-round interval after the end of, and the state is controlled to change to the retracted state (the operation scenario ends) at the same time as the end of the inter-round interval.

FIG. 95B is a schematic view schematically showing the contents of the opening / closing plate and the interference member operation scenario table 202f. The opening / closing plate and the interference member operation scenario table 202f are provided with information on which jackpot type and which round of the round game R each predetermined scenario type corresponds to.

In the MPU of the main control device 110, when the operation control of the opening / closing plate 1300 and the interference member 6930 is executed, the information corresponding to the contents specified in the opening / closing plate and the interference member operation scenario table 202f is provided to the opening / closing plate and the interference member. The opening / closing plate 1300 and the interference member 6930 are moved by reading from the operation scenario storage area 202e.

The opening / closing plate and the interference member operation scenario table 202f are configured so that the corresponding operation scenario can be set based on the combination of the jackpot type and the round game R of which round. In the round game R in the jackpot game, the opening / closing plate 1300 and the interference member 6930 are movably controlled at the same time as the start of the round game R in the selected operation scenario.

In this control example, the case where the interference member 6930 is movably controlled in response to the start timing of the round game R of the jackpot game has been described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the interference member 6930 is movable in an operation scenario in which the setting order is stored in advance in the opening / closing plate and the interference member operation scenario table 202f and changes in order from the time the power is turned on (or a predetermined operation start timing) to each end of the operation scenario. It may be controlled. As a result, the correspondence between the opening / closing plate 1300 and the interference member 6930 can be broken, so that it is difficult for the player to predict the operation of the interference member 6930.

With reference to FIGS. 96 (a), 96 (b), 97 (a), 97 (b), 98, 99 (a) and 99 (b), the opening / closing plate corresponding to the jackpot type. The operation mode of the 1300 (first specific winning opening 1000a), the interference member 6930, and the distribution device 4850 (specific area 4830, see FIG. 51) will be described.

In FIGS. 96 (a), 96 (b), 97 (a), 97 (b), 98, 99 (a) and 99 (b), the open state of the first specific winning opening 1000a is shown. Also indicated as "open", the closed state of the first specific winning opening 1000a is also indicated as "closed", the overhanging state of the interfering member 6930 is also indicated as "tensioning", and the retracted state of the interfering member 6930 is also indicated as "retired". The state in which the ball can flow into the region 4830 (that is, the state in which the distribution operation member 4851 is arranged in the open position) is also indicated as "open", and the state in which the ball cannot flow into the specific area 4830 (that is, the distribution operation member). The state in which 4851 is placed in the closed position) is also referred to as “closed”.

As shown in FIG. 95B, the operation mode of the opening / closing plate 1300 (first specific winning opening 1000a) and the interference member 6930 from the first round round game R to the fourth round round game R is as follows. Since it is common regardless of the jackpot type, the period from the end of the fourth round game R to the end of the jackpot game will be described in detail.

Further, as described above, the driving mode of the distribution operation member 4851 is common regardless of the jackpot type (see FIG. 96A). That is, 2.0 seconds after the start of the fifth round game R, the distribution operation member 4851 is displaced to the open position (the ball is opened so that the ball can pass through the specific area 4830), and 18.0 seconds later (5). (20.0 seconds after the start of the round game R of the round), the distribution operation member 4851 is displaced to the closed position (the ball is blocked so as not to pass through the specific area 4830).

FIG. 96A is a diagram showing the time-dependent changes of the first specific winning opening 1000a, the interference member 6930, and the specific region 4830 in the fifteenth operation pattern. In this control example, the timekeeping change shown in FIG. 96A is executed in the jackpot game when the jackpot type is jackpot K (see FIG. 94B).

As shown in FIG. 96A, in the fifteenth operation pattern, after the end of the fourth round game R, the fifth round is sandwiched between the first interval time Int1 (2.0 seconds) between the rounds. The game R is started, and the fifth round game R is executed in the above-described operation scenario 3 (see FIG. 95B).

First, according to this operation pattern, all the balls stored in the storage flow path 1231 are discharged at the interval between rounds immediately before the fifth round game R (0.2 seconds x 10 pieces). (= 2.0 seconds)) In the 4th round round game R, the balls stored in the storage flow path 1231 do not remain in the storage flow path 1231 until after the start of the 5th round round game. Further, since it takes at least 2.0 seconds for the ball newly entered into the storage flow path 1231 to reach the lower end of the storage flow path 1231, it takes at least 2.0 seconds within 1 second after the start of the fifth round game R. Balls are not discharged from the downstream side of the storage channel 1231.

Therefore, the ball is discharged from the storage flow path 1231 during the period (0.8 seconds) when the opening / closing plate 1300 is closed (the regulating member 1600 is discharged) immediately after the start of the fifth round game R. Since this is not the case, the distribution operation member 4851 is displaced to the open position, and the event that the ball passes through the specific area 4830 immediately after the ball is opened so as to be able to pass through the specific area 4830 does not occur.

On the other hand, since the storage flow path 1231 is configured to be able to store a regulated number of balls (10 in this control example), the fifth round round game R is performed, and 10 balls are stored in the first specific winning opening 1000a. It can be finished by inserting individual balls. Therefore, while the ball can pass through the specific area 4830 (20.0 seconds), the ball stored in the storage flow path 1231 can be discharged in the fifth round game R, so that the first specific By continuing to shoot the ball toward the winning opening 1000a, an event occurs in which the ball passes through the specific area 4830 after the end of the fifth round game R.

That is, in this operation pattern, since the ball is configured to be able to pass through the specific area 4830, it is possible to give a privilege advantageous to the player (in this control example, the continuation of the high probability state of the special symbol). In addition to being able to do so, the fifth round of round game R can be completed in a short time (finished by winning a specified number (10 in this control example)), so that the time efficiency with respect to the number of prize balls to be paid out in the jackpot game can be improved. Can be raised.

Further, since the timing at which the ball passes through the specific area 4830 is after the end of the fifth round round game R, it is not possible to know whether or not the ball passes through the specific area 4830 over the fifth round round game R. Therefore, it is possible to improve the player's interest in the game.

FIG. 96B is a diagram showing the time-dependent changes of the first specific winning opening 1000a, the interference member 6930, and the specific region 4830 in the sixteenth operation pattern. In this control example, the timekeeping change shown in FIG. 96 (b) is executed in the jackpot game when the jackpot type is jackpot L (see FIG. 94 (b)).

As shown in FIG. 96 (b), in the 16th operation pattern, after the end of the 4th round game R, the 5th round has a second interval time Int2 (1.0 seconds) between the rounds. The game R is started, and the fifth round game R is executed in the above-described operation scenario 3 (see FIG. 95B).

First, according to this operation pattern, five balls stored in the storage flow path 1231 are discharged at the interval between rounds immediately before the fifth round game R (0.2 seconds × 5). (Pieces = 1.0 second)) In the fourth round round game R, the balls stored in the storage flow path 1231 may remain in the storage flow path 1231 until after the start of the fifth round round game R. For example, in the fourth round of round game R, when five or more balls are stored in the storage flow path, the number of balls obtained by subtracting 5 from the stored number remains in the storage flow path.

Here, since the progress of the fifth round game R changes depending on the number of balls stored in the storage flow path 1231 in the fourth round game R, the cases will be described separately below.

First, in the fourth round round game R, when 10 balls are stored in the storage flow path 1231, the fifth round round game R starts with five balls stored in the storage flow path 1231. Will be done.

Here, as described above, in the present control example, among the balls stored in the storage flow path 1231 at the start of the fifth round game R, the fourth ball counted from the downstream side is the specific area. The distribution operation member 4851 is controlled to be in the open position at the timing of passing through 4830 (the timing at which the third sphere does not pass through the specific region 4830).

Therefore, when the fifth round round game R is started with five balls stored in the storage flow path 1231, the balls pass through the specific area 4830 immediately after the balls can pass through the specific area 4830. Therefore, a privilege advantageous to the player (in this control example, continuation of the high probability state of the special symbol) can be given at an early stage.

On the other hand, since the upper limit of the number of balls discharged from the storage channel 1231 immediately after the start of the fifth round game R is 4 (0.2 seconds x 4 = 0.8 seconds), the storage channel is discharged even after the discharge. One sphere remains in 1231. Therefore, in the fifth round game R, the number of balls that can be additionally entered into the storage flow path 1231 is 9 (the number is less than the specified number (10 in this control example)), so that the number of balls is 5 rounds. The round game R of the eyes does not end until 30.0 seconds, which is the maximum length of the first operating time T1, elapses, and the time efficiency with respect to the number of payout prize balls in the jackpot game decreases.

Note that FIG. 96 (b) shows, as a typical example, the timekeeping change when 10 balls are stored in the storage flow path 1231 in the round game R of the fourth round.

Second, in the fourth round round game R, when nine balls are stored in the storage flow path 1231, the fifth round round game R starts with four balls stored in the storage flow path 1231. Will be done.

Here, as described above, in the present control example, among the balls stored in the storage flow path 1231 at the start of the fifth round game R, the fourth ball counted from the downstream side is the specific area. The distribution operation member 4851 is controlled to be in the open position at the timing of passing through 4830 (the timing at which the third sphere does not pass through the specific region 4830).

Therefore, when the fifth round round game R is started with four balls stored in the storage flow path 1231, the balls pass through the specific area 4830 immediately after the balls can pass through the specific area 4830. Therefore, a privilege advantageous to the player (in this control example, continuation of the high probability state of the special symbol) can be given at an early stage.

On the other hand, since the upper limit of the balls discharged from the storage flow path 1231 immediately after the start of the fifth round game R is 4 (0.2 seconds x 4 = 0.8 seconds), the balls remain in the storage flow path 1231. All the balls that were there are discharged. Therefore, in the fifth round round game R, the number of balls that can be additionally entered into the storage flow path 1231 is 10 (the same number as the specified number), so that the fifth round round game R is the specified number. It can be ended by letting the ball enter the first specific winning opening 1000a. Therefore, it is possible to improve the time efficiency with respect to the number of payout prize balls in the jackpot game.

Third, in the fourth round round game R, when the number of balls stored in the storage flow path 1231 is 0 to 8, 5 is added from the number of balls stored in the storage flow path 1231. The fifth round game R is started with the number of drawn balls (0 to 3 balls) stored.

Here, as described above, in the present control example, among the balls stored in the storage flow path 1231 at the start of the fifth round game R, the fourth ball counted from the downstream side is the specific area. The distribution operation member 4851 is controlled to be in the open position at the timing of passing through 4830 (the timing at which the third sphere does not pass through the specific region 4830).

Further, since it takes at least 2.0 seconds for the ball newly entered into the storage flow path 1231 to reach the lower end of the storage flow path 1231, it takes at least 2.0 seconds within 1 second after the start of the fifth round game R. Balls are not discharged from the downstream side of the storage channel 1231.

Therefore, immediately after the start of the fifth round game R, while the balls discharged from the storage flow path 1231 pass through the whole ball (0 to 3), the distribution operation is performed in a state where the balls cannot pass through the specific area 4830. Since the member 4851 is maintained, the event that the ball passes through the specific area 4830 immediately after the start of the fifth round game R does not occur.

On the other hand, since the upper limit of the balls discharged from the storage flow path 1231 immediately after the start of the fifth round game R is 4 (0.2 seconds x 4 = 0.8 seconds), the balls remain in the storage flow path 1231. All the balls that were there are discharged. Therefore, in the fifth round round game R, the number of balls that can be additionally entered into the storage flow path 1231 is 10 (the same number as the specified number), so that the fifth round round game R is the specified number. It can be ended by letting the ball enter the first specific winning opening 1000a.

Therefore, it is possible to improve the time efficiency with respect to the number of payout prize balls in the jackpot game. In addition, if the ball is maintained in a state where the ball can pass through the specific area 4830 for 1 second or more after the end of the 5th round round game R (19 seconds have passed from the start of the 5th round round game R). If a specified number of balls (10 in this control example) are previously inserted into the first specific winning opening 1000a), an event occurs in which the balls discharged from the storage flow path 1231 pass through the specific area 4830. As the ball passes through the specific area 4830, a privilege advantageous to the player (in this control example, continuation of the high-probability state of the special symbol) is given to the player. be able to.

Summarizing the first to third cases described above, when there are 10 balls stored in the storage flow path 1231 in the round game R of the fourth round, the event that the balls pass through the specific area 4830 is early. While it can be generated, the time efficiency with respect to the number of payout prize balls in the fifth round game is reduced (in the first case), and nine balls stored in the storage flow path 1231 in the fourth round game R are reduced. In the case of the number of balls, the event that the ball passes through the specific area 4830 can be caused at an early stage, and the time efficiency with respect to the number of payout prize balls in the fifth round game is improved (in the second case), the fourth round When the number of balls stored in the storage flow path 1231 is 0 to 8 in the round game R of the above, the event that the balls pass through the specific area 4830 is after the end of the fifth round game R, while the fifth round. Increases time efficiency for the number of payout prize balls in the round game (in the third case).

Therefore, when controlling with the same operation pattern, the timing at which the player can obtain a profit and the magnitude of the profit obtained can be changed for each game mode of the jackpot game.

In this control example, as described above, in the round game R of the fourth round, the profit obtained by the player can be maximized by setting the number of balls stored in the storage flow path 1231 to nine. .. Therefore, at least when the jackpot type is jackpot L, information on a guideline for the number of pieces stored in the storage channel 1231 is displayed (see FIG. 88 (b)). As a result, it is possible to improve the attention to the number of balls stored in the storage flow path 1231, and it is possible to guide the line of sight of the player.

FIG. 97A is a diagram showing the time-dependent changes of the first specific winning opening 1000a, the interference member 6930, and the specific region 4830 in the 17th operation pattern. In this control example, the timekeeping change shown in FIG. 97A is executed in the jackpot game when the jackpot type is jackpot M (see FIG. 94B).

As shown in FIG. 97 (a), in the 17th operation pattern, after the end of the 4th round game R, the 5th round has a 4th interval time Int4 (1.8 seconds) between the rounds. The game R is started, and the fifth round game R is executed in the above-described operation scenario 4 (see FIG. 95B).

First, according to this operation pattern, the balls stored in the storage flow path 1231 are discharged at the upper limit of 9 balls at the interval between rounds immediately before the fifth round game R (0.2 seconds). × 9 = 1.8 seconds) In the 4th round round game R, the balls stored in the storage flow path 1231 can remain in the storage flow path 1231 with an upper limit of 1 until after the start of the 5th round round game. There is sex. Further, since it takes at least 2.0 seconds for the ball newly entered into the storage flow path 1231 to reach the lower end of the storage flow path 1231, the storage flow path 1231 is newly added in the fifth round game R. The ball that has entered is not discharged from the downstream side of the storage flow path 1231 within 1 second after the start of the fifth round game R.

Therefore, during the period (0.8 seconds) when the opening / closing plate 1300 is closed (the regulating member 1600 is discharged) immediately after the start of the fifth round game R, the balls discharged from the storage flow path 1231 are released. , The distribution operation member 4851 is displaced to the open position, and the event of passing through the specific area 4830 immediately after the ball is opened so as to be able to pass through the specific area 4830 does not occur.

In addition, the interfering member 6930 is in an overhanging state from 1.0 second after the start of the fifth round game R to 25.0 seconds, and the flow of the ball is restricted (FIG. 86). (See (a)), the storage channel 1231 is in a state where the regulated number of balls (10 in this control example) cannot be stored (a state in which a maximum of 9 balls can be stored, substantially downstream of the interference member 6930). Since the spheres are not stored, a maximum of 7 balls can be stored). Therefore, the fifth round game cannot be completed until 25.0 seconds have elapsed after the start of the fifth round game R, and then 10 balls are inserted into the first specific winning opening 1000a. Alternatively, the fifth round of the round game R ends when a predetermined time (30.0 seconds in this control example) elapses.

Therefore, while the ball can pass through the specific area 4830 (until 20.0 seconds have elapsed from the start of the fifth round game R), the ball is stored in the storage flow path 1231 in the fifth round game R. The ball cannot be ejected. Therefore, even if the ball is continuously fired toward the first specific winning opening 1000a, the event that the ball passes through the specific area 4830 does not occur after the end of the fifth round game R.

That is, in this operation pattern, since the ball is configured so as not to pass through the specific area 4830, it is possible to give the player an advantageous privilege (in this control example, the continuation of the high probability state of the special symbol). In addition to being unable to do so, the round game R in the fifth round becomes longer, so that the time efficiency with respect to the number of payout prize balls in the jackpot game cannot be increased (can be decreased).

FIG. 97B is a diagram showing the time-dependent changes of the first specific winning opening 1000a, the interference member 6930, and the specific region 4830 in the 18th operation pattern. In this control example, the timekeeping change shown in FIG. 97 (b) is executed in the jackpot game when the jackpot type is jackpot N (see FIG. 94 (b)).

As shown in FIG. 97 (b), in the 18th operation pattern, after the end of the 4th round game R, the 5th round is sandwiched between the first interval time Int1 (2.0 seconds) between the rounds. The game R is started, and the fifth round game R is executed in the above-described operation scenario 4 (see FIG. 95B).

As shown in FIGS. 97 (a) and 97 (b), the 18th operation pattern is the 17th operation except that the length of the interval between rounds immediately before the fifth round game R is different. Since it is the same as the pattern, the description of the parts common to the above description will be omitted.

The difference between the 18th operation pattern and the 17th operation pattern is whether or not there is a remaining ball that remains undischarged from the storage flow path 1231 in the inter-round interval immediately before the fifth round game R.

That is, in the 17th operation pattern, as described above, since the inter-round interval is set to the inter-round fourth interval time Int4 (1.8 seconds), the maximum number of discharges is 9, and the number of stored balls is 1231. If 10 are stored, one remaining ball is generated.

On the other hand, in the 18th operation pattern, since the interval between rounds is set to the first interval time Int1 (2.0 seconds) between rounds, the maximum number of discharged balls is 10, and the maximum number of stored 1231 balls is 10 (maximum). Even if it is stored, it can be discharged globally and no residual balls are generated.

In this case, in the 17th operation pattern, since there is a ball (remaining ball) discharged from the storage flow path 1231 immediately after the start of the fifth round game R, it is specified immediately after the start of the fifth round game R. On the other hand, in the 18th operation pattern, from the storage flow path 1231 immediately after the start of the fifth round game R, it is possible to make the player think that the ball may pass through the area 4830 (expected normal jackpot). Since there is no ball (remaining ball) to be discharged, the player can grasp that there is no possibility that the ball will pass through the specific area 4830 immediately after the start of the fifth round game R (expected normal jackpot).

Therefore, the player's expectation can be changed depending on the presence or absence of the ball remaining in the storage flow path 1231, while the benefits obtained by the player are substantially the same.

Further, as described above, the profit obtained by the player is larger than that of the jackpot of the jackpot type of jackpot M, and the 16th operation pattern in which the remaining balls are generated at the inter-round interval immediately before the round game R of the fifth round (FIG. Since the difference from 96 (b)) can be grasped by the number of remaining balls in the storage flow path 1231, the player's attention to the number of remaining balls in the storage flow path 1231 can be improved.

FIG. 98 is a diagram showing the time-dependent changes of the first specific winning opening 1000a, the interference member 6930, and the specific region 4830 in the 19th operation pattern. In this control example, the timekeeping change shown in FIG. 98 is executed in the jackpot game when the jackpot type is jackpot k (see FIG. 94 (b)).

As shown in FIG. 98, in the 19th operation pattern, after the end of the 4th round round game R, the 5th round round game R is performed with the first interval time Int1 (2.0 seconds) between the rounds in between. The fifth round of the round game R, which is started, is executed in the above-described operation scenario 4 (see FIG. 95 (b)).

First, according to this operation pattern, how many balls stored in the storage flow path 1231 are discharged at the interval between rounds immediately before the fifth round game R is changed by the operation of the player.

That is, immediately after it is determined that the player has operated the operation button 300 (see FIG. 1) according to the above-mentioned timing effect (operation effect, see FIGS. 90 and 91), the interference member 6930 changes to the overhanging state. Since the subsequent discharge of spheres is restricted, the spheres arranged on the upstream side of the interference member 6930 will remain in the storage flow path 1231. It should be noted that the operation of the operation button 300 is controlled so that only the timing of the first pressing in the inter-round interval is valid and the operation to the subsequent pressing is invalid, but the details will be described later.

Here, since the progress of the round game R in the fifth round changes depending on the number of balls remaining in the storage flow path 1231, it is possible to improve the attention to the timing effect (operation effect) and the operation of the operation button 300. Hereinafter, the cases will be described separately.

First, a case where there are many spheres remaining in the storage flow path 1231 (when there are five or more spheres) will be described. That is, it is a case where the fifth round round game R is started with five or more balls stored in the storage flow path 1231. This corresponds to the case where the operation timing of the operation button 300 is early (see FIG. 91 (a)).

Here, as described above, in the present control example, among the balls stored in the storage flow path 1231 at the start of the fifth round game R, the fourth ball counted from the downstream side is the specific area. The distribution operation member 4851 is controlled to be in the open position at the timing of passing through 4830 (the timing at which the third sphere does not pass through the specific region 4830).

Therefore, when the fifth round round game R is started with five or more balls stored in the storage flow path 1231, the balls pass through the specific area 4830 immediately after the balls can pass through the specific area 4830. Since it passes through, a privilege advantageous to the player (in this control example, continuation of the high probability state of the special symbol) can be given at an early stage.

On the other hand, since the upper limit of the number of balls discharged from the storage channel 1231 immediately after the start of the fifth round game R is 4 (0.2 seconds x 4 = 0.8 seconds), the storage channel is discharged even after the discharge. One or more spheres remain in 1231. Therefore, in the fifth round game R, the number of balls that can be additionally entered into the storage flow path 1231 is 9 or less (the number is less than the specified number (10 in this control example)). The round game R of the first round does not end until the lapse of 30.0 seconds, which is the maximum length of the first operating time T1, and the time efficiency with respect to the number of payout prize balls in the jackpot game decreases.

That is, in the first case, an advantageous event occurs in which the privilege of shifting to the high probability state of the special symbol can be obtained after the end of the jackpot game, while the payout of the prize ball in the fifth round game R is slightly smaller. Nari (the number of prize balls is reduced because the specified number of balls (10 in this control example) cannot be entered), which is a disadvantage that the duration of the fifth round game R is the maximum time (30 seconds). Event occurs.

Second, a case where the number of spheres remaining in the storage flow path 1231 is four will be described. That is, it is a case where the fifth round round game R is started with four balls stored in the storage flow path 1231. This corresponds to the case where the operation timing of the operation button 300 is good (see FIG. 90B).

Here, as described above, in the present control example, among the balls stored in the storage flow path 1231 at the start of the fifth round game R, the fourth ball counted from the downstream side is the specific area. The distribution operation member 4851 is controlled to be in the open position at the timing of passing through 4830 (the timing at which the third sphere does not pass through the specific region 4830).

Therefore, when the fifth round round game R is started with four balls stored in the storage flow path 1231, the balls pass through the specific area 4830 immediately after the balls can pass through the specific area 4830. Therefore, a privilege advantageous to the player (in this control example, continuation of the high probability state of the special symbol) can be given at an early stage.

On the other hand, since the upper limit of the balls discharged from the storage flow path 1231 immediately after the start of the fifth round game R is 4 (0.2 seconds x 4 = 0.8 seconds), the balls remain in the storage flow path 1231. All the balls that were there are discharged. Therefore, in the fifth round round game R, the number of balls that can be additionally entered into the storage flow path 1231 is 10 (the same number as the specified number), so that the fifth round round game R is the specified number. It can be ended by letting the ball enter the first specific winning opening 1000a.

Therefore, it is possible to improve the time efficiency with respect to the number of payout prize balls in the jackpot game. It should be noted that the specified number of balls will enter the first specific winning opening 1000a only after 25.0 seconds have elapsed from the start of the fifth round game R due to the control mode of the interference member 6930. ..

That is, in the second case, an advantageous event occurs in which the privilege of shifting to the high probability state of the special symbol can be obtained after the end of the jackpot game, and the specified number (10 pieces) is obtained in the fifth round game R. While there is an advantageous event that the ball can be entered into the first specific winning opening 1000a and the duration of the fifth round game R can be made shorter than the maximum time (30 seconds), the disadvantageous event is Does not occur.

Thirdly, a case where the number of spheres remaining in the storage flow path 1231 is small (when the number is 3 or less) will be described. That is, it is a case where the fifth round round game R is started with three or less balls stored in the storage flow path 1231. This corresponds to the case where the operation timing of the operation button 300 is late (see FIG. 91B).

Here, as described above, in the present control example, among the balls stored in the storage flow path 1231 at the start of the fifth round game R, the fourth ball counted from the downstream side is the specific area. The distribution operation member 4851 is controlled to be in the open position at the timing of passing through 4830 (the timing at which the third sphere does not pass through the specific region 4830).

Further, since it takes at least 2.0 seconds for the ball newly entered into the storage flow path 1231 to reach the lower end of the storage flow path 1231, it takes at least 2.0 seconds within 1 second after the start of the fifth round game R. Balls are not discharged from the downstream side of the storage channel 1231.

Therefore, immediately after the start of the fifth round game R, while the balls discharged from the storage flow path 1231 pass through the whole ball (0 to 3), the distribution operation is performed in a state where the balls cannot pass through the specific area 4830. Since the member 4851 is maintained, the event that the ball passes through the specific area 4830 immediately after the start of the fifth round game R does not occur.

On the other hand, since the upper limit of the balls discharged from the storage flow path 1231 immediately after the start of the fifth round game R is 4 (0.2 seconds x 4 = 0.8 seconds), the balls remain in the storage flow path 1231. Although all the balls that were in the game are discharged, the interfering member 6930 maintains the overhanging state from 1.0 second after the start of the fifth round game R to 25.0 seconds, so that it is specified during that time. The number of balls (10 in this control example) cannot be entered into the first specific winning opening 1000a. In addition, 20.0 seconds after the start of the fifth round game R, the distribution operation member 4851 (see FIG. 51) is driven so that the ball cannot pass through the specific area 4830.

Therefore, the event that the ball discharged from the storage flow path 1231 passes through the specific region 4830 after the end of the fifth round game R is configured so as not to occur.

On the other hand, since the upper limit of the balls discharged from the storage flow path 1231 immediately after the start of the fifth round game R is 4 (0.2 seconds x 4 = 0.8 seconds), the balls remain in the storage flow path 1231. All the balls that were there are discharged. Therefore, in the fifth round round game R, the number of balls that can be additionally entered into the storage flow path 1231 is 10 (the same number as the specified number), so that the fifth round round game R is the specified number. It can be terminated by inserting the ball into the first specific winning opening 1000a (it can be terminated without waiting for the lapse of 30.0 seconds, which is the maximum length of the first operating time T1).

Therefore, it is possible to improve the time efficiency with respect to the number of payout prize balls in the jackpot game. It should be noted that the specified number of balls will enter the first specific winning opening 1000a only after 25.0 seconds have elapsed from the start of the fifth round game R due to the control mode of the interference member 6930. ..

That is, in the third case, a disadvantageous event occurs in which the privilege of shifting to the high probability state of the special symbol cannot be obtained after the jackpot game ends, while the specified number (10) in the fifth round game R occurs. An advantageous event occurs in which the ball can be entered into the first specific winning opening 1000a and the duration of the fifth round game R can be made shorter than the maximum time (30 seconds).

Summarizing the first to third cases described above, when there are five or more spheres remaining in the storage flow path 1231, an event in which the spheres pass through the specific region 4830 can occur at an early stage, while 5 When the time efficiency with respect to the number of payout prize balls in the round game of the round is reduced (in the first case) and there are four balls remaining in the storage flow path 1231, an event in which the balls pass through the specific area 4830 occurs at an early stage. If the number of prize balls to be paid out in the fifth round game is improved (in the second case) and the number of balls remaining in the storage flow path 1231 is 3 or less, the balls pass through the specific area 4830. While no event occurs, the time efficiency for the number of payout prize balls in the fifth round game is increased (in the third case). Which case is applied depends on the timing at which the player operates the operation button 300.

That is, since the profit obtained by the player can be changed depending on the timing of operating the operation button 300, it is possible to improve the attention to the timing effect (operation effect) and participate in the timing effect (operation effect). You can motivate yourself.

FIG. 99A is a diagram showing the time-dependent changes of the first specific winning opening 1000a, the interference member 6930, and the specific area 4830 in the 20th operation pattern. In this control example, the timekeeping change shown in FIG. 99A is executed in the jackpot game when the jackpot type is jackpot K, M or k (see FIG. 94B).

As shown in FIG. 99 (a), in the twentieth operation pattern, the sixth round round game R is executed in the above-mentioned operation scenario 5 (see FIG. 95 (b)).

According to this operation pattern, in the round game R of the sixth round, the upper limit is the number of excess balls (the number of balls exceeding the specified number (10 in this control example)) into the first specific winning opening 1000a. It can be easily generated by one piece. Details will be described below.

The interval between rounds immediately before the round game R of the sixth round is set by the first interval time Int1 (2.0 seconds) between rounds. That is, the sixth round of the round game R is started with no balls stored in the storage flow path 1231.

Immediately after the start of the sixth round game R, the interference member 6930 is put into the overhanging state, but immediately returns to the retracted state (see FIG. 95 (a)). Therefore, the ball that first enters the first specific winning opening 1000a within 1.0 second from the start of the round game R in the sixth round is not restricted by the interfering member 6930 and flows down to 2 It takes 0.0 seconds to reach the lowermost end of the storage flow path 1231 (the front side of the regulation member 1600, the position where it comes into contact with the regulation member 1600).

The first ball entered is ejected when the first specific winning opening 1000a is closed (the outlet 1150 (see FIG. 14) is opened) 3.0 seconds after the start of the sixth round round game R. .. Here, since the period during which the first specific winning opening 1000a is closed is 0.2 seconds, the number of balls discharged from the storage flow path 1231 is limited to one.

3.0 seconds after the start of the sixth round game R, the interference member 6930 changes to the overhanging state at the same time as the discharge port 1150 starts to open. Therefore, thereafter, the ball arranged on the upstream side of the interference member 6930 is restricted from flowing down by the interference member 6930.

The internal shape of the storage flow path 1231 is such that, in the overhanging state of the interference member 6930, a maximum of two balls can be stored on the downstream side of the interference member 6930 and a maximum of seven balls can be stored on the upstream side of the interference member 6930 (FIG. 86 (b)).

After 3.0 seconds have passed from the start of the sixth round game R, the ball entering the storage flow path 1231 is restricted from flowing down by the interference member 6930, so that the ball stays on the upstream side of the interference member 6930. It will be.

On the other hand, as described above, when one sphere arranged at the lowermost end is discharged from the storage flow path 1231, as a result, the sphere arranged downstream of the interference member 6930 inside the storage flow path 1231 It will be one or less. Therefore, the maximum number of spheres that can be stored in the storage flow path 1231 is eight. Since the total number of balls discharged from the storage flow path 1231 is 9, which is less than the specified number (10 in this control example), the specified number of balls is maintained while the interference member 6930 maintains the overhanging state. Cannot be entered into the first specific winning opening 1000a, and the sixth round round game R cannot be completed.

During this period, the opening / closing plate 1300 is maintained in the open state (see FIG. 86 (b)), so that the player can continue to strike right according to the display of the third symbol display device 81 (see FIG. 92 (b)). , A plurality of spheres can be aligned on the upper surface of the opening / closing plate 1300 (so-called "grape" can be generated).

When the interfering member 6930 changes from the overhanging state to the retracted state, it flows down along the inclination of the opening / closing plate 1300 so that the ball whose flow is restricted inside the storage flow path 1231 will follow the flow down later. (It flows down like an avalanche). When a specified number of balls (10 in this control example) enter the first specified winning opening 1000a due to the flow of balls, the opening / closing plate 1300 starts operating toward the closed state, but corresponds to the number of ejected balls. Since a gap corresponding to one sphere is formed in the storage flow path 1231, the momentum of the inflow of the sphere into the storage flow path 1231 is maintained even after the opening / closing plate 1300 starts operation.

Therefore, before the opening / closing plate 1300 closes the first specific winning opening 1000a, there is a possibility that a ball that has gained momentum enters the first specific winning opening 1000a, and in this case, the upper limit of one is exceeded. Winning can be generated.

If the ball is not arranged at the lowermost end of the storage flow path 1231 at the timing when 3.0 seconds have elapsed from the start of the round game R of the sixth round, it is downstream of the interference member 6930 even after 3.0 seconds have elapsed. The number of spheres placed in does not change. Therefore, in this case, the number of spheres remaining on the downstream side of the interference member 6930 is 0 to 2. In addition, since the spheres are not discharged from the storage flow path 1231, the above-mentioned voids are not generated inside the storage flow path 1231, and the effect of causing an excess prize cannot be achieved. To.

FIG. 99B is a diagram showing the time-dependent changes of the first specific winning opening 1000a, the interference member 6930, and the specific region 4830 in the 21st operation pattern. In this control example, the timekeeping change shown in FIG. 99B is executed in the jackpot game when the jackpot type is jackpot L or N (see FIG. 94B).

As shown in FIG. 99 (b), in the 21st operation pattern, the sixth round round game R is executed in the above-mentioned operation scenario 6 (see FIG. 95 (b)).

According to this operation pattern, in the round game R of the sixth round, an excess number of balls (the number of balls exceeding the specified number (10 in this control example)) is generated in the first specific winning opening 1000a. It can be difficult. Details will be described below.

The interval between rounds immediately before the round game R of the sixth round is set by the first interval time Int1 (2.0 seconds) between rounds. That is, the sixth round of the round game R is started with no balls stored in the storage flow path 1231.

Immediately after the start of the sixth round game R, the interfering member 6930 is maintained in an overhanging state for 2.6 seconds (see FIG. 95 (a)). Therefore, the ball that first enters the first specific winning opening 1000a within 1.0 second from the start of the sixth round game R is restricted from flowing down by the interference member 6930.

When the interfering member 6930 changes to the retracted state, the ball whose flow is restricted resumes the flow, but 0.2 seconds (2.0 seconds, which is the time required for the flow of the storage flow path 1231/10 pieces that can be stored). ), The ball flows down only the length of one ball. Therefore, the ball that has resumed the flow has the lowermost end of the storage flow path 1231 (the front side of the regulating member 1600) by the time the opening / closing plate 1300 starts operating in the closed state (the discharge port 1150 (see FIG. 14) starts opening). It is not possible to reach the position where it comes into contact with the regulating member 1600). Therefore, in this operation pattern, the ball is not discharged from the storage flow path 1231 at the timing when 3.0 seconds have elapsed from the start of the sixth round round game R.

3.0 seconds after the start of the sixth round game R, at the same time as the discharge port 1150 starts to open, the interference member 6930 changes to the overhanging state again, but immediately returns to the retracted state. Therefore, thereafter, the spheres arranged on the upstream side of the interference member 6930 are not restricted from flowing down by the interference member 6930, and the spheres are sequentially stored in the storage flow path 1231.

As a specified number of balls (10 in this control example) enter the first specific winning opening 1000a (at a timing earlier than the 20th operation pattern), the first specific winning opening 1000a is closed. Changes to. At this time, the number of balls stored in the storage flow path 1231 is 10, and since the storage flow path 1231 is full, the entry of more balls is prevented. Therefore, according to the present operation pattern, the number of balls entering the first specific winning opening 1000a is a specified number (10 in this control example) as in the first operation pattern (see FIG. 23A). It is limited to (pieces) and cannot cause excess prizes.

Therefore, even if a ball is arranged on the upstream side of the opening / closing plate 1300 at the end of the jackpot game R in the sixth round, the ball does not lead to the profit of the player. Therefore, in the sixth round round game R in the jackpot game in which the jackpot type is jackpot L or N, the third symbol display device 81 is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 so as not to strongly urge the continuation of ball firing (see FIG. 92 (a)). Will be executed.

As shown in FIGS. 99 (a) and 99 (b), the timing at which the first specific winning opening 1000a changes from the closed state to the open state with reference to the start of the sixth round game R, and the interference member. It is unlikely that an excess prize will occur in the sixth round of the round game R (see FIG. 99 (a)) while controlling the timing at which the 6930 changes from the retracted state to the overhanged state in common. Cases (see FIG. 99 (b)) can occur.

This makes it difficult for the player to determine whether the round game R of the sixth round in this jackpot game is controlled by the 20th operation pattern or the 21st operation pattern. Therefore, it is possible to configure a game mode in which a ball suitable for the operation pattern is launched while predicting the operation pattern. As a result, it is possible to prevent the player from inadvertently digesting the jackpot game.

As described above, when the first specific winning opening 1000a and the interference member 6930 are driven and controlled in the 20th operation pattern, after the first specific winning opening 1000a is short-opened (opened for 0.2 seconds), No two spheres remain downstream of the interfering member 6930. On the other hand, when the first specific winning opening 1000a and the interference member 6930 are driven and controlled in the 21st pattern, the interference member 6930 is opened after the first specific winning opening 1000a is short-opened (opened for 0.2 seconds). Two spheres may remain downstream of.

Therefore, by checking how many balls remain downstream of the interference member 6930, whether the round game R in the sixth round is controlled by the twentieth operation pattern or is controlled by the twenty-first operation pattern. Since the ease of discriminating between the two is improved, the interference member 6930 is retracted for a predetermined period (for example, 23.0 seconds after the start of the sixth round round game R) on the downstream side of the interference member 6930. It may be configured to be difficult to see (up to 0.0 seconds ago).

Next, the details of the RAM 203 will be described with reference to FIG. 101. FIG. 101 is a block diagram showing the configuration of the RAM 203 of the main control device 110. As shown in FIG. 101, the RAM 203 includes a special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a, a special symbol 2 reserved ball storage area 203b, a normal symbol reserved ball storage area 203c, a special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d, and a special symbol 2 reserved ball. Number counter 203e, normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203f, probability variation counter 203g, time saving medium counter 203h, operation scenario storage area 203i, operation counter 203j, output flag 203k, remaining ball timer flag 203m, remaining ball timer 203n, remaining ball counter 203p , Closing flag 203q, counting start flag 203q, closing counter 203r, V flag 203s, V winning valid counter 203t, notification counter 203u, winning number counter 203w, discharging number counter 203x, and other memory area 203z.

The special symbol 1 hold ball storage area 203a has one execution area and four hold areas (hold 1st area to hold 4th area), and each of these areas has a random number counter per first. Each value of C1, the first hit type counter C2, and the stop type selection counter C3 is stored.

More specifically, at the timing when the ball enters the first entry port 64 (starting winning), each value of each counter C1 to C3 is acquired, and the acquired data is stored in four holding areas (holding). Among the vacant areas (1st area to 4th reserved area), the areas with the smallest area numbers (1st to 4th) are stored in order. That is, the smaller the area number, the data corresponding to the time-old prize is stored, and the data corresponding to the time-oldest prize is stored in the reserved first area. If data is stored in all four holding areas, nothing is newly stored.

After that, when the special symbol lottery is performed in the main control device 110, each value of each counter C1 to C3 stored in the reserved first area of the special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a is transferred to the execution area. A determination such as a special symbol lottery is performed based on the respective values of the counters C1 to C3 that are shifted (moved) and stored in the execution area.

When the data is shifted from the hold 1st area to the execution area, the hold 1st area becomes empty. Therefore, a shift process is performed in which the winning data stored in the other holding areas (holding 2nd area to holding 4th area) is packed into the holding area (holding 1st area to holding 3rd area) having the smaller area number. Will be done. In this control example, in the special symbol 1 hold ball storage area 203a, the data shift is performed only in the hold area (hold second area to hold fourth area) in which the winning data is stored.

The special symbol 2 reserved ball storage area 203b has one execution area and four reserved areas, similarly to the special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a. In the special symbol 2 reserved ball storage area 203b, each counter value acquired based on the start winning prize to the second ball entry port 640 is stored. Since the method of storing the counter value is the same as that of the special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a, a detailed description thereof will be omitted.

Similar to the special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a and the special symbol 2 reserved ball storage area 203b, the normal symbol reserved ball storage area 203c has one execution area and four reserved areas (holding first area to holding fourth area). Area) and. A second random number counter C4 is stored in each of these areas.

More specifically, the value of the counter C4 is acquired at the timing when the sphere passes through the through gate 67 (see FIG. 2), and the acquired data is the four reserved areas (holding first area to holding fourth). Areas) are stored in order from the smallest area number (1st to 4th) in the vacant area. That is, similarly to the special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a and the special symbol 2 reserved ball storage area 203b, the data corresponding to the winning is stored while the winning order is maintained. If data is stored in all four holding areas, nothing is newly stored.

After that, when the lottery for winning the normal symbol is performed in the main control device 110, the value of the counter C4 stored in the hold first area of the normal symbol hold ball storage area 203c is shifted to the execution area ( Based on the value of the counter C4 stored in the execution area (moved), a determination such as a lottery for winning a normal symbol is performed.

When the data is shifted from the hold 1st area to the execution area, the hold 1st area becomes empty. Therefore, as in the case of the special symbol 1 hold ball storage area 203a and the special symbol 2 hold ball storage area 203b, A shift process is performed in which the winning data stored in the other holding area is packed into the holding area one smaller than the area number. Also, the data shift is performed only in the holding area where the winning data is stored.

The special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d is a variable display (third symbol) of the special symbol (first symbol) performed by the first symbol display device 37 based on the entry (starting prize) into the first entry port 64. It is a counter that counts the number of reserved balls (the number of times of waiting) of the display device 81 (variation display) up to a maximum of four times. The initial value of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d is set to zero, and the maximum value is 4 each time a ball enters the first entry port 64 and the number of reserved balls in the variable display increases. They are added one by one (see S404 in FIG. 111). On the other hand, the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d is decremented by 1 each time a new variation display of the special symbol is executed (see S210 in FIG. 108).

The value of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d (holding number N1 of the variation display in the first special symbol) is notified to the voice lamp control device 113 by the reserved ball number command (S211 in FIG. 108, S405 in FIG. 111). reference). The hold ball number command is a command transmitted from the main control device 110 to the voice lamp control device 113 each time the value of the special symbol 1 hold ball number counter 203d is changed.

The voice lamp control device 113 holds the fluctuation display held in the main control device 110 by the hold ball number command transmitted from the main control device 110 each time the value of the special symbol 1 hold ball number counter 203d is changed. The value of the number of balls itself can be obtained. As a result, the number of reserved balls in the variable display managed by the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 223b and the second special symbol reserved ball number counter 223c (see FIG. 102 (b)) of the voice lamp control device 113 becomes noise. Even if the number of reserved balls in the actual fluctuation display held by the main controller 110 deviates due to the influence of the above, the deviation can be corrected by the next received number of reserved balls command. ..

The voice lamp control device 113 manages the number of reserved balls based on the reserved ball number command, and notifies the display control device 114 (see FIG. 93) of the number of reserved balls each time the number of reserved balls changes. Send a hold ball count command for display. The display control device 114 displays the reserved ball number symbol on the third symbol display device 81 based on the reserved ball number notified by the display reserved ball number command.

The special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 203e is a variable display (third symbol) of the special symbol (first symbol) performed by the first symbol display device 37 based on the ball entering the second entry port 640 (starting prize). It is a counter that counts the number of reserved balls (the number of times of waiting) of the display device 81 (variation display) up to a maximum of four times.

The initial value of the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 203e is set to zero, and the maximum value is 4 each time a ball enters the second entry port 640 and the number of reserved balls in the variable display increases. They are added one by one (see S410 in FIG. 111).

On the other hand, the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 203e is decremented by 1 each time a new variation display of the special symbol is executed (see S205 in FIG. 108). The value of the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 203e is also notified to the voice lamp control device 113 by the reserved ball number command, similarly to the value of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d.

The normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203f sets the number of reserved balls (waiting number) of the variable display of the normal symbol (second symbol) performed by the second symbol display device 83 based on the passage of the balls in the through gate 67 up to four times. It is a counter that counts up to.

The initial value of the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203f is set to zero, and each time a ball passes through the through gate 67 and the number of reserved balls in the variable display increases, 1 is added up to a maximum value of 4 ( See S704 in FIG. 114).

On the other hand, the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203f is decremented by 1 each time the variation display of the normal symbol (second symbol) is newly executed (see S605 in FIG. 113).

When the sphere passes through the through gate 67, if the value of the normal symbol hold ball number counter 203f (the number of hold times M of the variation display in the normal symbol) is less than 4, the value of the second random number counter C4 is acquired. , The acquired data is stored in the normal symbol holding ball storage area 203c (S705 in FIG. 114).

On the other hand, when the ball passes through the through gate 67, if the value of the normal symbol holding ball number counter 203f is 4, nothing is newly stored in the normal symbol holding ball storage area 203c (S703: No in FIG. 114). ).

The probability variation counter 203g is a counter for counting the number of fluctuations of the remaining special symbols in the probability variation state of the special symbol. That is, when the value of the probability variation counter 203g is a natural number, the probability variation state of the special symbol is set, and when the value of the probability variation counter 203g is 0, the probability variation state of the special symbol is set. In this control example, the probability variation state of the special symbol is accompanied by the time reduction state of the normal symbol, so the numerical value of the probability variation counter 203g corresponds to the remaining time reduction period (number of fluctuations of the special symbol).

The probability variation counter 203g is set to 80 at the end of the jackpot game when the ball passes through the specific area 4830 (see FIG. 51) in the jackpot game (see S1235 in FIG. 121). That is, in this control example, the number of changes of the special symbol in the probabilistic state after the big hit game is limited to 80 times.

Further, the probability variation counter 203g becomes a big hit by a lottery of a special symbol, and is set to 0 when the start of the big hit is set (see S219 in FIG. 108). In the initialized state (that is, the power is turned on for the pachinko machine 10 while the RAM erase switch 122 is pressed), the probability change counter 203g is reset to 0, and a normal power failure occurs. If this happens, the state immediately before the power cutoff occurs is backed up.

The time saving medium counter 203h is a counter for counting the remaining time saving period (number of fluctuations of the special symbol) in the time saving state (time saving state) of the normal symbol. When the ball does not pass through the specific area 4830 (see FIG. 51) during the jackpot game, the time saving / medium counter 203h is set to 100 at the end of the jackpot game (see S1237 in FIG. 121). That is, in this control example, if the probability change state is not set after the big hit game, the time saving state of 100 times is given.

In this control example, the case where the time saving state is given regardless of the jackpot type has been described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, all or one of the jackpot types (“big hit K”, “big hit L” and “big hit k”) in which the ball can be flown to the specific area 4830 (see FIG. 51) by executing the game in an appropriate game mode. In the unit, when the ball does not pass through the specific area 4830 during the jackpot game, it may be controlled so as not to give the time saving state.

In this case, the game was not executed in an appropriate game mode (for example, the ball firing was not stopped or the operation button 300 (see FIG. 1) was not operated without following the notification of the display device. ) Is excessively large (it does not shift to the probabilistic state of the special symbol that was originally supposed to shift, and the time saving state is not given), so it is possible to improve the motivation to play the game in an appropriate game mode. it can.

The operation scenario storage area 203i is the opening / closing plate and the interference member operation scenario table 202f (FIG. 95 (b)) when the operation control (see S1004 of FIG. 117) of the opening / closing plate 1300 and the interference member 6930 (see FIG. 53) is started. ) Refer to) This is the area to read and store the operation scenario. The operation control of the opening / closing plate 1300 and the interference member 6930 is performed based on the operation scenario stored in the operation scenario storage area 203i.

The operation counter 203j is a counter for determining the timing for movably controlling the interference member 6930 in the storage valve operation process (see S1412 in FIG. 128). Various upper limit values are set in the operation counter 203j in the storage control process (see S1008 in FIG. 125).

The output flag 203k is a flag for determining that the interference member 6930 is in the overhanging state, and when it is on, it indicates that the interfering member 6930 is in the overhanging state (see FIG. 53B). If it is off, it indicates that the interference member 6930 is in the retracted state (see FIG. 53A).

The output flag 203k is determined when it is determined that the operation of the operation button 300 is detected during the valid period (S1403: Yes in FIG. 19) or the operation start timing in the storage control process (see S1008 in FIG. 125). When this is done (S1408: Yes in FIG. 125), it is set to ON, and when it is set to ON, the storage valve operation process (see S1412 in FIG. 128) is executed, and the storage valve operation process (see S1412 in FIG. 128) is executed. ) Is finished, it is set to off (see S1445 in FIG. 128).

The remaining ball timer flag 203m is a flag set to be turned on in the winning process (see S1112 in FIG. 123) (see S1282 in FIG. 123), and is used to start counting the remaining ball timer 203n described later.

The remaining ball timer 203n is a timer that is counted in order to specify a normal range in the jackpot control process (see S1004 in FIG. 118). Even if the count value of the remaining ball timer 203n reaches the upper limit (value corresponding to 1 second), the number of balls detected by the detection sensor 1240 and the number of balls discharged from the discharge port 1150 (specific area detection sensor). If the number of spheres detected by the 4860 (see FIG. 51) and the number of spheres detected by the non-specific area detection sensor 4870 (see FIG. 51) do not match, the difference between the numbers is different. It is added to the remaining ball counter 203p.

The remaining ball counter 203p is a counter for detecting the difference between the number of incoming balls detected by the detection sensor 1240 and the number of discharged balls discharged from the discharge port 1150 across each round. When the notification of the remaining ball counter 203p is determined not to be 0 in the ending process (S1110 in FIG. 121) (S1231: No in FIG. 121), an error command is set.

The closing flag 203q is a flag for determining the timing at which the first specific winning opening 1000a is closed, and is a flag set to be turned on in the winning process (see S1112 in FIG. 123) (FIG. 123). (See S1278), which is used to start counting the closure counter 203r, which will be described later. Then, the closing flag 203q is set to off based on the fact that the closing counter 203r becomes a predetermined value or more in the V winning process (see S1009 in FIG. 129).

The count start flag 203qa is set to on based on the closing flag 203q being set to ON in the fifth round game R, and is used to start counting of the closing counter 203r. Then, the count start flag 203qa is based on the fact that the closing counter 203r has reached the upper limit value (value corresponding to 4.0 seconds in this control example) in the V winning process (see S1009 in FIG. 129). It is set to off (see S1510 in FIG. 129).

The closing counter 203r starts counting when the closing flag 203q is turned on, and mainly determines that the ball has passed the specific region 4830 at a normal timing in the V winning process (see S1009 in FIG. 129). It is a counter to do. The closing counter 203r is incremented by 1 each time the V winning process is executed.

In this control example, the predetermined value of the closing counter 203r is set as the interval period after the round game R according to various timings. The closing counter 203r is used for determining an abnormality in the timing of V winning in the V winning process (see S1009 in FIG. 129).

In the V flag 203s, the ball is set in the specific area 4830 (FIG. 51) at a predetermined timing (within the set value, a predetermined period after the first specific winning opening 1000a (see FIG. 7) is closed in this control example). This is a flag that is set to on when it is detected that it has passed (see). The V flag 203s is set to off after the value of the probability variation counter is set to 80 in the ending process (see S1110 in FIG. 121) (see S1236 in FIG. 121).

The V-winning valid counter 203t is a counter that is subtracted by the same number as the closing counter 203r in the V-winning process (see S1009 in FIG. 129). The V winning valid counter 203t is for determining that the sphere stored in the storage flow path 1231 has normally passed through the specific area 4830 in a state where the distribution operation member 4851 is arranged in the open position. Therefore, in the winning process (S1112 in FIG. 123), a numerical value (a numerical value corresponding to 4.0 seconds in this control example) is set when the closing flag 203q is turned on.

The notification counter 203u is a counter that counts the time until a notification command (see S1257 in FIG. 122) is set with reference to a predetermined timing (see S1253 in FIG. 122) in the notification process (see S1111 in FIG. 122). ..

The winning number counter 203w is a counter that counts the number of balls that have won the first specific winning opening 1000a (see FIG. 7) in the winning process (see S1112 in FIG. 123).

The discharge number counter 203x is a counter that counts the number of balls discharged from the discharge port 1150. The relationship between the numerical values of the winning number counter 203w and the discharging number counter 203x is determined each time the remaining ball timer 203n reaches the upper limit value in the abnormality processing (see S1113 in FIG. 124).

The other memory area 203z is an area for temporarily storing other counter values and the like used by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110.

Returning to FIG. 93, the description will be continued. An input / output port 205 is connected to the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 via a bus line 204 composed of an address bus and a data bus. The input / output port 205 has a large opening solenoid (a large opening solenoid) for closing or opening the payout control device 111, the voice lamp control device 113, the first symbol display device 37, the second symbol display device 83, and the first specific winning opening 1000a. A solenoid 209 composed of a solenoid 1510), a solenoid for driving an electric accessory, and a solenoid 6910 for driving an interference member 6930 are connected, and the MPU 201 issues various commands to these via the input / output port 205. Send a control signal.

Further, the input / output port 205 includes various switches 208 including a switch group and a sensor group (not shown), a RAM erasing switch (FIGS. 3, 122) circuit 253 provided in the power supply device 115, and a game during operation production. An operation button 300 operated by a person is connected, and the MPU 201 is based on various switches 208, signals output from the operation button 300, and a RAM erase signal SG2 output from the RAM erase switch (FIGS. 3, 122) circuit 253. To execute various processes.

The payout control device 111 drives the payout motor 216 to control the payout of prize balls and rented balls. The MPU 211, which is an arithmetic unit, has a ROM 212 that stores a control program and fixed value data executed by the MPU 211, and a RAM 213 that is used as a work memory or the like.

Like the RAM 203 of the main control device 110, the RAM 213 of the payout control device 111 has a stack area in which the contents of the internal registers of the MPU 211 and the return address of the control program executed by the MPU 211 are stored, and various flags and counters. It has a work area (work area) in which values such as I / O are stored. The RAM 213 has a configuration in which a backup voltage is supplied from the power supply device 115 to hold (back up) data even after the power supply of the pachinko machine 10 is cut off, and all the data stored in the RAM 213 is backed up. Similar to the MPU 201 of the main control device 110, the NMI terminal of the MPU 211 is also configured so that the power failure signal SG1 is input from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 when the power is cut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like. When input to the MPU 211, the NMI interrupt process (see FIG. 115) as the power failure process is immediately executed.

An input / output port 225 is connected to the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 via a bus line 224 composed of an address bus and a data bus. A main control device 110, a display control device 114, an audio output device 226, a lamp display device 227, a frame button 22, and the like are connected to the input / output port 225, respectively.

The voice lamp control device 113 determines an error according to a command from the main control device 110 and the status of various devices connected to the voice lamp control device 113, and displays and controls an error command including the type of the error. It transmits to the device 114. The display control device 114 controls the third symbol display device 81 to display an error message image according to the error type (for example, vibration error) indicated by the received error command without delay.

Next, the details of the electrical configuration of the voice lamp control device 113 will be described with reference to FIG. 102. FIG. 102A is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of ROM 222 of the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113. As shown in FIG. 102A, the ROM 222 has at least a variation pattern selection table 222a.

The variation pattern selection table 222a is based on the variation pattern command output from the main control device 110 to the voice lamp control device 113, and the rough variation content (variation time, variation type (reach, deviation, etc.)) indicated by the variation pattern command. ) Is used to determine more detailed fluctuations. Thereby, a wider variety of variation modes can be determined. Here, one of a plurality of types of variation mode is determined by lottery with respect to the rough variation content instructed by the main control device 110.

The opening / closing plate and the interference member operation scenario 222b is provided so that the operation status of the opening / closing plate 1300 and the interference member 6930 whose operation is controlled by the main control device 110 can be grasped on the voice lamp control device 113 side as well. This is an area in which information stored in the opening / closing plate / interference member operation scenario storage area 202e and the opening / closing plate / interference member operation scenario table 202f stored in the ROM 202 of the control device 110 is stored.

Next, the RAM 223 in the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 will be described with reference to FIG. 102 (b). FIG. 102 (b) is a block diagram showing the contents of the RAM 223. The RAM 223 includes a command storage area 223a, a first special symbol holding ball number counter 223b, a second special symbol holding ball number counter 223c, a normal symbol holding ball number counter 223d, a fluctuation start flag 223e, and a stop type selection. Flag 223f, effect counter 223g, round number cumulative counter 223h, probability variation state flag 223i, time saving state counter 223j, storage state flag 223k, storage upper limit flag 223m, storage counter 223n, operation flag 223p, The effect temporary storage area 223r, the first operation effect flag 223wa, the second operation effect flag 223wb, the first input flag 223wc, the second input flag 223wd, the effect execution flag 223x, and the pressing period information storage area 223y. And other memory areas 223z are provided at least.

The command storage area 223a is an area in which various commands output from the main control device 110 to the voice lamp control device 113 are temporarily stored until processing for the commands is executed. More specifically, it is composed of a ring buffer, and data is read and written by a FIFO (First In First Out) method. When the command determination process (see FIG. 132) of the voice lamp control device 113 is executed, the command stored first among the unprocessed commands stored in the command storage area 223a is read out, and the command determination process performs the command determination process. , The command is parsed and processing is performed according to the command.

The first special symbol reserved ball number counter 223b and the second special symbol reserved ball number counter 223c are fluctuation effects (variation display) performed by the first symbol display device 37 (and the third symbol display device 81). It is a counter that counts the number of reserved balls (number of standbys) of the fluctuation effect held in the main control device 110 up to 4 times for each type of special symbol. The first special symbol reserved ball counter 223b corresponds to the number of reserved balls of the variable effect based on the lottery of the first special symbol (special symbol 1), and the second special symbol reserved ball counter 223c corresponds to the second special symbol (special symbol 1). Corresponds to the number of reserved balls of the variable effect based on the lottery of the special symbol 2).

As described above, the voice lamp control device 113 directly accesses the main control device 110, and the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d and the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 203e stored in the RAM 203 of the main control device 110. Cannot get the value of. Therefore, the voice lamp control device 113 counts the number of reserved balls based on the reserved ball number command transmitted from the main control device 110, and the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 223b and the second special symbol reserved ball number counter 223c. In, the number of reserved balls is managed for each type of special symbol.

Specifically, in the main control device 110, when the number of reserved balls in the variable display is added by entering the first ball entrance 64 and the second entry port 640, or in the main control device 110, a special symbol is used. When the fluctuation display in is executed and the number of reserved balls is subtracted, the number of reserved balls indicating the value of the special symbol 1 reserved ball counter 203d after addition or subtraction, or the value of the special symbol 2 reserved ball counter 203e. The command is transmitted to the voice lamp control device 113.

When the voice lamp control device 113 receives the hold ball number command transmitted from the main control device 110, the special symbol 1 hold ball number counter 203d of the main control device 110 or the special symbol 2 hold ball number counter 203d is used from the hold ball number command. The value of the number counter 203e is acquired and stored in the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 223b and the second special symbol reserved ball number counter 223c (see S2210 in FIG. 132). In this way, the voice lamp control device 113 updates the values of the first special symbol hold ball number counter 223b and the second special symbol hold ball number counter 223c according to the hold ball number command transmitted from the main control device 110. , The value can be updated while synchronizing with the values of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d and the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 203e of the main control device 110.

The values of the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 223b and the second special symbol reserved ball number counter 223c are used for displaying the reserved ball number symbol in the third symbol display device 81. That is, the voice lamp control device 113 stores the number of reserved balls indicated by the command in the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 223b and the second special symbol reserved ball number counter 223c in response to the reception of the reserved ball number command. At the same time, in order to notify the display control device 114 of the values of the first special symbol hold ball number counter 223b and the second special symbol hold ball number counter 223c after storage, a display hold ball number command is sent to the display control device 114. Send.

When the display control device 114 receives this display hold ball number command, the value of the hold ball number indicated by the command, that is, the first special symbol hold ball number counter 223b and the second special symbol of the voice lamp control device 113. The drawing of the image is controlled so that the reserved ball number symbol corresponding to the value of the reserved ball number counter 223c is displayed in the small area Ds1 of the third symbol display device 81. As described above, the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 223b and the second special symbol reserved ball number counter 223c are synchronized with the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d and the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 203e of the main controller 110. However, the value is changed. Therefore, the number of reserved sphere symbols displayed in the small area Ds1 of the third symbol display device 81 is also synchronized with the values of the special symbol 1 reserved sphere counter 203d and the special symbol 2 reserved sphere counter 203e of the main control device 110. It can be changed while making it. Therefore, the third symbol display device 81 can accurately display the number of reserved balls for which the variable display is reserved.

When the value of the normal symbol reserved ball counter 203f of the main control device 110 is increased or decreased, the value of the ordinary symbol reserved ball counter 223d is increased or decreased according to the content of the received command. It is a counter to be used to synchronize the number of reserved balls of the normal symbol managed by the main control device 110 side with the number of reserved balls of the normal symbol managed by the voice lamp control device 113 side. is there. The value of the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203f is used, for example, when the third symbol display device 81 displays the number of reserved balls of the normal symbol. Regarding the detailed contents when the value of the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203f is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, the case where the number of reserved balls of the special symbol described above is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is used. Since the same is true, the description thereof will be omitted.

The variation start flag 223e is turned on when a variation pattern command transmitted from the main control unit 110 is received (see S2202 in FIG. 132), and is turned off when the variation display is set in the third symbol display device 81. (See S2702 in FIG. 136). When the variation start flag 223e is turned on, the display variation pattern command is set based on the variation pattern extracted from the received variation pattern command.

The display variation pattern command set here is stored in the command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 223, and is included in the command output process (S2102) of the main process (see FIG. 131) executed by the MPU 221. It is transmitted to the display control device 114. By receiving this display variation pattern command, the display control device 114 so that the third symbol display device 81 performs the variation display of the third symbol with the variation pattern indicated by the display variation pattern command. The display control of the fluctuation effect is started.

The stop type selection flag 223f is turned on when a stop type command transmitted from the main control unit 110 is received (see S2205 in FIG. 132), and is turned off when the stop type is set in the third symbol display device 81. (S2707 in FIG. 136). When the stop type selection flag 223f is turned on, the stop type is set as it is based on the stop type extracted from the received stop type command (in the case of a big hit, the big hit type).

The effect counter 223 g is a counter used for selecting a variation pattern, selecting various effects, and the like. The effect counter 223g is composed of a 1-byte loop counter that is updated in the range of 0 to 198, and the value is added and updated by 1 each time the main process (see FIG. 131) is executed. .. The effect counter 223g has a plurality of counters (not shown), and when the effect pattern is determined by referring to the plurality of counter values in one loop processing, different counter values are used. Used. As a result, when setting one effect pattern, the same counter value is not used at a plurality of places, so that the bias of the set effect pattern can be suppressed. It should be noted that the effect pattern may be set using each value calculated after performing different processing on the value acquired from the same counter. Specifically, among the effect patterns, one selection refers to the ones digit of the acquired value, the other selection refers to the tens digit of the acquired value, and the other selection refers to one of the acquired values. The ones digit of the obtained value may be referred to by multiplying the value obtained by multiplying the digit of the digit by three and the value obtained by multiplying the tens digit by five. With this configuration, it is possible to suppress the bias of the set effect pattern while reducing the number of counters used when setting the effect pattern.

The round number cumulative counter 223h is a counter for counting the number of rounds during the jackpot game, and is updated to a value corresponding to the round number command transmitted from the main controller 110 (when the round number command is received. S2504 in FIG. 133), the value of the counter is reset to 0 by receiving the jackpot ending command (S2510 in FIG. 133). In the voice lamp control device 113, a display command regarding the display during the jackpot game is set based on the round number accumulation counter 223h (see S2537, S2546, and S2547 in FIG. 134).

The probability change state flag 223i is a flag indicating whether or not the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 is the probability change state of the special symbol. When the probability change state flag 223i is on, it indicates that the pachinko machine 10 is in the probability change state of the special symbol, and when it is off, it indicates that the special symbol is in the low probability state. The probability change state flag 223i is updated according to the notification content of the state command output from the main control device 110.

In this control example, the state command is an embodiment in which if the value of the probability variation counter 203g is 1 or more, it indicates that the probability variation counter is in the game, the value of the probability variation counter 203g is 0, and the value of the time saving / medium counter 203h is If it is 1 or more, it is considered to indicate that the time saving game is in progress, and when the value of the probability variation counter 203g is 0 and the value of the time saving medium counter 203h is 0 (see S234 or S238 in FIG. 109). Is an aspect indicating that the game is normally in progress.

Depending on the state of the probability change state flag 223i, it is determined whether or not the present is the probability change state of the special symbol, and the corresponding effect is set. More specifically, whether or not to display the right-handed navigation image displayed in the probabilistic state of the special symbol, and whether or not to display the right-handed warning image when the right-handed game is executed in the normal state. To determine if.

The time saving state counter 223j is a flag indicating whether or not the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 is the time saving state of the normal symbol. When the time saving state counter 223j is on, it indicates that the pachinko machine 10 is in the time saving state of the normal symbol, and when it is off, it indicates that it is in the normal state (low probability state) of the normal symbol. The time saving state counter 223j is updated according to the notification content of the state command output from the main control device 110. Depending on the state of the time saving state counter 223j, it is determined whether or not the current time saving state is the normal symbol, and the corresponding effect is set. More specifically, it is determined whether or not to display the right-handed navigation image displayed in the time-saving state of the normal symbol, and whether or not to display the right-handed warning image in the normal state.

The storage state flag 223k is a flag for determining the number of spheres stored in the storage flow path 1231 (see FIG. 86 (a)), and is a flag for determining the number of spheres stored in the storage flow path 1231 (see FIG. Settings are made based on the detection result of. When this storage state flag 223k is on, it indicates that a predetermined number or more of spheres are stored in the storage flow path 1231, and when it is off, the storage flow path 1231 stores less than the number of stored spheres. Show that.

This storage state flag 223k is turned on when it is determined in the storage state monitoring process (see S2113 in FIG. 137) that the number of spheres stored in the storage flow path 1231 is a predetermined number (4 in this control example) or more. Is set to (see S2807 in FIG. 137), and is set to off when it is determined that the number of spheres stored in the storage flow path 1231 is less than a predetermined number (S2810 in FIG. 137). Here, when the storage state flag 223k is set to on, the median number display is executed in the display during the round game, and when the storage state flag 223k is set to off, the display is insufficient (FIG. 88). (See)) is executed.

The storage upper limit flag 223m is a flag for determining that the number of spheres stored in the storage flow path 1231 has reached the upper limit number (10 in this control example), and is the detection result of the detection sensor 1240. , The setting is made based on the detection result of the ball discharged from the discharge port 1150. When this storage upper limit flag 223m is on, it indicates that the upper limit number of spheres is stored in the storage flow path 1231, and when it is off, it indicates that the upper limit number of spheres is not stored in the storage flow path 1231. Shown.

This storage upper limit flag 223m is set to on when it is determined in the storage state monitoring process (see S2113 in FIG. 137) that the number of spheres stored in the storage flow path 1231 is the upper limit (see S2814 in FIG. 137). , It is set to off when it is determined that the number of spheres stored in the storage flow path 1231 is less than the upper limit (S2817 in FIG. 137). Here, when the storage upper limit flag 223m is set to on, the full tank display (see FIG. 92 (b)) is executed, and when the storage upper limit flag 223m is set to off, a dissatisfaction display (FIG. 92 (a)) is executed.

The storage counter 223n is a counter for counting the number of spheres stored in the storage flow path 1231. That is, when the passage of the sphere is detected by the detection sensor 1240, the value of the storage counter 223n is incremented by 1, and the discharge of the sphere from the discharge port 1150 is the specific area detection sensor 4860 or the non-specific area detection sensor 4870 (or dedicated). The value of the storage counter 223n is subtracted by 1 when it is detected by the ball discharge sensor).

The operation flag 223p is a flag for determining whether or not the operation button 300 has been operated. When the operation flag 223p is on, it indicates that the operation button 300 has been operated, and when it is off, it indicates that the operation button 300 has not been operated. This operation flag 223p is set to on when an operation command is received in the command determination process (S2218: Yes in FIG. 132), and is set to off in the button input monitoring / effect processing (see S3007 in FIG. 139). ..

The effect temporary storage area 223r is an area for temporarily storing the set effect contents until the effect is executed. For example, the effect mode of the timing effect (operation effect) executed during the jackpot is described. The content of the timing effect (operation effect) is temporarily stored during the period from the set timing (third round) to the timing (fourth round) when the timing effect (operation effect) is executed during the jackpot. This effect temporary storage area 223r stores the set effect mode, and when the round (4 rounds) in which the timing effect (operation effect) is executed is executed in the jackpot medium effect process (see S2505 in FIG. 134). Is read out (S2537 in FIG. 134).

The first operation effect flag 223wa and the second operation effect flag 223wb are flags for determining whether to execute the timing effect (operation effect) for executing the effect of causing the player to operate the operation means (operation button 300). If it is on, it indicates that the condition for executing the timing effect (operation effect) is satisfied, and if it is off, it indicates that the condition for executing the timing effect (operation effect) is not satisfied.

In this control example, as a condition for executing the timing effect (operation effect), the start of the fourth round game R with respect to the first operation effect flag 223wa is set to the second operation effect flag 223wb. On the other hand, it is set that the round game R of the four rounds of the jackpot game of the jackpot type k has been started. Then, the effect information read from the effect temporary storage area changes depending on the setting status of the first operation effect flag 223wa and the second operation effect flag 223wb.

Further, the first operation effect flag 223wa and the second operation effect flag 223wb are set to off after the effect execution flag 223x is set to on (see S2539 in FIG. 134).

The first input flag 223wc and the second input flag 223wd are flags for limiting the number of operations of the operation button 300 during the corresponding production (in this control example, the number of operations is limited to one), and the respective operations are performed. The first operation is executed during the period, or it is set to be turned on when the operation period is exceeded, and the input of the operation button 300 after that is invalidated. Further, the first input flag 223wc and the second input flag 223wd are set to off after the fifth round round game R is started and the effect executing flag 223x is set to off (see S2543 in FIG. 134). ).

The effect executing flag 223x is a flag for determining whether or not the timing effect (operation effect) is being executed. If it is on, it indicates that the timing effect (operation effect) is being executed, and if it is off, it indicates that the timing effect (operation effect) is being executed. For example, it indicates that the timing effect (operation effect) is not executed. The effect execution flag 223x is referred to when determining whether the operation for the operation means (operation button 300) is an operation based on the timing effect (operation effect).

The effect execution flag 223x starts a round in which the timing effect (operation effect) is executed in the jackpot medium effect process (see S2505 in FIG. 134) (S2532: Yes in FIG. 134), and issues a display effect round command. After setting, it is set to on (S2538 in FIG. 134). Then, when the set timing effect (operation effect) is completed, it is set to off (S2542 in FIG. 134).

The pressing period information storage area 223y is an area for storing the operation timing of the operation means (operation button 300) set so as to correspond to the display timing of the pointer (effect pointer) displayed in the timing effect (operation effect). ..

The successful pressing period is set in the pressing period information storage area 223y corresponding to the set display pointer (effect pointer). The successful pressing period set here is referred to in the button input monitoring / effect processing (see S2107 in FIG. 139) in order to determine whether the timing at which the operation button 300 is pressed is the successful pressing period.

The other memory area 223z is provided as an area for storing data other than the above-mentioned data, and is an area for temporarily storing other counter values and the like used by the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113.

Next, the electrical configuration of the display control device 114 will be described with reference to FIG. 103. FIG. 103 is a block diagram showing an electrical configuration of the display control device 114. The display control device 114 includes the MPU 231, the work RAM 233, the character ROM 234, the resident video RAM 235, the normal video RAM 236, the image controller 237, the input port 238, the output port 239, and the bus lines 240 and 241. have.

The output side of the voice lamp control device 113 is connected to the input side of the input port 238, and the MPU 231, the work RAM 233, the character ROM 234, and the image controller 237 are connected to the output side of the input port 238 via the bus line 240. .. A resident video RAM 235 and a normal video RAM 236 are connected to the image controller 237, and an output port 239 is connected via the bus line 241. Further, a third symbol display device 81 is connected to the output side of the output port 239.

Even if the pachinko machine 10 is a different model in which the lottery probability of winning a special symbol and the number of prize balls paid out for one special symbol jackpot are different, the symbol displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Since there are models with exactly the same configuration, the display control device 114 is made into a common component to reduce costs.

In the following, the MPU 231, the character ROM 234, the image controller 237, the resident video RAM 235, and the normal video RAM 236 will be described first, and then the work RAM 233 will be described.

First, the MPU 231 controls the display content of the third symbol display device 81 based on the display variation pattern command output from the voice lamp control device 113 based on the variation pattern command of the main control device 110. The MPU 231 has a built-in instruction pointer 231a, reads and fetches an instruction code stored at the address indicated by the instruction pointer 231a, and executes various processes according to the instruction code. Immediately after the MPU 231 is turned on (including recovery from a power failure; the same applies hereinafter), a system reset can be applied from the power supply device 115. Is automatically set to "0000H" by the hardware of MPU231. Then, each time the instruction code is fetched, the value of the instruction pointer 231a is added by one. When the MPU 231 executes an instruction pointer setting instruction, the pointer value instructed by the setting instruction is set in the instruction pointer 231a.

Although the details will be described later, in this control example, the control program executed by the MPU 231 and various fixed value data used in the control program are provided with a dedicated program ROM like a conventional game machine. It is stored in the character ROM 234 provided for storing the image data to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81, instead of storing the data.

Although the details will be described later, the character ROM 234 is composed of a NAND flash memory 234a capable of increasing the capacity in a small area. As a result, not only the image data but also the control program and the like can be sufficiently stored. If the control program or the like is stored in the character ROM 234, it is not necessary to provide a dedicated program ROM for storing the control program or the like. Therefore, the number of parts in the display control device 114 can be reduced, the manufacturing cost can be reduced, and the increase in the failure occurrence rate due to the increase in the number of parts can be suppressed.

On the other hand, the NAND flash memory has a problem that the read speed becomes slow, especially when random access is performed. For example, when reading data arranged continuously on a plurality of pages, the data on the second and subsequent pages can be read at high speed, but an address is specified for reading the data on the first page. It takes a long time to output the data. Further, when reading non-continuous data, it takes a long time to read the data. As described above, since the speed of reading the NAND flash memory is slow, if the MPU 231 is configured to directly read the control program from the character ROM 234 and execute various processes, it takes time to read the instructions constituting the control program. Even if a high-performance processor is used as the MPU 231, the processing performance of the display control device 114 may be deteriorated.

Therefore, in this control example, when the system reset of the MPU 231 is released, first, the control program stored in the NAND flash memory 234a of the character ROM 234 is transferred to the work RAM 233 provided for temporary storage of various data. And store. Then, the MPU 231 executes various processes according to the control program stored in the work RAM 233. Since the work RAM 233 is configured by a DRAM (Dynamic RAM) as described later and data is read / written at high speed, the MPU 231 can read out the instructions constituting the control program without delay. Therefore, high processing performance can be maintained in the display control device 114, and diversified and complicated effects can be easily executed by using the third symbol display device 81.

The character ROM 234 is a memory that stores the control program executed in the MPU 231 and the image data displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and is connected to the MPU 231 via the bus line 240. The MPU 231 directly accesses the character ROM 234 after the system reset is released via the bus line 240, and transfers the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 of the character ROM 234 to the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233. An image controller 237 is also connected to the bus line 240, and the image controller 237 transfers the image data stored in the character storage area 234a2 described later of the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 connected to the image controller 237. Transfer to the normal video RAM 236.

The character ROM 234 is configured by modularizing a NAND flash memory 234a, a ROM controller 234b, a buffer RAM 234c, and a NOR flash memory 234d.

The NAND flash memory 234a is a non-volatile memory provided as a main storage unit in the character ROM 234, and stores most of the control programs executed by the MPU 231 and fixed value data for driving the third symbol display device 81. It has at least a second program storage area 234a1 to be stored and a character storage area 234a2 to store data of an image (character or the like) to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

Here, the NAND flash memory has a feature that a large storage capacity can be obtained in a small area, and the character ROM 234 can be easily increased in capacity. As a result, in this pachinko machine, for example, by using a NAND flash memory 234a having a capacity of 2 gigabytes, many images can be stored in the character storage area 234a2 as images to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. it can. Therefore, the image displayed on the third symbol display device 81 can be diversified and complicated in order to further enhance the interest of the player.

Further, the NAND flash memory 234a can store a large amount of image data in the character storage area 234a2, and further store the control program and fixed value data in the second program storage area 234a1. In this way, it is provided to store the image data to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 without storing the control program and the fixed value data by providing a dedicated program ROM as in the conventional game machine. Since it can be stored in the character ROM 234, the number of parts in the display control device 114 can be reduced, the manufacturing cost can be reduced, and the increase in the failure occurrence rate due to the increase in the number of parts can be suppressed.

The ROM controller 234b is a controller for controlling the operation of the character ROM 234. For example, the corresponding data from the NAND flash memory 234a or the like is based on the address transmitted from the MPU 231 or the image controller 237 via the bus line 240. Is read out and output to the MPU 231 or the image controller 237 via the bus line 240.

Here, due to the nature of the NAND flash memory 234a, a relatively large number of error bits (bits in which incorrect data are written) occur when writing data, or a defective data block in which data cannot be written occurs. Or something. Therefore, the ROM controller 234b is known to perform known error correction on the data read from the NAND flash memory 234a, and to avoid reading and writing data to the NAND flash memory 234a while avoiding defective data blocks. Performs data address translation for.

Since the ROM controller 234b performs error correction on the data read from the NAND flash memory 234a including the error bit, even if the NAND flash memory 234a is used as the character ROM 234, it is based on the incorrect data. It is possible to prevent the MPU 231 from performing processing and the image controller 237 from generating various images.

Further, since the defective data block of the NAND flash memory 234a is analyzed by the ROM controller 234b and access to the defective data block is avoided, the MPU 231 and the image controller 237 have different defective data in each NAND flash memory 234a. Access to the character ROM 234 can be easily performed without considering the address position of the block. Therefore, even if the NAND flash memory 234a is used for the character ROM 234, it is possible to suppress the complicated access control to the character ROM 234.

The buffer RAM 234c is a memory used as a buffer for temporarily storing the data read from the NAND flash memory 234a. When the address assigned to the character ROM 234 from the MPU 231 or the image controller 237 via the bus line 240 is specified, the ROM controller 234b contains one page (for example, 2 kilobytes) including the data corresponding to the specified address. It is determined whether or not the data of is set in the buffer RAM 234c. If it is not set, one page (for example, 2 kilobytes) of data including the data corresponding to the specified address is read from the NAND flash memory 234a (or NOR flash 234d) and temporarily set in the buffer RAM 234c. To do. Then, the ROM controller 234b performs known error correction processing, and then outputs the data corresponding to the designated address to the MPU 231 and the image controller 237 via the bus line 240.

The buffer RAM 234c is composed of two banks, and data for one page of the NAND flash memory 234a can be set per bank. As a result, the ROM controller 234b can output the data of the NAND flash memory 234a to the outside by using the other bank while the data is set in one bank, or can be designated by the MPU 231 or the image controller 237. One page of data including the data corresponding to the assigned address is transferred from the NAND flash memory 234a to one bank and set, and the data corresponding to the address specified by the MPU 231 or the image controller 237 is transferred to the other bank. The process of reading from the bank and outputting to the MPU 231 and the image controller 237 can be processed in parallel. Therefore, it is possible to improve the responsiveness in reading the character ROM 234.

The NOR type ROM 234d is a non-volatile memory provided as a sub storage unit in the character ROM 234, and has an extremely smaller capacity (for example, 2 kilobytes) than the NAND type flash memory 234a for the purpose of complementing the NAND type flash memory 234a. ) Is configured. Among the control programs stored in the character ROM 234, the NOR type ROM 234d is the first program not stored in the second program storage area 234a1 of the NAND flash memory 234a, specifically, the MPU 231 after the system reset is released. At least a first program storage area 234d1 for storing a part of the boot program to be executed is provided.

The boot program is a control program for starting the display control device 114 so that various controls for the third symbol display device 81 can be executed, and the MPU 231 first executes this boot program after the system reset is released. As a result, various controls can be made executable in the display control device 114. The first program storage area 234d1 should be processed first by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released within the capacity range of one bank of the buffer RAM 234c (that is, one page of the NAND flash memory 234a) in this boot program. A predetermined number of instructions (for example, if the capacity of one page is 2 kilobytes, 1024 words (1 word = 2 bytes) worth of instructions) are stored. The number of boot program instructions stored in the first program storage area 234d1 may be less than or equal to the capacity of one bank of the buffer RAM 234c, and is appropriately set according to the specifications of the display control device 114. There may be.

When the system reset is released, the MPU 231 sets the value of the instruction pointer 231a to "0000H" by hardware and specifies the address "0000H" indicated by the instruction pointer 231a to the bus line 240. It is configured. On the other hand, when the ROM controller 234b of the character ROM 234 detects that the address "0000H" is specified for the bus line 240, the ROM controller 234b stores the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 of the NOR type ROM 234d in one bank of the buffer RAM 234c. Is set to, and the corresponding data (instruction code) is output to MPU231.

When the MPU 231 fetches the instruction code received from the character ROM 234, the MPU 231 executes various processes according to the fetched instruction code, adds only one instruction pointer 231a, and sets the address indicated by the instruction pointer 231a to the bus line 240. To specify. Then, the ROM controller 234b of the character ROM 234 is selected from the programs previously set in the buffer RAM 234c from the NOR type ROM 234d while the address specified by the bus line 240 is an address indicating the program stored in the NOR type ROM 234d. , The instruction code of the corresponding address is read from the buffer RAM 234c and output to the MPU 231.

Here, in this control example, instead of storing all the control programs in the NAND flash memory 234a, among the boot programs, a predetermined number of instructions from the instruction to be processed first by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released are NOR type ROM 234d. It is stored in for the following reasons. That is, as described above, the NAND flash memory 234a is peculiar to the NAND flash memory in that it takes a long time from the designation of the address to the output of the data in reading the data on the first page. There's a problem.

When all the control programs are stored in such a NAND flash memory 234a, the address "0000H" is specified from the MPU 231 via the bus line 240 in order to fetch the instruction code to be executed first by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released. If so, the character ROM 234 must read one page of data including the data (instruction code) corresponding to the address "0000H" from the NAND flash memory 234a and set it in the buffer RAM 234c. Due to the nature of the NAND flash memory 234a, it takes a long time to set the buffer RAM 234c from its read. Therefore, the MPU 231 specifies the address "0000H" and then gives an instruction corresponding to the address "0000H". It consumes a lot of waiting time to receive the code. Therefore, it takes a long time to start the MPU 231. As a result, there is a problem that the control of the third symbol display device 81 in the display control device 114 may not be started immediately.

On the other hand, since the NOR type ROM is a memory capable of reading data at high speed, a predetermined number of instructions from the instruction to be processed first by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released are stored in the NOR type ROM 234d among the boot programs. By doing so, when the address "0000H" is specified from the MPU 231 via the bus line 240 after the system reset is released, the character ROM 234 immediately stores the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 of the NOR type ROM 234d in the buffer RAM 234c. The corresponding data (instruction code) can be output to the MPU 231 by setting to. Therefore, the MPU 231 can receive the instruction code corresponding to the address "0000H" in a short time after designating the address "0000H", and the MPU 231 can be started in a short time. Therefore, even if the control program is stored in the character ROM 234 configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow read speed, the control of the third symbol display device 81 in the display control device 114 can be started immediately.

The boot program includes a control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 of the NAND flash memory 234a, that is, a control program excluding the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 of the NOR type ROM 234d. , The fixed value data (for example, display data table, transfer data table, etc. described later) used in the control program is stored in the program storage area of the work RAM 233 by a predetermined amount (for example, the capacity of one page of the NAND flash memory 234a). It is programmed to transfer to 233a or the data table storage area 233b. Then, in the MPU 231, first, the boot program in the first program storage area 234d1 sets the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 according to the boot program read from the first program storage area 234d1 after the system reset is released. While using a bank different from the bank of the buffer RAM 234c, a predetermined amount is transferred to and stored in the program storage area 233a.

Here, since the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 has a capacity corresponding to one bank of the buffer RAM 234c as described above, the address of the internal bus is designated as "0000H". When the boot program in the first program storage area 234d1 is set in the buffer RAM 234c in response to the above, the boot program is set in only one bank of the buffer RAM 234c. Therefore, when transferring the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 to the program storage area 233a according to the boot program in the first program storage area 234d1, the first program set in one bank of the buffer RAM 234c The transfer process can be executed using the other bank while leaving the boot program in the storage area 234d1. Therefore, since it is not necessary to reset the boot program in the first program storage area 234d1 to the buffer RAM 234c after the transfer process, the time required for the boot process can be shortened.

When the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 transfers the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 to the program storage area 233a by a predetermined amount, the instruction pointer 231a is transferred to the program storage area 233a. It is programmed to set to the first predetermined address. As a result, when the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 is transferred to the program storage area 233a by a predetermined amount after the system reset is released, the instruction pointer 231a is set to the first predetermined program storage area 233a. Set to the address.

Therefore, when a predetermined amount of the control programs stored in the second program storage area 234a1 are stored in the program storage area 233a, the MPU 231 reads the control program stored in the program storage area 233a and reads the control program. Various processes can be executed. That is, the MPU 231 does not read the control program from the NAND flash memory 234a having the second program storage area 234a1 and fetch the instruction, but reads the control program transferred to the work RAM 233 having the program storage area 233a and fetches the instruction. Then, various processes will be executed. As will be described later, since the work RAM 233 is composed of the DRAM, the read operation is performed at high speed. Therefore, even when most of the control programs are stored in the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow read speed, the MPU 231 can fetch the instructions at high speed and execute the processing for the instructions.

Here, the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 includes the remaining boot programs that are not stored in the first program storage area 234d1. On the other hand, the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 has the remaining boot programs in the control program transferred from the second program storage area 234a1 by a predetermined amount to the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233. It is programmed to be included, and the instruction pointer 231a is set with the start address of the remaining boot program stored in the program storage area 233a as the first predetermined address.

As a result, the MPU 231 transfers the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 to the program storage area 233a by a predetermined amount by the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1, and then transfers the control program. Run the remaining boot programs included in the control program.

In this remaining boot program, the remaining control program that has not been transferred to the program storage area 233a and the fixed value data (for example, the display data table and the transfer data table described later) used in the control program are all stored in the second program. A process of transferring a predetermined amount from the area 234a1 to the program storage area 233a or the data table storage area 233b is executed. Further, at the end of the boot program, the instruction pointer 231a is set to the second predetermined address in the program storage area 233a. Specifically, as this second predetermined address, the start address of the program stored in the program storage area 233a and corresponding to the initial setting process executed after the boot process by the boot program is completed is set.

By executing the remaining boot program, the MPU 231 transfers all the control programs and fixed value data stored in the second program storage area 234a1 to the program storage area 233a or the data table storage area 233b. Then, when the boot program is executed to the end by the MPU 231, the instruction pointer 231a is set to the second predetermined address, and thereafter, the MPU 231 is transferred to the program storage area 233a without referring to the NAND flash memory 234a. Various processes are executed using the control program.

Therefore, even when most of the control programs are stored in the character ROM 234 configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow read speed, the control programs are transferred to the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233 after the system reset is released. As a result, the MPU 231 can read a control program from a work RAM composed of a DRAM having a high read speed and perform various controls. Therefore, high processing performance can be maintained in the display control device 114, and diversified and complicated effects can be easily executed by using the third symbol display device 81.

Further, as described above, instead of storing all the boot programs in the NOR type ROM 234d, a predetermined number of instructions are stored from the instruction to be processed first by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released, and the remaining boot programs are stored. Even if the program is stored in the second program storage area 234a1 of the NAND flash memory 234a, the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 can be reliably transferred to the program storage area 233a. Therefore, the character ROM 234 can start the MPU 231 in a short time only by adding an extremely small capacity NOR type ROM 234d, so that the cost increase of the character ROM 234 due to the shortening of the time can be suppressed. Can be done.

The image controller 237 is a digital signal processor (DSP) that draws an image and displays the drawn image on the third symbol display device 81 at a predetermined timing. The image controller 237 draws an image for one frame based on the drawing list (see FIG. 106) described later transmitted from the MPU 231, and draws one frame of the first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c described later. The image drawn in the buffer is expanded, and the image information for one frame previously expanded in the other frame buffer is output to the third symbol display device 81 to display the image on the third symbol display device 81. .. The image controller 237 performs the image drawing process for one frame and the image display process for one frame in the image display time for one frame in the third symbol display device 81 (20 milliseconds in this control example). Process in parallel in.

The image controller 237 transmits a vertical synchronization interrupt signal (hereinafter, referred to as “V interrupt signal”) to the MPU 231 every 20 milliseconds when the drawing process of an image for one frame is completed. Each time the MPU 231 detects this V interrupt signal, it executes a V interrupt process and instructs the image controller 237 to draw an image for the next frame. In response to this instruction, the image controller 237 executes the drawing process of the image for the next one frame, and also executes the process of displaying the image developed by the drawing on the third symbol display device 81.

In this way, the MPU 231 executes the V interrupt process in response to the V interrupt signal from the image controller 237, and gives a drawing instruction to the image controller 237. Therefore, the image controller 237 performs the image drawing process and display. An image drawing instruction can be received from the MPU 231 at each processing interval (20 milliseconds). Therefore, the image controller 237 does not receive a drawing instruction for the next image before the image drawing processing and display processing are completed. Therefore, the image controller 237 may start drawing a new image in the middle of drawing the image. It is possible to prevent the image from being expanded in accordance with a new drawing instruction in the frame buffer in which the image information being displayed is stored.

The image controller 237 also executes a process of transferring image data from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 based on the transfer instruction from the MPU 231 and the transfer data information included in the drawing list.

The drawing of the image is performed using the image data stored in the resident video RAM 235 and the normal video RAM 236. That is, the image data required for drawing is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 based on the instruction from the MPU 231 before the drawing is performed.

Here, the NAND flash memory makes it easy to increase the capacity of the ROM, but the read speed is slower than that of other ROMs (mask ROM, EEPROM, etc.). On the other hand, in the display control device 114, the MPU 231 instructs the image controller 237 to transfer a part of the image data stored in the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 after the power is turned on. It is configured to do. Then, as will be described later, the image data stored in the resident video RAM 235 is controlled so as to be resident without being overwritten.

As a result, after the transfer of the image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 is completed after the power is turned on, the image controller 237 draws the image while using the image data resident in the resident video RAM 235. Processing can be performed. Therefore, if the image data used for the drawing process is resident in the resident video RAM 235, it is not necessary to read the corresponding image data from the character ROM 234 configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow read speed at the time of image drawing. The time required for reading the data can be omitted, and the image can be drawn immediately and the drawn image can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

In particular, since the resident video RAM 235 is resident with image data of images that are frequently displayed and image data of images that should be displayed immediately after the display is determined by the main control device 110 or the display control device 114. Even if the character ROM 234 is composed of the NAND flash memory 234a, the responsiveness until some image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 can be maintained high.

Further, when drawing an image using non-resident image data in the resident video RAM 235, the display control device 114 is required for drawing from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 before the drawing is performed. The MPU 231 is configured to instruct the image controller 237 to transfer the image data. As will be described later, the image data transferred to the normal video RAM 236 may be deleted by overwriting after being used for drawing the image, but at the time of drawing the image, the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow read speed Since it is not necessary to read the corresponding image data from the character ROM 234 configured by, and the time required for reading the data can be omitted, the image can be drawn immediately and the drawn image can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. it can.

Further, since it is not necessary to make all the image data resident in the resident video RAM 235 by storing the image data in the normal video RAM 236, it is not necessary to prepare a large-capacity resident video RAM 235. Therefore, it is possible to suppress an increase in cost due to the provision of the resident video RAM 235.

The image controller 237 has a buffer RAM 237a composed of 132 kilobytes of SRAM, which is the capacity of one block of the NAND flash memory 234a.

The image data transfer instruction given by the MPU 231 to the image controller 237 based on the transfer instruction or the transfer data information of the drawing list includes the start address (storage source start address) of the character ROM 234 in which the image data to be transferred is stored. The end address (final address of the storage source), transfer destination information (information indicating whether to transfer to the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236), and the beginning of the transfer destination (resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236). Contains the address. The data size of the image data to be transferred may be included instead of the final address of the storage source.

The image controller 237 reads data for one block from a predetermined address of the character ROM 234 and temporarily stores the data in the buffer RAM 237a according to various information of the transfer instruction, and when the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 is not used, the buffer RAM 237a The image data stored in the resident RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 is transferred. Then, the process is repeatedly executed until all the image data stored in the storage source final address is transferred from the storage source start address indicated by the transfer instruction.

As a result, the image data read from the character ROM 234 over time is temporarily stored in the buffer RAM 237a, and then the image data is transferred from the buffer RAM 237a to the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 in a short time. Can be done. Therefore, while the image data is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236, the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 is prevented from being occupied for a long time by the transfer of the image data. be able to. Therefore, since the resident video RAM 235 and the normal video RAM 236 are occupied by the transfer of the image data, those video RAMs 235 and 236 cannot be used for the image drawing process, and as a result, the image can be drawn by the required time. , It is possible to prevent the display on the third symbol display device 81 from being missed.

Further, since the transfer of the image data from the buffer RAM 234c to the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 is performed by the image controller 237, the resident video RAM 235 and the normal video RAM 236 perform image drawing processing and display the third symbol. The period during which the display process on the device 81 is unused can be easily determined, and the process can be simplified.

The resident video RAM 235 is used so that the image data transferred from the character ROM 234 is retained without being overwritten during the power-on, and when the power is turned on, the main image area 235a, the rear image area 235c, and the character design area are used. In addition to the 235e and the error message image area 235f, at least the variable image area 235b and the third symbol area 235d when the power is turned on are provided.

The main image area 235a at power-on is used as the main image at power-on to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 between the time the power is turned on and the time when all the image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 is stored. This is the area that stores the corresponding data. Further, in the fluctuating image area 235b when the power is turned on, the game is started by the player while the main image when the power is turned on is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and the first ball entry port 64 and the second ball entry are entered. This is an area for storing image data corresponding to a fluctuating image at power-on, which displays the result of a lottery performed by the main control device 110 by a fluctuating effect when a ball entering the mouth 640 is detected.

When the power supply is started from the power supply unit 251 of the MPU 231, the image data corresponding to the power-on main image and the power-on fluctuation image is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the power-on main image area 235a. A transfer instruction is transmitted to the controller 237.

Here, the fluctuation image when the power is turned on will be described. Immediately after the power is turned on, the display control device 114 transfers the image data corresponding to the power-on main image and the power-on variable image from the character ROM 234 to the power-on main image area 235a and the power-on variable image area 235b. Subsequently, the remaining image data to be stored in the resident video RAM 235 is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235. While the remaining image data is being transferred, the display control device 114 uses the image data previously stored in the power-on main image area 235a to display the power-on main image as the third symbol display device. Display on 81.

At this time, when the display fluctuation pattern command transmitted from the voice lamp control device 113 is received based on the fluctuation pattern command from the main control device 110 which is the instruction command for starting the fluctuation, the display control device 114 displays the main image when the power is turned on. On the display screen of, the fluctuation image of the "○" symbol at the lower right position when facing the screen and the fluctuation image of the "×" symbol at the same position as the "○" symbol are displayed during the fluctuation period. Medium, alternate and repeat display. Then, from the display variation pattern command and the display stop type command transmitted from the voice lamp control device 113 based on the variation pattern command from the main control device 110 and the stop type command, the lottery performed by the main control device 110 is performed. Judging the result, if it is a "big hit of a special symbol", the "○" symbol is displayed for a certain period of time after the variable effect is stopped, and if it is "out of the special symbol", the "x" symbol is displayed after the variable effect is stopped. Display for a certain period of time.

The MPU 231 uses the image data stored in the main image area 235a at power-on to the image controller 237 until all the image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 is transferred to the resident video RAM 235. Instructs to draw the main image when the power is turned on. As a result, while the remaining image data to be resident is transferred to the resident video RAM 235, the player or the person concerned with the hall can confirm the main image at power-on displayed on the third symbol display device 81. it can. Therefore, the display control device 114 transfers the remaining resident image data from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 over time while displaying the main image at power-on on the third symbol display device 81. be able to. Further, since the player or the like can recognize that some processing is being performed while the main image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 when the power is turned on, the image to be resident in the remaining resident video RAM 235. Until the data is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235, wait until the transfer of the image data to the resident video RAM 235 is completed without worrying that the operation has stopped. Can be done.

Further, even in the operation check in a factory or the like at the time of manufacturing, the main image at the time of turning on the power is immediately displayed on the third symbol display device 81, so that the operation of the third symbol display device 81 is started without any problem by turning on the power. Further, by using the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow read speed for the character ROM 234, it is possible to suppress the deterioration of the operation check efficiency.

Further, when the power is turned on, the player starts the game while the main image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and the entry into the first entry port 64 or the second entry port 640 is detected. In this case, the power-on fluctuation image is drawn using the image data corresponding to the power-on fluctuation image resident in the power-on fluctuation image area 235b, and the power-on fluctuation image is alternately displayed on the third symbol display device. The MPU 231 instructs the image controller 237 to be displayed on the 81. As a result, it is possible to perform a simple fluctuation effect using the fluctuation image when the power is turned on. Therefore, the player can confirm that the lottery has been surely performed by the simple variation effect even while the main image at the time of turning on the power is displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

Further, since the image data corresponding to the power-on fluctuation effect image is already resident in the power-on fluctuation image area 235b at the stage when the power-on main image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, the power is turned on. If a ball is detected in the first ball entry port 64 while the time main image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, the corresponding variation effect is immediately displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Can be done.

Returning to FIG. 103, the description will be continued. The rear image area 235c is an area for storing image data corresponding to the rear image displayed on the third symbol display device 81. The back image is an image displayed on the back side of the main symbol (third symbol), and for example, a city, the sea, the sky, or the like is displayed. A right-handed navigation image (see FIG. 88A) and the like are also stored in the rear image area 235c as a rear image.

The third symbol area 235d is an area for resident the third symbol used in the variation effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81. That is, in the third symbol area 235d, image data corresponding to the above-mentioned 10 types of main symbols with numbers "0" to "9", which are the third symbols, is resident. As a result, when the variation effect is performed by the third symbol display device 81, it is not necessary to read the image data from the character ROM 234 one by one. Therefore, even if the NAND flash memory 234a is used for the character ROM 234, the third symbol display device 81 You can start the variable effect quickly. Therefore, after the ball enters the first ball entry port 64, the variation effect is immediately started in the third symbol display device 81 even though the variation effect is started in the first symbol display device 37. It is possible to suppress the occurrence of a state in which the display is not performed.

Further, in the third symbol area 235d, as the main symbols without the numbers "0" to "9", the main symbol consisting of the rear symbol such as a wooden box, the rear symbol and the character such as the furoshiki, the helmet, etc. Image data corresponding to the main symbol consisting of the attached symbol imitating the above is also resident. These image data are used for the demonstration effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81 when the next variation effect accompanying the start winning is not started even after a predetermined time has elapsed after one variation effect is stopped. Be done. As a result, when the demo effect is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, the main symbol without a number is displayed as the third symbol in the demo effect. Therefore, the player can easily recognize that the pachinko machine 10 is in the demo state by visually recognizing the main symbol without a number from the display image of the third symbol display device 81.

The character symbol area 235e is an area for storing image data corresponding to the character symbols used in various effects displayed on the third symbol display device 81. In this pachinko machine 10, various characters such as "boy" are displayed according to various effects, and the data corresponding to these is resident in the character symbol area 235e to control the display. When the device 114 changes the character symbol based on the content of the command received from the voice lamp control device 113, the device 114 does not newly read the corresponding image data from the character ROM 234, but instead enters the character symbol area 235e of the resident video RAM 235. By reading out the image data resident in advance, a predetermined image can be drawn by the image controller 237. As a result, it is not necessary to read the corresponding image data from the character ROM 234, so that the character symbol can be changed immediately even if the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow reading speed is used for the character ROM 234.

The error message image area 235f is an area for storing image data corresponding to an error message displayed when an error occurs in the pachinko machine 10. In the pachinko machine 10, for example, when vibration is detected by the voice lamp control device 113 from the output of a vibration sensor (not shown) attached to the back surface of the game board 13, the voice lamp control device 113 causes a vibration error. Notify the display control device 114 by an error command. Further, even when the occurrence of another error is detected by the voice lamp control device 113, the voice lamp control device 113 notifies the display control device 114 of the occurrence of the error together with the error type by an error command. When the display control device 114 receives an error command, the display control device 114 is configured to display an error message corresponding to the received error on the third symbol display device 81.

Here, from the viewpoint of preventing fraud of the player and protecting the player against the error, the error message is required to be displayed almost at the same time as the occurrence of the error. In the pachinko machine 10, image data corresponding to various error messages is resident in advance in the error message image area 235f, so that the display control device 114 determines the error message of the resident video RAM 235 based on the received error command. By reading out the image data resident in the image area 235f in advance, each error message image can be immediately drawn by the image controller 237. As a result, it is not necessary to read the image data corresponding to the sequential error message from the character ROM 234. Therefore, even if the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow read speed is used for the character ROM 234, the corresponding error message is sent after receiving the error command. It can be displayed immediately.

The normal video RAM 236 is used so that data is overwritten and updated at any time, and at least an image storage area 236a, a first frame buffer 236b, and a second frame buffer 236c are provided.

The image storage area 236a is an area for storing image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 among the image data necessary for drawing an image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. The image storage area 236a is divided into a plurality of sub-areas, and the type of image data stored in the sub-area is predetermined for each sub-area.

Of the image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235, the MPU 231 collects the image data required for subsequent image drawing from the character ROM 234 to the sub-area provided in the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236. , Instruct the image controller 237 to transfer the type of the image data to a predetermined sub-area to be stored. As a result, the image controller 237 reads the image data instructed by the MPU 231 from the character ROM 234, and transfers the read image data to a designated predetermined sub-area of the image storage area 236a via the buffer RAM 237a.

The image data transfer instruction is given by including the transfer data information in the drawing list described later in which the MPU 231 instructs the image controller 237 to draw the image. As a result, the MPU 231 can give an image drawing instruction and an image data transfer instruction only by transmitting the drawing list to the image controller 237, so that the processing load can be reduced.

The first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c are buffers for developing an image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. The image controller 237 writes an image for one frame drawn according to the instruction from the MPU 231 to the frame buffer of either the first frame buffer 236b or the second frame buffer 236c, thereby writing one frame in the frame buffer. While the image is expanded and the image is expanded in one frame buffer, the image information for one frame previously expanded is read from the other frame buffer, and the drive signal is transmitted to the third symbol display device 81. By transmitting the image information, the third symbol display device 81 is executed to display the image for one frame.

In this way, by providing two frame buffers, the first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c, the image controller 237 expands the image for one frame drawn in one frame buffer and simultaneously expands the image. The image for one frame previously expanded can be read from the other frame buffer, and the read image for one frame can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

Then, the frame buffer that expands the image for one frame and the frame buffer for reading the image information for one frame in order to display the image on the third symbol display device 81 are used for drawing the image for one frame. Every 20 milliseconds to complete, the MPU 231 alternately specifies one of the first framebuffer 236b and the second framebuffer 236c, respectively.

That is, at a certain timing, the first frame buffer 236b is designated as the frame buffer for expanding the image for one frame, and the second frame buffer 236c is designated as the frame buffer for reading the image information for one frame. When the drawing process and the display process are executed, the second frame buffer 236c is designated as a frame buffer for expanding the image for one frame 20 milliseconds after the drawing process for the image for one frame is completed, and the image for one frame is expanded. The first frame buffer 236b is designated as the frame buffer from which the image information of the above is read. As a result, the image information of the image previously expanded in the first frame buffer 236b can be read out and displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and at the same time, a new image is expanded in the second frame buffer 236c. To.

Then, after the next 20 milliseconds, the first frame buffer 236b is designated as the frame buffer for expanding the image for one frame, and the second frame buffer 236c is designated as the frame buffer for reading the image information for one frame. Will be done. As a result, the image information of the image previously expanded in the second frame buffer 236c can be read out and displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and at the same time, a new image is expanded in the first frame buffer 236b. To. After that, one of the first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c is used every 20 milliseconds for the frame buffer for expanding the image for one frame and the frame buffer for reading the image information for one frame. By alternately alternating and specifying, it is possible to continuously perform the display processing of the image for one frame in units of 20 milliseconds while drawing the image for one frame.

The work RAM 233 is a memory for storing the control program and fixed value data stored in the character ROM 234, and temporarily storing the work data and flags used when executing various control programs by the MPU 231. It is composed of DRAM. The work RAM 233 includes a program storage area 233a, a data table storage area 233b, a simple image display flag 233c, a display data table buffer 233d, a transfer data table buffer 233e, a pointer 233f, a drawing list area 233g, a time counting counter 233h, and a stored image data discrimination. It has at least a flag 233i and a drawing target buffer flag 233j.

The program storage area 233a is an area for storing the control program executed by the MPU 231. When the system reset is released, the MPU 231 reads the control program from the character ROM 234, transfers it to the work RAM 233, and stores it in the program storage area 233a. Then, when all the control programs are stored in the program storage area 233a, the MPU 231 subsequently executes various controls using the control programs stored in the program storage area 233a.

As described above, since the work RAM 233 is composed of the DRAM, the read operation is performed at high speed. Therefore, even when the control program is stored in the character ROM 234 configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow read speed, the display control device 114 can maintain high processing performance, and the third symbol display device 81 can be maintained. Can be used to easily perform diversified and complicated productions.

The data table storage area 233b is a display data table and display data in which display contents to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 with the passage of time are described for one effect to be displayed based on a command from the main control device 110. This is an area for storing transfer data information of image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 and a transfer data table that defines transfer timing among the image data used in one effect displayed by the table.

These data tables are usually stored as a type of fixed value data in the second program storage area 234a1 provided in the NAND flash memory 234a of the character ROM 234, and according to the boot program executed by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released. , These data tables are transferred from the character ROM 234 to the work RAM 233 and stored in the data table storage area 233b. Then, when all the data tables are stored in the data table storage area 233b, the MPU 231 subsequently controls the display of the third symbol display device 81 by using the data table stored in the data table storage area 233b. As described above, since the work RAM 233 is composed of the DRAM, the read operation is performed at high speed. Therefore, even when various data tables are stored in the character ROM 234 configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow read speed, the display control device 114 can maintain high processing performance, and the third symbol display device can be used. By using 81, it is possible to easily execute a diversified and complicated production.

Here, the details of various data tables will be described. First, one display data table is prepared for each effect mode displayed on the third symbol display device 81 based on a command from the main control device 110. For example, a variable effect and an opening effect. , Display data tables corresponding to round production, ending production, and demo production are prepared.

The variation effect is an effect that is started by the third symbol display device 81 when a display variation pattern command is received from the voice lamp control device 113. When the display variation pattern command is received, the display stop type command indicating the stop type of the variation effect is also received. For example, when a variation effect is started, if the stop type of the variation effect is out of order, the stop symbol indicating the deviation is finally displayed as a stop, while the stop type of the variation effect is a big hit (big hit K, etc.). ), The stop symbol indicating each jackpot is finally displayed as a stop. The player can recognize the jackpot type by visually recognizing the stop symbol in this variation effect, and can easily determine the game value given according to the jackpot type.

The opening effect is an effect for notifying the player that the pachinko machine 10 will shift to the special gaming state and the first specific winning opening 1000a, which is normally closed, will be opened. This is an effect for notifying the player of the number of rounds to be started from now on. The ending effect is an effect for notifying the player that the end of the special game state (big hit state) is notified to the player.

As described above, the demo effect is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 when the next variation effect accompanying the start winning is not started even after a predetermined time has passed since one variation effect was stopped. Therefore, the third symbol consisting of the main symbols without the numbers “0” to “9” is stopped and displayed, and only the rear image changes. If the demonstration effect is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, the player or the person involved in the hall can recognize that the pachinko machine 10 is not playing a game.

In the data table storage area 233b, one display data table corresponding to the opening effect, the round effect, the ending effect, and the demo effect is stored. Further, as the variation display data table, which is a display data table for variation effect, if there are 32 patterns of variation effect patterns to be set, one table is prepared for one variation effect pattern, for a total of 32 tables.

Here, the details of the display data table will be described with reference to FIG. 104. FIG. 104 is a schematic diagram schematically showing an example of a variable display data table among the display data tables. The display data table should be displayed at the time corresponding to the address represented by the time (20 milliseconds in this control example) in which the image for one frame is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 as one unit. The content (drawing content) of the image for one frame is defined in detail.

In the drawing content, the type of sprite is specified for each sprite that is a display object that constitutes an image for one frame, and the display position coordinates, enlargement ratio, rotation angle, and translucency are specified according to the type of sprite. Drawing information for causing the third symbol display device 81 to draw a sprite, such as a value, α blending information, color information, and filter designation information, is defined.

The sprite type is information for identifying the sprite to be displayed. The display position coordinates are information for specifying the coordinates on the third symbol display device 81 on which the sprite should be displayed. The enlargement ratio is information for designating the enlargement ratio with respect to a standard display size preset for the sprite, and the size of the sprite displayed according to the enlargement ratio is specified. If the magnification is greater than 100%, the sprite will be displayed enlarged from the standard size, and if the magnification is less than 100%, the sprite will be reduced from the standard size. Is displayed.

The rotation angle is information for specifying the rotation angle when the sprite is rotated and displayed. The translucent value is for specifying the transparency of the entire sprite, and the higher the translucent value, the more the image displayed on the back side of the sprite can be seen through. The α-blending information is information for identifying a known α-blending coefficient used when performing a superposition process with another sprite. The color information is information for designating the color tone of the sprite to be displayed. Then, the filter designation information is information for designating an image filter to be applied to the sprite when drawing the designated sprite.

In the variable display data table, one back image, nine third symbols (design 1, symbol 2, ...) As the drawing contents for one frame defined corresponding to each address, and light in the image. Drawing information for each sprite, such as an effect that expresses the insertion of a boy image and a character used for various effects such as boy images and characters, is defined for each address. In addition, one or a plurality of information about the effect and the character are defined according to the content to be displayed in the frame.

Here, the display position of the rear image is fixed to the entire screen of the third symbol display device 81, and the enlargement ratio, the rotation angle, the translucent value, the α blending information, the color information, and the filter designation information are displayed with respect to the passage of time. Since it is constant, only the back type, which is information for specifying the type of the back image, is specified in the variable display data table. This back type displays one of the backs A to C corresponding to the stage selected by the player (either "city stage", "sky stage", or "island stage"), or backside A to. Information that specifies whether to display a rear image different from C is described. Further, as the back surface type, when specifying to display a back image different from the back images A to C, information for specifying which back image is to be displayed is also described.

When it is specified that any of the back surfaces A to C is to be displayed by the back surface type, the MPU 231 specifies the back image of the back surfaces A to C corresponding to the stage specified by the player as the drawing target. In addition, the range of the rear image to be displayed for the frame is specified according to the passage of time. On the other hand, when it is specified to display a back image different from the back images A to C, the back image to be displayed is specified from the back type.

In this control example, a case where only the back type is specified as the drawing content of the back image in the display data table will be described. Instead, the back type and the range of the back image corresponding to the back type will be described. It may be specified as the position information indicating whether or not to be displayed. This position information may be, for example, information indicating the elapsed time since the back image of the range corresponding to the initial position is displayed. In this case, the MPU 231 specifies the range of the back image to be displayed with respect to the frame based on the elapsed time from the display of the back image in the range corresponding to the initial position indicated by the position information.

Further, the position information may be information indicating the elapsed time from the start of drawing the image (or the display of the third symbol display device 81) based on the display data table. In this case, the MPU 231 displayed the range of the rear image to be displayed for the frame at the stage when the drawing of the image (or the display of the third symbol display device 81) was started based on the display database. It is specified based on the position of the back image and the elapsed time from the start of drawing (or the display of the third symbol display device 81) of the image indicated by the position information.

Further, the position information is information indicating the elapsed time since the back image of the range corresponding to the initial position is displayed and the drawing of the image based on the display data table (or the third symbol display device 81) according to the back type. It may indicate any of the information indicating the elapsed time since the start of the display), and the type information of the position information (for example, the range corresponding to the initial position) together with the back type and the position information. It is information indicating the elapsed time since the back image is displayed, or information indicating the elapsed time since the drawing of the image based on the display database (or the display of the third symbol display device 81) is started. Information indicating the above) may be specified as the drawing content of the back image. In addition, the position information may not be information indicating the elapsed time, but may be information indicating an address in which the range of the rear image to be displayed is stored.

In the third symbol (design 1, symbol 2, ...), The symbol type offset information is described as the symbol type information for specifying the third symbol to be displayed. This offset information is information representing the difference between the numbers attached to each third symbol. The offset information is specified instead of directly specifying the type of the third symbol. The display of the third symbol in the variation effect is the stop symbol of the variation effect that was performed immediately before and the variation effect that is performed this time. This is because it changes according to the stop symbol, and in the symbol offset information from the start of the fluctuation to the elapse of a predetermined time, the offset information from the stop symbol of the fluctuation effect performed immediately before is described. As a result, the variation effect is started from the stop symbol in the previous variation effect.

On the other hand, after a predetermined time has elapsed from the start of the fluctuation, the offset from the stop symbol set according to the stop type command (display stop type command) received from the main control device 110 via the voice lamp control device 113. Describe the information. As a result, the variation effect can be stopped at the stop symbol corresponding to the stop type designated by the main control device 110.

Since each third symbol has a unique number, the fluctuation symbol in the previous variation effect and the stop symbol according to the stop type specified by the main control device 110 can be selected as the third symbol. By managing with the numbers attached to and expressing the offset information by the difference of the numbers attached to each third symbol, the third symbol to be easily displayed can be specified from the offset information.

Further, in the symbol offset information, the third symbol fluctuates at high speed for a predetermined time during which the offset information of the stop symbol of the fluctuation effect performed immediately before is switched to the offset information of the stop symbol of the fluctuation effect performed this time. It is set to be the displayed time. While the third symbol is fluctuating at high speed, the third symbol is invisible to the player. During that time, the stop symbol of the fluctuation effect performed immediately before the symbol offset information is displayed. By switching from the offset information to the offset information of the stop symbol of the fluctuation effect that is being performed this time, even if the continuity of the numbers of the third symbol is interrupted, the player is prevented from recognizing the interruption of the continuity of the numbers. be able to.

The start address "0000H" of the display data table is described with "Start" information indicating the start of the data table, and the final address of the display data table ("02F0H" in the example of FIG. 104) is the data table. "End" information indicating the end of is described. Then, for each address between the address "0000H" in which the "Start" information is described and the address in which the "End" information is described, the drawing content corresponding to the effect mode to be specified in the display data table is obtained. Is described.

The MPU 231 selects a display data table to be used according to a command (for example, a display variation pattern command) transmitted from the voice lamp control device 113 based on a command from the main control device 110, and the selected display. The data table is read from the data table storage area 233b, stored in the display data table buffer 233d, and the pointer 233f is initialized. Then, the pointer 233f is added by 1 each time the drawing process for one frame is completed, and in the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d, based on the drawing content defined by the address indicated by the pointer 233f, the pointer is then added. The image content to be drawn is specified, and a drawing list (see FIG. 106) described later is created. By transmitting this drawing list to the image controller 237, a drawing instruction for the image is given. As a result, the drawing contents are specified in the order specified in the display data table according to the update of the pointer 233f, so that the image as specified in the display data table is displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

As described above, in the pachinko machine 10, the display control device 114 responds to a command (for example, a display variation pattern command) transmitted from the voice lamp control device 113 based on a command from the main control device 110 or the like. Instead of changing the program to be executed by the MPU 231, the effect image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 can be changed by a simple operation of replacing the display data table with the display data table buffer 233d as appropriate. ..

Here, when the program executed by the MPU 231 is started every time the effect image displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is changed like the conventional pachinko machine, the effect image becomes diversified. Since a large load is applied to the complicated and enormous processing of starting and executing a program, the processing capacity of the display control device 114 may be limited, and the diversification of controllable production images may be limited. there were. On the other hand, in the pachinko machine 10, the effect image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 can be changed by a simple operation of appropriately replacing the display data table with the display data table buffer 233d. A wide variety of effect images can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 regardless of the processing capacity of the control device 114.

Further, in this way, a display data table is prepared corresponding to each effect mode, a display data table buffer is set according to the effect mode to be displayed, and a drawing list is drawn frame by frame according to the set data table. This can be created because, in the pachinko machine 10, the effect to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is determined in advance based on the result of the lottery performed based on the start winning prize. On the other hand, in game machines other than game machines such as pachinko machines, the display contents change on the spot based on the user's operation, so that the display contents cannot be predicted. It is not possible to have a display data table corresponding to the effect mode. In this way, a display data table is prepared corresponding to each effect mode, a display data table buffer is set according to the effect mode to be displayed, and a drawing list is created frame by frame according to the set data table. This configuration can only be realized based on the configuration in which the pachinko machine 10 determines in advance the effect mode to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 based on the result of the lottery performed based on the start winning prize.

Next, the details of the transfer data table will be described with reference to FIG. 105. FIG. 105 is a schematic diagram schematically showing an example of a transfer data table. The transfer data table is prepared corresponding to the display data table prepared for each effect, and as described above, is resident among the sprite image data used in the effect specified by the display data table. The transfer data information for transferring the image data not resident in the video RAM 235 from the character ROM 234 to the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236 and the transfer timing thereof are defined.

If all the sprite image data used in the effect specified in the display data table is stored in the resident video RAM 235, the transfer data table corresponding to the display data table is not prepared. As a result, it is possible to suppress an increase in the capacity of the data table storage area 233b.

The transfer data table corresponds to the address specified in the display data table, and the transfer data information of the sprite image data (hereinafter referred to as "transfer target image data") for which transfer should be started at the time indicated by the address. Is described (corresponding to the addresses "0001H" and "097H" in FIG. 105). Here, the transfer start timing of the transfer target image data is set so that the image data corresponding to the predetermined sprite is stored in the image storage area 236a by the time the drawing of the predetermined sprite is started according to the display data table. In the transfer data table, the transfer data information of the image data to be transferred is defined in correspondence with the address corresponding to the transfer start timing.

On the other hand, if there is no transfer target image data to start transfer at the time indicated by the address specified in the display data table, there is no transfer target image data to start transfer corresponding to that address. Null data is defined (corresponding to the address "0002H" in FIG. 105).

The transfer data information includes the start address (storage source start address) and end address (storage source final address) of the character ROM 234 in which the transfer target image data is stored, and the start address of the transfer destination (normal video RAM 236). Is included.

In the "0000H" which is the start address of the transfer data table, "Start" information indicating the start of the data table is described as in the display data table, and the final address of the transfer data table (in the example of FIG. 105, in the example of FIG. 105). In "02F0H"), "End" information indicating the end of the data table is described. Then, for each address between the address "0000H" in which the "Start" information is described and the address in which the "End" information is described, the transfer data information of the image data to be transferred that should be specified in the transfer data table. Is described.

When the display data table to be used is selected by the MPU 231 according to a command (for example, a display variation pattern command) transmitted from the voice lamp control device 113 based on a command from the main control device 110, the display data table is displayed. If a transfer data table corresponding to the above exists, the transfer data table is read from the data table storage area 233b and stored in the transfer data table buffer 233e of the work RAM 233 described later. Then, each time the pointer 233f is updated, the drawing content defined at the address indicated by the pointer 233f is specified from the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d, and a drawing list (see FIG. 106) described later is created. At the same time, the transfer data information of the image data of the predetermined sprite to be transferred at that time is acquired from the transfer data table stored in the transfer data table buffer 233e, and the transfer data information is added to the created drawing list. to add.

For example, in the example of FIG. 105, when the pointer 233f becomes “0001H” or “097H”, the MPU 231 creates the transfer data information defined at the address in the transfer data table based on the display data table. It is added to the drawing list, and the added drawing list is transmitted to the image controller 237. On the other hand, when the pointer 233f is "0002H", since the Null data is specified at the address "0002H" of the transfer data table, it is determined that there is no transfer target image data to start the transfer, and the data is generated. The drawing list is transmitted to the image controller 237 without adding the transfer data information to the drawing list.

Then, when the transfer data information is described in the drawing list received from the MPU 231, the image controller 237 transfers the transfer target image data from the character ROM 234 to a predetermined sub-area of the image storage area 236a according to the transfer data information. Execute the process to be performed.

Here, as described above, in the transfer data table, the image data corresponding to the predetermined sprite is stored in the image storage area 236a by the time the drawing of the predetermined sprite is started according to the display data table. Since the transfer data information of the image data to be transferred is specified for a predetermined address, the image data is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the image storage area 236a according to the transfer data information specified in the transfer data table. When drawing a predetermined sprite according to the display data table, the image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 necessary for drawing the sprite can always be stored in the image storage area 236a. Then, using the image data stored in the image storage area 236a, a predetermined sprite can be drawn based on the display data table.

As a result, even if the character ROM 234 is configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow read speed, the image required for display can be read in advance from the character ROM 234 and transferred to the normal video RAM 236 without delay. While drawing the image of each sprite specified in the data table, the corresponding effect can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Further, according to the description in the transfer data table, only the non-resident image data in the resident video RAM 235 can be easily and surely transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236.

Further, in the pachinko machine 10, the display control device 114 receives display data in response to a command (for example, a display variation pattern command) transmitted from the voice lamp control device 113 based on a command or the like from the main control device 110. When the table is set in the display data table buffer 233d, the transfer data table corresponding to the display data table is set in the transfer data table buffer 233e. Therefore, the image data of the sprite used in the display data table is displayed. It is possible to reliably transfer data from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 at a desired timing.

Further, in the transfer data table, the transfer data information is defined so that the image data is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 for each image data corresponding to the sprite. As a result, the transfer of the image data can be managed and controlled for each sprite, so that the processing related to the transfer can be easily performed. Then, by controlling the transfer of the image data from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 in sprite units, it is possible to control the transfer of the image data in detail while facilitating the processing. Therefore, it is possible to efficiently suppress an increase in the load applied to the transfer.

Further, the transfer data table has the same data structure as the display data table, and is associated with the address specified in the display data table, and the transfer of the transfer target image data to be started at the time indicated by the address is transferred. Since the data information is specified, the image data of a predetermined sprite is surely stored in the normal video RAM 236 before being used based on the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d. As described above, since the transfer start timing can be instructed, even if the character ROM 234 is configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow read speed, a wide variety of effect images can be easily displayed on the third symbol display device 81. be able to.

The simple image display flag 233c is a flag indicating whether or not to display the power-on image (power-on main image and power-on fluctuation image) on the third symbol display device 81. The simple image display flag 233c is set after the image data corresponding to the main image at power-on and the variable image at power-on is transferred to the main image area 235a at power-on or the variable image area 235b at power-on of the resident video RAM. , MPU231 is set to on in the main process (see FIG. 131). Then, in order to display an image other than the image at the time of power-on on the third symbol display device 81 at the stage where all the resident target image data is stored in the resident video RAM 235 by the resident image transfer process of the image transfer process, Set to off.

This simple image display flag 233c is referred to in the V interrupt process executed by the MPU 231 each time a V interrupt signal transmitted from the image controller 237 is detected, and when the simple image display flag 233c is on, it is referred to. , The simple command determination process and the simple display setting process are executed so that the image at power-on is displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

On the other hand, when the simple image display flag 233c is off, the command determination is made so that various images are displayed according to the command transmitted from the voice lamp control device 113 based on the command from the main control device 110 or the like. Processing and display setting processing are executed.

Further, the simple image display flag 233c is referred to in the transfer setting process executed by the MPU 231 in the V interrupt process, and when the simple image display flag 233c is on, it is stored in the resident video RAM 235. Since there is no resident image data, it is necessary for the drawing process when the resident image transfer setting process for transferring the resident image data from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 is executed and the simple image display flag 233c is off. A normal image transfer setting process for transferring various image data from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 is executed.

The display data table buffer 233d stores a display data table corresponding to an effect mode to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 in response to a command or the like transmitted from the voice lamp control device 113 based on a command or the like from the main control device 110. It is a buffer to do. The MPU 231 determines an effect mode to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 based on a command or the like transmitted from the voice lamp control device 113, and displays a display data table corresponding to the effect mode from the data table storage area 233b. It is selected and the selected display data table is stored in the display data table buffer 233d. Then, the MPU 231 adds the pointer 233f by 1, and based on the drawing content defined by the address indicated by the pointer 233f in the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d, the image controller 237 is used for each frame. A drawing list (see FIG. 106), which will be described later, is generated, which describes the contents of instructions for drawing an image. As a result, the third symbol display device 81 displays the effect corresponding to the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d.

The MPU 231 adds the pointer 233f one by one, and based on the drawing content defined by the address indicated by the pointer 233f in the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d, the image for the image controller 237 is obtained for each frame. A drawing list (see FIG. 106) described later, which describes the drawing instructions, is generated. As a result, the effect corresponding to the display data table is displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

The transfer data table buffer 233e is a transfer data table corresponding to the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d in response to a command or the like transmitted from the voice lamp control device 113 based on a command or the like from the main control device 110. It is a buffer for storing. The MPU 231 selects a transfer data table corresponding to the display data table from the data table storage area 233b in accordance with storing the display data table in the display data table buffer 233d, and transfers the selected transfer data table. It is stored in the data table buffer 233e. If all the sprite image data used in the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d is stored in the resident video RAM 235, the transfer data table corresponding to the display data table is not prepared. Therefore, the MPU 231 clears the contents by writing the Full data which means that the transfer target image data does not exist in the transfer data table buffer 233e.

Then, the MPU 231 defines the transfer data information of the transfer target image data defined by the address indicated by the pointer 233f in the transfer data table stored in the transfer data table buffer 233e while adding the pointer 233f one by one. If (that is, if Null data is not described), the transfer data information is added to a drawing list (see FIG. 106) described later that describes the instruction content for drawing an image to the image controller 237 generated for each frame. to add.

As a result, when the transfer data information is described in the drawing list received from the MPU 231, the image controller 237 shifts the image data to be transferred from the character ROM 234 to a predetermined sub-area of the image storage area 236a according to the transfer data information. Execute the process to transfer. Here, as described above, in the transfer data table, the image data corresponding to the predetermined sprite is stored in the image storage area 236a by the time the drawing of the predetermined sprite is started according to the display data table. The transfer data information of the image data to be transferred is specified for a predetermined address. Therefore, when drawing a predetermined sprite according to the display data table by transferring the image data from the character ROM 234 to the image storage area 236a according to the transfer data information defined in the transfer data table, it is necessary to draw the sprite. Image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 can always be stored in the image storage area 236a.

As a result, even if the character ROM 234 is configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow read speed, the image required for display can be read in advance from the character ROM 234 and transferred to the normal video RAM 236 without delay. While drawing the image of each sprite specified in the data table, the corresponding effect can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Further, according to the description in the transfer data table, only the non-resident image data in the resident video RAM 235 can be easily and surely transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236.

The pointer 233f is an address to acquire the transfer data information of the corresponding drawing content or transfer target image data from the display data table and transfer data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d and the transfer data table buffer 233e, respectively. Is for specifying. The MPU 231 temporarily initializes the pointer 233f to 0 in accordance with the display data table being stored in the display data table buffer 233d. Then, in the display setting process of the V interrupt process executed by the MPU 231 based on the V interrupt signal transmitted from the image controller 237 every 20 milliseconds when the drawing process of the image for one frame is completed, the pointer The update process is executed, and the value of the pointer 233f is added one by one.

Each time the pointer 233f is updated, the MPU 231 specifies the drawing content defined by the address indicated by the pointer 233f from the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d, and describes a drawing list described later. (See FIG. 106) is created, and the transfer data information of the image data of the predetermined sprite to be transferred at that time is acquired from the transfer data table stored in the transfer data table buffer 233e, and the transfer data is acquired. Add the information to the created drawing list.

As a result, the effect corresponding to the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d is displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Therefore, the effect to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 can be easily changed only by changing the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d. Therefore, a wide variety of effects can be displayed regardless of the processing capacity of the display control device 114.

When the transfer data table stored in the transfer data table buffer 233e is stored, the sprite is drawn by the corresponding display data table based on the transfer data table before the drawing of the predetermined sprite is started. Image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 used for drawing can always be stored in the image storage area 236a. As a result, even if the character ROM 234 is configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow read speed, the image required for display can be read in advance from the character ROM 234 and transferred to the normal video RAM 236 without delay. While drawing the image of each sprite specified in the data table, the corresponding effect can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Further, according to the description in the transfer data table, only the non-resident image data in the resident video RAM 235 can be easily and surely transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236.

The drawing list area 233g is an image controller that draws an image for one frame generated based on the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d and the transfer data table stored in the transfer data table buffer 233e. This is an area for storing the drawing list instructed to 237.

Here, the details of the drawing list will be described with reference to FIG. 106. FIG. 106 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the drawing list. The drawing list is an instruction table for instructing the image controller 237 to draw an image for one frame, and as shown in FIG. 106, a back image used in the image of one frame and a third symbol (designs 1,). Symbol 2, ...), Effect (Effect 1, Effect 2, ...), Character (Character 1, Character 2, ..., Number of reserved balls Design 1, Number of reserved balls Symbol 2, ..., Error Detailed drawing information (detailed information) of the sprite is described for each sprite such as (design). In addition, transfer data information for transferring predetermined image data from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 to the image controller 237 is also described in the drawing list.

The detailed drawing information (detailed information) of each sprite includes information indicating the RAM type (resident video RAM 235 or normal video RAM 236) in which the image data of the corresponding sprite (display object) is stored, and the information thereof. The address is described, and the image controller 237 acquires the image data of the sprite from the memory area specified by the RAM type and the address. Further, the detailed drawing information (detailed information) includes display position coordinates, enlargement ratio, rotation angle, translucent value, α blending information, color information, and filter specification information, and various image controllers 237 are used. A standard image generated from the image data of the sprite read from the video RAM is subjected to enlargement / reduction processing according to the enlargement ratio, rotation processing according to the rotation angle, and translucent according to the semitransparent value. Performs conversion processing, synthesizes with other sprites according to α blending information, performs color tone correction processing according to color information, and performs filtering processing by the method specified by that information according to filter specification information. Then, the image obtained by performing various processing on the display position indicated by the display position coordinates is drawn. Then, the drawn image is expanded by the image controller 237 into either the first frame buffer 236b or the second frame buffer 236c specified by the drawing target buffer flag 233j.

The MPU 231 is a display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d. Based on the image, warning image notifying the occurrence of an error, etc.), detailed drawing information (detailed information) for all sprites used for drawing one frame of image is generated, and the detailed information is generated for each sprite. Create a drawing list by sorting.

Here, among the detailed information of each sprite, the storage RAM type and address of the sprite (display object) data are the sprite type specified in the display data table and the sprite type specified from the contents of other images. Generated accordingly. That is, for each sprite, the area of the resident video RAM 235 in which the image data of the sprite is stored or the sub area of the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236 is fixed, so that the MPU 231 can be adjusted according to the sprite type. Therefore, the storage RAM type and address in which the image data of the sprite is stored can be immediately specified, and such information can be easily included in the detailed information of the drawing list.

Further, the MPU 231 is defined in the display data table for other information (display position coordinates, enlargement ratio, rotation angle, translucent value, α blending information, color information and filter designation information) among the detailed information of each sprite. Copy those information as it is.

Further, when generating the drawing list, the MPU 231 rearranges the sprites to be arranged on the back side to the sprites to be arranged on the front side in the image for one frame, and detailed drawing information for each sprite. Describe (detailed information). That is, in the drawing list, detailed information corresponding to the back image is first described, and then the third symbol (symbol 1, symbol 2, ...), effect (effect 1, effect 2, ...), character. Detailed information corresponding to each sprite is described in the order of (character 1, character 2, ..., Number of reserved balls symbol 1, number of reserved balls symbol 2, ..., error symbol).

The image controller 237 executes drawing processing of each sprite in the order described in the drawing list, and expands the drawn sprites by overwriting in the frame buffer. Therefore, in the image for one frame generated by the drawing list, the sprite drawn first can be arranged on the backmost side, and the sprite drawn last can be arranged on the frontmost side.

Further, when the transfer data information is described in the transfer data table stored in the transfer data table buffer 233e at the address indicated by the pointer 233f, the MPU 231 describes the transfer data information (character in which the transfer target image data is stored). The storage source start address and storage source final address in ROM 234 and the storage destination start address of the sub-area provided in the image storage area 236a to store the transfer target image data) are added to the end of the drawing list. If the drawing list includes this transfer data information, the image controller 237 uses the transferred data information to create an image from a predetermined area (the area indicated by the storage source start address and the storage source final address) of the character ROM 234. The data is read out, and the image data to be transferred is transferred to a predetermined sub-area (storage destination address) provided in the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236.

The timekeeping counter 233h is a counter that counts the effect time of the effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81 by the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d. The MPU 231 stores one display data table in the display data table buffer 233d, and sets time data indicating the effect time of the effect displayed based on the display data table. This time data is a value obtained by dividing the effect time by the image display time for one frame (20 milliseconds in this control example) in the third symbol display device 81.

Then, the display setting process of the V interrupt process executed by the MPU 231 is performed based on the V interrupt signal transmitted from the image controller 237 every 20 milliseconds when the drawing process and the display process of the image for one frame are completed. Each time it is executed, the timekeeping counter 233h is decremented by 1. As a result, when the value of the timekeeping counter 233h becomes 0 or less, the MPU 231 determines that the effect displayed by the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d has ended, and performs the effect in accordance with the end of the effect. Perform various processes to be performed.

The stored image data determination flag 233i stores the image data corresponding to the sprite in the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236 for all the sprites whose corresponding image data is not resident in the resident video RAM 235. It is a flag indicating the storage state indicating whether or not it is present.

The stored image data determination flag 233i is generated by the initial setting process executed by the MPU 231 in the main process when the power is turned on. The stored image data determination flag 233i generated here is set to "off" indicating that the stored state for all sprites is not stored in the image storage area 236a.

Then, the stored image data determination flag 233i is updated when a transfer instruction of the transfer target image data corresponding to one sprite is set in the normal image transfer setting process executed by the MPU 231. In this update, the storage state corresponding to one sprite for which the transfer instruction is set is set to "on" indicating that the corresponding image data is stored in the image storage area 236a. Further, the image data of the other sprites that are to be stored in the sub-area of the same image storage area 236a as the one sprite is always in the unstored state by storing the image data of the one sprite. Therefore, set the storage state corresponding to other sprites to "off".

Further, the MPU 231 refers to the stored image data determination flag 233i when transferring the image data of the sprite whose image data is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236, and of the sprite to be transferred. It is determined whether or not the image data is already stored in the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 235. If the storage state corresponding to the sprite to be transferred is "off" and the corresponding image data is not stored in the image storage area 236a, a transfer instruction for the image data is set to the image controller 237. , The image data is transferred from the character ROM 234 to a predetermined sub-area of the image storage area 236a.

On the other hand, if the storage state corresponding to the sprite to be transferred is "on", the corresponding image data is already stored in the image storage area 236a, so the transfer process of the image data is stopped. As a result, it is possible to suppress unnecessary transfer from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236, reduce the processing load on each part of the display control device 114, and reduce the traffic on the bus line 240. it can.

The drawing target buffer flag 233j is referred to as a frame buffer (hereinafter, "drawing target buffer") that expands the image drawn by the image controller 237 from the two frame buffers (first frame buffer 236b and second frame buffer 236c). When the drawing target buffer flag 233j is 0, the first frame buffer 236b is specified as the drawing target buffer, and when it is 1, the second frame buffer 236c is specified. Then, the information of the designated drawing target buffer is transmitted to the image controller 237 together with the drawing list.

As a result, the image controller 237 executes a drawing process of expanding the image drawn based on the drawing list on the designated drawing target buffer. Further, the image controller 237 reads out the previously expanded drawing image information from the frame buffer different from the drawing target buffer in parallel with the drawing process, and together with the drive signal, displays the image on the third symbol display device 81. By transferring the information, a display process for displaying an image on the third symbol display device 81 is executed.

The drawing target buffer flag 233j is updated in accordance with the drawing target buffer information being transmitted to the image controller 237 together with the drawing list. This update is performed by inverting the value of the drawing target buffer flag 233j, that is, setting it to "1" if the value is "0" and "0" if the value is "1". Is done by. As a result, the drawing target buffer is alternately set between the first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c each time the drawing list is transmitted. Further, the drawing list is transmitted by the V interrupt executed by the MPU 231 based on the V interrupt signal transmitted from the image controller 237 every 20 milliseconds when the drawing process and the display process of the image for one frame are completed. It is performed every time the drawing process of the process is executed.

That is, at a certain timing, the first frame buffer 236b is designated as the frame buffer for expanding the image for one frame, and the second frame buffer 236c is designated as the frame buffer for reading the image information for one frame. When the drawing process and the display process are executed, the second frame buffer 236c is designated as a frame buffer for expanding the image for one frame 20 milliseconds after the drawing process for the image for one frame is completed, and the image for one frame is expanded. The first frame buffer 236b is designated as the frame buffer from which the image information of the above is read. As a result, the image information of the image previously expanded in the first frame buffer 236b can be read out and displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and at the same time, a new image is expanded in the second frame buffer 236c. To.

Then, after the next 20 milliseconds, the first frame buffer 236b is designated as the frame buffer for expanding the image for one frame, and the second frame buffer 236c is designated as the frame buffer for reading the image information for one frame. Will be done. As a result, the image information of the image previously expanded in the second frame buffer 236c can be read out and displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and at the same time, a new image is expanded in the first frame buffer 236b. To. After that, one of the first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c is used every 20 milliseconds for the frame buffer for expanding the image for one frame and the frame buffer for reading the image information for one frame. By alternately alternating and specifying, it is possible to continuously perform the display processing of the image for one frame in units of 20 milliseconds while drawing the image for one frame.

<Regarding the control processing of the main control device in the first control example>
Next, each control process executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 will be described with reference to the flowcharts of FIGS. 107 to 129. The processing of the MPU 201 is roughly divided into a start-up process that is started when the power is turned on, a main process that is executed after the start-up process, and a timer that is started periodically (at intervals of 2 ms in this embodiment). There are an interrupt process and an NMI interrupt process activated by inputting a power failure signal SG1 to the NMI terminal. For convenience of explanation, the timer interrupt process and the NMI interrupt process are first described, and then the start-up process is performed. And the main process will be explained.

FIG. 107 is a flowchart showing a timer interrupt process executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110. The timer interrupt process is, for example, a periodic process executed every 2 milliseconds. In the timer interrupt process, first, the read process of various winning switches is executed (S101). That is, the state of various switches connected to the main control device 110 is read, the state of the switch is determined, and the detection information (winning detection information) is saved.

Next, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 are updated (S102). Specifically, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 is added by 1, and when the counter value reaches the maximum value (319 in the present embodiment), it is cleared to 0. Then, the updated value of the first initial value random number counter CINI1 is stored in the corresponding buffer area of the RAM 203. Similarly, the second initial value random number counter CINI2 is added by 1, and when the counter value reaches the maximum value (239 in the present embodiment), it is cleared to 0 and the updated value of the second initial value random number counter CINI2. Is stored in the corresponding buffer area of the RAM 203.

Further, the first hit random number counter C1, the first hit type counter C2, the stop type selection counter C3, and the second hit random number counter C4 are updated (S103). Specifically, the first per random number counter C1, the first per type counter C2, the stop type selection counter C3, and the second per random number counter C4 are each added by 1, and their counter values are the maximum values (in the present embodiment). When it reaches 319, 99, 99, 239), it clears to 0, respectively. Then, the updated values of the counters C1 to C4 are stored in the corresponding buffer area of the RAM 203.

Next, in addition to the process for displaying on the first symbol display device 37, the special symbol variation process for setting the variation pattern of the third symbol by the third symbol display device 81 is executed (S104). After that, the start winning process associated with the winning (starting winning) in the first entrance 64 or the second entrance 640 is executed (S105). The details of the special symbol variation process and the start winning process will be described later with reference to FIGS. 108 to 112.

After the start winning process is executed, the normal symbol variation process, which is a process for displaying on the second symbol display device, is executed (S106), and the through is accompanied by the passage of the ball at the normal entry port (through gate) 67. The gate passage process is executed (S107). The details of the normal symbol variation process and the through-gate passage process will be described later with reference to FIGS. 113 and 114, respectively. After executing the through-gate passage process, the launch control process is executed (S108), and other processes to be executed periodically are executed (S109) to end the timer interrupt process. In the launch control process, the touch sensor 51a detects that the player is touching the operation handle 51, and the launch stop switch 51b for stopping the launch is not operated. It is a process to determine whether to turn on / off the firing. The main control device 110 instructs the launch control device 112 to launch the ball when the launch of the ball is on.

Next, the special symbol variation processing (S104) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 will be described with reference to FIG. 108. FIG. 108 is a flowchart showing this special symbol variation processing (S104). This special symbol variation processing (S104) is executed in the timer interrupt processing (see FIG. 107), and the variation display of the special symbol (first symbol) performed by the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device. This is a process for controlling the variation display of the third symbol performed in 81.

In this special symbol variation processing, first, it is determined whether or not the special symbol is currently in the jackpot (S201). Among the special symbol jackpots, the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81 are displaying the special symbol jackpot (including during the special symbol jackpot game), and the special symbol. This includes the middle of a predetermined time after the end of the jackpot game. As a result of the determination, if the special symbol is a big hit (S201: Yes), this process is terminated as it is.

If it is not during the big hit of the special symbol (S201: No), it is determined whether or not the display mode of the first symbol display device 37 is changing (S202), and the display mode of the first symbol display device 37 is changing. If not (S202: No), the value of the special symbol 2 hold ball number counter 203e (the number of hold counts N2 of the variation display in the special symbol) is acquired (S203). Next, it is determined whether or not the value (N2) of the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 203e is larger than 0 (S204).

If the value (N2) of the special symbol 2 reserved ball counter 203e is not 0 (S204: Yes), the value (N2) of the special symbol 2 reserved ball counter 203e is subtracted by 1 (S205) and changed by calculation. A hold ball number command (special figure 2 hold ball number command) indicating the value of the special symbol 2 hold ball number counter 203e is set (S206).

The reserved ball count command set here is stored in the ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203, and is executed in the external output process (S1001) of the main process (see FIG. 117) to be executed later by the MPU 201. , Is transmitted to the voice lamp control device 113. When the voice lamp control device 113 receives the hold ball number command, the voice lamp control device 113 extracts the values of the special symbol 1 hold ball number counter 203d and the special symbol 2 hold ball number counter 203e from the hold ball number command, and extracts the extracted values from the RAM 223. It is stored in the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 223b and the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 223c, respectively.

After the special figure 2 reserved ball number command is set by the process of S206, the data stored in the special symbol 2 reserved ball storage area 203b is shifted (S207). In the process of S207, the data stored in the hold 1st area to the hold 4th area of the special symbol 2 hold ball storage area 203b is sequentially shifted to the execution area side. More specifically, within each area, such as hold 1st area → execution area, hold 2nd area → hold 1st area, hold 3rd area → hold 2nd area, hold 4th area → hold 3rd area, and so on. Shift the data. After shifting the data, the first symbol display device 37 executes a special symbol variation start process for starting the variation display (S213). The special symbol change start processing will be described later with reference to FIG. 110.

On the other hand, in the process of S204, when it is determined that the value (N2) of the special symbol 2 reserved ball counter 203e is 0 (S204: No), the value (N1) of the special symbol 1 reserved ball counter 203d. (S208), and it is determined whether the value (N1) of the acquired special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d is larger than 0 (S209). If it is determined by the process of S209 that the value (N1) of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d is 0 (S209: No), this process is terminated.

On the other hand, when it is determined that the value (N1) of the special symbol 1 reserved ball counter 203d is not 0 (S209: Yes), the value (N1) of the special symbol 1 reserved ball counter 203d is subtracted by 1 (S210). , The hold ball number command (special figure 1 hold ball number command) indicating the value (N1) of the special symbol 1 hold ball number counter 203d changed by the calculation is set (S211). After setting the special figure 1 reserved ball number command by the process of S211 (S212), the data stored in the special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a is shifted (S212), and the process shifts to S213.

In the process of S202, if the display mode of the first symbol display device 37 is changing (S202: Yes), it is determined whether or not the fluctuation time of the variation display executed by the first symbol display device 37 has elapsed. (S214). The fluctuation time of the fluctuation display executed by the first symbol display device 37 is determined according to the fluctuation pattern selected by the fluctuation type counter CS1 (determined according to the fluctuation pattern command), and this fluctuation time is determined. If (S214: No) has not elapsed, this process ends as it is.

On the other hand, in the process of S214, when it is determined that the fluctuation time has elapsed (S214: Yes), the display mode corresponding to the stop symbol of the first symbol display device 37 is set (S215). The stop symbol is set in advance by the special symbol variation start process (S213) described later with reference to FIG. 110. When this special symbol change start process is executed, a lottery of special symbols is performed based on the values of various counters stored in the execution area of the special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a or the special symbol 2 reserved ball storage area 203b. Be told. More specifically, whether or not it is a big hit of a special symbol is determined according to the value of the random number counter C1 per first, and if it is a big hit of a special symbol, it depends on the value of the first hit type counter C2. It is determined whether the jackpot is K, the jackpot is L, the jackpot is M, the jackpot is N, or the jackpot is k.

In the present embodiment, when the jackpot is K, the blue LED is turned on in the first symbol display device 37, and when the jackpot is L, the red LED is turned on. If the jackpot is M, N or k, the yellow LED is turned on, and if it is off, the green LED is turned on. The display of each LED is turned off when the next fluctuation display is started, but it may be turned on only for a few seconds after the fluctuation is stopped.

After the processing of S215 is completed, when the variation display being executed by the first symbol display device 37 is started, the lottery result (current lottery result) of the special symbol performed by the special symbol variation start processing is displayed. It is determined whether it is a big hit of a special symbol (S216). If the result of this lottery is a jackpot with a special symbol (S216: Yes), the operation scenario of the first specific winning opening is set based on the jackpot type (S217), and then the start of the jackpot is set (S218). .. The operation scenario specifically indicates the setting of the opening pattern of the first specific winning opening 1000a. That is, in the 1st to 4th rounds, the first specific winning opening 1000a is set to be opened for a predetermined period (until 30 seconds elapse or 10 balls are won), and in the 5th and 6th rounds, the jackpot type is selected. It is shown that the first specific winning opening 1000a is set to be opened in the corresponding pattern (see FIG. 95B). When the processing of S218 is completed, the value of the probability variation counter 203g is set to 0 (S219). Next, the value of the time saving / medium counter 203h is set to 0 (S220), and the process proceeds to S221.

On the other hand, in the process of S216, if the result of the lottery this time is out of order (S216: No), the state command setting process for determining whether or not the time saving state has ended is executed (S222), and the process proceeds to S221. Transition.

In the process of S221, a stop command is set (S221). Then, this process ends.

Next, the state command setting process (S222) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 will be described with reference to FIG. 109. FIG. 109 is a flowchart showing the state command setting process (S222). This state command setting process (S222) is a process executed in the special symbol variation process (see FIG. 108) of the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 107), and is various types of the probability variation counter 203 g and the time saving medium counter 203h. This is a process for determining the game state based on the value of the counter and setting the state command (S234, S238).

In this state command setting process, first, it is determined whether the value of the probability variation counter 203g is 1 or more (S231), and when it is determined that the value of the probability variation counter 203g is 1 or more (S231: Yes), the probability variation is changed. The value of the counter 203g is subtracted by 1, and the value of the counter 203h is subtracted by 1 (S232). Next, it is determined whether the value of the probability variation counter 203g is 0 (S233), and if it is determined that the value is larger than 0 (S233: No), this process is terminated. On the other hand, when it is determined that the value of the probability variation counter 203g is 0 (S233: Yes), a state command indicating that the game is in the normal game state is set (S234), and the process returns to the special symbol variation process.

When it is determined that the value of the probability variation counter 203g is not 1 or more (that is, 0) (S231: No), it is determined whether the value of the time saving medium counter 203h is 1 or more (S235), and the time saving medium counter If it is determined that the value of 203h is not 1 or more (that is, 0) (S235: No), the process returns to the special symbol variation processing.

On the other hand, when it is determined that the time saving / medium counter 203h is 1 or more (S235: Yes), the value of the time saving / medium counter 203h is subtracted by 1 (S236). Next, it is determined whether the value of the time saving / medium counter 203h is 0 (S237), and if it is determined that the value is larger than 0 (S237: No), this processing is terminated. On the other hand, when it is determined that the time reduction / medium counter 203h is 0 (S237: Yes), a state command indicating that the game is in the normal game state is set (S238), and the process returns to the special symbol variation process.

Next, the special symbol variation start processing (S213) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 will be described with reference to FIG. 110. FIG. 110 is a flowchart showing the special symbol variation start processing (S213). This special symbol variation start process (S213) is a process executed in the special symbol variation process (see FIG. 108) of the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 33), and is special with the special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a. Based on the values of various counters stored in the execution area common to the symbol 2 reserved ball storage area 203b, a lottery (win / fail judgment) of "big hit of special symbol" or "missing of special symbol" is performed, and the first This is a process for determining an effect pattern (variation effect pattern) of the variation effect performed by the symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81.

In the special symbol fluctuation start processing, first, the first random number counter C1 and the first type counter C2 stored in the common execution area of the special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a and the special symbol 2 reserved ball storage area 203b. , And each value of the stop type selection counter C3 is acquired (S301).

Next, it is determined whether the value of the probability variation counter 203g of the RAM 203 is 1 or more (S302), and if it is 1 or more (S302: Yes), the value of the first random number counter C1 acquired in the process of S301 and the value of the first random number counter C1. Based on the special symbol jackpot random number table for high probability, the lottery result of whether or not the special symbol is a jackpot is acquired from the first random number table 202a (S303). Specifically, the value of the first random number counter C1 is compared with the 10 random number values defined in the first random number table 202a one by one. As described above, four random numbers "1 to 4" are set as the big hit random numbers of the special symbol, and the value of the random number counter C1 per first matches the random number values that hit these. If so, it is determined that the special symbol is a big hit. After obtaining the lottery result of the special symbol, the process proceeds to S305.

In the present embodiment, the lottery for the special symbol 1 and the lottery for the special symbol 2 share the same judgment value as a big hit, but depending on whether the lottery for the special symbol 1 or the lottery for the special symbol 2 is used. It may be a different random value. With this configuration, the random number value determined to be out of order in the first special symbol is configured to be determined to be a hit in the second special symbol, and the bias of the jackpot can be suppressed.

Further, in the present embodiment, the lottery of the special symbol 1 and the lottery of the special symbol 2 are set to the same number of judgment values to be big hits, but the lottery of the special symbol 1 and the lottery of the special symbol 2 The number of judgment values that are big hits may be different. By configuring in this way, the probability of a big hit can be made different between the first special symbol and the second special symbol, and when the lottery is executed with the special symbol having the higher jackpot probability, the player It is possible to have expectations for a big hit.

On the other hand, in the processing of S302, when it is determined that the value of the probability variation counter 203g is not 1 or more (that is, the value is 0) (S302: No), the pachinko machine 10 is in the normal state (low probability gaming state) of the special symbol. ), Therefore, based on the value of the first random number counter C1 acquired in the process of S301 and the first random number table 202a for low probability, the lottery result of whether or not the special symbol is a big hit is acquired. (S304). Specifically, the value of the first random number counter C1 is compared with the random number value of 1 stored in the first random number table 202a for low probability. As a random number value that becomes a big hit of a special symbol, one of "0" is set, and when the value of the random number counter C1 per first and the random number value that becomes this hit match, the big hit of the special symbol Is determined to be. After obtaining the lottery result of the special symbol, the process proceeds to S305.

Then, it is determined whether the lottery result of the special symbol acquired by the processing of S303 or S304 is a jackpot of the special symbol (S305), and if it is determined to be a jackpot of the special symbol (S305: Yes). , A display mode at the time of a big hit indicating a big hit is set (S306). More specifically, the value of the first hit type counter C2 acquired in the process of S301 is compared with the random number value stored in the first hit type selection table 202b, and the jackpot of five types of special symbols (big hit). Of K, jackpot L, jackpot M, jackpot N, and jackpot k), it is determined what the jackpot type is.

In the process of S306, the display mode (lighting state of LED 37a) of the first symbol display device 37 is set according to the determined jackpot type (big hit K, jackpot L, jackpot M, jackpot N and jackpot k). .. Further, the jackpot type (big hit K, jackpot L, jackpot M, jackpot N, and jackpot k) is set as the stop type so that the stop symbol corresponding to the jackpot type is stopped and displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

Next, the fluctuation pattern at the time of big hit is determined (S307). When the variation pattern is set in the process of S307, the variation time (display time) of the variation effect in the first symbol display device 37 is set, and the third symbol display device 81 stops at the jackpot symbol. The fluctuation time of the symbol is determined. At this time, the value of the variation type counter CS1 stored in the counter buffer of the RAM 203 is confirmed, and the fluctuation time of the symbol variation such as normal reach and super reach is determined based on the value of the variation type counter CS1. As described above, the relationship between the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 and the fluctuation time is defined in the fluctuation pattern selection table 20d.

The fluctuation patterns defined in the fluctuation pattern selection table 202d include, for example, "disengagement (for a long time)", "disengagement (for a short time)", "disappearance", and "disengagement" as fluctuation patterns for disengagement. Various types of "normal reach", various types of "outside super reach", and various types of "outside chance reach" are stipulated. In addition, various types of "shared normal reach", "shared super reach", "shared chance reach", and "shared special reach" are stipulated as fluctuation patterns for various jackpots.

On the other hand, in the process of S305, when it is determined that the special symbol is out of alignment (S305: No), the display mode at the time of deviation is set (S308). In the process of S308, the display mode of the first symbol display device 37 is set to the display mode corresponding to the outlier symbol, and the value of the stop type selection counter C3 stored in the execution area of the special symbol hold ball storage area 203a is set. Based on this, as the stop type to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81, whether it is out of reach or out of reach is set.

Here, if the pachinko machine 10 is in a probabilistic state of a special symbol, the value of the stop type selection counter C3 acquired in the process of S301 is compared with the random number value stored in the stop type selection table for high probability. Then, set the stop type. Specifically, if the value of the stop type selection counter C3 is in the range of "0 to 89", a complete deviation is set, and if it is in the range of "90 to 97", a reach other than the front and rear deviation is set, and "98". If it is ", 99", the front-back off reach is set. On the other hand, if the pachinko machine 10 is in the normal state of the special symbol, the stop type is set by comparing the value of the stop type selection counter C3 with the random number value stored in the stop type selection table for low probability. To do. Specifically, if the value of the stop type selection counter C3 is in the range of "0 to 79", a complete deviation is set, and if it is in the range of "80 to 97", a reach other than the front and rear deviation is set, and "98". If it is ", 99", the front-back off reach is set.

Next, the fluctuation pattern at the time of disconnection is determined (S309). Here, the display time of the first symbol display device 37 is set, and the fluctuation time of the third symbol until the third symbol display device 81 stops at the off symbol is determined. At this time, similarly to the processing of S307, the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 stored in the counter buffer of the RAM 203 is confirmed, and the fluctuation time of the symbol fluctuation such as normal reach and super reach is confirmed based on the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1. To determine.

When the process of S307 or the process of S309 is completed, next, a variation pattern command for notifying the display control device 114 of the variation pattern determined by the process of S307 or the process of S309 is set (S310). Next, a stop type command for notifying the display control device 114 of the stop type set in the process of S306 or S308 is set (S311). These fluctuation pattern commands and stop type commands are stored in the ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203, and these commands are transmitted to the voice lamp control device 113 in the process of S1001 of the main process (see FIG. 117). Will be sent. The voice lamp control device 113 transmits the stop type command as it is to the display control device 114. When the processing of S311 is completed, the process returns to the special symbol variation processing.

Next, the start winning process (S105) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 111. FIG. 111 is a flowchart showing this start winning process (S105). This start winning process (S105) is executed in the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 107), and determines whether or not there is a prize (starting prize) in the first ball opening 64 or the second ball opening 640. , This is a process for acquiring various random number counters and executing a hold process for the value when there is a start prize.

When the start winning process is executed, first, it is determined whether or not the ball has won a prize (starting prize) in the first ball opening 64 (S401). Here, the ball entering the first ball entry port 64 is detected over three timer interrupt processes. Then, when it is determined that the ball has won the first ball opening 64 (S401: Yes), the value of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d (the number of pending numbers N1 of the variation display in the special symbol) is acquired (S402). ). Then, it is determined whether or not the value (N1) of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d is less than the upper limit value (4 in this embodiment) (S403).

Then, whether or not there is a prize in the first ball opening 64 (S401: No), or even if there is a prize in the first ball opening 64, the value (N1) of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d is 4. If it is not less than (S403: No), the process proceeds to S407.

On the other hand, if there is a prize in the first ball opening 64 (S401: Yes) and the value (N1) of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d is less than 4 (S403: Yes), the special symbol 1 is reserved. The value (N1) of the ball counter 203d is added by 1 (S404). Then, a hold ball number command (special figure 1 hold ball number command) indicating the value of the special symbol 1 hold ball number counter 203d changed by the calculation is set (S405).

The reserved ball count command set here is stored in the ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203, and is executed in the external output process (S1001) of the main process (see FIG. 117) to be executed later by the MPU 201. , Is transmitted to the voice lamp control device 113. When the voice lamp control device 113 receives the hold ball number command, the voice lamp control device 113 extracts the value of the special symbol 1 hold ball number counter 203d from the hold ball number command, and transfers the extracted value to the special symbol 1 hold ball number counter 223b of the RAM 223. Store.

After setting the hold ball number command by the processing of S405, each value of the first random number counter C1, the first hit type counter C2, and the stop type selection counter C3 updated in the processing of S103 of the timer interrupt processing described above is set. , RAM 203 is stored in the first free holding area (holding first area to holding fourth area) of the holding ball storage area 203a (S406). In the process of S406, the value of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d is referred to, and if the value is 0, the reserved first area is set as the first area. Similarly, if the value is 1, the reserved second area is set as the first area, if the value is 2, the reserved third area is set, and if the value is 3, the held fourth area is set as the first area.

Next, in each of the processes of S407 to S412, the same process as that of each of the processes of S401 to S406 is executed for the winning of the second entrance 640. The only difference between the processes S407 to S412 is that the process of holding the reserved ball corresponding to the winning of the second ball opening 640 is executed, and the other processes are different from those of S401 to S406. Since they are the same, detailed description thereof will be omitted. When each process of S407 to S412 is completed, the look-ahead process is executed (S413), and the main process is completed.

Next, the look-ahead process (S413) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 will be described with reference to FIG. 112. FIG. 112 is a flowchart showing this look-ahead process (S413). This look-ahead process (S413) is executed in the start winning process (see FIG. 111).

In this look-ahead processing, first, it is determined whether or not there is a new prize in the first entry port 64 or the second entry opening 640 (S501), and any of the first entry opening 64 and the second entry opening 640. If there is no new prize (S501: No), this process ends as it is.

On the other hand, when it is determined that there is a new prize in the first entrance 64 or the second entrance 640 (S501: Yes), whether or not the game state at the start of the fluctuation is the probability change state of the special symbol. If the determination is made (S502) and the special symbol is in a probabilistic state (S502: Yes), the lottery result is acquired based on the first random number table for high probability (S503), and the process shifts to S505.

In the process of S502, when it is determined that the game state is not the probabilistic state of the special symbol (S502: No), the lottery result is acquired based on the first random number table for the low probability time (S504), and the process is performed in S505. Move to.

In the process of S505, each value of the first hit type counter C2 and the stop type selection counter C3, which are the determination results of the jackpot, is stored in the special symbol holding ball storage area (S505). Next, a winning information command including the jackpot determination result is set (S506), and this process is terminated.

Next, the normal symbol variation processing (S106) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 will be described with reference to FIG. 113. FIG. 113 is a flowchart showing this normal symbol variation processing (S106). This normal symbol variation processing (S106) is executed in the timer interrupt processing (see FIG. 107), and is associated with the variation display of the second symbol performed by the second symbol display device 83 and the second entry port 640. This is a process for controlling the opening time of the electric accessory.

In this normal symbol variation processing, first, it is determined whether or not the normal symbol (second symbol) is currently being hit (S601). As for the hitting of the normal symbol (second symbol), the opening / closing control of the electric accessory 640a attached to the second entrance 640 is performed while the display indicating the hit is being made on the second symbol display device 83. Includes during and during the process. As a result of the determination, if the normal symbol (second symbol) is hit (S601: Yes), the present process is terminated as it is.

On the other hand, if the normal symbol (second symbol) is not hit (S601: No), it is determined whether or not the display mode of the second symbol display device 83 is changing (S602), and the second symbol display device If the display mode of is not changing (S602: No), the value of the normal symbol holding ball number counter 203f (the number of holdings of the variable display in the normal symbol M) is acquired (S603). Next, it is determined whether or not the value (M) of the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203f is larger than 0 (S604), and if the value (M) of the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203f is 0 (S604: No), this process ends as it is. On the other hand, if the value (M) of the normal symbol reserved ball counter 203f is not 0 (S604: Yes), the value (M) of the normal symbol reserved ball counter 203f is subtracted by 1 (S605).

Next, the data stored in the normal symbol holding ball storage area 203c is shifted (S606). In the process of S606, the data stored in the hold 1st area to the hold 4th area of the normal symbol hold ball storage area 203c is sequentially shifted to the execution area side. More specifically, within each area, such as hold 1st area → execution area, hold 2nd area → hold 1st area, hold 3rd area → hold 2nd area, hold 4th area → hold 3rd area, and so on. Shift the data. After shifting the data, the value of the second random number counter C4 stored in the execution area of the normal symbol holding ball storage area 203c is acquired (S607).

Next, it is determined whether or not the pachinko machine 10 is in the time saving state of the normal symbol (S608), and if it is determined that the pachinko machine 10 is in the time saving state of the normal symbol (S608: Yes), the second acquired by the process of S607. Based on the value of the hit random number counter C4 and the second hit random number table 202c for high probability, the lottery result of whether or not the normal symbol is hit is acquired (S609). Specifically, the value of the second random number counter C4 is compared with the random number value stored in the second random number table 202c for high probability. As described above, if the value of the second hit type counter C4 is in the range of "5-204", it is determined that the hit is a normal symbol, and if it is in the range of "0-4,205-239", it is determined. It is determined that the normal symbol is out of alignment (see 202c2 in FIG. 94 (c)).

In the processing of S608, when the pachinko machine 10 is not in the time saving state of the normal symbol (S608: No), the pachinko machine 10 is in the normal state of the normal symbol, so the value of the second random number counter C4 acquired in the processing of S607. And, based on the second hit random number table for the low probability time, the lottery result of whether or not the normal symbol is hit is acquired (S611). Specifically, the value of the second random number counter C4 is compared with the random number value stored in the second random number table for low probability. As described above, if the value of the second hit type counter C4 is in the range of "5-9", it is determined that the hit is a normal symbol, and if it is in the range of "0-4, 10-239", it is determined. It is determined that the normal symbol is out of alignment (see 202c1 in FIG. 94 (c)).

Next, it is determined whether the lottery result of the ordinary symbol acquired by the processing of S609 or S610 is a hit of the ordinary symbol (S611), and if it is determined to be a hit of the ordinary symbol (S611: Yes). , The display mode at the time of hit is set (S612). In the process of S612, after the variation display in the second symbol display device is completed, the symbol "○" is set to be lit and displayed as the stop symbol (second symbol).

Then, it is determined whether the pachinko machine 10 is in the time saving state of the normal symbol (S613), and if the pachinko machine 10 is in the time saving state of the normal symbol (S613: Yes), the electric combination attached to the second entrance 640 The opening period of the object 640a is set to 1 second, the number of times of opening is set to 2 (S614), and the process proceeds to S617. In the processing of S613, when the pachinko machine 10 is not in the time saving state of the normal symbol (S613: No), the opening period of the electric accessory 640a attached to the second entrance 640 is set to 0.2 seconds, and the opening period thereof is set to 0.2 seconds. The number of times of opening is set to 1 (S615), and the process proceeds to S617.

In the process of S611, when it is determined that the normal symbol is out of alignment (S611: No), the display mode at the time of deviation is set (S616). In the process of S616, after the variation display in the second symbol display device is completed, the symbol "x" is set to be lit and displayed as the stop symbol (second symbol). When the setting of the display mode at the time of disconnection is completed, the process proceeds to S617.

In the process of S617, it is determined whether the pachinko machine 10 is in the time saving state of the normal symbol (S617), and if the pachinko machine 10 is in the time saving state of the normal symbol (S617: Yes), the variation display in the second symbol display device. The fluctuation time of is set to 1 second (S618), and this process is terminated. On the other hand, when the pachinko machine 10 is not in the time saving state of the normal symbol (S617: No), the variation time of the variation display in the second symbol display device is set to 30 seconds (S619), and this process is terminated. In this way, except during the jackpot of the special symbol, when the normal symbol has a high probability, the fluctuation display time is very short, "30 seconds → 1 second", as compared with the low probability of the normal symbol. Since the opening period of the second entry port 640 is very long, "0.2 seconds x 1 time → 1 second x 2 times", the ball can easily enter the second entry port 640.

In the process of S602, if the display mode of the second symbol display device is changing (S602: Yes), it is determined whether or not the fluctuation time of the variation display executed in the second symbol display device has elapsed (S602: Yes). S622). The fluctuation time here is a time preset by the process of S618 or the process of S619 before the variation display is started in the second symbol display device.

In the process of S622, if the fluctuation time has not elapsed (S622: No), this process ends. On the other hand, in the process of S622, if the fluctuation time of the fluctuation display being executed has elapsed (S622: Yes), the stop display of the second symbol display device is set (S623).

In the process of S623, if the lottery of ordinary symbols is a win and the display mode is set by the process of S612, the "○" symbol as the second symbol is stopped and displayed (lighted display) on the second symbol display device. ) Is set to be done. On the other hand, if the lottery of ordinary symbols is removed and the display mode is set by the process of S616, the "x" symbol as the second symbol is stopped and displayed (lighted up) on the second symbol display device. Is set.

When the stop display is set by the process of S623, the variation display in the second symbol display device ends when the second symbol display update process (see S1007) of the main process (see FIG. 117) is executed next. Then, the stop symbol (second symbol) is stopped and displayed (lit) on the second symbol display device in the display mode set in the process of S612 or the process of S616.

Next, when the variable display being executed in the second symbol display device is started, whether the lottery result of the normal symbol (current lottery result) performed by the normal symbol variation process is a hit of the normal symbol. Judgment (S624).

If the result of the lottery this time is a hit of a normal symbol (S624: Yes), the opening / closing control start of the electric accessory 640a attached to the second entrance 640 is set (S625), and this process is completed. When the opening / closing control start of the electric accessory 640a is set by the process of S625, the opening / closing of the electric accessory is opened / closed when the electric accessory opening / closing process (see S1005) of the main process (see FIG. 117) is executed next. The control is started, and the opening / closing control of the electric accessory is continued until the opening time and the number of times of opening set in the process of S614 or the process of S615 are completed.

On the other hand, in the process of S624, if the result of the lottery this time is out of the normal symbol (S624: No), the process of S625 is skipped and the present process is terminated.

Next, the through-gate passage process (S107) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 114. FIG. 114 is a flowchart showing the through gate passing process (S107). This through-gate passage process (S107) is executed in the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 107), determines whether or not the ball has passed through the normal entry port (through gate) 67, and the ball has passed. In this case, it is a process for acquiring and holding the value indicated by the second random number counter C4.

In the through gate passing process, first, it is determined whether or not the ball has passed through the normal entry port (through gate) 67 (S701). Here, the passage of the ball at the normal entry port (through gate) 67 is detected over three timer interrupt processes. Then, when it is determined that the ball has passed through the normal entry port (through gate) 67 (S701: Yes), the value of the normal symbol hold ball number counter 203f (the number of hold times M of the variation display in the normal symbol) is acquired. (S702). Then, it is determined whether or not the value (M) of the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203f is less than the upper limit value (4 in this embodiment) (S703).

Whether the ball has passed through the normal entry port (through gate) 67 (S701: No), or even if the ball has passed through the normal entry port (through gate) 67, the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203f If the value (M) is not less than 4 (S703: No), this process ends.

On the other hand, if the ball passes through the normal entry port (through gate) 67 (S701: Yes) and the value (M) of the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203f is less than 4 (S703: Yes), the normal symbol The value (M) of the reserved ball number counter 203f is added by 1 (S704).

Then, the value of the second random number counter C4 updated in the processing of S103 of the timer interrupt processing described above is set to the free hold area (hold 1st area to hold 4th area) of the normal symbol hold ball storage area 203c of the RAM 203. It is stored in the first area (S705), and this process is terminated. In the process of S705, the value of the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203f is referred to, and if the value is 0, the reserved first area is set as the first area. Similarly, if the value is 1, the reserved second area is set as the first area, if the value is 2, the reserved third area is set, and if the value is 3, the held fourth area is set as the first area.

Next, the NMI interrupt process executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 115. FIG. 115 is a flowchart showing an NMI interrupt process executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110. This NMI interrupt process is a process executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 when the power of the pachinko machine 10 is cut off due to a power failure or the like. By this NMI interrupt processing, the power failure occurrence information is stored in the RAM 203. That is, when the power supply of the pachinko machine 10 is cut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like, the power failure signal SG1 is output from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 to the NMI terminal of the MPU 201 in the main control device 110. Then, the MPU 201 interrupts the control during execution and starts the NMI interrupt process, stores the power failure occurrence information in the RAM 203 (S801) as a setting of the power failure occurrence information, and ends the NMI interrupt process. To do.

The above NMI interrupt process is also executed in the payout control device 111 (see FIG. 93), and the power outage occurrence information is stored in the RAM 213 by the NMI interrupt process. That is, when the power supply of the pachinko machine 10 is cut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like, the power failure signal SG1 is output from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 to the NMI terminal of the MPU 211 in the payout control device 111, and the MPU 211 interrupts the control during execution. Then, the NMI interrupt process is started.

Next, with reference to FIG. 116, the start-up process executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 when the power is turned on to the main control device 110 will be described. FIG. 116 is a flowchart showing this start-up process. This start-up process is started by resetting when the power is turned on.

In the start-up process, first, the initial setting process accompanying the power-on is executed (S901). In this initial setting process, for example, a predetermined value set in advance is set in the stack pointer. Next, a weight process (1 second in this embodiment) is executed in order to wait for the control device on the sub side (peripheral control device such as the voice lamp control device 113 and the payout control device 111) to be in an operable state. (S902). Then, the access of the RAM 203 is permitted (S903).

After that, it is determined whether or not the RAM erase switch 122 (see FIG. 3) provided in the power supply device 115 is turned on (S904), and if it is turned on (S904: Yes), the process shifts to S910. On the other hand, if the RAM erase switch 122 is not turned on (S904: No), it is determined whether or not the power cutoff occurrence information is stored in the RAM 203 (S905), and if it is not stored (S905: No). Since there is a possibility that the processing at the time of the previous power cutoff did not end normally, the processing is shifted to S910 in this case as well.

If the power outage occurrence information is stored in the RAM 203 (S905: Yes), the RAM determination value is calculated (S906), and if the calculated RAM determination value is not normal (S907: No), that is, the calculated RAM If the determination value does not match the RAM determination value saved when the power is cut off, the backed up data has been destroyed, and the process is shifted to S910 even in such a case.

As will be described later in the process of S1017 in FIG. 117, the RAM determination value is, for example, a checksum value at the work area address of the RAM 203. Instead of this RAM determination value, the effectiveness of the backup may be determined based on whether or not the keyword written in the predetermined area of the RAM 203 is correctly saved.

In the process of S910, a payout initialization command is transmitted in order to initialize the payout control device 111 which is a control device (peripheral control device) on the sub side (S910). Upon receiving this payout initialization command, the payout control device 111 clears an area (work area) other than the stack area of the RAM 213, sets an initial value, and is ready to start payout control of the game ball. After transmitting the payout initialization command, the main control device 110 executes the initialization process (S911, S912) of the RAM 203.

As described above, in the pachinko machine 10, when the RAM data is initialized when the power is turned on, for example, when the hall is open for business, the power is turned on while pressing the RAM erase switch 122. Therefore, if the RAM erase switch 122 is pressed during the start-up process, the RAM initialization process (S911, S912) is executed. Similarly, when the power failure occurrence information is not set, or when a backup abnormality is confirmed by the RAM determination value (checksum value, etc.), the initialization process (S911, S912) of the RAM 203 is executed in the same manner. .. In the RAM initialization process (S911, S912), the used area of the RAM 203 is cleared to 0 (S911), and then the initial value of the RAM 203 is set (S912). When the processing of S912 is completed, the process proceeds to the processing of S913.

On the other hand, if the RAM erase switch 122 is not turned on (S904: No), the power failure occurrence information is stored (S905: Yes), and the RAM determination value (checksum value, etc.) is normal ( S907: Yes), the information on the occurrence of the power failure is cleared while holding the data backed up in the RAM 203 (S908). Next, a payout return command at the time of power recovery for returning the control device (peripheral control device) on the sub side to the gaming state when the drive power is cut off is transmitted (S909), and the process proceeds to S913. Upon receiving this payout return command, the payout control device 111 is in a state where the payout control of the game ball can be started while holding the data stored in the RAM 213.

In the process of S913, a command (state command) for notifying the gaming state at the time of power recovery is output to the voice lamp control device 113 (S913). This state command is a command for notifying whether or not the special symbol is in the probable change state, whether or not the normal symbol is in the time saving state, the number of times of the normal symbol is shortened, and the like.

A state command is generated according to the value of the time reduction counter 203h and the value of the probability variation counter 203g, and is output to the voice lamp control device 113. By outputting this state command, the recognition of the game state can be matched between the main control device 110 and the voice lamp control device 113. Therefore, even though the normal symbol is in the low probability state, the right-handed navigation (for example, see the small area Ds3 in FIG. 88 (a)) is displayed, or conversely, the normal symbol is in the high probability state. Nevertheless, it is possible to prevent (suppress) the display of the right-handed warning image (not shown) when the player makes a right-handed hit. That is, it is possible to match the gaming state with the effect to be executed.

When the process of S913 is completed, the effect permission command is transmitted to the voice lamp control device 113 to allow the voice lamp control device 113 and the display control device 114 to execute various effects (S914). Next, the interrupt is permitted (S915), and the process proceeds to the main process described later.

Next, with reference to FIG. 117, the main process executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 after the above-mentioned start-up process will be described. FIG. 117 is a flowchart showing this main process. In this main process, the main process of the game is executed. As an outline, each process of S1001 to S1010 is executed as a periodic process having a cycle of 4 ms, and the counter update process of S1013 and S1014 is executed in the remaining time.

In the main process, first, during the execution of the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 107), the output data such as commands stored in the ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203 is sent to each control device (peripheral) on the sub side. The external output process to be transmitted to the control device) is executed (S1001).

Specifically, the presence or absence of the winning detection information detected by the switch reading process of S101 in the timer interrupt processing (see FIG. 107) is determined, and if there is the winning detection information, the number of acquired balls corresponds to the payout control device 111. Send a prize ball command to do.

Further, the hold ball number command set in the special symbol variation processing (see FIG. 108) and the start winning processing (see FIG. 111) is transmitted to the voice lamp control device 113. Further, by this external output processing, the variation pattern command, the stop type command, and the like necessary for the variation display of the third symbol by the third symbol display device 81 are transmitted to the voice lamp control device 113.

Further, the opening command, the number of rounds command, and the ending command set in the jackpot control process (S1004) are transmitted to the voice lamp control device 113. In addition, when launching a ball, a ball launch signal is transmitted to the launch control device 112.

Next, the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 is updated (S1002). Specifically, the variation type counter CS1 is added by 1, and when the counter value reaches the maximum value (198 in this control example), it is cleared to 0. Then, the update value of the variation type counter CS1 is stored in the corresponding buffer area of the RAM 203.

When the update of the variation type counter CS1 is completed, the prize ball counting signal and the payout abnormality signal received from the payout control device 111 are read (S1003), and then, when the special symbol is in the jackpot state, the jackpot effect is executed or the first A jackpot control process for opening or closing the first specific winning opening 1000a of the 1 variable winning device 6000 is executed (S1004).

In the jackpot control process, the opening and closing of the first specific winning opening 1000a are set according to the operation scenario set by the process of S217 of the special symbol variation processing (see FIG. 108) for each round of the jackpot state. In this control example, the jackpot control process (S1004) is executed in the main process, but it may be executed in the timer interrupt process.

Next, the electric accessory opening / closing process for controlling the opening / closing of the electric accessory 640a attached to the second entry port 640 is executed (S1005). In the electric accessory opening / closing process, when the opening / closing control start of the electric accessory is set by the process of S625 of the normal symbol variation process (see FIG. 113), the opening / closing control of the electric accessory is started. The opening / closing control of the electric accessory is continued until the opening time and the number of times of opening set in the processing of S614 or the processing of S615 in the normal symbol variation processing are completed.

Next, the first symbol display update process for updating the display of the first symbol display device 37 is executed (S1006). In the first symbol display update process, when a variation pattern is set by the process of S307 or the process of S309 of the special symbol variation start process (see FIG. 110), the variation display according to the variation pattern is displayed in the first symbol display. Start at device 37. In this control example, among the LEDs of the first symbol display device 37, from the start of fluctuation until the fluctuation time elapses, for example, if the currently lit LED is red, the red LED is turned off. At the same time, turn on the green LED, if the green LED is on, turn off the green LED and turn on the blue LED, and if the blue LED is on, turn off the blue LED. At the same time, turn on the red LED.

The main process is executed every 4 milliseconds, but if the LED lighting color is changed each time the main process is executed, the player cannot confirm the change in the LED lighting color. Therefore, a counter (not shown) is counted by 1 each time the main process is executed so that the player can confirm the change in the lighting color of the LED, and when the counter reaches 100, the LED is displayed. Change the lighting color of. That is, the lighting color of the LED is changed every 0.4 s. The value of the counter is reset to 0 when the lighting color of the LED is changed.

Further, in the first symbol display update process, when the variation time corresponding to the variation pattern set by the processes of S307 and S309 of the special symbol variation start process (see FIG. 110) ends, the first symbol display device 37 The executed variation display is ended, and the stop symbol (first symbol) is stopped at the first symbol display device 37 in the display mode set by the processing of S306 and S308 of the special symbol variation start processing (see FIG. 110). Display (light up display).

Next, the second symbol display update process for updating the display of the second symbol display device is executed (S1007). In the second symbol display update process, when the variation time of the second symbol is set by the process of S618 or the process of S619 of the normal symbol variation process (see FIG. 113), the variation display is started on the second symbol display device 83. To do. As a result, in the second symbol display device 83, variable display is performed in which the “◯” symbol and the “x” symbol as the second symbol are alternately lit.

Further, in the second symbol display update process, when the stop display of the second symbol display device 83 is set by the process of S623 of the normal symbol variation process (see FIG. 113), the second symbol display device 83 is executed. The stop symbol (second symbol) is stopped and displayed on the second symbol display device 83 in the display mode set by the process of S612 or the process of S616 of the normal symbol variation process (see FIG. 113) after ending the variable display (see FIG. 113). Lighting display).

After executing the process of S1007, the storage control process is executed (S1008). The storage control process (S1008) will be described later with reference to FIGS. 125 and 126, but a process for setting the retracting and overhanging of the interference member 6930 will be executed. Next, when the process of S1008 is completed, the V winning process is executed (S1009). The V winning process (S1009) will be described later with reference to FIG. 129. Then, when the process of S1009 is completed, other processes are executed (S1010).

When the processing of S1010 is completed, it is determined whether or not the power failure occurrence information is stored in the RAM 203 (S1011), and if the power failure occurrence information is not stored in the RAM 203 (S1011: No), the power failure monitoring circuit The power failure signal SG1 is not output from 252, and the power supply is not cut off. Therefore, in such a case, it is determined whether or not the execution timing of the next main process has been reached, that is, whether or not a predetermined time (4 msec in the present embodiment) has elapsed from the start of the main process this time (S1012). If the predetermined time has already passed (S1012: Yes), the process is shifted to S1001, and each process after S1001 described above is repeatedly executed.

On the other hand, if the predetermined time has not yet elapsed from the start of the main process this time (S1012: No), the first is within the period until the predetermined time is reached, that is, within the remaining time until the execution timing of the next main process is reached. 1 The initial value random number counter CINI1, the second initial value random number counter CINI2, and the variation type counter CS1 are repeatedly updated (S1013, S1014).

First, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 are updated (S1013). Specifically, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 are added by 1, and when the counter value reaches the maximum value (319, 239 in this control example), it is cleared to 0. .. Then, the updated values of the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 are stored in the corresponding buffer areas of the RAM 203, respectively. Next, the variation type counter CS1 is updated by the same method as the process of S1002 (S1014).

Here, since the execution time of each process of S1001 to S1010 changes according to the state of the game, the remaining time until the execution timing of the next main process is not constant and fluctuates. Therefore, by repeatedly updating the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 using the remaining time, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 (that is, , The initial value of the first random number counter C1 and the initial value of the second random number counter C4) can be randomly updated, and similarly, the variable type counter CS1 can also be updated randomly.

Further, in the process of S1011 if the power outage occurrence information is stored in the RAM 203 (S1011: Yes), the power is cut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the power is turned off, and the power failure signal SG1 is output from the power failure monitoring circuit 252. As a result, since the NMI interrupt process shown in FIG. 115 has been executed, the process when the power is cut off after S1015 is executed.

First, the occurrence of each interrupt process is prohibited (S1015), and a power off command indicating that the power is cut off is issued to other control devices (peripheral control devices such as the payout control device 111 and the voice lamp control device 113). (S1016). Then, the RAM determination value is calculated, the value is saved (S1017), the access of the RAM 203 is prohibited (S1018), and the infinite loop is continued until the power supply is completely shut off and the process cannot be executed. Here, the RAM determination value is, for example, a checksum value in the backed up stack area and work area of the RAM 203.

The processing of S1011 is performed at the end of a series of processing corresponding to the state change of the game performed in S1001 to S1010, or at the end of one cycle of the processing of S1013 and S1014 performed within the remaining time. It is running. Therefore, in the main process of the main control device 110, the power off occurrence information is confirmed at the timing when each setting is completed. Therefore, when returning from the power cut state, the process is performed after the start-up process is completed. It can be started from the process of S1001.

That is, the process can be started from the process of S1001 as in the case of being initialized in the start-up process. Therefore, in the process when the power is cut off, the stack pointer is used in the initial setting process (S901) without saving the contents of each register used by the MPU 201 to the stack area or saving the value of the stack pointer. By setting a predetermined value (initial value), the process of S1001 can be started. Therefore, the control load of the main control device 110 can be reduced, and accurate control can be performed without the main control device 110 malfunctioning or running out of control.

Next, the jackpot control process (S1004) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 118. FIG. 118 is a flowchart showing this jackpot control process (S1004). This jackpot control process (S1004) is executed in the main process (see FIG. 117), and when the pachinko machine 10 is in the jackpot state of a special symbol, various effects according to the jackpot are executed, or the first identification is performed. This is a process for opening or closing the winning opening (large opening opening) 1000a, or opening or closing the specific area 4830.

In the jackpot control process (FIGS. 118, S1004), first, it is determined whether or not the jackpot of the special symbol is started (S1101). Specifically, if the processing of S218 of the special symbol variation processing (see FIG. 108) is executed and the start of the jackpot of the special symbol is set, it is determined that the jackpot of the special symbol is started. In the process of S1101, when the jackpot of the special symbol is started (S1101: Yes), the opening command is set (S1102), and this process is terminated.

On the other hand, in the process of S1101, when the jackpot of the special symbol is not started (S1101: No), it is determined whether the jackpot of the special symbol is in progress (S1103). The special symbol jackpots include those during which the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81 are displaying the special symbol jackpot (including during the special symbol jackpot game) and the special symbol. This includes the middle of a predetermined time after the jackpot game is completed. In the process of S1103, if the special symbol is not a big hit (S1103: No), this process is terminated as it is.

On the other hand, in the process of S1103, when it is determined that the special symbol is a big hit (S1103: Yes), the process of S1104 is executed. In the process of S1104, it is determined whether it is the start timing of a new round (S1104). If it is determined in the process of S1104 that it is the start timing of a new round (S1104: Yes), the jackpot operation setting process is executed (S1105).

Here, the jackpot operation setting process will be described with reference to FIG. 119 (S1105). FIG. 119 is a flowchart showing the contents of the jackpot operation setting process (S1105). In the jackpot operation setting process (FIG. 119, S1105), first, the opening operation corresponding to the number of rounds of the jackpot to be started is read from the set operation scenario (S1201).

The operation of the distribution device 4850 (distribution operation member 4851, solenoid 4852) is set based on the data read in S1201 (S1202). The opening operation of the opening / closing plate 1300 of the first variable winning device 6000 is set by the data read in the process of S1201 (S1203). After that, this process is terminated and the process returns to the jackpot control process. In the processing of S1202 and S1203, the operation of the distribution device 4850 (distribution operation member 4851, solenoid 4852) and the operation of the opening / closing plate 1300 are set for each round.

In this way, since each operation of the first variable winning device 6000 is set at each start of each round, even if an unexpected power failure occurs during the jackpot game, the jackpot game ends in the middle. Such problems can be suppressed.

Returning to FIG. 118, the description will be continued. When the processing of S1105 is completed, a round number command indicating the number of newly started rounds is set (S1106). After setting the number of rounds command, this process ends.

The round number command set here is stored in the ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203, and the voice lamp is included in the external output process (S1001) of the main process (see FIG. 117) executed by the MPU 201. It is transmitted to the control device 113. When the voice lamp control device 113 receives the round number command, the voice lamp control device 113 extracts the round number from the round number command. Then, a display round number command corresponding to the extracted round number is transmitted to the display control device 114. When the display control device 114 receives the display round number command, the third symbol display device 81 starts a new round effect.

On the other hand, in the process of S1104, when it is determined that it is not the start timing of a new round (S1104: No), it is determined whether it is the operation timing of the opening / closing plate 1300 or the distribution device 4850 (S1107). When it is determined that it is the operation timing (S1107: Yes), the opening / closing process is executed (S1108).

Here, the opening / closing process will be described with reference to FIG. 120 (S1108). FIG. 120 is a flowchart showing the contents of this opening / closing process (S1108). In the opening / closing process (FIG. 120, S1108), first, the opening / closing operation of the opening / closing plate 1300 or the distribution device 4850 that matches the operation timing based on the operation scenario is executed (S1211), and then the process returns to the jackpot control process (S1004). , End this process.

Returning to FIG. 118, the description will be continued. In the process of S1107, when it is determined that it is not the timing of the opening operation (S1107: No), it is determined whether it is the start timing of the ending effect (S1109). As for the start timing of the ending effect, the opening / closing plate 1300 is closed after 6 rounds, and the waiting time (storage flow path 1231 and the probability fluctuation determination unit 4800 is 3.0 seconds or more from the design of the ball ejection time). When it is required and 3 seconds) has elapsed in this control example, it is determined as the start timing of the ending effect. When it is determined that it is the start timing of the ending effect (S1109: Yes), the ending process is executed (S1110). After that, this process ends.

Here, the details of this ending process (S1110) will be described with reference to FIG. 121. FIG. 121 is a flowchart showing the contents of this ending process (FIG. 121, S1110). In the ending process (FIG. 121, S1110), first, it is determined whether or not the value of the remaining ball counter 203p is 0 (S1231). If it is determined that the value of the remaining ball counter 203p is not 0, a problem such as ball clogging has occurred, or the player illegally stops the ball stored in the storage flow path 1231 with a strong magnet or the like. An error command is set (S1232), and then an ending command is set (S1233).

The error command set here is stored in the ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203, and is controlled by the voice lamp in the external output process (S1001) of the main process (see FIG. 117) executed by the MPU 201. It is transmitted to the device 113. When the voice lamp control device 113 receives the error command, the voice lamp control device 113 selects the display mode of the error notification based on the information stored in the command storage area 223a of the RAM 223. Then, an error command corresponding to the selected error notification display mode is transmitted to the display control device 114. When an error command is received by the display control device 114, error notification is started in the third symbol display device 81.

In this control example, the characters "Discharge error. Please call the hall clerk" are displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and the player is controlled to notify the player that an abnormality has occurred.

Further, when the voice lamp control device 113 receives an error command, the lamp display devices 227 (see FIG. 93) such as the illumination units 29 to 33 (see FIG. 1) are strongly emitted in red, or the voice output device 226 is used. (See FIG. 4) is controlled so that the hall clerk notices the occurrence of an abnormality by outputting a loud voice (in this control example, the sound of a black telephone bell).

On the other hand, when it is determined that the value of the remaining ball counter 203p is 0, the ending command is set (S1233). The ending command set here is stored in the ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203, and is controlled by the voice lamp in the external output process (S1001) of the main process (see FIG. 117) executed by the MPU 201. It is transmitted to the device 113. When the voice lamp control device 113 receives the ending command, the voice lamp control device 113 selects the display mode of the ending effect based on the winning information stored in the command storage area 223a of the RAM 223. Then, a display ending command corresponding to the display mode of the selected ending effect is transmitted to the display control device 114. When the display ending command is received by the display control device 114, the ending effect is started in the third symbol display device 81.

When the processing of S1233 is completed, it is then determined whether the V flag 203s is set to on (that is, whether the sphere has passed through the specific area 4830) (S1234) and set to on (that is, the specific area 4830). (S1234: Yes), the value of the probability variation counter 203g is set to 80, the value of the time saving / medium counter 203h is set to 80, and then the V flag 203s is set to off. (S1236), the process returns to the jackpot control process (S1004), and this process ends.

On the other hand, in the process of S1234, when it is determined that the V flag 203s is not set to ON (that is, the sphere has not passed through the specific area 4830) (S1234: No), the value of the time saving / medium counter 203h is set. The setting is set to 100 (S1237), the process returns to the jackpot control process (S1004), and this process ends.

As described above, in the present embodiment, at the end of the jackpot game, it is determined whether the V flag 203s is on, and if it is on, a numerical value is set in the probability variation counter 203g. Therefore, at the end of the jackpot game, it is possible to determine whether the ball is passing through the specific area 4830 and set the probability variation. Therefore, it is possible to keep expecting the player to shift to the probabilistic game state until the jackpot game is completed.

Furthermore, if the ball can be passed through the specific area 4830 during the jackpot game, the probability variation game state is given after the jackpot game, so whether or not the ball passes through the specific area 4830 even during the jackpot game. You can play the game with interest.

Returning to FIG. 118, the description will be continued. If it is determined in the process of S1109 that it is not the start timing of the ending effect (S1109: No), the notification process is executed (S1111). Here, the details of the notification process (S1111) will be described with reference to FIG. 122. FIG. 122 is a flowchart showing the contents of this notification process (S1111).

In the notification process (S1111), first, it is determined whether the jackpot type of the jackpot game currently being executed is the jackpot k (S1251), and when it is determined that the jackpot type is not the jackpot k (S1251: No). , This process is terminated, and the process returns to the jackpot control process (S1004).

On the other hand, when it is determined that the jackpot type is jackpot k (S1251: Yes), it is determined whether the value of the notification counter 203u is greater than 0 (S1252). When it is determined that the value of the notification counter 203u is 0 (S1252: No), it is determined whether it is the end timing of the fourth round (S1253). The determination of the end timing of the fourth round is performed depending on the case where it is detected that 10 balls have been won or the case where it is determined that 30 seconds have passed in the fourth round. When it is determined that the end timing of the fourth round is reached (S1253: Yes), a counter value corresponding to 0.5 seconds is set in the notification counter 203u. After that, this process ends.

On the other hand, in the process of S1253, if it is determined that it is not the end timing of the fourth round (S1253: No), this process is terminated. Here, by setting a counter of 0.5 seconds in S1254, the notification counter 203u becomes 0 during 2 seconds of the interval time, which is the ball ejection time after the end of 4 rounds, and the voice "press" is heard. Is output.

Therefore, although the distribution device 4850 operates in the fifth round, the player must operate the operation button 300 at the interval time after the end of the fourth round, and the operation button 300 and the liquid crystal are attracted attention. It is possible to make it difficult to visually recognize the number of spheres remaining in the storage flow path 1231. As a result, it is possible to prevent whether or not the sphere passes through the specific region 4830 is identified from the number of remaining spheres. Therefore, for example, at the start of the fifth round, it is possible to make it difficult to determine whether or not the sphere has passed through the specific region 4830 by performing the above-mentioned control that makes it difficult to see the inside of the storage flow path 1231. The player can play the game with the expectation that the probabilistic game state will be granted (given) until the end of the jackpot game (and even after the end of the jackpot game).

In the present embodiment, by providing the notification counter 203u, the effect of attracting attention to the liquid crystal is performed over the fifth round from 1.5 seconds before the end of the interval time, but the effect is not limited to this, and four rounds. It may be executed continuously from the eyes.

On the other hand, in the process of S1252, when it is determined that the value of the notification counter 203u is larger than 0 (S1252: Yes), the value of the notification counter 203u is updated by -1 (S1255). It is determined whether the value of the updated notification counter 203u is 0 (S1256). When it is determined that the value of the notification counter 203u is 0 (S1256: Yes), the notification command is set (S1257). After that, this process ends. By this notification command, the voice lamp control device 113 executes the setting of the voice output of "press".

Returning to FIG. 118, the description will be continued. When the notification process (FIG. 122, S1111) is executed, the winning process is executed (S1112). Here, the winning process (S1112) will be described in detail with reference to FIG. 123. FIG. 123 is a flowchart showing the contents of this winning process (S1112).

In the winning process (FIG. 123, S1112), first, it is determined whether the round is valid (S1271). The round valid period is a period in which the round game is set, that is, a period from when the opening / closing plate 1300 is opened to when the opening / closing plate 1300 changes to the closed state and the interval period ends. If it is determined that the round is out of the valid period (S1271: No), this process ends.

On the other hand, when it is determined that the round is within the valid period (S1271: Yes), it is determined whether or not the detection sensor 1240 of the first specific winning opening 1000a has passed. When it is determined that the detection sensor 1240 of the first specific winning opening 1000a has passed (S1272: Yes), the winning number counter 203w is incremented by 1 and updated (S1273). After that, the process of S1274 is executed. On the other hand, when it is determined that the detection sensor 1240 has not passed (S1272: No), the process of S1274 is executed.

In the process of S1274, it is determined whether the value of the winning number counter 203w is 10 or more (S1274). When it is determined that the value of the winning number counter 203w is 10 or more (S1274: Yes), it is determined whether the closing flag 203q is on (S1277), and when it is determined that the closing flag 203q is on. (S1277: Yes), this process is terminated, and the process returns to the jackpot control process (S1004).

On the other hand, in the processing of S1277, when it is determined that the closing flag 203q is off (S1277: No), the closing flag 203q is set to on (S1278), and then the set value of the V winning valid counter 203t (S1278). In this control example, a numerical range corresponding to 3.0 seconds or less and (3-0.2 × number of stored balls) seconds or more) is set (S1279), and then the opening / closing plate of the first specific winning opening 1000a is set. The closure of 1300 (change of state in the closed state) is set (S1280), and then a numerical value (in this control example, a numerical value corresponding to 4.0 seconds) is set in the V winning valid counter 203t (S1281), and then The remaining ball timer flag 203m is set to ON (S1282). By setting the remaining ball timer flag 203m to ON, it can be determined that the ball is in the ball-spraying time after the opening / closing plate 1300 is closed. After that, this process is terminated, and the process returns to the jackpot control process (S1004).

As described above, the lower limit of the set value of the V winning valid counter 203t fluctuates based on the number of stored balls. As a result, when only three spheres are stored in the storage flow path 1231 (controlled so that the spheres do not pass through the specific area 4830), the spheres flow down due to dirt inside the storage flow path 1231 or the like. Even if the ball passes through the specific area 4830 due to a delay, the passage of the specific area 4830 can be invalidated as it is outside the range of the set value of the V winning counter 203t.

As a result, when a display effect different depending on the number of stored items in the storage channel 1231 is executed by the third symbol display device 81, the degree of expectation indicated by the display effect (the amount of prize balls paid out and the end of the jackpot game). It is possible to prevent a discrepancy between the degree of possibility of shifting to the high probability state of the special symbol later) and the actual game result.

On the other hand, in the process of S1274, when it is determined that the value of the winning number counter 203w is less than 10, it is determined whether the round time (30 seconds in this embodiment) has elapsed (S1275). When it is determined that the round time has elapsed (S1275: Yes), the processes of S1277 to S1282 are executed.

On the other hand, when it is determined that the round time has not elapsed (S1275: No), it is determined whether the opening / closing plate 1300 is closed halfway based on the operation scenario (S1276). Here, when it is determined that it is the timing to close halfway (S1276: Yes), the processes of S1277 to S1282 are executed, and when it is determined that it is not the timing to close halfway (S1276: No), this process is performed. It ends and returns to the jackpot control process (S1004).

Returning to FIG. 118, the description will be continued. When the winning process (FIG. 123, S1112) is executed, the abnormal process is executed (S1113). After that, this process ends. Here, the abnormality processing (S1113) will be described in detail with reference to FIG. 124. FIG. 124 is a flowchart showing the contents of this abnormality processing (S1113). In the abnormality processing (S1113), a processing for monitoring whether or not the specific area 4830 is illegally passed is executed.

In the abnormality handling (FIG. 124, S1113), first, it is determined whether or not the round is valid (S1301). If it is outside the round validity period (S1301: No), this process ends. On the other hand, when it is determined that the round is within the valid period (S1301: Yes), it is determined whether or not the game ball has passed through the discharge port 1150 (S1302). Whether or not the game ball has passed through the discharge port 1150 is determined by whether or not the passage of the game ball is detected by the specific area detection sensor 4860 (see FIG. 51) or the non-specific area detection sensor 4870 (see FIG. 51). Will be done.

When it is determined that the game ball has passed through the discharge port 1150 (S1302: Yes), the value of the discharge number counter 203x is incremented by 1 and updated (S1303). After that, the process of S1304 is executed. On the other hand, when it is determined that the game ball has not passed through the discharge port 1150 (S1302: No), the process of S1304 is executed.

In the process of S1304, it is determined whether the remaining ball timer flag 203m is on (S1304). When it is determined that the remaining ball timer flag 203m is off (S1304: No), this process ends.

On the other hand, when it is determined that the remaining ball timer flag 203m is on (S1304: Yes), the remaining ball timer 203n is incremented by 1 and updated (S1305) because it is in the period of the ball brushing time. The remaining ball timer 203n determines whether or not the upper limit value (various interval times in this control example) has elapsed (S1306). If it is determined that the value is not the upper limit (S1306: No), this process ends. On the other hand, when it is determined to be the upper limit value (S1306: Yes), the number of discharged balls (the number of spheres detected by the specific area detection sensor 4860 (see FIG. 51) and the non-specific area detection sensor 4870 (see FIG. 51)). It is determined whether or not the number of winnings (the value of the winning number counter 203w) matches the number of winning balls (the total value with the number of balls detected in 1307).

If it is determined that they match (S1307: Yes), the process of S1309 is executed. On the other hand, when it is determined that they do not match (S1307: No), the value obtained by subtracting the value of the discharge number counter 203x from the value of the winning number counter 203w is added to the remaining ball counter 203p (S1308), and the processing of S1309 is executed. To do.

In the process of S1309, it is determined whether it is the start timing of the ending effect (S1309). If it is not the start timing of the ending effect (S1309: No), the process of S1312 is executed.

On the other hand, when it is the start timing of the ending effect (S1309: Yes), it is determined whether the value of the remaining ball counter 203p is 0 (S1310). When the value of the remaining ball counter 203p is 0 (S1310: Yes), the process of S1312 is executed. On the other hand, when the value of the remaining ball counter is not 0 (S1310: No), an error command is set (S1311) because an abnormality has occurred in the ejection of the ball, and the process of S1312 is executed.

When the voice lamp control device 113 receives the error command, an error display (for example, a character of a winning number mismatch error is displayed) is displayed, and an error signal is output to the hall computer. Therefore, even if the jackpot type of the jackpot acquired later is the jackpot M or N, the game ball is illegally left in the storage flow path 1231 or the probability fluctuation determination unit 4800, and the game ball is illegally passed through the specific area 4830. Can be suppressed.

In this way, by controlling so as to notify the ball discharge error at the start timing of the ending effect, even if there is a difference between the number of balls entered and the number of discharged balls in the round game R of each round, the error notification is performed. You can play the game without any. As a result, it is possible to partially regulate the discharge of balls from the storage flow path 1231 in the interval between rounds, and to realize the playability of starting the next round with the balls stored in the storage flow path 1231. ..

Further, even if there is a difference between the number of balls entered and the number of ejected balls in the round game R of each round, the game can be executed without notifying an error, so that the period of the interval between rounds is set to 2 seconds (storage). It can be set to a shorter period (the period required to discharge the spheres stored in the flow path 1231).

The method of setting the ball discharge error command is not limited to this. For example, from the jackpot type, set a value that can occur normally as the difference between the number of balls entered and the number of ejected balls, and if the difference in the number is within the range of that value, the error command is not set and the difference in the number. However, if it is out of the range of the value, it may be controlled to set an error command. In this case, it is possible to determine that an error in ball discharge has occurred without waiting until the start timing of the ending effect, so that the occurrence of an abnormality can be detected at an early stage. As a result, when the ball discharge error is caused by fraudulent activity, early detection of fraudulent activity can be achieved.

In the process of S1312, the remaining ball timer flag 203m is set to off (S1312), and the remaining ball timer 203n is reset to the initial value 0 (S1313). After that, the winning number counter 203w and the discharging number counter 203x are reset to the initial values (S1314), and then this process ends.

Next, the storage control process (S1008) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 125. FIG. 125 is a flowchart showing this storage control process (S1008). This storage control process (S1008) is executed in the main process (see FIG. 117) and is a process for setting the state of the interference member 6930.

As described above, the interference member 6930 changes its state according to the operation of the operation button 300 by the player (S1403 to S1407) and the state changes at a preset timing (S1403 to S1407). There are S1408 to S1411), but both of them are included in the storage control process (S1008).

In the storage control process, first, it is determined whether the output flag 203k is on (S1401), and when it is determined that the output flag 203k is not on (that is, it is off) (S1401: No), the interference member 6930 It means that it is in the retracted state. Next, it is determined whether the operation of the operation button 300 is valid (S1402).

If it is determined that the period is valid (S1402: Yes), it is determined whether or not the player presses (operates) the operation button 300 (S1403). That is, it is determined whether or not the pressing detection signal is detected.

In the process of S1403, when it is determined that the pressing (operation) of the operation button 300 is not detected (that is, the pressing detection signal is not detected) (S1403: No), the interference member 6930 is kept in the retracted state as it is. In order to keep it, this process is terminated as it is.

On the other hand, when it is determined that the pressing (operation) of the operation button 300 is detected (that is, the pressing detection signal is detected) (S1403: Yes), the upper limit value setting process 1 of the operation counter is executed (S1404). Here, the upper limit value setting process 1 (S1404) of this operation counter will be described with reference to FIG. 126. FIG. 126 is a flowchart showing the contents of the upper limit value setting process 1 (S1404) of the operation counter. In the operation counter upper limit value setting process 1 (S1404), a process of setting an upper limit value different depending on the operation timing of the operation button 300 as an operation counter upper limit value is executed.

That is, in the operation counter upper limit value setting process 1 (S1404), the pressing (operation) of the operation button 300 is detected from the inter-round interval period after the inter-round interval period is started (that is, the pressing detection signal is output. The period until (detection) is subtracted, the value indicating the remaining period is set as the upper limit value of the operation counter 203j (S1421), this process is terminated, and the process returns to the storage control process (S1008).

Next, a button operation command is set (S1405). Then, in order to indicate that the interference member 6930 is in the overhang state, the extension flag 203k is set to ON (S1406), and the interference member 6930 is in the overhang state (extension state based on the operation of the operation button 300, extension). In order to notify the voice lamp control device 113 that the output state 1) has been reached, a storage state command corresponding to the overhanging state of the interfering member 6930 is set (S1407), this process is terminated, and storage control is performed. Return to the process (S1008).

On the other hand, when it is determined that the period is not valid (S1402: No), it is determined whether it is the operation start timing of the interference member 6930 based on the operation scenario (S1408). If it is determined that it is not the operation start timing of the interference member 6930 (S1408: No), this process is terminated and the process returns to the storage control process (S1008).

On the other hand, when it is determined that it is the operation start timing of the interference member 6930 (S1408: Yes), the operation counter upper limit value setting process 2 is executed (S1409). Here, the upper limit value setting process 2 (S1409) of this operation counter will be described with reference to FIG. 127. FIG. 127 is a flowchart showing the contents of the upper limit value setting process 2 (S1409) of the operation counter. In the operation counter upper limit value setting process 2 (S1409), a process of setting a preset upper limit value according to the operation scenario as an operation counter upper limit value is executed.

That is, in the operation counter upper limit value setting process 2 (S1409), first, it is determined whether or not it is the change timing of the interference member 6930 to the overhanging state based on the operation scenario (S1431). When it is determined that it is not the timing of change of the interference member 6930 to the overhanging state (S1431: No), this process is terminated and the process returns to the storage control process (S1008).

On the other hand, when it is determined that it is the timing of change of the interference member 6930 to the overhanging state (S1431: Yes), an appropriate value from the operation scenario (based on the operation scenario, the interference member 6930 is maintained in the overhanging state). The value corresponding to the period to be performed) is set to the upper limit value of the operation counter 203j (S1432), this process is terminated, and the process returns to the storage control process (S1008).

Next, in order to indicate that the interference member 6930 is in the overhanging state, the extension flag 203k is set to ON (S1410), and the interference member 6930 is in the overhanging state (overhanging state and overhanging state based on the operation scenario). In order to notify the voice lamp control device 113 that 2) has occurred, a storage state command corresponding to the overhanging state of the interference member 6930 is set (S1411), and this process is terminated.

The storage state command set here is stored in the ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203, and the voice lamp is included in the external output process (S1001) of the main process (see FIG. 117) executed by the MPU 201. It is transmitted to the control device 113. When the voice lamp control device 113 receives the storage state command corresponding to the overhang state, it outputs a display rear image change command for setting the back side type corresponding to the overhang state to the display control device 114. The display control device 114 changes the rear image based on the display rear image change command.

That is, for example, it is set so that the characters "passing ball is being stored" are displayed in the small area Ds1 (see FIG. 87 (a)). As a result, the player can easily recognize that the interference member 6930 is in the stored state.

On the other hand, in the process of S1401, when it is determined that the output flag 203k is on (S1401: Yes), the storage valve operation process for setting the operation of the interference member 6930 is executed (S1412). Here, the storage valve operation process (S1412) will be described with reference to FIG. 128. FIG. 128 is a flowchart showing the contents of this storage valve operation process (S1412). The storage valve operation process (S1412) is a process for setting the operation of the interference member 6930.

In the storage valve operation process (S1412), first, the solenoid 6910 is set to ON (S1441), and 1 is added to the operation counter 203j (S1442). Although not particularly shown, when the solenoid 6910 is already on, the process of S1441 is skipped and the process of S1442 is performed. Next, it is determined whether the value of the operation counter 203j is the upper limit value (S1443).

When it is determined that the value of the operation counter 203j is the upper limit value in the process of S1443 (S1443: Yes), the solenoid 6910 is set to off (S1444). Then, the output flag 203k is set to off (S1445), the value of the operation counter 203j is set to 0 (S1446), and this process is terminated. Further, in the process of S1443, when it is determined that the value of the operation counter 203j is not the upper limit value (S1443: No), this process is also terminated.

When the process of S1412 is completed, it is determined whether the output flag 203k is off (S1413), and if it is determined that the output flag 203k is not off (that is, it is on) (S1413: No), the present process is terminated. To do.

On the other hand, in the process of S1413, when it is determined that the output flag 203k is off (S1413: Yes), it means that the interfering member 6930 is in the retracted state, so that the interfering member 6930 is in the retracted state. In order to notify the voice lamp control device 113 of this, a storage state command corresponding to the retracted state of the interference member 6930 is set (S1414), and this process is terminated.

The storage state command set here is stored in the ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203, and the voice lamp is included in the external output process (S1001) of the main process (see FIG. 117) executed by the MPU 201. It is transmitted to the control device 113. When the voice lamp control device 113 receives the storage state command corresponding to the evacuation state, it outputs a display rear image change command for setting the back type corresponding to the evacuation state to the display control device 114. The display control device 114 changes the rear image based on the display rear image change command.

By executing this storage control process, the state of the interference member 6930 can be set according to the operation status of the operation button 300. As a result, it is possible to switch between a state in which the flow of the ball is restricted by the interference member 6930 at an arbitrary timing of the player and a state in which the regulation is released and the flow of the ball is allowed.

Further, by this storage control process, the interference member 6930 can be driven at a time other than the operation timing of the operation button 300. Therefore, a member that operates according to the operation status of the operation button 300 and a member that operates regardless of the operation of the operation button 300 can be composed of the same member.

Next, the V winning process (S1009) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 129. FIG. 129 is a flowchart showing this V winning process (S1009). This V winning process (S1009) is executed in the main process (see FIG. 117), and is a process for controlling the flow of the ball after the first specific winning opening 1000a is closed. ..

In the V winning process, first, it is determined whether or not the count start flag 203qa is on (S1501). When it is determined that the count start flag 203qa is not on (that is, it is off) (S1501: No), it is determined whether or not the closing flag 203q is on (S1502). When it is determined that the closing flag 203q is on (S1502: Yes), it is determined whether or not the current execution is the fifth round (S1503). If it is determined that it is the fifth round (S1503: Yes), then the count start flag 203qa is set to ON (S1504), and this process ends.

On the other hand, in the processing of S1502, when it is determined that the closing flag 203q is not on (that is, it is off) (S1502: No), and in the processing of S1503, it is determined that the current execution is not the fifth round. If this is the case (S1503: No), the present process is terminated as it is.

On the other hand, in the process of S1501, when it is determined that the count start flag 203qa is on (S1501: Yes), it means that it is near the timing at which the distribution operation member 4851 that opens and closes the specific area 4830 operates. , In order to determine whether the ball has normally passed through the specific area 4830, the closing counter 203r is updated by adding 1 (S1505), and then the V winning valid counter 203t is similarly subtracted by 1. Update.

Then, it is determined whether the value of the closed counter 203r after the update is a predetermined value (that is, whether the period in which the opening / closing plate 1300 is maintained in the closed state has elapsed) (S1507), and if it is a predetermined value (S1507). : Yes), the closing flag 203q is turned off and set (S1508), and then the process proceeds to S1509. On the other hand, if it is not a predetermined value (S1507: No), the process proceeds to S1509 as it is.

In the process of S1509, it is determined whether the value of the closing counter 203r is the upper limit value (4.0 seconds). When the value of the closing counter 203r is the upper limit value (S1509: Yes), it means that the value of the V winning valid counter 203t has become 0, so the count start flag 203qa is set to off (S1510). The closure counter is reset to 0 (S1511), and the process proceeds to S1512. On the other hand, if the value of the closing counter 203r is not the upper limit value (S1509: No), the process proceeds to S1512 as it is.

In this way, after the closing counter 203r reaches the upper limit value (that is, after 4.0 seconds have passed since the opening / closing plate 1300 was closed), the count start flag 203qa is turned off. The process of S1512 is not executed. That is, the processing of S1512 is executed only during the period from when the opening / closing plate 1300 is closed until 4.0 seconds have elapsed.

In the process of S1512, it is determined whether the sphere has passed through the specific area 4830 (that is, whether the sphere has been detected by the specific area detection sensor 4860). When it is determined that the sphere has not passed through the specific area 4830 (S1512: No), this process ends. On the other hand, when it is determined that the ball has passed through the specific area 4830 (S1512: Yes), it is determined whether the value of the V winning valid counter 203t is within the set value range (S1513).

In the process of S1513, when it is determined that the value of the V winning valid counter 203t is within the set value range (S1513: Yes), it means that the sphere has normally passed through the specific region 4830. , The V flag 203s is set to ON (S1514), and this process ends.

Immediately after the opening / closing plate 1300 is changed to the closed state, a value corresponding to 4.0 seconds is set in the V winning valid counter 203t, and the value is subtracted from the value. As described above, the set value of the V winning valid counter 203t is set as the timing at which the sphere stored in the storage flow path 1231 passes through the specific area 4830, and in this control example, it is 3.0 seconds. Hereinafter, it is set to a numerical range corresponding to (3-0.2 × number of stored balls) seconds or more.

Therefore, for example, when the ball passes through the specific area 4830 immediately after the opening / closing plate 1300 is closed (the value of the V winning valid counter 203 is larger than 3.0 seconds), the ball is out of the set value range. In this case, it is suspected that the ball stagnated near the lower end of the passage 4810 (stopped due to clogging or improper fastening of the ball), and the ball started to flow immediately after the opening / closing plate 1300 was closed. , It is controlled to notify an error.

Further, for example, when the ball passes through the specific area 4830 after a long time has passed since the opening / closing plate 1300 was closed (the value of the V winning valid counter 203 is less than (3-0.2 × number of stored balls) seconds). It is out of the set value range. In this case, there is a problem in the flow mode when the ball is discharged from the storage flow path 1231 (ball biting, stopping due to improper fastening of the ball, etc.), and the discharge timing of the ball from the storage flow path 1231 (opening / closing plate 1300 is closed) Since it is suspected that the ball started to be ejected later than the timing of the state), it is controlled to notify the error just in case.

In addition, as the fraud to stop the ball, it is assumed that the ball is fastened with a strong magnet, or the ball with the thread adhered is launched into the game area and the player operates the thread to operate the ball. .. In this pachinko machine 10, a magnetic sensor (not shown) is placed near the storage flow path 1231, and the storage flow path 1231 and the probability fluctuation determination unit 4800 are not reached by magnetic force against fraud caused by magnets. This is supported by arranging them apart from each other behind the glass unit 16 (see FIG. 1) or by making the glass unit 16 thicker.

Further, in response to fraud caused by a ball to which a thread is adhered, when the thread is laid to the communication passage 4810 via the storage flow path 1231 and the opening / closing plate 1300 is closed, the ball entry prevention unit 1331 When the thread is fixed and the opening / closing plate 1300 is opened by being sandwiched between the side wall of the accommodating portion 1230 and the portion holding the detection sensor 1240 (see FIG. 7), the regulating member 1600 and the discharging plate 1600 are discharged. The thread is fixed by being sandwiched between the outlet 1150 and the outlet. Therefore, even if the player operates the thread, the load can be prevented from being transmitted to the ball in the communication passage 4810. Therefore, for example, the thread held by the player is released at an arbitrary timing. Even if the ball is illegally targeted to pass through the specific area 4830, as described above, the thread is fixed in some places, so that it is easy to prevent the ball from illegally passing through the specific area 4830. Can be done.

On the other hand, if it is determined that the value of the V winning valid counter 203t is not within the set value range (S1513: No), some kind of fraud or a malfunction of the pachinko machine 10 is suspected, so an error command is set. (S1515), and this process is terminated. In this case, the V flag 203s is not turned on.

In this control example, the case where the occurrence of fraud or malfunction is determined by setting the set value of the V winning valid counter 203t based on the number of storages in the storage flow path 1231 has been described, but it is not necessarily limited to this. Not. For example, the occurrence of fraud or malfunction may be determined by detecting the discharge interval of the balls from the storage flow path 1231, or the occurrence of fraud or malfunction may be determined by detecting the period during which a predetermined number of balls are discharged. It may be determined, or if the number of spheres stored in the storage flow path 1231 is less than the required number (less than 4 spheres), the passage of spheres in the specific area 4830 is detected, and fraud or malfunction occurs. May be determined.

In the V winning process (S1009) in this control example, the case where the V flag 203s is set to ON only when it is determined that the value of the V winning valid counter 203t is within the set value has been described. It is not limited to this. For example, even if it is determined that the value of the V winning valid counter 203t is not included in the set value, the V flag 203s is set to on so that the game cannot be played until the error due to the error command is resolved. You may control it. The resolution of this error command is executed by turning off the power, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the RAM 203 may need to be cleared.

In this case, if the timing of the ball passing through the specific area 4830 is deviated due to a malfunction of the pachinko machine 10 instead of the player's fraud, the player is in a high probability state of the special symbol without any problem after it is discovered. You can play a game.

On the other hand, if the cause is fraudulent by the player, after the fraud is discovered, the player who commits the fraud is first stopped, the hall clerk clears RAM203, and the special symbol is placed in a low probability state. It is forcibly controlled so that it becomes. As a result, it is possible to prevent another customer from having an extra waiting time before starting the game on the pachinko machine 10 where the fraud has been performed.

In this control example, while the error command is set by S1515, for example, it is controlled so that the ball cannot be fired, or when the ball is fired, an error notification is given to the clerk to notice. It is controlled so that the prize ball is not paid out even if the fired ball enters the winning opening (for example, the function of the payout control device 111 is stopped), the ball is fired or the prize is won. It is controlled so that the game cannot be played by a control mode such as controlling the power to be turned off based on the ball entering the mouth.

<Regarding the control process of the audio lamp control device in the first embodiment>
Next, each control process executed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113 will be described with reference to FIGS. 130 to 140. The processing of the MPU 221 is roughly divided into a start-up process that is started when the power is turned on and a main process that is executed after the start-up process.

First, the start-up process executed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113 will be described with reference to FIG. 130. FIG. 130 is a flowchart showing this start-up process. This start-up process is started when the power is turned on.

When the start-up process is executed, first, the initial setting process associated with the power-on is executed (S2001). Specifically, a predetermined value is set in the stack pointer. After that, depending on whether or not the power-off processing flag is turned on, the power-off processing of S2120 (see FIG. 131) is caused by a momentary voltage drop (instantaneous power failure, so-called "instantaneous power failure") in this startup processing. ) Is started in the middle of execution (S2002). As will be described later with reference to FIG. 131, when the voice lamp control device 113 receives the power cutoff command from the main control device 110 (see S2114 of FIG. 131), the voice lamp control device 113 executes the power cutoff process of S2117. The power off processing flag is turned on before the power off processing is executed, and the power off processing flag is turned off after the power off processing is completed. Therefore, whether or not the power off processing of S2117 is in the middle of execution can be determined by the state of the power off processing flag.

If the power off processing flag is off (S2002: No), the start-up process this time is started after the power is completely cut off, or after a momentary power failure occurs and the power of S2120 is turned off. It was started after the execution of the process was completed, or it was started by resetting only the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 due to noise or the like (without receiving the power off command from the main control device 110). is there. Therefore, in these cases, it is confirmed whether or not the data in the RAM 223 is destroyed (S2003).

Confirmation of data corruption in RAM 223 is performed as follows. That is, data as a keyword of "55AAh" is written in the specific area of the RAM 223 by the processing of S2006. Therefore, the data stored in the specific area can be checked, and if the data is "55AAh", there is no data corruption in the RAM 223, and conversely, if the data is not "55AAh", the data corruption in the RAM 223 can be confirmed. If the data corruption of the RAM 223 is confirmed (S2003: Yes), the process proceeds to S2004 and the initialization of the RAM 223 is started. On the other hand, if the data corruption of the RAM 223 is not confirmed (S2003: No), the process proceeds to S2008.

If the start-up process is started after the power is completely cut off, the keyword "55AAh" is not stored in the specific area of the RAM 223 (the memory of the RAM 223 is lost due to the power off). (From), it is determined that the data of the RAM 223 is destroyed (S2003: Yes), and the process proceeds to S2004. On the other hand, the start-up process this time was started after the execution of the power-off process of S2120 was completed after a momentary power failure occurred, or was reset only to the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 due to noise or the like. Since the keyword "55AAh" is stored in the specific area of the RAM 223, the data of the RAM 223 is determined to be normal (S2003: No), and the process proceeds to S2008.

If the power off processing flag is on (S2002: Yes), the start-up process this time is after a momentary power failure occurs, and during the execution of the power off process of S2120, the voice lamp control device 113 The MPU 221 of the above was reset and started. In such a case, the storage state of the RAM 223 is not always correct because the power off processing is being executed. Therefore, in such a case, the control cannot be continued, so the process is shifted to S2004 and the initialization of the RAM 223 is started.

In the process of S2004, the storage area of the entire range of the RAM 223 is checked (S2004). As a check method, first, "0FFh" is written for each byte, and it is read for each byte to check whether or not it is "0FFh", and if it is "0FFh", it is determined to be normal. Such writing and confirmation for each byte are performed in the order of "0FFh", then "55h", "0AAh", and "00h". By this read / write check of RAM 223, all the storage areas of RAM 223 are cleared to 0.

If it is determined that the read / write check is normal for all the storage areas of the RAM 223 (S2005: Yes), the keyword "55AAh" is written in the specific area of the RAM 223 to set the RAM destruction check data (S2006). By confirming the keyword "55AAh" written in this specific area, it is checked whether or not the RAM 223 has data corruption. On the other hand, if an abnormality in the read / write check is detected in any storage area of the RAM 223 (S2005: No), an abnormality in the RAM 223 is notified (S2007), and an infinite loop is performed until the power is cut off. The abnormality of the RAM 223 is notified by the indicator lamp 34. The voice output device 226 may output voice to notify the abnormality of the RAM 223, or an error command may be sent to the display control device 114 to display an error message on the third symbol display device 81. It may be.

In the process of S2008, it is determined whether or not the power off flag is turned on (S2008). The power-off flag is turned on when the power-off process of S2117 is executed (see S2116 in FIG. 131). That is, since the power-off flag is turned on before the power-off process of S2117 is executed, the process of S2008 is reached with the power-off flag turned on because the start-up process is instantaneous. This is the case where the operation is started after the power failure of S2117 is completed after the power failure occurs. Therefore, in such a case (S2008: Yes), the work area of the RAM is cleared in order to initialize each process of the voice lamp control device 113 (S2009), the initial value of the RAM 223 is set (S2010), and then an interrupt is interrupted. Set the permission (S2012) and move to the main process. The work area of the RAM 223 refers to an area other than the area for storing commands and the like received from the main control device 110.

On the other hand, the reason why the process of S2008 is reached with the power off flag turned off is that the start-up process of this time is started after the power is completely shut off, for example, so that the process of S2008 via the processes of S2004 to S2006 This is a case where the processing is reached, or only the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 is reset due to noise or the like (without receiving the power off command from the main control device 110). Therefore, in such a case (S2008: No), S2009, which is the clearing process of the work area of the RAM 223, is skipped, the process is shifted to S2010, and the initial value of the RAM 223 is set (S2010). Next, the probability change state flag 223i is updated (S2011) according to the game state notified by the state command received from the main control device 110, interrupt permission is set (S2012), and the process proceeds to the main process. By updating the probability change state flag 223i based on the state command, the game state recognized by the main control device 110 and the game state recognized by the voice lamp control device 113 can be matched. Therefore, it is possible to appropriately execute the effect according to the game state.

The reason for skipping the clearing process of S2009 is that when the processing of S2008 is reached via the processing of S2004 to S2006, all the storage areas of the RAM 223 have already been cleared by the processing of S2004. When only the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 is reset due to noise or the like and the start-up process is started, the data in the work area of the RAM 223 is saved without being cleared, so that the voice lamp control device 113 This is because the control of

Next, with reference to FIG. 131, the main process executed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113 after the start-up process of the voice lamp control device 113 will be described. FIG. 131 is a flowchart showing this main process. When the main process is executed, it is first determined whether or not 1 msec or more has elapsed since the main process was started or the process of S2101 this time was executed (S2101), and 1 msec or more has elapsed. If not (S2101: No), the process proceeds to S2111 without performing the processes of S2102 to S2110. In the process of S2101, it is determined whether or not 1 msec has elapsed because S2102 to S2110 are mainly processes related to display (effect), and it is not necessary to edit in a short cycle (within 1 msec). This is because it is preferable to execute the command determination process of S2111, the variation display setting process of S2112, and the storage state monitoring process of S2113 in a short cycle. By executing the processing of S2111 in a short cycle, it is possible to prevent omission of reception of the command transmitted from the main controller 110, and by executing the processing of S2112 in a short cycle, the command received by the command determination processing Based on the above, settings related to variable effects can be made without delay. Further, since the processing of S2113 is executed in a short cycle, the setting regarding the storage state flag 223k and the storage upper limit flag 223m can be performed without delay based on the storage state.

If 1 msec or more has passed in the process of S2101 (S2101: Yes), first, various commands for the display control device 114 set by the processes of S2101 to S2113 are transmitted to the display control device 114 (S2102). ). Next, the output of each lamp is set so as to set the lighting mode of the indicator lamp 34 and the lighting mode of the lamp edited by the process of S2108 described later (S2103), and then the power-on notification process is executed (S2104).

The power-on notification process notifies that the power has been turned on for a predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds) when the power is turned on, and the notification is performed by the voice output device 226 or the lamp display device 227. Will be. Further, a command may be transmitted to the display control device 114 to notify that the power has been supplied on the screen of the third symbol display device 81. If the power is not turned on, the process shifts to the process of S2105 without performing the notification by the power on notification process.

In the process of S2105, the customer waiting effect process is executed, and then the hold quantity display update process is executed (S2106). In the customer waiting effect processing, when a predetermined time elapses when the pachinko machine 10 is not played by the player, a setting is made to switch the display of the third symbol display device 81 to the title screen, and the setting is displayed as a command. It is transmitted to the device 114. In the hold quantity display update process, a process of turning on the hold lamp (not shown) is performed according to the value of the first special symbol hold ball number counter 223b.

After that, the button input monitoring / effect processing is executed (S2107). This button input monitoring / effect processing monitors the input of whether or not the operation button 300 operated by the player is pressed in order to enhance the effect, and the effect corresponding to the case where the input of the operation button 300 is confirmed. It is a process to set to perform. In this process, when an operation by the player of the operation button 300 is detected, a display command corresponding to the operation of the operation button 300 is set in the display control device 114.

When the button input monitoring / effect processing is completed, the lamp editing process is executed (S2108), and then the sound editing / output processing is executed (S2109). In the lamp editing process, the lighting patterns of the illumination units 29 to 33 and the like are set so as to correspond to the display performed by the third symbol display device 81. In the sound editing / output processing, the output pattern of the voice output device 226 is set so as to correspond to the display performed by the third symbol display device 81, and the sound is output from the voice output device 226 according to the setting.

After the process of S2109, the liquid crystal effect execution management process is executed (S2110). In the liquid crystal effect execution management process, a time synchronized with the time required for the fluctuation display performed by the third symbol display device 81 is set based on the fluctuation pattern command transmitted from the main control device 110. The lamp editing process of S2108 is executed based on the time set in the liquid crystal effect execution monitoring process. The sound editing / output processing of S2109 is also executed at a time synchronized with the time required for the fluctuation display performed by the third symbol display device 81.

When the processing of S2110 is completed, a command determination process for performing processing according to the command received from the main control unit 110 is performed (S2111). Details of this command determination process will be described later with reference to FIGS. 132 to 135.

Next, the process proceeds to S2112. In the process of S2112, the variable display setting process is executed (S2112). In the variation display setting process, a display variation pattern command is generated and set based on the variation pattern command received from the main control device 110 in order to execute the variation effect on the third symbol display device 81. As a result, the command is transmitted to the display control device 114. The details of this variable display setting process will be described later with reference to FIG. 136.

Next, the process proceeds to S2113. In the process of S2113, the storage state monitoring process is executed (S2113). In the storage state monitoring process, a display variation pattern command is generated and set based on the variation pattern command received from the main control device 110 in order to execute the variation effect on the third symbol display device 81. As a result, the command is transmitted to the display control device 114. The details of this storage state monitoring process will be described later with reference to FIG. 137.

Then, when the storage state monitoring process is completed, it is determined whether or not the power failure occurrence information is stored in the work RAM 233 (S2114). The power-off occurrence information is stored when a power-off command is received from the main control device 110. If the power-off occurrence information is stored in the process of S2114 (S2114: Yes), both the power-off flag and the power-off processing in-progress flag are turned on (S2116), and the power-off process is executed (S2117). After executing the power off processing, the power off processing flag is turned off (S2118), and then the processing is looped infinitely. In the power cutoff process, the occurrence of the interrupt process is prohibited, and each output port is turned off to turn off the output from the audio output device 226 and the lamp display device 227. In addition, the memory of the power failure occurrence information is also deleted.

On the other hand, if the power failure occurrence information is not stored in the process of S2114 (S2114: No), it is determined whether or not the RAM 223 is destroyed based on the keyword stored in the RAM 223 (S2115), and the RAM 223 is destroyed. If not (S2115: No), the process returns to the process of S2101, and the main process is repeatedly executed. On the other hand, if the RAM 223 is destroyed (S2115: Yes), the processing is looped infinitely in order to stop the execution of the subsequent processing. Here, if it is determined that the RAM is destroyed and an infinite loop is performed, the main process is not executed, so that the display by the third symbol display device 81 does not change thereafter. Therefore, since the player can know that the abnormality has occurred, he / she can call a clerk in the hall or the like and ask for repair of the pachinko machine 10. Further, when it is confirmed that the RAM 223 is destroyed, the audio output device 226 or the lamp display device 227 may notify the RAM destruction.

Next, the command determination process (S2111) executed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113 will be described with reference to FIG. 132. FIG. 132 is a flowchart showing this command determination process (S2111). This command determination process (S2111) is executed in the main process (see FIG. 131) executed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113, and determines the command received from the main control device 110 as described above. It is a process for.

In the command determination process (FIG. 132, S2113), first, from the command storage area 223a provided in the RAM 223, the first unprocessed command received from the main control unit 110 is read and analyzed, and the variation pattern command is executed. It is determined whether or not the command has been received (S2201). The variation pattern command is a command for notifying the variation pattern (fluctuation time) of the special symbol, and the variation pattern (variation time) selected from the main control device 110 is the first special symbol and the second special symbol. It is output corresponding to each pattern.

When it is determined that the fluctuation pattern command has been received in the processing of S2201 (S2201: Yes), the fluctuation start flag 223e provided in the RAM 223 is set to ON (S2202), and the fluctuation pattern type is selected from the received fluctuation pattern command. Is extracted (S2203), and this process is terminated. The variation pattern type extracted here can be identified in the other memory area 223z of the RAM 223 as the variation pattern type of the special symbol for each special symbol type (corresponding first special symbol, second special symbol). When stored in a format and notified to the display control device 114 of the start of the variable display effect of the special symbol and the display mode of the variable display effect of the special symbol in the variable display setting process (see FIG. 136) described later. It is used (when setting a variation pattern command for displaying a special symbol).

On the other hand, when it is determined that the fluctuation pattern command has not been received (S2201: No), it is determined whether or not the stop type command has been received from the main controller 110 (S2204). If it is determined that a stop type command (either the special figure 1 stop type command or the special figure 2 stop type command) has been received (S2204: Yes), the flag corresponding to the received command type is set to on. (S2205). Specifically, when the special figure 1 stop type command is received, the stop type selection flag 223f corresponding to the first special symbol is set to on, and when the special figure 2 stop type command is received, the second special The stop type selection flag 223f corresponding to the symbol is set to on.

Next, the stop type (one of complete loss, reach loss, small hit, and big hit K, L, M, N, and k) is extracted from the received stop type command (S2206), and this process is terminated. The stop type extracted in the process of S2206 is stored in the voice lamp control device 113 in the other memory area 223z of the RAM 223 of the MPU 221. Then, it is referred to when the variation display setting process (see FIG. 136) described later is executed, and is used to set a display stop type command for notifying the display control device 114 of the stop type of the variation effect.

In the process of S2204, when it is determined that the stop type command has not been received (S2204: No), it is determined whether the stop command has been received from the main control unit 110 (S2207). When it is determined that the stop command has been received (S2207: Yes), the display stop command is set based on the received command (S2208), and this process is terminated.

Next, it is determined whether or not the reserved ball number command has been received from the main control device 110 (S2209). When it is determined that the hold ball number command has been received (S2209: Yes), the special symbol 1 hold ball number counter 203d or the special symbol 2 hold ball number counter 203e of the main controller 110 included in the received hold ball number command (That is, the number of reserved balls in the variable display of the first special symbol or the second special symbol) is extracted, and the corresponding counter value provided in the RAM 223 of the voice lamp control device 113 is matched with the extracted counter value. The counter value is updated (S2210), and this process ends. More specifically, when the value of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d is extracted, the extracted counter value is stored in the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 223b of the RAM 223, and the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 203e is stored. When the value of is extracted, the extracted counter value is stored in the second special symbol reserved ball number counter 223c.

Here, the hold ball number command is transmitted from the main control device 110 when the ball enters the first entry port 64 or the second entry port 640 (starting winning), so that the starting winning is won. By the processing of S2210, the values of the first special symbol reserved ball counter 223b and the second special symbol reserved ball counter 223c of the voice lamp control device 113 are set to the special symbol 1 hold of the main control device 110 each time. The values of the ball number counter 203d and the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 203e can be adjusted respectively.

Therefore, due to the influence of noise or the like, the value of the first special symbol reserved ball counter 223b or the second special symbol reserved ball counter 223c of the voice lamp control device 113 is the special symbol 1 reserved ball counter 203d of the main control device 110. Alternatively, even if the value deviates from the value of the special symbol 2 hold ball counter 203e, if the hold ball number command is notified based on the start winning, the first special symbol hold ball counter 223b of the voice lamp control device 113 Alternatively, the value of the second special symbol reserved ball number counter 223c can be modified to match the value of the special symbol 1 reserved ball counter 203d or the special symbol 2 reserved ball counter 203e of the main controller 110.

Further, in the process of S2209, when it is determined that the reserved ball number command has not been received (S2209: No), it is determined whether or not the winning information command has been received from the main control device 110 (S2212). If it is determined that the winning information command has been received in the processing of S2212 (S2212: Yes), the winning information command receiving processing is executed (S2213).

In this winning information command reception process (S2213), various flags to be referred to and various counters are set in order to set various effects executed by the third symbol display device 81. As a result, based on the lottery result of the pending special symbol, the special symbol executed before the change of the pending special symbol starts (that is, before the change of the target special symbol). During the variable display), it is possible to execute an effect showing the lottery result of the special symbol for which the winning information command is transmitted, and the lottery result of one special symbol is displayed to the player using the variable display period of a plurality of special symbols. Suggestion notification can be given, and the effect of production can be enhanced.

On the other hand, in the process of S2212, when it is determined that the winning information command has not been received (S2212: No), it is determined whether the notification command has been received from the main control device 110 (S2214). If it is determined that the notification command has been received (S2214: Yes), the display notification command is set (S2215), and this process ends.

If it is determined that the notification command has not been received in the processing of S2214 (S2214: No), the storage device-related command (storage state command corresponding to the evacuation state (S1414, see FIG. 125) or the overhanging state) is supported. It is determined whether or not the storage state command (S1407, see FIG. 125) has been received (S2216). If it is determined in S2216 that a storage device-related command has been received (S2216: Yes), the corresponding rear image for display is changed. A command is set (S2217), and this process ends.

In the process of S2216, if it is determined that the storage device-related command has not been received (S2216: No), then it is determined whether or not the operation command has been received (S2218). In the process of S2218, if it is determined that the operation command has been received (the operation (pressed down) of the operation button 300 has been performed) (S2218: Yes), the operation flag 223p is set to on (S2219), and this process is terminated. To do. This operation command is a command output when the operation button 300 is operated. On the other hand, when it is determined that the operation command has not been received (S2218: No), it is determined whether or not the hit-related command has been received (S2220).

If it is determined that the hit-related command has been received in the process of S2220 (S2220: Yes), the hit-related process is executed (S2221), and this process is terminated. The detailed contents of this hit-related process (S2221) will be described later with reference to FIGS. 133 to 135. On the other hand, in the process of S2220, if it is determined that the hit-related command has not been received (S2220: No), the process corresponding to the other command is executed (S2222), and this process is terminated.

In the processing of S2222, if the other command is a command used by the voice lamp control device 113, the processing corresponding to the command is performed, the processing result is stored in the RAM 223, and if the command is used by the display control device 114, the command is performed. Is set to be transmitted to the display control device 114. For example, a ball entry command set based on the ball entering each entry port provided in the game board 13. Is received, a process of accumulating the number of balls entered for each type of entry port into which the ball has entered is executed.

Next, the hit-related processing (S2221) executed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113 will be described with reference to FIG. 133. FIG. 133 is a flowchart showing a hit-related process (S2221). This hit-related process (S2221) is a process executed in the command determination process (see S2111 in FIG. 132) of the main process (see FIG. 131) executed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113, and is the main control. This is a process executed when a hit-related command is received from the device 110.

When the hit-related process (S2221) is executed, it is first determined whether or not the jackpot opening command has been received (S2501). If it is determined that the jackpot opening command has been received (S2501: Yes), then the display opening command is set (S2502), and this process ends. On the other hand, in the process of S2501, when it is determined that the opening command has not been received (S2501: No), it is determined whether or not the round number command has been received (S2503). If it is determined that the round number command has been received in the processing of S2503 (S2503: Yes), the round number accumulation counter 223h is updated based on the received command (S2504), and then the jackpot medium effect processing is executed (S2503). S2505), this process is terminated.

The jackpot middle effect processing (S2505) is a process for selecting the mode of the round effect (the effect of the round game R and the effect of the interval between rounds), and the details will be described later in FIG. 134.

In the process of S2503, if it is determined that the hit-related command received this time is not a round number command (S2503: No), then it is determined whether an interval command has been received (S2506). This interval command is a command output from the main control device 110 when each round in the jackpot is completed. If it is determined that an interval command has been received in the processing of S2506 (S2506: Yes), the number of completed rounds is calculated based on the value of the round number accumulation counter 223h, and the corresponding display interval command is set (S2506: Yes). S2507), this process is terminated.

On the other hand, in the process of S2506, when it is determined that the interval command has not been received (S2506: No), it is determined whether or not the jackpot ending command has been received (S2508). In the process of S2508, when the jackpot ending command is received (S2508: Yes), the display ending command is set (S2509), the value of the round number accumulation counter 223h is cleared (S2510), and this process is terminated. Further, in the process of S2508, when it is determined that the jackpot ending command has not been received (S2508: No), this process is also terminated.

Here, the jackpot middle effect processing (S2505) will be described with reference to FIG. 134. FIG. 134 is a flowchart showing the jackpot medium effect processing (S2505). In this jackpot middle effect processing (S2505), as an effect executed during the jackpot, in addition to the jackpot game effect for blessing the jackpot, the inside of the storage flow path 1231 is visually recognized by having the player operate the operation button 300. The first operation effect (operation effect (timing effect)) that enables the interference member 6930 and the second operation effect (operation effect (timing effect)) that changes the state of the interference member 6930 by causing the player to operate the operation button 300 are defined. The continuous firing effect that encourages the continuation of the firing of the balls even after the number of balls has been entered, the effect mode and the presence / absence of the effect are set, and each effect is executed.

When the jackpot middle effect processing (S2505) is executed, it is first determined whether or not the effect execution flag 223x is on (S2531). If it is determined that the effect executing flag 223x is on (S2531: Yes), the process proceeds to S2540. On the other hand, if it is determined that the effect executing flag 223x is not on (off) (S2531: No), then is the round number command received this time a round number command indicating the third round of the jackpot? Is determined (S2532).

In the process of S2532, if it is determined that the command is the number of rounds indicating the third round (S2532: Yes), the first operation effect flag 223wa is set to ON (S2533), and the process proceeds to S2534.

In the processing of S2534, it is determined whether the jackpot type of the jackpot currently being executed is the jackpot k (S2534), and if it is determined to be the jackpot k (S2534: Yes), the second operation effect flag 223wb is turned on. Is set to (S2535), and the process proceeds to S2536. On the other hand, if it is determined that the jackpot is not k (S2534: No), the process proceeds to S2536 as it is.

That is, if it is a jackpot k, both the first operation effect flag 223wa and the second operation effect flag 223wb are set to on, but if it is a jackpot other than the jackpot k (big hit K, L, M, N), , Only the first operation effect flag 223wa is set to on.

Here, the display effect round command setting process will be described with reference to FIG. 135 (S2536). FIG. 135 is a flowchart showing the contents of the display effect round command setting process (S2536). In the display effect round command setting process (S2536), first, it is determined whether the second operation effect flag 223wb is on (S2551), and if the second operation effect flag 223wb is on (S2551: Yes), The first display mode is set as information that can be read from the effect temporary storage area 223r (S2552), this process is terminated, and the process returns to the jackpot medium effect process (S2505).

In the first display mode, as a display effect round command, it is displayed that there is an operation effect in the next round and that there is an operation effect in the interval period after the end of the next round in the third round game R (FIG. 88 (a)), and the operation effect is displayed (see FIGS. 90 and 91) in the interval period after the end of the fourth round game R.

The display in the interval period after the end of the third round game R and the display in the fourth round game R are common regardless of the display mode.

On the other hand, when it is determined that the second operation effect flag 223wb is not on (that is, it is off) (S2551: No), it is determined whether the jackpot type of the jackpot currently being executed is jackpot L or M (S2553). ), When it is determined that the jackpot type is jackpot L or M (S2553: Yes), the second display mode is set as information that can be read from the effect temporary storage area 223r (S2554), and this processing is terminated. Then, the process returns to the big hit medium production process (S2505).

In the second display mode, as a display effect round command, there is an operation effect in the next round in the third round round game R (see FIG. 88 (a)), and the number of stored balls in the fourth round game. It is set to display information (see FIG. 88 (b)), and during the interval period after the end of the fourth round game R, a moving image (or still image) without an operation effect is set to be displayed. Will be done.

Here, the information about the number of stored balls is prepared so as to be displayable, and is based on the operation button 300 being operated at the success timing of the operation effect (for example, the timing when the display pointer 719 overlaps the bar display unit 717). Is controlled so that the display is executed.

The display in the interval period after the end of the third round game R and the display in the fourth round game R are common regardless of the display mode.

On the other hand, in the processing of S2553, when it is determined that the jackpot type is not jackpot L or M (that is, jackpot K, N, k) (S2553: No), the information can be read from the effect temporary storage area 223r. , The third display mode is set (S2555), this process is terminated, and the process returns to the jackpot middle effect process (S2505).

In the third display mode, as a display effect round command, in the third round game R, there is an operation effect in the next round, and a character urging the ball to be launched toward the first specific winning opening 1000a is displayed. (See FIG. 88), and during the interval period after the end of the fourth round game R, a moving image (or a still image) without an operation effect is set to be displayed.

The display in the interval period after the end of the third round game R and the display in the fourth round game R are common regardless of the display mode.

As described above, the display of the third round round game R and the fourth round round game R is collectively set as a display effect round command.

It will be described back to FIG. 134. After the processing of S2536, the effect information is read from the effect temporary storage area 223r, and the display effect round command for the display effect of the third round round game R and the fourth round round game R is set (S2537). The effect executing flag 223x is set to on (S2538), the first operation effect flag 223wa and the second operation effect flag 223wb are set to off (S2539), and this process is terminated.

Although details are not shown, the process of S2539 is configured to be skipped if the first operation effect flag 223wa or the second operation effect flag 223wb is already set to off. doing. As a result, it is possible to prevent unnecessary processing from being executed.

On the other hand, in the process of S2532, if it is determined that the command is not the round number command indicating the third round (S2532: No), then it is determined whether the round number command received this time is the fourth round of the jackpot (S2532: No). S2540).

If it is determined in the process of S2540 that the command is the number of rounds indicating the fourth round (S2540: Yes), a display command indicating that the fourth round has been reached is set. Then, since the display mode of the fourth round has already been selected as described above, this process is terminated in order to avoid selecting another display mode in duplicate, and the process returns to the hit-related process (S2221).

On the other hand, in the processing of S2540, if it is determined that the round number command received this time is not the fourth round of the jackpot (S2540: No), then the round number command received this time is the fifth round of the jackpot. (S2541).

In the process of S2541 when it is determined that the command is the number of rounds indicating the fifth round (S2541: Yes), the effect executing flag 223x is set to off (S2542), and the first input flag 223wc and the second input flag 223wc and the second are described later. The input flag 223wd is set to off (S2543), and the process proceeds to S2547. On the other hand, if it is determined that the command is not the number of rounds command indicating the fifth round in the process of S2541 (S2541: No), the process proceeds to the process of S2544.

In the process of S2544, it is determined whether the number of rounds command received this time is the sixth round of the jackpot (S2544). In the process of S2544, when it is determined that the command is the number of rounds indicating the sixth round (S2544: Yes), it is determined whether the jackpot type is jackpot K, M or k (S2545).

When it is determined that the jackpot type is jackpot K, M or k (S2545: Yes), a continuous firing round command for display is set (S2546), this process is terminated, and the process returns to the hit-related process (S2221). ..

The continuous firing round command for display is set to include a display (see the small area Ds3 in FIG. 92B) that prompts the ball to continue firing without stopping as a display effect round command. .. This display is executed only in the jackpot type (big hit K, M or k, see FIG. 94 (b)) in which an excess prize can be expected in the round game R of the sixth round. Therefore, the player can increase the possibility of excess winning by continuing to shoot the ball according to the display.

On the other hand, in the processing of S2544, when it is determined that the command is not the number of rounds command indicating the sixth round (S2544: No), or in the processing of S2545, the jackpot type is not jackpot K, M or k (that is, jackpot L, If it is determined (S2545: No), a display round number command corresponding to the received round number is set (S2547), and this process is terminated.

Therefore, in this control example, when the 1st, 2nd, 5th rounds, and the 6th round number command when the jackpot type is jackpot L, N are received, the display round number command is set by the processing of S2547. To. On the other hand, when another round number command is received, a display effect round command or a display continuous firing round command is set. In this way, by changing the display of the round game R according to the jackpot type and the number of rounds, the jackpot game can be advanced without boring the player.

Various display round number commands and the like (display round number command, display effect round command, display continuous firing round command) set here are stored in the ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 223, and are stored in the MPU221. Is transmitted to the display control device 114 in the command output process (S2102) of the main process (see FIG. 131) executed by. When the display control device 114 receives various display round number commands and the like (display round number command, display effect round command, display continuous firing round command), the third symbol display device 81 starts a new round effect. To do.

As described above, in the present embodiment, the current number of rounds is determined by the counter value of the round number cumulative counter 223h, and the content of the effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is changed. Other configurations may be used. For example, by including information indicating the current number of rounds in the number of rounds command, it is possible to eliminate the process of adding the counter value of the round number cumulative counter 223h.

Further, although the display mode of the 4th round is also selected when the 3rd round number command is acquired, other configurations may be used, for example, the 3rd round number command is acquired. The control equivalent to the control performed when the command is performed may be repeatedly performed when the round number command for the fourth round is acquired. Further, for example, when the third round number command is acquired, only the display mode is set, and when the fourth round number command is acquired, the display mode is selected. You may.

As described above, in the present embodiment, when the jackpot is started, at the time of the round (3 rounds) before the round (4 rounds) in which the timing effect (operation effect) is actually executed, the next A notice effect is executed to announce that the timing effect (operation effect) will be executed in the round (see FIG. 88 (a)). Then, the timing effect (operation effect) is executed (see FIG. 88 (b)).

In this way, since the advance notice effect is executed in the round before the timing effect (operation effect) is executed, it is possible to inform the player in advance that the effect of operating the operation button 300 is executed. it can. In addition, since the advance notice effect is executed only in the round before the timing effect (operation effect) is executed, the timing effect (operation effect) is not executed even though the advance notice effect is executed. Can be prevented.

In the present embodiment, the timing effect (operation effect) is executed in a predetermined number of rounds during the jackpot, but other configurations may be used, for example, in the storage flow path 1231. When it is determined that a predetermined number (for example, 3) of balls have been stored, the timing effect (operation effect) may be executed in the next round. As a result, the player can be made to play the game of storing the ball in the storage flow path 1231 more positively.

Next, the variation display setting process (S2112) executed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113 will be described with reference to FIG. 136. FIG. 136 is a flowchart showing this variation display setting process (S2112). This variation display setting process (S2112) is one process (see FIG. 131) executed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113. As described above, in the variation display setting process (see FIG. 136), the first special symbol is based on the variation pattern command received from the main control device 110 in order to display the variation display effect on the third symbol display device 81. Alternatively, a process of generating a display variation pattern command of the second special symbol and transmitting the command to the display control device 114 is executed. Further, based on the extracted stop type (complete loss, reach loss, jackpot), a process of setting a display stop type command for notifying the display control device 114 of the stop type is executed.

In the variation display setting process (S2112 in FIG. 136), first, it is determined whether the variation start flag 223e provided in the RAM 223 is set to ON (S2701). Then, when it is determined that the fluctuation start flag 223e is off (S2701: No), the fluctuation pattern command has not been received from the main control device 110, so the process proceeds to S2706. On the other hand, when it is determined that the fluctuation start flag 223e is on (S2701: Yes), the detailed mode of the fluctuation display of the special symbol this time is determined based on the fluctuation pattern command received from the main control device 110. Each process of S2702 to S2705 for the purpose is executed.

More specifically, first, the fluctuation start flag 223e is set to off (S2702), then the extracted fluctuation pattern is acquired (S2703), the display fluctuation pattern command is set (S2704), and then the corresponding variation pattern is set. 1 is subtracted from the value of the special symbol reserved ball counter (1st special symbol reserved ball counter 223b or 2nd special symbol reserved ball counter 223c), and the winning information included in the command storage area is based on the subtracted value. The data in the storage area is shifted (S2705), and the process shifts to the process of S2706.

In the process of S2706, it is determined whether the stop type selection flag 223f of the RAM 223 is set to ON (S2706). Then, when it is determined that the stop type selection flag 223f is off (S2706: No), the present process is terminated as it is. On the other hand, in the process of S2706, when it is determined that the stop type selection flag 223f is on (S2706: Yes), the stop type selection flag 223f is set to off (S2707), and then the command determination process (FIG. 132). In the process of S2206 of (see), the extracted stop type is acquired (S2708), and the acquired stop type is set (S2709). Next, based on the set stop type, a display stop type command for notifying the display control device 114 of the stop type is set (S2710), and this process is terminated.

Next, the storage state monitoring process (S2113) will be described with reference to FIG. 137. FIG. 137 is a flowchart showing this storage state monitoring process (S2113). This storage state monitoring process (S2113) is one of the main processes (see FIG. 131) executed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113, and the spheres are stored in the storage flow path 1231 (see FIG. 51). It is a process for determining that.

Here, in this control example, as shown in FIG. 51, a storage flow path 1231 is provided as a part of the storage device capable of storing balls on the game board 13, and a maximum of 10 balls can be stored. It is configured in.

A detection sensor 1240 is arranged at the upstream end of the storage flow path 1231, and the detection sensor 1240 detects the entry of a ball into the storage flow path 1231. Further, the sphere discharged from the downstream side of the storage flow path 1231 is detected by the specific area detection sensor 4860 or the non-specific area detection sensor 4870.

In the storage state monitoring process (S2113), first, it is determined whether the ball has passed through the first specific winning opening 1000a (that is, whether the passing of the ball has been detected by the detection sensor 1240) (S2801), and the first specific winning opening When the sphere has passed 1000a (S2801: Yes), 1 is added to the value of the storage counter 223n (S2802), and the process proceeds to S2803. On the other hand, if the ball has not passed through the first specific winning opening 1000a (S2801: No), the process proceeds to S2803.

In the process of S2803, it is determined whether the ball has passed through the discharge port 1150 (that is, whether the ball has been detected by the specific area detection sensor 4860 or the non-specific area detection sensor 4870) (S2803), and the discharge port 1150 is used as the ball. When it is determined that has passed (S2803: Yes), the value of the storage counter 223n is subtracted by 1 (S2804), and the process proceeds to S2805. On the other hand, when it is determined that the ball has not passed through the discharge port 1150 (S2803: No), the process proceeds to S2805.

In the processing of S2805, when it is determined whether the value of the storage counter 223n is 4 or more (S2805) and when it is determined that the value of the storage counter 223n is 4 or more (S2805: Yes), the storage state flag 223k is turned on. (S2806). When it is determined that the storage state flag 223k is not on (that is, it is off) (S2806: No), the storage state flag 223k is set to on (S2807), and the display median command is set (S2808). ), The process proceeds to S2812. On the other hand, when it is determined that the storage state flag 223k is on in the processing of S2806 (S2806: Yes), the process proceeds to the processing of S2812.

On the other hand, in the process of S2805, when it is determined that the value of the storage counter 223n is not 4 or more (that is, 3 or less) (S2805: No), it is determined whether the storage state flag 223k is on (S2805: No). S2809). When it is determined that the storage status flag 223k is on (S2809: Yes), the storage status flag 223k is set to off (S2810), a display shortage command is set (S2811), and the process proceeds to S2812. .. On the other hand, in the process of S2809, when it is determined that the storage state flag 223k is not on (that is, it is off) (S2809: No), the process proceeds to the process of S2812.

In the processing of S2812, if it is determined whether the value of the storage counter 223n is 10 (S2812) and if it is determined that the value of the storage counter 223n is 10 (S2812: Yes), the storage upper limit flag 223m is on. (S2813). When it is determined that the storage upper limit flag 223m is not on (that is, it is off) (S2813: No), the storage upper limit flag 223m is set to on (S2814), and the display full tank command is set (S2815). ), End this process. On the other hand, in the process of S2813, if it is determined that the storage state flag 223k is ON (S2813: Yes), this process is terminated as it is.

On the other hand, in the processing of S2812, when it is determined that the value of the storage counter 223n is not 10 (that is, 9 or less) (S2812: No), it is determined whether the storage upper limit flag 223m is on (S2816). ). When it is determined that the storage upper limit flag 223m is on (S2816: Yes), the storage upper limit flag 223m is set to off (S2817), a dissatisfaction command for display is set (S2818), and this process is terminated. On the other hand, in the process of S2816, if it is determined that the storage upper limit flag 223 m is not on (that is, it is off) (S2816: No), the present process is terminated as it is.

As described above, the settings of the storage state flag 223k and the storage upper limit flag 223m are configured to be updated at any time based on the detection results of the detection sensor 1240, the specific area detection sensor 4860, and the non-specific area detection sensor 4870.

As described above, in the storage state monitoring process (S2113) in the present embodiment, the storage status of the spheres in the storage flow path 1231 is determined, and various flags (storage state flag 223k, storage upper limit flag 223m) are set. Therefore, the voice lamp control device 113 can perform an effect based on the storage state of the storage flow path 1231.

In the above description, the number of balls entered in the storage channel 1231 based on the detection result of the detection sensor 1240 and the number of discharged balls based on the detection results of the specific area detection sensor 4860 and the non-specific area detection sensor 4870. The number of is calculated, but it is not limited to this.

For example, a sensor for detecting the presence or absence of a sphere is arranged at an arbitrary position in the storage flow path 1231, and the sphere is stored downstream of the sensor based on the lapse of a predetermined period in the state where the sphere is detected by the sensor. It may be determined that there is. As an example, when a sensor is arranged at a position where the third ball from the downstream stops, the sensor causes three balls including two balls arranged on the downstream side of the storage flow path 1231. It can be determined that it is stored in.

Further, if the detection of the ball by the sensor is continued even after the opening / closing plate 1300 is closed, it can be suspected that the ball is illegally stopped. Therefore, it is illegal to notify the error. Can be detected early. That is, the sensor that detects the spheres can be used for both detecting the number of spheres stored in the storage flow path 1231 and detecting fraud.

Next, the lamp output process (S2103) will be described with reference to FIG. 138. FIG. 138 is a flowchart showing this lamp output process (S2103). This lamp output process (S2103) is one process (see FIG. 131) executed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113, and sets a lamp lighting command transmitted to the lamp display device 227. It is a process for.

Here, in this control example, as the lamp display device 227 (see FIG. 93), in addition to the above-described configuration, the decorative lamp 227a (described above) used for the effect and the like provided throughout the pachinko machine 10. (Including the illuminated parts 29 to 33, the indicator lamp 34, etc.) and the lining front plate 1200 (see FIG. 5) provided so as to cover the storage flow path 1231, the inside of the lining front plate 1200 is A transmission lamp 227b (see FIG. 86) for making the transmission state visible to the player and another lamp 227z are provided.

When the lamp output process (S2103) is executed, it is first determined whether or not the current state is within a predetermined period (30 seconds) after the start-up process of the voice lamp control device 113 is executed (S2901). Here, a predetermined period is measured using a timer (not shown) timed by the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113. If it is determined that the time is within 30 seconds in the process of S2901 (S2901: Yes), the transmission lamp lighting command (strong) is set (S2903), and the process proceeds to the process of S2905.

When the transmission lamp lighting command (strong) is set, all of the transmission lamps 227ba to 227be are controlled to be lit (intensity).

Here, in this control example, the lining front plate 1200 is provided so that it is possible to configure a state in which it is difficult for the player to visually recognize the internal state of the storage flow path 1231 and the operating state of the interference member 6930 in the normal game state. There is. As described above, the lining front plate 1200 is configured to change from a shielded state to a transmitted state by irradiating a predetermined light (light of a transmitting lamp) from the back surface.

Then, during a predetermined period (a predetermined period after the start-up process is executed) after the power is turned on to the game machine, the transmission lamp is lit regardless of the game state. As a result, immediately after the power is turned on to the pachinko machine 10, that is, at the timing when the clerk inspects the pachinko machine 10, the inside of the storage flow path 1231 covered by the lining front plate 1200 can be easily visually recognized. it can.

On the other hand, in the process of S2901 when it is determined that the current state is not within a predetermined period (30 seconds) after the start-up process of the voice lamp control device 113 is executed (after the predetermined period (30 seconds) has elapsed) ( S2901: No), then it is determined whether the detection sensor 1240 has detected the passage of the ball (S2902). In the process of S2902, when the detection sensor 1240 detects the passage of a ball (S2902: Yes), a transmission lamp lighting command (strong) is set so that the player can visually recognize the ball that has passed the detection sensor 1240 (strong). S2903), the process proceeds to S2906.

In this case, the transmission lamp lighting command is a transmission lamp 227b for a sufficient time (for example, 2.0 seconds) for the ball to pass through the area covered by the lining front plate 1200 in the storage flow path 1231. Is set to light up, and while the permeation state is maintained during the period when the ball flows down the storage flow path 1231, the permeation state can be canceled after the ball is stopped. It is not limited to this. For example, the transmission lamp 227b is turned off (shielded from the transmission state) on the condition that the ball has passed through the discharge port 1150 or the specific area detection sensor 4860 or the non-specific area detection sensor 4870 has detected the passage of the ball. It may be configured to change to a state). As a result, the lining front plate 1200 can be maintained in a permeated state for the period during which the spheres remain in the storage flow path 1231.

In the process of S2902, if the detection sensor 1240 does not detect the passage of the ball (S2902: No), then it is determined whether the transmission lamp-related command is set (S2904), and the transmission lamp-related command is set. If this is the case (S2904: Yes), a predetermined transmission lamp lighting command is set (S2905), and the process proceeds to S2906. On the other hand, if the transmission lamp-related command is not set (S2904: No), the process proceeds to S2906 as it is.

The setting of the transmission lamp-related command is mainly executed by the ball number confirmation process (S3004) described later in FIG. 140.

Returning to FIG. 138, the description will be continued. In the process of S2906, a decorative lamp lighting command is set according to the current state (game state) (S2906), and this process is terminated. The decorative lamp lighting command is set in various ways according to the fluctuation pattern to be executed, the current game state, and the like.

Next, the button input monitoring / effect processing (S2107) will be described with reference to FIG. 139. FIG. 139 is a flowchart showing the contents of the button input monitoring / effect processing (S2107). In this button input monitoring / effect processing (2107), the input of whether or not the operation button 300 operated by the player is pressed in order to enhance the effect is monitored, and when the input of the operation button 300 is confirmed. This is a process for setting the corresponding effect. In this process, when an operation on the operation button 300 is detected, an operation button effect command for notifying the display control device 114 that the operation button 300 has been operated is set, and various flags based on the operation content are set. The settings are made.

Specifically, first, during the round game R of the fourth round, it is determined whether or not the operation timing of the operation button 300 during the period during which the timing effect (operation effect) is executed is the pressing success period. You can set a transparent lamp lighting command to execute the lamp lighting based on the judgment result, or set a display command to display the accompanying ball number grasping effect (success effect, failure effect, impossible effect). (See FIG. 140). Secondly, in the interval period after the end of the fourth round game R, the operation timing of the operation button 300 during the period in which the timing effect (operation effect) is executed is either the pressing success period or the pressing success period. It is determined whether the period is the push-down failure period, and a display command for displaying the effect (great success effect, success effect, failure effect) based on the result is set.

When the button input monitoring / effect processing (S2107) is executed, it is first determined whether or not the effect execution flag 223x is set to ON (S3001). Then, in the process of S3001, when it is determined that the effect execution flag 223x is on (S3001: Yes), then it is determined whether the jackpot type of the jackpot currently being executed is the jackpot k (S3002). .. In the processing of S3002, if it is determined that the jackpot is k (S3002: Yes), it is determined whether it is an interval period (S3003), and if it is an interval period (S3003: Yes), the process proceeds to S3005. On the other hand, in the processing of S3002, when it is determined that the jackpot is not k (that is, the jackpot is K, L, M, N) (S3002: No), or in the processing of S3003, it is not in the interval (that is, the round game). If it is determined (S3003: No), the number of balls confirmation process is executed (S3004), and this process is terminated.

Here, the number of balls confirmation process (S3004) executed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113 will be described with reference to FIG. 140. FIG. 140 is a flowchart showing a ball number confirmation process (S3004). This ball number confirmation process (S3004) is a process executed in the button input monitoring / effect process (see S2107 in FIG. 139) of the main process (see FIG. 131) executed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113. is there.

This ball number confirmation process (S3004) monitors the input of whether or not the operation button 300 operated by the player is pressed in order to enhance the effect, and corresponds to the case where the input of the operation button 300 is confirmed. This is a process for setting the effect. In this process, when an operation on the operation button 300 is detected, various flags are set based on the operation content, a transparent lamp lighting command for executing lamp lighting is set, and the like, as described above. A display command for displaying the accompanying effect of grasping the number of balls (success effect, failure effect, impossible effect) is set.

When the number of balls confirmation process (S3004) is executed, first, it is determined whether the first input flag 223wc is on (S3101), and when it is determined that the first input flag 223wc is on (S3101: Yes). Since the transmission lamp lighting command and the display ball number grasping related command have already been set, this process is terminated as it is, and the process returns to the button input monitoring / effect process (S2107).

On the other hand, in the process of S3101, when it is determined that the first input flag 223wc is not on (that is, is off) (S3101: No), then it is determined whether the operation (pressing down) of the operation button 300 is detected. (S3102). When the operation (pushing down) of the operation button 300 is detected (S3102: Yes), it is determined whether or not the number of balls is within the grasping period (S3103).

Here, the ball number grasping period means a period in which the display pointer 719 coincides with the bar display unit 717 at least in part in the timing effect (operation effect) described above (see FIG. 88 (b)). The length of this ball number grasping period can be adjusted according to the relationship between the size and operating speed of the display pointer 719 and the width of the bar display unit 717.

In this control example, the display pointer 719 is a circle with a diameter of 3 [cm], its operating speed is 20 [cm / s], and the width of the bar display unit 717 is 1 [cm]. In this case, the period for grasping the number of balls is 0.2 [s] because it is the same as the time for the display pointer 719 to move by 4 [cm].

In the process of S3103, when it is determined that the number of balls is within the period (S3103: Yes), the command for success in grasping the number of display balls is set (S3104), and the transmission lamp lighting command (strong / long) is set (S3105). ), The process proceeds to S3111.

Here, when the display ball number grasping success command is set, the display prompting the grasping of the number of balls stored in the storage flow path 1231 (for example, the character display "Attention to the attacker !!") is displayed as the third symbol. It is executed in the device 81, "good" is displayed as the result display mode 720, and the button display mode 715 schematically showing the operation button 300 is changed to the pressed state mode (see FIG. 88 (b)).

Further, the transmission lamp lighting command (strong / long) is set so that the transmission lamps 227ba to 227be are lit at least from the fourth round round game R to the fifth round round game R.

On the other hand, in the process of S3103, when it is determined that the operation button 300 is not within the period of the number of balls (that is, the operation of the operation button 300 is executed at the timing when the display pointer 719 and the bar display unit 717 are out of alignment (see FIG. 89)). (S3103: No), the command for failing to grasp the number of display balls is set (S3106), the transmissive lamp lighting command (medium / long) is set (S3107), and the process proceeds to S3111.

Here, when the display ball number grasping failure command is set, the display prompting to grasp the number of balls stored in the storage flow path 1231 is not displayed, "bad" is displayed as the result display mode 720, and the operation is performed. The button display mode 715 schematically showing the button 300 is changed to the pressed state mode (see FIG. 89).

Further, the transmission lamp lighting command (medium / long) is set so that only the transmission lamp 227ba is lit at least from the fourth round round game R to the fifth round round game R.

On the other hand, when it is determined that the operation of the operation button 300 is not detected in the process of S3102 (S3102: No), the process proceeds to the process of S3108. In the process of S3108, it is determined whether or not the time limit (in this control example, 3 seconds from the start of the fourth round game R) has elapsed (S3108). When it is determined that the time limit has passed (S3108: Yes), a command for not grasping the number of display balls is set (S3109), a transmission lamp lighting command (weak / short) is set (S3110), and the process proceeds to S3111. Transition. On the other hand, in the process of S3108, if it is determined that the time limit has not elapsed (less than 3 seconds from the start of the round game R in the fourth round), this process is terminated and the button input monitoring / effect process (S2107). ) Return.

Here, when the command for not grasping the number of display balls is set, the display prompting to grasp the number of balls stored in the storage flow path 1231 is not displayed, and the result display mode 720 (see FIG. 89) is not displayed, and the operation is performed. The button display mode 715 schematically showing the button 300 also does not change (see FIG. 88 (a)).

Further, the transmission lamp lighting command (weak / short) is set so that the transmission lamps 227ba to 227be are turned off in the subsequent round game R.

As described above, in this control example, the player can obtain the player by operating the operation button 300 rather than not operating the operation button 300 from the display on the third symbol display device 81 and the lighting mode of the transmission lamp 227b. It is controlled so that the profit is large. Further, when operating the operation button 300, it is better to operate the operation button 300 during the ball number grasping period (0.2 seconds in this control example) than to perform the operation at other timings, the third symbol display device 81. It is controlled so that the profit obtained by the player is increased from the display in the above and the lighting mode of the transmission lamp 227b.

Therefore, the player can improve the motivation to operate the operation button 300 during the fourth round game R, and can concentrate on the operation. Then, the operation of the operation button 300 is executed according to the display performed by the third symbol display device 81. Therefore, the line of sight of the player who is trying to operate the operation button 300 can be gathered on the third symbol display device 81.

In the process of S3111, the first input flag 223wc is set to on (S3111). The first input flag 223wc is set to on by the operation of the operation button 300 (or the passage of the time limit), and while the first input flag 223wc is set to on, the ball number confirmation process (S3004) is skipped. Therefore, in the ball number confirmation process (S3004), only the first operation (push down) of the operation button 300 is valid.

Therefore, it is possible to urge the player to avoid the operation mode in which the operation button 300 is blindly repeatedly hit, and to carefully plan the timing of operating the operation button 300. Further, by executing the display prompting this (display of alerting) on the third symbol display device 81, it is possible to suppress the player from repeatedly hitting the operation button 300, so that the operation of the operation button 300 can be suppressed. It is possible to prevent the number of times from exceeding the useful number of times at an early stage, and it is possible to improve the durability of the operation button 300.

When the process of S3111 is completed, this process is terminated and the process returns to the button input monitoring / effect process (S2107).

It will be described back to FIG. 139. In the process of S3005, it is determined whether or not the second input flag 223wd is on (S3005). When it is determined that the second input flag 223wd is on (S3005: Yes), since the display operation button-related effect command has already been set, this process is terminated as it is, and the button input monitoring / effect process (S2107). Return to.

On the other hand, in the process of S3005, when it is determined that the second input flag 223wd is not on (that is, it is off) (S3005: No), it is determined whether the operation flag 223p is on (S3006). The fact that the operation flag 223p is set to ON (see S1405 in FIG. 125 and S2218 and S2219 in FIG. 132) is an effect for changing the state of the interference member 6930 to the overhanging state (see FIGS. 90 and 91). It means that the operation (pushing down) of the operation button 300 was executed in (see S1403 in FIG. 125). In other words, it means that the state change of the interfering member 6930 to the overhanging state is executed.

When it is determined that the operation flag 223p is on (S3006: Yes), the operation flag 223p is set to off (S3007), and the round is based on the value of the storage counter 223n at the end of the fourth round game R. After subtracting the value obtained by dividing the elapsed time of the interval by 0.2 by 0.2, it is determined whether or not the number of remaining balls indicated by the value obtained by further subtracting 2 is 4 (S3008). The value calculated in S3008 corresponds to the number of spheres left on the upstream side of the interference member 6930 in the storage flow path 1231.

Here, the value calculated in S3008 is 4, when the display pointer 719d is in a position where at least a part of the display pointer 719d coincides with the second band portion 716b in the vertical direction in the timing effect (operation effect). It is controlled so that it is the case when the operation is executed (see FIG. 90 (b)). Here, the period during which the display pointer 719d is in a position where at least a part of the display pointer 719d coincides with the second band portion 716b at the top and bottom depends on the relationship between the size and operating speed of the display pointer 719 and the width of the second band portion 716b. , The length can be adjusted.

In this control example, as described above, the display pointer 719 is a circle having a diameter of 3 [cm], and the width of the second band portion 716b is newly set to 4.2 [cm]. Since the period required for one ball to be discharged from the storage flow path 1231 is 0.2 seconds, it is assumed that the period required for the display pointer 719 to pass through the second band portion 716b is 0.1 seconds. , The operating speed of the display pointer 719 is 72 [cm / s]. After being set in this way, the display pointer 719 is controlled so that its left end reaches the right end of the second band portion 716b at a timing of 0.7 seconds from the start of the interval period (0.8 seconds). At the timing, its right end passes the left end of the second band portion 716b). In this control example, by controlling in this way, the period in which the display pointer 719 coincides with the second band portion 716b at least in the vertical direction can be limited to 0.1 seconds.

When it is determined that the number of remaining balls is 4 in the process of S3008 (S3008: Yes), the display operation button great success effect command is set (S3009), and the process proceeds to the process of S3014.

Here, when the display operation button great success effect command is set, a display indicating that the player can obtain the highest profit as a result of the timing effect (operation effect) is executed on the third symbol display device 81. (See FIG. 90 (b)).

On the other hand, in the process of S3008, when it is determined that the number of remaining balls is not 4, (S3008: No), it is determined whether the number of remaining balls is 5 or more (S3010). Here, the reason why the number of remaining balls is 5 or more in S3010 is that in the timing effect (operation effect), the operation of the operation button 300 is performed when all of the display pointers 719d are in positions that vertically match the first band portion 716a. Is controlled so as to be the case when is executed (see FIG. 91 (a)). That is, it corresponds to the case where the operation button 300 is operated (when the operation is too early) before 0.7 seconds have elapsed from the start of the interval period.

If it is determined in the process of S3010 that the number of remaining balls is 5 or more (S3010: Yes), the display operation button success effect command is set (S3011), and the process proceeds to the process of S3014.

Here, when the display operation button success effect command is set, the player can obtain a medium profit (that is, neither the highest nor the lowest profit) as a result of the timing effect (operation effect). The indicated display is executed in the third symbol display device 81 (see FIG. 91 (a)).

On the other hand, in the process of S3010, when it is determined that the number of remaining balls is not 5 or more (that is, the number of remaining balls is 3 or less) (S3010: No), or the operation flag 223p is not set to ON. When the time limit (1.5 seconds in this control example) has elapsed (S3012: Yes), the display operation button failure effect command is set (S3013), and the process proceeds to S3014.

Here, the reason why the number of remaining balls is 3 or less in S3010 is that in the timing effect (operation effect), the operation of the operation button 300 is performed when all of the display pointers 719d are in positions that vertically match the third band portion 716c. Is controlled so as to be the case when is executed (see FIG. 91 (b)). That is, it corresponds to the case where the operation button 300 is operated after 0.8 seconds have elapsed from the start of the interval period (when the operation is too late), or when the operation button 300 is not operated.

Here, when the display operation button failure effect command is set, a display indicating that the player can obtain the minimum profit as a result of the timing effect (operation effect) is executed on the third symbol display device 81. (See FIG. 91 (b)).

As described above, in this control example, the profit obtained by the player is greater when the operation button 300 is operated than when the operation button 300 is not operated, and the display on the third symbol display device 81 also changes accordingly. Is controlled. Further, when operating the operation button 300, the operation is performed at the timing when the number of remaining balls becomes 4 (from the start of the interval period to the elapse of 0.7 seconds until the elapse of 0.8 seconds). It is controlled so that the highest profit is obtained, the profit is medium before the timing, and the lowest profit is obtained after the timing.

Therefore, the player can improve the motivation to operate the operation button 300 in the interval period immediately after the round game R in the fourth round, and can select the operation mode of the operation button 300.

That is, if the player wants to obtain at least a medium profit, he / she can obtain a medium profit without risk by pressing the operation button 300 immediately after the start of the interval period (stable). Profitable). On the other hand, if you want to get the highest profit, if the operation is delayed even a little, you will not get the medium profit and you will get the lowest profit, so you should consider the disadvantage and perform the operation. (Profit is unstable and fluctuates greatly).

By differentiating the operation mode of the operation button 300 in this way, the player selects a person who can stably obtain a medium profit or a person who is unstable but can obtain the highest profit. be able to.

Therefore, it is possible to concentrate on the operation of the operation button 300. Then, the operation of the operation button 300 is executed according to the display performed by the third symbol display device 81. Therefore, the line of sight of the player who is trying to operate the operation button 300 can be gathered on the third symbol display device 81.

In the process of S3014, the second input flag 223wd is set to on (S3014). The second input flag 223wd is set on by the operation of the operation button 300 (or the passage of the time limit), and while the second input flag 223wd is set to on, the button input monitoring / effect processing (S2107) is performed. Since it is skipped (S3005), only the first operation (pressing down) of the operation button 300 is valid in the button input monitoring / effect processing (S2107).

Therefore, it is possible to urge the player to avoid the operation mode in which the operation button 300 is blindly repeatedly hit, and to carefully plan the timing of operating the operation button 300. Further, by executing the display prompting this (display of alerting) on the third symbol display device 81, it is possible to suppress the player from repeatedly hitting the operation button 300, so that the operation of the operation button 300 can be suppressed. It is possible to prevent the number of times from exceeding the useful number of times at an early stage, and it is possible to improve the durability of the operation button 300.

According to this control example described in detail above, the following excellent effects are obtained.

The visibility of the inside of the storage flow path 1231 was changed depending on the lighting mode of the transmission lamps 227ba to 227be. As a result, the number of spheres stored in the storage flow path 1231 and the ease of grasping the operation mode of the interference device 6900 can be changed.

In order to maintain high visibility inside the storage flow path 1231, it is necessary to remove the line of sight from the storage flow path 1231, pay attention to the liquid crystal display device (third symbol display device 81), and participate in the timing effect (operation effect). It was configured to be As a result, it is possible to prevent a situation in which the jackpot game ends while the player's line of sight is concentrated on the first variable winning device 6000.

Further, pay attention to the first variable winning device 6000 in which the storage flow path 1231 is arranged when the storage flow path 1231 becomes a transparent state as a result of the player operating the operation button 300 in the timing effect (operation effect). It was configured to display a prompt to do so. As a result, it is possible to encourage the player's line of sight paying attention to the liquid crystal display device (third symbol display device 81) to be transferred to the storage flow path 1231 when necessary.

On the liquid crystal display device (third symbol display device 81), a circle is displayed so that the range of the number of spheres stored in the storage flow path 1231 can be grasped. As a result, the player can easily predict the internal state of the storage flow path 1231 by visually recognizing the liquid crystal display device, and can easily determine how many more balls should be fired before the specified number of prizes are won. be able to. Therefore, the launch mode of the ball can be easily selected.

As the timing effect (operation effect) performed by the liquid crystal display device (third symbol display device 81), the quality is different for the player (in this control example, the visibility of the storage flow path 1231 and the prize ball are paid out. When the timing effect (operation effect) that gives the benefit of (the one that is directly connected to) is executed continuously, the operation timing that gives the best benefit to the player is grasped as the same timing (similar timing) for the player. It was configured to be. As a result, even when the transition from the earlier timing effect (operation effect) to the later timing effect (operation effect) occurs immediately, the player can perform the operation without discomfort.

Depending on the jackpot type, in the predetermined round game R (6th round round game R), when the ball is discharged from the storage flow path 1231 (20th operation pattern, operation scenario 5) and when it is not discharged (21st). The operation pattern and the operation scenario 6) of the above are configured to occur. Thereby, it is possible to specify whether or not an excess prize is generated in a predetermined round game R depending on the jackpot type.

By making the predetermined inter-round interval period (for example, the interval period between the 4th and 5th rounds) different depending on the jackpot type, the inside of the storage flow path 1231 in the round game R immediately after the inter-round interval period. It was configured so that the state (number of stored balls) changed. As a result, even if the mode of state change of the first specific winning opening 1000a, the interference member 6930, and the specific region 4830 in the round game R is the same, the progress mode of the round game can be changed.

A predetermined number of balls (9 in this control example) different from the specified number (10 in this control example) of the predetermined round game R (4th round game R in this control example) are first. By ending the ball in the specific winning opening 1000a, the profit obtained by the player in the next round game R (in this control example, the fifth round game R) is maximized. did. As a result, it is possible to prevent the player from inadvertently digesting the jackpot game.

In a configuration in which the ball flows down toward the specific region 4830 as the first specific winning opening 1000a is closed, a specified number of balls flow into the first specific winning opening 1000a while the interfering member 6930 maintains the overhanging state. It was configured so that the ball could not enter. Thereby, the timing at which the first specific winning opening 1000a is closed at the end of the round game R can be defined by the operation mode of the interference member 6930, and the ball reaches the upstream of the first specific winning opening 1000a. The timing and the timing of the end of the round game R can be dissociated. That is, based on the operation mode of the interference member 6930, it is possible to specify the timing at which the first specific winning opening 1000a is closed with the end of the round game R.

In the open state of the first specific winning opening 1000a, the balls are easily retained in a state of being aligned on the upstream side of the first specific winning opening 1000a, and the retained balls are in a state in which the first specific winning opening 1000a is closed. It is configured to flow down toward the first specific winning opening 1000a at a changing timing. As a result, it is possible to collectively make it possible to enter a plurality of stagnant balls in the first specific winning opening 1000a, and it is possible to increase the possibility of excessive winning.

In addition, the number of excess prizes can be specified. As a result, it is possible to prevent the number of excess prizes from becoming excessive and hindering the playability.

Further, the presence or absence of excess winning is defined by the operating mode of the interference member 6930 arranged downstream of the first specific winning opening 1000a, and the operating mode of the interference member 6930 is predetermined based on the jackpot type. To. As a result, even if the ball is similarly retained on the upstream side of the first specific winning opening 1000a, it is possible to switch between the case where the excess winning occurs and the case where the excess winning does not occur based on the jackpot type.

Based on the operation timing of the operation button 300, the profit obtained by the player in the round game R (for example, the visibility inside the storage flow path 1231, the number of discharge balls discharged from the storage flow path 1231, and based on it. The presence or absence of the ball entering the specific area 4830 and the maximum number of balls entered in the round game R) are configured to change. As a result, the player's attention to the timing effect (operation effect) can be improved.

Based on the operation timing of the operation button 300, the two types of profits obtained by the player are configured to be seesawed, and the display device (third symbol) so that the player can grasp the mode of the profits obtained by the player. It is configured to be displayed by the display device 81). As a result, the player who visually recognizes the display of the display device can obtain the profit that matches the operation timing by selecting the operation timing and operating the operation button 300 based on the profit that he / she wants to obtain preferentially. Therefore, the motivation to participate in the timing effect (operation effect) can be increased.

Next, a second control example will be described with reference to FIGS. 141 to 143. First, with reference to FIG. 141, the details of the first type selection table 202b in the second control example will be described.

As shown in FIG. 141, "big hit P" is associated with the special symbol 1 in the range where the value of the first hit type counter C2 is "0 to 49". This "big hit P" is a big hit with 6 rounds. Of the 100 counter values that the first hit type counter C2 can take, 50 are counter values that become "big hit P", so if a big hit is achieved in the special symbol 1 lottery, "big hit P" is determined. The ratio is 50% (50/100).

For this "big hit P", 6 rounds are set as the number of rounds, and after the big hit ends, the special symbol and the normal symbol shift to the high probability state. In this control example, it is controlled so that at least one jackpot is determined between the transition of the special symbol to the high probability state and the transition to the low probability state. Therefore, it is an advantageous jackpot type in terms of ball ejection (expected ball ejection) that can be acquired by the player from the start of one jackpot until the gaming state returns to the normal state.

Further, with respect to the special symbol 1, the value of the first hit type counter C2 is defined in the range of "50 to 99" in association with "big hit Q". This "big hit Q" is a big hit with 6 rounds. Of the 100 counter values that the first hit type counter C2 can take, 50 counter values are "big hit Q", so if a big hit is achieved in the special symbol 1 lottery, "big hit Q" is determined. The ratio is 50% (50/100).

For this "big hit Q", 6 rounds are set as the number of rounds, and after the big hit is completed, the time saving state of the normal symbol is given 100 times.

On the other hand, for the second special symbol, "big hit m" is associated with the range (entire range) in which the value of the first hit type counter C2 is "0 to 99". This "big hit m" is a big hit with 6 rounds. Of the 100 counter values that the first hit type counter C2 can take, the counter value that becomes the "big hit m" is 100, so the "big hit m" is determined when a big hit is obtained in the special symbol 2 lottery. The ratio is 100%.

For this "big hit m", 6 rounds are set as the number of rounds, and after the big hit is completed, the special symbol and the normal symbol shift to the high probability state. In this control example, it is controlled so that at least one jackpot is determined between the transition of the special symbol to the high probability state and the transition to the low probability state. Therefore, it is an advantageous jackpot type in terms of ball ejection (expected ball ejection) that can be acquired by the player from the start of one jackpot until the gaming state returns to the normal state.

That is, the special symbol 1 and the special symbol 2 have the same number of rounds of the jackpot game, but the privilege (high probability state of the normal symbol or the high probability state of the special symbol) given after the jackpot ends is the special symbol 2. Is stipulated to be more advantageous (easier to shift to a high probability state).

As described above, in this control example, the case where the lottery of the special symbol 1 is a big hit, the case where the lottery of the special symbol 2 is a big hit shifts to a high probability state which is advantageous to the player. The structure makes it easy. Therefore, once the consecutive villa mode (high probability state of special symbol and time saving state of normal symbol) is set, the special symbol 2 is drawn by right-handed to enter the second entrance 640. Is easy to be executed and the jackpot game is easy to be repeated. Therefore, it is possible to have the player play the game for one purpose of shifting to the consecutive villa mode. Therefore, it is possible to improve the interest of the player in the game.

Next, in the sixth round of the round game R, the operation pattern is controlled to be different according to the jackpot type, which will be described with reference to FIG. 142. In this control example, the first variable winning device 9000 (see FIG. 66) described above in the ninth embodiment will be described.

FIG. 142 (a) is a diagram showing the time timing change of the opening / closing plate 8300 and the auxiliary opening / closing member 8340 in the 22nd operation pattern, and FIG. 142 (b) is a diagram showing the time change of the opening / closing plate 8300 and the auxiliary opening / closing member in the 23rd operation pattern. It is a figure which showed the time change of the member 8340, and FIG. 142 (c) is a figure which showed the time change of the opening / closing plate 8300 and the auxiliary opening / closing member 8340 in the 24th operation pattern.

In this control example, in the 6th round round game R of the jackpot P, the opening / closing plate 8300 and the auxiliary opening / closing member 8340 are driven by the 22nd operation pattern, and in the 6th round round game R of the jackpot Q, the 23rd The opening / closing plate 8300 and the auxiliary opening / closing member 8340 are driven by the operation pattern, and the opening / closing plate 8300 and the auxiliary opening / closing member 8340 are driven by the 24th operation pattern in the sixth round game R of the jackpot m.

As shown in FIG. 142 (a), in the 22nd operation pattern, the opening / closing plate 8300 and the auxiliary opening / closing member 8340 are maintained in the open state (that is, the regulating member 1600 is maintained in the stored state), and the round game R is started. After the waiting time TK (8 seconds in this control example) elapses, the interference member 6930 changes from the retracted state to the overhanging state.

The interference member 6930 returns to the retracted state by the end of the round game R (skip if the round game R ends before the waiting time TK). Here, in the round game R, the passage of a specified number of balls (10 in this control example) is detected at the first specific winning opening 1000a, or the maximum time of the round game R (in this control example, 10) is detected. It ends when 30 seconds) elapses.

In the sixth round round game R of the jackpot P in which the opening / closing plate 8300 and the auxiliary opening / closing member 8340 are driven and controlled in the 22nd operation pattern, a specified number (10 in this control example) before the standby time TK elapses. When the ball enters the first specific winning opening 1000a, the round game R ends without waiting for the waiting time TK.

On the other hand, if a specified number of balls do not enter the first specific winning opening 1000a before the waiting time TK elapses, the interference member 6930 is in an overhanging state, and 10 balls can be stored in the storage flow path 1231. Therefore, it becomes impossible to insert a specified number of balls into the first specific winning opening 1000a, and the time required for the round game R becomes the maximum value (30 seconds) of the first operating time T1.

The standby time TK (8 seconds in this control example) does not stop the firing of the ball even during the inter-round interval from the end of the fifth round round game R, and the ball continues even after the start of the sixth round round game R. By continuing the firing, a specified number (10 in this control example) of balls is set as a sufficiently reachable period in the first specific winning opening 1000a. In this control example, the ball is launched at intervals of 0.6 seconds.

On the other hand, for example, when the firing of the ball is stopped during the interval between rounds from the end of the fifth round game R and the firing of the ball is started at the start of the sixth round, the launched ball is released. From the balance with the time to reach the first specific winning opening 1000a (about 4.0 seconds), the specified number of balls (10 in this control example) is set in the first specific winning opening by the elapse of the waiting time TK. It cannot be passed through 1000a.

Therefore, the case where the ball firing is stopped at the inter-round interval immediately before the sixth round round game R is compared with the case where the ball firing is continued at the inter-round interval, the sixth round round game R. It can be configured to increase the time required for. As a result, it is possible to suppress the game mode in which the firing of the ball is stopped at the interval between rounds.

As shown in FIG. 142 (b), in the 23rd operation pattern, the opening / closing plate 8300 is maintained in the open state (that is, the regulating member 1600 is maintained in the stored state), while the standby time TK is before elapse. , Only the auxiliary opening / closing member 8340 is driven and controlled so as to open / close multiple times (open / close on one side as shown in FIG. 74). That is, the control in which the drive (excitation) is released for 0.025 seconds is executed a plurality of times.

It should be noted that the interference member 6930 changes its state from the retracted state to the overhanging state after the waiting time TK (8 seconds in this control example) elapses from the start of the round game R, which is the same as the 22nd operation pattern. ..

According to this operation pattern, not all the balls on the opening / closing plate 8300 enter the first specific winning opening 1000a, but some of the balls flow down toward the auxiliary entry opening 9111. It is possible to make it more difficult for a specified number of balls (10 in this control example) to pass through the first specific winning opening 1000a before the standby time TK (8 seconds in this control example) elapses than in the operation pattern. ..

Therefore, with a high probability, the round game R of the sixth round can be set to a long time (30 seconds). On the other hand, unlike the 22nd operation pattern, the prize balls can be paid out when the balls enter the auxiliary entry port 9111. Therefore, the number of prize balls to be paid out is larger than that of the 23rd operation pattern. can do.

As shown in FIG. 142 (c), in the 24th operation pattern, the opening / closing plate 8300 is maintained in the open state (that is, the regulating member 1600 is maintained in the stored state), while before and after the standby time TK elapses. , Only the auxiliary opening / closing member 8340 is driven and controlled so as to open / close multiple times (open / close on one side as shown in FIG. 74). That is, the control in which the drive (excitation) is released for 0.025 seconds is executed a plurality of times.

It should be noted that the interference member 6930 changes its state from the retracted state to the overhanging state after the waiting time TK (8 seconds in this control example) elapses from the start of the round game R in the 22nd operation pattern and the 23rd operation pattern. It is the same as the operation pattern.

In this operation pattern, not all the balls on the opening / closing plate 8300 enter the first specific winning opening 1000a, but some of the balls flow down toward the auxiliary entry opening 9111 (see FIG. 66). Similar to the 23rd operation pattern, the probability that the round game R ends can be reduced by passing a specified number of balls (10 in this control example) through the first specific winning opening 1000a.

Therefore, with a high probability, the round game R of the sixth round can be set to a long time (30 seconds). On the other hand, unlike the 23rd operation pattern, the ball can be entered into the auxiliary entry port 9111 (see FIG. 66) even after the waiting time TK has elapsed, so that the period is longer than that of the 23rd operation pattern. Throughout this, the payout of the prize ball due to the entry of the ball into the auxiliary entry port 9111 can be generated. Therefore, more prize balls can be paid out as compared with the 23rd operation pattern.

In this operation pattern, even after the interference member 6930 is in the overhanging state, it is controlled so that one-sided opening and closing occurs. That is, even after the storage flow path 1231 is filled with spheres (filled) and the spheres stay on the upstream side of the detection sensor 1240 (see FIG. 66), one-sided opening and closing occurs, so that the spheres are arranged. It is possible to easily guide the ball to the auxiliary ball entry port 9111 when opening and closing one side as compared with the case where is unspecified.

Next, the display in the sixth round of the round game R will be described with reference to FIGS. 143 (a) and 143 (b). 143 (a) and 143 (b) are schematic views showing an example of display contents for notifying the third symbol display device 81 that the sixth round round game R is being executed.

In addition, in FIG. 143 (a), an example of the display of the 6th round round game R when the jackpot type is "big hit P" or "big hit Q", or the 6th round round game when the jackpot type is "big hit m". A schematic diagram showing an example of the display before the lapse of the waiting time TK in R is shown, and in FIG. 143 (b), the waiting time TK in the sixth round round game R when the jackpot type is “big hit m” is shown. A schematic diagram showing an example of the display after the lapse is shown.

That is, when the jackpot type is "big hit P" or "big hit Q", the display command is set so that the display shown in FIG. 143 (a) is maintained over the round game R, and the jackpot type is "big hit". In the case of "m", the display command is set so that the display shown in FIG. 143 (a) is maintained, and then the display is switched to the display shown in FIG. 143 (b) after the waiting time TK elapses. The display command is set so that the display shown in FIG. 143 (b) is maintained until the end of the round game R.

As shown in FIGS. 143 (a) and 143 (b), the third symbol display device 81 indicates that the round number display unit 714 that displays the current number of rounds is in the sixth round round game R. A sub-round display unit 714b is displayed in the upper left corner of the screen in the mode, and below the round number display unit 714, indicating that an additional prize ball can be expected in the round game R.

In FIG. 143 (a), the round number display unit 714 is light-emitting (displayed brightly), while the sub-round display unit 714b is turned off (displayed dark), and in FIG. 143 (b), conversely, the number of rounds is displayed. While the unit 714 is turned off (displayed dark), the sub-round display unit 714b is displayed (displayed brightly).

That is, in this control example, the round game R is executed by the display of the mode shown in FIG. 143 (a) during the period in which the prize balls are mainly paid out when the balls are entered into the first specific winning opening 1000a. In addition to notifying the player of this, after the waiting time TK has elapsed, although it is no longer possible to expect the prize ball to be paid out when the ball enters the first specific winning opening 1000a, due to the entry into the auxiliary entry opening 9111. It is possible to make the player recognize that the period in which the payout of the prize ball can be expected is continued.

Here, by changing the display on the sub-round display unit 714b, it is possible for the player to easily recognize the change in the substantial profit obtained by the player by entering the ball. That is, the number of prize balls paid out when one ball enters the auxiliary entry port 9111 is three as described above, which is 1/5 of the case where the ball enters the first specific winning opening 1000a. Is. The player can easily recognize the change in the number of prize balls with respect to the number of balls entered.

Further, the ball flows to the auxiliary entry port 9111 only when the ball is arranged between the opening / closing plate 8300 and the auxiliary opening / closing member 8340 within a short time when the auxiliary opening / closing member 8340 is opened. The ball does not always flow to the auxiliary entry port 9111 every time the auxiliary opening / closing member 8340 is opened.

Therefore, the frequency of ball entry into the auxiliary entry port 9111 during the period when the sub-round display unit 714b emits light (displays brightly) is the period during which the round number display unit 714 emits light (displays brightly). It is lower than the frequency of balls entering the first specific winning opening 1000a.

In this way, according to this control example, while notifying that the period of the round game R has not ended, the profit obtained by the player (change in the prize ball paid out by entering one ball, or a ball). It is possible to simultaneously notify that a change has occurred in the frequency of ball entry.

In an example of the display in the sixth round of the round game R shown in FIG. 143 (b), the character "+ chance" is displayed as the above-mentioned excess winning possibility increase notification mode 721. In this control example, the character "+ chance" may cause a ball to enter the auxiliary entry port 9111 by firing a ball, and a prize ball may be entered by the ball entering the auxiliary entry port 9111. Corresponds to being able to receive a payout.

As described above, in this control example, in the round game R, it is controlled to pay out an additional prize ball due to the ball entering the auxiliary ball entry port 9111. Therefore, in the round game R, the number of prize balls paid out to the player when a specified number of balls (10 in this control example) enters the first specific winning opening 1000a (150 in this control example). More than the number of prize balls (excess prize balls) can be paid out.

In particular, in the 24th operation pattern, there is a high possibility that the ball will enter the auxiliary entry port 9111 even after the waiting time TK has elapsed, and the game is compared with the other 22nd operation pattern and the 23rd operation pattern. The number of prize balls paid out to a person can be large. On the other hand, in the operation pattern in this control example, the driving mode of the interference member 6930 is the same.

That is, in the 22nd to 24th operation patterns in this control example, the number of prize balls paid out to the player can be different while the driving mode of the interference member 6930 is the same.

Since the maximum number of times the ball enters the auxiliary ball entry port 9111 corresponds to the number of times the auxiliary opening / closing member 8340 opens / closes in the round game R, the above-mentioned excess is achieved by setting the number of times the auxiliary opening / closing member 8340 opens / closes. The number of prize balls can be adjusted.

According to this control example described in detail above, the following excellent effects are obtained.

In the inter-round interval period, when the ball firing is stopped, the period required for the next round game R is likely to be longer than when the ball firing is continued in the inter-round interval period. As a result, it is possible to suppress the game mode in which the firing of the ball is stopped during the interval period between rounds.

Depending on the driving mode of the opening / closing plate 8300 and the auxiliary opening / closing member 8340 (that is, whether or not the above-mentioned "one-sided opening / closing" occurs), the number of prize balls paid out to the player in the round game R can be positively changed. .. In other words, whether the ball that has reached the opening / closing plate 8300 and the auxiliary opening / closing member 8340 passes through the first specific winning opening 1000a or the auxiliary entry opening 9111 is determined by the opening / closing plate 8300 and the auxiliary opening / closing member. It can be switched depending on the driving mode of 8340.

Thereby, the timing at which the ball is likely to be guided to the auxiliary entry port 9111 and the timing at which the ball is difficult to be guided to the auxiliary entry port 9111 can be separated and configured. Therefore, for example, during the period of the round game R, the timing at which the ball is likely to be guided to the auxiliary entry port 9111 can be concentrated in a part of the period. In this case, the balls that have reached the movable object that circulates are sorted in the order of arrival, and a predetermined number of the reached balls is guided to the winning opening (the winning opening corresponding to the auxiliary entry opening 9111). As a result, the attention power in the vicinity of the auxiliary ball entrance 9111 can be improved.

That is, the number of launched balls can be reduced relative to the number of payouts by launching the ball at a timing when the ball is likely to be guided to the auxiliary entry port 9111 and stopping the firing of the ball at other timings.

On the other hand, the timing at which the ball should be launched with the aim of winning the auxiliary ball opening 9111 is configured to be different based on the jackpot type. As a result, it is possible to request the player to change the firing mode of the ball for each jackpot game, so that it is easy to prevent the player from playing the jackpot game indiscriminately. In addition, by making it difficult to grasp the type of jackpot, it is possible to prevent the occurrence of a strategy, which is an excessive profit for a specific player (experienced player) (for example, the number of balls paid out rather than the number of shot balls). Can be prevented from occurring.

The auxiliary ball entry port 9111 is arranged at a position where the ball is not guided (difficult to be guided) when the opening / closing plate 8300 is not driven (non-excited). As a result, the player's ability to concentrate on the game can be improved as compared with the case where the ball is guided to the auxiliary ball entry port 9111 at the timing when the opening / closing plate 8300 and the auxiliary opening / closing member 8340 are not driven.

In the round game R, it is easy for the player to grasp the change in the expected value of the number of prize balls paid out with respect to the number of balls reaching the first variable winning device 9000 from the display of the display device (third symbol display device 81). It was configured as follows. As a result, during the continuation of the same round game R, the player can easily select whether to continue firing the ball or stop firing the ball from the display on the display device.

Next, a third control example will be described with reference to FIGS. 144 to 148. First, the ROM 202 in the third control example will be described with reference to FIG. 144. FIG. 144 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the ROM 202 in the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 in the third control example. The ROM 202 includes a first random number table 202a, a second random number table 202c, a first hit type selection table 202b, a variation pattern selection table 202d, an opening / closing plate and an interference member operation scenario storage area 202e, and an opening / closing plate. In addition to the interference member operation scenario table 202f, at least a small hit type selection table 202g is provided.

This small hit type selection table 202g is used to select the small hit type when a small hit is made based on the entry of a game ball into the first entry port 64 or the second entry opening 640. Is something that can be done.

The contents of the first random number table 202a will be described with reference to FIG. 145. FIGS. 145 (a) to 145 (c) are schematic views schematically showing the contents of the first random number table 202a.

In the first random number table 202a, as shown in FIG. 145 (a), whether or not the value of the first random number counter C3 acquired when the game ball enters the first entry port 64 is a big hit. It is determined whether or not the value of the special symbol 1 random number table 202a1 for determining whether or not the value of the first random number counter C3 acquired when the game ball enters the second winning opening 640 is a big hit. This is a table in which the special symbol 2 random number table 202a2 for the purpose is set.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 145 (b), the special symbol 1 random number table 202a1 is a random number value determined to be a hit in the lottery of the first special symbol based on the entry into the first entry port 64. This is a table in which (judgment value) is set. In the lottery of the first special symbol, it is determined whether or not the value of the acquired first random number counter C3 is "0", and if it is "0", it is determined that it is a big hit. Further, it is determined whether the value of the acquired first random number counter C3 is "1 to 3", and if it is "1 to 3", it is determined to be a small hit. In addition, when it is determined that the value is "4 to 319", it is determined that the value is out of alignment.

On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 145 (c), the special symbol 2 random number table 202a2 is a random number value (judgment value) determined to be a hit in the lottery of the second special symbol based on the ball entering the second winning opening 640. Is a set table. In the lottery of the second special symbol, it is determined whether or not the value of the acquired first random number counter C3 is "0", and if it is "0", it is determined that it is a big hit. Further, it is determined whether the value of the acquired first random number counter C3 is "1 to 318", and if it is "1 to 318", it is determined to be a small hit. In addition, when it is determined to be "319", it is determined to be out of order.

As described above, the first random number counter C3 in the pachinko machine 10 of this control example is configured as a 2-byte loop counter in the range of 0 to 319. In this first random number counter C3, at the time of lottery of the first special symbol based on the entry into the first ball entrance 64, the number of random numbers that becomes the jackpot of the first special symbol is one, and the total number of random numbers is Of the 320, the total number of random numbers that will be big hits is 1, so the probability of being big hits for the first special symbol is "1/320". Further, since the total number of random numbers that are small hits is 3, the probability of being a small hit of the first special symbol is "3/320".

On the other hand, at the time of the lottery of the second special symbol based on the entry into the second winning opening 640, the number of random numbers that becomes the jackpot of the second special symbol is one, and the total number of random numbers is 320. Since the total number of random numbers is 1, the probability of becoming a jackpot for the second special symbol is "1/320". Further, since the total number of random numbers that are small hits is 318, the probability of small hits of the second special symbol is "318/320".

As in each of the above-described embodiments or control examples, when it is determined that the normal symbol is a hit, after the variation display in the second symbol display device is completed, the stop symbol (second symbol) is marked with "○". The symbol is lit and displayed, and the electric accessory 640a is opened for a predetermined time.

The electric accessory 640a in the present embodiment is opened for 5 seconds or 0.5 seconds when the time is shortened, but is released only for 0.2 seconds when the time is not shortened. Therefore, even if the value of the second hit random number counter C5 is hit when the time is not shortened, it is difficult to make the game ball win the second winning opening 640. As a result, it is possible to suppress a game in which a ball is attempted to enter the second winning opening 640 even though the time is not reduced (the jackpot with a time reduction is not displayed).

FIG. 146 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the first type selection table 202b. The first hit type selection table 202b (see FIG. 146) is a data table in which judgment values for determining the jackpot type are stored, and the judgment values of the first hit type counter C4 are each stored. It is stipulated in association with the type of jackpot and the type of winning opening that triggered the lottery of special symbols. In the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, when it is determined that the special symbol is a big hit, the value of the first hit type counter C4 acquired based on the start winning prize is compared with the first hit type selection table 202b, and the first The jackpot type corresponding to the value of the hit type counter C4 is selected.

Specifically, when a big hit is obtained in the special symbol 1 lottery (lottery based on the entry into the first entry slot 64), the value of the first hit type counter C4 is in the range of "0 to 49". Is defined in association with a jackpot R (see 202b21 in FIG. 146).

When the jackpot R is reached, the jackpot game of 16 rounds is executed, and the game state after the jackpot game is completed becomes a time saving state (100 times) until the fluctuation of the special symbol is digested 100 times. In this case, the player can receive a payout of about 2400 prize balls.

The jackpot S is associated with the range in which the value of the first hit type counter C4 is "50 to 99" (see 202b22 in FIG. 146).

When the jackpot S is reached, the jackpot game of 16 rounds is executed, and the game state after the jackpot game is completed becomes the normal state. In this case, the player can receive the payout of about 2,400 prize balls, but cannot obtain the profit of the time saving state after the jackpot game is completed.

In the jackpot based on the lottery of the special symbol 1 (lottery based on the entry into the first ball entrance 64), the game state after the end of the jackpot game can be shortened with a probability of 50%. During the time saving, we will aim to get more big hits by the small hit game described later.

On the other hand, if a big hit is obtained in the special symbol 2 lottery (lottery based on the entry into the second winning opening 640), the value of the first hit type counter C4 is in the range of "0-9". n is associated and defined (see 202b23 in FIG. 146). The jackpot n gives the player the same profit as the jackpot R described above.

That is, 16 rounds of the jackpot game are executed, and the gaming state after the jackpot game is completed becomes a time saving state (100 times) until the fluctuation of the special symbol is digested 100 times. In this case, the player can receive a payout of about 2400 prize balls.

A jackpot p is associated with a range in which the value of the first hit type counter C4 is "10 to 99" (see 202b24 in FIG. 146). The jackpot p is provided with a difference in the number of fluctuations in the time-saving game while giving the player the same prize ball payout as the jackpot n described above.

That is, 16 rounds of the jackpot game are executed, and the gaming state after the jackpot game is completed becomes a time saving state (4 times) until the fluctuation of the special symbol is digested 4 times. In this case, the player can receive a payout of about 2400 prize balls.

As described above, the jackpot generated by the lottery of the special symbol 2 (lottery based on the entry into the second winning opening 640) shifts to the time saving state with a probability of 100%. Therefore, the possibility of winning the next big hit in a short time after the end of the big hit game is increased as compared with the case where the big hit is obtained in the lottery of the special symbol 1.

As described above, during the time reduction of the special symbol, the hit probability of the normal symbol is increased, the fluctuation time of the normal symbol is shortened (3 seconds), and the opening time of the electric accessory 640a when the normal symbol is hit is increased. It is set to be longer (5 seconds or 0.5 seconds). Therefore, it becomes easy to put the ball into the second winning opening 640, and the lottery of the special symbol 2 becomes easy to be performed. Then, if a big hit is obtained by the lottery of the special symbol 2, the time will be shortened after the big hit is completed, so that it becomes easier to obtain the big hit by the lottery of the special symbol 2.

Therefore, once it is possible to shift to the time saving state of the special symbol, the time saving state of the special symbol which is likely to be a big hit of the special symbol and is likely to be a big hit G when it becomes a big hit is likely to be repeated, so that the player can easily repeat the time saving state of the special symbol. It becomes easier to win a large number of prize balls. As a result, it is possible to make the player play the game while strongly expecting the player to shift to the time saving state of the special symbol, so that the player's interest in the game can be improved.

Further, in this control example, the number of spheres stored in the storage flow path 1231 is related to the number of reserved special symbols, and the spheres are in the specific area 4830 (in this control example, the next jackpot is obtained by passing the spheres). Whether or not to pass through the area to be determined (see FIG. 51) is determined, the details of which will be described later in FIG. 148.

Next, the contents of the small hit type selection table 202g will be described with reference to FIG. 147. FIGS. 147 (a) to 147 (c) are schematic views schematically showing the contents of the small hit type selection table 202 g.

The small hit type selection table 202g is a small hit based on the first entry opening 64, a special symbol 1 small hit selection table 202g1 for selecting the small hit type, and a small hit based on the second winning opening 640. It has a special symbol 2 small hit selection table 202g2 for selecting a hit type (see FIG. 147 (a)).

As shown in FIG. 147 (b), at the time of a small hit based on the first entry port 64, when the value of the small hit type counter C6 is "0 to 1", the small hit A is selected and "2 to 99". In the case of "", the small hit B is selected.

On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 147 (c), at the time of a small hit based on the second winning opening 640, when the value of the first hit type counter C6 is "0-9", the small hit A is selected and "10". In the case of "~ 99", the small hit B is selected.

In this control example, the operation of the opening / closing plate 1300 is set according to the small hit type (see FIG. 148). Although the details will be described later, the small hit A is a small hit that is given with a high probability of a big hit when the game ball passes through the specific area 4830, and the small hit B is a small hit that is not given a big hit with a high probability. ..

Further, in this control example, the jackpot given after the small hit A and the small hit B is configured to be the jackpot G (16R time-saving big hit).

In this embodiment, the type of jackpot to be given thereafter is determined according to the type of small hit, but as another specification, the lottery result of the second special symbol is a small hit. Also, the type of jackpot is determined by the jackpot selection table (only the jackpot right is acquired), and the jackpot that acquired the right earlier is executed when the game ball passes through the specific area 4830 in the subsequent small hit game. You may. By doing so, the player can select a small hit that passes through the specific area 4830, and the interest of the game can be improved.

FIG. 148 is a diagram showing a time change of the opening / closing plate 1300, the solenoid 1510 and the distribution device 4850 in the small hit A and a time change of the opening / closing plate 1300, the solenoid 1510 and the distribution device 4850 (see FIG. 51) in the small hit B. Is. The operation of the sorting device 4850 is the same for both the small hit A and the small hit B.

Note that in FIG. 148, the difference between the operation timing of the opening / closing plate 1300 and the drive timing of the solenoid 1510 is omitted, and the operation starts at the same point.

First, the outline of the operation in the small hit A will be described. In the small hit A, the solenoid 1510 is driven (excited) so that the opening / closing plate 1300 is maintained in the open state for 1.0 second from the start of the small hit, and after 1.0 second, the solenoid 1510 is driven (excited). Excitation) is released. 0.2 seconds after the excitation is released, the solenoid 1510 is driven (excited) again, the opening / closing plate 1300 is maintained in the open state for 0.6 seconds, and then the solenoid 1510 is driven (excited).

Next, the outline of the operation in the small hit B will be described. In the small hit B, the solenoid 1510 is driven (excited) so that the opening / closing plate 1300 is maintained in the open state from the start of the small hit for 1.8 seconds, and after 1.8 seconds, the solenoid 1510 is driven (excited). ) Is canceled.

In this way, the small hit A and the small hit B have the same time of the small hit game (1.8 seconds), but differ in whether or not the opening / closing plate 1300 is closed during the small hit game. ..

In this control example, when the small hit game is started immediately after the end of the small hit game, that is, when the number of reserved balls of the special symbol remains and the small hit game occurs continuously, between the small hit games. The minimum period for which the opening / closing plate 1300 is maintained in the closed state is set to 0.4 seconds. Therefore, in the above-described embodiment, when the small hit game occurs continuously, even if two or more balls are stored in the storage flow path 1231 (see FIG. 51), the balls are discharged from the discharge port 1150 during the small hit game. The number of spheres to be made is limited to two. Therefore, the ball that entered the storage flow path 1231 in the previous small hit game may remain in the storage flow path 1231 even during the next small hit game.

The operation mode of the distribution device 4850 will be described. The distribution device 4850 maintains the distribution operation member 4851 in the closed position until 2.0 seconds have passed since the solenoid 1510 was started to be driven (excited) at the start of the small hit game, and after 2.0 seconds have passed. The distribution operation member 4851 is moved to the open position and maintained for 0.5 seconds, and after 0.5 seconds have passed, the distribution operation member 4851 is returned to the closed position again. Further, the distribution device 4850 moves the distribution operation member 4851 to the open position and maintains it for 0.5 seconds after 3.2 seconds have passed since the solenoid 1510 was started to be driven (excited) at the start of the small hit game. After 0.5 seconds have passed, the solenoid 4852 is driven (excited) in such a manner that the distribution operation member 4851 is returned to the closed position again.

That is, the distribution operation member 4851 moves to the open position twice for one small hit game. The first movement corresponds to 1 second (corresponding to the time elapsed until the ball passing through the discharge port 1150 reaches the distribution operation member 4851) after the opening / closing plate 1300 is closed in the small hit A. ..

From this, when the opening / closing plate 1300 is driven by the small hit A, if a sphere remains in the storage flow path 1231 in advance, the sphere passes through the specific region 4830 when the first distribution operation member 4851 moves. Can be made to. On the other hand, since the probability that the small hit A will occur is 10% in the case of the special symbol 2, it is difficult to frequently cause the ball to pass through the specific region 4830 at this timing.

The second movement of the distribution operation member 4851 is 1.4 seconds after the end of the small hit game (corresponding to immediately after the second ball that has passed through the discharge port 1150 has passed through the distribution operation member 4851). Equivalent to. That is, the second movement is an embodiment in which the balls are not allowed to enter the specific area 4830 if the number of balls discharged from the storage flow path 1231 at the end of the small hit game is up to two.

That is, according to this control example, when only the small hit B is repeatedly executed during the time saving game, the ball does not pass through the specific area 4830 unless the number of reserved balls of the special symbol 2 becomes 0. Can be configured as follows.

As a result, when only the small hit B is repeatedly executed during the time saving game, the timing at which the ball passes through the specific area 4830 can be limited to the time when the number of reserved balls of the special symbol 2 becomes 0. In this case, the prize balls paid out by the game in which the balls are continuously inserted into the second entrance 640 so that the number of reserved balls does not become 0 can be used to obtain a large amount of prize balls to be paid out in the time-saving game.

On the other hand, it is difficult to pass the ball through the specific area 4830 while the ball is continuously inserted into the second entrance 640, so in order to obtain the next big hit (pass the ball through the specific area 4830). , The player needs to set the timing to set the number of reserved balls of the second special symbol to 0 in the time-saving game. As a result, in the time-saving game, when the number of remaining time-saving times decreases, it is possible to configure the player to obtain a larger profit by frequently setting the timing to set the number of reserved balls to 0.

According to the setting of the second movement, if the number of balls discharged from the storage flow path 1231 is 3, the balls pass through the specific area 4830, but the present invention is not limited to this. That is, the number of ejected balls may be set when the number of ejected balls is larger than the number of ejected balls (2 pieces) at the shortest interval (0.4 seconds) of the small hit game. Therefore, for example, the fourth ball covers the specific area 4830. The second movement may be set at the timing of passing (1.8 seconds from the end of the small hit game). Further, the shortest interval of the small hit game may be set to 0.2 seconds (the number of ejected pieces is 1), and in this case, the second movement is when the number is larger than the number of ejected (1 piece). It may be set, and for example, the second movement may be set at the timing (1.2 seconds from the end of the small hit game) when the second ball passes through the specific area 4830.

Further, since the average number of balls that can enter the storage flow path 1231 in one small hit game is about 1 or 2, the storage flow path 1231 is before the small hit game in which the number of reserved balls becomes 0. By storing the spheres in, the possibility that the spheres pass through the specific area 4830 can be increased. Therefore, the timing for setting the number of reserved balls of the special symbol 2 to 0 can be selected according to the number of balls in the storage flow path 1231 that increases or decreases with each small hit game. This makes it possible to improve the attention to the spheres stored in the storage channel 1231.

In this control example, as the period of the time-saving game becomes longer, the number of prize balls paid out due to the ball entering the second entrance 640 increases. Here, by setting the number of prize balls in the second entrance 640, the player can select whether to shorten or lengthen the period of the time-saving game.

For example, if the number of prize balls in the second entrance 640 is 1, there is no profit (number of payout prize balls) that the player can obtain by subtracting the number of shots (0). Therefore, it is beneficial for the player to shorten the period of the time-saving game.

On the other hand, if the number of prize balls in the second entrance 640 is 2 or more (for example, 5), there is a profit (number of payout prize balls) that the player can obtain by deducting from the number of shots (1 piece). that's all). Therefore, it may be beneficial for the player to suppress the entry of the ball into the specific area 4830 and prolong the period of the time-saving game.

In this control example, the opening time of the opening / closing plate 1300 for one small hit game is set to 1.8 seconds from the start of the first opening to the closing, so that the first specific winning opening 1000a in one small hit game is reached. The number of balls entered is 3 or 4, but the number is not limited to this. For example, by configuring the opening pattern of the small hit game with an opening pattern in which the opening of 0.12 seconds is repeated 15 times, more balls (for example, 10 balls) can be played during one small hit game. ) May be configured to be able to enter the first specific winning opening 1000a. In this case, for example, by disposing the drop delay plate 3250 described in the third embodiment, even if the opening time of the opening / closing plate 1300 is short, the ball is at the lower end of the opening / closing plate 1300 when the opening / closing plate 1300 is closed. It is possible to prolong the time until the ball falls downward, and the ball can be guided to the first specific winning opening 1000a.

In this control example, since the ball is controlled to be able to be launched at intervals of 0.6 seconds, the small hit game (small hit A, small hit B) with a period from opening to closing of 1.8 seconds is the shortest interval (0). When repeated at intervals of .4 seconds), the number of small hit games for the number of balls that can be fired is 11 balls / 3 times. That is, a maximum of 11 balls can be fired during three small hit games.

Here, since it is necessary to put a ball into the second entrance 640 in order to generate a small hit game, when the number of reserved balls in the second entrance 640 is 0, such as at the start of right-handed hitting. It is necessary to insert three balls into the second entrance 640 as the number of balls for generating three small hit games. Therefore, the remaining eight balls deviate from the second entrance 640 and head toward the first specific winning opening 1000a. In the three small hit games, for example, if all the small hits are the above-mentioned small hits B, six balls are ejected after the three small hit games. Therefore, after three small hit games, two balls remain in the storage flow path 1231. Therefore, the expected number of additional balls remaining in the storage flow path 1231 when the balls are continuously launched is 2 for every 3 small hit games.

The ball that has passed through the first specific winning opening 1000a in the small hit game is not discharged if it has not reached the lower end of the storage flow path 1231. It takes 2 seconds from the first specific winning opening 1000a to reach the lower end of the storage flow path 1231, and even considering that the opening in the small hit game is completed in 1.8 seconds, the small hit game is the first. It is possible that the opening of the next small hit game is started before the ball that has passed through the 1 specific winning opening 1000a reaches the lower end of the storage flow path 1231.

Therefore, when the balls start to accumulate in the storage flow path 1231 (when the number is not 0, the first time), the small hit game in a state where the number is not 0 (for example, two balls remain in the storage flow path 1231). It is possible to make it easier for the balls to remain in the storage flow path 1231 as compared with the case where the balls are additionally increased in the small hit game to be executed (continuous times).

On the other hand, if the number of reserved balls in the second entrance 640 is not 0, the number of reserved balls remaining is newly added even if three balls do not enter the second entrance 640. If the number of balls entered into the second entrance 640 exceeds 3, three small hit games can be executed at the shortest interval (0.4 second interval). In this case, the number of balls heading to the first specific winning opening 1000a during the three small hit games is eight or more, and more balls can be directed to the storage flow path 1231 for three small hit games. It is possible to leave more than two spheres in the storage channel 1231 additionally.

As described above, in this control example, the small hit game generated based on the ball entering the second entry port 640 is maintained so as to continue at the shortest interval, and as many balls as possible are used. 1 It is controlled so that it is profitable for the player to enter the ball into the specific winning opening 1000a and leave the ball in the storage flow path 1231. Therefore, when the ball entering the second entrance 640 is not involved in the occurrence of the small hit game (when the number of reserved balls is full (4 in this control example)), the ball is inserted into the second entrance 640. Is disadvantageous to the player from the viewpoint of the number of prize balls and the increase of the number of balls to be additionally left in the storage channel 1231 (to the second entrance 640 during the right-handed game). The entry of the ball may be disadvantageous to the player).

Therefore, it is possible to improve the attention to the number of reserved balls of the special symbol 2 when the ball enters the second entrance 640 during the right-handed game.

Here, in this control example, when aiming to pass a ball through the specific area 4830, more balls than two are stored at the stage where the number of reserved balls in the second entry port 640 becomes 0. It is required that it is stored in the flow path 1231. That is, if the number of reserved balls is not reduced based on the time when there are more balls than twice the number of reserved balls in the second entry port 640 (determined), the balls flow into the specific area 4830. It is configured so that it is difficult to make it. As a result, in addition to the attention to the number of reserved balls of the special symbol 2, the attention to the number of balls stored in the storage flow path 1231 can be improved.

In this control example, the adjustment of the game area (gauge configuration, nail adjustment, etc.) is an adjustment in which a large number of balls enter the second entry port 640 so that the ball can easily pass through the normal entry port 67 during the right-handed game. However, even if the adjustment is such that it is difficult for the ball to enter the second entry opening 640 and many balls tend to move toward the first specific winning opening 1000a, the loss given to the player can be reduced.

That is, for example, in the case of adjustment in which a large number of balls enter the second entry port 640 during the right-handed game, it is difficult for the balls to accumulate in the storage flow path 1231, and while the small hit game B continues to occur. Although it is difficult for the ball to enter the specific area 4830, if the small hit game A selected with 10% probability occurs, the ball can be passed to the specific area 4830, so that the ball enters the specific area 4830. By entering a large number of balls into the second entrance 640 in the meantime, it is possible to aim for the payout of many prize balls.

Further, for example, in the case where it is difficult for a ball to enter the second entrance 640 during a right-handed game and many balls are easily adjusted toward the first specific winning opening 1000a, the ball enters the second entrance 640. Since it is difficult to enter, most of the right-handed game balls can be entered into the storage flow path 1231, and in addition, the number of reserved special symbols 2 based on the entry into the second entry port 640 is 0. Since it is easy to maintain as it is, it becomes easy to eject two or more balls in the first small hit game. Therefore, since it is easy for the ball to pass through the specific area 4830 at an early stage, the time-saving game can be completed at an early stage, and a period in which a loss occurs due to the ball being difficult to enter the second entrance 640 (that is, the time-saving game). The period) can be shortened.

In this control example, since the opening / closing plate 1300 and the first specific winning opening 1000a are configured to be used in the small hit game, it is desirable to separately prepare the winning opening used in the big hit game. For example, the second specific winning opening 2255a different from the first specific winning opening 1000a as described in the second embodiment may be set as the winning opening used in the jackpot game.

In this case, the storage channels 1231 do not necessarily have to merge, and for example, the first specific winning opening 1000a and the second specific winning opening 2255a may form independent storage channels. The second specific winning opening 2255a may not form a storage flow path (discharged to the ball discharge path).

It should be noted that this control example exemplifies one means of the technical idea regarding the game machine that "the player can select the timing of flowing the ball into the specific area 4830 (can aim)", and other means for the same purpose. May be used.

For example, a small hit (small hit A in this control example) for driving (exciting) the opening / closing plate 1300 in a driving mode in which the ball easily flows into the specific area 4830 (small hit A in this control example) and a ball is difficult to flow into the specific area 4830 ( In the control mode in which the small hit (small hit B in this control example) that drives (excites) the opening / closing plate 1300 in the drive mode (which does not flow in) is selected according to the small hit type, which small hit is executed is played. By controlling so as to notify the person and controlling so that the launched ball can pass through the specific area 4830 after grasping the content of the notification, the timing of flowing the ball into the specific area 4830 is played. It may be possible for a person to select. According to this, it is possible to allow "a game mode in which the ball is avoided from entering the specific area 4830 by not firing the ball at a predetermined timing".

The means of notification is not limited in any way. For example, it may be notified by the display of the third symbol display device 81, or may be notified by voice.

Although the present invention has been described above based on the above-described embodiment, the present invention is not limited to the above-described embodiment, and it is easy to make various modifications and improvements within a range that does not deviate from the gist of the present invention. It can be inferred.

In each of the above embodiments, a part or all of the configurations in one embodiment may be combined with or replaced with a part or all of the configurations in another embodiment to form another embodiment.

In each of the above embodiments, the storage flow path 1231 is configured as a flow path extending on a plane, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the storage flow path 1231 may be configured so that the right side of the plane orthogonal to the left-right direction is bent 90 degrees and extends in the front-rear direction. That is, it may be configured as a flow path that extends from the detection sensor 1240 to the bent position in the left-right direction, extends from the bent position in the front-rear direction, and again extends in the left-right direction on the upstream side of the discharge port 1150.

The flow path extending in the front-rear direction has a flow path shape in which the extension direction is switched from left-right to front-back (rotated by 90 degrees in the vertical axis) by diverting the shape of the storage flow path 1231. It is formed by combining two lightly transmissive members having a substantially symmetrical shape having recesses forming one side surface of the flow path on opposite sides from the left and right.

The storage flow path 1231 including the flow path extending in the front-rear direction has a different direction of the flow path from the above embodiment, but the number of balls that can be stored downstream of the first specific winning opening 1000a is a specified number (10 in this embodiment). It is designed to be (pieces). That is, also in this embodiment, it is possible to configure the same game playability as the game playability described in each of the above embodiments.

Even for the storage flow path 1231 including the flow path extending in the front-rear direction, the solenoid 6910 enters the flow path in a driven (excited) state and regulates the flow of spheres in the flow path, and the solenoid 6910. In the state where the drive (excitation) of the vehicle is released, an interference member is provided which is retracted from the flow path and can be switched between the retracted state where the flow of the sphere in the flow path is allowed.

Here, the arrangement of the interference member with respect to the flow path is the same as that of the sixth embodiment. That is, among the balls stored on the downstream side of the first specific winning opening 1000a, the flow path extending forward and backward on the upstream side of the second ball counting from the lowermost ball whose flow is restricted by the regulating member 1600. It is arranged so that the flow of the third ball can be regulated by entering the inside, and in the overhanging state of the interference member, seven pieces are located on the upstream side of the interference member and on the downstream side of the first specified winning opening 1000a. Balls can be stored.

The flow path extending back and forth is formed so that the third and subsequent spheres are stored behind the second sphere counting from the lowermost sphere whose flow is restricted by the regulating member 1600. Therefore, when the second sphere is arranged, the sphere is arranged on the front side of the interfering member, so that the interfering member is hidden by the sphere. That is, the state of the interfering member can be made difficult to grasp by the sphere.

Compared to the case where the stored spheres are arranged side by side, the entire sphere cannot be visually recognized, and the flow path itself extends to the back side, so that the distance from the glass unit 16 (see FIG. 1) to the visual object can be reduced. When the storage flow path 1231 includes a flow path extending back and forth due to reasons such as being far away, a state in which 10 spheres are stored in the storage flow path 1231 due to the retracting of the interference member and the interference member It becomes difficult to grasp the state in which nine balls are stored in the storage flow path 1231 from the arrangement of the balls. Therefore, according to the present embodiment, it is possible to make it difficult to grasp the number of stored balls even if the first variable winning device 1000 is directly visually recognized.

In the case of having such a feature, for example, the third symbol display device 81 may display the number of balls entered into the first specific winning opening 1000a. In this case, the number of balls that have entered the first specific winning opening 1000a can be grasped by looking at the third symbol display device 81 rather than visually recognizing the storage flow path 1231 in which the number of stored balls is poorly discriminating. Since it can be configured to be easy, the attention power to the third symbol display device 81 can be relatively improved with respect to the attention power to the first variable winning device 1000. Therefore, the line of sight of the player can be easily removed from the first variable winning device 1000.

In each of the above embodiments, the case where the number of balls discharged from the storage flow path 1231 is controlled by the operating length of the regulating member 1600 has been described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, a second discharge port capable of discharging a ball from the middle of the storage channel 1231 and a second discharge port regulating member for opening and closing the second discharge port are provided so that the ball can be discharged from the second discharge port. You can do it. In this case, it is possible to prevent the balls stored between the second discharge port and the first discharge port from being discharged without strictly controlling the operating length of the second discharge port regulating member. Therefore, the number of balls discharged can be changed depending on whether the balls are discharged from the first discharge port or the second discharge port. Further, in this case, for example, if the first discharge port and the second discharge port are controlled to be opened at the same time, the time required to discharge the ball globally can be shortened, and the interval can be shortened.

In each of the above embodiments, the case where the opening / closing plate 1300 operates in rotation has been described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, it is composed of an opening / closing plate 1300 that moves up and down so that the ball can be guided to the first specific winning opening 1000a when it is placed in the upper position, and the ball is guided from the first specific winning opening 1000a when it is placed in the lower position. You may try to divert. In this case, since it is not necessary to arrange the ball at a position sandwiched between the opening / closing plate 1300 and the lining front plate 3200 when raising the ball, the raising operation of the ball can be made smoother.

In each of the above embodiments, the case where the balls stored in the storage flow path 1231 are discharged from a single discharge port 1710 has been described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, an additional outlet may be located midway through the storage channel 1231. In this case, the maximum number of possible discharges can be changed depending on whether the discharge is performed from the discharge port 1710 or an additional discharge port. That is, it becomes difficult to discharge the ball stuck on the discharge port 1710 side from the additional discharge port. Further, by opening both discharge ports at the same time to discharge the ball, the discharge efficiency of the ball can be improved and the interval can be shortened.

In each of the above embodiments, the case where the distribution device 4850 of the probability fluctuation determination unit 4800 starts the operation based on the operation timing of the opening / closing plate 1300 has been described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the state may be changed by the weight of the spheres depending on the number of spheres passing through the probability fluctuation determination flow path 4820 within a predetermined time. In this case, it is possible to switch whether or not the right to shift to the high probability state can be obtained depending on the number of balls discharged, regardless of the ejection speed (interval) of the balls.

In each of the above embodiments, the case where the operation start timing of the opening / closing plate 1300 and the operation start timing of the regulation member 1600 are slightly different has been described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the operation may be started at the same time. In this case, the structure can be simplified.

In each of the above embodiments, the case where the resistance of the ball to enter the ball changes depending on whether or not there is a gap for the ball to enter in the storage channel 1231 (whether or not the storage channel 1231 is full). It is not necessarily limited to this. For example, it may be configured to decelerate a predetermined ball entering the storage channel 1231 depending on whether or not the number of balls stored in the storage channel 1231 is close to the full state. In this case, even if the specified number (count number) of the round game R is smaller than the number that can be stored in the storage channel 1231, it is possible to suppress winning more than the specified number. Further, in this case, as compared with the case where the ball is decelerated regardless of the number of stored balls, it is possible to prevent the jackpot game from being delayed while suppressing the winning of a predetermined number or more. It should be noted that the deceleration is not limited to the acceleration. In this case, it is possible to intentionally generate more than a specified number of prizes.

In each of the above embodiments, the case where the balls are stored in the storage flow path 1231 and the balls are restricted from entering the first specific winning opening 1000a by the stored balls is not necessarily limited to this. Absent. For example, a non-electrically actuated member may be provided, which operates by a predetermined amount when a ball that has reached the specific winning opening 1000a passes through, and facilitates regulation of ball entry in a certain posture. In this case, the time required for the inter-round interval can be shortened as compared with the case where the stored balls are discharged all at once.

In each of the above embodiments, the case where a specified number of balls are stored in the storage flow path 1231 has been described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, a specified number + 1 ball may be stored. In this case, the number of balls that exceed the specified number and pass through the first specific winning opening 1000a can be limited to one for each round game R. Further, in this case, the round in which the eleventh ball easily passes and the round in which the passage of the eleventh ball is restricted may be switched for each round.

In each of the above embodiments, when the opening / closing plate 1300 starts switching to the closed state, the ball cannot be held (falls) in front of the first specific winning opening 1000a, so that two balls cannot be won at the same time. However, it is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the ball may be held only for one ball so that the opening / closing plate 1300 may pass through the first specific winning opening 1000a before the opening / closing plate 1300 is closed. In addition, the presence or absence of this possibility may be switched for each round.

In the second embodiment, the storage flow path 1231 having a plurality of inlets and a single outlet has been described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, a plurality of outlets may be arranged in the storage flow path, and the flow path may branch toward the outlet in the middle. In this case, a predetermined number of balls can be left in the storage flow path 1231 regardless of which outlet the balls are discharged from.

In the second embodiment, the case where the number of balls that can be stored when the ball is entered from the first specific winning opening 1000a is the same as the specified number of winnings (counting number) in the round game R of the jackpot game has been described. It is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the number of balls that can be stored when the ball is entered from the first specific winning opening 1000a is less than the specified number of winning balls (count number) in the round game R, and the number of balls that can be stored when the ball is entered from the second specific winning opening 2255a. May be equal to or greater than the specified number of winnings (counting number) in the round game R. In this case, it is possible to configure the game property that the round time is inevitably extended when the ball is entered from the first specific winning opening 1000a while the whole ball is discharged at the interval between rounds.

In the third embodiment, the case where the ball flowing down the opening / closing plate 1300 is lifted upward by the opening / closing plate 1300 again is described, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, the ball may be raised by a movable accessory having a constant motion capable of picking up the ball. In this case, the movement of the ball can entertain the player.

In the third embodiment, the case where the delay member (fall delay plate 3250) is arranged below the opening / closing plate 1300 has been described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the opening / closing plate 1300 may be formed so as to slide along a direction perpendicular to the board surface, and ribs protruding from the board surface or the glass plate side to the game area may be arranged above the opening / closing plate 1300. Then, when the opening / closing plate 1300 that slides is in the open state, the ball does not come into contact with the rib, and when it is in the closed state, the ball may come into contact with the rib. As a result, even above the opening / closing plate 1300, the flow velocity of the sphere can be changed to delay the flow.

As a method of preventing the sphere from coming into contact with the rib, it is possible to move the sphere to either the front or the back by inclining in the front-rear direction and arrange the rib on the opposite side.

In the third embodiment, the case where the flow of the ball is delayed by the drop delay plate 3250 arranged on the front side of the opening / closing plate 1300 has been described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, an inlet and an outlet may be arranged on the front side of the opening / closing plate 1300, and the flow path connecting the inlet and the outlet may be composed of a curved flow path passing through the back side of the opening / closing plate 1300. In this case, a ball that has once become difficult for the player to see due to the opening / closing plate 1300 by passing through the entrance from the front side of the opening / closing plate 1300 and flowing down the back side of the opening / closing plate 1300 is discharged from the exit again. Since the area where the ball is delayed is not limited to the area on the front side of the opening / closing plate 1300, the ball is delayed until the next round is started even if the interval is long. It is possible to secure a sufficient section for.

It is desirable that the entrance is below the opening / closing plate 1300 and the exit is above the opening / closing plate 1300. Further, when the opening / closing plate 1300 is in the open state, it is desirable that a part of the opening / closing plate 1300 narrows the opening of the entrance to such an extent that the passage of the ball can be prevented. In this case, the opening / closing plate 1300 can prevent the ball from entering the entrance when the opening / closing plate 1300 is in the open state.

In the third embodiment, the case where the ball is decelerated by moving the facing surface 3251a of the extended plate portion 3251 away from the thin plate member 1110 of the main body member 3100 toward the downstream side has been described. It is not limited to this. For example, the inclination angle of the upper surface of the extension plate portion 3251 may be made gentler toward the downstream side. In this case, the component of the gravitational acceleration in the flow direction of the sphere becomes small, and the sphere can be decelerated.

Further, the change in acceleration / deceleration may be reversed. When the sphere accelerates toward the downstream side, it is possible to prevent the formation of a continuous sphere on the fall delay plate 3250.

In the third embodiment, the case where the fall delay plate 3250 is arranged below the opening / closing plate 1300 so that only the sphere that has passed downward through the opening / closing plate 1300 is brought into contact with the opening / closing plate 1300 has been described. It is not limited to. For example, in a front / rear sliding type opening / closing plate, in an open state, a ball enters a pocket in which a winning opening is arranged, and in a closed state, the ball rolls on the upper surface of the opening / closing plate. A rib that can be contacted when reaching the downstream side on the plate may be arranged. The ball that enters the pocket as it is does not come into contact with this rib. In this case, since the sphere can be delayed on the upper surface of the opening / closing plate in the closed state, it is possible to prevent the sphere from moving up and down with the operation of the opening / closing plate.

In the third embodiment, the case where the drop delay plate 3250 is omitted from the drop position Pf3 and the sphere falls vertically downward at the position immediately before the detection sensor 1240 has been described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. .. For example, the fall delay plate 3250 is extended to a position where it passes the detection sensor 1240 in the left-right direction, a through hole through which a ball passing through the detection sensor 1240 can pass is formed, and the ball is discharged from the through hole. You may do so. In this case, even when the opening / closing plate 1300 is switched from the closed state to the open state when the sphere is arranged at the position immediately before the detection sensor 1240, the sphere can be arranged above the opening / closing plate 1300.

This is different from the second drop delay plate 7260 described above in the seventh embodiment. That is, when the fall delay plate 3250 is extended to a position where it passes the detection sensor 1240 in the left-right direction, the ball that has fallen at the position immediately before the detection sensor 1240 and has landed on the fall delay plate 3250 remains to the right (detection sensor). The ball that has fallen to the second fall delay plate 7260 due to the same drop flows down to the left side (the side away from the detection sensor 1240) and then flows down to the fall delay plate 3250 again. To reach. That is, the period during which the flow of the sphere is delayed and the path through which the sphere flows are different below the opening / closing plate 1300.

In the fifth embodiment, the case where the flow path through which the balls entering from the second entry port 640 and the specific winning openings 1000a and 2255a flow down merges with the storage flow path 1231 and the number of incoming balls is related to each other will be described. However, it is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the sphere may be automatically supplied into the storage flow path 1231. In this case, it is possible to create a situation in which the ball remains in the storage flow path 1231 from the start of the game.

In the fifth embodiment, the case where the profit obtained by the player decreases as the number of lottery until the jackpot is acquired decreases in the high probability state, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the more the number of lottery to win the jackpot, the greater the profit that the player can obtain. In this case, the profit obtained from the jackpot obtained in a short time is small, and the profit obtained from the jackpot obtained over a long time can be increased, so that the time efficiency with respect to the profit obtained by the player can be made uniform.

In the sixth embodiment, the case where the interference member 6930 is driven by the solenoid 6910 and the number of balls that can be stored in the storage flow path 1231 changes has been described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, an operating member that operates in the storage flow path 1231 according to the number of stored balls and changes the number of spheres that can be stored in the storage flow path 1231 may be provided. In this case, since the operating member moves depending on the number of stored devices regardless of the driving timing of the driving device 1500, it is possible to prevent the player from feeling uncomfortable due to reasons such as the operating timing of the operating member being different from the usual one.

In the sixth embodiment, the case where the number of balls that can be stored in the storage flow path 1231 changes due to the interference member 6930 forming an overhanging state, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the portion forming the storage flow path 1231 (particularly, the U-shaped portion) is configured to move in the extension direction (left-right direction) of the flow path to change the flow path length of the storage flow path 1231. You may. In this case, even if the movement is performed in advance, it is difficult for the player to notice whether or not the movement has been made due to the small amount of the movement. Therefore, it is possible to form a game property in which the movement of the member (change in the flow path length of the storage flow path 1231) is noticed only after the ball is accumulated in the storage flow path 1231, and the player's attention to the first variable winning device 6000 can be formed. Can be improved.

The member may be moved by the driving force of the solenoid, or the member may be moved only by switching whether or not the member can be moved by the driving device, and the actual movement may be performed by the weight of the ball itself.

In the sixth embodiment, the case where the interference member 6930 projects in a state where a predetermined number of balls are stored in the storage flow path 1231 has been described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, an overhanging state may be formed before the sphere begins to enter the storage channel 1231. In this case, the number of balls that can enter the storage flow path 1231 can be seven. Further, a pattern that forms an overhanging state after the spheres are stored and a pattern that forms an overhanging state before the spheres start to enter the storage flow path 1231 may be mixed for each round. In this case, the round in which the number of stored pieces is 7 and the round in which the number of stored pieces is 9 can be switched by a single member.

In the sixth embodiment, the case where the interference member 6930 is in the retracted state when the ball is discharged from the storage flow path 1231 has been described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the interference member 6930 may be able to change to an overhanging state while the ball is being discharged from the storage flow path 1231. In this case, by changing the combination of the timing at which the ball is discharged and the timing at which the interference member 6930 is brought into the overhanging state, the mode of discharging the ball can be formed in a plurality of patterns.

In the eighth embodiment and the ninth embodiment, the auxiliary opening / closing member 8340 is seen as an auxiliary, but the present invention is not limited thereto. For example, only the auxiliary opening / closing member 8340 may open / close, and the opening / closing plate 8300 may be configured as a fixed plate. In this case, the auxiliary opening / closing member 8340 may be provided with a flow path for dropping the ball from above vertically so as to prevent the auxiliary opening / closing member 8340 from passing to the left. In this case, a limited number of excess prizes can be allowed based on the continuous ball mode.

Further, for example, the opening / closing mode of the auxiliary opening / closing member 8340 may be switched depending on whether the auxiliary opening / closing member 8340 is repeatedly opened for a long period of time or shortly opened for each round game R. In this case, the detection sensor 1240 detects and closes at the end of the round game R, or the ball closes as an operation pattern before being detected by the detection sensor 1240 and passes through the detection sensor 1240 while it is closed. When is detected, the round game R ends, and it is possible to switch whether or not the next opening occurs. In this case, the possibility of over-winning is lower in the case of repeated short-opening than in the case of long-term opening, so the possibility of over-winning may differ depending on the difference in operation pattern. Can be done.

In the eighth embodiment, the case where the opening / closing plate 8300 and the auxiliary opening / closing member 8340 are driven by the same driving device has been described, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, a dedicated drive device may be provided for each and controlled so as to be independently driveable.

In the eighth embodiment, when the opening / closing plate 8300 and the auxiliary opening / closing member 8340 are changed to the open state, the opening / closing plate 8300 rotates in a manner of rising forward, and the auxiliary opening / closing member 8340 is directed to the left. Although the case where the opening / closing plate 8300 is configured to rotate so as to approach the opening / closing plate 8300 from above is described, the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the rotation axes of both the opening / closing plate 8300 and the auxiliary opening / closing member 8340 are parallel (for example, the axis in the front-rear direction), and the opening / closing plate 8300 and the auxiliary opening / closing member 8340 face each other (for example, one is downward and the other is upward). It may work. In this case, the opening / closing plate 8300 and the auxiliary opening / closing member 8340 can perform an effect of sandwiching the ball as the state changes.

In the eighth embodiment, the case where the opening / closing plate 8300 includes the ball entry prevention unit 1331 has been described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the ball entry prevention unit 1331 may be omitted. In this case, since the opening / closing plate 8300 does not close the detection sensor 1240 regardless of the state, the auxiliary opening / closing member 8340 can be made to correspond as a member that regulates the guidance of the ball to the detection sensor 1240. Further, for example, the front surface portion of the ball entry prevention portion 1331 may be recessed so as to be recessed toward the back surface side. In this case, it is possible to prolong the period from the start of the state change of the opening / closing plate 8300 toward the closed state until the ball of the detection sensor 1240 cannot pass through.

In the eighth embodiment and the ninth embodiment, the opening / closing plate 8300 and the auxiliary opening / closing member 8340 have been described as members for allowing the ball to pass through the first specific winning opening 1000a, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. There is no. For example, by omitting the ball entry prevention unit 1331, the allowance of the ball to pass through the first specific winning opening 1000a can be switched only by the auxiliary opening / closing member 8340, and the opening / closing plate 8300 allows the ball to be inserted into the auxiliary ball entry port. It may be interpreted that the ball is thrown toward 9111 or the first out port 66. That is, the opening / closing plate 8300 only has a role of guiding the ball to the auxiliary opening / closing member 8340 in the open state, and whether or not the ball is guided to the first specific winning opening 1000a is switched depending on the state of the auxiliary opening / closing member 8340. It may be interpreted as being. In this case, the attention power of the auxiliary opening / closing member 8340 can be improved as compared with the attention power of the opening / closing plate 8300.

In the ninth embodiment, a case will be described in which a plurality of members movable on the upstream side of the first specific winning opening 1000a are configured and a driving mode in which one member is operated is configured to allow the ball to flow down to the auxiliary entry opening 9111. However, it is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the opening / closing plate 1300 is closed by using a single movable member (for example, the opening / closing plate 1300) and controlling the interference member 6930 to be in the overhanging state in accordance with the timing when the opening / closing plate 1300 is closed. The discharge of balls from the storage flow path 1231 in the state may be suppressed, or the period required for the opening / closing plate 1300 to be closed may be set short (the time required for one ball to be discharged from the discharge port 1150). (By setting it to less than 0.2 seconds), the discharge of balls from the storage flow path 1231 may be suppressed.

In the ninth embodiment, the case where the auxiliary ball slot 9111 is configured as a general winning slot has been described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, it may be configured as a winning opening related to a lottery of special symbols. In this case, the special symbol 2 is configured to be able to win the lottery of the special symbol 2 by entering the ball into the auxiliary entry port 9111 under the control that the special symbol 2 fluctuates in preference to the special symbol 1. It is possible to suppress the start of the fluctuation of the special symbol 1 immediately after the end.

In the ninth embodiment, the rolling plate 9112 is configured as a fixed plate, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the state changes between a state in which the rolling plate 9112 is retracted from the front side of the thin plate member 9110 (a state in which it does not collide with the game ball) and a state in which it overhangs the front side of the thin plate member 9110 (a state in which it collides with the game ball). It may be configured as a movable plate that is driven and controlled so as to be driven. In this case, various modes of operation patterns are exemplified. For example, it may be a constant operation from the power on, or a predetermined operation starting from the start of the jackpot game.

In the ninth embodiment, the case where the operating speed of the return operation of the power transmission member 5400 when the drive (excitation) of the solenoid 1510 is released is substantially constant (depending on the restoration mode of the return spring of the solenoid 1510) has been described. However, it is not necessarily limited to this. For example, a damper that gives a load to the power transmission member 5400 after the auxiliary transmission member 8340 is closed during the return operation of the power transmission member 5400 may be provided. In this case, since the period during which the opening / closing plate 8300 is maintained in the open state after the auxiliary opening / closing member 8340 is closed can be extended, the control of opening one side can be facilitated.

In the ninth embodiment, the case of switching the entry into the auxiliary entry port 9111 on the premise that the opening / closing plate 8300 changes its state toward the open state has been described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the ball may be configured to be able to enter the auxiliary ball opening 9111 at a predetermined rate during the period when the opening / closing plate 8300 is maintained in the closed state. For example, another movable object having a constant motion may be arranged so that the ball collides with the movable object to cause the ball to enter the auxiliary ball entry port 9111.

In the tenth embodiment, the movement of the movable member 10181 causes the balls to be discharged from the middle of the storage flow path 1231 so that more balls than can be accommodated in the storage flow path 1231 can pass through the first specific winning opening 1000a. As explained, it is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the volume of the storage flow path 1231 may be variably configured. In this case, since the number of balls remaining in the storage flow path 1231 can correspond to the number of balls that have passed through the first specific winning opening 1000a, it is possible to prevent the player from being confused.

In the first control example described above, a case has been described in which the periphery of the first variable winning device 6000 is brightly lit based on the operation of the operation button 300 so that the number of balls stored in the storage flow path 1231 can be grasped. It is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the brightly lit portion does not have to be in the vicinity of the first variable winning apparatus 6000, and may be a wide range portion (center frame 86 or the like) including the first variable winning apparatus 6000.

Various modes are exemplified as means for changing the lighting mode of the transmission lamp 227b. For example, a predetermined clock pulse generation circuit is arranged in the voice lamp control device 113, data of the lighting mode is transmitted to the lamp control device 227 at the rising edge of the clock pulse, and corresponds to the transmitted data at the falling edge of the clock pulse. The lamp may be turned on. In this case, when the lamp is turned off, the data corresponding to the turning off may be transmitted to the lamp control device 227. It may also be combined with a latch.

Further, a plurality of types of lighting pattern tables may be facilitated in advance, and the lighting mode of the lamp control device 227 may be switched by switching the tables. Further, the lighting mode may be switched by combining the lighting pattern table and the above-mentioned clock. Further, the display mode may be changed by setting a command, or may be controlled by using a serial port driver.

The intensity of light emission of the lamp control device 227 may be determined by a so-called dynamic lighting method (a lighting method that produces a difference in brightness by changing the time interval between lighting and extinguishing), or by a high or low voltage.

In the first control example described above, if the operation effect is successful, the case where the transmission lamp 227b is kept lit has been described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, when the operation button 300 is pressed, the transmission lamp 227b may be turned on for a short period (for a moment). In this case, the attention to the storage channel 1231 can be improved. Further, based on the success of the operation effect, it is possible to notify, for example, how many remaining balls should be inserted into the storage flow path 1231 instead of lighting the lamp.

In the first control example, five or more spheres are stored on the upstream side of the interference member 6930, and the interference member 6930 is brought into a retracted state by operating the operation button 300 so that the spheres flow into the specific area 4830. However, it is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the number of balls stored on the upstream side of the interference member 6930 is set to 4 or less, and the interference member 6930 is in the retracted state, so that the general winning opening is arranged at a position where the stored balls can pass. You may. In this case, the interference member 6930 can be configured as a so-called "holding device".

In the first control example, the case where the number of balls to be entered into the storage flow path 1231 is notified by display in the round game R in which the operation effect is executed has been described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the round in which the operation effect is executed may be advanced by one round, and the number of balls to be entered in the storage flow path 1231 may be notified in the round game after the round in which the operation effect is executed. In this case, it is possible to prevent the balls from accumulating too much in the storage flow path 1231 before the notification.

Further, in the round game R in which the operation effect is executed, when the number of balls to be entered into the storage flow path 1231 is notified, the time is insufficient to reach the number (continuously firing the balls). It is desirable to execute the notification at a time (when it is insufficient). As a result, even if the firing of the ball is continued from the start of the round game R, it is possible to prevent a situation in which the ball enters the storage flow path 1231 too much at the execution timing of the notification.

In the first control example described above, the case where the operation speed of the display pointer 719 is the same in the operation effect has been described, but the operation speed is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the operating speed of the display pointer 719 and the number of display pointers may be changed and controlled based on a predetermined condition. Examples of the predetermined conditions include, for example, the number of changes in the special symbol required for the jackpot, the number of points accumulated by the number of games, and the like. In this case, for example, when the number of fluctuations of the special symbol is large or when the privilege is high, the difficulty level of the operation effect is controlled to be low, so that the burden (number of fluctuations, the number of fluctuations) required by the player to the jackpot is required. The larger the number of games), the greater the profit that the player can obtain by the operation effect.

Here, as the difficulty level, the difficulty level of the operation effect itself, the difficulty level of profit acquisition after the operation effect, and the like are exemplified. When the difficulty of obtaining profit after the operation effect is high, for example, the execution timing of the operation effect and the accompanying notification is the latter half of the round game R (the period during which the specified number of balls can enter the storage flow path 1231 has elapsed. It is exemplified that it is arranged later). In this case, at the timing of notification, a situation may occur in which the number of balls entering the storage flow path 1231 exceeds the number notified as the number of balls to be entered into the storage flow path 1231.

Further, the difficulty level of the operation effect itself may be associated with the difficulty level of profit acquisition after the operation effect. For example, when the operation speed of the display pointer 719 is slow, it is easy to succeed in the operation itself, but since the time elapsed until the operation timing is long, the number of balls to be entered into the storage flow path 1231 by then is set. There is a possibility that more balls than the reported number will enter. On the other hand, when the operation speed of the display pointer 719 is high, it is difficult to succeed in the operation itself, but since the time elapsed until the operation timing is short, the number of balls to be entered into the storage flow path 1231 by then. It is possible to prevent more balls than the number notified as.

Since the duration of the remaining round game R differs depending on the difference in the execution timing of the notification, the display effect adopted may be controlled so as to be switchable according to the duration of the remaining round game R. For example, if the duration of the remaining round game R is short, a display effect is configured with a video that can be completed in a short period of time, and if the remaining round game R is sufficiently long, a video that continues for a long period is displayed. You may configure the production. In this case, for example, it is possible to prevent a problem that the loading of the moving image does not end with the remaining time of the round game R and the round game R ends without being displayed.

In the first control example, the case where the number of balls to be inserted into the storage flow path 1231 is nine, which is less than the specified number, has been described, but the number is not necessarily limited to this. For example, by allowing an extremely small number (for example, two) of balls to enter the storage flow path 1231, the player may be controlled so as to obtain a large profit. In this case, the player can be urged to stop firing the ball at the start of the notified round. At the same time, the third symbol display device 81 or the like may give a notification such as "stop firing".

In the first control example, the case where the interference member 6930 operates immediately when the operation button 300 is pressed has been described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the operation timing of the operation button 300 in the operation effect and the operation timing of the interference member 6930 may be shifted by a predetermined period. In this case, it is possible to prevent the operation button 300 from being operated with the state near the interference member 6930 (the flow state of the ball as a guide), and it is possible to improve the attention to the operation effect.

In the first control example, the timing at which the error command is set by S1515 is the timing at which the sphere is discharged from the storage flow path 1231, and the solenoid 1510 is turned off, so that the error command is issued. If the sphere remains in the storage flow path 1231 even after the setting, the discharge from the storage flow path 1231 is continued, but the discharge is not necessarily limited to this. For example, another movable object that regulates the passage of the ball of the discharge port 1150 is arranged, and when the power is turned on, it is driven (excited) to allow the ball of the discharge port 1150 to pass, and while an error command is generated. May be controlled to change state so as to regulate the passage of the ball. In this case, since it is possible to prevent the balls remaining in the storage flow path 1231 from being discharged from the storage flow path 1231 at the timing when the error command is generated, it is not illegal and some kind of malfunction (ball clogging or ball When an error command is set due to deceleration due to dirt, etc.), the disadvantage caused to the player can be reduced. After that, by resolving the error command by turning off the power or turning the power on again, the game can be restarted from the state where the ball remains in the storage flow path 1231 (the state immediately before the error command is set). ..

The control of this movable object is not limited to the control depending on whether or not an error command is set. For example, it may be controlled so that the state changes when the power is turned on and off. In this case, for example, when the game cannot be continued due to a sudden power failure or the like, it is possible to prevent the balls stored in the storage flow path 1231 from being discharged from the storage flow path 1231.

Further, the control mode of the movable object may be changed depending on whether or not the RAM 203 is cleared before and after the power is turned off. For example, even when it is discovered that the error command setting was based on fraudulent activity and the RAM 203 is cleared, it is not necessary to be able to restart the game from the state immediately before the error command is set. Before resuming the game, the movement of the movable object may be controlled so that the ball is discharged from the storage flow path 1231.

The mode of this movable object is not limited at all. For example, a drive device may be separately arranged and the regulating member 1600 may be diverted as a means for preventing the ejection of the ball, or the interference member 6930 may be configured to be able to be maintained in an overhanging state as a process when the power is turned off. The interference member 6930 may be adopted as the movable member.

In the first control example, the control flow is configured based on the number of rounds started in the jackpot medium effect processing S2505, but the control flow is not necessarily limited to this. For example, control is performed based on the start of a specific effect, such as the start of a round game R in which a ball can pass through a specific area 4830 or the start of a round game R in which an operation effect is started. The flow may be configured. In this case, even if the round number of the production is changed due to the specification change, it is possible to eliminate the need for a drastic change in the control flow, so that the burden of the specification change can be reduced. it can.

Further, in the jackpot medium effect processing S2505, the control flow is configured so that the flag turned on in the control flow when it is determined to be the third round is turned off in the control flow when it is determined to be the fifth round. , Not necessarily limited to this. For example, the flag may be turned off at the end of the control mode set in the third round, that is, at the end of the round of the fourth round game R. In this case, the burden of changing specifications when adopting a 4-round jackpot game can be reduced.

In the second control example, the case where the ball flows down toward the auxiliary ball entry port 9111 by the drive control in which only the auxiliary opening / closing member 8340 is opened / closed has been described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, by adopting the opening / closing plate 1300 described in the first embodiment and controlling the solenoid 1510 in a drive (excitation) mode in which the opening / closing plate 1300 is maintained in the closed state for a predetermined period during the round game R, the auxiliary ball entry port is used. The ball may flow down to 9111. In this case, the ball can be configured to flow down to the auxiliary entry port 9111 without dividing the plate that guides the ball to the first specific winning opening 1000a.

Further, in this case, by setting the period for keeping the opening / closing plate 1300 in the closed state to less than 0.2 seconds, the discharge port 1150 is again before the ball is discharged from the storage flow path 1231 (in the state where the ball is about to be discharged). The passage of the ball can be regulated. Therefore, the balls can flow down to the auxiliary entry port 9111 without reducing the number of balls stored in the storage flow path 1231.

In the second control example described above, the case where the display mode of the round number display unit 714 and the sub-round display unit 714b is controlled so as to be switched based on the passage of the waiting time TK has been described, but this is not necessarily the case. It is not limited. For example, it may be controlled so as to be switched based on the number of balls that have passed through the first specific winning opening 1000a. In this case, the display is controlled to be switched based on the number of balls stored in the first specific winning opening 1000a (the storage flow path 1231 is full in the overhanging state of the interference member 6930). The player can be made to grasp the change timing of the display mode as the timing when the storage flow path 1231 is full.

The number of balls inside the storage flow path 1231 may be determined by the value of the remaining ball counter 203p, or the number of balls may be directly detected by arranging a contact sensor separately in the storage flow path 1231. You can do it.

In the second control example described above, the case where the character "+ chance" is displayed as the excess winning possibility increase notification mode 721 at a predetermined timing of a predetermined jackpot type has been described, but it is not necessarily limited to this. There is no. For example, regardless of the jackpot type, the character "+ chance" may be displayed as the excess winning possibility increase notification mode 721 during the period when the ball can enter the auxiliary entry port 9111, or the auxiliary entry may be performed. During the period when the ball cannot enter the ball opening 9111, the character "+ chance" of the excess winning possibility increase notification mode 721 may be controlled so as to be displayed as a fan display. For example, when the round number display unit 714 is brightly displayed, the character "+ chance" may be displayed.

Further, as the excess winning possibility increase notification mode 721, the characters "+ chance" may be continuously displayed for a certain period of time, or may be displayed so that the display and non-display can be switched in a short period of time. You may.

In the second control example described above, it is configured to control whether or not the auxiliary opening / closing member 8340 is opened on one side based on the jackpot type and the passage of time from the start of the jackpot, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. .. For example, the frequency of occurrence of one-sided opening and the timing of occurrence may be changed based on the type of jackpot and the passage of time from the start of jackpot. In this case, it is possible to suppress the launch mode in which the ball is launched aiming at the ball reaching the auxiliary opening / closing member 8340 at the timing when the auxiliary opening / closing member 8340 is closed (the effect of the launch mode is reduced).

In the third control example, the case where the balls remaining in the storage flow path 1231 continue to be discharged during the period when the opening / closing plate 1300 is closed has been described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, by adopting the interference member 6930 and controlling it so that it is in the overhanging state at a predetermined timing, the case where the ball remains in the storage flow path 1231 while the opening / closing plate 1300 is maintained in the closed state is configured. be able to. As a result, it is possible to complicate the selection of the launching mode of the ball by the player, so that it is possible to prevent the player from playing the ball indiscriminately.

The present invention may be implemented in a pachinko machine or the like of a type different from each of the above embodiments. For example, once a jackpot is hit, a pachinko machine (commonly known as a two-time right item, a three-time right item) that raises the expected value of the jackpot until multiple times (for example, two or three times) a big hit state occurs. It may be carried out as). Further, after the jackpot symbol is displayed, it may be implemented as a pachinko machine that generates a special game that gives a player a predetermined game value on the condition that a ball is won in a predetermined area. Further, it may be carried out on a pachinko machine that has a winning device having a special area such as a V zone and is in a special gaming state on the condition that a ball is won in the special area. Further, in addition to the pachinko machine, it may be implemented as various game machines such as an ale-pachi, a sparrow ball, a slot machine, a so-called pachinko machine and a slot machine.

In the slot machine, for example, the symbol is changed by operating the operation lever in a state where a coin is inserted to determine the symbol effective line, and the symbol is stopped and confirmed by operating the stop button. It is a thing. Therefore, the basic concept of the slot machine is "provided with a display device that displays the identification information in a variable manner after displaying the identification information string composed of a plurality of identification information in a variable manner, and is caused by the operation of the starting operation means (for example, the operation lever). The variable display of the identification information is started, and the variable display of the identification information is stopped and confirmed and displayed due to the operation of the stop operation means (for example, the stop button) or after a predetermined time has elapsed. It becomes a "slot machine that generates a special game that gives a player a predetermined game value, provided that the combination of time identification information is specific". In this case, the game medium is represented by coins, medals, etc. Take as an example.

Further, as a specific example of a gaming machine in which a pachinko machine and a slot machine are fused, a display device for variably displaying a symbol sequence consisting of a plurality of symbols and then confirming the symbol is provided, and a handle for launching a ball is provided. Some are not. In this case, after a predetermined amount of balls are thrown in based on a predetermined operation (button operation), the symbol variation is started, for example, due to the operation of the operation lever, and for example, due to the operation of the stop button or a predetermined amount. As time elapses, the fluctuation of the symbol is stopped, and a special game is generated that gives the player a predetermined game value on the condition that the confirmed symbol at the time of the stop is a so-called jackpot symbol, and the player is given a predetermined game value. Is for paying out a large amount of balls to the lower saucer. If such a game machine is used instead of a slot machine, only the ball can be treated as a game value in the game hall, which is a game value seen in the current game hall where pachinko machines and slot machines are mixed. Problems such as the burden on equipment due to the separate handling of medals and balls and restrictions on the locations where game machines are installed can be solved.

The concepts of various inventions included in the above-described embodiments in addition to the gaming machine of the present invention are shown below.

<Points that do not allow you to win more than the target number>
The game area in which the ball flows down, the entry port through which the ball flowing down the game area passes, and the first state in which the ball flowing down from the upstream side of the entry port can be guided to the entry port and the entry ball. In a game machine including a ball entry switching means for switching a ball flowing down from the upstream side of the mouth in a second state in which the ball cannot be guided to the ball entry port, and a detection means for detecting the ball entering the ball entry port. A game characterized in that the detection means includes a ball entry prevention means that makes it difficult for a ball to pass through the ball entry port in a state where a predetermined number of balls have entered the ball entry port in a predetermined period. Machine A1.

Here, in a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, a detection means is arranged so that the detection port of the large winning opening is turned sideways, and a predetermined number of balls are detected by an operating member that rolls the balls toward the detection port. There is a gaming machine that operates when it passes through the mouth and drops a ball that is on the operating member during the operation to prevent more than a predetermined number of balls from passing through the detection port of the detection means. (See, for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2015-181572). However, in the conventional game machine described above, when a plurality of balls roll unexpectedly vigorously on the operating member, an extra ball is added between the start of operation of the operating member and the fall of the ball from the operating member. There is a possibility that the ball will pass through the detection port, so that there is a problem that a predetermined number or more of balls may pass through the detection port.

On the other hand, according to the game machine A1, the ball entry prevention means makes it difficult for a predetermined number of balls or later to pass through the detection means. Therefore, regardless of the magnitude of the momentum of the balls when they are arranged on the upstream side of the entrance, the ease of passage when the balls pass through the entrance is determined by the number of balls within the predetermined number and the predetermined number of balls. It can be changed with the subsequent spheres. As a result, it is possible to prevent a predetermined number or more of balls from passing through the detection port.

As the ball entry prevention means, a means for changing the ease of passage of the ball entry port according to the detection result of the detection means, a means for constantly maintaining the passage ease of the ball entry port, etc. Is exemplified.

In the game machine A1, the ball entry prevention means includes a storage means for accommodating a ball that has passed through the ball entry port, a discharge port through which the ball passes when the ball exits from the storage means, and a discharge port thereof. The accommodation means includes a first state in which the ball can pass and a second state in which the ball cannot pass through the discharge port, and the accommodating means is between the ball entry port and the discharge port. The gaming machine A2 is formed with a volume that accommodates the predetermined number of balls at the maximum.

According to the game machine A2, in addition to the effect of the game machine A1, the storage means is formed with a volume in which a predetermined number of balls can be stored between the entry port and the discharge port. When the means is maintained in the second state and the balls are stored in the accommodating means, it is possible to prevent the balls accommodated in the accommodating means from passing a predetermined number or more of the balls through the entrance. Therefore, it is possible to physically prevent the number of balls after the predetermined number from passing through the entry port.

In the game machine A2, the game machine A3 is characterized in that while the discharge switching means is in the first state, the ball entry switching means is formed so as to be sustainable in the second state.

According to the game machine A3, in addition to the effect of the game machine A2, it is possible to prevent the ball from entering the accommodation means from the entry port while the ball is being discharged from the accommodation means. The operation timings of the discharge switching means and the ball entry switching means may be simultaneous or different.

The game machine A4 is characterized in that the game machine A2 or A3 includes a drive means that is also used as the discharge switching means and the ball entry switching means.

According to the game machine A4, in addition to the effect of the game machine A2 or A3, the pair of switching means can be operated by the combined driving means. As a result, space saving and cost saving can be achieved.

In any of the game machines A2 to A4, after the ball entry switching means starts the state change from the second state to the first state, the discharge switching means changes from the first state to the first state. A game machine A5, wherein the state change is ordered in a manner of starting the state change toward two states, and the state changes are completed substantially at the same time.

According to the game machine A5, in addition to the effect of any of the game machines A2 to A4, the ball that has entered the accommodation means is discharged from the discharge port after the ball entry switching means is in the first state. While preventing (preventing irregular winning), the ball entry switching means can be started from the second state before the discharge of the ball from the discharge port is completed, so that the ball is discharged from the discharge port. It is possible to reduce the number of balls that flow down the game area and head toward the out port through the ball entry switching means, as compared with the case where the ball entry switching means is started after the completion of the above.

The order of state changes may be performed by sequentially transmitting a driving force to each switching means, or a dedicated driving means is provided for each switching means to control the timing. You may.

The game machine A6 is characterized in that any one of the game machines A2 to A5 is provided with a changing means for changing the maximum number of the accommodation means.

According to the game machine A6, in addition to the effect of any of the game machines A2 to A5, the maximum number of accommodation means can be changed by the changing means, so that the maximum number of accommodation means can be changed temporarily (for example, in a specific round). It is possible to form a state in which more balls than the number of balls are accommodated in the accommodating means. This makes it possible to improve the interest of the player.

Further, by using the accommodating means having the same shape, it is possible to reconfigure the gaming machine by changing the predetermined number of numerical values (it is possible to cope with the difference in specifications). As a result, the development cost can be suppressed as compared with the case where the shape is made for each specification.

In the game machine A6, the ball entry port is communicated with the first ball entry port and the accommodating means downstream of the first ball entry port so that a ball flowing down the game area can pass through the ball. It is provided with a second entry port whose passage is switched by the entry switching means, and a case where a ball enters the accommodation means from the first entry opening and a case where the ball enters the accommodation means from the second entry port. The maximum number of accommodating means is changed depending on the case where the ball enters the means, and the changing means selectively sets which entry port allows the ball to pass through. Game machine A7.

According to the game machine A7, in addition to the effect of the game machine A6, both the ball entering from the first entry port and the ball entering from the second entry port can be stored in the accommodating means. Therefore, the space required can be reduced as compared with the case where separate accommodation means are arranged for each.

In the game machine A6, the changing means includes an interfering means capable of extending to the inside of the accommodating means, and the interfering means interferes with a ball overhanging and stored inside the accommodating means, and the accommodating means. The gaming machine A8 is characterized in that the maximum number of accommodating means is changed depending on the case where the accommodating means is retracted to the outside.

According to the game machine A8, in addition to the effect of the game machine A6, the number of balls accommodated is changed by changing the internal volume of the accommodating means without changing the ball entry route to the accommodating means. Therefore, it is possible to switch the number of accommodations without giving the player a sense of discomfort.

In the game machine A8, the interference means projects from the back side of the game area to the inside of the accommodation means, and is characterized in that the ball can be arranged on the front side at the time of evacuation. Game machine A9.

According to the game machine A9, in addition to the effect of the game machine A8, the interference means at the time of evacuation can be hidden by a ball arranged in front. As a result, the operation of the interference means can be made inconspicuous while eliminating the need for an additional shielding member.

<Point AK to hide the number of stored balls>
The game area in which the ball flows down, the entry port through which the ball flowing down the game area passes, and the first state in which the ball flowing down from the upstream side of the entry port can be guided to the entry port and the entry ball. In a game machine including a ball entry switching means for switching a ball flowing down from the upstream side of the mouth in a second state in which the ball cannot be guided to the ball entry port, and a detection means for detecting the ball entering the ball entry port. A ball entry preventing means for making it difficult for a ball to pass through the entry opening in a state where a predetermined number of balls have entered the entry opening in a predetermined period is provided by the detection means. The game machine is provided with a storage means for accommodating a ball that has passed through the entrance, and is provided with a visually obscuring means for making it difficult to visually recognize at least a part of the balls accommodated in the accommodating means. AK1.

Here, in a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, a detection means is arranged so that the detection port of the large winning opening is turned sideways, and a predetermined number of balls are detected by an operating member that rolls the balls toward the detection port. There is a gaming machine that operates when it passes through the mouth and drops a ball that is on the operating member during the operation to prevent more than a predetermined number of balls from passing through the detection port of the detection means. (See, for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2015-181572). However, in the above-mentioned conventional game machine, since the visibility downstream of the detection port does not change, there is a problem that the effect of the effect of the ball passing through the detection port is insufficient and the attention may be reduced. There was a point.

On the other hand, according to the game machine AK1, at least a part of the balls housed in the accommodating means is made difficult to see by the visually obscuring means, so that the effect differs depending on the number of balls accommodated in the accommodating means. When the mechanism that causes the occurrence of the ball is adopted, it is possible to reduce the possibility that the player's expectation of the action that occurs is consistent with the action that occurs. Thereby, the attention to the above-mentioned production can be improved.

In the game machine AK1, when the ball comes out of the accommodating means, the discharge port through which the ball passes, the first state in which the ball can pass through the discharge port, and the second state in which the ball cannot pass through the discharge port. A game characterized in that the accommodation means is formed with a volume in which a predetermined number of balls can be accommodated at a maximum between the entry port and the discharge port. Machine AK2
According to the game machine AK2, in addition to the effect of the game machine AK1, the balls can be stored in the accommodating means, so that the period during which the effect of the balls can be maintained can be extended.

The game machine AK3 is characterized in that the game machine AK1 or AK2 is configured to change the action of the visual disability means based on the establishment of a predetermined condition.

According to the game machine AK3, in addition to the effect of the game machine AK1 or AK2, the player's attention to the establishment of a predetermined condition can be improved.

The mode of the predetermined condition is not limited in any way. For example, as a predetermined condition, it may be adopted that the operating means that can be operated by the player is detected to be operated by the player at a predetermined timing. In this case, the magnitude of the deviation between the operation timing instructed by the display means and the actual operation timing is detected, and the degree of change in the action of the visibility obstruction means is changed according to the magnitude. Is also good. For example, the visibility of the ball accommodated in the accommodating means may be improved when the degree of deviation is small as compared with the case where the degree of deviation is large. In this case, the player's motivation for operating the operating means can be improved. The reverse is also possible.

Further, for example, as a predetermined condition, it may be adopted that the ball has passed through a predetermined entry port. In this case, for example, the degree of change in the action of the visibility obstruction means may be changed according to the number of balls that have passed through the predetermined entry port within a predetermined period. For example, as the number of balls that have passed through the entry port increases, the visibility of the balls accommodated in the accommodating means may be improved. In this case, the player can be motivated to fire more balls. The reverse is also possible. In this case, since it is possible to enthusiastically adjust the firing intensity of the ball, it is possible to suppress a vague game.

<Points to suppress wasted balls at intervals while suppressing over-winning>
The game area in which the ball flows down, the entry port through which the ball flowing down the game area passes, and the first state in which the ball flowing down from the upstream side of the entry port can be guided to the entry port and the entry ball. In a gaming machine including a ball entry switching means for switching a ball flowing down from the upstream side of the mouth in a second state in which the ball cannot be guided to the ball entry port, and a detection means for detecting the ball entering the ball entry port. , A delay means for delaying the flow of the ball at the upstream position of the ball entry port when the ball entry switching means is in the second state as compared with the case where the ball entry switching means is in the first state. A game machine B1 characterized by being equipped with.

Here, in a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, a detection means is arranged so that the detection port of the large winning opening is turned sideways, and a predetermined number of balls are detected by an operating member that rolls the balls toward the detection port. There is a gaming machine that operates when it passes through the mouth and drops a ball that is on the operating member during the operation to prevent more than a predetermined number of balls from passing through the detection port of the detection means. (See, for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2015-181572). However, in the conventional game machine described above, since the ball that has fallen from the operating member is inevitably configured to flow down to the out port, is it possible to launch the ball so that the ball that falls from the operating member does not occur? There is a problem that a certain amount of actual ball launch occurs depending on whether or not (the skill of the player's launching technique is high or low).

On the other hand, according to the game machine B1, when the ball entry switching means is in the second state in which the ball flowing down from the upstream position of the ball entry port cannot be guided to the ball entry port, the delay means acts. By delaying the flow of the ball, it is possible to facilitate the arrangement of the ball at the upstream position of the ball entry port until the ball entry switching means is switched to the first state. If the ball entry switching means is in the first state while the ball is located upstream of the ball entry port, the ball is guided to the ball entry port. As a result, it is possible to reduce the influence of the player's launching technique on the actual number of balls to be launched, so that a beginner-friendly gaming machine can be configured.

The mode of the delay means is not limited. For example, it may be a drop regulating means that is composed of a horizontally long member that supports the ball from below and regulates the fall to the end, or a convex means formed from a protrusion that decelerates the ball by contact.

In the game machine B1, the delay means is characterized in that, in a state where the ball is arranged on the downstream side, the degree of delay is increased as compared with the case where the ball is arranged on the upstream side.

According to the game machine B2, in addition to the effect of the game machine B1, the degree of delay of the ball increases when the ball is arranged on the downstream side of the delay means, so that the attention of the ball flowing down along the delay means Can be improved.

The mode of the degree of delay is not limited in any way. For example, the speed of the ball may be high or low, or the degree of backflow of the ball when the ball entry switching means is switched from the second state to the first state may be high or low.

In the game machine B1 or B2, the delay means is configured such that the ball arranged on the downstream side has a larger distance from the opening direction of the entry port than the ball arranged on the upstream side. A game machine B3 characterized by this.

According to the game machine B3, in addition to the effect of the game machine B1 or B2, when the delay means is arranged on the downstream side of the delay means, the delay means increases the distance between the opening direction of the ball entrance and the ball. Is formed, it is possible to prevent the ball from directly entering the ball entrance when the ball flows down vigorously through the delay means.

In any of the game machines B1 to B3, the ball entry switching means includes an ascending means for ascending the game area when the state changes from the second state to the first state, and the delay means is the first. The gaming machine B4, which is arranged below the ascending means in the state.

According to the game machine B4, in addition to the effect of any of the game machines B1 to B3, the delay means is arranged lower than the ascending means in the first state, so that the ball is placed from the ball entry switching means. The ball can be delayed after making the player visually recognize it as if it had fallen. This makes it possible to improve the attention to the sphere.

The game machine B4 is provided with an ascending regulating means which is arranged on the upstream side of the flow path of the ball with respect to the ascending means and which regulates the ascending movement of the ball and guides the ascending movement in a predetermined direction.

According to the game machine B5, in addition to the effect of the game machine B4, the ascending movement of the ball is regulated by the ascending regulating means and the ball is guided in a predetermined direction, so that a load is applied to the ball when the ascending means is ascended. It is possible to prevent the ball from flying in an unexpected direction.

The game machine B5 is characterized in that the ball guided in the predetermined direction by the ascending regulating means can be entered and the game machine B5 is provided with a relief entry port that gives a predetermined benefit to the player.

According to the game machine B6, in addition to the effect of the game machine B5, as a profit different from the profit generated when the ball passes through the entrance due to the ball that has been loaded and flew when the ascending means is raised. , It is possible to give the player a profit generated when the ball passes through the relief entrance. As a result, even when the ball deviates from the flow path to the entrance of the ball, it is possible to prevent the attention from being lowered, and the movement of the ball can improve the interest of the player.

In any of the game machines B1 to B6, the delay means includes a variable action unit having a different action on the sphere depending on the mode of reaching the delay means.

According to the game machine B7, in addition to the effect of any of the game machines B1 to B6, the action of delaying the ball can be different depending on the mode of reaching the delay means. As a result, it is possible to select each sphere and give a different action.

It should be noted that the mode of difference in the mode of arrival is not limited. For example, it may be a difference in the arrival position of the ball with respect to the entry port, or a difference in the flow direction of the ball until it reaches the delay means.

In the game machine B7, the variable action unit delays the flow of the ball that has reached the delay means at a position separated from the entry port by a predetermined distance or less, while separating the ball from the entry port by a predetermined distance or more. A game machine B8 characterized in that it does not act on a ball that has reached the delay means at a position.

According to the game machine B8, in addition to the effect of the game machine B7, the flow of the ball is delayed by the variable action unit for the ball that is close to the ball entry port and the state of the ball entry switching means cannot be switched in time. On the other hand, an appropriate game speed can be maintained by assuming that the variable action unit does not act on a ball that is far from the ball entry port and is sufficiently in time for switching the state of the ball entry switching means.

<Point BK that makes use of the ball reached at intervals>
The game area in which the ball flows down, the entry port through which the ball flowing down the game area passes, and the first state in which the ball flowing down from the upstream side of the entry port can be guided to the entry port and the entry ball. In a game machine including a ball entry switching means for switching a ball flowing down from the upstream side of the mouth in a second state in which the ball cannot be guided to the ball entry port, and a detection means for detecting the ball entering the ball entry port. , While the ball entry switching means is in the second state or from the second state, as compared to a ball that has reached the ball entry switching means while the ball entry switching means is in the first state. The gaming machine BK1 is provided with a profit-giving means that makes it easy to give a profit to a player by a ball that reaches the ball-entry switching means while the state changes to the first state.

Here, in a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, a detection means is arranged so that the detection port of the large winning opening is turned sideways, and a predetermined number of balls are detected by an operating member that rolls the balls toward the detection port. There is a gaming machine that operates when it passes through the mouth and drops a ball that is on the operating member during the operation to prevent more than a predetermined number of balls from passing through the detection port of the detection means. (See, for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2015-181572). However, in the conventional game machine described above, since the ball that has fallen from the operating member is inevitably configured to flow down to the out port, is it possible to launch the ball so that the ball that falls from the operating member does not occur? Depending on whether or not (the skill of the player's launching technique is high or low), some of the actual ball launches will occur, so that the player has to play carefully, and there is a problem that the interest may be reduced.

On the other hand, according to the game machine BK1, by adopting the profit-giving means, it becomes easy to give a profit to the player by the ball that arrived while the ball entry switching means changes the state, so that the profit is given to the player. Since it is possible to incorporate chance into the magnitude of profits, it is possible to remove caution from the game and improve the interest.

The mode of profit given to the player by the profit-giving means is not limited at all. For example, the prize ball may be paid out, a lottery of a predetermined symbol may be performed, the right to shift to a high probability state after the jackpot game is completed, or the next jackpot may be confirmed.

For example, when the mode of profit given to the player by the profit-giving means is the lottery of the special symbol 2, the special symbol 2 is reached by reaching the ball entry switching means at a predetermined timing during the jackpot game. The number of reserved balls can be increased up to a predetermined upper limit. As a result, when the game shifts to the high probability state after the jackpot game ends, the number of reserved balls of the special symbol 2 is 0, so that the occurrence of the event in which the reserved special symbol 1 starts to fluctuate can be suppressed. Can be done. As a result, in a gaming machine in which the lottery of the special symbol 2 is more advantageous for the player, the possibility that the lottery of the special symbol 1 unintentionally wins a big hit and causes a disadvantage to the player is reduced. can do.

In the game machine BK1, the ball is sent to the profit-giving means by a load given from the ball entry switching means.

According to the game machine BK2, in addition to the effect of the game machine BK1, it is possible to prevent the occurrence of a problem that the ball is thrown to the profit-giving means when the ball entry switching means is stopped.

In the game machine BK1 or BK2, the profit that can be given to the player by the profit-giving means is equal to or greater than the loss that can occur while the ball entry switching means maintains the second state. ..

According to the game machine BK3, in addition to the effect of the game machine BK1 or BK2, the player's attention to the profit-giving means can be improved, and the game is performed so that the profit given by the profit-giving means can be obtained. You can make it happen.

In any one of the game machines BK1 to BK3, the profit-giving means is controlled so that a plurality of types of periods maintained in the second state can be selected and controlled.

According to the game machine BK4, in addition to the effect of any of the game machines BK1 to BK3, a plurality of types of periods during which the profit-giving means are maintained in the second state are selected, so that the player can use the profit-giving means. It is possible to make it difficult to launch the ball at the timing of the change to the second state. Therefore, in order to obtain the profit obtained by passing the ball through the profit-giving means, it is possible to configure the game property that the firing of the ball must be continued.

<Points to adjust the launch of the jackpot game>
The game area in which the ball flows down, the entry port through which the ball flowing down the game area passes, and the first state in which the ball flowing down from the upstream side of the entry port can be guided to the entry port and the entry ball. In a game machine including a ball entry switching means for switching a ball flowing down from the upstream side of the mouth in a second state in which the ball cannot be guided to the ball entry port, and a detection means for detecting the ball entering the ball entry port. When the ball entry switching means maintains the first state, a ball that can pass through the ball entry port in relation to the number of balls that have passed through the ball entry port during the period in which the first state was formed before that. The gaming machine C1 is provided with a number changing means capable of changing the number.

Here, in a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, the operation mode of the operating member arranged in the big winning opening during the big hit game is such that a specified number of balls can be inserted for a long time and a specified number of balls can be inserted. There is a gaming machine that is controlled so as to change the number of balls entering the large winning opening in each round by switching the balls in a short time, which is impossible (for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2015-). 181572 (see). However, in the above-mentioned conventional game machine, the number of balls that can be won in the big prize opening is independent in each round, and each of them depends on the mode of launching the balls, so that the prize balls throughout the big hit game are large. There was a problem that there was a possibility of making a difference.

On the other hand, according to the game machine C1, the number of balls passing through the entry port in the state where the entry ball switching means forms the first state by the number changing means is determined by the entry ball switching means before that. When one state is formed, it can be changed in relation to the number of balls that have passed through the ball entry port, so that the benefit given to the player in a series of operation patterns in which the ball entry switching means repeatedly forms the first state. Adjustments can be made.

The method of adjusting profits is not limited. For example, when the ball entry switching means previously forms the first state, the ball enters the ball when the ball entry switching means forms the first state due to passing through a large number of balls through the ball entry port. It may be an embodiment in which the number of balls that can be put into the mouth is suppressed, or the player's benefit (not limited to the ball output) when the ball entry switching means forms the first state next due to the same event. For example, it may be an aspect of increasing the right to move to a high probability state).

In the game machine C1, the number changing means includes a storage means for accommodating a ball that has passed through the entry port, an discharge port through which the ball passes when the ball exits from the accommodation means, and a ball at the discharge port. A discharge switching means that can switch between a first state through which the ball can pass and a second state in which the ball cannot pass through the discharge port, and the discharge switching means can be operated in a plurality of types of operation modes, and the discharge switching means The gaming machine C2 is characterized by comprising an operation mode switching means capable of changing the number of balls discharged from the accommodating means depending on the difference in the operation mode.

According to the game machine C2, in addition to the effect of the game machine C1, the number of balls housed in the housing means to be discharged from the discharge port can be changed by the operation mode switching means, so that the balls remain in the storage means. The number of remaining spheres can be made variable. As a result, the number of balls required to fill the accommodating means with the balls can be changed, and the maximum number of balls passing through the entry port can be physically changed.

The mode of the difference in the operation mode is not limited in any way. For example, different operation periods, or when a plurality of discharge ports are arranged, different discharge switching means to be operated (operation target) may be exemplified.

In the game machine C2, the number changing means includes an interval maintaining means for maintaining a ball discharge interval from the discharge port.

According to the game machine C3, in addition to the effect of the game machine C2, the discharge interval of the balls from the discharge port is maintained by the interval maintaining means, so that the balls are discharged regardless of the number of balls housed in the storage means. The number of balls discharged from the discharge port can be specified according to the length of the period in which the switching means is in the first state. Therefore, the number of balls discharged from the discharge port can be strictly changed according to the length of the interval determined in advance by the jackpot symbol.

The mode of the interval maintaining means is not particularly limited. For example, a flow path shape formed so that the direction of the load received from the ball immediately before the discharge port from the subsequent ball is perpendicular to the direction in which the discharge port is opened may be used as the means, or from the inner wall of the accommodation means. A rib that is projected and gives a load to the ball to decelerate the ball may be used as the means.

In the game machine C3, the space-maintaining means includes a protrusion protruding from the inner surface of the accommodating means in the flow path of the ball in the vicinity of the discharge port.

According to the game machine C4, in addition to the effect of the game machine C3, the protruding portion is projected into the flow path, so that the flowing ball is brought into contact with the protruding portion to decelerate, so that the ball is closer to the discharge port. It is possible to prevent a large change in the flow velocity between the ball and the ball having a short distance from the discharge port, and it is possible to make the flow velocity of the ball uniform.

In the game machine C4, the accommodating means includes a discharge path for causing balls to flow down in a row in a predetermined flow direction immediately before the discharge port, and the protrusions are staggered from facing surfaces constituting the discharge path. A game machine C5 characterized in that it is projected at predetermined intervals.

According to the game machine C5, in addition to the effect of the game machine C4, the protrusions are alternately projected from the facing surfaces at predetermined intervals, so that the protrusions collide with the balls flowing down the discharge path to cause the balls to collide with each other. It is possible to collide with the protrusions at predetermined intervals while shifting the position in the vertical direction in the predetermined flow direction, and the action of decelerating the ball can be maintained for a long period of time.

In the game machine C5, the accommodating means includes a rolling discharge plate portion that is connected to the discharge passage and rolls a ball immediately before being discharged from the discharge port, and rolls the rolling discharge plate portion. The gaming machine C6 is characterized in that the flow velocity of the ball is formed to be higher than the flow velocity of the ball flowing down the discharge path.

According to the game machine C6, in addition to the effect of the game machine C5, the ball rolling on the rolling discharge plate portion flows down at a higher speed than the ball flowing down the discharge path, so that the ball stored in the accommodating means Regardless of the number of balls, the tempo (time interval) at which the balls are discharged from the discharge port can be kept constant.

In any of the game machines C1 to C6, the ball entry port is provided with a start port for determining a big hit of a special symbol by passing a ball.

According to the game machine C7, in addition to the effect of any of the game machines C1 to C6, the number of jackpot determinations of the special symbol can be associated with the number of balls entering the ball entrance. As a result, the number of payouts in the jackpot game can be changed depending on the number of determinations of the special symbol required to acquire the jackpot.

The game machine C7 includes a starting ball passing switching means for switching whether or not a ball passing through the starting port can enter the accommodating means, and the starting ball passing switching means operates in conjunction with the entering ball switching means. A game machine C8 characterized by doing.

According to the game machine C8, in addition to the effect of the game machine C7, the number of arranged drive devices can be reduced.

By the way, the discharge port includes a first discharge port and a second discharge port arranged at different positions, and the discharge switching means changes the state of the first discharge port and the second discharge port independently of each other. The first discharge port and the second discharge port are made possible by the accommodating means depending on whether the ball is discharged from the first discharge port or the ball is discharged from the second discharge port (under the same conditions). The number of remaining spheres may be arranged at a changeable position.

In this case, the number of balls remaining in the accommodating means can be changed depending on whether the balls are ejected from the first outlet or the second outlet, so that the flow velocity of the balls flowing down the accommodating means has changed. Even in this case, the number of balls ejected from the accommodating means can be maintained.

The arrangement of the first discharge port and the second discharge port is not limited in any way. For example, one may be arranged at the lower end of the accommodating means and the other may be arranged at the intermediate position of the accommodating means, or both may be arranged at the lower end and a branch flow path for distributing the sphere may be arranged upstream thereof. You can do it.

Further, the operation mode of the first discharge port and the second discharge port is not limited. For example, one may be opened one by one, or both may be opened. When both are open, the time required to discharge the same number of balls from the accommodating means can be shortened as compared with the case where the balls are discharged from a single discharge port. As a result, the interval in the jackpot game can be shortened, and the number of balls discharged from the out port during the jackpot game can be reduced.

By the way, the first discharge port may be arranged at the lower end of the accommodating means, and the second discharge port may be arranged on the upstream side of the first discharge port.

In this case, when the ball is discharged from the second discharge port, the ball arranged between the first discharge port and the second discharge port is used as the accommodating means regardless of the period during which the second discharge port is in the first state. Can be held. Therefore, even if the number of balls accommodated in the accommodating means varies, it is possible to easily keep the number of balls remaining after discharging the balls constant. Further, even if the launch of the ball is reduced due to clogging of the ball or the like, it is possible to easily form a state in which the ball remains inside the accommodating means.

Further, the first discharge port and the second discharge port may be arranged on the downstream side branched at the lower end portion of the accommodation means.

In this case, from the state in which the same number of balls are accommodated in the accommodating means, it is possible to switch from which discharge port the last ejected ball is ejected depending on the operation mode of the ejection switching means, so that the balls are ejected. From the behavior at the start, it can be difficult to grasp the ejection mode of the sphere. That is, for example, when the profit given to the player changes depending on which discharge port the last discharged ball is discharged from, it is possible to improve the attention to the flow mode of the ball.

<During the round, it will be produced as if the round was switched>
The game area in which the ball flows down, the entry port through which the ball flowing down the game area passes, and the first state in which the ball flowing down from the upstream side of the entry port can be guided to the entry port and the entry ball. In a game machine including a ball entry switching means for switching a ball flowing down from the upstream side of the mouth in a second state in which the ball cannot be guided to the ball entry port, and a detection means for detecting the ball entering the ball entry port. When the ball entry switching means maintains the first state, the open state switching means is provided so as to be able to switch between a period during which the ball easily passes through the ball entry port and a period during which the ball does not easily pass through. The game machine CK1 characterized by.

Here, in a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, the operation mode of the operating member arranged in the big winning opening during the big hit game is such that a specified number of balls can be inserted for a long time and a specified number of balls can be inserted. There is a gaming machine that is controlled so as to change the number of balls entering the large winning opening in each round by switching the balls in a short time, which is impossible (for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2015-). 181572 (see). However, in the conventional game machine described above, since the ball enters the large winning opening in each round in the same manner, there is a problem that it may be difficult to sufficiently improve the attention to the large winning opening. there were.

On the other hand, according to the game machine CK1, while the ball entry switching means maintains the first state, the attention to the ball entry mode to the entry port can be improved by the opening state switching means. ..

The mode of the open state switching means is not limited at all. For example, the period may be changed by changing the operation mode of the movable object arranged on the upstream side of the detection means, or the period may be changed based on the number of balls entering the detection means. You may.

The game machine CK2 is characterized in that the game machine CK1 includes a notification means for notifying a change in profit given to a player while the ball entry switching means maintains the first state.

According to the game machine CK2, in addition to the effect played by the game machine CK1, if the notification of the notification means is confirmed, the game shows that the profit obtained by the player has changed while the ball entry switching means maintains the first state. Can be grasped. Therefore, the game mode can be adjusted by the notification of the notification means.

The mode of notification of the notification means is not limited in any way. For example, while presenting the number of rounds of the jackpot game, it may be notified to make a break in the middle of the round game R (switching the screen, outputting sound, etc.), or turning off the display of the number of rounds. , The sub-round may be displayed as if a new round game R has started. In any case, assuming that the start timing of the round game R and the timing of notification by the notification means are the breaks in the game, the number of times the maximum number of rounds in the control state (for example, 16 rounds) is exceeded, and the breaks in the jackpot game By setting (for example, 20 breaks), it is possible to improve the interest of the player.

In the game machine CK2, it is configured so that a predetermined benefit can be easily given to the player based on the fact that the number of balls that can pass through the entry port is guided by the entry switching means. The gaming machine CK3, which comprises a conditional profit-giving means.

According to the game machine CK3, in addition to the effect of the game machine CK2, it is possible to prevent all of the balls from being wasted when the number of balls that can be passed through the ball entrance is increased. As a result, it is possible to link the improvement of the interest of the player by the production and the substantial profit (payment of the prize ball).

It should be noted that a notification may be given to instruct the player to continue firing so that the player does not stop firing by visually recognizing that the ball has stopped passing through the entrance. As the mode of notification in this case, various modes are exemplified. For example, it may be a direct notification such as "continue firing", a notification that euphemistically suggests the number of shots such as "if you put 5 on it, a great chance", or "something can be seen through the ball". It may be notified (in this case, it cannot be visually recognized when there is no sphere, and when there is a sphere, a light beam that visually displays some figure or picture is irradiated to a predetermined position where the sphere is accumulated near the incoming ball switching means. Is desirable).

<Points to adjust the launch of the jackpot game for each round>
The game area in which the ball flows down, the entry port through which the ball flowing down the game area passes, and the first state in which the ball flowing down from the upstream side of the entry port can be guided to the entry port and the entry ball. In a game machine including a ball entry switching means for switching a ball flowing down from the upstream side of the mouth in a second state in which the ball cannot be guided to the ball entry port, and a detection means for detecting the ball entering the ball entry port. A switching drive means for switching and driving the ball entry switching means to the second state when a predetermined number of balls have passed through the ball entry port while the ball entry switching means is in the first state. The game machine DK1 is provided with an adjusting means configured to be able to adjust an excess ball entering the ball entrance based on a specified number of balls.

Here, in a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, the operation mode of the operating member arranged in the big winning opening during the big hit game is such that a specified number of balls can be inserted for a long time and a specified number of balls can be inserted. There is a gaming machine that is controlled so as to change the number of balls entering the large winning opening in each round by switching the balls in a short time, which is impossible (for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2015-). 181572 (see). However, in the above-mentioned conventional game machine, the number of balls that can be won in the big prize opening is independent in each round, and each of them depends on the mode of launching the balls, so that the prize balls throughout the big hit game are large. There was a problem that there was a possibility of making a difference.

On the other hand, according to the game machine DK1, the excess ball entering the ball entrance can be adjusted by the adjusting means, so that the profit given to the player by the ball passing through the ball opening varies in a short time. It can be leveled for a long time.

The mode of adjusting the excess ball is not limited at all. For example, the ball entry switching means may be adjusted so that the same excess ball entry can be expected each time based on the specified number of balls that can pass through the ball entry port during the first state, or a predetermined number (plural or singular). ) The second excess ball that occurs when the first state is set at the other (multiple or singular) timing is reduced compared to the first excess ball that occurs when the first state is set at the timing. , The first excess ball and the second excess ball may be adjusted so as to be balanced, and the period in which the ball entry switching means is in the first state is short or long (big hit game and small hit). (In the game), the number of over-entry balls may be distinguished and adjusted so that they balance.

The ball entry switching means may be configured in a single arrangement or may be configured in a plurality of arrangements.

The game machine DK1 is provided with a load applying means configured to be able to apply a load suitable for the detecting means to a sphere arranged at a predetermined position on the upstream side of the detecting means in the process of switching driving by the switching driving means. DK2, a game machine characterized by.

According to the game machine DK2, in addition to the effect of the game machine DK1, the ball arranged on the upstream side of the detection means can be easily detected by the detection means by the action of the load applying means.

The number of spheres to which the load is applied by the load applying means is not limited at all. For example, it may be one or a plurality.

In the game machine DK1 or DK2, as a state at the start of the switching drive, a post-drive entry ball that can be switched between an allowable state that allows the ball to pass through the ball entry port and a regulated state that restricts the passage of the ball. A game machine DK3 characterized by being provided with a state switching means.

According to the game machine DK3, in addition to the effect of the game machine DK1 or DK2, whether or not the ball can pass through the ball entrance port regardless of the flow mode of the ball to the ball entry port and the operating speed of the ball entry switching means. Can be specified by the ball entry state switching means after driving, so that the degree of excess ball entry into the ball entry port can be easily adjusted.

In any of the game machines DK1 to DK3, the load applied from the ball to the ball entry switching means is applied in a direction along the direction in which the ball entry switching means is driven during the switching drive. Machine DK4.

According to the game machine DK4, in addition to the effect of any of the game machines DK1 to DK3, it is possible to suppress a problem that the load from the ball prevents the ball entry switching means from changing to the second state. ..

As a mode of applying the load from the ball, for example, the ball entry switching means is configured to be driven so as to fall (hang down) downward by the switching drive, and the weight of the ball is given to the ball entry switching means. The case is illustrated.

<Points to adjust the launch of the jackpot game for each round>
The game area in which the ball flows down, the entry port through which the ball flowing down the game area passes, and the first state in which the ball flowing down from the upstream side of the entry port can be guided to the entry port and the entry ball. In a game machine including a ball entry switching means for switching a ball flowing down from the upstream side of the mouth in a second state in which the ball cannot be guided to the ball entry port, and a detection means for detecting the ball entering the ball entry port. A switching drive means for switching and driving the ball entry switching means to the second state when a predetermined number of balls have passed through the ball entry port while the ball entry switching means is in the first state. After the switching drive by the switching drive means is started, a post-drive entry state switching means capable of forming an allowable state for allowing the ball to pass through the ball entry port and a regulated state for restricting the passage of the ball, A game machine D1 characterized by being equipped with.

Here, in a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, the operation mode of the operating member arranged in the big winning opening during the big hit game is such that a specified number of balls can be inserted for a long time and a specified number of balls can be inserted. There is a gaming machine that is controlled so as to change the number of balls entering the large winning opening in each round by switching the balls in a short time, which is impossible (for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2015-). 181572 (see). However, in the above-mentioned conventional game machine, the number of balls that can be won in the big prize opening is independent in each round, and each of them depends on the mode of launching the balls, so that the prize balls throughout the big hit game are large. There was a problem that there was a possibility of making a difference.

On the other hand, according to the game machine D1, the post-drive entry state switching means switches whether or not the ball can enter after the entry port is closed by the switching drive means, so that an extra ball can enter. The timing can be reduced, and the number of prize balls throughout the jackpot game can be made uniform.

In the game machine D1, the ball entry port includes a first ball entry port and a second ball entry port, and the drive-after ball entry state switching means forms the restricted state at the first ball entry port. However, the gaming machine D2 is characterized in that the allowable state is formed at the second entrance.

According to the game machine D2, in addition to the effect of the game machine D1, the number of balls exceeds the specified number depending on whether the ball passes through the first entry port or the second entry port. Since it is possible to switch whether or not the ball can be entered, it is possible to improve the attention to which entry opening the entry switching means opens.

In the game machine D2, the first ball entry port is provided with a drop hole on the front side of the opening, and when the ball entry switching means starts switching to the second state, from the front side of the opening of the first ball entry port. The gaming machine D3 is characterized in that a ball arranged on the upstream side is dropped into the drop hole.

According to the game machine D3, in addition to the effect of the game machine D2, even when the ball remains on the upstream side of the first ball entry port, the ball is dropped while the ball entry switching means maintains the second state. It can be dropped into the ball and kept away from the entrance. As a result, it is possible to prevent the number of balls exceeding the specified number from passing through the first entry port.

<Point where balls join the storage channel from multiple winning openings>
The game area in which the ball flows down, the entry port through which the ball flowing down the game area passes, and the first state in which the ball flowing down from the upstream side of the entry port can be guided to the entry port and the entry ball. In a game machine including a ball entry switching means for switching a ball flowing down from the upstream side of the mouth in a second state in which the ball cannot be guided to the ball entry port, and a detection means for detecting the ball entering the ball entry port. , A storage means in which a predetermined number of balls that have passed through the ball entry port are stored, and a ball housed in the storage means based on the switching of the ball entry switching means to the second state from the storage means. The gaming machine EK1 is provided with a discharge means for discharging, and the ball entry switching means can be switched to the first state before the end of the discharge action by the discharge means.

Here, in a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, the operation mode of the operating member arranged in the big winning opening during the big hit game is such that a specified number of balls can be inserted for a long time and a specified number of balls can be inserted. There is a gaming machine that is controlled so as to change the number of balls entering the large winning opening in each round by switching the balls in a short time, which is impossible (for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2015-). 181572 (see). However, in the above-mentioned conventional game machine, the number of balls that can be won in the big prize opening is independent in each round, and each of them depends on the mode of launching the balls, so that the prize balls throughout the big hit game are large. There was a problem that there was a possibility of making a difference.

On the other hand, according to the game machine EK1, since the discharge act by the discharge means can be completed leaving the balls that have been closed in the storage means, the number of balls that can be entered into the entrance in each round is related. Can be made to. Therefore, it is possible to reduce the difference in the prize balls throughout the jackpot game.

Further, since the ball can be accommodated in the accommodating means for a period in which the state of the entry ball switching means is switched a plurality of times, the number of balls that can pass through the entry slot while the entry ball switching means is maintained in the first state. More balls can be accommodated in the containment means. As a result, it is possible to notify the player of the guideline of the frequency of entering the ball, so that the player can be shown the game efficiency of the game machine currently playing.

The means for showing the game efficiency is not limited in any way. For example, the ratio of the number of prize balls paid out to the number of balls launched (prize ball / number of launched balls) may be used, or each time the ball entry switching means is in the first state, the number of times in a row at the ball entry port. It may be an index indicating whether or not the ball is passed.

The number of ball entry ports, ball entry switching means, and accommodating means is not limited to a single number, and may be plural. In this case, the ball entry switching means and the accommodating means may be provided corresponding to each ball entry port so that the state change of each ball entry switching means occurs in order, or each ball entry switching means may be configured. It may be configured so that the state changes partially at the same time.

The game machine EK2 is characterized in that whether or not the discharging action ends with the ball housed in the accommodating means can be adjusted depending on the launching mode of the ball.

According to the game machine EK2, in addition to the effect of the game machine EK1, it is possible to increase the motivation to participate in the game of launching the game ball toward the entrance.

In the game machine EK1 or EK2, the entry port includes at least a first entry port and a second entry port, and a mode in which balls that have passed through the first entry port or the second entry port merge. The gaming machine EK3, characterized in that the accommodating means is formed in the above.

According to the game machine EK3, in addition to the effect of the game machine EK1 or EK2, the balls that have passed through the first entry port or the second entry port merge inside the accommodating means capable of accommodating up to a predetermined number of balls. Therefore, the number of balls that can pass through the second entrance can be changed in relation to the number of balls that have passed through the first entrance. Therefore, the number of balls passing through the first entry port and the second entry opening (the number of payouts associated therewith) can be made uniform throughout the game.

The game area in which the ball flows down, the entry port through which the ball flowing down the game area passes, and the first state in which the ball flowing down from the upstream side of the entry port can be guided to the entry port and the entry ball. In a game machine including a ball entry switching means for switching a ball flowing down from the upstream side of the mouth in a second state in which the ball cannot be guided to the ball entry port, and a detection means for detecting the ball entering the ball entry port. A storage means for accommodating a predetermined number of balls that have passed through the ball entry port is provided, and the ball entry port includes at least a first ball entry port and a second ball entry port, and the first ball entry port thereof. Alternatively, the gaming machine E1 is characterized in that the accommodating means is formed in such a manner that the balls passing through the second entrance are merged.

Here, in a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, the operation mode of the operating member arranged in the big winning opening during the big hit game is such that a specified number of balls can be inserted for a long time and a specified number of balls can be inserted. There is a gaming machine that is controlled so as to change the number of balls entering the large winning opening in each round by switching the balls in a short time, which is impossible (for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2015-). 181572 (see). However, in the above-mentioned conventional game machine, the number of balls that can be won in the big prize opening is independent in each round, and each of them depends on the mode of launching the balls, so that the prize balls throughout the big hit game are large. There was a problem that there was a possibility of making a difference.

On the other hand, according to the game machine E1, the balls that have passed through the first entry port or the second entry opening merge inside the accommodating means that can accommodate up to a predetermined number of balls, so that the first entry ball The number of balls that can pass through the second entrance can be changed in relation to the number of balls that have passed through the mouth. Therefore, the number of balls passing through the first entry port and the second entry opening (the number of payouts associated therewith) can be made uniform throughout the game.

In the game machine E1, when the accommodating means is empty, the number of balls that can be accommodated in the accommodating means by passing through the first entry port and the accommodation by passing through the second entry port. The gaming machine E2 is characterized in that the number of balls that can be accommodated in the means is different.

According to the game machine E2, in addition to the effect of the game machine E1, the number of balls that can enter the first entrance and the number of balls that can enter the second entrance are different. It is possible to improve the player's attention to whether or not the entrance to the ball is opened.

In the game machine E2, the number of balls that can be accommodated from the first entrance is set to be smaller than the number that can be accommodated from the second entrance, and a predetermined upper limit number of balls is discharged in the closed state of each entrance. The upper limit is set to be the same as the number that can be accommodated from the first ball entrance, and the first ball opening is opened during the opening when the second ball opening is opened a plurality of times. A game machine E3 characterized by this.

According to the game machine E3, in addition to the effect of the game machine E2, the ball that has passed through the second ball entrance before the opening of the first ball opening and the second ball opening after the opening of the first ball opening The ball that has passed can differ from the actual benefit given to the player.

That is, when the ball passes through the second ball slot before the first ball slot is opened, even if the number of balls that can be accommodated from the first ball slot has passed through the second ball slot, the ball has passed. Minutes are not discharged, and the number of balls obtained by subtracting the remaining amount is accommodated from the first entry port. The player can only get the same profit as if he passed the number of.

On the other hand, if the ball passes through the second ball slot after the first ball slot is opened, and if more balls than can be accommodated from the first ball slot pass through the second ball slot, they are deducted. The player can get additional benefits because it is not.

The number of game balls that can be accommodated is set in various ways. For example, it can be performed by setting the length and thickness of the flow path in which the game ball is accommodated. Further, the change in the substantial benefit given to the player is not limited to the number of prize balls, and for example, the substantial benefit given to the player can be changed depending on whether or not the ball can pass through a specific area. Can be done.

<Points where the interference member overhangs>
The game area in which the ball flows down, the entry port through which the ball flowing down the game area passes, and the first state in which the ball flowing down from the upstream side of the entry port can be guided to the entry port and the entry ball. In a gaming machine including a ball entry switching means for switching a ball flowing down from the upstream side of the mouth in a second state in which the ball cannot be guided to the ball entry port, and a detection means for detecting the ball entering the ball entry port. The ball is arranged in the flow path of the ball that has passed through the entrance, and is provided with an interference means that can be switched between an overhanging state that can interfere with the ball and a retracted state that does not interfere with the ball. The game machine F1.

Here, in a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, the operation mode of the operating member arranged in the big winning opening during the big hit game is such that a specified number of balls can be inserted for a long time and a specified number of balls can be inserted. There is a gaming machine that is controlled so as to change the number of balls entering the large winning opening in each round by switching the balls in a short time, which is impossible (for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2015-). 181572 (see). However, in the above-mentioned conventional game machine, the number of balls that can be won in the big prize opening is independent in each round, and each of them depends on the mode of launching the balls, so that the prize balls throughout the big hit game are large. There was a problem that there was a possibility of making a difference.

On the other hand, according to the game machine F1, since the interference means is arranged in the flow path of the ball passing through the ball entry port, by keeping the interference means in the overhanging state, from the ball entry port to the interference means. It is possible to clog the ball in the path of the ball and prevent more balls from passing through the entrance. Thereby, the prize ball can be adjusted throughout the jackpot game depending on the operation mode of the interference means.

The game machine F1 is characterized in that the game machine F1 is provided with a stopping means for stopping the ball in front of the interference means in the retracted state of the interference means.

According to the game machine F2, in addition to the effect of the game machine F1, the interference means can be changed to the overhanging state while the ball is stopped in front of the interference means, so that the state of the interference means is changed in advance. Compared to, the movement can be hidden by a sphere. Therefore, the movement can be made difficult for the player to notice.

In the game machine F2, the stopping means is switched between a stopping state in which the ball passing through the detecting means is stopped and a passing state in which the ball passing through the detecting means is passed, and the above-mentioned aspect of switching of the stopping means. The gaming machine F3 is characterized in that the mode of changing the state of the interfering means can be changed.

According to the game machine F3, in addition to the effect of the game machine F2, a plurality of types of modes of changing the state of the interfering means in the passing state of the stopping means can be configured, so that the stopping means can be maintained in the passing state. The timing at which the ball passes through the stopping means can be changed in a plurality of types.

<It is difficult to predict the type of benefits from the number of stored items>
The game area in which the ball flows down, the entry port through which the ball flowing down the game area passes, and the first state in which the ball flowing down from the upstream side of the entry port can be guided to the entry port and the entry ball. In a game machine including a ball entry switching means for switching a ball flowing down from the upstream side of the mouth in a second state in which the ball cannot be guided to the ball entry port, and a detection means for detecting the ball entering the ball entry port. , The ball is arranged in the flow path of the ball passing through the entrance, and is provided with an operation means capable of operating in a plurality of operation patterns, and the profit that can be obtained by the player is changed based on the operation pattern of the operation means. A game machine FK1 characterized in being capable of being configured.

Here, in a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, the operation mode of the operating member arranged in the big winning opening during the big hit game is such that a specified number of balls can be inserted for a long time and a specified number of balls can be inserted. There is a gaming machine that is controlled so as to change the number of balls entering the large winning opening in each round by switching the balls in a short time, which is impossible (for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2015-). 181572 (see). However, in the above-mentioned conventional game machine, the number of balls that can be won in the big winning opening is determined based on the situation on the upstream side of the big winning opening in each round, so that the attention to the downstream of the big winning opening may decrease. There was a problem that there was.

On the other hand, according to the game machine FK1, the operation means is arranged on the downstream side of the ball entrance, and the profit that the player can obtain can be changed by the operation pattern of the operation means. It is possible to improve the attention to the downstream side of.

The game machine FK1 is characterized in that the game machine FK1 is provided with an operation means that can be operated by the player, and the operation pattern of the operation means can be changed by the player operating the operation means.

According to the game machine FK2, in addition to the effect of the game machine FK1, the operation pattern of the operation means can be changed by the player operating the operation means, so that the player's motivation to operate the operation means is improved. Can be made to.

In the game machine FK2, a first privilege and a second privilege are set as profits given to the player based on the passage of the game ball through the entrance, and the first privilege depends on the operation mode of the operation means. The gaming machine FK3, characterized in that the mode of acquisition of the privilege and the second privilege changes.

According to the game machine FK3, in addition to the effect of the game machine FK2, the profit obtained by the player directly changes depending on the operation mode of the operation means, so that the player's motivation to operate the operation means can be improved. it can.

The modes of the first privilege and the second privilege are not limited in any way. For example, the first privilege may be set as the payout of the prize ball, the second privilege may be set as the confirmation of the probability change state after the jackpot game (as a V probability variation game machine), or the second privilege may be set as the confirmation of the jackpot. It may be set (as a small hit game in a type 1 type 2 mixer).

The relationship between the first privilege and the second privilege is not limited in any way. For example, they may be large or small, have different properties, or have conflicting relationships.

Here, as for those having a large or small relationship, for example, the profits given to the player in the first privilege and the second privilege are both the payout of prize balls, and the number of balls paid out in the first privilege is the first. When the number of balls paid out in the 2 benefits is larger, or the profit given to the player in the 1st and 2nd benefits is both a transition to the jackpot game state, which is compared with the number of rounds of the jackpot game in the 1st benefit. Then, the case where the number of rounds in the second privilege is larger is illustrated.

Further, as another property, for example, the profit given to the player in the first privilege is a transition to the jackpot gaming state, whereas the profit given to the player in the second privilege is a prize. In the case of paying out balls or when the profit given to the player in the first privilege is a clear indication of the game state, the profit given to the player in the second privilege is the maximum payout prize ball acquisition. For example, the case is.

Further, as a contradictory relationship, for example, the profit given to the player in the first privilege is related to the profit of the player such as the game state after the end of the jackpot game (or the number of fluctuations until the next jackpot). In contrast to the disclosure of information), the profit given to the player in the second privilege is the game state after the end of the jackpot game (and information related to the player's profit such as the number of fluctuations until the next jackpot). An example is the case of extinction.

<Point 1 that makes it difficult to predict whether or not a V prize can be won from the attacker's movement>
The game area in which the ball flows down, the entry port through which the ball flowing down the game area passes, and the first state in which the ball flowing down from the upstream side of the entry port can be guided to the entry port and the entry ball. The ball entry switching means for switching the ball flowing down from the upstream side of the mouth in the second state in which the ball cannot be guided to the ball entry port, the detection means for detecting the ball entering the ball entry port, and the ball entry port. A profit-giving means that gives a predetermined profit to the player by passing the passed ball, a first state in which the ball can be guided to the profit-giving means, and a second state in which the ball cannot be guided to the profit-giving means. In a gaming machine including a profit switching means that can be switched by, in an operating mode in which the conditions for maintaining the ball entry switching means in the first state are the same, a case where the ball can pass through the profit-giving means and the profit. The gaming machine G1 characterized in that it is possible to switch between the case where the ball cannot pass through the giving means.

Here, in a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, a ball that has passed through a large winning opening is distributed to either an advantageous route or an unfavorable route by the distribution section, and the profit given to the player changes depending on the distribution result. (See, for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2014-155538). However, in the above-mentioned conventional game machine, the operation mode of the opening / closing plate of the large winning opening during the period in which the distribution unit is in a state where the ball can be distributed to the advantageous route is an operation for causing the ball to flow down to the advantageous route. It is clearly divided into the mode and the operation mode for when the ball is not allowed to flow down to the advantageous route. In the operation mode for when the ball is not allowed to flow down to the advantageous route, the ball should not enter the big winning opening in the first place. Since the opening / closing plate is operated (closed), it is not possible to maintain the attention to the ball toward the big winning opening, and there is room for improvement from the viewpoint of paying attention to the behavior of the ball entering the big winning opening. There was a problem.

On the other hand, according to the game machine G1, in the operation mode in which the conditions for maintaining the ball entry switching means in the first state are the same, the ball can pass through the profit-giving means and the ball passes through the profit-giving means. Since it can be switched between the impossible case and the impossible case, it does not block the ball from entering the ball entrance. As a result, it is possible to maintain the attention to the ball toward the entrance.

The game machine G1 is provided with a stopping means which is arranged on the upstream side of the profit switching means and can be switched between a stopping state in which a ball passing through the detecting means is stopped and a passing state in which a ball passing through the detecting means is stopped. As the ball entry switching means is switched from the first state to the second state, the stopping means is switched from the stopping state to the passing state, and the ball flowing down to the downstream of the stopping means switches the profit. A game machine G2 characterized by reaching a means.

According to the game machine G2, in addition to the effect of the game machine G1, the ball that has passed through the entrance is stopped once by the stopping means arranged upstream of the profit switching means, so that the ball is profitable at an arbitrary timing. It is possible to prevent the switching means from being reached. As a result, it is possible to prevent the ball from reaching the profit switching means at an unexpected timing no matter how the ball passes through the ball entry port while the ball entry switching means is in the first state. it can.

The game machine G2 is characterized by comprising a period changing means for changing the period during which the ball flowing down through the stopping means can reach the profit switching means after switching the stopping means to the passing state. Game machine G3.

According to the game machine G3, in addition to the effect of the game machine G2, the period during which the ball can reach the profit switching means after the ball passes through the stopping means changes depending on the period changing means, so that after the ball passes through the stopping means. It is possible to prevent the player from getting bored with the playability of the above, and it is possible to improve the interest of the player until the ball reaches the profit switching means.

The period changing means may be a means for changing the flow velocity of the ball passing through the stopping means, or a means for delaying the period from when the stopping means is switched to the passing state until the ball starts flowing down. It may be a means for changing the number of balls anchored in the stopping means.

In the game machine G3, the period changing means is formed so that the number of balls stopped by the stopping means can be switched according to the profit given to the player.

According to the game machine G4, in addition to the effect of the game machine G3, the profit given to the player can be predicted from the number of balls stopped by the stopping means, so attention to the balls stopped by the stopping means can be predicted. The power can be improved.

The means for switching the number of balls stopped by the stopping means is not limited at all. For example, the number of balls to be stopped in the stopping means can be changed by combining the period in which the stopping means is in the passing state and the period in which the ball entry switching means is in the first state immediately after that.

That is, for example, when the period in which the stopping means is in the passing state is extremely shortened, and then the period in which the ball entry switching means is in the first state is extremely shortened immediately after that, among the balls stopped in the stopping means. Since the number of balls flowing downstream of the stopping means is extremely reduced, a large number of balls are stopped at the stopping means even if no new balls enter from the entrance.

On the other hand, if the period during which the stopping means is passed is sufficiently long and then the period during which the entry switching means is set to the first state immediately after that is extremely shortened, among the balls stopped at the stopping means, In addition to the majority of the balls flowing downstream of the stopping means, no new balls enter from the entry port, so that the balls are hardly stopped at the stopping means.

In this way, by changing the period during which the stopping means is in the passing state and shortening the period during which the entering ball switching means is in the first state immediately after that, the ball is stopped at the stopping means regardless of the launch mode of the ball. The number of spheres can be changed.

In any of the game machines G1 to G4, the entry ball switching means is provided with a setting means for selecting and setting a plurality of types of closed maintenance periods in which the second state is maintained, and a predetermined period from the end point of the closed maintenance period. The gaming machine G5, wherein the profit switching means is switched to the first state after the lapse of time.

According to the game machine G5, in addition to the effect of any of the game machines G1 to G4, the setting means forms a plurality of types of periods during which the ball entry switching means maintains the second state, so that the ball is a stopping means. Since the period from passing through to the switching of the profit switching means to the first state is formed by a plurality of types, even if the number of balls stopped at the stopping means is the same, the balls pass through the profit giving means. It is possible to control the case where it is performed and the case where it is not passed. Therefore, it is possible to continuously improve the attention to the flow of the ball.

For example, a period in which the ball entry switching means is maintained in the first state for a sufficiently long period so that a specified number of balls can pass through the ball entry port, and immediately after that, the ball entry switching means is maintained in the second state. When the setting means selects the closed maintenance period in the manner of making it extremely short (the ball passing through the stopping means is shorter than reaching the profit switching means), the entry ball switching means is in the first state immediately after that. By changing the state of the profit switching means from time to time, it is possible to arbitrarily set the period from the passing state of the stopping means to the first state of the profit switching means. Therefore, regardless of the timing at which the ball entry switching means is switched from the first state to the second state, it is possible to arbitrarily determine whether or not the ball that has passed through the stopping means passes through the profit-giving means. Thereby, regardless of the number of balls anchored in the stopping means and the mode of stopping (for example, timing), it is possible to arbitrarily determine whether or not the balls passing through the stopping means pass through the profit-giving means.

In any of the game machines G1 to G5, the switching operation of the ball entry switching means occurs not in the first operation caused by the specified number of balls entering the ball entry port but in the second operation caused by the passage of the specified time. The gaming machine G6 is provided with an intentional selection means for intentionally selecting the player.

According to the game machine G6, in addition to the effect of any of the game machines G1 to G5, the switching operation of the ball entry switching means is limited to the operation at a preset time by the action of the intentional selection means. It is possible to eliminate the randomness of switching depending on the passing mode of the ball at the entrance. As a result, it is possible to secure a large amount of time during which the ball is not allowed to enter while the profit switching means is in the first state.

As an intentional selection means, it is exemplified that the ball does not pass through the entrance due to the passage of less than the specified number of balls. This can be achieved by intentionally clogging (not allowing) the ball on the way through the entrance.

The game area in which the ball flows down, the entry port through which the ball flowing down the game area passes, and the first state in which the ball flowing down from the upstream side of the entry port can be guided to the entry port and the entry ball. A ball entry switching means for switching a ball flowing down from the upstream side of the mouth in a second state in which the ball cannot be guided to the entry port, a detection means for detecting entry into the entry port, and the entry port. A profit-giving means that gives a predetermined profit to the player by passing the passed ball, a first state in which the ball can be guided to the profit-giving means, and a second state in which the ball cannot be guided to the profit-giving means. In a game machine provided with the profit switching means that can be switched by, the notification is sent based on the flow mode determining means for determining whether the flow mode of the ball to the profit giving means is normal and the determination result by the flow mode determining means. A game machine GK1 characterized by comprising a notification means for performing.

Here, in a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, a ball that has passed through a large winning opening is distributed to either an advantageous route or an unfavorable route by the distribution section, and the profit given to the player changes depending on the distribution result. (See, for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2014-155538). However, in the above-mentioned conventional game machine, there is a problem that not a few players try to obtain an illegal profit due to an illegal act of applying a load (magnetic force or impact) to the ball before reaching the distribution part. was there.

On the other hand, according to the game machine GK1, when an abnormality is determined, it is notified by the notification means, so that fraudulent acts can be suppressed. That is, even if the ball is illegally blocked from flowing down, there is a high possibility that the notification will not be able to obtain an illegal profit. Therefore, a person who tries to make an illegal profit (hereinafter, "a fraudulent person" or It can exert a deterrent effect against (also called "illegal person").

The mode of determining the abnormality is not limited in any way. For example, after the profit switching means is switched to the first state, the timing at which the balls are completely discharged may be set, and the discharge of the balls is not detected even at that timing, so that the notification may be performed. In this case, since the notification can be given before the ball passes through the profit switching means, it is possible to reduce the dissatisfaction from the player.

In the game machine GK1, the flow-down mode determining means makes a determination based on the number of balls arranged between the ball entrance and the profit-giving means.

According to the game machine GK2, in addition to the effect of the game machine GK1, it is possible to determine whether or not the flow mode of the ball is abnormal regardless of the accumulation state of the game ball between the entrance and the profit-giving means. it can.

The game machine GK3 is characterized in that the game machine GK1 or GK2 is provided with an arrangement suppressing means for suppressing a change in the arrangement of balls on the upstream side of the profit-giving means after the notification means executes the notification.

According to the game machine GK3, in addition to the effect of the game machine GK1 or GK2, the change in the arrangement of the balls can be suppressed by the arrangement suppressing means, so that the player suffers when the game is restarted when an unexpected error occurs. The loss can be minimized.

<Point 2, which makes it difficult to predict whether or not to win a V prize from the attacker's movement, there is a paca>
The game area in which the ball flows down, the entry port through which the ball flowing down the game area passes, and the first state in which the ball flowing down from the upstream side of the entry port can be guided to the entry port and the entry ball. A ball entry switching means for switching a ball flowing down from the upstream side of the mouth in a second state in which the ball cannot be guided to the entry port, a detection means for detecting entry into the entry port, and the entry port. A profit-giving means that gives a predetermined profit to the player by passing the passed ball, a first state in which the ball can be guided to the profit-giving means, and a second state in which the ball cannot be guided to the profit-giving means. H1 is a gaming machine including a profit switching means that can be switched by the above, wherein the mode in which the ball reaches the profit switching means can be changed depending on the operation mode of the ball entry switching means.

Here, in a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, a ball that has passed through a large winning opening is distributed to either an advantageous route or an unfavorable route by the distribution section, and the profit given to the player changes depending on the distribution result. (See, for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2014-155538). However, in the above-mentioned conventional game machine, the operation mode of the opening / closing plate of the large winning opening during the period in which the distribution unit is in a state where the ball can be distributed to the advantageous route is an operation for causing the ball to flow down to the advantageous route. It is clearly divided into the mode and the operation mode for when the ball is not allowed to flow down to the advantageous route. In the operation mode for when the ball is not allowed to flow down to the advantageous route, the ball should not enter the big winning opening in the first place. Since the opening / closing plate is operated (closed), it is not possible to maintain the attention to the ball toward the big winning opening, and there is room for improvement from the viewpoint of paying attention to the behavior of the ball entering the big winning opening. There was a problem.

On the other hand, according to the game machine H1, the mode in which the ball reaches the profit switching means can be changed depending on the operation mode of the ball entry switching means while maintaining the state in which the ball can pass through the ball entry port. Therefore, it is possible to intentionally control in what manner the profit switching means reaches the ball.

The game machine H1 is characterized in that the number of balls related to the time when the ball entry switching means is switched to the second state can be guided to the profit switching means.

According to the game machine H2, in addition to the effect of the game machine H1, the player can tell how the ball is guided to the profit switching means from the length that the ball entry switching means is maintained in the second state. It is possible to improve the player's attention to the operation of the ball entry switching means.

In the game machine H1 or H2, a start state is formed in which the ball is started to be thrown to the profit switching means while the ball entry switching means is switched from the first state to the second state. Game machine H3.

According to the game machine H3, in addition to the effect of the game machine H1 or H2, when the ball is sent to the profit switching means only after the start state, the operation of the ball entry switching means is stopped immediately before the start state. Since the first state can be set again, it is possible to form a game property that the throwing to the profit switching means is not necessarily started even if the operation is started from the first state. As a result, it becomes necessary to directly confirm whether or not the sphere reaches the profit switching means, so that the attention to the profit switching means can be improved.

The game area in which the ball flows down, the entry port through which the ball flowing down the game area passes, and the first state in which the ball flowing down from the upstream side of the entry port can be guided to the entry port and the entry ball. A ball entry switching means for switching a ball flowing down from the upstream side of the mouth in a second state in which the ball cannot be guided to the entry port, a detection means for detecting entry into the entry port, and the entry port. A profit-giving means that gives a predetermined profit to the player by passing the passed ball, a first state in which the ball can be guided to the profit-giving means, and a second state in which the ball cannot be guided to the profit-giving means. In a game machine including a profit switching means that can be switched by, the game machine includes a state changing means configured so that the entering ball switching means can change the state by detecting the passage of a ball, and the state changing means is provided. The gaming machine HK1 is characterized in that the number of balls that can be thrown to the profit switching means can be switched based on the passing frequency of the balls to the profit switching means.

Here, in a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, a ball that has passed through a large winning opening is distributed to either an advantageous route or an unfavorable route by the distribution section, and the profit given to the player changes depending on the distribution result. (See, for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2014-155538). However, in the above-mentioned conventional game machine, the operation mode of the opening / closing plate of the large winning opening during the period in which the distribution unit is in a state where the ball can be distributed to the advantageous route is an operation for causing the ball to flow down to the advantageous route. It is clearly divided into the mode and the operation mode for when the ball is not allowed to flow down to the advantageous route. In the operation mode for when the ball is not allowed to flow down to the advantageous route, the ball should not enter the big winning opening in the first place. Since the opening / closing plate is operated (closed), it is not possible to maintain the attention to the ball toward the big winning opening, and there is room for improvement from the viewpoint of paying attention to the behavior of the ball entering the big winning opening. There was a problem.

On the other hand, in the game machine HK1, the number of balls that can be thrown to the profit switching means can be switched based on the frequency of passing the balls to the state changing means, so that the ball enters the profit switching means. Can be changed. As a result, it is possible to improve the attention to the behavior of the ball that has passed through the entrance.

In the game machine HK1, when the frequency of entering the state changing means is higher than a predetermined frequency, an upper limit of the number of balls thrown to the profit switching means is set in a predetermined period. Machine HK2.

According to the game machine HK2, in addition to the effect of the game machine HK1, it is possible to escape from the game property that the more the ball is passed through the state changing means, the better.

The game machine HK1 or HK2 is configured to be capable of throwing balls that have passed through the ball entry port to the profit switching means in a plurality of opening and closing of the ball entry switching means. ..

According to the game machine HK3, in addition to the effect of the game machine HK1 or HK2, the ball entering the ball entry port when a plurality of ball entry switching means are opened and closed can be associated with the throwing mode to the ball entry switching means. Therefore, it is possible to increase the variation of the throwing mode as compared with the case where the throwing mode to the ball entering switching means is independent by opening and closing the ball entering switching means once.

The number of times the ball entry switching means is opened and closed is not limited in any way. For example, it may be counted by the number of operations of the ball entry switching means, or may be counted by the number of occurrences of a combination of actions of the ball entry switching means (for example, a preset operation pattern such as a small hit game).

An operating means that can be operated by the player, a storage state in which the ball that has entered the ball entry switching means is temporarily stored, and a passing state in which the ball is released from storage and can flow down toward the profit-giving means. The gaming machine HP1 is provided with a temporary storage means that can be switched by the above, and the state of the temporary storage means can be switched by operating the operating means.

According to the game machine HP1, the player can switch the state of the temporary storage means at an arbitrary timing, so that the motivation to participate in the operation of the operation means can be increased.

In the game machine HP1, the game machine HP2 is characterized in that the profit given to the player is selected from the first privilege or the second privilege according to the operation timing of the operation means.

According to the game machine HP2, in addition to the effect of the game machine HP1, it is possible to improve the player's attention to the operation of the operating means.

The relationship between the first privilege and the second privilege is not limited in any way. For example, they may be large or small, have different properties, or have conflicting relationships.

Here, as for those having a large or small relationship, for example, the profits given to the player in the first privilege and the second privilege are both the payout of prize balls, and the number of balls paid out in the first privilege is the first. When the number of balls paid out in the 2 benefits is larger, or the profit given to the player in the 1st and 2nd benefits is both a transition to the jackpot game state, which is compared with the number of rounds of the jackpot game in the 1st benefit. Then, the case where the number of rounds in the second privilege is larger is illustrated.

Further, as another property, for example, the profit given to the player in the first privilege is a transition to the jackpot gaming state, whereas the profit given to the player in the second privilege is a prize. In the case of paying out balls or when the profit given to the player in the first privilege is a clear indication of the game state, the profit given to the player in the second privilege is the maximum payout prize ball acquisition. For example, the case is.

Further, as a contradictory relationship, for example, the profit given to the player in the first privilege is related to the profit of the player such as the game state after the end of the jackpot game (or the number of fluctuations until the next jackpot). In contrast to the disclosure of information), the profit given to the player in the second privilege is the game state after the end of the jackpot game (and information related to the player's profit such as the number of fluctuations until the next jackpot). An example is the case of extinction.

The game machine HP2 is characterized in that, based on the selection of the first privilege, the passage of the ball at the ball entry port is restricted when the ball entry switching means is in the first state. Game machine HP3.

According to the game machine HP3, in addition to the effect played by the game machine HP2, based on the selection of the first privilege, the ball is prevented from passing through the ball entry port regardless of the state of the ball entry switching means. Therefore, when the player does not want the ball to pass through the entrance, it is not necessary to temporarily stop the ball from firing (so-called "stop hitting") at the right timing. it can. In this case, since the player can continuously shoot the ball regardless of the state of the ball entry switching means, the desired game can be smoothly executed.

The game machine HP4 is characterized in that, based on the selection of the first privilege, the game machine HP3 is controlled so that the game can be continued regardless of the detection time of the ball by the detection means.

According to the game machine HP4, in addition to the effect of the game machine HP3, it is possible to realize the game property of restricting the entry of the ball by clogging the detecting means with the ball.

A1 to A9, AK1 to AK3, B1 to B8, BK1 to BK4, C1 to C8, CK1 to CK3, DK1 to DK4, D1 to D3, EK1 to EK3, E1 to E3, F1 to F3, FK1 to FK3 A game machine Z1 characterized in that the game machine is a slot machine in any one of G1 to G6, GK1 to GK3, H1 to H3, HK1 to HK3, and HP1 to HP4. Among them, the basic configuration of the slot machine is "provided with a variable display means for dynamically displaying an identification information string composed of a plurality of identification information and then confirming and displaying the identification information, and for operating a starting operation means (for example, an operation lever). Due to this, the dynamic display of the identification information is started, and the dynamic display of the identification information is stopped due to the operation of the stop operation means (stop button) or after a predetermined time has elapsed, and at the time of the stop. It is a game machine provided with a special game state generating means for generating a special game state advantageous to the player, provided that the definite identification information of the above is the specific identification information. In this case, coins, medals, and the like are typical examples of the game medium.

A1 to A9, AK1 to AK3, B1 to B8, BK1 to BK4, C1 to C8, CK1 to CK3, DK1 to DK4, D1 to D3, EK1 to EK3, E1 to E3, F1 to F3, FK1 to FK3 A gaming machine Z2 characterized in that the gaming machine is a pachinko gaming machine in any one of G1 to G6, GK1 to GK3, H1 to H3, HK1 to HK3, and HP1 to HP4. Among them, the basic configuration of the pachinko gaming machine is provided with an operation handle, and the ball is launched into a predetermined game area according to the operation of the operation handle, and the ball is placed in a predetermined position in the game area. As a prerequisite for winning a prize (or passing through the operating port), the identification information dynamically displayed by the display means is fixedly stopped after a predetermined time. In addition, when a special gaming state occurs, a variable winning device (specific winning opening) arranged at a predetermined position in the gaming area is opened in a predetermined manner to enable a ball to be won, and is valuable according to the number of winnings. Some are given value (including not only prize balls but also data written on a magnetic card).

A1 to A9, AK1 to AK3, B1 to B8, BK1 to BK4, C1 to C8, CK1 to CK3, DK1 to DK4, D1 to D3, EK1 to EK3, E1 to E3, F1 to F3, FK1 to FK3 In any one of G1 to G6, GK1 to GK3, H1 to H3, HK1 to HK3, and HP1 to HP4, the gaming machine Z3 is a fusion of a pachinko gaming machine and a slot machine. .. Among them, as a basic configuration of the fused gaming machine, "a variable display means for dynamically displaying an identification information string composed of a plurality of identification information and then confirming and displaying the identification information is provided, and a starting operation means (for example, an operation lever). The variation of the identification information is started due to the operation of, and the dynamic display of the identification information is stopped due to the operation of the stop operation means (for example, the stop button) or after a predetermined time elapses. A special game state generating means for generating a special game state advantageous to the player is provided on the condition that the definite identification information at the time of stopping is the specific identification information, the ball is used as the game medium, and the identification information is described. A game machine that requires a predetermined number of balls to start the dynamic display of the game, and is configured to pay out a large number of balls when a special game state occurs. "
<Others>
Here, in a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, the ball that has passed through the large winning opening is distributed to either an advantageous route or an unfavorable route by the distribution section, and the profit given to the player changes depending on the distribution result. (For example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2014-155538).
However, the above-mentioned conventional gaming machine has a problem that there is a risk of cheating.
The present technical idea is made to solve the above-exemplified problems, and an object thereof is to provide a game machine capable of suppressing fraudulent acts.
<Means>
In order to achieve this purpose, the game machine of the technical idea 1 has a game area in which the ball flows down, an entry port through which the ball flowing down the game area passes, and a ball flowing down from the upstream side of the entry port. A ball entry switching means that can switch between a first state in which the ball can be guided to the entry port and a second state in which the ball flowing down from the upstream side of the entry port cannot be guided to the entry port, and the entry port. A detection means for detecting a ball entering the ball, a profit-giving means for giving a predetermined profit to the player by passing the ball passing through the ball-entry port, and a first state in which the ball can be guided to the profit-giving means. In a game machine including the profit switching means for switching the ball to the profit-giving means in a second state in which the ball cannot be guided to the profit-giving means, the flow-down mode determination for determining whether the flow-down mode of the ball to the profit-giving means is normal. A means and a notification means for performing notification based on a determination result by the flow mode determination means are provided.
The gaming machine of the technical idea 2 is the gaming machine described in the technical idea 1, and the flow-down mode determining means makes a determination based on the number of balls arranged between the entrance and the profit-giving means. Do.
The gaming machine of the technical idea 3 is an arrangement that suppresses a change in the arrangement of balls on the upstream side of the profit-giving means after the notification means executes the notification in the gaming machine according to the technical idea 1 or 2. Provide restraining means.
<Effect>
According to the gaming machine described in Technical Thought 1, fraudulent activity can be suppressed.
According to the game machine described in the technical idea 2, in addition to the effect of the game machine described in the technical idea 1, the flow mode of the ball does not depend on the accumulation condition of the game ball from the entrance to the profit-giving means. Can be determined if is abnormal.
According to the game machine described in the technical idea 3, in addition to the effect of the game machine described in the technical idea 1 or 2, the loss incurred by the player when the game is restarted can be minimized.

10 Pachinko machine (game machine)
13 Game board 81 Third symbol display device (part of notification means)
110 Main control device (part of change means, part of period change means, part of setting means, part of intentional selection means, part of flow mode determination means)
300 Operation buttons (operation means)
640 Second ball entry port (part of the ball entry port, starting port, part of the state changing means)
640a Electric accessory (part of ball entry switching means)
1000a 1st specific winning opening (part of the entry opening, 1st entry opening)
1140 Protruding part (part of spacing maintenance means, protruding part)
1150 Outlet (part of ball entry prevention means, part of number changing means)
1210 Thin plate member (means for making visibility difficult)
1231 Storage flow path (part of ball entry prevention means, part of number changing means, part of post-drive entry ball state switching means, accommodation means, discharge path, part of adjustment means)
1231a Guide surface (part of spacing maintenance means)
1231b Rolling surface (part of spacing maintenance means, rolling discharge plate)
1235 Protruding part (part of spacing maintenance means, protruding part)
1240 detection sensor (part of detection means)
1300 Opening and closing plate (part of the ball entry switching means)
1310 Board part (raising means)
1331 Ball entry prevention part (part of ball entry prevention means)
1510, 2810 Solenoid (driving means, part of number changing means, operation mode switching means, switching driving means)
1600, 2600 Regulatory members (part of ball entry prevention means, part of number changing means, discharge switching means, stopping means, part of placement suppressing means)
2251 Second storage flow path (part of ball entry prevention means, part of number changing means, part of post-drive entry state switching means, accommodation means, discharge path)
2255 Second detection sensor (part of detection means)
2255a 2nd specific winning opening (part of the entry opening, 2nd entry opening)
2840 slide plate (part of ball entry switching means)
3181 additional winning opening (relief entry opening)
3182 Curved extension plate (elevation regulation means)
3250 Drop delay plate (part of delay means)
3251b End surface (part of drop hole)
4830 Specific area (part of profit-giving means)
4850 distribution device (profit switching means)
4860 Specific area detection sensor (part of profit-giving means)
5900 Ball ejection adjustment device (starting ball passage switching means)
6930 Interference member (interference means, part of period change means, part of adjustment means. Part of drive-in-ball state switching means, part of operation means, part of arrangement suppression means)
7260 Second drop delay plate (part of delay means, variable action part)
8300, 11300 Opening and closing plate (part of ball entry switching means)
8340 Auxiliary opening / closing member (part of ball entry switching means, part of opening state switching means, part of adjustment means, part of load applying means, part of post-drive entry state switching means)
9111 Auxiliary entrance (part of entrance, part of profit-giving means, part of conditional profit-giving means)
10180 Intermediate discharge device (part of operating means)
11183 2nd additional winning opening (part of the entry opening)
11190 Opening / closing means (part of the ball entry state switching means after driving)

Claims (3)

The game area in which the ball flows down, the entry port through which the ball flowing down the game area passes, and the first state in which the ball flowing down from the upstream side of the entry port can be guided to the entry port and the entry ball. The ball entry switching means for switching the ball flowing down from the upstream side of the mouth in the second state in which the ball cannot be guided to the ball entry port, the detection means for detecting the ball entering the ball entry port, and the ball entry port. A profit-giving means that gives a predetermined benefit to the player by passing the passed ball, a first state in which the ball can be guided to the profit-giving means, and a second state in which the ball cannot be guided to the profit-giving means. In a game machine equipped with a profit switching means that can be switched with
A flow mode determining means for determining whether the flow mode of the ball to the profit-giving means is normal, and
A gaming machine characterized by comprising a notification means for performing notification based on a determination result by the flow mode determination means. The gaming machine according to claim 1, wherein the flow-down mode determining means makes a determination based on the number of balls arranged between the ball entrance and the profit-giving means. The gaming machine according to claim 1 or 2, further comprising an arrangement suppressing means for suppressing a change in the arrangement of balls on the upstream side of the profit-giving means after the notification means executes the notification.

Images